Nodirstdd bc sot socbecn sseansEeeEeEeosee 79 lcimikeyandachey Lescried\ Children sss. -5-\cceeicels a teel= se nlssisecie So scee oenace eee cs aac checks 83 Bictinikesthel Coyotes andthe Colt. s5-2...-c=-socescemaes sneoaclse se cceae se en, aesisineres sce cccece 96 sieponmayandct Nel COVOU rs ceca sce 2 le aa one nicinmieete ne en ee elena as asa nae Seals. csp esse 99 he oy ore and thoeruttalogsiesse a. 6 -S2-cessae nes oes oes ce saan eee ee mee ee ee 766 Gali pe toje nde“ pax 282 cna neces lanan sean eee Oe ae eee te ee 766 Wiad pecatiosOmar alte.) eee cna eee ee ates eae eee were Oe Semen emer eee 767 Naazandajtrtoy lM Messick? 52) -sacccoe~ hme yee eee ee oe heh ee ee ee 768 Horio Parenho Un ay Ms ksi ae ears cc none ye eet See ae eee ee wan ae RO EE 769 Bbtsys Dick to. Wadiqe-yacivecsn cece « sases c= cco ee eee ores a oe ee ABC OLeD 770 Nudat-axalto; Cude-saxe- 505 soc.) jane ono -2 soo Meare ea a Ss 772 acde-pahittoSilagy Woodea..20etts tas anes seins cc Raye Len theme abe 9 i Rete a rene oem 773 Mins a; 6-lin gato e-4redey saa ton lca sas ata clonic aeiew at eee oe nee ae Se CN erg Le-uya"ha to Unajitski, and He-watjita...-<-. .-.. .-2-2- 0 -0-2ee enecoe ceeeeeceeese adeetaraae- 775 Wudat-axajtoiMiss! J ocelynce.sss=c. tance sash aee ssa) Ota ng Eee tee 776 Wagqpeca to Unajit-ski.......-....22 melsin nice aieR sles almaesises slacete saclou ae here = ees Seeerce eto etaee V7 Pahafiga-ma"¢i" to Silas Wood..... Bene oee hese anes Bineleiseetsinsisiss leo date see ae tene tee en atsaaayaoee 778 Pahanea-mareit to ude-paxe)a-24- 5-25. seo ncces el os ee er oe ee nT 779 Appendixy--2-ncs-s-cccenenew es aie ainalates = quicive seis oem == anyone ence sate cone eee ee 781 UNA OXiome caste ocvins cel secencwe cast cecesl eee sensewoc scene cee cree eee Cs eee oR Oe) TOR ANG Ss: Mole A. Wasuineaton, D. C., September 4, 1890. Sir: I have the honor to submit to you the accompanying monograph, entitled “Contributions to North American Ethnology, Vol. VI, The (tegiha Language.” ; Yours, respectfully, J. Owren Dorsey. To Hon. J. W. PowE 1, In charge of the Geological and Geographical Survey of the Rocky Mountain Region. 12 yeU 1 oy Re MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. i j bg . 7 . . > - a . on . 7 i SC < > eI : 7 7 - + i} se | | - “oe : ‘] y . ‘ . ‘ - x - . ‘ P 2 — . I \ é - i _ PREFACKH. “The (legiha Language” as used in this volume refers to the speech of the Omaha and Ponka tribes of the Siouan linguistic family of North American Indians. The author is responsible for “(egiha,” first as the name of a group in the Siouan family, and, secondly, as the name of a particular language in that group. (tegiha means, “Belonging to the people of this land,” or, “Those dwelling here,” i. ¢., the aborigines or home people. When an Omaha was challenged in the dark, if on his own territory, he usually replied, “IT am a (legiha.” So might a Ponka answer under similar circumstances. A Kansas would say, “I am a Yegtha,” of which the Osage equivalent is, «I am a (leydha.” These answer to the Oto ‘ pofwere” and the lowa “ Toéyiweére.” The (fegiha linguistic group may be divided as follows: Languages. Tribes. Dialects. ras Omaha ..---.- -- Omaha (Uma ha"). fl, GGaTG) Sosesebconocsce ; zi Bonksaives-e== Ponka (Pan‘ka). ®. Yepaha -----..------ «--. Kanga- -a.--- == None found. 3. Geydha-...--. .----.----| Osage--------- Five or more. 4. Name not yet gained....| Kwapa-------- Uncertain. The material in this volume consists of myths, stories, and letters (epistles) obtained from the Ponkas, to whom the author was missionary from 1871 to 1873, and from the Omahas, with whom he resided from 1878 to1880. The letters in Part I are those sent to the Ponka reservation in the Indian Territory. Xvl PREFACE. After his return to Washington in 1880, the author arranged for several Indians of the Omaha and Ponka tribes to visit Washington for the purpose of aiding him in the revision of his work. From these Indians and Mr. Frank La Fléche (see page 525) he gained additional myths and stories, which, with numerous letters recorded chiefly at the Omaha Agency, form Part II. It has been decided to publish the remaining letters in a bulletin of the Bureau of Ethnology, under the title of “‘Omaha and Ponka Letters.” This bulletin, with the present monograph and the publications named on pp. xvii and xviii, will contain all the @egiha texts, phrases, and sentences collected by the author. The texts will be followed by a (legiha-English dictionary, an English- (fegiha dictionary, and a grammar. Up to July, 1885, over 16,000 (egiha- English entries for the dictionary were arranged on slips in alphabetical order after they had been transliterated into the present alphabet of the Bureau of Ethnology. It was decided in 1882 that the present volume, the dictionaries, and grammar should be published together. But in November, 1889, another conclusion was reached by the Director, resulting in the author’s devoting most of his time to the preparation of the additional texts which form Part I. It will require at least one year, if not longer, for the completion of the @egiha-English dictionary. In the final revision of the slips for that dictionary there will be many references to words and phrases in the texts by page and line. The English-(egiha dictionary and the grammar must be deferred for a few years. In translating personal names the author has proceeded according to the following rules: In compound names, such as Wajinga-sabé (bird black), capitalize each part as far as possible, thus: ‘Black Bird.” In names which can not be resolved into two or more primitives use but one capital, as Mang¢iqta, Blackbird; Wasabé, Black bear (not ‘“ Black Bear”); Ma*tcu, Grizzly bear (not ‘Grizzly Bear”). LIST OF THE AUTHOR’S SIOUAN PUBLICATIONS. 1. Ponka | A B C wabdrn. | Missionary Jurisdiction of Niobrara. | New York, | 1873. Pp. 1-16, sq. 16°. Primer in the Ponka dialect. The alphabet used differs from the present alphabet of the Bureau of Ethnology in the following particulars: c of the primer= te of the Bureau alphabet; 3 of the former=¢ of the latter; q of the former=k’ of the latter; r of the former=q of the latter; x of the former=c of the latter. The characters for gh, final n as in French bon, and ng as in sing are wanting. No distinction is made between the surd and its corresponding medial sound, which is known for the present as a ‘‘ sonant-surd.” 2. The Sister and Brother: an lowatradition. By J. O.Dorsey. In American Antiquarian, vol. 4, pp. 286-289, Chicago, 188182. 8°. Contains an Iowa song, six stanzas, with free translation. 3. The Rabbit and the Grasshoppers: an Oto Myth. By Rev. J. Owen Dorsey. In Our Continent, vol. 1, p. 316, Philadelphia, 1882. Folio. 4, Omaha Sociology. By Rev. J. Owen Dorsey. In Bureau of Ethnology, Third Annual Report, pp. 205-370, Washington, 1884. 8°. Contains several hundred Omaha proper names, words, and sen- tences, passim. Omaha songs, pp. 320, 322, 323, 325, 331. 5. Siouan Folk-lore and Mythologie Notes. In American Antiquarian, vol. 7, pp. 105-108, Chicago, 1884—5. 8°. 6. An Account of the War Customs of the Osages. Illustrated. In American Naturalist, vol. 18, No. 2, February, 1884, pp. 113-133. 7. Mourning and War Customs of the Kansas. By the Rey. J. Owen Dorsey. Illustrated. In the American Naturalist, July, 1885, pp. 670-680. 8. On the Comparative Phonology of Four Siouan Languages. By Rev. J. Owen Dorsey. In Smith- sonian Institution Annual Report for 1883, pp. 919-929, Washington, 1885. 8°. Languages of the Siouan Family, pp. 919-920. The Siouan Alphabet, pp. 920-921. Classification of Consonants, pp. 921-923. Vocabulary of the Dakota, @egiha (204 words of Porika and Omaha, Kansa and Osage), Loiwere, and Hoteangara, pp. 924-927. Notes, pp. 927-929. A paper read before thé American Association for the Advancement of Science, Montreal, August, 1882. Separately issued as follows: 9. On the | Comparative Phonology | of Four | Siouan Languages. | By | Rey. J. Owen Dorsey, | of the Bureau of Ethnology. | From the Smithsonian Report for 1883. | Washington : | Government Print- ing Office. | 1885. Pp. 1-11. 8°. (Smithsonian Catalogue No. 605.) 10. Indian Personal Names. By Rev. J. Owen Dorsey. In American Ass. Ady. Sci. Proc., vol. 34, pp. 393-399, Salem, 1886. 8°. Examples from the Omaha, Ponka, [owa, Oto, and Missouri. 11. Migrations of Siouan Tribes. With maps. By Rev. J. Owen Dorsey. In American Naturalist, vol. 20, No. 3, March, 1886, pp. 211-222. 12. Songs of the He¢ucka Society. Journal of American Folk-lore, vol. 1, No. 1, April-June, 1888, pp. 65-68. 13. Ponka Stories. In same number, p. 73. 14. Abstracts of Ponka and Omaha Myths. In same number, pp. 74-78. 15. Abstracts of Omaha and Ponka Myths. In Jour. Amer. Folk-lore, vol. 1, No. 2, 1888, pp. 204- 208. 16. Omaha Songs. In same number, pp. 209-213. 17. Teton Folk-lore. American Anthropologist, vol. 2, No. 2, pp. 148-158. Extracts from a paper read before the Anthropological Society of Washington, in November, 1888. Translated from the texts recorded by George Bushotter in the Teton dialect of the Dakota. e. XVii VOL VI——II XViii LIST OF THE AUTHOR’S SIOUAN PUBLICATIONS. 18. Osage Traditions. By James Owen Dorsey. In Bureau of Ethnology, Sixth Annual Report, pp. 373-397, Washington, 1888. 8°. Tradition of the Tsiou wactaye gens, a fragment of 107 lines, with interlinear and free translations, pp. 381-390. Tradition of the Bald Eagle sub-gens, a fragment of 63 lines, with interlinear and free translations, pp. 390-395. 19. Leton Folk-lore Notes. Extracts from a paper read before the Anthropological Society of Wash- ington. In Jour. Amer. Folk-lore, vol. 2, No. 5, April-June, 1889, pp. 133-139. Part of this paper (‘‘ Teton Folk-lore”) appeared in Science. 20. Winnebago Folk-lore Notes. In Jour. Amer. Folk-lore, vol. 2, No. 5, p. 140. 21. Omaha Folk-lore Notes. In Jour. Amer. Folk-lore, vol. 2, No. 6, July-September, 1889, p. 190. 22. Camping Circles of Siouan Tribes. In Amer. Anthropologist, vol. 2, No. 2, April, 1889, pp. 175-177. 23. The Places of Gentes in Siouan Camping Circles. In Amer. Anthropologist, vol. 2, No. 4, October, 1889, pp. 375-379. 24, Ponka aud Omaha Songs. ‘In Jour. Amer. Folk-lore, vol. 2, No. 7, October-December, 1839, pp. 271-276. 25. Omaha Clothing and Personal Ornaments. By J.Owen Dorsey. In Amer. Anthropologist, vol. 3, No. 1, January, 1890, pp. 71-78. 26. Indian Personal Names. By J. Owen Dorsey. In Amer. Anthropologist, vol. 3, No. 3, July, 1890, pp. 263-268. A description of a monograph in course of preparation. It will treat of about four thousand personal names, arranged according to tribes and gentes. ; 27. AStudyofSiouan Cults. (Nearly ready.) To appear in the Eighth Annual Report of the Bureau of Ethnology. Illustrated by numerous sketches colored by Indian artists.. Referred to in the Amer. Anthropologist, vol. 3, No. 1, January, 1890, p. 50. THE @CEGIHA LANGUAGE. PART 1 MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. INTRODUCTION. The myths, stories, and letters in the present volume have been obtained directly. from Indians. They were dictated in (egiha, and written in that language by the collector. A brief account of each of the Indian authorities for these texts may not be considered out of place. 1. Joseph LaF léche is a gentleman to whom I am indebted, not only for myths in (legiha and ypiwere, but also for a knowledge of the latter tongue, a collection of ethnological notes, ete. I regard him as my best authority. By birth he is a Ponka, but he has spent most of his life among the Pawnees, Otos, and Omahas. He has acquired a knowledge of several Indian languages, and he also speaks Canadian French. While Frank, his younger brother, has remained with the Ponkas, and is now reckoned as a chief in that tribe, Mr. LaF léche has been counted as an Omaha for many years ‘Though debarred by Indian law from member- ship in any gens, that did not prevent him receiving the highest place in the Omaha governmental system. He has some influence among the Paw- nees, and when the Yankton Dakotas wished to make peace with the former tribe, it was effected through the instrumentality of Mr. LaF léche, ” ‘THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. who accompanied Struck-by-the-Ree to the Pawnee village. Mr LaF léche is the leader of the “citizens” party among the Omahas. The names of two of his children, Susette (Bright Eyes) and Frank (Wood-worker, or Carpenter), are familiar to all who have read of the Ponka case. 2. Mrs. Mary LaF léche is of white descent on the father’s side. She learned Oto by a residence among her mother’s people. She was known in former years as “the beautiful Omaha girl,” having been adopted by the latter tribe 3. Frank LaF léche is the eldest surviving son of Joseph. He has a fair knowledge of English, writes a good hand, and is devoted to reading, I have had many opportunities of testing his skill as interpreter, and I did not find him wanting. He is the only Omaha who can write his native dialect. 4. Susanne LaF léche is Frank’s youngest sister. She is still a child, and was not over thirteen when she gave me an abstract of a myth told her in Omaha by her Oto grandmother. 5. qa¢i"-na"-paji (He who fears not a Pawnee when he sees him) is a full-blood Omaha, who has passed middle age. He belongs to the ‘citi- zens” party, and is one of my best informants His articulation is rapid; but after he repeated a sentence I had no difficulty in writing it. 6. Hupe¢a™ is a full Omaha, one who refuses to join either political party in the tribe. He has not given me much information. 7. Ma™tet-na™ba (Two Grizzly Bears) is the aged ex-chief of the Hanga gens of the Omahas, which keeps the two sacred tents and regulates the buffalo hunt. He has been a medicine-man, and is the head of the old men’s or chiefs’ party. He was always friendly to me, and was the first Omaha to pay me a visit. Owing to his rapid articulation, common to Omaha orators, I was obliged to revise his myth, with the assistance of Mr. LaF léche, who gave me the corresponding Oto version. 8. Mawada¢i" (Mandan) is a full Omaha. He is short, and of a nery- ous temperament (the opposite of Hupe¢a”), his utterance being thick at times. While he means well, his information is not equal in any respect. to that given by qa¢i*-na"paji. He belongs to the “citizens” party. 9. e-tya"ha (Sentinel Buffalo apart from the Herd) is head of a sub- INTRODUCTION TO THE TEXTS. 3 gens of the Thunder and Reptile gens of the Omahas, being keeper of the sacred pipe of his gens. He is full of fire as a speaker; and his enjoyment of the burlesque was shown when he told me the myth of the turtle who led a war party. He declared that he had added a little to it, but only such parts as he thought were needed to make the myth complete. The songs in the myth point to an Oto derivation. Le-tiya"™ha is one of the “citizens” party and a good farmer. 10. Can’-ge-ska (White Horse) is head of the Wolf gens of the Omahas and a member of the chief’s party. He understands the Kansas (Kaw) dialect of the Q@egiha as well as his own. 11. A™pa®-yan’-ga (John Big Elk), an Omaha, is one whom I regard as a dear friend, a good example to his tribe. He is the authority for sev- eral myths and most of the Omaha historical papers The Indians call him “The man who is always thinking about the Great Spirit.” He is a full Indian, a nephew of the Big Elk mentioned by Long and others. He is an adherent of the “citizens” party. 12. ,¢-da-ui¢iqaga (Dried Buffalo Skull) is head of the Singers, a sec- tion of the Black Bear subgens of the Omahas. He is half-brother to qat¢i"-na"-paji, but he is so far advanced in life, and his articulation is so rapid, that it was impossible to record all his words, which he would not repeat. 13. Nuda”’-axa (Cried to go on the War-path) is a Ponka chief. He is head of a part of the Thunder-bird gens. I have known him since 1871, whereas I did not become acquainted with the Omahas until 1878. Nuda”’- axa has furnished me with eleven myths, three historical papers, and some valuable ethnologic notes. He is a very patient man, and is deserving of sympathy and encouragement in his efforts to become self-supporting. Among the Omahas who sent letters elsewhere are Two Crows, Lion, and Duba-ma*¢i*. Two Crows is now a chief; he has been a leader of the young men for several years, though he is a grand-parent. He was the leader of the tribe on the hunt and war-path, and is still feared even by the chiefs’ party. He says just what he thinks, going directly to the point. He is regarded as the speaker of the purest Omaha, and one has no difficulty in understanding him. 4 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. Lion is the head of the first subgens of the Deer people, and is keeper of the sacred pipe of his gens. He used to be a government chief, but was set aside at the election in 1880. The Omahas do not put much confidence in him, and he is regarded by some as a mischief-maker. Diba-ma" ¢i" (Four Walking) is one of the young men’s party. He was elected chief in 1880, with Two Crows and five others. He was usually the first speaker when the young men had a couneil. LIST OF SOUNDS IN THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE. The alphabet which follows is substantially the one suggested by Maj. J. W. Powell, in the second edition of his Introduction to the Study of In- dian Languages, Chap. I. A number of sounds not used in (@legiha are given because they are found in pLoiwere (Oto, lowa, and Missouri), Winnebago, and other kin- dred languages, to which occasional references are made in the explanatory notes. Therefore, the alphabet may be regarded as including all the sounds known to exist in Qegiha, jaiwere, and Winnebago When any Dakota word is given, it is written first in this alphabet, then in that adopted by Mr. Riggs in his Dakota Grammar and Dictionary, published by the Smithsonian Institution in 1852. al as in father; German, haben. at a prolonged a; always a final sound. ‘an a nasalized a a"+ a prolonged nasalized a. “Fy an initially exploded a. ‘an a nasalized ‘a. a nearly as in what; German, man. an initially exploded 4@, as in wés‘d, a snake. an a nasalized @. a as in hat. b as in blab; French belle. Not used in y,oiwere. c as sh in shall. a) a medial sh, between sh and zh. Not synthetic. Oo Gi -& Oo INTRODUCTION TO THE TEXTS, 5 as th in thin (not heard in Qegiha). Used in yoiwere. a medial th (not heard (fegiha) Used in yoiwere. Not synthetic. as th in the, then. (See 1.) as in dread; German, das; French, de. Used in (fegiha. (See r.) as in they; German, Dehnung; French, dé. a prolonged e. an initially exploded e. as in then; German, denn; French, sienne. as in go; German, geben. as in he; German, haben. as in pique, machine; German, ihn; French, Ze. a prolonged 7. an initially exploded 2. a nasalised 7. a prolonged nasalized 2. a nasalized %. as in pin; German, will. a nasalized 2. as 2 in azure; j in French Jacques. as in kick; German, Kind; French, quart. a medial & (between & and g). Modified initially; not synthetic. an explosive k. as in mine; German, Mutter. as in nun; German, Nonne; French, ve. a modern sound used instead of cn (shn). The initial part of this sound is expelled from the nostrils, not from the mouth, and is but slightly audible. as ng in sing, singer. In yiwere it is often used when not followed by a k-mute. as in note; German, Bogen; French, nos. Not used in (begiha. a prolonged 0. Not used in (legiha. an initially exploded 0. Not used in (egiha. a nasalized o. Not used in Qegiha. a prolonged nasalized 0. Not used in (fegiha. 6 p -] THE (@EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. a nasalized ‘0. Not used in Qegiha. as in pipe; German, Puppe; French, poupe. a medial p (between p and b). Not a synthetic sound. The modi- fication is initial. an explosive p. as German ch in ich; Hebrew, kh. asin roar; German, rihren; French, rare. Not used in (egiha; it is synthetic in poiwere and Winnebago. as in sauce; German, Sack; French, sauce. Corresponds to the \L®iwere ¢. a medial s (between s and z). Not synthetic; modified initially. as in touch; German, Tag. a medial ¢ Not synthetic; modified initially. an explosive ¢. as in rule; German, du; French, dous. a prolonged w. an initially exploded wu. a nasalized w; rare in @egiha, common in yiwere. a prolonged nasalized u. a nasalized ‘w; rare in @egiha, common in y,iwere. as in pull, full; German, und a nasalized «; rare in @egiha, common in yiwere. as in wish; nearly as ow in French owt. gh; or nearly as the Arabic ghain. (The sonant of q.) as in you; 7 in German ja. Not used in (begiha. as z and s in zones; German, Hase; French, zéle. as j in judge (rare). as ch in church, and ¢ in Italian cielo; Spanish, achaque. a medial ¢¢ (between fc and dj). Not synthetic; modified initially. Not used in (egiha, common in yiwere. an exploded te. as wh in when; Spanish, huerta. (An interjection.) a prolonged m (An interjection.) a prolonged c. (An interjection.) INTRODUCTION TO THE TEXTS. qT al as 7 in fine, aisle. ei as 7 in ice, twice, trice, fice. au as ow in how; German, Haus. yu as in use, feud. ui as in German, p/wi. In one myth is given: ‘‘t-t-t-t-t-t.” In some cases, when uw is pronounced very rapidly after @ or e, an 0 sound is heard, resembling aw in the French awourd’hui. Thus, in gaqa u¢ici, when thus pronounced, the aw has a sound between that of ow in how and the sound of o in xo; while in ye-t1ya"ha both vowels are heard, being pronounced almost as if the name was ye-dyatha. Every syllable ends in a vowel or diphthong, pure or nasalized. When a consonant appears at the end of a word or syllable, it is a sign of contraction. Another apparent exception is the Gegiha interjection wih, in which the final # denotes an expulsion of the breath through the nostrils Almost every sound in this alphabet can be prolonged; but when the prolongation is merely rhetorical, it is given in the notes and omitted in the text. Prolongations in the text are usually interjections. One interjection of admiration, ete., is designated for the present by “+!” Tt is made by drawing the tip of the tongue backward from the upper front teeth, causing a sucking sound. The reader is requested to consult the Appendix after examining each text. ; Brackets mark superfluous additions to the texts, and passages which seem to be modern interpolations. Words within parentheses were omitted by the narrator, but, in most cases, they are needed to complete the sense. The following abbreviations are used in the interlinear translations :— sub subject. mv. moving. ob. object. recl. reclining. st. sitting lg. long. std. standing. pl. plural. 8 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. sing. singular. cl. classifier. Fr. Frank La Fléche. L. Louis Sanssouci. G. George Miller. W. Wadjepa. or Samuel Fremont. I). Joseph La Fléche. The following sounds should be added to those given on the preceding pages: ‘© an initially exploded é, as in ukit‘e, foreigner, enemy. yan evanescent h, a sound heard in some Pawnee words ny as the Spanish n in canon, found in poiwere and Kwapa words. Mr. Joseph La Fléche was alive when this introduction was_stereo- typed. He died in September, 1888. Susanne La Fléche mentioned on page 2 is now a woman. She was graduated in 1886 at the Hampton Agricultural and Normal Institute, Vir- ginia. She attended the Women’s Medical College at Philadelphia for two years, and returned to the Omahas in 1889. She is practicing medicine among her people, paying special attention to the diseases of women and children. 10, 18, e¢ passim. When A*ha™ means consent, read A*ha™’; but when assent is intended, read A ha®. 228, 8. See important note on page 541. The Appendix referred to on page 7 is that of Part I, beginning on page 525. Some time after that Appendix was stereotyped additional information was obtained from Omahas visiting Washington, and also from members of the Osage, Kansa, and Kwapa tribes. Consequently the reader is requested to consult the Appendix to Part II for a few errata, ete., which refer to Part I. IMEEM ES: HOW THE RABBIT KILLED THE (MALE) WINTER. OBTAINED FROM FRANK LA FLhCHE. Mactein’ge-i” ama ¢é amdama. Egi¢e Usni ¢inké’di ahi-biamé. Ahai! Rabbit the was going,they Itcameto Cold the—at he ar- they say. Well! say pass rived qati-iji-qti-hna" ¢a™cti. Cégédi g¢in’-ga. H‘a™qti ma™oni™ ¢a¢ined a, you have very as arule heretofore. Those’ things sit. What great you have been walking q not come by matter A-biamé Usni aké. A™ha®, negiha, wijimi méga", wiya™ akaé a aq¢i-qti-a”i 3 said, they say Cold the. Yes, O mother's my father’s likewise, my grand- the knocked the life out of brother, sister mother me altogether ega” waji”cte pi acithé ha. Xagé g¢i"-biama Mactcin’ge-i” aka; ua’’s having inabadhumor I have been i Crying hesat they say Rabbit the; hopping coming iga™¢a™ g¢i"-biamda; cka™aji ctéwa™ g¢i’-baji-biama Mactcin’ge-i” aka. suddenly and he sat they say; motionless at all he sat not they say Rabbit the. repeatedly Cka™aji éga™ g¢in’-g ahd, a-biama Usni aka. An’‘kaji, negiha ¢e égima™ 6 Motionless = . he they say Cold the. Not so, O mother’s this I do it said brother eu , L t . De ca” ca", Kgi¢e Usni aka ‘Abae a¢é ‘i¢a-biama. Negiha cub¢é ta minke, always. Itcameto Cold the hunting going he _ they say. O mother’s Igo with will I who pass spoke of brother you ° , DAY) *n/ , a hee ~ RAO , a-biama Mactein’ge-i” aka. Tend! ¢at’é te ha, a-biama Usni aka. he they say Rabbit | the Why! you die will . he they say. Cold the said said An‘kaji ha, negiha, Agta” at’é tada™. Ca™ cub¢é ta minke ha. Hin‘daké! 9 Not so ; O mother’s how pos- Idie — shall? Atany I gowith will Iwho : Let us see! brother, sible rate you égan gi ha, 4-biamda Usni aké. Usni akdé dci a¢db ega” Hw! hw! ~ so do r he_ they say Cold the. Cold the out he went fiat aving Wh! Wh! said they say A-biamdé yi fgacude gaxi-biamé, usni hégaji ama. Ki a¢a-biama yi he they say when Shree wd is made they say, cold very it was, And he went, they say when said they say. jlig¢e a¢ai-biama Mactein’ge-i” aka. Mactcin’ge-i” aka wasisige-qti-bi- 12 with him went they say Ra abbit~ the. Rabbit the active very they ama: ita¢iahd-qti cti nan’ge a¢é-hna"-biama: qad¢a cti ag¢f-hna®- say: forward very too running he habitu- they say: back too he came habitu- went ally again back ally biama: Usni ci® nan’ge cti u¢ica’-hna”-biama, Niaci"ga ¢i” wasisige they say: Cold the running too he went habitu- they say. Per: “ee the active around him — ally 9 12 15 18 10 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. fnahi® Aha, e¢éga"-biamé Usni aka. Hgi¢e jA4qti wi" ¢ihi-biama. Ubu! truly ! he thought they say Cold the. Itcameto deer one hescaredup, they Oho! pass say. negtfha, y4qti wi" cuhi ha. Kida-gi ha, 4-biama Mactcin’ge-i" ama. O mother’s deer one hasreached . Shoot it - he they say Rabbit the brother, you said An‘kaji ha éga" udna-méji ha, 4-biama Usni aka. Gan’‘ki ind4da™ uné Not so indeed, such I do not seek a uo they say Cold the. And what he seek said etéda® e¢ega"-biama Mactcin’ge-i” amd. Egi¢e nfacitga d‘iba wéda- can? he thought they say Rabbit the. Tt came to person some he found pass them biamdé Macetcin’ge-i" amd. Uht! negiha, niaci*ga d‘iba cuhfi ha. they say Rabbit the Oho! O mother's person some they reach brother, you A™ha™, éga"-hna® udne ha, a-biamaé Usni aka. Ga" t’éwa¢d-biama. Yes, such habitually I seek : uo they say Cold the. And he killed them they say. sai Niaci"ga ké wa‘ ag¢d-biama. Wa‘i” aki-biama yi tha™-biamdé nfaci*- Person the carrying he went they say. Carrying he reached when he cooked them, per- them homeward them home, they say they say ga ¢ankd. (izicka gi¢iki¢a-gat ha, na"pchi"-qti-a" ebdéga", 4-biama son the Your brother's work hurriedly “tor hungry very I think, he they say son him said Usni aké. Nin‘de¢a-biamé uqpé ufji-biama niac®ga jyantya té. Wi Cold the. Cooked tilldone they say dish she filled for him human fresh meat _ the. I they say éga™ wab¢ata-maji-hna"-ma™ ha, 4-biamaé Mactein’ge-i” aka. Weé‘i-biama. such I eat not habitu- Ido > he they say Rabbit the. He gaveit they say. ally said back to them Uma”e té ¢asni”-biama yi ci ‘abae a¢é ‘ica-biama Usni aka. Anga¢e Provisions the swallowed they say when again hunting going ne ney: say Cold the. We go spoke o: tai Mactcin’ge-i”, a-biama Usni aka. An’‘kaji, negiha, ¢i-hna™ ma”- will Rabbit he they say Cold the. Not so, O mother’s thou alone wall said brother, ¢in’-g4, a-biama Mactcin’ge-i” aka. Usni aka ci usni gaxdb ega™ ci thou he_ they say Rabbit the. Cold the again cold he made, having again said they say a¢i-biama. I¢é amd yi Mactcin’ge-i” aka Usni igdq¢a™ ¢inké fmaxé- he went they say. He had they say when Rabbit the Cold his wife the he ques- gone tioned her biamé. pimiha, winégi inddda™ na™pe a. (@inégi na™pe ¢ingéé he. they say. O father’s my mother’s what fears he ¢ Thy mother’s to fear has nothing . sister, brother brother An’‘kaji, yimiha, wiecté na™pe at‘a™ ha: Aqta™ winégi na™pe cingé tada”. Not so, O father’s even I to fear IT have . how pos- my mother's tofear have noth- shall? sister, (something) sible brother ing (ings nape ¢ingéé hé, 4-biamé wa‘ ak&é An’kaji, jimiha, wiecté hymother’s tofear hasnothing . she they say woman the Not so, O father’s even I brother said sister, na” a*xi¢a-hna*-ma™ ha: Agta” winégi nape ¢ingé tada™. A™ha", ¢indgi me scared habitu- TIuse : how pos- my mother’s to fear have noth- shall? Yes, thy mother’s ally sible brother ing Trathes dactan’ga-da na™pe hé. A™ha™, éga® éska" eb¢éga™ ha, 4-biamé Ma- Rocky Mount- head he fearsit . Yes, 80 itmight I thought ; he they say = Rab- ain sheep be said — es HOW THE RABBIT KILLED THE (MALE) WINTER. ~ 11 y etein’ge-i™” aka. Wi" i¢ab ega™ t’é¢a-biama. ga ¢a™ maga @gar a? bit the. One hefound, having he killed they say. Head the he cutoff, having hecar- they say it they say ag¢a-biama. Usni ak& aki-biama. Mactein’ge-i” wi’a™waja ¢é &. ried it they say. Cold the he they say. Rabbit in which direction went he ? homeward reached home I™teatgtci Aci a¢af, a-biami wa‘ti akdé. Egi¢e daze yi aki-biamd New very out he went, she they say woman the. Itcame to evening when he reavhed said pass home, they say. Maetem’ge-i” aka. Negtha, cé¢a” dactan’ga-dé wi, 4-biamd. Gia™¢a Rabbit the. Omother’s thatthe Rocky Mount- head one, he they say. He threw it brother, ain sheep said to him ¢cé¢a-biama yi t’é-qti a¢a-biama Usni aka. Wa‘t ¢inké end-qtci uctd he sent they say when dead very he went they say Cold the. Woman the alone very re- it forcibly mained ama. Ada™ edita” usni-qti-iji-hna” amd. Ceta™. they say. Therefore from that cold very not habitu- they say. So far. canse ally NOTES. The accompanying version of this Omaha myth was given me by Mr. Frank LaFleche. Mr. Sanssouci says that it was not the Winter, but Igacude (Storm-maker), who was killed by the Rabbit. Igacude used to go each day to a lofty bluff, and gaze in all directions till he spied a party of hunters. When he discovered as many as he could carry on his back, he used to take up a ball of snow and blow off the particles till he made a snow-storm, in which all the men were sure to perish. Then Igacude gathered the bodies and car- ried them to his lodge. 9,1. Macteinge-i, or Mactcifige, the name of a mythical hero of the Ponkas and Omahas, answering to the Iowa and Oto Micteine. His other name was Si¢é- maka" (see myth of the Turkey, in the first version; also that of Si¢é-maka”’s advent- ures aS a deer). The distinction, if any, between Mactcinge and Mactciige-i@ has been forgotten. 9, 2. e‘a®-qti ma*oni" ¢a¢itce 4. The use of “ea-qti” shows that there must have been some great trouble or important business which torced the Rabbit to wander from his home at such a time. 9, 10. a¢a-b ega™, contr. from a¢a-bi ega”. 9, 11. igacude gaxa-biama, usni hegaji ama. Frank said: usni he+gaji ama, It was ve---ry cold. 10, 7. niacitga ké, “the long line of men’s bodies,” in this case. 10, 15. gaxa-b ega*, contr. from gaxa-bi ega®. 11, 6. ada® edita® ugni-qti-diji-hna" ama. Before that it was much colder than 1t is now. Now we have the female Winter. TRANSLATION. The Rabbit was going somewhere. It came to pass that he reached the place where the Winter was dwelling. ‘Well! you made it a rule not to come hither at all in the past. Sit by those things near you. On what very important business have you been traveling?” “Yes, O mother’s brother, and my father’s sister! my grand- 12 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. mother has altogether beaten the life out of me; so I have been coming hither in a bad humor” (said the Rabbit). The Rabbit sat crying; he continued hopping to and fro; the Rabbit did not sit still at all. ‘Do sit still,” said the Winter. ‘‘O mother’s brother, I always do thus!” At length the Winter spoke about going hunting. ‘O mother’s brother, I will go with you!” said the Rabbit. ‘Why! you would be apt to die,” said the Winter. ‘‘No, O mother’s brother! how is it possible for me to die? I will go with you at all events.” “Let us see! Do so,” said the Winter. The Winter, having gone out, said: ‘Wh! Wh!”, and made a fine driving snow-storm (blizzard). It was very cold. And when he departed, the Rabbit went with him. The Rabbit was very active: he continued going and running very far ahead (of the Winter); and he was coming back repeatedly; he also went running many times around the Winter, as he moved along. ‘The person in motion is truly active!” thought the Winter. By and by he (the Rabbit) scared up a deer. “Oho! O mother’s brother! a deer has reached you; shoot it!” said the Rabbit. ‘No, such I do not seek,” said the Winter. And the Rabbit thought, ‘What can he be seeking?” After a while the Rabbit (in moving along) discovered some men. ‘Oho! O mother’s brother! some men have come to you.” ‘Yes, such only do I seek,” said the Winter. And he killed them. He carried the (dead) men homeward on his back. When he reached home with them on his back, he boiled the men. “Hurry for your nephew; I think that he is very hungry,” said the Winter (to his wife). She cooked them until they were done. They filled for him (the Rabbit) a dish with the human fresh meat. “T am not accustomed to eating such (food),” said the Rabbit. He gave it back to them. When the provisions had been devoured, again the Winter spoke of going hunting. ‘Let us go, Rabbit,” said the Winter. “No, O mother’s brother! you go alone,” said the Rabbit. The Winter, having made cold (weather) again, went again. When he had gone, the Rabbit questioned the Winter’s wife. ‘O father’s sister! what does my mother’s brother fear?” ‘ Your mother’s brother has nothing to fear.” “ No, O father’s sister! even I have something to fear. How is it possible for my mother’s brother to have nothing to fear?” “ Your mother’s brother has nothing to fear,” said the woman. ‘ No, O father’s sister! even I am used to being scared. How is it possi- ble for my mother’s brother to have nothing to fear?” ‘ Yes, your mother’s brother fears the head of a- Rocky Mountain sheep.” “ Yes, just sol thought it might be,” said the Rabbit. Having found one, he killed it. Having cut off its head with a knife, he carried it homeward on his back. The Winter reached his home. “In which direction has the Rabbit gone?” ‘“ He has just gone out (of the lodge),” said the woman. After a while, when it was dusk, the Rabbit reached home. ‘‘O mother’s brother! that round object by you is the head of a Rocky Mountain sheep,” said he. When he had thrown it suddenly toward him (the Winter), the Winter became altogether dead; only the woman remained. Therefore, from that cause (or, from that time), it has not been very cold, as a rule. HOW THE RABBIT CAUGHT THE SUN IN A TRAP, 13 HOW THE RABBIT CAUGHT THE SUN IN A TRAP. OBTAINED FROM FRANK LA FLECHE. Egi¢e Mactcin’ge aka iya™ ¢inké ena-qtci yig¢e jugig¢a-biama. Ki It came to Rabbit the his grand- the (st. only very hedwelt he withhis they say. And pass (sub.) mother ob.) in a lodge own ha’ egatceé’-qtci-hna” ‘Abae ahi-biamaé. Ha ega"tcé’-qtci a¢a-bi ctéwa™ morning very early habitually hunting he went thither, Morning very early he went,they notwith- they say. say standing nikaci*ga wi™ si snedé’-qti-hna" sig¢e ag¢a-bitéama. Ki ibaha™ ga™¢a- person one foot long very habit: trail had gone, they say. And fo iow he wished ally im biamé. Niaci"ga ¢i" r’ta" wita™¢i® b¢é ta minke, e¢éga"-biama. Ha”- they say. Person ee now I—first Igo will I who, he thought they say. Morn- my.) ega"tcé’-qtei yaha"-bi ega™ a¢a-biama. Ci cgi¢e nikaci"ga ama sig¢e ing very early he arose they having he went, they say. Again it came to person the (my.) _ trail say pass a¢i-bitéama. Egi¢e aki-biamd. .Ga-biamé: ya"ha, wita™¢i® b¢é axidaxe he had gone, theysay. Itcame to he reached home, He said as follows, O grand- I—first I go I make for pass they say. they say: mother, myself ctéwa™ nikaci*ga wi" a™aqai a¢ai te a”. ya™hda, uyfa"¢e daxe ta notwith- person one getting ahead he has gone. O grandmother, a snare Imake will standing of me minke, ki b¢ize ti minke ha. Ata™ ja™ tada™, 4-biamd wa‘tyinga aka. I who, and Itake will I who é Why youdo should? she they say old woman the. him it said Niaci"ga i¢atfab¢é ha, a-biama. Ki Mactcin’ge a¢a-biama. A¢a-bi yi Person Thate him he they say. And Rabbit he went they say. He went, when said they say ci sig¢e ¢é té ama. Ki ha™ té i¢ape ja”-biama. Man’de-ya™ ¢a” ukinacke again trail it had gone, they And night the ok he lay they say. Bow-string the noose say. ‘or gaxi-biama yi, sig¢e ¢é-hna™ té & di i¢a™¢a-biamd. Egi¢e ha™ega*ted’- he made they say when, trail went habitu- the there heputit they say. It came to very early in the it ally pass qtei uyfa"¢e ¢a™ gija™be ahf-biama. Egi¢e Mit ¢a® ¢izé akama. Tar¢i'’- morming snare the to see hisown he ar- they say. It came to Sun the he had taken, they Running rived pass say. qtci u¢d ag¢d-biamd. yga"hd, inddda® ¢i*te b¢ize édega®™ a™ baaze-hna™ very totell he went they say. O grandmother what (thing) itmay I took but me it scared _habitu- homeward be ally ha, d-biamd. yga™hd, man’de-ya" ¢a™ ag¢ize ka™b¢édega™ a’’-baaze- he they say. O grandmother, bow-string the I take my I wished—but me it scared said own hna™i ha, 4-biamé. Mahi" a¢i"-bi ega™ é’di a¢a-biama Ki _ eca"-qtci habitually. he they say. Knife he had they having thither he went they say. And nearto very said say 1 it ahi-biama. Piiji ckAxe. Eata™ éga™ ckaxe & E’di gi-ada™ i” ¢ické-ga he ar- they say. Bad you do. Why so you do ? There be com- and untie it for me rived ing back ha, 4-biama Mi” aké. Mactcin’ge aka é’di a¢a-bi ctéwa™ na™pa-bi ega™ he they say Sun the. Rabbit the thither wentthey notwith- he feared theseen having said say standing danger, they say 9 12 15 14. THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. hébe fhe a¢é-hna?-biama. Ki yu‘é’ a¢a-bi ega” mdsa-biama man‘de-ya" partly he hewent habitu- they say. And rushing hewent,they having hecutit they say bow-string passed ally with say bent head ¢a". Gan‘ki Mi” aka ma*cidha aid¢a-biamd. Ki Mactcin’ge aka abayu the. And Sun the on high ithad they say. And Rabbit the space be- gone tween shoulders hi” ¢a" nézi-biamd, dnakada-bi ega™. (Mactcin’ge ama aki-biama.) I-tei- hair the burnt they say, it washoton they having. (Rabbit the reached they say.) Ttci- yellow it say home tei+! ya"ha, na¢ingé-qti-ma™ ha, a-biamaé. Jy,ucpa¢a"+! i” na¢ingé’-qti-ma” tei+! O grand- burnt to very Iam e he they say. O grandchild! forme is burnt very Iam mother, nothing said to nothing eska™+! 4-biama. Ceta™. Ithink! she they say. So far. said NOTES. 13, 7. a¢ai te a". The conclusion of this sentence seems odd to the collector, but its translation given with this myth is that furnished by the Indian informant. 13, 11. ha®+ega"tcé-qtci. The prolongation of the first syllable adds to the force of the adverb “qtci.” The translation may be given as “‘ve -- ry early in the morning.” 14, 1. hebe ihe a¢e-hna®-biama. The Rabbit tried to obey the Sun, but each time that he attempted it he was so much afraid of him that he passed by a little to one side. He could not go directly to him. 14, 2. ma™ciaha aia¢a-biama. When the Rabbit rushed forward with bowed head, and cut the bow-string, the Sun’s departure was so rapid that “he had already gone on high.” 14, 3. itcitci+, an intj., showing that the speaker was in pain, caused in this case from the heat of the Sun’s rays. See myth of the Sun and Moon. The sentence at the end of the translation was given in Gegiha by the narrator; but the collector failed to write it. Hence it has no equivalent in the text. TRANSLATION. Once upon a time the Rabbit dwelt in a lodge with no one but his grandmother. And it was his custom to go hunting very early in the-morning. No matter how early in the morning he went, a person with a very long foot had been along, leaving a trail. And he (the Rabbit) wished to know him. ‘ Now,” thought he, “I will go in advance of the person.” Having arisen very early in the morning, he departed. Again it happened that the person had been along, leaving a trail. Then he (the Rabbit) went home. Said he, “Grandmother, though I arrange for myself to go first, a person anticipates me (every time). Grandmother, I will make a snare, and I will catch him.” ‘Why should you do it?” said she. “I hate the person,” he said. And the Rabbit departed. When he went, again had the footprints gone along. And he lay waiting for night (to come). And he made a noose of a bow-string, putting it in the place where the footprints used to be seen. And it came to pass that he reached there very early in the morning for the purpose of looking at his trap. And it happened that he had caught the Sun. Running very fast, he went homeward to tell it. Said he, “Grandmother, I have caught something or other, but it scares me.” “Grand- mother I wished to take my bow-string, but I was scared every time,” he said. He went thither with a knife. And he got very near it. ‘ You have done wrong. Why N HOW THE RABBIT KILLED THE BLACK BEARS. 15 have you done it? Come hither and untie me,” said the Sun. The Rabbit, although he went thither, was afraid, and kept on passing partly by him (or, continued going by a little to one side). And making a rush, with his head bent down (and his arm stretched out), he cut the bow-string with the knife. And the Sun went on high. And the Rabbit had the hair between his shoulders scorched yellow, it having been hot upon him (as he stooped and cut the bow-string). (And the Rabbit arrived at home.) “Tam burnt. O, grandmother! the heat has left nothing of me,” said he. She said, “Oh, my grandchild! I think that the heat has left to me nothing of him!” (From that time the rabbit has had a singed spot on his back, between the shoulders.) HOW. THE RABBIT KILLED THE BLACK BEARS Omaua VERSION, BY J. LA FLECHE. Mactcin’ge amd iya™ é¢a"ba édi akama jigte jigig¢e. Wasdbe 4f Rabbit the his grand- too there was, they hedwelt he with his Black bear _vil- mother say inalodge own age daa ¢aji-a hé’, iya™ akdé egd-biamdé. Wasdbe ama nikaci"ga wawéqaqai theto go not a his grand- the she said that to Black bear the (pl.) men they are laughors mother him, theysay. at them hé. E’di ¢aji-a he’. I¢iqdga taf hé. Wasdbe nikagahi ¢inké dahe, céhi¢e- : There go not A They laugh will . Black bear chief the hill that dis- at you tant ¢an’di 4fi hé, 4-biama. E’ja ¢aji-a hé’, a-biama. Kgi¢e man‘de g¢iza-bi the (ev.) he . she they say. Thither go not c as they say. It came to bow he took his at itches said Bai pass own, they say is tent ega’ 6di a¢d-biamé Mactcin’ge. Wasdbe nikagahi ¢ifké’di Mactcin’ge having there he went they say Rabbit. Black bear chief the—to Rabbit ama 6'di ahi-biamd. ijébe é’di a-i-naji” yi xagé gax4-biama Mactcin’ge. the there ar-_ they say. Door ‘there hecameto when crying he made they say Rabbit. (mv.) rive and stood at Mactcin’ge, edta™ ¢axdge a, 4-biamd Wasdbe aka. A™ha’—negtha—wa- Rabbit, ° why you cry ? he they say Blackbear the. Yes O mother's old said brother ‘“jinga aka—¢inégi— Wasabe—¢inké ya—ma"¢i"-& hé—ai éga"—a™¢a™ husai woman the your moth- Black bear the—to walk thou 5 she having she scolded me er’s brother said ega”—pi hi, 4-biam4 Mactcin’ge aké. Egi¢e nan’de masdniaja g¢in’-gi having Ihave . he they say Rabbit the. It came to sideofthe onthe otherside sit thou been coming said pass lodge ha, 4-biam4 Wasdbe aka. Egi¢e Mactcin’ge edi g¢i* ¢inké amd. Ha™ he theysay Blackbear the. It came to Rabbit there _he was sitting, they say. Night said pass yi Mactein’ge dci a¢d-biama. Aci ahf-bi ega™ yijébe égaxé/-qti jaé-biama when Rabbit outof he they say. Outof ar- they having door round very dunged, they doors went doors rived say about say Mactcin’ge aka. Hat! ing¢é wiwha, a’ba wiujan’ga ugig¢a‘dA‘a tai hia, Rabbit the. Well! feces my own, day as soon 18 you give ge scalp- will ye co 12 9 12 15 18 16 THE GEGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. d-biama Mactcin’ge aké. A™ba wiujanga égi¢e niaci"ga hégaji-qti ug¢a‘a‘a- he they say Rabbit the. Day as soon as it came person not afew very gave the said to pass scalp-yell . 5 o ae is . F biamé. Negiha, nikacitga hégactéwa™ji cka”awa¢ai ha, 4-biama Ma- they say. O mother’s person a few—not at all they cause us to > said they say Rab- brother move ctein’ge aké. (Qé¢u skéwa™-qti aja” ¢a™ja &'be cka™a™¢é td, A-biama bit the. Here along while very Tlie though who make memove shall? said, they say Wasabe aka. Ede nfaci"ga hégaji-qti ug¢d‘a‘’-biama b¢uga-qti. Gan‘ki Black bear the. But person not afew very gave stenosis they say all very. And ye Pe . , . , . . fi Kise) , , = dci a¢i-biamé Wasdbe ama, nikaci®gd-bi e¢éga"-bi ega™. Aci hi wiujan- out of went they say Black bear the (my.), person (See Note). thonght they having. Out of ar- as soon doors say doogs rived gi-qti Wasdbe t’é¢a-biama Mactein’ge aka. Negtha, té¢i¢é’-qti-a™i, -bi- as very Black bear he killed, they say Rabbit the. oa they kill very said, they orother thee ama Mactein’ge aké. T’é¢a-bi ega™ ag¢a-biama. Ki af téya aki-biama. say Rabbit the. Killed they having he went _ they say. And lodge at the he reached home, him = say homeward ey say. X atha, Wasdbe nikagahi t’éa¢é ha, 4-biama. Agta" téwa¢a¢ée ta. Téeé te / O grand- Black bear chief I have 4 he they say. How possi- youkill them shall? Killink the mother killed him said ble = pibaji hé, 4-biamé. -yahd, téa¢é ha. Anga¢e tai, a-biama. (See Waji”- bad 5 she they say. O grand- I have c We go will, he they say. said mother, killed him said ska’s version.) Wa‘tjinga &'di jug¢e ahi-biama. yga*ha, céé ha, a-biama. Old woman there she with arrived, they say. Ogrand- that E he they say. him mother is it said A™ha® yicpa¢a™, ca® hé, d-biamé. qada-bi ega” 4" ag¢d-biama. Aki- Yes O grandchild, enough . said they say. Carved they having carry- they went home- Reached she, it say ingon ward, they say. home the back bi yi Mactcin’ge a¢d-biamé Wasdbe can‘de a¢i”-bi ega”. Wasabe mi they when Rabbit went they say Black bear scrotum hehad they having. Black bear _ vil- say say age ¢a"yA ahi-bi yi, Mactcin’ge ti ha, Mactein’ge tf ha, 4-biama. Za‘é’-qti- N the—to ar-_ they when, Rabbit has ! Rabbit has ! said they say. Uproar very rived say come come a”-biamé. A™ha", ati ha. Tub¢a ati ha, 4-biamé Mactcin’ge aké. Hat! they say. Yes, Ihave . Itell Ihave . said they say Rabbit the. Well! come news come Mactcin’ge fu¢a ti 66 ha, 4-biama. Wasabe b¢tiga-qti édi ahf-biama. Rabbit to tell has he 2 said they say. Black bear all very there ar- _ they say. news come says rived Akié-qti ahi-biam4 sfaja. Keé, fu¢d-gi ha’, 4-biaméd. A™ha™, fub¢a ta ¥/ Standing very ar-_ they say at the Come, tellthenews . said they say. Yes, Itell will close together rived lodge they news ) minke ha, 4-biamd Mactein’ge aké. Wasdbe nikagahi yu ¢inké nikaci"ga I who . said they say Rabbit the. Black bear chief Bent the person pa! dhigi-qti &di ahi-bi ega” t’é¢a-biama, 4-biama Mactcin’ge aké. Nikagahi many very there ar- they having they they say, said they say Rabbit the. Chief ; rived say killed him angtyai t’é¢a-biamd, 4-biamé Wasabe ama. Wasabe ama b¢uga-qti xagé- our sey Taye they say, said they say Black bear the (pl.) Black bear the (pl.) all very cried killed him HOW THE RABBIT KILLED THE BLACK BEARS. 17 biama. Nikagahi tju tégiki¢at hnankacé, can’de ¢a" céé ha, A-bi ega™ they say. Chief pune they killed for ye who are, scrotum the that is . said they having, pal you it say Ane o f . v ey sae Se eareiKe , wéti"-biama. Hatt! Mactcin’ge éwa'i ha. (hiqa-ba té¢ai-ga ha, a-biama. he hit them with it, Well! Rabbit caused it A Chase and kill him . said they say. they say. him ag OSs . > ‘ . 1 . , . , : Weéahide’-qti-ajahi uq¢a-bi ega” t’é¢a-biama. Jutga b¢tiga ¢icpacpa-qti Far away very atitar- overtook they having killed they say. Body whole pulled into very riving him say him small pieces 1 . wees ie poesia , mm . ega™ a™¢a-biama. Iya” ¢inkédi yaci ki-iiji ama Mactcin’ge Ga” iya™ having threw they say. His grand- the—to a long reached they Rabbit. And his grand- away mother while home, not say mother , , , ° . aka ugine a¢é ga™¢a-biama. Wa'‘tjinga aka uq¢iiqaha ¢a™ g¢iza-bi ega™ the toseek togo wished they say. Old woman the woman's bag the took her they having her own own say Mactein’ge ugine a¢a-biama. Agudi tédi t’é¢ai té ya™ be téga™ udne b¢cée Rabbit. to sel went they say. In ae it the—in theykilled the Iseeit inorder Iseekit Iam her own place him that going hé, d-biamé wa‘tyinga aké. E’di ahi-bi ega” ¢icpdcpai gé bahi-bi ega™ said they say old woman the. There ar- they having pieces Pulled the picked they having she rived say apart up say ug¢tiqaha ¢a" uji ma™¢i'’-bi te’di, AYha", Mactein’ge, naxide-¢i¢in’ge. Lf woman's bag the fillmg walked they when, ¥es; Rabbit, inner-ear thee—none. Lodge say | Soa? 6 di Aji-n hé hé ¢a® aw af dont dj ray gaama naxide-¢in’gai éga" é'di ¢aji-a hé, ehé ¢a™ ca™ ei éga® teegi¢al. 2 aoge they are disuhediont as there go not ; Isaid inthe yet you as they killed past went you. Ag¢i-biama watjinga, ug¢iiqaha ¢a” gif-bi ega”. Aki-bi ega™ wiha Went homeward, old woman, woman's bag the carried on they having. Reached they having sack they say her back say home say . O=/ . OM 7 cher aw ne, . ¢a® gamu-bi ega” Mactcin’ge ni”ya-biamd. IPd¢a™ba™ ¢aji-a he. fi ¢a® the emptied by having Rabbit alive they say. A second time go not ‘ Village the DOURAIE, oe naxide-¢in’gai hé, 4-biamé. Mactein’ge aka, Béé ta minke, e¢égva™-biama. ») eo} ? b] D they are disobedient 3 said they say. Rabbit the, go will Iwho, he thought they say. she Man‘de g¢fza-bi ega” aga-biama Wasdbe yi ¢a™ ahi-bi te’di Wasdbe Bow took his they iain went they say. Black bear village the arrived, when Black bear own say they say : : . , i ° / ‘ ; 26 wi" ha™ b¢a-biama. Wasabe xagé’-qti-hna” naji” ‘-biama. Ci, ata™ aja™, one had a dream, they say. Black bear erying very et lace stood they say. And why youdo ally it? d-biamé. Hat™ab¢d-de piiiji hégaji ig¢aha™b¢é ha. Benga qti téawa¢at said, they say. Thad adream but bad not alittle Idreamed aboutit . very they killed us : - / igiha"b¢é ha. A™ha, wi cti téa™gai i¢dha™b¢é ha, A-biama. Uan¢in’ge I Ra about . Yes, I too se) I dreamed about 5 ed they say. To no purpose ki it e ieetatied ha. Aqta” b¢tiga t'éawa¢e taba. Wasabe ama nikaci"ga ena- you had a : How post all they kill us shall? Black bear the (pl.) human beings alone dream e& qti wA¢ati-biami; dda” Mactein’ge nikaci"ga wiuki-bi ega™ b¢tiga-qti very they ate they say; therefore Rabbit mankind sided with them, ine aving all very them they say téwade gadd-biama. Wasdbe fi ¢a® di ahi-bi ega” ha™da™ ii ¢a” to) tokillthem desired they say. Black bear village the there arriy. ed, Tene night-during village the they say ope . 1 ws égaxé-qti ja-biama Mactcin’ge aké. Hawi! ing¢é wiwija, aba sa” tihé San very dunged, they Rabbit the. Well! feces my own, day distant ap- about say white proaches suddenly VOL. VI 9 12 18 18 THE @EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. yi ug¢dta‘di-gai, 4-biama. Wasibe b¢tiga téa"wa™¢é tai ha 4é-biama. when give ye the se alp-yell, said, they say. Black bear we kill them will 5 said they say. Wita™¢i"’-qti w afaba® ti minke ha. ‘Pkita” ug¢d‘atai-o& ha, 4-biama. Tat the first very I give the attack- will I who . Atthesame give ye the scalp- . said they say. ing cry time yell “ba twalanea wai’ ba™-biama Mactcin’ge aké. B igs i-qti ug¢a‘a‘i- Ja UWaAN, Day as soon as he gaye the at- they say Rabbit the. be they gave the a tacking cry scalp-yell biamA nfaci"ga am&. Wasibe b¢tiga dci aht-biama. B¢tga-qti t’éwa¢a- they say a the (pl.). Black bear all out of they came, they All very ey killed doors say. hem biamia Wasidbe-mé. Nuga wi? mi”ga wi" edabe ugacta-biama. Wasabe they say Black bear the Male one female one, also remained they say. Black bear (pl.). na“ba-ma Mactein’ge tg¢a®-biami. Mactein’ge ama twakia-biama Wa- two the Rabbit them he took hold Rabbit the talked with they say Black (pl.) of, they say. (my.) them sibe-ma. (fiptbaji ega” wag¢icka end-qti wahnate taité, 4-biama. bear the ae bad tei ing So uane only very you eat shall surely, eo they say. (pl.) ) Wandxi ¢i¢in’ge taité. I’na"ha winégi edabe ¢i¢ate taité. Wasadbe Spirit youhave shallsurely. My mother my mother’s also they eat shallsurely. Black bear none brother you 5 Vi tee + / e¢ige taité. Ma'¢i"i ga. Ceta™. they say shall Walk ye. So far. to you surely. NOTES. 15, 2. ega-biama, fr. ege: to be distinguished from ga-biama. 15, 3. dahe cehi¢e¢andi. Let A denote the place of the speaker; B, dahe ceké, that visible long hill, a short distance off; b, dahe ce¢a™, that visible curvilinear hill, a short distance off; ©, dahe cehiké, that visible long hill, reaching a point farther away; ¢, dahe cehi¢a" ditto, if curvilinear; D, dahe cehi¢eké, that visible long hill, extending beyond dahe ceké, and dahe cehiké; d, dahe cehi¢e¢a”, that visible curvilin- ear hill, extending beyond dahe ce¢a™ and dahe cehi¢a”. A (line of vision) Bl |---- 0) ----- DI |; A (line of vision) - - - - |B |----- |C |----- ee | or, A (line of vision) - - - -®)- - - -- - Oke s=23 @. 15, 7. a"ha"—negiha, ete. The Rabbit spoke as children sometimes do when crying. 16, 1. hegajiqti, pronounced he+gajiqti by the narrator. 16, 2. hegactewa*ji, pronounced he+gactewa*ji by the narrator. 16, 4. b¢ugaqti, pronounced b¢éu+gaqti by the narrator. 16, 5. niaci"ga-bi e¢ega™-bi ega®. The -bi after niaci"ga shows that the Black bear, while he thought that there were men outside, had not seen them. See the Oto version of this myth, to appear hereafter in “The poiwere Language, Part I.” TRANSLATION. There was a Rabbit and his grandmother, too; he dwelt ina lodge with her. His grandmother said that to him: “Go not to the village of Black bears. The Black bears are abusers of men. Go not thither. They will abuse you. The Black bear HOW THE RABBIT KILLED THE BLACK BEARS. 19 chief has a lodge on a hill extending beyond that one in sight. Do not go thither,” said she. And taking bis bow, the Rabbit went thither. The Rabbit reached the chief of the Black bears. When he got there, and was standing by the door, the Rabbit pretended to be crying. “Rabbit, why do you ery?” said the Black bear. “Yes,—O mother’s brother—the old woman—said—‘Go to—your mother’s brother— the Black bear’—and, havying—scolded me—I have been coming hither,” he said. At length the Black bear said, “Sit by the side of the lodge on the other side of (the fire- place).” And it came to pass that the Rabbit was sitting there. At night the Rabbit went out of the lodge. Having gone outside, the Rabbit dunged all around the door. “Well, my own faces,” said the Rabbit, “you will please give the scalp-yell as soon as it is day.” As soon as it was day, behold, a very great multitude of persons gave the scalp-yell. “O mother’s brother! an exceedingly large number of men dislodge us,” said the Rabbit. “Though I should lie here a very long period (or, for many years), who could possibly dislodge me (or, cause ine to move)?” said the Black bear. But every one of a large number of persons gave the scalp-yell many times. And thinking that it was people, the Black bear went out of the lodge. The Rabbit killed (wounded) the Black bear just as soon as he got outside. “OQ mother’s brother! they have indeed killed you,” said the Rabbit. Having killed him, he went homeward. And he reached his home at the lodge. ‘“O grandmother! I have killed the Black bear chief,” said he. How would it be possible for you to kill him? To kill him is bad (or diffienlt),” she said. “Grandmother, I have killed him. Let us go (thither),” said he. The old woman arrived there with him. (See Waji"ska’s version.) ‘Grandmother, this is he.” “Yes, my grandchild, it will do,” said she. Having cut up the body, they carried it homeward on their backs. When they reached home, the Rabbit departed, carrying the scrotum of the Black bear. When he reached the village of the Black bears, they said: “The Rabbit has come! The Rabbit has come!” They made a great uproar, “Yes, I have come to tell news,” said the Rabbit. “ Halloo! the Rabbit has come, he says, to tell news.” All of the Black bears went thither (to the lodge where the Rabbit was). They were at the lodge in great crowds. ‘Come, tell us the news,” said they. “Yes, I will tell the news,” said the Rabbit. ‘A great many persons, it is said, went to the principal chief of the Black bears, and killed him,” said the Rabbit. ‘Our chief has been killed,” said the Black bears. All the Black bears cried. “ Ye who have had your head-chief killed, here is his scrotum.” Having said this, he struck them with it. “ Syme Kiéita’-qtei ma™hni’ 4, 4-biama. Ga", Maca® uaxyine dhigidyi¢e ki gan‘ki Why very you walk % said they say. And, Feathers Iseek for Imademany for and also she myself myself cae f pos % - . , ag¢é taté akiqib¢a Ada™ axdge-hna™-ma™, A-biamé. M+! &-biamé wa‘t I go shall J hesitate, fear- therefore Ihave been doing nothing said they say. M+! said they say woman homeward ing failure but ery, he she aka. Niaciga wi" judwag¢d-de pibaji. Ug¢é ¢ag¢é te Wandg¢i’-a he, the. Person one Iwiththem but bad. Quic yy you for will. Hasten thou é MOMOWATC 4-biama&. g.ejihitde é¢aska-qtei ug¢i’-biama Mactein’ge aké. Maca” tedi said they say. Woven yarn that size very satinit they say Rabbit the. Feathers to the she (turban) 1 . : ory Cayo : . ka” ta"-biama. (le ¢ag¢é te ¢a’ja aki té’di bide igi” wa"yi te, 4-biama. he tied it they say. This yougo will though yourcach when red-oak put in it for me said she, they homeward home acorn please, say. 1 Se eS . * : Tan‘de ké A¢ata" yi hnfp’ande té, a-biama. Ga® ¢ieta™ g¢é¢a-biama. Ground the youtread when shake it by pull- will said they say. And letting him sent him back sud- on ing she go denly, they say. Aki-biama yi fta¢ewa¢-biamd Mactcin’ge ama. (la‘éwadat ¢inké iqta- He reached home, when he was hateful they say Rabbit the (mv.). She pitied him —_ the one he abused they say, who her . pes . RG yarn Dok . ins . a biama, Ujiha uji-biamé. Gan‘ki ¢ip’an’da-biama, gan‘ki e¢izai te. Ki they say, bag he dunged in, they And he shook it they say, and she took her own. And say. Oye : ° _/1.* ° ga" mica®™ gif”-bi ega™” ag¢d-biama. Gan‘ki akf-biama. yatha, ag¢i thus feathers carrying his having he went homeward, And he reached home, Grandmother, T have own, they say they say. they say. come home . , . , Te . He t : , rt v , hau, a-biama. faquiba-biama: I¢iate’ f¢iate’é+! 4-biam’. Maca? té, yaha, i said they say. She spoke in they say: said they say. Feathers the grand- he wonder she mother ai” ag¢i, A-biamd. Ki ga-biama: (tinggi ahigi-qti ma" gaxewaki¢a-a hé, ITear- Ihave said theysay. And she said as fol- Your moth- many very arrow cause them to make ried come he lows, they say: er’s brothers {-biamé. Egi¢e ga-biama, ya™hd, edta" Ada”, i-biamaé. Ki gé-biama: said they say. Tt came he said as fol. Grandmother, where- g said they say. And — she said as fol- she to pass lows, they say: fore he lows, they say: 12 12 15 18 28 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. dahé wi” édi aké nikaci"ga ¢é ca® fhe ¢i” ¢altini-hna™i, 4-biamé. Ga’, Hill one there the person going and passing the draws into habitu- said they say. And by (Qny.) its mouth ally she ee . , T° . use Oy? oe oe, . Ga ja" be ta minke, 4-biama. I¢iate’ i¢iate’e+! cka™aji gq¢iv-a he, A-biama, That Isee will I who, said they say. still ‘sit thon A said they say. (unseen) he she — oy) 9 , : , y . / [L . An‘kaji, ca" ya™ be t& minke, 4-biama. U¢itagé-qti ca” da” be a¢ad-biama., Not so, at any Iseeit will I who, said they say. She unwill. very — still to see it he they say. rate he ing went Egi¢e &'di ahi-biama. (é gahé-wa¢ahuni hni”, édi hninké amd, 4-biama. It came there he arrived, they This Hill that devours youare, there you who they say, he_ they say. to pass say. said A™¢ahiini-ea, A-biamaé. yyaci-qti éga" ¢asni’i-biama. Egi¢e yihd a-f akama oo? D. t=) fo) Draw me into your said they say. Along very so he was they say. Itcame down he was coming, mouth he while swallowed to pass they say. Kgi¢e niaci"ga wad¢asni" ita’ ¢iadi waht qéga-qti, gan‘’ki yay Ag¢askabé It came person he swallowed formerly bone dried very, and flesh sticking to to pass them r 8 ive : O i 3 vie . nisage-ma, ki i'’tea"-qtci t’e-ma cti, te té’di agi” ahi, di ¢a"-hna™ nia dried hard them- and lately very dead,them- too, dead unto having reached liver the only alive who who (it) < 5 ae ° ike ota . , gixe ja”-biama. Gan‘ki inijja waséya"™ amé ahi-biama Mactein’ge-i” ami. “made “lay they say. And alive (and) active ones he reached, they Rabbit the. say Ci-ci-ci-ci! ¢éma_ djtiba, 4-biama Mactcin’ge-i” aké. gqahdé-wa¢dhuni Ci-ci-ei-ci! these few, said they say Rabbit the. Hill that devours he yé-nande waci-qti u‘é‘é-qti g¢i-biamaé. Téna’! gigé hnate tai-éde, buf- heart fat very dangling very it sat they say. Why! ‘those you should have eaten falo d-biama. Maqa™-biama, y¢-nande macpacpa-biamé. qahé ké b¢aza¢e said they say. He cut it off, they say, buf- heart he cut into many they say. Hill the it split open he falo pieces ama. (le nikaci"ga amé was¢éya" amd Gahé ké béazd¢e ékita™ wasisigd- theysay. This person — the quick the hill the split open at the active (pL) (pL) same time biama. Ki gé-biamd: Mactein’ge ta” wa"in’g¢a" taf, 4-biama. Niawag¢at, they say. And they said as fol- Rabbit we make a nation for will, said they say. He made us live lows, they say: him they a-biama. Ki, pi uginai-ga, Agudi ¢ati dite, d-biamé. Mangci"i-¢a, said they say. And, Lodge seek ye your own, where youhave may said they say. Begone ye, they come hither he 4-biamé (Mactein’ge-i” akd). Ga" éga"™-biamaé. Ga" ag¢a-biama Mact- said they say (Rabbit the). And soit they say. And he went homeward, Rab- he was they say cin’ge amd. ‘yathd, caki, 4-biama. I¢iate’ {¢iate’é+! A-biamd. > yga™ha hit the (mv.). Grandmother, Icome said they say. said they say. Grand- backto you, he she mother dahé-wa¢ahuni uhnd ke¢a” téa¢e, d-biamé. M+! cé te’é¢e ida” Hill that devours you told inthe past I have said they say. M+! that to kill it good of killed him he akima-¢a". Eatca-qtei te’éwa¢acé teci"te, A-biama. Tena’! yanha, t’éa¢e, he was in the past. Tow very you kill them may be, said they say. Why! grand- T killed she mother him d-biami. Nikaci"ga edi-hna® edi-ma Mactein’ge ta” wa"in’g¢a" taf, ai said they say. Person there only there, those who Rabbit let us make a nation for him, they he said f oben , f PARAS. @hel es 4 éde ub¢i‘age. pi ugine waagdaji, A-biama. but Iwasunwill- Lodge to hunt Itold them, said they say. ing his own he 5 HOW THE RABBIT WENT TO THE SUN. 29 - NOTES. 25, 2. i¢iate’ i¢iate’e+, an interjection used by females, denoting surprise. L. Sans- souci gives i¢iatie+. The corresponding man’s word is qa-i-na. lL. Sanssouci makes i¢iate’ i¢iate’e+, equal to the goivere hintqeine, or hiniqeine, but the latter appears to the collector to be nothing but a variation of hindqeine or inaqeine, “an old woman” (in peiwere). Tada™+, is equal to tada® (used by males). 25, 4. negi-hau+ equals negiha. The last syllable shows that the voice was raised to call a distant person. Sanssouci says ‘the Rabbit crossed level prairies, and called on the ground.” Inmediately after that he said “‘negi-hau+, refers to the Hagle.” But that is inconsistent with the kinship system; for the Eaglets called the Rabbit ‘“ elder brother.” Hence the Eagle must have been the Rabbit’s father, and the female Eagle his “mother.” Perhaps this myth originated among a people who called a ‘mother’s brother’s” sons, ‘‘ brothers.” 25, 5. ma"xe - - - gawi"xe amama. To the eye of the Rabbit, the Eagles were pressing very close to the sky, which was supposed to be a horizontal solid, and the roof of this lower world. 26, 5. yi dedi te ama. This lodge was said to be in the Sun. 26, 7. mangte, ete. The Rabbit sat erect (mang¢e) on his haunches with his legs thrust out towards the Haglets, who were looking at him. Je-musnade differs from je-muxa. i 26, 9. awattta", was given; but it was probably intended for awaté-qata”. 26, 12. maqpi - - - ag¢i-hna’i. “It is his custom to come home when water is fall- ing drop by drop from small clouds of different sizes (?)” 26, 14. What follows is not expressed very clearly. It is probable that part of the conversation was omitted in what was given by Nuda®-axa. 27, 1. Sanssouci gives instead of wés‘a - - aki-bi yi, two expressions: wés‘a kédega" adi’ aki-biama (equal to the goiwere waka™ iya” anyi yi, anye ké), and we/s‘a améga" kéde a¢i" aki-biama (equal to the gaiwere waka” énaha-cké iya’ anyi yri, anye ke). If Sanssouci be right, the former phrase is “they say that he has come back with a snake”; and the latter ‘one of the class of snakes le brought home, they say.” 27, 12. e¢arska-qtei, that is, about the size of a hat. 27, 14. hnip’ande, you shake the rope or cord by which L let you down. 27, 15. aki-biama yi it’a¢dewa¢a-biama. ‘“IKi” here denotes that the subject had returned to his native place, the earth as distinguished from the upper world, whence he had been lowered by the old woman. He did not reach his home till he had gone some distance. 27, 19. ¢inegi ahigi-qti ma”, ete. Your mother’s brothers, men. 28, 5. egi¢e yiha ai akama. Sanssouci reads, ahi akama, he was going or arriving there. 28, S. inigja waseya™ ame. Sanssouci gives three goiwere equivalents for this: “those who were yet a little strong;” “those who stirred a little;” and “those who, as they say, stirred, or were alive, with a little strength.” 28, 18. eata"-qtei te’ewad¢adée teeimte, a corruption of eata®-qti tewa¢a¢e tei"te. Such corruptions are frequently used by old women and children. 30 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. TRANSLATION. Jn the former time the Rabbit departed. “Grandmother, I will go to hunt feathers for myself,” said he. ‘I¢iate’ i¢iate’e+!” said she, “in what place (do you think) you will find feathers very easily?” And he went. Going across the ground by a very hear way, on very level prairie, he went crying: ‘‘O--- mother’s brother! O- - mother’s brother!” he continued saying as he went. Those whom he sought, the Eagles, were flying round and round, pressing very closely against the (top of) the sky. Both went along, and they turned themselves around as they went. ‘These (moving ones) will take me,” he said. The Eagles were crying and saying ‘T-t-t-t-t.” It came to pass the other one was coming (this way, to earth) from above to attack him (or, dash ou him). And he seized him. And he carried him homeward. And he reached home with him. He took him home to the sky up above. And there was a lodge. ‘My father has brought home a very good animal as prey” (said the Haglet). And the Eaglet said, O elder brother (Rabbit) we two love you very much.” “Though for some time I have been doing nothing but move, who will love me?” said (the Rabbit). And he sat erect on his hind legs. The Eaglets loved that; it alone was very good. And he (the Eaglet) said as follows: ‘“‘Whence have you come?” “When I was just walking across the ground by a near way, your father seized me,” said he (the Rabbit). And he said, ‘At what time of the day does your father usually get home?” “My father,” said he, “is accustomed to come home when it is very late in the afternoon, and when water is falling one drop at a time from small round clouds of different sizes.” It came to pass that he (the Eaglet) said as follows: “O elder brother, of what sort is it when you do that?” “Yes,” said he (the Rabbit) “thus, as you see me, they strike my head with one stone, when it is resting on another.” “O elder brother, treat us so,” he said (the Eaglet). “ You all shall sit in that place,” said he (the Rabbit). ‘So let us sit,” said he (the Eaglet). And so he treated them. The one he crushed with a violent blow, and he killed his younger brother with a blow in like manner. And he pulled out the feathers. And he made them (the Eaglets) fall violently to the ground. And he tied up the feathers. And that which they told him was apt to be the case (did occur): the father came back suddenly. ‘Do you and your younger brother take that,” he said. When he had reached home with a snake, and pushed his way into (the lodge) he (the Rabbit) crushed him with a violent blow. After a while, precisely at the beginning of darkness, the mother came home suddenly. “Do you and your younger brother take that,” she said. Again in like manner she had brought home a snake. And again he killed the mother with a blow. And again he sat pulling out the feathers, he sat tying them up. And he also sat crying. He departed, carrying the feathers on his back. And he was going along erying. At length there was a lodge. He arrived there. And he was standing crying. The woman peeped at him. Behold, she was his grandmother. After she stood a while she said “M+! on what very important business are you traveling?” And he said, “T sought feathers for myself, and have many. And moreover, I hesitate about start- ing homeward, fearing failure; therefore I have been doing nothing but ery.” “M+!” said the woman, “I am with a person, but he is bad. You must go quickly to your home. Hasten,” she said. The Rabbit sat in a bag of woven yarn the size of a hat. He tied the feathers to it. ‘Though you will go homeward this time, when you reach home, put a red-oak acorn in (the bag) for me,” said she. “ When you tread the HOW THE RABBIT WENT TO THE SUN. 31 ground, you must give it (the rope) a slight pull,” she said. And letting him go, she sent him back suddenly (to the earth, his home). When he reached home (the earth), the Rabbit was hateful. He abused the one who pitied him, he dunged in the bag. And pulling (the rope), he shook it a little, and she took her own. And so he went homeward carrying the feathers on his back. And he reached home. ‘“O erand- mother, I have come home---!” he said (raising his voice). She spoke in wonder. She said, “I¢iat¢? i¢iat¢e+!” “Grandmother,” said he, ‘I have brought home the feathers on my back.” And she said as follows: “Cause your mother’s brothers to make very inany arrows.” And then he said as follows: “Grandmother, for what reason?” And she said as follows: “There is a hill that is accustomed to draw into its mouth the person going and passing that way.” And he said, “I will see that.” “I¢iate’ i¢iat’e+!” said she, ‘sit still.” “No, I will see it at any rate,” said he. (Though) she was very unwilling, still he went to see it. At length he arrived there. “You are this hill that draws into its mouth. They said that you were there. Draw me into your mouth,” said he. He was swallowed for a very long time. Atlength he got down (to the bottom). And it happened that (there were) the very dry bones of the persons whom it had swallowed formerly, and those who had the flesh dried hard and sticking (to the bones), and those, too, very lately dead, brought unto the dead, lay with the liver alone made alive. And the Rabbit reached those who were alive and quick. ‘Ci-ci-ci-ci! these are few,” said the Rabbit. The fat on the heart of qahe-wa¢ahuni was dangling very much. ‘Why! youshould have eaten that,” said he. He cut it off with a knife, he cut the heart into pieces with a knife. The hill split open of its own accord. And these men who were quick (alive, stirring) became active at the very time that the hill split open of its own accord.- And they said as follows: “Tet us put the Rabbit at the head of the nation.” “He saved us,” said they. And he said, “Seek ye your own lodges, from whatsoever places ye may have come hither.” “ Begone ye,” said he (the Rabbit). And soit was. And the Rabbit went homeward. “OQ grandmother, | have come back to you,” he said. ‘“I¢iate i¢iat’e+!” said she. “O grandmother,” said he, “I have killed the hill that draws them into its mouth, of which you told in the past.” “M+! It was said that it were good to kill that one. How could you have been his slayer?” said she. ‘“‘ Why! grandmother, I have killed him,” said he. “Of the persons that were there, there were those who said, ‘Let us make the Rabbit the head of the nation,’ but I was unwilling. I commanded them to seek their own lodges,” he said. 15 32 THE @EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. HOW THE RABBIT KILLED THE DEVOURING HILL. OBTAINED rROM J. LAFLECHE. dihe-wa¢ahuni wi" édi ké ama. Ki Mactcin’ge aka iya" aka Jugigga- Hill that devours one there he was lying, And Rabbit the his grand- the he with his they say. mother own biama. qadhe wi” édi kéde piiiji, Hgi¢e @’di ond te hé; e’di onaji te hé, they say. Hill one there itlies, bad. Beware there yougo will . there you go will but not i-biama Ki, yga"hd, edta® dda", 4-biamé. Niaci*ga ama @’di hi-hna® said they say. And, Grandmother, where- ? (in said they say. Person the (mv.) there arrived only she fore word) he (as a rule) ¢an‘di wi¢ahtni-hna™i hé, 4-biamé. Ki Mactcin’ge amd, Hinda! edta™ when (in it drew them habitually D said they say. And Rabbit the (mv.) Let me see! where- the past) into its mouth she fore éda®. E’di b¢é te-na, e¢éga"-biama. Ga" é'di a¢a-biama. Mactcin’ge ? (in There Igo will (in he thought, they say. And there he went, they say. Rabbit thought). thought), edi ahi-bi yi gaéhe-wi¢ahuni aké fbaha’-biamd. Tbaha"-bi ega” di there reached, when Hill that devours the ho knew they say. He knew him, having there they say (sub.) him they say hi fi, qahe-wai¢ahuni, a” ¢ahtini-ga, 4-biama Mactein’ge aki. qahe- reach- when, Hill that devours, draw me into your said they say Rabbit the. Hill ed mouth, he wi¢ahuni waonahtni-hna” amd, a” ¢ahtni-ga. Ki gahe-wa¢ahuni aka that devours them you draw habitu- they say, draw me into your And Hill that devours the into your mouth ally mouth. Mactein’ge tba-ha”-bi ega™ ¢ahtni-baji-biama. Egi¢e nikaci"ga héga- Rabbit he knew him they, having drew him not they say. It came to person by no say - into its mouth pass ctéwa ji d-idmamé gaq¢a”. Egi¢e @di ahi-biama. Ki gahe-wa¢ahuni means afew they were coming, a hunting It came to there they arrived And Hill that devours they say party: pass they say. akd id¢ixd-biama, ki niaci"ga am’ updé-biamd dahe f té. Ki Mactcin’ge the opened its mouth, and person the (pl.) entered they say hill mouth the. And Rabbit they say, aka € eti upa-biamd. Egihe aid¢a-biamd Mactein’ge qahe-wa¢ahuni nixa the he too entered, they say. Onward he had gone, they Rabbit. Hill that devonrs stomach without say hesitation / Z / De 7 . , . ae ma™taja hi yi nan‘de-fsabaji-biama qahe-wa¢ahuni aka. Ga" Mactcin’ge inside arrived when heart ~ not good by they say Hill that devours the. And Rabbit means of dahe-wa¢ahuni aka ig¢eba-biama. Ci gaq¢a™ d‘iba 4-idmamaé. Gaq¢a™ Hill that devours the it vomited they say. Again hunting party some they wereapproach- Hunting him up ing, they say. party edi ahi-bi yi ci Gahe-wa¢ahuni aka id¢ixa-biamé. Ci niaci"ga upa-biama there arrived, when again Hill that devours the opened its they say. Again person entered, they say they say mouth ~ uv *—/ ia y . , 1; . . i te. Iki Mactein’ge ama ci updé-biamda. Edithi qahe-wa¢ahuni wége¢eba- mouth the. And Rabbit the again entered, they say. At that Hill that devours vomited them (mv.) time up HOW THE RABBIT KILLED THE DEVOURING HILL. 33 baji amd. Egiée nikaci"ga pahan’ga hi-md t’e-ma wah{ k& sa® ké amd, not they say. Behold person before arrived, the dead,the bone the (lg. dis- they were ly- ones who ones who line) a ing, they say, Ww. 1) . 2 Se_y er ae , . ¥ en/ - ? f qi'q ugdhahd-ma yaci-jin’ga t’e-m4 cti ju u¢as‘i”-ma, ci 7’ tea"-qtci te-ma tissue adheringto the agreat little dead,the too flesh ak hering the again now very dead, tho each one ones while * ones who withit ones ones who who ago who cti, ki ni™ja-ma cti. Mactein’ge ak& g4-biam4: Hata" hndta-bajfi i. too and alive, theones too. Rabbit the said as follows, Why youeat - not ? who they say: jenan'de gagé waci”-qti ondt etai-éde; wieb¢i" yi b¢ate te, 4-biamd. Buffalo heart those (un- fat very you eat shall but; Tam he if Teatit will said they say. seen and he scattered) : Ki mahi" g¢fza-biama Mactein’ge aka. Mahi" e¢iza-bi yi ye-nan/de méqa"- And knife he took his own, they Rabbit the. Knife he took his when buf- heart he cut with say own, they say, falo a knife biama. Ki qahe-wA¢ahuni amd, Ha”! ha™! ha"! (hna"™-biama. Ki Mactein’ge they say. And = _ Hill that devours the, Hat! hat! ha*! hesaidit theysay. And Rabbit regularly aka, Ha®! ha*! ha"! 4-ji-gi ha, 4-biamé. Ki ye-nan’de waci™ g& eddbe the Has! has! ha"! say not - said theysay. And buffalo heart fat the (scat- also he tered) ugéwi'wa¢ai Mactein’ge aka. gahe ké b¢azd¢a-biama. Niaci"ga b¢tiga- he collected them Rabbit the. Hill the split of its own accord, Person all : they say. qti gacibe ag¢a-biamd. Ag¢d-biamé yi niaci"ga bdtiga u¢éwinyi¢a-biama. very outofit went homeward, Went homeward, when person all” assembled themselves, they they say. they say say. Mactcin’ge nikagahi angdxe taf, 4-biam4. Gan’‘ki g4-biamé: Mactcin’ge Rabbit chief wemake will, said they say. And he said as follows, Rabbit they they say: nikagahi ckaixe tai 4-bi 4¢a. W4i nikagahi ka"b¢a A¢i@hdite. Wia”’- chief you make will he says, indeed. au chief I wish I who move, Which they say. it may be. n 4 Aan 7 a ess WY - ; n/ yn/ i n £ f wajata™ ¢ati dite mangei™i-ek. Wi cti wiya" waci" ¢ingéga” dag¢é att. from you have it may begone ye. I too my grand- fat had none, as_ I for my I have come be mother own come. Ga” ag¢d-biam4 Mactcin’ge amd waci™ ‘bi ega”. TI" aki-bi ega™ And went homeward, Rabbit the (mv.) fat carried, they having. Car- hereached having they say say rying home, they say dciaja ité¢a-biama. ya™ha, qahe-wad¢ahuni t’éadé Ada, d-biamd. His! outside he putit, they say. O grandmother Hill that devours Ihave indeed, said, they say. Oh! killed him si-Jan'ga péji’-qtci! i-cpacpa péji’-qtei! ed t’ébe vida” aké-cna™-¢a™ téwaga¢é te, foot big bad very! mouth, pieces bad very! that to kill good theone only inthe you have been his out 0 one , past slayer, a-biama. ‘yathd, t’éa¢éea" cehé hi. Giida té da"ba-g% ha, 4-biama. said they say. Grandmother, Ikilledhim,as I said that . Beyond the see thou 5 said they say. she (farther off) (pile) he Watijitiga aki Aci ahi-bi ega”, Hiv+! yicpa¢a"+! win’ke tedé, 4-biamé. Old woman the outof arrived, having, Oh! my grandchild! told the truth did-but, said they say. doors they say she Waci” té ¢izd-biama. Fat the she took they say. VOL. VI——3 18 34 [HE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. NOTES. See the preceding myth: How the Rabbit went to the Sun; also, J. La Fléche’s Oto version of this myth, to appear hereafter in “The goiwere Language, Part 1? $2, 2. kéde, contraction from ké, éde. 32, 9. hegactewarji, pronounced he+gactewa"jl. 33, 2. qitq contraction from qi"qé, dried flesh or meat next the bone. (For the speech of the men and the Rabbit’s reply, see the Oto version.) 33, 11. mactcifige - - - Abi 4¢a, the words of the crier going through the camp, quoted by the Rabbit. ka™b¢a A¢imhéite (#. ¢., ka"b¢a a¢im@he eimte) is not in the form of a question, though it implies one, according to Sanssouci. 33, 12. maing¢i” i-gi, begone ye! “Go to your respective homes,” is meant, but it is not expressed. 33, 12. Aag¢é ati, I have come for my own property. The Rabbit talks as if he had a prior claim to the hill’s heart, ete. 33, 14. The words of the old woman are not to be taken literally. She was proud of what the Rabbit had done, and was praising him. Even if he was deformed, he had done what should have been done long age by others. 33, 17. winke tedé, feminine of wii’/ke téde, contraction from win’ke té, éde, he did tell the truth but,” an elliptical expression, which would be in full, win‘ke té édehna® ewéja ¢a"cti, he told the truth, but I did nothing but doubt him at the first. TRANSLATION. There was a Hill that drew (people) into its mouth. And the Rabbit was with his grandmother. ‘“A Hillis there, but it is bad. Beware lest you go thither. Go not thither,” said she. And he said, “Grandmother, wherefore?” She said, “ Whenever people go thither, it draws them into its mouth.” And the Rabbit thought, “‘Let me gee! Why is this? I will go thither.” And he went thither. When the Rabbit arrived there, the Hill knew him. As he knew him when he arrived there, the Rabbit said, ‘‘ gahe-wa¢ahuni, draw me into your mouth. gahe-wa¢ahuni, you who, as they say, are used to devouring, devour me.” And gahe-wa¢ahuni knew the Rabbit, so he did not devour him. And it came to pass that a great many people belonging to a hunting party were coming to that place. And they arrived there. And gahe-wa¢a- huni opened his mouth, and the people entered the mouth of the Hill. And the Rabbit entered too. The Rabbit pressed onward. And when he reached the stomach of the Hill within, gahe wa¢ahuni was not pleased by it. And gahe-wa¢ahuni vomited up the Rabbit. Again some members of a hunting-party were approaching. When the party reached there, gahe-wa¢ahuni opened his mouth again, and the people entered the mouth. And the Rabbit entered again (as a man, this time). And then gahe- wa¢ahuni did not vomit him up. And there were lying in the distance the whitened bones of the people who had entered first and had died, the dried flesh next to the bones adhering to them; also those who had been dead but a little while, with the flesh (on the bones); and those, too, who had just died, and the living ones too. And the Rabbit said as follows: “Why do yon not eat? You should have eaten that very fat heart. Were I (in your place), I would eat it,” he said. And the Rabbit seized his knife. When he seized his knife, he cut the heart. And gahe-wa¢ahuni 4 } HOW THE RABBIT CURED HIS WOUND. oD said, ““Ha™! ha! ha®!” And the Rabbit said, “Do not say ‘Ha™! hat! ha"!?” And the Rabbit gathered together the heart and the scattered pieces of fat. And the Hill split open of its own accord. All the people went out again. When they went homeward all the people assembled themselves. Said they, ‘Let us make the Rabbit chief.” And he said as follows: “It is said ‘You shall make the Rabbit chief’ As if T, for my part, had been desiring to be chief!! (Or, Have I been behaving as if I wished to be chief?) From whatever places ye may have come, begone ye (to them). I too have come hither to get some of the fat belonging to me, as my grandmother had none.” And the Rabbit went homeward, carrying the fat on his back. Having brought it home on his back, he put it outside. “O grandmother! I have killed qahe-wa¢ahuni,” he said. “Oh! You very bad big-foot! you very bad split-mouth! Have you killed him who only should have been killed in the past?” ‘‘Grandmother, I say that because I have killed him. See the pile farther away,” he said. The old woman having gone out of doors, said, “Oh! my grandchild told (nothing but) the truth (though I did doubt him at first).” And she took the (pile of) fat (meat). HOW THE RABBIT CURED HIS WOUND. OBTAINED FROM NUDA®’-AXA. Mactein’ge aké iya™ ¢inké jigig¢e g¢i” akdma. Ki ugaca® ahi- Rabbit the (sub.) his the (ob.) he with was sitting, they say. And traveling he grandmother his own arrived there. biamé. Qéki wé¢ixuxti ca™qti ga” dkicugé-qti ja’-hna” ¢éga™ ama they say. Under prickly-ash just as it happened very dense ay only thus they the blnffs (habitually) say utefje é wakai). Ga® nfaci"ga sig¢ai kée‘di si ké snededqti-hna™i ke, thicket that he meant. And person trail (?) atthe foot the long very habit- the (ig. ob.) ually was (lg. ob.) Atbiamé. Egi¢e égasdni yi, yga"hd, waja™”be b¢é ta minke, 4-biama. I said they say. It came the follow- when Grand- | I see zo will I who said they say. he to pass ing day mother he A t é Vee r ‘5 ° 5 Eigi¢e ha™ega™tce a¢d-biamé. A¢d-biami yi égi¢e agi atiag¢a- Jt came in the morning he went, they say. He went, they say’ when itecame they were suddenly to pass topass returning biama. (hé niacga gdhi¢eamé ama, e¢éga*-biama. Uhé agai uka™ska they say. This person those who moved are he thought, they sey. Path he in a straight yonder they (contsé) went line with ita ciaja ja’’-biamd. Egi¢e édi ahi-biama yi i¢ai-baji-biama, sig¢e ke ahead helay they say. Itcame there ar- theysay when hewasnot they say, foot- the to pass rived found prints (lg. ob.) ahigi g4xe ga” {¢ai-baji-biamé akiha” did¢ai te. Gan’ki ci pi ita” ¢iaja many hemade so he was not found, they say beyond he had the. And again anew ahead e gone - a¢af t8, ita -¢iaya fja’-biamd. Cété wi" cu¢é te ha i, a-biama Anase he went, ahead of him they say. That one will come ! said they say. To head he lay (ob.) to you he him off 6 12 15 36 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTBS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. naji”-gi hati, 4-biam4 kidqpaqpdg¢e. Egi¢e wi am4 uhan’gaja man¢i™ stand thou ! said they say walking back and forth It came one the at the end was walking, they among themselves. to pass (mv. sub.) vy ~~ s8n/ = y v ama. Gété cu¢é te hat, 4-biama, ¢e dnasé naji” ui¢a ¢é¢ai té. Ki they say. That ill come ! said they say, this to head to stand telling he sent it. And (unseen ob.) to you he him off F him utcije baza” a¢d-biama. Kgi¢e ga” akama f¢a-baji gaxai té uba-haja thicket pushing went they say. It came after standing he not he pretended at the side among to pass awhile found him inaji® ki ma" ké g¢izai té. Ga™ mdndé ké ga™ ¢ida™i té. Ge cu¢é of ithe and arrow _ the he took his And bow the so he pulled it. his coming stood (lg. ob.) own. (lg. ob.) to you té u¢ixida-gi, a-biama, gactan’ka té. Ga" ma™ ké ¢icibai té Mactcinge which lookout forit, said they say, he tempted him. And arrow. the he pulled when Rabbit he (lg. ob.) and let go kuisandé’-qti i¢a’¢ai té. Ga" xagé ama Mactcin’ge. I’a! iva! ra! through and he put it (the And he was orang, they Rabbit. (the rabbit's cry), through arrow). d-biama Mactein’ge aké. Kagé¢ha, Pébads, a-biama. Kagéha, a‘i” td Ba they say Rabbit the. O friend! you killed said they say. O friend, Iearry will him, he it on my back a hau, 4-biama. Mactcin’ge ua’si aid¢a-biamé. Ki ma™ ké ¢iontda- I who ! said they say. Rabbit leaping hehad they say. And arrow the he pulled he gone out of biama. Ki a¢i” a¢d-biama. Ga” ¢iqd-biamd. Mactcin’ge wam{ md ké they say. And having he they say. And they they say. Rabbit blood snow the it went chased him (lg. ob.) ji-de ké amama ¢iqai té. Ma™can’de ugidaazi-biamd, fgat‘a®-biama. red was lying, they say as they chased. Den theyscaredhim they say, he they say. into his own grunted yya"ha, téa*¢é'-qtci-a“i, a-biama. Hw"! hi! 4-biamd. ITya"’ igaska¢d- Grand- they have altogether said they say. Ht! hin! said, they say. His tried him (sic) mother, killed me, he grandmother biama. Naxide-¢i¢in’ge i¢anahi" eha®’+. ({-hna® u¢ina-bi, ehé yf, ¢axdga- they say. Disobedient you oat you-truly ! You only they soughtyou, I when youcry it was reported. said jt. e ga™ gag¢i” etéde, 4-biama. Ga", ya"hd, maka” ufine ma” ¢in’-ga, not you sit should said they say. And, Grand- medicine to seek walk have, she mother, it (for one) aan Wiyticpa, maka™ i¢dpaha™ da” cté-ma™ a¢iPhé, 4-biamaé. -ya"h4, ae they say. My grandchild, medicine I know it (dubitative sign) I who move at they say. Grand- e she mother, na™pa-hi ge-¢a” wi" i” ¢i® sf-o%, a-biamé. Iya” akd agi” aki-biamé. choke- bush the inthe one bring back forme said they say. His the having reached home, cherry (pl.) past : he grandmother (sub.) it they say. Ga® ¢ata-biamd. Ga” igini-biama. < And he ate it, they say. And he recovered by it, they say. NOTES. 35, 2. wé¢ixuxti. Nuda?-axa, a Ponka, gave it thus; but it may be intended for wé¢ixuxt-hi, as the Omahas use we¢ixtixu-hi k&. @a™/-qti ga" is a phrase which scarcely admits of a brief translation. It seems to imply for no reason whatever, at any rate, etc. 35, 8, et passim. aiatai té, a¢ai té, ui¢a ¢e¢ai té, etc., denote certainty on the part of the speaker, or that he was cognizant of the acts referred to, hence it would have been better to say, “‘aia-¢a-biama, a¢a-biama, ui¢a ¢e¢a-biama,” denoting what was not observed by the narrator. 2 HOW THE RABBIT CURED HIS WOUND. au * 35, 7. ita™¢iaja ja"-biama. The Rabbit went ahead of their trail and lay con- cealed, lying in wait for them. 35, 7. sig¢e ké ahigi gaxe, etc. He made so many tracks that the people did not know which way to turn to search for the Rabbit. 36, 3. i¢a-baji gaxai té- This man pretended that he had not discovered where the Rabbit lay concealed. He pulled the bow in one direction to deceive the Rabbit, and then turned around suddenly and shot him, sending the arrow through his body. 36, 11. igaska™¢é seems to be used here in the sense of chiding. 36, 14. i¢apaha™ dacté-ma™ 4¢i™hé implies doubt: I may know it as I go along, and I may not know it. 36, 15. na™pahi ge¢a™, the choke-cherry bushes which had been (full of sap, etc.). It was winter at the time he sent the old woman after one. TRANSLATION. The Rabbit was dwelling with his grandmother. And while traveling he reached a certain place. At the foot of the bluff the prickly ash was very dense. It was thus all along. And he said, “Persons have been on the trail, all of whom had very long feet.” And on the next day he said, “Grandmother, I will go out to see (that is, to act as a scout, suspecting the presence of foes).” And he went in the morning. When he departed, at length they were coming back suddenly. ‘These persons are the ones who were moving there,” thought he. He lay ahead in a straight line with the path they went. It came to pass that when they reached there (where the Rabbit was) he was not found. He had made many footprints, so he was not found, and they went beyond the place. Then again he went ahead, and lay ahead of him (of one of the men). “That one thing will come to you,” he said. ‘Stand and head him off.” They were walking back and forth among themselves. At length one was walking at the end. “That unseen thing will come to you,” he said. This he communicated (to those at a distance), telling (them) to stand and head him off. And he went pushing among the undergrowth, ete. And then, after standing awhile, he pretended that he had not found him (the Rabbit). He stood at the side (of the thicket) and took his arrow. And so he fitted it to the bow-string. ‘Look out for this which is coming to you,” he said, as he tempted him (the Rabbit). And letting the arrow go he pierced the Rabbit through the body (the arrow appearing on the other side). And the Rabbit was crying. The Rabbit said, “Ima! ita! ita!” “Friend, you have killed him,” said they. “Friend, I will carry it on my back,” said (one). The Rabbit had gone with a leap. And he pulled out the arrow. And he carried it away. And they pur- sued him. As they chased him the Rabbit’s blood was lying along (in a long line) on the snow. They scared him into his burrow. He grunted. ‘‘Grandmother,” said he, “they have altogether killed me. Hi"! hi!” said he. His grandmother chided him. “You were truly disobedient. When I said that it was reported you alone were sought after, you should have sat without crying at all,” she said. And he said, “Grandmother, go to seek for medicine.” Said she, “My grandchild, I doubt whether I know the medicine.” “Grandmother,” said he, “bring me back one of the choke- cherry bushes.” And his grandmother took it home. He ate it, and it made him recover. 12 — 388 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. THE RABBIT AND ICTINIKE. OBTAINED FROM NuDA®’-axA. Ictinike amé a¢é amdma. Gan’ki Mactcin’ge ama ga” amama. And Ictinike the Was going, they say. Rabbit the so was mv., (my. sub.) (my. sub.) they say. Hu+! 4-biam4. Kagé! 4-biama. Uht+! a4-biama. U¢ai-da” waja™ be Hu+! said,theysay. Ovyounger said, they say. Uhbu+! said, they say. It was when I see it brother ! told E ka®b¢éga® éga™ agija"be dha*, 4-biama. Ga™a¢i"hé-hna™ ¢a™ja &be I hoped and so I see my own ! said, they say. I moe uae some only though who C} qta’¢é té, 4-biama. Gi-gi, 4-biamé. Kata® dda", 4-biamd. Ca” of-93, loveme will said, it is said. Come said, it is said. Where- ? said, they say. At come, fore any rate 4{-biam4 Ictinike ak4. E/di akf-biam4. Kagé, 4-biam4, edéhe ctéctewa™ said, they say Ictiniké the There hereachedhome, Ovyounger said, theysay, whatI soever (sub.). they say. brother, say a™ha® -ecé te, 4-biamd4. A™ha”, 4-biama Mactcin’ge aka. Kagé, 4-biam4é— yes you will said, they say. Yes, said, they say Rabbit the Oyounger said, they say— : Bay (sub.). brother kagé, witei ta minke, 4-biama4 Ictinike aka. An‘kaji, 4-biamd, wita™¢™ Oyounger tecumcoeo will I who, said, they say - Ictinike the(sub.). Not so, said, they say, I first brother, (te- cum _co- 7- bo) witcf tee, 4-biam4 Mactcin’ge aka. Na’! an’kaji, kagé, na” amd edad tecum cowo, said, they say Rabbit the (sub.). Psha! notso, Oyounger adult the what brother, (pl. sub.) “¢ai uhé-hna"i, 4-biama. Na’! an’kaji ha, ji*¢éha, 4-biam4. Jingd amé, they they have their said, they say. Psha! not so : O elder said, they say. Younger the speak of way, habitually, brother, = (pL) jin¢cha, edada” ‘i¢ai té’di é ¢acta-baji éga* ¢ uhé-hna’i, 4-biamd O elder what they when that a ee not so they have habiiu- said, they say brother, speak of talking their way ally, (Mactein’ge ak4). Hindéga*, kagé, égan-gi hi. Ga” Ictinike aké bas4™ Rabbit the (sub.). Let us see, O younger do so . And Ictinike the(sub.) upside brother, down i¢a”¢a-biama. Mactcin’ge akA ga™ teil té. @icta”-biama yi ua™si Aid¢a- he placed they say. Rabbit the (sub.) so cum eo coiit. Finished they say when leaping he had it *« gone biamé Mactcit’ge ama. Giga, kagé, ¢-hna™biam4. Egi¢a"-hna™ ama they say Rabbit the Come, Ovyounger said habit- they say. Said to habitu- they (my. sub.). brother, ually him ally say yi Mactcin’ge ama& a™he-hna” amd. Ca” utcije ciiga égihe did¢a- when Rabbit the was fleeing they say. And thicket dense headlong he had (my. sub.) into it gone biamé. Wahu+! d-biama Ictinike aké. Wi-hna" niaci"ga i¢dkite-de they say. Wahbu+! said, they say Ictinike the (sub.). I only person I cheated while ma” tihéa¢é ata”he ¢a™cti. Mactcin’ge péji’-qti! si-yan’ga péji’-qtei! ictea- I was putting it inside heretofore. Rabbit bad very! foot big bad very! eye- si-jani'ga péji'-qtci! ja”xe ahigi péji’-qtci! ‘Ag¢ea add tedbe dha*, 4-biamd ball big bad very! Sie much bad very! you navel made verymuch ! said, they say or me er THE RABBIT AND ICTINIKE. 39 -Ictinike aka. Ga” a¢4-biama. Ictinike cé¢i" b¢fje atei tedbe hau, 4-biama. Tetinike the And went, they say. Ictinike thatone cacare cumeo very ! said, they say. (sub.). (mv. ob.) Sect coti Ga™ Ictinike aka wag¢an’g¢a™ amd ci. Ci wag¢an’g¢a™-biama. Ictinike And Ictinike the (sub.) reviled him they again. Again reviled him they say. Ictinike say ami a¢a-biama gi¢a-baji-qti. Ga¢u ahi-bi yi jéti¢inge ca™ ji-biamd. Ja’- the went they say sorrowful very. Inthat hear- they when cacattiritt and ca- they say Caca- . (my. sub.) place rived say cavit vit biama yi mactcin’ge jin’ga wi" nan’ge-qtci a¢d-biamdé. Giid-i¢a™¢A-qti they say when rabbit young one ran ey went they say. It is put further very ‘asi aha?! Wuht! 4-biama Ictinike aké. E ci gdé¢u ahi-bi yi jéti¢in’ge ca® Wuhu! said, they say Ictinike the That again inthat hear- they when cacatiiriit and (sub.). place rived say ja-biama. Ci mactcin’ge jin’ga wi" nan’ge-qtci add-biamd. Ci fda¢ai-té. ca- they say. Again rabbit young one ran very went theysay. Again peperit. cavit fast Ci égi¢a™ té, Wuhu+‘a ‘l ‘Ag¢ea™¢é tedbe aha", d-biamd. Ga™ a¢d-biama. Again he said to him, eaily! he has made me very ! said, they say. And went they say. suffer much Ci ga u ahi-bi yi jéti¢inge ca™ ja-biama. Ci mactcin’ge jin’ga wi" Again ta ths hear- they when cacattiriit and Pash they say. Again rabbit young one ae. rived say cavi ci yud’ a¢a-biama. Ci égi¢a™ eee I¢a™ba® hné téga™i, 4-biamé. Ci again witha went theysay. Again he toi they say. sencond you go Bat apt said, they say. Again ‘ime rush éga" wéda¢é fyiquhd-bi ega”, égi¢e je hig¢ai tédi waii” ¢a™ ca” Et) parére Ae es they hee atlength cacans hemadeit when robe the atany for himself say : reach (the rate ground) u¢ipupt-bi ega” dnasd-biamé. Waii” ¢a” ca” da®si-biamd. Waii™ ¢a™ he bent it around having hehin- they say. Robe the inspite onithe they say. Robe the over (the rabbit) dered it ts) leaped ing¢é ugina"skabe ¢a” ama. Wuhit+! etid-i¢a®cd-qti alldce aha® : feces it was made to edhere to it from his feet, Wuhu+! it is put further very made me ley say. d-biama (nuya¢i® gidxai té é waka-bi ega”). Hau. Ga™ ad¢d-biama. said, they say naked he made for him that he they ane Well. And went they say. meant say Ca™qti ga" nuya ee a¢i-biamd. Egi¢e ntjitiga d‘iba ma"¢i” bagi a¢i® mama. In spite of so nake went theysay. Itcame boy some were throwing sticks as they to pass walked, it is said. 12 Wakipa-biama. Hat! kagé, a-biama Ictinike amd.’ Hat! 4-biama nijinga 15 He a they say. Ho! Oyounger said,they say Ictinike the Ho! said, they say boys them brother, (my. sub.) = amd. Indddaeté éga" ¢and‘a™-baji, kagé, 4-biam4. A*, 4-biamé. Ca™ the Whatever so you have not, O younger said, they say. Yes, said, they say. Still (pl. sub.). heard brother, dada" ctécte ¢and‘a" éite iwi" ¢ai-gi, 4-biamd Ictinike aké. A™ha®, what soever youheard may have tell ye to me said, they say Ictinike the (sub.). Yes, 4-biama. Téna’! Mactin’ge amd-hna™ Ictinike amd tef-biamd af, a™nd‘a%i, said, they say. Why! Rabbit the only Ictinike the cumeo itis re- they we heard (mv. sub.) : (my. one) cotit ported say a-biama nijinga ami. Wuhu+! yaci-qti a™wa™na‘a" améde, e¢éga?- said, they say boys Wuhu+! a very long ofme they they are the thought ey a yi while ago have heard ones, but biama Ictinike aka. Ci a¢d-biama. Ki ci d‘iba ma*¢i™bagi a¢i” amdma. they say Ictinike . the. Again went theysay. And again some were throwing sticks as they walked, it is said. 18 40 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. Ci wikipd-biam4. Kagé, inddda™ ctécte iwi ¢ai-g& hau, 4-biamaé. Again he met they say. O younger what soeyver tellye tome ! said, they say. them brother, Indada" afigui¢i¢a taite ¢ingé ce" , a4-biamd. Téni’! Mactcin’ge ama- What we tell you shall there is said, they say. Why! Rabbit the none a (my. sub.) 3 hna® Ictinike amd tei-biamd af, and‘a"i, 4-biamd nijinga amd. Ga™ only Tctinike the cumeo itisre- they we heard, said, they say boys the And (mv. sub.) coitt ported say, (pl. sub.). agai té. Wuhut+! yaci-qti-éga" und‘a"a”¢é dha", e¢éga’-biama. Ga™ ci e went. Wauhu+! a very long time he made me to ! thought they say. And again ago be heard of d‘iba didmama. Kyi ci éga® wémaxa-biamé. Kagé, indada® etécte Mwi- some wereapproach- And again Fe questioned they say. Gyeiees what soever tell ing. them brother, 6 ¢ai-gi hati, 4-biamd: Inddda"™ arguf¢i¢a tafte ¢ingé éga*, 4-biama. 9 12 15 15 ye to me ! said, they say. What we tell thee shall itisnothing like said, they say. Téni’! Mactein’ge amaé-hna® Ictinike ama tei-biama ai, a™nd‘ai, 4- Why! Rabbit the only Ietinike the cumeo itisre- they we heard, said, (mv. sub.) (my. sub.) coiit ported say, biamé. Wuhu+! ydciqti-éga" und‘a"a”¢é dha", e¢éga"-biama Ictinike they say. Wuhu+! a very long time he made me to be ! thought they say Ictinike ago heard of aka. Ci a¢d-biamé. Egi¢e jéidig¢a™ pe ‘ji g¢iza-bi éga™ wéza-hna® a¢a- the Again went they say. It came breech-cloth bad he took they ragite to give the went (sub.) to pass his own say alarm, only biama. Egi¢ ¢e si é¢a"be ahi-biamé. Pe‘age ¢éya ¢im iénaxi¢ai ¢i", a- they say. gth lodge in iene of ar-_ they say. enemas thisone the he is attacked said rived man behind (my. ob.) they . 43° . re a . . ? ae ee biamé. E’di ahf-biam4. Akicuga-qti-a”-biam4 Cin’gajin’ga ua™he they say. There hear- they say. They were standing they say. Children a place of rived very thick retreat, dwagindi-gi. A™¢a™naxi¢ai éde hégactéwa?-baji, 4-biamA Ictinike aka. seek ye for them. Me they attacked but by no means a few, said, they say Ictinike the (sub.). I"c‘age waii” ¢a™ ctéwa™ gacai ta", 4-biama. A™ha”, éga™-qtia” (4-biama). Venerable robe the even he is deprived of said, they say. Yes, so very said, they say. man by chasing him, Gaski wakan’di¢é’-qti naji’-biamé, wactanka akéga*. A™wa™ da™be taf ha. Panting excessively he stood they say, atempter he was Sie We see them will . Ké, udwagi¢di-gi, 4-biamdé. An’kaji ha, 4-biamd Ictinike ak&é. Waii™ ? fo) ? ? Come, tell us about them, said, they say. Not so . said, they say Ictinike the (sub.). Robe oS wi" i”¢im gfi-o%, 4-biam4. Wi waja™”be b¢¢ ti minke, 4-biama the (pl.) one bring ye to me, said, they say. 1 to see them Igo will I who, said, they say Ictinike aka. Ic‘dge win'’ké-qti aha", 4-biaméa. Ga” waii” ¢a™ ‘fi- Ictinike the (sub.). Venerable ree the very ! said, they say. aa robe the was given biam4, waii™ okiibi- -qti Ce ‘fi-biama. Watcicka ké uha a¢d-biama. they ay robe thick very summer was they say. Creek the follow- he went, they say. (hair) robe given in, Haha+'! aba wi™¢a™¢a” gdawaki‘a® ata”he ¢a™cti. Niaci@ga wi™ Ha! ha! day one by one have I been doing that to them _ heretofore. Person one a” ¢ijietéwan ji, 4-biamé (Mactcin’ge ¢ waké-bi ega™). did not eri me Ww ema they say Rabbit that he meant they having. al C) 8a) | THE RABBIT AND IOTINIKE. Al NOTES. 38, 5. édi aki-biama. It was some place where the Rabbit had been on some pre- vious occasion, or else it was on the way to the Rabbit’s home: “he reached there again,” or “he reached there on his way home.” 38, 16. ma*tihea¢é atathe ¢a®cti. Hitherto, Ictinike placed his plot within his head and concealed it there. Ma*tihea¢é refers to the plot, not to the victim. 39, 1. b¢ije atci teabe. ‘Bé¢ije” is from “ ¢ijé.” 39, 4. gud-i¢a"¢a-qti aha®, a phrase occurring only in this myth. 39, 10. je hi¢ai, a case of “hapaa legomenon.” 39, 12. ugina*skabe ¢a? ama. The young Rabbit leaped upon the robe of his relation, Ictinike, soiling it with the “itig¢e” sticking to his feet. 40, 9. jetidig¢a®™ péji g¢iza-bi ega®. He took his own breech-cloth which he had on to use in giving the signal of alarm. Hence he was not “naked” in the strict sense of the word before he took it off. 40, 12. hegactewa*baji, pronounced he+gactewa*baji. 40, 13. itc‘age waiit ¢a® ctéwa" gacai ta". The people said, “They chased the venerable man so closely that he had to drop his robe.” 40, 18. waii® ckube-qti yeha ‘ii-biama. Though this means “a very thick summer robe,” geha (buffalo robes of animals killed in swmmer) were not covered with thick hair, as were the meha or winter robes. TRANSLATION. Ictinike was going, and so was the Rabbit. “Hu+! O younger brother! Uhu+!” said Ictinike. ‘When it was told, I hoped to see him, and so I see my own (rela- tion),” said he. “Though I am only moving for some time, who will love me?” said the Rabbit. “Come,” said Ictinike. ‘ Wherefore,” said the Rabbit. “Never mind, come,” said Ictinike. He reached there. ‘“O younger brother,” said he, “what- soever I say, you must say ‘Yes.’” “Yes,” said the Rabbit. ‘O younger brother, tecum coibo,” said Ictinike. “No,” said the Rabbit, ‘‘prier tecwm coibo.” ‘“Psha! O younger brother,” said Ictinike, “‘when the elder ones talk about anything, they generally have their way.” ° “‘Psha! Not so indeed, elder brother. The younger ones, elder brother, when they speak about anything, do not stop talking about that, so they usually have their way,” said the Rabbit. ‘Let us see, do so, younger brother.” And Ictinike turned upside-down. The Rabbit ewm eo cotit. Coitw completo, the Rabbit leaped and had gone. “Come, O younger brother,” said Ictinike repeatedly. When he was saying it to him the Rabbit was fleeing; and he went headlong into a dense thicket. “‘Wahu+!” said Ictinike, ““While I alone cheated a person, I used to keep (the plot) inside (my head). You very bad Rabbit! You very bad big-foot! You very bad big-eyeballs! You very bad much strong odor! You have made me suffer very much.” And the Rabbit departed. ‘Cum isto prior coit et fect ut caca- ret,” said the Rabbit. Ictinike reviled him again. Again he reviled him. Ictinike departed very sorrowful. When he reached a certain place cacaturitt et cacavit. Ictinike cacante, a young rabbit departed, running very rapidly, “It gets worse and worse!” Again, when he reached a certain place, cacaturtit et cacavit; and 42 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. a young rabbit departed, running very swiftly. JIterum peperit. Again he said to him, “Really! he has made me suffer very much.” Again, when he reached a cer- tain place, cacattriit et cacavit. Again a young rabbit departed with a rush. “You will not be apt to go again,” said Ictinike. Quwm iterum parére timuit, as he stooled and caused it to reach the ground, he held the robe down on the feces and the rabbit, to hinder the escape of the latter. In spite of the effort the young rabbit leaped over the robe. He soiled the robe with the “ifg¢e” on his feet. “Wuhu+! It gets worse and worse.” (He meant his being naked.) Well, he departed. In spite of (his condition) he went naked. It came to pass that some boys were playing with ma™¢i*bagi as they walked. He met them. “Ho! younger brothers,” said Iectinike. ‘Ho!” said the boys. “Have you not heard anything at all, younger brothers?” said he. “Yes,” said they. “Then, whatsoever ye have heard, tell me,” said Ictinike. “Yes,” they said. ‘Why! they say that it is reported that the Rabbit alone cum Ictinike cotit. We have heard it.” “Wuhu+! They have heard about me for a very great while,” thought Ictinike; and he departed. And again some were playing ma*¢i"bagi as they walked; and he met them. ‘‘O younger brothers, tell me something or other,” he said. ‘What we shall tell you is as noth. ing. Why! we have heard it said that it is reported that the Rabbit alone ewm Icti- nike coiit,” said the boys. And he departed. ‘ Wuhu+! I was caused to be heard of a very long time ago,” thought he. And again some were approaching. And again he questioned them. ‘“O younger brothers, tell me something or other,” said he. ‘What we shall tell thee is as nothing. Why! we have heard it said that it is reported that the Rabbit alone cwm Ictinike covit,” said they. “ Wuhu+! Iwas caused to be heard of a very long time ago,” thought Ictinike; and he departed. It came to pass that he took his bad breech-cloth and went to give the alarm. At length he came in sight of a lodge (village?). ‘This venerable man behind us is one who has been attacked by the foe,” they said. He arrived there. They were standing very thick (around him). ‘Seek ye a place of retreat for your children. They attacked me, and they were a great many,” said Ictinike. ‘The venerable man is deprived (by their chasing) even of his robe,” said they. “Yes, it is just so.” He stood panting excessively, as he was a tempter. “We will see them. Come, tell us about them,” said they. ‘Not so indeed,” said Ictinike. ‘Bring to me one of the robes. I will go to see.” “The venerable man speaks very truly,” they said. And the robe was given him; a thick summer robe was given him. He departed, following the stream. “Ha! ha! Day after day have I been doing that to them heretofore. One person did not treat me well at all,” he said (meaning the Rabbit). THE RABBIT AND THE GRIZZLY BEAR. 43 THE RABBIT AND THE GRIZZLY BEAR; or, THE BIRTH OF THE YOUNG. RABBIT. ToLp By NupA”-aXa, Ma*tei aki Mactcin’ge ¢inké wagida*be aki-biama. Ga™ ¢é ama, Grizzly bear _ the Rabbit the (st. ob.) to scout for his reached home, And went they (sub. own they say. say wénaxi¢d-biama Mactcin’ge aké. pé wi" ci”-qti t’é¢a-biama Mactcin’ge attacked them they say Rabbit, ihe Bufialo one fat very he lulled, they say Rabbit — (sub.). aki. Uh a®wa™¢a mang¢in’-gi, 4-biamd Ma ici aka. Ma*teti icta-jide the Tocome to tell about begone, said, they say Grizzlybear the Grizzly bear eyo red (sub.). forthemeat me (sub.). ufhe ti¢dbi-e% hati, 4-biam4 Mactcin’ge aka. Hi+! wici‘é, witaY wari, tocome pass yeon ! said, they say Rabbit the Oh! my busband’s in which place! for the meat (sub.). brother 4-biama Mattei mi”ga aké. Ga™ a¢a-biama. ‘I” aki-biama 46 ké said, they say Grizzly bear female the And went they say. Brought home they say buif lo the (sub.). on their backs (meat) , Cees B nee ae . oo rele . , b¢tiga-qti. Ki Ma*tett jin’ga aka dtiba-biamé. Ga™ jing’ haci-qtci aka all. And Grizzly bear young the four _— they say. And young last very the (sub.) ey g . eps A . h : 2 Mactcin’ge ¢a‘é¢é-hnat’-biamd. Wag¢itai té hdébe ¢¢i" ahi-hna’-biama Rabbit: he pitied habitu- they say. What they ate part having hear- habitu- they say ally forhim rived ally mat¢a®’-hna®. Ci égasdini yi ci Mattet aka ci égi¢a’-biama: Mactcin’ge, by stealth habitu- Again thenext whenagain Grizzly the again said to him, they say: Rabbit, ally. day bear (sub.) imase ¢i¢fja ugipi ha, 4-biamd (Mattei aké). Ji™”¢ehd, hitbé tagija™ ha, chasing- your own is full : said, they say Grizzly bear the (sub.). Oelder moccasins I put on my place brother, own i-biam4 (Mactcin’ge aké). Ga™ wénaxi¢d-biamd. Ci 4yé wi" ci’’-qti said, they say Rabbit the (sub.). And he packet they say. Again buffalo one fat very them ¢é¢a-biamd. Edi ahi-biama. Uhe a™wa™ ¢a mang¢in’-gi, 4-biama (Ma*tet he killed, they say. There arrived, they say. a come to tell of me . begone, said, they say Grizzly bear ‘or meat akd). Ga ag¢é amdma Mactcin’ge ama. Ma"tet icta-jide uthe tifabi-ga the And was going homeward, Rabbit the Grizzly bear eye red to go pass on, (sub.). they say (my. sub.). for meat hat, 4-biam4 Mactein’ge aké. Hit+! wici‘é, wi a” wazd, 4-biama Me "teu ! said, they say Rabbit the _ Oh! my husband’s in which place? said, they say Grizzly bear (sub.). brother, mi”ga aki. Ga" ufhe a¢d-biama. Ci b¢tiga-qti ‘i aki-biamd. Ki ¢ Ma*tct female the And togofor went theysay. And all very brought homeontheir Andthat Grizzly (sub.). meat backs, they say. bear jin’ga akA ci hébe é¢i" ahi-biamé. Ki Ma™tci aka ga-biamd: Hébe young the again apiece having he arrived, they And Grizzly bear the saidasfollows, maqtide ya™ha ké'di ca*’-qti look at him 5 this the said they say. Theysaw they when ashes edge by the just so (lg. ob.) she him say uyidata" ja"-biamé, xagé ja™-biama Si¢emaka™ akdé, Ha?! ha™! hat! turning himself he lay they say, erying helay they say igemaka® the (sub.), Hat! hat! has! Da®bi-biama wat ¢Ab¢i? aké. Him+! ciya”’, win’ké-qtci-a™ wa tyinga. They saw they say woman three _ the (sub.). Oh! husband’s — she told the exact truth old woman. him sister, (ia¢uha-qtei ?é ké, A-biama. Aga-biamé watt ¢4b¢i" ama. A” ¢a- Nearly very dead helies, said, they say. Went they say woman three the (sub.). They left him biama. A” ¢a a¢a-bi yi Si¢émaka" aki paha* Atid¢a-biama. yja™ha, they say. Leaving him they they when Sigemaka" the (sub.) arose suddenly they say. Grand- went say mother. céké yaonin’g¢ickaha wjiha i ‘i¢a-gi A-biama. Gii ¢é¢a-biama. Si¢é- that spotted fawn skin “bag hand to me said they say. Gave suddenly they say. Sige- (lg. ob.) he, him maka” b¢tiga uginaji"’-biamd, yaqti gaxd-biama. Ega® ¢ié baha™-qti maka" the whole stood in his own they say, deer made they say. So side middle of very rounded part a® ma™ wi? ubAxa® gaxd-biamé, i wamf oaxd-biama. Nan’ge ga" ’ D )) oD hae arrow one sticking in made they say, mouth blood made they say. Running so (ob. até-biam& Wa‘t ¢Ab¢i® wa‘é-ma-ga abf-biama Ha®b¢in’ge wa‘é ma*¢i"’- 12 he went, they say. Woman three those hoeing to arrived they say. Beans hoeing walked biama wat amé. Hi"! ciya™, yaqti wi" ¢e t’é¢é-qtia” { ¢i" hé, a-biama. they say woman the (sub.). Oh! brother's decr one this badly wounded heiscom- . said they say. wife ing she 12 Ved 18 58 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. Aqi” a¢d-biama. Ca” wafi site qti wai ama ¢iqd-biama. Agi” a¢a-bi Having they went, they say. And very woman the (sub.) chasedit, they say. Having they went him him they say, ga” uti” yi gaona™gi ga” " weahide’ -qti wa¢i® ahi-biama. Wiubeni agi- “so they hit when missed when it so very having he arrived, they Going round cuytars got to him them Say. them back biama Si¢émaka™ amd. Agi-bi ega” Wiha gina” onuda-bi ega” ha"b¢in’ge they say Sig¢emaka? the (sub.). Coming back, ie aving bag pulled off they having beans they say say itégidé uji-biamé ujiha ké. ‘I ¢é¢a-bi ega™ ag¢a-biama iya™” ¢inké putting putin they say bag the Carried sud- they eee he went they say. his the (ob.) together (ob.). denly say homeward grandmother giyadé. Tya™ ¢inkée’di “i” aki-biamdé. ‘ya™ha, dtaka Wiha anaq¢ drew near His to the carrying he reached home, Grand- this one sack hiding hisown. grandmother they say. mother, here : & “ E vl . Ane ° = ihé¢a-gi, A-biamé. Qéde nan‘de kéja égih i¢é¢a-biama, anag¢ ihé¢a- put away, or they say. Grass side oftent atthe headlong sherent they say, hiding she put it e suddenly biamé. Ki wa‘t ¢ab¢i" agi-biama. Na! wa‘ujinga ¢iyiepa ha"b¢in’ge they say. And woman three coming back, Why! old woman your grand- beans they say. child anyf‘ai ¢a’cti wan'gicé’-qti wéi" agfi té hé, 4-biama. Hi"+! wina™, we hoed for heretofore all very carrying was coming 5 said, they say. Oh! first ourselves for us back she daughter, an’kaji/-qti-a" hé. @éké wakége cta”bai t& ca"ca™-qti-a" hé, 4-biamd. not so very . This Bigs you saw as hecontinues very : said they say. (ig. ob.) she Da*ba-biama yi, Hi®+! ciya”, win’ké-qti-a" hé, na¢uha-qtci t’é ke hé, They saw they say when, Oh! brother’s shetoldtheexacttruth . nearly very dead helies . wue, d-biamé. Ag¢d-biam& wa‘i ama. -ya™hd, ké, uhan’-gi, 4-biama. said they say. Went they say woman the (sub.). Grandmother, come, cook them, said they say. she homeward he Watate jugig¢a- biami ya"hd, udagaca™ b¢é te, a-biamaé. Man’dé ké Eating he with his they say. Grandmother, I travel Igo will said they say. Bow the own cS) (ob.) g¢iza-bi ega” a¢é-biama. Ca™-qti qade ckube sidthi ckttbe tida-qti took his they having hewent, they say. All at once grass deep siduhi deep good very own say ; ¢a" 6/di ahi-biama. Qade ¢ibty i¢a”-biamaé. Ca™-qtci ag¢é amd. Aki- the there he they say. Grass emade itround they say. Allatonce he went they say. Reached (ob.) arrived homeward ome bi ega™ xagé-hna® gixe g¢i’-biama. Hata" ¢axdge 4, 4-biama iya” they having crying regu- made he sat they say. Why you ery ? said they say his grand- say larly she mother aké. A™ha™, ya"hé, icka® wi" a™bahi éde téqi hégaji, a-biama, Hddda™ the Yes, grand- deed one Iam picked but difficult nota little, said, they say. What (sub.). mother, out he téqi yi ga™ uont te hé, 4-biama. ‘ya™ha, watcefgaxe a™bahi, 4-biama. difficult if so youtellit will 3 aa they say. Grandmother, to dance Tam picked said, they say. she out, he Kde, yathd, ti¢aze jiwigig¢e te af, a-biama. Awate téqi té ga” &'di But helt to chorus I with you will he he_ they say. Where _ difficult the © still there said, said (ob.) anga¢e té, A-biam4é wa‘ijinga aka. H’di ahi-biama yi, ya"hd, ¢e éde we go will, said, they say old woman the (sub.). There arrived, they say when, Grandmother, this but SIGEMAKA”’S ADVENTURE AS A DEER. 59 na™te ¢icta” akidg¢ai ke, 4-biama. Ca™-qti ga" man‘dé jin’ga g¢iza- dancing finished they have gone said, they say. All at once bow little took his homeward he own bi ega™ na™td-biamd. Tya” ¢inké ti¢azd-biamd. ya” ¢inké ug¢tigiqa- they having hedanced they say. His grand- the chorused they say. His grand- the he made sport say mother (st. one) mother (st. one) of his own biama. they say. NOTES. Sanssouci said that Mactcinge-i*, the Rabbit, was Si¢emaka™. The latter name cannot be translated, the meaning being unknown. 57, 9. yaoning¢ickaha, 7. ¢., yaqti jinga, ha ké g¢eje, the spotted skin of a fawn. 57, 10. ¢ié baha*’, the projecting part of the side of an animal. The side of a human being cannot have this term applied to it. 58, 2. uti” gacna™ gi to strike at an object, missing it when the weapon reaches it. 58, 3. ujiha gina"onuda-bi, he pulled off his skin (or sack) by the feet. 58, 4. ‘it ¢e¢a-bi, he put it on his back suddenly. Gigade shows that his lodge was near the place where he stole the beans. 58, 8. The reply of the old woman to the three was in a quavering voice. 58, 13. siduhi. See Dictionary. 58, 14. Qade ¢ibuy i¢a"-biama. F. La Fléche read, Qade ké/di ¢ibuy i¢a"-biama: Grass, on the, he became round (by pulling his legs and body together as he lay down). 58, 16. a"bahi, from bahi, to pick up, gather up; used here instead of a™¢a*ha, I am selected. 59, 3. ga¢i®-na*paji said that the rest of this myth was “shameful,” so he would not tell it. TRANSLATION. Si¢emaka"™ dwelt alone in a lodge with his grandmother. It came to pass that three women were going (along). ‘“O Si¢emaka™,” said they, “we are going to hoe (our ground).” ‘Oh! first daughter, this one lies sick and he is nearly dead to me,” said his grandmother. “If you doubt it, look at him as he is lying.” When they saw him, just so was he lying, turning himself by the edge of the ashes. Si¢e- maka? lay erying, ‘“Ha™! ha™! hat!” The three women saw him. “Oh! husband’s sister, the old woman told the exact truth. He lies very nearly dead,” said one. The three women departed. They left him. When they went and left him, Si¢emaka®™ arose suddenly. ‘Grandmother, hand to me that spotted fawn-skin bag,” he said. She tossed it to him suddenly. Si¢emaka® stood in the whole of it, he became a deer. He made an arrow sticking right in the middle of his side; he made his mouth bloody. So he went running. He reached the women who were hoeing. The women went along hoeing beans. ‘Oh! brother’s wife, this deer is coming badly wounded,” said one. They went along with it. And all the women chased it. Having gone along with it, they hit at it and missed it, the weapon striking in the air. So he took them to a very great distance. Going around them. Si¢emaka® was return- ing. Having returned he pulled off his sack at the feet, and collecting the beans he put them in the sack. Putting it on his back suddenly, he went homeward to his grand- mother, who was near by. He carried it home to his grandmother. ‘Grandmother, put this sack in a hiding-place,” said he. She plunged it suddenly under the grass at 60 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. the side of the lodge; she put it away and hid it. And the three women returned “Why! old woman, your grandchild was coming back hither carrying away from us all the beans that we had been hoeing for ourselves,” they said. “Oh! first daughter, it is not so at all. This one lying sick continues just as you saw him,” said she. When they saw him they said, ““Oh! brother’s wife, she told the exact truth. He lies very nearly dead.” The women went homeward. ‘Grandmother, come, cook them,” said he. He ate them with her. ‘Grandmother, I will go traveling,” said he. Having taken his bow he departed. All at once he arrived at the very good and deep siduhi (deep grass). He became round, lying curled up in the grass. All at once he went homeward. Having reached home, he sat pretending to be crying. ‘Why do you ery?” said his grand- mother. ‘Yes, grandmother, I am selected for a deed, but it is very difficult,” said he. “If anything is difficult, still you will tell it,” said she. ‘Grandmother, I am selected for a dance. But, grandmother, I must take you with me to sing the chorus,” said he. “Let us go where the difficult thing is,” said the old woman. When they arrived there he said, ‘‘Grandmother, this is it, but they have finished dancing and gone homeward.” All at once he took his little bow and danced. His grandmother (sitting) sang the chorus. He made sport of (deceived) his grandmother. ....... ICTINIKE, THE TURKEYS, TURTLE, AND ELK. TOLD BY QA¢I™-Na™PAJI. » Zizika d‘iba édi amama hégactéwa™ji. Ma” yedé ma” ciadi-qti ma™sa- Turkey some there were, they by no means a few. Ground edge very high arrow- say ; 5 71 , 5 Ses a qti ma’ tadi-qti wabahi amama. Ictinike ama é’di ¢é ama. Weé¢a-bi ega™ weed altogether within they were feeding, they Ictinike the there went they Found them, having say. (sub.) say. they say 3 ca™-qti bamimaxe qa¢a agi-biamé. EHata™ dma” ma b¢at etéda®, e¢éga?-bi at once bending his head _ bac ny was coming, How Ido T eat apt? thought, they repeatedly again they say. say ega™ wé¢ig¢a™ gaxa-biama. Ca™-qti miya-ha waii™ beta™ta"-bi ega™ 4" haying decision he made they say. At once raccoon-skin robe rolled up several having some- times, they say thing for carrying eaxd-biama. ‘I’-bi ega” ca™-qti ja™¢i’-biamé. Zizika wabdhi-ma he made, they say. Carried, having at once heran they say. Turkey feeding the they say ones ~ , . reais : . oh eee rh 6 wéna‘u-qtci ya"¢i’-biama. Wuhu+! itc‘age ‘a” ega". Da*bdi-ga, 4-biamd passing close by heran they say. Wuhu+! oldman something is See him, said, they say them the matter. Zizika ama. Nia! i*c‘age ‘a” éimte, 4-biama. A™ha™, éga"-qti-a™, 4-biama Turkey the Why! nent something may said they, they Yes, e is just so, said, they say (sub.). man be the matter say. Ictinike aka. Ta” wang¢a™ d‘iba ewéquya te af éga", an’gi-ah{ éga™ Ictinike the (sub.). Viilage some Ising forthem will said having, come forme having 9 wa‘a” té agfi" a¢imhé ‘ita, d-biama. Uhu! ie“ge, angt cti a "nat éga" song the I i ive been carrying indeed, said they say. Oho! venerable we too wedance some- (ob.) mine he man. what ICTINIKE, THE TURKEYS, TURTLE, AND ELK. 61 taf, A-biamé Zizika ama. An‘kaji, awAnag¢i™-qti ma*b¢i”, 4-biama. Ictinike will, said, they say Turkey the (sub.). Not so, Tin a great hurry I walk, said, they say Ictinike aka. Angti cti ic‘dge a™na”t éga" yi hné te, 4-biama Zizika amd. Wuhu+! the We too venerable wedance some- when you go may, said, they say Turkey the Wuhu:+! (sub.). _ man wha' (sub.). dada™, awdnaq¢i® tedbe ¢a™cti ¢ana™’te ctéctewa" ja™ tai, 4-biama Ictinike what, Tin a hurry Rens eretofore youdance notwithstanding you do will said, they say Ictinike muc 1 aks. Hau! ké, indaké, u¢éwi" gfi-ga, 4-biamé Ictinike aké. U¢éwi" the Ho! come,” let us see, collecting come ye said, they say Ictinike the Collecting (sub.). hither, (sub.). A rane os . . . ieee agi-biami = Gan’ki_ waii” —u¢ib a-biama. Baylwi?xe a™wa™ ¢ica™l-ga, they were coming, And robe he pulled they say. Bending around go ye around me, they say. open 4-biama. angd-qti ¢a¢imed, am¢a™na‘i-qtci fhe a™wa™¢ica™ na"tai-ga, said they say. Big very ye who move passing very close to passing to go around me dance ye, he me by 4-biamA Ictinike ak4. Ictd-¢ipizdi-gi. Egi¢e ictd gab¢ai 4 icta said, they say Ictinike ane Eye shut ye Beware eye you open if eye (sub.). ¢ijide tai, a-biama Ictinike aké. Ibe ¢a" ¢iman’g¢a-ba ¢iA‘anti-ga, you red lest, said, they say Tetinike the Tail the lift up and spread ye out - (sub.). (ob.) repeatedly i-biama. Hau! ké, na®tdi-ga, 4-biama. said, they say. Ho! come, dance ye, said they say. E7AX = [een ee he = = 2 = = eo 2 Hé! wa-da”-be ¢in-ké, Ho! looker the one who SS i - ctd-ji-dé, i-ctaji-dé Hi'’-be-hna® ¢i-‘4-ni, hi’-be-hna" ¢i-‘4-ni. eye red, eye red. Tail regularly flirt up, tail regularly flirt up. Z. . ee 1 ioe . ; pee Ay anga-qti-ma da ¢a" vig¢a™-bi ega™” da ¢a” wa¢iqaqa’-bi ega” wiha uji Big very the head the he held them, haying head the them he pulled off re- having bag filling ones (ob.) they say (ob.) peatedly, they say i -biam4é Ictinike aké. Ujiha gata”ha uji-biama, uské’-qti uji-biama. ’ sat they say Ictinike the Bag that high he filled, they say, _ full very he filled, they (sub.). say. Ziztka jin’ga snuta-bi éde fhaha" ta améma, ictaxa"xa® gaxe ma"¢i"-biama. Turkey small half-grown, but was about to know it the eyes opened he made he walked they say. they say as he moved, a little now and then yangég an’ga¢i” cendwad¢é agai. Dada” baski¢e. Ictinike aké akédega", Big some- we who destroying us he goes. What angry. Ictinike the it was he stand- what (sub.) ing, but 4-biama. K’u! A™he a¢d-biamé. Haha+! ga™bada" wénandedyi¢é, a-bi- said they say. (Sound of Fleeing they went, they Ha! ha! how easy T fill myself to reple- said, they he wings.) say. tion, ama Ictinike aké. Iqa gaskf wakan’di¢é-biama. Ujiha ké baqt4-biama. Bay Tetinike the Langh- panted excessively they say. Bag the he bound up, they (sub.). ing say. Gan’ki ja™jinga ndqpe gas4-biama. qcde té égaxé’/-qti wabasna™-biama And stick roasting- hecut they say. Fire the all around he put ener te they say. stic roas 15 18 ce 12 15 62 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. Nin‘dewa¢é’-qti yi ja™ wi" gakidha™ éga", ‘I"! 4-biama. Wab¢ate téya Almost done when tree one raisedbythe alittle, ‘In, said, they say. T eat on Boe win count 0 wajedji minké. Edta™ aja” a™¢astage 4, 4-biamdé Ictinike aké. (e-hna™ I am roasting the collec- Why youdo youcluckatme ? said, they say Ictinike the This only tion. that (sub.). égija" yi cub¢é t&4 minke, uwiti® ta minke, 4-biamé. [’di ahf-bi yi youdoit if Igoto will I who, Thit you will I who, said they say. There he arrived, when you he they say ca’ -qti ¢iji’jitdé-biama. Gan‘ki na*bé té dAnasandd-biama. Kagéha, at once thrust in his they say. And hand the itclosedon ‘they say. Friend, arm repeatedly (ob.) igaqa ka“ b¢a ga" cé-ma Kagéha, a™¢ictani’-ga, 4-biama. KY ¢icta™’-baji I laugh I wanted “80 those. Friend, let me go, said he, theysay. And let go not ca"ca”-biama. Cé-ma hau+! wadiagiji. Gudihehdi-gi hau+! 4-biamd, continued they say. Those halloo! Iputmyown pieces Go ye farther away ! said he, they say, there for safety. Ca™janga é waka-bi ega™. Ictinike wadiji ¢, 4-biamd. Pahan’ga hi Big wolf that he meant, having. Ictinike he put pieces he said they, they Before reached they say away for says say. safety ama jehtiq¢abe if¢dbeta™ ¢até “¢a-biamda. Iénaxi¢a a¢a-biama. Akibdéna™ the ones fat on stomach wrapped toeat spoke of it, they Dashing they went, they Running a race who around it say. say. ¢é¢a-biamé. Edi ahi-bi ega” ¢aqté-biama. (lasni”’-biama. Gasnit’-bi bh they went suddenly, There arrived, having they bitit they say. They swallowed it, they ey swallowed they say. they say say. it, they say ega™ éag¢d¢a ad¢d-biamda. Gan’ki anasan‘de té yig¢iciba-biama. having in different they went, they And closed on the it opened itself, they say. - directions say. faye a ec ° : x, . Gan‘ki hide ki éga"™ ca™-qti ja“jinga ké’ gisnibe ihé¢ée g¢i™ And bottom gothome having at once stick the (ob.) licked his putting was sit- own ting akama Ietinike aka. ge ama nit¢ica"™ ni bibuja i¢a”¢é ké ya”ha ké they say Ictinike the e they say lake water severalround put the border the (sub.). went ones (line of) (ob.) uh’ mai” amd. Kgi¢e yéjafga ni ya™”ha ké/di édedi ¢inké ama. following he walked they say. Ithappened bigturtle water border by the there wassitting, they say. (bizd-biama sin’de uga™-bi ega”. Gacfbe agi” ahi-biama. Wénandedyi¢é Took they say tail oor hold of, having. Out from hewn he arrived, they I make myself full they say i say. taté Aha™ gan’yiji, 4-biama. Ja™ ¢iqa”-biamd ci. Ja" dAkastd-qti u‘a™- ! shall andthen, said he, they say. Wood hebroke they say again. Wood piled up high he put in biamé géde té ndhegaji gaxd-biama. Gan‘ki ydéyanga magqide té they say Fire the (ob.) burningmuch he made, they say. And big turtle ashes me (ob.) ma™te i¢é¢a-biamé. Jég¢a"-biamd Ci ¢até ta akama. Nin’de¢é kan’ge under e sent suddenly, He put in the cv. ob. Again he was about to eat it. Cooked near they say. to roast, they say ¢é yi’ji Ictinike aka ja”ti¢in’ge amd. Aja™ta™¢a™¢inge. Nin’de yi went when Ietinike the (sub.) sleepy they say. I am sleepy. Cooked when a“hnigi te, ija”xehi, 4-biama. Ja™t’é ama. Ja"t’é ama yi nikaci"ga you awaken will, O ane, said they say. He was they say. He was theysay when person “me he sound asleep sound asleep wi’ &di ahi-biamé. Ganga ¢izd-bi ega” ¢atd-biama nikaci"ga aka, one there arrived, they say. Big turtle took, they say having ate it, they say person ine (sub.). ICTINIKE, THE TURKEYS, TURTLE, AND ELK. 63 asni”’-bi yi ca™-qti sihi ké ycéha ubdda™da”-biamd. Na™bé té wallowed, they when at once feet the (ob.) turtle he thrust them against it, Hand the say shell one after another, they say. (ob.) oni” onind&’-qti gidxa-biamé, i t® cti oni™onindé’-qti gidxa-biama. greasy (smeared) very he made for him, ites mouth the too greasy very he made for him, they say, (ob.) gay. Nikaci"ga a¢d-biamd. Ictinike ifyi¢4-biam& Giddha™ ti¢é ama. Person went they say. Ictinike awoke they say. He arose suddenly they say. Wajéayiji iv najubé’-qti-a" té-ana, 4-biama. Sihi ké ¢iontiida-bi ega™ Troasted the col- it has been cooked entirely ! said they say. Feet the he pulled out, having lection for myself too much for me he they say agi-biamé. Wanadugé’-qti k¢, 4-biamé. Na! ag¢ate até’, ¢ ama. Na! he was coming, (See note.) said they say. Why! Imust have eaten said they say. Why! they say. he mine, he ag¢asni® yi aja™ até’, é amd. Na™bd té gija”be ega”, A™ha", ag¢asni® Iswallowed when I must have said they say. Hand the saw hisown haying, Yes, I have swal- mine slept he (ob.) lowed minké, d-biamd. Nixa ¢a®™ g¢it‘a" ihé¢a-biama. A™ha™, i¢dnandé’-qti- my own, eid they say. Stomach ae he felt hisown lengthwise, they Yes, Tam very ie (ob. say. ma” minké, 4-biamd. A¢a-biamd yi égi¢e A™pa™ hégactéwa™ji édi- full indeed, said they say. He went,they say when it came Elk nota few by any means were he to pass there mama. Ugas‘i-bi ega” wé¢a-biama Ictinike aké. Hinda! ¢é-ma they say. Peeped, they say having found them, they say Ictinike the (sub.). Stop! these awactanka té-ana, e¢éga-biama. A™pa™ ama f¢a-bi ega”, (Péaka I tempt them will ! (in hethought they say. Elk the (sub.) found him, having, This one thought) they say Ictinike aké aka, 4-biamda. Kage-san’ga, wieb¢i" a¢ithé aga, 4-biama. Tetinike is the one said they, they Friend younger Iam he Iwho move indeed said they say. say. brother, he Kage-san’ga, ‘a” mathni” té éga™-qti jiwigig¢e ma"b¢i” ka b¢a, Friend younger how you walk the just so I with you my own I walk I wish, rother, kdge-san’ga, 4-biama Ictinike aké. Hau! ie‘dge, ud¢ide ¢ingé’qt¢i friend younger said, they say Ictinike the (sub.). Ho! venerable cause for none at all brother, man, complaint dha", a-biamé. Qade déji p‘a gé yi'ji A¢uta™ b¢ate ma™b¢i”. Aqta™ ! eaid they say. Grass weeds bitter the when straight I eat I walk. How pos (ob.) along sible ¢até nan’de i¢isa tabada", 4-biama. An’‘kaji ha, kage-san’ga, ma*hni” to eat heart thee good shall said they say. Not so 5 friend younger you walk orother, té éga™-qti juwigig¢e ma*b¢i” ka™b¢a d¢a, a-biama. U¢the taté ¢a™ja the just so Iwithyoumy I walk Iwish indeed eaidl they say. Youshall have your though own way nikaci*ga uké¢i" cka™ wécpaha™ ja™ gar cin’gajinga uhé uwa¢agihnixide person common ways you understand children path youseek for them at our request taté, a-biama. A™ha", ccai té égima™ taté, a-biama Ictinike aka. shall paul they say. Yes, yousay the Ido that shall said, they say Ictinike a (sub.). Hau! ie. -gazaza, ¢fe-gi, d-biamd. Ahat! 4-biama. Hau! gidugaq¢e Ho! Split-horns, you try it, end they say. Oho! cad they say. Ho! facing the other e way najin’-gi, 4-biama. ié ké fti® ga" ad¢d-bi yi ¢i‘4-biamd, Ictinike stand, said they say. ide the tohit so went, they when failed they say, Ictinike he (ob.) on say (ol OG 15 64 THE PEGIMNA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. a“ha-bi ega”. Wuhii+ ! ugaxe ¢ ¢ingé inahi", i"e‘dge, a-biama. An‘kaji fled, they say having. Wuhu:+! edone nothing truly, old man, oid they say. Not so hi, kdége-san’ga, an’ginan’ge i¢dyuhé ga” aa? ‘he ha, ‘ene Ci éga™ friend sana r running over me I feared 80 A aie they say. Again 80 »rother, duba” gaxd-biamé. Wéduba™ tédfhi, Hau! ¢é i’ji, ca™-daxe ta minke, four times he didit,they say. Thefourthtime when it Ho! this when, I stop will I who, arrived, : d-biam4. A™ha™, kage-san’ga, aa”ha-mdaji ta minke, 4-biamaé Ictinike said they say. Yes, friend younger I flee Inot will I who, said, they say Ictinike he rother. aka, (Pid fti™-bi ega” ékiga™-qti jug¢e a¢a-biama, Ictinike a™p i¢a™ the Side hit on, having just Fike him with him he went, they say, Tetinike elk became (sub.). they say suddenly ama. Iyiji-bi ega™ na®stastapi ma"¢i"-biama, mieaee ga wé¢é gaxe theysay. Proud, they aie stepped lightly, making walked they say, discov- made say very little noise ering (pretended) man¢i"-biamaé ‘I™! é-hna™-biama. walked they say. ‘Tn! pes regularly, they say. ne , = us : ea : / Waspegan-ei, Me‘dge, cgi¢e égija"-hna” te, 4-biama Apa” ama. Do behave, old man, beware you aa that aie arly lest said, they say Elk the (sub.). a inty v $2 one ee , =f) . An’‘kaji hi, k4ge-san’ga, i¢dyiji éga" ca” ad¢a, kage-san’ga, a-biama Not so . friend younger brother, I am proud as allright indeed friend younger brother, said, they say ° S = ° eat 3 Ictinike akdé. Ka™b¢a té kége-san’ga, éga"-qti ma™b¢i” cka™ té, Ictinike the (sub.). I wish the friend younger brother just so I walk deed the, A-biamé. Ca™-qti wad¢dte ma¢i’-bi p% gé ¢a‘ii ga®™ teatcu-hna- said they say. All at once eating walked they say bitter the (ob.) hespitout as he spit regularly he large pieces rapidly biama. Wa! wag¢éate pfijiiji’-qtci ¢até amédega® éduche, 4-biama. Wa! they say. wa! food bad not very those who did eat 1 follow, said they say. Wal he ic‘dge, edécega’-hna” a, 4-biamdé. Edéha-maji. Wag¢ate tida™ ¢até amé- venerable man, what were you saying ? said they say. I said what I not. Food good those who tS) dega” &duche Aga, ehé a¢i"hé Aga, d-biamd. Egi¢e baxt-qti dhe A¢é-bi did eat I follow indeed I was saying (as indeed said they say. Itcameto flat-top very went went, they I moved) he pass hill over say yiji nikaci"ga wéd¢a-biami A™pa™ amd. ‘I! 4-biamd. Hau! Ictinike, when person they discovered them, Elk the (sub.). ‘In! said, they say. Ho! Tetinike, they say oida"ba-ga, a-biama. B'di agi-bi yi égi¢e nikaci"ga akama. EK’di ahi- look at for him, said they, they There went they when it came men thoy were, There arrived say, say to pass they say. biamé. Wadi" agii té ecéd ¢aki te ha, a-biama jfji uf¢a-biama they say. Having them heis the yousay youreach will 5 said they say whisper- told him they say coming home he ing Ictinike ak& nfaci"ga ¢anké. Wa! ite‘ige edécega” 4, 4-biama. — ‘A” Ictinike the (sub.) person the (pL ob.). Wa! venerableman, what are you ? said they,they | Whatis saying say. the matter edéhe ta. Skéwa*-qti mahi” bayé g¢i" ¢a® uciki¢ai ehéd Agimhe aa, whatI shall? A very long time weeds clump sitting the gave needless Iwassayingas indeed (ob.) trouble I went 4-biama. Kgi¢e baxtt wi" dhe a¢a-bi 4 égi¢e A™pa® wit a™he agtf- said theysay. Atlength flat-top hill one passing went,they when it happened Elk one fleeing was he over say coming ICTINIKE, THE TURKEYS, TURTLE, AND ELK. 65 biama ci. Hau! Ictinike, Agudi ¢ijicpa gida"bd-gi, 4-biamé. V'di they say again. Ho! Ictinike, where your grandchild look at for him said they, they There ‘ say. ahi-bi ega” égi¢e nikaci"ga akama. Nikaci"ga wé¢é té win’ké-qti-a™ te, arrived, having it came men they were, Men found the he told the truth indeed, they say to pass it 1s said. them d-biama. Ci wédaji wi" wé¢a-biamd. Hau! ¢iyicpa ci gida*ba-ga, Ao theysay. And _ elsewhere one foundthem theysay Ho! your grandchild again look at for him, C) 4-biamé. E’di a¢é-biama. Ci nikaci"ga akéma, wag¢dde-hna” ama said they,they There went they say. Again men they were, crawling up on them they say. itis said say A”pa™-ma. Ci win’ké-qti-a”, 4-biamd4. Hau! Ictinike, cin gajinga uhé Elk theones Again he told the truth said they say. Ho! Ictinike, children path who. indeed he tiwagi¢ixida-ga, 4-biama. Ahati! 4-biamé. Pahan’ga b¢i” ¢a”ja cgi¢e look out for them, said they, they Oho! ae they say. Before Tam thongh beware say. e < u‘é¢a hni™ tai. ‘A ma*b¢i" té a™¢a”wa™ahé mat™hni™ tai, 4-biama. Agim scatter. you will. How I wal the you follow me you walk shall psa theysay. Ridge ing C) ké Ada¢age ga” uhd-biama. Nikaci"ga akiciga ga” wéna‘dxe ga™ fhe the headland 80 he went they say. Men standing thick so passing closeto so passed along along a¢a-biama Wieb¢i", wieb¢i", ¢ ma¢i’-biama Ictinike aka. Bé¢uga-qti went, they say. It is 1, it is I, said walked they say Ictinike the (sub.). All t‘éwa¢a-biama. A™'pa"™ ¢ab¢i" umucta-bi yi Iectinike ini¢a-hna"-biama. they killed they say. Elk three remained from when Ictinike took refuge only they say. them shooting, they say with him Ca”-qti hé ¢a" ¢iontide ¢é¢a-bi ega” wéti" ¢é¢a-biamd. A™pa™ e¢ige Allatonce horn the pulled off sud- they having hitthem sending them off, Elk they call denly say with them they say. you tai. Gudiha man¢i"i-ga, 4-biamaé will. Further off walk ye, a they say. e NOTES. Some say that it was the Orphan or Si¢emaka® who caught the turkeys with the assistance of his grandmother, and that Ictinike killed a bear and roasted it, not the turkeys. The yehuqeabe shows this, as turkeys have none.—(L. Sanssouci.) The fol- lowing version of Si¢emaka" and the Turkeys is probably of Oto origin. The Dakota version of this myth makes Unktomi, the mythical Spider, play the part of Ictinike (see Iapi Oaye for December, 1880). SIGEMAKA*® AND THE TURKEYS. [Told by Susanne LaF léche. ] Once there was a young man, named Si¢emaka*, who lived with his grandmother. And she told him to get something to eat. ‘‘ Well, I will get some food, grandmother,” said he, “if you will have the fire ready.” So he took his bow and arrows, and also a bag filled with grass. By and by he saw some Turkeys. ‘Ho! Si¢emaka™, what have you in your bag?” said they. “IT havesongs.” ‘Sing us some,” said the Turkeys. “Come and dance for me, and I will sing for you,” said he. ‘“ But, while dancing, it VOL. vi——5 12 66 THE @EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. will be necessary for you to keep your eyes closed; for if any of you open your eyes, all of you shall have red eyes.” And he commenced to sing: ——— So Hé! wa-da™-be ¢in-ké ¢a", I-cte&-ji-de! I-ctea-ji-de! I’-be ¢i-a”- dje! I’-be ¢i-a®-dje! “Beware! he who has seen, Byes red! Kyes red! Spread your tails! Spread your tails!” The Turkeys danced while he sang this over and over; and as they danced, he grabbed first one and then another, putting them into his game-bag. But one Turkey, suspecting something wrong, opened one eye and cried out, “He is killing us all.” Then the surviving Turkeys flew away. The youth took the sack home, and said: “Grandmother, now I have comets Keep the bag while I go out and get some water.” But the old woman’s curiosity proving too great, she opened the bag, and all the Turkeys but one got away. The old woman, who was blind, held the Turkey by both legs. When the young man returned, ain ealled out, @Gome quickly and help me. I have two of them.” The young man was angry, and reproved her, not allow- ing her to eat any of the Turkey. And from that time Turkeys have had red eyes. 60, 3. b¢at eteda, contracted from b¢ate eteda”. 60, 9. a"na"t ega", contracted from a®na"te ega?. 61, 13. gata"ha uji-biama. About four feet deep. 61, 14. zizika jinga snuta. According to L. Sanssouci, it was not the young Tur- key that opened its eyes and gave the alarm, but one of the Tai’-si-snéde, the Long- legged ta™i", a species of snipe. These birds danced with the Turkeys, and they, not the Turkeys, had their eyes changed to red ones. 61, 16. k’ti is ewhispered. 62, 1. gakiaha". Two branches rubbed against each other, being moved or raised by the wind. 62, 4. kageha, i¢aqa..... cema: My friend, as I wished to laugh (I said) those (words). 62, 6. cena hau+. The voice is raised and prolonged, it being a call to the wolves in the distance. 62, 6. wadiagiji—l’. LaFléche; but wadiagiji—ga¢ina™paji. 62, 6. gudihehdi-ga, contracted from gudiha ihai-ga. 62, 7. pahanga hi ama, etc. The Wolves agreed among themselves that whoever was the first to reach the place, could eat the “qehuq¢abe i¢abeta™.” 62, 13. egi¢e yeyaiiga, ete. White Eagle’s (Ponka) version of this myth tells how Ictinike caught the Big Turtle. “When Ictinike saw the Big Turtle, he drew back very quietly, and went to a little distance. Then he raised his voice, and called to the Big Turtle. ‘Ho, you over there!’ ‘What is the matter, venerable man?’ said the ICTINIKE, THE TURKEYS, TURTLE, AND ELK. 67 Turtle. ‘You are in great danger,’ said Ictinike. ‘The Wakanda have determined to make a great flood, and the ground will be covered, and you will be drowned, ‘ But I can live in the water,’ said the Turtle. ‘But I tell you that there will be great danger this time for you,’ said Ictinike. ‘This time you cannot live in the water” At length, after much talking, Ictinike persuaded the Turtle to leave the place where he was near the water, and to go to the hills. Ictinike went ahead and hid himself in a ravine. ’ And when the Turtle came crawling along after a while, Ictinike hit him on the head with a stick as he came up the hill, and killed him.” 62, 19. nikaci"ga wi". The person who stole the turtle meat was Miyasi, the Coyote, according to the Omaha and Ponka versions; but the Dakota version makes him Dokeitea, the Mink. White Eagle says that Ictinike found out who was the thief, and when he met him, he punished him—cum eo covit. 63, 4. té-ana. Te is the classifier té, which is lengthened in such expressions. 63, 5. wanadugeqti ke is the Omaha pronunciation of the Oto waydoyé/qtci ke, the equivalent of the Omaha nindeqtia” hi. This points to a yaiwere original. 64, 19. skéwa"qti, etc. ‘I was saying, ‘A bunch of weeds was always there, and deceived them. ”—(Sanssouci.) 65, 1. agudi ¢igucpa gida™ba-gi. See for your grandchild where it (the danger) is.—(Sanssouci.) 65, 7. a¢i" ké Ada¢age ga” uha-biama. The ridge was of a curvilinear form. The men were in ambush all around, and Ictinike led the Elk all around inside the line of ambush. TRANSLATION. There were some Turkeys, a great many. They were feeding on the very high edge of the ground among the arrow-weeds. Ictinike went thither. Having discov- ered them, he bent his head at once, and was coming back again (to the place whence he had started). ‘How shall I do in order to eat them?” he thought. And he made a decision. Immediately he rolled up a raccoon-skin robe several times, making it a pack for carrying something. He carried it on his back, and ran at once. As he ran, he passed very close by the Turkeys who were feeding. ‘“ Wuhu+! Something is the matter with the old man. See him,” said the Turkeys. ‘‘ Why! venerable man, what is the matter?” said they. ‘‘Yes, itis just so,” said Ictinike. “Some villagers having said that I was to sing dance-songs for them, and having come after me, I have been carrying my songs (on my back),” said he. ‘Oho! venerable man, we too will dance a little,” said the Turkeys. “No, I go in a very great hurry,” said Iectinike. ‘We too, venerable man, will dance a little, and then you can go,” said the Turkeys. “ Wuhu+! what a bother! I was in very much of a hurry, but if you wish to dance, you shall do it,” said Ictinike. ‘‘ Well! Come, let us see! Come hither in a body,” said Ictinike. And they came in a body. And he pulled open the robe. ‘Turn in your course and go around me. Ye very large ones who are moving along, pass very close to me as ye go dancing around me. Shut youreyes. Beware lest you open your eyes, and your eyes become red,” said Ictinike. “ Lift your tails erect, and spread them out repeatedly (by opening and closing). Well! Come, dance ye,” he said. Then he sang: “Alas for the gazer! His eyes shall be red! His eyes shall be red! Flirt up your tails! Flirt up your tails!” Having caught hold of the very large ones, and 68 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. having twisted off their heads in succession, Ictinike sat filling.the bag. The bag he filled that high; he filled it very full. A small half-grown Turkey was about to comprehend (the situation as he moved along), he walked with his eyes open a little now and then. “He is destroying the largest ones among us. There is cause for anger! It is Ictinike who is standing (here), but (we did not recognize him),” he said. “K’i!” They went fleeing. ‘‘Ha! ha! How easy it is to fill myself to reple- tion,” said Ictinike. He laughed till he panted excessively. He bound up the bag. And he cut sticks (as) roasting-sticks. He put them (the birds) to roast all around the fire. When they were almost done, the branch of a tree raised by the wind, said, “‘I"!” “J am roasting them on account of my eating. Why do you cluck at me?” said Ictinike. “If you do this any more, I will go to you and hit you.” When he arrived there (up the tree) he thrust in his arm several times. And it closed on his hands. “Friend, I wished to jest, so those things (I did and said). Friend, let me go,” said he. And it continued so without letting him go. ‘Ho!! those yonder! I put my own pieces there for safety. Go ye further off!” said he, referring to the Big Wolves. ‘Ietinike says that he has put the pieces away for safety,” said they (the Wolves). They promised that those who should be the first to arrive were to eat the fat wrapped around the stomach. They went dashing towards it. They went suddenly, running a race. Having arrived there, they bit it. They swallowed it. Having swallowed it, they departed in different directions. And what closed on (Ietinike) opened itself. And having reached home at the bottom again, Ietinike was soon sitting and putting down the sticks as he licked them. He departed and walked along the shores of a row of round lakes. It happened that a big turtle was sitting there, by the shore of the lake. He took it, catching hold of the tail. He took it off to one side. “I will make myself full in a while!” said he. He broke wood (branches?) again. He piled up the wood very high, and put it in (the fire). He made the fire burn very fast. And he put the big turtle very quickly into the ashes. He put it in to bake, and he was about to eat it. When it was nearly done, Ictinike was sleepy. ‘I am sleepy. When it is cooked, you shall awaken me, O ane,” said he. He slept. While he slept a person arrived there. The person took the big turtle, and ate it. When he had swallowed it, immediately he took the feet and thrust them (in their places) against the turtle-shell. He made Ictinike’s hands very greasy for him; he also made his mouth very much smeared with grease. The person departed. Ictinike awoke. He arose suddenly. ‘What I roasted for myself is cooked too much for me!” he said. He pulled out the feet and they were coming to him. “It is done,” said he. ‘Why! I wonder if I have eaten mine,” he said. “ Why! I must have swallowed it and then slept.” Having looked at his hands, he said, “Yes, I have swallowed my own.” He felt his stomach lengthwise (that is, running the hand all along it). ‘Yes, I am very full indeed after eating,” said he. When he departed, it came to pass that there were a great number of Elk. Having peeped, Ictinike discovered them. ‘Stop! I will tempt these!” he thought. The Elk having discovered him, said, “ This one is Ictinike.” ‘Friend younger brother, it is I. Friend younger brother,” said Ictinike, “I wish to live just as you do.” “Well, venerable man, there is no reason at all for this!” said one. ‘When the vegetation consists of bitter weeds, I eat straight along as I walk (rejecting none). How is it possible for your heart to feel good when you eat them?” ‘Not so, friend younger ICTINIKE, THE TURKEYS, TURTLE, AND ELK. 69 brother, I wish to live with you just as you do,” said Ictinike. “Though you will have your way, you shall seek a path for our children, as you understand the ways of the Indians,” said they. ‘Yes, I will do as you say,” said Ictinike. ‘Come, Pronged- horns, do you be the one,” said they. ‘ Well,” said he, ‘‘come, stand with your face the other way (with your back to me).” When he went to hit him on the side, he failed, as Ictinike fled. ‘‘Wuhu+! truly nothing is there to be done, venerable man,” said he. “O no, friend younger brother, I fled as I feared that he would run over me,” said Ictinike. Again it was done so four times. The fourth time the Elk said, ““When this (is over) I will stop.” ‘Yes, friend younger brother, I will not flee,” said Ictinike. When he hit him on the side, he went with him, just like him; Ietinike had become an Elk. As he was proud, he walked making light steps, he walked pre- tending to discover men. He kept on crying, “‘I™!” ‘Do behave, venerable man. Beware lest you do that regularly,” said the Elk. ‘O no, friend younger brother, it is all right because I am proud,” said Ictinike. “Friend younger brother, I am now living just as I desire.” And eating as he went he spit out the bitter ones in large pieces; he was constantly spitting them out. ‘‘Wa! I have joined those who eat very bad food,” said he. ‘ Wa! venerable man, what were you saying?” said they. ‘TI said nothing. I was saying ‘I have joined those who eat good food,” said he. At length when they went over a hill with a very flat top, the Elk discovered men. ‘I"!” said they. ‘Come, Ictinike, look at it (the danger) for him (your grandchild),” said they. When he went thither, behold, they were men. He arrived there. “You shall go home and say that he is coming with them,” said Ictinike, telling the men in a whisper. “Wa! venerable man, what are you saying?” said the Elk. ‘ What is the matter? What should I say? I was saying as I walked, ‘A clump of weeds which was there a very long time, gave them needless trouble (or, deceived them—Sanssouci),’” said he At length, when they went over a flat-top hill, an Elk was coming back again fleeing. “Well, Ictinike, see for your grandchild where it is,” said they. When he arrived there, behold, they were men. Said he, “He told the truth, indeed, when he said he found men.” Again, one discovered them in another direction (07, elsewhere). ‘ Well, again see for your grandchild (where the danger is),” they said. He went thither- Again they were men, who were crawling up on the Elk. Again he said, ‘ He told the exact truth.” ‘Come, Ictinike, look out for your children a path (by which they may escape),” said they. ‘ Well,” said he, “though I am ahead, beware lest you scatter. You must walk following me in the manner that I walk.” He followed the headlands of the ridge. He went passing close by the men who were standing thick. “It is I! it is I!” said Ictinike, as he walked. They killed all (of the Elk). Three Elk remained after the shooting, and they took refuge with Ictinike. And he soon pulled off the horns, throwing them away, and hitting the Elk with them. ‘You shall be called A™pa?, Elk. Walk away,” said he. 70 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. ICTINIKE AND THE ELK. Hupr¢a”’s VERSION. Kag¢ha, nikaci*ga d‘iba gatéya Ededf amdma. Kita bed ka” b¢a, Friend, person some at that place there they are,itissaid. Thither Igo I wish, d-biama Ictfinike aké. Ahati, a¢i-biama. A¢a-biama yi égi¢e A pat said, theysay Ictinike the (sub.). Well, he went, they say. He went, they say when it happened Elk 3 miga édi ¢inké amd ha. Hau, ukfa-biama. Kagéha, wawéwimaxe male there the (st.ob.) they say J Well, Ne they say. Friend, to question you . with him ati, a-biamd Ictinike aka. Ki eddda* a*¢a“hnaxe té 4, 4-biamé Apa" Ihave said, they say Ictinike the(sub.). And — what you questionme will { said, they say Elk come niga aké. Kagéha, hi a*wa™je¢a ag¢i’ ha, ada™ a"wa™ wayacté udgaca™- male the (sub.)- Friend, legs me tired IT sit 5 there whithersoever I travel 6 maji ha, d-biam&é A™pa" niga aka. Kag¢ha, nikaci"ga-ma tyjawa- IT not g said, they say Elk male the (sub.). Friend, person the haye much ones who qti-a®-biama. Hata" dda" ma”oni'’-aji & A™ha®, kagéha, wa‘tt pahan’ga enjoyment, they say. Why therefore youwalk not ? Yes, friend, woman before” ag¢a” ¢inké i™nacaf éga*, nan‘de fsaa” ¢in’gega” ¢é¢u ag¢i”, A-biamd I took to the (ob.) snatched from as, heart as it = nothing to here I sit, said, they say wife me satisfy it 9 A* ‘pa niga aké. Kagéha, é’di afigd¢e té, 4-biama Ictinike aki Kagéha, male the Friend, there we go will, said,theysay Ictinike the Friend, (sub.). (sub.). ¢i-hna"” @‘di ma*¢in’-ga, 4-biama A™pa™ niga aka. Kagéha, dwatédfi you alone there go thou said, they say Elk male the (sub.). Friend, in what place are they a, a-biamd. Kagéha, ¢étéjdi ha. Edi ea -ga, d-biama. Hau, a¢a- ? said they say. Friend, they are at : There said they say. Well, went he this place he 12 biama Ictinike amé. Egi¢e Apa" Gdedi améma, dhigi-biamdé. K’di they say Ictinike the (sub.). It happened Elk there they were, itissaid many they say. There ahi-biamé. I"c‘Age, edta® mathni” ¢i"te, 4-biamd A™pa™ amd. A™ha®™ Oo? ’ b] hearrived, they say. Venerable why you walk may said, theysay Elk the (sub.). Yes, man, quepaha, a” ba wi" wa¢ate onatai b¢aite ka“ b¢a ma"b¢i” ga” ada®, yucpdha, grandchild, day one food you eat eat I wish I walk as penis! grandchild, 15 ati ha, 4-biama. Qa-i! ic‘dgeha, téqi ha, wa¢ate angiyai. Dada® p‘a’ Ihave . said they say. Why! Ovenerable difficult’ . food our. What bitter come he man! eé b¢uga a™¢ate a™ma”¢i® usni yi’cté kima*ha™ pasate -qti aa i ha, the (ob.) all we eat we walk cold even when against the wind we sit i-biama. Hau, ic‘dgeha, ug¢dde ¢i¢in’ge. Cena, ¢actan’ ae ha. An’ eae said they, they Ho! oO yeners able totalkof you ae © Enough, stop talking . Not so, say. man! nothing. 18 qucpaha, ¢i¢da® céna ¢acta”i-ga ha. Ga™ mathni’-macé’di ma?b¢i’ grandchild, do you enough stop (ye) talking e Anyhow you walk by youwho TIT walk a ICTINIKE AND THE ELK. ffl ka" b¢a hi, 4-biamé Ictinike aka. Hau, wit’ke ¢ite. ackahi jin’ga I wish said, they say Ictinike the (sub.). Ho! hespeaks truly may be. Oak tree small hé gidxa-biamé. Sin’de ké ja*ya™ giixa-biamé. Hau, yucpdha, usni horn oe for they say. Tail the (ob.) tree root ee for they say. Well, grandchild, cold m yi, éga® snia”te té ha. Hit ¢ijai éga® in’gaxadi-ga, 4-biama. Hau, wahdb when so Be cold may . Hair your like for me make ye, aad they say. Well, cat’s- (freeze) t) igaska™ #6 hi’ gidxa-biamd. Hau! ké, japahi ¢égé ¢ata-ga, 4-biama. (hata- tails hair madefor they say. Ho! come, rosin-weed these eat said they, He ate ii (ob.) they say. biama Ictinike aka. (fata-bi yi itp%i-biamd, tet-biama. Wii! dada*cté they say Ictinike the (sub.). eate they when bitter they say he spit they say. Wil whatever say in mouth piiijtiji’-qtei ae sduéhe dha" 4-biamd. Hau! iwc‘dge, edécega"-hna™ 4, good-not-not very they eat I go with ! said he, they say. Ho! venerable man, whatwere you saying q 4-biamd. Inddda®-qti ed¢he ta? Wa¢ate péji-qti ¢ataf éduche aha”, ehé, said they, What indeed I say what shall? Food bad very theyeat Igo with ! I said, they say. juepdha, 4-biama Ictinike aka. Ahatii Hau! ic‘4ge, tcka™ wi" angui¢i¢a grandchild, said, they say —_Ictinike the (sub.). Well. Ho! venerableman, deed one we tell to thee tan’gata". Cin’gajin’ga naxidewa¢a¢e te Ada® icka™ wi? angui¢i¢a tan’gata’, we will. Children you make them have ears will therefore deed one we tell thee we will, 4-biamd. Hau! ie‘4ge, ¢éamA niaci*ga wé¢ai tédi éga®-qti té’di bitzé- said they, Ho! venerable man, these (sub.) persons they findthem when just so when they cry they say. hnati, 4-biam4. Ahat! 4-biama, éga” taté A¢a, d-biamd. Usni ama, yadé- out, said they, Oho! said they say, 80 shallbe indeed said they say. Cold they say, hard they say. he he sage usni-qti amd. A*pa’-ma b¢tiga-qti_ _kima*ha™tigaq¢e ma*¢i™ -biama. wind cold very theysay. Elk the all facing the wind walked they say. ones who Ictinike am4 kimaha"™ gaqé’-qti wa¢dte man¢i™-biama. Agaq¢e yig¢isa’¢a- Ictinike the against the apart very eating walked they say. With the turned himself (su wind wind around i ul piiijiaiji’-qtci, 4-biama. biamé. Wi! pfajiay ; they say. Wi! good-not-not very, said he, they say. Hau, é ga™-ama nfkaci"ga wé¢a-biama Ictinike aké. L-t! 4-biama. Well, that after awhile person he found they say Ictinike the T-u! said they say. them (sub.). he Gida"bai-git, gida™bai-git, 4-biam4 A™pa"-ma bétiga Cagaha"™ ¢é¢a-biama. Look for him, look for him, said they say. Elk the all raised their suddenly, they say. he ones who heads E‘a” 4, A-biama éakA nikacitga wi", 4-biama Ictinike aka. Da*ba- Whatis 1% saidthey,theysay. This one person one, said they say Ictinike the They looked the matter he (sub.). at it biam& yi égi¢e qad i¢a™ ama. EK wa¢ake, 4-biama. A™”ha", 4-biama. they say when behold grass wassud- they That you mean, said they, Yes, said they say. denly say. they say. he Hau! ie‘ige, égi¢éga® ckaxe-hna" te, 4-biamé A™pa®-ma. Ega"-qti yi Ho! venerable beware lest you do thus continually, said, they say Elk the Tues So just when man who. éea"-hna™i, 4-biamé. Ci wabéhi ma?¢i”-biama. Kegi¢e ci niaci*ga wé¢a- so regularly, said they say. Again feeding walked they say. It hap- again person he found he together pened them 6 iio) 12 15 18 15 72 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. biama Ictinike aké. Gida™bdi-ga, 4-biamd. A™pa™ amd da™ba-bi ¥i they say Ietinike the Look for him, said they say. Elk the looked, they when (sub.). he (sub.). say éga™-qti amd nfaci*ga akima, ugds‘i" akéma. Hau! ¢éga™-qti te, 4-biama Fuat so they say they w ae men, itis said, they were peeping, it is Ho! just so it was, said, they say said A™pa® amd. Cin’gajin’ga ua™he tiwagina-ga, 4-biamaé. Ki, Wieb¢i" te ha, Elk the (sub.). Children flight hunt for them, said they, they And, Tam he will say. ° a ve ys oY . 1 = 4-biama Ictinike aké. Win’ké-qti dba", 4-biamdé A™pa"-ma. Hau! kégan- said, they say Ictinike the He speaks truly ! said, they say Elk the Ho! come, do (sub.). indeed ones who. git, a-biamd. (bié-gi, d-biamé. Cin’gajin’ga uhé tiwagind-ga, 4-biaméa. it, said they,they You be first, said they, they Children path hunt for them, said they, they say. say. say. Ahati! i¢agaska"b¢e ti minke, d-biama Ictinike aka. Ictinike aka ag¢a- Oho! T attempt it will I who, said, they say Tetinike the (sub.). Ictinike the (sub.) went biamé. A” pa" bguig ga qti u¢tha-biamé. Gan‘ki Ictinike améga® niaci"ga they say. followed they say. And Ictinike as he moved men wé¢a-biama. Ba até biamé Niaci"ga wéna‘u-qtci tha-biama. Niaci®ga discovered, they say. Thither went they say. - Men right alongside of he passed, they say. men wé¢ai yi ¢ twakia-biama: Wi ankida-bajfi-ga. Wieb¢i” ha, a-biama discov- whenthat talked with they say: Me shoot not at me. ItisI s said, they say ered them them Ietinike aka. A™pa™-ma wakida-biama. A™pa™-ma t’éwa¢a-biama. A” pa"- Ictinike the Elk the they shot at them, Elk the they killed them, they Elk (sub.). ones who they say. ones who say. ma muwa¢ingé’-qti-a® ‘-biama, cénawa¢a-biama. A™pa™ niga jin’ga wi" the ones they shot down all they say, they extermin they say. k male small one who ated them A™pa®™ min’ga jin’ga cti wi", Ictinike aka ¢ wé¢ab¢i" nijga-biama. Wéahidé’- Elk female small too ane. Ictinike the that the third alive they say. Far away (sub.) qti a” he jiwag¢e ahi-biam4 Ahi-biama yi hé ke ¢iza-bi Ictinike aka, very fled he with them arrived, they say. Arrived, they say when horn ane took, they Ictinike the (ob.) say (sub.), a’ ¢a ¢é¢a-biama. AY pa jin'ga ¢é wagaji ega”, Hata" a®¢a™war¢ahai a. threw suddenly, they say. Elk eral to go told them having, Why me you follow q away Lantya hébe ayidadéga" te ha. Gudiha ma™¢i”i-ga. Apa” e¢ige tai, Fresh meat piece Lcut up for myself will E Further off walk ye. Elk they will call you, 4-biama. Ceta™. said he, they say. So far. NOTES. 70, 17. u¢ade ¢i¢inge, “You have nothing to talk about”—Joseph La Fléche; “Vou have no cause for complaint”—Sanssouci; syn., égicaji eté yi, “ You ought not to say it to (any one)”—Mary La Fléche; “It were good for you to say nothing to any one.” 70, 18. ¢iéda”, ete. Ictinike thought that they would not allow him to join them. So he implored them, using ¢ieda® in lis entreaty: “If you are unwilling, do not say it. Do you stop speaking. Refuse me no longer.” 71, 6. piajitiji-qtci, etc. The literal meaning is the opposite of the real one. So wat¢ate péji-qtci, is “very good food;” and wa¢aha péji-qtei, “very good clothing.” ar _ICTINIKE AND THE ELK. 73 71, 8. ahau and hau are often used as catch-words or continuatives. 71, 9. naxidewa¢a¢é (given by Hupe¢a™), “You make them have inner ears,” “You teach them to use their ears so as to detect the presence or approach of danger ;” but JosephLa Fléche gave naxi¢awa¢ad¢é, “ You annoy or alarm them”: “We tell you one thing lest you alarm the children.” 71, 10. bi®zé, syn., xaxage, to cry out as a child, or as the young of the elk or coyote. This cry, according to Hupe¢a™, is it; Joseph La Fléche gave u®, said through the nose, with the rising inflection; and ga¢i*-na"paji gave in the preceding myth, ‘i". 72, 4. kégan-git (ké, égan-ga) “Come, do it.” 72, 5. ¢ié-gi, “Be thou he,” imperative of ¢ie, thou; syn., ¢i pahan’ga-ga, “Be thou the foremost, the leader”—Joseph La Fléche. 72, 8. wena‘ugqtei, goiwere, winaq‘axe, to go near in one’s course, to pass along- side of them. TRANSLATION. “My friend, there are some persons in that place. I wish to go thither,” said Ietinike. Well, he went. When he went, it happened that a Male-elk was (sitting) there. Well, he talked with him. “My friend, I have come to question you,” said Ietinike. And the Male-elk said, ‘‘ What will you ask me? My friend, I sit tired in my legs, therefore I do not go anywhere at all.” ‘My friend, persons are accustomed to enjoyment. Why do you not walk?” said Ictinike. ‘Yes, my friend, the woman whom I married formerly having been taken from me, my heart has no enjoyment, and I sit here,” said the Elk. “My friend, let us two go thither,” said Ictinike. “My friend, do you go thither by yourself,” said the Male-elk. ‘‘ My friend, where are they ?” said Ictinike. “ My friend, they are at this place (near by). Go thither,” said the Male- elk. Well, letinike departed. And there were a great many Elk (in motion) there. He arrived there. “Venerable man, what may be your business?” said the Elk. “Yes, my grandchildren, I have been desiring to eat the food which you eat for one day; there- fore, my grandchildren, I have come,” said he. “Why! O venerable man, our food is difficult. We eat all bitter things as we go; besides, when it is cold we sit facing the wind,” said they. ‘Ho! O venerable man, you have nothing to talk about. Enough. Stop talking.” “No, my grandchildren, you (have said) enough. Do you stop talking. (Notwithstanding what you have said) 1 wish to live as you live,” said Ictinike. “Ho! he may be telling the truth” (said the Elk). They made horns for him of a small oak. They made him a tail of the root. ‘Well, my grandchildren, when it is cold, I may freeze (if I am) so. Make for me hair like yours,” said he. Well, they made hair for him out of cat’s-tails (Typha latifolia). ‘Ho! come, eat these rosin- weeds,” they said. Ictinike ate them. When he ate them they were bitter in the mouth, and he spit them out. ‘“Psha! I have joined the eaters of very bad things,” he said. “Ho! venerable man, what have you been saying?” they said, ‘ What indeed could I say? I said, ‘I have joined the eaters of very good food, my grand- children,” said Ictinike. “Ho! venerable man, one custom we will tell you. You shall cause the children to use their ears (aright), therefore we will tell you one custom,” said they. ‘Ho! venerable man, when these discover men, and it is just so, they ery out.” “Oho!” said he, “it shall be so indeed.” It became cold. The wind blew, and it was very cold. All the Elk walked facing the wind. — Ictinike 74. THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. walked apart from them, facing the wind. He turned himself with the wind (with his back to it). “Psha! it is very bad!” he said. Well, after going awhile, Ictinike discovered men. “I-u! look ye for him! Look ye for him!” said he. All the Elk raised their heads suddenly. “What is the matter?” said they. “This one is a man,” said Ictinike. When they looked at it, behold, it had suddenly become grass. “You mean that?” said they. ‘Yes,” he said. ‘Ho! venerable man, beware lest you continue doing thus,” said the Elk. “When it is just so, only so is it,” he said. Again they were grazing as they walked together. And it happened that Ictinike discovered men again. ‘Look ye for him,” said he. When the Elk looked at it, it was just so; they were men, and they were peeping. “Well, it was just 80,” said the Elk. “Seek a way of flight for the children,” said they. ‘Let me be the one,” said Ictinike. “Indeed, he speaks truly!” said the Elk. ‘Ho! come, do it. You shall be the one (to go ahead). Seek a path for the children,” said they. “Oho! I will attempt it,” said Ictinike. Ictinike went. All the Elk followed him. And as Ietinike went he discovered men. He went thither. He passed right alongside of the men. When he discovered the men he talked with them. “Do not shoot at me; it is I,” said Ictinike. They shot at the Elk. They killed the Elk. They shot down all the Elk; they exterminated them. One small Male-elk, and one small Female- elk, Ictinike being the third, were alive. Fleeing with them, he reached a place at avery great distance (from the place of slaughter). When he arrived, he took the horns and threw them away. Having commanded the young Elk to depart, he said, “Why do you follow me? I will cut up for myself a piece of fresh meat. Walk fur- ther off. You shall be called A*pa®” (Elk). The End: ICTINIKE AND THE BUZZARD. TOLD BY MA®TCU-NA™BA, Kgi¢e Ictinike ama ¢é amima. Ki Héga wi" gawi'xe ma*¢i"’-biama. Itcame to Ictinike the was going. And Buzzard one going around walked they say. pass (sub.) Ki letinike ak4 ni-jan’ga masdniaja ¢é ga™¢a-biama. Héga ¢inké ¢aha™- And Tetinike the big water tothe other togo wished they say. Buzzard the (ob.) he prayed (sub.) side of to him biama. piga™ha, i in-gi ha. Ni masaniaya i” 4n-ga ha, 4-biama Ictinike they say. O grandfather, carry me . Water to ee oer carry me : said, they say Ictinike s§1de 0. aké. A™ha", a-biami Héga aka, wi'i” téinke, 4-biamd4. Gan‘ki gf" the Yes, said, they say Buzzard the I carry will said they say. And he carried (sub.). (sub.) you he him biamdé. GiS"-bi yi jatq¢i‘a und gii*-biamd. Egi¢e jaq¢ti‘a té {¢a-biama they say. He carried when hollow tree seeking he carried him, Atlength hollow tree the he found, they him, they say they say. (ob.) say 6 ha. H’di gfi® agi-biama yi ja%q¢ii‘a té ya"ha-qtci fhe a¢é-hna’-biama There carrying went they say when hollow tree al border very passing went regularly, they say him (ob. = ICTINIKE AND THE BUZZARD. 45 Héga ama, A¢ika™ a¢é hna™biamaé. A¢ika" a¢af yi: jiga™ha, a®wa"- ne the (sub. ’, leaning he went regularly, they say. Leaning he went when: O grandfather me hniqpé¢ etéga", a-biamd Ictinike ak&. Ma™¢i™ téga™ ca™ca™ b¢i’ ha qp ga, ’ you make fall apt said, they say Ietinike the (sub.). To walk Se so always Tam i-biami Héga aké. Egig¢e yig¢iub¢i’-biamd yi Ictinike ma™can’de iat said, they say Buzzard the (sub.). Atlength twisted Bimeelt they say when Ictinike den Head: aroun ong i¢é¢a-biamé Héga aka. Ki Ietinike ja"q¢i‘a égihe ¢é¢é ma” taya waqpani, sent him suddenly, Buzzard the And Hoang hollow tree headlong sent inside poor they say (sub.). suddenly q¢aqti ma¢i”-biamé. Egi¢e af hégactéwa™ji gaq¢a™ ati-biamd. Egi¢e lean very walked they say. Atlength lodge by no means a few onthe hunt have come, they Atlength say. uq¢ita wéds yi wai amd q¢abé té gajdqi amd. Egi¢e Ictinike aka hollow sought when woman the (sub.) tree the hit and made theysay. At length Ictinike the (tree) (wood) (ob.) sound (sub.) jangq¢i‘a matéja g¢i’-bi ci, Niaci"ga wé¢é ti-biamd e¢éga"-biama. Egi¢e “hollow tree inside sat, ay say again, Eon seeking have come thonght ere say. It hap- (wood) (see note), he pened miyd-ha wa-i"-biama Ictinike aka. Sin’de ké ja"q¢ti‘a usnd i ubdsna® raccoon skin wore they say Ictinike the (sub.). Tail the (ob. ) hollow tree split the (pl.) pushing into é¢a"be-hi¢a-biama. Gan‘ki wa‘ ¢ab¢i" ati-biama, ci q¢abé gaydqi- he caused to come in sight, And woman three have come, they again tree hit and they say. say sounded biama. Ci sin‘de da"bé-biamé. Egi¢e g4-biamé: Hinda! ciya”, miyA they say. And tail they saw they say. It happened she said as fol- Stop! husband's raccoon lows, they say: sister d‘tiba qeakd, i-biamé. Miyé d‘iba wedyi¢é, 4-biamé. Hi"+! ciya™’, wit” some she pee they Raccoon some Ihave found said they say. Oh! © brother's one for myself she e anga‘'i teda™+, 4- Rees Ja” té angiga‘ide taf hé, 4-biam4. Egi¢e ja™ you give will? said ee they Tree on wecutawholein will . ae they say. At length qe me 4 té gasd-biama, Sedtudscbinird, Egi¢e Ictinike ga-biamd4: Miy4 yan’ga the theycut they say theycutahole they say. It happened Ictinike said as follows, Raccoon big (ob.) in it they say: b¢i’ ha. pangad¢éha gaxdi-ga hi, d-biama. Hi"+! ciya™, Miyé aka yanga-bi lam : Large around make it said they say. Oh! brother’s Raccoon the big (see note) he wife (sub.) ai hé, 4-biama. Gan’‘ki ja™q¢i‘a té yangé¢éha u‘tide té gaxd4-biama. he c said (one) And Jee tree the large around hole the they they say. says they say. (ob.) (ob.) made Gan‘ki é¢a"be aki-biamd Ictinike aké. Miya yan’ga a¢i” é¢a™be caki, And coming out reached home, Ictinike the (sub.). Raccoon pew having coming out I come they say home to you A-biamd. Hi"+! ciya™, Ictinike amé améda", 4-biamé. Gan‘ki Ictinike said (one) Oh! brother's Ictinike it is he who is said (one) And Ictinike they say. wife ~ moving, they say. é¢a*be akf-biama. Miyd yan’ga a¢ithé cag¢é te. Guidiha naji™i-ga, coming out reached home, Raccoon ies I who move I go home will. Further off stand ye they say. to you d-biamé. E¢a™be aki té‘di wé¢ig¢a™ gaxe g¢i-biamdé. Ata" Ama®™ yi said he, Comingout he when decision king hesat they say. How Idoto if they say. reached home him éga®é‘a" etéda™, e¢éga™ g¢i”-biama. At?é dixe yi-hna” timakad¢ etégat so Ido to him apt? thinking hesat they say. I die Imake if only Imake it casy apt 6 9 12 15 18 12 15 18 76 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. dha®, e¢éga"-biama. Ci égi¢e yaxe wi’ da"b4-biama. ypaxe da*ba-bi ega” } he thought they say. Again it hap- Crow one he saw they say. Crow he saw, they say havin pened é . . pons / ci Wajfbe-snéde wi” da"bi-biama. I gi¢e ¢aha”-biama. Kag¢ha, ¢a‘ean’- again Magpie one he saw they say. Tt ha he prayed to, they say. Friend, pity ye pened gi¢di-ga, Pwin’ka"i-ga, 4-biama. At’é dixe ta minke; @win’ka®-ba a™ ¢a- me, help ye me, Fr said he, they say. I die Imake will I who; help me and eat tdi-gi, 4-biamd. Wajin’ga b¢tiga-qti wéba®-bi ega™ di ahi-biama. Gan‘ki yeme, he said, they say. Bird all very called them, nae there arrived, they say. And they say Qi¢A ama cti &di ahi-biamaé. yaxe aké égi¢a"-biamad, Qi¢d ¢inké € wa- Eagle the too there arrived, they say. Crow the al to him, they say, Eagle the (ob.) that he (sub.) (sub.) kA-bi ega™: Kagcéha, mahi" pai aoni”, Weémab¢dzai-ga, a-biama. Gan‘ki meant, having: Friend, knife sharp you have. Rend it for us, said they say. And they say he nin’de ¢a"a a aka hé ¢a™ u¢d‘uda-biama. Sin‘de-q¢ti‘a ma*taja waci™ rump i the the skin the bitaholein they say. Tail | hollow within fat (sub.) (ob.) ¢a” wa¢iona g¢i”-biama. A™pa*, ¢ i hégaji ama, 4-biama. Gantki Héga the (ob.) visible sat they say. Elk, ni not a little, it arab, said he, they Buzzard say. ama-ona ceta™-hna® ahi-baji-biama. Kgi¢e Héga ama @'di ahi-biama. the only so far only ar- not they say. At length Basser the there arrived, they say. (sub.) rived (sub. Ci+ete! Ietinike, 4-biama Héga amaé. An‘kaji, kag¢ha, ¢ikii¢a-g ga, mab¢aza- Fie on you! Ictinike, said, they say Buzzard the (sub.). Not so, friend, hurry, rend gi. Mahi pai aoni” ha, 4-biama yaxe aka. An’kaji, Ictinike ¢@ ha, it. Knife sharp you have - said, they say Crow the (sub.). Not so, Ictinike itis d-biamé Héga amd Héga ¢ataji té’di Wajibe-snéde ma*téja-qtei upé ahi-bi said, they say, Buzzard the nied he ate when Magpie within very entered reached, (sub.). not they say ega™” waci™ ¢atd-biamd. Héga amd daja a¢a-bi ega™ igaska™¢a-biama. haying fat ate _ they say. eal the tothe went, they havints tried him they say. (sub.) head say [gaska™¢d-bi ega™ paq¢ige ¢agta- -biama, eé¢ectéwa™ ji ja”-biama Ictinike Tried him, they say having nostr: ls” they say, not heeding at all lay they say Ictinike aki. Kgi¢e icti-ha ké ¢aqté-biama, ci cé¢ectéwa™ji ja-biamad Ictinike ane Atlength eye-skin ene he bit they say again notheedingatall lay they say Tetinike (sub.). (0 aka. Nin‘dayi¢ica™ a¢d-bi yi waci™ hebé édf ¢a® ké ¢ata-biama Héga e Towards the rump went, they iy fat piece there thatwhich heate they say Buzzard (sub.). say was aki. Egi¢e u‘tide ya”ha ké‘di waci” hébe édi ¢a™ ¢acpa-biama Héga aka. the At length hole border by the fat piece there the ‘bitotfa they say Buzzard the (sub.). (ob.) piece (sub ) Kgi¢e, Win’ka-bi té, A™ pa” kéde, 4- biama. Egi¢e ma taj4-qtei upé ahf-bi It hap- They told the tie Ea it is, but, ae they say. At length within very entered reached, pened, they ay ega™ waci™ hébe ¢acpa-biama. “Teatba” upé ¢é yi a¢isandd-bi ega™ having fat piece bit offa they say. The second enter- went when squeezed with his having piece time ing hands, they say mang¢e naji-biama Ictinike aké A” onijuaji ega” éga*wi‘a" ta minke, erect stood they say Ietinike the You treated me ill having soIdoto you will I who, (sub.) ICTINIKH AND THE BUZZARD. an 4-biama Ictinike ak&. Kagéha, a™¢ictan’-g8, 4-biama Héga aka. Aha’, said, they say Ictinike the (sub.). Friend, let me go, said, they say Buzzard the (sub.). Yes, yaci wib¢icta®-maji ta minke, 4-biama Ictinike aké. Gan’‘ki ¢icta™ ¢é¢a- along Iletyougo Inot will I who, said,they say Ictinike the And let him go sent sud- while (sub.). denly biama yi nacki ¢a™ hiv’ ¢ingé’-qti-a" Héga, uontida-bi ega™. Ada” héga they say when head ene feathers ithad very Buzzard, the pullingout having. ‘Therefore buzzard (ob.) none nackf ¢a" hi” ¢ingaf, jide’-qti-a”. Ceta™. head He feathers has none, red very. So far. (ob.) NOTES. The Oto version of this myth, given by J. La Fléche, will appear hereafter in “The qoiwere Language, Part I.” 75, 2. mar¢im tega® catca™ beim ha. If tega” be inseparable, the meaning of it is “in order that, in order to;” and the whole phrase cair be rendered: ‘IT am always so, in order to go.” But if tega™ be a contraction of té and éga®, it must be translated by “T always go so.” In this case, éga”-ca*’ca" means ‘so forever, so always.” 75, 4. q¢aqti and hegactéwarji, pronounced q¢atqti, and he+gactéwarji. 75, 6. gagaqi. This word shows that the wood was hard, and that it must have been winter. Had it been warm weather, gayaci would have been used. 75, 7. we¢é ti-biama. “Biama” refers to the thought of Ictinike, and must not be rendered ‘it is said.” 75, 14. miya aka gafiga-bi ai he. She had perceived by the sense of hearing (taking direct cognizance) that he had said this, so she says “ai” instead of “a-biama.” But she did not learn by direct cognizance that he was large, she learned it indirectly, so she says “ganga-bi,” not “janga.” 76, 6. mahi" pai aoni®, “You have a sharp knife;” that is, his beak. Cf. the Winnebago name, Mahi®-no"pa-ka, Two Knives, of the Bird Family (Foster), and the (legiha, Mahi" ¢in/ge, No Knife. 76, 18. a"pa" kéde, an example of contraction and ellipsis. It is contracted from apa" ké, éde, referring to the past doubts of the speaker. The full form would be, a"pa" kéde-hna” ewéja ¢a’eti: “It was an Elk lying there, but I doubted it heretofore.” TRANSLATION. It came to pass that Ictinike was going (somewhere). And a Buzzard kept flying around. And Iectinike wished to go to the other side of the great water. He prayed to the Buzzard: “Grandfather, carry me on your back. Carry me on your back to the other side of the water.” “Yes,” said the Buzzard. ‘(I will carry you on my back.” And then he earried him on his back. When he carried him on his back, he searched for a hollow tree. At length he found a hollow tree. When he carried him thither on his back, the Buzzard kept on passing close to the hollow tree and tipping his wing. As he went tipping his wing, Ictinike said, “O grandfather! you will be apt to make me fall.” “This is the way in which I always go,” said the Buzzard. At length, when he had twist: d himself around, the Buzzard sent Ictinike down, down, into a hole (in the tree). And Ictinike, having been sent down headlong into the hollow tree, continued poor and very thin. And a great many lodges of a hunting party came thither. And 78 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. it happened that when the women found a hollow tree, they hit the tree, making it give forth the sound “gaqi.” And it happened that Ictinike sat inside the hollow tree, and he thought that people had come to get wood. And, as it happened, Ictinike had on some raccoon-skins. He made the tails appear in sight by thrusting them through the cracks of the hollow tree. And three women approached, and they struck the tree, making it give forth the sound “yaqi.” And they saw the tails. And (one) said as follows: “‘Stop! O husband’s sister! this is a lot of raccoons. I have found some raccoons for myself.” ‘*Oh! brother’s wife! Will you please give me one?” said (another). Said she, “Let us cut a hole in the tree.” At length they cut the tree, cutting a hole in it. It came to pass that Ictinike said as follows (in a hollow voice): “Tam a big Raccoon. Make ye it large around.” “Oh! brother’s wife! the Raccoon says he is big,” she said. And they made the hole in the hollow tree large around. And Ictinike came home again, in sight (7. e., into the open air, his native element). “Having a big raccoon, I come out to you, to my home (in the air),” said he. ‘Oh! brother’s wife! it is Ietinike (in motion),” said (one). And Ictinike got out again into the air. “I who have been a big raccoon will go home to you. Stand further off!” said he. (And the women fled.) When he had come out again, he sat forming a plan. He sat thinking, “What ought I to do to get even with him?” He sat planning. Thought he, “If I pretend to be dead, only thus shall I be apt to accomplish it easily!” And after this he saw a Crow. And having seen the Crow, he saw a Magpie. And then he prayed to them. “‘O friends, pity me and help me,” said he. “TI will pretend to be dead. Help me and eat ye me.” All the birds went thither, having been called. And the Eagle, too, went thither. The Crow said to him (meaning the Eagle), “Friend, you have a sharp knife. Cut him up for us.” And the Eagle bit a hole in the skin on the ramp. The fat was visible inside the ham. Said they, “It is the Elk; and he is very fat.” And the Buzzard alone had not yet reached there. At length the Buzzard arrived. “Fieon you! It is Ictinike,” said he. “No, my friend, hurry. Cut it with your knife. You have a sharp knife,” said the Crow. “No, it is Ietinike,” said the Buzzard. Before the Buzzard ate any, the Magpie entered, and went very far inside and ate the fat. The Buzzard went towards the head, and tried it. Having tried it, he bit the nostrils. Ictinike did not stir in the least. And when he bit the eye-lids, Ictinike lay without stirring at all. The Buzzard went towards the rump, and ate a piece of fat which was there. And at length the Buzzard bit off a piece of fat that was there by the edge of the hole. It came to pass that he said, “The truth was told. It is the Elk lying here, but (I doubted it at first).”. At length, having entered, he went very far inside, and bit off a piece of fat. When he entered the second time, Ictinike squeezed him and stood upright. ‘As you have injured me, so will I do to you,” said Ictinike. ‘“O friend, let me go,” said the Buzzard. ‘Yes, I will not let you go for a long time,” said Ictinike. And when he let him go suddenly, the Buzzard had no feathers at all on his head on account of their having been stripped off. There- fore, the buzzard has no feathers on his head; it is very red. The End. — IOTINIKH, THE BROTHERS, AND SISTER. 79 ICTINIKE, THE BROTHERS, AND SISTER. RELATED BY FRANK LA FLECHE. Ukfkiji dub4-biama, ijan’ge aké wésata™-biam’. Wakide-pi-qti- Brethren four they say, sister the (sub.) the fifth they say. Very good marksmen biam& ukfkiji dba amé. Ki ian’ge akd 4¢tiwAxe-hna”-biama. Ki they say brethren four the (sub.). And sister the (sub.) used to make theani- they say. And mals come by calling téqiwdgi¢d-biam4 wat aké. Ké, yinuhd, in’gahaf-a hé. Ga” gidha- she prized them they say woman the(sub.). Come, elder brother, comb for me é And ner combed or her biamé, gidonapa-qtci-biamé. Sadég¢e gidxa-biama, ki gaha _ i¢a™¢a- they say, combed very smooth they say. Scaffold Sines made for her, and on it they placed her for her they say, biamé. Ki wan'gi¢é-qti hAhayf¢é naji-biamd, man’dé ¢kina agi" they say. And every one making bimself stood they sae bows sufficient they had realy biam’. Ki watt akA ba®’-biamé, ki ci ba™-biam&é Weédab¢i’a® tédihi they say. And woman the (sub.) called they say, and again called they say. The third time occurred yi mana” cude wa¢iona-biama. pinuha, wacka™ ega™-i, ca-fi hé, when dust from treading visible they say. Elder anes make an effort do they arecom- . the ground ing to you 4-biama. Wéduba”™ tédfhi yi é¢a"be ati-biamé Ki Ictinike aka édi she said, they The fourth time occurred when insight they had come, And Ictinike the(sub.) there say. they say. naji”-biama. Egi¢e ati-biam4 wanfja amd ca” b¢iiga-qti, ¢ améga”, stood they say. At length had come, pak say animal the (sub.) indeed all Buffalo the Gen: A™pa™ amé, Laqti amd, ca™ b¢iga- biama. Ca”’-qti-ga™ t’éwa¢é naji™ Elk the (gabe ) Deer the (aab: ) indeed they say. All at once killing them they stood biamé. Ki can’gaxd-biama. Ga™ wacé’-qti g¢i”-biama. Kgi¢e umat’e they say. And they made anend they say. And tich very they sat they say. Atlength provisions té ¢asni” a¢a-biama. Ki iginu aké ‘Abae a¢é S¢a-biama wan sige. Ki the swallowed went theysay. And herelder the hunting togo spoke of, they say all And (ob.) brother (sub.) iinu na” aké: Nikaci"ga wi" ti taté ¢a™ja dada™-qti edé ctéctewa" herelder grown the one Person one come shall though what indeed he notwithstanding brother who: hither says that égi¢éga" ¢éckaxe te ha, d-biama. yinuha, an ‘ka-maji t& minke, beware you do it for him lest é he said, they say. 0 elder brother, I not so will I who, d-biama. Jyan’ge ¢inké uma™e giydxa-bi ega™ gia” at a¢a-biama. she said, they His sister he (ob.) provisions made forhisown, having leaving they went, they say. they say (their own) say. A¢d-biamé yi Ictinike aka ati-biama, tixesigi man’dé kéde a¢i™-bi, They went,they when Ictinike the (sub.) came they say, rd willow bow the (ob.) he had, ee say say, iq¢e-ma ma™jiha ké ugipi-g pi-qti a¢i”-bi. Wihé, indada™-qti edéhe is the (ob.) quiver the (ob.) very hehad, they Seconddaughter, what indeed Isay that say. ctéctewa® éga" im¢éckaxe te hia. Gia‘ean’gi¢a-gi, yucpdha. An‘kaji, notwithstanding 80 you do forme — will A Pity me, your relation, my grandchild. Not so 9 12 15 18 14 15 80 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. yigathd, ub¢f‘age hé, 4-biam& wai aka An‘kaji, yucpa, ¢a‘ean’gi¢a-ga. grandfather, Iamunwilling . said, they say woman the(sub.). Not so, grandchild, pity me, your relation. Ma” ¢été yéga-qti ayig¢icta” éde i¢dgig¢aska™ b¢e ka” bea. Ltti- - Arrow _ this (col.) new very I finished for myself but I try my own I wis Animals to come wackdxe-hna" amd. Ega™ gdxa-gi. Wa‘t ¢inké u¢i‘age ¢a™ja ca” you are myer tomaking they say. So do. Woman the (ob.) unwilling though yet them ¢acta”-baji-biama. Egi¢e ca”-ak& uhcki¢a-biamad wa‘t aka. In‘daké, he stopped not they say. Atlength after standing she lethim theysay woman the Let us see, talking awhile have his way (sub.). ingahe-& hé’ 4-biamé wa‘i aké. Ictinike aka gidha-biama. yi‘an’ki¢é comb for me a said, they say woman the (sub.). Ictinike the(sub.) combed for her, He made her ‘pet they say. herself ctéa”-bi ega™ of¢icta’-biamd. Sadég¢e gidxai té gaha g¢in’ki¢a-biama. even, they say having he finished they say. Scaffold FN at had been on it he made her sit they say. for her made for her Ki, Duba™ aba té’di atf-hna"i hé, 4-biama watt aka. In‘daké, ban-gi, And, Fourtimes I call when they usually come . said, they say woman the(sub.). Let us see, call, 4-biamd Ictinike ak& Ki wa‘i aka ba*’-biama. (lab¢ia® ba®™-bi said, they say Tetinike the (sub.). And woman the(sub.) called they say. Three times called, they when say ma™na”™-cude té wa¢fona-biamd. Hi"+! ca-fi hé, yiga"ha, wacka™ ega™-a dust from treading the visible they say. Oh! theyare . grandfather, make an do the ground (ob.) coming effort he’. Weéduba” tédihi yi égi¢e é¢a"be ati-biama. Kgi¢e ati-biama. 6 The fourth time occurred when ithappened insight they came, they Atlength they came, they say. say. Wakida-biama Ictinike aka. iq e ma™ ké wékida-biama, u¢ihuni He shot atthem, theysay Ictinike the (sub.). arrow the (ob.) he shiog at them =a wabbling they say, éga" i¢é¢a-biama. He-i! 4-biama Ictinike aké. Ca™ éga™-hna® wakidai like sentsuddenly, theysay. Why! said, they say Ictinike the (sub.). And so only heshotat them té mtiwaona™ naji”-biaméa. Egi¢e ma™jiha miuq¢u‘d-biama. Egi¢e when missing them he stood they say. At length quiver shotempty they say. It happened haci-qti Apa" niga wi™ jin’gaji’-qti édega™ ati-biama. Sadég¢e baqia¢a- at ae coy Elk male one notsmall very like, was came, they say. Scaffold ea down as’ biamé. Ki wa‘t pas hé ujaja ug¢a™ agi” dkidg¢a-biama. Ki égi¢e they say. And woman he (ob.) horn fork in between having he had gone homeward, And at length her they say. ivinn ama aki-biamé. Iyan’ge ¢inké ¢ingé té aki-biamé. Ugine ytiwi"xd- her the reached heme, His sister the (ob.) was none when reached home, Toseek his went about brother (sub. ) they say. they say. own bi ¢aja fgi¢a-baji-biamé. Egi¢e jingd-qtci ¢inké yan‘de A¢ité-qti they though he ea nothis theysay. It happened small very the one ground crossing by a say own who very near way ugine a¢d-biamé. qadhe jin’gaji’-qti édega™ 6’di ahi-biama. Ki é'di ene went they say. Hill smallnot very like, was there arrived, they say. And _ thero 1s own e¢i”-biamé. Ca™-qti-aké ci 8/di ja”-biamé. Egi¢e watt wi" xagdé hesat they say. After he sata great again there he lay theysay. Ithappened woman one erying while na‘a”-biamd. U¢ixidd-bi yiji nfkaci™ga cté wa‘ wa¢fona-bajf-biama. he heard theysay. Looking around for when person even woman visible not they say. them, they say ICTINIKE, THE BROTHERS, AND SISTER. 81 Ca” wi'a"wa téda® e¢éga"-bi ega™ u¢ixide-hna”-biamaé. Ci ja™-bi ¥f Yet which isit? thought, they say having he looked around they say. Again helay down, when repeatedly they say ei xagé na‘a”-biama. Kigi¢e iyan’ge ¢inké hi té fgidaha™-biama. h'di again crying heheard theysay. It happened his sister he (ob.) voice the i recognized they say. There (ob.) his own égaP-qti ya™ gi" ag¢a-biamd uq¢6'qtel. Aki-bi yi ii”¢e ¢anka tiwagi¢a- just so running he went homeward, very soon. He reached when hiselder the (ob.) he told them they say home, they say brother biamé. Ji®¢cha, wijan’ge xagé agina‘a” hia, i¢dgi¢s ag¢i ha. Hau! Ho! they say. Elder brother, my sister erying Lheardmyown . Ifoundmy Ihave own returned ké, Awagan’di ditte angaé¢e taf, d-biama. Ga” 6'di a¢d-biamé. Ga™ come, to the place where she may be let us £0, he said, they say. And there went they say. And maja” ¢an‘di_— ahf-biama égu ha, 4-biama isan’ga aka. Ké, land at the arrived, they say. Here c said, they say his younger the (sub.). Come, brother 4na‘a™i-gi, A-biamd. Ga™ dna‘a™-biama wan'gi¢e. Aha’, ¢ijan'ge listen ye to it, he said, ee say- And listened to it, they say all. Yes, your sister gan’de mataja agi” akfi etédega™ e ‘a angdxai ada™ ang¢ize taf eda™ Scare into having hereached should Tae how we do therefore wetake our may q her home but own a-biamd. Hau! ji®¢cha, ké, Aja" éga™ ite kégan-gi, 4-biama jingé-qtci he said, they say. Ho! elderbrother. come, you do so may come, do so, said, they say small very aké. Ahati! A&-biam4 na™-qtci aké, wiliga" ¢éga™ téqi Aakipa 8 ji the (sub.). Oho! said, they say. grown very the (sub.), my grand- thus trouble I meet father ¢égima” té é ha, A-bi ega” jatweti" agi” akama édega™ iti’-biama I do thus may said 4 hesaid, haying striking-stick that he had had, they say he hit with it, he they say they say yan’de ké. Ki na™ji®cké’-qtci ugdkiba jingé-biamé. Hau! kégan-ga, ground the(ob.). And barely he aoe acrack small they say. Ho! come, do so, by hitting 4-biam4. Ci édudta™ ta® é wakd-biamd. Ahati! 4-biama, wiyfga" ¢éga" he said, they Again next the him hemeant they say. Oho! he said, they my Pe thus say. (ob.) say, father téqi dakipa ky’j i ¢égima® té é ha, d-bi ega™ ja™wéti" agi” akama trouble I meet I do thus may aie A ue said, having striking-stick that he had ts) they say - édega® {ti®-biamé yan’de ké. Ki na™jitcké/-qtci ugdkibé-biama. Ci had, they he hit with it, ground the (ob.). And “barely mae a crack by hitting, Again say they say they say. wé¢ab¢i® aké ci éga™-biamd. Jingdé-qtci aka: Wiyiga® ¢éga” téqi dakipa the third the again sodid they say. Small very the My grand- thus trouble Imeet (sub.) (sub.) : father Vii ¢écima® té & ha, 4-bi ega™ ja®wéti® adi” akdma ddega™ iti*-biama ’ g if Idothus may said . he said, having striking- that he had had, they say he hit with it, he they say stick they say qan'de ké. Ki dahé ¢a™ ugdsné-qti i¢é¢a-biama. Kgi¢e wanfja ddda™ ground the And hill the he = lit altogether suddenly they say. It happened animal what (ob.). (ob.) by hitting b¢tiiga-qti wad¢a"ba-biama Kgi¢e yan'ge poles yijébeg¢a™ gaxd-bi-ta™ all made them appear, they say. It happened his Biscon he (ob.) door she had been made amd, & ké agean’ka"ha® ka™ta™-bi ega” ubdtihé¢a-bi-ta”-ama. ijit’ ¢e they say, arm the on each side tied, they say jivi ing she had been hungup they say. Your elder (ob.) as she stood brother 6 12 15 18 82 THE PEGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. méga" mi™ga niga eddbe-¢a"-¢a® tigactai-gi. Ga’ wakide naji’-biama. likewise female male also ofeach kind leave a remainder And shooting at stood they say. after hitting. them Ga™ wimuctai-ma ga™ ijdje wa'i naji'’-biama. Kgi¢e car qt © gan a And those who remained so name giving to they stood, they say. At length from shooting them , : : =i} Sata Va s : t 1 eénaki¢a-biama. Iyan’ge ¢inké ga”. g¢iza-biama. Ceta™, thoy exterminated them, His sister the (ob.) so he took his own, thoy So far. they say. say. NOTES. 82, 2.3. ca"qti ga" cenaki¢a-biama, Of course, this is not to be understood literally, as a male and a female of each kind had been spared. TRANSLATION. There were four brothers. Their sister was the fifth (child). The four brothers were very good marksmen. And their sister used to make the animals come by call- ing. And the woman prized her brothers. ‘Come, elder brother, comb my hair for me.” And he combed it for her; he combed it very smooth for her. He made a scaffold for her, and he put her on it. And all of them stood in readiness, having bows sufficient for (every one). And the woman called, and called again. When the third time came, a dust from trampling the ground was visible. ‘‘ Elder brother, exert yourself. They are coming,” said she. At the fourth time they had come in sight. And Ictinike stood there. And the animals came—all of them, the Buffalo, the Elk, the Deer—in short, they were all there. And just so they stood killing them. And they made an end of it. And they dwelt with plenty to eat. At length the provisions were decreasing. And all her brothers spoke of going hunting. And her eldest brother said, ‘‘Though a person shall come hither, no matter what he says, beware lest you do it for him.” ‘Elder brother, I will not be so,” said she. Having prepared some provisions for their sister, they departed and left her. When they had gone, Ictinike came, having a bow of hard willow, and a quiver full of reeds. ‘‘Second- daughter, you will please do for me whatsoever I say. Pity me, your relation, my grandchild.” ‘No, grandfather, I am unwilling,” said the woman. ‘No, my grand- child, pity me. I have finished these new arrows for myself, and I wish to try them. You are used to calling the animals, they say. So do.” The woman was unwilling, but still he did not stop talking. At length the woman let him have his way. ‘Let us see! Comb my hair for me,” said the woman. Ictinike combed it for her. Having even painted her (face and head) he finished it for her. He made her sit on the scaffold which had been made for her. And the woman said, “They generally come when I have called the fourth time.” ‘Let us see! Call,” said Ictinike. And the woman called. When she had called the third time, a dust from trampling the ground was visible. “Oh! they are coming, grandfather. Make an effort.” At the fourth time they came in sight. Atlength they came. Ictinike shot at them. He shot at them with arrows made of rushes that went wabbling. ‘ Why!” said Ictinike. And so he shot at them, missing them continually. At length he shot all out of the quiver. It happened at the very last that a very large Male-elk came. He pushed over the scaffold. He went homeward carrying the woman in the space between his horns. And at length her brothers reached home. They reached home when their sister was ICTINIKE AND THE DESERTED CHILDREN. 83 not there. Though they went all around seeking her, they did not find her. It came to pass that the youngest one went to seek her, making a very short cut across the country. He reached a very large hill. And he sat there. After he sat there a great while, he lay down there. It happened that he heard a woman crying. When he looked around, neither man nor woman was visible. Yet he was looking around, thinking “Which ean it be?” And when he lay down again, he heard the crying again. At length he recognized the voice of his sister. Forthwith he ran home very speedily. When he reached home, he told his elder brothers. ‘Elder brothers, I have heard my sister crying. I have found her and have come home.” ‘Ho! come, let us go to the place where she may be,” said they. And they went thither. And they reached the land. ‘It is here,” said their younger brother. “Come, listen to it.” And all listened to it. ‘Yes, he has taken your sister home into the ground, but how shall we do to get her back?” said they. ‘ Well, elder brother, do what may be in your mind,” said the youngest one. The eldest one having said, ‘‘My grandfather said that I should do thus when I got into trouble of this sort,” he hit the ground with a club that he had been carrying. And he barely made a small-crack. ‘Ho! come, do so,” he said, meaning the next brother. Having said “My grandfather said that I should do thus when I got into trouble of this sort,” he hit the ground with a club that he had been carrying. And he barely made a crack. And the third did so. The youngest having said, ‘“ My grandfather said that I should do thus when I got into trouble of this sort,” he hit the ground with a club which he had been earryirg. And the hill split suddenly in two from top to bottom. And it happened that by their blows they made all the animals appear. And behold, their sister had been made into a door: having been tied by her arms on both sides, she had been hung up. ‘ You and your elder brothers spare a male and female of each kind,” said the eldest brother to the rest. And they stood shooting them. And they gave names to those which remained after. the shooting. At length they exterminated them. They took their sister back to. The End. ICTINIKE AND THE DESERTED CHILDREN. NupDA"-AXA’s VERSION. Ma*tet wi" ta” wang¢a" e wégi¢ig¢a" akama_ ta” wang¢a" hégabaji. Grizzly bear one tribe that he was governing them, it is said tribe not a few. U¢uciaydqti yi akama. I"c‘age wi" Ma"tet agi” aki-biamé ga” cgi¢e Tn the very center pitched his tent, Old man one Grizzly bear having reached home, and at length they say. him they say ga-biamé: Cin’gajin’ga b¢tigaqti syigaxe ¢éwaki¢e taf, twagi¢d-gi, all said as follows, Children to play they will send them tell them — they say: A-biam&é Ma"tceti aké. Ga™ i¢éwaki¢a-biama. Cin’gajinga-macé yigaxe said, they say Grizzly bear the (sub.). And he sent them they say. Children ye who to play QD. 2) 9 15 18 84. THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. ¢éwa¢dki¢e te af A¢a u+! d-biama. Ga™ bgligadti yigaxe ad¢d-biama. you send them will he indeed halloo! he said, And fan play went they say. says they say. ‘Ligaxe a¢é-bi ega” Marten aké ite‘age ¢inké giba"-biama. Cin’gajin’ga To play went,they having Grizzly bear the oldman the (ob.) mabe him, they say. Children say (sub.) E alle tes . . wiutcije-hna™i ha; waa” ¢a tai éga” ¢éa"wan'‘ki¢ai. Waha™ tai, 4-biama. are troublesome to us : to abandon in order ahi we sent them away. Let them remove he said, they them say. Waha”™ wagaji-biamé. Wa¢adha" te ai a¢a u+! a-biama i"e‘age aka. Cat Toremove he commanded them, You are toremove he indeed halloo! said, they say oldman the (sub.). And they say. says ey) *n/. . . yi ké b¢tiga a™¢a e¢ihé¢a-biama, ga™ can’ge wai waki¢a-biamd. B¢tga lodge the all they threw down theirown sud- Ord horse they caused them to they say. All (ob.) denly, they say * carry the tents, &c, can’se Ag¢i"-biama. Sig¢é ¢ingé gaxd-biama. U‘é¢aqti a™ha-biama 4 ? 1 horse saton they say. Tra ane the “y made, they say. Scattering they fled they say very much cin’gajinga wéa™hd-biamd. LEgi¢e sig¢é ké wa¢iona tédihi u¢tihe binihé children they fled from them, At length trail the(ob.) visible when to follow feared, they say. they say e¢éga”™ éga™ u‘é¢agti wéa"hd-biama. Weéahide eyahi yi u¢éwinyi¢a-biamd, they as scattering very they fled from them, Far away arrived when they assembled themselves, thought much they say. there they say a / s : y Ada ujan’ge va" wa¢iona a¢af tédihi yi ga” yi-biama. qadzéqtci hi yi therefore road there is visible it went (oc¢urred) when a they pitched Very latein they when tents, they say. the evening arrived —~/ pe Vinee C © > , yigaxe amd can’gaxd-bi ega” é¢a™be ahi-bi yi égi¢e ukiz4-biama. players the (sub.) they ceased, they having insight theyarrived, when behold no onethere, they say. say they say Cin’gajinga xagé za‘e’qtia”-biama. pit¢iq¢ige ké aki-biama bgiiga. Ki Children erying made a great noise, they Old tent-sites the reached home, And say. (ob.) they say mi” jinga na”-éga" amd way ¢iona”i ké fki¢e-hna”-biamdé, yaya” ctl girl grown some- the (sub.) awl dropped the (ob.) were finding they say deer-sinew too what accidentally iki¢e-hna™-biama. Ki niyjinga amd cki¢e ama cttya ¢a™¢a” jukig¢a- were finding they say. And boy the (sub:) related to the by companies went with accidentally one another (sub.) one another biama, ja"¢a”ha gé égaxe i¢a™¢a-bi ega™, qide aji-biama, yf aka sata™hai they say ark ae nana they placed, having grass theyputon lodge the in five (scattered) they say much, they say, ; places ante Cy, hind Slee te dae 5 té jin’gaji-hna" gaxé-biama, uské‘qti-hna"’-biama. Kgi¢e mad¢e ama. the not small, asarule they made they ae very full asarule they say. At length winter they say. Nijinga na”ba na”-biamé. Kag¢éha, angi¢ide te, ma” anyfyaxe te, Boy two grown they say. My Secret let us two be together, arrow let us two make for ourselves, A-biamé. Man‘dé pahan’ga gaxd-biamé. Man’dé ké akiwa yig¢ficta™- said (one) they Bow before they made, they say. Bow the both they finished for say. themselves biama. Mahi"-si té gaxd-biamdé, g¢ébahiwi”-hna” gaxa-biama, a¢i™ taité they say. Arrow-head the they made, they say a hundred inalot they made, they say what tone) shall have ékina yiyaxa-biamd. Masa té gax4-biamd. Egi¢e bize amd. Ag¢a-biama _ asuflicient they made for them- Arrow- the they they say. Atlength dry they say. They Hood them quantity selves, they say. shaft made on, they say ICTINIKE AND THE DESERTED CHILDREN. 85 (ma™ca" té A¢askabe A¢a-biamé). Ki Ama ta™ eduata” pa-i té ug¢af té (feather the to stick they glued them And the the next sharp the heputin the on, they say). other (std. sub.) mahi®si té; g¢ébahiwi" ¢icta™i té. Gan/ki ci Ama ¢é Addai té, gan’ki ci arrow-head the; a hondred he finished. And again the one this he glued them ~ and again on mahi®si Ama ta" tig¢e g¢ir té. (icta”-biamé. Ki ma” ujf taité ha wi" arrow-head the other the putting hesat the. They they say. And arrow theyput shall skin one hem in finished them in si-biama. Akfwaha yiy4xe ¢icta’-bi ega” ma” té ugfji-biama. Ki they slit, they Both making for he finished, they having arrow the he put in hisown. And say. himself say thity say. gé-biama: Kagéha, ugdca” anga¢e te, 4-biama. Ga” a¢d-biama. Egi¢e hesaid as follows My friend traveling letus go _ he said, they say. So they they say. At length they say: went yi hégaji édedi ama. E’di ahf-biamé ugdhanadaze té’di. Ga™ can’ge lodge not a few there were, they say. There they arrived, they say darkness when. So horse wama”™ ¢a"-biama. (fe nikaci"ga uké¢i"-ma ikit’a¢ai éga™ yahawag¢e gaxi- they stolethem they say. This Indians the hate each other so shield made e eG ye a s Or a . . . . 77 biama; é cti ma®¢a™i té. FE yahdwag¢e itizé ¢ i¢A¢isande agi”’-hna’. Ga™ they say; that too they stole. That shield with it that by which it is they had as a rule. So held tight ag¢a-biamd. Can’ge-ma edabe wa¢i"-bi ega™, wa¢i® ag¢di-biama, Ahigi they went home- The horses also they had having, having them they went home- many ward, they say. them, they say ward, they say weénacai te Aki-biam4. Ki ntjinga na”-hna® gata’-ma can’ge ékindqti they took away They reached And boy grown only theonesthattall horse just a sufh- from them. home, they say. cient number wa‘-biamd. Ci mi™jinga-ma can/ge mi*gi wa‘i-biama Gan‘ki nujinga they gave them, Again girls the horse female they gave them, And boy | they say. they say. gatca”-ma can’geyajin’ga wa‘i-biama. _ Kag¢ha, ca”, A-biamd. Ga” the ones that high colt they gave them, them say. My friend enough they said, they say. And ‘no n/ #2 b: su Ter ani Oba } ate ‘di di ] Deyn en! * la wi'a” waja a¢a-bajl ca” jigaxe a ¢ai ahii-¢an'di é€di-hna" ca‘ca -biama. to what place they went not _ still playing abandoned reached, at the there only always they say. Kgi¢e mi¢e amd. Egi¢e 4é ati-biama Ki ¢e nujinga na” ba na™ ahi Atlength winter they say. At length buffalo has come, they And this boy two grown arrived say. aka akiwa wahitita™¢i® a¢i™7 té, ma” jiha eti a¢i™i té. Ga™ 4é-ma wénaxi¢a- the both bow they had quiver too they had. And the buffaloes they attacked (sub.) them biam4 Akfwa dtba-hna" t’éwa¢d-biama. Ga aki-biama, wai” ki¢é they say. Both four only he killed them, they say. And _ they reached home, they who cause they say to carry nijinga wa¢i? ahi-biamd. Ga" qiide yi Aé¢a*ba gixai ké ékina ug¢i™i té boy having they arrived there, And grass lodge seven made the inegual theysat when them they say. numbers in jantiya té uhd ud¢iqpagé agi-bi ca” dAhigi yangé téwa¢é ega™ yantiya fresh meat the following they let fall were return- in many great killed them having fresh meat (the camp ing, they say fact circle) yangd wa‘i-biama 4f ké wan’gi¢e. Ki ha ¢i" ci umi™je wa‘i-biama ¢ékina, great thoy gave them, lodge the every one. And skin the again bed they gave them, equally (quantity) they say (col. ob.) they say ki ci yaya™ ci ékina wa‘i-biama wn ké. andagain deer- again equally they gavethem, lodge the sinew they say (vol. ob.) 12 15 9 fa) 12 18 86 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. Ga” ci wandse ahf-biamé. Akiwa c&de-hna" t‘éwa¢d-biamd. Edthi And again tosurround they they say. Both six only killed them they say. Hence arrived tjawa-biamé. Ga™ jantiya ké fcé-qtia’-biamé. Ga™ yahénuya u¢ti¢ingé- in good spirits, they say. And fresh meat the richin very they say. And green hide those who is were left, ma wa‘fi té ha’ ci. Kgi¢e nugé te ama yi nuijinga amd ci na”ba without they gaveto . again. Atlength it wassummer they say when boy the again two them 5 (sub.) ¢ab¢i® e¢éba céta® na™-biamaé, ki watt akdé cti ¢kina ci na™i té Ki three ten so far were grown, the. = and woman the too inequal again were grown. And say, (sub.) numbers niyjinga na"hé aki ukfkid-biamé: Kagéha, na! uwag¢a angi’. Ankioga® boy two the they talked they say: Fria nd alas! sufferers we are. We take wives (sub.) with each other from each other tai, 4-biamd. Ga™ ¢é niyinga nag ba pahan’ga aka wa‘t na™ba yan’ gewata- will, they said, And this boy before the woman two had them for sisters they say. ; (sub.) biamdi. Ki ¢ akiwaha ki‘i-bi ega™ wag¢a-biamd. Ci ¢é ucté ama they say. And that both (oneither gave to they having they married they say. gain this the remaining side) theother say them ones kig¢ga™ waki¢a-biama. Ga™ é nugé té wan’gi¢e na™i éga” min’g¢a?-biama, caused them to marry they say. And that summer the everyone grown somewhat they took wives they say, one another e¢éba na” ba adta-biamé. Ki énaqtci 4f ké ficta® -bi e yé-ma ha gé jfha twenty beyond they say. And (they) only lodge the hed Po that the buffa- hide the skin- loes (pl. ob.) lodge gaxd-biamé, ucté ami ¢ yi té uské’qti ug¢i" LH na” —hfbaji-ma. they made, they say, the rest they lodge the very full they sat in, they say grown they who reached not. Kgi¢e ci nuda” ad¢d-biamé. Ki ¢é nijinga na"bé aké pahan’ga nuda” At length again on the they went, they And this boy two the before on the war-path say. : 0 war-path 5 if , o =i ° 5 ahi aké ci a¢a-biamad akiwa. Ci can’ge g¢éba-hiwi® na™ba wénaca-biama, went the again went, they say both. Again horse hundred two they snatched they say, ones who from them ga” ci wa¢i" aki-biama. Ci niyjinga-ma na”-ma ékindqti can’ge wa‘i- und again having reached theysay. Again the boys those whowere equally horse they them home grown gavethem biamd. Gan‘ki ci nijinga-ma ci éga™ can’ge wa‘i-biamd. Egig¢e ci they say. And again boys the again so horse they gave them, At length again they say. mi¢e amd. Ma¢e yi ci yé wakida-biamé. Niaci"ga min ‘oga” ami winter they say. Winter when again buffalo they shot at them, Bacar tools wives the they say. (sub.) wan gi¢e 4yé wakida-biam’. Ki édihi wan’gi¢e ug¢thi . éga"-biama, every one buffalo they shot at them, And hence every one had a sufficient some- they say, they say. quantity what umi”je gé wali @é, jaya”ha gé, ca” bgugaqti ca" u¢tihiwagi¢a-biama. bed the they gave the deer-sinew the in fact in fact caused them (their they say. (pl.ob.) them (pl. ob.), (pl. ob.), own) to have a suf cient quantity Gan‘ki ci ¢ méd¢e té wan'gi¢e kig¢a” waki¢a-biama ci. Ki édihi And again that winter the every one they caused them to they say again. And then marry one another ea” ¢ingé. Ca” nugé té. Gan’ki ci 4é wakidai té. Bédgagti yigea- what the there was And it was summer. And again buffalo they shot at them. dwelt in matter none. lodges . . es . Cs aes 1 . biamd, af ité¢a-biama, yf e@¢¢bahiwi® ki di ge¢éba-dé¢a*ba. Ga™ e¢i’- they say, lodge they putthemup, lodge a hundred and byit seventy. Thus they say they say, ICTINIKE AND THE DESERTED CHILDREN. 87 biamd. Egi¢e, Wednaxi¢ai hau, 4-biama. (iéaka na™bi aka yig¢ita?- it is said. At length, We are attacked ! they said, they This two the prepared for Bay. (sub.) battle biamé akiwa. gf té ugticiayigti wégaxd-biama. (Niyinga-hna® égi¢a™- they say both. Lodge the inthe very center they made for them, they say. (Boy only said it to ° : re , sls anaes . biamé, Hi¢uga gixai-da® ug¢ticiaja wégaxdi-ga, 4-biama ) Kgi¢e e they say, Circle made when in the center lodge make ye for us, they said, they Atlength that : say.) weénaxi¢ai ted. Egi¢e can’ge { katta™i-biamé. Akfwa @di a¢af té. they were attacked (as At length horse mouths were tied, they say. Both there they went. aforesaid). . . ‘Tt *n/ / . , Payne S oS . Weénaxi¢ai té. Ama aka wi" u¢a"-biama, vanki ci dma aké ei wi" uga’’- They attacked them. The the one heheld they say, ~ and again the the again one he held one (sub.) other (sub.) . a 3 aad ae Lek y ~~] ) biamd; akiwa nfja t¢a"-biamd. Gan ki wabdaze wa¢i" ad¢ai té ha’ ci. they say; both alive they held them, they say. And scaring them having them they went - again. Ci Amaaké ci wi” t’é¢a-biama, ci Ama aka ct wi’ té¢a-biamd. Cami’ ge- Again the the again one he killed, they say, again the the agaim one he killed, they say. Horses one (sub.) other (sub.) ma wénace-hna™-biama. Ca™qti gat na*ha” wa¢i"-biama. Gara Ke; the they snatchedfrom they say. Walking even till night they had them, they And, Come, them regularly say. ca” angéxe taf, d-biamé akiwa. Ga™ ak{-biama. Niaci"ga-ma t’éwa¢ai-ma let us stop, said, theysay both. And _ they reached home, Persons the those who were they say. killed . hore . . ° najiha mAwaqa”™-bi ega™ (ijawaqtia”-biamaé. Wa‘t ama u¢ica” watcigaxa- hair cut off they say having in very good they say. Woman the around in they danced of them spirits a circle biami. Gat aba g¢¢éba watefgaxe-hna” ca"eai te. Egi¢e daze hi ama. they say. And day ten they danced continually. Atlength even- it theysay. ing arrived, fkima™é¢@ ati hau, 4-biamA LEgi¢e Ictinike amé ama. & a qtiéga™ ; g qties Visitor hascome ! said (one), It happened Tectinike was the(mv.sub.). This head-man they say. re , v . yv , . ra . . v Gju yo awaté 4, A-biama. here, A-biamé. E/di ahi-biamé Ati ha, chief lodge where-the q he said, they This isit, they said, they There he arrived, 1 have come say. say. they say. kag¢ha, 4-biamé. Hau! ugi¢ai ga” windta® pi ha, d-biama. Ca* nti friend, hesaid, they say. Ho! you have been as Thear you Ihavebeen . he said, they say. And man told of (reported of) coming hni®, wacka™i-@i, kagéha, 4-biama. Ga, Jit¢cha, can’ge wi" wil, A-biama. you are, be ye strong, friend, he said, they And, Elder brother, horse. one Igive said (one), say. thee, they say. An‘kaji ha, kagéha, 4-biama. U¢itaga-biama. M a™jiha ké-hna” ma™ ké Not so, : younger he said, they He was unwilling, they say. Quiver the only arrow the brother say. a : , . ae . . qtaacé, i-biamé. Wab¢ite téga” aga ¢a® téqi ha, 4-biama. A®, 4-biama. L love, he said, they T eat in order to yougaveme the difficult - he said, they Yes, they said, they say. say. say. Ki ma® daxe t4é minke, 4-biamaé (Ictinike aki). Ma” g¢cbahiwi® na” ba And arrow Imake will I who, said, they say * (Ietinike the sub.). Arrow hundred two gaxd-biama, ¢icta”-biami. Akiwaha wa‘li té. Jit¢cha, ca” ha, 4-biama. he made, they say, he finished they say. Both he gave them. Elder brother, enough . they said, they say. Ga” wanice wag¢a-ki¢d-biama Tctinike. And police to go for them they caused Tetinike him, they say is) 12 12 18 88 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. Ga” wénaxi¢d-biamé. Ci Ictinike aké wi” t’é¢a-biamd, u¢a’’- And they were attacked, they saj. Again Ictinike the (sub.) one killed they say, he held him biama. Najiha hébe maqa" ¢izi-biama Ictinike aké. Wa‘ti ama they say. Hair part he cut off he took, they say Ictinike the (sub.). Woman the ré ¢ | n/ ] ; 4 I 1 ik ¢ 4 sibéati wax jan! | 1s 4 dcéd WwW equya- ma’ -Dlama. etinlkke ama “sa peqti yLyaxeqtia -Diama, ede he sang for regu- they say. Ictinike the (sub.) very black he made himself they say, fire them larly naq¢é naji¢a-biama biyiba-bi ega” isabéyi¢a-biamé. Ki é€ gadxe af, charcoal he caused to go out, he rubbed to having he blackened himself And that madeit they they say powder, they say with, they say. (one) say Ictinike ¢i”. Nikacitga uké¢i® fkita¢ai éga"™ téki¢ai té’di u‘ar’t‘a® Ictinike the (my. one). Indians they hate oneanother as they killone another when cause (blame) ag¢ai té Ictinike ak& ¢ naq¢é fsabéyi¢al, nag¢é iyi‘a™i té, é& garzd they as- when Ictinike the (sub.) that charcoal he blackened charcoal hepaintedhim- that taught cribe to (one) himself with, self with, (one) . a 7 5 o. e? 5 a pee ° aké-biama, ai. Ga"-biama dji-¢a™¢a" jut‘a i té, ki gf Aji-¢a™¢a™ ¢i- the one who, itis they In the course of different ones matured, and lodge differentones were said, say. time, they say man g¢ai té, hégactéwa™ji, g¢ébahiwiyan’ga na™bé-biama cin’gajin’ga set up a great many, thousand two they say children waa ¢aii ama. Kgi¢e ga-biama Ictinike: Kagé, 4-biamé, fkima™ ¢i? they were the (sub.). Atlength said as follows, Ictinike : O younger he said, they say, as a visitor abandoned they say brother, b¢é tai minke, 4-biamé. Ki, Ji"¢¢éha, Awakéja hné te, 4-biamaé. A*ha"™ ) ’ ’ ? ’ Igo will I who, he said, they And, Elder brother, whither you go will, they said, they Yes, say. say. ca™ ga” b¢é tai minke, a-biamd. Ga" niaci"ga u¢éwi"wa¢d-biami. just because Igo will I who, he said, they say. And person they assembled them they say. I wish it (ié¢inke nijinga natbA akdé a” qtiéga™ aki é wémaxai té Ké, nijinga This one boy two the head man the that they were ques- Come, boy (sub.) (sub.) (they) tioned. na™-hna™ ¢éma @’be i¢adi¢e-hna”i eté yi, Mwi™¢ai-ga, 4-biamd Ictinike grown only these who each has for a father ought, tell ye to me, said, they say Tctinike aka. Ki ga-biama, na” na"ba aka: Wi cti imdddi ga” ¢inkd, ijaje the And said as follows, grown two the (sub.): I too my father is such a one, name (sub.). they say, g¢ada-bi ega”. Ki ucté ama gé-biamé: Wia™ baha®-baji-ctéa™i, A-biama. called his, having. And remainder the said as follows, We do not know at all, they said, they they say (sub.) they say: . say. Ictinike ama a¢a-biamai Ga” uta”nadi-hna” ja™i té Ca™ a™ba¢éga™ Ictinike the went they say. And in a place regu- he slept. And as it was day (sub.) between larly u¢tiag¢e duba ja” ca” qti ga” na™ha”-biamda. A”ba wésata™ ja” té throughout four (day) sleep he walked even till night they say. Day the fifth sleep the édi ahi-biamaé qfi ¢an’di A™gqtiéga™ yf té Awaté, A-biamd. Cdhite, there arrived, they say lodges the (circle) at. Head-man lodge the where-the, hesaid, they say. Yonder it is i-biama. Edi ahi-biamdé. [kima™¢i" ati hau 4-biamé ni wi. Ga", they said, they There he arrived, they Avisitor hehascome ! said, they say man one. And, say. say. = ny : . . . . fue > Ké, fu¢a égan-ga, 4-biamd. ji Akicugdqtia’’-biamd égaxe i¢a™¢ai té. Come, do tell the news, they said, they Lodge very thick they say around in they were put. say. a circle . . y cs . . , A™ha®, A-biamd, niac@ea d‘iba édf amd hi, 4-biamé. Niaci®ga d‘iba Yes, he said, they say, people some there were, he said, they say. People some it is said ICTINIKE AND THE DESERTED CHILDREN. 89 eska™ wa¢da®hnat, 4-biamé. A™ha®™, 4-biamd, niaci"ea d‘iba ein’ eajinega 9 ? ? D to) 4} 5 it may be you abandoned them, he said, they Yes, they said, they person some children Say. say, d‘iba a®wan’gia™¢ai. Ki Ma™tei aki wegdxai, na”a™wa"pal éga” éga"- some we abandoned ourown. And Grizzly bear the he did it for us, we feared them as so (sub.) (the Bear) win gaxal, a-biama. Niaci"ga na”ba a™qti¢ga" akA dma ¢dta aka 3 we did it to them they said, they say. Person two head-man the (sub.) the left- the (the children) one handed (sub.) ha, 4-biamé. Ki a™qtiéga" ak& e,4-bi 4-biamé. Ce wiwija, 4-biama. he said, they Aud head-man the (sub.) his he said, they That my own, he said, they say. say. say. Tha” ak&i xagé-biamd u¢i¢ai yi. Ki ci dma a™qtidga" aka ci ed His the (sub.) cried they say they toldof when. And again the head-man the again his mother her own other (sub.) akima. Ga™ ¢ cti ci, Ga ¢inké wiwfja, 4-biamé. Ictinike gaf té: 6 was, they say. And he too again, Such aone my own, he said, they say. Ictinike said as follows: Watt wi” ga” ¢inké, 4-biamaé Ga™ xagé za‘é’qtia’-biama wagina‘a™ i té. Woman one such a one, he said, they And erying they made a very great when they heard of say. noise, they say their own. Ga”, Dttba ja” yi ag¢é t& minke, 4-biamd Ictinike ak4. Ena ja™ And, Four sleep when I go will I who, said, they say Ictinike the (sub.). That sleep homeward many té'di ag¢ai té. Ag¢ai teé’di gd-biamd: Gaq¢a” ¢ikui, 4-biaméa. A™ba 9 when he went home- He went when he said as follows, To move they have said he, they Day ward. homeward they say: camp invited you say. dé¢a™ba ja” té é'di cf ta-bi éska"™ e¢égati, 4-biamd Ictinike aké. Ga™ seven sleep the there you will it may be they thought, said,they say Ictinike the (sub.). And come waha™-hna’i té. A™ba ddé¢a"ba ja” té dna ja” té kange-qtci ahfi té. they removed. Day seven sleep the that sleep the near very they arrived. many (when) Ietinike amd aki-biam&i Gd-biamd: Kaeé, 4-biamaé, 1 ¢a-maji, kagodé, 12 tie) ? ’ Tetinike the reached home, He said as follows, Younger said he,they Iam sorrowful, younger (sub.) they said. they said : brother said, rother, A-biamnd. A™, jit¢cha, indida® ¢i"te iwi" ¢ahna eté yi, 4-biamé. A™ha?, said he, they Yes, elder brother, whatever it may be you tell me ought, he said, they say. Yes, say. ¢iadi a” qtiéga" te yi ca™ nikaci"ga wi” bégi¢éqti ¢inkd, A-biama, fe té your was head-nan when yet person one agreat stranger the one said he, they word the father who say, éna‘a® éga™ ¢ia™ dai té pfiji gixai. (fa‘éwidai akfwa, 4-biama. Akfwa 15 listened to as he abandoned when bad he did. I pity you both, said he, they say. Both for him you nan‘de-u¢ati éga" daman’g¢e g¢i”-biamé. Win’ke inahi® dha", e¢éga® heart hemadepain as with bowed head they sat they say. He tellsthe indeed ! thinking by talking truth g¢i’-biama akiwa. Ha” ama. Ietinike giba™ i¢d-biamd ¢ata aka. sat they say both. Night was, they Ictinike to callhim had gone, they left-handed the say. say (sub. ). Jim¢cha, f-gi ha, A4-biamd. Ki é’di ahf-biamaé. A™ha®, 4-biama. (isan’ga 18 Elder brother, come 0 he said, they And there he arrived, they Yes, said he, they our younger hither, . say. say. say. brother agimane¢in’-ga, 4-biama. (Pigéha" &di hné te, 4-biamé. A™ha”, 4-biama. begone for him, he said, they our wife's there you go please, said he, they Yes, said he, they v Say: brother say. say. Ki @'di a¢af té. Iu’di ahi-biamé. Ga™, Wii’ ¢e, ahaha, fe te¢a™ nan‘de- And there he went. There he arrived, they And, My elder O sister's hus- what he has heart say. brother band, spoken 15 18 90 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. i”pi-maji, 4 biamé. U¢tida™bd-ga, 4-biama. A™ha™, éga™, 4-biama. Ga” forme sad, said he, they say. Consider it, said he, they say. Yes, so, said he, they say. And = : / / 2 ti tédfhi yi angdxe té, 4-biamd. Ga" a”ba ama. Ictinike aka dahaja theyar- itoccurs when let us do it, said he, they say. And day was, they Ictinike the to the bluff rive here say. (sub.) a¢di-biama. Egi¢e aki-biamé Kagé, gaq¢a” amé a-{ amd ha, 4-biama. went, they say. At length he reached home, Younger none who are moving are coming he said, they they say. brother, their camp hither sily. e —~ s L , — Ati yi-biamd, watecicka ag¢an’ka"ha™ yi-biama, hu¢uga yanga¢eha. Ca” They and pitched tents, creek on both sides they pitched tribal cirele — extended over a And came they say, tents, they say. large piece of land. niaci" ga ama. cin’ gajinga igidaha”™ ama ati yf- -bi ega™ ca™ cin’ gajinga ugine Senna the child they who knew their came Bile hed ne wing and seeking (sub.) own tents, they (their) own say . . . . psec ma¢i™” ega™ kitiqpag¢e ma*¢i’-biama. Egi¢e niyjinga na™ba aké giku walked having moving back and they walked, they say. At length — boy two the toinvite forth among themselves one who them ahi-biamé. Mattei ¢fkui ha, 4-biamd. A¢é-baji-biamdé. Egi¢e watt wi" arrived, they say. Grizzlybear invites . said, they say. They did not go, they say. Atlength woman one you ahi-biama. Wici‘e+, ¢ikui hé, 4-biamé. yfaya f-gi ha, 4-biama. Ga™ arrived, they say. My sister's you are . shesaid,they say. Tothe come : he said, they say. And husband, invited lodge Hadi g¢in’ki¢i-biamé wat ¢inké. Egi¢e ci wai wi" ati-biamé. Oi in the ie caused her to sit, theysay woman the (st.ob.). Atlength again woman one came,theysay. Again lodge égi¢a”’-biamé: Wici‘e+, ¢ikui hé, 4-biama. Lfaja f-ga ha, 4-biama. Ga™ said to him, they say: My sister's youare . said, they say. Tothe come . hesaid,they say. And husband ‘invited lodge yadi g¢in’ki¢i-biamé wa‘t ¢inke. Ga™ g¢cki¢abaji té ha ci. Egi¢e ci inthe he caused her to sit, they woman the (st.ob.). And hedidnotcauseherto . again. At length again lodge say go homeward ha“ ega™tce ga’-éga" té yi_ci_ wi” ati-biama. Ci égi¢a’-biama: Wici‘e+, morning alittle while was when again one came,they say. Again said to him, they say: My sister's husband, ¢ikui hé, 4-biamé. piaja f-ga ha, 4-biamd. Ga™ yfadi g¢in’ki¢4-biama you are . shesaid,they say. Tothe come . he said,they say. And in the he caused her to sit, they invited lodge lodge say wait ¢inké, é dita aké-biamé, gikui aki; ki a¢d-béji-hna”-biama. Egi¢e woman the that left- it was they say, he who was - and he went not asarule they say. At length (st. ob.), handed he invited ; wéduba ¢inké ati-biamé. Wici‘e+, ¢ikui hé, 4-biamaé. fara f-ga ha, the fourth the one who came, they say. My sister’s you are . she said, theysay. To the come husband, invited lodge d-biamd. Ga™ qadi g¢in’ki¢d-biamd wa‘t ¢inké. Ki ¢égi¢e tWugti amé he said, they And inthe he caused hertosit,they woman the (st.ob.). And atlength real prin- the one say. lodge say cipal who was ati-biaméa Ma"tci ami. Wahndte téga™ ¢ihan’ga ama ag¢igiti ¢a™cti, came, they say Grizzly bear the You eat in order your wife’s the came for heretofore, (sub.). that sister (sub.) you i-biama — Ietinike aké da™ béqti g¢i"-biama, qta¢a-baji-biamé. Ga™ ag¢é- hesaid, they say. Ictinike the seeing him sat they say, he loved him not, they say. And went (sub.) plainly homeward . A . S , . . =) . as o . biama Egi¢e ci ati-biamé. Kagé, ¢ihan’ga giwaki¢égan-ga, 4-biama they say. At length again he came, they say. wounee: your pate do cause them to come. said, they say rother, sister Ictinike ak’. Weé‘e pa-f agi’ cde é¢a"be ahf-biama ga”, Mang¢in’-ga, Tetinike the (sub.). Hoo sharp had but insight arrived, they say and, Begone — ICTINIKE AND THE DESERTED CHILDREN. 9] j-biama. Na! edta™ Ada®, 4-biam4 (Ma"tet aka). A™ha®, ca” mang¢in’-ga, said, they say. Why! wherefore? said, they say Grizzly bear the Yes, still begone, (sub.). . “ . . a7 . , . . . fi-biaméa Egi¢e isan’ga é¢a"be atfi-biamd, ¢ata aka wahuta®¢i" ag¢a¢i"-bi he said, they At length his younger in sight came, they say, left- the gun (bow?) had his own, they say. brother handed (sub.) say x a . ‘ . . . 1 . =a] ega”. Ama aka ci é¢a"be ati-biamd wahtita"¢i" ag¢a¢i?-bi ega™. (ihan’ga having. The other one again insight came, they say gun (bow) had his own, they having. Your wife's say sister wit ha, 4-biam4 Mateti aka (¢ata ¢inké ¢ waké-bi ega™). Ci ama aka I give . said, they say Grizzly bear the (lett- the (ob.) that he meant, having). Again the other one to you (sub.) handed they say s C . , S . xl qs / yu‘e’ a-f-biamé. Ma"teti amé a”he a¢a-biama. Ki Ictinike aké @di yu‘é witha was coming, Grizzly bear the fleeing went they say. And Ictinike the there with a rush they say = (sub.) (sub.) rush a¢a-biama. Nagki ¢a® gaqix i¢é¢a-biamd. Yu! ya! 4-biama. (Wawéqta ¥ went they say. Heid the hecrushedin sud- they say. Yu! ‘yu! said, they say. (They abuse when (ob.) denly ea™-hnati, i-biama ) Ga" can’ge wagika"ta"-biamd. Wena ca" ati = 4i- thus it is, it is said, they And horse they tied their they say. Toask in fact came pitched say.) for them tents , (Pen OT COE Es ae : Qa 2 , Uf es VQ RO , ma e ein gajinga wagia be ti-ma e cenawace qtia -biama. the ones that child — to see theirown those that they fully exterminated they say. who who came them NOTES. Nuda?-axa said this myth was “first told by Indians living west of Nebraska.” 83, 1. hegabaji, pronounced he+gabaji by Nuda™axa. 84, 1. b¢ugagti, pronounced b¢u+gaqti by Nudataxa. 84, 9. ujange ta" wa¢iona a¢ai tédihi yi ga" yi-biama. Though the people scattered and went in all directions to avoid pursuit, all had some idea of the location of the place of meeting. So the members of each party changed their course by and by, making a considerable detour. And whenever any party came across the trail of others, leading in the right direction, they kept in it for the rest of the way, pitching their tents in it, 84, 9. dazéqtci, pronounced datzéqtci by Nuda*axa. 84, 19. egi¢e bize ama. The arrow-shafts were wet when made. 85, 3. 4ma ta" ug¢e g¢i" té. The text is given just as dictated by the narrator; but “ta",” which denotes a standing animate object, can hardly agree with the follow- ing verb. Hence the collector thinks that “¢inké” (“the sitting animate object,” or “the one sitting,”) should have been used. 85, 6. hegaji, pronounced he+gaji by Nuda™axa. 85, 8. yahawag¢e itizi e i¢a¢isande a¢i*-hna%i. That is, the quivers of the foe; i¢a¢isande refers to the quiver-straps. 85, 15. wahuta"¢i, “the roaring weapon,” generally means a gun; but here it is a synonym of “mande,” a bow. See myth of the Orphan and the Water-monster with seven heads. 85, 16. watinki¢é nujinga, etc. Those boys who remained at home took out ponies when they went to meet the hunters. And they aided them by putting the packs of meat on the ponies, and leading the latter back to the camp. 86, 9. g¢ebana"ba ata-biama . . yiha gaxa-biama.—LHach of these married men had a skin-tent of his own; but the unmarried ones dwelt in the communal lodges of their respective gentes. _ 92 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. 87, 14. nu hni", wacka"™i-gi. Ictinike is asking a favor of the two young chiefs. 87, 17. wab¢ate tega™ a™¢a‘i ¢a™ teqi hi. This is a puzzling sentence to F. La Pléche, as well as to the collector. Iectinike asked a favor. They offered him a horse, which he refused, saying that he cared for nothing but a quiver and arrows. Perhaps he then reconsidered his decision, saying, ‘What you have offered me (a horse), in order that I might get my food, is precious,” or “ difficult to obtain.” They assented to this. Then he made each of them a present of a hundred arrows in return for the horse. (2) 88, 3-6. Ki e gaxe ai . . e ga"ze ake-biama ai. A parenthetical explanation of the origin of the war-custom of blackening the face. 88, 7. hegactéwa*ji, pronounced he+gactéwa*ji by Nuda®axa. 89, 7. wa‘u wi" ga™¢inke. Ictinike described the difference of features, hair, etc., as he did not know the names of the children. 89, 9. gaq¢a® ¢ikui. Ictinike pretended that the deserted children had sent an invitation to their parents. 89, 14. nikaci"ga wi* begi¢eqti ¢iike, 4-biama. The “a-biama” should be omitted in translating, as ‘“nikaci"ga” is the object of the following verb, éna‘a®, 90, 6. kiugpag¢e ma*¢i", equivalent to ubésnesne, refers to members of two parties meeting and intermingling, when distant from the spectator or speaker. TRANSLATION. A Grizzly-bear was the ruler of a tribe that was very populous. He pitched his tent in the very center of the tribal circle. The Grizzly-bear took an old man home, and said as follows: ‘Tell them to send all the children to play.” And he sent them. “He says that you are to send the children to play!” said the crier. And all went to play. Having gone to play, the Grizzly-bear called the old man. ‘The children are troublesome to us. We sent them away in order to abandon them. Let them remove the camp,” said he. He commanded them to remove. ‘He says that you are to remove!” said the old man. And they struck all their tents suddenly, and they made the horses carry them. All rode horses. They made no trail. Scattering, they fled; they fled from the children. As they were apprehensive that the children would follow in case the trail was plain, they scattered very much when they fled from them. They were caused to assemble when they reached a place far away. Therefore when they arrived where there was a road that went along plainly, (there) they pitehed the tents. When it was very late in the afternoon (or, quite dusk), the players, having stopped, came in sight of the former camping-place. Behold, no one was there. The children made a great noise crying. All arrived at the old tent-sites. And the girls who were somewhat grown, went abont finding awls that had been dropped, and deer-sinew also. And the boys that were related to each went together in their respective companies. Having placed the scattered bark around in a circle, they put grass on it, forming a lodge. They made the lodges large, and in five places. They were very full. At length it was winter. Two boys were grown. “Friend, let us two be together, and let us make arrows for ourselves,” said one. They made bows first; each one finished a bow for himself. They made arrow-heads, a hundred in a lot. They made for them- selves a sufficient quantity for each one to have. They made arrow-shafts. At length they were dry. They glued them on (they glued feathers on so as to stick). And ICTINIKE AND THE DESERTED CHILDREN. 93 the one next put the sharp pieces, the arrow-heads, in the ends of the arrow shafts; he finished a hundred. And then the one glued on the feathers, and again the other sat putting the arrow-heads in the ends of the shafts. They finished. And they slit a skin from one end to the other, for quivers. When each had finished making a quiver for himself, he filled it with arrows. And one said as follows: ‘My friend, let us go traveling.” And they went. At length there were a great many lodges. They arrived there when it was dark. And they stole horses. These Indians hated each other, so they made shields. Those, too, the two boys stole; and with them they took the quivers and quiver-straps. And they went home. They also took the horses home; they took many from the foe. They reached home. And they gave just a sufficient number of ponies to the grown boys who were that tall (7. ¢., about four feet). And they gave the mares to the girls. And to the boys who were that high (i. é., about three feet), they gave colts. ‘Friend, it is enough,” said one. And they went to no place; they were always at the place where they arrived when they had been abandoned at play. At length it was winter. It happened that the buffa’ses came. And these two boys who had reached manhood had bows and quivers. And they attacked the buffaloes. Hach one killed four of them. And they reached home, the boys who caused the ponies to carry the meat having gone thither to meet them. And as the people sat in equal numbers in the seven grass lodges which they made, the hunters followed the camp circle, distributing the fresh meat, and were coming back to the other end of the circle. And as they had killed a great many buffaloes, they gave a great quantity of fresh meat to every lodge. And they gave the skins equally, for beds; and they gave to the lodges equal shares of deer-sinew. And they went again to surround the buffaloes. And each (chief) killed six. Hence they were in good spirits. And they were very rich in fresh meat. And they gave again to those who had been left without green hides. It came to pass when it was summer, that two, three, or ten of the boys were grown by that time, and an equal number of the women were grown. And the two boys talked to each other. ‘Friend, alas! we are sufferers. Let us marry.” And these two leading boys had two sisters. And each boy having given his sister to the other boy, they married them. And they caused the rest to marry one another. And that summer, all who were somewhat grown took wives, twenty-odd. And they alone made lodges, they made skin-lodges of buffalo hides; the rest who were not grown, dwelt in the lodges that were very full. At length they went on the war-path again. And both of these two boys who went before on the war-path, went again. And they took two hundred ponies from the foe, and brought them home. And they gave equal shares of the ponies to the grown boys; and so they gave ponies to the smaller boys. At length it was winter again. When it was winter, they shot at the buffaloes. All of the persons who had taken wives shot at them. And hence every one had a sufficiency of the beds which were given and of the deer-sinew, in fact, they caused them to have a sufficiency of all. And that winter they caused all the rest to marry one another. And after that there was nothing worthy of note. And it was summer. And they shot again at the buf- faloes. All dwelt in upright lodges; they set up lodges, a hundred and seventy. Thus they dwelt. At length it was said, “‘We are attacked!” These two prepared themselves for battle. The lodges had been made for them in the very center. (The boys had said it to the people: ‘When ye make the circle, make ye lodges for us in 94 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. the center.”) At length they were attacked, as has been said. At length the horses’ mouths were tied with lariats. Both went thither. They attacked the foe. The one took hold of one foe, and the other took hold of one; both took hold of them alive. And they scared them, driving them away. And the one killed one foe, and the other killed one. And they chased them even till night. ‘‘Come, let us stop,” said both. And they reached home. Having cut off the hair of those whom they killed, they were in good spirits. The women danced around in a circle. And they danced continually for ten days. At length it was evening. ‘A visitor has come,” was said. It happened to be Ictinike. “Where is the lodge of the principal head-man of this tribe?” said he. ‘This is it,” said they. He arrived there. “I have come, my friends. Well, as you have been reported (=famous), I have been coming to hear you. And you are men. Be strong, my friends,” said he. And one said, “O elder brother, I give you a horse.” “No, younger brother,” said Ictinike. He was unwilling. “TI love only the quiver and arrows. It is difficult to get my food with what you have given me.” “Yes,” said they. And he said, “I will make arrows.” He made two hundred arrows; he finished them. He gave them to both. “Elder brother, it is enough,” said they. And they made Ictinike a police servant, one to go on errands, or to act as crier. And they were attacked. And Ictinike killed one; he took hold of him. Ictinike eut off part of his hair, and took it. He was accustomed to sing for the women-dancers. Ictinike made himself very black; he caused the fire-brands to go out, and rubbing them to powder, he blackened himself with it. And they now say that Ictinike was he who originated it. Of Indians hating one another, when one kills another, they ascribe the blame to Ietinike: as Ictinike blackened himself with charcoal, painting himself with charcoal when he killed a person, it is reported, they say, that he was the one who taught it. In the course of time different ones matured, and different lodges were set up, a great many; the children who had been abandoned were two thousand. At length Ictinike said as follows: “My younger brothers, I will go as a visitor.” And they said, - “Whither will you go?” “Yes,” said he, “I will just go because I desire it.” And they assembled the people. And these two grown boys who were head-men were questioned. Ictinike said, “‘Come, tell me who are the fathers of the boys who are grown.” And each of the two grown ones said as follows: “My father is such a one” (describing his features, dress, etc.), having called his name. And the rest of them said as follows: ‘‘We do not know at all.” Ictinike departed. And he slept each night in an uninhabited place. And when it was day, he walked throughout the day, he walked even till night, for four days. On the fifth day he arrived at the circle of tents. ‘Where is the lodge of the head-man?” said he. ‘ Yonder it is,” they said. He went thither. “A visitor has come!” said a man. And they said, “Come, do tell the news.” The tents were standing very thick; they were put around in a circle. “Yes,” said he, ‘some people were there; it may be that you abandoned some people.” “Yes,” said they, “‘we abandoned some people, some of our children. And the Grizzly- bear caused it for us; we feared him, so we did it to them.” He said, “‘One of the two head-men is left-handed.” And the chief said that he was his. “That is mine,” said he. The mother cried when they told her about him. And the other one was the other chief’s son. And he too said, “Such a one is mine.” Ictinike said as fol- lows: ‘‘One woman was such a one.” (And so he described the others.) And when they heard of their own children, they made a great noise by crying. And Ictinike ils ICTINIKE AND THE DESERTED CHILDREN. 95 said, “In four days I will go home.” And in so many days he went home. When he went home, he said as follows: “They have invited you to move your camp, and come to them. They hope that you may come in seven days.” And they removed. And in seven days they had arrived very near. Ictinike reached home. He said as follows: “My younger brothers, Iam sorrowful.” ‘Yes, elder brother, you ought to tell me, whatever it may be,” said one of the two. ‘Yes, when your father was head-man, he listened to the words of a total stranger and abandoned you, doing wrong. I pity you both.” As he made the hearts of both pain by his words, they sat with bowed heads. Both sat thinking, ‘‘ He tells the very truth!” It was night. The left-handed one had gone to call Ictinike. “Elder brother, be coming hither,” said he. And he arrived there. “Yes,” hesaid. ‘Begone for your younger brother,” said the head-man. He said, on reaching the lodge of the other, ‘¢ You will please go to your wife’s brother.” “Yes,” said he. Andhe went thither. He arrived there. And the left-handed one said, “O sister’s husband, my heart is sad on account of what my elder brother has spoken. Consider it.” “Yes, it is so,” said the other. And he said, ‘‘When they shall have come, let us doit.” And it was day. Ictinike went to the bluff. At length he reached home. ‘My younger brothers, they who have moved their camp are coming,” said he. They came and pitched their tents; they pitched their tents on both sides of a creek, the tribal circle extending over a large tract of land. And the people who knew their own children came and pitched their tents. And as each one continued to seek his child, they were constantly moving back and forth among themselves in the distance. And they arrived to invite the two boys toa feast. ‘The Grizzly-bear invites you,” said they. They did not go. At length a woman arrived. ‘ My sister’s husband, you are invited,” said she. ‘Come to the lodge,” said he. And he made the woman sit in the lodge. At length a woman came. And she said to him, ‘“ My sister’s husband, you are invited.” ‘Come to the lodge,” he said. And he caused the woman to sit in the lodge. And again he did not send her home (7. ¢., her, too, he did not send home). And at length, when some of the morning had passed, again came one, and said to him, “ My sister’s husband, you are invited.” ‘Come to the lodge,” said he. And he made the woman sit in the lodge. He who was invited was the left-handed one; and he made it a rule not to go. At length the fourth one came. ‘ My sister’s husband, you are invited,” she said. ‘Come to the lodge,” said he. And he made the woman sit in the lodge. And at length the Grizzly-bear came. ‘Your wife’s sisters have come for you heretofore,” said he. Ictinike sat, seeing him plainly; he did not love him. And the Grizzly-bear went home. At length the Grizzly bear came again. “My younger brother, cause your wife’s sisters to be coming,” said Ictinike. He had a sharp hoe, and he came in sight. And he said to the Grizzly-bear, ‘“‘ Begone.” “Why! wherefore?” said the Grizzly-bear. “Yes, nevertheless begone,” said Ictinike. At length his younger brothers came in sight. The left-handed one had a bow, and the other one came in sight, having a bow. “I give you your wife’s sisters,” said the Grizzly-bear, meaning the left-handed one. And the other one was coming with a rush. The Grizzly-bear went fleeing. And Ictinike rushed after him. He crushed his head in suddenly with a blow from the hoe. “Yu! yu!” said he. It is said that it is thus when they abuse a fallen foe. And they tied their horses. They exterminated those who came and pitched their tents, having come to see their children. 15 18 96 THE ¢EGIUNA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. ICTINIKE, THE COYOTE, AND THE COLT. FRANK LA FLECHE’S VERSION. Egi¢e Can’ge jingd¢iq¢ige wi’ jat'éké amd ké Miyasi aké‘da™be It happened Horse small, two yearsold one was lying asleep, itis when (?) Coyote the looking said (sub.) at it naji” akAma. Ictinike aké ké’di ahi-biam4. Hau! kagéha, ¢¢éké Can’ge was standing, they Ictinike the (sub.) to it came they say. Ho! friend, this Horse say. (lg. ob.) wi" t’éde-ga" gaqé a™¢isnu anga¢ai-de a™¢ate anga™ ¢ai éde at¢ii"-baji-hna” i. one dead, but Ste we drag it wego when we eat it we wished but we have not succeeded in moving it. Udwagika™i-ga, 4-biama Mfyasi aka. Kagéha, sin’de ké na™bé té Help us said, they say Coyote the (sub.). Friend, tail the (ob.) hand the (ob.) fwika"ta” te ha, gan’ki onfda™ yi sihi angti¢ai éde a™¢isnu angd¢e I tie you with will 5 and you pullon when legs wetakeholdof but we drag it we go taf, 4-biamé Mfyasi aka. A™ha*, d-biamaé Ictinike aka. Gan‘ki, Ke’, will, said, they say Coyote the (sub.). Yes, said, they say Ictinike the (sub.). And, Come, im¢in’ka'tai-ga, a-biama. Ga Mfyasi aka Ictinike ta" na™bé té tie mine for me, he said, they say. And Coyote the (sub.) Ictinike the (ob.) hand the (ob.) fka™ta®-biamd Can’ge sin’de ké, sagi-qti gax4-bi ega’. Qicta”-bi yi, ticd with it they say Horse tail the (ob.) tight very madeit, they having. He finished, they when, say say Ké, kagéha, ¢idan’-gi ha, a-biama. Ki Ictinike aka ¢ida”’-biama. Come, friend, pull on it és he said, they say. And Ictinike the (sub.) pulled on it, they say. *n/ ° t s . . Can’ge aka figs biama, naji” atid¢a-biamd, ¢isnti a¢a-biama. Ictinike Horse the(sub.) aw they say, hestood suddenly theysay, 4 ragging he went they say. Ictinike im. na"téctéa”-biama, na™xdge a¢i”-biama Ictinike aké. Miyasi aka iqa he even kicked they say, makin, ite ery hehad they say Ictinike the Coyote the laugh- him from kicking him (one who.) (sub.) ing yy: Pile . . . gaski wakan’di¢e-hna™-biama. Kgi¢e Ictinike na*staki ¢é¢a-biama, panted excessively they say. At length Ictinike he kicked, and sent flying ‘inert the air, they say, na"cpdcpaqtcia™-biama. Hata™ yi éga®é‘a" etéda™, é-hna"-biama Ictinike he kicked off very deep pieces of flesh, Why if Ido so to him apt ? said regu- they say Ictinike they say. larly aké. Egi¢e égas4ni yi Ictinike aka huht wi" ¢até akdma. Ki Miyasi the It happened the ellos when Ictinike the(sub.) fish one waseating,itissaid. And Coyote’ (sub.). ing day aka @'di ahi-biamé. Wuht! kagéha, tjawa fnahi" 4, 4-biama Mifyasi the there arrived, they say. Wuhu:+! friend, a pleasure truly ! said, they say Coyote (sub.) aka. A™ha", kagéha, éga", 4-biamd Ictinike aka. Kagéha, edta™ dja” the (sub.). Yes, friend, 80, said, they say Ictinike the (sub.). Friend, how youdid yi onize 4, huhti ké. Kagéha, niixe ké udga‘ide yi sin’'de ké udg¢e when youtook ? fish the (ob.). Friend, ae Ibrokeahole when tail the (ob.) I putin it (ob. in agi” ni ké. Sabdéji-qti huhtii wi™ a™¢ahai sin’de ké, ki b¢ize ha. I sat water the (ob.). Very suddenly fish one bit me tail the (ob.) and I took it ICTINIKE, THE COYOTE, AND THE COLT. 97 Kag¢éha, Awad¢andi 4, 4-biam& Miyasi akdé. Kagdéha, ed¢andi édega® ) ’ Friend, in what place q said, they say Coyote the (sub.). Friend, in yonder place but daze usni te’di ¢ahé-hna%i ha. gdze yi usni-gti amd. Ké, kagé¢ha, evening cold when they are used to : Evening when verycold they say. Come, friend, biting anga¢e taf, a-biama Miyasi aké. A™”ha™, db ega™ a¢é-biamd. Niixe let us go, said, they say Coyote the (sub.). Yes, pie ead having they went, they say. Ice ey say ké‘di ahi-bi ega” ugd‘udi-biama. Keé, sin’de ug¢é g¢in’-gi, 4-biamdé at the arrived, having he broke a hole in it, Gunes tail put in sit thou, said, they say they say they say. Ictinike aka. Sin’de ké ug¢é g¢i-biama Miyasi aka nf ké. Gattéga™ Ietinike the Tail the putin sat they say Coyote the water the Awhile (sub.). (ob.) (sub.) (ob.) yi, Kagcha, a™¢ahai, a-biama. Kag¢ha, jingd-hna"i; yangd yi'ji when, Friend, me-bites, he said, they say. Friend, small only; big when waonize te. Cka™aji g¢in’-ga, a-biama Ictinike aké. Ga'téga™ yi niixe you may take them. Motionless sit, said, they say Tetinike the (sub.). Awhile when ice aki dd a¢i” ad¢d-biama. Kagéha, ci géama wi” a™¢ahai, d-biama the frozen having it went, they say. Friend, again those one me-bites, said, they say (sub.) him Mfyasi aka. Kag¢ha, cka™aji g¢in’-gi. Jingé-hna"i, d-biama Ictinike Coyote the (sub.). Faiend, motionless sit. Small only, said, they say Ictinike aka. Gattéga" yi yang’ ama ati t& ama, A-biamaé Ictinike aké. Egi¢e the (sub.). Awhile when big the (sub.) come will, said, they say Ictinike the(sub.). At length nixe aké dé-biama. P’ta®, kagéha, gdama yangd-qti wi a" of hi, ice the(sub.) froze, they say. Now, friend, those very big one me-bites a-biama Mfyasi aka. Ahati! ahat! ¢idan’-gi! ¢idan’-gi! 4-biama said, they say Coyote the (sub.). Come! come ! pull on itt pull on it! said, they say Ictinike aka. Miyasi aké ¢ida’-biamé. Wacka™-qti ctéwa™ mixe ké Ictinike the (sub.). Coyote the(sub.) pulled on it, they He tried very hard notwith- ice the Say. standing (ob.) na"ondha-hna” ama. Wackan’-gi! jingdé-bdéji, 4-biamd Ictinike aka. he slipped in only they say. Be strong! small _ not, said, they say Ictinike the walking (sub.). I'win’kan-gi, 4-biam4 Miyasi aki. Na"bé té a™wa™¢an-g@i, A-biama Help me, said, they say Coyote the (sub.). Hand the(ob.) take hold of me, said, they say Ictinike aka. Na*bé té u¢a’’-bi ega™ wacka™-qti ¢ida’’-biamd. Kagé¢ha, Ictinike the Hand the took hold of, at aving making a great they pulled, they say. Friend, (sub.). (ob.) itis said effort wackan’-ga ha, huhti aka jinga-baji édega™ a"wa'’¢i‘a taté eb¢éga". Aha! be cone 5 fish the (sub.) small not ae we fai shall, I think. Oho! db ega™ wa™ibagi'qti ¢ida”-biamd. Ki sin’de ké ¢isé’-qti ¢é¢a-biama. said, having with avery great they pulled, theysay. And tail the was pulled off suddenly, they say. they say effort (ob.) peas Miyasi aka sin’de ké gija™ba-biama. Kag¢éha, a” onijudji f¢anahi™ Coyote the (sub.) tail the (ob.) looked at me own, they Friend, you have treated you truly me ill aha”, a-biama Mfyasi aka. Kaevhe ¢i cti égarin¢d‘a™ ¢a™cti, A-biamd said, they say Coyote the (sub.). Friend, thou too treated me so heretofore, said, they say Ictinike aka. Aki¢aha a¢a-biama. Ki Miyasi aké qadde ¢ib¢éb¢i" sin’de Ictinike the (sub.). Apart they went,they say. And Coyote the (sub.) grass twisted tail ké igaxd-biama. the (ob.) of it made, they say. VOL. VI—7. 12 18 © “ ~~ — 98 THE (EGIHNA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. NOTES. 96,1. For ja*t’e ke ama ké, L. Sanssouci read ja™t?e ke ama yi, which agrees with the gaiwere, and makes sense. The additional ““ké”, if correct, is puzzling. 96, 2. ké/di ahi-biama. Ictinike reached the Colt that was lying down (ké refers to him, not to the Coyote, who was standing). 96, 7. Miyasi aka (sub.: Ist third person); Ictinike ta® (1st ob., 2d third person); na"be té (2d ob., 3d third person); ika"ta’’-biama (predicate in the instrumental form); cange sinde ké (the instrument: 4th third person). TRANSLATION. When a two-year-old Colt lay sleeping, the Coyote was standing looking at him. Ictinike came to him. ‘ Well, friend, as this was a dead Horse, we wished to drag him along and eat him; but we have not been able to move him. Help us,” said the Coyote. “My friend, I will tie your hands to his tail; and when you pull, we will catch hold of his legs, and we will go along dragging him,” said the Coyote. “Yes,” said Ictinike. And he said, ‘Come, tie my hands for me.” And the Coyote tied Ictinike by the hands to the Colt’s tail, having made it very tight. When he finished, he said, ‘Come, my friend, pull on it.” And Ictinike pulled on it. And the Colt awoke. He arose suddenly. He went off dragging him. He kept kicking at Ictinike; he kept Ictinike crying as he kicked him. The Coyote laughed till he panted for breath. And the Colt kicked Ictinike, sending him flying through the air. He kicked off very deep pieces of flesh. “And how shall I do to get even with him?” said Ictinike, referring to the Coyote. And on the following day Ictinike was eating a fish. And the Coyote came thither. ‘Oho! my friend, it is truly a pleasure,” said the Coyote. “Yes, my friend, it is so,” said Ictinike. ‘“ My friend, what were you doing when you caught the fish?” “My friend, I knocked a hole in the ice; and I sat with my tail put through the hole into the water. A fish bit me suddenly on the tail, and I caught it.” “ My friend, where was it?” said the Coyote. ‘My friend, yonder it is; but they bite at evening, when it is cold.” When it was evening, it was very cold. ‘Come, my friend, let us go,” said the Coyote. Ictinike having said, “Yes,” they went. When they reached the ice, Ictinike knocked a hole in it. ‘Come, put your tail in the hole and sit,” said Ictinike. And the Coyote sat with his tail through the hole and in the water. After some time he said, “My friend, it bites me.” “My friend, they are small; when they are large, you shall catch them. Sit still,” said Ictinike. After some time the ice commenced freezing over again. ‘My friend, again one of those bites me,” said the Coyote. ‘My friend, sit still; they are all small,” said Ictinike. “ After a while the large ones will come.” At length the ice froze over. “ Now, my friend, one of those very large ones bites me,” said the Coyote. “‘Now! Now! Pull! Pull!” said Ictinike. The Coyote pulled. Though he tried ever so hard, he only slipped on the ice. “Exert yourself; it is large,” said Ictinike. ‘Help me,” said the Coyote. “Take hold of my hands,” said Icti- nike. Having taken hold of his hands, he pulled with a great effort. “My friend, exert yourself; the fish is very large, therefore I think we shall fail.” Having said, “Now!” they pulled with a very great effort. And the tai) was suddenly pulled off altogether. The Coyote looked at his tail. ‘My friend, truly you have done me a wrong,” said the Coyote. “My friend, you, too, have done a similar thing to me,” said Ictinike. They went different ways. And the Coyote made a tail for himself out of twisted grass. — THE PUMA AND THE COYOTE. 99 THE PUMA AND THE COYOTE. ToLp BY MAwapa" I", OR MANDAN, AN OMAHA. Ing¢a’’-si"-snéde céna"ba-biama Mfyasi e¢a™ba. Akikip-biama. ong-tailed cat, only those two, they say Coyote he too. They mee each they say. other Kag éha, ticka™ wi” eb¢éga™ éde ug¢tiwikie ti minke, 4-biam& Mfyasi iend, deed one I think but Ispeak to you will I who, said, they say Coyote about it aka. Ta™wang¢a" hégactewa™ ji édi¢a® amd. Kagéha, icka" u¢twikie ta 3 the Tribe a great many (=popu- there was the, they My friend, deed I talk to you will (sub.). lous) say. about it minke éga"qti ckaxe te ha, 4-biamé. A™ha", 4-biamé. Nikagahi ijan’ge I who just so youdo please . hesaid, they say. Yes, he said, they say. Chief his daughter wi" ga“ ¢a-hna™i éde ¢i’-hna’i, éde ka™b¢a ta minke ha. Kagé, can’ge one they desire invariably but they fail avariahly, but Idesire her will I who 2 Friend, horse ckaxe te, 4-biamé. Gan‘ki Awig¢i? ti minke. Gan‘ki Ing¢a”’-s -si"-snéde 6 you make please, he said, they say. And Tsit on you will I who. And ong- ae cat ma” ze-¢ahe ké ¢ahéki¢a-biama. Gan’ki dg¢i" té ha Mfyasi aké. Kagéha, bridle the he made him put it in And satonhim . Coyote the My friend, (ob.) his mouth, they say. (sub.). nada" hnipi cka“hna te. Can’ge cka", sig¢dhaha, ua™si, pamakide, to show what you do you desire please. Hors action prancing, enna: arching the neck, you are well (ways) ia¢ixaxa, ma™¢i™, ua™siqti té cti d4-id¢e-hnai ma™¢in’-g4 ha. Gan’ki uta” 9 chau ane ie walking, jumping high the too they usually go walk thou . And leggings it, (act) yan’ga uadta® ta minke ha. Gan‘ki hi"bé ndcabe¢é ugk" tA minke ha. large Iputon will I who 5 And moccasins _ blackened Iputon will Iwho leggings moccasins Gan’‘ki mé¢-ha ahi" cf¢é mi” ta minké ha. Za®z{-man’dé ab¢i” t& minke And spring robe with Kae pees will I who Osage-orange bow Ihave will Iwho outside robe ha. Man‘dé-da té maca™ skaqti udgacke ab¢i” tA minke, 4-biamé. Gan‘ki 12 5 Bow head op) feather very white Ifastenon Ihave will Iwho, said he, they say. And ob. yi ¢a® ya™haqtci u¢ica™ Awig¢i" ta mitike ha. qa¢itjahe a” aka &di village Be atthe very border aroundit Isiton you will Iwh : Playing ga¢i"jahe the (sub.) there (ob.) a-fnaji” aki ha. Can’ge ua™si pamdkide a- ld¢a¢a Agd¢i" ma*¢i"’-biama. approaching the : Horse jumping arching its neck had gone satonit it walked they say. he stood (sub.) repeated]} y Hau! kagcha, cutf nfaci"ga wi’. Qa-i! nidcitga a"da™ba-baji’qtia™i, Ajiqti 15 See! my friend, _ yonder person one. Whew! person we have not seen at all, very dif- has come ferent aha", u¢uka"pi fnahi" 4, 4-biamd4. Cange ta™ cti tida® fnahi" ag¢i” ti ! well dressed truly ! said they, they Horse the too good truly _sittingon has say. (std. ob.) come aha" 4-biami. Hindé! fbaha™i-gi, 4-biamé. Mfyasi aké yig¢faji’qtia®’- ! said they, they Stop! know ye him, said they say. Coyote the(sub.) made himself alto- Bay. gether different biama. Miyasi é ¢inké éska” e¢éga"-baji-biamé. Egaé-biama ha, Hau! e‘a” 18 they say. Coyote he theone who they did not think that they say. They said theysay , Ho! how that to him x 12 15 18 100 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. ma"-hni’ 4, 4-biamé. A™ha®, éga%qtia™, 4-biama. Nikagahi ijan’ge ¢inké you walk ? said they, they Yes, just so, said he, they Chief his daughter the (ob.) say. say. ka™b¢a ati, A-biamé. Ki gan‘ki uf¢a ahf-biama. Gijan’ge ga” ¢a Idesire Ihavecome, said he, they And then totellto they arrived, they our daughter desirmg say. him say. ati-biamé. Niaci"ga ida" hégabaji 4, 4-biamé. Can’ge ta” cti tida™ hégaji he has come, he Person good notalittle ! said, they say. Horse the too good notalittle says. (std. ob.) 4, d-biamé. Ké, ijin’ge ¢ank ¢ wawagiké-biama, ¢ij4ha" agi" gii-ga ! said they, they Come, ‘his son the that meaning them, they say, your sister's having him come say. (pl. ob.) his own husband back bi, A-biamé nikagahi aké. Agia¢d-biamé ha. Ki, Ké, yaha™ha, awide said, they say chief the (sub.). They went for him, 5 And, Come, sister'shusband Lask you to they say go with me ati ha. Angadigi-angati ha. A™ha®, yaha™ha, 4-biama Miyasi aka. Can’ge Ihave . We have come for you . Yes, wife’s brothers, said, they say Coyote the Horse come (sub.). ta" dgig¢i”-da" ¢ia’siqti ua™siqti ma¢i”-biama. Nikaci"ga ¢é¢uta” the satonhisown when pulled hard on to jumped high walked they say. People hence (std. ob.) make jump da™be ¢é¢@ amé. Nikaci*ga ¢i" u¢tika"pi tahi" a Nikaci"ga dada® Gi"te gazed at adis- they say. Person the well dressed truly ! Person what he may tance (mv. ob.) be u¢tiika’pi fnahi® 4, A-biamé. Hau, égi¢e agi” aki-biamd, nfkagahi tyu well dressed truly ! said they, they Well, atlength having they reached home, chief princi say. him they say, pal pee vie ° . Cis fe . a3 / . ii té/di. Hau! ké, ¢ij4ha™ agi’ efi-gi, d-biamé. Can’ge ta” cégédi his at the. Ho! come, your sister's having beye coming said he, they Horse the (ob.) by those lodge husband him Say. things ugick fe¢ati-ea. Qade ‘fi-ga ha, 4-biama nikagahi aka. ahaha, wixiga® “fasten ye it for him. Hay giveto . said, they say chief the My wife's my wife’s him (sub.). brothers, father méga", can’ge aki qide ¢atd-baji, 4-biami Miyasi aka. jantya-hna" likewise, horse the (sub.) hay he eats not, said, they say Coyote the (sub.). Freshmeat only ¢até-hnati, 4-biamé. Gan’ki ubdéha™ a¢af ega™ yiaja ahi-biama. Ki he eats as arule, said he, they say. And at the door went having inthelodge arrived,they say. And H té u¢iza™ tea watt A¢ixeki¢ai ¢inké jug¢e a-ig¢i-biamé. Gan'ki lodge the middle atthe woman wascaused to theonewho with her approaching he sat, they And (ob.) marry him say. ha” amd. - Winat, ¢idg¢an’ge ¢inké umi"je gidxa-ga, 4-biamad nikagahi night they say. First daughter, your husband the (st. ob.) couch make for him, said they say chief aki. Tei ¢icta”-bi yi Mfyasi aké egi-biama, Andje b¢é. Gan’ki ci the Coire he finished, when Coyote the (sub.) said to her, they Meio I go. And out of (sub.). they say say doors a¢ai Miyasi ama. Ing¢a” -si-snéde ahi-biamé. Kag¢ha, b¢icta®. Cka™hna went Coyote the ong-tailed cat he reached, they My friend, Ihave finished. You wish (my. sub.). say. yi tef-gi ha. Ega™ fki¢ita"tan’ga gaxd-biama Ca™qti baa™ba-biama. if cot : So alternatim faciebant they say. Valde et usque a vespera ad they say. mane cwm ea coibant Aba sa” tihé yi nikagahi ¢¢é cti b¢tigagti ugéwinyi¢A-biama. Kdada* Day whitish comes when chief his too all assembled they say. What suddenly relation themselves wat‘a” g& ctéwa™ b¢liga ud¢éwir¢d-biamd, wa¢i" a¢a-biama yi té4ya, goods the (ob.) soever all they collected they say, having they went, they say lodge to the. THE PUMA AND THE COYOTE. 101 Wahtita"¢i" yucf-hna’i, Ku+! ku+! Mfyasi na‘a”i yi ytiha-biama. Ku+! Gun they were firing, Kur! ku+! Coyote heard it when feared it, they say. Ku+! ku+! Aci ua™siqti 4-i4¢a-biamé. Hau! Mfyasi aké. Utin’-ga! utin’-ga! ku+! Out leaped far _ had gone, they say. Ho! it is the Coyote. Hit him! hit him! té¢ai-ga! Mfyasi aké jéqti i¢é¢é-hna™-biamdé. Ing¢a’-si"-snéde yimtig¢a® to) fo) kill him! Coyote the valde sent flying regularly they say. ong-tailed cat stealing himself (sub.) cacavit suddenly off ac¢d-biamdé. Miyasi t'é¢a-biami Usa-biamd. Wa¢ijudji dha*. [=] went homeward, Coyote they killed him, They burnt him, He did wrong ! they say. they say. they say. NOTES. 99, 13. da¢i*jahe a® aka édi a-inaji*-biama. The men of the village were playing there when the Coyote came in sight. 99, 14. a-ia¢a¢a, from i¢a¢a, frequentative of i¢é. The Puma pranced a short dis- tance, then walked, then pranced, and so on. 99, 16. inahit 4. Here and elsewhere “’” is a contraction of “aha.” 100, 4. ¢aik, contraction from ¢anka. 100, 18. iki¢ita"tanga, etc. The Puma entered the lodge after the Coyote, whose place he took, deceiving the woman; then the Coyote returned; next, the Puma; and so on till daylight. TRANSLATION. There was a Puma and also a Coyote, only these two. They met each other. “My friend,” said the Coyote, “TI will speak to you about one thing of which I have been thinking.” There was a very populous tribe. ‘My friend, please do just what I speak to you about.” “Yes,” said the Puma. ‘They have been wishing to get the chief’s daughter, but they have always failed; but I desire her. My friend, you will act the horse, and I will ride on you,” said the Coyote. And he put the bridle on the Puma. And the Coyote saton him. ‘My friend, please desire to act well, and to show your skill. Practice the actions of a horse such as prancing, jumping, arching the neck, champing the bit, walking, and also jumping high. And I will draw on large leggings; I will put on blackened moccasins; I will wear a winter robe with the hair outside; I will have an Osage-orange bow; and I will fasten very white feathers on one end of the bow. And I will ride you around the village when we come near it,” said the Coyote. He approached and stood at the place where they were playing the game called “ ga¢itjahe.” He continued sitting on the horse as it pranced, jumped, arched its neck, and went a little way at atime. ‘See, my friends, a person has come suddenly. Whew! a man has come, one whom we have never seen at all heretofore, a very different sort of a man from those we are accustomed to see! He is very well-dressed! He has come on an excellent horse! Stop! recognize him if you can,” said they. The Coyote had thoroughly disguised himself. They did not think that he was the Coyote. They said as follows to him, “Well, why do you go?” “Yes? said he, “it is just so. I have come because I desire the chief’s daughter.” And they went to tell him. ‘He says that he has come desiring your daughter. He is a very handsome man! The horse too is a very fine one!” said they. “Come,” said the chief, addressing his sons, “‘go for your sister’s husband.” They went for him. And they said “Come, sister’s husband, I have come to invite you to go with us. We have come for you.” “Yes, my wife’s brothers,” said the Coyote. Having mounted his 9 102. THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. horse, he pulled on the bridle very hard to make him jump, and the horse jumped as he went along. All the people stood at a distance, looking at him. “The man in motion is indeed well-dressed! Whatever sort of man he may be, he is truly well- dressed!” said they. Well, at length they reached home with him, at the house of the head-chief. “Ho! come, bring your sister’s husband to me. Fasten his horse by those things. Give him hay,” said the chief. ‘My wife’s brothers, and also my wife’s father, the horse does not eat hay,” said the Coyote. “He eats nothing but fresh meat.” And they went into the lodge. And he approached the woman whom they caused to marry him, and sat by her. And it was night. Said the chief, ““O first- born daughter of the household, make a couch for your husband.” Coitw completo, the Coyote said to her, ‘“Mictum eo.” And the Coyote went out of doors. He reached the Puma: “Amice, complevi; si cupias, coi,” ait. Dt alternatim faciebant, aiunt. Valde et usque a vespera ad mane coibant, aiunt. The chief assembled all his relations at daybreak. They collected all kinds whatsoever of goods, and took them to the lodge. They were firing guns, “Ku+! ku+!” The Coyote heard it and was afraid. “Ku+! ku+!” He leaped out of the door and had gone. ‘Why! It is the Coyote. Hit him! hit him! Kill him!” The Coyote valde et frequenter cacavit. The Puma stole off and went home. They killed the Coyote. They burnt him. He did wrong! THE COYOTE AND THE BUFFALOES. Totp By FRANK LA FLECHE. Egi¢e Miyasi amd ¢é amdma. Ki ye-niga diba wabahi mar¢i” At length Coyote the was going, they say. And Tuer four grazing were walk (my. sub.) amima. Ki édiahi-biamé. Ki wa¢aha”-biamé. iga”ha wijiga®" méea", ing, they say. And there he arrived, they And heprayedto they say. O grandfather my een likewise, say. - them fathers cA‘ean’gi¢éga. Maoni"-macé’di ¢éga"qti ma"b¢i” ka"b¢éga®. — A¢haqti pity me. You walk by you who just so IT walk I desire. For the very last time fa-gi, A-biamé pe-niga aka An’kaji, yiga™ ha, ca” ca‘ean ‘gi¢d-oa. Wadate SAPs said, they say Buffalo-bull ihe Not so, nats uther, still pity me. Food (sub.). ké fkiaé’qti ondte ma™oni” ite éga"qti ma*b¢i” ka*b¢ega™ ha Wi" ¢ak the spreading very you eat you walk it may just so I wal I desire You tell the thick and far be truth dqt ija” tada”, 4-biama hci pe-niga ic‘age aka. Ca™- = acta’ - how youdoit shall? said,theysay behind Buffalo- bull old man the ne did not possible with (sub.). baji-biamé Miyasi aké. Aha! Hé-batcage-ha, ¢ie-ga, 4-biama. Ahai! to} ? b stop talking, they Coyote the (sub.). Oho! Blunt-horns oO! you try it, said he, Oho! say they say. 4-biama Hé-batcige akéa. Ké, gidugaq¢e neji -gi, egi-biamd. Egi¢e said, they say Blunt- ae te (sub.). Gone facing the other he sald that to him, Beware way they say. na” ji" ¢aa™ he ¢i*he au, 4-biamé. H4 jiga", ha jiga", wiga” ha, dqta™ a little you flee (sign of Bone said he, they Oh! gra wt ste Oh! om uther, grandfather Ob! how prohibition) say. possible THE COYOTE AND THE BUFFALOES. 103 aa“he tada™. Nistustu a¢di-biamé ye-niga Hé-batcdge ak4&. Ma"™na"‘n T flee shall? Backing he went, they say Buffalo-bull Blunt-horns the (sub.). Pawing the repeatedly ground . . : Pe en/ 1 Cts . mam¢i"-biama, q¢ajé cti ma¢i”-biaméa. an’de ké’ cti jdha-bi-dé he walked they say, bellowing too he walked _ they say. Ground the (ob.) too hepoked at, they say, when ¢icpé’qti-hna®” ¢é¢a-biama. Ki Mfyasi aké ¢éde¢é da™be naji” -biama. broke off pieces sent off flying, they And Coyote the (sub.) out of the looking he stood they say. invariably Bay. corner of his eye Qe-f, a“¢ihega u¢iciqti dha", e¢éga” naji”-biamé Mfyasi aké. Gi¢ika®qti Whew! to hurt mea altogether ! thinking stood they say Coyote the (sub.). Getting alto- little impossible gether out of the way ahi-biama. Ki édita® oe agi-biama ag¢a-b ega” tsanga ¢fe iti® 1 he arrived, they And thence to dash on him was coming back, went home- having without side hit say. they say ward, they say him on . . : t , *n/ dkiig¢a-biama. Wahu‘d! 4-biama Hé-batedge akaé Wi takéga éska"beéga™ he had gone along, they Really! said, they say Blunt-horns ~ the You told a little of I thought it might Say. (sub.). the truth be % =) Oe . hy (ee 0 / ~ : y; ¢acti. An‘kaji, jiga”ha, na” wigipéga™ ca” ha. Ca™ 4giga™ha, heretofore. Not so, grandfather, as I feared you, so (it was) 5 Yet grandfather, my relation cA‘ean’gi¢i-ga. Ma*oni"-macé’di éga"qti ma*b¢i” ka"b¢éga". (Two others pity me. You walk by you who just so I walk I wish. made attempts, but the Coyote jumped aside each time. At last they addressed the fourth, who was a young Buffalo bull.) Hau! pe-niga Ho! Buffalo-bull jin’ga, ¢fe-ga. Hau! d-biamd pe-niga jin’ga aka. Giidugag¢e najin’-ga. young do you try it. Ho! said, they say Buffalo-bull young the (sub.). Facing the other stand way (Pe gaa“he yi téwi¢é ta minke ha, 4-biamé. Hau! giga™, aa™ha-maji ta This you flee if Ikillyou will Iwho . he said, they say. Ho! grandfather I flee Inot well (time) minke ha, 4-biaina Mfyasi aké. Ca™ pe-ntiga nistustu a¢i-biamd, ma™na™ ‘1 I who . said, they say Coyote the (sub.). And Buffalo-bull backing —_he went, they say _ pawing the repeatedly ground . . . Sc *n/ . , er ele: . . . ma"¢i"-biama, q¢ajé cti ma*¢i"’-biama. pan‘de ké’ .cti jiha-bi-dé ¢iepé’ qti- he walked they say bellowing too he walked they say. Ground the too pokedat,they he broke off (ob.) say, when pieces hna" ¢é¢a-biama. Ci edita" iénaxi¢a agi-biamé. Edthi yi a™ha-bajf- invariably sending them fly- Again thence todashonhim was coming back, He arrived when fled not ing, they say. they say. there biamé Miyasi aké. (fe {tir A-id¢a-bi yi ékiga"qti pe-ntiga jin’ga jigde they say Coyote the (sub.). Side hit on had gone, when justlikehim Buffalo-bull young with him ey say d-id¢a-biama. Ga™ jukig¢a-bi ega” a¢d-biamé. Maja™ wi” aht-bi had gone, they say. And with one another, being they went, they say. Land one arrived at, when they say they say wabahi-hna™-biama. Ki Miyasi aka déje ké a” ctewa™ ¢até ma™¢i"’-biama. they continued grazing, they say. And Coyote the (sub.) grass the(ob.) ofany sort eating walked they say. Ca” qtiama cti haci-yig¢a’-hna”-biama Wa! téna’! sagigi égan-gi ha, After moving a too inthe he dropped invari- they say. What! fie! do be faster great while rear ably q . = Ou 5 é-hna"-biama e-ntga ic‘age aka. An’‘kaji, yiga”ha, déje ké nan‘de-fma® said invariably, they Buffalo-bull old man _ the (sub.). Not so grandfather grass the I cannot get too say much of it ha, dda" wa¢ate-hna® udyig¢ispe ha, é-hna™-biamé Mfyasi am. therefore eating it, invariably Ihold myself back . said invariably, they say Coyote the (mv. sub.). 6 12 15 18 21 12 15 18 104. THE GEGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. Ci a¢é-biamaé. Ki haci-hna™ ma*¢i"’-biama. Kgi¢e baxtt wi" é¢a"be Again they went, they And behind regu- he walked they say. AtJength hilltop one in sight of say. larly ahf-biama. Ki y,e-ntiga diba amd kig¢diha a¢a-biama. Maja” wi" ye-niga they arrived, they And Buffalo-bull four the tothe bottom went they say. Land one Buffalo bull say. (pl. sub.) diba ama ahi-biamé yi i¢dda-biama. Tiiijiqti aha”. Kdé tida® ha, four the reached, they say when waited they say. He has not To wait for is good (pL sub.) for him come at all him d-biamd. I¢ada-biamé yi ya¢i ahi-baji-biama. Hau! pe-nuga jin’ga, they said, they ous y waited they say when for some he arrived not, they say. Ho! Buffalo-bull young say. for him time uné mang¢in’-e4, 4-biamd. Ahati! 4-b ega™ ag¢d-biama pe-nuga jin’ga to seek begone, 2 said (one), they Oho! said, they having went they say Buffalo- bull young him say. say back aké Edita®qti nan’ge ag¢a-biama. Maja” ucka™ ¢a™ aki-biama. Ki égi¢e the Right from that running he went they say. Land deed the hereached again, And behold (sub.). place back (ob.) they say. ¢ingé’qtia’-bitéama Mfyasi ama. Ag¢d-biamd pe-miga jin’ga. Egi¢e ga™ he was not there at all, they say | Coyote the Went they say Buffalo-bull young. At length an (mv. sub.). home Miyasi amd add-biamdé. A¢a-bi yi égi¢e Miyasi wi” dida® unéga’-hna™ Coyote the departed, they Went, they when behold Coyote one what seeking invari (mv. sub.) say. say ably ma"¢i” ¢i™ ama Cé¢i" hau! na"héba-ga hau! 4-biama Mfyasi-e-ntiga jin’ga was walking they say. sue O! wait 0! said, they say Coyote-Butfalo- jag young (mv. ob.) aki =(Jé ma™b¢i’ té éga%qti ma®oni” cka™ona, 4-biamé. A™ha", ji"¢cha, the This I walk the oat so you walk you wish, he said, they say. Yes, nines brother, (sub.). (way) éga*qti ma™b¢i” ka"b¢éga". Hau! gtidugaq¢e najin’-ga, 4-biama. A™ha®, San so I walk I wish. Ho! facing the other way stand he said, they say. Yes. Jiecha, i-biamd. je-nuga jin’ga nistu ma™na™‘u ma?¢i"’-biama. yan’de 7 fer he said, they say. Buffalo- pull young backing pawingtheground walked they say. Ground brother, ké’ eti jaha-bi ¢iepé'qti ¢é¢a-biama. E gi¢e na™ji" ¢aa”he ¢i*hé ati! the too as ad at, broke off pieces sent they say. Beware a ae you flee (sign of strong (ob.) they say forcibly prohibition). Ccyata" icnaxi¢a agi-biamé.. Usanga ¢fe fti" 4kidg¢a-bi yi Miyasi aka From that to dash on him was coming back, Without side hiton hadgone by, when Coyote the place they say. the: sy say (sub.) ua” siqti a-id¢a-biama. A™he ¢ab¢i%a™ Gga*-bi yi a™he-hna”-biama leaping far had gone, they say. Fled three tans 80, Ses say when fled invariably they say Miyasi aki Weéduba™ tédihi yi, éwi¢e ta minke ha, 4-biama J,e-niga Coyote ae The fourthtime itarrived when, Ikillyou will Iwho . _ said,they say Buffalo-bull (sub.). jin’ga aké. Cdjata™ iénaxi¢a agi-biama. Kgi¢e ¢fe iti Akidg¢a-biama young the From that to dashon him was coming, they Atlength side hiton had gone by they say (sub.). place say. yi ékiga’qti Miyasi jug¢e a¢a-biama. A” onijuadji f¢amahi’i 4. Gruidiha when just like him Coyote with him went they say. You have = eated you, indeed ! Away mei n : bi Ci fog 9 0 4-bi: 4 Wi 1704 bi n/ ma ¢in’ -@a, 4- jama. 1 \Le-nuga-ma ugine a¢a- DlamMa. agqa- D1 ega walk he said, they Again Buffalo-bulls the to seek he went, they say. Pursued them, having say. them they say tiq¢a-bi ega” ci waha™‘a-biama: piga”ha, cad‘ean’gi¢ai-ea. Nikaci"ga he overtook having again he asked a favor, they say: Grandfather pity ye me. Person them, they say HE COYOTE AND THE BUFFALOES. 105 wi" a ¢ijuaji hégaji. Hau! yje-niga jin’ga, ¢ie-ga. Hau! ké, gidugaq¢e one ilL-treated very much. Ho! Buffalo-bull young, do you try it. Ho! come, facing the other me way ele Os) . ral. = oe eF . 1 najin’-e%, 4-biama. Egi¢e ¢aa™he te. An‘kaji ha, yiga" ha, aqta” aa™he stand, said he, they Beware you flee lest. Not so : grandfather, how pos- I flee say. sible tida, A-biama Mfyasi aké. A¢d-b ega’ edita" idnaxi¢a agi-biamaé. 1h’di shall? said, they say Coyote the Went, they having thence todashon him was coming, they There (sub.). say say. aki-bi yiji Mfyasi jaha-biamé. Maciiha a™¢a i¢é¢a-bi xii gat’ the reached when Coyote gored they say. On high throwing sent him when lay killed by home, they him him forcibly, they the fall say say gaxi-biama. Ceta™. made him, they say. So far. NOTES. 102, 5. ikiatqti, from ikiae. Since the Buffaloes obtained their food without hav- ing to cultivate it, they fared better than men, in the estimation of the Coyote. Their food, grass, spread out very thick all over the surface of the ground. (See ukiae, ugae, aba‘é, ete., in the Dictionary.) 102, 5. wit¢ak agt ija" tada”, contracted from wit¢ake aqta™ ija tada, “You can- not mean what you say.” 102, 8. egi¢e naXji® ¢aa™he ¢i™he au. The word ¢i*he is used in strong commands or prohibitions. See myth of the Raccoons and the Crabs (Frank La Fléche’s version), also that of Two-face and the Two Brothers; and inihe (binihe) in the Dictionary. 103, 4. a™¢ihega u¢iciqti aha": “He could not hurt me « little with his horns (but he would be sure to kill me, or else do me a serious injury).” 103, 20. peji ké nande-ima™ hi. The idea is that although the Coyote had eaten enough to satisfy hunger, the grass was so good that he wished to eat all of it. He did not wish to leave any. He could not, in his opinion, eat too much. 104, 9. ce¢i® hau, said with the voice raised, the last word being emphasized. 105, 4. gat? ihe, contracted from gat’e ihe. TRANSLATION. Once a Coyote was going somewhere. And four Buffalo-bulls were grazing as they walked. And the Coyote went to them, and prayed to them: “O grandfather, and you my grandfathers also, pity me. I wish to live just as you are living.” “Let this be the very last time that you speak it,” said the Buffalo-bull. ‘No, grandfather, still pity me. You live by eating food that comes up abundantly, without your working for it; and I wish to live just so.” “How can you be speaking the truth?” said the aged Buffalo-bull who was behind. Still the Coyote would not stop talking. ‘Oho! Blunt- horns, do you begin,” said the aged Buffalo. “Oho!” said Blunt-horns. “Come, stand with your back to me,” he said to the Coyote. ‘Beware lest you make even the slight- est attempt to flee,” said he. “Oh! grandfather! Oh! grandfather! grandfather Oh! why should I flee?” The blunt-horned Buffalo-bull kept backing, pawing the ground, and bellowing. He also thrust his horns into the ground, sending the pieces flying off in all directions. And the Coyote stood peeping at him out of one corner of his eye. “Whew! it would be impossible for him not to kill me, if he should touch me,” thought the Coyote as he stood there. And he got altogether out of his way. When the 106 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. Buffalo-bull was coming from his place to rush against him, the Coyote having gone aside, the Buffalo-bull went’ by without hitting him on the side. “Really!” said Blunt- horns, “TI did think that you were speaking the truth; (but now I do not think so).” “No, grandfather, it happened so because I was afraid of you. Still, grandfather, pity me. As you are living, just so I wish to live.” [Hach Buffalo made an attempt, but the Coyote jumped aside every time. At last the aged Buffalo-bull said,} “Ho! Young Buffalo-bull, you begin.” ‘‘Ho!” said the young Buffalo-bull. ‘Stand with your back tome. If you flee this time, I will kill you,” said he. “Ho! grandfather, I will not flee,” said the Coyote. And the Buffalo went backward by degrees, pawing the ground, bellowing, thrusting his horns into the soil, and throwing up the dust. And he was coming thence to rush on him. When he reached him, the Coyote did not flee. And he struck him on the side as he went, and the Coyote went with him, a young Buffalo-bull, just like him. And they departed together. And when they reached a certain land, they continued grazing. And the Coyote went eating grass of every sort. After moving a great while he invariably dropped in the rear. ‘ What! fie! Do be faster,” the aged Buffalo-bull kept saying to him. ‘No, grandfather, I cannot get too much of the grass, therefore I am holding myself back by eating,” the Coyote kept saying. And they departed. And the Coyote continued walking behind. And they reached the top of a hijl. And the four Buffalo-bulls went down to the bottom of the hill. The four Buffalo-bulls reached a certain land, and waited for him. “He has not come at all! It is good to wait for him,” said they. And when they had waited for him a long time, he did not arrive. “Ho! Young Buffalo-bull, begone to seek him,” said they. And saying “Oho!” the young Buffalo-bull went back. From that very place he went running. He got home to the land where the deed was done (i. é., Where the Coyote was changed into a Buffalo). And, behold, the Coyote was not there at all. The young Buffalo-bull went back. It happened that the Coyote de- parted. When he departed, behold a Coyote was walking as if seeking for something. “QO you in motion there! O wait!” said the young Buftalo-bull who had been a Coyote. “Do you wish to live in this way, just as I am living?” ‘ Yes, elder brother,” said the Joyote, “I wish to live just so.” ‘ Well, stand facing the other way,” said the Buffalo- bull. ‘Yes, elder brother,” said the Coyote. The young Buffalo-bull went backward, pawing the ground, thrusting his horns into the soil, and throwing up the dust. ‘ Be- ware lest you make even the slightest attempt to flee.” Thence he was coming back, as if to attack him. He had come and gone without hitting him on the side, as the Coyote had leaped far and had gone. When he had fled thus three times, the Coyote fled invariably (sic). When the fourth time came, the young Buffalo-bull said, ‘I will kill you.” Thence he came rushing on him. It happened when he struck him on the side and passed on, that he departed with him a Coyote, just like him. ‘You have injured me very much. Begone!” said he. He departed to seek the Buffalo-bulls again. Having pursued them and overtaken them, he asked a favor of them again. “My grandfathers, pity me. A person has done me a very great wrong.” ‘Ho! Young Buffalo-bull, you begin.” ‘Ho! come, stand with your back to me,” said the young Buffalo. ‘ Beware lest you flee.” “No, grandfather, why should I flee?” said the Coyote. Having gone, he was coming back to rush on him. When he got back he gored the Coyote, and threw him up high into the air; and he occasioned his death by the shock of the fall. The End. WAHA*‘GICIGE’S ADVENTURES AS A RABBIT. 107 WAHA‘GICIGE’S ADVENTURE AS A RABBIT. Toip BY Mrs. La FLECHE. eae ° ,°¢ é i, oO : Waha™ ¢icige iya™ jigig¢e. ypa"ha, fi ¢a%a b¢é te. Hir+! yuepa¢a’, Orphan his he with his Grandmother, to the village let me go. Oh! grandchild, grandmother own. i¢iqdqa tat. (aji-a hé. An‘kaji, yatha, ca” b¢e ta minke. E’ja a¢ad- they abuse will. Go not 6 Not so grandmother, still Igo will I who. Thither went you . . s t ; ey i ~~ s . biama. fi ¢a™4 ahi-biama. Huhti! Mactein’ge ti ha, 4-biamé. Nikagahi they say. To the village arrived, they say. Ho! ho! Rabbit has. said, they say. Chief come gankaja a¢i™ ti¢ai-ga. Mactein’ge ¢ida™ be ti ha. Ké, agi” gfi-ga. U¢izaya to them having pass ye on. Rabbit tosee you has . Come having be ye To the middle him come him coming. ti¢d-ga. U¢ewinsyi¢ai-ga ha Kgaxe i¢a™ ¢ai-gi. Keé, wagatcigaxe taté ha Pass thou on. Assemble ye : Around in place ye. Come you dance shall a circle Ké, i”quyai-ga. Keé, Mactcin’ge wabasna” ¢a” waci”™ oni” éga” fb¢a™ jiwag¢es Come sing ye for me. Come, Rabbit shoulder ae fat youare as _ impossible to satisfy ob. one oni” ha. Gan'’ki giquya-bi ega” watcigaxd-biama. Na®*cta’’-biama 41, youare . And sung for him, they having he danced they say. He stopped they say when, say dancing Gé¢ica4d¢ica® nikagahi ditba awaqiqixe ha, 4-biamé. Awaqiqixe ta minke Towards one side chief four Ibreakintheir . said he, they I break in their will Iwho (heads) say. (heads) ha, éha. Kgaxe ita” ¢ai-ga ha, gan’ki dnasdi-ga ha. Nikagahi diba ¢anka he . Around in place ye 4 and cut him off 0 Chief four _ the (ob.) said a circle wAqiqixa-biama. Gan‘kiahe ag¢a-biama. Uq¢a-baji-biama Gan‘ki a™he he broke in they say. And fleeing went they say. They did not overtake him, And fleeing their (heads) homeward they say. ag¢d-bi ega” utide ¢é¢a"ska udé ag¢i-biama. Iya” ¢inké’di aki-biama. went home- having hole this size entering went homeward, His by the (ob.) reached home, ward, they say they say. grandmother they say. yyanha, ma”’ze gé hébe a™i-ga ha, d-biamé. Ki, Maze cté a®¢in’ge hé; Grand- iron the piece givetome . said, they say. And, Tron even me none ; mother, (pl. ob.) wé‘uhi eona” ¢e hébe hé, 4-biama. A™i¢a-ga ha, 4-biamd. Gan’ki yijebe hide- that only this piece c said she, they Let mehaveit, - said he, they And door seraper say. say. ¢a" gaqapi ¢é¢e yi WH te u¢ici gaxd-biama. Agqta" téar¢a¢é taba. the threw it through when lodge the covering it he made, they say. How pos- you kill me shall? suddenly (ob.) sibly Mang¢i"i-ga. Uar¢in’ge ¢andji. Ceta™. Begone ye. For nothing you stand, So far. NOTES. This (egiha version of the myth was told by Mrs. La Fléche, who also gave the corresponding yoiwere, to be published hereafter in “ The yoiwere Language, Part I.” 107, 1. Waha"¢icige, an orphan, syn., waha"’-¢inge: poiwere, woni’’-qcine. 12 15 108 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. 107, 8. ge¢ica™-qa¢ica®, etc. J. La Fléche says it should read, “When he stopped dancing, he struck four of the chiefs who were in a line with the lodge, and broke in their heads.” 107, 11. u‘ude ¢e¢a® ska. J. La Fléeche says that the Rabbit passed through a small hole in the ground; but his wife told me that he found a small opening in the ranks of the men who surrounded him before the dance. TRANSLATION. Wahat¢icige lived with his grandmother. ‘O grandmother, let me go to the village.” ‘‘Why! grandchild, they will maltreat you. Do not go.” ‘No, grandmother, I will go at any rate.” He went thither. He reached the village. ‘ Ho! ho! the Rab- bit has come.” ‘Take him to the chiefs.” “The Rabbit has come to see you,” they -said to the chiefs. “Come, bring him hither. Pass on to the middle. Assemble ye, and surround him.” To the Rabbit the chiefs said, ‘‘Come, you shall dance.” ‘Come,” said he, “sing for me.” ‘*Come, Rabbit, as you are fat on the shoulder alone, you are one that cannot satisfy one’s hunger.” And as they sang for him, he danced. When he stopped dancing, he said, ‘I break in the skulls of four chiefs at one side.” “He said, ‘I will strike them and break in their skulls,’” exclaimed the bystanders. ‘“Sur- round him. Cut off his retreat.” He struck four chiefs and broke in their skulls. And he fled homeward. They did not overtake him. And as he fled homeward, he entered a hole this size (i. ¢., the size of a hen’s egg) and went homeward. He got home to his grandmother. ‘Grandmother, give me a piece of iron,” said he. And she said, “‘I have no iron at all; there is only this piece of a hide-scraper.” ‘‘Let me have it,” he said. And when he threw it suddenly through the door, he made it cover the lodge. And when his pursuers came up, he said to them, “‘ How can you possibly kill me? Begone. You are standing for nothing.” The End. WAHA*GICIGE AND WAKANDAGI. FRANK La FLECHE’s VERSION. Waha™ ¢icige aka wahita"¢i" wi" a¢i’-biamé. Inddda™ wajinga Orphan the (sub.) gun (bow) one had they say. What bird fkida-bi ctéwa" muttona®-baji-hna”-biamd. Ki ‘ibae a¢é-biama. Ki he shotatwith notwithstand- he missed not regu- they say. And hunting went they say. And it, they say ing shooting larly niaci"ga wi akipa-biama, cinuda™ ska-qti-hna™ na™ba jiwag¢é-biama. person one he met they say, dog very white (all over) two he ee with they say. them Ma"™ze-weti" kéde digi¢a amama. Kagéha, mddda™ aoni” a, A-biamad Sword the (past) carryingon was, they say. Friend what youhave ? said, they say his arm niacitga ak’. Kagéha, ma™ ab¢i’, A-biami Waha¢icige aka. Indida” person the (sub.). Friend arrow — L have, said, they say Orphan the (sub.). What WAHA*GICIGE AND WAKANDAGI. 109 i¢ikide ctéwa™ mudona®-maji-hna"-ma™ ha. Indaké, kag¢éha, cé¢inke I shoot at notwithstand- I miss in Inot regu. Ido n Let us see, friend, that with it ing shooting larly / kidajgi, Ajtbiamaé nfacitga aki. Wajin’ga ji"Aqtei ¢inké’di Abazvi-biama. shoot at said, they say person the (sub.). Bird very small the (st. ob.) at he pointed at, they say. Ki Waha™ ¢icige kida-biama, t’é¢a-biama. Kag¢ha, wapé ké qtawiki¢e And Orphan shot at it, they say, he killed it, they say. Friend weapon the Llove you (ob.) for it ° Ears tM ° , pines , . . . i¢anahi” a, a-biama miaci"ga aka. Wibd¢i"wit te, d-biamé. Kagéha, I truly ! said, they say person the (sub.). I buy it from will said he, they Friend, you (please) say. i wacta-miji, A-biama Waha™ ¢icige ala. Inddda® a™¢a‘i taida", A-biama I cannot spare it, said, they say Orphan the (sub.). What you give will? said, they say me Waha™¢icige aké. Cinuda® ¢e¢anké-i ki ma™ze-weti" ¢e céna wi'l te bo) Orphan the (sub.). Dog ee (ob.) are and sword this enough I will give they (?) you % . . , NYS + rye , : ha, d-biamé nfaci"ga aké. Cinuda” ¢anka wi¢ib¢a" Dada, a-biama said, they say person the (sub.). Dog the ones scent them they? said, they say who Wahat™¢icise akdé. A™ha®, tid¢ib¢ati ha. Inddda™ wanfya agi cawaki¢é g ’ ‘ Orphan the (sub.). Yes they scent them . What animal I cHuee eer to go ‘or it ctéwa” gasnit ag¢i-hna'l ha. Ki ma™ze-wéti" ¢é indada™ i¢ati® ctéwam no matter ragging they always z And sword this what T hit no matter what by the come back with it what teeth i¢Agaq¢i-hna®-ma™, a-biama niaci"ga aké. Ki, Indaké, y4qti-ma wi" 1killit with regu. Ido, said, they say person the (sub.). And, Let us see, deer (pl.) one the blow larly agi¢eki¢a-ga cinuda” ta", Ama. Ahati! Mat ze-¢aqa™, yaqti wi agima"- cause it to go for it dog the the one. Oho! Breaks-iron-with-his- deer one walk (std. ob.) teeth, ¢in’ega ha, d-biamd nfaci"ga alka. Cinuda® aka utefje égihaqti aid¢a- for it E said, they say person the (sub.). Dog the (sub.) thicket headlong he had gone biamé. Ki gatéga™té-ctéwa™ ji yaqti wi" ¢axaxage a¢i’ ag¢i-biama. they say. And not even a little while deer one making cry re- having he came they say. peatedly by biting it back Indaké, ci dma ta" ¢éki¢gd-gi, A-biamd Waha" ¢icige aka. Ahat! Let us see, again the other the send him, said, they say Orphan , the (sub.). Oho! (std. ob) I'-¢acije, wasdbe wi” agima"¢in’-ga ha, i-biama nfaci"ga aké. Cinuda™ Shivers-stones- black bear one walk for it 5 said, they say person the (sub.). Dog with-his-teeth, ak& ci a¢d-biamé. Ki ga™ega"té-ctéwa™ji ci wasibe wi” ¢ahé aki- the again went they say. And not even a little while again black bear one holding in he (sub.) themouth reached home y biamd. Indaké, ja” eété ma ze-weti® ké ftin-ga, a-biama Waha” ¢icige they say. Let us see, tree that (ob.) sword the withhitit said, they say Orphan aké. Ja™ t& ft@bi yi gab¢ijéqti i¢¢¢a-biamé niaci"ga aké. Wapeé . ké the Tree the hit they when he knocked it down they say person the (sub.). Weapon the (sub.). (ob.) with it say very suddenly (ob.) *n/ se. . , Om Ss . , ants i’ wacta-maji édega™ ca” wil ta minke ha, 4-biamd Waha’’¢icige aka. I cannot spare it but yet I give will I who 5 said, they say Orphan the it to you (sub.). Hy) 18 9 12 15 18 110 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. Wi cti ¢é¢anké cinuda™ ¢ank4 i” wacta-maji édega" ca” wi‘i ta minke I too _ these (ob.) dog the (ob. pl.) I cannot spare but yet Esive will Iwho you ha, d-biama niaci"ga aké. Ki cinuda™ ¢ankaé 4-biama, ma™ze-weti" ké said, they say person the (sub.). And dog the he gave to him, sword the (pl. ob.) they say, (ob.) , ee / edabe, Waha” ¢icige. Ga édiqti aki¢aha a¢a-biama. Ki Waha” ¢icige also Orphan. just then apart went they say, And Orphan aka aki-biama_ iya™ sinks! di. Ki cinuda™ ¢anka jiwag¢e aki-biama. the reached home, his by the (ob.). And dog the (pl. ob.) he with them reached home, (sub.) they say grandmother they say. Ki iya” akdé fhusd4-biama. Ki, Uma™e té ¢ingé’qtia" hé. Hata" efnuda™ And his grand- the scolded theysay. And, Provisions the there are none 7: Why dog mother (sub.) him (ob.) at all ¢anké cé jiwa¢ag¢e ¢ag¢i a ya™hd, wéucii ¢éga" wabd¢i’wir ha, 4- the (pl. ob.) that you with them youhave ? Grandmother, useful as I bought them 5 said come home biam&é Waha™¢icige aka. Waijinga uma”e ¢ingé Ab ega™ 4f dkie they say Orphan the (sub.) Old woman provisions there are said, having lodge stand- none they say ing thick amaja wéyig¢iqe a 6 “i¢a-biamé. Ga waha"’-biama. ji dAkie améaja tothem to seek se for gomg spoke they say. And removed theysay. Lodge pee to them herse of thie aki-biama Gaqdjaqtci yi-biamé. Ki 4f ama néu¢ica™ jin'gaji ¢a™ &'di reached home, At one side she pitched the And _ the lodges lake not small the by they say. tent, they say. (cv. ob.) yavha ké yi amdama. border the pitched they say. tents Ki ha™ega"tce yi xagé za‘é’qtia’-biamé. ya"hd, edta” xagaf A And morning when crying they made a very great Grandmother, why they cry ? noise, they say. i-biama Waha™¢icige aka. Ecpa¢a™hé! ¢and‘atji Aqta" Ada", 4-biama said, they say Orphan . the (sub.). O grandchild ! you heard not how possible q said, they say waitijinga aké. Wakan’dagi dadé¢a"ba aké nikagahi ijan’ge ¢inké old woman the (sub.). Water-monster seven heads the (sub.). chief his dan hiss the (ob.) wena-biama. ‘Li-baji yi ta™ ‘wang ¢a” ¢a" b¢tiga ¢ahtini “¢a-biama. begged they say. They not if the all draw into he spoke of, they of them : ae his mouth say. “© him Ada® id¢e etaf éga" gfgika™i hé. Qa-f! 4-biam& Waha¢icige There- toopenhis apt as ne ecudola with . Whew! ‘said, they say Orphan fore mouth her (a relation) aké. Ga™, wa‘ijinga, aki¢a-bada™ t’é¢ etaf yi. FE cé égi¢ayi-a hé. the (sub.). Any- old woman, to attack and (pl.) killhim they ought. It that say not to ° how, him (any one) Egi¢a"i = t8’.—seté-—s gind‘a”-hna”-biam& Wakan’dagi dadé¢a"ba aka. (One) says it to when even . he hears regu- they say Water-monster seven heads the (another) of him larly (sub.). Wa‘ujinga, &’di b¢é ti minke ha, 4-biam&é Waha'¢icige aka. Gidki¢é Old woman, there Igo will Iwho c said, they say Orphan the T cause her (sub.). to be com- ing back ti minke wa‘ti ta". Ga™ @&di a¢d-biamé Waha™¢icige aka. Ki w‘at will Iwho woman the And there went they say Orphan the And woman (std. ob.). (sub.). ta" ni ya™ha ké’di ugdack es ‘ga-bi¢inkéamé. EHadta™ ¢ag¢i” a, the water border at the fastened ut she had been, they Why you sit 1 (std. ob.) Bay. WATASGICIGH AND WAKANDAGI. 114 4-biama Waha™¢icige aka. Wakan’dagi dadé¢a"ba aka a*nd-biama, said, they say Orphan the (sub.). Water-monster seven heads the (sub.) paued they say or me ki ‘fi-baji yi ta” eee ¢a™ b¢iga ¢ahtin ‘i¢a-biama, ada" i¢a™ar¢ai and they not if the swallow spoke of, they say ons I was put gave (ob.) tohim ati dtath¢é. Ki ¢ickab’ ega” g¢éki¢a-biama. (lag¢é taté ¢a™ja Ihave Iwhostand. And. untied, they im aving caused her to go home- You go shall though come say ward, they say. homeward a®wa™onaji te ha wi edéwiki¢é té, A-biam& Waha™¢icige aka. Ki you tell not of me — will ‘ I caused you to the said, they say Orphan the And go homeward (deed) (sub.). e¢é amd wa'‘tt ¢i", Ké, Ma?’ze-¢aga™, &di ma¢in’-ga, a-biama Waha”- went ‘they woman the Goris Ma"ze-¢aqa" there walk said, they say Or- home- say (my. one). ward icige aka. Ki cinuda” aka égihagti dia¢a biamad. Ga*éga"te-ctéwa" ‘ji chant the (sub.). And dog the (sub.) headlong had gone they say. Not. even a little while s w ley ye Re . C¢a"be aki¢a ati-biama (Wakan’dagi aka). Ki, Ké, I” é-¢aci‘je, édi in sight to attack came they say (Water-monster the). And, Come, I"'8-¢acije there man¢in’-oa, d-biami Waha'’¢icige aka. Ki jiga kéya Aki¢a wagaji- walk said, they say Orphan the (sub.). And body to the to attack he com- him manded them biama ecfnuda® ¢ank’. Ki Wahat¢icige aka da ¢a® aAki¢a-biama. oD they say dog the (plob.). And Orphan the (sub.) head the (ob.) attacked they say, : . ; / . . eps 2 . Wakan’dagi Gdadé¢a"ba aka cka"-lhna'i ¢an‘di nit¢ica" b¢tiga bicka™- Water-monster seven heads the moved regularly at the time lake the whole he made it (sub.) (when) move by his weight hna™-biama. Ni ¢a" ma"tdhaqti eti wad¢i" akiag¢e-hna™-biama. Ga™ éga™- regularly theysay. Water the far beneath too haying he had gone regularly they say. Not even (ob.) them home té-ctéwa" ji ci é¢a"be ag¢i’-hna" biamé. Kgi¢e da ¢a" wi gasd-biama a little while again in sight Schae regu- they say. Atlength head the one hecut they say came back larly (ob.) off Waha¢icige aki. Ki ye¢éze ¢a" ¢iza-biama Waha¢icige aka. Ki Orphan the (sub.). And tongue the (ob.) took they say Orphan the (sub.). And duba” dki¢a-bi yi t’é¢a-biama ki ye¢cze we 'sife ¢izi-biama. Ki t’é¢é four times he attacked when he killed him, and tongue he took, they say. And _ killing him, they say they say him icta’-bi tédi’hi waqe-sabé wi” ni yaYha ké ugaca"-mama. Ki da finished they when black man one water border the traveling was, they And head say (shore) (ob.) say. té f¢a-biamd. Ki ¢yii té’di wangi¢e 4" aki-biamé da té Ki wa‘t the found they say. And his at the all carry- reached home, head the And woman (col. ob.) odge ing they say (col. ob.). ak& aki-hna™i té’di fmaxe-hna”-biama. Ebé-hna" gi’¢iki¢é 4, a-bi the reached regu- when questioned regu- they say. Who regu- has sent you # said, they (sub.) home larly her larly larly home say ctéwa™, Agfsi¢a-maji, ¢-hna"-biama. Ki ébdi té fbaha™ ga™¢a éctéwa" notwith- Idonot remember, she said regularly, they And who it was to know desired notwith- standing, Bay. standing ors pA fbaha"-baji-hna™-biama. they knew not = regu- they say. larly 2 vo 6 15 18 12 15 18 ath THE @EGULA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. Ki nikagahi_ tiju aka ieki¢é-waki¢a-biama Me‘dge. Wi"a™wa nikagahi And chia! f princi- the causedcrierstogo theysay old men. Which one chief pal (sub) around 1 ijan’ge ¢inké gi¢iki¢ Gite gga” te af Ada, d-biamd ic‘d4ge amd. Egi¢e his the one causedher itmay marry may he _ indeed, said,they say old man the At length daughter who to come back be her says (pl. sub.). 4 y st , : ° / D - waqe-sabé aka, Wieb¢i", 4-biamé. Wakan'dagi dadé¢a"ba aka t’éa¢éga™ black man the Iam he, said, they say. Water-monster seven heads the IThaving killed (sub.), (ob.) im gidki¢e wait ¢inkdé, 4-biamé waqe-sabé aka. Nikagahi uju ¢inké ui¢a Isent her woman the one — said, they say black man the Chief princi- theone to tell hither who, (sub.). pal who him akf-biama. Waqe-sabé aké é aka ha, a-biama. Wiyjan‘de igi ¢i” gti-ga, they reached home, Black man the that isthe . said, they say. My danghter’s having him g ye com- they say. (sub.) one husband for me ing d-biama nikagahi tiju aké. Ki waqe-sabé yed war v'gi¢e “i i”-bi ega™ édi ‘i said, they say chief princi- the And black man head carried, having there car- pal (sub.). they say rying ahf-biama nikagahi ‘ju ¢inké’di. Ki wa‘t ¢inké fmaxdé-biama. (héta™ é a, arrived, they say chief princi- to the (st.ob.). And woman the he ques- they say. This he 1 pal (st.ob.) tioned (std. ob.) ri¢iki¢é ta®. An’‘kaji hé, ajiqtia” hé, 4-biamé wa‘t aké. Wieb¢i "ha. Wi $ “| ? ’ caused you the one Not so 3 very different . said, they say woman the Tam he to come who. (sub.). téa¢é ha Wakan‘da ké, 4-biama waqe-sabé aka. Ca™ nikagahi ju aka I killed " Water-deity the said, they say black man the And chief princi- the him (ob.) (sub.). pal (sub.) ‘{-biama waqe-sabé ¢ifké wait ¢inkdé. Min’g¢a" téga" tha™-biamd Ki gave to him, black man the (st.ob.) woman the (st.ob.). Totakea wife in order they cooked, they And they say that say. ta” wang¢a™ ¢a" b¢iga wéku-biama. Ki Waha¢icige aké na‘a’’-biama. tribe — the all they were invited, And Orphan the heard it they say. (ob.) they say. (sub.) Wage-sibé ¢inké nikagahi ian’ge ¢inké “i té na‘a’’-biamd. Ga™ ttha™ té Black man the (st. ob.) chief his daughter the had given he heard, they say. And cooking the (st.ob.) to him cig¢ai té wébaha"™ g¢i”-biama, qubé aka ga” wébaha™ g¢i”-biama. Ahat! lading out when knowingit sat they say, sacred he was _ so knowing it sat ae say. Oho! Ma’ ze-¢aqa™, &di ma™ Us‘u ud to-wit 2 A-biama é -¢aqa" , édl ma eee “2a. s‘u uda*qti té wi” i”¢im ga, lam Maze-¢aqa" there Slice very good the one _ having an ee said, they say (col. ob.) for me Waha™ ¢icige aka. Cinuda™ a¢d-biama. Uha" té cig¢éqti g¢i” amdma @'di Orphan the Dog went they say. Cooking the justlading they were sitting, there (sub.). -out they say a¢ad-bi té ca” ca™qti usu wénac ag¢a-biama. Cé¢i" ¢iqdi-ga, é’be cinuda” he went, when without stop- slice snatching went homeward, That pursue him, who dog they say ping at all from them they say. (mv. ob.) eyai ite. Q@iqd-biamé. Ag¢a-biamA ca™ca™qti Waha™¢icige exf ey té his it may Pursued him, they Went homeward without stop- Orphan his his the Ce say they say ping at all lodge (ob.) égiha akidg¢a-biamd. Wa¢iqe ama ca™ca"™ di ahi-biama qf té‘di. he Silos had gone _ they say. Pursuers the continuing there arrived, they say lodge atthe. homeward (pl. sub.) Cinuda" wa¢dhe gi ¢ga"™ b¢ige pi, a-biama. aoe , wi cud¢éaki¢é, Dog the onecarr)- hecame as I have come chas- said (one), I I sent him to you, inginhis mouth back ing him they say. d-biama Waha™ ¢icige aka. Wakan’‘dagi ke¢a™ wi t’éa¢é, 4-biama Waha”- said, they say Orphan the Water-monster the I I killed said, they say Or- (sub.). (past. ob.) him, WAHASG@ICIGE AND WAKANDAGI. ial ¢icige aka. pe¢cze cti wan'gice b¢ize, 4-biamd. Cinuda" ¢é¢anka aki¢a phan the (sub.). Tongue too all IL tovk, said, they say. Dog these both 5 ° 1 , . oe juawag¢e, A-biaméa. Ga™ u¢’ ag¢a-biama. Waha ¢icige aka é dkédega™ I with them, — said, they say. And to tell went homeward, Orphan the he it was, but, it they say. (sub.) é cinuda® ¢i” agitiki¢é aka ha stu ke. Ki é t’é¢a-bi at ha Wakan‘dagi ke, he dog the caused to come was : slice the And he killed he 4 Water-monster the (mvy.ob.) hither for it theone (ob.). him says (ob.) PVs , Foes , Tap , , , OAV , . , ° A-biamaé niaci"ga cinuda® ¢iqé ahi aka. Agima¢ii-ga, 4-biamé nikagahi said, they say person dog chasing = ar- the Go ye for him, said, they say chief rived (sub.). tju aké. Ga" agiahi-biama Ki @’di agi” aki-biama Ki nikagahi aka prin- the And arrived for they say. And there having reached home, And chief the cipal (sub.). him him they say. (sub.) wait ¢inké imaxa-biama. (iégim A ei¢iki¢é gi", A-biama nikagahi aka. woman the (ob.) questioned they say. This q he who sent thee said, they say chief the her (my. ob.) back, (sub.). A™hat, 66 hé, 4-biama wa‘ti aka. Ke’, ug¢ai-ga, 4-biama nikagahi aka. Yes, itishe . said, they say woman the(sub.). Come, confess ye, said, they say chief ye. W: ] TO nt 4 ondsn Bay ae 2 > i1-] oO é Ki a nA-| Os Z W ij re) aha ¢icige ta” cta"¢i” ug¢a agaji-biama. Ki ug¢a-biama Waha* ¢icige Orphan r the he first to confess he commanded him, And confessed, they say Orphan (std. ob.) they say. aka. Wahtita"¢i® a¢i’i tédita" cinuda™ wa¢i™ wi" ¢aika ctéwa™ ug¢a-biama. the Gun (bow) he had it from the dog bought them the (pl ob.) even acknowledged, they (sub.). say. Wakan'dagi ké t’é¢ai te’ cti ug¢a-biama. Ke’, ug¢a-ga, waqe-sabé, a-biama Water-monster the killed the too acknowledged, they * Come, confess, black man, said, they say (ob.) (fact) say. Waha'¢icige aka. Inta™! Aci b¢éé ka™b¢a ha, a-biama waqe-sabé aka. Orphan a the Hold on! outside Igo I wish 5 said, they say black man the (sub.). (sub.). U¢ami-ea, A-biama Waha™¢icige aka. Wage-sabé ¢inké win‘kaji ama, Take hold of said, they say Orphan the Black man the (ob.) didnot speak they him (sub.). truly say, dda" usd-biamé. Waha'’¢icige aka nikagahi ijan’ge ¢inke ga” g¢ar’- there- they burnt him, Orphan the chief his daughter the (ob.) after married fore they say. (sub.) all (?) her biama. Ceta™. they say. So far. NOTES. 108, 1. wahuta™¢i". See Notes on “Ictinike and the Deserted Children.” Here it may be the bow, as the Orphan calls it ma™, an arrow. See the next version. The sword is the only other word in this version, which seems of foreign origin. 109, 6. ¢e¢anke-i, probably intended for ¢e¢anka éé ha, these are they. 109, 11. cinuda® ta®, ama, 7. e., cinuda™ ama ta®, ‘‘the other dog that is standing.” 109, 13. ga"ega"té-ctéwa*ji, from ga™ega*té, a slight while, diminutive of ga"te, a while; and ctéwa®ji (negative of ctéwa"™) not even. The dogs had gone not even a little while; they returned almost immediately: ‘they had gone no time.” 109, 15. I™‘é-¢acije, peculiar to this version. Joseph La Iléche gives Ni-uha-man¢i" instead of it; but the Ponka chiefs say that these names belong to different myths. 109, 18. gab¢ijé-qti ¢e¢a-biama. He knocked it down very suddenly, sending the splinters flying in all directions. 110, 5-6. cinuda® ¢anka ce, ete., instead of cinuda"™ ce¢anka, VOL. Vi 8 114 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. 110, 8.-4kie amajya. The old woman did not live near the rest of the people; her lodge was far to one side. 110, 11. za‘éqtia-biama, pronounced za+‘éqtia®-biama by Frank La Fléche. 110, 12. écpa¢athé is used; but qyuepa¢athé is the better form. 110, 15. ia¢e etai ega*, etc.: “‘The monster is apt to open his mouth (and devour her), so the relations are condoling with her.” 110, 16. t’e¢ etai yi, contraction from te¢é etai yi, they ought to kill him. 110, 20. i¢ar¢a-bi¢inkéama. They say that she had been put in a sitting posture, in which she remained till the Orphan found her. 111, 2-3. i¢a™a*¢ai ati atathe, ‘I have come hither, and am bere now where they placed me.” Ata™he should not be translated literally (‘I who stand”), but “I am now” (i. @, just at this moment); on the other hand a¢ithe and minke (from ‘“¢inke”) denote a longer continuance. 111, 3. ¢ickab ega*, contraction from ¢icka-biega™. See ‘¢icke,” in the Dictionary. 111, 13. je¢eze, literally, ‘“buffalo-tongue.” See “¢eze” and ‘qe¢eze” in Dictionary. 111, 14. duba*, four times, that is, four days. 111, 15. waqe-sabé. Some say that this was Ictinike, who cheated the Orphan, and married the eldest daughter of the chief. He was not put to death at that time. The Orphan received the second daughter for his wife. The adventures of the Orphan in this variation are almost identical with those of the young Rabbit, pp. 50-54. 113, 2. Wahar¢icige aka e akedega® (a™¢a™baha"-baji a/gata® acti): “The Or- phan was he who did it, but (we continued ignorant of it in the past),” an elliptical expression. 113, 3. e t?e¢a-bi ai, he said in our presence that he killed him. TRANSLATION. The Orphan had a bow (gun). Whatsoever bird he shot at with it, he never missed. And he went hunting. And he met a man who was with two dogs that were very white all over. And the man carried a sword on hisarm., “My friend, what have you?” said the man. ‘My friend, I have an arrow,” said the Orphan. ‘ No matter what I shoot at with it, | never miss.” “Let us see, my friend. Shoot at that thing,” said the man, pointing at a very small bird that was sitting. And the Orphan shot at it and killed it. ‘My friend, truly do I love your weapon,” said the man. “T will buy it from you.” ‘My friend, | cannot spare it. What could you possibly give me?” said the Orphan. ‘1 will give you these dogs and this sword,” said the man. ‘ Do the dogs scent game?” said the Orphan. ‘“ Yes, they scent them. No matter what animal one causes them to go for, they invariably bring it back, dragging it as they hold it with their teeth. And no matter what I hit with this sword, I always kill it with the blow,” said the man. And the Orphan said, ‘Let us see. Make one of the dogs go after a deer.” “Ho! Ma®ze-¢aqa", go for a deer,” said the man. The dog had gone headlong into a thicket. And scarcely any time had passed when he returned bringing a deer, which he made ery repeatedly by holding it in his mouth. “Let us see. Send the other one,” said the Orphan. ‘Ho! I™é-¢acije, go for a black bear,” said the man. The dog departed. And scarcely any time had elapsed when he returned with a black bear which he held with his mouth. ‘Let us see. Strike that tree with the sword,” said the Orphan. When the man hit the tree with it, he knocked it down very sud- WAHA*‘¢ICIGE AND WAKANDAGI. 115 denly. “I cannot spare the weapon, but still I will give it to you,” said the Orphan. “T too cannot spare these dogs, but still I will give them to you,” said the man. And he gave the dogs and tli» sword to the Orphan. And just then they separated. And the Orphan went home to his grandmother. And he reached home with the dogs. And his grandmother scolded him. And she said “All of the food is gone. Why have you brought those dogs home?” ‘Grandmother, as they are useful I bought them,” said the Orphan. The old woman having said that there were no provisions, spoke of going to the lodges which were standing close together, to seek relief for herself. And they removed, and returned to the lodges standing close together. They camped far at one side (or, far apart from them). And the villagers pitched their tents by the shore of a large lake. And in the morning they made a very great noise crying. “Grandmother, why do they cry?” said the Orphan. “O grandchild, how is it possible that you did not hear?” said the old woman. ‘The Water-monster with seven heads has asked them for the chief’s daughter. If they do not give her to him, he threatens to devour the whole tribe. Therefore, as he is apt to open his mouth, they (her relations) are condoling with her.” “Whew!” said the Orphan. “At any rate, old woman, they ought to attack him and kill him.” “Do not say that. The Water- monster with seven heads invariably hears, even when one says anything to another.” “Old woman, I will go thither,” said the Orphan. “TI will cause the woman to come home.” And the Orphan went thither. And the woman had been placed fastened by the shore of the stream. ‘*Why are you here?” said the Orphan. “The Water- monster with seven heads asked for me; and if they did not give me to him, he threatened to swallow all the tribe. Therefore I have come hither, and am now where they placed me.” And having untied her, he made her go home. “Though you shall go home, please do not tell about me, that I sent you home,” said the Orphan. And the woman went home. ‘Come, Ma™ze-¢aqa"™, go thither,” said the Orphan. And the dog went headlong into the water. Hardly any time had elapsed when the Water-monster came in sight to attack him. And the Orphan said, “Come, I"8-¢acije, go thither.” And he commanded the dogs to attack him at the body. And the Orphan attacked the head. And whenever the Water-monster with seven heads moved, he made the whole lake move by his weight (i. ¢., all the water was agi- tated). He kept carrying the dogs with him far beneath the water. Hardly any time had elapsed when they came back in sight. At length the Orphan cut off one head. And the Orphan took the tongue. And when he had attacked the Water-monster four times, he killed him. And he took all of the tongues. And when he finished killing him, a black man was traveling along the shore of the water. And he found the heads. And he earried all the heads on his back, reaching his home at the lodge. And when- ever the woman reached home, they invariably asked her, “Who sent you home?” Notwithstanding that, she always said, ‘I do not remember.” And notwithstanding they desired to know who it was, they never knew. And the head-chief caused old men to go around as criers. The old men said, “The chief has said in our presence that whosoever it may be who caused the chief’s daughter to come home, he can marry her.” At length the black man said, “I am he. I killed the Water-monster with seven heads and sent the woman home.” They reached home, and told the head-chief. “The black man is he,” said they. “Bring my daughter’s husband hither for me,” said the head-chief. And the black man having carried all the heads on his back, he took them 116 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. to the head-chief. And the chief questioned the woman: ‘Is this one he who sent you back?” “No, he is a very different one,” said the woman. “I am he. I killed the Water-monster,” said the black man. And the head-chief gave the woman to the black man. They cooked for the marriage. And all of the tribe were invited to the feast. Andthe Orphan heard it. He heard that the chief’s daughter had been given to the black man. And he sat knowing when they laded the meat out of the kettles. He was sacred, so he sat knowing it. ‘Oho! Ma®ze-¢aqa", go thither. Bring back for me one of the best slices,” said the Orphan. The dog departed. At the very time they were lading them eat out of the kettles, he went thither, and without stopping he snatched a slice and went homeward. ‘ Pursue that one, whosesoever the dog may be.” They pursued him. He went homeward without stopping at all, and had gone right into the lodge of the Orphan. The pursuers continuing, arrived at the lodge. “A dog came back hither carrying something in his mouth, so I have come chasing him,” said one. ‘Yes, L sent him to you,” said the Orphan. “TI killed the Water-monster that was. I took all the tongues. I had both these dogs with me.” And they went homeward to tell it, “It was the Orphan, but we did not know it then. It was he who sent the dog hither after the slice of meat. And he said that he killed the Water- monster,” said the men who had pursued the dog and arrived at the Orphan’s. Go ye for him,” said the head-chief. And they went thither for him. And they brought him back. And the chief questioned the woman, “Is this one coming he who sent you back?” said the chief. ‘Yes, it is he,” said the woman. ‘Come, contess ye,” said the chief, addressing the Orphan and the black man. He commanded the Orphan to con- fess first. And the Orphan told his story. He told his story from the time he had the bow. He confessed even about buying the dogs. He acknowledged, too, that he had killed the Water-monster. ‘Come, black man, confess,” said the Orphan. “ Hold on! I wish to go outside,” said the black man. “Take hold of him,” said the Orphan. The black man did not tell the truth, therefore they burnt bim. And thus, after all, the Orphan married the chief’s daughter. The End. WAHA*GICIGE AND WAKANDAGI. JosEPH LA FLECHR’S VERSION. Nujinga wi ugica" a¢a-biama, waqpaniqtci nujinga ama, ca™ 41 Boy one traveling went they say, poor very boy they say in lodge fact ¢ingé’qti, niaci"ga ctéwa™ ¢ingé’qti ugdca" ma*¢i"-biama. Ki égi¢e none at all, person even none at all traveling walked they say. And atlength © sabijiqter wabdg¢eze jin’ga wi" i¢a biama. Wabdg¢eze jin’ga da*ba- suddenly very book (writing) small one found they say. Book small saw biama yi égi¢e, Wahita™¢i™ wi’ wii tai minke, a-bi¢atama. Ki ¢¢ they say when behold, Roaring weapon one Igive you will I who said the writing, And went they say. ama yi walhiita"¢in ké i¢a-biama. Egi¢e wahita™¢i" ké ¢izé ama. Ki they say when roaring weapon the found they say. Andthen roaring weapon the hetook they And (ob.) (ob.) say. WAHA‘G¢ICIGE AND WAKANDAGIL. ial ¢ niyjinga ta" wahtta™¢i" ¢izéga" gan‘ki wabag¢eze jin’ga da®baé-bi yi, “boy — the roaring weapon having and book small saw it when, (std. ob.) taken is said efa” gdxe taté gia™za-bitéami wahita¢i® ké. Gan‘ki nijinga aka how to do shall he was tanght, they say roaring weapon the (ob.). And boy ee (sub.) wahiita"¢i® ke ¢iza-bi ega®™ maqtde ujf-biama, ma™ze-ma”" cti ug¢a”’- roaring weapon the (ob., took they having powder put they say, shot too put in Say in r biama. Ga" cyt wi" i¢a-bi ega™ ntjimga aké kida-bi ega™ umuqpa¢a- they say. And pra one foand they emia boy 2 the shot they SIS made fall by es say (sub.) atit say shooting bi ega” té¢a-biama cyt ¢inké. Niaci*ga wahuta™¢i® ctéwa™ ibaha™- they having killed they say prairie — the (ob.). People — roaring weapon even knew say it chicken baji-biama. Gan’ki a¢di-biama yi, ci yaqti wi" da™bi-biama. paqti da™ba- not they say. And went they say when,again deer one saw they say. Deer saw bi ega” ci kida-biama. Ci t’é¢a-biama. Kdihi nijinga aka, Wahtita™¢i" they having again shotat they say. Again killedit, they say. Then boy the Roaring weapon say (sub.). ké uda™ inahi® aha", e¢éga™-biama. Ci a¢a-bi yiji, ci yaqti wit i¢a- ne good truly y thought they say. Again went they when, again deer one found (ob.) say biamad. Ga” ci ydqti té¢a-bi ega” gi¢éqtia’-biama nijinga aka. Wahu- they say. And again deer killed they having he was very‘ they say boy the Roaring say glad (sub.). ta"¢i? ké tida" fnahi" Aha", e¢éga™-bi ega™ gi¢éqtia”-biamd. Ga™ égi¢e weapon the good truly ! thought they having he was very _ they say. And at length ob. say glad niaci"ga wi" fe na‘a™-biama. Qeabe cugagti ma™taja ma"¢i”-biama. person one talking heheard they say. ree very dense within walked they say. Cinuda*-ma wagaji Atidg¢a-biama. Hu! hi! hu! ha! 4-biama. Cinuda* The dogs pom mite suddenly they say. Hu! hu! hu! hu! said, they say. Dog them ‘Abae-waki¢a-biama. Ki nijinga aki Waha™¢icige aka ja” dka™ naji”- to hunt hecaused they say. And boy the Orphan the tree leaning stood them (sub.) (sub.) against biama, fyinaq¢e naji"-biama; cinuda™ na™ wapa-bi ega™ wahiita™¢i" ag¢a¢i” they say, hiding himself stood they say; dog he feared them they haying roaring weapon had his own say naji"-biama. Ga” éei¢e cinuda" ama niyjinga ta" f¢a-biamda. Ga™ ¢oi¢e stood they say. And at length dog the boy the found they say. And at length (pl. sub.) (std. o niacitga aka 6di ahi-biamd. Nidcitga aké @’di ahi-bi ega™ ukfa- man ~ the there arrived, they say. Man the there arrived, having spoke to (sub.) (sub.) they say him biamé. Hata" céké ahniY” a Wahiuta™¢i" ké imaxd-biamd, wahita¢i" they say. Why that youhave ? Roaring weapon the heques- they say, roaring weapon (ob.) (ob.) tioned about fbaha™ji ega”. Ki niyjinga gd-biamdé: Edada™ wanija ya”be yi itead¢ée he knew not because. And boy said as follows, What animal Isee when ITkill they say: with it yi ji, b¢ate-hna*-ma™ dda" ab¢i”, 4-biamé. Ga™, Hin’dega™! cyt céta™ when, I eat it inva- Ido therefore Ihaveit, said he, they And, Let me see! prairie- that riably say. chicken kida-ga, 4-biamé. Nujinga aké cyt ta” kida-bi yi t’é¢a-biamé. Hin- shoot at it, said, they say. Boy the prairie- the shotat they when killed they say. Let me (sub.) chicken (std ob.) say it 12 15 12 15 18 118 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. daké, kagd, fwija"be tai. I¢a-@a wahuita™¢i® ké. Gan’ki ‘i-bi yi da™ba- see, O friend, let me see your Hand itto roaring weapon the And hegaveto when he looked property me (ob.). him, they say at it . S , . . , . va y ~ , oe bi yi: Kagé, ida" inahi™ aoni” dha", d-biama. Ki, Hinda! kagé, inga’’- they when: Friend, good truly you have ! said, they say. And, Stop! friend, teach it say . , . . , i= yes , . . o Za- gi, d-biaméa Gia™za-biama. Gan‘ki cyt wi" kida-biama yi t’é¢a- to me. said, they say. Taught him they say. And eS one shotat they say when killed it chicken biamé nidc@ga aké. Kagéha, wahtta"¢i® ké wib¢itwi? ka™b¢a, a- they say man the (sub.). O fri iend, roaring weapon the (ob.) I buy from you I wish, said biamda nidcitga aké. Ki niyinga aka u¢f‘aga-biama. Keat¢a™ja i”- they say man the (sub.). And poy the (sub.) wasun- they say. Although so I willing wacta-maji, 4-biam’. Ki niaeP@ea akA: Wi tida®™ Ata wilt te ha, 4- ) to} 7 cannot spare it, said, they say. And man the (sub.):_ I good beyond I give will 5 said to you biamd. Ki, Eddda® a™¢a% tida™, d4-biamé nijinga aka. Cinuda™ ¢anka they say. And, What yougiveme will? said, they say boy the (sub.). Dog the (pl. ob.) na"ba-biamaé. Cfinuda™ ¢é¢anké akiwa wit te ha, 4-biama. Ki, Edda” two they say. Dog these both - Igive will . said, they say. And, What to you wédaxe taté cinuda™ ¢anka, 4-biama. ‘Abaewa¢dki¢s té, 4-biama. I do with them shall dog the (pL ob.) said, they say. You cause them to hunt will, said, they say. Hindega™! Waja™be te ha. ‘Abae wagajfiga. Ki nfaci® aci"ge aka cinuda™ Let me see! I see aatlly 3 Tobunt command them. the (sub.) dog ta" ijdje ¢adé-biamé: Ni-tha-ma™¢i"-a! yaqti wil agima”¢in'-ga, 4-biama. the name called they say: Walks-following-the- oO! deer on walk for it, said, they say. (std. ob.) stream Ci, Mat ze-¢dqa™-4! wasdbe wi” agima™¢in-gi, 4-biamd. Ki Ni-iha-ma”’¢i" jen Beoee iron-with- OO! black bear one walk for it, said, they say. And Ni-uha-ma¢i" his-teeth aké yAqti wi” uq¢é’qtci a¢i” aki-biamd. Ci Ma’ze-¢aqa™ aka ci wasdbe the deer one very soon having reached they say. Again, Ma"ze-¢aga" the again black bear (sub.) home (sub. wi" uq¢é qtci agi” aki-biama. Ki ntjinga aka cinuda™ma_ qtawa¢a- one very soon having See they say. And boy the (sub.) the dogs loved them ome biamé. Ki wahtta™¢i" ‘i-biama nikaci"ga ama ta™ Ci nujinga ta” they say. And roaring weapon _he gave to him, man the other the Again boy the they say (std. ob.). (std. ob.) cinuda® ¢anké ‘“-biama. Ga™ nifaci"ga aka, Wi tda™ Aataqti wit ha, dog the (pl. ob.) he gave to him, And man the (sub.) TI good very I give they say, you A-biamd. Ma" ze-weti® cti eddbe wit ha, 4-biama. Ki ntjinga aka, said, they say. Sword too also Igiveyou . said, they say. And boy the (sub.), Wi eti tda™ wil ha, 4-biamé. Edada™ wanija i¢akide ctéwa™ it’ea¢e- too good I give * said, they say. What animal with it I notwith- T kill you shoot at standing with it hna™-ma™ éde ab¢i” ha, 4-biama. Ki, Inga™za-ga ha, wahita¢i" ke, inva- Ido but T have it a said, they say. ‘And Teach me roaring weapon the riably (ob.), 4-biamé. Ga™ gia™za-biamd. Ucka™ fbaha™ ga™¢4-biamé wahiita¢i® ké. said, they say. And taughthim they say. Deed (use) to know Sanbeal they say roaring weapon a (ob.). WAHA‘GICIGE AND WAKANDAGI. 119 Ci d4ma aka: Kag¢ha, inga”za-gi cinuda® ¢anké, 4-biamdé. Cfnuda™ Again ape the (sub.): O friend, teach me dog the (pl. ob.) said, they say. Dog other ¢anké edida® gaxe we¢écka*hna yi, cinuda™ ijd4je wa¢dde-hnan’-ga. the (pl. ob.) what to do you wish them if, dog his name you call them mye Ga™ gaxdi-gi, ecé yi, éga” gaxe-hna”™ taité, 4-biamé. Ki ma" ze-weti" Thus do ye you say if, 80 do ante they shall, said he, they And sword riably gay. ¢é cti inga”za-gi, d-biama. Edada™ téqi a¢akipa yi a®¢dsi¢d-da® this too teach me, he said, they What difficult you meet if me youthink and say. £ of ma™ze-weti? ké ¢izé-ada™ wéti® abdha-hnan’-ga ha, 4-biam& Ama aka. sword the (ob.) take and to strike make the always 6 said, they say the other the with motion (sub.). Téqiqti ectéctewa” ca® éga*-hna™ taité, 4-biama. Ga™ aki¢aha a¢a- Very dificult notwithstanding still so always ears said, they say. And apart went biamé Aki¢aha a¢a-bi yi ntjinga aka cinuda® ¢anké jiiwag¢e a¢éi- they say. Apart went they when boy the (sub.) dog the (pl. ob.) he with them went biam4, ci dma aké wahitta™¢i" ké a¢i” aga-biama. Nijinga ta™ wang¢a™ they say again the the roaring weapon the having went, they say. Boy tribe other (sub.) (ob.) it édedi¢a” kan’gégtei ahi-biamdé. Kan’géqtci ahi-bi yi mactcin’ge tne the one t very near arrived, they say. Very near arrived, when rabbit to hunt was there they say them wigaji-biamé nijinga aké. Ma ze-¢aqa™ 4; Ni-tha-ma”™ ¢i" é¢a"ba, ma- commanded they say boy the (sub.). Ma*ze-¢aqa® Ni-uha-ma*¢i" also rab- them ctin’ge tinai-ga, 4-biam4 Ki mactin’ge wna-bi yi mactin’ge hégacté- bit hunt ye he said, they And rabbit hunted them, when rabbit a very great them say. they say. wa" ji t‘'éwa¢d-biama cinuda™ ama. Ki nijinga aka mactinge hégacté- number killed them they say dog the (pl. sub.). And boy the (sub.) rabbit a very great wa" ji wa‘i”-biamd. Ki wa‘ujinga wi" gaqdjaqti yi ¢inké ama. E’di “number carried they say. And old woman one very far apart had pitched her they say. There them on tent his back ahi-biama ntyinga ama. Wa‘ujinga ¢inke di ahi-bi ega”, Mactin’ge arrived, they say boy the (sub.). Old woman by the (ob.) arrived, having, Rabbit they say eé¢ankaé wa¢izaga ha, a-biama. Hi"+! yicpa¢a"+ mactin’ge ingfi” ti- those take them : said, they say. Oh! my grandchild! rabbit carrying has forme come ena+, 4-biamd. yga"hd, pahan’ga aki¢aha mactin’ge ¢anka wi" wa‘t- ! said she, they Grandmother before apart (apiece) rabbit the (pl.ob.) one give to say. 3 ha, efnuda" ¢ankd, ¢i hdAcida® wahndte tdcé, 4-biam&é Ega"™ eaxa- g ’ ’ them , dog the (pl.ob.) you afterward you eat must said he, they So did say. biamé wa‘ujinga aké. Ga™ égi¢e nikaci"ga ta wang¢a" hégaji’qti eca™ they say old woman the (sub.). And at length people tribe avery erent close number adi g¢i” ama xagé za‘é’qtia”-biama. Ga nijinga aké ga-biama: yfa"ha, to sat they say crying madeavery they say. And boy the said as follows, Grand- great noise (sub.) they say: mother, eAta" xagaf 4, d-biamé. A™ha", Wakan’dagi dadé¢a"ba édega™ nikagahi why theyery ? said he, they Yes, Water-monster seven heads but chief say. 15 = alts: Oo 15 120 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. ijan’ge ¢asni” ‘i¢af ega™, nikagahi ijan’ge ¢asni™-baji ib ta™ wang¢a" his daugh- to swallow spoke of having chief his daughter swallow not tribe ter her her , . . Y . . , , vi v b¢tigaqti ¢asni™” ‘i¢af ega” é@di a¢i” ad¢é tiama he’, dda™ xagaf he, all to swallow spoke of having there having her go they will : therefore they ery . ae , 7: Tr / . o . i-biama Ki, ypa"hd, edta" Wakan‘dagi dadé¢a™ba t'é¢a-baji a, 4-biama said she, they And, Grandmother why Water-monster seven heads they do not i] said, they say say. kill him ate nujinga aké. Hin+! yiepag¢as! dgi¢a™yi-a hé. Qubat éga™ -égi¢a™i xi boy the (sub.). Ob! my grandehild! do not say it to 3 He is as (one) says it if (any one) sacred to (another) wébaha"-hnati he, d-biamé. Ki, Weébaha" etécte ea” yatha, t’é¢ai yi he knows invariably . said she, they say. And, He knows nomatterif yet grandmother they kill him if tida® ha, “-biamé Egi¢e wandce ama nikagahi ijan’ge ¢inké agi” add- good : said, they say. At length soldier the (pl. sub.) chief his dauchior the (ob.) having her went he biama Wakan‘dagi dadé¢a™ba ginke’y ya. Ki nijinga aka é/di a¢d-biama. they say Water-monster seven heads to the (ob.). And boy the (sub.) there we ut, they say. Edutha-baji, gacibaja ma¢i’-biamaé Kan’ge a¢i” ahi-bi yi wat ¢inké He did not join at a place out- walked they say. Near having they reached, when woman the (ob.) them, side of her they say di ¢cki¢’-biam&é wandce ama, hebddi na*cta’’-bi ega”. Ki nujinga there sent her they say soldicr the (pl sub.) on the way stopped theysay having. And boy cme , . . / . aké, Waha™¢icige aka, c¢ta™¢gi? ni ya™ha kéya ahi-biama; Wakan’- the (sub.), Orphan the (sub.) he first water border tothe arrived, they say ; Water- dagi dadé¢a” ba di éta*¢i" ahi-biamé nujinga aka. Egi¢e wait aka monster seven heads ae he first arrived, they say boy the (sub.). Atlength woman the (sub.) édi ahtf-biama nutjinga tan’di. Nujinga aka wa¢aha uda™qti yiydxa- there arrived, they say boy by the (std.). Boy the (sub.) clothing very good made for himself bi egat’, ma” ze-weti" cti a¢i” akima. Ki wa‘t ta" ukia-bi ega”, Awadi they having sword too had they say. And woman a talked they havi On what say (std. ob.) to her say : business ¢ati a, A-biamd ntjinga aka. Hit+! na! ¢and‘ayi dqta” Ada®, A-biamaé you ? said, they say boy ~ the (sub.). Oh! why! you have not how g said, they say have heard possible a dae come che ei , pee , , : wat aké. A™ha®, and‘a"-maji, 4-biami nijinga aka. Wakandagi dadé- woman the (sub.). Yes Lhave not heard it said, they say boy the (sub.). Water-monster seven atba aké a™¢asni® ‘i¢af ega™ atti hé. A” ¢asni®-baji yi c a” qti ta” wang¢a” heads the to swallow spoke eS Ihave . He does not swal- if then, alas! tribe | (sub.) me of come low me (0) b¢tiigaqti ¢asni” ‘i¢af ega™ atfi hé, a-biamé. Ki ntyinga aka, Mang (in all of to swallow hespoke ne aving Thave . said she, they And boy = the of come say. , (sub.), ei, 4-biamaé Ki wa‘ aka, Hi"+ ! ¢ag¢é etéde, ¢i niaci"ga u¢i¢ika™- gone, said he, they say. And woman the (sub.), Ob! you should have gone, you man you dressed piqti ¢atateé. Egi¢e Wakan‘dagi dadé¢aba aka t’é¢i¢e taf, A-biama. very well you who Beware Water-monster seven heads the (sub.) kill you lest said she, stand. they say. An‘kaji, ¢{ mang¢in’-gi, 4-biama niyjinga aké. Ga” wait aka ag¢a- Not so, you begone - said, they say boy the (sub.). And woman the went (sub.) homeward WAHAGICIGE AND WAKANDAGI. 2a biamé. Wait ¢i° g¢é yi ndjinga aka ni ya™ha ké’di a-inaji"’-biama. they say. Woman the went when boy the water border by the came and they say. (my. ob.) home- (sub.) stood ward Ma™ze-¢aiqa™-i, Gdhi hidéqti ¢an‘di Gdedi ¢ata™eéd te ha. Ni-ttha- Ma*"ze-¢aqa® O! neck lowest part by the there you who stand will 5 Ni-uha- oa e kos eqs nics Fi s . Ns ma” ¢i?-4, sin’de hidéqti ¢an‘di édedi ¢ata"eé te ha, 4-biama. Cmuda™ man¢i® O! tail right at the by the there you who will : said, they say. Dog root stand aka akfiwa ni ¢a™ ma"tdha Aid¢a-biama. Kgi¢e Wakan’dagi dadé¢a™ba the both water the underneath had gone, they say. At length Water-monster. seven heads (sub.) (ob.) aka dé ¢a" wi’ ¢awad¢iond-biama ecinuda" aka. Gan‘ki niyinga aka the head the one made appear by they say dog the (sub.). And boy the (sub.) (ob.) biting (sub.) ma™ze-weti" ¢izi-bi ega” da ¢a® gasi-biamé Wakan‘dagi dadé¢a"ba. sword took they say having head the (ob.) cut off they say Water-monster seven heads. Gan‘ki, Ke’, can’gaxai ea, dé-biaméa. Ga™ nijinga aka Wakan‘dagi And, Come do enough (cease) hesaid,they say. And boy the (sub.) Water-monster dadé¢a"ba dé ¢a" ¢déze ¢izi-biama. Gan‘ki da ¢a™ ni ya”ha ke'di seven heads head the tongue took they say. And head the water border by the (ob.) (ob.) a’ ¢a-biama, ga™ ye¢éze ¢a” a¢i™ agd-biama nijinga aka. threw ‘they say and tongue the having went they say boy the (sub.). away (ob.) [ii ¢a" kan’ge aki-bi, Mactin’ge Unai-ga, 4-biama, cinuda™ ¢anka. Lodges the near reached home, Rabbit hunt ye for said he, they say, dog the (pl. ob.). circle they say, them Mactin’ge u¢éwi"wa¢d-bi ega” wai’-biama Waha™ ¢icige aka. Wa‘ujinga Rabbit collected them, they say having carried they say Orphan | the Old woman them (sub.). inké‘di wa‘i” aki-biamaé, mactin’ge ¢anka. ya"™ha, mactin’ge cé¢anka by the (ob.) carrying he reached home, rabbit the (pl. ob.). Grandmother, rabbit those them they say, wa‘i™ ag¢i, a-biama. Hi"+! yicpaca™+! mactin’ge ing” g¢i-ena+, 4-biama earrying I have said, they say. Oh! my grandchild! rabbit carrying has i said, they say them come forme come home home wa‘uinga aka. Ki mactin’ge wa¢iza-biama. ypa"ha, ga¢a” i'¢in’e¢an-gi, old woman the And rabbit took them they say. Grandmother, — that put on something (sub.). (ev. ob.) for me, . aie wales) = Ge yet . i . , i-bi ega’ ¢éze ¢a® wA‘ujinga ¢izi-bi ega” nan‘de i¢a™¢a-biama. Cinuda® hesaid, having tongue the old woman took, they having side oflodge — putit they say. Dog they say. (ob.) say ¢anka, ye™ha, ¢ pahan’ga aki¢aha mactin’ge wi" wa‘i-ga ha, 4-biama: the gran dmother, that before — both (apiece) rabbit one give to them , said he, they (pl. ob.), say. =F s0/2 pws y 710 SL VALS 7 = , os . Ucté ¢anké ¢i¢tja ha, d-biamd. Gan‘ki ha”ega"tce yi xagé za‘é’qtia®- Remain- the your own - said he, they say. And morning when crying made a very der (pl. ob.) great noise biamaé ta” wang¢a"-madi. Gat’, ypa"ha, edta™, 4-biamé niyinga aka. Hir+! they say those in the tribe. And, Grandmother, wherefore, said, they say boy the (sub.). Oh! t om Sav ysiee— , . vere = , yucpa¢a", edé ¢inké eha"+, Mi"jinga nikagahi ijan’ge ¢inké qa¢a my grandchild, whatishesaying ! (fem.) Girl chief his daughter the back (one who) again aki améga™ ci 6’di a¢i” a¢é ga™¢ai dea" xagaf hé, 4-biama. yya™ha, Wa- she reached home, and there having to go they wish as they cry. said she, they say. Grand- = Water- as _ her mother. 12 15 18 12 15 18 122) THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. kan‘dagi dadé¢aba t’é¢é taf. Hata" t’é¢a-baji a, 4-biama ntjinga aka. monster seven heads let them kill Why they do not kill ? said, they say boy the him. him (sub.). Lucpa¢at+! qubé hégabaji, na pai hé. Betiga nikaci#*ga na” pai hé, O grandchild! sacred very, they fear : people they fear him him i-biamaé. Ci nijinga ak4 6/di a¢d-biama Ni ké ¢ta®¢i" a-fnaji”’-biama. said she, they Again boy the there went they say. Water the he first came and they say. say. (sub.) (1g. ob.) stood Ga” wandce ama ci wa‘t ¢inké &di a¢i™ agd-biama. Kan‘ge agi” ahf-bi And soldiers the again woman the (ob.) there having went they say. Near having arrived, (pl. sub.) her her they say yi /di ¢éki¢d-biamé. Ki wandce ag¢a-biama. Ga” wa‘ ama edi a¢a- when there senther they say. And soldier went homeward, As woman the there went they say. (mv. sub.) biam4 nf ¢an‘di. Ki dgi¢e mijinga aka édedi akama ci, ni ya™“ha ké'di. they say water by the (ob.). And at length boy the there he was, they cont, water border by the (sub.) say (ob.). Nijinga aka, Edta™ cf 4, 4-biamé wa‘i ta® é waka-bi ega”. Him+! na! Boy the Why you ? said,they say woman the that he meant, having. Oh! psha! (sub.), come (std. ob.) they say ¢ag¢é etéde, ¢i nfaci® ga u¢ti¢ika’piqti ¢dtatcé. Egi¢e Wakan'dagi dadé- you should have you you are dressed very you who Beware Water-monster seven gone homeward well stand. ¢aba akaé t’é¢i¢e taf, d-biamé. An’kaji, ¢i mang¢in’-ga, 4-biamaé nujinga heads the he will kill you, said she, they Not so, you begone, said, they say boy (sub.) say. aké. Ki watt aké ag¢a-biamé. Ga™ ci ni ké’di ahi-biama nujinga aka the And woman the went homeward, And again water bythe arrived, they say boy the (sub.). (sub.) they say- (sub.). Cinuda™ ¢ank4 twagikid-biamé. Ni-tha-ma’¢i"-4! dahi hfdéqti ¢an‘di Dog the (pl.ob.) he talked with they say. Ni-aha-ma*¢i= oO! neck the very by the them, his own bottom édedi ¢dta*cé te ha’, Ma™ze-¢aqa™-a! sin ‘de hidéqti ¢an‘di édedi ¢ata™cé te there you will stand 3 Ma*ze-¢aqa"™ Oo! the eu by the there you will stand roo ha’, 4-biam4. Ga™ cfnuda® aké ni ké égiha Aid¢a-biamd. Egiha didda- , 8 g = said, they say. And dog he ; water as headlong had gone, they say. Headlong had gone (su (ob.) -biamé yi égi¢e Wakan‘dagi dadé¢a™ba dai na”ba ¢awad¢iona-biama. they say when atlength Water snounine seven heads head two they made ap- they say. pear by biting Nujinga dé ¢a" akiwa gasd-biamé. Q[éze ¢a" wa¢iza-bi ega” da ¢a™ ni Boy head the both 23 off, they say. ongue the tookthem,they having head the water (ob.) (ob.) say (ob.) ya”ha ké‘di a™¢a-bi ega” ag¢a-biama. Ga™ yf té kan’ge aki-bi ci border by the threw away, ovine went homeward, And lodge the near reached again they say they say. (ob.) home, they say mactin’ge tma-biamdé. yga"hd, cé¢anké mactin’ge wa¢izd-gi, a-biama. rabbit he hunted them, Gaandinothor those rabbit take them, said, they say. they say. Ki wa‘ujin’ga ci mactin’ge wd¢izd-biama ‘ya"ha, ¢éze ¢a™ m¢in’g¢an-ga, And old woman again rabbit took them they say. Grand- tongue the put on something for mother (ob.) me, 4-biama. Ci ja™-biamé. Ha” amd. Ci ha™ega™tce xagé za‘é’qtia”’- he said,they Again slept they say. Night they say. Again ata cr. ae made a very say. great noise 1 « WAHA*GICIGE AND WAKANDAGI. 123 biam4 -yathd, edta™ xagaf 4 gdama, 4-biamé. Cpa¢a™+, nikagahi ijan’ge they say. Grand- why they cry ? those, said, they say. O grandchild, chief his mother, daughter ¢inké qd¢a ki améga” gika" éga® xagaf hé, a-biama Ci -é’di agi" aga- the (ob.) back again she came home, to condole as they cry . said she, Again there having went as with her they say. her ‘ or DUN ase Cel e pies . 0 biama nfkagahi ijan’ge ¢inké wandce ama. Ci ntjinga ¢ta™¢i" ni ya™ ha they say chief his the (ob.) soldier the Again boy he first water border daughter (pl. sub.). ké’di ahi-biamé. Wa¢aha udaqti 4iyxixa-biaméa. Ci wa‘t aka é'di by the _—_ arrived, they say. Clothing very good he made for they say. Again woman the there himself (sub.) ahi-biama. Nijinga ta" é waka-bi ega™, Ciiiji et¢é xi, a-biama wa‘t aka. arrived, they say. Boy the that she meant, having, Yououghtnotto said, they say woman the (std. ob.) they say come (sub.). Eei¢e Wakan‘dagi dadé¢a"ba aka t’é¢i¢e taf hé, 4-biamd. Ki nijinga aka ts) to) ) t) Beware, Water-monster seven heads the he ki lest . said she, they And boy the (sub.) you say. (sub.), Ankaji ha, ¢f mane¢in’-ea, 4-biamd. Hau, wa‘t aké ag¢a-biaméa. Ag¢a-bi L} ) ) ) 5 $ Not so A you bogone, said he, they Well, woman the went homeward, Went home- say. (sub.) they say. ward, they say yi nujinga ak4, Ma®’ze-¢aqa®-4! Géhi hidéqti ¢an’di édedi ¢atarcé te ha. when boy rhe ; Ma2ze-¢aqa® O! neck me Sr ety by the there you will stand 0 (sub.), ottom Ni-tha-ma™¢i"-4! sin‘de hidéqti ¢an’di édedf ¢ata*cé te ha, 4-biama. Ni-uha-ma*¢i® oO! tail very rootof by the there you will stand : said, they say. Cinuda® aké akfwa nf ¢a® ma*tdha did¢a-biamdé. Egi¢e Wakan‘dagi dadé- Dog His both water the beneath had gone they say. Atlength Water-monster seven (sub.) (ob.) ¢a"ba dA ¢Ab¢i® ¢aé¢a*bé-biama cinuda® aka. Ga™ nujinga aka da té heads head = three made emerge they say dog the And boy the head the by biting (sub.). (sub.) asi-biamAa ¢Ab¢i". Ga™ ¢éze té ¢izi-bi ega” dad té a™¢a-bi ega” 8 5 8 cut off they say three. And tongue the took, they having head the threwaway, having say (ob.) they say ag¢é-biama. (Mi"jinga yi ¢a44 ki-hna™ ¢an'di ug¢a gar ¢a ctéwa™ ¢i‘d- went homeward, (Girl lodges tothe reachedhome, when toconfess wished notwithstand- failed they say. each time ing ona™ ama.) Ga™ ag¢a-bi yi mactin’ge ci tna-biamaé. Mactin’ge dhigi invaria- they say.) And went home- when rabbit again them hunted, Rabbit many bly ward, they say they say. fina-bi ega™ wai aki-biamé. WaAt‘ujinga ¢inkédi aki-bi ega™ ¢éze huntedthem, having carrying reached home, Old woman by the (ob.) reached home, having tongue they say them they say. they say ¢ib¢i® ci “f-biamé. ya"hd, gaté itdi™¢in’ki¢d-ga, d-biamé. Hau! ma- three again he gave to her, Grandmother, that put away mine for me, said he, they Ho! rab- they say (col. ob.) say. etin’ge cé¢anka wacizd-da™ cinuda" akiwa wi" wa‘i-ga ha, 4-biamé. Hau, bit those take them and dog both one givetothem . said he, they Well, Bay. ja™-biama ci. slept, they say again. Ci ha”ega™tce yi ci nfiaci"ga-ma xagé za‘é’qtia”-biama ta™ wahg¢a"- Again morning when again people the crying made a very they say among those in great noise . , % : CuO madi. ‘ya™hd, gdamé4 edta™ xagaf 4, 4-biamd. icpa¢a®+! nfkagahi ijan’ge the tribe. Grand- those why they cry ? said he, they O grandchild ! chief * his mother say. daughter 18 15 124. THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. ¢inké ci qa¢a ki améga" 6'di agi” ag¢é gam ¢ai éga™ xagé améd¢e, d-biama. the (ob.) again back shereached home there having togo they wish rae ney are crying said she, they again as her indeed say. L Pate ’ , , pee Paci ya"hé, Wakan'dagi dadé¢a"ba t’é¢é taf. Eata™ t’é¢a-bdji a, A-biamé Grandmother Water-monster seven heads let them kill him. Why they donot kill him , said, they say miyinga aka. T¢a™ba™ égi¢atpi-a he. FE gi¢a™ yi Pé¢i¢e tat, A-biamé wa‘ujinga boy the (sub.). A second ee it not ie 4 It is said if he will kill you, said, they say old woman time (any one) to (any one) A fs p ay 00s . re Poo akd. Ga" wanice ama ci a¢i™ a¢a-biama mi™jinga ¢i”. Ki nijinga ama the And soldier the again having went they say girl the And boy — the (sub.). (pL. sub.) her , (my. ob.) (my. sub.) oye : e 5 ° , . / viqye o payee é'di a¢i-bi ega™ ci ¢ta¢i? ahi-biamé ni ya™ha ké‘di. Ki mi“jinga ama there went, they having again he first arrived, they say water border at the. And girl the say (mv. sub.) y . . ° Me @0\ i ~ Oy wv TILe £ Gt . édi ahi-biamé. Ci ntjinga aké, Mang¢in’-ga. Hata" ef dite, 4-biama. there arrived, they say. Again boy _ the (sub.) Begone. Why do you come? said they say. he Watt ama ag¢a-biama ci. Ni-ttha-ma'’¢i"-4, dahi hideqti ¢an‘di ¢andji* te Woman the went homeward, again. Ni-uha-ma¢i" O! neck the very by the you stand will (mv. sub.) they say bottom ha. Ma ze-¢aqa"-a, sin‘de hidéqti ¢an‘di ¢anaji" te ha, 4-biamé. Cfinuda® : Masze-¢aqa» oO! tail the very root by the youstand will . said, they say. Dog akiwa ni ké édi ¢gihe did¢a-biama. Udq¢e’qtci da wirdqtci ¢ad¢a*ba- both water the there headlong had gone, they say. Very soon head one made emerge (ob.) by biting biami. Ga” nijinga aké da ¢a" gasi-biama. (féze ¢a® ¢izd-biamé qa they say. And boy the head the cutoff they say. Tongue the tookit they say. Head (sub.) (ob.) (ob.) té égazéze ni ya”ha kédi ité¢a-biama. Ga" nijinga amd ag¢d-bi yi the inarow water border by the put them, they. say. And boy the went home- when (col. ob.) (mv.sub.) ward, they say égi¢e wagqe-sibé mi ya™ha ké uha ma¢i’-biaméd. gad té f¢a-biama it hap- black man water border the follow- walked they say. Head the found, they say pened (ob.) ing (col. ob.) wage-sabé aka. I” ag¢a-biama waqe-sibé ak’ Wakan'dagi dadé¢a"ba black man the Carry- went homeward, black man the (sub.). | Water-monster seven heads~ (sub.). ing they say aka t’éag¢é ha, A-biama. Ga", Huhu! waqe-sabé ¢éamé Wakan’‘dagi dadé¢a"ba the Ikilled . said, they say. And, Really! black man this Water-monster seven heads one him who & . , . . . 3) : ¥ : da té ‘i® ag¢i, 4-biamé. Nikagahi wi téya 4” mang¢in’-@a, d-biamda. head the earry- has come said they, they Chief lodge tothe carry- begone * said they, they (col. ing home say. ing say. ob.) Kya 4" ahf-biama. Ga", gé té dgudi hnize a, 4-biamaé nikagahi aké_ Ki, Thither carry- he arrived, they And, Head the where youtook ? — said, they say chief the (sub.). And, ing say. (col. ob.) them Wakan‘dagi dadé¢a™ba aké Cdega® t’éa¢é, A-biamé waqe-sibé akdé. Ga™, Water-monster seven heads the one but I tae said, they say black man the (sub.). And, who him Hau! ¢i ?é¢a¢e yiji cin’gajinga wiwha ¢ag¢a” taté, d-biamd nikagahi aka. Ho! you you killed if child my own youimarry shall said, they say chief the him her (snb.). Ga™ ttha"-biama, wa¢aite gaxd-biamd. Nikaci"ga b¢uigaqti min’e¢a” téga" And cooked, they say, food made they say. People 2 all to marry in en that WAHA‘G@ICIGH AND WAKANDAGL. 125 wéku-biama. Cin’gajin’ga wiwtya waqe-sabé g¢a™ te ecai xi e@¢an” taté ha. invited they say. Child my own black man he marry may yesay if he marry shall them her her Ki nikaci"ga amé ga-biamaé: A™ha”, ta’ wang¢a"™ bétiga niawa¢at ha, Ada" 5 ? D ) And people the said as follows, Yes, tribe all he saved us ‘ there- (pl. sub.) they say: fore ~ , ue ©, ~~ , . g¢a" te ecai yi g¢a" te ha, 4-biama. he may yesay if hemarry may . said they, they marry her say. her Ki nuijinga aka fhaha™ g¢i'’-biamaé, waqe-sabé watt ¢inké e¢a” tate; And boy the (sub.) knowing sat. they say, black man woman the (ob.) marry shall it her gi¢a-baji g¢i’-biama. Ga-biama niyjinga aka: Ma ze-¢aqa’-d, 6'di glad not, sat they say. Said as follows, boy — the (sub.) : Ma»ze-¢aga" O! there they say . ma"¢in’-% ha. Min’e¢a" téga® thai té vista wi" ¢ahé gi-ga, A-biama. walk thou : He marry her in order cooked the — slice one carrying come back, he said, they that (ob.) in the mouth say. Cinuda™ ana di a¢a-biama. Cinuda™ é¢a"be hi yi niaci"ga amd, Cinuda® Dog the there went they say. Dog insight ar- when people the Dog (my. sub.) rived (pl. sub.), , . . ~ 77° . tda" inahi® ti aha", 4-biama. Cinuda"™ aké wa¢ate ¢an‘di a¢i-bi ega™ tis‘u good truly has ! said they, they Dog the (sub.) table by the went, they having — slice come say. say any, : . . Fs wi™ ¢ahé ag¢a-biama. Hu-hit! cinuda™ ¢i" piiiji hegajl yi gaxai. (hiqdi-ga, one carrying be went homeward, Really! dog the bad ery ian io as done. Pursue ye in the they say. (my. one.) him mouth d-biamd nfaci"ga ama. Ki wa‘ujinga qi te’di ¢ahé aki-biam’. Cinuda” said, they say neue the And old woman lodge by the carrying he reached home, Dog (pl. sub.). in his they say. mouth inké nifacitga ey uae edibe ahni” cki te, a-biama nikagahi aka. the (ob.) man his the (ob.) also you have you come will, said, they say c hiet the him back (sub.). Wanace-ma gixe wigaji-biama Ki wandce ama wa‘ujinga Vi té4a ahi-bi The soldiers to doit commanded they say. And soldier the old woman lodge at ae arrived, them (pl. sub.) they say a for > 1; ay) ka 110 ] iqti A¢aha 1; Dvt? yl éo i e niaci' ‘ga cinuc a” eja aka niaci' ‘ga u¢ut ay ‘pq 1 Wagaha uda qt when bel hold man dog his the (sub.) man dressed very well clothing very good akima. Ki wanace @di ahi-bi yi niaci"ga ¢inké Abag¢a-biamad. Ki, was, they say. And soldier there arrived, when man 2 the drew back they say. And, they say (st. ob.) from him through shame Awadi ecati i"te, 4-biama niyinga aké. A™ha™, cinuda” min’g¢a" téga™ For what have you come ? said, they say boy the (sub.). Yes dog wedding for the tha"i té wa¢dte ¢ahé of té da”be tiawaki¢af, a-biamdé. Niaci®ga eyd cooked the food in his coming as to see him he caused us to said they, they Man his mouth back come say. ¢inké edibe juang¢e angig¢e ta-bi af ha, d-biamé. Ké, mang¢i"i-ga. the one also we with him we go home- shall he said they, they Come, begone ye. who ward said say. Cub¢é ta minké’ce, 4-biama nijinga aké. Ga" nijinga aké wa¢aha tida'qti I go to you will I who must said, they say boy — the And boy a the clothing very good (sub.). (sub.) yyixa-bi ega™ (ze t&é ag¢i”-bi ega™ 6'di a¢d-biamd. Ki waqe-sabé aka made for him- having tongue the hadthem, having there went they say. And black man the self, they say (col. ob.) they say (sub.) 15 18 15 126 THE @EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. ceta” yf té/di ahf-bajf-bitéama, yf wédaji g¢i” t& Egi¢e &/di ahf-biama so far lodge by the had not reached it, they say lodge elsewhere he sat. At length there arrived, they say niyjinga aké, ye¢éze a¢i”-bi ega™. lKddda" wib¢ipii-maji ega™” wandce boy the (sub.) tongue had them, having. What I did wrong to you because soldier they say an gihiwa¢aki¢at a, 4-biama. Wakan‘dagi wi™ tam watig ga” ¢a® ca™ gti ¢i¢asni® you made them come for / said he, they Water- TOS one tribe the inspite of to devour me say. everything you ta akédega" t?éwiki¢ai ha. Kata" wanace a™¢izewa¢dki¢at 4, 4-biama. will he was the I killed him for 3 Why soldier you caused them to take me ? said he, they one, but you. say. Ga™ gaté Wakan’dagi dadé¢a"ba ¢éze té, 4-bi ega™ nfkagahi gine * i-biama. And that (col.) Water- esi seven heads tongue the said, having chief e(ob.) gave to him, (col. ob.) they they say. say Ga™, I) ¢inké Wakan‘dagi dadd¢a"ba t’é¢s ¢inké, wijan’de 68 ha, 4-biama And, That he who Water- ornteee seven heads killed he who my daughter’s itis . said, they say him husband he nikagahi aka. Mi" jinga gan‘ki jig¢e g¢in’ki¢d-biamad waqe-sdbé igdq¢a". chief the (sub.). Girl and with her madehim sit they say black man his wife. A™ha™, dadiha, é@ hé, A-biamdé, ni é wakaé-bi ega™. Gan’ki nikagahi ’ ’ ’ ’ Q% Yes, O father, itishe . said she, they man him _ she meant, having. And chief say they say aka, Wage-sabé ¢inké agi” gii-ga, a-biama Ki wandce agia¢d-biama the Black man the (ob.) Havin ral ye eae said, they say. And soldier went for him, they say. (sub.), im ing Aqi” aki-biama waqe-sabé ta". Ga™ u¢ticiaja i¢a™¢a najin’ki¢4-bi ega” Having reached home, black man the And in the middle putting him made him stand, they having him they say (std. ob.). say wawémaxa-biama. Ki, Awatégija" yi Wakan'dagi dadé¢a"ba ké Pédads a, questioned him they say. aa! How youdid when Water-monster seven heads the you killed re (past ob.) him a-biama. Ga™, E’'di pi ega™ Aakib¢e ega™ t’éa¢é, 4-biama. Ki, Eddéda" said he, they And, There I havi ing lLattacked having I killed said he, they And, = What say. reached him him say. ite¢acé A, 4-biama. Mahi" ited¢e, 4-biama. Egi¢e wat aka nu ¢inkd you killed ? said, they say. Knife IT killed him said, they say. Atlength woman the man _ the (ob.) him with with (sub.) jug¢e é¢a"be ati-biama. Dadiha, ¢éé hé, ni ¢inké Wakaéndagi dadé¢a"ba with him insight came, they say. O father, thisishe . man vhe‘one Water-monster seven heads who téG¢e ¢inkd, nian¢é ¢inkd tee hé, 4-biama. Waqe-sdbé ¢inké u¢a™i-ga, 4-bi killed theone hesavedme theone thisis . said she, they Black man the (ob.) old him, said, him who who he Say. they say ega™ Aci a¢i” a¢a-bi ega™” ndqude¢a-biama. i=) D having out having went, they having caused himto they say. him say be burnt NOTES. Mrs. La Fléche says that a part of this myth is of French origin; this includes “the gun, paper, powder, shot, sword, table, and the white man’s food for the marriage- feast.” She agrees with others in considering the rest of the myth as of Indian origin. Mr. Sanssouci, an Omaha half-caste and ex-interpreter, says that the man put the gun and paper where he knew the Orphan would be sure to find them Yet in the myth itself it is said that the man knew not what the gun was. WAHA‘GICIGE AND WAKANDAGI. 127 116, 1. waqpaniqtci, pronounced waqpa+niqtci by the narrator. 118, 1. iwija"be, from igida"be; i¢a-ga, from i¢é, to cause to be coming, ete. 119, 16. aki¢aha mactinge ¢anka wi" wa‘i-ga hi—aki¢aha, apart, apiece, hence both : “Give each dog one of the rabbits, but place them apart, each one by itself.” 119, 18. hegajiqti, pronounced he+gajiqti. 119, 18; 121, 17; 122, 19; 128, 19. za‘éqtia®-biama, pronounced za+‘éqtia"-biama. 120, 2; 120, 17. b¢ugaqti, pronounced b¢u+gaqti. 120, 8. gacibaga ma"¢i"-biamé. He did not walk in their ranks (baza", or gaza"adi), but outside of them (gacibe), and to a place outside of their ranks (gacibaqga). 120, 12; 123, 4; 125, 18. udamqti, pronounced u+darqti. 121, 13. quepa¢a"s, ifgit g¢i-enat+. The first time that the Orphan brought the rabbits to her lodge, it was not his home: so the old woman used ingi‘i® ti; but now she uses g¢i instead of ti, as he lives with her. 124, 1. xage ame¢é, contracted from xage ama é¢é. 126, 7. waqe-sabe igaq¢a", his promised wife. TRANSLATION. A boy went traveling. The boy was very poor; he continued wandering about without a lodge, without any kindred at all. And at length he suddenly found a small writing. When he found the writing, behold, it said, “IT will give you a gun.” And as he went he found the gun. And then he took the gun. And the boy having taken the gun, when he looked at the small writing, he was taught what the gun did. And the boy took the gun, and put in powder and shot. And having found a prairie- chicken, the boy shot at it, knocked it down, and killed it. The people (7. e., Indians) knew nothing at all about guns. And when he departed, he saw a deer. Having seen a deer he shot at it, and killed it. Then the boy thought, “Truly the gun is good!” And as he went, again he saw a deer. And having killed a deer, again the boy was very glad. Having thought, “Truly the gun is good,” he was very glad. And at length he heard a person speaking. He was walking in very dense woods. He urged on his dogs suddenly. He said, “Hu! hu! hu! hu!” He made the dogs hunt game. And the boy, who was the Orphan, stood leaning against a tree, he stood hiding himself. As he feared to see the dogs, he stood holding his gun. And at length the dogs discovered the boy. And at length the man went thither and spoke to him. “Why do you have that?” He asked him about the gun, as he did not know what the gun was. And the boy said as follows, “When I see any animal, [ kill it with it, and I always eat it, therefore I keep it.” And the man said, ‘‘ Let me see. Shoot at yonder standing prairie-chicken.” When the boy shot at the prairie-chicken, he killed it. ‘Let me see! O friend, let me see your property. Hand the gun to me.” And when the boy gave it to him, he looked at it and said, “Friend, you have indeed a good thing.” And he said, “Stop, friend, teach me how to use it.” He taught him. And when the man shot at a prairie-chicken, he killed it. ‘O, friend, I wish to buy the gun from you,” said the man. And the boy was unwilling. ‘Nevertheless, I cannot spare it,” said he. And the man said, “I will give you something better.” “And what can you give me?” said the boy. The dogs were two. “T will give you both of these dogs,” he said. And the boy said, “‘ What can I do with the dogs?” Said he, “You can cause them to hunt for game.” “Come, now, I wish to see. Command them to 128 THE (EGIUNA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. hunt.” And the man ealled the dogs by name. ‘ Here, Ni-uha-ma*¢i", go for a deer. Here, Maze-¢aqa", go for a black bear.” And Ni-uha-ma"¢i® got back very soon with a deer; and Ma*ze-¢aqa" soon returned with a black bear. And the boy loved the dogs, and he gave the gun to the other man. And the man gave the dogs to the boy. And the man said, “I have given you something very good. I give youasword too.” And the boy said, “I too have given you something good. Whatsoever animal I shot at with it, I killed, hence I had it.” And the man said, “Teach me how to use the gun.” And he taught him. He wished to know the ways of the gun. And the other said, “My friend, teach me about the dogs.” Said he, ‘‘ If you wish the dogs to do anything, call the dogs by name, and when you say, ‘Do thus and so, they will always do so.” “And teach me about this sword too,” he said. The other said, ‘If you get into any trouble, think of me, seize this sword, and threaten to strike with it (7. ¢., make the motion). Even if it should be the greatest possible difficulty, still it shall be so (and not otherwise),” said he. And they parted. When they parted, the boy went away with the dogs, and the.other one carried the gun away. The boy came very near a tribe that was there. When he got very near, the boy commanded them to hunt rabbits. “Ma»ze-¢aqa® and Ni-uha-mam¢i", hunt for rabbits,” said he. And when the dogs hunted - for rabbits, they killed a great many rabbits. And the boy carried a great many rabbits on his back. And there was an old woman who pitched her tent far apart from the village. The boy went thither. When he arrived there he said, ‘Take those rabbits.” “Oh! my grandson has come bringing rabbits to me!” she said. ‘Grandmother, first give one of the rabbits to each dog; you shall eat afterward.” The old woman did so. At length the people, who dwelt in a very populous village near by, made a great noise by erying. And the boy said as follows: ‘Grandmother, why do they ery?” “Yes, the Water-monster with seven heads has spoken of swallowing the chief’s daughter, and if he does not swallow the chief’s daughter, he threatens to devour the whole tribe; so they will take her thither; therefore they cry,” said she. And the boy said, “Grand- mother, why do they not kill the Water-monster with seven heads?” ‘Oh! my grand- child, do not say it to any one. As he is sacred, if it be said to any one he inva- riably knows it,” said she. “No matter if he does know it, grandmother, if he were killed it would be well,” he said. At length the soldiers went to the Water-monster with seven heads, taking the chief’s daughter. And the boy went thither. He did not join them; he went another way. When the soldiers had gone near with her, they sent the woman thither, they having stopped before reaching there. And the boy, the Orphan, reached the water’s edge first; the boy arrived before her at the place of the Water-monster with seven heads. At length the woman arrived at the place where the boy stood. The boy had made for himself very good clothing; and he had the sword too. And he spoke to the (standing) woman: ‘* Why have you come?” “Qh! fie! Is it possible that you have not heard it?” said the woman. ‘Yes, it is true that I have not heard,” said the boy. “I have come because the Water-monster with seven heads threatened to devour me. If he does not devour me, then—fearful to think of !— he threatens to devour the whole village. So I have come,” said she. And the boy said, “‘ Begone.” And the woman said, “Oh! You should have gone home, you who are a very fine-looking man. Beware lest the water-monster with seven heads kill you.” ‘No, begone thou,” said the boy. And the woman went home. When the woman had gone home, the boy went aud stood by the edge of the water. ‘O Ma‘ze- WAHA‘GICIGE AND WAKANDAGI. 129 ¢aqa"! you are he who will stand where the bottom of his neck is. O Ni-uha-man¢i"! you are he who will stand where the very root of his tail is,” he said. Both the dogs went under the water. At length they caused one of the heads of the Water-monster with seven heads to appear. And the boy, seizing his sword, cut off the head of the Water-monster with seven heads. And he said, “Come, cease.” And the boy took the tongue of the head of the seven-headed Water-monster. And he threw away the head by the edge of the water. And the boy took the tongue away. When he drew near the village, he said, “Hunt ye rabbits.” Having collected the rabbits, the Orphan carried them in a pack. He carried the rabbits home in a pack to the old woman. “@randmother, I have come home carrying those rabbits.” “Oh! my grandchild has come bringing rabbits in a pack for me!” said the old woman. And she took the rabbits. “Grandmother, put that on something for me,” he said. And the old woman, having taken the tongue, placed it by the side of the lodge. “Grandmother,” said he, ‘first give the dogs one rabbit apiece; the rest are yours.” And when it was morning, they made a very great noise, crying among the villagers. And the boy said, ‘‘Grand- mother, what is the matter?” “Oh! what is my grandchild saying, as he sits! They are crying because the chief’s daughter came home, and they wish to take her away again.” ‘Grandmother, let them kill the Water-monster with seven heads. Why do they not killhim?” ‘My grandchild! he is very sacred, they fear him. All the people fear him,” said she. Again the boy went thither He went and stood by the water, in advance of the soldiers. And the soldiers took the woman away again. When they drew near they sent her thither. And the soldiers went home. And the woman went thither, to the water. And behold, the boy was there by the edge of the water. And the boy said, “Why have you come?”—meaning the woman. “Oh! psha!” said she, ‘you should have gone home, you who are so fine looking a person. Beware lest the Water-monster with seven heads kill you.” ‘No, begone thou,” said the boy. And the woman went home. And the boy went again to the water. He spoke to his dogs: “OQ Ni-uha-ma"¢i"! you are he who will stand by the very bottom of the neck. O Ma®ze-¢aqa"! you are he who will stand there by the very root of the tail.” And the dogs went headlong into the water. When they had gone headlong into the water, it happened that they caused two of the heads of the seven-headed Water-monster to appear. And the boy cut off both heads. Having taken the tongues, he threw away the heads on the bank, and went home. And when he drew near the lodge, he hunted rabbits again. “Grandmother,” said he, “ take those rabbits.” And the old woman took the rabbits. “Grandmother, put the tongues on something for me.” And he slept again. It was night. In the morning they cried again, making a very great noise. “Grandmother, why do those ery?” said he. “ My grandchild, the chief’s daughter having come home, they cry to condole with her.” Again the soldiers took the chief’s daughter away. And the boy reached the edge of the water first. He had made very excellent clothing for himself. The woman went thither again. Refer- ring to the boy, the woman said, “You ought not to come. Beware lest the Water- monster with seven heads kill you.” And the boy said, “No, begone thou.” Well, the woman went home. When she had gone home, the boy said, “O Ma®ze-¢aqa"! you are he who will stand where the bottom of his neck is. O Ni-uha-ma"¢i"! you are he who will stand where the very root of his tail is.” And both dogs went beneath the water. And the dogs bit the seven-headed Water-monster, causing three of his VOL. VI——9 130 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. heads to appear. And the boy cut off the three heads. And having taken the tongues, he threw away the heads, and went home. Though the girl wished to tell about her- self every time that she reached home, she always failed. And having gone home- ward, the boy hunted rabbits. Having hunted a great many rabbits, he carried them home in a pack. Having come back to the old woman, he gave her the three tongues. ‘Grandmother, put those away for me. Ho! take those rabbits and give the dogs one apiece,” said he. Well, they slept. In the morning again did the people make a very great noise by crying. ‘ Grandmother,” said he, ‘‘ why are those crying?” Said she, “My grandchild, the chief’s daughter having come home again, they wish to take her thither; therefore they are crying.” “Grandmother, they ought to kill the Water-monster with seven heads. Why do they not kill him?” said the boy. ‘Do not say that again to anyone. If it be said to any one, he will kill you,” said the old woman. And the soldiers took the girl away again. And the boy having gone thither, was again the first to reach the edge of the water. And the girl came thither. And the boy said, “Begone. Why have you come?” The woman went home. And he said “O Ni uha-mam¢i"! you will stand by the very bottom of his neck. O Maze-¢aqa™! you will stand by the very root of his tail.” And both dogs went down into the water. Very soon they bit the remaining head, causing it to emerge from the water. And the boy cut off the head. Hetook thetongue. He placed all the heads in a row on the bank of the stream. And when the boy went homeward, it came to pass that a black man walked along the bank of thestream. The black man found the heads. The black man carried the heads away. The black man said, ‘‘ I have killed the Water-monster with seven heads.” And they said, ‘Really! This black nan has come home carrying in a pack the heads of tLe seven-headed Water-monster. Begone with them to the chief’s tent.” He carried them thither. And the chief said, ‘‘ Where did you get the heads?” And the black man said, ‘There was a Water-monster with seven heads, but I killed him.” And the chief said, ‘‘ Well, if you killed him, you shall marry my daughter.” And they cooked; they prepared food. All the people were invited to the marriage- feast. And the chief said to the people, “If you say that the black man may marry my child, he shall surely marry her.” And the people said as follows: ‘“ Yes, he has saved us, the whole tribe, therefore if you say that he may marry her, let him marry her.” And the boy sat knowing it. He sat sorrowful, because the black man was to marry the woman. The boy said as follows: “O Ma*ze-¢aqa™, go thither. Bring back in your mouth a slice of the meat that is cooked for the marriage-feast.” The dog went thither. When the dog came in sight the people said, ‘“A very fine dog has come!” The dog went to the table, and went homeward, carrying a slice in his mouth. ‘“ Really! The dog has dene very wrong. Pursue him,” said the people. And he reached his home at the lodge of the old woman, carrying the meat in his mouth. The chief said, “Return ye with the dog and his owner too.” He commanded the soldiers to do this. And when the soldiers reached the lodge of the old woman, behold, the man who was the owner of the dog was a very good-looking man, and he had on very excel- lent clothing. And the soldiers were ashamed before the man (é. e., he was such a respectable person that they did not like to state their business). And the boy said, “For what have you come?” ‘Yes, we have been sent hither to see the dog which came back with a slice of meat in his mouth, taken from the marriage-feast,” said they. The chief said in our presence that we were to bring home with us the dog’s owner WAHA*GICIGE AND THE BUFFALO-WOMAN. Lot also.” “Come! begone! Iam bound to go thither to you,” said the boy. And the boy made the very best clothing for himself; and he went thither, taking the tongues. And the black man had not yet reached the lodge of the chief. He was in a lodge else- where. At length the boy arrived at the chief’s lodge with the tongues. Said he, “What wrong have I done you all that you sent soldiers after me? A Water-monster was about to devour your whole tribe in spite of all that you could do; but I killed him for you. Why did you cause the soldiers to take me?” And having said, ‘‘Those are the tongues of the Water-monster with seven heads,” he gave them to the chief. And the chief said, ‘That is he, he who killed the Water-monster with seven heads. That is my daughter’s husband.” He made him sit with the girl, the wife of the black man. ‘Yes, father, it is he,” she said, referring to the man. And the chief said, “Go ye after the black man.” And the soldiers went for the black man. They returned with the black mau. When they made him stand in the middle, the chief questioned him, saying, ‘‘How did you kill the Water-monster with seven heads?” Said he, ‘I went thither and attacked him and killed him.” The chief said, ‘“‘ With what did you kill him?” He said, “I killed him with a knife.” And the woman came to the lodge with the man, and appeared. ‘Father, this is he, the man that killed the Water- monster with seven heads. My preserver, this is he,” she said, referring to the Or- phan. And the chief having said, ‘Take ye hold of the black man,” they carried him outside and burnt him. WAHA‘GICIGE AND THE BUFFALO-WOMAN. Mrs. La FLECHE’S VERSION, Waha" ¢icige é iha™ git’ai i¢adi cti gftai té iyan’ge jigig¢i-biama. Orphan ——sihe___shiis died hisfather too died when hissister “he with his they say. mother own Ki yan’ge aka ni wi" wakidepiqtia® ¢ A¢ixd-biamdé. Ki ‘Abae a¢a-bi yi And his sister the man one avery good marksman that she took for a hus- And hunting went, when (sub.) band, they say. they say yaqti wi" ‘i agi-biama.- Ki Waha"¢icige, Hi"tce+! yangéha, wiytha™ wa‘i”’ deer one carry- was coming home, And Orphan, Surprising! O sister my sister’s carrying ing they say. husband gi gi”. Waciqti b¢ate ta minke, 4-biamd. Ki aki-bi yi yedza™tas{ ¢a™ he is coming Very fat leat will Iwho said, they say. And he got home, when kidneys the home. they say (ob.) waci™ ubcta™ ¢a™ ¢iza-bi ega™ ¢iq¢tida-bi ega” yedi ¢a® edabe ‘{-biamé. fat wrapped the shetook,they having .cputledit they having liver the (ob.) also she gave, they around (ob.) say outof say say. Cé¢a" gatd-& hé. Waci™ cka™hna f¢anahi” 4, 4-biamé iyan’ge aké. Qnate That eat thou. Fat you wish you, indeed ! said, they say his sister the (sub.). You eat onicta” yi we ké Akihide mam¢i”’-a, A-biamaé. Ki gan’ki ¢atd-bi yi taja you finish when field the to watch it go said she, they And then he ate, they when to the (ob.) say. say field 12 15 18 2 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS, a¢d-biama, gf¢a-bajiqti a¢a-biamaé. Ki ti‘e kédi ahi-bi yi ni aka ja™ wi" he went, they say very sorrowful went they say. And field atthe arrived, when man the _ tree one they say (sub.) fta"-bi ega™, Wajin’ga-macé te ké ¢até gfi-ga, 4-biamd. Gan‘ki ag¢a- stood on, having, Ye birds field the toeatit be ye said he, they And went they say (ob.) coming say- homeward 6 7 . S ery; : Ate aS . biama ha” yi. Ci ha’ega™tce yi igaha" ama yaqgti wi" ‘1 agi-biama. they say night when. Again morning when his sister’s the deer one carrying was comin husband (my. sub.) home, they say. Hu-hii! yangcha, wijdha™ wa‘i’ gi ¢i” War’ete waci™qti hébe bé¢ate ta Oho! O sister, my sister's’ carrying he is coming This once very fat a piece Ieat will” husband home. will, said they, they Yes, consent, you say. d-biamé. Eddda"™ angdxe taf 4, 4-biamé ntyjinga aka. Ki niaci"ga pfiaji said he, they say. What ae) do will ? said, they say boy the (sub.). And man bad aké& ja™ wi" snédeqti miiza-bitéama, ondqtci. Gan‘ki, Ja” cété angdne yi the wood one very long had planted as a post, very smooth. And, Wood that (ob.) weclimb when (sub.) they say, wi'a™ wa hadci angag¢i yi t'ean’ki¢e taté, 4-biama. Ga™ ane a¢a-biamaé i, which one behind wecome when we kill him will said they, they And climbing they went, when, back surely say. they say égige niaci"ea piaji aka é pahan’ga aki-bi ega” niyinga t’é¢a-biama. > length man the he before is) got back, having boy he killed, they say. (sub.) they say 9 Gan‘ki ci watt ¢inké ci cin’gajin’ga fdagé amd. Ci na” amaé nujinga And again woman the one again child she bore him, they Again grown they say boy who say. a/ = THE ADVENTURES OF HEQPE-AGCE. 163 ¢inké. Na” amd yi, ci wi™ adé ahi-biama. Cin’ gajin’ ga ¢i¢ija the one He was they when, again one toaskhim arrived, they say. your who. grown say to go with him at¢an’ka™ angati, 4-biama. Ki i¢adi aka iha™ ¢¢a™ba ci u¢i‘aga-biama. we haveacon- we cece said he, they And his the his shetoo again were unwilling, they test with come say. father (sub.) mother say. Egi¢e, ci ntiyjinga aka na™-biama, ga™ &'di a¢d-biama. Gan‘ki &di_ hi Behold, again boy the (sub.) was grown, they and there he went, they say. And there ar- say, rived ama& nijinga ¢i”. Ci éga™ fka"-biama. Ci, Edada™ a"a” te a, 4-biama. they say boy the Again 80 they had a contest And, What wedo will ? said he, they (my. one.). with, they say. say. % we 1 S . eet . oo Ki, He¢tibaja™ ata” te ha, 4-biama. He¢ibaja® a”’-biama. Haajinga 4ma And, Swing weuso will . said they, they Swing they used, they say. Cord the one say. ké sdsaqtia’”-biama, ki dma ké tida*qtia’-biama. Haajinga tida™ ké ¢ the was broken very much, and the the was very good, they say. Cord good the that (ob.) they say other (ob.) (ob.) nujinga ¢inké an‘ki¢a-biama; ki haajinga sasa ké é€ nfaci"ga piaijt aka boy the (ob.) they caused him to use, and cord broken the that man the they say; (ob.) (sub.) a”-biama. Egi¢e hdajinga tda® ké égi¢e piiiji ké ama. Haajinga he used, they say. At length cord good the behold bad lay they say. Cord (one which) gaséga™ nijinga gat’é ama. Ga™ t’é ama nijinga ké. Ci wait ¢inké ci it was cut, as boy ane fall they And dead they say boy the Again woman the one again killed say. (one lying) who ein’ gajin’ga ida¢é-biamé niyinga wi”. Ci nujinga ida¢af ¢inké ci na” child bore they say boy one. Again boy born the one again was who grown ama. Na™ ama yi, ci agiahi-biama. Cin’ gajin’ ga ¢i¢ija at¢an’ka® angati they say. He was they when,again they came for him, you we have acon- we have grown say they say. test with come d-biamé. Iha™ aka i¢ddi é¢a"ba u¢i‘aga-bi ¢a™ja, ca” niyinga aka é@di said they, they His the his father © too were sasniiirs though, yet boy the there say. mother (sub.) they say (sub.) a¢a-biami. Ke, ci a ¢a™¢ika" tan’gata", a-biamé. Ci ika™bi yi cf went they say. Come, again we have a contest we will, said they,they Again they con- when again with you say. tested with him, pees say nujinga kfbana® Aki¢4-biamd. Ci niyjinga ¢i" gia™¢a-bi ega™ ci nujifiga boy racing they contended, they Again boy the Bait him, they ines again boy say. (my. ob.) say ¢i? té¢a-biama. Egi¢e ci wi™ fda¢d-biamd iha” aké. Egi¢e cin ‘gajin’ ga the they killed, they At length again one bore they say his the At length (mv. ob.) say. mother (sub.). Hitqpé- ~ag¢e fda¢a-biamé. Ki maja” b¢ugaqti fda¢af té und‘a"-biama, Fine- le stuck-in she bore, they say. And land all over that he was born — heard of it, they a Hin "ape dg¢e ida¢ai té. Nujinga ¢i" wakide-pi hégaji ega” edada™ wanfja Hirqpe-ag¢e that he was born. Boy the good marks- very being what animal (mv. ob.) man ctéwa™ ¢i'd ¢ingé’qtia” ama. Ca™ maja™ ¢a™ b¢ugaqti muinea ibaha”™- Boever failing there Vi at they Indeed land indeed all over knew him al say. : le eas ee ee ‘ pee Brame, tte : biamé, nijinga vida" hégaji-biamdé. Egi¢e mijinga na™ yi, égi¢e ci Ade they say, boy good very they say. At length boy was when,atlength again toask grown him to go with him 12 15 18 i) 12 15 18 164 THE (@EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS, ahi-biamé. Nijinga ¢i¢ija at¢an‘ka" angiti, 4-biama. Ki i¢adi aka they arrived, they Boy your wecontend with wehave said they, they And his father the say. come, say. (sub.) iha” é¢a"ba u¢ffagd-biama. ndji te, 4-biama. Ki niyinga aki: Naha, his she too were mneeiilines g, they say. Please do not go, said they, And boy the (sub.): O mother, mother they say. imdadi é¢atba, edi b¢é t& minke, 4-biama. (ijiv ¢e ¢éga” wagiati éde my father 16 too, there Igo will I who said he, they say. Your elder so they came for but brother them 7 3 on Wipes i ie Pe / aye wi¢i a¢af éde téwa¢e-hna™i, a-biama tha” aka, - Ki Cat -natha, 6 di they took them but, they killed them said, they say his the And, Still, Omother, there away eae mother (sub.). Fes . . , . , , mm yy° . , b¢é ti minke, 4-bi ega™, 6'di ag’-biamaé niyjinga aka. E’di ahi-biama. Igo will I who said, having, there went they say boy the There he arrived, they they say (sub.). say. A™ha™, ca™ hai ¢ati t6, 4-biama. Ki, Ké, edada® ata” tai 4, a-biamd Yes, that will . youhave as, saidthey, they And, Come, what we do will ? said, they say do come say. : nujinga aké. Ja™ c¢té angdne taté, d-biamd. Ga™ nujinga aka hitqpé boy the Wood that we Solin shall, said they, they And boy the fine feather (sub.). (std.) say (sub.) , 5 : <7 r A B g¢iza-bi ega™ hitqpé Agig¢a-biama. Ga ja” té ane aga-bi ega”, ¢ took his, they having fine feather Sane his in, they say. And wood the climbing went, they having, he & say (ob.) say pahan’ga ntjinga aké ahi-biamd. Ci agf-bi yi, ci & pahan’ga hide before boy the arrived, they say. Again coming when, again he before below (sub.) back, they say akf-biama nijinga ak& Ga™ aki-bi yi, gaq¢f-biama niaci"ga pfiji ke, got back, they boy the (sub.). And he got. when, he killed him, they man bad the- say back, they say say (ob.), diiba e wit gaq¢f-biama. Ga™ nijinga aka ag¢d-biama. Tha™ ¢inke'di four that one he killed they say. And boy the went homeward, His at the (sub.) they say. mother i¢idi ¢inke’di edibe akf-biamé. Naha, wiji’¢e téwag¢e hna”™ ¢an‘ka wi hisfather at the also he reached home, O mother, my elder killed them inva- they who one they say. brother riably téagé ha, a-biama. Ga™, Sijimqtci¢a’+! wacka” ega™-a hé. Ega"qti Ikilledhim . said he, they say. And, oO ear tita child! do exert Soureel® Just so ctéwa™ ¢iji’¢e téwad¢é-hna”i hé, A-biama. Kgasani yi, ci Seige ¢ab¢i" notwith- yourelder they killed inva- 5 said she, they The morrow when,again behold three standing brother them riably say. aki ahi-biama. At¢a™¢ika" angati, mijinga, a-biama Aha", cub¢é ta the arrived, they say. We contend with we have O boy, said they, they Yes, I go to you will (sub.) you come, say. minke, 4-biamé. Ki iha™ aka gdé-biam’: Wacka™ ega™-a hé, sijinqtci¢a™+! Iwho, said he, they say. And his the said as follows, Do try O dear little child! mother (sub.) they say: éga'gti ctéwa™ ¢iji ¢e téwags- -hna™i hé. Wacka™ ega’’-a hé, a-biama. just so nothwith- your elder mney killed invariably . Do be strong 2 said she, they standing brother them say. Nijinea akdé 6/di ad¢d-biamé. Gat 6/di ahf-biama. BE gi¢e ci he¢tbaja" ying \] Boy the (sub.) there went theysay. - And there hearrived, they say. At ea again swing an ‘i¢a- -biamé. Hegttbaja" ké hdajinga tda® ké an’-ga ha, a-biama to use 163 yf té ude agai té’di wébaha” ji (had) they And leader the old man the lodge the entering went when hedid not know say. (sub.) (mv. ob.) (ob.) him, ama. Egi¢e ga™¢inké’qti wébaha” amd i'ctige ¢inké. Ietige aka theysay. Atlength aftersittingagreat he knewhim they say old man the (st. ob.). Old man the while (sub.) gé¢ega™-biamd: I¢i"sabé’qti ugdca™ “ibae wéahidé'qti ugdca™i ¢a”’cti, thonght thus, they say: My relations snffering traveling hunting toagreatdistance they traveled inthe past very much Niacitga d‘tiba timakdqtci axyig¢a¢i"® ti aha", e¢éga™-biama. [fidiqti Man some very easily have brought them- ! thought he, they say. Right in the selves hither lodge niacitga d‘tiba t’éawa¢é t& minke, e¢éga™-biama. (iéaké nuda™hanga aké man some Tkillthem will Iwho, thought he, they say. ‘This one leader the (sub.) gé¢ega™-biama: T! Nika-najfha wdi"mi” ta minke, ehé ¢a™cti. Wafi" ‘thought thus, they say: rer Human hair I wearasarobe will I who, Isaid in the past. Robe ent! ida® inahi" 4ha%. Ab¢i té minke, e¢éga"-biama. Egi¢e isan’ga aka good truly ! IThaveit will Iwho, he thought, they say. Atlength his younger the brother (sub.) THE CHIEF'S SON AND THE THUNDERS. 181 wi” aka wasibe wi” a¢i” aki-biama. Nack{ ¢a” jin’gactéwa”ji akdma, one the black bear one he brought home, they say. Head the by no means small he had, (sub.) (ob.) they say, ki najiha jidéqti akdma. Ki yi isan’ga fu¢d-biama imc‘ige aka. and hair very red had,they Reached when his younger told the news to, old man the say. home brother they say (sub.). I¢isabéqti u¢digaca™ ¢a™cti. Diba wpiidiqti ayig¢a¢i® ti. T’éawage ta You suffered you traveled in the past. Some right to the have brought themselves. I kill them will exceedingly lodge minke, 4-biamdé. Ci wi” aka ye-nuga éde a¢i” aki-biamd Najiha ¢a” I who, said he, they Again one the buffalo-bull but brought it home, they say. Hair the say. (sub.) ziqteci akima. Hau. Gan’ki wan’gi¢e aki-bi yi ci wi" najiha ¢a" very he had, they Well. And all reached home, when again one hair the yellow say, they say qiqti akima. Nidcitga dde a¢i” aki-biaméa. Ga™ pahan’ga aki aka, very he had, they Man but brought it home, they say. And before he reached he green say. home who, Tc‘ige-a, wa¢atai 4 niaci"ga ¢ankd. Aha", wa¢ata-baji, dwagiha™i-ga ha, Oldman O! didthey eat ? man — they who. Yes, they did not eat, cook ye for them d-biamé. Ga™, Wat‘a’-bacpi uwagiha’i-gi ha, a-biamé. Ki égi¢e, said he, they And, Squash sliced, cook for them 6 said he, they say. And behold, say. nikaci?ga nija tiwagiha™ akima. Ega® a¢dta-baéji ha, 4-biamé. EKga® to) to) J ? fo) man ear he had cooked for them, they say. Such we eat not . saidthey, theysay. Such onadta-baji yi eddda®™ ondtai dite, 4-biamd i’ec‘age aka, wand‘a®-baji-bi you eat not if what you eat may? said he,theysay oldman the (sub.), they not hearing pos , Ae, % ° eiere: . % : e¢éga" éga". Wata™zi-ski¢e b¢a” zéqtci twagiha™i-ga, 4-biama. Ki égi¢e, he thought as. Corn sweet very fine cook for them, said he, they say. And behold, hé é waké akama. Ga™, Ega® a™wa™ ¢ata-baji, 4-biamé. Egi¢e wit’ aka lice that he meant, they say. And, Such we eat them not, said they, they Atlength one the say. (sub.) . _ Sty Sirs 5 gi-biamai: Wasabe je-niga edabe é’qti uyfha™ taf, a-biama. Ga™ said as follows, Black-bear buffalo. bull also themselves let them cook for said he, theysay. And they say: themselves, gi¢éqtia”-biama. Uyiha"-bi ega™ wjawaqti wa¢ata-biama. Hau, égi¢e they were very glad, they Cooked for them- having in good spirits they ate, they say. Well, at length say. selves / ~~) e , / « fe f s Ss; , ha” amd. Ha™ yi Pe‘ige aka gé-biama: Jucpaha, niaci"ga ugdca™ night they say. Night when oldman _ the (sub.) at as follows, Grandchild, man travels they say: i décteda edwaga® taf ha. Ueetai-ea, A-biami Aha", giga™ha, ¢f feo} to) to} coo} when talking inces- let us be so - Vell about said he, they Yes, grandfather, you santly yourselves, say. ¢ana™ éga" ie‘age hni® éga” edada” ahigiqti iepaha" ha Qita"¢i" ug¢a-ga ha, you as oldman youare as what a great many you know A You first tell about grown yourselves . ? : , . 7D , Cf) Oya i-biamé. Hau, yucpdha, i"c‘ige b¢i™ ¢a”ja uig¢a a™¢in’ge Aga. Hidga® said he, they Well, grandchild, old man lam though totellabout Ihave indeed. Itella say. his relations nothing myth 5 F ; 7 Ao D : . te A¢a, 4-biamé. Ga higa’-biamd ic‘ige aka. Egi¢e, yuepaha, i"e‘ige will indeed, said he, they And told a myth, they say old man the It happened, grandchild, old man say. (sub.). : wy. , So et GE ° ] b] O father, my mother cook will. T hungry, said he, theysay. And she covked, they say. This way a 20:5 O20 *n/ Al tw a : X ae k . aoni™ cf taf. Nin’de ké ahigi agi” gfi-ga, a-biamé. Ga” nin‘de¢é-bi you willcome with it. Cooked the much bring ye hither, said he, they say. And they cause it to be cooked, they say yi edi é¢i" ahi-biama. E¢i" ahi-bi ega” na*bu¢iq¢a ¢iontida-biama., when there having they arrived,they Having they arrived, having ring he pulled off they say. for him say for him they say ° ° 1 . ° , . 1 ° ; r (fiontida-bi ega™ ecaadi ¢iontid ia” ga-biama. Ké, a™wam date tatd, Pulled off, theysay having near by pulled off, he putit they say. Come, Wo eat shall, ° . , elpinite: es Ooyi rd Ce a-bi ega” égi¢e watt aka jigig¢éqti g¢i”-biamd, Wée's‘ai-watt aka. said, having behold woman the (sub.) right with him sat they say, Snake-woman the they say (sub.). Ga” wa¢ate jugig¢a-biama. Ci kikickade-ctéa"-hna™-biamd, ni ¢inké And eating she with him they say. Again they even played regularly with they say, man the (ob.) } each other a¢ixa-bi ega™. shemarried, having. they say : Ci Wée's‘i-wa‘t ama ¢ingd-biamé. Ci na™bi¢iq¢d gia™-biamd ni Again Snake-woman the (sub.) was none, they say. Again ring wore his, theysay man ¢inké. Ci, Dadiha, wat cémi*jin’ga jingdqtei watcigaxe waja™be ka™b¢a, eiecne Agair, O father, woman young woman very small to dance T see them I wish, who. d-biama. Ky i¢adi aka ga-biamd: Hau! cin’gajin’ga wiwfja wa‘t ¢émi®- said he, they And hisfather the said as follows, Well! child my woman young Bay. (sub.) they say: jin’ga jingdqtci watcigaxe wegarta ha; éga" gaxe taf, 4-biamad i¢ddi aka. woman very small todance wishes forthem ; 80 do will said, they hisfather the (they), say (sub.). Ki itc‘age wi ci tiwagi¢a a¢d-biamé. Ga-biam4: Wa‘ti-mécé cémi?- And old man one again totellthem went they say. He said as follows, Ye women young they say: jin’ga jinigaqtci-macé edibe wa¢atcigdxe ¢ida”be ga™¢ai. Wag¢atcigdxe woman very small ye who also you dance to see you he wishes. You dance taf, ai a¢a+! d-biama. Ga” watcigaxd-biam& Nijinga aké u¢fxida-biama will, he indeed! said he, they And they danced they say. Boy the looked around, they say says say. (sub.) 15 18 6 t=) 12 192. THE @EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. yi Wé's‘a-wa‘t i¢a-bajf-biama. a a-baji yi, Ké, dadiha, wa‘'i ama when Snake-woman he did not find, they say id not find when, Come, O father, woman the (sub.) mek f, A- watcigaxe can’gaxe taf, 4-biama. Ca ckaxe taf, 4-biama, a¢a+, watcigaxe to sree stop will said he, they Ye will stop, said he, they indeed, dancing (they), say. say, té, A-biamé. Ga™ can’/gax4-biamé. yf téya aki-biama. Ké, dadtha, the, said he, they And they stopped, they say. Lodge tothe he reached home, Come, 0 father, Say. they say. i“natha tha" te. Na™pa™hi", 4-biamé. Ki ttha"-biama. Duda! aoni” ci my mother cook will. T hungry, said he, they And she cooked, they say. This way! you come say. with it taf. Nin’de ké Ahigi agi” gfi-ga, 4-biama. Ga” nin‘de¢a-bi yi 6'di é¢i" will. Cooked the satan bring ye eae said he, they And they caused it to when there having say. be cooked, veoe say for him ahi-biama. E¢i® ahi-bi ega™ nebeCat: e¢ionuda-bi ega”, Ké, a"wat- they arrived, they Having arrived, ane pulled off his own, iain. Come, we Say. forhim they say they say ¢ate taté, A-bi ega™, gi¢e wait aka jugig¢é’qti g¢i’-biama, Wé's‘a-wa‘tt eat shall, said, having, behold woman the right with him sat they say, Snake-woman they say (sub.) aké. Ga™ waddte jigig¢i-biama. Ci kikickade-ctéa”-hna™-biama. Ci the And eating she with him, they say. Again they even played regularly with each other, Again (sub.). they say. We'si-wat ama ¢ingd-biamé. Oi. na"bii¢iq¢a gia”-biama nu ¢inké. Ci, Snake-woman the was none, they say. Again ring wore his, they say man theone Again, (sub.) who. Ké,- dadtha, wa‘ cémi%jin’ga na” ¢i” watefgaxe te, d-biama. Cémiryin’g: Come, O father, woman maiden grown une let her dance, said he, they Maiden (ob. say. ¢ana™ ¢a¢ited waddtcigaxe taf ag¢at! Nilcagahi iin’ge aka ¢ida”be ga™ dai yougrown you who you are to dance indeed! Chief his son the to see you wishes are (sub. a¢a+! d-biamd. Ga’ watcigaxa-biama. Ga” wait ama u¢ixida-biama. indeed! said he, they And they ion they say. And woman the he looked around for, aay. ; (one my.) they say. [¢ai-bajf-biamé. I¢a¢a-maji aha", e¢éga"-biama. Can’ gaxewaki¢a-biama. She was not found, they I find her I not ! thought he, they say. He caused them to stop, they say. say. Ga™ ag¢d-biamé. Aki-biama yi tha™ agaji- -biama. Ké, dadtha, i”’natha And he went homeward, He reached home, when tocook he commanded them, Come, O father, my mother they say. they say they say. tha" te. Na®pa™hit, 4-biamé. Ki tha™-biama. Duda aoni™ cf tat. cook will. IT hungry, said he, they say. And he cooked, they say. This way you will come with it. 5 ye ene . Posey ° / Cony; . - ° : Nin’‘de ké Ahigi a¢i” gfi-gi, a-biamd. Ga” nin‘dega-bi yi di é¢i" Cooked the much bring ye hither, said he, they And they causedit to when there having say. be cooked, bee! say for him ahf-biamé. EH¢i" ahf-bi ega™ naa g¢ionuda-bi ega™, Hau! ci a¢tiha they arrived, Having arrived, ene pulled off his own, ai ee Ho! again finally they say. for him bey say they say atwa™ date taté, d-biamd. Kgi¢e wat aka jigig¢é’qti e¢i'’-biama, We's‘a- we eat shall, said he, they Behold woman the right with sat they say, Snake- say. (sub.) wat aké. Ga” wa¢ate jigig¢a-biama. Ukfkie-hna”’-biama. Ukikie- woman the And eating she with him, they say. They talked inva- they say. They talked (sub.). to each other riably to each other hna”-bi yi i¢ddi aké na‘a”-biama. Ebé-hna" ukié cite da™bai-ga, inva- they when his father the heard it they say. Who only he may be talking see ye, riably say (sub.) to THE CHIEIS SON, THE SNAKE-WOMAN, AND THUNDERS. 193 a-biamé. Mi”jinga wi” da”be ad¢a-biama. Ki gé-biama: Dadiha, wijinu said he, they Girl one to see went they say. And _ she said as fol- O father, my elder say. lows, they say: brother , , . oH 0 ben : Ns . ape a aka wa‘ti uda™-qti wi” jug¢e g¢i” hé, é-biam& mi™jinga aké. Ga™ the woman very beautiful one he with sits fe said he, they say girl the And (sub.) her (sub.). Wée's‘a-wa‘tt A¢ixe wa¢iona-biama. 3 Snake-woman married him visible they say. We's‘a-wa'tt awa" waja a¢a-baji-biama. Egi¢e ni aka ada-biama. Snake-woman which way went not they say. Atlength man the (sub.) went, they say. A¢aé-biama yi égi¢e watt uda"-qti wi" i¢a-biama. Ga-biama: Wig¢a" He went, they say when at length woman very beautiful one he found, they say. He said as follows, IT marry yn/ they say: you ti minke. (iddi ¢iha™” twagi¢d-ga, a-biamé. Gan’ki wai akd uf¢a 6 will I who. Your father your tell them, said he, they And woman the totellit mother say. eee ) aki-biama. Gd-biamd: Dadihdé, i”na™ha méga", nuikagahi ijin’ge akaé reached home, She said as follows, O father, my mother likewise, chief his Sa the they say. they say: (sub) ang¢a™ ‘i¢ai, A-biamd. Ki i¢adi aka ga-biama : (hi¢ahidai te ha, a-biaméa. tomarry promised, said she, And her father the said as follows, He mocked you . said he, they me they say. (sub.) they say: say. Ki Wé's‘i-wait akdé wayji’cte ¢ingd-bitéama, watt Aji waga'’¢a té’di. 9 And Snake-woman the inabad humor disappeared, they say, woman a differ- he desired when. (sub.) ent Ga™ ¢ingaf té yi ga-biama: Wab¢ate ka™b¢a ha I”na™ha tha? te, And she disappeared when he saidas follows, T eat Iwish 5 My mother let her cook, they say: si 4-biamé. Ki ttha’-biamé. Dtida aoni™ ci tai. Nin‘de ké ahigi a¢i” efi 2a, said he, they And she cooked, theysay. This way you will come Cooked the much bring ye hither, say. with it A biamaé. Ga™ nin’de¢é-bi yi é’di é¢i" ahi-biama. [H¢i" ahi-bi ega™ 12 said he, they And they caused it to be when there they brought it thither to Brought it thither to having say. cooked, they say him, they say. him, they say na"bu¢iq¢a g¢fonuda-bi ega”, Ké, a"wa™ ¢ate taté, A-biama. EKei¢e, an’ kaji- ring = led off his, they ine ing, moms we eat shall, _ said he, they Behold, not so say say. biamé. An’‘kaji ega” ¢atd-baji-biama, gi¢a-baji-biama, Wé’s‘a-wa‘t igi¢a- they say, Not so being he ate not they say, displeased they say, Snake-woman found not his baji-bi ega”. Qiza-gi. I" ¢a-maji. Wa¢adte ka™¢a-maji, 4-biamé. Ké, 15 they say having. Take it. Tam sad. Food I want not, said he, they say. Come, dadfha, ‘A4bae b¢é ta minke, 4-biama. Can’ge ta" na™qa canakag¢e father, hunting Igo will I who, said he, they say. Horse the (ob.) vertebra saddle in’ g¢ari-gi, 4-biamé. Wad¢aha uda*qti a¢aha-biama. Can‘ge ta™ cti udarqti, put ye on for me, said he, they Clothing very good he put on, they say. Horse the too very good, say. canakég¢e cti uda’qti. A¢a-biamd. A¢d-biamé yi ¢gi¢e Weé's‘a-wa't 18 saddle too very good. He went, they say. Hewent,they say when behold Snake-woman sig¢é té fgi¢a-biama Nihan’ga té ag¢a-bitéama. Sig¢u¢tigiha-biama. trail the he found his, they say. Spring the (ob.) she went back, He tollowed the they say. they say. tra‘] of his Sig¢ugtigiha- -bi yi, égi¢e nihan’ga té akusande aya a¢a-bitéama sig¢é té. He followed the trailof when, behold spring the through beyond went, they say trail the. his, they say Sig¢u¢igihe a¢d-bi* ega™, ¢4-bi ga”, ¢a-bi ga”, égi¢e yf té pfijiqti édedi 21 Following the trail he went, haying, he went, having, he went, having, at length lodge the very bad there it of his own they say they say they say VOL. vi 13 12 15 18 194 THE GEGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. te ama. (fétédi hi eska™, e¢éga" éga" &/di a¢d-biama. H’di ahi-bi yi égi¢e was they Atthis she itmight hethought as there hewent,they say. There hearrived, when behold Say. place arrived be, they say niacitga Pe‘Agéqtci akima, wa¢aha ¢icpdcpaqtcia” akd4ma. (é niaci"ga person very old man‘ was,theysay, clothing torn in shreds they say. This man ahfi yi Me‘Age ¢inké wi¢aha ey té Ad¢ahaki¢a-biama niyjinga aka. arrived when old man the (ob.) clothing his the caused him to put on, boy the they say (sub.). IrcAge aké qubé-biamé. Hau! jucpaha, ¢a‘ea™ ¢a¢e ehnéga", wa¢aha Oldman the (sub.) sacred, they say. Ho! grandchild, you pity me you think, clothing an¢Ati, ca™ ga‘éwigi¢é, d-biama. Uwikie ti minke, d-biamé. Wa‘t you gave yet I pity you, said he, they Italk to you will I who, said he, they Woman me, say. say. u¢i¢ahe ¢i” gaké ¢é, ni-yanga ke A¢ite ¢¢, a-biamd. Hau! wa¢aha ¢¢ youfollow the that (way) went, big water the crossed it went, said he, they Ho!- clothing this her say. pfijiqtei ¢é dhnaha hné te, 4-bi ega™ ‘i-biama i"ctige aka. Wa¢ige very bad this youputon you will go, said, having gave him, old man the Hat they say they say (sub.). ¢a” cti ‘f-biamé. Ma" ze-weti” cti ‘-biamd. Can’ge ta” pfiji wahi¢agé the too gave him, Sword too gaye him, Horse the bad lame they say. they say. cti ‘i-biamé. Gat, Ké, hné te. Ta” wang¢a™ wi” édedi¢a™ @'di ahi ag¢a too gave him, And, Come, you will go. Viliage one the one that _—_ there ar- indeed they say. : is there rived watt aka, A-biama. A™ha™, A-biamaé. Masdni ci tédihi yi nfaci™ga woman the (sub.), said he, they Yes, said he, they Across you arrivesatit when person say. say. arrive diiba é@di g¢i”, a-biama. Uwa¢akié te, 4-biamé. Te ké é¢ind‘a®-baji some there sit, said he, they You will talk with said he,they Word the not heed for you : say. them, say. yi ¢éwa¢iki¢e té, A-biamaé A™ha™, jiga™ha, 4-biama, ¢aha™-bi ega™. if you will sead them said he, they Yes, grandfather, said he, they thanked him, having. away, say. , say, they say Ga™ a¢a-biama. And so_ he went, they say. Ni-yanga ahi-bi yi ni ké jin’gaji ama. I*c‘Age aka waqtbe gaxai Big water hereached, when water the notsmall they say. Old man the sacred (thing) made they say . (sub.) , v, . . . . . . *n/ . . éga" mf ké Agajade ¢éki¢d-biama, i"c‘age aka icta-¢ipT’ze g¢i-bi ega™. having water the striding he sent him, they say, old man the (sub.) closing hiseyes sat, they say having. Icta ¢ib¢a-bi yi, égi¢e masdni ahi biamd. Masani ahi-bi yi, 3i édedi-te Eye opened,they when, behold theother he reached, they The other he reached, when, lodge there it was, say side say. side they say ama, etide ga™ man’g¢e naji te ama. (é yi witiga™ ud¢d gar’ cti, ¢etés ha, theysay, smoke — so erect it stood they This lodge my grand- told of heretofore, this is it say. father d-biama. E/di ahf-bi ega” uda-biamd. Egi¢e i"ce‘dge na”ba é'di g¢i”’ said he, they There arrived, having he entered, they Behold old man two there were sit- say they say say. akdma, Ing¢a™ Pe‘ige. ‘Abae a¢a-biamd ucté ama. Watage ¢a™ inc‘dge ting, they Thunder old man. Hunting went,they say therest the Hat tho old man say, (pl. sub.). aka ‘fi ¢a™ ugidada”-bi yi wa¢iona-baji-biama. I"c‘ige ama i¢a-baji- the had given the he pushed down his, when he was invisible they say. Old man the (sub.) did not ‘sub.) bim they say discover him THE CHIEIWS SON, THE SNAKE-WOMAN, AND THUNDERS. 195 biamd. Ki égi¢e, angi éga™ nikaci"ga wa¢ate akama Ing¢a™ aka. Ca™ they say. And behold, us liko man were eating them, theysay Thunder the (sub.). Yet weta- baji e¢i’-bi x, Piaji nahi" gaxai dha", e¢éga™ g¢i"’-biama niyjinga aka. found him not wey sat, when, Bad truly Thee do ! thinking sat they say boy the they say (sub.). Wisiga™ udwakie tai-ma ¢é wawake te-Ana e¢éga™-biama. Ga™ nini uji-bi My gri eral Italk with will they this he meant them ! thought he, they say. And tobacco they put father them who (in thought) in, they say yi wa¢iona yiyixa-biama, wa¢age g¢ionudd-bi ega”. Nintba ké wénaca- when visible he made himself, they hat pulled off his, they cn Pipe the he snatched say, say from them . , ¥ . biama. Niniba nakade yi ibista-biamé Ingca” Pc‘dge Ama ¢inké. I'teitef! they say. Pipe hot when he held against, Thunder old man the the (ob.). I burn! they say other d-biama i"c‘Age aké. Gan’ki wa¢ige ugidada”-bi yi ¢inga-biama. Qa-i, said, they say old man the And eae ne pulled on his, when he was missing, Whit! (sub.). they say they say. niaci"ga tmaka inahi” ayig¢agi® ti ¢a’cti Hata" cénaji Gitte, a-biama. man easy truly having himself had heretofore. Why notdestroyed may? said (one), come they say. Ama ga-biama: (hi éwidacibe, ehé té edta™ cénaji, A-biamé. Géagiama The said as follows, Thee I left him for thee, Isaid when why not destroyed, said he, they Those returning other they say: say. 4 ‘ 4 4 Ni ky: A] Dn aty Akin 1 hit weama ta ama. faci™ ga tmaka teabe ti ¢a* cti akiag¢al, wéahusa ta they will the (sub.) Man easy very had come hither went back again, they will blame us scold us ami. Kgi¢e niacitga té¢e 4” ag¢i-biamda. Gaké ¢izdi-ga, 4-biama. the (sub.). At length man killed carrying one came home, That (ob.) take ye, said he, they they say. say. (hizd-bi ega™ nan‘day ihé¢a-biama. Hau! ha+! wéa¢ama taité, a-biama. Took it, having by the wall they placed it, they (See note) you will surely blame us, said they, they say say. they say. Niacitga timaka ayfg¢a¢i® ti ¢a™cti dkidg¢ai, 4-biama. Tena’! edta™ aja” Man easy having himself had come he went back said they, they Fie! why youdid hither again, say. yi t’é¢a¢a-baji g¢é¢aki¢af a, d-biamd. Weéahidéqti angi-hna" angahii, when you did not kill you sent him q said he, they At a very great we only we arrived, him homeward say. distance 4-biama. Umakagtei ti yi té¢a¢a-baji g¢éwa¢adai piiji ckaxai. wit’: ab¢ai, said he, they Very easily came when you did not kill you sent them bad you did. I hate you, him homeward 4-biama. K¢é, nini ujfi-gi, adida! 4-biama Gan’ki nini uji-bi ega™, vege said he, they Gone tobacco put ye in, simpletons! said he, they And tobacco putin, having, killed Bay. - say. they say eqi ¢inké ‘“-biamd. Niniba ké ¢ana-bi ega” niyjinga aka wénaca- earry- came theone they gave him, Pipe the took a whiff, -having boy the snatched it ing home who they say. they say (sub.) from them biamd, fbista-biama. I'tcitei! 4-biamd Wieb¢i"-maji, 4-biama. Ama, they say, pressed it against him, Lam burnt! said he, the) It was not I, said (one), they The other, they say. say. say. Wieb¢it-maji, 4-biama. Nijinga aka wag¢dge g¢ion uda-biama, (iéma It was not I, said he, they say. Boy the (sub.) hat. pulled off his, they say. These jawag¢e’qti i¢a”-biamd. Edada™ edécai a, 4- biama Edada™ eda™ ¢a?-baji, right with them he sat suddenly, What what said ?% said he, they What what we said not, they say. ye say. d-biama. [¢ae-hna™i, 4-biamd miijinga aki. Ke, efa” ckaxe ceka™ hnai said they, they You were speaking, said, they say boy the (sub.). Come, how you do you wish say. 15 18 Oo 15 — (oe) 196 THE ¢@HGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. yi, ké, gdxai-ga, 4-biami. Wéa-biama. Kagéha, an‘kaji, a™¢a™a-baji, if, come, do ye, said he, they say. They denied, they say. Friend, not so, we werenot speaking, re ape . ° ee : pecinkes : d-biama. QAb¢it aka da™bé-bi yi, égi¢e, sabdjiqti wadige ¢a" ugidada™-bi said they, they Three the saw him, they when, behold, very suddenly hat the pushed on his, they say. (sub.) say say ega™ ¢inga-biama. having he was not, they say. Na! kagé, wéa¢amat ¢a”eti, ihusa-biamd ci. Hata", kag¢, nikacitga Why! younger you blamed us heretofore, they scolded him, again. Why, younger man brother, they say. brother, té¢agaji e¢éwadaki¢é a. Weag¢ama ¢acti; A-biama pahan‘ga aka. Ga- you did not you sent homeward ? You blamed us heretofore, said, they say the first the Those Jall (sub.). agiama wéama taité, d-biama. Kgi¢e ag¢i-biama. Cin’gajin’ga 4” ag¢i- fo) t=) returning will surely blame us, said (the first Atlength (one) came home, Infant earry- he came A ones), they say. they say. ing heme biama. GaAké ¢izdi-ga, 4-biamé. Nan‘day ihé¢a-biama. Ga-biama: Wa- they say. That (ob.) take ye, said he, they By the wall they laid it, they He said as follows, Very say. say. they say : gideajt-qti pi; ai ae¢i, A-biama. Ga-biama: Kagéha, niaci"ga wi" ar i Iwas I carried I have said he, they They said as fol- Younger man one (I reached) ; come home, say. lows, they say: brother, timaka tedbe ati ¢a” ett. T’ea™ wa"¢a-baji ag¢al, a-biama. Céaka wéama éde easy very came formerly. We did not kill them he went said they,they Yonder blamedus_ but hither homeward, say one k, Pe See tie. y__/ , 5 atthe 5 i & ett égai ji-bajiha. = Wan’gabacibai, t’ea” ¢a-baji ci. Ga-biama: Qa-i! he too wasso unsuccess- We left it for them, we did not kill him again. He saidasfollows, Why! ful they say: ‘ a™¢a™ sabe inahi" wéahide pt ¢a” cti. Umaka fnahi" ti té t’é¢a¢a-baji I suffered truly a great dis- I reached formerly. Easy truly came when you did not kill tance him . , Sy feet . / es ia ~, , oS . A gécdaki¢at té pfiji ckaxai. Wi ga” qa”be yi t’éa¢e ta minke, 4-biama you sent him when bad you did. I atany Iseehim if Ikill bim will I who, said he, they homeward rate say. [kihusd-bi yi égi¢e nijinga aka wa¢age g¢ionuda-biama, éwakiga™ qti i¢a”’- Scolding one when at length boy the hat | pulled off his they say, just like them sat sud- another, they say (sub.) denly biamd. Edéeai a, 4-biami = A*¢aa-baji, d-biamé. Kagéha, eddda” eda'’- they say. What said ? ~~ said he, they We did not speak, said they, they Friend, what we said you say. say ¢a"-baji, 4-biamé. Weéja-biama Na” pa-i-biama nijinga alka. I¢ae-hna”i. nothing, said they, they They denied it, they Was feared they say boy the You were speak. say. say (sub.). ing. Edadda" edécega™ fai-gi Kagéha, edada™ ctéwa™ ‘ia® ¢a-baji, a-biama. What what yousaid,so speak ye. Friend, what soever we spoke not of, said they, they say Wad¢age ¢a™ gia-bi yi cgi¢e ¢ingé aAtidg¢a-biamd. Kagéha, edta™ aja™. Hat ~ the he puton when behold he disappeared suddenly, they say. Younger what were you his, they say brother, doing? Pie . ek , Wee : . Kata® téwadadaji, kig¢¢waddgé & Weadamai ¢acti, da-biama. Nikaci™’ga Why you killed them not, you sent them home ? You blamed us heretofore, said they, they Man again say. , = : om ar oni, , tmaka tedbe ati-hna™ ¢a™cti, a"wa™ ¢ig¢a™ ¢ai. Tea ¢a-baji. DP’ta" gdagi-ma easy very came regu- heretofore, we missed doing it to him. We did not kill him. Now those return- larly ing wi" qtawa¢é u¢iciqtia’i, wéahusa ta ama, a-biama. Ci wi" ag¢i-biama. one to love us very dittcult, they scoldus will the said they, they Again one came they say. (pl. sub.), say. home s THE CHIEFS SON, THE SNAKE-WOMAN, AND THUNDERS. 197 Wat mi™jinga ¢¢a"ba wai” ag¢i-biamé. Hau! kagcha, wéa¢at’Ahne tat, Woman girl Fy too carrying he came home, Ho! younger you hate us will, them they say. brother, ‘-biama. Nikaci*ga wi” tmaka teabe ati ¢a™eti, t'ea” wa"¢a-baji, kig¢éa™- said they, they Man one easy very came formerly, we did not kill them, we sent them Say. wa"¢ai, a-biama. Hau, ha+! 4-biama. Hata® t’éwa¢dd¢a-badji a. Weéahide home again, said they, they (See note) said he, they Why you killed them not i] Very far say. say. angtine-hna® angahi. Wéasabéqt{i angahi-hna™i. Edta™ t’éwa¢d¢a-baji a. we hunting regu- we arrive. We suffering ex- we usually arrive. Why you did not kill them % larly ceedingly 1 . . . / , v , . , Iwit’db¢ai, 4-biamé. A™ha", kagéha, éga" ha, 4-biamé. Awa" da®baf I hate you, said he, they Yes, younger it is so 3 said they, they We see them say. brother, say. e VO Jai sou2 , : . mail ean , ctéwa™ edwaga™hna™i, akiag¢e-hna™i, wi’¢ake. Ati t&é ama ha, 4-biama. notwith- we are always so, they always go back you speak Come will the . said they, they standing again, truly. (pl. sub.) say. Wi ya™be yi téa¢e te. Nini ujfi-ga, 4-biamaé i”tca" ag¢i aka. Gan‘ki I Iseehim if Ikillhim will. Tobacco put ye in, said he, they just now come the And say (sub.). ninf uji-bi ega™ té¢e a" o¢i ¢inké “-biama. Niniba ké ¢and-bi ega™ tobacco put in, having killed carry. came theone they gave him, Pipe the drew a whiff, having they say ing home who they say. they say nwjinga aka wénaca-biama, ibista-biama. I'tcitei! 4-biama. Nin‘dea¢a¢ai, boy the snatchedit they say, pressed it against Iam burnt! said he, they You burn me, (sub.) from them him, they say. say, a-biama. Angut a™¢i™-baji, a-biama. Niyjinga aka wa¢age g¢ionuda-bi ega™ said he, they We weare not, said they, they 30y the hat, pulled off his, they having say. say. (sub.) say Juwag¢e’qti i¢a”’-biama wa¢iona-biama. Kiya" ya"béqti-biama. right with them sat suddenly, they visible they say. They looked repeat- they say. say edly at one another A n 1 4-} Qty gy aty dgoya® ] 5 nik) 16 tk 1 ink 4-bi 3 ega udi¢a wad da ctl cola Mankace, UWLKIE tal min e, a-Dlama Thus he told of only formerly you do you who are, I talk to you will Iwho, said, they say you that niyjinga aka. Uwikie taf minke ca™ja fe ké A¢ana‘a-baji yi hné taité, boy the I talk to you will I who though words the you obey not if you go — shall, (sub.). j-biama. Ag¢and‘a% yi hna-baji taité, a-biamd. Niaci*ga ¢éama said he, they You obey if you go not shall, said he, they Man — these say. say. ‘ag¢awa¢a¢ai. Kata téwa¢ag¢at a. A*wa’¢ate tai ha, a-biama. Ki ¢éma ye make them suffer. Why you kill them 2 We eat them will . said they, they And these say. ébe wahnatai 4. Pfaji ckaxai, 4-biama. Ca™ckaxe taf ¢éma_ t’éwa¢a¢at who youeat them ? Bad youdo, said he, they say. You will stop it these you kill them té, a-biamé. A™ha™, kagéha, 4-biamdé. Gatédi hé t'a® wacta™bai 4, the, said he, they Yes, friend, said they, they In that horn have you see them ? say. say. place a-biama (¥é 6 waka-biama). A™ha®, hégabaji, 4-biama. (hé Wakanda said he, they (buf- that he meant, they say). Yes, a great many, said they, they This Deity say falo say. akA wa¢ate waxai nikaci"ga g¢iba. Qéma wahnatai té piiiji ckaxai. the(sub.) food made them people all. These youeat them as bad you do. Can‘gaxdi-ga, d-biamd nijinga akA EF cti wacta™bai a (a™pa® é waka- Stop yo it, said, they say boy ~ the (sub.). That too you see them q (elk that he meant Lo) 15 18 9 12 15 18 21 198 THE @EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. biamaé), 4-biaméa. A™ha™, 4-biamd Ega" wag¢atai-ga, 4-biamaé nujiniga they say i said he, they Yes, said they, they So eat ye them said he, they boy say. say. say aka. ED eti wacta™bai 4, 4-biama nijinga aka (qaqti ¢ wakdé-biama). ( he That too you see them 4 said, they say ‘boy the(sub.) (deer that he meant they say). sub.). A™ha®, hégabaji a"wa™da"bai ha, d-biama. Ega® wahnate taf. (iéma Yes, a great many we saw them . said they, they say. So ye eat them will. These n , (al) , . , Us niet (Pei elitunaas 72 ] aes 2 yas , ca"meéwa¢ai-ga, da-biama. a"¢in'ge ‘ag¢awag¢agal, a-biama nuymga aka. let them alone, said he, they say. Needlessly you make them suffer, said, they say boy the (sub.). Ki éga” ckaéxe taf yi uwikie taf minke. A™ha*, kagcéha, éga™ angaxe And so you do will if Italktoyou will I who. Yes, friend, so we do tangata", d-biamé. Ca™ckaxe taité, 4-biamad A™ha", kag¢ha, ca™angidxe we who will, — said they, they You will surely stop it, said he, they say. Yes, friend, we stop it say tan’gata", d-biamd. Ki ¢éma wanija hnate awigaji-ma wahnate taité, we who will, said they, they And these animal you eat ITcommand them you eat them will say. you surely, 4-biama. A™ha®, kagéha, a™wa™¢ate tan’gata", 4-biama. Hau! b¢¢ ta said he, they say. Yes, friend, we eat them we who will, saidthey, they say. Ho! Igo will minke, 4 biamd nijinga aki. B¢é ta minke ¢a™ja the ag¢f t& minke, I who, said, they say boy the (sub.). Igo will I who though passing peowe will I who, ac) d-biama. Wi" ¢aka-baji hnankacé bné taité; wi" ¢ake hnankacé ca’’ca™ said he, they You tell not the truth ye who you go shall; you tell the ye who continually say. truth ¢ag¢i’ taité fe wanfja wahnate hnankécé ag¢i yi ca™ca"™ hni™ taité, I you sit shall. nis animal you eat them ye who at igome when continually you be shall, auc d-biamaé. An’‘ka-¢i"-baji hnankacé, ag¢i ki hné taité, 4-biama. Ga™ a¢a- said he, they You are not-so ye who, ular when you go shall, said he, they And went say. LC say. biama. Wa‘t sig¢é ¢é té ci u¢the a¢a-biama. Sig¢é ¢é té u¢tihe a¢a-bi they say. Woman trail went the again following he went, they say. Trail went the fo owing went, they say , . , s / , s / — f Be i, Mss y ega™, ¢i-bi ga”, ¢a-bi ga”, égi¢e ta” wang¢a” hégactéwa™ ji édedi-¢a” ama. having, went, having, went, having, atlength village populous there it was they they say they say say. Ki Wée's‘a-wat &di ahi-bitéamé. Nutjinga aki yf kan’géqtci ahi-bi yi And Snake-woman there arrived had, they Boy the lodge very near to arrived, when say. (sub.) they say yig¢ita"-biama. Waqtbe gaxa-bi ega™ wa¢aha tida%qti Me'dge ‘fi ké é worked for himself, they Saered thing made, they having clothing very good old man ave the that say. say im gaxi-biama. Can’ge ta™ cti sabéqti gaxa-biamé. Ma”ze-weti"’ cti mig¢a”- he made, they say. Horse the too very black he made, they say. Sword too he wore in his belt . lan ke , . = , . . i} ° . biamé. E/di ad¢d-biama. Can’ge amd ua” siqti nan’ge ma*¢i"-biama they say. There he went, they say. Horse the (sub.) deen ing very, running walked they say. high Niaci##ga wada™be yi'cté nape atidg¢a-biama. QWé niaci"ga wi” ati éde to) fo) feo) People saw even when feared suddenly they say. This man one hascome but wa¢aha vida" tedbe Aga. Can’ge ta™ cti tda*qti ag¢i™i, 4-biama. Wé's‘a- clothing good very indeed. Horse the too very good hesitson, said they, they Snake- say. wait ugine ti éga" yfi ¢a™ ytiwi"xe a¢d-biama. Ueg¢ixide ga” g¢i”-biama. woman seeking had as lodges the going around he went, they say. Looking for his so he sat they say. his come (ob.) » THE CHIEI’S SON, THE SNAKE-WOMAN, AND THUNDERS. 199 Aiea Te ite, 2 OTe : f . : rye Ps Egi¢e We's‘a-watt fgi¢a-bi ega™ égi¢e ni wit Adixe akAma. Und ahf At length Snake-woman found his, having behold man one she had married, they Seeking ar- they say say. her rived 19 ° . ° . . a Os icy aka fta¢i-biama, mi”ada-biamaé. Mi’ wadd-biamé yi ma™ze-weti" i®c‘dge he who he hated they say, jealous they say. Jealous they say when sword old man , . w . . . . v : = aka ‘fi ké g¢iza-bi egat, wéti" Abahdé-biamdé. Wéduba™ tédihi ta” wang¢a" the gave the tookhis, they having, threatened to strike, they say. The fourth time arrived village (sub.) him (ob.) say at it ; yi s ® ° , y v . . b¢uigaqti waq¢i-biama. We’s‘a-wa‘i edabe gaq¢i-biaméa. Ag¢a-biama the whole he killed them, they say. Snake-woman also he killed her, they*say. Went homeward, they say Y aed = , . . . . nijinga aké. Ag¢é-bi ega™ niaci"ga twakie-ma é'di aki-biama. boy the Went homeward, having person those with whom there he reached home, (sub.). they say he talked they say. Egi¢e win’ka-baji akAma, can’gaxe ‘i¢ai té. Naxide-¢i¢in’ge i¢anahini Behold they had not told the truth, to stop it they promised. You have no ears you indeed dha™. Ca™ckaxe ta-bi, ehatf ¢a™cti. Ag¢and‘a"-baji ha, 4-biama. Hné taité, ! You are to stop it, Isaid formerly. You have not obeyed. said he, they You go — shall, say. A-biama. (héeu ma*hni™ yi niaci"ga-ma fqtaqti wahni® inihe eb¢éga" said he, they Here you walk if the human race wantonly you have lest - T think Bay. them ga” ma™ci hné tai, 4-biamd. Nikaci"ga t’éwa¢a¢é-macé ma™”ci hné x, 80 high you go will, said he, they Men ye who kill them * high you go when say. a“ ba ata’ cté macté’qti yi gan’ki asni™wa¢aki¢é taf, a-biama. Naji” ¢ day whenever very warm when and you make them coolagain will, saidhe,theysay. Rain that waka-biamé. Gat, Ké, ¢é-i-ga, 4-biama. Ga™ ma™ci ¢éwaki¢a-biama. he meant, they say. And, Come, go ye, said he, theysay. And high he sent them, they say. Ga” ag¢i-biamé. Ni-tanga ké ahi-biama. Hau! Me‘ige, cag¢é a¢a, And he went homeward, Big water the ~ he reached, they Ho! venerableman, Igo back indeed, they say. say. to you 4-biamé. Ic‘dge aka icté-¢ipi’ze g¢i"-bi ega” nujinga ¢i" nf agajade said he, they Old man the closiug hiseyes sat,they say having boy the water striding say. (sub.) (one my.) ¢éki¢d-biamd. Masini ahi-biama icta ¢ib¢d-bi te’di. Ie‘dge ¢inké sent him, they say. Across he got, they say eye he opened, they when. Old man the say (one st.) aki-biamé. Hau! yiga”ha, ag¢i, d4-biama. Niaci"ga udawakie te ecd-ma reached home, Ho! grandfather, I have said he, they Person | Italk tothem will you the they say. come back, say. said ones who udwakie éde fe éga"™ ingdxa-bdji, Ada" ma™ci ¢éawaki¢e ha, 4-biama. T talked to but words so they did not do therefore high I sent them e said he, they them for me, say. Hau! ca” ha, 4-biamé itc‘age aka. hewagakige té vida" ha, «-biama. 0 Ho! enough . said, they say old man the usentthemaway as good ; said he, they : (sub.). say. Ki ¢é u¢tiahe b¢é ¢i” wa¢ixe akadi pi, dda® ta™wang¢a” b¢uga Aq¢i, And this Ifollowed Iwent the married totheone I _ therefore village all I killed, her (mv. ob.) who arrived, d-biama. Ueka" gaxe a™¢agaji té éga™qti daxe, a-biama. A, ca” ha, said he, they Deed todo you commanded the just so I did. said he, they Yes, enough 5 say. me say. d-biamé. Ucka™ éga" ckaxe té wika"b¢a ga” wit, d-biamd (ma ze-weti™ said he, they Deed so you do the I wished you so I gave said he, they (sword say. to you, say 15 18 12 200 THE @EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS é waka-bi ega™). Ké, yiga”ha, ag¢é ta minke. I"dddi agija"be ka b¢a, that he meant, having). Come, — gre vandfi ather, F go will TI who. My father I see mine I wish, they say homeward d-biama Ag¢a-biama. Can’ge wahi¢agéqtia™i, wa¢aha piiijiqti, wa¢age said he, they He went homeward, Horse very lame, clothing very bad, hat say. they say. plijiqti, b¢ab¢azéqti. Ki i¢adi aka t’é giyaxa-biama. T’é té dha’, very bad, torn very much. And his father the (sub.) dead eeide ered his, they say. He died Y e¢éga"-biama. Aki-biamé. pii ¢an’di aki-bi yi tbaha"-baji-biama thought he, they say. He reached home, Lodges at the he reached when did not know they say they say. home, they say him niaciea amd. Niaci"ea waqpani teabe [g¢i} ti, 4-biamd. Nikagahi ju pe oplee the Man — poor very {come has said they, they Chief prin- (sub.). back] come, say. cipal PO if) aeiher fey Fane py: Cols ae TIC rime / re . ¢inke’di [edi] a¢é-biama. [adi ii té’di aki-bi ega” uda-biama I¢addi aka by the {there] went,they say. His father his atthe reached having he entered,they His father the lodge poms, say. (sub.) they say cti fbaha"-baji-biama& Dadiha, wieb¢i’, 4-biama. Ag¢i, a-biamaé. A™ha’, too did not know him, they say. O father, it is I, said he, they T have said he, they Yes, say. come, say. , ¢ag¢t, a-biama. Gate éska™ eb¢éga™ éga™ i” ¢a-maji ag¢i" , A-biama. ee you have said he, they ou died it might I thought as I was sad I sat, said he, they come, say. be say. Qlag¢i té ca” ha, 4-biamaé. Ajin’gadi, nisfha, ¢égima”, 4-biamé. Maja” You have as enough . said he, they When Iwas small, my child, Idid thus, said he, they Land come say. say. yangd¢éha udgaca’-hna"-ma™. A*wa™ qpaniqti ag¢i-hna"-ma” ga” a” qti- overalargetract I traveled regularly. I was very poor Tess regularly Iwasa ome an’ga®, -biamd. Hau! mi*’-¢ag¢a™ te, nistha. Wa‘t wi™ ahni™ te, 4-biama great man, said he, they Ho! female you will marry, my child. Woman one you shall have, said he, they say. ay. Gaé-biama: Dadiha, wa‘i gatédi qtda¢é, a-biami Wa¢ixaji a, a- eee He said as follows, O father, woman in that place 1 love her, said he,they Is she unmarried ? said, they say they say: Say. ijin’ge aké. A”ha®, wa¢ixaji, 4-biama i¢adi aka Ca, dadiha, ¢¢waki¢a-ga. his son the Yes, she is unmar- said he, they his the Then, O father, send them. (sub.). ried, say father (sub.). Ki i¢adi aka edi ¢éwaki¢a-biama. K’di ahi-biama. Nikagahi ijin’ge aka And his father the there sent them, they say. There they arrived, Chief his son the (sub ) they say. (sub.) ¢ijan’ge ofa” ga™¢ai, d-biamda. Gan‘ki watt i¢adi aka gd-biama: Aha", your to marry wishes, said they, they And woman her father the said as follows, Yes, daughter her say. (sub.) they say: . . / - = 2 niacitga a*wa™ qpani ga” éga®™ taté eb¢éga*-maji ¢a’cti, a-biama. Ga” man Tam poor “as so it shall be I did not think tormerly, said he,theysay. And ¢aé¢s ga” ca” ha, d-biama. Ga™ ‘i-biama wa‘t ¢inké nu ¢inké. Ga™ he pities as enough : said he, they And gave tohim, woman the man the. And her - say. they say e¢a”-biama. Wat cti t‘a™-biama, 41 t‘a™-biama niyinga aka Gan'‘ki he married her, Woman too he had, they say, lodge he had, they say boy the And they say. (sub.). niacitga Ajiayita" wénaxi¢a-biama. Weénaxi¢a-bi yi iki¢itan’ga Akiki¢at té. people from a rushed on them, they say. They rushed on them, when here and there they attacked 3 different (place) they say one another. Ki @di té¢a-biama niyinga i tea™ min’g¢a" aka. (Higa® té ahigi ucté And there they killed, they say boy just now married a woman the (sub.). (Myth the much remains ca™ja agisi¢a-maji ha.) though I do not remember it 5)} THE CHIBF’S SON, THE SNAKE-WOMAN, AND THUNDERS. 201 NOTES. 189, 5-6. cange aka na™qa ing¢an-gi. Sanssouci reads, cange aka na™qahi cana- kag¢e ing¢a*i-gi, place ye for me the saddle on the horse’s backbone. 189, 11. weahide, pronounced we+ahide. 189, 13. wakandi¢éqtia”-biama, pronounced waka"+di¢éqtia"-biama. 189, 15. tateska"b¢ega", in full, tate eska™ eb¢ega”. 190, 5. uda™qti akama, pronounced u+da"qti akama. 190, 10-12. The Snake-woman told him that she would leave him if he ever courted another woman. 190, 16. The young man had a lodge for himself, apart from that occupied by his father and the rest of the family. 193, 2; 193, 5; 193, 17. uda™qti, pronounced u+daqti. 194, 2. imc‘ageqtci akama, pronounced i*c‘a+geqtci akama. 195, 11. hau-ha+! This is retained in the text, as it was given by Cange-ski; but Frank La Fléche says that it is obsolete, huhu+! having taken its place. 197, 18; 198, 3. hegabaji, pronounced he+gabaji. 198, 14. hegactéwa*ji, pronounced he+gactéwaji. 198, 16. wa¢aha uda™qti, pronounced wa¢aha u+da" = 1D , , ys 3 2 . jan’-ga. Qiuda" taté, 4-biamé. Gan‘ki t’é ama najide ubAéxati k@ ~— Gan’‘ki, Seine © Good for (it) said he, they And he they red hot thrust into the And, you shall (be), say. died say (ob.). Ké! ef-ga ha piji” ¢e giuda® éga™ jav’éqti i¢¢é, a-biamda. Gan‘ki ama Come! Rani Thon : Your elder a4 better a sound asleep he has — said he, they After a while, they brother gone, say. say yi ci éga"gi‘a™-biama. Gan‘ki jin’ga ke ci t’é ama, maze ndjide’qti when again he dide so to him, they say. And small the agaim he they iron very red hot ; (ob.) died say A ° 2 pple 61: yn : : ubaxa"-bi ega™”. T’é yi gan’ki mahi" ¢izi-bi ega™ wadadda-biama thrust into, they having. Dead when then knife took, they he a ing he cut them up, they say say say Wakan‘dagi na“ ba. Gan‘ki akiwa wadade ¢icta”-bi yi akiasta it¢wa¢a- Water-monster two. And both he cut them he finished it, when ina pile he put them up they say biama u¢iza™ te’di. Gan‘ki ¢éxe akiwa ugipiqti ujf-biamd ts‘u waxai yi. they say middle in the. And kettle both very full he filled, they strips made them when. Say —~ D 7 —/ ~ S C , , ° f Gan‘ki ga” tha" e¢i”-biama. Ki gan’‘ki gatéya niacitga amd eé-biamia: And so cooking he sat they say. And then in that place people the (sub.) said as follows, they say: Cénujin’ga na baqtiéga" &'di gig¢a-ba da™be gig¢ai-ga, d-biama. Ki, Young man | about two there goand and looking pass ye if, said they, And, 7 pass it they say. Wazc¢e ¢inké yaci hégaji, 4-biama. Na! Haxige eb¢éga", ehé yi imédjai Doctor the one a long very, said they, they Why! Haxige I think, T said when you who time say. doubted me ett. Héga aké, ecai. Ii e’be g¢é etéda”, u¢ixide ga” o¢i”-biamad. Ki wit’ é too. Buzzard he is, you said. And who go shall? considering so they sat, they say, And one he homeward ga-biama: We's‘a-nideka, ¢i ¢ag¢é yi i¢i¢aji etéga", wa¢i¢iondji éga’, said as follows, Grass-snake, you you go if not to find apt, you invisible oe they say: homeward you 5 , hep . 2 , Say . d-biama. Gan‘ki onipi te ha. E gi¢e i¢i¢eé te ha. Utide ji™Aqtci uddé-da™ said he, they And you shall do : 3eware he lest B Tlole very small enter and say. well detect you 12 15 18 12 15 18 248 THE (EGIHNA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. da“ba-gi ha. Egi¢e Haxige i¢i¢é te ha. Ki, AYha®, 4-bi ega™ ag¢a-biama look at him 4 Beware Haxige. detect lest. And, Yes, said, having went homeward, you they say they say We's‘a-nideka amd. K/di akf-bi ega™ u‘tide jimiqtei icté ¢a” ugds4”-biama. Grass-snake the There he reached having hole very small eye the peeped in, they say. (sub.). home, they say Ki Haxige aké da™bé-biamdé. Huhi! gf-ga ha. Waonate tace, 4-biama And Haxige the saw him, they say. Ho! ho! come . You eat must, said he, they (sub.) say ida-bi ega” = G¢é ga” ga yi na” wape te Wée's‘a-nideka aka. Gan‘ki, Giga, detected having. To go he wished when feared him Grass-snake the And, Come, him, they back (sub.). say aes era . ies . Oye heya . d-bi ega™ @diaga-biamd. Gan’‘ki, Und¢e ya™ha ke'di eé¢u jan’ga, 4-biama. said, having there he went, they say. And, Fire-place border by the yonder lie, said he, they they say say. Waonate yi wé¢anandé’qti oné taté, A-biamé. Waondte yi oné yi, Haxige You cat when you being gorged you go shall, — said he, they You eat when you when, Haxige say. go ak’ é akéde Wakan’dagi akiwa t?éwa¢é aké ha, ecé te ha, a-biamé. the he itis, but Water-monster both h» has killed them F you — shall é said he, they (sub.) say say. Gan‘ki waci™ hébe ¢izi-bi ega™ tgp u‘a“ha-biama Haxige aka. Gan‘ki And fatmeat apiece he took, having bowl he put in, they say Haxige the And they say (sub.). waci™ ¢é¢aska s‘t-biama. Gan’‘ki, (hasni™ ¢é¢a-gi ha. éta™ é¢a™be fat meat this size he cut a long strip, And, Swallow it doitsuddenly . his far in sight they say. ité¢a-ga. Gan’ki waci” hébe é¢a*be itéyi¢d-biama { té. Ki natbé ¢ingé put it. And fatmeat piece insight he put it for himself, mouth the And hand without they say (ob.). ¢i® éga" e¢fonudaji té waci” ké. A¢a-bi yi na” ji®cké’qtci nfaci”ga amadi he ag he did not pull out his fat meat the He went, when barely people to them was (ob.). they say ahi-biamé We’s‘i-nideka aké. We's‘a-nideka ¢é té‘di ékita" ag¢af Haxige. arrived, they Grass-snake the Grass-snake went when at the went Haxige. say (sub.). same time homeward 2 Isan’ga ¢inké g¢iza-bi ega™ a” he ag¢ai-biama. Gan‘ki We's‘a-nideka fe His younger the (ob.) took his, having fleeing he went homeward, And Grass-snake to brother they say they say speak , 5 Ol a as , i. — *ynseesy / : , 1 ay pal / : giteqi, Haxige, Haxige, ¢ yi cai™iji-hna’’-biama. Niaci"ga ama eca™’qti hard for Haxige, Haxige, said when his voice failed invariably, they People the very near him, say. (sub.) to hi yi ca" wéahidéqri e¢éga"-biama. Gadi" We's‘i-nideka Haxige é ha, ar- when yet very far they thought, they say. That one Grass-snake Haxige says rived d-biam4 Gan‘ki und-bi yi égi¢e eca’qtci ahf akama Wé's‘a-nideka. said they, And they sought when behold very near had come, they say Grass-snake, they say. him, they say Huhi! We'sta-nideka ée ¢i éde waci” nide ké ukf¢ata-qtia” ¢i", Ho! ho! Grass-snake itishe theone but fat meat throat the sticks very tight in the one (my.) (mv.), 4-biama. Gan’ki ef¢ionuddé-biama. Gan’‘ki nfkaci"ga ama yf ¢a 4a ag¢a- said they, they And they pulled it out for him, And people the village to the went say. they say. (sub.) homeward biamé. Gan‘ki Haxige amd ag¢ad-bi yi égi¢e Jdbe-wa‘ujin’ga édedt akama they say. And Haxige the went when behold Beaver-old-woman was there, they say. (sub.) homeward, they say Ki, WA‘ujin’ga, edta™ ¢andji® a, 4-biami Haxige akd. A™ha™, yuepaha, And, Old Woman, why youstand 7? — said, they say Haxige the (sub.). Yes, grandchild, THE ADVENTURES OF HAXIGR. 249 Haxige Wakan‘dagi na™ba akdé te’éwade amd he. Edi wagdq¢a" a™ ¢izal Haxige Water-monster two the killed them they 5 There servant me they (col. ob.) say took © he; 4-biamaé. Ka, Wa‘ujin’ga, eat ckaxe tdda” u¢éhe a. A™ha®, yucpaha, said she, they And, Old woman, how you do will, you join it ? Yes, grandchild, say. therefore Haxige Anida® gixe ‘i¢a-biama he. E/di Haxige mand tig¢i" yi ub¢d‘ude Haxige floodon tomake they speak of, . There Gries boat sitin when I bite a hole in him it they say te a-bi ega” éduche, 4-biaméi. Watujin’ga, éga™ yicté Haxige ama will ead they, nari ing Ijoinedit, said she, they Old woman, 80 even if Haxige the they say say. (sub.) mandé ug¢i" ga” qti ga” efuda™gti ma¢i” t& ama hi, 4-biamd. Ki ei ¢ifat boat sit in at any rate “still So joyful walk will he who . said he, they And again they say. fai yicté, quepaha, maja™ ¢a™ betiga ugathanadaze axe ‘i¢ai hé, A-biamé. even if, grandchild, land the al darkness making it they a said she, they speak of say. Wa'‘ujin’ga, éga™ yi'cté Haxige ama yiqinde uq¢tiga ug¢i”’ ta aka ha. Old woman, so even if Hosiae: the (sub.) gorge deep hollow sit in will he who Uq¢uqa ug¢i" ‘-de wanfja gat’é-ma ga™ wa¢ate g¢i’ ta akdé, 4-biama. Ci, Deep hollow sitin when «animal Eanoee killed “still eating them he will sit, said he, they Again, BY falling say. yucptha, ugdihanadaze ¢i‘af yi’cté wé’s‘a t'a™ waxe ‘f¢ai hé, A-biamé. grandchild, darkness they fail even if snake toabound making they c said she, they them speak of say. Wa‘ujin’ga, éga" yicté Haxige aka yéha gé na"bé gaxaf-de we’s'a ké dA Old woman, even if Haxige the turtle the hand make when snake the head (sub.) shell (L 2 ob.) gé wata® ma™¢i” ti ama, d-biamé. Ki gan‘ki, WaA‘ujinga, e‘a®’-macé’ the treading he will walk, said he, they And then, Old woman, what is the matter (pl. ob.) on them say. with you ctéwa™ Haxige f¢at’aonaf a, d-bi ega™, gaqiqixd-biamé. Gan’ki ag¢a- soever Hoey ye hate him ? said, hi aye he crushed in her (head) And he went they say with blows, they say. menewaca biama Ag¢a-biama gan’ki Haxige ama aki-bi yi 4f jingaqti gaxd-bi ega” they say. He went homeward, 2 and neice the reached when lodge very small “ma ude, they faving they say (sub.) home, they say say M6 gd¢askaqti ¢énaqti pigd¢a™-bi ega™, yf jin’ga gaxd-biamdé. Gan’‘ki stone just that size just this transported, having, lodge small he made, they say. And many they say isan’ga ¢inké hi ¢a™ Amaja i¢an ‘gi¢a-bi ega” dmaja g¢i”-biamd. Gan’ki his younger the(ob.) skin the onone side placed his, they Reais on the he sut, they say. And brother (ob.) say other side me gé ndjide’qti gaxd-bi ega” ni igaqta" g¢i’-biamaé. pf jin’ga té stone the very red hot made,theysay having water pouring on he sat, they say. Lodge small the nikadé‘qti gaxd-biamé. Hea" té dtiba ja” gaxd-biamd. Wéduba jam very hot he made it, they say. The like four sleep he did it, they say. - The fourth sleep té‘di isan’ga gisi” giixa-biam4. Nia isan’ea akdé. Ki, Hau! kige- > to} to) ’ co) onthe his snes alive he made for him, they Alive his younger the And, Ho! friend brother again Say. brother ub: Ys — , - 3 . , - safi’ga, ni’ ya wika"b¢aqti ega™ ni™ja widaxe ¢a™ ja akiwaha ar nea¢e tat, younger alive I wished very much having alive I have made te apart let us go, brother, for you you d-biama. Ki wi cti ca” yanga beim ta minke, kige-san’ga, 4-biamdé. Ki suid he, they And I too big ale Tbe will I who, fae nd younger said he, they And Say. brother, say. ¢i, kage-san’ea, yaqti niga jin’ga oné taté ha, 4-biamé. Cetar’. you, frie nd Ronee r deer mi: ne smi all you go shall : said he, they So far. brother, : Bay. 9 12 15 250 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. NOTES. The myth of Haxige was told to the collector by three Omahas. First, by Wadjepa, whose words were not recorded; but they were interpreted by Frank La Fléche, and the important points are given below. Frank La Fléche’s version was the next obtained, and that of ga¢i"-na"paji was the last. According to Wadjepa, the myth was that of ““Haxuya and the Deities with seven heads.” He calls the hero Haxuya, which is gaiwere in form, and answers to the (Jegiha Haxige of the other versions. Haxuya met Hega, the Buzzard, who was on his way to the wounded deities. Haxuya said nothing to him, but passed on. He met the Ducks after that. One of the Ducks told him that his younger brother had been killed, after wounding two of the deities with seven heads; that his skin was hung up as a door-flap, and that Hega was going thither every day to powwow over them. After leaving the Ducks, Haxuya went along the creek, crying for his brother, and his tears made all the streams. As he went, he heard some one cutting wood by the bank of the stream, and talking about Haxuya, mentioning him by name. He found that it was an aged Beaver-woman. She said, “‘ You smell of Haxuya.” He denied it, and asked her what she was doing. She told him that she was making a boat. He then asked her, “With what tools are you going to make it?” She pointed to her teeth. After learning what the deities intended doing in order to destroy him, he killed the old woman. Then he met Hega. When Haxuya came in sight of the village, disguised as Hega, everybody came out to meet him, even little children. Thenceforth it is as in Frank’s version. 244, 2. a®wardiqtag¢a-ga, from u¢iq¢aq¢a. 244, 6. a®bati¢awaqti, in full, aba té i¢awa-qti. 244, 12. didmama, i. ¢., di amama, from i, to be coming. See aiama in the Dic- tionary. 245, 4. we'ui, ‘wounded for them,” 7. e., for (the disadvantage of) the parents and friends of the two Water-monsters. 245, 6. g¢iza-biama ga", equivalent to g¢iza-bi ega”. So gasa¢u-bi ga”, equivalent to gasa¢u-bi ega”. 245, 8. He ki-ma"-da", said to be equivalent to the modern (egiha expression, “@egima"-hna®-ma®: I always do this.” 246, 6. agia¢ai té. The article pronoun marks the act as past, and as seen by the speaker. To accord with the rest of the myth, the text should read: “Ki é Héga eska®™ e¢éga"-bi egat’ agia¢a-biama: And as they thought that he was the Buzzard, they went after him, it is said.” 246, 9. naxide té ukia-bi, he talked with him (holding his mouth close and speak- ing) into his inner ear. 246, 13. yi‘u refers to the wounded ones. As “yi” in composition is used in a reflexive sense, its use in this case is not clear to the collector. See ‘ Nuda®axa’s Account of his First War-party,” in which this word occurs. 249, 14. yug¢a" means “to transport’a load by boat, travois, wagon, or any other conveyance.” He probably carried the stones in a pack on his back, hence, in this gase, qug¢a™ = ‘>. 249, 15. Amaja’. . . Amaga, on the one side . . . on the other side; so 4ma... Ama, the one... the other. ape THE ADVENTURES OF HAXIGRE. 251 TRANSLATION. « (There were two Water-monsters, who killed the younger brother of Haxige. They flayed the body, and hung up the skin for a door-flap. They invited all the animals to a feast, when they cooked the body, dividing it among the animals, thus bribing them to silence. Haxige missed his brother, and went in search of him. He reached a creek, where two Wood-ducks were swimming. The conversation of the Ducks, and the account of the transformation of Haxige into a leaf, are given in the preceding version. When he caught them :—) “ What particular thing did you say?” said he. ‘Yes, O elder brother. Loosen your hold on me. I will tell the news. Loosen your hold on me,” said one. And Haxige said, “Come, tell it.” “Yes, Oelder brother. When Haxige’s younger brother was killed, I received nothing but the little fingers as my share; and so I said that no matter at what time I might see him, I would tell him about his brother. All the animals were invited to partake of the body, and only the little finger was left for me at the distri- bution.” And Haxige said, “ How is it usually with them?” “Yes, the Buzzard goes every day to powwow over them,” said the Duck. And Haxige made the feathers whitish that were next to the outer corners of the Duck’s eyes. The feathers on the top of his head he made into a crest for him. “You shall be called ‘Conjurer-duck.’ Depart. Think of me when you get into any trouble, and I will help you,” said Haxige. Haxige departed. When he cried, the water flowed very rapidly in many long streams, making very large crecks. His tears were the rivers. When he went, behold, the Buzzard was approaching him. He met him. And Havxige said as follows: ‘* Venerable man, on what business are you going?” “Yes, grandchild, have you not been hearing it long ere this?” “Yes, whatever it may be, I have not yet heard it,” said Haxige. “Yes, grandchild. Haxige had a younger brother who was killed. So Haxige wounded two of the most dearly beloved children of the Water-monsters. Therefore I have been there to powwow over them,” said the Buzzard. ‘Venerable man, when you arrive in sight of the village, what are you accustomed to do?” “Yes, I always do thus,” said he. And when he seized his gourd-rattle, and rattled it, he said, “Thus I always do, grandchild.” And he danced and sung, saying as follows: pea Hé-ki ma™-da®, hé-ki hé-ki ma®-da®, hé-ki hé-ki ma”/-da. And Haxige said, “Grandfather, do once more what you do when you arrive in sight. I willsee you again.” And the Buzzard said, “I always do thus.” He danced. And Haxige said, “Grandfather, how do you do when you powwow over them?” “Yes, grandchild, T usually say, ‘Let every one in the village go out of sight behind the hill, every one; and take the dogs, too”” Yes, grandfather,” said Haxige. “And when you practice on them, how do you do?” said he. “Yes, grandchild, I keep that iron rod, as I think that I will thrust it into the wounds, when 1 make it red-hot.” “Yes, grandfather. Come, do as you intend doing when you arrive in sight of the village. Depart. I wish to see you.” And when the Buzzard went to do so, Haxige seized a stick, and hit him directly on his head, killing the Buzzard with a blow. And Haxige took the iron, and having taken the small pack, too, he carried it on his 252 THE GEGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. back. And Haxige departed. He went tothe Water-monsters. At length he reached the hill in sight of the village. And Haxige sang the song which was the Buzzard’s. At length, when Haxige came in sight, they said, “Oho! This one at a short dis; tance, Doctor Buzzard, is coming hither.” And the chief said as follows: “Let four of the most stout-hearted young men walk thither. Let them place him in a robe, and bring him back.” And they went after him, because they thought he was the Buzzard. And the young men reached Haxige. Having spread out the robe, they said, ‘Come, venerable man, sit in it. We have come for you.” And Haxige sat in it. And one of the young men whispered in the ear of another, saying, ‘The Buzzard is a different one. I think it is Haxige.” He said it to the other, because he recognized Haxige. And the other said as follows, in a whisper: ‘It is the Buzzard. How could Haxige have come hither?” And they carried him homeward, he sitting in the robe. And they took him to their home unto the wounded ones. And when they reached their home with him, behold, they had flayed all the body of his younger brother, and had made a door-flap of the skin. And when Haxige stood and raised the door- flap, he recognized the skin of his younger brother. And when he raised it, he said as follows: “Alas! my dear little younger brother!” He said it to him in a very soft whisper, not crying out aloud. And one of the persons standing around said as follows: “Friend, when he raised the door-flap he said, ‘Alas! my dear little younger brother!’ I think that he is Haxige.” And another said, ‘Do not say it to any one. It is the Buzzard.” And Haxige went to the lodge. And when he went, he said, ‘‘Come, you shall go out of every lodge. Walk ye out of sight behind the hill. And go ye after water, and hang two very large kettles over the fire for me. When I finish powwowing over these, I will cause them to bathe.” And having done so, all departed. And Haxige made the iron very red-hot. Having done this, he said as follows: ‘I will powwow over your elder brother first. Lie still for the present.” ‘Come, show the wound,” he said to the elder one. And when he made the iron very red-hot, he thrust the iron into the hole made by the wound. And when he thrust it into the wound, the Water-monster said nothing but “Hans, hay.” ‘Lie quiet. It shall be good for you.” And he who had had the red-hot iron thrust into him died. And Haxige said, ‘Now! Come! Your elder brother is a little better, and has gone into a very sound sleep.” And after a while he did likewise to him. And the young one, too, died, having had the very red-hot iron thrust into him. And when he was dead, Haxige took a knife, and cut up the two Water-mon- sters. And when he finished cutting up both, he placed them in a pile in the middle of the lodge. And when he cut them into long, narrow strips, he filled both kettles very full. And so he sat boiling them. And those persons out of sight said as follows: “Let about two of the young men pass by that place on their way home, and go to look at him.” And they said, “The doctor is a very long time about it.” “Aha! When I said that I thought he was Haxige, you doubted me, and you said that he was the Buzzard,” said one. And so they sat considering who ought to go homeward. And one said as follows: “Grass-snake, if you go homeward he wili not be apt to detect you, as you are not visible. And do well, lest he detect you. Enter a very tiny hole, and look at him. Beware, lest Haxige detect you.” And having said, “Yes,” the Grass-snake went homeward. And when he reached home, he peeped through avery tiny hole. And Taxige detected him. “Ho! ho! Come! Come! You THE ADVENTURES OF HAXIGR. 253 s must eat,” said he, when he discovered him. When the Grass-snake desired to go to his home, he feared him. And as Haxige said, ““Come,” the Grass-snake went thither. And Haxige said, “Lie there by the edge of the fire-place. When you eat, you shall depart very full. When you eat and depart, you shall say, ‘It was Haxige, and he has killed both of the Water-monsters.”” And Haxige took a piece of fat meat and put it ina bowl. And he made a strip of fat meat about two feet long. And he said, “Bolt it down. Let it appear out of the mouth this far (#. ¢., about an inch)” And the Grass-snake arranged the piece of fat meat so as to have it stiek out of his mouth. And as the Grass-snake had no hands, he could not pull out his fat meat. When the Grass-snake departed, he barely reached the people. At the same time that the Grass. snake departed, Haxige wint homeward. Having seized his younger brother, he fled homeward. And it was difficult for the Grass-snake to speak. When he said, “Haxige, Haxige,” he spoke in a very faint voice. When he arrived very near to the people, they thought that he was very far away. Said they, “That Grass-snake says, ‘Haxige’” And when they sought for him, behold, the Grass-snake had come very close to them. ‘Ho! ho! It is the Grass-snake, but he has a piece of fat meat very tight in his throat,” said they. And they pulled it out for him. And the people went homeward to the village. And when Haxige went homeward, there was an aged Beaver-woman. And Haxige said, “Old woman, what are you about?” “Yes, grandchild,” said she, “Haxige has killed two of the Water-monsters, consequently they have taken me as a servant.” And he said, “Old woman, what work that you can do has led you to join the party?” “Yes, grandchild, they threaten to make a flood on Haxige. When Haxige, in consequence of it, sits in a boat, they say that I am to gnaw a hole in it, and so I have joined them.” “Old woman, even if it be so, Haxige will sit in the boat, and will get along very well at any rate.” ‘“* And, more- over, even if they fail at this, grandchild, they threaten to make darkness over the whole earth,” said she. ‘Old woman, even if so, Haxige will sit in a gorge, in a deep hollow. As he sits in the hollow, he will be eating the animals which die from falling into it.” ‘Besides, grandchild, even if they fail with the darkness, they speak of making an abundance of snakes,” she said. ‘Old woman, even if so, Haxige will make paws of turtle shells, and he will walk treading on the heads of the snakes in all places.” And then having said, “Old woman, what sort of person are you that you hate Haxige?” he crushed in her skull with several blows. And he went home- ward. Haxige went homeward, and when he reached home, he made a very small lodge. Having transported so many stones of a certain size, he made a sweat-lodge. And having placed the skin of his brother in a sitting position on one side, he sat on the other. And having made the stones very red-hot, he sat pouring water on them; he made the small lodge very hot. He did thus for four days. On the fourth day he made his brother return to life. His younger brother was alive. And he said, ‘‘ Ho! friend younger brother, as I was very desirous for you to be alive, I have made you alive. But let us separate. And I, friend younger brother, will be a big- wolf. And you, friend younger brother, shall depart as a young male deer.” The End. 254 THE @EGIMA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. HOW THE BIG TURTLE WENT ON THE WAR-PATH. TOLD BY [E-OMA"HA. Ki nikaci"ga ta” wang¢a® hégactéwa" ji g¢i"-biama. yeyanga ke'di And people village very populous sat they say. Big turtle to it wiha-biama. Ki wénuda® ati-hna"-biamé nikaci"ga 4ji amaja. Ki wit joined, they say. And to waragainst came regularly, they say people af another place. And = one them 3 gaq¢i ag¢a-biama. Ki nuda™ ttha’-biama. Niaci"ga na™ ba wagi¢ewaki¢a- killed they went home- And war-path- he cooked (for it), Person two he caused them to go ward, they say. they say. for them . , , , rane , “7 No _/ ps biama. Wagadq¢a" wag¢aki¢e, ypehamajide Sin’ga céna*ba. Qade na™ba they say. Servant he caused to go Red-breasted turtle Gray-squir- those two. Grass two ; for their own, rel ¢ibtya i¢a” ¢a-biamad tha” ¢a" ugacke tée'di hidé té. Ki a-i-biama, Niaci"ga he made he placed, they say kettle the fastening by the bottom the. And they approached, Person round they say. 6 é¢a"be ati-biamé. Hau, nikawasa™! a-biama. Nikaci™ga fqtai yi éga"- in sight came, they say. Tio, warrior ! said he, they People injured when so say. , Juv / 14 , ° v . wé‘a?-hna", nikawasa™ ! (het nuda” udha", 4-biama. Uha® té wata™zi they always do warrior ! This war-path I cook said he, they Cooking the corn to them, (for it.), Say. ski¢e ye-nixa edAbe uaha™ ha, a-biama yeyanga aka. IY ¢apa i ¢acki-hné sweet buffalo- also I cook : said, they say Big turtle the Corn-crusher you go after him paunch (for it) - (sub.). for me 9 tai. Gan’ki gibati-ga, d-biamdé. (Ci éga" Miydhe, Wayu cti, Wche cti, will. And eall to him, said he, they (Again so Comb, Awl too, Pestle too, say. , . = s. ~ s , tf — , 4 . Nawitxe cti, pe-néxe céna, wéba"i-ga, a-biama yejyanga aka.) Egi¢e Fire-brand too, Buffalo-bladder enough, call them, said, they say Big turtle the.) At length wéba® a¢ai-biama niaci"ga na™ba ama. Ki I” ¢apa giba"-biama: tocall went, they say person two the And Corn-erusher they called him, them (sub.). they say: ——< == eS 12 I"’-¢a-pa! wa-ska-¢i"-heat! I" -¢a-pa! wa-ska-¢i?-heat! ['’-¢a-pa! wa-ska O Corn-crusher! bowl bring! O Corn-crusher! bowl bring! OCorn-crusher! bowl iepasssses5 ¢i"-heati! I"’-¢a-pa! wa-ské-¢i"-heatt! 4-biama Ci Miyahe giba™-biama: bring! O Corn-crusher ! bowl bring! said they, they Again Comb they called him, say. they say: HOW THE BIG TURTLE WENT ON THE WAR-PATH. 255 igs a. Sea SSaeheeyy Mi-ya-hé! wa-ska 4d Mi-ya-hé! wa-ska-¢i"-heatt! Mi-ya-hé wa-ski- O Comb! bowl bring! O Comb! bowl bring! O Comb howl oes e ¢i"-heati! Mi-ya-hé! wa-ska-¢i"-heati! a-biama Ci éga" Wayu giba"- bring! O Comb! bowl bring! suid they;they Again 2 Awl the sy called say. him . , biama: they say: fs SSS SaaS Wa-yu! wa-ski-¢i"-heat'! Wa-yu! wa- ska-¢i"-heau! Wa-yu! wa-ska-¢i"-heatt! 3 O Awl! bowl bring! O Awl! bowl bring! O Awl! bowl bring ! Eero y Wa-yu! wa-ska-¢i"-heati! 4-biama. Ki Wéhe giba"-biama: Wé-he! wa-ska- O Awl! bowl bring! said they,they And Pestle they called him, O Pestle! bowl say! they say: ee ¢i"-heati! Weé-he! wa-ska-¢i"-heai! Wé-he! eee ieee We-he! aa bring! O Pestle! bowl - bring! O Pestle! bowl | bring! O Pestle! bowl ¢i"-heati! 4-biama. Ki Nawi"xe cti giba"-biama: Na-wit-xé! wa-ski- 6 bring! saidthey, they And Fire-brand too — they called him O Fire-brand! bowl say. they say: SSS se Sees ¢i"-heati! Né-wi?-xé! wa-ska-¢i"-heatt! Na-wi'-xé! wa-ska-¢i" heat! Na-wi'- . bring! O Fire brand! bowl bring! O Fire-brand! bowl bring! O Fire- cee Sa ——=s x¢! wa-ska-¢i"-heat!! 4-biamé. Ki j,e-néxe eti giba"-biama: [¢-ne-x¢! brand! bowl bring! said they, they And Buffalo-blad- too they called him, O Buffalo-blad say. der they say: der! 12 15 256 THE (EGIHNA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. Ss SSS wa-ska-¢i"-heati! y,¢-ne-xé! wa-ska-¢i"-heati! pé-ne-xé! wa-ské-¢i"-heati! bowl bring! O Buffalo-blad- bowl bring! O Buffalo-blad- bowl bring! der! der! iI Lé-ne-xé! wa-ska-¢i"-heatt! 4-biama. Wag¢a ama aki-biama. Niida- O Buftalo-blad- bowl bring! said they, they Went for they reached home, O war der! Say. them who they say. hangd! wan’gi¢e na‘a”i, 4-biama. Giba™i-mdé wan ‘gigeqti ahfi, yéyanga chief ! all heard, said they, they Those called aed Big turtle say. yi té'di. Hau! nida™hangé! I’ ¢apa, Miyahe, NBL Wéhe, Nawi"xe, J,e- lodge at the, Ho! O war-c hief!~ Corn-crusher, Comb, Pestle, Fire-brand, Buffalo- néxe, nikaci"ga gdama iqtai ¢a”ja céd¢a-baji éga". Nida" wi" nudanga¢e bladder, seats Benes injured though do not stir like. War-path let us go to war for taf, a-biama yeyanga aké. Duba ja” yi anga¢e tai. I” ¢apa tha® Agaji- them, said, theysay Big turtle the Four night when let us go Corn-crusher to cook he com- (sub.). manded biama. Nuda™hanga! I" ¢apa, ¢f u¢dha™ te ha. Ki Miydhe ci ha™ gud¢ica™ they say. O war-chief! Corn-erusher, you youcook will . And Comb again night — beyond it té’di ¢f u¢dha™ te ha. Ci Wayu ¢i eéna u¢aha® te ha, 4-biamdé. Nuda’- ? when you youcook will . Again Awl youthat many you cook will . said he, they War- say. hanga ceéna diba tha". Nuda™hangai; ucté ama wagaq¢a. Ki niaci"ga chief thatmany four cooked. They were war-chiefs; rest the were servants. And people ama gi-biama: Na! niaci"ga wéba™ ama ¢a" &be nitda®™ tha™i té’eti. Ki the said as follows, Why! persons those who were called who war-path they cook (See note). And (sub.) they say: ‘ wi™ gi-biama: Na! yycyanga tha"-biama. Téna’! cka™’-juaji-ma cka™’-¢i‘A- one said as follows, Why! Big turtle cooked, they say. Psha! they whocannotmoye — they who can- a say: well enough ma ¢a™ wan’si¢e wabahi 4. Tena’! Cénawad¢é ta ama tibesni® wé¢ai te. 8 not move fast all he gathered ? Psha! They will destroy them they find they see when. enough them them out them Is / , : Nuda” hanga wé¢ig¢a” t'a"i-de nuda™ aka té’, 4-biama. I’ ¢apa tha"-biama. War-chief mind pos- when he may carry on war, said they, they Corn-crusher cooked, they say. sesses say. Nuig¢e tha™-biama, ci ye-nixa éga” u¢tiha’-biama. Ci Wayu aka ttha™-biama. Turnips hecooked,they again buffalo- like he cooked together, Again Awl the cooked, they say. gay, paunch they say. (sub.) Si” vtha™-biamaé. Cr Miydhe aka ttha’-biama. pé¢awe tha™-biama. Ga”, Wild he cooked, they say. Again Comb the cooked, they say. ‘Le¢awe he cooked, they say. And, rice (sub.) (see note) Céna ja”. Anga¢e taf, ha®’ yi, 4-biamdé. Ga™ a¢d-biama. anga aka J ’ ’ Enough - sleep. Let us go, night when, said he, they And they went, they Big turtle the say. say. (sub.) uta” -¢ahe yan’ga gaxd-biamd. Hi¢awi'’-da"pd hi¢dwi"-biama. Ma¢in’k leggings with large flaps “made they say. Short garters he tied around the leg- Earth gings, they say. HOW THE BIG TURTLE WENT ON THE WAR-PATH. 257 indé ¢a" thiya-biama yyeyanga aki. Gan’ki jide¢é-hna’-biama. Gan’‘ki face the rubbed with, they Big turtle the And he reddened it they say. And say (sub.). ° *n/ qide ¢agda-biamd. Jaqpi ¢a®" hi’ qpe ska’ dji-biamé. gqéxeha ge¢fza-biamé, grass he wore on his head, Lopoft the fine fe: ape x white he put them on, Gourd he took his, they say, they say. head they say. (rattle) ‘éoa™-biama. Gasda¢u-biama. Wat‘a”-biamda nuda“hanga wata™ eA té. 2D to} thus they say. He shook and rattled, He sang they say war-chief song his the. they say. Ké-ta" Qa”-ye wa-te ki-he cé-nan-ga hi-e teé-e 6, hi-e teé-e 6. (See note. 7 Na*téqti ma"¢i"-biama. U¢ica" ma¢i’-biamd. A¢d-biamA yi a™ba ama. =———— ne Stepping lively he walked they say. Around he walked they say. They went, they when day they them say Bay. = . ee oan , . , Kgi¢e pe-niga jin’ga wi” ati-biamd. Nikawasa™! ginahébai-ga, 4-biama Atlength Luffalo-bull small one came, they say. Warrior! wait ye for Me ae they say yeyanga aka. Ki, Wagaca™ ma"b¢i"-de awadnag¢i™ qti ma*b¢i”. we -gi, Big turtle the hea Traveling IT walk while Iam in a great hurry T walk. Speak rapidly, (sub.). a-biama. Hata" ma"hni™ dimte. A™ha", nida™hanga, éga", 4-biamaé. Waga- said he, they Why you walk may? Yes, O war ceuieh 80, said he, they actos say. say. ca" ma"hni’-de u¢i¢ai éga®, K’di ma"b¢i™ té, eb¢éga", uwinai hi, 4-biama ing you walk while hey told as, There I walk will, Ithought, Isoughtyou . said, they say of you (Le-niga jin’ga aké). Keégan-ga, a-biamda (yféjanga aké). Cka™ ¢ija té (Buffalo-bull small the). Gane. do 3. said, they say (Big fale the). Ways your the (mov ements) wija"be ka™b¢a, 4-biamaé. e-niga aka uyfdaja’’-biamaé. Giddha®-biamé. b] Lsee for you I wish, said he, they Butfalo- bull the rolled himself over, they He arose again, they say. say. (sub.). Say. Lan‘de ké jahe-hna”-biama. Hé té fjahe-hna’’-biama. an’de ké baqdpi-de Ground the hethrust regu- theysay. Horn the hethrust regu- they say. Ground the he gored while at larly at with laily hcbe a™¢a ¢é¢a-biamad. Sin’de ké ¢iqa™ téga" naji”-biamaé. aonan’ge piece he threw away suddenly, Tail the break off will, he stood they say. Ash-tree they say. like wi” édedi-te ama. Iénaxi¢a-biamd. Bastikiqti wéahide te ¢a- biama. Niida- one it stood there, they He attacked it, they say. Pushed (and far away e sent forcibly, O war- say, splintered?) they say. hanga, gama" téska"b¢éga" nada"xi¢a ‘i¢di yi, a-biama (ye-ntiga aka). chief, T do that will, I expect to scare, or vex i me if, said, they say (Butfalo-bull the). me threatens Nikaci"ga d‘iba wagaca" judwag¢e wada™ba-gi hi. Wahéhe ctéwa™ Person some traveling I with them see them ; Faint-hearted inthe least ¢ingaf. Ewad¢dkiga’-ctéwa"ji. Uciar¢ade. Keé, man ¢in’ ga, a-biamé. Wa‘a” there are You are not in the least like them. You have disap- Cin walk, said he, they Song none. pointed me. say. ee e : 1 té ci wa‘a"-biama. Ké-ta" Qa'’-ye wi-te ki-he ca-nan-ga, hi-e teé-e 6, the again hesang they say. Turtle Big (see note) hi-e teé-e ¢6, a-biama. Ci a¢a-biama. Nikawasa™! ti¢é-i-ga, 4-biamd. Ni : said he, they Again they went, they Warrior! pass yeon, said he, they Water say. say. say. VOL VI 17 12 15° 12 15 18 21 258 THE (EGIHNA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. wi” édedi-ke ama, jin’gaji. (ijd-biamé. Gan‘ki Nawi™xe pahan‘ga one there it lay, they say, not small. They crossed it, And Fire-brand before | they say. wacka™ gti ma™¢i” ama&. Hgi¢e ujé¢a-bi ega™ niahi¢é¢a-biama ga” néaji- making a great was walking, they Atlength weary, they iter he plunged into the water, and went out effort say. say they say biamé. Nudathanga! ¢é¢uqtei cub¢a-maji, 4-biamd4. Nikawasa™! uq¢é'qtei they say. O war- chief! just here I go not to you, said he, they say. Warrior! very soon ag¢i ti minke. Ca” g¢in’-gi, 4-biamé. Masani ahi-bi ega” a¢a-biama. Icome will Iwho. Fora sit, said he, they The other reached, having they went, they back while say. side they say say. Egi¢e Ing¢a”’-sit-snéde wi ci ati-biamd. Nikawasa™! gina"h¢bai-ga, e‘a” At length ong- eee cat one again came, they say. Warrior! wait ye for him, (See feg@ar Car 1 te. Kgazdéze naji”i-ga, 4-biama. Gakti¢a-oa, 4-biama. E‘a™ note.) ih a line stand ye, said he, they say. Speak quickly, said he,theysay. How mathni” éitte, 4-biamé. Aha”, nida™hangd, ¢ga™, 4-biama. Wagdca” you walk may! said he, they say. Yes, O war-chief, SO, said he, they say. Traveling ma*hni”-bi af u¢f¢a-hna™i. Ki &’di ma”b¢i” ka b¢a ga” uwinai, 4-biama you walked itwas they was told regularly. And there I walk I wish so Ihavesought said he, they said sai of you you, say. Kégati-ga, 4-biamd. Cka™ ¢i¢ija té wija"be tate. Gan’ ki Tng ga" ‘-si"-snéde Do so, said he, theysay. Ways yourown’ the Iseeforyou shall. ong-tailed-cat aka hi” ké bétigaqti yxig¢iheda”-biama. Sin’de ké tit in’ka-biamé. Gan‘k the hair the all over made his bristle up, they say. Tail the e bent BE can ard, they And (sub.) dahé jin’ga kig¢aha ua™si adid¢a- biama. (pLaqti jin’g ga wi” uma” ¢inka hill rat tothe bottom leaping he had gone, they say. Deer sant one year na®’ba améga™ ntide-jace ¢a™ ¢it‘a’ bi ega™ ¢aq¢dje ¢ahé ag¢i-biamé. Gama™ two like thon throat Jump the touched, ae wing makinghim holding he came back, I do that they say, ery by biting with his they say. - teeth téska"-b¢éga", ntida"banga! edida™ nda*xi¢a ‘feai yi, a-biamaé. A¢itha, will, I expect, O war-chief ! what to scare or vex he if, said he,they Again (some- me threatens say. thing else), d-biamé yy4janga aké. An‘kaji eh niida*hangd! eona™, 4-biamd. Ucia™- said, they say Big turtle the Not so O war-c hiefl 1 that alone, said he, they You have (sub.). say. dads, A-biamd yejanga aké. Nikaci"ga ¢é¢anka judwag¢e ¢ankdé wada”- disap- said, they say Big turtle the Person these who I with them the ones see pointed me, (sub.). who ; ba-gi, d-biama. Awata® wi™ jiaji dda", 4-biama. Gijiiijiqtia”. Ké, them, said he, they Where one imperfect q said he, they You are very in- Come, say. (stands) say. terior. ma"¢in’- gi. Gi licia™@A¢é, &-biamd. A¢a-biamd. Egi¢e dahé yiha ahi-bi 1 you have disap- said he, they They went, they At length hill down- they arrived, th: me, say. say. ward they say i, égi¢e Wasdbe wi” ati-biama. Nida*hanga! ci ati wi’, a-biama. E‘a” when, behold Black bear one came, they say. O war-chief! again has one, saidthey,they (See come say. téga™ ca™ te, nikawasa™! Ginat™h¢bai-ga. Egazéze naji”i-gi, 4-biama. note), warrior! Wait ye for him. = a row Stand se said he, theysay. Hau! ké, ¢akti¢a-gt. E‘a™ ma™hni” ¢i"te. Wagaca™ ma™b¢i"-de awana- Ho! come, speak quickly. What is your business ? Traveling I walk while Tamina q¢iqti ma"b¢?’, A-biamd (ypéyanga aké). A™ha™, nida*hangd! éga?, a- great heey I walk, said, they say (Big arte the). Yes, O war-chief! 80, said, walk. a eS ee ee ge ae eee ee a a ey 7 . 7 2 e— -) SS a a HOW THE BIG TURTLE WENT ON THE WAR-PATH. 259 biama (Wasabe aka). Wagdca™ ma*hni”-bi af u¢f¢a-hna™i, ki &/di ma™b¢i” they say (Black bear the). Trav Saunt you walked, it they wastold regu- and there I walk was said said of you larly, ka”b¢a ga” uwinéqti A¢a, a-biamé. Hau! kégaii- ga, a-biama (yéyanga I wish and Ihave sought indeed, said he, they Ho! Sab 80, said, they say (Big turtle you diligently say. aka). Aja" ga” cécei"te. Cka™ ¢i¢ija qa“ be ka™b¢a, &-biamé (ypératiga the). How so you may have Ways yourown Isce I wish, said, they say (Big aan you do thought that. aka). Wasabe aka jan‘de ké ¢iqdpi-bi ga” ma-3Ace a” ¢a-hna® ¢é¢a-biama. the). Black bear the ground the pierced with pan round lumps threw regu- he sent forcibly, (sub.) his claws, of earth away larly they say. they say Gan‘ki yackahi nasabe wi” édedi-te am& I¢naxi¢a-biamaé. Ana-bi eva” And oak blackened by one stood there, they say. He attacked it, they say. Huggedit, having re they say, ’¢aqti ¢é¢a-biama Ndda*hangd! edida™ nda™xi¢a ‘i¢ai yi gima®™ téska”- he threw it sent suddenly, they O war-chief ! what to scare or vex he if Ido that will, I far say. me threatens b¢éga", 4-biama (Wasdbe aka). Gan’‘ki gai té yeyanga ta”: Hau! nika- expect, said, they say (Black-bear the). And said as Big turtle the Ho! war- follows (std. ob.): wasa™, ucia’¢a¢é. Nikacitga diiba ¢é¢anka judwag¢d-de wada™ba-gi, rior, you have disap- Person some these who “TIwiththem but see them, pointed me. d-biamé. Wahéhe ctéwa™ ¢ingaf. Uciagagé. Ké, mat¢in’ga. Jvibaji-ma said he, they Faint-hearted in the there is You have disap- Come, walk. The inferior ones say. least none. pointed me. éga"-hna" ¢éawaki¢ée ha, 4-biama. so regu- I send them off . said he, they say. larly Utefjéqti edi a¢d-biamd. Egi¢e e-ndéxe ¢inkdé ¢ibédza-biamd, Dense under- there they went, they Atlength Buffalo-bladder the (ob.) was torn open, they growth say. say, ¢iquiega™-ma. Qe-i! ¢é¢uqtci cubd¢d-maji, 4-biama. Hau! nikawasa™’! sound of tearing like it, Alas! just here I go not to you, said he, they Ho! warrior! they say. say. ug¢é'qtci ag¢i ta minke. Ca” g¢in’-gi, a-biamé (ydjanga aka). Ci very s00n Icome will I who. For a sit, said, they say (Big turtlo the). back while i a¢a-biama. A¢a-biama yi uhé piaji é’di ahi-biama. Ja™¢a™ qa ma” ciiidy’qti they went, they They went, they when path bad there they reached, Log very high say. say they say. g¢adi” ja” ke ama. vyehamajide aké dgajade ¢i‘A4 amd. Hau!-niida”- Across were lying, they say. -Red-breasted turtle ae, to step over failed they say. Ho! O war- (su hanga, ¢é¢uqtci cub¢a-maji, A-biama. Hau! nikawasa™, uq¢é’qtei ag¢f ta chief, just here I go not to you, said he, they Ho! warrior, very soon I come will say. back minke. "efit. -ga, a-biamé (yéjanga aka). Ci aga-biamd. A¢a-biama I who. os a t, said, they say (Big turtle the). Again they went, they They went, they while say. say yi, égi¢e Ca™janga wi™ ati-biama. Nida™hangd, ci ati wit, 4-biama. when, behold Big wolf one came, they say. O war-chief, again has one, said they, come they say. K‘a™ téga® ca™ ite, nikawasa™! Ginathébai-gi. Egazdéze naji”i-git, 4-biama (See note.) warrior! Wait for him. a a row st: te ye, said, they say (y4anga aka). Hau! ké, ¢akti¢a-gi. E‘a” mathni” dite. Wagdca™ (Big turtle the). Ho! come, speak quickly. What is your business? Traveling Again 2 oO 12 260 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. ma"b¢i"’-de awdnaq¢i” qti ma"b¢i”, a-biama (ypéyanga akd). A™ha™, mida®- I walk while I am in a great hurry I walk, said, they say (Big turtle the). Yes, O war- hanga! éga", 4-biamé (Ca™janga aka). Wagaca" ma*hni"’-bi ai u¢i¢a- chief! 80, said, they say (Big wolf the). Traveling you walked,it was they was told said said of you hna”™i, ki &/di ma™b¢i” ka™b¢a ga™ uwinai, 4-biama (Ca™jafiga aka). Hau! regu- and there I walk I wish as IT have said, they say (Big wolf the). Ho! larly, sought you, kégan-gi, d-biamé (yéjanga aka). Aja" ga™ cécei*te. Cka™ ¢i¢ija ya be do so, said, they say (Big turtle the). How so you may have Ways yourown Ise é you do thonght that. ka™b¢a, 4-biamd (yéjanga aka). yi‘a” amd. qa té jide¢a-biama. Si te I wish, said, they say (Big turtle the). He decorated himself, Nose the he reddened, they Foot the they say. (See note) say. wan r gife jide¢a-biamd. Nan’ka ké gi¢&’ maca” ugdcka-biama. Qa-i! he reddened, they say. Back the eagle feather he tied on, they say. Why! sae Kégati-gi, 4-biama. Cka™ ¢i¢ija té ya™be ka”b¢a. Keégan-ga, said he, they Do 80, said he, they Ways yourown the Iasee I wish. Do so, say. Bay. d-biama (yyéyanga ak4). Ca™janga ama uxfg¢ica"ca”-biama. Ki watei’cka said, theysay (Big turtle the). Big ae the turned himself round and round, And creek (sub.) they say. 9 jin’ga ja” ké’di wawénaxi¢a a¢a-biama. paqti wi" té¢a-biama. (ahé email wood by the to attack he went, they say. Deer one he killed, they olding say. with the teeth ag¢{-biamé. Nida*hangé! gama™ téska"b¢éga", edada® naa*xi¢a ‘tai xi, he came back, they O war-chief! I do that will, I expect, what to scare or vex 6 if, say. me threatens A-biama (Ca™yanga ao Uciat¢a¢é. Nikaci®ga d‘iba wagdca™ judwag¢e said, they say (Big oles the). You have disap- Person some traveling I go with them pointed me. ganké wada™ba-gi hi. Wahche ctéwa™ ¢ingaf. Ké, ma*¢in’-ga. Hea the ones see them A Faint-hearted in the least there is Come, walk. So who none. 15 18 hna® jitiji-ma ¢éawaki¢é, 4-biam4 Nikawasa™ Sin’ga, wada™be ma*¢in’-o, regu- the inferior send them off, said he, they Warrior Gray-squirrel, to see them walk, larly ones say. d-biam4.. Sin’‘ga amd wada™”be a¢a-biama. Egi¢e agi-biama, nistda said he, they Gray squirrel the to sce them went, they say. Atlongth he was returning, horn say. (sub.) they say, bihthuta*. Nitida™hangd, cugi, 4-biama. ydyanga &’di a¢a-biama. Hau! blowing on. O war-chief, he is said they, they Big turtle there went, they say. Ho! returning, say. nikawasa™, wAgaztiqti gdxa-gi. Ega™qti iwi'¢a-gi, a-biama. Aha’, warrior, very straight do (=act). Just as it is tell me, said he, they say. Yes, nida*hanga! éga™qti Ata! A®wa™ besni®-baji’-qtia” pi ad¢a! a-biama. pi O war-chief! Sa 80 indeed ! They did not find me out at all Iwas indeed! said he, they Lodge there say. ya” hagqtci ké a ang i taf, 4-biamad (yféyanga aka). yeanga a¢é ‘i¢a-biama. border very the let us sit, said, they say (Big turtle the). Big lanai going spoke of, they say. Wégaska"awai¢é ta minke, nikawasa™! édiqtci 4namdi"te, 4-biama. Ag¢i- Tlook around to see how will Iwho, O warrior! just there how many said he, they He re- things are may be, say. turned, biamé. Nikawasa”, ey4ha angd¢e taf. (léta" ug¢i" tida™ ¢a", 4-biama. they say. Warrior, thither- let us go. This far sitting-place good the, said he, they ward say. i, . i - } HOW THE BIG TURTLE WENT ON THE WAR-PATH. 261 Ca” amd, Hau! nikawasa®’! miida® hangd I’¢apa! kégan-gi. Igaskar’- By and by, as Ho! O warrior! O war- Siiste Corn-crusher! Sis 80. Make an they moved, ¢a-gi. pi-gaqa ad¢é ta aké. Nuida™hanga! agudi ag¢i” tdi™te, 4-biama. attempt. End lodge he will go. O war-chief! Shas I sit shall ? said he, they say. Niidathangd, nikawasa”, yijebe ma*bitahiqti té’di Aciaia ¢ag¢i” te, 4-biama. O war-chief, O warrior, door (see note) when on the you willsit, said he, they outside say. Ki wa‘t wi™ néje Aci a¢a-biama. I ¢apa uska™ska® Abit‘4-biama. Da*ba- Atque mulier one mingere earit they say. Corn-crusher in a line with she pressed on him, She saw they say. him, biamé yi, gd-biamé: Hi"+! wanin’de ka™b¢a ¢a™cti. IY ¢apa péji’qtei they say when, she said as fol- Oh! mush I desired heretofore. Corn-crusher very bad lows, they say: iddyi¢é-nd, d-biamd. I” ¢apa péji'qtci weagig¢ata™ té-na. I¢ayi¢é, A-biama. Ihavefound ! saidshe,they Corn-crusher very bad I mara myown will ! I have found said she, they for myself say. on with for myself, say. , . Keke 7] Wégata™ yi na™bé b¢tigagti gasté-biama. Wami gaciba-biama. Aci a™¢a Pouidall on when hand the whole she mashed flat, Blood sho forced out, they Out threwit (corn) with they say. say. away f . y ete pares y e¢é¢a-biama. I ¢apa pfiji. A™¢a g¢éd¢a-bi ega™, ca” ca™gti yeqaniga jade she sent it back, Corn-erusher bad. She threw ent it back, hav ing, without stop- Big turtle near to they say. it away they say ping him ag¢a-biamd. Ag¢i-biama. I’ ¢apa ecé-hna™i wi” yadi'qti gaq¢i g¢i, a-biama. he went back they He came back,they Corn-crusher yousayreg- one rightatthe killed hascome said he, they say. say. ularly lodge her back, say. Nida™hanga! Mfyah¢! feaska™ ¢a-g%, A-biama. I’ ¢apa edi” tédi’qti ci ¢ag¢i”’ + ga, pé q O war: chief! O Comb! oC uke an attempt, said he,they Corn-crusher sat justatit again oa sit say. te, a-biamd. Gat a¢d-biamd. Gi" Agaji tédi’qti g¢i'’-biama, Miyahe will, said he, they And he went, they To sit commanded just at it he sat, they say. Comb say. say. him aké udatqti-biama. Ki wa‘i wi™ Aci a¢d-biama. Miyahe ké f¢a-biama. the very good, they say. And woman one - out went, they say. Comb the she found, they (sub.) (recl. ob.) say. Miydhe a®¢in’ge minké ¢a™ cti. Mipjahe pei qtei i¢axi¢ée, A-biama. yiayja Comb Lhave been withoutone heretofore. very bad Ihave found said she, they ‘To the for myself, say. lodge a¢i” aki-biamé. Ud¢e'qti fyig¢aha-biamd. Najfha na™¢ade masani haying reached home, Very soon she combed her they say. Hair the temples on one side they say. (hair) with it b¢uigaqti gaontida-biama. Miyahe piaji nahi" ¢a" éde tida® éska™-hna® eb¢éga” all aiitedl out with they say. Comb bad indeed the but good as if only so I thought the comb it © a t * “I Vs A / ¢acti. A™ ga ¢é¢a-biama yijébe té’di. A™¢aki¢ai té’di ca™ca™qti ag¢a- heretofore. She threw she sent it, they door at the. He made her when without stopping he went it away say throw him away back biam4. Najiha a¢i” ag¢d-biama. Miydhe hnade-hna™i wi” yiadi‘qti they say. Hair havingit he went back, they Comb you call him regu- one right at the say. larly lodge najiha bgtigaqti énace di, 4-biamé. yyéyanga é¢i" aki-biamd. ‘I-biama. haic Isnatched Iam _ said he, they Bigturtle having be reached again, He gave to from her coming say. it for him they say. him, they say. back, Ga-biamé yeanga: Wéona"a¢dgi¢é, A-biama. (é uné awib¢i, 4-biama. Said as follows, Big Turtle: You make me thankful, said he,they This toseek Ihave you, said he, they they say say. say. eo 12 15 12 18 262 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. Wa‘ti-ma watcigaxea"wan’ki¢é taité angdkii yi (@fehni”-de wai wi? The woman we ae them dance shall wereach home when. Itisyou since woman one b¢ize ta minke. Mi”ag¢a" ta minke, 4-biama. Itake will I who. Itakeafemale will I who, said he, they her say. Nuda*hanga! Wayu-ha! a¢th fgaska™¢a-gi, 4-biamé. Nuda™hanga O war-chief! O Awl! again make an attempt, said he, they War-chief say. Miyahe agin té ci @'di ¢ag¢i” te, 4-biam4. Wayu akdé uda*gqtei-biama; Comb the again there you sit will, said he, they Awl. the very good they say; say. (sub.) da™be uida"-biama. G¢i" Agaji-bi té ci é'di g¢i’-biama. Wa‘t wi™ Aaci tolookat good they say. Tosit commanded the again there hesat they say. Woman one out him, they say a¢i-biama. Wayu ké Wee -biamaé. Hi"+! waéyu fnahi" igaati¢ ¢é, A-biama., went they say. Awl the e found, they Oh! awl indeed ave found said she, they (recl. ob.) say. ie myself, say. Wayu a ¢in’ge ¢a™cti. Weéonanki¢é, 4-biama. pfaja agi” ag¢d-biama. Awl I had none heretofore. Iam caused to be said she, they To the having she went homeward, thankful, Bay. lodge it they say. Hiwbé igidat ‘i¢a-biama. Hi"bé ifagidate té, d-biamd. Tbatd-biama. Moccasin to sewhers she spoke of it, Moccasin sew mine will, said she, they She sewed with it, with it they say. with it say. they say. Na*béhi té fbaqapi-biama. Baona™ ¢é¢a-biama. Wami hégaji amd. ijébe eee the she piere ed with it, Missed in she sent suddenly, Blood notalittle they Door they say. pushing they say. say. té’di a” ¢a ¢é¢a-biama. Wayu ké pfaji mahi" eha+! Nié finahi® ayfidaxe. atthe threw it she sent suddenly, Awl the bad truly ! Pain indeed Ihave made away they say. (ob.) for myself. Méayi¢o'qtima™, a-biaméa. A™¢a g¢é¢a-biama, yij¢ébe aciajiqti. Wayu I have altogether killed said she, they She threw sending it homeward, door far out from. Awl my self, say. it away they say, hndde-hna™i. ,faidi’qti wi” jahe yi t’éa¢é, a-biamdé. Man‘dehi wami{ati L q q you called him Right atthe one J abbed ab I kille an said he, they Spear very bloody regularly. lodge say. ag¢a¢i®. yejanga ¢inkd 6'di aki-biamé. Nuda*hangd! Wau yaje uyzied¢a had his. Big turtle the (ob.) there he arrived again, O war- Gen Awl his name telling his they say. ef Wi" é¢é, a-biama. yeanga aka ga-biamd: Hau! nuda"haned, is One he has said they, they Big turtle the said as follows, Ho! O war-chief, coming killed, say. (sub.) they say: back. wéonatadagi¢é, 4-biama. (ieoni”-de indé sabédgi¢é ti minke. Ta™wat you make me thankful, said he, they tisyou since face Iblackenmine will I who. Village say. ; : ri s v ¢a® tyawa tatdé, d-biamd. Hau! Wéhe-a! igaska™¢a-ga, 4-biamd. Nudat’- the joyful shall said he, they Ho! O Pestle! make an attempt, said he, they War- (be), say. say. Tr © wy, v ° L . t . % . hanga Wayu ja” té ci ¢aja™ te, d-biama. Weéhe tdatqtef-biama. Ki &di chief Awl “lay the again youlie will, said he, they Pestle very good __ they say. And there say. 5 F racy Ps lon ® , ° . . ahi-biamaé. Ja” dgaji té’dyja”-biama. Wa‘u wi Aci a-i-biamé. Wéhe he arrived, they To lie commanded by he lay, they say. Woman one out was coming, Pestle say. him the they say. 4 ké f¢a-biama. Hi+! wéhe uda™ fnahi" i¢ayi¢é. Wehe a¢in’ge ¢a™cti, the she found, they Oh! pestle good truly Ihave found Pestle I had none naretgeoeel (reel. say. for myself. ob.) HOW THE BIG TURTLE WENT ON THE WAR-PATH. 263 d-biama. piaja agi” aki biama. Wata™zi d‘iba ¢iz4-biamé. Uhe té said she, they Atthe having she reached home, Corn some she took, they say. Mortar the say. lodge it they say. wjf-biama’. Ha-biama. Waytba-biamé. Cinan’déqti dkiha" jdha-biama. she filled, they She pounded it, She beat it fine, they Right on the knee beyond “she stabbed, they siy- they say. say. bs say. Baona™ ¢é¢a-biama, ¢ga" cinande jdha-biamé. Hi"+! wéhe piiiji fnahit She missed and sent suddenly, so knee she stabbed, they Oh! pestle bad truly in pushing they say, say. eha™+! 4-biama. Aciaja a™¢a g¢é¢a-biamd. Weéhe ecé-hnai wad’ gti wit’ ! said she, they Outside throwing she sent it homeward, Pestle you say regularly right at one say. it away they say. the lodge Jahe gi, wit vé¢é ha, 4-biama. yycyanga ¢inkéd o'di aki-biamd. Wi” t’éade, stabbed is one has “i said he, they Big turtle the (ob.) there he reached, they One Thave coming killed say. say. killed, back, nida*hanga! a-biama. Weéona*a"¢égi¢é, d-biamd yéyanga akdé. Hau! O war-chief! said he, they You make me thankful, said, they say Big turtle the Ho! say. (sub.). nikawasa™ Sin’ga, igaska™¢a-gi, d-biamé. Téni! ntidathangd, e‘a™” daxe O warrior Gray- make an attempt, said he, they Fie! O war-chief, how Ido squirrel, say. ta, d-biam’. i ama q¢ab wyi-biamda. Qé¢abé ké yihuya" pahaci ké f¢ahe can? said he,they Lodge the (pl.) tree camped in them, ‘Tree the smoke-hole above the you pass say. they say. (line of) by ma*hni” te. I¢i¢ai yi ¢ikide ta ama. Wackan’-gi, 4-biamd4, ndzande you walk will. They find if they will shoot at you. Do your best, said he, they _ to evade (the you a say, blows, &c.) wackan’-e%. Wi" gaqé ahi yi idnaxfi¢a-gi, 4-biamd4. Egi¢e nijinga wit’ do your best. One aside reaches if attack him, said he, they At length “boy one say. i¢a-biama. egir sin’ga wi" aha™, d-biama. Za‘é’qti a¢d-biamd. Walnita"¢i® found him, they ‘hisone gray one ! said he, they Inagreat they went, they Roaring weapon say. squirrel say. uproar say. fkidi-biama. Uti’ ctéa"-hna”-biamd. Nujinga wi™ gaqdya_naji’’-biama they shot at him They even hit regularly they say. Boy one atoneside stood they say. with, they say. him (?) Iénaxi¢a-biama. (aqta-biama. Iénaxi¢a-bi yi ¢i‘af a-i-biamdé. Wuhi! He attacked him, they say. e bit him, they say. Theyattacked him, when they they werecoming, Wonderful! they say 5 failed they say. singa umaka fnahi" ¢a™ cti a®¢i‘ai ha. Angut-hna” wi” wa¢aqtai ha, 4-biama. gray- easy indeed heretofore wehave . We only one has bit us 0 said they, squirrel failed E they say. Sin’ga hnade-hna™i gaza”adiqti wi” té¢é gi ha, 4-biamé. yycyanga uf¢a- Gray- you call regularly rightamong them one killed iscoming . said he, they Big turtle told to squirrel him back say. him biama. Hau! nikawasa’qti, 4-biama. Wagazuqti gdxa-gi, 4-biama. they say. . Hol real warrior, said he, they Very straight act, said he, they y say BS, Bes Nida*hanga, éga™qti, 4-biama. Wi” t’¢a¢é, d-biamé. Hau! nikawasa™, O war-chief, just so, said he, they One I have said he, they Ho! warrior, say. killed, say. wéonaa¢agi¢é Aga, 4-biama. you make me thankful indeed, said he, they say. Hau! nikawasa”, i¢agaska” b¢e té minke, wf, 4-biama. -yadci ag¢i-maji. Ho! warrior, I make a trial will Iwho, I, said he, they A long I come not back. say. time Egi¢e ¢ag¢é tai, 4-biamA ypGanga aka. Egi¢e a%iathna ¢ag¢é taf, A-biamd Beware yougo lest, said,they say Sig turtle the Beware you leave me you go lest, said, they say homeward (sub.). homeward 9 12 15 18 264 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. yajanga aka. Pdi ahf-biama. Maqtide d‘tiba Ahigi gaqta”-bitéama. Naji té Big turtle the There he arrived, they Ashes some ee had been poured ont, They had (sub.). say. they say, gone out, ama. Egi¢e ypéyanga aké uyfidani™’-biamd. Mate a¢a-biamd. Mate g¢i’’- they Atlength Big turtle the pushed his way through, Within he went,theysay. Within he sat say. (sub.) they say. biamé. Ictd ¢a™ é¢abe g¢i’-biama u¢ixide ga”. Wa‘tt wi” a-i-biama ha” - they say. Eye the emerging he sat, they say looking as. Woman one was coming, morn- around they say ega™tee yi. yGjanga g¢i” ¢inké eca™qti naji”’-biama. ahawag¢e gii”’- ing when. Big turtle sat the rong very near she stood, they say. Shield eared : who is 4 biamé yjanga akdé. pahdwag¢e i ¢ata™ te ha’, d-biamaé Wa‘t aka u¢ixida- they say * Big turtle the Shield youtread will . ‘said he,they Woman the looked (sub.). on my say. (sub.) around biama. Awaté’ya fai éda®, e¢éga"-bi ega™, u¢ixidd-biama. Ci égi¢a”-biama. they say. At what place he 2 thought she, having, she looked around, Again he said to her, they speaks they say they say. say: Lahdwag¢e i’ ¢ata® té. Gidiha najin’-ga, 4-biama. Ki wa‘t aka f¢a-biama. Shield you tread will. Further away stand, said he,they And woman the found him, they on my say. (sub.) say. Hit+! A-biama. Cka™ji najin’-g&. Wabaji"wi¢é, 4-biama yeajanga aka yyeé- Oh! said she, they Motionless stand. I cause you to carry said,they say Big turtle the Big say. a message, (sub.). yanga akA nuda™ ati-bi af, ¢ ki-ga, 4-biama. Nikagahi i yan ge ubdtihégi¢ai amis the towar hascome he say reach said he, they Chief his ae he buried his by (sub.) says, home, say. * hanging up ké é ga™¢a ati-bi, af, é ki-ga, 4-biam4. Ga-biama: Gaqixéqti ¢dé¢ai-ga, the that desiring hascome, he say reach said he, they They said as fol- Break in (his send suddenly, (reel. says, home, say. lows, they say: head) ob.) 4-biama nikaci"ga b¢tiga. Ga-biama: Aqta™ a™¢aqixe ¢é¢a¢é taba, 4-biama said, they say people all. He said as follows, How you breakin yousend can? said, they say they say: possible my (head) suddenly (pl.), yGanga aki. A™¢aonaha ¢a™¢a™ ¢é¢ag¢ai yi jibe ¢ayig¢aqa™ tal, 4-biama. Big turtle the You hit and it each time yousendit if leg you break yours will, said he, they (sub.). slips off of me suddenly with blows say. Ni té ndkadé’qti yi ug¢a™ ida®, 4-biama. Ci+cte! 4-biama Ni té nakade Water the very hot when put good, said they, For shame! said he,they Water the hot him in they say. say. ana™ bixa™ nikaci"ga Ahigi nd¢it’é taf, 4-biamé. Win’ke éga”, 4-biamé I seatter by: person many you dieby will, said he, they He tellsthe likeit, said, they say kicking scalding say. truth nikaci*ga amé. Ki éga"™ yi usé da”, 4-biama. Ci+cte! d-biama. qgéde people the And so if to burn good, said they, For shame! said he, they Fire (sub.). him they say. say. té ana™bixa” yi maja” ¢a" bgtiga naq¢iads té. Egi¢e cin’gajin’ga eth the I scatter by if land the TI cause to blaze will. Beware children kicking dhigi nadg¢it’é taf, 4-biamé. Win’ke éga", 4-biama. Ki cin’gajin’ga wi" ni Tne youdie will, said he, they Hetells like it, said they, And child one water from heat say. the truth they say. nd-biamaé. Naha, nf diiba, 4-biamé. yéjanga aka, Hiv+! 4-biama. Ni asked for, they O mother, water some, it said. they Big turtle the Oh! said, they Water say. say. (sub.), say. t® gactan‘ka-biama (P{é¢inké nf ndki¢di-ga, 4-biamé. Kdada™ ¢ wag¢ake, the hetempted they say. Thisone water cause him iB said (one), What that you mean, (ok ) ask for, they say. I 7 HOW THE BIG TURTLE WENT ON THE WAR-PATH. 265 a-biama. Natha! ni d‘iba, 4-biama. (é¢inkd ypeqanga, Hi"+! af, 4-biama. said (others), O mother! water some, it said, they This one Big turtle, Oh! he said he, they they say. say. said, say. + 1 pes ue A ree ar MO Ze s Wuht! Ni na® pe ¢inké ha, 4-biamé. Niaja a¢i” a¢a-biama, sin’de ké Wonderful! Water he is fearing - said they, they Tothe having they went, they tail the say. water him say, u¢a”-bi ega”. syéyanga aké yan’de ké fma*¢a"ta® ctéwa"™ ca™ sin’de ké held, they having. Big turtle the ground the clinging to notwith- yet tail the say (sub.) standing u¢a™-bi ega” nfaja adi" ah{-biam4. Ni ké éoih a” ¢a i¢é¢a-biama. held, they having tothe having they arrived,they Water the headlong threw him they sent suddenly, say water him say. away they say. *n/ . a , *n/ . , , sie t Ni ké ga” ma¢i”-biamé. Xagéga™ ma™¢i’-biama. Niwa” ga™jinea gaxa- Water the fora he walked, they say. Crying a little he walked, they say. Toswim knew not how he made while biama. Wi! wi! wi! 4-biamé. Wuht! nf ké gaza” aja ¢é¢ai-ga, A-biama. they say. Wi! wi! wi! saidhe,they Wonderful! water the to the midst of send him said they, they say. say. , . . . , a . *n/ . a ae 4 an © Pi égih i¢é¢a-biama. yuwi"xe ma*¢i”-biama. Egi¢e uspé ama. Ki, T’é ha, Again head- they sent him sud- Wandering he walked, they say. Atlength he sunk, they And, Dead long denly, they say. around Say. d-biama. Ag¢ad-biamé. Edi éga” ga¢é‘a" etaf éde, 4-biamaé niaci"ga ama. - said they, they They went homeward, Immediately you should have done said, they say people the say. they say. that to him, - (sub.). Ag¢i-biamd yi ntyinga d‘iba &’di naji”-biama. Ki yeranga ugaha ‘They went home- when boy some there stood they say. And Big turtle floating ward, they say . a-t-biama, Ugas‘i" atf-biama. Ki nijinga dba &di ucka™ ¢an’di da™be was coming, Peeping he came, they And boy some there deed (was atthe to see they say. say. done) najr’-biama. ycjanga nuda” ti yi'cti t’é¢agd-bi ecai ¢a®cti. A"da™be stood they say. Big turtle to war came men, in you Rilled! him, you said heretofore. Look here the past that i¢di-ga, A-biamd ycyanga aki. Ud¢d ag¢d-biama nijinga ama. yaanga t’é- at me, said, they say Big turtle the To tell went homeward, boy | the Big turtle you (sub.). it they say (sub.). Z ¢a¢a-bi ecaf éde ¢é4a aka juga yidéha éga" wedqaqa, d-biama. yaanga aka killed that you said but thisone the body showedhis as laughed at us, said they, they Big turtle the him behind (sub.) - say. (sub.) nija aki-biama. Hau! a™¢a™naxf¢ai hau, 4-biam4 nfaci*ga ama. Iénaxidd- alive heis they say. Ho! we attack him 1 said, they say people the They attacked (sub.). him 7 . *9 . , . . biama. Idi ahf-biama Awag¢an‘di? 4-biamd. Qé¢andi, 4-biamé. Nuona*’ they say. There they arrived, they Tn what place? said they,they In this place, said (the boys), Otter say. say. they say. dwagi" é 8. Wé's‘a-nideka cti awagi" ¢ a, d-biama. Céna*ba uné tai, where is he 3 Grass-snake too where is he ? said they, they Those two let them seek moving moving : say. him, d-biama. yeyanga ak’ ma"¢in’ka mate g¢i-biama. acije icté ¢a" edAbe said they, they Big turtle the soil within sat they say. Tipofnose eye the also say. (sub.) (under) (ob.) enaqtci é¢a"be am’. Wé’s‘a Nuonat” é¢a"ba und-biamé ni ma™ taya Kea” qti alone emerged they Snake Otter he too sought him, they water within. Very near to say. say him 3 12 15 — an we 15 18 266 THE ¢(EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. fha-biamé. gad ¢a™ dgajade-hna”-biamd. I[¢a™ba” etéga” yi Nuona™ iziqti they passed, they Head the theystepped regu- they say. A second time apt when Otter the very say. over larly abdomen ¢an‘di ¢aqta-biamé Hau! ji*¢éha, nié a"ckaxe, 4-biama. Ki, Hata a"wa™’- inthe he bit him, they say. Ho! elder brother, pain you make me, said he, they And, Why you seek gay. ¢ané? 4-biamé yéyanga ak4. Uwina-mdji ha, 4-biama. Wab¢ate ka™b¢a me? said, they say Big turtle the I did not seek you : said he, they I eat I want (sub.). say. an’gakikipai, 4-biamdé. An’kaji, t’ea $8 ga™ ¢a-ma &'di u¢¢éhe cka™hna ga™ we have peek each said he, they Not so, tokillme they who wish there youjoin youwished so other, say. atwar’¢and, A-biama. Ha jim¢é! ha jim¢é! jimgcha! wib¢aha”. Uwina-maji, you sought me, said he, they 0) elder 0) elder elder brother O! I pray to you. I have not sought say. brother! brother! you, 5 , ne 5 *. 1 = ri d-biama. Wib¢acta™ téga?-maji, 4-biama. Hau! ji"¢cha, ata™ yi a™¢acta™ said he, they I will by no means let you go said he, they Ho! elder brother, how when you (open say. (from my mouth), say. ong your mouth and) let me go taté, d-biama. Ing¢a” o¢f yi wib¢acta® ta minke, 4-biama. Hu"+! Ing¢a” shall, said he, they Thunder- has when Ilet you go will Iwho, said he, they Halloo! Thunder- say. god vane say. god ac { yi a’ é¢acta® A¢a. H+! Hi-titatna a’ ¢aqtai Ada. Hut+! Niaciea sel yf q g has when he lets me go indeed. Halloo! Between thelegs he bites me indeed. Halloo! People come back . Om oufs . aie y . . wéya ¢é¢a-biamd. Qaqta-bi ¢, a4-biama. Hi-ita™na ¢aqta-bi ¢, 4-biama. asking a he sent suddenly, eis bitten, he said they, itis Betweenthelegs heis bitten, he said they, itis aver of they say. that says, said. that says, said, them ytha uftin-ga, 4-biam4. ypiha gaptki-biama. Hau! jin¢éha, ng¢a” ama Tent-skin hit for him, said they,they Tent-skin they made sound by Ho! elder brother, Thunder- the say. hitting, they say. god (sub.) 5 et) 2 Ee , ks - g¢i, d-biamé. Géama ha uti”, d-biama yeyanga aka. Ci ja” gaqiad¢a has said he, they Those tent-skin hit, said,theysay Big turtle the Again wood to fell it come, say. (sub.). ida", A-biama. Ja™ gé gaqfa¢a-hna™-biama. Ja™ gé, Qwi+, qwi+, 4-biama. good, said they,they Wood rece ) they were felling they say. Wood the, (sound of trees fall- said, they say. Bay. (pL ob. ing), Hau! ji*¢cha, Ing¢a™” ama g¢i, d-biama. Gaamaé cti ja” gaqia¢ai, 4-biama Ho! elder brother, Thunder- the has said he, they Those too wood they fell, said, they say god (sub.) come, say. Ganga aké. Wahita¢i" ¢icfbe ida", 4-biamd. Jit¢cha, e¢f, 4-biamd. M soy 78 Big turtle the Gun to fire good, saidthey,they Elder brother, it has said he, they (sub.). say. come, say. Géamaé cti wahiita™¢i® ¢icfbai, 4-biama yéjanga aké. Egi¢e Ing¢a” hita?- Those too gun they fire, said,they say Big turtle ( the At length EB roared ‘sub.). g biama wéahidé’qti. Hau! jimécha, g¢i, 4-biama. Qacta’’-biama. Nuona™ they say very far away. Ho! elder brother, ithas said he, they e let him go, they say. Otter come, say. aka q¢Aqtci-biama. G¢é ama. Q¢aqti ki ama. the very thin they say. He went they say. Very lean he reached home, (sab.) homeward they say. - Wajin’ga na™ba-ma ¢a™ ni ¢a™ ¢aqt tai, d-biama. B¢éxe wa¢i” gfi-ga, Bird the two the water the let them drink said they,they Pelican having be ye re- (ob.) it dry, say. them turning, HOW THE BIG TURTLE WENT ON THE WAR-PATH. 267 d-biamé. Wa¢i" agi-bi ega”, Ni ¢a™ ¢aqui-gi ha, 4-biama. Niaci®ga wi” said they, they faving they were nen Water the drink ye dry - said they, they Person one say. them coming back, say. they say / eNO arn fo nuda” ati éde téawa™¢at éde nija. Wedqaqdqtia™i, tea” $s anga™ ¢ai to war came but we killed them but alive. He laughs heartily at us, we kill him a desire ar¢izai yi. Paqu-biamd wajin’ga aké. Djiibaqtei yejatiga g¢i™ ¢a® endqtci we take when. Drank it dry, they bird the A very little Big turtle sat the only him Bay (sub.). ugacta-biama. yi yeqanga aké gd-biamd: Hau! nikawasa®™ Sin’ga, 6'di wasleft they say. And Big turtle the Sait as follows, Ho! warrior Gray-squirrel, there (sub.) they say: gi-gi, dgudi ¢a¢i™cdi"te, 4-biama. Na¢uhaqti Péargai, a-biama. Sin’ga becoming where you may be mov- said he, they Almost Tam killed, saidhe,they Gray-squir- back, ing, say. say. rel ama hiita"qti agi-biama. Wawénaxi¢a agi-biamaé. Ni-uji ¢a" wd¢ab¢azd= the erying loud was coming back, To attack them iN was coming Water- See the he tore them by (sub.) they say. back, they say. biting biama aki¢a. U¢d‘u'udd-biama. Egi¢e ni ké bgugaqti é4a ak{-biama. they say both. He bit holes in (them), they say. Atlength water the there Teaches home, they say. Watcicka niti¢ica” ¢a 44 égiga”-biamdé; ni ugfji-biamé. Weébatdi-ga, Creek lake to the it was as before, they water filled with its, they Sew ye for them, Bay; ay. d-biama. Mixa ama B¢éxe-ma nide gé wébatd-biamd4. Weébaté ¢icta’’- said they, they Swan the Pelican the throat the sewed for them, they Sewing for they fin- say. (pl. sub.) (ob.) say. them ished biamé. Ké, ci ¢aqtti-ga. Wacka™i-ga, d-biamda. Egi¢e at¢i‘a taf, 4-biama. they say. Come, again drink it dry. Do your best, said they, they Beware we fail lest, said they, they say. say. Ci ¢aqt-biama. Ci ni ¢a™ djibaqtei ucté ama. Ha! nikawasa®™ Sin’ga, Again they drankit dry, Again water the avery little wasleft they Ho! warrior Gray- ae they say. (ob.) Say. rel, doudi ¢a¢ircdi*te, ¢a¢uhaqtci téa™¢ai. E’di gf-ga, a-biama yéjanga aka. ean you may be mov- nearly Tam killed. There te conte said, they say Big turtle a ing, ack, (su B’di agi-bi ega™ ci niide wa¢ab¢ab¢aza-biama. Ci ni ké bpugadti &ya There hewascom- when again throat he bit and tore themin many Again water the there ing back, they say places, they say. aki-biama. Nude gé pfijiqti waxa-biama. Baté ctéwa™ pfijiqti waxa- reached home, Throat the very bad _ he made them, they Tosew intheleast very bad he made they say. (ob.) say. them . ye =) Ce) . biama, baté u¢ici éga.. Ca™ a®wa™¢ic‘a tan’gata™. Sin’ga amd ¢iqd- they say, to sew difficult. Yet we fail we who will. Gray-squirrel the chased (mv.ob.) him biama yi ¢icti-biamad. Sin’ga ftag¢éwa¢ée Mahi” a, 4-biama. Sin’ga e-hna” they say when they failed, they say. Gray- yin abominable very ! said they, they Gry fits: alone say. yanga jug¢ai eb¢éga”. K-hna” u¢tiki eb¢éga™, A-biamé. Ada® a®wa" ¢i‘ai, “Big turtle with him T think. He only Bidedis with I think, said they, they ahere we have failed, say. ‘ore i-biama. Can’gaxd-biama. Ha™ yi ag¢d-biam& yydyanga aka E’di said they, they They ceased _ they say. Night when went back, they Big turtle the There say. say. (sub.). ak{-biama juwag¢ai ¢ankaidi. Hau! nikawasa”, waméxe¢ai yi ag¢é-hna’i. he rerchedagain, he with them by those who Ho! warrior, they geteven when they go_usnally. they say were. with them homeward 12 15 18 12 18 268 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. (higan’ge watcigaxe i¢dhidai Ga"mi® dha", A-biama. Ag¢a-biama. U¢ica™ Your sister to dance they are tired I suspect ! said he, they They wenthomeward, Around / of waiting say. they say. them ANTE ; A £ i penie nl 9 ma'¢i"-biama. qéxe ¢a™ gig¢asa¢u ma*¢i’-biamd. Nikawasa™! ¢égima™ té he walked they say. Gourd the rattling his he walked they say. Warrior! thusIdo will ehé-de éga®™ ha, 4-biama. Usd-biamd. yyéjanga nuda” ¢ai yi’cti wéhna- IT said but so é said he, they He burnt (grass), Big turtle on the went when, you inva- say. they say. war-path in the past hide-hna™i. Nikaci"ga waq¢i gi-bi éska® amd usd-biamd. Egi¢e afi ¢a™ riably ridiculed. People killed them heis theythink they he burnt(grass), Atlength vil- the coming back that say they say. lage (ob.) ° . 5 C / . pay apks é¢a™be akf-biamdé. Wahitta"¢i" ¢iciba-bi ega” najiha ja™jinga ugacke insight they reached home, Gun (?) red, they say having hair stick tied to they say. . . / a¢i™’-bi ega™, Nuda™ ama céag¢i. Igaca™ ca". Nikacitga wag¢i cagi. I ¢apa having it, when, They who wentto therethey They ran round Bapoie kille pees they Corn- they say war have come. and round. them Lat come erusher ack. wi” t’é¢é a-bi no+! yiadi’qti té¢é d-bi no+! a-biama. Miydhe giidi’qti one hekilled hesays (see Right inthe he killed hesays said he, they Comb right in the note). odge him say. lodge wi” té¢é A-bi no+! A-biamé. Wayu yfadi’qti wi” t’é¢é 4-bi no+! d-biama. one he killed he says! said he, they Awl rightinthe one he killed he says! said he, they say. lodge say. Wéhe yfiidi’qti wi” t’é¢é d-bi no+! a-biama. Sin’ga gaza”adiqti ¢ab¢i" Pestle ight the one he killed he says! said he, they Gray-squirrel right among them three odge say. iG; ° : = ents “se = téwa¢e abi no+! 4-biamé. Nuda”hanga gaza™adigti za‘é’gti yeyanga killed them he says ! said he, they War-chief right among them in a great Big turtle , say. uproar u¢a™-biamad no+! @iti-biamd no+! d-biamaé. [yijtigqti mar¢i"’-biamé. they held him, they say! They failed, they say! said he, it is said. Very prond he walked they say. ahawag¢e gif” ma¢i"’-biamd yéjanga. pf té udé ag¢d-biamd. Ug¢a Shield carrying walked they say Big turtle. Lodge the toenter net wenthomeward, ‘Telling of his (ob.) they say. himself to them o¢i”-biamd. Nikaci"ga na‘a” ga™¢ai éga™ 6'di ahi-hna™-biamé. Hata" he sat they say. People to hear it wished as there they regu- they say. Why arrived larly (¢i¢i‘af 4, eca’ qtci didg¢i". Eca” qtci i¢ag¢i” yi edta" yi ¢anija. Ni na®ape didthey ? very near they sat. Very near you sat if how when youalive. Water I feared fail with you dixe ga™ anfja, 4-biamaé. Can’de gidama icta ¢ingai, 4-biama. Hata" I pre- ees Talive, said he, they If so those over eye they have said eye they How tended say. there none, yi ¢anfja f¢i¢a-baji. Kga™a™ja maqtide ma™te ag¢i” ga” anfja, 4-biamd. if youalive they did not ‘find Nevertheless ashes in I sat sO T alive, said he, they you. say. Nikaciga wagq¢i ag¢i. Eadta™ im¢éjai a, 4-biama. Niaci"ga ¢idq¢i-hna™i Person killing them I have Why wows faubs ? said he, they Beagle killing you reg- come home. say. ularly wa¢ikihna-baji éga" wénuda™ pf. Niaci* ga téawa¢é. Hata™ im¢djai cite. you did not take ven- as to war on I was Pegpiey I killed them. Why youdoubt may? geance on them . them there. me Non/ : i Céna udg¢a té minke. Ca daxe, 4-biama. Ceta™. Enough Itellof will Iwho. Ihave stopped, said he, they So far. myself say. HOW THE BIG TURTLE WENT ON THE WAR-PATH. 269 NOTES. 254, 2. nikaci®ga aji amaga, literally: “people, different, at them.” It may be intended for aji amayjata”, “from a different people.” 254, 4. qade na*ba. The two bundles or wisps of grass are used (1) for wiping the mouths and hands of the guests; and (2) for wiping the bowls and kettles. They are then put into the fire, and the bowls are passed through the smoke which ensues. 254, 5. tha" ¢a™ ugdcke (tédi), equivalent to uha® u¢tigacke, and isag¢e, the forked stick from which the kettle is suspended over the fire. 254, 9. gibati-gi, call tohim. The Qegiha call (ba®), but the yaiwere never do. The latter go to each tent, and speak to those invited to a feast. 254, 12. waska ¢i*heati. This is a contraction from “waské a¢i” ¢i™hé at, bowl, having, be sure.” 256, 4. “yeqaiga qii tédi,” was given by the narrator, but “yejanga 6 yi tédi” is plainer, according to J. La Fléche. I agree with F. La Fléche in regarding “e ii tédi” as more definite than “ii tédi”. The word “‘e” may be rendered, “the aforesaid.” 256, 5. nikaci"ga gaama, the people of the village where the Big turtle resided. 256, 5. nuda® i"wi®nudaiga¢e tai, é. e., (nuda™) imwi’nuda™ aiga¢e tai. The ‘“nuda®” seems redundant. 256, 9-10. niaci®ga ama, the men for whose sake they were going to war. Frank La Fléche says that “Ebe nida® thai técti” is equivalent to “ Nada” tha” aka ébéi té/cti,” the former meaning, ‘Who is cooking the war-feast?” and the latter, ‘‘Who is he that is cooking the war-feast?” 256, 12. ubésni® we¢ai té. Sanssouci prefers “ubésni" y1," if he finds him out ; but Frank La Fléche says “tibesni"i yi,” if they find them out, which is better. 256, 15. ye¢awe, the root of a water-plant, which is scarce at present. The plant has a leaf resembling a lily, but it is about two feet in diameter, and lies on the water. The stalk extends about two feet above the water, and ends in a seed-pod. The seeds, which are black and very hard, are almost oval. The Indians dry the root, and cut it in pieces about six inches long, if required for a long time; but, if not, they boil it. 257, 1. inde ¢a® ibiya-biama. He made alternate black and red stripes on his face, extending from left to right. 257, 3. ¢ega" ama. Here the narrator made an appropriate gesture. — 257, 4. Song of the war-chief. The words in the text are of yoiwere (Iowa) origin, but are given as pronounced by the Omahas. The correct [oiwere version, according to Sanssouci, is, “ ypeta® Qa"ye watce yu he (anye ke) icd-nana hie tee yu he,” answering to the (egiha, “ypeyalga wate agi-biama ecai ¢a” e té agii ha:” “ ‘The Big turtle is com- ing back from touching the foe, they say’, you said. He is coming back from touching.” Frank La Fléche reads “wat‘é” for “wate”; but he does not understand the use of the last clause, e te agii ha. 257, 5. u¢ica™ ma™¢i-biama. The war-party marched in the following order: Two scouts went inadvance. Then came the ‘“nuda*haiiga jiiga,” carrying the sacred bag. He was followed by the warriors, who marched abreast. The war-chiefs walked behind them. The Big turtle danced around the warriors as they moved along, passing between them and the nudathanga jinga. 257, 7. ¢aku¢a-gii, addressed to the Buffalo. 257, 11. gidAha™-biama, equivalent to “ Najit’ atia¢a-biama,” He stood suddenly. 270 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. 257, 19. ti¢ai-gi, keep on, is addressed to a few; but when there are many in the party, ti¢é¢ai-ga is used, the latter (ti¢e¢é) being the frequentative of ti¢e. 258, 2. niahi¢é¢a-biama (niahi¢e¢é) is contracted trom nidha, into the water; and * i¢é¢é, to send or be sent suddenly. S 258, 5. efa® téga™ ca™itte. Sanssouci says that this is not plain. He substitutes for it, ““ Bata" tada® cé éja"mi’ ha” (poiwere, Toto u™ tana ceé Ware ké), I suspect that is how he will act; or, “Edé tada™ cé éja®mit’ ha,” I suspect that that is what he will say. Frank La Fléche says that all three are correct. 258, 10. ¢icinka, to bend the tail backward. 258, 13. a¢uha. The Turtle asked him to do something else; but the Wild-cat said that it was the only thing which he could do. 259, 3. dja" ga" cecei"te, may be equivalent to “Aja™ ga’ céce Gite.” Sanssouci gave, as the yoiwere, Tacké-na ceice k’are ke. 259, 7. gai té yéjatiga ta", implies that the narrator witnessed this; but as he did not, it should read, g4-biamaé yéjanga aka. 259, 12. ¢iqi‘e-ga"-ma. When anything is torn, the sound made by the tearing is called quié’. 260, 5. da té, the nose of an animal as distinguished from that of a person, da ké. 260, 15. yéyanga 6/di a¢a-biama. The Turtle went thither to meet the Squirrel. 260, 18. 4i ya haqtci ké, just on the border or edge of the lodges, just outside the camp circle or the line of tents. 261, 3. yijébe ma*bitahiqti tédi. There are two renderings of this, according to Sanssouci. (1) pijébe ma®-bit‘4-ahiqti tédi, When, or, On arriving right at the door by pressing on the ground (in crawling). (2) gijébe ma™-bit ihé-qti tédi, Aciaja 4ici hidé té/di ¢ag¢i’ te, You will sit outside at the bottom of the tent-pole, when, by pressing on the ground with hands and feet as you are lying down, you drag yourself up even . to the door. Frank La Fléche says that the first is the correct one in this myth. 262, 1. ¢iehni*’-de wai wi” b¢ize ta minke, ete.: “On account of you I will take a wife—you will acquire her for me.” ¢icibe uda®. This is a modern interpolation, a change probably made by the narrator, who had forgotten the ancient phrase. Frank La Fléche says that he never heard it used in this myth. The three phrases which he heard were, “Wahdé-sagi uitin-gi, Strike the hard skins for him”; “ piha uitiN-ga, Strike the tent- skins for him,” and “ Néxegayu uitifi-ga, Strike the drum for him.” 267, 3. djubaqtci yéqanga g¢i" ¢a™, pronounced dju+baqtei, ete. 267, 14. bate ctéwa® piajiqti w4xa-biama, pronounced bate ctéwa? pi; er , , . Gicka”-a hé. Uwaq¢ai yi cgi¢e te¢i¢e tat. Wi edta™ yi téa™¢e taba, a-biama Go faster They overtaké if beware they kill lest. I why if they kill will? said, they say us you me eee , . , , . wat akd. EKgi¢e wa¢iqe amd ¢é¢a"be ati-biama. Wa‘ti aka ga-biama: woman the Atlength pursuer the in sight came, they say. Woman the said as follows, (sub.). (sub.) (sub.) they say: Céati é, A-biamd. Uwagq¢ai, d-biamd. T’é¢i¢e té. Gicka’-a hé, a-biama. Yonder he, said she, they We are over-_ said she, they He kill you will. Go fast said she, they has come say. taken, say. say. . 18 erate! Nei Goo ; Mare ats Ug¢a-bi ega™, watt ta" u¢a’’-biama. Gan ki Qiga iin’ge akiha" ¢iqa-biama. Overtook having, woman the they held her, they And 3udger his son beyond they pursued him, them, they say (ob.) say. they say. Ki wi” a¢i” ati ega” Quga ijin’ge uq¢a-biama yi gd-biama: Kagc¢ha, And one having come having Badger his son he overtook him, when he said as follows, My friend, him they say they say: tea™ ¢i¢d tA-bi ¢a” ja, téwi¢a-maji. Gickan’-gar Man‘de b¢iqa®, ehé ta minke. we were to kill you though, I do not kill you. Go faster. Bow T broke it, Isay will I who. (he said) Q¢abé eé zandé cé Akibanan’-ga, d-biama. Wi’ ci &'di ahi-biama. U¢agq¢e. Tree that thick that roan to withall your — said he, they One again there arrived, they say. You over- forest might, say. took him. Kata” té¢agaji a. Man’de ké b¢iqa" ga” téa¢a-maji, d-biama. Cété — g¢e. Why youdidnot ? Bow the LIbrokeit so Idid not killhim, said he, they Yonder he goes kill him (ob.) say. homeward. Gicka® iha-ga, 4-biamd. Ci wa¢iqe di ahi-biama. Hau! kag¢ha, t’ea™ ¢i¢ée Going suddenly, said he,they Again pursuer there arrived, they say. Ho! friend, we wereto kill faster be thou, say. ta-bi ¢a™ja, t’éwi¢a-maji ta minke. Gicka™i-ga. Q¢abé cé¢a™ Akibanan’-ga, you though, T kill you not will Iwho Go ye faster. Tree yonder run to with all your che said) might, {-biamd. yan’eéqtci ¢ag¢i, 4-biamd. Man’deya™ b¢ise. ehé ta minke, said he, they Very near to you have — said he, they Bowstring I broke it, Isay will I who, say. come again, say. 12 15 18 6 15 296 THE @EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. d-biamd. Wi” ci @di ahf-biamd. U¢aq¢e ¢acti. Kata aja’? 4-biama. said he, they One again there arrived, they say. You over- heretofore. Why youdidit? said he, they iy. took him Bay. Kita" tc¢ag¢dji a. Man‘déya” b¢isé Goa" niga o¢é edté, A-biamé. Ci wa- Why you did not ’ Bowstring I broke it as live he goes yonder said he,they Again pur- kill him home- (see note), say. ward ¢iqe 6di ahi-biamé. Wau! kagcha, nikagahi ju t’ea’ ¢i¢é ta-bi af ¢a™ja, suer there arrived, they say. Ilo! friend, chief princi- we were to kill you he though, pal (he said) said an ka-w" (i"-baji, (ania te. Si nia” ¢é, ehé ta minke, d-biamé. Gickan’-oa. we are not so, You live will. Yoot it hurt me, Isay will 1 who, said he; they Go faster, say. / *n/ ~ »~/ 7 rae , Wy es “ge Qgabe : dkibanan’-ea, 4-biamé. Wi ci é'di ahi-biamdé, Tena’! Ud¢iq¢éeqtia”. Tree run to with all Pann said he, they One again there arrived, they say. Why! You really overtook might, Bay. him. , ) Ix , & . ¥ fdta" té¢ad¢aji a. Si nia’ ¢e, ga” ted¢a-maji. Ccété g¢¢. Gicka" ¢iqd-gi, Why did you not ¢ Foot hurt me, 80 I aia not kill him. Yonder he went Going chase him, kill him homeward, faster d-biama. Ci wa¢igqe é’di ahi-biamd. Hau! kag¢ha, été yf wi” égihe hné said he, they Again pursuer there arrived, they say. To! friend, yonder lodge one he sadlong you sity. into it xo : . 1s / / . ae te, i-biamd. (fanfya te, 4-biama. Siya™ ana™b¢i"¢a, ehé td minke, 4-biamé. will, said he, they You live will, said he, they Ankle twisted in run- Isay will I who, said he, they say. say. ning, say. . Tip i0 : Mx. ee ¥ Wi” @'di ahi-biama. Na*cta™-biamd. Téna’! U¢aq¢éqtia” ¢a’cti. Hata" One there arrived, they say. He stopped running, Why! You really overtook heretofore. Why they say. him aja”? Wi'¢ake, Siya™ ana™ b¢i"¢a, ga” ana” cta®. Cété g¢é. Gicka™ ¢iqd-ga, you did You tell the Ankle I twisted it in so. Lstoppedrun- Yonder he went Going chase is, it? truth. running, ning. homeward. faster A-biamé. Mar¢i"i wi’ égihe did¢a-biama A™he ami. Za‘é’qtia”- said he, they Warth-lodge one headlong he had gone, they say. He fled they In a very great say. into it say. confusion, Kx ka f{baji-biama { ma"ta at biama We i¢iqe ama. . ; t t jiig¢e-hnan’-e% hi, d-biamd i¢ddi aké. Egi¢e jig¢e a¢i-biama. (Séamé, go with him regularly é said, they say his the Atlength with him he went, they say. These are ; father (sub.). they, . , . . ra 7 , 14 kagéha, 4-biama. pAqti ébazti-biamé. Ki ga” ébazu tédita® wénaxi¢a O younger said he, they Deer he pointed at for him, And so he pointed after the attacking brother, say. they say. at for him them a¢i-biama. Ga™ ucka™ ¢andiqti ca™ yaqti wi” t’é¢a-biama Ing¢a™-si"-snéde he went, they say. So deed justatthe yet deer one _ killed it, they say Long-tailed-cat 15 18 304 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. aka. Gat 4“ aki-biama. (lisan’ga céga"™-hna” éga" téqia¢é, A-biama the So carry- he reached home, our younger in that way invari- as I prize him, said, they say (sub.). ing it they say. brother ably i¢adi aké. Ga” indida® wanfja cka”hna yi ¢isan’ga uif¢a-hnan’-gai 5 his father the So what animal you wish if youryounger tell it to him regularly. (sub.). brother Wanija bétigaqti t'éwa¢é ma¢i’-biamd Ing¢a™si-snéde aka. Dadtha, kagé Animal all killing them walked, they say Long-tailed cat the O father, younger (sub.). brother ‘Abae judg¢e b¢é ta minke, 4-biama cénujin’ga aka. GAtédi q¢abé huuting§ I with him I go will I who, said, they say young man the In that tree (sub.). place cugaqti ui¢a™be naji” té édedi amaf. di dahadi ¢isan’ga i¢ape gin’ gi. very thick up-hill stands thethere they are (my.). There onthe hill your younger waiting brother for Ga™ cénujin’ga aké Gahadi Ing¢a’-si"-snéde i¢ape g¢i-biama. Kagé, ¢é So young man the on the hill Long-tailed-cat waiting sat, they say. O younger this (sub.) for brother, idadi ‘dacpae eté té, d-biamé. Ga” dahadi g¢i’-biama cénujin’ga aka. my father youhunt may the, said he, they So on the hill sat they say young man the say. (sub.). Ga™ Ing¢a”-si"-snéde q¢abé ctiga égih aid¢a-biama. Laqti wi” u¢a”-biama. So ong- ae cat tree thick hez eile had gone, they say. Deer one heheld they say. oar -biami. Ga” &di ahi-biamd. (isnt a¢d-biamaé. Ubatihéda- e made cry out by holding, So there he arrived, they Dragging he went, they say. He hung it up they say. say. it biama. Wasidbe-ma wi” ka™b¢a, kagé, 4 biama. Waci™ b¢ate téga", they say. The black bears one I wish, O younger said he, they Fat meat I eat in order brother, say. that, e wv 2 4-biamé. Egi¢e wi” u¢a”-biamé. E’di ahi-biama. Egi¢e yaci t’é¢eé said he, they Atlength © one he held they say. There he arrived, they Behold some he was kill- say. say. time akima. Ing¢a’-si*-snéde aka fyig¢ag¢idai-de yidfya ma"¢i’-biama. Hau! ing it, they say. Long-tailed-cat the gotfoamonhim- since rubbing he walked they say. (sub.) self by biting himself kagé, jabe-ma wi™ ka™b¢a ha, 4-biama. Ni ké anase té. Ca™ ga™ égih O younger the beavers one I wish : said he, they Water the obstructed. And after head- brother, say. some tlme long did¢a-biama Egi¢e jAbe-ma wi" jin’gaji cdega" é¢a"be a¢i” ag¢i-biama. he had gone, they At Tongttl the beavers one not small but so insight having he came back, they say. it say. r ‘ 7 ° / ~~ , ® 4 7 / Kagé, nuona”-ma wi" ka™b¢a ha, 4-biama. Ga™ ci wi" t’é¢a-biama O younger- the otters one I wish 5 said he, they So again one he killed, they say brother, say. nuona™. Ki i¢adi aké nan‘de-gipibaji té ga’ ugine a-f-biama. Gan’‘ki otter. And his father the heart was bad for him as so seeking he was coming, And (sub.) them, his they say. own pahan’gaqtci yaqti Pé¢ai té edi ahi-biamd4. Ci ¢é wasdbe té¢ai té Odi the very first deer killed the there he arrived, they Again this black bear killed the there say. rs , g : . vl qe : y / Beni, ahf-biama. Ci ¢é jibe t’é¢ai té &’di ahi-biama. Ci ¢é nuona™ t’é¢ai té he arrived, they Again this beaver killed the there hearrived, they Again this otter killed the say. say. wii ye. . * Tit é/di ahfi-biamé. Na! ¢isan’ga f¢inge t’é¢a¢é, kagdé, 4-biama. Ca™ éga’ there he arrived, they Fie! your que ger weary you kill him, my child, said he, they Enongh so Bay. brother say. eae THE ADVENTURES OF THE PUMA. 305 gaxa-ga, A-biama. Ga™ ¢ céna wa'i™” ag¢d-biamd. I¢ddi ak& zani wa‘i’- make it, said he, they So that enough carrying they went home- is the all carried say. them ward, they say. father (sub.) them : t / Parse / biama. Ga” aki-bi ega” ijin’ge ak& ak{fwaha wa¢ate g¢i"-biama. they say. So _ reached home, ose his son the both eating sey sat, they say. they say (sub.) Ing¢a”-si*-snéde & Wju-biamé, i¢ddi t'a™ té; Ada™ i¢ddi fyidiski Jugig¢e 3 Long-tailed-cat he principal, they his had ies therefore his near him with his say, father © him father without touching -biama. Ga™ iha™ aké é cti éga™qti Agi‘a"¢a-biamé. Gat edita® sat they say. So his the she too just so took eare of her own, So after that mother (sub.) they say. ‘abae jigig¢e a¢é-hna"-biama. (isan’ga wiraqtci té¢é-ga" “”’-ada™ jug¢e hunting with his he went Ae they gue younger only one deed having carry and with him rother i it ef-hnan-gi, 4-biamé. Ahigi t’éwa¢é tédfhi yinan ‘da¢i® igiyuhd-biama 6 be coming back said he, they Many killed them when making himself ah it for his, they regularly, say. crazy by running say : : 7s. : . . igadi aka. Ga™ éga™-hna”-biamé. Wanfja wirdqtci t’é¢ai ga” jig¢e his the So San regularly, they say. Animal only one hekilledit so with him father (sub.). agi-hna’-biamé. Ci ‘Abae jiig¢e ahf-biamé. (isan’ga watcicka wi gtiata™ ne was coming home regu- Again hunting with him he arrived, they Your younger creek one sean the larly, they say. say. brother further (ob.) ti¢e té’di cugdqti naji” té’di édi ‘Abae jii¢ag¢é te, A-biamé. Ga™ 6'di 9 pone atthe very thick stands atthe there hunting you with him will, said he, they So there ort! say. ahi-biama. Kagé, i"dadi ‘acpae eté té ¢¢, 4-biamd. Ga™ &’di a¢a-biama. he Cy they O younger my father youhunt may the this, said he, they So there he went, they brother, say. Bay. Edi ae biama yi yaciqti éga™ a” pa” niga kéde t’é¢é akdma. Kagé, There arrived,they say when a very long time elk sae lying, and he was killing it,they 0 younger say. brother, ma"tcti-ma wi” t’é¢a-gi, d-biamé. Egi¢e wi" u¢a™ Atidg¢a-biama. E/di 12 the grizzly bears one kill it, said he, they Atlength one heheld suddenly they say. There say. a¢a-biama. Ma"tct-xage hégabaji-biamé. H‘a! h‘a! h‘a! é-hna™-biama he went, they say. Grizzly bear crying very much _ they say. H'a! h‘al h‘a! said only they say matte aké. Egi¢e t’é¢a-bikéama. Akiq¢dte ag¢an‘ka"ha™ ¢iqdpi i¢d¢a- grizzly bear the Atlength he was lying killed, On the body on both sides pierced _ forcibly (sub.). they say. under the foreleg with claws biama Ing¢a”-si-snéde ta”. Ga™ ye-niga wi" ci i¢naxi¢aki¢d-biamad. 15 they say ong-tailed cat the: So buffalo-bull one again he Snade bin rush on it, they (ob.) Bay, je-nuga ta” be a-biama. Gan‘ki ci gd-biama: Kagé, ¢étédi wasabe sig¢é Buffalo- ct on ae it, they And again hesaidasfol- Qyounger inthis black bear trail y. lows, they say: brother, place té ee a- See cénujin’ga aka Ing¢a™-si"-snéde Agudi ¢aqtai té, the hunt it, said, they say young man the ong-tailed-cat where was bit the, (ob.) (sub.). dkiq¢ate ca” b¢tiga fbaqti-hna”-biama. Ca’ ib¢a’-baji éga™ pi ‘ibae- 18 - onthe body infact all over was constantly swelling up Yet unsatisfied like again was con- miter the fore- very much, they say. stantly egs ki¢é-hna”-biamd ecnujin’ ga aka. causing him to hunt, they young man the say (sub.). VOL. VI——20 9 12 15 18 306 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE THS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. Egi¢e ci wat’é¢é ugine agai. Ci &’di ahi-biama. Egi¢e ma*tet t’é¢é té At length again slayer seeking went. Again there he arrived,they Atlength grizzly bear killed the them, his own say. é’di ahi-biamé. Ki nan’de-gfpibaji-biamé. Egi¢e wasdbe r’tca™ té¢ai té there he arrived, they And heart was bad for him they say. Atlength black bear now killed the say. ¢isnt gi ama. Edi ahi-biama. Ing¢a*’-si®-snéde i¢Adi ¢i* Agine i¢a®-biama. dragging was coming, There he arrived, they Long-tailed-cat his father the eaieeed suddenly, they say. it they say. say. (ob.) his Hau! (fisan’ga wanfya-ma waji”-pibaji u¢éhnaji eté yi, 4-biama. A”, Ho! Your younger the animals cross you not to ought, said he, they Yes, brother. tell to him say. dadiha, éga", 4-biama nijinga aka. I¢a"ba™ ¢isan’ga wi'éctéwa™ uf¢aji-ga, O father, sO, said, they say boy the A second your younger even one tell him not, (sub.) time brother d-biamé. Ga™ ci i¢ddi ak& wan 'gi¢e téwa¢ée ¢ankdé wa‘i’-biamé. Ga™ said he, they So again his father the killed them theones carried them, they So say. (sub.) Say. wa‘i” aki-biama. Tha” aké xagéqti Agin i¢a”-biamd, wamf ké ea bai 4 carrying hereached home, Hismother the cried Ditterly anponed suddenly, they say, blood the oe her own them they say. (sub.) hers té. Cénujin’ga fe té i¢Adi gidxai té ci égi¢a”-biamé wait aka. (fisan’ga when. Young man word the his father made for the again said to him, they woman the Your younger him say (sub.) brother | f¢a"ba™ wiréctéwa” cta”be yi ui¢aji-a’, 4-biama. A ¢i” ‘Ag¢aa™ ¢aga¢i”, a second even one you see it if donot tell said she,they Youhave come near making me time him, Say. suffer, f-biamd. Ga’ edita™ giniki¢é g¢i’-biamd. ‘Abaa-bdji, wacé ctea™ akdga”™. said she, they So after that causing him they sat, they say. He did not hunt, rich in even he raat say. to recover food because. Egi¢e ha” ega"teé’qtci ama yi ¢ing4-bitéama Ing¢a”’-si"-snéde am Dadtha, At length very e sae inthe morn- they when he was missing, they Long-tailed-cat the O father, ing say say (sub.). kagé ama ¢ingal, 4- biama cénuyin’ga aka. (hisan’ga ‘abae ¢e té, A-biama. y ae r the * is missing, said, they say young man the Your younger hunting went, said he, they brother (sub.) say (sub.). younger say. G¢i ta ¢i’, d-biama. Mi” ¢a™ ma”’ci tiga” yi ag¢i-biama. Ga™ i¢ddi Coming he willbe, said he, they Sun the high it became when he came home, they So his father back — say. again, suddenly say. inké giddspa™-biamd. Gan‘ki Aci a¢a-biama. Ga™ i¢ddi amd u¢tigiha- } the (ob.) ane pushed his to attract And out he went, they So his father the followed his notice, they say. say. (sub.) biama. Ni-iwagi-ayi¢ica” &’di a¢d-biama. E/di ahi-biam4 yi ¢gi¢e jébe-ma they say. Place for ae towards there they went, they There they arrived, when behold the beavers ting water say. they say wi” gan’ke ama, jin’gaji. Ci hideaqd¢ica™ é’di ahi-biamaé. Ci éga™ jabe-ma one Soe for some time, notsmall. Again down-stream there they arrived, Again so the beavers they say they say. wi" gan‘ke ama, jin’gaji. Ga céna*ba t’éwa¢a-biama. Wai” aki-biama. one tay for some time, not small. So only those ue killed them, they Carrying he reached home, they say, wo say. them they say. Ga” égasini na™ba ja’ -qtidga™ té’di jug¢e a¢a-biama nijinga aka. Ci 4Aqti So the next day two sleeps, about when withhim went, they say boy the Again deer (snb.). * : ty na™ ba t’éwa¢a-biama. Wasdbe na™ba t’éwad¢a-biama. Ga” &'di Ahigi téwa¢a two he killed them, they say. Black bear two he killed them, they say. So there ene Be ue al them biamad. Gédéba t’éwadd-biama: yAqti, wasabe cti, jAabe cti. Mi" -¢a® hide- ? } they say. Ten he killed them, they say: deer, black bear tov, beaver too. Sun the low THE ADVENTURES OF THE PUMA. 307 qtei hi yi aki-biama. Dadiha, kagé dhigiqti téwa¢ée ha, A-biamd ntijinga very arrived when _ they reached O father, sane very many killed them - said, they say boy home, they say. brother aki. Egasini té tthe ad¢af té, wan ‘gi¢e. I¢ddi jigig¢e a¢d-biama, iha™ the The. next day when to bring went, all. His father with his he went, they say, his (sub.). in the meat mother , —~ ' edabe. Ing¢a™-si"-snéde aké& a¢a-bajf- Biama: Wenaxi¢é-biamd nfac@ga Aji also. Long-tailed-cat the did not go, they Attacked them, they say Seanioae differ- (sub.) ent ama. Cénujin’ga pahan Vga gaq¢i-biama. “Watijinga éduata™ gaq¢i-biama. the Young amr 2 they killed him, they Old woman next SiGe killed her, they (sub.). say. say. I¢idi ama na" ji'cké’qtei akf-biamd. (iha™ ¢iji”¢e eddbe wAq¢i, 4-biaind. is the barely reached home, Your your elder also they killed said he, they .father — (sub.) they say. mother brother them, say. Ki'di anga¢e té, 4-biama. E’di ahi-biamd. Ing¢a"’-si"-snéde i¢ddi &/di hi There let us go, said he, they There they arrived, they Long-tailed-cat his father there ar- say. Say. rived witiwatan’ ga t ‘E¢a-biama niaci"ga ama Ing¢a™-si"-snéde aka wénaxi¢a-biama as soon as killed him, they pacnlen, the Long-tailed-cat the attacked them, they say say (sub.). (sub.) niaci"ga ¢anka. Can’ge ké edabe wi” t’é¢a-biama Ing¢a”-si"-snéde aka. Ci people the (ob.). Hoses, the also one killed them, they Long-tailed-cat the Again (ob.) say - (sub.). wénaxi¢a-biama. U¢tikihehébe wa¢i?-biama Ing¢a Bea’ v-si"-snéde aké. Niaci"ga he attacked them, they say. One after another had them, they say ong-tailed-cat ue Man (sub.). wi" can’ge u¢dsi" éga"-hna"-siqti té¢a-biama. G¢écbahiwi’ to’ téwa¢a- one ~° horse sticking to so throughout he killed, they say. A hundred the he killed them, biamad. Wa¢igapi u¢iqpa¢é téwa¢ée-hna”-biama. Mi" i¢é ckita™’ qti wi'qtei they say. Piercing them he pulled off he killed regularly they say. Sun had just then only one with claws them gone ugdcta-biama. ; was left they say. NOTES. 304, 6-7. kagé, ¢é imdadi ‘acpae eté té. Another elliptical phrase, which is, in full, kagé, ¢étéedi mdadi ‘acpae eté, 6 té (younger brother, in this place, my father, you hunt, may, Said it), or some like phrase. Frank La Fléche gives: ¢ée hi i"dadi ‘acpae etéé té. 304, 12. iyig¢ag¢idai. This was caused by the bite of the bear, as well as by the struggles of the Puma himself. 304, 19-305, 1. ca®’ 6ga” gdxa-ga, a strong command. 305, 3. i¢adi t‘an’ té. The Puma was considered the real child of the man and woman; and the young man was merely called so. He was adopted after the Puma. “Kage,” in the text just above this phrase, may be translated “my child”, being used instead of ‘nisiha.” 306, 9. agi" ‘Aag¢aa¢ad¢ag¢in, contracted from a”/¢i" “ag¢aa Gags agin. TRANSLATION. A manwas keeping a Puma. And he had no children at all. And so he regarded this Puma as his child. At length a young man was going. When he arrived very near the lodge, behold, some deer were walking. Concealing himself from them, he reached the iedes, as he had no gun. And the father of the Puma, too, had none. 12 308 THE PEGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. The young man said as follows: “O father, some deer are there, very easy to kill. Lend mea gun.” “Oho! [have no gun whatsoever,” said he. He caused the Puma to be the younger brother of the young man. ‘Go with your younger brother. Beware lest you scold your younger brother. Be accustomed to go very gently with your younger brother,” said the father. Atlength the Puma went with theyoungman. ‘These are they, O younger brother,” said the young man. He pointed at the deer for him. And so, after he pointed at the deer for him, the Puma went to attack them. And the Puma killed a deer just at the place where the young man had found the deer. And he carried ithome. “Because your younger brother always does thus, I prize him,” said the father. “And if you desire any kind of animal, tell your younger brother.” The Puma contin- ued to kill all kinds of animals. “O father, I will go hunting with younger brother,” said the young man. ‘There they are in that place out of sight, where the very dense forest stands, extending up-hill. Sit there on the hill, and wait for your younger brother.” And the young man sat on the hill, waiting for the Puma. ‘O younger brother, this is the place where my father said that you might hunt,” said he. And the young man sat on the hill. And the Puma went headlong into the dense forest. He took hold of adeer. He made it cry out bitterly because he held it with his claws. And he arrived there at the hill. He went dragging it. He hung it up. ‘I desire a black bear, O younger brother, in order to eat fat meat,” said the young man. At length the Puma caught hold of one. He arrived there. Behold, he was some time in kill- ing it. Since the Puma got foam on himself in struggling with the black bear, he rubbed himself as he walked. “Ho! O younger brother, I desire a beaver,” said the young man. The water was obstructed. And after a while the Puma went head- long into the water. At length he came back in sight, bringing a large beaver. “O younger brother, I desire an otter,” said the young man. And the Puma killed an otter. And as their father was sad at heart, he was coming seeking them. And he arrived first at the place where the deer had been killed. Next he arrived at the place where the black bear had been killed. And he arrived at the place where the beaver had been killed. And he arrived at the place where the otter had been killed. “Fie! my child, you kill your younger brother with fatigue. Do stop it at once,” said he. And they went homeward, carrying just that many animals. The father carried all on his back. And having reached home, both of his sons sat eating. The Puma was the principal one, as he had a father; therefore he sat with his father, near him, but not touching him. And his mother also in like manner took care of her own child. And after that the young man went hunting regularly with his adopted brother. “When your younger brother has killed just one animal, carry it on your back, and be coming home with him,” said the father. The father feared for his son, lest he should make himself crazy by running, if he killed many animals. And so it continued. When he killed just one animal, he was coming home with him. And he arrived there with him as he hunted. ‘You will go thither with your younger brother to the place where the trees stand very thick by the creek which comes forth from the remote object,” said he. And he arrived there. ‘“O younger brother, this is the place where my father said that you might hunt,” said he. So he went thither. When he had been there a very long time he was killing the male elk that was lying there. “O younger brother, kill a grizzly bear,” said the young man. At length the Puma took hold of one suddenly. He went thither. He was crying very much like a grizzly bear. The THE ADVENTURES OF THE PUMA. 309 grizzly bear said nothing but “Ha! h‘a! h‘al” At length he was lying killed. The Puma had been pierced very deep with his claws on both sides of the body, under the forelegs. And the young man made the Puma rush on a buffalo bull. He killed the buffalo bull. And again the young man said as follows: “O younger brother, hunt the trail of a black bear in this place.” The Puma was continually swelling up wher- ever he had been bitten on the body under the forelegs, in fact, all over his bod y. Yet the young man was repeatedly making him hunt, as if he was not satisfied. At length the father went again to seek the slayers, his sons. He arrived there. At length he arrived at the place where the grizzly bear had been killed. And his heart was sad. At length he arrived there whither the Puma was coming, dragging the black bear which he had just killed. The Puma embraced his father suddenly. “Ho! You ought not to tell your younger brother about the Savage animals,” said the father. ‘Yes, O father,” said the youth. “Do not tell your brother about even one of them any more,” said the father. And again did the father carry all those animals that were killed. And he carried them home on his back. The mother, crying bit- terly, embraced the Puma suddenly, when she saw his blood. The woman said to the young man the words which the father had said tohim. “If you see even one of them, do not tell your younger brother about it any more. You came very near causing me to suffer,” she said. And after that they sat, causing him to recover. They did not hunt, as they were rich in food. At length the Puma was missing, when it was very early in the morning. “O father, younger brother is missing,” said the young man. “Your younger brother has gone hunting. He will be coming back,” said the father. When the sun was high the Puma came home. And he pushed against his father to attract his attention. Then he went out, and his father followed him. They went towards the place where they got water for the lodge. When they reached there, behold, a large beaver had been lying there for some time. And they reached a place that was down-stream. And a large beaver had been lying there, too, for some time. _ And the Puma had killed just those two. The father carried them home on his back. And about the third day afterward the youth went with him. And the Puma killed two deer. He killed two black bears. And there he killed many. He killed ten: deer, black bears, and beavers. When the sun was very low, they reached home. “O father, younger brother has killed very many animals,” said the youth. The next day all went to bring the meat into camp. The young man went with his father and mother, The Puma did not go. Another people attacked them. They killed the young man first. Next they killed the old woman. The father barely reached home. “They have killed your mother and your elder brother. Let us go thither,” said he. They arrived there. As soon as they arrived the men killed the Puma’s father. The Puma attacked the men. The Puma killed one and his horse. He attacked them again. The Puma encountered them one after another. He killed a man with the horse that he was on; and so on throughout the ranks of the foe. He killed a hun- dred. Piercing them with his claws, he pulled them off their horses and killed them. Just as the sun set, only one man was left. 310 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORTES, AND LETTERS. THE RACCOONS AND THE CRABS. FRANK LA FLiCHE’s VERSION. Egi¢e Miyé amd ¢é amama. Kgi¢e g od-biama: At Te ngth Raccoon the was going, they At length i said as follows, (sub.) say. they say: pa Kaé-ge Mi-ya ha! ha-zi a’-¢at an-ga-¢e te ha, ka-ge Mi-ya ha! - Sammie Coon O! grapes we eat iiee us go * snitece Coon O! brother brother se i * I / ae s 3 Wii'¢cha, cé b¢ate-hnan’di hi a™sa"san’de-ma”, ga” ada™ ub¢i‘age. 10) my clder that Teat it Ine REANLY, tooth shake me rapidly, so therefore I am unwilling. brother, when ee SS Sree Sr Sasso Ka-ge Mi-ya had! yan’-de a”-¢at an-gd-¢e te hd, kaé-ge Mi-ya ha! Younger Coon oO! plums weeat - let us go : younger Coon oO! brother brother yee Ae | / ~ / zi Wri'¢cha, cé b¢ate-hnan'di a™¢a"wankéga-hna*ma™, ga” ada” ub¢f'age. O my elder that JLeatit inv: a iably it always makes me sick, so therefore Iam unwill- brother, when ing. SSS 6 Ka-ge Mi-ya ha! na’-pa a’’-¢at at-ga-¢e te ha, kaé-ge Mi-ya ha! Younger Coon oO! choke-cher- we eat let us go 4 younger Coon "oO! brother ries brother ° 4: . / Wiir¢cha, cé b¢ate-hnan‘di snia”t’e-ma”, ga” ada” ub¢i‘age. O my elder that Leatit invariably Tam chilly, so therefore I am unwilling. brother, when . tess -o- Ka-ge Mi-ya ha! Ma’-cka" a™ ¢at an-gad-¢e te hi, ka-ge Mi-ya He Younger Coon oO! Peay we eat het us go younger Coon brother brother 9 HA! ji'’¢e, ba! ji’ ¢e, jit¢cha! cé 7’uda"-hna"-ma™. Hgi¢e ¢é ama. Hgi¢e oO! elder O! elder elder brother that always good for me. At length they went, At length brother, brother, O! they say. Ma cka® ni-iwagi ahi-biamd. Eegi¢e t'é gaxd-biamd. Egi¢e na™jim ¢acka™ Crab where they they arrived, At length dead they made, they Beware _ barely you stir got water they say. say. ¢i”he at. Ata”, Aha! ehé yi ¢acka™ te hd. Egi¢e cibe ¢if‘i¢ai etécte- ever ! When, Oho! Tsay when youstir will . Beware entrails they tickle — notwith- (you) 6 THE RACCOONS AND THE CRABS. oly wa", daq¢tige ug¢ibahi”i ctéctewa’”, ictd ¢i¢ijin‘dai ctéctewa”, dgi¢e ¢acka” standing, nostrils they push up notwithstanding, eye they reachinto notwithstanding, beware you stir into your your ¢ivhe ati. Ata™, Ahau! ehé yi'ji ¢acka™ te had, 4-biamd (Miyé na" aka). ever ! When, Oho! I say if; you stir will . said, they say (Raccoon grown the). Kgi¢e Ma®cka® mi“jinga d‘iba ni agiahi-biamé. Ki ga” ¢anka wé¢a-biama. At length Crab girl tome water arrived for, they say. And after they they found thom, (stood) awhile they say, Ladi” u¢a ag¢a-biama. Wa¢dquqixe na”ba t’é aké Ada! U+! A-biama. Running totellit they went home- Raccoon two dead the two indeed! Halloo! said (some), ward, they say. (lie) they say. Kgi¢e Ma cka®* nikagahi ¢inkeé’di u¢4 ahi-biamé. Egi¢e Ma™cka® nikagahi At length Crab chief to him to tell they arrived, Atlength Crab chief it they say. aké é¢a™be ati-biamé. Egi¢e wénaxi¢a ¢é¢a-biamé. Ki Pe‘Age wi™ the in sight came, they say. Atlength to attack them he sent suddenly, And old man one (sub.) they say. feki¢é téga™ jawag¢d-biamd. (Egi¢e Miyé akadi é’di ahi-biamaé. Ki wi’ toactas inorder withthem they say. (Atlength Raccoon by them there they arrived, And one erier to they say. gi-biama:) Hinda! cfbe b¢fi¢a té-ana, 4-biama. Cibe ¢i‘i¢a-bi (ji) said as follows, Let me see! entrail Iticklehim will ! said he, they Entrail he tickled (when) they say :) say. they say eé¢ectéwan ji ja”-biamd. Qad¢uhaqtei fqa amd yi ¢icta”-biamdé. Ci Ama stirring notatall he lay, they say. Almost he they when he stopped, they say. Again the laughed say other ké’di a¢a-b ega™ daq¢uge ¢ijin’da-biama. Cé¢ectéwarji ja”-biamaé. Ci dma f=) « . by the went, having nostrils he reached into, they say. Stirring notat all he lay, they Say. Again the they say other ké‘di ag¢a-biama. Icté-yatha ¢izibéqtei u¢a™-biamaé. Cé¢ectéwa™ ji jat’- by the _he went, they say. Eye-border taking by the he held, they say. ‘Stirring not at all lay very edge biamdé Miyd aké. Hé! wa¢dwatciedxe té af ac¢u+! & feki¢e ¢é¢a-biamd yf g they say Raccoon the Ho! you are to dance he says indeed, say- proclaim- sent suddenly, (sub.). halloo! ing ing they say Ma” cka® i'c‘age aka. Kgi¢e watcigaxd-biamé. Watcigaxe ti¢ica™-biamé. Crab old man the Atlength they danced they say. Dancing they went around (sub.). them, they say. Wag¢aquqixe na™ba t’é aké, Ama si¢éde snedé, Ama in’dje q¢éxe. U-+! Raccoon two ~ dead the two The one heel long, The face spotted. Halloo! (lie). other (a-biama i"c‘dge aka). Kgi¢e ta“ wang¢a" b¢iiga watcigaxe u¢ica’-biama, (said, they say oldman the). At length village all dancing went eee them, they say, Ma” cka™ ta” watig¢a™. Egi¢e, Ahati! d-biamé. Akig¢a naji’ Atidda-biama. Crab village. At length, Oho! said he, they Both stood suddenly they say. say. ° ° ° ys om aN Wénaxi¢ a¢a-biama. Ma cka" yf agikibana”-biamd. Wa¢ate ma*¢i’-biama. Attacking they went, they Crabs lodge ran with all their might for Eatingthem they walked, they say. em say. their, they say. Téwa¢é ma¢i"-biamé LEgi¢e na*baqtci akidg¢a-biamdi. Ké! Mang ¢ii-ed. Killing them they walked, they say. At length only two had gone back, they say. Come! Begone. Ma" cka"™ e¢ige tai (A-biama Miya aké). Ceta™. Crab they say will (said, they say Raccoon the). ‘So far. of you (they) 9 12 18 312 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. NOTES. 310, 9. ha jin¢e. ha jin¢e, jim¢éha. Used in expressing thanks, approval, or a peti- tion. So, ha giga", ha giga”, giga™ha, 102, 9. 310, 11. au, pronounced auc. 311, 4. wa¢aququxe na"ba te aké a¢a ut. ga¢i"-na"paji uses “ wa¢axuxe” instead of “wa¢aququxe.” As “A¢a” is a masculine term, it shows that a man cried out, not the girls. 311, 11. icta-ya"ha ¢izibéqtei u¢a®-biama, pronounced ¢izi+béqtei, ete. 311, 12. ai a¢u+, in full, ai a¢a ut. 311, 14. The dancing-song sung by the old man Crab was as follows: SESS so=a Se == Sa SoS Sears Ss: Wa-té-qu-qu/-xe na”-ba t?é6 a-ké A-ma si-¢é-de gne-dé, A-ma in/-djé q¢é- ? ) Je q xe, u+. $11, 19. ma®cka", from ma®, ground; and cka™, to move, stir; 4. e., “they who ? ro J) b] 5) J ? scainpered over the ground.” Perhaps the craw-fish, rather than the crab, is referred to in this myth. TRANSLATION. At length the Raccoon was going. At length he said as follows: v6 -@ er Coon.” “Omy elder brother, whenever I eat them, my teeth chatter rapidly, and therefore I am unwilling.” “Younger brother Coon! Let us go to eat plums, Younger brother Coon.” ‘O my elder brother, whenever I eat them, they make me sick, and therefore I am unwilling.” ‘Younger brother Coon! Let us go to eat choke-cherries, Younger brother Coon.” ‘O my elder brother, whenever I eat them, I am chilly, and therefore I am unwilling.” “Younger brother Coon! Let us go to eat Crabs, Younger brother Coon.” ‘QO! elder brother, O! elder brother, elder brother, O! They always agree with me.” At length they departed. At length they reached the place where the Crabs got water for the village. Atlength they pretended to be dead. “ Beware. _Don’t you dare to stir at all. When Isay,‘Oho!’ you willstir. Beware. Even if you are tickled in the sides, even if they push their claws up your nostrils, even if they reach into your eyes, do not stir at all. When I say, ‘Oho!’ you will stir,” said the elder Raccoon. At length some Crab girls arrived there for water. When they had been there some time, they found the Raccoons. They ran homeward totellit. “Two Wa¢a- ququxe are lying dead. Halloo!” said some of the men. At length they arrived at the lodge of the Crab chief, whither they had gone to tell it. And the Crab chief came THE RACCOONS AND THE CRABS. 313 in sight of the Raccoons. And he sent some away to attack them. And an old man went with them to act as a crier and to sing for the dancers. And they reached the Raccoons. And one said as follows to himself: ‘‘Let me see! I will tickle him in the side!” When he tickled him in the side, the Raccoon Jay without stirring at all. When the Raccoon almost laughed, the Crab stopped. And the Crab went to the other Raccoon, and thrust his claws up his nostrils. He lay without stirring in the least. Going again to the former Raccoon, he took hold of his eyelids by the very edge. The Raccoon lay without stirring in the least. The aged Crab man proclaimed aloud, say- ing, “Ho! he says that you are todance. Halloo!” At length they danced. They danced around the Raccoons. The old man said: Two wa-¢a-qu-qu-xe are ly-ing dead. The one has a long heel. The oth-er has a spot-ted face. Halloo! At length the whole Crab vil- lage went dancing around them. At length the elder Raccoon said, “Oho!” Both Raccoons stood suddenly. They went to attack them. The Crabs ran with all their might to their lodges. The Raccoons walked along, eating and killing them. At length just two Crabs had gone home. “Come! Begone. You shall be called ‘Ma>- cka",’” said the Raccoons. The End. THE RACCOONS AND THE CRABS. Ah¢-Na™PAIS VERSION. Kgi¢e Miyd ama a-i-biamé. Kage Miye+! kage Miye+! kage Miye+! Atlength Raccoon the wascoming,they Younger CoonO! younger Coon O! younger Coon O! 3 say. brother brother brother , ( , — v. s J taal) , - / hazi a’¢at angd¢e hi+, kage Miye+! 4-biama. Wii"¢cha! cé b¢ate-hna” grapes weeat we go f younger Coon QO! said he, they O my elder that leat regularly brother say. brother! ¢an‘di nixa a"¢anie-hna®-ma™. Ni té b¢Ata™ té’di a®¢a”daxeté cta™, acka when stomach painsmein regu- Ihave Water the I drink when it purges me habit- close larly (or, Ido). ually, gima"™ ajé cta™ hi, d4-biamé. Kage Miye+! kage Mike+! kage Miye+! Idothat Istool habit- 6 said he, they Younger Coon O! younger Coon O! younger Coon O! ually say. brother brother rother etibe ar¢at angd¢e hé+, kage Miye+! 4-biama. Wjin¢cha! cé¢a™ b¢ate- hack- we eat we go ! younger Coon O! said he, they O my elder that eat berries brother say. brother! hnan‘di in’g¢ a wasd cta™. Waji’qidda¢é, 4-biamé. Kage Miye+! kAge regularly, Lam constipated habit- I get out of patience _ said he, they Younger CoonO! younger when ually. with it, say. brother brother Miye+! kage Miye+! wajide a™¢4t anga¢e ha+, kage Miye+! 4-biama. Coon O! ounger Coon O! buffalo we eat Wwe go. ! ounger Coon O! said he, they rother berries rother say. 15 314 THE (@EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. Wijit¢éha! cé¢a® b¢dte-hnan‘di ija’’xe a” ¢a‘ii¢a éga® ayzig¢it cta®. Waji”’- O my elder that I eat regularly, anus it itches me a I serateh habit- T get out of brother! When myself ually. Ae U7 ° I qidda¢é, A-biami. Kage Miye+! kage Miye+! ! kage Miye+! Ma™cka™ a?- patience with said he, they Youn coe Coon O! one Coon O! iy paste Coon O! Crab we it, say. brother brother brother wa" ¢at angd¢e te hau, kage Miye+! 4-biamd. HA! jim¢e, ha! jim¢e, ji*¢cha, eat them we go will ! younger CoonQ! _ said he, they Oo! elder oO! elder elder brother say. brother, brother, brother O! cé-hna™ wad¢dte awaési¢é cta®, d-biamé. Gan‘ki a¢a-biama ega™, wé¢ig¢a™ that only eating 1 think of habit- said he, they And they went, they having, plan (them) them nally, say. say gixe ma®¢i”-biamd. Ta” wang¢a” hégactéwaji yadé a¢a-biama. _Jin¢cha, making they walked, they say. Village aoe populous mea they A) they Elder brother, ; by say. tkie angaxe yi dkicuga yi wia™naxi¢ai yi a"wa™ ¢ate taf, 4-biama. An’‘kaji, to talk we aire if sti anding when werush on them if weeatthem will, said he, they No, with them thick say. A-biam4 iji”¢e aké. Gad-biamd: Ni-agihi té’di wi" ¢a™¢a™ t’éa®wa™ dé said, they say his elder the He said as follows, Arrive there at the one by one we kill them brother (sub.). they say: for water awa” ¢ate ang¢i™ tai, 4-biama. Ci isan’ga aka, An‘kaji, Meters wi daxe ha, we eat them we ait will, said he, they Again hisyounger the No, I Imake say. brother (sub.), it d-biama. Can’ge uné ujan’ge gax4 agii kéya dahdé a¢i" bax ¢ta™ té said he, they Horse seeking road it forks is moe at the hil ridge peak just the say. ing again that far angdxe te, 4-biama. A™ha", ca”, d-biama. Cé taté, 4-biama. E’ya a¢a- let us make it, said he, they Yes, enough, said he, they That shall be, saidhe,they Thither they say. say. say. went . Spyies biamd. Ega™ ujan’ge ké aki¢a ma™a¢aqti ga” ja’-biama. T’é gaxéd- they say. So ro: “Ae the both flat on the back so they lay, they Dead they say. made biama. Wackan’-g4, 4-biamé. Ca™ ‘a™ a¢ig¢i” ctéctéwa™, icta ¢a™ u¢ibahi® they say. Do your best, said (one), they Still how he hasyou notwith- eye the he pushes in say. standing, your ctéctéwa”, cibe ¢i¢ati¢ai etéctéwa™, daq¢uge té u¢ibahi® ctéctéewa™, da ¢a” even if, entrails he tickles you even if, nostrils the he pushes in even if, head the your sida té ¢ina”ha ¢c¢é etéetéwa"’ , cé¢aji-ga, d-biama. Kgi¢e can’ge uné wi” toe the hekicksyou send- even if, do not stir, said he, they At length horse seeking one aside ing off say. agi amima. Ujan’ge ké uha agi-biama. Wé¢a-bi yi, Ci! ci! ef! ¢éake was returning, nade the follow- ines was returning, Hefoundthem, when, Ci! ci! ci! thesetwo they say. ing they say. they say lying na™ba, 4-biama. Wébeta™-biamé. Ci @'di a-i-biamé. Sida ga™ natha two, said he, they He went around them. Again there was approaching, Toe thus he kieked say. _they say. they say. one ‘é¢a-biama yi eé¢ectéwan ji ja’-biamd. U¢a ag¢a-biami. Wag¢axuxe ecd- aside suddenly, when moving not at all he lay, they say. To tell he went homeward, Raccoon you say they say it they say. , 1 . 1 ee 18 hna® na™ba t’é aké Ada Hu+! d-biamé. Ta" wang¢a™ ga” g¢i’-biama. regu- twe dead the indeed. Halloo! said he, they Village 80 ~ sab they say. larly = two (lie) say. S . ay) S , . Am . Hinda! 4-biama& ba™ na‘a’-bi aké. Egi¢e ie‘age wi" cikan’geaja g¢i” Hark! said he, they calling heardit,they pewho. Atlength old man one far Se he who say say was sit- i) a ‘ i THE RACCOONS AND THE CRABS. olor akama ba™ té na‘a”-bi evga” udkiha” u¢d ag¢di-biamé. Wag¢dxuxe na" ba ting, they calling the heard it, they having beyond to tell went homeward, Raecoon two say say it they say. té aké, af a¢a+ u! a4-biama. ji ama za‘é’qtia’-biamd. Wand‘a-biama. dead the he indeed, hal- saidhe,they Lodge the in great confusion, they They heard them, they two (lie), says loo! say. say. say. Wawaf¢atcigaxe te, af a¢é+ u! 4-biamaé. Ca™ cin’gajin’ga ma’¢i" wakan’dagt You are to dance, he indeed, hal- said he, they And child towalk forward (= quick) says loo! say. ctéwa™ b¢tigaqti ahi-biama. Ahi-bi ega” akicugaqti égaxe naji"’-biama. even all, arrived, they say. Arrived, having standing very around stood they say. they say close together Ieigeqti-bi édega” a¢ihagé’qtci ahi-biama. Imang¢et‘a® d-inaji’’-biama. A very aged man, DHE. at the very last arrived, they say. Using a staff he came and stood, they they say Say. Ma’cidgaha naji”i-ga ha, 4-biama. (jéama Ictinike ¢ipii A¢a! d-biamia. Off at a distance stand ye - said he, they These Ietinike skillfal indeed! said he, they say. (=cunning) say. Hahayi¢ai-gi, 4-biamda. Hinda! wa¢it‘a™i-ga, 4-biama. Cibe wa¢ii¢di-ga Get yourselves ready, said he, they Let us see! feel them, said he, they Entrail tickle ye them, say. say. A-biamé. Cibe wa¢ii¢ai-de cé¢ectéwa-baji-biama. T’é ¢anka, A-biama. said he, they Entrail tickled them when they moved not at all they say. Dead they who, said he, they say. say. Tai ha. Ké, wawatcigaxdi-ga, a-biama. Ic‘age aka wéquya g¢i"-biama. They Come, dance ye, said he, they Old ae the singing for sat they say. are dead — say. them Ss : Ibehi? uti’-biamé. Qéxe biya gasd¢u uti”-biamé. Wa¢dxuxe na™ba t’é Pillow hit they say. Gourd round to rattle he hit they say. Raccoon two dead aké. In’de q¢éq¢e, in’de q¢éq¢e; Su de snéde q¢éq¢e; Hi” ja" xe yan‘ga, the. Face spotted, face spotted ; long spotted; Hair ies e mea A-biama. Jir¢éha, ecja¢ica™ Onn a-biama. Naji™ atia¢a-bi ega™ said he, they Elder brother, on that side attack them, said (one), they Stood suddenly, they having say. say. say e ? = la , RIZE AS Ie a OF ’ . Ci edita"qti t'éwa¢é wa¢ate ma¢i’-biama. pf ké ugidaaza-biamd. Djibagteci forthwith killingthem eatingthem they walked, they Lodge the they scared them into their : Very few say. own, they say. ° 1 71: , C aki-biama. Ceta” na*cta™-biama, wénanda-bi ega™”. Haha! ga™bada®™ reached home, So far they stopped running, felt full after eating, having. Ha! ha! just as we they say. they say, they say wished (2) wénandeawaki¢é, 4-biama. we have been caused to feel said UheY, they full after eating, say. NOTES. 313, 1: Miye+ must be intended for a vocative. This myth contains the only in- stance of as use in the texts. 313, 2. hazi, pronounced ha+zi; so gube, 318, 5, is pronounced gu+be; wajide, 313, 7, ee and Matcka*, 314, 2, Ma®+cka®. 313, 3. a™¢a™daxete, from idaxete. 313, 6. ing¢ a®wa"sa, 7. e., iIng¢e a"wa"sa, from ing¢(e)-usa. 315, 2. za‘éqtia®, Srononnced za+‘éqtia®. 315, 4. b¢ugaqti, pronounced b¢éu+gaqti. 315, 6. ¢eama Ictinike ¢ipii a¢a. Here the Raceoons are called “Tetinike” as well as “ Wad¢axuxe.” And besides, the Omaha and Ponka delegates at Washington, in 316 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. August, 1881, spoke of the (two) Ictinike who planned to catch the crabs. Frank La Fléche says that the Raccoons were as cunning as Ictinike, knowing all his tricks, but he and they should not be confounded. 315, 11. inde-q¢exe, or inde g¢eq¢e, “spotted face,” is a Gegiha name sometimes applied to the raccoon. Frank La Fléche says that ‘hi" ja"xe yaniga” cannot be said of a raccoon. 315, 14-15. Haha! ete. Such phrases were commonly used by Ictinike in express- ing his delight at having overreached others. TRANSLATION. At length the Raccoon was approaching. He sang as follows to his younger brother in the distance :—‘‘O younger brother Coon! O younger brother Coon! O younger brother Coon! We go to eat grapes, O younger brother Coon!” “QO my elder brother! whenever I eat those, my stomach aches me, and when I drink water I have the cholera morbus so bad that I have an action whenever I take a step,” said the younger. “O younger brother Coon! O younger brother Coon! O younger brother Coon! We go to eat hackberries, O younger brother Coon!” said the elder. ‘O my elder brother! whenever I eat them, I am constipated for along time. I get out of patience,” said the younger. “QO younger brother Coon! O younger brother Coon! O younger brother Coon! We go to eat buffalo-berries, O younger brother Coon!” said the elder. ‘““O my elder brother! whenever I eat them, anulus meus prurit me, et scabo. I get out of patience,” said the younger. ‘O younger brother Coon! O younger brother Coon! O younger brother Coon! We will go to eat Crabs, O younger brother Coon!” said the elder. “Thanks, elder brother! Thanks, elder brother! elder brother, thanks! I always think of eating those alone,” said the younger. And they departed, planning as they went. They went towards a very large village of Crabs which was close by. ‘O elder brother! let us pretend to go and pay a friendly visit. And when they stand very thick around, let us attack them and eat them,” said the younger. “No, let us kill them one by one as they go for water; and then we can eat them,” said the elder brother. And the younger brother said, “No, I have a plan. Let us pretend to be dead on top of a ridge of hills, where the path which they take when they go after horses turns aside as it comes back this way.” ‘Yes, that will do. That shall be it,” said the elder. They went thither. And both lay flat on their backs in the path. They pretended to be dead. ‘Do your best,” said the elder. “No matter how they treat you,—even if they thrust their claws into your eyes, even if they tickle you on the side, even if they thrust their claws up your nostrils, even if they kick your head aside very suddenly with their toes,—do not stir.” At length one who had been seeking horses was coming back. He was coming back along the path. When he discovered them, he said, ‘Ci, ci, ci! those who are lying are two.” He went around them. Then he approached them. He kicked one aside suddenly, but the Raccoon lay without stirring at all. And the Crab went homeward to tell it. ‘Two of those whom you call Wa¢axuxe lie dead. Halloo!” said he. Those in the village sat as they were. ‘ Hark!” said he who heard the call. At length an old man, who had been sitting at a very remote place, heard the call, and went further homeward to tell it. “He says that two of the Wa¢axuxe lie dead. Halloo!” said he. The lodges were in great confusion.(i. e., they made a great commotion by talking and shouting.) THE WARRIORS WHO WERE CHANGED TO SNAKES. 317 They heard them. ‘You are to dance, he says, indeed! Halloo!” said the crier. And every one arrived there including even the children who were forward in learn- ing to walk. Having arrived there, they stood around, being very close together. < aaa CPL = Z m4fal_hi JAB / n/4,, va! on 4a. (iéga" dja" yi, cin’ gajin’ga xagé gind‘a®-biamé; yan/de ma taja ja” gind‘a Thus he lay when, child crying he heard his, they say; ground within lying he heard his on it biamé. E¢é e34 bétigagti u¢éwinyi¢a-bi, ‘éwaki¢ “¢a-biamdé. yan‘de ké 6 they say. Re his all they assembled, they to cause them he spoke of, Ground the tions say, to dig they say. (ob.) ‘6 ¢a-biamé. E¢é e34 amd can’ge u¢éwirwata-biam, wawéci wa‘f todig e spoke of, Relation his the horse they collected them, they say, pay to give it they say. (sub.) them tai ga". Wat‘a™ cti u¢éwi"wad¢a-biama, can’ge-m4 eddbe. Ki nfaci®g: in order to. Goods too they collecte they say, the horses also. And man na” ba quba-bi, 4-biama. Cin’gajin’ga ké und ‘i¢a-biamd. I"e‘Age wi iddidi 9 two were sacred, they said, they Child the to they spoke of, Oldman one his say. (ob.) seek they say. father ¢inké uf¢a a¢a-biama. Gan’ki wa¢i" atf-biamé. Nfaciga qubé ¢anka idddi the (ob.) totell went they say, And having he came, they Person sacred the ones his him them say. who _ father aki ninf wi wa‘i-biama. Cin’gajin’ga ké ahni” ¢ag¢{ yi, b¢liga wit taf n the tobacco put- he gave to them, Child the youhave youcome if, a Igive will (sub.) ting in they say. (ob.) him back to you (pl.) Ors . . . . a * , minke wawéci ké. Hau. yi‘a’’-biami; 4ma aké sdbéqti gdxa-biama, 12 I who pay the T They painted themselves, the one very black he made it, they (ob.). they say; say, 12 15 18 356 THE PEGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. 4ma ak4 ziqti gdxa-biam4. Nf ckibe ké ma*tdha akf¢a Aid¢a-biama. the other very he made it, they say. Water deep the into bot had gone, they say. yellow (ob.) Ki ¢é nfaci*ga natbé aké 6’/di ahi-biama. Wakan‘da ¢inké ukfa-biamda. 5 And thi man two the there arrived, they say. Deity the (ob.) they talked to, (sub.) they say. Cin’gajin'ga inké t’Aji; ni”ja g¢i” ¢inké amd. I¢ddi aka cin’ gajin’ ga hild eone wasnot alive he was sitting they Hisfather the - who dead; say. (sub.) ginaf, 4-biamé. Afigd¢i? afigdg¢e t4-bi, af ha. Ahni” ¢ag¢é tai ¢a™ja, begs for said they,they Wehavehim we go home- will, : Youhave yougo_ will though, is, say. ward (see Tee) ena him homeward pahaci abni” ¢akifi yi t’é taté. Cataji té’di ahni” ¢ag¢af yi, ni’ya téite. above having you when he - shall. eatenot when youhad youwent if, alive might him reach home die him homeward (be). Wagate bédte ¢a® ¢ ga¢a téga™ éwa" ga™ t’é taté. El i¢ddi ¢inké fe Food eat He that hedesires will,as causing 80 he shall. That his the words (ob.) it die father (ob.) gité uf¢a mang¢i™i-gi. Agi-biama nfaci"ga na"b4 amd. Akf-biama 4f those _ to tell begone ye. They were coming man two the They reached lodge him back, they say (sub.). home, they say té’di. Cin’ gayi’ ga ¢i¢fja ya” be; wa‘u-wakan’da aK i” akd, 4-biam4. Ni@3a at the. your Isaw ae woman-deity ehashim, said (one), they Alive say. ¢inké, 4-biama. Ni”ya ya”be ¢a™ja, wa¢ate ¢ataf ¢a" é hébe ¢até aka; he who, said he, they Alive Isawhim though, food they eat ae that apiece he has eaten; say. (o 14 n/ n/ n/ Ada® pahdci ang4¢i" angag¢i yi, t’é tatd, af. I¢adi aké ca™ gija™be ga” hie there- above wehave wecomeback if, he saan, he His the still tosee his fore him die says. father (sub.) Wakan’da wa‘t aké cif’gajin’ga ¢inké ¢f yi, cinuda™ ska’qtci wawéci Deity woman the child the(ob.) shegivés if, dog very white pay (sub.) back to you ga™¢ai. I¢ddi aka, A‘{ t& minke, 4-biamé, cinuda® ska’ ¢inké. Ci nfaci*ga wishes. His the Igive will I-who, said he, they dog white the(ob.). Again man father (sub.), toher say, na”ba ci Ama sdbéqti yiy4xa-biamaé, ci Ama ziqti yiyaxa-biamaé. Ci ni two again the veryblack he made himself, atey, again the very hemade himself,they Again water one say, other yellow a8 ma” te a¢di-biamé. Ké‘di ahi-biama ci. I¢adi aka cin’gajin’ga ca” anga¢i" beneath they went, they At the they arrived, again. His the child atany we have say. (ob.) they say father (sub.) rate him angag¢e Loe gija”be ‘“¢ai. Ki cin’gajin’ga wéi éga™, agi” agga- -biama. we go home- tosee his he puke And child hegave as Deve ey went home- ward back to them ward, they say. Pahdci a¢i” akfi yi, cin’gajin’ga t’é ama. Tea di ¢inké’di gfi-biamé. Ki Above having they when, child he they at the they gave back to, And him reached died say. father they say. again nikaci"ga b¢tigagti xagd-biama, gija™ biqti cin’ gajin’ ga. Cfnuda™ hi” ski’ people they cried, they they saw theirs Dog hair white say, plainly niahi¢é¢a-biama. Cin’ gajin ‘ga gia’ be gigaf yi, niaci"ga na™ba ¢ankd they plunge into the water, adiee saw they | when, man two he ones ey Bay. their buried their who wawéci b¢tiga wai. Ga'téga™ yi, ci i¢ddi aka iha” e¢a™ba ci mi” jinga pay all he gave Sometime when, again _ his the his (she) too again girl to them, father (sub,) mother = A YANKTON LEGEND. 307 mw éga? gi¢ingd-biaméa. Wakan’dagi ¢inké wa¢dte wa‘t té ¢atd-bajf- one they became without Water-deity the one food he gave the did not eat theirs, they say. who biama, mi™jifiga aka; dda™ ni”ja a¢i” akfi-biama. a™ja wakan'da Aji- they say, girl the there- alive having they reached home, hough deity another (sub.); fore her they say. biama a¢i” aka, ki cinuda®™ ska’ diba ‘fi yi’ji wéi ‘{¢a-biama. they say he who had jek and dog white four they if to give he promised, they gave him her back Bay. NOTES. 355, 5. ¢ega™ aja™ x1, when he lay thus on it, 7. e., with his cheek on the palm of his hand. 355, 9. quba-bi, a-biama, “they said that they were sacred (qube),” and as this was reported, qube is changed to quba-bi. 356, 1. The Indians think that there are water-deities or wakandagi under the water. A wakanda loved the child and had taken it, as his wife had no children, and wished to keep this one. 356, 5. aliga¢i® afgag¢e ta-bi. As the message or command of the father is repeated, “tai” is changed to ‘“ta-bi” in the report. TRANSLATION. A man and his wife had only one child, whom they prized. He used to go playing. He fell into the water. His father and mother, and even all his relations, were crying. His father was very much distressed. He did not sleep within the lodge; he lay out of doors, without any pillow at all. When he lay with his cheek on the palm of his hand, he heard his child crying; he heard him as he lay beneath the ground. All of his relations having assembled, the father spoke of causing them to dig. He spoke of digging into the ground. His relations collected horses to be given as pay. They col- lected goods and horses. And two men said that they were sacred. They promised to seek for the child. An old man went to tell the father. He brought the two men to the lodge. The father filled a pipe with tobacco, and gave it to the sacred men. “Tf you bring my child back, I will give you all as pay.” They painted themselves; the one made his body very black, the other made his body very yellow. Both went into the deep water. And these two men arrived there. * They talked to the water-deity. The child was not dead; he was sitting alive. Said the men, “The father demands his child. He said that we were to take him back with us.” “Though you shall take him homeward with you, when you reach the surface of the water with him, he shall die. Had you taken him back before he ate anything, he might have lived. He will desire the food which I eat; that being the cause of the trouble, he shall die. Begone ye, and tell those words to his father.” The two men went. They arrived at the lodge. ‘We have seen your child; the wife of the water-deity has him. Though we saw him alive, he had eaten part of the food which the water-deity eats; therefore the water-deity says that if we bring the child back with us out of the water, he shall die.” © Still the father wished to see him. ‘If the water-deity’s wife gives you back your child, she desires a very white dog as pay.” The father said, ‘‘I will give her the white dog.” Again the two men painted themselves; the one made himself very black, the other made himself very yellow. Again they went beneath the water. They arrived at the place again. ‘The father said that we were to take the child back at any 358 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. rate; he spoke of seeing his child.” And as the water-deity gave the child back to them, they went homeward with the child. When they arrived above with him, the child was dead. They gave him back to his father. And all the people cried when they saw the child, their relation. They plunged the white haired dog into the water. When they had seen the child, and had buried him, they gave all the pay to thetwomen. After a while the parents lost a girlin like manner. She did not eat any of the food of the water- deity, and therefore they took her home alive. But it was another water-deity who had her, and he promised to give her back to them if they gave him four white dogs. THE LAMENT OF THE FAWN OVER ITS MOTHER. Toutp BY JosEPH LA FLECHE. Lagti wi” mi’ga Laqtijinga jigiggai. Laqtijinga aka wé¢ai té. Deer one female Fawn sh ornare ney discovered them. ers. sub Natha, ¢éama niaci"gai ha. An’kaji, niaci"ga-baji, yaxai hé. Ki, Natha, O mother, these are men 3 Not so, they are not men, they ure . And, O mother, crows ¢éama niacigai ha. An‘kaji, niaci"ga-baji, yaxai hé. Ky, Na*hd, ¢éama these are men Not so, they are ae men, they are 3 And, O mother, these crows nfaci@gai ha. An‘kaji, nfaci"ga-baji, yaxai hé. Egi¢e kfdai nfaci"ga ama. are men E Not so, they arenotmen, theyare . At length they shot man the crows at her (sub.). Laqtijinga aka a™hai té. Fawn the fled. : (sub.) (When he returned to the place, he found that the men had cut up his mother, and had put her liver on the fire. So he sang this lament:) a Se Na®-ha ni-d-ci"-ga-bi_ e-hé, ye -x4-bi e-cé ¢a™-cti; qi ¢a" nd-¢i-zi- he O mother they are men I said, ey arecrows you formerly; Liver the is sizzling said (ob.) ai-dje. on the fire. NOTE. I first heard of the song in this myth in 1871, when I was with the Ponkas in Dakota. But the fragment of the text was given me at the Omaha Agency. Had the Fawn spoken the lament, he would have said, “Na*ha, niaci™gd-bi ehé, yAxa-bi ecé yntéde di na¢izide 4ha", O mother, I said that they were men, you said that they were erows; but now your liver is sizzling on the fire!” A PONKA GHOST STORY. 359 TRANSLATION, A Doe was with her Fawn. The Fawn discovered the presence of enemies. “O mother, these are men,” said the Fawn. ‘No, they are crows. They are not men,” said the Doe. And the Fawn said again, ‘‘O mother, these are men.” ‘No, they are not men; they are crows,” said the Doe. Again he said, ““O mother, these are men.” “No, they are not men; they are crows,” said the Doe. At length the men shot at her. The Fawn fled. (When he returned to the place, he found that the men had cut up his mother, and had put her liver on the fire. So he sang this lament:) “O mother, I said that they were men; you said that they were crows; your liver is sizzling on the fire.” A PONKA GHOST STORY. ToLp BY FRANK LA FLECHE. Nuda”™ a¢d-biam4 nfa¢i"ga dhigi. Pan’ka-biamé. Ki a¢d4-b ega™ To war went, they say persons many. Ponkas, they say. And went, having they say a-f{-yi-biamé. Né¢a-biamé. Hada" amd. Ki né¢éqti g¢i”-biamé; déde they camped for the They kindled a fire, Night time theysay. And kindlinga - they sat, they say; fire night, they say. they say. bright fire té ndhegaji’qti g4xa-biamé. Gi¢éqti wa¢dte g¢i’-biamd. Sabdéjiqti nfa- the to burn very they made it, they Rejoicing eating they sat,they say. Very suddenly _per- (ob.) brightly say. much ciga wi™ wa‘a”-biama. Q¢faji, 4-biam4. Qéde cété aba‘ti-gi. Q¢fiijt son one sang they say. Speechless, ra (one) Fire yonder cover with oe Speechless ey say. man‘de g¢izai-gi. Ki wari gi¢e man‘de g¢iza-biama. Ki égaxe i¢a™ bow take ye yours. And bow took their, they say. to surround him a¢d-biama. Egaxe i¢a™¢a-bi ga” ubfsande a¢i™ ftiAga-biamA, Ki ga” they went, they They surrounded him, so in close quar- they had theybeganatonce, And still say. they say ters him they say. wa‘a™ naji”-biama; cé¢ectéwa" ji. Egi¢e q¢abé té'di yan’ge a¢a-biama. singing he stood, theysay; hedidnotheedatall. Atlength tree by the near they went, they say. Ki yan’géqtci ahi-biam4 yi, ¢acta’’-biama wa‘a” aka. Ki q¢abé té‘di And very near they arrived, when, hestopped singing, he sang hewho. And tree by the they say they say ahi-bi y1, wahi té ga”te amd. Q¢abé hidé té’di wahf té édedf-te ama, theyar- when, bone the had lain there some Tree the bot- bythe bone the they were there, rived, (ob.) time, they say. tom they say, they say . 2 a1: . . nfaci*ga wahi té. Caa™ amd ubatihéwa¢é-hna”-biamd niaci"ga tai xi. human bone the. Dakota the they hang upthe regn- they say persons they when. (sub.) bodies larly die 360 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. TRANSLATION. A great many persons went on the war-path. They were Ponkas. As they ap- proached the foe, they camped for the night. They kindled a fire. It was during the night. And kindling a bright fire, they sat down; they made the fire burn very brightly. Rejoicing greatly, they sat eating. Very suddenly a person sang. ‘Keep quiet. Push the ashes over that fire. Seize your bows in silence,” said their leader. All took their bows. And they departed to surround him. They made the circle smaller and smaller, and commenced at once to come together. And still he stood singing; he did not stir at all. At length they went near to the tree. And when they drew very near to it the singer ceased his song. And when they reached the tree, bones lay there in a pile. Human bones were there at the foot of the tree. When persons die, the Dakotas usually suspend the bodies in trees, in a horizontal attitude. A DAKOTA GHOST STORY. OBTAINED FROM FRANK LA FLECHE. Caa” nuda” a¢d-biamd. A¢a-bi yi na™ba wada™be a¢d-biama. Dakotas to war went, they say. They. went, when two toactas scouts they went, they ey say Bay. Nikaci"ga wi” wa‘a™ na‘a™-biama. Person one singing ‘they heard, they say. Hé-a-he+ ¢e-hé-a! Hé-a-he+ ¢e-hé-a! Hé-¢e-hé-e-hé! A-hé ¢e-hé-a! Hé-¢e-hé-e-hé! E-hé-hu+¢u-t he-¢é-a! Ya-a-hu! k- -¢e ha-a-é-a! Kig¢dda-biamé. Eca™qtci ahf-bi yi ugas‘i"-biama. Kgi¢e ca™yanga They crawled they say. Very near ved hey ar- when they peeped, they say. Behold big wolf up on him to- rive gether akaéma. he was, they say. NOTE. The beginning of each line in the wolf’s song is shown by the capital letter. TRANSLATION. The Dakotas went on the war-path. As they went, two went out as scouts. They heard a person singing. ‘‘Hé-a-he+¢e-hé-a! Hé-a-he+¢e-hé-a! Hé-¢e-hé-e-hé! A-hé-¢e- hé-a!l Hé-¢e-hé-e-hé! E-h4-hu+¢u-0 he-¢é-a! Y4-a-ha! Bi-¢e hé-a-é-a!” They crawled up on him together. When they arrived very close, they peeped. Behold, he was a big wolf. THE ADVENTURE OF AN OMAHA. 361 THE ADVENTURE OF AN OMAHA. RELATED BY JOSEPH LA FLicHRE. Niacitga wiaqtci xf widgtci ‘Abae a¢d-biama, wa‘t cin’gajin’ga edibe child also Man one tent one hunting he went,theysay, woman juwagig¢e. Gan’ki x{-biama utcfje ya™hadi. Ki nti aké ma” ké hégaji And he with them, they camped, under- bytheedgeof. And man the arrow the a great his own. they say growth (sub.) (ob.) many a¢i”-biamdé. Wahiuta?¢i" ¢ingaf tédi-biama. Ki yf-biama yi, gan’ki ‘Abae he had, they say. Gun they had when, they say. And they camped, when, aftera hunting none they say while (?) a¢d-biamd nu sfa™¢é. pf té al¢a a¢d-biamé. qdzega™ ‘abae ag¢a-biama went, they say man _ alone. Tent the leavingit he went, they Atevening hunting he wen homeward, ob. Bay. ey say vf te’di, yf t& eca” aki-bi yf, yuha-biamd ni aké. Ga qti yuha-bi tent to the. Tent the mnearto hereached when, feared unseendan- man the Imme- feared un- (ob.) home, they ger, they say (sub.). diately (?) seen danger, say they say ega”, 1 t& gig¢dda-biamd. Ki égi¢e niaci*ga dhigi yw t8 ¢a¢uhaqtei having, tent the hecrawledup they say. And behold men many tent the very nearly (ob.) on his own (ob.) iénaxi¢a amdma yi, &/di Anazddi akf-biamé. Ga” hibé uta” gé edibe were attackingit, theysay when, there in therear he reached home, And moccasin leggings the also they say. (ob.) e¢ionuda-bi ega™, waii” gé eddbe a” ¢a-biama. Gan‘ki { té idnaxi¢ai pulled off his, they having, robe the also he left, they say. And tent the they say (pl. ob.) (ob.) attacked it té, ékita" é cti iénaxi¢a ag¢d-biama. [¢ae-baji’qtia” ctéwa” wa‘t-biama. when, atthe he too to attack went homeward, He did not speak at all notwith- he wounded them, same time they say. standing they say. Egi¢e fbaha™i-biama. Gan’ki nfaci"ga ama a“ha-biamé. A™ha-bi i, Atlength he was recog- they say. And men the they fled, they say. They fled, they when, nized (sub.) say Gi-gi, gi-gd, 4-bi ega™, cin’gajin’ga, wa‘ edabe, wig¢izd-bi ega”, utcfje Come, come, said, they having, child, woman also, he took them his having, thicket say own, they say k&’ya juwagig¢e did¢a-biama. Wi'éctéwa" t’é¢ai-baji-biama. Eona* héga- tothe he we them, hehad gone, they say. Not even one was killed, they say. He alone a great 8 OWD ctéwa" ji t’é¢a-biama. many he killed, they say. TRANSLATION. A man went hunting, taking his wife and children, one lodge in all. They camped by the edge of a thicket. The man had a great many arrows. They say that it was when they had no guns. When they pitched the tent, the man went hunting by him- self. He left the tent, and departed. About evening he went homeward to the tent. When he had nearly reached home, the man feared an unseen danger. Immediately 12 12 362 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. he crawled up towards his tent. And behold, when many persons were nearly attack- ing the tent, he reached home in their rear. And having pulled off his moccasins and leggings, he left his robes also. He went to the tent to attack them just at the moment they attacked it. Without speaking at all, he wounded them. At length he was recognized. And the men fled. When they fled, he said, “Come, come;” and having taken his wife and children, he went with them into the thicket. Not even one of his family was killed; but he killed a great many of the foe. THE DAKOTA WHO WAS SCARED TO DEATH BY A GHOST. OBTAINED FROM JOSEPH LA FLECHE. Caa” d‘iba vf amdma. Ki Caa™” wi” éd-utha-bi yi, waha™-cta" Dakotas some camped they say. And Dakota one joined, they say when, aconstantremover hégabaji-biama. Ki ¢é Caa™ 4i-md edita™ wi ugdca™ ¢e téé ha. Ky notalittle they say. And this Dakota peeee ia from one traveling he went . And campe nfacBga Aji nuda™ Akipaf yi, t'é¢ai té ha. Ki ¢é nfaci"ga waha” gfuda® man differ- on the he met when, hekilledhim . And this man toremove itwas good ent war-path him for him aké Gézéqtci hi yi, waha™ agaf té ha. Wa‘i-hna" wirdgtei jug¢ai té ha. hewho late in the it wen; removing he went Woman only one went withhim . evening arrived Kegi¢e ha”, ugdhanadazéqti, yi ts ha ¢é waha” a¢é aka. Gan'ki 4f wa‘ti he Atlength night, very dark, , this removing he hewho. And tent woman camped went . y y , 2 — *n/ 4 ak& gixai te ha. Ki wat aké, piadi mang¢i”-1. Nadya" gdxa-i hé, the made it . And woman the To the begone. A light make 2 (sub.) (sub.), tent 4-biamé. Ga™ yfaja ag¢af ni akd. Ga” déde na aka gaxai té ha. said she, they And in the went man the And fire man the he made it say. tent (sub.). (sub.) Naya" gixa-bi yf, égi¢e nfaci*ga vé ke’, najiha ma¢ingéqtia®-bikéama gaq¢fi A light he made, when, behold, man dead lying, hair all cut off as he lay, they say killed they say : ké’, da” bai té hi. Na™pa-bi ega™, Him! 4-bi ega™, ca™ca™ t’4-biama. the he saw him 2 He feared the having, Oh! said, having, without he died, they say. (ob.), sight, they say they say stopping * Naya" ckixe ¢ag¢é ¢a™cti A¢aa™ a, 4-biama wa‘t alka. Taji ega™, & di A light youmake you go heretofore have you ? gaid,they say woman the He having, there homeward put it on (sub.). spokenot ak{-bi ega™, ¢it‘a’’-biamé Ga™ ndya® gixa-biama. Gan’ki t’é ké’ wada™ba- she reached having, she felt him, they And alight she made, they say. And dead he she saw home, they say. lay say bi yi, can’ge wit’ kat ta™-bi ega”, yf té a” da ag¢d-biamé wa‘i aké. Gam they when, horse one tied it, they say having, tent the leaving wentback,they woman the And Bay (ob.) say (sub.). THE HANDS OF THE DEAD PAWNEE. 363 ak{-bi ega”, Nu jude¢e b¢é édega™, niaci"ga wi" gaq¢ii kédega™, édiqti reached having, Man Iwithhim Iwent but person one was killed helay, but just there home, they say ayfi édega™, na™ pe t’éé hé, a-biaméa. MKegasani yi, nti am’ da™be ahi-bi we but fearing he q said she, they The next day when, man the toseehim arrived, camped the sight died say. (sub.) they say yi, égi¢e t’é ca™ea™ ké ama. when, behold, dead without he they stopping lay say. NOTE. Observe the use of “té h&” instead of ‘-biama,” as if the narrator had witnessed the adventure here recorded. As he did not, the uniform substitution of ‘-biama” would have been consistent. But the text is given just as it was dictated. This apparently incorrect use of ‘‘té ha” instead of ‘‘-biama” will be found elsewhere in the Historical Papers which follow. TRANSLATION Some Dakotas camped. One Dakota joined them, who was continually moving his tent from place to place. And one wandered away from these Dakotas who had camped. And when he met another man who was on the war-path against the Dakotas, he killed him. And when it was very late in the evening, this man who was fond of moving removed and departed. One woman alone accompanied him. At length it was night, very dark, and this one who removed and departed, camped. And the woman set up the tent. And the woman said, “Begone to the tent. Make a light.” And when the man went to the tent and made a fire, behold, he saw the man who lay dead, with all his hair cut off, lyimg killed. As he feared the sight, he said, “Oh!” and immediately he became insensible. ‘‘ You went to make alight; have you put on the wood?” said the woman. As he did not speak, she went thither and touched him. And she made alight. And when she saw him lying insensible, she tied a lariat on a horse, and left the tent, going back to the other Dakotas. And having reached there again, she said, “I went with the man, but a man lay there killed, and we camped just there, and he died from fright on seeing him.” On the next day, when the men went thither to see him, behold, he lay dead beyond recovery. THE HANDS OF THE DEAD PAWNEE. ToLpD By JosEPH LA FLECHE. Caa™ d‘iba yf-biama. Ki ga¢i" wi” t’é¢a-biama. qa¢i" ¢inké na™bé Dakotas some camped,they say. And Pawnee one they killed, they say. Pawnee the (ob.) hand ey té mésa-bi ega”, ubatité¢a-biamda Cahaya wéga"ze na™baqti¢ga™. Ki his the cutoff,they having, they hung them up, they at a hill measure about two. And tt) say say ha”, ugdhanadaze yi, yadésage hégaji amd. Ki nv ama u¢éwi" g¢i™-biama. night, dark when, high wind much they And man the _ collecting they sat, they say. say. (pl sub.) 3. 6 12 15 18 364 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. Ca” fug¢a ga” g¢i”-biamd, décteda g¢i™-biama, ca” it¢a dji¢arga” ‘i¢e And telling 80 they sat, they say, talkingin- they sat, they say, infact news eee sorts pues news about cessantly ing of themselves g¢i"-biamd. Ki nfaci*"ga wi” fe wakan'dagiqti ufjebe to‘di g¢i”’-biama. they sat, they say. And man one very loquacious oor atthe hesat they say. Ki nfaci8ga wi’ wahchajiqt{-bi dcia}4ta™ a-{-biama, ca™ nfaci"ga waspeqti-bi And man one very stout-hearted, from outside wascoming, in fact man very Boma) they they say they say, é#te, wahé¢hajiqti-bi ite, Aciaj4ta” a-f-biama. Nu Aciajata" a-i aka, (he) may very stout-hearted, (he) may from outside he was coming, Man fromoutside hewas he e, they say 8, they say. coming who, Na™jitcké’qtci ati dha", 4-biama. Ki ¢é nfaci” ga fe wakan‘dagi aka, Hata™ Hardly Ihave ! he said, they And t. loquacious the Why come say. (gub.), na*jPcké’qtci ¢atf 4, A-biamd. Na! yadésage, ugdhanadazé‘qti éga*, yhahe hardly you % said he, they Why! ahigh wind, very dark as, I feared have come say. unseen danger héga-maji éga, na™ji"cké’qtci ati ha, d-biamé. Aqta® wieb¢i™ mI I very much as, hardly I have : said he, they How itis come Bay. possible na" ji®cké/qtci at{ tada”, 4-biama fe wakan‘dagi aka. Uyuhé ctéwa™ ¢ingé, hardly Ihave shall ? said he, they loquacious the Something tall there is come say (sub.). to fear none, -biamé. Ega™¢a™ja, wi yuahe héga-maji, 4-biamad dma aka, pi té’di. said he, they Though 80, Vt I feared I Ss much, said he, they the other, Iwas when. Bay. mmneen say coming anger Figa™¢a™ja, yf gaza™adiqtia” ca” yu¢ahé té ca™aji, 4-biamd. Ki niaci” nga Though so, tent in the very midst of yet youfeared the improper, said he,theysay. And waspe aké g4-biamé: Hin’daké-ga™! yuig¢ahaji wi’ ¢akeite, qagi" na*bé té sedate the he said as follows, So let us see! youdo not if you tell the truth, Pawnee hand = the (sub.) they say: fear (ob.) agima*¢in’-gi. Aoni” ¢ag¢i yi, can’ge ida” wil t4 minke, 4-biam& Adifb¢e walk thou for them. You have youcome if,- horse good Igive will Iwho, said he, they I go for them back to you say. them ka®b¢a yi, adfb¢e té minke, 4-biama fe wakan‘dagi aka. Téna! keé, I wish if, Igoforthem will Iwho, said, they say loquacious the (sub.). Fie! come agima”™ ¢in' ga. Can’ge tdatgti wif t4 minke, aoni” ¢ag¢{ yi, 4-biama. go for t Horse very good Igive will I who, youhave youcome if, said he, they you them back Bay. Agia¢d-biama 4ma aka na"bé té. eee ¢éaka g ga-biama: Egi¢e He went for them, the other hand jana? e thi man 8 (sub.) Card as follows, Beware they say they say: win kaji té daha®. Edi na™ ‘ba jug¢e mai a gin -gi, a-biama. Fga” edi hetell not lest ! There two with him thon, said a they there the truth ada-biama. yafi’géqtci ahfi yi, na"bé aka hebédi Boa ne i¢ape g they a they Very near they when, two the onthe way oe sat, they say, waiting te sat arrived (sub.) for him Sone Egi¢e g¢fiiji yici amd. Ga™ g¢fiiji ega”, nabd aka ag¢a-biama they say. Behold hecame along they And hecame having, two the went peck: they not back while gay. not back (sub.) THE HANDS OF THE DEAD PAWNER. 365 yiaga. Gar, (faa”ona ¢ag¢i 4, 4-biama. Na! didadi a™¢an’gape ang¢i™ to the And, oulefthim youhaye ? said he, they Why! onthis side we waited for we sat tent. come say. him yi, g¢fajiega”, angagi, 4-biam4. Téna’! t’é té, 4-biama. Hinda! edi when, he came because, we came said they, Fie! he died, said he, they Let me see! there not back home, they say. say. b¢é t& minke, 4-biam4 waspe aké. A¢i™ ¢ingé’qti é’di a¢d-biama, niniba Igo will I who, said, they say sedate the Having there was there he went, they say, pipe (sub.). it nothing at all sia"¢é’qtci ag¢a¢i"-bi ega™, 6'di a¢a-biama niaci"ga natbé té’di, eondqtei. alone had his, they say having, there he went, they say man hand to the, he alone. E gi¢e a¢a-bi yi, pahan’ga niaci ga a¢é aka, égi¢e nfaci*"ga na™bé té Beh he went, when, before he went he. behold, man hand the they say who, (ob.) yan’géqtci ahfi yi, t’é akaéma. Gan’ki ¢é niaci"ga akd na™bé té ¢iza-bi very near he _ when, he had died, they And this man the hand the _ took, they arrived say. (sub.) (ob.) say ega”’, a¢i” ag¢a-biama. Aki-biam éga”, Na™bé té ab¢i” ag¢i ha, 4-biama e took back, they say. He reached there mal Hand the Ihavebrought . said, they say again, they say (ob.) them bac niaci” ga waspe aka. Gan‘ki ¢é nfaci” ga waspe aka fa-biama. Wi cti sedate the And this ma: sedate the he spoke, they too (sub.). (sub.) say. a‘jif’ga tédita® udgaca"-hna"-ma™, antida’-hna"™-ma™, 4-biama. Ki ca™ me small from that I have traveled regularly, Ihave gone regularly on the _ said he, they And no time war-path, say. matter ed4da® téqiqti dakipé ctéwa™ ani”ya édige-hna*-ma™. Ki ca” wa” ecté, what very difficult Imet soever Llive the in. ob. were there, And yet even once, regularly, I had. Géma™ t& minke, ehd-maji-hna"-ma™, dagindq¢e-hna*-ma™, 4-biama. I do that will I who, Inever said it, I concealed mine regularly, said he, they say. Edada® wi” téqi dakipa th Na beim ¢a", eb¢éga"-hna"-ma™, 4-biama. Ki What one difficult I meet I always think, said he, they And Gat £1), say. a” fe tam¢ingé’-qti d4xa-mdji-hna"-ma™, 4-biam4. Ki wa‘i-hna”™ téqia- a words without just cause I never make them, said he,they say. And woman only I prize wa¢é hi, ki can’ge cti téqiawa¢é ha, 4-biama. Ga” niaci "ga waqpaniqti them ' and horse too Iprize them . said he, they say. And very poor na™ba wéba"-biama nfaci"ga waspe aka. Niaci” ga waqpani ¢anka can’ge two called them, they man sedate the poor the ones horse say (sub.). who Uda*qti aki¢a wa‘f-biama, can’ge a”sagi’qti. Ki nfaci*ga min’g¢a*ji éi"te very good both he gave to them, horse very eee. And man unmarried perhaps they say, wat ¢inké cti ‘i-biamd nfaci*ga waspe aké. Wa‘i-hna™ téqi ¢a™ja ca™ woman the(ob.) too gave to him, ate sedate the Woman only precious though yet they say (sub.). ani’ya ta minke, 4-biama. Nan’de wiwija i¢agidaha” ka™b¢a ga™ égima’, Ilive will Iwho, said he, they say. Heart my own know mine I wish cae I Tae that, d-biamé. Niaci®ga té ké’ agima"¢i"i-ga, 4-biama. said he, they Man dead the walk ye for him, said he, they Bay. (ob.) Bay- 12 15 18 366 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. TRANSLATION. Some Dakotas camped. And they killed a Pawnee. Having cut off his hands, they hung them up on a hill which was about two miles away. And at night, when it was dark, there was a very high wind. And the men collected and sai. And they sat telling their own adventures; they sat talking incessantly; in fact, they sat speak- ing of different kinds of news. And aman who was a boaster sat by the door. And one man, who was said to be very stout-hearted, was coming from the outside—in fact, a man who was said to be very sedate and very brave, was coming from without. The man who came from without said, “I have barely come!” And the boaster said, “How is it that you have barely come?” ‘Why! as there is a high wind, and it is very dark, I was very much afraid, so I have barely come,” said he. “ Were it I,” said the boaster, “how could I possibly be hindered in getting here? There is nothing at all to fear.” ‘Nevertheless, | was very much afraid when I was coming,” said the other. ‘Nevertheless, as you feared even when you were right among the tents, it was wrong,” said the boaster. And the sedate man said as follows: ‘Let us see! if you tell the truth, and do not fear, go after the hands of the Pawnee. If you bring them back, I will give you a good horse.” “If I wish to go for them, I will go for them,” said the boaster. “Fie! come, go for them. I will give you a very good horse if you bring them back,” said the sedate man. The other one went after the hands. And this man said as follows: ‘ What if he does not tell the truth! Let two of you walk thither.” So they went thither. When the two arrived very near, they sat down, not going any further; they sat waiting for him to appear. Behold, after a long while he had not come back. And as he had not come back, the two went back to the tents. And the brave man said, “‘ Have you come home witbout him?” ‘Why! when we sat down on this side of the place, waiting for him to appear, he did not come back, so we came back,” said they. ‘Fie! he died. Let me see! I will go thither,” said he who was sedate. Without any weapons at all he went thither; having only his pipe, he went alone to the man’s hands. Behold, when the first man who went drew very near to the man’s hands, he had died. But this man took the hands, and carried them back. As he reached the tents, the sedate man said, “I have brought the hands back.” And this sedate man spoke: “J, too, have been accustomed to travel- ing and going on the war-path since I was small. Aud no matter what kind of trouble I encountered, I always found a loop-hole by which I managed to get out of it alive. And not even once did I say beforehand, ‘I am going to do that;’ I always concealed my plans. When I encountered any difficulty, I always thought that I wasa man. I am not used to talking at random. I prize women, and I prize horses, too.” And the sedate man called two*very poor men. He gave very good horses to both of the poor men, a very swift horse toeach. And the sedate man gave a woman, too, toa man who, perhaps, had not married. ‘*Though the woman only is precious, I shall live after giving her away. I wish to know my own heart, therefore I have done that. Go ye after the dead man,” said the sedate man. HOW THE CHIBE’S SON WAS TAKEN BACK. 367 HOW THE CHIEF’S SON WAS TAKEN BACK. OBTAINED FROM JOSEPH LA FLECHE. Caa” diba yf amdma. Egi¢e nikagahi ¢inké ijin’ge ugdca™ i¢é ama, Dakotas some hadcamped,they At length chief the one hisson traveling had gone, they say. who say, ‘bae. Kgi¢e ha™ yi, nfaci"ga fu¢a aki-biama. Nikagahi ¢inké, ijaje to hunt. Behold, night when, ~ man to tell reached there Chief the one his news again, they say. who, name ¢adé-bi ega™, Maja” gd¢uadi ¢ijin’ge t’é¢ai, d-biamé. Ki nikagahi aka 3 mentioned, having, Land in that your son they killed, said he, they And chief the (unseen place) say. (sub.) Aciaga ahf-biega™, feki¢ éé¢a-bi ega”, g4-biama: Caa™ jin’ga wa¢fhehaji’ qti outside arrived, having, to pro- ‘sent sud- having, saidas follows, Dakota young you are very stout- they say claim _ denly, they they say: hearted say cka“hna-hna”i ¢a® cin’gajin’ga wha ha” ¢8’qtci agfja"be ka™b¢a. Pin’ you desire zegolarly ete » child my night thisvery Isee mine I wish. Go after pas! gima’¢i"i-ga. Can’ge a sagi/qti wi” niji-qanga edabe, aoni™ ¢ag¢i yi, wi'l 6 mine for me. Horse very swift one big-ears also, youhave youcome if, I give him back to you t4 minke, 4-biamé. Ki Caa™ bétigaqti Abag¢a-biamd na*’pa-bi ega”. Ki will Iwho, said he, they And Dakotas a hesitated, they say they feared because. And say- (seen danger) they say Caa” wi" wahchajiqti é@te, Hindé! wi adib¢e té, e¢éga"-biamé. Ga™ Dakota one very stout-hearted perhaps, Letmesee! I Igoforhim will, he thought, they say. So agia¢d-biama. Ca™, di pi yi, na™ape taté aha’, e¢éga"-baji-biama. Egi¢e 9 Been for they say. Yet, There Lar- when, I fear shall ! he did not think, they say. At length im rive di abf-bi yi, na™pe héga-bajf-biamé. Ki ca™ ¢it‘a*’-biama. Egi¢e ‘i there hearrived, when, he feared very much, they say. And yet he touched him, they At length carry- they say Say. ing him ag¢A-bi yi, uqpd¢e-hna™ ama can’ge ‘in’ki¢ai ké. Xagé-hna™ .ca"ca”- he went when, itwas constantly falling, they say horse he caused to the He cried regu- without back, they say carry (ob.). arly stopping ° . 4 Y / “ : biama, ‘i ag¢af té na™pe. Pi¢ar¢a uqpa¢é yi, Aa™ b¢a ak{ yi, égi¢e 12 they say, carry- he went the he feared it. Again and itfell when,Iabandonit Ireach if, beware ingit back again there again atta“aa taf, edéea"-bi eva™, it aki ga™a-biamdé. Uqpa¢é ctéwa” ca” ’ D to} ’ 5 they laugh lest, thonght,they having, to carry it he wished,they say. * It fell notwith- yet at me say back standing ¢izaf-de can’ge ta® ‘in’ki¢é-biama. Ga™ aki-bi ega”, can’ge wi™ niqa- he took it horse the hecansed to they say. And carried it back, having, horse one big- when (ob.) carry it they say yanga edabe ‘{-biamd. Ca™ ticka® g@ téqi ¢a™ja, ca™ ucka™ ¢é téqi Ata 15 ears also he gavetohim, Yet deed the difli- though, yet deed this diffi- exceed- they say. (pl.) cult cult ingly dixe, (4-biama,) 4 aki-bi té/di é waka-bi ega™. I did it, (said he, they he carried it when that meant,they having. say,) back, they say say 368 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. TRANSLATION. Some Dakotas had camped. At length the chief’s son had wandered off to hunt. Behold, when it was night, a man came back to tell the news. Calling the chief by name, he said, “In that land they have killed your son.” And the chief, having gone out of doors, sent a crier at once, saying as follows: “Ye young Dakotas who have always desired to be stout-hearted, I desire to see my son this very night. Go after him forme. If you bring him back, I will give you a very swift horse, also a mule.” All the Dakotas hesitated, because they feared to see the corpse. And one Dakota, who, perhaps, was stout-hearted, thought, ‘‘Let me see! I will go after it.” And he went after it. Yet he did not think, “‘When I arrive there I shall fear to see him!” At length, when he arrived there, he was very much afraid. And still he touched it. At length, when he was carrying it back, the body was constantly falling off the horse which he made carry it. He was erying all the while, as he feared to carry it to the tents. When it fell again and again, he thought, “If I go back without it, I am afraid that they would laugh at me,” so he wished to take it back. Notwithstanding it fell, he took it up and made the horse carry it. And when he reached the tents with it, the chief gave him the horse and mule. Referring to his having brought the corpse back, he said, ‘Though the deeds of others have been difficult to perform, I have done a deed which was exceedingly difficult.” PONKA HISTORICAL TEXTS. THE WAR PARTY OF NUDA*-AXA’S FATHER. ToLp BY NuUDA2-AXA. Indadi aka nuda™ a¢af t&. Ga wa‘a”-hna™ ca™ca". Ma¢i’ ma™¢i™ My father the to war went. And he sang Goset always. Walking he walked té wa‘a™-hna™ ca™ca"; ha” ja” gé ga” wa‘a™-hna™i cénujin’gai t8’di. when hesang regularly always; night helay the 80 hesang regularly he waa.e/yonug when. down (pl.) Egi¢e wada™be ahf-biama. Nikaci® ga sig¢e wé¢a-biama wada™be ag¢at At length to see they arrived, they trail they found them, to see they went say. they say bac té. Nudahanga, égite, niaci” ga d‘iba ag¢ai ke ha’, 4-biamé. Ahat! when. O war- Bice behol some have gonehome-_ . said they, they Oho! ward in along line say. 4-biama. Wacka™egan-gi. Qubéyi¢d-bi ¢i"hé, 4-biama. Egi¢e Os aga said he, they Do persevere. To re one: sself besure, said he, they At length say. sacre say. ¢ab¢i" wéna‘iqtci fhe amama. Ké, niida™hangd, ¢éama a*wan’gaq¢i taf, three very eles beside were passing, they Come, O war-chief, these let us kill them, em say. 4-biamd. Ede nuda™hanga aké u¢i‘agai té. Egi¢e ha” ama, ugdhanadaze said they, they But war-chief the was SSiise At length night they gay. (sub.) say, THE WAR PARTY OF NUDASAXA’S FATHER. BIbY) éga". Hu! hu! hu! hu! ¢éxe-gayt uti’-bi améé ha. ga¢i® ami. Nata’’-bi like. Hu! hu! hu! hu! drum they hit (not they are é Pawnee the Heard it, them seen) theones (sub.). they say ega™, Mdadi aké cénujin’ga jig¢e ¢inké ¢iqf-biamd. gqahan-git, 4-biama. aaving, myfather the young man he with the(ob.) he aroused them, Arise, said he, they (sub.) him they say. * Bay. Ci ui¢a ag¢i té. Niida*hanga, ¢éxe-gaytt uti” amd wa¢fonai. Gagqtci ama And to tell they came O war-chief, drum theyhit the they are mani- Those who are it to him back. (sub.) fest. near . / . ah, cl , . oe gigu ag¢i yf, a-biama. A™ba uga™ba tihd amd. Egi¢e nikaciga nf ké at that they have said he, they Day light it came again, At length person water the place comeandcamped, say. they say. (ob.) , , ? . 5 t=} to) justaslargeashe Iwithhim; he too IThadasasister’sson. And road the (ob.) we followed we went. Watcicka wi™ éga” ujéja naji” akA gamit angddai te’di tie wi" édi aka. Creek one like forked it was standing. Down-hill we went when field one it was there. a¢im am& waja” od dkast itégi¢é-lna”i. Wayja™ ahigi a®¢izai, wata™zi Pawnee the (sub.) squash the (pl.) inlieaps they used to place their. Squash many we took, corn ké eddbe dhigi a%izai. Ga™ “i” angdki, héga-baji, Ena-¢a™¢a™ a®wa di. 18 the also many we took, Aud carry- wereached a great many. Tn equal shares we gave to (ob.) ing there again, them. Nea™ ¢ai. qéde ké zi yi jea™ji. Egi¢e a” ba aké ma cidha tihat. Wadi" ca-i We kindled a Fire the yel- when we Atlength day the on high it passed. Yonder they fire. ow roasted it. (sub.) come with the pursuers ha, af. Watcicka kig¢4ja nea™¢é ang¢i”. Gat égi¢e, ubisandé’qti wa¢i" they Creek at the bottom we kindled we sat. And behold, pressing into very they came said. a fire close quarters atfi. Umaha amd eddbe ga¢i™ ¢inké’di édufhai té. Egi¢e ga’ a”he amé, 21 and had Omaha the (pl.) also Pawnee = at the (vil- joined in it. At length so they were fleeing, us. lage) 12 15 374 THE (@EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. wabaazaf. Ma™ na™cudaf. gamit wa¢i" édiqti wi” t’c¢ai té Pan‘ka ¢anka. they were Soil theymadeadust Down-hill having justthere one theykilledhim Ponka the A scared off. by running. them (pl. ob.). . < ° Cetiien oe aff] me ie *n/ ys qe 49 , Atatadi ci wi” u¢a™i te. Gan‘ki ci wi” édi té¢ai té édudta™. Gan’ki Far beyond again one they took hold of. And again one there they killedhim the next. And , . . o . ene: . . a3 watt wi" ¢izai té, Ta-sdba-wi", Umadha watt. Egi¢e winégi aka can’ge woman one they took, Deer-black-female, Omaha woman. Atlength my mother’s the horse brother (sub.) sateen ihre n / , r i} wy ~ s ta" im¢i’ gi? aki, a%¢a" wa"héga". Wackan’-ga ha, ai. Nfaci™ga ama héga- the having mine _ he ar- having followed me. Do your best, . he People the a great (ob.) forme rivedagain said. (sub.) = baji, af. Ga™ a™a™¢a ag¢al. Windqtci a"wa™cte. Canakag¢e dag¢a™ xi many, he And leaving me he went T alone me remained. Saddle Iputiton when said. homeward. for (the cons, horse) dag¢i. gamiiqti ag¢é; wéka"ta” u¢iq¢ag¢al b¢icta® g¢éa¢é. HKgi¢e wéahide IT sat on it. Down avery I went lariat holding loosely Ilethim Isent him Atlength atadistance steep hill homeward; go homeward suddenly. Ov e , o y s — . aki. Sindéhadi Ag¢inga, ehé; éde u¢itagai. Ga” aki, ujan’ge akicuga, Ireached By the tail sit on if, Isaid; but hewasunwill And _ Tarrived road standing thick, again. ing. again, FS Bie =. Oo — eiqe / sue ° ° ukihange ¢ingé. Uta’ na jin’ga té’di tha aki. Ga” céna. Wa¢icta™, masini bounds none. Space small bythe follow- I ar- And enough. Theyletus go, the other between two ing it rived side again. nS ee > : . im re race . . angikii yi. Egi¢e wi” agi” akii, yaxe-jin’ga. ga¢i® wi” wabdsna™ hiddé wereached when. Atlength one they came back Crow- young. Pawnee one scapula bottom it again with him, te’di wi, ci hfdeayAdi ti; ci ¢éxande pahaci ¢an‘di Wi. u¢as4”, Ga™ at the wounded again atthe bottom hewas again cheek above onthe hewas itstueckin. And him, wounded; wounded, mahi"si gf¢iontide. Ga” angé¢i” angdg¢ai. Ha" i¢aug¢e ama” gi. Ha arrow-head he pulled outfor And wehadhim wewenthome- Night throughout we walked. Night him ward. ‘ ¥ O *n? / s. / : aU ni 8: . . té ci éga™ i¢dug¢e a®ma” qi. Ca” qti a"na”ha4. Hgi¢e égasdni ditba ja” the again so thronghout we walked. We walked even till night. Atlength thenextday four ‘sleep ca qti a"na™a*bai. A™ba wésati” té angakii, Niub¢a¢a ké'ya. Kgi¢e nfaci"ga wewalked till broad daylight. Day the fifth the ye reached Niobrara atthe. Behold man ome, pahan’ga amd nfaci"ga g¢éba. Hgi¢éga", Ca” ha, af ega’’, ag¢ai. Egi¢e before they who man ten. At length, Enough . said having, they enk At length homeward. niaciga yajzata" duiba é¢a*be ati. Kegi¢e pahan’ga ag¢i ¢i", qasi-¢ingé. person *from the four insight they Behold before heeame the Top-branch- lodge came. (my. one), without. Wiji’¢e pahan’ga ma?¢i” amd dduata™. Niaci®ga b¢igaqti iwagikig¢e. My elder before — he walked the next. People — all kissed them, their brother own. Windaqtei ian’gikig¢a-baji. Aki te’di mdadi aka gdin¢in‘eai: Wa! ma%¢in’-ga Me only they kissed not me, Ireached when my father the said as follows Why! walk 7 their own, home (sub.) tome: a . . , . s ‘ 7s ries & \. ha. Nikaciga ¢db¢i" waq¢i-ma wacta™h ci'te, e'di ¢at’é eté yi, af. piadi : Men ~ three those whowere you may have seen there youdie ought, he ‘To the killed them, said. tent: cki té ub¢i‘age, af. HK cka™hna, al. UtaYnadi dgudi na™pchi" ¢at’é youhave the Tamunwilling, he That you desire, he Tn some space in what hunery you dic come back said. said, place ~~ . , . , Pee ‘n/t , . etéctéwam & vida", ai. A™q¢dgtei aki. I’natha aka umi™je tda™ wi” even if that good, he Me very lean LTreached My mother the couch good one said. home. (sub.) NUDAXAXA’S ACCOUNT OF HIS FIRST WAR PARTY. 379 o_ s ~ 7 [1a | G ~ se s Lue re y Pie , ingixai ha. Edi aja” ha. I"dadi aka wagate ati ha Qé¢inké Nudat’- madeforme . There Islept . My father the food gavetome . This one Nuda’- = ie f , a + pt L y 4 ° = axa ugdca" hi cde i¢inge té g¢i. Dal be i-ga, al. Indadi aka can’ge axa traveling arrived but tired to death he has To see him becom. he My father the horse there come home. ing, said. (sub.) / rey at ach serif 1 . , 1 , ® Ee OH By one AS r wi “i td, waii®’, uta”, hitbé, ca” b¢tiga ime‘age giba’i ¢inké ‘i té. B one he gave, robe, leggings, moccasins, in fact all” old man he was the one he gave called who to him. NOTES. 372, 9. yyii—_Nuda”-axa. yyitl, to wound himself ; but yiu, to be wounded; wounded— Frank La Fléche. 372, 11. ugahanadazéqti, pronounced ugathanadazeéqti by the narrator. 373, 10. wa¢ata-bajiqtia’l, pronounced wa¢at+ta-bajiqtia'l. 373, 12. winegi aka. This was Wasabe-jan/ga (Big Black bear) or Tuka¢a. 373, 19. dede ké, said of much fire, as in a long line. 378, 19. wa¢i® ca-i ha. Said by those who peeped over the hill. 374, 1. wa¢it Ediqti wi? Vedai te. This was Waha-jan/ga (Big Hide). 374, 2. atatadi ci wi" u¢ari té. This was He-jaja (Forked Horns). 374, 2. ganki...eduata™. This was Uha"-na"ba (Two Boilings or Two Kettles), a name borrowed, perhaps, from the Dakota Oohe-no"pa (Oohe-noypa). 374, 13. Niub¢ada kéja. It was where Westermann’s store now stands in the town of Niobrara, Neb. 374, 15, gasi-¢inge, or Wegasapi (Whip) was the father of White Eagle, the pres- ent head-chief of the Ponkas. 374, 16. wijit¢e. This elder brother was Ubi-ski, sometimes called Wacka"/-ma- ¢iv (He who makes an effort in walking), the second head-chief, who shared the power with Wegasapi. ; PLAN OF THE BATTLE AND FLIGHT. A.—Blnff near the Pawnee village, which some of the Ponkas ascended to view the fight. B.—Ponka camp, where Nuda®axa and the other non-combatants were nearly surrounded. C.—The route by which most of the Ponkas fled. D.—The route by which Nuda”’-axa fled. =] ( THE (@EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTUHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. ais Oo TRANSLATION. At the very first, when I was small, they spoke of going on the war-path. And when I said, “Father, I wish to go to those people,” he said, “No! Do not say that again to any one. When I was young, my child, I used to travel, but I used to know difficulties. Because you are young, I fear you would cry if you got into trouble.” “‘ Nevertheless,” said I, ‘persons of any size at all who decide for themselves invaria- bly travel; therefore Ido that. I wish to travel.” ‘Well, you shall go thither. When they attack one another, you shall go among them. Even if they kill you while you take hold of a man, it would be good,” said my father. So I went to the persons who had assembled. Behold, they were all grown. (It is customary among Indians for the wounded ones to become great men by means of their suffering.) “Ho! it is right. It is his son, but he has come.” They shook hands with me. They departed, travel- ing throughout the month. At length the moon was dead, and it was very dark. ‘Ho! bring ye hither the boys of different sizes who have come. Let them abandon their old names. Bring his son hither,” said they. They meant me, and they called my father’s name. The messengers took me thither. ‘You shall go thither,” said they. Cide-gaxe (Smoke-maker), Naii/ge-ti¢a (He-starts-to-run), Mi"xa-ska (White Swan), and the others made me sit in the center. ‘‘Oho!” said they, “you shall abandon your name. Behold, his friend shall have a name, for there is a great abundance of them. When we were coming hither on the war-path, this one, his friend, cried for it; therefore he shall have Nuda”’-axa (He-cried-for-the-war-path) for his new name.” And Cude-gaxe lifted his voice to tell the deities. “He is indeed speaking of abandoning his name, halloo! He is indeed speaking of having the name Nuda*/-axa, halloo! Ye big headlands, I tell you and send it to you that you may indeed hear it, halloo! Ye clumps of buffalo-grass, I tell you and send it to you that you may hear it, halloo! Ye big trees, I tell you and send it to you that you may indeed hear it, halloo! Ye birds of all kinds that walk and move on the ground, I tell you and send it to you that you may indeed hear it, halloo! Ye small animals of different sizes, I tell you and send it to you that you may hear it, halloo! Thus have I sent to tell you, ye animals. Right in the ranks of the foe will he kill a swift man, and come back after holding him, halloo!” He also told the old name. ‘He speaks indeed of throwing away the name Naji"-ti¢é (Starts-to-rain), and he has promised to have the name Nuda”-axa, halloo!” said he. Weslept regularly each night. As we had not reached the Pawnee village, we had eaten nothing at all, and we became very impatient from hunger. We reached the Pawnee village. When it was night, they went to surround the village. My mother’s brother said, ‘‘I will ride this horse.” “No,” said I. Still he spoke of riding it. The horse which he rode was very swift. And when they went to surround these lodges I was hungry. Said I, “Let us go and steal ears of corn.” I went with a boy who was just my size. I called him my sister’s son. We followed the path. One stream forked. When we went down hill, a field was there. The Pawnees had placed their squashes in heaps. We took many squashes and ears of corn. We returned to camp, carrying a great many on our backs. We distributed them in equal shares. We kindled a fire. The coals were bright, and we roasted the corn. At length if was broad daylight. Those on the hill said, “Yonder they come in hot pursuit” We sat - THE DEFEAT OF THE PAWNEES BY THE PONKAS IN 1855. 377 below the hill, kindling a fire at the stream. At last they came close upon us, getting us into a tight place. The Omahas joined the Pawnees. The Ponkas fled, being seared off. They raised a dust with their feet. Just as the foe went down hill after the Ponkas, one of the latter was killed. Beyond that the Pawnees captured another. Next they killed Uha*-na"ba, and an Omaha woman, ya-saba-wi'’, was captured. At lergth my mother’s brother brought back my horse, having followed me. ‘Do your best. The people are very many,” said he. [:e went homeward on foot, leaving me _ alone. I put the saddle on my horse, and mounted him. Ags Iwent down a steep hill, I loosened my hold on the lariat, giving him full rein. At length I arrived at a great distance from the foe. “Sit behind,” said I to my mother’s brother; but he refused. The paths stood so thick that they were without spaces between them. I went a little distance by another way, joining the rest after making a detour. When we reached the other side of a stream, the Pawnees let us go without further pursuit. At length one was brought to us, yaxe-jil’ga (Little Crow), whom a Pawnee had wounded in two places on the shoulder and in the upper part of the cheek. The arrow-head stuck in the cheek, so they pulled it out for him. We took him along homeward. We walked throughout the night, and when it was day we walked till night. We walked four nights after that, and until broad daylight. On the fifth day we reached home at Niobrara. The foremost were ten men. Having said, “It is enough,” they went to their respective homes. At Jength four of the people from the lodges came in sight. The first one who came home was qasi-¢inge, and my mother’s brother was the next in vank. All the people kissed them. Me alone did they not kiss. When I reached ‘home, my father said as follows to me, as if in reproof: “Why! Go! You have seen the three men who were killed, and you ought to die there. I am unwilling for you to come back to this lodge. You desired that. It would be good for you even to die from hunger in some lone place.” I came home very lean. My mother made a good couch forme. I slept there. My father gave me food. He said, “This Nuda?/-axa went traveling, but he has come home tired to death. Come to see him.” My father gave a horse, a robe, leggings, and moccasins to the old man who was called. THE DEFEAT OF THE PAWNEES BY THE PONKAS IN 1855. qAGE: WAQGL TE. PAWNEE THEY WERE THE. KILLED DictaTeD BY NuDA"-AXa. digi" ama ifdug¢e'qti wenuda™ ca”ea". Ki ¢é¢i" Agaha-ma ¢i? ie%ige Pawnee the throughout made war on always. And thisone Over (them) he walks old man (sub.) us CLE pe L Ce oat Pai f Ee Vein ee 2 D/ AD olf f 7 ‘ nan'ge éde nig¢e ¢izaf qa¢i" ama. Ki Agaha-ma’¢i" ak& ga” gija™’be his sister but acaptive tookher Pawnee the And A gaha-marei? the (an ex- to see his (sub.). (sub.) pletive) s / _ x/ WY ¥ we ye erp, , Tie ca™ ga” é 4¢a-biama. Ha™egated’qtei xi, ¢inga-bitéam’. Ki-hna” ea” 8 at any rate to he spoke of, they Early inthe morning when, he was missing, they And only (exple die my. say. tive) 12 18 Ala 378 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE aS, AND LETTERS. oe) r nh, *1/ Pons / aps . d¢uta" maja” g¢i” Gadi" ama Ga™ gakeé atid¢ai té ca“ ca". Uta nadi- inastraight land “sat Pawnee the And that he passed on always. In a lone place line with (sub.). hna® ja™i té. Kei¢e ha” egatee’ qtel edi ahi-biama. U¢a’-biama digi" regularly he slept. At length early in the morning there he arrived, they Took hold of him, Pawnee say. they say , , “ns ami. Eata™ ma™hni”, a-biama. Ga’, Mijinga uadkiji dde ndg¢e hnizai; the Why you walk, said they, they And, Girl — Tamnearly but acaptive you ioe (sub.). say. related to her; ki Agudi té¢agai Gite edi Péa¢age ka” b¢a. K'di cinuda™ a™¢ate taf éea® and in Sit: you killed her it may there you kill me I wish. There dog toeatme inorder that place be mab¢i”, 4-biamé Paqtibewa¢a-biama qa¢i ama. 1 abit%-biamé. Wuhu+! I walk, said he, they Spoke in wonder they say Pawnee the Mouth they pressed on, Really! say. (sub.). they say. : té na™paji, a-biamad. qa¢i® ama u¢éwinyi¢a-biama, bgligagti. U¢iiciaga todie he fears not, said they, they cai ue assembled they say, all. Tn the center say. (sub.) o¢i’-biamdé. Pi imaxai té. Eadta® mat™hni™, 4-biamdé. Utatgti uedéa-en 7 q o Dp ’ he sat they say. Anew they asked him. Why you walk, said they, they Very straight tell your say. (story), poe , ty, . ae A-biamé. Na! Mimjinga udkiyi éde ndg¢e hnizai; ¢é¢u im¢ahni® cki. Ki said they,they W hy! Girl 2 Tamnearly but acaptive youtook ~- here you hadher youwere And say. related to her; 4. forme coming home. dwa¢an'di té¢a¢ai té’di t’éa%¢ad¢ai ka™b¢a. K’di cinuda® a ¢ate taf éea" where youkilledher at the you kill me I wish. There deg to eat me in order that ma™b¢i”, d-biama. Ga, Win‘ke te, 4-biama. Ga", (izan’ ge uw hideaja I walk, said he, they And, He told the truth, said they, they And, Your sister lodge down- say. say. stream . . hey . 1 Ae hes gahiakaja adi”, A-biamd. An¢ii taité, d-biamd. Gasdni ya hné te, at yonder (camp) they said they, they We give shall, said they, they To-morrow thither you go will, have her say. her to you say. Y . . : ah oy) S Ay qs ‘ ¥ Ri j-biama. Ga™ ¢gasini yi, @’ta a¢af té E’di ahi-biamé yi, nfacitga amd said they, they And the next when, thither he went. There hearrived, they when, people the say. day say (sub.) . rietearee he ony epee oi ° a, : . f¢a-biamé. U¢a™i te. Gat gi wi” égiha agi” Aid¢ai yi, u¢éwi"¢a-biama. found him, they They took hold And lodge one headlong they hadtaken when, they assembled, they say. of him. him say. ° =) ° rp: Oe : Ga™ té¢ ‘i¢a-biama. Ga” 4f pahan’ga ua™si amadi ama abi-baji yaci; And to kill they spoke of, And lodge before he alighted by those the they didnot fora him they say. in (sub.) arrive long time; dda” a™¢i® t’é¢a-ba¢i” té. [kikinag¢i"’ -biama, pahan’ga t’é¢é ga” gai dea”. therefore he came very near being put Each one hastened to anticipate the ante to kill he desired as. to death, the rest, they say, him bs : ; ee Z A ie ee ps Bhi: oe Kganqti adi” akéma. Ki Amaha-u¢ici aka cé¢éctéwa" i g¢i'i te; wail” Just so they were keeping And Unvwilling-to-share- the not heeding at all gat; robe" him, they say. his-lodge-with-one (sub.) yigdipigti e@¢i”i te. Ga” gagi® eqdita"-ma wi ahii te. Hau! k¢, can’- he pulled well he sat. And Pawnee those from (the one he arrived. Ho! come, cease around himself other camp) gaxii-gi. Waite ¢icta”, ni cti ¢ata” ¢icta”, ninf cti i ¢icta™, af té. ye. Eating he finished, water too drinking he snished, tobacco too using he finished, he said. Ga" off ‘“¢a-biama. Qiyan’ge a¢dg¢alini” ¢agéé taté, A-biamé. Ga" te} bel Dy °) And to give they promised, Your sister you have yours you zo shali, said they, they And his back they say. homeward M say. —_— = 2 | THE DEFEAT OF THE PAWNEES BY THE PONKAS IN 1855. 379 / , , vy St , Y / vy , ° . vy . a”ba dttba gi¢adai té e¢é taté. Ga™ céna® tédihi yi ga” ag¢ai té. qa¢i” day four theypro- when hego shall. And enough arrived when so “he went Pawnee nounced to him homeward times there homeward. ; an oe Pane , en : ae ous na” ba edibe jiwag¢a-biama. Ga™ Agidg¢ai té. A™ba g¢céba ¢ab¢i" ja’’- two also went with them, they say. And they passed (the other Day ~ ten three “sleep- camp) on their way home. qti-éga™ akfi té. Ga™ qa¢i-ma jiiwag¢e akfi té, hitbé, uta” gé, wali”, 3 about they reached And the Pawnees “ withthem reached when, moccasin, leggings the robe, home. home = (ob.), oy fe . ye v) i s . an o - ean’ge eti ékina wa‘ti té, ci g¢éwaki¢ai té. Ki ga” edita™ ga™ ikit’a¢at té horse too equally they gave to again they sent them home. And then fromthat (exple- they hated one them, time tive) another. re . pe eee ne 5 ~ , Dene . . ie. es Ga™ Agaha-ma™ ¢i" cénujingai tédi té. Ga™ wahaba ¢isé’ ¢icta™i té edi. And A gaha-man¢ir he was a young it was when. And earsofcorn topull they finished it was man off then. : Is t ye 4 1 on/ , : Sy ae Qé ¢icta’i té, gaq¢a” agai te. Ga™ 4é wanase-hna”i Niub¢a¢a ke'di. 6 To they finished when, migrating they went. And buffalo they sur- regularly Niobrara at the. bury rounded them Pe 5 F 5 , ° re Eas nid , , Egi¢e dazéqtei niaci*ga dba sig¢a-bikéama, hégaji. Kgi¢e of ama At length late in the person some they leftatrailinalong a great Behold the tents evening line many. sakiba™wat¢af té. Maetein’ge ak& qa¢i® ¢anka wé¢ai té. Mi” ¢a® hide- we had them side by side. Rabbit the(sub.) Pawnee the(pl.ob.) found them. Sun the at the qtei té’di, égi¢e, Mactcin’ge yf amaja tkima’’¢i" ag¢af cde agi amama, af té. 9 very when, behold, Rabbit tent tothe as a visitor hewent but he is coming back, said bottom : they say, they. With! with! af té. Nikaci=ga amd za‘ai éga® can’ge ama a*ha-biama. With! with! he said. People the making as horse the fled _ they say. (sub.) an uproar (sub.) Pan‘ka amd nika¢iqe adaf té. Mactein’ge éduthai té. qa¢i" ¢anka g¢ini Ponka the tochase the foe went. Rabbit joined in it. Pawnee the (pl.) sat ¢an’di abfi té. Ga” égax i¢a™wa¢at ga” édiqti ahi yi, Cgi¢e ¢ingat té. 12 at the they arrived. And around it they placed them so just there shove? behold, there were none. . arrive Niactga fyindq¢ai té. Umar‘e 4", hi"bdé, uta”, can’ge wéka"ta® a¢i™i People had hid themselves. Provisions carried, moccasin, leggings, horse lariat they had s “ . . eee , oe te ee ge ctéwa™, ons éoa® a’ ¢ai té hégaji a™¢izai té. Gat Waii’’-qude ama the soever, they dropped as theyaban- as a great “we took. And tobe-gray the (pl ob.) doned many (sub.) eca” yfi. Ga nikaci"ga am& dahé b¢tiga unai sig¢é ctéwa™ wé¢a-baji 15 near camped. And people the hill all hunted trail inthe least they found not Ga™ an’eu an’ga¢i*dita® niaci*ga na”ba é'di twagi¢a ahfi té, wii’ ¢e ci And we we who moved from man two there totellthem they arrived, my elder his brother tent té/ja. Niaciga dba ga¢andi wé¢a-biama éga", wenaxifa ati-bi cde sig¢é at the. People some inthat(place) they found them, as, to attack them they came, but trail they say they say s das t * D n/ oes “ ctéwa™ ¢ingai; uma” ‘e b¢igaqti waca-biama. Ada® ata™ ma®oni™ t& eta" 18 inthe least there was provisions all they snatched from Therefore when youwalk the tothat none; them, they say. time = : I ~/ ~ / : can’ge eé-ma wa¢akihide te, af Ada, u+! Ha” gé’ ctéwa™ wa¢akibide te, horse those you watch them will, he indeed, halloo! Night fe soever you watch them will, says (pl.) af Ada, u+! 4-biamé. Ga™ é tiwagi¢a ahi-biama af ana‘a". Gat™ a™wat- he indeed, halloo! — said they, And that to tell them they arrived, they I heard. And We sur- says they say. they say said rounded 12 18 380 THE ¢@EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS, nase-hna™ ca™ca". Egi¢e Caa™ d‘iba ati ami. Ki &@di angéhii. Ki the regu- always. Atlength Dakota some caine the And there we arrived. And herds larly (sub.). Pan’ka am& wandce waxai. Wandce amd nikagahi edabe ukikiai té. Ponka the (sub.) police made them. Police the (sub.) chief also they talked together. x * Ps ’ su : Hau! ca” ha, af. Gat aé-ma iénaxi¢ai. Mitiwahéga-baji. Ga’ Caa™ ama Ho! enough . they And the buffa- they attacked. They shot down a great And Dakota the said. loes many. (sub.) *n/ rs iss onl) gra ce a ° eddbe wandse. Wati™ akfi éga", cka™ji g¢i” té'di, égi¢e, Ca-i cangag¢i" also surrounded Carrying reached having, motionless they when, behold, Yonder riding a horse the herd. them home sat 3 he comes wi” hau, af. Egi¢e fbaha"-hna™i. U¢ati-bi ¢ aka hau, af. Ati hi. one ! they (sub.) related. . Y . . , . vl s = . nasai, af U¢dti-bi aké. ye-niga g¢éba-na™ba ki 6di na” ba wan’ ganasai, rounded said U¢d'1-bi the Buffalo bull ten two and there two we surrounded them, them, (sub.). éde cénaa®wa™ ¢éqtia™i, af. Ede ddé¢a™baqti-éga™ ye-niga ama t’dawagat, but we utterly destroyed them, he But about seven buffalo bull the they killed us, said. : (pl. sub.) an , i , : tien (a af. Ki Hi-b¢éa® ama, Kbé-hna™ itd, e¢éga” éga", wakan‘di¢éga" wand‘a" he And Fish-smeller the Who only it may ihey as, impatiently they hear it said. (sub.), be, though* taité.. Nazandaji t’é¢ai, af. Namn’ge-ti¢e t’é¢ai, af. Na®ba-ma™¢i” t’é¢ai, af shall. Seeks-no-refuge is killed, he To-run-he-starts is killed, he Two-walking is killed, he said. said. said. Miixa-najm té¢ai, af. CaAnugahi t’é¢ai, af. Na™ba uctat ¢a™ja iyaje awd- Stuck in he is killed, he Lig-head is killed, he Two remained though his name T re- obliquely stands said. said. . *% 1s * / ~ ‘sla / : si¢a-maji ha. Gai: qa¢i® g¢éba-na”ba ki édi na™ba weanaxi¢ai éde member Inot A Hesaid Pawnee tens two and there two they attacked us but them as follows: , o OEE G n/ *n/ n n/ n] . { ome), *n/ a Ww ba Oe cenawa¢eqtia® 1, al. a” ni™ja a®wa" da"bal, zani gini”, wi" ecte ta-baji. they were utterly he And alive °* wesaw them, all recovered, even one he died not. destroyed, said. qi¢i® ama hégaji améga™ wéahidéqti wa¢i" ahfi, cénawa¢a-biama. Na™ba- Pawnee the a great they were, to a very great they went after they exterminated them, By (sub.) many as distance them, they say. 3 gamba” oti téwadat té, ukidwata"ta” wiriqtci-¢a"¢a” waq¢i wagi" agai te. twos too they killed them, one after another by ones killing them they went after them. e ie - ; See Ga” wan’gakiji. Waii™’-qide-ma watcigaxe-hna" ca™ca". Wiji¢e aka And we came together Waii"’-qude the they danced regularly without My elder the again. (pl.) stopping. brother (sub.) pehan’ga wi" té¢é aka. Ga wa‘a™ uhé¢ai té: a : tine first one theonewhokilled. And song they carried itaround: SSS Sas Hi-af-o-his Hi-af-o-hi+, Hli-af-e-hi+, Hi-af-o-hi+.. U-bi-sk ails THE DEFEAT OF THE PAWNEES BY THE PONKAS IN 1855. 381 Ss < as ine i : = — mm = ——— t == T Gg tec e939 8 ee @ «7 o@ cté he+ - -wa-qtcike+, Cu-e¢e-¢i-ji a-he+, Gan’-ki na"-wa-pe+, The any first, He did not send him And they fear us, home to you | = | t Cé-na-wa- oe a-he+. Ciide-gixe ijin’ge 6’di efi" abi-bi ega® 9 lagi They were exterminated. Cide-gaxe hisson there carrying shearrived, taeiie Pawnee ¢ : him they say wi” tdé¢ai ké gahd dAtanki¢ai té. Ci wi” gahd atanki¢ai te. Na™ba 3 one lie was the upon he caused him to Again one “upon he caused him to Two killed (ob.) a tread on. tread on. = FIG , , oeye oi A Atanki¢ai té. Ga Na*bé-wata™ yaje a¢in’ki¢at te. , he caused him to And Two-he-trod-on-them hisname he caused him to tread on. have it. NOTES. Sanssouci says that this occurred in the summer, and he thinks that it was earlier than 1855. 378, 6. b¢ugaqti, pronounced b¢u+gaqti by the narrator. 378, 16. ega®qti a¢it akama. He sat between two men, who held him. Each of them had one hand on a knife, to kitl him if he stirred. 378, 16. Amaha-u¢ici is another name of Agaha-ma?¢i7, meaning, “He who is un- willing to share his lodge with another.” See “amahe” and “ wamahe” in the Dictionary. 379, 7-8. ji ama sakiba"wa™¢ai. The camps of the two parties of Ponkas, the Waiir- qude and the Hu-b¢a*, were placed side by side. The Hu-b¢a™ chief sent two messen- gers to Ubiski, to put him and the Waii®-qude on their guard. As the two camps were close together, it was very easy for Nuda®/-axa, who belonged to the Hu-b¢a*, to hear what the criers proclaimed. 379, 8. MactcinNge was a brother of Hidiga (Myth-teller), A*haji (Flees not), or aa¢i®-wa‘u (Pawnee woman) of the Wacabe gens.” 379, 16. 631 té/9a—Nuda*-axa; e ii té’49a.—Frank La Fléche. 380, 1. Caa" d‘uba. These were about forty lodges of Yanktons, with whom the Hu-b¢a® camped. 380, 5. U¢ati-bi or Ma*tcu-Kina"papi was a member of the Wajaje or Reptile gens. 380, 7. By “buffalo bulls” he meant the Pawnees. 380, 16. wangakiji, from wakiji, refers to the two parties of the same tribe. When two tribes come together again and camp, and then travel together, akikiji is used. Sanssouci says that when the Omahas were on the Platte River, in 1855, the Ponkas and Yanktons attacked the Pawnee:, some of whom were opposite Fremont, Neb., the others being about five or six miles distant. The former were the gé¢i"- maha and the Pitah4wirataé. Several Omaha messengers were there at the time of the attack. The Omahas had sent word to the Pawnees to come in on a friendly visit. Indé-snede (Long-Face) killed an Omaha Wéji"cte woman who was among the Ponkas; and Black Crow, the head of the Ponka Nika-daona gens, was wounded. Two Omanes, 382 THE (EGIUA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. Mazi-kide (Shot at a Cedar), and Mika-qega, rushed into the Ponka ranks. The Poukas questioned them as to the numbers of the Pawnees, and then sent them back, saying, “Phe Yanktons would like to kill you.” Returning, they told the Pawnees that the enemy were few. The Pawnees charged and routed the Ponkas and Yanktons, driving some of them into the Platte River. This was in the fall of 1855, and after Ubi-ski’s victory. TRANSLATION. The Pawnees warred on us incessantly. And this old man, Agaha-mna"¢i" (Ile walks over them), had a sister who was captured by the Pawnees. And Agaha-man¢i" wished to see her, and he spoke of dying. Early one morning he was missing. The Pawnees dwelt in a land which was in that direction. He continued passing thither- ward. He slept in lonesome places. At length he arrived early one morning. The Pawnees arrested him. ‘: What is your business?” said they. ‘I havea girlasa near blood-relation, but you have taken her captive. I wish you to tell me where you have killed her. I walk so that the dogs may eat me there,” said Agaha-ma¢i". The Pawnees were astonished. They pressed their hands against their mouths. “ Really! he does not fear death,” said they. All the Pawnees assembled, Agaha-ma"¢i® sitting in the center. They questioned him again, and he answered as before. Said they, “He told the truth.” Then addressing him, they said, ‘‘ Your sister is held by those who are in the village over yonder, down the stream and out of sight. We will give her to you. You shall go thither to-morrow.” On the morrow Agaha-man¢i" went to the other Pawnees, who arrested him when they found him. They carried him at once into a lodge, and then they assembled. They spoke of killmg him. The Pawnees whom he met at the first were late in arriving, so he came very near being put to death. There was a contest, as each one wished to be the first to wound him. Just so they were keeping him. And Amaha-u¢ici sat as if unconcerned, with his robe wrapped around him, the ends held by his hands, and with his arms crossed on his breast. One came from the other Pawnees. ‘Ho! cease that. He has already taken food and drink, and has smoked,” said he. They promised to restore his sister to him. “You shall take your sister home,” said they. And on the fourth day which they mentioned to him he and his sister were to go home. And when the full time had come, they went home, two Pawnees also going with them. And they passed the other Pawnee camp on their homeward way. In about thirty days they reached home. And when they reached home with the Pawnees, they gave the latter equal numbers of moccasins, leggings, robes, and horses, and sent them home. And from that time the Ponkas and Pawnees hated one another. This was when Agaha-ma»¢i® was a young man. It was when they finished pulling off the ears of corn. When they finished burying them in caches, they departed on the hunt. And they sur- rounded the buffaloes at the Niobrara. At length, late in the evening, a great many persons left a trail in a longline. Then we placed the tents of the two parties of Ponkas side by side. Macteifge (the Rabbit) detected the Pawnees. When the sun was at the very bottom of the sky, behold, they said: “It is said that Mactcinge went to the tents as a visitor, but he is coming back.” “With! with!” said Mactcinge. As the people made an uproar the horses fled. The Ponkas went to chase the foe. Mactcinge took part in it. They reached the place where the Pawnees dwelt. And when they surrounded them and had arrived just there, behold, the Pawnees were missing. THE DEFEAT OF THE PAWNEES BY THE PONKAS IN 1855. 383 They had hid themselves. We took a great many of the things which they dropped and left; provisions in packs, moceasins, leggings, lariats. And the Waii"-qude (Gray- robes) camped very close. The Ponkas searched over all the hills, but they could not find the slightest trail. And two men from our party went to the tent of my elder brother to tell about the affair. He sent out criers who said: “They report that they found some people in that place, and when they went to attack them, there was not even the slightest trail; but they deprived them of all their provisions, ete. So be on your guard and watch your ponies. Watch them even at night.” And [ heard one say that they tiad been there to tell it. And we continued surrounding the herds. At length some Dakotas came. And we went thither. And the Ponkas made policemen. The policemen and the chiefs talked together. “iio! That will do,” said they. And they attacked the buffaloes. They shot down a great many. And the Dakotas also sur- rounded them. When they sat still after carrying the meat to the camp, they said: “Yonder comes one on horseback!” At length they recognized him. “It is Udati- bi!” they said. He came from the Waii"-qude. He reached the tent of Drum, the two being related. ‘We surrounded the herd. We surrounded twenty-two buftalo bulls, and we utterly destroyed them. But the buffalo bulls wounded about seven of us,” said he. And as the Hu-b¢a™ (Fish-smellers) thought, ‘* Who can ‘hey be?” they were impatient to hear about them. Said he, “Seeks-no-retuge is wounded. Starts-to- run is wounded. Two-Walking is wounded. Standing-with-bent-legs is wounded. Big-head is wounded.” Though two remained, I do not remember the names. Te said as follows: “Twenty-two Pawnees attacked us, but they were utterly destroyed.” And we saw them alive; all recovered, not even one died. As the Pawnees were a great many, they chased them to a great distance before they exterminated them. They killed them by twos; they killed them by ones, one after another, as they went along. And we, the Hu-b¢a® and Waii"-qude, came together again. The Waii®-qude danced . continually. My elder brother was the first to kill one of the foe. So they passed the song around: “ Hi-ai-o-hi+! Hi-ai-o-hi+! Hi-ai-o-hi+! Hi-ai-o-hi+! U-bi-ski was he! The first one was he! He did not send him home to you! And they fear us! They were exterminated!” Smoke-Maker’s new-born son was carried to the battle-field by an old woman, and Was caused to put his feet on two dead Pawnees. Therefore they made him have the name, Trod-on-Two. Loe) 384 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. OMAHA HISTORICAL TEXTS. HISTORY OF ICIBAJI. OBTAINED FROM JOSEPH LA FLECHR. Ca™ niaci"ga wi” wa‘t wi” min’g¢i" yi, ci’gajin’ga widaqtci a¢i™ And man one woman one married her when, ehild only one he had. Ki ntyinga aka ‘Abaa-baji’-ctéa™, ugdca"-baji’-ctéa™, ca" edada" gdxa-baji’- And boy the(sub.) hunted not at all, he traveled not at all, indeed’ what he did not ctéa”; wa‘u-hna"qti igqtawa¢é twakié-hna™ ca”ca™. Ki niaci"ga dji ama at all; woman only loving them he talked regu- always. And people differ- the to them larly ent (oh ) iqaqa ¢ahide-hna™ ca*ca™ biama; i” cte mune wé¢igga” ¢ingé’qti éga™ evening, always ridiculed him they say; as it were without any like at ¢ahide-hna® ca"ea’-biamd. I¢adi aka endqtci ¢a‘égi¢éqtia’-biama. Ca™ they always ridiculed him they say- His father the healone pitied his own very much, they say. And niyinga ni na” gti éga"-biamd. Ci man’dé cté ¢ingé-hna" ca"ca™-biama. boy male fullygrown like theysay. Again bow even he was always without it they say. Ca” wapé ¢ingé-hna® ca"ca”-biama. Ki nujinga aka ja"-wéti" wi” gaxd- Indeed weapon he was always without it they say. And boy the wood to hit one made (sub.) with it biamdé, baxtixt dtibaha gaxd-biamaé. Ki ja™-wéti ké a¢i™-hna® ca®ea"- they say, ridges in four places hemade it, theysay. And war-club the(ob.) hehad regularly always biamd. Ki niaciga amd da*baé-bi yi, ¢ahide-hna™ ca"ca”-biama, ja®-w¢ti" they say. And people the sawit,theysay when, they always ridiculed him they sway, war-club a¢i” té. Ki niacinga ukit‘é ucté ama nuda”’-hna® ca*ca”-biamaé. Ki ¢é he had as. And people nation the rest made war regularly always they say. And this Icibaji nuda” adé-baji-hna"™ ca™ca"-biama; tbaha®-baji-biama. Ci ¢gi¢e Ieibaji to war never went they say; heknewit not theysay. Again at length maca™ na“ba i beziga méca™ waqube gaxa-biama; a¢i” té ébé ctéwa™ feather two yellow-tailed feather sacred thing -he made them,they hehad the who soever hawk say; them ibaha?-baji-biamA; ma™a™ gaxd-biamé. Egi¢e nfacitga nuda” a¢é ‘i¢e knew it not they say; by stealth he made them, they At length people to war togo spoke say. of na‘a”i hai Teibdjt aka. Ma®¢a™ ukikie aké yi, wand‘a™biamé Teibaji aka. heardit , Teibaji the By stealth they were talking when, heard them, they say Teibaji the (sub.). to each other (sub.). Ki Icibaji ak4, E’di béé ti minkd, e¢éga™-biamaé. Ki &ébé ctéwa™ ufda- And Icibaji the(sub.), There Igo will Iwho, thought they say. And who soever hetold him baji-biamé Tha” ¢inké af té’di ¢ingé té yi’, maca™ ké g¢izai yi, add- not theysay. Hismother theone lodge at the was not ie feather the hetook. when, he who (ob.) his went biama. Ha” yi nuda” ¢é ga™¢a ¢anka wakihidéqti ma™¢i"’-biama Teibaji i J they say. Night when to war to go Sach who wished wate ning em very walked they say — Teibaji closely ew / =) e 5 / . , 1 / , . ye & aki. Egi¢e a“ba yan’ge yi, nuda” a¢a-biama. Ga wéahide ahi yi, the At length day near when, to war they went, they And at a distance they when, (sub.). say. arrived HISTORY OF ICIBAJL. 385 g¢i’-biama. Gan‘ki ucté amd wi" ¢a"¢a" 6'di u¢éwi® ahf{ naji"’-biamé; they sat, they say. And the rest one by one there assembling arriving stood they say; ugéwinyi¢a-biama. Egiée nuda”hanga aké Icibaji éduthai té {baha®-bajf- they collected themselves, It hap- war-chief the Tcibajl he joinedit the did not know it they say. pened that (sub.) biama. Nuda™ amd wan’gi¢éqti u¢éwi® ahi-biamd. Egi¢e Icibaji aka all they say. The warriors assembling arrived, they say. Behold Icibajt the wa¢iona-biama haciaja, ugds‘i" ga™-biamdé. Ga nuda™ ama da™bai té, was manifest they say inthe rear, peeping thus _ they say. And the warriors saw him when, gi-biama: Nida*hanga! wi” ati ha, 4-biamé. Ga™ nuda™hanga aka ga- they said as fol- O war-chief | one has . said they, they And war-chief the saidas lows, they say: come say. (sub.) follows biama: Nikawasa™! ébéi"te ibaha" mang¢i™i-e4, 4-biamé. Ga wagdq¢a™ they say: Warriors! who ie may to know begone ye, he said, they And servant 6 it say. na“ba da“be ahf-bi yi'ji, égi¢e, Icibaji aké akdma. Ga™ nuda”hanga two to see arrived, when, behold, Teibaji was the one, they say. And war-chief they say ¢inké'di ak{-bi yi, Nuda™hanga! [cibaji aké aka ha, 4-biamé. Nuda™hanga by the they when, O war-chief ! Teibaji he is the . said they, they War-chief reached again, one say. they say aké gf¢éqtia”-biamd. Nikawasa™! agi gfi-ca Wat ‘iwa¢d magi” yi, the wasvery glad they say. Warriors! - bring him hither. Woman talking hewalked when, (sub.) i of them i¢aqaqa ma*hni™ tabace, 4-biama. Agfahf{-bi ega™ a¢i™ ak{-biam4. Hei¢e, youlaughed youwalked necessarily, said he,they Arrived for him, having they reached there again Behold, at him say. they say with him, they say. man‘dé cté ¢ingd-bi, ki hitbé cté ¢ingé akéma Icibdji ak&. Gat’, Nika- bow even had none, and moccasin even had none, they say Teibaji the And, War- they say, (sub.). wasa™! hitbé 4i-ga, 4-biamé nuda™hanga aké. Gat, Ci ma™ cti ‘fi-ga, riors! moccasin give ye said, they say war-chief the Ami, Again arrow too give ye to him (sub.). to him, a-biama Nikaci"ga wan’gi¢éqti ma™ na™bd¢a™¢a™ ‘{-biamd, hi™bé wit’ said he, they Man all arrow two each they gave to moccasin one Say. him, they say edibe ¢a™a” ‘i-biamd. Ci jaonan’ge édega™ qéga éde gasd-bi ega™, also (from) each they gave to Again ash-tree but dry but cut down, having, him, they say. they say man‘dé gidxa-biamaé. Ga™ a¢d-biamé Ca™ ga™ ja™-hna™-biamd. Ga™ bow they made for him, So they went, they * As usual they slept regularly, they So they say. say. say. ci a¢a-biama égasani yi. Kgi¢e ha” Ahigi ja”-biamé. again they went, they thenextday when. Atlength night many they slept, they say say. Kgi¢e nikaci"ga wi” i¢a-biamé nuda” amd. Nikaci"ga f¢a-biamd yi, At length person one found, they say the warriors. Person oe. found him, when, they say Nida*hanga, nikaci"ga ¢i" ¢é uska”ska"qti { ¢i" A¢a!l Hau! nikawasa’, O war-chief, person the this rightinaline with is coming indeed! Ho! warriors, (mv. ob.) a . Ac ° . ° . ° / p é angunai A¢a, angdqcei tai Ada, 4-biamé. Ga" yig¢ita"-biamaé nuda” ama, that weseek him indeed, letus killhim indeed, said he, they And prepared they say the warriors. . say. themselves yi‘a”-biama, ma™¢in’ka zi wasésa™ eddbe fyi‘a’-biama. Wasésa" ubiqpa¢ai They painted them- earth yellow white clay also they painted them- White clay fell as they selves, they say, selves with, they say. rubbed it VOL. VI 25 12 15 18 12 15 18 w 386 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STURIES, AND LETTERS. gé bahf-hna®-biamé Icibdji ak’. Ki nuda™hanga ak gd-biamd: Ega"qti the picked up, they say Icibaji the And war-chief the Said as follows, Just so (ob.) (sub.). (sub.) they say: ada* , nikawasa™, 4-biama. A™ha®, niidjathanga! éga™ éga", a-biama. Ci warrior, said he, they Yes, O war-chief! somewhat like it, saidhe,they Again say. say. nafka ké ziki¢d-biamaé. Nan‘ka ké zian’ki¢d-ga, d-biama. Ki nuda”hanga back the he made it yellow for Back the make it yellow for said he, they And war-chief (ob.) him, they say. (ob.) me, say. . , s , = — akA gd-biamd: Egatqti Ada”, nikawasa™, 4-biamé. A™ha®, nudja*hanga! the said as follows, Just so warrior, said he, they Yes, O war-chief! (sub.) they say: say. éga" éga®, 4-biamé. Ki nuda” ama hi"bé gé cté edabe g gtionuda. -biama. pulle somewhat like it, said he, they say. And the warriors moccasins the even also d off their, they say. Ki Icibaji ‘n’ki¢4-biamd. Icibdji, waii” wéagili-ga, 4-bi ega”, [cibaji And Icibaji they caused to carry Teibaji, robe carry ours for us, said, they having, Teibaji them, they say. say in’ki¢d-biamd. Icibdji (aké) gd-biam4: Nida*hanga! nfaci*ga ¢i" ya” be- cae, caused to carry Icibaji (the said as follows, O war-chief! ie man the Isee him em, they say. sub.) they say: (mv.) ona” ctécte-ma™ te ha, udgas‘i” te ha’, 4-biama. Egi¢e waonthi te ha, 4-biama only atanyrate Ido will , Ty peep will . said he, they Beware youscare lest . said, they say. him off say nuda™hanga aké. An‘kaji, ntida"hangdé! ya™be-hna” ctécte-ma™ te ha, war-chief the (sub.). Not s0,, O war-chief ! Isee him only atanyrate Ido will 5 4-biamé. Hau! kéga®, da™b4-ga hi, 4-biama. Ga™ Icibdji aka ugas‘i"- said he, they Ho! doing so, see him z said he, they And Teibaji ete peeped say. say- (sub.) biama. Egi¢e uhfackdgqtci ti ¢i” nfacitga ¢i@. Ki gan’ki g4-biama Icibaji they say. At length very near was com- man the And sere Sia as follows, Icibaji ing (mv.). they say aka: Nuda™hangé! wa” ecte ¢éta™ ati-maji, 4-biama. Ga™ iénaxi¢d-biama the O war-chief! evenonce thisfar I have not said he, they And attacked him they say (sub.) : (before) come, say. Icibaji aké. Man’dé a” ¢a-biamé, ja"-wéti" sfa™¢é’qtci a¢i”-biama. Ki Icibaji the (sub.). Bow he threw away, they say, club barely he had it, they say. And niack ga ¢i” uq¢a-bi ega™, ja*-wéti" ké igag¢i-biamé. Wa¢ahide ctéctéwa™ the he overtook, ae club the with it he killed him, They ridicule even if (ob.) they say (ob.) they say. 7] ye ws a . . . . wa"ete ¢acta” éga"-hna™i ha. Hska" wi” gawf‘a" ka”, 4-biama. Nfaci"ga at some time they stop talking usually : Oh that one Idoso to you I wish, said he, they say. Man ucté ama bguga najiha ¢izi-biama, [cibaji aka ani‘kaji ha. Ga™ ag¢4-biama. the rest hair took it, they say, Teibaji the wasnotso . And they went home- (sub.) ward, they say. Nuda” ama 4fi é¢a™be aki-biama. K¢a™be aki-biamd yi, g4-biamd: Niaci™ga The warriors village in sight of reached home, In sight of they reached when, Snes said as fol- Man they say. home, they say lows, they say: iaqtci a®¢a™ naxf¢ai éde Icibaji amé gaq¢fi, 4-biamd. Ga™ Pe‘dge wi” only one we attacked him but Teibaji the killed him, said they, they And oldman one (sub.) say. feki¢é ¢é¢a-biama. Nuda™ ama niaci"ga wi™iqtci idnaxi¢ai édega® Leibaji proclaimed it aloud, they say. The warriors man only one attacked him but Leibaji wégaq¢i, A-bi aga u+! d-biama. Ga™ iha™ gina‘a® ama. Gind‘a"™-biama killed him for they indeed halloo! said he, they And his earl it about her She heard it about hers, them, say gay. mother own, they say. they say HISTORY OF ICIBAJTI. 387 xi, ga-biamd: Gaama win'kai ¢i"te, i¢i’dab éga"-a hé, 4-biamd, ég¢ange when, she said as fol- Thatone he tells the itmay see about mine do Fi said she, ee her husband lows, they say: (mv.) truth be, for me say, Cet a : 1 ° ¢inké é wakd-bi ega”. Agta" win’ke tabida”. Q@ahide am4 té, d-biama he who that she meant, having. How pos- he tells the shall? They were ridiculing him, said, they say they say sible truth nti aka. Gan‘ki yf yahaqtci aki-bi yi, Nuda” ama nfaci*ga wi"Aqtci 3 male the And lodge the very border they reached when, The warriors man only one (sub.). again, they say idnaxi¢ai édega® Icibaji wégaq¢i, 4-bi d¢a u+! A-biamdé @e‘Age aké. Gan‘ki attacked him but Icibaji killed him for they indeed halloo! said, they say old man the And them, say (sub.). i¢adi aka naji’’-bi ega™, Aci a¢d-biamdé. Aci a¢4-bi yi, win’kai té fbaha™- his the stood, they having, out he went, they say. Ont he went, when, hetoldthe the knew it father — (sub.) say they say truth biama i¢idi aka. Gan’ki i¢adi aka can’ge-md cté ca” 4f té bétiigaqti 6 they say hisfather the. And his father the the horses even indeed lodge the everything fkine-waki¢a-biamé. Gan’‘ki [cibaji amé ga™ ma¢i"-biamé. Egi¢e nuda” toscram- made them they say. And Teibaji the Si walked they say. Atlength to war ble for (sub.) a¢a-biama. Nuda™ a¢a-bi, égi¢e ci niaci"ga diba f-ma wé¢a-biama. Ci they went, they To war they ent at length again man four those they found them, Again say. , they say, coming they say. wénaxi¢a-bi yi, ci [eibaji ama wagia"¢a-bi ega™, niaci"ga diiba ¢ankdé 9 they attacked them, when, again Icibajtl the left them, they say having, man four the ones ney, say (sub.) wan eigeqti waq¢i-biama. Ga™ ci aki-bi xi, gi-biamd: Niacitga dtba he killed them, they And again they reached when, they said as fol- Man four say. home, they say lows, they say: wea" naxi¢ai éde Icibaji ama gaq¢fi ha, 4-biamd. Ga™ @cdge wit’ feki¢é we attacked them but Icibaji the killed 7 said they, they And old man one pro- + (sub.) say. claimed it ¢é¢a-biamé. Nuda” amé nfacitga dtiba wénaxi¢ai ddega” [cibdji wégaq¢i, 12 aloud they say. The warriors man four they attacked tae Teibaji killed them them for them, a-bi a¢a u+! a-biama. Ga” éga*-hna"™ nuda™ ahi-bi yi, nfaci"ga waq¢i- they indeed halloo! said he, they And so usually onthe war- they ar- when, man he killed say say. path rived, they them say hna® ca"ca™-biama, can’ge cti wa¢i® aki-hna"-biama. regu- always they say, horse too having he reached home regularly, larly them they say. Ki i¢ddi aka min’g¢a" dgaji-biamdé. Nisiha, min’g¢a” égan-gi. Ki 15 And his father the to take a wife comiaanded him, My child, do take a wife, And (sub.) they Say. u¢i‘age-hna”-biama [cibaji aka. Egig¢e watt g¢a™-biamd ITcibaji aka. was unwilling regularly, they Teibaji the (sub.). Atlength woman married, they say Teibaji the. say G¢a"-bi yi, Icibaji aka watt ¢inké ja” ‘a™ha-baji-hna"™ ca*ca™-biama. He married when, Icibaji the woman the (ob.) lay not on her regularly always they say. her, they say (sub.) Agudi ctécte ha” yi, ja”-hna™-biama. Ki i¢ddi aka gd-biamd: Nisfha, 18 In what soever night when, Je slept usually, they say. And his father the said as follows, My child, place (sub.) they say: wait wag¢a” yi, ja”wa‘a™he-hna™i ha. Ja” ‘athdgan-gi. Pfaji ckdxe, woman they marry when, they lie on them usually c Do lie on her. Bad you do, them d-biama. Gan‘ki i¢ddi aka égi¢a"-hna" ca*ca™ qtia™-biama. Egi¢e [cibaji said he, they | And his father the said it to him always they say. Atlength Teibaji say. (sub,) regularly 12 15 18 21 388 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. aké 4maka-bajf-biamd ic‘dge ¢inké. Ga™ ha” yi, wa‘t cinkd jat’‘a"hd- the got out of patience with, old man the (ob.). And night when, woman the(ob.) he lay on her (sub.) they say biamé. A™ba yi, ca” déha"-baji-hna™ ca™ca”qti ki watt ¢inké ja™‘a"he- they say. Day when, still he rose not regularly always and woman the (ob.) he lay on her hna®™ ca®ca™ qtia’-biama. Ki watt ké déha™ ga ¢a-bi ¢a™ja, [cibaji aka regu- always very they say. - And woman the _ to arise wished, they though, Icibaji the larly (recl.) say (sub.) u¢f‘agd-biamd. Ki 4f ey4 amd waha™ a¢é-bi ctéwa™, ca™ Géha?-baji-biama. was unwilling, they say. And lodge his the removing they went, notwith- yet hearose not they say. (sub.) they say standing, qazéqtei yi’cté, waha” ahi-hna"-biamé&. Ci éga™ ha™ yi ja”-biama. Egi¢e Late in the even removing hearrived usually,they Again so night when he lay, they say. Behold, evening when, say. ha”ega"tcé’qtci ukit'® Aji d‘iba wénaxi¢d-biamé. Im¢ddi aké, qaha™ very early in the morning nation different some they attacked them, they say. His father the, Do égan-gi. Wednaxi¢ai ha. Ca™ Icibdji aké fa-bdji ja™-biamd4. Egi¢e arise. We are attacked 5 Yet Teibajl tke speaking not lay, they say. At length uhiackaqtci ati-biama yi, égi¢e, leibaji e+! Agudi oninkdi*té! wa¢i" piaji qti very near they had come, when, behold, Icibaji Ob! inwhat you whoare may keeper very bad they say place be ab¢i” éde égi¢e ¢éama i da™be taf hé, 4-biam4é wai wi” aké. Hu té Ihave but beware these seeforme lest . said, they say woman one the. Voice the na‘a”-bi yi, Gdha*-bi ega™, wéti" ké g¢iza-biaméa. Ga™ 6'di a¢d-biama. he heard, when, arose, they having, club the he took his, they And there he went, they they say say (ob.) say. : say. Ga™ ukit‘®-ma ufha-biam4 yi, wAq¢i-hna”-biama Icibaji ak4. Ukit% And the nations he joined, they say when, killed them regularly, they Teibaji the Enemy (enemy) say (sub.). hégactewa™ji waq¢i-biamdé, ca” wan'gi¢e. Niaci"ga wactice na"ba-biama. a great many he killed them, they say, in fact all. Man brave two they say. Wi” Undhe ijaje agi” aka, Han’ga-biama. [cibaji aké uika"-biam4. Wactice One Unahe his name 6 had it, a Hanga they say. leibajl the helped him, they say. Bravery té ékiga™gqtia”-biama. Ga™ Icibaji [ak4] ta" wang¢a™ ey4 amd qtdgide’- the they were just alike, they say. And Icibaji [he who] nation his the (sub.) loved him very qtia”-biama. dearly, they say. Egi¢e ci nuda™ a¢a-biama yi, nfaci"ga wi” wacticeqti ¢i"te jug¢a- Atlength again to war they went, they when, man one very brave itmay be was with say him biamé. pextyja™ ijaje agi” aka, yra”za-biama. Kiad¢a-bi yi, gé¢ega’’-biama they say. ‘Lexuja" hisname he had it, ayaze they say. And they went, when, thought thus, they say ey say akiwa: Wia"wa nan‘de ¢a” ataqti a’ ¢i" éda", e¢éga*-biama. LEgi¢e ta”- both: Which one heart the very much we are i] they thought, they say. Atlength vil- (ob.) more Wy (in thought) wang¢a" hégactewa™ji édi-¢a” ama. ‘di ahi-biamé. Ga™ 6'di ahi-bi yi, lage very populous was there they say. There they arrived, they And there they ar- when, Bay. rived, they say ga-biama: Nikawasa™, ¢ag¢é tai ha, 4-biama; ucté ama ¢ waké-bi ega™. they said as fol- Warriors, you go__ will . saidthey,they remain- the that meantit,they having. lows, they say: homeward say ; der (pl.) say . Wéahide mang¢i"i-ga, 4-biamé. Ga™ wagdq¢a" ama ag¢a-biama. Ga” To a distance begone ye, _ said they, they And servant the went homeward, they And say. (pl.) say. HISTORY OF ICIBAJI. 389 Lextyja", [cibdji e¢a™ ba, E’di anga¢e te, A-biama, niin’de fyidaha"™ ga®¢A-bi (Lexuja’, Teibajl he too, There let us go, said they,they heart to knowtheir the wished, say, they say ega™. i'di ahf-bi yi, égaxe afi ¢a™ sna” sna"qtia” ama. i yan’ge ahf-bi because. There they ar- when, around village the very level they say. Village near they ar- rived, they (cy. ob.) rived, they say say y1, égi¢e, nfaci"ga amdé banan’ge-kidé-biama. Akio’ qti naji”-biamé. Ki when, behold, men the (sub.) shot at the rolling hoops, they say. Ina Pare they stood, they say. And crow mi” ¢uma*efqtia’”-biama. Ga™, EAta® a” ¢i® yi, &/di anedhi téda A-biama >] ? tao} ’ it was just noon they say. And, How we be if, there we reach shall? said, they say Lextija" ak&. Ki Icibaji aka’ gé-biama: Kagéha, wahi ¢é¢a" nack{ ¢a® ‘Lexuja® ’ the And Teibaji the said as follows, Friend, bone this head the (sub.). (sub.) they say : (ob.) angig¢a” té, 4-biamd, je-sin’de-q¢ti‘a waht ski’qti édedi-¢a" & wak4-bi ega™. let us put in, said he, they buffalo-pelvis bone very white uae ones that meant,they having. say, ere say Ga” mi”de &'di a¢é-biamdé. Ca” gé¢ega™-hna”-biama: Hindd! wit’a"wa And crawling there they went, they Yet ehey shone ht only they say: Let us see! which one say. us na”a"pe téda, e¢éga’-hna”-biamdé. Gan’‘ki nfaci"ga banan’ge-kide amd we fear seen will? they thought only they say. And man shot at rolling hoops the danger (sub.) wahf wi" da"ba-bi yf, égi¢e, uhfackégtci tiga” wahf ¢a". Gd-biamé: bone one they looked at, when, behold, very close had be- bone the. One said as fol- they say come lows, they say: Kagéha, wahi ¢é¢a" wéahideaydqti ¢a™cti, A-biama. Ki wi’ ga-biama. Friend, bone this ata very great distance heretofore, said he, they And one _ said as follows, 2 say. they say: Kagéha, &'di ca%ca", a-biamé. Egi¢e ga™te-jin’ga yi, égi¢e, uhfackaqtei Friend, there always, said he,theysay. Atlength a while little when, behold, very close ti¢a™ wahf ¢a". Kagéha, waht ¢é¢a" wéahide ecd ¢a™ cti, uhfackagtei ti ha, became bone the. Friend, bone this atadistance you heretofore, very close it has said come d-biama. KY pextyja" aké g4-biamd: Wedbaha™i. Weéadai hi, 4-biamé. ? said he, they And ‘Lexuja” the said as follows, They know us. They havede- . said he, they say. (sub.) they say: tected us say. Ga” Icibaji ak4 gd-biamd: Ca, A-biama. Ga” Lexuja” aka, Ahati! 4-bi And Teibaji the said as follows, Enough, said he, they And Lexuja® the Oho! said, (sub.) they say: say. (sub.), they say ega™, wah{ a™¢a ¢é¢a-biamé, wénaxi¢d-biama, banan’ge-kfde ¢anika. Gat’ having, bone they threw far _ they say, ghey ees they say, shotatrollinghoops those who. And away em aki¢aha wi” gaq¢{-biamd, banan’ge-kide ¢anika. Ga” agd¢d-biamd. Ga” t both one ey illed him, shot at rolling hoops ose who. And they went home- And hey say, < ward, they say. ukit ama: Na™baqtciai! awa" ¢ige taf ha, A-biamé. Wa¢iqe wa¢i” a¢a- enemy the They are only two! let us chase them - said they, they Chasing them they went with (sub.): say. them biamé. Egi¢e wéahidé’qti wa¢i” ahi-bi 31’j1, utcfje ubiazd-biama. Utefje they say. Atlength atavery great they carried them, when, thicket scared them into, they Thicket distance they say say. ciigaqti égiha did¢a-biamé pextija" aké [cibdji e¢a® ba. Ga™ wa¢i‘A-biama very dense headlong had gone they say Lexuja® the Teibajt 6 too. And they failed with them, (sub.) they say ukft‘é am4. Ga™ éga™-hna® ca™ca™ qtia”-biama akiwa. enemy the And so regu- continually they say _— both. (sab.). larly 12 15 18 390 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. NOTES. The exact meaning of Icibaji is uncertain: it may mean, “‘ He to whom they do not give any wages.” This is still a sacred name in the je-sinde gens, being borne by a son of the present head of the gens. 384, 7. ja®-weti™. This was about two feet long, and four inches in diameter. 385, 4. ga®-biama, in this way. The narrator said this when he imitated the action. 386, 3. nanka ké ziki¢a-biama. He made his back like that of the sparrow-hawk. 386, 7-8. ya"be-ona™ ctecte ma? te ha, in poiwere, ‘ata-ona qe hau” td,” I wish to see him at any rate; but ‘“ga™be te-hna” cte ma” te ha,” in coiwere, “at& yi tanyi hau™ t6,” I cannot do anything else, I must see him at all events.—Sanssouci. 387, 7. ikinewaki¢a-biama. ‘The father of Icibaji was so proud of his son’s success that he let the people scramble for the possession of all his property, as well as for his ponies. Chips were thrown into the air, each representing a piece of property. Who- ever caught the chip as it descended, won the article. There were other adventures of the two, but I have not preserved them in @egiha. Only one of these was gained and written in English, and it occurred after the adventures given here in the text. Mothers used to scare their children, telling them that Icibaji or jexuja™ would catch them if they did not behave. TRANSLATION. A man took a wife and had one child. The boy did not hunt at all, he did not travel at all; indeed, he did nothing at all; as he was fond of the women, he was always talking to them. The people laughed at him and derided him as a boy without any sense. The father was the only one who spared him. He became a man; but he had no bow, and he was without any other weapons. The boy made a four-sided club, which he always had with him. When the people saw it, they always laughed at it. And hostile nations were continually going on the war-path; but this Icibaji never went, as he knew nothing about it. At length he made sacred two quill-feathers of a sparrow-hawk. He did this secretly. No one knew that he had them. At length Icibaji heard the men speak of going on the war-path. When they were talking to each other by stealth, Icibaji overheard them. And he thought, “TI will go thither.” But he did not tell it to any one at all. When his mother was not at the lodge, he took his quill-feathers and departed. When it was night Icibaji walked, watching very closely those who desired to go on the war-path. At length when day was near, they went on the war-path. And when they arrived some distance from the village, they sat down. And the rest assembling, one by one, came and stood; they assembled themselves. It happened that the war-chief did not know that Icibaji had joined the party. All of the warriors arrived. At length Icibaji was visible at the rear, peeping thus. And the warriors said as follows: ‘“‘O war-chief! one has come.” And the war-chief said as follows: “‘O warriors! begone and see who it is.” And when two servants went to see, behold, it was Icibaji. And when they returned to the war-chief, they said, “O war-chief! Icibajiis the one.” The war-chief was very glad. “O warriors! bring him hither. When he walked talking about the women, you were bound to laugh at him; but now it is otherwise.” They went for him and brought him back. Behold, he had HISTORY OF IGCIBAJY. 391 no bow, and he was destitute even of moccasins. “O warriors! give him moccasins and arrows too,” said the war-chief. All the warriors gave him arrows, two from each. They also gave him moccasins, one pair from each man. They cut down a dry ash tree, and made a bow for him. So they departed. They slept regularly as usual, and when it was the next day they departed again. At length they had slept many nights. At length the warriors detected a man. When they detected the man, they said, “O war-chief! a man is indeed coming right in a line with our course.” “Ho! warriors, he is indeed the one whom we seek. Let us kill him!” And the warriors prepared themselves; they painted themselves; they painted themselves with yellow earth and white clay. Icibaji picked up all the pieces of white clay which fell as they rubbed it on themselves. And the war-chief said as follows: “Does it have to be just this way, O war- rior?” “Yes, O war-chief! somewhat like it,” said Icibaji. And he made his back yellow forhim. “Make my back yellow,” said Icibaji. And the war-chief said as follows: “Does it have to be just so, warrior?” “Yes, O war-chief! somewhat like it,” said Icibaji. And the warriors pulled off their leggings and moccasins also. And they made Icibaji carry them. “Tcibaji, carry them for us,” said they; and they made him carry them. Icibaji said as follows: “O war-chief! I wish to see the man at any rate.” “Beware lest you scare him off!” said the war-chief. ‘No, O war-chief! I wish to see him at any rate,” said Icibaji. “Ho! Doso and look at him,” said the war-chief, And Icibaji peeped at him. At length the man had come very near. And then Icibaji said as follows: “O war-chief! not even once hitherto have I come this distance.” And Icibaji attacked him. He threw away the bow, having only the club. And having overtaken the man, he killed him with the club. ‘Even though men ridicule one, they usually stop it at some time. I wish that I could serve some one of you in that way,” said he to the others. All the other warriors took parts of the scalp; but Icibaji did not. So they went home- ward. When the warriors came again in sight of the village, they-said as follows: “We attacked a man, and Icibaji killed him.” And ah old man proclaimed it aloud: “The warriors attacked aman, but Icibaji killed him for them, they say, indeed, halloo!” And the mother of Icibaji heard it. When she heard it, she said as follows, addressing her husband: “Do see for me whether that one tells the truth.” “How is it possible for him to tell the truth? They were ridiculing him,” said the husband. And when they had reached the very border of the encampment, the old man said, “The warriors attacked a man, but Icibaji did indeed kill him for them, halloo!” And the father hav- ing stood, went out of doors. When the father got out, he knew that they told the truth. And the father caused the people to scramble for his horses, and, in fact, for everything in hislodge. And Icibaji continued so. At length they went on the war-path. When they went on the war-path, behold, they discovered four men approaching. Again when they attacked them, Icibaji left his comrades behind, and killed all four of the men. And again when they reached home they said as follows: “We attacked four men, but Icibaji killed them.” And an old man proclaimed it aloud. “The warriors attacked four men, but Icibaji killed them for them, they say, indeed, halloo!” And it was usually so when they reached any place when they were on the war-path: he always killed the men, and also brought back horses. : And his father commanded him to marry. “My child, do take a wife.” And Icibaji was unwilling for some time. At length Icibaji took a woman. When he married her, Icibaji never lay with the woman. In what place soever he was when 392 ‘THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. night came, there he usually slept. And his father said as follows: “My child, when they marry women, they usually lie with them. Do lie with her. You do wrong.” And his father was saying it to him incessantly. At length Icibaji got out of patience with the old man. And when it was night, he lay with the woman. When it was day still he did not rise; he continued to lie with the woman without intermission. And though the woman wished to rise, Icibajf was unwilling. And notwithstanding their lodges removed and departed, he did not rise. When it was very late in the evening he usually reached them. Again when it was night, so he lay. Behold, very early in the morning, some men belonging to different hostile tribes attacked them. His father said: “Do arise. We are attacked.” Yet Icibaji lay without speaking. At length when they had come very near, behold, a woman said, ‘Oh! Icibaji, in what place can you be? I have a very bad captor. Beware lest he see my parts which should not be seen!” When he heard her voice, he arose and took his club. And he went thither. When he joined the foe, Icibaji was killing them. He killed a great many of the enemy; in fact, all. The brave men were two. One was named Unahe, a member of the Hatga gens. Icibaji helped him. They were equally brave. And his nation loved Icibaji very dearly. At length, when they went again on the war-path, one very brave man went with him. jjexuja® was his name, and he was a member of the Kansas gens. And as they went, each one thought thus: ‘Which one of us has the best heart?” At length a very populous village was there. They arrived at it. And when they arrived there, they addressed the rest of the party, saying as follows: “‘ Warriors, you will go home- ward. Begone ye toa distance.” And the servants went homeward. And jexuja® and Icibaji said, ‘Let us go thither,” because they wished to know their own hearts. When they arrived there, it was very level around the village. When they were close to the village, behold, the men were playing the game banaige-kide (shooting at roll- ing hoops). They were standing in a great crowd. And it was just at noon. And pexuja® said to himself, “‘ How shall we be when we go thither?” And Icibaji said as follows: ‘Friend, let us put our heads in these bones,” referring to the very white buffalo pelvis bones that lay there. And having put them on, they went crawling. Yet each one thought thus: “Let me see! which one of us will fear danger when he sees it?” And when the men who played banaiige-kide looked at one of the bones, behold, the bone had become very near. And one said as follows: ‘Friend, this bone was ata very great distance heretofore.” And another said as follows: “ Friend, it was always there.” At length after a little while, behold, it had become very close. “Friend, you said heretofore that this bone was at a distance. It has come very close,” said one. And zexuja" said as follows: ‘They recognize us. They have detected us.” And Icibaji said as follows: “It is enough.” And when gexuja® said, “Oho!” they threw away the bones, and attacked those who played banange-kide. And each of them killed one of the players. And they went homeward. And the enemy said, “They are only two! Let us chase them.” They went along in pursuit of them. At length the two carried their pursuers to a very great distance. And the pursuers scared the two into a thicket. ,exuja™ and Icibaji had gone headlong into a very dense thicket. And the enemy failed to do anything to them. And both were so continually. te 7" THE STORY OF WABASKAHA. 393 THE STORY OF WABASKAHA. ToLp By JosrPH LA F'LECHE. Ta” wa"-ni ké'di g¢i”’-biamé Uma”ha" ama. Kgi¢e qa¢i® nuda” atf-bi Village water bythe sat they say Omahas the Atlength Pawnees to war came, (sub.). they say ega™, can’ge d‘tiba wi¢i" ag¢a-biamd. Ki nfaci"ga ey aké nfaci’ga ¢ab¢i" having, horse some they took homeward, they say. And man their he who man three jiwaged-bi ega™, sig¢é ké witthe a¢d-biama, can’ge wa¢i" a¢af ké sig¢e ké. 3 with them, they having, trail the following he went, they horse having they the trai the. say (ob.) them say, them went Niacitga withe a¢é akdé, Wabaskdha ijaje a¢i”-biamd. A¢ad-bi ega™, Man following went the Wabaskaha hisname had they say. Went, they having, them (sub.), say wateicka wi’, Republican ijdje-¢adai, ki qa¢i” ama Ki¢a¢ida iaje-¢adat stream one, Republican hisname they and Pawnees the i¢gaguda hisname they call it, (sub.) eallit ké, &di ahf-biamé. E’di ga¢i® ama 6’di ta” wa™ g¢i’-biama. H’di wa¢i" 6 ’ the there they arrived, There Pawnees the there village sat they say. There having (ob.), they say. (pl. sub.) them aki-biama cani’ge-ma. Ga™ méda™ ama. Ga™ @'di ahi-bi ega”, y{ uda- they reached the horses (ob.). And duringthe they And there arrived, having, lodge they home, they say spring say. they say entered biamé. Hau.e T’éwa¢é ga®¢d-biama qa¢i® ama Uma™ha® ¢anka. Ki qa¢i" they say. 7 Tokillthem wished they say Pawnees the (sub.) Omahas the (ob.). And Pawnees a am ucté amd t’éwa¢é ga™¢a-bajf-biamd. Ki nikagahi yf udaf aka fe 9 the the rest tokillthem did not wish they say. And chief lodge they theone he (sub.) enteredit who spoke etéwa™ -baji-biamé. Ga™, T’éwa¢é ga™ ¢ai yi cté téwadé taité, e¢éga™ éga”, at all not they say. And, Tokillthem thoywish evenif theykillthem shall, hethought as, {a-bajf-biamé. Egi¢e nikagahi igiq¢a” aka ni agfag¢a-biama. A¢i” ag¢f-bi he not they say. Atlength ~- chief his wife the water wentfor they say. She brought it back, spoke (sub.) they say yi, Uma™ha" ¢anka ni té wa‘i-biama. Gan’ki 44 hébe ¢iza-bi ega™, iig¢a™- 12 when, Omahas the (ob.) water the she gave them, And dried pieces shetook, having, to putin (ob.) they say- meat they say the mouth waki¢a-biama, ni”ja wéga¢d-bi ega”, wa‘t aka. Hau. Wa¢ata-bi yi, ga- she caused them, they to live she desired for because, woman the - 7 They ate, they say when, saidas say, them, they say (sub.). follows biamé nikagahi aké: Ké! can’gaxd-ba Aci mang¢i"i-gi. Ni™ya wéga™¢éga™ they say chief the Come! cease ye and out begone ye. Tolive she wished for (sub.): them, as wa¢dtewaki¢é, d-biamé. Bé¢iigaqti dci ag¢d-biamd. Ga™ weéku-hna”- 15 she caused them to eat, said he, they All out went they say. And invited regu- say. them larly biamA qA¢i® am4 Uma™ha® ¢anké. Ki niaci"ga wi” wéku-biam4, qa¢i" they say Pawnees the(sub.) Omahas the (ob.). And one invited them, they say, Pawnee 9 12 15 18 394 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. wahc¢ha-baji’qti-bi dite, Uma™ha™ ¢anké wéku-biama. Ki uqpé té jin’- very stout-hearted, a ysay it may be, Omahas the (ob.) he ated them, And dish the far ey say. gactéwa™ji améde hi"b¢in’ge siah¢e’ qti ugtpiqti wéku-biamé. qa¢i™ aka Poin small they were, but beans alone very full he invited them, Pawnee the they say. (sub.) ja"-wéti" wi" adi” ak&ma. gnasniti yi, gaké fwigdg¢i taf minké. Ci club one was keeping, theysay. Yedevourit if, that(ob.) Ikillyouwith will Iwho. Again onf‘ai yi’cté, gdké fwigdq¢i taf minkdé, 4-biama. Egi¢e ¢asni”-biamd; ye failto evenif, that(ob.) Ikillyou with will I who, said he, they At length they swallowed it, do it say. they say; inandéqtia”-bi ca” ¢asni”-biama. Gaq¢i-baji-biama. Ca” ha. Qnasni”, they were satiated, yet they swallowed it, He did not kill they say. Enough . You have they say they say. swallowed it, j-biamé. Ki égasdni yi, twakid-biama qa¢i® ama Uma™ha™ ¢anka: he said, they say. And ike nextday when, talked tothem, theysay Pawnees the (sub.) Omahas the (ob.): Kagéha, can’ge ¢ank& wid¢ag¢é ¢atti ¢a“ja, wagag¢doni" ¢ag¢a-baji taité, Friends, oes the (ob.) you have come for though, them you have, your you go not shall, them, your own own homeward d-biami. T‘a™ yi, wad¢ag¢é ¢ati te, 4-biama. Ki t'a” yi, ¢ati yi, maqude said they, they Harvest when, youcome for them, will, saidthey,they And harvest when, you when, gunpowder say. your own say. come ditiba wé¢aoni" ¢ati taf, 4-biam4. Ga™, A™ha™, égima™ ta minke, 4-biama some you have for you will, said they, they And, Yes, Idothat will MIwho, _ said, they say us come say. Wabaskaha aké. Ag¢a-biamd. Ag¢a-biamd yi, xagé-hna® ca®ca™ qtia’’- Wabaskaha the They went homeward, They went home- when, crying regularly all the time (sub.). they say. ward, they say biama Wabaskdha aké. Wakan‘da ¢inké gfya xagé-hna"-biamd4. Hau! they say Wabaskaha the Deity the (ob.) askinga he ered regu- they say. Ho! (sub.). favor of larly Wakan‘da, ukit‘ ¢anké a” ¢ijudjl ¢a”ja, iwi" ¢aka™ ka” eb¢éga", a-biama Wakanda, foreigners they who ill-treated me though, you help me Thope Ttgink, said he, they say xagé-ona™-bi ¢an‘di. Ga™ qad¢i-ma wiki¢a ga™¢4-biama Wabaskaha aka. erying regu. they when And cq Pawnees totakeven- wished they say Wabaskaha the larly say _— (past). geance on them (sub.). Kei¢e ha” yi padi aki-biamé. Xagé ag¢a-biama, 4fi ¢an’di akf-bi yi. Atlength night when at the they reached C eae he went homeward, vil- at the hereached when. lodges home, they say. they say, lage home, they say n/ 1: . ce Ki xagé g¢é té fbaha”’-biamé, nfaci"ga b¢liga na‘a”-biamd. Ga¢i" can‘ge And ae hewent the they knew it, they people all heardit they say. That one horse homeward say, witigihe ¢i" gf éde, xagé gi ha, 4-biama. Xaga-bi té’di, Wakan‘da ¢inké he who was follow- is com- er eryins heis . saidthey,they Hecried,they when, Deity the (ob.) ing his ing back, coming say. say ¢aha™ xaga-biamd. Gan‘ki nfaci"ga fbaha"-biama, nuda” ga’ ¢a xagé te, imploring he er: ried, they say. And people knewit theysay, to war wishing crying the. im Ug¢aji ¢a™ja, ca” fbaha™-biamd. Ga™ nfaciga bgligagti é'di ahi-bi ega™, Hetold though, yet they knew it, they And people there arrived, Taeiie not say. they say edta" xagé té na‘a™ ga™¢d-biamd. Ga™ ug¢d-biam4 Wabaskaha aka. K'di why heeried the tohear they wished, they And told his they say Wabaskaha the There it Bay. (sub.). _ as snyer og 1 . - pi ¢a™ja, can’ge ¢ankd i”’4-baji. A™¢ina t’dawd¢a-bag¢i", 4-biamd. Ki Lar- though, horse the(ob.) they did not They came near killing us, said he, they And rived give me mine. say. THE STORY OF WABASKAHA. 395 tia” yi, maqtide i”nai ha. Maqtide i” ¢i" ti-ga ha, 4-biama qa¢i? ami, harvest when, gunpowder theyasked . Gunpowder having come : said, they say Pawnee the of me for me thou (sub.), A-biama. Bog aqti niacttga ama Wabaskaha ¢a‘é¢a-bi ega™, gi¢a-baji- said he, they pe enlen the Wabaskaha pitied him, they haying, they were sad say. (sub.) say biamé. Egasdni yi, nfaci"ga b¢ tigaqti u¢cwinyi¢a-biama. Nikagahi ama, they say. The nextday when, men assembled themselves, they say. Chief the, wahéhaji ama cti, ca” bgrigaqti u¢éwinyi¢a-biama. Ki ninfba wi™ uji- stout-hearted the too, infact assembled themselves, they And pipe cne they (sub.) say. fillod biamé. Ga™ Wabaskaha aka niaci"ga bgugagti wa¢istuba-biama, yaqpi they say. And Wabaskaha the men spread his hands before crown (sub.) them, they say, of head eé wabit’-biamé. Gad-biamd: (fa‘ean’gifdi-ea ha. Edada? i"¢i” ¢aonigea” the he pressed on them, He said as follows, Pity ye me you decide for me (pl. ob.) they say. they say: yi, éga®qti ingdxai-gi ha, 4-biaméa. Ga™ nikagahi aka ninfba waqtbe if, just so do ye for me . saidhe,they say. And chief the (sub.) pipe sacred -gaxai ké uji-biamé. Ga™ od-biama: Niniba gaké, ga¢i" wan’ gaki¢a taite theymade the filled they say. And he said as follows, Pipe that (ob.), Pawnees wetake vengeance shall it (ob.) they say: on them i¢anahi™i yi, ¢andi-gi ha. Uonie‘agaf yi, ¢ana-bajfi-ga ha, 4-biama. Ga™ yeare willing if, putyethepipe . Ye are ee if, donot put the pipe ¢ said he, they And to your lips to your lips say. ¢ana-biama; nse nga b¢ligagti i”-biamé Ga-biamaé nikagahi aké: Ké! they put it to their smoked it, they Said as follows, chief the Come! lips, they say ; say. they say (sub.): a¢uha, i¢ig¢a™i-ga. Ata™ yi wan’gaki¢a tate, f¢ig¢a™i-gi. Ki wi” ga- finally, aekide ye. How when wetake vengeance , shall, decide ye. And one said as long on them follows biama: Ntidathangd, nugé ¢¢-ona™ a"wa™ ¢ate taf. Wakan’da ¢inké cti they say: O war: chief, summer this only we eat will. Deity the (ob.) too a’¢aha™ tat, uma? ‘ginka ¢é-hna™. Ta” xi, wan ‘gaki¢a tai, 4-biamda. Ga™ we pray to will, season this only. Harvest when, wetakevengeance will, said he, they And on them say. niaci"ga dtiba ade ‘hangd-biama; xagé-hna”™ ca™ca”-biama; a™ba ge’ cté man four war-chief they say; nee regu- always they say ; day aie even cried larly (pl.) ha” g&' cté xagé-hna®™ ca”ca™-biama. Wakan‘da, ¢a‘ean’gi¢a-ga. Awaji®eté night the even they regu- always they say. Wakanda, pity me. Tam ina bad (pl.) cried larly humor té @win’kan-gi, Wakan’da, ¢-hna® ca"ca”qtia”-biama. Gan’ki nugé xi, the help me, Wakanda, he said always they say. And snmmer when, regularly gaq¢a™ a¢a-bi yi, xagé-hna® ea™ca”-biamad. Niaci®ga diba a“ba gé wa¢ata- migrating they went, when, ines regu- always they say. Man four day the they ate they say cried larly (pl.) baji, ni cti ¢ata”-béji-hna”-biamé. Ha™ yi, ni ¢ata-bi-dé wa¢ate-hna”- not, water too they drank not regu- they say. Night when, water they they while they ate usually larly drank say / biama. Egi¢e t’a” yi, ag¢i-biama ta™wa™ ¢an‘di. Hau! ké, ca” ha. Anga- they say. Atlength harvest when, they came back, village to the. Ho! come, enough . Let they say . n . ¢e taf, A-biamé. Gat add-biamdé gacfbe. Ha’ ega™tcé’qtci nuda™ a¢a-biama us go, said they, they And _ they went, they ane of it. Very early in the morn- towar they went, they say. say ing say 12 15 18 12 15 18 21 396 THE GEGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. ni amd bé¢tigagti A¢aé-bi yi, égi¢e, Caa” d%iba yii ¢an‘di ahf-biama; males the all. They went, when, behold, Dakotas some village atthe arrived, they say; (sub.) they say Uma™ha™ 4fi ¢a™ ninf a¢i” ahi-biamd. Qé¢a™ba-biama. Nuda”™ b¢ugaqti Omaha village the tobacco they brought to, they say. Seven they say. To war all a”ba¢é aid¢ai té ¢ati, d-biamé. Caa” aka qd¢a ag¢a-baji, nuda” amadi to-day havegone when you said they, Dakotas the back did not go home, to those who went havecome, they say. (sub.) again to war a¢é ‘f¢a-biaméi. Gad-biama: Ucté ama ati yi, uwa¢agiona taf ha, 4-biama, togo they spoke of, They said as fol- The rest they when, youtellthem will . said they, they say. lows, they say: come they say, Caa” é wawakd-bi ega™. Gat Caa” ama dé¢a"ba ama Uma™ha?-md Dakotas that meant them, they say having. And Dakotas the seven the the Omahas witihe a¢a-biamé nuda” té. A¢a-bi ega” égi¢e agi" yfi ¢an’di ahi-biama following went theysay onthe when. They went, having at length Pawnee village at the arrived, they them war-path they say say Uma™ha™ ama nuda” té fi ya™ha ké’di ahi-biama a™ba yan’ge yi. Omahas the on the when. Village border by the they arrived, day near when. (sub.) war-path they say Wénaxi¢a gat¢d-bi ega”, yfi ya"ha ke‘di naji”’-biama. Egi¢e wénaxi¢d- Toattack them desired,they having, village border by the they stood, they say. Atlength they peeekes them say biamd a“ba yi, ga¢@-md. Ki ga¢i® am& Uma™ha™-ma wada™ba-biama they say day when, the Pawnees. And Pawnees_ the the Omahas saw them they say weénaxi¢ai té. qad¢i® ama, Wu! wednaxi¢ai ¢aja, ya™zai té ha. pajuci they attacked when. Pawnees the Why! they have attacked though, they are Kansas . equent them (sub.), us explosions égati-dé ga™ o¢é ta ama, 4-biama. Egi¢e jf ¢an’di ahi-bi ega™, égi¢e they make atlength they willgoaway, said they,they Atlength village bythe arrived, having, behold, them while - say. they say Uma™ha®-mima. Wébaha™-biami Uma™ha"-ma. Ga™ waki¢a-biama. they were Omahas moving. They knew them, they say the Omahas. And they contended with them, they say. Waki¢a-biama ¢a™ ja, aki¢a t’ékig¢é-hna”-biama: Ga¢i"-ma cti_ ?’éwa¢é-hna"’- They fought them, though, both they killed one another, regu- the Pawnees too they killed them regu- they say larly, they say: larly biamé, Uma™ha®-mii eti t’éwa¢é-hna”-biama. Egi¢e afi ¢a™ ubfsandé’qtei they say, the Omahas too they killed them regularly, they At length village the pressing very close say. upon ahi-biamdé. Egi¢e fi ¢an’di ali-bi ega”, égi¢e ma™-fji gé. Ma™-fi gé they arrived, At length village by the arrived, having, behold, lodgesof the Lodgesof the) they say. E they say earth (pl.). earth (pl. ba‘t-bi-dé usé-hna”-biamé. gqa¢i? vio wi” ba‘t-bi-dé ga¢i" amd mate they pushed holes they set afire regularly, Pawnee lodge one they pushed holes Pawnees the inside in, they say, while they say. in, they say, while (sub.) ee . 7 . GS ey t . a undji? amd aci a”ha a¢a-bi-dé, ci 4 wédajiaq4 ahi-hna”-biama. qa¢i" stood in the out fleeing they went, they again lodge elsewhere they reached regularly, Pawnees (sub.) say, while, they say. ahigi miwahégabaji-biama. Ki yii djtibaqtci ugactd-biama, qa¢i" cé- many they shot down many of them, And lodges very few remained they say, Pawnees_ they i they say. were . zs 3 . pine : nawa¢a-bi ega™. Ga” can’ge-ma cti b¢iigagti wénacd-biama qa¢i’-ma. exterminated, because. And the horses too all they took from them, the Pawnees. they say they say Ga” Caa™ dé¢a™ba nuda” withe hi ¢anka cti zanf téwa¢d-biama. And Dakotas seven to war following arrived theones too all they killed them, they them who say. yaxé-¢a ba iziga™ cti t’é¢a-biama. Crow Two hisgrand- too they killed him, father they say. > 7 7 THE STORY OF WABASKAHA. 397 NOTES. This story refers to events which occurred about a hundred years ago. Two Crows, the grandson of one of the characters, is now over fifty years of age. 393, 1. Ta"wa"-ni, Village-stream. The Omahas call two streams by this name, because they camped near them. The Ta™wa?-ni of this story, Omaha Creek, is one of their old camping-grounds, according to Half-a-Day, the tribal historian. 393, 1. ga¢i. These were the Republican Pawnees whom the Omahas call Zizika- aki¢isi” (Joseph La Fléche), or Zizika-dkisi (Sanssouci). They may be a Turkey gens. 393, 11. nikagahi igaq¢a™ aka, ete. This custom was observed by the Pawnees, Omahas, and Ponkas. Even if foes ate with them, they became relations, whom it was wrong to kill. A mouthful of food, a drink of water, or a whiff from a pipe, sufficed to establish the relationship. 394, 2. Sanssouci adds: neje-ni ¢ataiki¢ai, “he was caused to drink urine,” which was mixed with the beans. 394, 4. oni‘ai. This should be ond‘ai, from ¢a‘a, to fail in eating or drinking all. 396, 2. de¢a"ba-biama. Seven is a sacred number in the Omaha and Ponka gen- tile system, and it is the number of the original gentes of the Dakotas. See references to this in the other historical papers in this volume. _ TRANSLATION, The Omahas dwelt on Omaha Creek. It happened that a war-party of Pawnees carried off some of their horses. The owner of the horses took three men and followed their trail. The man who went following them was named Wabaskaha. Having de- parted, they arrived at the Republican River, which the Pawnees call Ki¢a¢uda. The Pawnees dwelt there in villages, to which they had taken the stolen horses. It was dur- ing the spring. Having arrived there, they entered a lodge. Some of the Pawnees wished to kill the Omahas, but the rest did not wish to kill them. The chief whose lodge they had entered did not speak at all. As he thought, “If they wish to kill them, they will surely kill them,” he did not speak at all. At length the chief’s wife went for water. When she brought it back, she gave the water to the Omahas. Taking pieces of dried buffalo meat, the woman made them put them in their mouths, as she wished them to live. When they had eaten, the chief said as follows: “‘Come, cease ye and go outside. As she wished them to live, she caused them to eat.” Every one of them went out and homeward. And the Pawnees were continually inviting the Omahas to feasts. One man, a very brave Pawnee, invited the Omahas to a feast. And he invited them to eat from dishes which were very large and filled very full of beans alone. The Pawnee hadaclub. Said he, “If you swallow the food, I will kill you with that; and if you fail to eat all, I will kill you with that.” At length they swallowed it; they were satiated, yet they swallowed it. He did not kill any one. ‘Hnough. You have swallowed it,” said he. On the morrow the Pawnees talked with the Oma- has: “Friends, though you have come hither for your horses, you shall not take them back with you. You can come for them in the early fall. And in the fall you must bring us some powder when you come.” And Wabaskaha said, ‘‘ Yes, I will do that.” 398 THE @EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. The Omahas went homeward. As they went homeward, Wabaskaha was crying con- tinually. He was erying and asking a favor of the deity. ‘Ho! Wakanda, though the foreigners have ill-treated me, I hope that you may help me,” he said when he cried. And Wabaskaha wished to take vengeance on the Pawnees. Atlength, when it was night, he and his comrades reached their own village. When they reached their own village, he went crying to his lodge. And they knew that he went away crying; all the people heard him. ‘That one who was following his horses is coming back, but he is coming crying,” said they. When he cried, he cried in prayer to the deity. And the people knew that it was the crying of one who wished to go on the war-path. He did not tell it, yet they knew it. And all the people went thither, as they wished to know why he was crying. And Wabaskaha told his story. “TI went thither; but they did not restore my horses to me. We came very near being killed. And they asked me for gunpowder in the fall. The Pawnees said, ‘Bring us gunpowder when you come.” All of the people pitied Wabaskaha; they were sorrow- ful. The next day the chiefs, the braves, and, in fact, all the people, assembled. They filled a pipe. And Wabaskaha stretched out his hands in.supplication towards the people; he touched their heads, and said as follows: “Pity ye me. Do for me just what you decide as to my case.” And the chief took the sacred pipe and filled it. He said as follows: “If ye are willing for us to take vengeance on the Pawnees, put ye that pipe to your lips; and if ye are not willing, do not put that to your lips.” And every man put the pipe to his lips, and smoked it. And the chief said, “Come! Make a final decision. Decide when we shall take vengeance on them.” And one said as follows: “.) it yiqti-ha ¢@wi” ma¢in‘ki¢ai té Bayot aka. Egi¢e (likfima dud¢ica™ ugdq¢i deer- skin to buy caused him to walk Sarpy the Atlength Tekamah this side of point of - (sub.). timber ké’ga &'di yfi té ha Uma™ha" amd. LEgi¢e ni ama ‘Abae a¢af té ha. Diba 6 atthe there camped , Omahas the(sub.). Atlength man the(sub.) hunting went ° Some eti nuda™ a¢ai té; wa‘t, ic‘dge, cin’gajin’ga edabe, waa™¢a a¢at té ha. Dyjd _too towar theywent; woman, old man, child also, leaving them they went . Joe akdé, Gdeda”-naji®, Ta™’wa"-gaxe, céna uctaf té. Kgi¢e Uma™ha™ nuda” the, Hawk- standing, Village- maker, thoseonly remained. At length Omahas to war a¢é amd Caa™ sigdé té weéd¢ai té ha. Wa‘t, cin’gajin’ga edabe, wagijadé 9 those who Dakotas trail the they foundthem . Woman, child also, near to them went (their own) \ s~ sa (fines ¥ fe *n/ g¢ai yi, ki-baji; ccnawa¢ai te Caa™ ama. Ci “Abae-maé yantiya “i g¢af they when, they did not exterminated them Dakotas the Avain those who fresh meat earry- they went reach again ; (sub.). hunted ing went back back 15 18 416 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. té, ci cénawad¢é-ma kfi té ha. Djd wat'a™ ké bgugadti Caa™ ama gina- when, again those who were ex- they Joe goods the Dakotas the took terminated reached home (ob.) (sub.) caf té ha. Can’ge-ma cti b¢iga ginacaf té hi. Ga'™ can’ge-mié cti b¢iiga from him “i The neeres too all Sieg took from - And the horses too all him wénacai té wi ¢a" b¢iga. Gd¢eda”-naji" i¢ddi endqtci a ‘ja jugig¢e. they took from village the all. Hawk- standing his father he only ve he with his. them Watt-ma, i"c‘age edabe, wi"dénaqti t'éwa¢ai té, g¢cba diba-qti-éga" Uma’’- The women, old man also, just one half they were killed, forty about the Oma_ ha"-ma. Ucté ama a”he a¢ai té utcije kéya. Ucté ama cin’gajin’ga has. Those who re- fleeing they went thicket to the. The rest children mained wagii™ a”he-hna™i té, é ni”ya b¢uga. Gan’‘ki wi dizibahe ké’ya pi. carrying they fled as, that alive all. And dizabahe to the them Sit Nikaciga yf g¢éba-qti-éga™ a™¢i’. Té amd héga-baji. Heégaji yé-ma t’éa"- Person lodge ten about we were. Buffa- the were a great A great the buffa- wo loes (sub.) many. many loes wa"¢ai. Waii”, mé-ha gé’ cti hégaji, dda" Ackaqtci a yiffna™ a"ma™ dil. killed them. Robes, winter-robes te too agreat therefore very near we camped we walked. (pl.) many, regularly (he te ujaja ¢an’di qa¢i® ta” wa" dud¢ican’di éqtci angdg¢ii. E’di ha™ Here the fork at the Pawnee town on this side of just that we came back. There night ayja™i, a™yii. Kgi¢e, ha”ega™”tce angidaha™i yi, can’ge-ma bguigadti w¢- welay wecamped. Behold, morning ae arose again when, the ee were down, ¢ingal té ha. Sig¢e an/euginaf, ca™ béliga. MAja™ a™wa™waja adaf té missing to vs Trail we followed theirs in fact all. Land to which they the (our own), went wean ‘oidaha™ anya ¢ai té, ma ¢ingé té.. Hgi¢e wama™¢a" ag¢al ké; égi¢e we eae of ours we desired, snow none when. Behold, stealing them they had gone behold, back in a line; wi¢i" ag¢ai ké. Wian’gugihé angd¢ai. Egi¢e qa¢i™ wama’¢a® agd¢at ke. having they had gone We sought them we went. Behold, Pawnees stealing them had gone home- them back in a line. (our own) ward. / Cé Ni-bédska itaxaja wandce ta” wa" ¢an’di GA¢i® ama &/di g¢i” amd. E‘di That Platte River towardsthe soldiers town by the Pawnees the _ there sat. There head ‘i (sub.) . x O Bort . = ae K 1 wa¢i® aki ama. Ki é'di wian’gugihé angahii. Ki ha” yi, qa¢i" can’ge having they reached And there wesoughtourown wearrived. And night ay Pawnees ees them home. eyi-ma éga™ a"wa™ mar¢a™i. Ki wandce vf yan’géqtci qa¢a agfi Uma™ha™ their (pl. ob.) ike we stole them. And soldier lodge very near back were Omaha again coming nujin’ ga Gabe Kei¢e qa¢i" nuda” g¢e-mé wakipaf té. qa¢i" ama dhigi boys Atlength Pawnees on the war- aos going they met them. Pawnees the many path homeward (pl.)- 3 on tu ht a —/ a™ja Uma™ha™ nujin’ga aka wi” gaq¢i. [i angi an’ga¢i" can’ge éga™ ee I Omaha boys the one killed him. And we we who moved horse so a"wan ga¢i" angagil. LA ¢an’di angdg¢ii yi, Djd wat‘a™ b¢viga ginacé-bi, we had them we ae com- Villagé to the we came home when, Toe goods all ete had nan ing back. —~ . from him, af, and‘a". Caa™ amd cénawa¢a-bi Uma™ha"-ma, ai, and‘a™. they L heard it. Dakota the had destroyed them the Omahas, . hey T heard it. said it, . (sub.)* ~ said it, \ \ Kay : SOS Vi A a HOW JOSEPH LA FLECHE LOST HIS GOODS. AIT NOTES. 415, 1. Bayi ta"wa™, “ Baqoi’s town,” situated in Iowa, opposite Bellevue, Neb. “Bayoi” is the Omaha name for the late Peter G. Sarpy, one of the pioneers of Nebraska, and a native of Saint Louis. He married, according to Indian iaw, Nik’tmi, a woman of Iowa and Oto parentage, and thus became the stepfather of Nik’imi’s daughter, now known as Mrs. Mary La Fléche. Mr. La Fléche (“‘ Djo”) was employed by Sarpy, who sent him to trade among the Omahas and other tribes. Fi 415, 3. Pikima a¢utaqtia", refers to Arizona Point, on the Missouri, just beyond the town of Tekamah, Neb. 415, 6-7. d‘uba ctf nuda® a¢ai té. “None of the Omahas went on the war-path at this time. All were out hunting for game. Some went as far north as the present reservation. This was in the winter of 1846, when the Omahas had their winter camp at the mouth of Papillion Creek, below their village.”—Sanssouci. ; 416, 3. G¢eda®-naji® i¢adi enaqtci ni4ya jugig¢e. Therest of this family were killed i sf in the attack. i oy 416, 4-5. windenaqti t?ewa¢ai té - - - Umatha®-ma. “About seventy-five Omahas Ms were killed. The Mormons helped to bring the wounded Omahas to Bellevue. My ted wife remembers this occurrence. She was very young, and was with her parents at a inf place about five miles below the scene of the slaughter.” —Sanssouci. 416, 6. gizabahe, a locality at the head of the Elkhorn River, in Nebraska. The name seems to denote that there were many sand hills in that region. The hunters : divided into two parties before they arrived there. Gahige-jifiga (Little Chief) was ‘ the head of one party, and yaxe-¢a"™ba (Two Crows) followed him. The younger A®pa®- nee galga (Big Elk) was the head of the other, which Sanssouci joined. Sanssouci was then ec trading among the Indians. 416, 7. hega-baji and hegaji were pronounced he+ga-baji and he+gaji by the nar- rator. yaxe-¢a"ba is said to speak the language far more correctly than any other man. 416, 9. ga¢i" ta"wa" dua¢icandi. Columbus, Neb., now stands at this place. 416, 14. wanace ta"wa" ¢andi. The Pawnees were then dwelling by Fort Kearney, near Grand Island. 4 ; one iL cures Fac i NS ee, a a i TRANSLATION. The Omahas went on the hunt in the winter. They dwelt atSarpy’stown. I went to hunt the buffaloes in that unseen place, so I have no direct knowledge of the attack; yet I heard the report about it. The hunting party came to the bend of the Missouri, just beyond Tekamah. And Joe arrived there. Sarpy caused Joe to keep a trading- post. He caused him to walk among the Omahas, trading for deer-skins. At length the Omahas camped at the point of timber this side of Tekamah. At length the men went hunting; and some, too, went on the war-path, leaving the women, the old men, and the children. Joe, Standing Hawk, and Village Maker were the only young men who remained there. At length the Omahas who had gone on the war-path found the trail of Dakotas. They were still near the women and children, and when they went back.to them they did not return to them, as the Dakotas exterminated the latter before the men reached home, And the hunters carried fresh meat homeward; and you. yi— 27 re 418 THE (@EGIHA LANGUAGH—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. they, too, reached home after the people had been destroyed. The Dakotas had de- prived Joe of all his goods. They had taken all his horses, and all the horses of the whole tribe. Standing Hawk and his father were the only survivors of their house- hold. Just half of the women and oid men were killed, about forty in number. The rest fled into the bushes, carrying the children, and all of these were alive. And I reached gizabahe. We men were occupying about ten lodges. The buffaloes were very numerous. We killed a great many buffalo#s. There were a great many robes and winter robes; therefore we used to pitch our tents at very short intervals. We returned to the forks of the river, just this side of the Pawnee towns. There we camped and lay down for the night. Behold, when we arose again in the morning, all our horses were missing. We followed their trail. We wished to ascertain about our horses, to what land they had gone, before there was any snow, which would cover the trail. Behold, after stealing them, they had carried them homeward, leaving a trail in a long line. We departed, seeking our property. Behold, the Pawnees had taken them homeward. The Pawnees dwelt by the soldiers’ town towards the head of the Platte River. And there we arrived when seeking them. And when it was night, we stole the Pawnees’ horses in like manner. And three Omaha young men were coming back again very close to the soldiers’ lodges. At length they met the Pawnees who were returning from the war-path. Though the Pawnees were many, the Omaha young men killed one. And we who moved were bringing back horses in like manner. When we came back home to the village, I heard them say that all of Joe’s goods had been taken from him. I heard them say that the Dakotas had destroyed the Omahas. BATTLE BETWEEN THE DAKOTAS AND OMAHAS IN 1847. TOLD BY YAXE-GA™BA. Mé yi, déje é¢a"be xi, égi¢e Caa” ci wénuda® ahfi, ci waéki¢a ahfi. Spring when, grass camein when, behold, Dakotas again to war arrived, again to fightus they sight against us arrived. Waitt wagé g¢iq¢u‘a ahfi. Ki Caa” ama é’di ahfi té. Wénaxi¢ai té Woman cache toemptytheirown arrived. And Dakotas the (sub.) there arrived. They attacked them wait-ma. Watt aké ¢ab¢i" té na” ¢ankdé Maxéwa¢é aka éduthai té, jinga- the women. Woman the three the grown the ones Maxewa¢é the joined, small (sub.) who (sub.) qtci, iha” ké téki¢at té’di. Ki 4yfi ¢a" wéahide waqé g¢iq¢u‘a-ma very, hismother the they killed when. And village the at a distance cache those who emptied (ob.) her for him theirs eénawa¢a-bi, ai. Wa‘t wi” ni”ya ag¢iaka ¢ u¢ai. Ga™ ednujin’ga ama they destroyed at said Woman one alive whocame back that told. And young men the it is said, they. (sub.) cani‘ge-ma wagika"ta" ci 6/dia¢ai, wa¢ige. Ga™ dahé-de nikaci"ga beigadti the owes tied t theirown again there went, chasingthem. And hill when person akfi nacta”i. Ki wif hacida™ ag¢é yi, ag¢d-baji-mé ca” 6'di aki. Wa‘t- they they stopped And I afterward Iwent when, those who didnot aftera there I came Old came + going. homeward go homeward while again to. again to hg he eel te BD os . \re hd? eed Sew a 2 at ee ch BATTLE BETWEEN THE DAKOTAS AND OMAHAS IN 1847. 419 jinga kiu ag¢i ama, é Maxdéwa¢é efa™ ‘ba ni’ja ag¢i. Wawéamaxe: woman she was she came the that Maxewa¢é alive came back. I questioned her: wounded back (my.sub. ), Indéda® ukit‘ai a, wa‘ijinga, ehé. Pan’ka ebééga®. Umat™ha™ ié udwakiat What tribe were ry old woman, T said. Ponkas I think. Omaha speech they talked they to me hé, af wa‘ijinga aka. Ké, angdg¢e tai; a"wa™dabe taf, ehé. Kictawégu said old woman the(sub.). Come, let us go homeward; let us see them, I said. Kictawagu ki nijinga 4ji wi” céna ¢ab¢i" anga¢ai. Ki ucté amd haci agtfi. H¢a™be and boy another one enough three we aaene And the rest after ae Tn sight c oming. angakii yi, dahdédi niaci"ga wi” @’di naji”. E’di angakii yi, wéahusai we got back when, on the hill man one there stood. There we got back when, scolded us edge aka. E‘a™ hau, a™¢a™i yi, Ha” ega"tce’qti wa‘i-ma waq¢i. Indéda™ old man the What is q we said when; Earlyinthemorning the women they killed What (sub.). the matter them. hnita" ¢ag¢i"’-bada" wa¢isnindai G"te. ypaciqti dkidg¢ai té, af. Ha™éga™ you you sat and you delayed it may be? Long ago they had come he Some inde worked at and gone, said. téga™ waq¢i icpaha™ stp uhnad ¢aki etéde. Ki wa‘tjinga cka™ ¢i‘Aqti nanka- in the they killed vane knew if, you you should have And — old woman totally unable running very morn- them tellit reached home. to move swiftly to get ing piqti ki te, ehnéga" 4, ehé. Gaf: (é¢ankée ha. Wag¢fona ja™i. Gédu there reach will, you think it ? I said. He said These are é Visible they lie. In that soon home as follows: the ones place téwa¢al, af. Gat &di angdg¢ai yi, &'diangdki wa‘t ¢anké. Ma™ oé a®wa'’- they killed, le And there wewenthome- when, there were moneda woman the Arrow che we pulled them, said. ward again (pl.. ob.). (pl. ob.) ¢iontidai waii’ eyaf gé aizai-de anigubéta" fhea™¢ai. Egi¢e cangig¢i® out of them robe their the we took while we wrapped them we laid At length horseman (pl. ob.) in (them) down. b¢tigaqti akfi, nfaci"ga g¢ébahiwi"-qti-éga" akfi. Ga™ angd¢a-baji; di all reached men hundred about reached And we went not; there there again, there again. a®wa™ da®be a®ndjiti. Egi¢e nikagahi wi” akfi. [ckaddbi aké. Ké, a®wa'’- we looked at them we stood. At length chief one . a eached Ickadabi ee Come, let us there again. ne ¢ige taf ha, al. Niaci®ga b¢tiga, Ahau! af. Sig¢é ké wian’guhai, a"wa™ ¢iqai. chase them 5 Men all, Oho! they Trail the we followed them, we chased them. pa sae Gicka™ qti-baji, i¢api¢i? wéuhe a®ma™¢i"i Jtga-hna® pahan’ga wéuhe Not going very fast, slowly © following them we walked. Body only before UO them amma ¢ii sig¢é ke. Cangdg¢i" amd Agahadi wiuta™ e¢i“i. Egi¢e waticka we walked trail the. Riding horses the (sub.) at Phe outside next tous theysat. At length creek aké yanga¢éhai; uq¢liqa-bajf; qade ha, ¢iq¢e cktibe baza™ ag¢af ké. Ga™ the extented: widein itwasnotahollow; grass 5 canes deep pushing they went And (sub.) all directions ; among homeward. ag¢an’ka"ha™ undsude ga™ sig¢e tmai. Can’ge Ag¢i"-ma dahé wéahide'qti on both sides it had been 0 foot-prints they Horse those who sat hill ata great distance pe bare sought them. on sig¢e tmega™ nan’ge yiwi"xai. Ki nikaci"ga qide ckube ke’di wiuhe aka trail they Sean sree they went And man grass deep inthe followed the them, as around. them (sub.) (a) f *n/ r *n. yan’géqtei ahfi yi, Caa’ ama. bispé jai i¢a”. A” ¢i" wé¢a-ba¢i™ niaci"ga very near arrived when, Dakotas the crouching lay suddenly. He came very near finding man (sub.) them witaqtei akdé, ci yig¢isa"¢a agii. Can’ge tan‘di ag¢i éga" Agig¢i". Ga one the again turned about heat was Horse tothe hecame as _ he sat ou his. And (sub.), coming back. back 9 12 18 21 Ca : 5 hs mh al ay 7 \ 420, THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. : s dkiha"™ b¢ figaqti can’ge ‘g¢i® mai, ¢égaxe akikipaf Wa¢ttada wi" 4 beyond hor = sitting on they sought sroundin they met one Oto one : 4 them, ave oe another. judwag¢e. Wag¢titada aké walhiita¢i™ agi”; wi ma™ ab¢i”. Gépe ha: , he with us. Oto the gun had; I arrow T had. I said as : : (sub.) follows 8 Kag¢ha, qide ¢an‘di &di bispé jai, eb¢éga". U¢dse te ha, ehé. Hau. fT Friend, grass in the there crouching they I think. You willsetié =. I said. - lic, alire 5 Uma™ha® wi” ag¢ii. Ga™ andji® edita" usé agi” ag¢ai. Ga? unahe So Omaha one came back. And we stood thence setting having they went And conflagra- oy it wfire it homeward. tion a ae Amusta dahé e ata” can’ge dg¢i"-maA b¢tiga bayéye naji® i, undhe Amusta ae rightabove hill ate how horse those who sat all in groups stood, conflagra- AES abege es, it (pl. ob.) far P on tion a 6 da™be naji”i, égaxe naji”i. Undhe akaé ndhega-baji, qide aka dae y = looking they stood, allaronnd they stood. Conflagra- _— the burnt with much grass the deep 4, tion (sub.) heat, etc., (sub.) : 3 éga®. Can’ge dg¢i"-ma cddé-qti-éga" judwag¢e andji" wi cti, uta?’nadi. . as. Horse those who saton six atone: I with them I stood I too, apart. Rad Egi¢e undhe am4 nfacitga ¢ankddi abfi té. Egi¢e ba” awdna‘a”. Cag¢af $ ES Atlength conflagra- the persons to the arrived. Atlength calling I heard side I go home- tion (moving) ward to you 9 ha, hu+! af. Caa™’-ma nde¢a"bewa¢ail. HKei¢e wakide akidg¢ai. “ halloo! mee The Dakotas the fire made come out. Atlength shootingat they had come sai us and gone. Wa‘t ¢aq i ckf Pan’ka hni” ¢i"te u¢d i¢ai-gi, ai IekadAbj ak. Ki Woman youkilled youwere Ponkas youare it may to tell send ye ig said — Iekadabi the And them coming back be it way, (sub. Caa” am fa-baji. Ki Ickadabi aka: Ickadabi wieb¢it’ ha, af té, kikin Dakotas the they spoke And Ickadabi the Ickadabi Tam he - hesaid when, fighting (sub.) not. (sub.) : 12 ‘d¢af. A™b i¢dug¢e dkiki¢af. Wadi" a¢af ¢ga" mi“ da*be anaqti-éga™ ahfi they Day throughout they contended Having they as hour about how many it ar- spoke of. with one another. them went rived te, égi¢e Caa™ wi" ti. Egi¢e Caa™ ¢i" wi” wacai, cka”¢i‘al. Ucté ama when, at length Dakotas one was Atlength Dakota the one epee he was unable ‘The rest q wounded. (mv.) them abandon to move. : i him, Pay 3 ag¢al. Kgaxe i¢a™¢ai Uma™ha" amd. Can’ge ta" aa” b¢a. Jtiga-hna® b¢i”. “or: went Renan in they placed Omahas the Sate the T left. Body only I was. homeward. a circle (sub.). 15 Cka?-¢i‘d aki man‘dé a¢i™. Wabaaze-hna” ama Uma™ha?-ma, wajr’- Unable tomoye the bow had. He geanel then offregn- theysay ~ the Omahas, temper (sub.) arly pibaji Caa” aké. Hacida™ é’di pi. Edi pf t& ca™ca” i¢dnaxib¢a béé Caa”” bad Dakota the Afterward there I ar- There I when without Jattacked him I went Dakota = (sub.). rived. arrived es inkéd. an’gve pi yi, ankide-hna™i ¢a™ja, ma®™ o& wédaji-hna? ¢é¢6-hna™1. ¢ yan ge pi xi gar) = y ge¢ the one Near at hand Lar- when, heshotatmeregu- though, arrow the elsewhere regularly he sent them who. rived larly (pl. ob.) away. ele a us & 18 Ga™ Aq¢i Caa” ¢inké; man’d idti® ha. Aza™ ihed¢t, ki Wa itada aka 1 b And LIkilled Dakota the (ob.); bow T hit him J Thit him and knocked and the i him with him down, (sub.) . . 1 ° . . . . a O jahai té. Ga? nfaci"ga ama fkinai. gQadai. qadde ¢icta” yi, a"wa™ ¢ige; speared him. And persons the snatchedat Theycuthim Cutting they fin- when, we chased them; (sub.) the pieces. up. up ished : ucté ama wi¢i" a¢ai. Ci @di angd¢ai. Qé¢abé ctigaqti &’di égihaqti Aki- the rest having they Again there we went. ‘Tree very thick there rightheadlong had them went. into von Care Se ee ee ore Pt ee “ it . ii am A ¥ BATTLE BETWEEN THE DAKOTAS AND OMAHAS IN 1847. 421 a dg¢ai Caa” amd. Ci nfkagahi ahf-bi ehé akd, Ickaddbi ak‘, gaf: Hau! gone Dakotas _ the Again chief arrived Tsaid the ee Ickadabi the said as Ho! (sub.). wio, (sub.), follows: af. : : x Ce, cali gaxdi-gi. Gaski gf‘aziyi¢é gfi-ga, ai. Gatéga™ yi, ci wadakihna taf, cease ye. Panting to rest one’s self beyecom- he Some mae when, again you contend with w il, ing back, said. ae ai. Hau! éga™ te, ai. qahaya b¢tiga akfe¢i". Can’ge-ma cti gi‘a™ ziwagi¢e he Ho! so letit-be, the At the hill all sat together Theh horses too Shey eaused ninGaE ee ir said. said. on. own, to rest. Caa™ ama q¢abé ukig¢i® g¢i™i, wa‘a™ za‘é’qti edi™i. Qéabé udtinaji® aka % Dakotas the tree sitting sat, singing making great ji sat. Tree were depending on (sub.) ~ together in confusion Caa” aké. fi-gi! an’gakikf¢a taf, ¢hna", an’gabig¢a ta-bi e¢éga" éga". Dakotas the Be ye let us contend together, they said we will draw back they thought as. (col. sub.). coming! regularly, P'ta®’! nathébe g¢i"i-gi. Gattedga” yi, ga” an’gakiki¢a taité, af. Hau. T Hold! waiting sit ye. Some time when, ofcourse we contend to- * shall, he gether said. Kei¢ e@ Ea ES ama ahfi té. Hea” i"win’g¢i7i, dda" tiwagi¢a abfi. Nika- At flenein the arrived. Near we sat to them, therefore totellitto they To chase (sub. them arrived. ¢iqe ahfi Wad¢titada ama. Q¢abé gam angubdaazai té, Wa¢titada ama atti. the foe arrived tos the Tree tho we enced them when, Otos the came. (sub.). (cv. col.) into ue ) Ga” nikagahi aka gaf té: ta! na™h¢ébai-gi. Ga*teéga™ yi, ga” an’/gaki¢a 5 fo) 1S And chief the saidasfol- Hold! wait ye. Some anna when, of we coniend to- (sub.) lows: course gether taité, ai. Ga™ Wagitada amd na*cta™i. B¢iga ang¢i”i. ypaci ang¢i’i, shall, hesaid. And tos the stopped going. All We sat. A long time we sat, ca” mi™da"be wi” akiha*-qti-éga” ang¢i”i. Hau. Nikagahi ak& man ‘ode in fact ~ hour one beyond abot. we sat. 7 Chiet af the erect naji”i. Leki¢ai: Hau! ceta” ha. Ké! waki¢si-ga, af Gam wan gi¢e, stood. aera proclaimed: Ho! so far 5 Come! contend with them, he said. And every one, Ahaii! af Q¢abé ¢a® biya hi Egaxe i¢a™ waddi-ei. Masini hi-ba ga” Oho! said. ‘Tree the round . Sane them. The other reach so (col.) side and ‘eae 1 718 Re Ae aie gii-ga, af. Ga™ waiki¢af. Téki¢a-baji yaci. Kgi¢e Uma™ha® wit’ t’é¢a-bi, ie coming he And they fought They didnot kill along At length Omaha one was killed, back, said, them. one another time. “ af. Uma™ha™ wim t’é¢ai ha, af. K’di pi yi, égi¢e an’ka-bdji; had¢ezaha they Omaha one has been 3 they There Lar- when, behold, not so; ‘i just on the said. killed said. rived surface ¢inké. Wagata g¢i”i yi, Caa™ aka cta™¢i" kidai, 4 ké ti. Hau. Ci the one eninge he sat when, Dakota the first shotat arm the he bit Again who. (sub. ) him, "a ) pounded: ga'teé yi, Wa patada wi” té¢ai, & t’é¢dqtia’i. Hei¢ te Caa™ aka ci wit’ L, ook time when, one was he was el indeed. At jeawen Dakotas the again one killed, (col.) té¢ai, € Uma”ha® ama wat’é¢ai Ci Caa” aka Wag¢titada wi t’é¢ai. was that Omahas the were the Again Dakotas the Ote one they killed, ‘. (sub.) slayers. (snb.) killed. Caa™ aka, a*wan’gabig¢a yaci a™ma™ ¢i"i, téawag¢é-hna™i. Q¢abdé ¢a® ca” Dakotas the we drew back fromthem along wo walked, they were killing us. Tree he at any (sub.), time (col.) rate ua” sii-ei, af Ickadabi aka. Wacpag¢at té, égi¢e t’é¢i¢é-hna”i te. Gat leap ye into, said Tekadabi the You draw back he beware they kill regularly lest. And (sub.). from them you ¢abé ¢a® ca” ua” sii niaci®ga bgiiga. Q¢abé ga” wirdétan-di hi yi, ci tree the atany leaped in men : Tree the toone-halfofthe ar- when, again (col.) rate among (col.) distance rived 12 18 21 ~ 422 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. i . =f, . ne ce £ a . , ana” cta™i, a"wan’gabdg¢ai. Ci ga™teé jin’ga xi, Ickaddbi aka gaf: Ca™ we stopped going, we drew back from them. Again a little while when, Ickadabi the saidas Atany (sub.) follows: rate ua™sii-ea. Wacpag¢at yi, dgi¢e té¢i¢é-hna™i te, ai. Nab é¢a"™be a®wan’- leap in. You draw back if, beware they kill regularly lest, he Two coming out we had you said. of it : = a *n/ Tagine Pap. I *n/ 1 frat ~ ga¢i® angahii, akiwa ni”ya a"wa™¢izai. Uma™ha™-ma wi” Caa™ t’é¢ai_ ké them we arrived, both alive we took them. The Omahas one Dakotas they killed the him (ob.) a*¢an’ gidaha®-baji angidadai. Ci Wad¢utada t’é ké eddbe angidadai. Caa” we knew not ours we cut up ours. Again Oto who fos! also we cut up durs. Dakota dea wi™ i¢dnaxib¢a yi, nfahi¢é. Wahiitar¢i ké g¢fona® ga” ni ké égihi¢é. ~ Ni one Tattacked him when, he fell into un the heletdrop as water the it fellright Water the water. (ob.) (ob.) into. 7 ké uda®si ga” é¢a*be e¢i yi, A té aki¢a ub¢a™. Naji”’aki¢éga® Uma™ha™-ma. the LTleaped as he came again when,arm the both T held. As I made him stand the Omahas (ob.) into up dideawaiki¢é. Caa™ ucté-ma watcicka ké Aki¢fye a” he-ma Uma™ha™ ama I made them cut Dakotas the rest creek the crossing those who fled Omahas the him up. (ob.) together (sub.) . ‘@ ; P Sy : ee an fehl, wakipaf ha. (@é Caa” amd wahiita™¢i™ g% ujf ¢ingé adi™i éga™ Péwagal. met them ; This Dakotas the fun the filled without they as they were (sub.) (pl. ob.) had killed. ° . . mse ° . Ss / Ca’ qti ga” mttkiha”i. Mi” i¢éqtia”i yi, cénawa¢ai Caa”-ma. They shot at one another even till Sun ithad fully when, they destroyed the Dakotas. night. set a NOTES. 418, 1. Me yi, 7. e., in the spring after La Fléche lost his goods, as told in the pre- ceding paper. 419, 214-20, 1. Gat akiha®™ b¢ugaqti, ete. The Omahas divided into two parties, and went all around the creek till they came together again. Then they went beyond for a short distance, but as the trail was lost they returned to the stream. 420, 4. a™naji® edita™ use a¢i" ag¢ai. The Omahas set fire to the grass on both sides of the stream. 420, 6. nahega-baji, pronounced nat+hega-baji by the narrator. 420, 12. Anb i¢aug¢e akiki¢ai. Two Crows was mounted, and his horse was nearly killed by a bullet. 422, 3-4. Umatha®-ma wi” - - - angidadai. His name was yawaha. 422, 7. dadeawaki¢é. Frank La Fléche said that “dade” is often used in the sense of ‘“‘scalping;” though instead of it, the narrator might have employed the phrase “najiha hébe ¢izéawaki¢é (hair, part, I caused them to take it), I made them sealp him.” TRANSLATION. When the vegetation came up in the spring, the Dakotas came on the war-path to attack us again. The women went to empty the caches and the Dakotas arrived there. They attacked the women. Maxewa¢é, who was very small, joined the three women who were the eldest, when the Dakotas killed his mother. And it was said that the women who emptied the caches had been destroyed when far away from the — village. One woman who had come home alive told that. Then the young men put BATTLE BETWEEN THE DAKOTAS AND OMAHAS IN 1847. 423 lariats on their ponies, and went thither in pursuit. And when the men reached the hill again, they stopped going. And I, when I went homeward later, came again to the place where they had stopped. The old woman who came back wounded, as well as Maxewa¢é, came home alive. I questioned her: “Of what tribe were they, old woman?” said I. ‘I think that they were Ponkas. They talked to me in the Omaha language,” said the old woman. “Come,” said I, ‘let us go homeward; let us see them.” Only three of us went: Kictawagu, another youth, and I. The rest were coming after. When we got in sight, a man stood on the hill. ~When we reached there again, the old wman scolded us. When we said, “ What is the matter?” he said: “They killed the women early in the morning. What could you have been doing that you delayed so long? They departed long ago.” “If you knew that they killed them at some time in the morning, you should have gone home to tell it. And did you think that an old women, who was altogether unable to move, could reach home soon by running very swiftly?” said I. He said as follows: “These are the ones. They lie in sight. They killed them in that place, which is out of your sight.” And as we went thither on our homeward way, we reached the women. We pulled out the arrows, and wrapping the bodies in their blankets, we laid them down. At length all the horsemen, fully a hun- dred, reached there on their way home. Then we did not depart; we stood looking at the dead. At length a chief reached there; it was Ickadabi. ‘‘Come,” said he, ‘let us chase them.” All the men said, “Oho!” We followed their trail; we pursued them. We did not go very fast; we walked along very slowly as we followed them. We who went in advance went on foot following their trail. The horsemen sat at the outside, next tous. At length the creek extended wide; it was not in a ravine; but it was covered with grass and tall canes, through which the foe had pushed when going home- ward. And as the ground had been burnt bare on both sides, the Omahas sought their trail. Those on horseback rode back and forth on the hills in the distance, seek- ing their trail. And when the man who followed them in the tall grass came very near, the Dakotas crouched down suddenly. The one man came very near finding them, but he turned around and came back. He came back to his horse and mounted him. And all the mounted men sought for them beyond the stream; having passed all around, they met one another. An Oto was with us. The Oto had a gun, and I had a bow. I said as follows: “My friend, I think that they lie crouching in the grass. You will please set it afire.” An Cmaha came back. And starting from the place where we stood they went along setting the grass afire. And the horsemen stood all around in groups on the hills, as far as the latter extended, looking directly down on the flames. The fire burnt fiercely, as the grass was tall. I stood apart, with about six horsemen. At length the fire reached the men. I heard a call: “I go homeward to you, halloo!” said one. The fire made the Dakotas come forth. At length they shot at us, and had gone along. «Send your voices this way, and tell us if you who came and killed women are Ponkas,” said Ickadabi. But the Dakotas did not speak. And Ickadabi said, “T am Ickadabi.” As he said it, they spoke of fighting. They contended with one another throughout the day. Whenthe Omahas had pursued them for several hours, a Dakota was wounded. The Omahas made them abandon one of their number who was unable to move rapidly. The rest of the Dakotas went homeward. The Omahas surrounded the ° 424 THE (@EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. man who had been left. I left my horse, and went afoot. The man who could not go rapidly had a bow. The Dakota was desperate, and he was constantly searing back the Omahas. Larrived there later. When I reached there, forthwith I went to attack the Dakota. When I got near, though he shot at me repeatedly, he always sent the arrows elsewhere. And I killed the Dakota; I hit him with the bow, and felled him; and the Oto speared him. Then the men snatched for pieces of the body. They cut it up. When they finished cutting it up, we chased the foe; the rest had gone in pursuit. And we went thither. The Dakotas had gone headlong into a very dense forest. And the chief that I said had arrived, even Ickadabi, said as follows: “Ho! cease ye. Come back and rest yourselves awhile from panting. After some little time you may contend with them again.” ‘Ho! so let it be,” said they. All sat together at the hill. They also caused their horses to rest. The Dakotas were sitting together in the forest; they sat singing and making a great uproar. The party of Dakotas were depending upon the forest. They kept on saying, “Come ye! let us contend together,” as they thought that we would draw back through fear of them. ‘ Hold! sit and wait. After some little time, of course, we shall contend together,” said Ickadabi. At length the Otos arrived. We dwelt near to them; therefore some went thither to tell them of the fight. The Otos came to chase the foe. They came when we had scared the Dakotas into the forest. And the chief said as follows: “Hold! wait. When some little time shall have elapsed, of course we shall contend with them.” And the Otos stopped going. We all sat for a long time, say, for a little more than an hour. The chief stood erect and proclaimed: ‘Ho! it isended. Come! contend with them.” And all said, ‘‘Oho!” The forest was a curvilinear one. ‘Surround them. Goto the other side and be coming back,” said the chief. And they fought them. They did not kill one another for a long time. At length it was said that an Omaha was killed; but when I arrived there, behold, it was not so; he was but slightly wounded. When he sat aiming at the foe, a Dakota was the first to shoot at him, wounding him in the arm. Again, when some time had elapsed, an Oto was wounded and was killed outright. At length one of the Dakotas was killed by the Omahas. And the Dakotas killed an Oto. We drew back from the Dakotas for a long time, and they continued killing our men. ‘Leap ye into the forest at all hazards,” said Ickadabi. ‘‘ Beware lest they con- tinue killing some of you, if you draw back from them,” said he. And all the men jumped into the woods at all hazards. When we had gone half-way through, we faltered and stopped. Again, after a little while, Ickadabi said as follows: ‘‘Jump in at all hazards. If you falter before them, beware lest they continue killing you.” We brought two of them out of the timber, capturing both of them alive. The foe had killed an Omaha; and not recognizing him in the excitement, we dismembered him as well as the Oto, our ally. When I attacked a Dakota, he fell into the water. As he Jet his gun drop, it fell right into the stream. I leaped into the water, and as he came again to the surface, 1 caught hold of him by both arms. Having made him stand, I caused the Omahas to sealp him. The Omahas met the other Dakotas who fled together across the stream. © As these Dakotas had no loads in their guns, they were killed. They shot at one another even till night. Whew the sun had fully set, the Dakotas were destroyed. FIGHT BETWEEN THE OMAHAS AND THE DAKOTAS, 425 HOW THE OMAHAS FOUGHT THE DAKOTAS AFTER THE LATTER HAD KILLED AXPAX-, ANGA’S BROTHER. . 4 RELATED BY A™PA®-LANGA. Bas - Uma™ha® ama wandse e@¢i”i te. Wiji¢e ama ye-jin’ga kide a¢ai té, har’- =) Omahas the surrounding sat. My elder the buffalo-calf to shoot went, morn- iat : (sub.) the herds brother — (sub.) at ee ega™tce. Wit jig¢ai té. Uhnickadi ye-jin’ga wi” t’é¢ai te; dade naji"i te. ee ing. One went with him. . Ina valley buffalo-calf one they killed; cutting they stood. at " it up a Caa™ amd wag¢dde a-fi té, can’ge ag¢i" cidéqti-cga". Wahiita’¢i® ujfiji ee Dakotas the creeping up were ap- horse sitting on about six. Gun not loaded — (su on them proaching, os naji” t& wiji”¢e ta®, dma ak& man‘dé a¢i™i. Wénaxi¢ai-de, yute’ a-t a stood my elder the the other the bow had it. They attacked when, rushing were iy brother (std. one), (sub.) them forward coming ae biama Caa®™” ama. yu‘é’ a-i-bi ega”, t’éwa¢d-biama, wapé ¢ingéga™. o they say Dakotas the Rushing were coming, having, they killed they say, weapon they had none, any (sub.). they say : them as. oo Kgi¢e u¢d ag¢i. Uma™ha™ na”ba t’éwa¢ai, é ug¢d ag¢i. Caa™ ama 6 er. At length to tell they came Omaha two they killed that totell theycame Dakotas the ee it back. them, baek. ; (sub.) a™he ag¢af té waté¢é amd. Hi’di ahf éga*, wat ag¢i. Caa” ama fleeing went home- murderers the * There they as, earrying theycame Dakotas the ward | (sub.). arrived them home. (sub.) aki-biama. fi ¢a%4 aki-biama. Igadizd-biama ; 4 u¢ica"-hna’-biama., veuched home, ‘Village to the reached home, They rode roundand lodge they went around regularly, they say. they say. round, they say; they say. Iiéga-baji-biama; Pan‘ka eddba-biama; akikiji g¢i“i té edahe. Tha” y They were a great many, Ponkas were also, they say ; the tribes they sat also. His they say; coming together mother ugine d‘tiba éded{-¢a" amé. Wandq¢i"i-gi ha, a-biamé. EE waté¢e tju —oe ~ he seeks some the company is there, Hasten ye ci said he, they That murderers prin- his — ‘they say. say. cipal aké ig¢ddi aka waniq¢i"wadé i ké uhé-biama. Gibézu ijdje a¢i”-biama ; the (one his the causing them to hasten lodges the went along, they Kipazo hisname he had, they say ~ who) father (sub.) (line of ) say. * igadi akd, nikagahi tju aka Pan‘ka 4fi ké ci uhdé-biamd. Ewa¢ad¢at 12 his the chief principal the Ponka lodge the again he went along, You have them father (sub.), (sub.). (line of) they say. for relations - watag¢ize taf, nig¢e wa¢izai yi, wé¢agicpaha™i yi, 4-biama. Pan‘ka- youtakethem will, captive theytakethem when, you recognize yours — if, said he, they say. The Pon- ma cé¢a-baji-biama. Ci &di égi¢a” agd-biama U¢cha-baji yi‘cté, ¢iéoni" oe : kas did not heed, they say. Again there tosayitto he went, they You donot join evenif, you are the ; say. ones g: taité ha, a-biamd. Qf an’ga¢ikf¢a tan’gata", d-biamd A¢é naji"’-biamd 15 ‘ shall(be) . said he,theysay. You we conten with you we will, said he, they say. Going stood they say Caa” am&. Ca” wabaha kod ug¢i“i-de wa‘ti amd ga” a¢é naji”-biama. 4 Dakotas the Infact Indian car- in the satin while woman the 80 going stood they say. (sub.) i < (sub.) riage 12 15 18 426 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. Ki Pan’ka ju akd, Wéeasdpi aké, Pan‘ka afi ¢a® uhd-biama. E‘a™qti J , 4 ’ q And Ponka prineipal the Whip the Ponka vil- the went along, they Just how | (sub.), (sub.), lage (circle) say. Ly wl ys . gixe taf éda" wadbana™ hné cka”hna ¢a¢i"eé @'di oné etéde, 4-biama they will do 2 (in to witness you go you wish you whomove there youshould have said, they say thought) 4 gone, Wégasipi aki. E/di a¢af té hai té, Wégasdpi Matcu-wa¢ihi jigig¢e, Whip the Thore they went it was when, Whip Ma*teu-wa¢ihi he with his, (sub.). night 3 . = “=, A . fen/ . te gan‘ki Pan’‘ka amd cti Egi¢e a-f-naji” amama. (hiski¢ u¢éwinyi¢at té, and Ponkas the too. Atlength they were approachingand Alltogether they assembled when, (sub.) standing, they say. wanice u¢éwinyi¢af, diba akikihide a¢a-biama. Wandce ama égaxe police they assembled, some watching over went, they say. Police the all around one another (pl. sub.) ma'¢i"’-biamé; udticiaja cti d‘iba, ubdhiaja eti, hadciaya cti. Wandce walked they say; at the front too some, at the sides too, behind too. Police wénaxf¢a-hna™-biamé; wasnin'de ma™¢i’i-ma vti"-hna’-biama. Wégasapi they attacked them regularly, they delaying those who walked they hit them regularly, Whip say; they say. aki wéhusi-biamé. Ukit‘® fwidaha™-hna’-ma™i. (Qijt-baji-hna”i ¢a™ cti. the scolded them, they say. Nation T have always known you in You were always unfor- heretofore. (sub.) particular tunate . eee: ne ery Latah ree g 2 5 Hata" tma"pe i¢éona"i & Wait égijaYqti ja” hnim ¢a™cti, a4-biama Why punishment do yethreaten ? Woman youdidjustso you you heretofore, said, they say to me did were Weégasipi aké. Ki ukitte aka nti ha, 4-biama. Iwidaha” taf minke, Whip the (sub.). And nation the aremen . saidhe,theysay. I know you will I who, d-biama. E/di ag¢af té, ha™ ima’’¢i" a-t-biama. said he, they There they when, night walking by they approached, say. went they say. Uma™ha®™ aka-ji¢ica" b¢d. Uma™ha™ ama daze té na”za géxai. Omahas towards those who I go. Omahas the evening when ‘embank- made. are (sub.) ment ire i . eda te ofeee yh Hi¢uga g¢i™i ¢a® ca” ca™ na” za gixai. Cin’gajin’ga naza we¢éckaxe te, Tribal circle theysat the always embank- they Children embank- you are to make for ment made. ment them, af a¢a+. Ati td-bité, af a¢a+, d-biamd. Ki na™za gaxai té Uma™ha” ama. he indeed. Itissaidthat they he indeed, said (one), they And embank- made Omahas the says will surely come, says say. ment ss (sub.). Gan’ki pha ké ud¢tikihehébe gixai i¢iug¢e; pei gé akifis‘i’si™ gaxai And tent- the one after another, as they throughout ; tent- the interwoven they skins (lineof) farasthey would go made poles (ob.) made i¢dug¢e A™ ba yan’ge; wa¢dcka™ te, af Ada. Ati-bi, ai a¢a+, ai. K’ya throughout. Day nearathand; you will do your best, he indeed. It is said he indeed, said Thither says they have come, says he. ha” wada™be ahf-hna" am4; wand‘a® ag¢i, na"jide wand‘a" ag¢i. Wag¢a- night scouts were arriving ; hearing them they making a hearing them they You will = came back, drumming came home. with the feet cka" te, af Ada. E’be u¢ika™ te ¢ingé d¢a, af. Wapé ké b¢tigagqti haha all do your best, he indeed. Who hehelpyou will thereis indeed, he Weapon the ready says ’ none said. *n/ * n/ Peat , , . see A a¢aig¢ahni™ ¢aja™ te, at Ada; maqtide wahtita"¢i" u¢dgiji te, af Ada; att-bi, you have yours youlie will, he indeed; powder gun you putin will, he indeed; it is said says yours says they have come, al ata, af. he indeed, he says said. FIGHT BETWEEN THE OMAHAS AND THE DAKOTAS. 427 “ / yee in fact e¢i’ waki¢a-biama t’é gan’ka. pf té a¢idza té ca™ca™ nan’de ké ma*¢in’k madethem sit theysay dead _ the ones Tent the they when without sides the earth (sods) who. opened and stopping put it on the poles Agaspa-biama. i té ¢icta’-bi yi, a”he ag¢é-biamé. Uma™ha™-ma ati te, they weighted, they say. Tent the they finished, when, fleeing they went home- The Omahas come will, they say ward, they say. . Pre / “ 1 : af, Ada™ a”he ag¢d-biam&é Caa™” amd. Ki Uma™ha"-madi t’éwa¢ai-ma they there- fleeing went homeward, Dakotas the And among the Omahas the dead ones (ob.) said, fore they say (sub.). wagigai. Hé-janka-jan’ga dahi-qti ‘é¢a™¢ai, ?é¢ai. Wanikige si té ‘é¢a”- they buried Horn forked large right in the they put it on, they killed Wanukige foot the they put their own. (of fawn) neck him. ¢ai. Agaha-wactiee ‘é¢a%¢ai, ¢ té¢éqtia”i. Pc‘ige-wahi¢e wi jibe it on. Agaha-wacuce they putit on, that they killed outright. Iec‘age-wahi¢e they _ lower wounded le; ke¢a”. qa¢i"-gahige da ¢a™ ‘é¢a™¢ai. ; the. da¢i®-gahige head the they put it on. (The following is an incomplete account of the same occurrence, which Two Crows gave:) Nugé gdq¢a™ atigd¢ai Uma™ha"-maé. Sia™¢ai: Qa¢i"-ma jiwag¢a-baji; Summer onthe hunt we went the Omahas. — They were the Pawnees were not with them; alone: Uma™ha?-ma-hna”™ oaq¢ai. Ga” Wajé ké gdké angtha anga¢ai.. Djd The Omahas only wereonthehunt. And Elkhorn the that we followed we went. Joe aka é/di nikagahi i¢ig¢a"-ma éduihe ma*¢i"i. Anga¢ai dga™ 4é wéa¢ai. the there chief those who ruled joining walked. We went as _ buffalo we found them. é-ma hégaji t’éa"wa"¢ai, égaxe ga™ t’éa*wa™¢ atig¢i™i; ca™ ahigia™ qti The buffaloes nota few we killed them, allaronnd so we killed them we sat; infact very many times awa"nas ang¢i™i. Ca™ niaci"ga wi"aqtei yé-ma g¢éba cti, ag¢i™satii”- we surrounded we sat. In fact man only one the buffa- ten too, by them loes ¢a'¢a”, g¢éba-na™ ba-¢a™¢a™ cti, téwa¢é-hna™i, Ga" wandse té angt¢i‘age fifteens, by twenties too, killed them regularly. And tosurround them we were unwilling éga" ang¢i”i, wedb¢ati. ¢é-ma wea™4" ga” éga™ ang¢i“i. Hgi¢e ha’- some- we sat, we had our fill. The buffa- _—_— we carried and so we sat. At length early what loes them ega"tcé’qtci mi” é¢a™baji’qtci, ja” agidaha” yi, égi¢e yé ama ackaqtci didma. in the morning sun hadnotrisenatall sleep Irose from when, behold, buf- the very close were coming. falo (sub.) Wiragtci Djé aka t’é¢a-baji ca” bayliwi"xe a¢i™i, ca™ weéahide a¢i™ aga; Only one Joe the(sub.) did not killit yet turning around’ hehadit, yet far off he took it; tikiza ké’ya adi” a¢af. Ki can’ge ta® a®wa™‘i Djé aka. Ga™ 4é ¢i" Peds no one to the e took it. And horse the loanedtome Joe the And buf the tokillit there (sub.). falo (my. ob.) . ens 1 en/® aref, ada™ téagé-ga” at™didai. Ju ké wi aii”, ga” jahanuya sfa™¢é 41 asked there- Ikilledit and wecutitup. Body the I Icarried, and green hide alone carried me, fore it a at) FIGHT BETWEEN THE OMAHAS AND THE DAKOTAS. 499 Djé aké. Angde¢ai éga® yf ké angijadé angig¢ai. fi ¢a" é¢a*be atigaki Joe the Wewenthome- as tent the wewerenear wewenthome- ‘Tents the insightof we got (sub.). ward to ward. back Sea Se pons , Apel at : < . . yi, égi¢e 4¢ d‘iba wa¢iqai. Angdg¢ai kéya uka™ska wad¢i" a-fi duda. when, at length buf- some they chased We wenthome- tothe right inaline having theywere this falo them. ward with them coming way. ey) om . w , ° o . . yan’ge angdki yi, 3¢-ma wabayuwi"xe a¢af. Egi¢e nfaci"ga amd yahawag¢e Near we got when, the buffa- wheeling around went. Behold, men the shield home loes (sub.) a¢i”i té nika¢iqe a¢af. had when chasingthefoe went. (When Two Crows had dictated this, several Omahas entered the room, and he would not tell the rest.) NOTES. . This event occurred in 1849 or 1850, in Nebraska, south of the Niobrara, and near the Nigni, a branch of the Loup Fork of the Platte. 425, 7. wa‘i® ag¢i. This refers to the Omahas, who went after the bodies of the two who had been slain. 425, 9. hegabaji-biama, pronounced he+gabaji-biama. 425, 9-10. iha® ugine d‘uba, ete. This refers to the Omahas, whom the Dakotas re- garded as few, and as separated from “their mothers,” 4. e., the main body of the tribe. 426, 1-2. E‘arqti - - ¢a¢itce Edi one etede: ‘‘ You who are wishing to go and see what is to be done, should have gone thither.” This was said to each head of a husehold. 426, 3. édi a¢ai ha*i té. Sanssouci preferred to say, “édi a¢ai hati té yi,” making “hari té,” it was night; and “yi,” when. 426, 8-10. ukit‘é - - - Iwidaha* tai mifike. The Ponkas camped so near to the Dakotas that Whip could reprove the latter while pretending to scold the former. 426, 9. Eata™ una"pe it¢eonai 4. A™pa"-yanga said this was equivalent to “ Hata™ na™pea™¢aki¢at 1.” Sanssouci said that this should be, “Hata A¢a"pi in¢éona™ Gi"te.” He derived “ti¢a"pi i¢éona®” from “a¢a™pi gi¢a™.” 426, 12. na"za gaxai. Sanssouci said that some of the Omahas made an excavation as a shelter for their horses. The embankment was about four feet high. It was in the shape of a crescent, and was between the tribal circle and the bluffs. 427,1. weanaxi¢a cu-ifai, from “wenaxi¢a cu-i¢é.” “Cu-ige” must be distinguished from “cu-¢e¢é,” which denotes sudden motion from the place of the speaker and his party toward the party of those addressed. 427, 4. Mactu @ida*. Mr. Reed had come to reside among the Omahas in order to study the language, and to assist the principal missionary, Rev. Mr. McKenny. 427, 5. Ca®-ama denotes a reversal of the previous state after moving awhile. 427, 7. Ugida-qtiai: ugide is the possessive of ude; “qtia” is added for emphasis, showing that the Omahas were driven back so forcibly that they went as far into their lodges as they could get- 427, 12. ‘e¢am¢ai is almost a synonym of u, to wound. 427,15. jibe ke¢a®. The addition of “¢a"” seems to convey the idea of past action or condition. 427,19. waonuonude ga” wegiti" ¢e¢a-biama. The Omahas mangled the bodies of the two Dakotas, one of them being that of Kipazo’s son, the murderer of A"pa™ qanga’s 430 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. brother. They disemboweled them and threw pieces towards the foe, who cried with rage as they retreated. 427, 20 aki-biama Caa® ama, wagi®. This was not their home, but some place on their homeward way. : 428, 2. yacage a té u¢a®waki¢a-bi ega™. Sanssouci said that this should read: qacage na"be té Uwagi¢isna™-bi ega’”, u¢a” waki¢a-bi ega’; literally, “ Deer-claws— hand—the—they slipped on for them, they say—having—they caused them to hold them, they say—having.” ‘ 428, 4-5. zi té adiaza té - - - agaspa-biama. They had the tent spread open over the tent-poles, and they kept the sides down with sods of earth, which they placed all around the tent after they had put their dead inside. TRANSLATION. . The Omahas continued surrounding the buffaloes. My elder brother went one morning to shoot at a buffalo calf, and some one went with him. They killed a calf in a valley, and stood cutting it up. The Dakotas approached them by crawling, there being about six horsemen. My brother had no load in his gun, and the other Omaha had a bow. The Dakotas attacked them, coming with a rush. They killed the two, as they had no weapons. At length some one came back to tell it. They came back to tell that two Omahas had been killed. The Dakota murderers fled homeward. The Omahas went to the place and brought the bodies back. The Dakotas reached their home at¢he village. They roderound and round; they went around the lodges repeat- edly. The Dakotas were very numerous, and the Ponkas were there too, the tribes having come together. ‘Some buffalo calves are there, seeking their mothers. Hasten ye.” This was said by Kipazo, the father of the principal murderer, as he went along the line of lodges. He was the head-chief of the Dakotas. He also went along the line of Ponka lodges. ‘‘ When they capture your relations, the Omahas, you can take them, if you recognize them,” said he. The Ponkas did not heed him. So he went again to say it to them. “If you do not join the party, you shall certainly be the ones whom we will attack,” said he. The Dakotas were departing. The women Sat in the Indian carriages, and so they were departing. And the principal Ponka, Whip, went along the line of Ponka lodges. ‘You who are wishing to go and’see what is to be done, should have gone thither,” said he. Whip, his son Ma*tcu-wa¢ihi (Grizzly-bear- scares-off-the-game), and the Ponkas too, departed at night. At length they were approaching the place of meeting, where they stood. When they assembled themselves all together, some of the police who had assembled went watching one another. The police walked all around: some at the front, some at the sides, and some in the rear. The police attacked the company froin time to time, hitting those who showed any dis- position to walk leisurely. Whip scolded them. ‘TI have always known your nation in particular. Heretofore you were always unfortunate. Why do you threaten to punish me? You are they who have always acted just like women.. And that tribe (7. ¢., the Omahas) is composed of men, not women. I will know how you behave on meeting them,” said he. When they went thither, they approached as they walked by night. Now I will speak about the Omahas. In the evening the Omahas made an embank- ment or wall, inside of which they placed the tribal circle. The erier proclaimed thus: “ He says, indeed, that you are to make an intrenchment for the children. He says, FIGHT BETWEEN THE OMAHAS AND THE DAKOTAS. 431 indeed, that it is said, ‘They will surely come.’” The Omahas made the embankment. And they planted the tent-poles all along it, interweaving them. Then they placed outside of these the tent-skins, all along the embankment, one after another, as far as they would go. “He says that day is at hand, and that you will do your best. He says, indeed, that they have come,” said the crier. The night scouts were continually arriving there, having heard the noise made by the feet of the coming foe. “ He says, indeed, that you will do your best. You have none to help you. You will lie with all your weapons in readiness. You will fill your guns with powder. They have come, indeed,” said the crier. The day came forth. They charged on us in coming this way; they made the ground resound all around as they ran. Some of the horses from this place broke their lariats and ran; they ran around us. The Dakotas carried homeward the horses which arrived outside by running. A white man joined the hunting party and was among the Omahas during the fight. They carried off his horse too. His name was Mr. Reed. He continued saying, ‘The Dakotas will give me my horse again;” but there was not the slightest prospect of that. In about half an hour they contended with us all around the lodges. By and by the Omahas were driven back into their lodges; they were coming back right along to the rear. The Dakotas shot at random when they sbot at the lodges. They killed many horses. The arrows of the Dakotas came regularly to the lodges. The Omahas cut holes in the tent-skins, and when the Dakotas came in sight the Omahas shot away at them. The Dakotas killed an Omaha, Two Crows’ elder brother, in that manner. He cut a large hole in a tent-skin and peeped out. At length he was wounded right in the forehead. His name was U¢uci- najit (Stands-at-the-front). When they walked on the outside of the embankment, an Omaha who wore a wolf-skin was hit. ‘Buzzard is wounded,” they said. And another was wounded when they walked outside. ‘Big Kettle is wounded,” they said. A third was ga¢i"-na"paji (He-who-fears-not-a-Pawnee). When Mandan heard that he had been wounded, he went thither, and was wounded himself, in the leg, below the knee. “Mandan is wounded,” they said. When the Dakotas shot at Mandan, they made him fall suddenly. They dragged off any of the Dakotas who had been killed; having put ropes around their necks, they made the horses drag them away. But now, at length, they were not approaching. They ceased fighting. Two Dakotas had been killed at the front. The Omahas rushed on them, and cut up the bodies on reach- ing them; they cut them in many pieces, and threw them back at the enemy, who went homeward crying. And the Dakotas reached a place again, carrying the bodies of their fallen comrades. They danced the Mandan dance at the very large tent. They caused all the dead Dakotas to sit in the middle. Having made them hold deer- claw rattles on their arms, they made them sit as if they were singing. They sat sing- ing with them. In fact, they caused all the dead to sit in the tent. When they had opened the tent, and had put it over the poles, without delay they weighted down the sides with sods. When they finished it, they fled homeward. They said, ‘The Omahas will come,” therefore the Dakotas fled homeward. And among the Omahas they buried their own dead. He-janka-yaiga (Big-forked-horn) had been wounded right in the neck and killed. Wanukige was wounded in the foot. Agaha-wacuce was wounded and was killed at once. I°c‘age-wahi¢e was wounded in the leg, and aa¢i" gahige (Pawnee chief-who-keeps-a-sacred-pipe) on the head. 3 432 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS, TRANSLATION OF TWO CROWS’ VERSION. The Omahas went alone on the summer hunt, without the Pawnees. We followed the course of the Elkhorn River. Joe joined the chiefs, those who governed the tribe. As we proceeded we discovered buffaloes. We-killed a great many of them. We surrounded and killed them a great many times. In fact, there were men who killed them by tens, fifteens, and even by twenties. So we were almost unwilling to sur- round them again, as we had our fill. We continued bringing in the buffaloes. At length, very early one morning, long before sunrise, when I arose from sleep, behold, the buffaloes were coming very near. Joe did not kill one which he chased around and then to a distance to a lone spot. Then Joe loaned me the horse and asked ine to kill the buffalo. So I killed it and we ent it up. I carried the meat, and Joe bore the hide. We went back to the camp, which was not far from us. When we got back in sight of the lodges, behold, they chased some buffaloes. They were coming this way, right in a line with us as we went back to camp. When we had nearly reached the camp, the buffaloes wheeled around and departed. Behold, the men had shields and went in pursuit of the enemy. . HOW MAWADA*¢IX WENT ALONE ON THE WAR-PATH. DICTATED BY FRANK LA FLiECHRE. Mawada"¢i® nuda” a¢a-bi -¥i, endqtci a¢a-biama. pii ¢an’di ahi-bi Mandan to war went, they when, healone went he said. Village atthe he arrived, say he said yi, yi ¢a® baza™ snede -bi yi, can’ge-undji" wi" ¢ictbai té. Ki wa‘t wi” dci when, vil. the . among he went, when, inoree standsin one e pulled open. And woman one out lage he said ati-bi yi, da™bai té ha. I¢-qti yfaja ag¢a-biama. Ki Mawada"¢i? aké came, he when, she saw him : Speaking tothe she went back, he Mandan the sai very (much) lodge said. (sub.) ean’ge ¢anka wi¢i‘a a”he ag¢af té, cénujin’ga hégaji ¢iqd-biama. Uq¢a- ws) the ones failed with ficeing went when, young men a@ great chased him, he Not over- that them homeward many said. baji Akidg¢ai té. A™ba yi'ji jai té, wéahide aki-bi yi. Ha™ yi, ci é'di taking he had gone again. Day when he slept, far off hereached when. Night when, again there him again, he said a¢i-biama. Ki afi ¢a” u¢ica-hna® ma¢i"i té, ja” wagi¢e. B¢tgaqti he went, he said. And village the going around it, he walked, to wait for them to All regularly go to sleep. ™ bi yi, eénujin’ga na” ba ja”-baji, wa‘a™ yuwi'xe ma*¢i"i te. Ha™ska"- ea he when, young man two not sleeping, singing wandering they walked. Mid- said around ska™ ké’ya hfi yi, cénujin’ga na” ba ama ag¢ai té ha, ja”. Mag¢i"’-qi zijebe night tothe itamwhen, young man two the went homeward , fonlcege Earth lodge door rived (sub.) “as HOW MAWADA‘¢I® WENT ALONE ON THE WAR-PATH. 433 fba-t‘a® gahaé akfja™i t8. Ki akf¢a ja t’ai yi, 4ma gaq¢i ga” ¢ai té (Mawa- handleithad upon they lay to- And bot! sound when, the to kill wished (Man- gether. asleep one him da™¢i" aka). Tgapigi"’qtei &ya a¢ai té. K’di ahi-bi yi, 4ma aka dagaha™i den the). ery carefully thither he went. There hearrived, when, the the raised his head he said other (sub.) te, nackf ¢a"™ sdbajiqti ma™zepe-jin’ga {ti™-biamé. Ama aké dadha* when, head the very suddenly ax little he hit with it, he said. Theone the(sub.) to arise Atid¢ai té ha. Ki ¢iqaf té ha. A™ha-biamd MawAdat¢i akd. (igé started : And theychasedhim . Fed he said Mandan the (sub.). Chasing him ma"¢i”-bi yi, ba” ma¢i”-biamd Qa¢i"-jin’ga amd. yi ama b¢tigadti walked, he said when, hallooing walked he said Pawnee young tho(sub.). Lodge the (sub.) all ¢iqd-biama, wat amd cté, cfinuda™ ama cté. Ci ¢i‘d-biamad. Ci aba xi, chasedhim,hesaid woman the even, dog the even. Again he failed, hesaid. Again day when, ja”’-biamd, utcfje mate. Ci ha” yi, di a¢d-biaméa. A™ba yan‘géqtci D: he slept, he said, _‘ thicket within. Again night when, there he went, he said. uy very near , =f) OO . a . / ° = : ° yi, cani’ge yf wi” ¢icibai té ha. Can’ge wi” ka™ta"-biamd. Ki Aci ag¢a-bi when, horse lodge one hepulledopen . Horse one he tied ha said. And out hewent home- ward, he said ega™, yjebe é¢a*be aki-qti-bi xi, qa¢i® wi” akipé-biam4 uhfacka. Ki having, door emerging hehadjustreached when, Pawnee one he met him, he said close by. And from again, he said da¢i*® ak4 na™pai té Mawdda"¢i*. Ki Mawdda’¢i" aka can’ge ta” ¢icta”- Pawnee the feared to see him Mandan. And Mandan the (sub.) horse the(ob.) not letting baji ¢isnt ag¢4-biamd, ya” ¢i". Ki ga¢i akd &di éga™qti ba” ¢ahégabaji- - him go pulling went homeward, running. And Pawnee the just then halloo- wasmaking a great him along he said, (sub.) ing hna”-biama. Ki Mawdda"¢i® aké can’ge ta” ag¢i™ if¢a™i té, yig¢itutis‘a noise by calling, he And Mandan the horse the sat on him sud- when, bucking repeatedly said. (sub.) (ob.) denly efi-biama, ki a™¢ ieee pias: (Pab¢ita” an¢ igé¢ai yiji, za‘ai ama; it carried him, and threw him off, he said. Three times it threw him off when, they nade aaaD roar, he said; na¢uhaqtei ati-biama. Cinuda™ ama cti, wa‘i ama cti, ni ama ctl, b¢uga all very nearly they came to him, Dog the too, woman the too, man the too, he said. (sub.) (sub.) (sub.) ¢iqai té. Can’ge ¢i" ca™ca™ Ag¢i® akidg¢a-biama. chased hin). Horse the without sittingon he had gone again, he (my.) stopping said. NOTES. Mawada"¢i" told his story to Frank La Fléche, from whom the collector obtained it, in November, 1881. The event occurred when Mawada”¢i" was very young, say about thirty-five years ago. 432, 1-2. yii ¢andi ahi-bi yi. As the Pawnees camped in a rectilinear inclosure or line, the proper phrase would have been, ‘‘gii kédi,” ete. “ Tii ¢a®” refers to a curvi- linear encampment, such as the Omahas and cognate tribes use. 432, 6. ja" wagi¢é, synonym, ja™ wéadai té. 432, 8.433, 1. ma™¢i"-ti yijebe iba-t‘a". The shape of the earth-lodge, including the covered way leading to the inner door, resembles that of a frying-pan. The lodge is the pan, and the covered way represents the handle. The two young Pawnees lay on top of the covered way. VOL VL 28 12 15 434 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. TRANSLATION. When Mandan went on the war-path, he went by himself. When he arrived at the village of the enemy, he went among the lodges, and pulled open a stable. But a woman came out of a lodge, and saw him. Speaking many words, she went back to her lodge. And when Mandan was fleeing homeward, after having failed to capture the horses, a great many young men pursued him. He managed to get away without being overtaken. When it was day he slept, when he came again to a remote place. When it was night, he went thither again. And he continued going around the village, as he waited for the people to go to sleep. When all the others slept, two young men who did not sleep continued rambling around and singing. When it approached mid- night, the two young men went homeward to sleep. They lay together upon the cov- ered way which was over the door of an earth-lodge. And Mandan desired to kill one of them when both were sound asleep. He went thither very carefully. When he reached there, the young man whom he did not intend to kill raised his head, and Mandan hit him very suddenly on the head with a hatchet. The other one started up and chased him. Mandan fled. When the young Pawnee continued chasing him, he was hallooing. All the villagers chased him, even the women and dogs. And he failed again in his attempt to steal a horse. And when it was day he slept within a thicket. And at night he went thither. When day was very near at hand, he pulled open a stable. He put a lariat on a horse. Having gone out, he had just come out in sight when he met a Pawnee, close to the door. And the Pawnee was afraid at the sight of Mandan. And Mandan did not let the horse go; he ran homeward, pulling the horse along. And just then the Pawnee hallooed, and made a great noise by calling. And when Mandan sat all at once on the horse, the latter bucked repeatedly as he carried him, and finally threw him off. When he had been thrown off three times, the Pawnees made an uproar; they almost overtook him. The dogs, the women, and the men, all pursued him. Still sitting on the horse, Mandan had come and gone. GAGP-NA*PAJTS WAR PARTY IN 1853. RELATED BY HIMSELF. T‘an’gaq¢a™ yAqti a™¢an’kide gaq¢a” angd¢ai. Ca™ eddda™ waa”si- Fall hunt deer we shot at onthe hunt we went. In fact what leaping animal / sons: / : . , jin ga bgligagti an’gunai A-fji ai’, Wjawaqtia™i. Ca™ qaqti, miya, quga, we hunted Approach- we were, in excellent spirits. Infact deer, raccoon, badger, them. ing and pitching tents 3 man’ ‘ora, zizika, ca™ | Die a” ba gé wat” ag¢i-hna’. i g¢éba ar¢i”. mean turkey, in fact day Fhe carrying they came back Tent — ten we were, (pl.) them regularly. JAGLE-NASPAJPS WAR PARTY IN 1853. 435 Angaé¢ éga®, a-fji. Ci éga™i, ci UWjawaqtia”i. Anga¢ai éga", wage d‘iba We went as, they ap- Again it was so, again they were in excel- We went as, Wwhiteman some proached and ent spirits. pitched tents. Caden 14: Ss +e Oh ae os ° wa‘é igi” ami ké’di angdhii, Wage amadi angahii éga", wa¢dte wa‘ti, farming they whosatat bythe we arrived. White by them we arrived as, food they gave man us, tida'qtia™ i. Egi¢e u¢éwiawd¢ai. Nikacitga uké¢i" hnankdcé, fi-gi. it was very good. At length they collected us. Indian ye who are, be ye coming, Angtkikié tabicé. Ha” yi angikikié taf, ai. At™ha™, ai. Ha” éga™ We talk to each must. Night when wetalktoeach will, they Yes, said Night like other other said. they. a a = , a = 0D Aa Gee . . ké wagiayi éga", Anga¢e tai. Li té yangdqti té'di juawag¢e atti. Kgi¢e, the for us they as, We go will. House the very large at the with us they Behold, come came. wage am4 b¢tigaqti abfi hi. (E Wayé gud¢ica®, Ni-x¢be ké’ya, wage white man the all arrived . (That Little Sioux beyond, Water-shallow at the, white (sub.) River . man pahan‘gaqtci hi-ma édedi-ma ha. Gadi’ ¢é¢uta® ga” ¢é té.) Udwakiaf. the very first those who they were there . Across thence so it went.) They talked arrived with us. Ahati! kagéha, uwikie minké-ja, kag¢éha, edida® ed¢he yi, éga™qti ckaxe Oho! friend, I talk to EWG on the friend, what Isay what if, just so you do you one hand, tai. A*¢an’guda™”be tangata”. Uda" yiji, éga" angdxe tan’gata™, ai will. We consider it we who will. Good if, so we do it we who will, said (Uma™ha™ amd). Maja” ké u¢dgaca™ hné taf té ub¢f‘age, ai (wage aka). Land (Omahas the). the youtraverse yougo will the Iam unwilling, said (white man the). Maja” ké ¢é ¢ag¢i’qtci ¢a” e-hna™ ¢ag¢i”; ki eddda™ wandg¢e ¢i¢ta Land the this yousitjust (onit) the thatonly yousit (on); and what domestic animal your COA . ay, z . . gactbe hiwa¢a¢é ¢i¢in’ge hia. Ega"ja, maja” ké wiwfja, ai wage aka. outof it youcausethem youhavenone . Thongh so, land the mine, said white the to arrive man (sub.). . ene Out ie OVO. ° . a Maja” ké ¢i¢gaji; Lyiga™¢ai ¢i@wiYaji, u¢dasi ha, ai pe-sa” aka. Tyiga™¢ai Land the is not yours; Grandfather he didnot buy you leaped , said Buf- distant the Grandfather it, on it falo white (sub.). wi’ aji té fepaha” A4da™ i¢dpaha*-qti-ma™, ai. Tyiga™¢ai ¢inké ¢imwi™ té he did not the youknowit and I know it very well, he said. Grandfather theone he bought the buy it who it Oe ° . . 27 %y oi waji’ ¢iska-qti dda” iepaha® Ada”, ai, ¢aji-baji Uma™ha* ¢inké. e-sa” aka you are very intelligent there- you know it q he speaking con- Omaha the (ob.). Le-sa" the fore said, temptuously of (sub.) ae 3 SAAS ° RA he : a wage ¢inké man’ge ké uti’ti", Hadta™ g¢a™¢i’-a'¢a¢é 4. Maja” uhan‘ge white the (ob.) breast. the he hit re- Why doyoumakeme foolish ? Land end man (ob.) peatedly. ké gacibe jin’ga ¢ag¢i”. Wiebgim ga” nikaci"ga¢ayi¢é oni” tateé. the out of it a little you sit. It is as you make yourself a man you shall be. Wani'ya ewaji® jit‘a® ag¢ate ka b¢a, ga” udgine ma™b¢i”, ai pe-sa™ aka. Animal of itsown grows Teatmine I wish, so Iseekmine I walk, said je-sa™ the accord (sub.). Egatja, ca” ub¢i‘age, ai (wage aka). fe té a ¢ana‘a” ji, ca” Akiha™ hné Neverthe- still Iam unwilling, said (white man the). Speech the me you do not yet beyond you go less, listen to, yiji, ankikina taté ha, ai wage aka. Akiha" b¢é ta minke. A™¢akina te. if, we fight shall r said white the Beyond Igo will Iwho. You may fight me. man (sub.). 12 15 18 12 15 18 21 436 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. Maja” ké wiwfja ga”, béé t&é minke, ai. A™ha”, ai, gasdni hné a, Ae Land the mine at Igo will Iwho, he said. Yes, Peete ie to-morrow you go wija" be cub¢é t& minke hi, ai wage aké. Waqe-jin’ga ya™haha ehta™ I see you Igoto will Iwho said white the Young white people neighboring that class you man (sub.). ones u¢éwrrawat¢é-de, judwag¢e cub¢é ta minke, ai wage aka. Ha™ega”’te - Icollectthem when, JIwiththem Igotoyou will I who, said white man the. Morning waha"i éga", ‘abae u‘é¢a ga™, aiga¢ai éga”, gabgr judwag¢e. Wage ama they removed as, hunting scattered as, we went as, ree I with them. Whiteman the e¢éba-diba-qti éga” ahfi éga", wanase naji”i. Ga™i. Ceta™ na®cta™i-ga, forty Au arrived as, heading us off they stood. They didso. That far stop moving, ai. Ca™ angd¢ai yi, yu‘e’ a-fi éga™, TELE ké waéyii. Angu¢i‘agai-de they Yet wewent when, witha they as, the they tried We were unwilling, said. rush approached (ob.) to get from us. when wakidai: Ku! ku! ku! Angdg¢ai éga”, ucté k&’3a w¢i" abfi. (f4-bajfi-ga. they shot atus: Ku! ku! ku! We went home- as, remain- tothe havingus they Do not go. ward ing reached. Hnaf yi, wikide taf minke. U¢an’da ¢a™ angunaji"i; ékipa wénaji"i wage Yego if, Ishootat will I-who. Island the we stood in it; stood surrounding us white you man am&. Wa¢dkide hnicta"i, ai. An’ka-a™¢i’-baji ha, wéjai wage ama. the You shot atus you finished, he said. We are not so 3 doubted whiteman the (sub.). their word (sub.). A‘talcide hnictai ga”, ca” b¢é ta minke, ai. Maja” wiwija udgiha You have finished shootingatme as, at any; Igo will JIwho, _ saidhe. Land my I sob my rate ma"b¢i”, ai. ‘Abae ma"b¢ir. a aja“i a. I” ¢ika™i-ga. Cubsé ta Iwalk, saidhe. Hunting I walk. do woe q Make ye room forme. Igotoyou will act 80 minke, ai. A¢ahucige, wikide téike, ai. Hau! égija" cka™hna Ys Iwho, saidhe. You speak saucily, I shoot at you will, he said. Ho! you do that you wish égan-gi, ai Uma™ha™ ama. A¢af yi, wage amd wé¢ika?. dahé ke do it, said Omahas the They when, white the made way for the (sub.). went men (sub.) them. an’gahe angd¢ai ga” damt angd¢ai. Waticka ké angahii. Waticka ké we went over we went and down-hill we went. Stream the we reached. Stream the ug¢i” ida”; &'di aigug¢i7. tositin good; there we sat in. Egi¢e wage amd é¢a*be atfi, héga-baji, g{ébahiwim “na” ba: -qti-éga”. At aa white man the (sub.) in sight came, a great many, about. Angu See No ce -qtci a” ¢i". Waticka ké uspé aiigug¢i"; nf ya” haqtci just we were. Stream the sunken we sat in; water on the very place bank ké ang¢i”i. Wandce-jin’ga ehé ¢i* é¢a"be hi. Wada™be. Ga™ i¢a" the we Bat. Young-soldier Isaid theone insight arrived. He looked at He did so sud- ; who them. ares yiji, 4 ké ‘é¢a%¢ai. T’éa™¢ai hau, al. Dada” baski¢e! t’éa*¢éqtia™ i, ai. when, arm the he was hit on. They have ! What angry! they have cee (ob.) killed me ae Killed me, aia Ahat! ai. Keé! ca” wia naxi¢a taf, ai. B¢tiga anajiti, angug¢a‘af. Kga- Oho! the Come! atany wedashonthem will, Bey we stood, we gave the scalp- Ina said. rate sai yell. zéze ga™ wia™naxi¢a angd¢ai. WaAqe-ma a*wa™baazai. Can’ge ag¢i" wage row 80 wedashed onthem we went. The white men we scared them off. Horse sat on white men gAGI" NA*PAJLS WAR PARTY IN 1853. 437 bgtiga: Uma™ha® wirqtci can’ge Ag¢i7, Agaha- ma” ¢i*. [gadize-hna™-biamd. Omaha just one horse sat on, Agaha-mar¢ir. He rode round and round, they say. Wégaze ma™¢i”: Waqe-ma mtitwaona™ gaxdi-g3. Wedaji-hna® ¢icibai-ga, Instructing us he walked: The ae men missing them in make ye. Elsewhere, always feces ye shooting (the guns), ai. Egi¢e ci Uma™ha® ak& wdnasai hi. Hau! ké, na®cta”i- ga. Car- he At length again Omahas the headedthem . Ho! orn stop going. Let said. (sub.) off angaxe taf, ai Agaha-ma™¢i" aki. WaAqe-ma ani ‘cuwankiii; wirécte ang¢i- us cease, said Agaha-mar¢ia the The white men we have them for near even one we do not (sub.). relations; kena-baji te ida” ha, ai. Angig¢ai. Wa‘i-madi angdkii. Ké! angé¢e taf, injure ourown the good 4 said We went home- To the women ay came Come! let us go, he. ward. - home. ai. Angd¢ai. Ga” a-izi a™¢i” hau. Hau. paqti ké hégactéwa"-baji, t‘a” they We went. And Sppronch: we were : T Deer the a great many, abun- said. ing and dant camping teabai. paqti ké ab if¢dug¢e wakfde ma*¢i™i, yaqti-ma kidqpag¢a. qadze very. Deer the day roughout shooting at they walked, the deer movedinandout Evening them among themselves. i” i¢é yf, aki. Niet" ga wi'dqtci aka sata™ cté t’éwa¢ai, diba cté t’éwa¢al, sun had when, they one the five even he killed four even hekilled gone got back. (sub.) them, them, ° ee, ¢ab¢im cté t’éwa¢al, na"ba cté t’éwadal, ijawa héga-baji. Gasdni maja" three even Be pee two even ne piled pleasure aah a ae To-morrow land em. em, ga¢u ¢an’di ayf taf, ai. Ki égasdni yi, ci éga%qti a®ma™ ¢i7i, hégaji tea™- that at the SRI) said And thenext day when, again St so we walked, a great we place they. many war¢ai Gaq¢a™ ama a-fiii, wateicka ké’di ci antigtyii; ci ‘Abae b¢tigagti killed them. Those mae, were on camped, stream by the again we camped again hunting the hunt in; wai” akfi. Edithi, égi¢e, éa¢a¢a ta ama. Gé¢ica" b¢é td minke, ai carrying reached Then, behold, indifferent will, they In that direc- Igo will Iwho, said them home. directions said. tion d‘tiba. Ky wi cti géb¢e ta minke, ai. Ki wi cti gdké udha ta minke, some. I too Igoby will, I who, said And I _ too that Igo will Ivwho, that course (one). (stream?) along it al. (fab¢itha™ éa¢a¢a angd¢ai; u¢iza® té'di u¢éhe. A-fyi ar¢i” éga™, yAqti said In three parties in different we went; middle tothe I joined. Approach- wewere as, deer (one). directions ing and camping ké hégactéwa"ji ci tea” war¢ai. Ci angdg¢ai éga*, dkiha® a-tfyi angi”. the a great many again we killed them. Again we went home- as, beyond approaching we were. ward and camping Ha” yi ‘abae amd ag¢fi. Nikaci® ga na™ba édedi améde Caa™ ama, Night when they whohunted came home. two there they were, Dakotas they said but were, they. Udwakfa-maji, ¢ cti a"wan’kia-baji. Wuhit! twa¢akié etai yi‘ji. Gasdni I did not talk to them, they too did not talk to me. Surprising! youshould haye talked tothem. To-morrow wacta™bai yi'ji, na"bé ti¢a"-ba tiwakidi-gi, ai. Mgi¢e ci ha™ t& aki. you see them if, hand youholdand talkyetothem, said Atlength again night when they (one). reached home. Caa™ ama ¢ingaf. A®™wada*ba-baji, a"wa™ waya¢ica® ugdca™ a¢af dite, ai. Dakotas the there were We did not see them, in what direction traveling they may have said (sub.) none. gone, they. 12 15 18 12 15 18 21 438 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. Gasani ci wacta™bai yi, ta" uwakiéga"i-gi, ai. A™ja™i. Gan’yi Caa” To-morrow again you see them if, now do talk to them, said(one). Weslept. And Dakotas afi dubai te. Ha™ té’di g¢éwaki¢af té, wai amd a”hai. Gan’yi ni ama tent were four. Night when they sentthemhome- woman the fled. _ And man the ward, (pl. sub.) (pl. sub.) sfa"¢é wag¢ade a-ii té, angu. Ga” watcicka jin’ga angtyii ké hideaja alone creeping up they were us. And stream small wecamped the down-stream 0 us coming, in caii‘ge-ma ¢éa"wa"¢af. Uwa¢ica™i té Caa™ amd, cani’ge-ma tmai té Egi¢e the horses (ob.) we sent them. Went aroundus Dakotas the the horses (ob.) sought when. Atlength (sub.) them can’ge-ma wé¢ai té. Weé¢ai éga", gan’yi wa¢i" agdaf té. A™¢an’gidaha’- the horses (ob.) theyfound them. They found as, after a having they went We did not know at all them » while them homeward. bajiqgti éga", ci ‘abae anga¢ai; yaqti-ma a™wan’kidaf. gaze hi éga™, aboutourown as, again hunting we went; the deer we shot at them. Evening arrived as, angdg¢ai yi, égi¢e, cin’gajin’ga, wa‘t edabe, dahé ¢égega”™ gé'di Anaji"i, xagé we went Onis when, behold, child, woman also, hill like these a them stood on, ae war za‘é'qti amé. Hata" dda". Can’ge bgtigaqti wat¢i" akidg¢ai ¢a"+, ai té. they made a they Wherefore q Horse having they have gone (past they said. great uproar’ say. ee seat oan %) Qe-i! wad¢iju-baji héga-baji, ai. Ga™ wé¢a-baji ga" ‘ang¢i™ an’ga¢i”. Ahau! Alas! they eyed injured not alittle, aay And we sad we sat we whomoved. Oho! hey, als, Gan ade ga angdg¢e taf. A™wa™ha™ taf. A®wa™ha"i éga *, betigadti said And back again let us go homeward. Let us remove the camp. We removed oe (one). a®war’i@4™i, wa‘tl, cif’ gajin’ga, na”-ma cti, peas Ga” angdg¢ai éga", we carried little woman, child, the grown too, And we went home- as, packs, ones ward wateicka Zandé-btyja é akizi am¢i”. Arja™i éga" a“ba. Ud¢tida"da"béga”- stream Zande-buja that were we were. Weslept as day. Do consider ye it turned to and camped i-gi, ai. Ahau! ehé, nikaci” ga ¢ijtibaji yi'ji, éga"wé‘a® ga” ¢awadé eb¢éga”. alittle, said Oho! T anid, injuresone when, to ae so in desirable It ae (one). return Nikaci®ga uké¢i" eka” edwakiga™i, na"bé ‘a™, wakide, ca” wa¢ita™ gé ‘a” Indian habits they are like us, hand how to shoot, indeed work : ak how pl. ob.) cka™ g&’ ctewa™. Ugdhanadaze wag¢dde, can’ge wénacai té é cti éga™ g 8 g ) habits the soever. Darkness to crawl up to horse snatching the that too so (pl. ob.) them, from them (act) a*¢a™baha™ i, eb¢éga". A¢ipii, eb¢éga®. A*¢ige taité, ehé. Sig¢é ké we know, T think. We do it well, I think. We chase shall, T said. Trail the a™¢an’ouhe taité, ehé. Waqtbe uaha™ ta minke, ehé, wi. we follow it shall, I said. fe thing Icook will Iwho, I said, it Hau. Waqtbe udha”. Nikaci®ga u¢éwi"awa¢e. Ca® januya yaqti udha™; 7 Sacred thing I cooked. Man I collected them. fresh meat deer I eeieent yanuya té .ma™zeska na™ba fgaxe é-hna™ udha*. Néxe té ma™zeska sata”. fresh meat the silver two valued at thatonly Icooked. Kettle the silver five. Wat‘a™, wafi® jide, wafi" 44, haqude sabé, undji® b¢éya tigaxe na™ba, b¢ize; Goods, blanket red, blanket green, robe black, shirt thin eed two, I took; aki¢a wi" b¢tiga ki &’di masdni dixe: u¢ticiaza itéags. Gé wéku-ma, both one round (one) and onit halfadollar 1 madeit; in the middle I ye his those anor invited, gAGT"NA*PAJPS WAR PARTY IN 1853. 439 Hau! ¢été wia"b¢ai, ehé. Nikaci®ga gd¢i® wa¢ijudji ¢i” udne té mifke. Ho! thispile Iabandonto Isaid. Person thatone he who did wrong Iseek will I who. you, him Awacka™ ma*b¢i™ taté. Waji” ¢i¢iza a’¢at taf; wib¢itwi", ehé. Hau! ai, I make an I walk shall. Mil your you give will, I buy it from you, I said. Ho! said effort i me they, a’¢ii tan’gata™ ¢a™ja, wa¢acka™ té, im¢in’gai. I™behi" ¢izaf-de u¢ticiaja we give it we will though, youdo your /will, they said that Pillow they took when inthe middle to you best Y to me. ihé¢ai. qéxe na™ba eddbe in¢iquya tan’gata™. Hni" wi" éga", ati tan’- they laidit. Gourd two also we sing for you we will. You buy it as, we give we to dance it to you gata", al. Hné taté ¢a™ja, icka™ a¢i‘a™ té éga¢é‘a™ ¢ag¢i taté, ai. Wa‘a™ will, said Yougo shall thou J deed isdone the youdosoto youhave shall, said Singing they. to you him come home they. g¢ivi, Uéxe gasd¢ui té, ibehi” dma*ti” g¢i”i. Ha™ té snédega™, ca” qti they sat, gourd they rattled, pillow beating yas they sat. Night the long, as, they beat agains gaa™bai. Ga™ nuda” jiawag¢e ga™¢a-ma na*tai b¢uga. Wi téa¢é tA even till day. And to war Iwith them they whowished they danced all. Tkilhim will minke, ai. Wi ub¢a” ta minke, ai. Wi t ¢ingé’qti ub¢a® 144 minke, ai. Iwho, _ said I Itake will Iwho, said I wound none at all is eae will Iwho, said (one). hold of (another). (a third). Can’ge ewénace ta minke, ai. Hau. Aba. Ga™ a™fi coe , wi cti dad¢dd¢a oe Istealfrom will I who, said 7 Day. And they gave as, I too indifferent them (a fourth). to me directions awa. Wa¢ixabe ahni” hné te, wabaqte ahni” hné te (i¢d¢isande jug¢e- I gave. Sacred bag you neve you go will, bundle youhaye yougo will (whatis fastened with it, i it securely to it hna”’1). eee. yiman’e¢a” agai, wi" ¢am¢a™ qtei ixinaq¢e ubésni® regularly). Darkness * stealing himself went, just one by one hiding himself tofind him ont ¢ingé’qtci ga” a¢é-hna‘. Ha™adi nuda” a¢aé-bikeama, ai. Gacibe a-fja"i. there is no one 80 they were going. lLastnight to war they went, itis said, they Outsideof they ap- at all said. proached and lay down. Hau! nikawasa™, wada™be ma¢i”i-gi, ehé. Wégaze wi” a-fja"-hna™i Ho! warrior, to see walk ye, I said. Measure one they usually ap- proach and liedown ha” wada™be ama Hau! nikawasa™, ata” ¢aja™ti¢i¢inge yi, gti-o& ha, night scout the (pl.sub.). | Ho! warrior, when you are sleepy if, come back ehé. ** * Wajin’ga-jide huta® éta™ té'di, qiha"i-ga! daha"i-ga! ehé. qaha™ Isaid. * = Small bird red cried atthat then, Arise ner arise yes Isaid. Arising time Atid¢ai té wan i gite. * ** * Weasdni yi, wada™be ama sabdjiqtei ag¢ii. Agti they started up SSS mhadaxt day when, _ scouts the verysuddenly came ‘They were (sub.) back. coming yi ji, nuda” hanga na” ba yibaq¢a ad¢af. Nuda™hanga, watcicka ¢é gé¢ica® when, war-chief wo face to face went. O war-chief, stream this that side —/ B20 *H/ ké tea"qtel wa¢i" om ké. Una™sude yéga g¢ag¢a. (Cani'ge jaja ma™¢i" the just now having they went Bare spots were new suddenly and (Horse dunging walked them homeward. made in by frequently. often treading . . y / ké, é wakaf.) Sa™ itdta-qti ag¢af ke. Hau! nfkawasa™, ké, a*da™be taf. the, that theymeant). White inmanyclus- they went back. Ho! warriors, come, let us see. : afar.off ters, hereand ¥ there ~_ e . . i, . Ch B’di a¢af. E’di abfi, @éé ha, ai. Hau! nikawasa”, 66 ha. Wian‘guhe There theywent. There they Thisisit . (he) Ho! warriors, itis . We follow them arrived. said. that 12 15 18 12 15 18 440 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. taf, ai. Withai. Withe ca” mami” a”ba t i¢dug¢e. Egi¢e mit’ will, said They fol- Following _ still walked day the throughout. Atlength sun _ the (le). lowed them. them i¢éqtci yi, akijii ké. Wei¢e, can’ge-ma wa¢i" akfi té. fi ké ditba. Ha™ had gone when, they reached Behold, the horses having they had Lodges the four. Night very there again and them reached camped. there. yi atja™i, ki dgasani a™wa™ ¢iqai. Ujan ge ké anguha a™ma™¢i"i ¢a™ja, when we slept, aml the nextday we chased them. Roa the we followed it we walked though, an’guq¢a-baji; ci hebadi aja™i. Ci égasdéni a"wa™ ¢ige angd¢ai. Ci an’guq¢a- we did not overtake again ontheway weslept. Again thenext we pursued we went. Again we did not over- them ; day them baji; hebadi aja“i. Aba diba a"wa™ ¢iqai; a” ba wi"déta"hi, mi” ¢uma™ ci take on the way we slept. Day four wepursued them; day half the length noon them ; arrived, té‘di a™na™ cta"l, uwaje¢aqtia” i. A™wa?’¢atai. Ci a*wa” ¢ige anga¢ai. Egi¢e at westopped going, we were very tired. We ate. Again wepursuedthem we went. At length watcicka ké ujdja ké’ya angaéhii yi, sige ké ujaja baca™ca" ké uha a¢af stream the fork atthe wearrived when, the fork winding the aco it had ing i ké ha. Ki wian’ganase tai-éga", ujaja ¢uta® ké angtiha angd¢ai. gamut gone . And we head them off in order that, fork straight the wefollowed we went. Down-hill aya” ¢i" anga¢e-hna™i, ki ee gicka™qti a™ma™¢i" angd¢e-hna™ we ran we went always, and very fast we walked we went always, mi™¢uma"ci hiaji té’di. Hisiee mi” ¢a" hidé’qtci tédihi ana” cta"i. Na™ba noon arrived not when. Atlength sun the bottomvery itarrived westopped Two at the going. wada™be a¢af. Ga'-¢anka-jin’ga yi, agfi. Ugdhanadéze édihi yi, ci to see went. They moved a little while when, they were Darkness it arrived when, again coming there back. watefcka ujéja baca™ca™ ké itaxaji¢ica™ ké angdkii. E/di angdkii éga’, stream fork winding the towards the head the wecame to There we reached it again. itagain wada™be na”ba hideaja ¢éa"wanki¢ai. A¢ai éga", égi¢e sabdjiqti Caa™ scouts two down-stream we sent them. They went as, atlength very suddenly Dakota yf cddena™ba wé¢ai. Ki wada”be amd agfi. Cagi! cdAgi! cagi! ai. tent twelve they found And scouts the oe There they there they therethey said them. (sub.) coming are, coming are, coming are, coming (some). back. back! back! back! Anyfa a g¢ihea”¢ai. Egi¢e wada”be am& ag¢fi. Nuda™hangé! wea™ Serene! ourselves down to hide. Atlength scouts the had come. O war-chief! we found them. qi cddena™ba a¢af ké ha, ai. Watcicka ké uhd a"wa™ha angdgii. Egi¢e Tent twelve have gone - said Stream the follow- we followed we were At length they. ing it (their trail) coming back. Caa” yi cddena”ba ké fi ¢a"™ edi angakii, ¢iidéqti té’di. qéde té Dakota tent twelve the had ‘the there we reached sae when. Fire the been (past act) on our home- deserted pitched ward way, ceta™ ziqtcia”. Ha” hébe an’guq¢e tan’ga¢i”. so far very yellow. Night apart wepursuethem ae move. Caa” ama watcicka ké bas‘i” uhaf, ki Caa™ ucté amd cafi’ge wa¢i" Dakotas the stream the upside went and Dakotas the rest horse had them (sub.) own along, ama wakipai. Ha” té witdétagtiht yi, an’guq¢ai. Hau! nikawasa™, ic‘dge the met them. Night the just reached half when, we overtook Ho! warrior, old man ones who the distance them. qAGE-NA*PAJVS WAR PARTY IN 1853. 441 maja” wé¢ajif’gai gja™mi” hi. Hau! nikawasa™, ha” hébe afi’guq¢e tat. land they speak slight- I suspect 6 Ho! warrior, night apart of let us overtake them. ingly of us ads 1 fs : ie te i peas eh z r Wacka™ ega™i-gi. (iya™, ¢ixiga" eddbe, u¢igihita-baji Ga"mi™ ha. Ata®’hi® Do your best. Your grand- = your also, they are yearning for I suspect 5 At last mothers, grandfathers you, their own, v , , . : Q - 4 : s yi, é¢a"be g¢{ etéda™, edigigaf Ga™mi” ha. piadita® aga‘a® ¢a¢ircé ite. when, insight he has apt? they say that I suspect “ From the lodge whatluck you are q come about you have you moving ee), , Togen® . . “ Cee, . Ujan’ge ké a¢iqe ama” ¢iti. Wada™be amd did¢ai yi f¢a-baji age¢it. Céta™ Road the we pursued we walked. Scouts the had gone when notfinding hadcome So far (su (any one) back. an/guq¢a-bajl, ai. Watceicka jin’ga gaqa édi té a™¢fyai yi, maséni angdbii we have not overtaken said Stream small (going) there the we forded when, the other we reached them, they. aside side v 7] == . . . oo . . yi, nuda”hanga wi”, Nini ai” ta minke, nikawasa™, ai. Agdha-ma”’¢i" when, war-chief one, Tobacco LIuse will I who, warrior, he said. Agaha-mar¢i" akéi hi. Hitbé anetgiya® ang¢i™i. Hinbé uja™ ¢iktiku¢ai-gi, ai Agdha- it washe . Moccasin we put on our we sat. Moccasin to put on pull them on hastily, said Agaha- moccasins moccasins ma” ¢i® aké. Hau! nikawasa”, ninf ji” hnicta"i yi, cf taf. Wi waja™be mar¢i> the Ho! watrior, tobacco you youfinish when, you will. ut I see them (sub.). use reach there b¢é, ehé. Ujan’ge ké udha matb¢iv. Aga®’ya"b¢i" ma™b¢i”. Qd¢abé ké I go, I said. Road the Ifollowed I walked. Tran a little, now I walked. Tree the it and then (line of) ugdcabe ja”. ‘yan’géqtci pf yi, can’ge-ma ujan’ge ké uhd ¢utii éga?, making adis- lay. Very near I when, the horses road the follow- hadcome as, tant shadow arrived ing it this way wadasi éga", wéb¢i® di. Uma™ha™ can’ge ejai-ma wiqti awag¢ize. Idrove them as, Ihadthem Iwas Omahas horses their (pl. ob.) I myself I seized our along coming back. own again. Wadasi ag¢é é e¢i™ ¢ankd yan’géqtci wAb¢i® di yi, cka™aji i¢a’- ga” ¢ Idrovethem Iwent so this sitting those who very near Thad them I was when, not stirring I placed along back were coming back awa¢é. H’ya ag¢é. Aja™ya"b¢i”. (é g¢i” ¢ankdja awdyade ag¢é. Ceéta® them. Thither I went Tran a little, now This sitting to those who I, being near I went So far back. and then. were to them back. eé¢ectwa"ji; ninf ga” g¢i” amd. Hau! nikawasa™, nuda™hanga edabe, they had not stirred in tobacco as they they were sit- Ho! warrior, war-chief also, the least; were ting. eé¢ectéwa" ji ¢ag¢i’i. Ujan’ge ké nikaci™’ ga d‘iba uhd agfi, ehé. Wa! not stirring in the you sat. Road the person some _ follow- are com- I said. Why! least ing it ing back, nikawasa™, ‘a™ dite. A™wa™wajd¢ica™ ca” a’ ¢i® tai G'te, ai. Gépe: warrior, what is can be? In what direction by and by weare will can? said Isaid as the matter they. follows: Nikawasa™, nuda“hanga eddbe, yAciqti d‘iba wab¢i" ag¢t, ehé. Hal Warrior, war-chief also, averylong some Thadthem Icame Isaid. Thanks! time ago back, nuda™hanga! hi! nuda™hanga! ha! nuda™hanga! ai. A™ ¢isttbai. war-chief! thanks! war-chief! thanks! war-chief! said They extended their they. hands towards me. Sid4hi a"nfa-mAji ag¢i taté A¢a, ai. Waka"ta™i-gi! waka*ta™i-gi! ehé. Toes not paining me Teome shall indeed, Gn Tie ye them! tie ye them! I said. ome one). 12 15 18 12 15 18 21 442 ‘THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. Hajitiga wéka"ta’i éga™, fki wAbaqtai. Hau! nikawasa™, ¢é¢u wafi i gi¢e Cord they ticd them with as, chin they tied them. Ho! warrior, here iskfe Ui¢a™ o¢i“i-ga, ehé. Nikawasa™, nuda™hanga edabe, a pane eet ga, ’ g ) together BOUENE sit ye, I said. Warrior, war-chief also, they found me out hem . etéwa™-baji. Pi ati’gi‘a™ taf, ehé. Ucté amd wagdq¢a™ amd can’ ge-ma in the least not. Anew let us doit to him, I said. The rest servants the (sub.) the horses waka™ tai ga” cka™aji t¢a™ g¢i”i. Hau! nida*hanga, 6’di anga¢e té, ehé. tied them so motionless holding sat. Ho! O war-chief, there letustwogo, Isaid. em E’di angd¢e, na™ba ¢éga.. Ugahanadaze, ca” bamamaxe afiga¢ai. There we went, two thus. Darkness, yet bowing the head we went. repeatedly Egazéze ga’ qti yf amé. Nuda™hangé, yf uhan’ge dma téya hnéd td, ehé. aise cet so they camped. O war- chief,” tent end theone tothe you go will, T said. Atha, &di béé t& minke, ai. Qi, Awaté/di ond ta, ai. i uhan’ge dma Yes, there Igo will Iwho, saidhe. You, by which yougo will? said Tent end the he. other té’ja b¢é t& minke, niida*hanga, ehé. ‘A qti ctéctewa” diba wab¢i" ag¢i tothe Igo will Iwho, O war-chief, Isaid. Justhow notwithstanding some Ihave Ihave it happens them come ta minke, ehé. E/di b¢é. Egi¢e can’ge-ma yijébeqti ugdck i¢a™ wa¢ai ama. will Iwho, Isaid. There Iwent. Atlength the Sirs (at) the very fastened they had been placed. door E’di pf. Can’ge amd 4ji a®wa ¢ib¢a™i éga™, fathaf. Mahi" ag¢ize ga” There I Horse the different they smelt me as, they fled Knife I took my so arrived. (pl. sub.) . for that reason. wéka"ta® gS mdawdsasa; wadasi ag¢é. Hau! nikawasa”, ¢éama ci d‘iba lariat the I cut them ahr I drove them Twent Ho! O warrior, these again some (ob. edly; homeward. ci wab¢i" agi, ehé. A” ¢istibai. Ha! nuda”hanga! ha! nuda”hanga! again Ihave Ihave Isaid. They extended their Thanks! war- Aaa? thanks! war-chief! them come, hands towards me. ha! nuda”hatiga! ntiida™hangd, wéonaa¢dgi¢é, ail. Ha™ wirdqtci té, thanks! war-chief! O war-chief, you cause us to bethankful, saidthey. Night justone when, na*ba™ wib¢ize. Hau! Wag¢i"i-ga! wag¢i"i-ga! wag¢ini-ga! ehé Can’ge-ma twice I took them. Ho! Sit on them! sit on them! sit on si Isaid. The horses (ob.) wigajad i¢a’¢ati. Can’ge dg¢i"-baji amédega™ uskaskaqti dagajade ga” they straddled they did it Hors a ae ridden it was of that directly (on it) I straddled so them ees sort dag¢i® ga” yig¢ijemuxa ga”, a™a¢aqti i¢é¢ai. Hau! nikawasa™, sind¢hadi I sat on it oa kicking up his heels _ so, he threw me very far away. Ho! warrior, at the tail i¢a™ ¢ai-gi. Angig¢e tabacd, ehé. Ca” ¢iskié’qti angdg¢ai. Ca™ a®na™abat. place him. We gohomeward must, Isaid. And alltogether we went home- We rode till day. ward. Gicka™qti ang¢i”i, Ca™qti a™na”mi"™¢uma”cii. Hdihi yi, ana” cta?i. Very rapidly we sat. We rode even till noon. It arrived when, we stopped going. Cka™aji¢a’i. Egasini yi, mi ké cktbe hi. gnite wawakan’di¢al. They were suddenly Thenextday when, snow’ the deep j Feeling we were impatient from. motionless. cold gnidwatai, snidwatai! Né¢é ada", ai. Can’ge-ma wedag¢ae. (iéta" a¢in’-ga, We are cold, Weare cold! To kindle aa said The horses I divided This one have thou, a fire they. among them. ehé dé¢ab¢i’a®. Ké! ca” angdg¢e tai. Gicka™qti atig¢i“i. Ca™qti ci I said eight times. Come! still let us go homeward. Very rapidly we sat. Still, indeed again gAGI’-NA*PAJV?S WAR PARTY IN 1853. 443 a™na™ hati. Ci a®ja™-baji‘qti, ca” a™na™a"baf. Ci gicka”qti ang¢i™i, ef we rode till night. Again we slept not at all, we rode till day. Again very rapidly wosat, again J . . A . “nf ou . eo = , a Os fre . ca™qti a™na”ha"i. HKgasini mi” hidéqtei hi yi, angdkii; wéahide’qtci we rode even till night. The next day sun the very it when, wereached a very great distance bottom reached home; hiv ewe , , = a’ma™¢iti, Nuda” ama ag¢i, hu+! Nuda” amd ag¢f, hu! Can’ge we walked. Warrior the have halloo! Warrior the have __halloo! Horse (pl. sub.) come home, (pl. sub.) come home, wa¢i? ag¢i, hu"+! ai ag¢aji amd. Angdkii éga™, atjai. bringing they halloo! said those who had We reached as, we slept. them have come, they not gone. home < / =) . . . . Egi¢e Caa” amd can’ge-ma wig¢ige atti. Wiraqtci wag¢ade a-f. Atlength Dakotas the the horses pursuing their had Just one creeping up was (sub.) own come. to us coming. a“be. Aci pi yi wed¢é; ugdhanadadze ca” wa¢fona marti’. Wigdaqda™ ’ 5D D> I saw him. ae of oe pace z found darkness yet visible he walked. My wile oors rive ‘im ; uéb¢a. QGéama Caa” wi” ati, ehé. Wahiita™¢i® ké ag¢ize éde, Caa™ a®wat - I told her. hese Dakotas one has Isaid. Gun the Itookmine but Dakota found come, (ob.) besni® éga™ bispé-ga™ ja™, yan‘de ké A¢askabe. Na®stistapi ag¢af. A™ba me out as crouching some- lay, ground the he stuck to. Walking rapidly — he went Day : what but softly homeward. yi ata™hai, Wajé-ujin’ga kédita". Hideaya a®a“hai. Uhnicka wi” angahii when _ we fled, Little Sioux River, from the. Down-stream we fled. Valley one we reached the smaller éga®, a-fyi afi”. Ha” yi, ugdhanaddze hi. Egi¢e Caa” ama uwaq¢ai, as, Wwewereapproach- Night when, darkness . Atlength Dakotas the overtook us, ing it and camping. (sub.) hégaji. Angt djiba a¢i”. Baxt ké’di Caa™ wi” ugas‘i"i té. Gan’yi wage not a few. We few wewere. Sharp, atthe Dakota one he peeped. And white ; thin peak man wi” édedi-aké. EK imaxai té. Uma™ha®™ oni” a, af té wage aka. An‘ka- one he was (living) He questioned him. Omaha youare # said whiteman the Tam there. (sub.). maji, Caa™ b¢i”, af té. Ki waqe na™ba damti a-fi éga™, wada™ be atti té. notso, Dakota Iam, hesaid. And whiteman two down-hill they as, toseeus they came. were coming Gai té wage aki: Uma™ha” oni”i. Caa™ ama édedi-ama ¢a™ja, Aqta™ vida” Said as fol- whiteman the Omahas youare. Dakotas the theyarethere though, how good lows (sub.): (sub.) possible foidxe taba, af té. Uma™ha™ fe té ¢api-baji ¢a™ja, ca” udwacitat te. £ D : Jy 5 they doto should? said they. Omaha speech the theydidnot though, yet they told it to us. you speak well Caa™ iwi"athan’ga¢i”i. Caa™ vi¢ai éga”, can’ge ugick i¢a™wad¢é tida®, Dakotas we were fleeing from them. Dakotas eras as, horse fastened _ to place them good, 0 em ai. Egi¢e Caa” amd wednaxi¢ai. Can’ge-ma wénace ga” ¢ai té. Nid¢a said Atlength Dakotas the attacked us. The horses totakethem they desired. At random (some). (sub.) from us a a™¢icibai. Caa”-ma a™wa™baazai, ki cani’ge-ma wan’gag¢d¢ii té. E’di, we fired. The Dakotas (ob.) wescared them off, and_ the horses (ob.) we had our own. Forth- égaqti Caa™ Mwi”athan’ga¢i”i. Hideaja ata“he anegddai. Cat qti ha” po 8 with Dakotas we were fleeing from them. Down-stream we fled we went. Right along night at¢a™mar¢i" anga¢ai. Ma‘a-uhan’ge ké’ya angdhii. Mandé-ha angixai éga®, we walked by we went. End of the cotton-woods atthe we arrived. Skin-boat - we made as, Nictide ké niwan’ga¢ije angag¢ai. Caa™ wa¢iqe amd g¢éba-¢ab¢i" ki &di Missouri the wecrossedin boats wewenthome- Dakotas pursuers the thirty and on it River ward. (sub.) 12 15 18 21 12 15 18 444 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. cAde itéxaja ag¢ai éga” Ada¢age yan’ga wi” &'di akfi té IY Uma™ha® six to the head went hea aad large one there theyreached And Omahas of the stream homeward it again. d‘iba, yAqti ime ma¢i”-ma ¢a”, qéki ké’di g¢i” akama. Ki Uma™ha® some, deer Boreas those who had walked, foot aoe the atthe were sitting,they say. And Omahas em amaé ucté amd eca™ ogi i té wégidaha’-baji-biamé j4qti tne ma"¢i” ama the therest nearthere sat the knewnot about theirown,they say deer hunting walked the (sub.) them (sub.) ¢éamé. Caa™ amd baxtt ké/di ugds‘i*-biamd. Egi¢e Uma™ha™ nal ba these. Dakotas the (sub.) peak at the peeped, they say. At ga Omahas watcicka ké’di aki-bi ega™”, mandé-ha gaxd-bi ega™, niwa¢ije et té. stream atthe reached again, having, skin-boat made,they having, tocrossinthe they went. they say say boat Egi¢e Caa” amd wakida-bi ega™, aki¢d téwatal. Ucté aka akfi, cin’ ay ga, Atlength Dakotas the shotatthem, having, both Hove The rest Sacked (sub.) they say home, wa‘t eddbe. Angt-an’gata"-j4ta™ can’ge Ag¢i” wi’ a-i. Masdaniataja™ u¢a woman also. ea from us who stood horse _ sitting on one was From the other side to tell coming. i¢a-biama. Na™ba eee ag¢ai, hu"+! 4-biam4. Cé ha™adi weanaxi¢ai. they sent (the Two ee lolled eet vant halloo! said they, he That lastnight we were attacked. voice) this way, homeward, said. . they say. . 1 : . Wakidai. Ha” a™¢a"ma?¢i", ca” qti a"na”a"ba afigag¢ii, é ¢é¢a-biama. Theyshotatus. Night we walked by, we walked even till day wehavecome to theysent (the voice), back, say it they say. Wagq¢i ké Sbé-hna*i 4, 4-biama (can’ge dg¢i" aka). Ma™cka-gaxe gaq¢t Killed the who only ? said, they say (horse sitting on he who was). Ma*cka-gaxe they slew ag¢ai, nijinga jug¢e, ai. Ca™ angag¢e tan’ gata” hau. Mandé-ha angaxai they went boy with him, said Yet we gohome- we who will Skin-boat we make homeward, they. war éde céta™ anyig¢i‘af. Itdxayd-ma géama b¢iiga cag¢é ta ama, 4- biamé. but so far we have not Those up thestream those out all they ‘go home- will they, said Sd they finished for ourselves. of sight ward to you Agi ‘¢4-biam4, é u¢d aki. Egi¢e xagé agi Atidg¢ai Xagé Aue ha, Coming theyspokeof, that to hereached Atlength crying coming they were Crying they are back they say, tellit home. back doing it suddenly. coming back ai. Ha™adi wakide-ma ¢a” é da™cte uhé the aki éde, wi” t’éawa¢al té, ai. was Last night those whoshotatus they perhaps path pass- they but one they killed (of) us, said said. , ing that reached (some). way again Ha’ adi wednaxf¢ai amd ¢a” Adaddge té hidé ké’di gaq¢i ag¢a-biama, ai. Last night they attacked us the ones who headland the bottom atthe killed him went homeward, said did they say, he. (jijin'ge, Ma” cka-gixe, gaq¢i ag¢d-biama, ai. Agaha-ma”’¢i" (ak4) iwi" ¢ai. Your son, Marcka-gaxe, killed him faut Lone wan ee Agaha-mar¢i> (the sub.) told me. they say, yi ké bedgaqti agi-biama. ji ama bgugaqti cangdki tan’ga¢i®. Wédai-ga, Tent the et coming back, Tent the we reach you wewill, as we Wait for 2 ’ they say. (sub.) at home move. af té nf masdni naji” ama. pi ama bgtigadti cak{ ti amd. Weédai-ga, said river ontheother those whostood. Tent the ciay ele you Wait for us, side (sub.) at home. A-biamé u¢d ag¢i ak&é. Na™ba ja” yi, égi¢e af ké bgagadti ag¢fi. Nicide eye said, totellit he who came Two sleep when, atlength tent the came Missouri said he back. back. hidé kéya uhd ag¢af. Wana b¢igagti ‘i ma*¢i’’-biama, . Wjawagti. bottom tothe follow- they went Animal all carrying walked, they say, a great (mouth) ingit homeward. abundance. gAGr-NA‘PAJPS WAR PARTY IN 1853. 445 yigta’’xe hégaji t’a”i yf ke. Ag¢af éga™ akfi Maja” man¢i"’-qi gaxe Bees not a few pos- tents the. They went as theyreached Land earth-lodge made sessed homeward home. ¢a44 akii. Akii éga, tjawaqtia”i. Nikaci™ga b¢tgaqti bayéye watef- all at the they They as, a very pleasant time. People in bands they reached reached home. home : gaxal, Mawdda¢i" watcigaxaf. Can’ge ta" ab¢i” aki ta” dag¢i’. Axf‘a?; danced, Mandan they danced. Horse the Thad TIreached the Isatonhim. I painted \ (std.) home (std. ob.) myself; wa¢aha tida® Ab¢aha. Néxe-gayt udti": Ku+! Waga-naji" gata” yig¢ize te clothing good I wore. Drom T hit: Ku+! Wagqa-naji= that one let him take it for himself hi, ehé. Qingéagé. Ewa¢é 34 ama a” ¢isttibal. (hi waqpani na” ¢apaji. T said. Igaveittoone Hehadthem his the extended their You tobe poor you donot fear it. not my relation. for relations (sub.) hands to me. Wa¢icuce hégaji Aha". A” qti¢iéga” ¢ayickaxe dha”, af té. You are brave not alittle ! You are anhonor- youmake yourself ! they said. able man NOTES. Ni-xebe is Boyer Creek, in Iowa, opposite Calhoun, Neb. Dixut/ai is on this creek. This is where the Omahas died from the small-pox, whence this name: in full, dixe ut’ai, from dixe, the small-pox; and ut’e, to die in. This place is where the first whites were in Iowa, about fifty miles in a direct line southeast by south from Omaha Agency, Neb. These white men who attacked the Omahas were Mormons. 435, 11-12. edada® wanag¢e ¢i¢ija gacibe hiwa¢a¢é ¢i¢inge ha: “You have no domes- tic animals which you send outside of the land where you dwell; but T have wild animals which are outside of my dwelling-place, though on my land.” This seems to have been the idea implied in ye-sa”’s remarks, though it is not fully expressed in the text. 435, 16. g¢a™¢imam¢a¢é, equivalent to “atonajuaji” from “¢ajuaji.”. The former is from g¢an¢ir¢e. 435, 17. wieb¢i® ga" nikacitga¢ayi¢e oni tate. “The land in Towa from Dixut/ai, or Ni-xebe, southward had been sold to the President; but the Iowa land north of Dixut/ai had not been sold. Yet the white people came on it, and the Omahas have not been able to get any pay.”—ga¢i*-na"paji. 436, 5. gai, so; 7. ¢., they waved their hands at the Omahas. 436, 7. ucte keya wa¢i® abii. The main body of the whites went in advance of the main body of the Omahas, endeavoring to head them off. The four Omahas were driven towards the main body of their people. 436, 18. Wanace-jinga ehe ¢i". I do not know why ga¢i®-na"paji spoke of him in this manner. 436, 17-18. ni ya"haqtci ké ang¢i*i, close to the stream, on the very bank. 438, 8. akiag¢ai ¢a"+. The latter word is crescendo, and with the rising inflection. 438, 11. a®wa™in‘ini, from watim‘i", a frequentative which has a diminutive force. Compare “ana‘a™a®” (I have heard a little now and then, but I am not sure that it is exactly correct), from “na‘a™a™,” frequentative of ‘na‘a”.” 439, 14. ¢aja™ti¢i¢inge yI gii-ga hi. When the scouts became sleepy, first one and then another made the ery of a coyote. Then all four returned to the rest of the party, and lay by the fire till almost day. 439, 15-16. daha atia¢ai wangi¢e. All arose and dressed hastily. A little before 446 THE GEGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. sunrise two went out as scouts, passing directly along in the path to be traveled by the war party (literally: Mir’ é¢a™ba-b4ji tédi na™b4 wada™be a¢ai, uhé a¢é tai éga™ uka™ ska). 439, 19. sa® itata-qtci ag¢ai ké; ‘‘sa®” refers to the light soil bare of grass; the horses feet had trodden down the stubble (or, burnt grass), leaving the lighter soil, which was seen in the distance. ‘“Itata” shows that there were several horses, and that the ground was trodden thus in many places; and “ké” denotes the long line of such tracks on the homeward way. 440, 1. a™ba t i¢augte, in full, a®ba_té i¢aug¢e. So, mi® ¢ i¢eqtci, in full, mi™ ¢a™ i¢eqtei. 440, 20—441, 1. itc‘age maja" we¢ajiiga, ete. The old men who remain at home act as criers day and night. They goamong the tents and to the bluffs where they exhort the distant warriors, after this style: ‘“Wacka™ egan’-g4. Na hnit éga", u¢agaca™ mathni™. Maja” She ga ¢aqti A4¢ahe mathni’. Agudi¢aja” cka™hna yf, &/dijai’/-gihi. Gaidugé- q¢e ja” ¢ithé.” The following is a translation of this address: “Do your best. You have gone traveling because you area man. You are walking over a land over which it is very desirable for one to walk. Lie in whatever place you wish to lie (7. e., when you are dead). Be sure to lie with your face the other way (7. e., toward the enemy).” 441, 3. yiadita™ a¢a‘a™ ¢a¢ince te. This is probably a quotation from the usual song of the women. When Hebadi-ja? of the yatze gens was addressed, they sang thus: Wanag¢i"-a! A¢a‘a™ ¢a¢incé inte. Hasten! What are you doing that you remain away so long? qinuha, ¢aa™¢a car’ ¢adircé. Elder brother, now at length, you have left him behind. Hebdadi-ja®! Caa™ jin’ga kite a¢i’ gi-a. O Hebadi-ja"! come back quickly with a young Dakota. 441, 7. hitbe aiigugija" aig¢i"i. They had removed their moccasins before cross- ing the stream. 441, 19. sidahi a*nia-maji ag¢i tate a¢a. This refers to going home on the horses, and thus avoiding traveling on foot, which would have pained their feet (na*nie). When ga¢i™-na"paji caught the horses, he did not recognize them, as it was dark. After the rest had gone to fasten them, Agaha-ma*¢i" returned and thanked him, say- ing: “They are our horses. We thank you.” 442, 4. édi anga¢e te. ga¢i?-na™paji meant Agaha-ma*¢i" and himself. 442, 17. ca® ¢iskieqti angag¢ai. They drove most of the horses. The warriors being mounted kept around the sides and rear of the herd. 443, 16. Caa® i*witathanga¢i®, in full, Caa® Mwitathe alga¢i®. 444, 8. na"ba waq¢i ag¢ai. Sanssouci said that only one Omaha was killed at the big headland, and that there were more than two in the party which attempted to cross the river at that time. 444, 10. Ma®cka-gaxe belonged to the Quya or Raccoon section of the Wasabe- hitaji. Hence his name may contain an allusion to the myth of the Raccoons and the Crabs (or, Craw-fish). 444, 13. agi ‘i¢a-biama, e u¢a aki. This was told by Agaha-mar¢i>. 444, 14. hatadi wakide-ma, ete. This was said by some of ga¢i?-na"paji’s party. 445, 1-2. maja" ma¢i"-yi gaxe ¢a“4ya aki. At Sarpy, Neb., near mouth of the Platte. gAGl-NA'PAIJLS WAR PARTY IN 1853. 447 TRANSLATION. We killed deer when we went on the autumnal hunt. We hunted all sorts of small leaping animals. When we approached any place to pitch the tents, we were in excellent spirits. Day after day we carried into camp different animals, such as deer, raccoons, badgers, skunks, and wild turkeys. We had ten lodges in our party. AS we went, we camped for the night. And we camped again at night, being in excellent spirits. At length we reached a place where sonie white farmers dwelt. They gave us food, which was very good. Atlength they assembled us. “Come, ye Indians, we must talk together. Let us talk toeach other at night.” “Yes,” saidwe. As they came for us when a part of the night had passed, we said, “Let us go.” They came with us to a very large house. Behold, all of the whites had arrived. That place was beyond the Little Sioux River, at Boyer Creek, where the first white men were, across the country from this place. They talked with us. “Oho! my friends, though I, for my part, talk with you, you will do just what I say,” said one. ‘We will consider it. If it be good, we will do so,” said the Omahas. “I am unwilling for you to wander over this land,” said the white man. je-sa" (White-Buffalo-in-the-distance) said, “As you keep all your stock at home, you have no occasion to wander in search of them; and you dwell nowhere else but at this place. (But we have wild animals, which are beyond our dwelling-place, though they are on our land.)” ‘Though you say so, the land is mine,” said the white man. “Theland isnot yours. The President did not buy it. You have jumped on it. You know that the President has not bought it, and I know it full well,” said ze-sa®. “If the President bought it, are you so intelligent that you would know about it?” said the white man, speaking in a sneering manner to the Omaha. gye-sa” hit the white man several times on the chest. ‘‘ Why do you consider me a fool? You are now dwelling a little beyond the bounds of the land belonging to the President. It is through me that you shall make yourself a person (7. e., you shall improve your condition at my expense). I wish to eat my animals that grow of their own accord, so I walk seeking them,” said ye-sa". ‘Nevertheless, I am unwilling. If you go further, instead of obeying my words, we shall fight,” said the white man. “I will go beyond. You may fightme. As the land is mine, I shall go,” said ye-sa®. ‘Yes, if you go to-mor- row, I will go to you to see you. I shall collect the young white people all around, and go with them to see you,” said the white man. Having removed the camp in the morning, we scattered to hunt for game. I went with three men. About forty white men arrived, and stood there to intercept us. They waved their hands at us, saying, “Do not come any further.” As we still went on, they came with a rush, and tried to snatch our guns from us. When we refused to let them go, they shot at us: “Ku! ku! ku!” As we went back, we were driven towards the rést of our party. The leader of the white men said, “Do not go. If you go, I will shoot at you.” We stood on an island; and the white men surrounded us. “ You have already shot at us,” said the Omahas. The white men doubted their word, saying, “It is not so about us.” “You have already shot at us, so we will go at all hazards. I am following my trail in my own land. Iam going to hunt. Why do you behave so? Make way for us. We will go to you,” said ye-sa". “If you speak saucily to me, I will shoot at you,” said the white man. ‘Ho! if you wish to do that, do it,” said the Omahas. As they 448 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. departed, the whites made way for them. We went along a bluff, and then down hill, when we reached a creek. It was a good place for us to stay, so we remained there. At length about two hundred white men came in sight. We were just thirty. We were in the hollow by the edge of the stream. Wanace-jiiiga, whom I have spoken of, arrived in sight. He looked at them. When he made a sudden signal, he was wounded in the arm. ‘They have wounded me! There is cause for anger! They have wounded me severely,” said he. “Oho! come, let us attack them at any rate,” said the Omahas. We all stood, and gave the scalp yell. Having formed a line, we went to attack them. We scared off the white men. All of them were mounted; but only one Omaha, Agaha-ma*¢i7, was on a horse. He rode round and round, and gave us directions what to do. ‘Miss in firing at the white men. Shoot elsewhere every time,” said he. At length the Omahas intercepted the retreat of the whites. ‘Come, stop pursuing. Let us cease. It is good not to injure even one of the white people, who are our own flesh and blood,” said Agaha-ma*¢i". We returned to the women. Then we departed. We reached a place where we pitched the tents. There were _ a great many deer; they were exceedingly abundant. Throughout the day we walked shooting at the long line of deer, and they were moving back and forth among them- selves. At evening, when the sun set, the hunters reached the camp. Some men had killed five, some four, others three, and so on. They were in a good humor. “To-morrow we will camp at that land,” said they. And we fared as well the next day, killing many deer. Those who were on the hunt reached another place, where they camped. We pitched the tents by a stream. And all who went to hunt brought back game on their backs. Then, behold, it was proposed to go in different directions. We divided into three parties; one went to the right, one to the left, and the third kept straight ahead. I joimed the last. When we camped, there were plenty of deer, and we killed them. Going on towards home, we camped again. At night the hunters returned, saying, “‘Two men were there who were Dakotas. We did not talk to them, and they did not talk to us.” “Surprising! you should have talked to them. If you see them to morrow, shake hands with them and talk to them,” said one of us. At length they reached the camp the next night. The Dakotas were missing. ‘They went traveling in some direction or other, so we did not see them.” “If you see them to-morrow, do talk to them,” said one of us. Weslept. There were four lodges of Dakotas. At night they sent the tents homeward, and the women fled. The men alone were coming, creeping up towards us. We sent the horses towards the mouth of the small stream by which we camped. The Dakotas surrounded us, seeking the horses. At length they found them and took them off. As we knew nothing at all about our loss, we went hunting again, and we shot deer. When we went towards the camp, as evening arrived, behold, the children and women stood on bluffs resembling these, and they made a great uproar by erying. ‘ Wherefore?” said we. “They have taken away every horse!” said they. ‘Alas! they have done us a very great injury.” And we sat very sad. ‘Oho! let us go back again. Let us remove the camp.” When we removed, all carried little packs, the women, the children, and all who were grown. As we went homeward, we reached the stream called Zande-buja, where we camped. We slept, and it was day. ‘Do consider the matter a little,” said they. “Ho!” said J, “I think that when one man injures another, it is desirable to repay him. The Dakotas are like us in their Indian habits. We know just az well as they how to use dAGL-NA*PAJLS WAR PARTY IN 1853. 449 the hands for shooting at foes or game, for working in any way. We know how to creep up to them in the darkness, and snatch their horses from them. TI think that we can do it well. Let us pursue. We shall follow the trail. I, even I, will do the sacred cooking.” I did the sacred cooking. I collected the men. TI cooked fresh venison, which I valued at two dollars. The kettle was worth five dollars. I put some goods in the middle of the tent; a red blanket, a green one, a black robe, and two figured calico shirts, the last of which I valued at a dollar and a half each. To those who had been invited, I said, “Ho! I leave this pile of things to you. I will seek that man who did the injury. I shall make every effort in walking to find him. Please give me your temper. I buy it of you.” “Ho!” said they, “though we will give it to you, please do your best.” They took a pillow, which they put in the middle with two gourd rattles. ‘We will sing for you to dance. As you have bought it, we will give it to you. You shall return after doing to them as they did to you.” They sat singing, making the gourds rattle by striking them against the pillow. As the night was long, they beat the rattles even till day. And all those who desired to go on the war-path with me danced. “Twill kill him,” said one. Another said, ‘I will take hold of him.” “T will take hold of one when he is not wounded at all,” said a third. “TI will snatch horses from them,” exclaimed a fourth. It was day. And as they had given something to me, I, too, gave presents all around. ‘You may take a sacred bag, and what is bound up with it (what is always fastened securely to it),” said my guests to me. When it was dark, we stole off one by one, secretly, without being detected by any one at all. The next day it was said, “They went on the war-path last night.” We reached a place outside of the village, and there we slept. ‘Ho! warriors, go ye as scouts,” I said. Those who go as scouts at night, usually go about a mile from the camp before they liedown. “Ho! warriors, when you become sleepy, come back,” said I. * * * When it was time for roosters to crow, L said, “Arise! arise!” All arose hurriedly. * * * The next day the scouts came back very suddenly. As they were returning, two war-chiefs went out to meet them. “O war-chiefs, they have just taken them homeward on this side of the stream. The feet of the horses have recently made a series of bare spots along the ground where the grass has been burnt.” They also referred to the fresh manure dropped by the horses as they went. ‘They have gone back, making a line of clusters of whitish spots on the burnt grass,” said they. “Ho! warriors, come, let us see it,” said the war-chiefs. They went thither. “This is it,” said the scouts. “Ho! warriors, it is that. Let us follow them,” said the war chiefs. They followed them, walking the whole day. At length, when the sun had just set, they reached again a place where they had been, and there they camped. Behold, the foe had reached home with the horses. The tents were four. We slept at night, and we pursued them the next day. Though we passed along the road, we did not overtake them, and we slept on the way, The next day we con- tinued the pursuit ; but we did not overtake them, so we slept on the way. We pursued them four days. When half of the day had gone, and it was noon, we stopped, as we were very tired. We ate, and then continued the pursuit. At length, when we reached the forks of a stream, the trail had gone up a crooked branch to the right hand. We went straight on to head them off. We ran down-hill, and walked fast wp-hill till noon. When the sun was very low, we stopped. Two went as scouts. When they VOL. VI 29 450 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. had been absent but a short time, they returned. At dark we reached another place, having arrived again at the crooked branch, up towards its head. When we reached it again, we sent two scouts down-stream. As they went, they came very suddenly upon twelve Dakota tents. Then the scouts were returning tous. ‘There they come! there they come! there they come!” We threw ourselves down to hide. At length the scouts came back. ‘O war-chief! we discovered them. Twelve lodges departed,” said they. We were coming back (i. e., down the crooked branch), following the trail of the foe. At length we reached the place where the twelve Dakota tents had been pitched, when it was altogether deserted. They had gone, but the coals of the camp- fires were still very bright. ‘We will pursue them for a part of the night,” said we. These Dakotas had gone down-streain till they met the rest of their people who had our horses. We overtook them just at midnight. ‘‘Ho! warriors, I suspect that the old men at home are exhorting us. Ho! warriors, let us overtake them before this night ends. Do make a desperate effort. I suspect that your grandparents are yearning for you. I think that they are saying about you, ‘When shall he come in sight after so long an absence? What are you doing that you are continuing so long away from the lodge?’” We kept in pursuit along the road. The scouts went and returned without finding any one. When we forded the small stream which went aside from the creek, and had reached the other side, one of the war-chiefs said, ‘‘ Warriors, I will smoke.” It was Agaha-mat¢i®. We sat, putting on our moccasins after wading. Agaha-ma?¢i" said, “Put on the moccasins hastily.” ‘Ho! warriors, when you finish smoking, you may come. I, for my part, will go as ascout,” said I. I followed the road. Iran a little, now and then. The long line of trees made a dark shadow in the distance. When I drew very near, the horses followed the road, and came directly to me, and I drove them before mine, and was bringing them back to our men. I myself recovered the Omaha horses. I brought them very near to those who were sitting, and made them stand there motion- less. Then I went to the men. I ran a little, now and then. I went back to these who were sitting, having been very close to them. They had not yet stirred at all; they were still smoking. ‘‘Ho! warriors and war-chiefs, you are sitting still. Some persons are coming back along the road,” said I. ‘‘ Why! warrior, what can be the matter? In what direction can we go after sitting here so long?” said they. isaid as follows: ‘¢O warriors and war-chiefs, [ brought some of them back a great while ago.” “Thanks! O war-chief! thanks! O war-chief! thanks! O war-chief!” they said, as they extended the palms of their hands toward me. ‘ We shall indeed come home without having our toes ache us from too much walking.” “Tie them! tie them!” said I. They threw lariats over the horses’ heads, and tied their lower jaws. ‘Ho! warriors, let all of you sit here and keep them together. Warriors and war-chiefs, they did not detect me at all. Let us do it again to them,” said I. The rest of them, who were the serv- ants of the war-chiefs, tied the horses, and sat motionless as they held them. “Ho! war-chief, let us two go thither,” said I. Then we two went thither. It was dark, yet we bowed our heads repeatedly as we went. They had camped just so, in a line. “OQ war-chief, you will go to the tent at the other end of the row,” said I. ‘Yes, I will go thither; but how about you, to what one will you go?” said he. ‘O war-chief, I will go to the tent at the other end,” said I. ‘‘ No matter what happens, I shall reach home with some of them.” I went thither. Behold, the horses were fastened just by the door. J arrived there. As the horses perceived that I had a different odor, they fled, AGI-NA*SPAJ?S WAR PARTY IN 1853. 5 d drawing back to the end of their lariats. Taking my knife, I cut one lariat after an- other, and went back, driving the ponies. ‘‘Ho! warriors,” said I, “I have brought these, too.” They extended the palms of their hands toward me. “Thanks! O war- chief! thanks! O war-chief! thanks! O war-chief! O war-chief, you cause us to be thankful,” said they. In one night I had taken horses twice. ‘Ho! mount them! mount them! mount them!” said I. They mounted the horses at once. I mounted a horse which had never been ridden, and when I sat on him, he kicked up his hind legs, and threw me very far away. ‘Ho! warriors, place him in the rear. We must go homeward,” said I. And we went homeward, having most of the horses all together. We rode till day. We went faster and faster, not stopping till noon. Then we stopped. The horses were suddenly motionless. The next day there was a deep snow. We were very impatient on account of the cold. ‘“ Weare cold, we are cold. It is good to kindle a fire,” satd we. I divided my horses among eight of the party, saying to each one, “Keep that one. Come! still let us go homeward.” Werode very rapidly. We rode even till night. And without sleeping at all, we rode even till day. Again we rode very fast, keeping on until night. We reached our camp the next day when the sun was very low, having traveled a great distance. The people said, “The warriors have come home, halloo! The warriors have come home, halloo! They have brought back horses, halloo!” We slept, as we had reached the camp. At length the Dakotas came in pursuit of their horses. I saw just one when he was creeping up tous. I detected him when I went out of doors; it was dark, yet he was visible as he walked. I told my wife. ‘One of these Dakotas has come,” said 1. I seized my gun, but the Dakota, suspecting me, fell flat, sticking to the ground. He soon hastened away, walking softly. At day we fled, starting from the stream, Wayje- ujinga, a branch of the Little Sioux River. We fled southward to a ravine, where we camped for the night. At night it was dark. At length the Dakotas overtook us; they were many, but we were few. One of them peeped over the bluff at us. Nowa white man resided there. He questioned him, saying, “Are you an Omaha?” “No,” said the other, “I am a Dakota.” Then two white men came down-hill, and came to see us. The white men said as follows: “You are Omahas. The Sioux are there, but they cannot be there for any good purpose.” The white men did not speak the Omaha language, yet they managed to tell us. We were fleeing from the Dakotas. ‘As they told about the Dakotas, the horses should be secured,” said our people. At length the Dakotas attacked us. They wished to snatch the horses from us. We fired at ran- dom, scaring off the Dakotas, and retaining possession of the horses. Without delay we were fleeing from the Dakotas. We fled southward, and traveled all night. We reached Ma‘a-uhange, The End of the Cottonwoods, below the Little Sioux. We made skin-boats, and crossed the Missouri in them. ‘Thirty-six of our pursuers, who were returning north, came back to a large headland on the Iowa side. At the foot of the bluff were some Omahas, who had been hunting deer. These Omahas knew nothing about our party and the Dakotas. The latter crept to the edge of the bluff, and peeped over. At length two of these Omahas came to a creek, where they made a skin-boat, in which they attempted to cross the creek. At length the Dakotas shot at them, killing both. The rest of them, including the women and children, reached the bank of the Missouri in saety. A horseman from our party approached the river. They called over to him from the other side: “They have gone homeward after |ill- 452 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. ing two of our party, halloo!” The horseman called over to them, saying, ‘‘ We were attacked last night, when they fired at us. We walked by night, and having walked even till day, we have come back so far on our way home.” Then he said, ‘‘ Who has been killed?” ‘They went homeward after killmg Ma*cka-gaxe and the youth with him. Still, we will go homeward. We have made skin-boats, but we have not yet finished them. AJ] those who are up the stream wil go homeward to you,” said they. The horseman reached home, telling that they spoke of coming home. At length they were coming crying. ‘They are coming crying. Those who shot at us last night prob- ably killed one of our people when they were on their way back to Dakota,” said some of our party. Agaha-ma*¢im told me, saying, ‘Those who attacked us last night went back after killing some one at the foot of the headland. Itis said that they killed your son, Matcka-gaxe, and then went homeward.” All of the lodges were coming. ‘“ We shall come home to you with all the lodges. Wait for us,” said those who stood on the other side of the river. He who came back to tell it said, “They say, ‘All of the lodges will come home to you. Wait for us”” , / Bayot ta"wa” ¢é ugaq¢i ké’di ang¢i”i, Uma”ha® amd b¢tigagti ang ¢i"1. Sarpy village that Sait of by the we sat, Omahas the ones we sat. timber : who Wa't ditiba wata™zi yan’de ma™te qaf, ta” wa" ¢an’di. Nz a aye éga”, g¢ate Woman some corn ground in buried, village at the. a to eat their own f an / : / * ay wv oy ie téea" o¢ize ag¢at. Ki Caa™” ama égi¢e nuda” ama atfi té ha, édf. MHde inorder totake they went And Dakotas the atlength those on the war- came ; there. But that their own back. (sub.) path TWO CROWS’ WAR PARTY IN 1854. 453 ¢ wa‘ti ama akfi yi, wénaxi¢ai t&, na%bd téwa¢ai wai ¢anka. Watt ¢i" wit’ woman the reached when, they were at- when, two were killed woman the ones Woman the one (sub.) there tacked who. (my. ob.) again i" wahtita’¢i” {ti-biamd, gab¢db¢aze, niya g¢i, t'é¢a-baji. Najiha ma- the gun they hit her with, gashing her repeat- alive she came they did not Hair they (my. ob.) they say, edly, back, kill her. wasihiqti éga" mawaqa™i, wa¢i® dkidgdai A'wa™ ¢iqai éga®, an’ euq¢a-baji. cut entirely off — as they cut up, having if they had gone We pursued them as, we did not overtake again. them. Ugahanadaze sig¢é wéa%a-baji. Aki yi, égi¢e ha™ si, égi¢e nikaci"ga Darkness trai we did not find it. preuehed when, atlength night when, behold, man ome S72 an’giati, E’di pf ha. Ki éei¢e niaci"ga dtiba u¢éwinyi¢é ha, ki wi wé- came for me. There I <. And behold, man four assembled them- , and I the arrived selves 2 sat” b¢i’. H’di pi. Egi¢e g4i hi: Hau! nikaci*ga d‘tiba u¢éwi"wa¢i-git fifth I was. There TI Atlength they said Ho! man ~ some assemble them, arrived. as follows: ai. Qé nikaciga ak& Caa” ama wa¢ijubaji té, éoiwi'‘a" taf ha, ai they This people the Dakotas the have injured us as, let us do so to them 6 said said. (sub.) (sub.) nikaci"ga diba amé. Nikaciga duiba ama, Njinga-ma u¢éwiwa¢d-gi, ai. man four the Man four the The boys collect thou them, said (sub.). (sub.), they. FE cti nikaci"ga u¢éwi®wa¢ai wan'gi¢e. Wi cti nitiyjinga u¢éwirawa¢é, They too man assembled them all. I too boy — LT assembled them. ) Nikacitga o@¢éba-sdta" té u¢éwita"wa™ ¢ai. Gépe: Hau! nikaci"ga an’ ga- Man fifty the we assembled them. Pe as Ho! man we who OLlLOWS: qi” angi awadkiga™qtia™i, nikaci"ga {qta wad¢i"-in4 ea” wankiga™i; inddéda” are us they are just like us. man wantonly those whe we are like them; what treat them wapé adil, wahiita¢i™ agi”, dea” angadi"i. Hei"wi"’‘a" taf hai. Ké! édi weapons they have, gun they have, hke it: we have. Let us do so to them 3 Come! there a n : : aes x Ce = a angie taf ha, ehé. Ga™ b¢igaqti imahiti. Angdda-baji ca”angata™, éoi¢e let us go 3 I said. And all were willing. We did not go when we stood awhile, behold, nikagahi amd udwagi¢i‘agai. Wat‘a™ u¢éwi"¢ai nikagdhi ama. (hé niaci"ga chief the they were unwilling Goods they collected chiefs the This man (sub.) for us. (sub.). a — sata" pahan’ga u¢éwi"awa™’¢ an/eata™ wagiatii. H’di angdhii wi, égi¢e five before we collected them we who stood they came forus. There we arrived when, behold, watia™ u¢éwi'¢ai gé Cgi¢e wedgikti aké nikagdhi aka. Kgi¢e ¢aji wagaji goods they collected the behold, had invited us on chiefs the Behold, not'to they com- q (ob.) account of them (sub.). £0 manded us me ce er fiel ES, , Ch CRS ee nuda” té. Hna-baji taf nuda” té. (é agi i-g, af. Vé Tyiga tai dinké ja on the war-path. You will not go on the war-path. his haveyeit, said This Grandfather to him they. . . . re y . y / . a Payee a¢ai, maja” wé¢i"wi? agai; ag¢f{i tédihi yi, nuda” hné cka™hnai yi, i¢igina- they land to sell they they come atthe when, to war you go you wish if, they are went, went; home time willing for himi yi, hnd taf, af nikagdhi ¢aji ama. Ub¢ifage ha. [I ¢a-maji ha you if, yougo will, said chiefs those who did I was unwilling : I was displeased not go. Wat‘a” b¢iza-maji agdé. Gat angAda-baji: I}fga™¢ai ¢e-mdé wean’ gapai Goods I took T not I went And we did not go: Grandfather those who we waited for homeward went (to) them (te) 12 15 454 THE (@EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. éga", angd¢a-béjt, Ag¢fi ha Tyiga™¢ai ¢a™-gdta™-ma. Ag¢fi xi, Dyd as, we did not go. They came 4 Grandfather those from (his city). They came when, Joe home home ¢inke’ya pi. Nuda™ b¢é ka"b¢éde nikagdhi ama a™¢a™ nité ga", b¢d-maji ha. to him Towar Igo I wished, but chiel ots the they prohibited so, I did not go Nas ived. (sub.) me Ingi’wa"da™ba-ga ha, ehé. Ahati! ai. Ga” hné cka™hna yi, ga” ¢4-ga, Consider it forme — Z I said. Oho! said Of yougo you wish if, iy all £0, he. course means ai. Hau. Aki yi nikaci*ga u¢éwitawa¢é. Qa¢i"-na"paji agihiawaki¢é, said he. 7 Ireached when man T collected them. da¢i?-na"paji I sent them for bim, home Comey hl : Bane: iS ° “Ae . eee, Wandce-jin'ga ci agihiawdki¢é, ci atfi. Sin’de-xa”xa" agihiawaki¢é. Wanace-jinga — again Isent them for him, and they came. Sinde-xa"-xa" T sent them for him. Nwjinga Ahigi u¢éwita"wa"™ ¢ai. Ké!l nuda™ angd¢ai ka™b¢a, ehé. Caa™ Boy many we collected them. Come! to war we go I wish, T said. Dakotas ama wi™ af igac j¢i ka™b¢a, ehé. Ga™ ha” yi u¢éwitanyi¢ai. Ha wi"- e sh the one ay Ae I wish, T said. And night when we assembled ourselves. Night just ones who déta"qti yi angd-i. Uma" ha®™ ta” wa®™ ¢a™ angatii yi, a” ba. Gan'yi dkiha® half the when we were Omaha city the wecameto when, day. And beyond length approaching. angdhii, dtida. E’di wage ctewa™ ¢ingaf. FEgi¢e yéska na™ba &dedi-ama we arrived, this way. There white man at all there were Aft length ox two were moving none. there uta’nadi. Ki nijyinga amé wagiq¢a® am& wa¢ate ga” ¢ai, t’éwad¢é ‘dai. in a place be- And boy the servant the to eat Garished! killing them spoke tween. (sub ) (pl. sub.) of. Nida*hangé, a"wa™¢ate tan’gata", ai. Hau! wagaq¢a", dma ¢i™ t’é¢a- O war-chief, we eat them we who will, said Ho! servant, the one the kill they. (my. ob.) bida™ ¢atdi-gi. Ama ¢i” ca” ¢iré¢ai-gi, ehé. Edita™ ga” angahii ga” and (pl.) eat it. The the let it alone, I said. Thence so wereached so other (my. ob.) arja"i ha. Ci edita™ angéhii éga", Ha™¢i ai uspé ké Edi a-i ayja™i. Edit. we slept F Again thence we reached as, Henry house hollow the there we approached Thence and slept. — U 7 , — - = Ata a » = mt y — Lg angd¢ai yi, Hiyanga maja” ubhan’ge ké ci é’di a-i a Na"i Ci anga¢ai we went when, Winnebago land end the again there we spprpeched Again we went and slept. éga", Ni-bdse ¢a”, Maqude-wa‘ai dud¢ica", @'di a-i aya™i. Ha" ega™tce Ni-base the, Towas farmed this side of, there wes SpHroagied Morning and slept. angidaha™i yi, ¢kita™ nikaci*ga wéa'¢ai. Hau! wean’gapai ta-bi, a°¢a"1 Wwe arose when, just then person we detected Well! let us wait for them to we said them. appear, yi, qa¢i"-na™paji Agidg¢ai yi u¢f‘agai. Gé¢ica™ a®wan’gandse ta-bi, ehé when, da¢i?-na*paji they pass by when he was aan On that side let us ne ud them off, Tsaid ing. (jan‘deaji¢ica” i¢ahe, ehé) yi, Ga¢i"-na™paji Nictideaya¢ica™ fhe ‘i¢ai. Ki (on the side of the Ipass TIsaid) when, dag¢i™-na"paji towards the Missouri passing spoixe And ground along, along of. gan’yi uhdé pfiiji angtyia’¢ai. Uwaje¢ai éga® nifaci*ga an’guq¢a-bajii. then path bad swe got ourselves into. We were tired an man we did not overtake them. ‘hs Nin‘dug¢ade angakii éga” an’gugiq¢a-béji. Ca™ qti an’guq¢a-baji. Ha?’ ha. Creeping backward we reached Se we-did not overtake our In spite of we did not overtake Night again own. them. TWO CROWS’ WAR PARTY IN 1854. 455 Na"péawahi"i éga" uwaje¢ai, an ‘guq¢a- baji. Ha™ega™tce a™ fan’ yi¢ai 1, We were hungry oi we were tired, we did not overtake them. Mosaine we awoke when, wa¢ite wa¢in’ge, wagaq¢a"-ma na™péhi". Hau! ga¢i™-na™paji-ha, ‘Abae food we had none, the servants were hungry. Ho! dag¢it-na"pajl, ; Oo! hunting s—/ v . rt 3 ma"¢in'-ga. Wagaq¢a" na™pchi", ehé. A¢ai ‘abae gi¢i®-na™padji. Egi¢e walk thou. Servant hungry, T said. Went to hunt dag¢i"-na"paji. At length jaqti wi” 4” ag¢t. Ega® an¢atai. deer one carry- neve came So y we ate. ing back. A™ba té ga” Nictide g¢adi” anga¢ai. Nictiide ya™ha ké’ja 4-i-a™ja". Day the so Missouri across to we went. Missouri bank atthe we arrived and River slept. Ha™ega™tce yi, ni aka jin’ga-baji, nida”. paqti-ha t’éwad¢af-ma mandé-ha ie ning when, river the was Te small, a flood. Deer-skin those which had skin-boat (sub.) been killed angaxal. Mandé-jim’ga ga”, man’dé gé, waii” gé, wahiita™¢i" edabe, we made. Boat small So, bow ane blanket the gun also, b.), (pL. ob.), angiyjii N{ aké e¢hiaké yf dahddi énas A¢éhat, ni aka jin’ga-baji. Mandé weput River the yonder one house on the bill extende att hat far, river the iat small. Boat them in. (sub.) (sub.) ké angujii yi, nfa"wa" anga¢ii. Na™ji®ské’qtei ni ké masdéni angahii; the we filled when, weswam we had them. Hardly river the theotherside we reached; (ob.) uwaje¢aqtia”i masani angahii. Masdni dian’g¢i"i yi, hitbé angigija™ we were very tired the other side wereached. Theotherside wesatdown when, moccasin we put on our there moccasins a'¢icta’i yi, na™baha usaf. Caa™ ama ugaca™ ctewa™ sig¢é da” be ang¢i"’i. we finished when, intwoplaces theyset Dakotas the traveled notwith- trail seeing it we sat. the grass afire. (sab.) standing A*¢an’yinag¢e ang¢i™i. Han. Ké! wagaq¢a™, udtida™bai-ga. Crude ¢é We hid ourselves we sat. 7 Come! O servant, consider ye it. Smoke this na"baha té; wita”wa é'di afga¢e tai a, ehé, HE. di¢i®-na"paji aka, in two places the; which one there we go will ? reside da¢i"-na"paji the, Nuda*hanga, ¢éja téja¢ica™ anga¢e tai, ai Ga¢i’-na™paji aké. Hau, ga™ O war-chief, this one towards the let us go, said da¢i®-na"paji Gel Well, so behind (sub.). = e . . / ay? . . , , / anga¢ai; Nicide a™a™¢ai, ga” angad¢ai, d¢ija. Itdxaja usaf, a™wa™jade we went; Missouri we left it, so we went, across, by Up-stream it was we, being near it River a near way. set afire, anga¢ai. Aja™i ha ha” té. Ha™ i¢dug¢e a®mar¢i“i; ki ¢4¢uhdqtei a™ba we went. Welaydown , night when. Night throughout we walled ; and almost day yi, ayja™i. Nikaci@ga, ha™ega™tce té an’gu¢ixidai yi, wéa"¢a-bdji. Ki when, we slept. Man, morning when we Wal around when, we aie not find And for them them. Caa™ ta” wang¢a” eya¢ica™ angagii, a” bi¢aug¢e. An’gu¢ixidéqti a"ma™ ¢i7%i, Sioux city towards we were re- throughout the We looked around very we walked, turning, day. carefully for them wéar¢a-baji. qazéqtci mi” ¢a® Gahé ké yan’géqtci hi. Ke! anga¢e taf, we did not find them. Late in the sun the hill the very near to ar- Come! let us go. afternoon rived. — » j Lies L De ae x Foto) Le Yan wigaq¢a™. Ga™ angd¢ai. Mara sia ¢dé, q¢dabé ¢ingé ha. Ug¢d ikisa™ ¢i* O servants. So we went. Clift alone, tree therewasnone . Quickly out of sight — ae , Ate = ~ f an a _ é Su =i w ie = 4 é Sy fe ee angaid¢e tai Sagigi éga"i-ga, ehc. ki atigahi-baji te’di, qa¢i"-na"paji aka, let us go. “Do walk faster, Isaid. And we did not reachit when, dag¢ie-napaji the 15 18 12 15 18 456 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. Wakide-jin’ga e¢a” ba bispé fhai, éta"¢i" wé¢ai nikaciga-ma. Ki angt eti Wakide-jinga he too crouched suddenly, they first foundthem the people (ob.). And we too bisp aja“ i. Qadi™-na*pajiama ug¢a ag¢i. Niuda™hanga, q¢abé ¢é’qtci ¢an‘di crouch- we lay. dagi"-na"paji the totellit came O war-chief, tree this very at the ing (sub.) back. ja” edsai, gajiqi, af. Hau! wagaq¢a™, nikaci™ gai té edada™-baji. Anga¢a- wood theycut, they make said Ho! O warriors, they are people the itis nothing. We did it sound, he. béji ca®’-angata™ nfaci"ga dma aka ag¢i Hau! nida*hanga, nikaci"ga ama not ‘go after we stood man the the came Ho! O war-chief, they are persons who awhile other (sub.) back. are moving ha, ai. Wa‘ti éde Mawadda'¢i" wa‘a™i ha, ai. Hau! nikawasa", ca™ ha, said They but Mandan they sing 5 said Ho! O warrior, enough he. are women he. ehé. Hau. Ga” angd¢ai. Jingd-qtci ma™ onade ang¢i™i, qade biyja undcte T said. 1 So we went. Very small ground bare of we sat, grass round left aftera vegetation fire = cats Oy) Bc . / 1 . anete di. Min aka ¢a¢uhagtei did¢aii Hau! wagaq¢a™, ha™ ta aka. Mir’ we sat in. Sun _ the (sub.) almost had gone. Ho! O servants, night will be. Sun aké did¢aiha Hau! Ké, wagag¢a™ qa¢i-na"paji-ha! wada™be ma"¢in’-ga. the hasset . Ho! Come, O servant da¢i-na"paji oO! as a scout walk thou. Niacitga ¢anké yi ¢anké Anai éda” wa¢dwa-ga, ehé. Egi¢e ga¢i?-na™paji Person the ones camped theones howmany ? count them, Isaid. Atlength dagin-napaji who are they amd ag¢i. Nuda"hangd, yf aka na®ba-aka ha. Can’ge wi"Aqtei a¢i” aka ha, the came O war-chief, | tent the two arethe . Horse just one they have A (sub.) back. (sub.) ones nidathangaé, ¢ iwi"¢a ag¢i. Hau! ca” ha, ehé. Hau! wagaq¢a™, wan’- O war-chief, that he told me ub cue Ho! enough , Isaid. Ho! O servant, let us ack. gaki¢a taf hi Wa¢dcka™ taf ha, ehé. Hau! pigi‘a" ci ¢e-hna”, Sin‘de- contend withthem . You willdo your best’ - Tsaid. Ho! todoitagain again only this Sinde- to him time, xa”’xa", wégaska™¢é ma*cin’-ea, WU ¢ankaé ja"t’af yi, ehé. Uhna ¢ag¢i te, xa"xal, to try them walk thon, tent theones theyare if, Tsaid. You tell youcome will, who sound asleep it ac ehé. Egi¢e Sin’‘de-xa”xa" ama ag¢i. Nuda*hanga, ja™t’ai ha, ai Sin‘de- I said. At length Sinde-xa"xa" the came O war-chief, they are said Sinde- (sub.) back. sound asleep xa™xa™, Hau! Ké, wea” naxi¢a tai ha, wagaq¢a™. Wapé gé pa-i gaxdi-gi, xa'xar, Ho! Come, let us attack them ' O servants. Weapon tne sharp make ye, (pl. ob.) ehé. Mahi? gé@’ cti pa-f yiyaxai; mahi"si cti pa-i yiyaxai; wahita™¢i" pi I said. Knife the also sharp they made arrow-heads also sharp they made gun anew (pl. ob.) for themselves; for themselves; ugfjii, ma™zema" diba-¢a"¢a", ¢ab¢i?-¢a" ¢a® cti ujii. Hau! nida*hanga, they loaded ball four apiece, three apiece too they Ho! O war-chief, theirs, put in. ca” ha, ai. Hau! wdgaq¢a™, ca” g¢i™i-gi. Sin’de-xa™xa"™ @di judg¢e enough . saidthey. Ho! servants, still sit ye. Sinde-xa°xa" there I with him b¢é t&4 minke. Wégaska"a"wa¢é anga¢e tan’gata", ehé. Wagqi™ha yi té Igo with Iwho. We look upon things we go we who will, T said. Canvas tent the ug¢i’. Nan‘de ké edi‘qtei ja"q¢tide a"wan’gana‘a". i té udkiha™ jaq¢ude they satin. Sideofthe the jnst there snoring we heard them. Tent the next to it snoring tent TWO CROWS’ WAR PARTY IN 1854. 457 a"wan'’gand‘a™ a™ndji", nazaga a™ndjimi. Sin’de-xa"’xa" Cha". Gdaka wi we heard them we stood, atthe rear we stood. Simde-xa"xa" T called That one one to him. out of sight : , . , i wa y w Uae, = . , janqétdai, ehé, Aguta® t’é¢a¢e te ha, ehe. Gan'yi angig¢ai. Wagaq¢a" snores, T said. PLE youkillhim will, T said. And we went back. Servant towards , z rn i‘ =e. as E oe Re Bd acts ¢ankaéja angu¢a angag¢e te, ehé. Kgi¢e wagaq¢a” ¢ankaéja a-fi 3, angakii. to them we tell it we go back will, I said. At length servant tothem they ap- when, wereached proaching again. , ns / © ti we : ‘ a ~ tne ee d Nida"hanga, e‘a” ha, ai. Ja™vé’qtia’i ha, ehé. Hau. Ga™ &'di anga¢ai. O war-chief, howisit ? said They are sound ; I said. T So there we went. they. asleep Nazaja angthii. pi égaxe naji“i. Ahat! ga” wakidai jf te wénaxi¢ai Attherear wearrived. . Tent allaround they stood. Oho! “80 they shotat Tent the they attacked them. them i y ° 2 f 4 2 OR IIS TO Sine a , / iy / ga”, égaxe wakidai gga", 1 té mu¢inge qtia™1; dé¢a"ba tea wa"¢at. Hat as, allaround they shot at as, tent the they exterminated them seven we killed them. Night them by shooting ; wirdéta gti té’di wan’gaki¢ai, han‘kaska yi wan’ gakf¢ai. T’éa"wa™ ¢é am¢i- just half gone when we contended with midnight when we contended with We killed them we them, them. 5 “o Sy 00 , / th, hd / ~ L etati yi, angdgii Hau! nikawasa™, ca™angaxe tai. Ké, ca™ ha, ehé. finished when, we were com- Ho! warriors, let us cease. Come, enough 4 I said. ing this way. Ga” anedeii. Hat i¢dugte ca” atma¢@i. A™ba ékita*haqti Nictide ké $ : | So we were re- Night throughout © still we walked. Day just that far Missouri the turning. River ae oe en/ we Pre umencriee wy: , = .: = oo y, y / angdg¢ii. Mir’ ¢a® é¢ambaji Nictde ké age angagil Angégii té, ci a™b we came back Sun the hadnotarisen Missouri the wecrossed we were Wewere when, again day to. returning. returning i¢dug¢e a®ma™ ¢imi. Ki mi” ¢uma” ci hi té, na*péawahi™i éga*, yAqti na” ba throughout, we walked. And sun on bigh ar- when, we were hungry as, deer two rived Ci = safe yon neers ! : F - pues téwadai. Awat¢ate ang¢i”i. Ga™ angdgn ¢ga", ga" atjani. Ci égasani they killed. We ate them we sat. So we were as, so we slept. Again the noxt day return ng — =I / = > J asn° / “ ¥ f S *n/ ¥ Sef: G angagii gga", ca” a” b i¢dug¢e ama” (1%. Ha” +6, ci y4qti wi” ci té¢al; we were as, still day throughout we walked. Night when, again deer one again they coming killed it; . Caer, * yy An Syn eer / / : v Las ! ampatai. Ci égasdni té, ab igdug¢e ca” qti ga” ana’ hati. Ci ha” té, ga™ we ate it. Again the next day when, day throughout still, indeed so we walked till Again night when, 80 night. ars cme) ike, items Fae Sere t ° 2 ama ¢i"i; atja”’-bajt atma” git. Ha™ te, mi” da"be dé¢ab¢i"-qti-éga”, wage we walked; we slept not we walked. Night when, clock abont eight, white man x wit édité fhe angig¢ii. Wage aka égi¢e na™awape ta aké. Wa¢ate house one which passing we came back. White the behold he will fear us. Food wasthere it man (sub.) na taf hi. Pahan’ga jijébe b¢icibe t4 minke. A*¢a™wathe fi-ga, yu'e, let us ask of . Before door Ipullitopen will I who. Following me be ye with a him coming, rush, / *y/ . . (ped Gh . een/ Pr ehé. Wiuga™ba udgasi” yi, yig¢isia’¢é’qti naj” aka wage aka. Wéona?- T said. Window Ipeeped in when, he stripped himself was standing white the Caused us entirely bare man (sub.). Reh Ce (Pie , 2 Gog Teas dwa¢é wage aka, wa Mate watti té hat té, nfawa¢e’qti éga". Ha™ té, ca” tobethank- white the food hegavetous night at, he really saved our like. Night at, yet ful man (sub.), lives 2 v 6 15 18 458 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. a” baji, ca” mi” C¢a®baji, wi ¢a'yA angdkii. Ga™ nikaci"ga b¢viga cka™ i. not day, yet sun hadnot village tothe we got home. And Senne all were arisen, stirring. ‘Nikaci#?ga Caa™ waq¢i ama ag¢ii ha, ai Nikaci"ga dé¢a"ba tea” wa"¢ai Man Dakotas those who killed have : said Person seven we had killed them them come home they. 1s F Dieta eeey iO 5 an , ama” i ga”, gi¢éqtia’i nikaci"ga b¢uga. we said as, were very glad people all. NOTES. 452, 1. Nib¢aska k&ja¢ica", at or near the present town of Bellevue, Neb. 452, 4. wa‘u d‘uba. There were only three women. 453, 2-3. mawasihi-qti. Compare “usihi,” clean. 453, 7. egi™wi"a" tai, in full, éga® iPwir‘a® tai. \ 453, 17-18. (ie liga¢ai ¢inkéja a¢ai. Sanssouci said that Joe and the other chiefs were just about to start for Washington, when Uha?-na*ba and the rest prevented Two Crows and his friends from going on the war-path. But why should Uha?-na"ba act as head-chief before the departure of his superiors? They were Joseph La F leche, Ma*teti-na"ba, Wantikige, G¢eda"-naji", [ckadabi (Louis Sanssouci), and Logan Fon- tenelle. Logan and Louis, however, went as interpreters rather that as chiefs. 454, 6. Nujinga ahigi, “many boys.” These were only eight. The four war-chiefs were yaxe-¢a"ba (Two Crows), ga¢i"-na"paji, Wanace-jidga, and Sinde-xa"xa". 454, 9. yeska na™ba. These were two stray oxen. 454,13. Ha™¢i yi uspe ké, Wood Creek, by Henry Fontenelle’s farm, near Decatur, Neb. 454, 15. Ni-base ¢a® is a point of timber on the Missouri River, between the towns of Jackson and Ponea, Neb. It is east of Ionia Creek, in Dixon County, Neb., which is called MAqude-watai by the Omahas. This latter is also the Omaha name for the adjacent land. : 454,18. yandeajat¢ica®, 7. ¢., “back from the river, towards the interior of the country ;” while Nicudeata¢ica®, its opposite, means “towards the Missouri, along the bank of the river.” 454, 20. Nindug¢ade aigakii ega™ aigugiq¢a-baji; literally, “As we reached the place where we had been, by creeping backwards, we did not overtake our enemies.” They fell back. But “they fell back” because ns were lost in the thick forest (see map) near a lake in that vicinity; and they wandered on till they found themselves back again at the place where they had struck the trail at the edge of the forest.— Sanssouci. 455, 8. yi dahadi enaska¢ehai, refers to a block-house (at Omaha hens which was about a quarter of a mile from the place where the story was told. 455, 11. na™baha means, in this case, ‘on two sides,” and hence is almost equiva- lent to ag¢anka"ha®”, “on both sides.” 455, 15. itaxaya usai. This refers to Qe watcicka, the Big Sioux, along which the party proceeded for a little while. 455, 21. atigaia¢e tai, the specific of “atiga¢e tai,” fentnne motion to a particular place. See ‘i¢é” in the Dictionary. 457, 3. egi¢e wagag¢ia® ¢aikaga a-ii yi angakii. Irank La Fléeche and the collector have been puzzled by the use of “a-ii yi” in this sentence. It would have been omitted, TWO CROWS’ WAR PARTY IN 1854. 459 were not Two Crows one who speaks the purest Omaha. The collector can offer but one explanation. The warriors were probably anxious to learn the result, so they were approaching Two Crows and Sinde-xa"xa® (a-ii); then, after they met, all reached their camp (angakii), 457, 4. ea" hii used instead of eta” 2.” 457, 6. de¢a™ba tea"war¢ai. They killed seven Yanktons. 457, 9. i¢aug¢e, pronounced i¢a+ug¢e. M A P SHOWING COURSE TAKEN BY TWO CROWS’ PARTY. © | Wirnebagos Ornahas \ t7z LSSO iN \ iy Bellevi can Photo Eng. Cah. 1 Where the Yanktons tarmed. 2. The Lake. 3. The Forest. 460 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. TRANSLATION. We dwelt beyond Omaha City, and towards the Platte. The Dakotas came on foot to attack us. All of us Omahas dwelt on the Nebraska side of the river, at the point of timber near Sarpy’s village. Some of the women had buried corn in the ground at the village. Being hungry, they went back to eat it. Behold, the Dakotas who had come on the war-path reached there. And when the women reached there, they were attacked by the Dakotas, who killed two of the women. The remaining woman was struck with a gun, and gashed in many places, but she came back to us alive. The Dakotas cut off all the hair of the two women, and after cutting the scalps in pieces, they carried them homeward. We pursued them, but we did not overtake them. We could not find their trail in the dark. When I reached home, behold, men came for me at night. I arrived there. And behold, four men had assembled; and I was the fifth. At length they said, “Ccllect some men; these people, the Dakotas, have injured us; let us repay them. Assemble the young men.” All of them, too, assembled the men. And I collected the youngmen. We collected fifty persons. I said as follows: “Ho! they are just like us, and we resemble those who have treated us cruelly; we have guns and other weapons as they have. Let us repay them for what they have done to us. Come! let us go thither.” And all were willing. But before we could leave, the chiefs manifested their unwillingness for us to depart. They collected goods, and sent for us five leaders. When we arrived there, behold, the chiefs had invited us on account of the goods which they had collected. Behold, they commanded us not to go on the war-path. ‘You will not go on the war-path. Take these things. These chiefs went to the President to sell land. If they come back and consent to your going, you may then go,” said the chiefs who had not gone to Wash- ington. I was unwilling. I was displeased. I went home without taking any of the goods. So we did not go on the war-path, as we waited for the return of those who went to the President. They came home from the city of the President. When they had come back, I went to Joe. “I wished to go on the war-path, but the chiets forbade me; soI did not go. Consider the matter for me,” said I. “Oho!” said he, “go, of course, if you desire it.” When I reached home, I collected the men. I sent the messengers after ga¢i%- na"paji, Wanace-jinga, and Sinde-xa"xa™. We collected many young men. ‘Come!” said I, “it is my desire for us to go on the war-path, and to kill one of the Dakotas.” And we assembled at night. When that night was half gone, we were coming towards our present reservation. It was day when we reached Omaha City. And we continued our march in this direction. At that time there were no white people in that region above Omaha. At length two oxen were wandering about there. The young men, who were the servants, wished to eat them, so they spoke of killing them. ‘O war- chief, we will eat them,” said they. ‘Ho! servants, kill one and eat it; but do not disturb the other one,” said I. Passing on, we stopped again for the night. The next day we went on till we reached the hollow by Henry’s house, where we spent the night. Going thence the next day, we reached the present Winnebago reservation, sleeping when we arrived at the northern boundary. The following day, we went as far as Ni- base, which is on this side of the ancient farming-place of the lowas. When we arose TWO CROWS’ WAR PARTY IN 1854. 461 in the morning, we discovered the proximity of persons. When we said, ‘Ho! let us wait for them to appear,” ga¢i"-na"paji was unwilling for them to pass by. I said, “Let us head them off on that side. I am in favor of our going by a path which is more towards the interior of the country.” But ga¢i®-na®paji spoke of going towards the Missouri. And then we got ourselves into a difficulty. We did not overtake the nen, because we were tired. We dropped back, and so they got away in spite of us. When we awoke in the morning, we had no food. The servants were hungry. ‘Ho! O ga¢i®-na*paji, go hunting. The servants are hungry,” said I. ga¢i®-na®paji went hunting. At length he came back, carrying a deer. So we ate it. During the day we went across the country to the Missouri. That night we slept on the bank of the river. In the morning the stream was wide, as there was a freshet. We made a skin-boat of the deer-skin, and we put in it our guns, bows and blankets. The river extended as far as yonder house on the hill. When we put the things in the boat, we swam across with it. We barely reached the other side, as we were very weary. When we sat down on the other side, and had finished putting on our moc- casins, the grass was set afire in two directions. We sat looking at the trail of the Dakotas who had been traveling about. We sat concealed. ‘Ho! come, warriors, consider the matter. This smoke is in two places; to which one will we go?” said I. qa¢i™-na*paji said, ““O war-chief, let us go towards this one in the rear.” So we went. We left the river, and departed across the country, by a near way. The fire had been made towards the head of a stream, and as if was near by we went towards it. At night, we lay down for a short while. Then we walked throughout the night; and when it was almost day we slept. In the morning we looked around for the men, but did not find them. And we were all day in coming back towards the place where Sioux City now is. We looked around very carefully as we walked, but we did not find them. Late in the afternoon the sun was very near the bluffs. “Come, let us go, O servants,” said I. So we went. There was a bare cliff, without trees. “Let us soon go out of sight. Quicken your steps,” said I. Before we reached it, qa¢i®-na*paji and Wakide-jinga crouched suddenly, they being the first to find the people. We, too, lay crouching. ga¢i®-na™paji came back to us to report. ‘O war- chief, at this very place they ent wood, for they make the sound ‘“yaqi,” said he. ‘Ho! servant, as they are people, it is nothing.” After we stopped and stood awhile, the other man came back to report. ‘O war-chief, they are people. They are women, but they sing Mandan songs,” said he. ‘Ho! warriors, it is enough,” said I. So we went. We sat on avery small piece of the ground that was bare of vegeta- tion; that is, we sat on around tract of grass which had not been burnt by the prairie fire. The sun had nearly gone. ‘Ho! servants, it will be night. The sun has set. Ho! come, O servant ga¢i™-na™paji, go as a scout. Count the persons that have camped, and see how many they are,” said I. At length ga¢i"-na™paji returned tous. ‘O war- chief, the lodges are two. They have but one horse.” ‘Ho! that is enough. Ho! O servants, let us contend with them. You will do your best. Ho! to do it again but this once, Sinde-xa®xa", go to try them whether they are sound asleep. You will come back and report,” said I. At length Smde-xa™xa® came back. ‘O war-chief, they are sound asleep.” ‘Ho! come let us attack them, O servants. Make your weapons sharp,” said I. They sharpened their knives and arrow-heads, and they put extra loads in their guns, some three bullets, others four. Then I made them sit 462 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. awhile, and I took Sinde-xa"xa" to make a final inspection. They were in a canvas tent, and just at one side of it we heard them snoring. As we stood at the rear of the next tent we heard its occupants snore. I called to Sinde-xa™xa?. “One of those snores. You will kill him by holding your gun close to the place where he lies,” said I. “Let us go back to the servants to tell them,” said I. And we went back. At length, after some of them came towards us, we all reached the servants. “O war- chiefs, how is it?” said they. ‘They are sound asleep,” said I. So we went thither. We reached the rear of the lodges. We surrounded them and shot at them. As the lodges were attacked and shot into, their occupants were all shot down; we killed seven. We contended with them when just half of the night had gone, even at mid- night. When we finished killing them, we were coming this way. “Ho! warriors, let us cease. Come, it is enough,” said I. So we were coming back. We walked all night, and just at day we reached the Missouri. We crossed the river before sunrise. We walked all day; and at noon we killed two deer, as we were hungry. We sat eating them. Then we continued our homeward march till we stopped for the night. The next day we walked throughout the day, and at night we killed a deer. The next day we walked till night, and so at night till about eight o’clock. Then we reached the house of a white man. Said I, “The white man will fear us, thinking that we are Dakotas. So let us ask him for food. I will open the door. Do you rush in after me.” When I peeped in at the window, the white man was standing without any clothing at all. (He asked us if we were Dakotas, and was glad to find that we were Omahas.) ‘The white man made us thank- ful, saving our lives, as it were, by giving us food at night. At night, when it was not day, that is, before the san rose, we reached our village. Then all the people were stirring. “The men who killed the Dakotas have come home,” said they. As we said that we had killed seven, all the people were delighted. BATTLE BETWEEN. THE OMAHAS AND DAKOTAS IN 1855. RELATED BY A”’PA®-[AN’GA. Gaq¢a™ anigd¢ai pahan’gadi. Ki Wajé ké angthai. Wada™be wa¢adai Onthe hunt we went at the first. And Elkhorn the we followed it. Scouts they who are River called yf waqube na™ba te ‘di g¢éba-¢ab¢i?-qti-éga". Anga¢ai yi, huhu tea” wa*¢at tent sacred two t the about thirty. Wer went when, fish we killed them dtiba, Anaqti-éga". pangd ¢ank&é wandce (amé) yig¢izai éga", uha"i. Ga™ some, about how many. Large the ones policeman (the pl. took forthem- Ss, they So that sub.) selves cooked taeet ¢asni™i té, angdd¢ai. Ha™ a™¢a™ma¢i”i. Waticka cuga wi™ angttha a"ma” - they swel- wher, we went. Night we walked during. Creek thick one we followed we lowed ene ara Ni Xo . s2 ; . . 1 G (ii. Waticka ké a®ja™-baji; gacibaya a®ja”i, sna"sna”aja. A™ba ké uga™ba valked. Creek the we slept not; out from it weslept, on the level ground. Day the light ma a 4 BATTLE BETWEEN THE OMAHAS AND DAKOTAS IN 1855. 463 yl, égi¢e a” pa® niga eca™ madi" ama. Wakide-pi ayig¢ajii. Wakidai yi, when, behold, elk male near to were walking. Good marksman exhorted one They shot at when, another. them nugd wi" jibe muqa™i. andata™ iénaxi¢ai yi, wi ub¢a™. Ana hi¢ed¢e. male one lower broke it by Treading on the they attacked when, I Theld him. I kicked him and leg shooting. ground him knocked him down. . rod , A / ~ Pfs so, Haci ati amd dé ¢a®™ ‘c¢a%¢ai. Ha” ¢atai yi, b¢ata-maji. Huhti jin’ga After those who head the hit him on. Night they ate when, I did not eat it. Fish small came (ob.) it Och. Ryko _s ens cS A mijinga wi” ingdsi wab¢ate agdi’. Kgi¢e apa" na“ ba ci ¢uti waticka boy one caught for Tate I sat. At length elk two again there creek me they came ké uhé. Ama t’ea™éai, mi’ga ké. Wagai éga" ugdgi. Angddai (4), wil’ the follow- The we killed, femé ‘ie the Cut in as it was held We went (when), one ing. other (ob.). slices over a fire. ‘ d: n/} | { E if ab! pin Kdbaqe 6 ny 4 wada" be abil. gi¢e 1é-ma wé¢al. a” ¢i” g¢cd¢ai; ii ¢a a ug¢a ag¢al. as a scout arrived Atlength the buffa- he found He ran back suddenly; tents tothe to Zs 11 “of he went there. loes them. his back. Weéegarze e¢éba-na™ba-qti-éga” ya" ¢i" wan'gi¢e akfi. Hgasani té, waha™ all Meaaaee about twenty running reached The nextday when, removing home. a¢af. A-f-3i éga", yé-ma wanasai. Mi ¢a® céhiqtci hi té, égi¢e nfaciga they Theycame as, the buffa- they sur- Sun the just that far arrived when, behold, man went. to a place loes rounded them. and camped wi" a¢af. Egi¢e nikaciga d4iba wag¢ade amama, Caa”. Nika¢iqai. Wa¢i" one went. At length person some ereepingup were,they Dakota. They chased the Having to us say, foe. them a¢ai. Kduéhe. Ca” égi¢e ugdhanadaze. Ca™ wakide-hna® g¢i”i. Caa” they I joined it. Still at length darkness. Still shooting regularly they sat. Dakotas went. at them . ae a ama djtiba ‘ag¢aqtia™i. Kgi¢e Caa™” ama ugdhanadaze u¢tnaji"i; wajr’- the a few they suffered very Atlength Dakotas the darkness depended on; they were (sub.) much. (sub.) pibaji. Wednaxi¢ai (yi) wiY ?é¢ai, Uma™ha®. Ci Uma™ha™ ama wénaxi¢ savage. They attacked us (when) one they killed, Omaha. Again Omahas the attacking (sub.) them . ea . / . “¢ai. Akipai. Wea™naxi¢a taf, ai. Uma" ha® wi™ can’ge a”sagi ta® dg¢i", spoke of. They met. Let us us attack them, said Omaha one hor: a sw ‘ft the sat on, they. ~ . , ony, . t . ne — . = ma™ zepe-niniba sia¢é agi”. Wi" wu ¢in’ge uti” ga”¢ai. Edi’qti ahi x, hatchet pipe alone he had. One wound without tohit he wished. Just there he ar- when, him rived ma™zepe gisi¢a-baji égari. (lipaz u¢iqpadé ga™¢ai. Can’ge amd dihi hatehet he forgot it like. Pulling by to make hinr he wished. Horse the neck the hair fall (sub.) = . / : / rcs Ss Dens pave wacka™jangai éwa" ga™, akusan’de gif" a¢ai. Gan’yi Uma™ha™ ¢inké he was strong being the cause, to him and be- carrying he went. And Omaha the yond “ (st. one) ite se / , : S Caa™ ta™ uda™ e¢éga", wa¢iona” i¢é. Caa™ aka nazaja tégai Can’ge Dakota the tohold he thought, missing his he had Dakota the atthe rear killed him. Horse (std.one) him hold gone. (sub.) ama gif” qi¢a agli T’éa%¢eqtia’i! ai. Ca™ ca" wednaxi¢al. Ci wi’ the Ss ying back was com- T have been killed suidhe. Notstopping they attacked us. Again one (sub.) him again ing. outright! sire ares WV) , , Wu Cl ey) 3 man‘dehi fjahai, Uma™ha"-ma wi” ugaqpa¢at. Ci wi" can’ge ta” nan’ge spear was pierced the Omahas one struck him down. Again one horse the to run by, x 9 18 9 ro) oy) 15 464 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. u¢f‘agai (qizdbahe ké4ya ma"-bajuji é na” pai can’ge). Ci Caa™ wi att, refused (dizabahe at the clods i te that feared horse). Again Dakota one came, here and there ci té¢ai Uma™ha"™ ¢inké. Han‘kaska yf, can’gaxai. Egasani yi, waha™ again he killed Omaha the (ob.). Midnight when, they ceased. The next day when, removing a¢ai. pa wat” ag¢fii nikaci"ga ¢4b¢i". Watcigaxe u¢éwinyf¢ée. Was‘ar they Dried buf- carrying came man three. To dance they assembled. Singing went. falo meat back oes . ; e Gas . = / jiwag¢e edi” waki¢al ?é ¢anka Haci a™wa‘a™ taf, ai T’é ¢anka wa‘a™ “with them they caused themto dead the After let us sing, suid Dead the singing sit (pl. ob.). they. (pl. ob.) Te . . . es, : cv . 2 Juwag¢ ‘i¢ai. Wagé ¢icta”i yi, niaci"ga wi” wéga*ze wi"-qti-éga” a¢at. with them they Burying they fin- when, man one measure about one went. spoke of. them ished BETY Sie Af pha Ie <5 e / Ones (haji-ea, é fnite-hna™i nikagahi amd. Ki ca™ a¢af, dahé ké yadé. Nujinga Do not go, say- forbade him chief the And yet he went, hill the being Boy ing, (sub.). (ob.) near it. Sy, Paar , & v / a. , . ene ctéwa™ wi¢iqe i yi, u¢itage, ki ca” a¢afi. [ya aka giba™ égatqti g¢i"'l. notwith- pursuing were when, herefused, and still he went. There the callingto justso sat. standing him coming (col.sub.) him ; d ; c . ey, yas a 5 ro (hé fnite-ma uhéwaki¢a-baji. gGahé ¢a™ i’ta™ é’di hi-qti ejdta® ad¢i” a-ii. This those who pro- he did not let them Hill the now there hehadjust thence having they hibited him have their way. arrived him were coming. . , = =) . eee RO oe 3 T’é¢ai. Ug¢é ati Can’ge amd nan’ge agfi. Can’gaxdi-ga. Agfi. They killed Quickly they came. Horse the running was coming Cease ye. They were him. (sub.) back. coming. Waha™. Ci wednaxi¢ai. Gaq¢a” a¢ai Weanaxi¢a a-ti, héga-baji. They re- Again they attacked us. Onthe hunt they went. To attack us they were not a few. moved. coming, Waki¢ai. Ackagqtci Akiki¢ai Mukiona*-hna™i. Can’ge wi™ t’é¢ai Uma™- They contended Very close they contended They usually missed one Horse one killed it Oma- with us. together. another in shooting. 5 a g = . x / . ha" ama. Wage iéska juan’g¢ai ké t’é¢ai. Can’ge aka a”sagiqti, ma'™- has the White man interpre- we with him the they killed. Horse the very swift, wet (sub.). ter (ob.) (sub.) snisnu égih i¢é. Caa™ amd uq¢é ahi éga”, é cti wi" té¢é té, wahuta¢i"- quicksand right hehad Dakotas the soon arrived as, he too one he killed, gun into it gone. (sub.) jaja adi”. Uma™ha™ amd gaq¢a” ma*¢i™ té’di ugde ma™¢i"i; wi" ¢a7¢a™, forked he had. Omahas the on the hunt walk when scattering they walk; by ones, na*ba-¢a™¢a™ ma*¢ivi. Uma ¢inka wi"dqtci ¢ab¢ia” weanaxi¢ai Caa™ ama. by twos they walk. Season just one ‘three times attacked us Dakotas the. NOTES. 462, 5. gacibaja atja"i. They feared an attack from the enemy, if they remained close to the creek. 463, 3. b¢ata-maji. A*pa™-yaiga did not eat any of the male elk, because its flesh was prohibited to all members of his gens, who were the Elk people. 463, 7. jadi" waiigi¢e. There were several scouts, but only one is mentioned as having discovered the herd. The others peeped over the bluff, and then all ran back to the camp to tell the news. 463, 8. mi" ¢a" cehiqti hi té, 7. ¢., about 4 p. m., at which time the story was dictated. BATTLE BETWEEN THE OMAHAS AND DAKOTAS IN 1855. 465 463, 8-9. niaci*ga wi". This was Louis Sanssouci. 464, 7. Eya aka, etc. The Dakotas, who were over the hill, called a little, without hallooing, inviting him to approach them. 464, 10; 464, 11. hegabaji and ackaqtci, pronounced he+gabaji and a+ckaqtci by the narrator. 464, 11. ackaqtci akiki¢ai. The narrator clapped his hands three times, to repre- sent the firing. 464, 12. Wage ieski, Logan Fontenelle, after whom Logan Creek, Neb., was named. 464, 14. Umatha" ama gaq¢a”, etc. An explanatory sentence. It shows how the Dakotas were able to surprise Logan. TRANSLATION. ~ In former days we went on the hunt with all the tribe, following the course of the Elkhorn River. About thirty of those called scouts were at the two sacred tents. As we went along, we killed some fish, a considerable number. The policemen took the large ones for themselves, and then cooked them. After eating, we departed, walking by night. We followed the course of a stream, whose banks were covered with trees. We did not sleep by the creek; we slept out from it, on the open prairie. At day, when it was light, behold, male elk were walking near us. The good marks- men exhorted one another. When the men shot at them they broke the leg of a male. When he made a dash, I caught hold of him and kicked him over. Those who came afterward hit him on the head. When they ate him at night, I did not eat any of the meat. I ate a small fish which a boy caught for me. At length two elk came directly toward us, following the stream. We killed one of them, the female, and having cut the meat into slices, we scorched them a little over a fire. As we went, one of those who had departed as scouts discovered the buffaloes. The scouts were about twenty miles from the camp, but all ran back suddenly to tell what they had observed. The next morning the camp was removed, and the tents were pitched near the herd, which we surrounded. When the sun was just about yonder, a man departed. Behold, some men were creeping towards the camp. They were Dakotas. The Omahas pur- sued the foe. I joined. At length it was dark; but still they continued shooting at them. meat (ee of) aka 44 ci” qtci diba u¢uciaya ihé¢é-hna™i. Maqati. Ki ci’ qtci ké na™bé the dried very fat four _in the middle placed them. He cut And very fat the hand (sub.) meat ‘ them up. (ob.) té é¢a"ska waga gdxe-hna™i. Waséjide fgahfi yi, ja” waqube té fbiya- the that size slices he made them. Red clay Pheer when, sacred pole oe he rubbed mixed wi ob. hna™i, oni“ oninde ataca™ gdxe-hna™i. Ga™ ¢icta’-hna%i. Ukit‘é-cta”-ma on, greasy exceedingly he made it. And he completed it. The habitual fighters u¢éwiwA¢é-hna”i. Ukit Aki¢a gdxe “¢é-hna™i. Igadize-hna™i, cai’- they assembled them. Enemy tocontend making they spoke of. They rode round and sitting with (feigning) round, gag¢i™. Qadde dubaha nfkaci"ga éga" gaxe-hna™i, yf snéde ud¢tciajd¢ica”. on horses. Grass __in four places man like they made, tent long in front of. Diba" kikide-hna”i, ci dtiba® nikaci"ga ¢ank& téwa¢é waxe-hna”i. Four times they ae at one again four times person the (ob.) they pretended to kill them. another, Wadade cti dtiba" waxe-hna”i. Ada*bé’qti kide-hna”™i. Qdde miub¢ij To cut them too fourtimes they pretended. Taking verv close they shot at (them). Grass they up aim knocked ihé¢é-hna™i. Maqude sia™¢é uji fkide-hna”i. Ukit‘é amd nikagaéhi ¢ankd down by shooting. Powder alone putin they shot at (them) The hostiles chief the (ob.) : with. wénaxi¢a-hna™i. Duba™ Akiki¢a-hna™i. Na®cta™i. Ukit‘é ama can’gaxai. attacked them. Four times they fought one They stopped The hostiles ceased. another. running. Niniba waqutbe yi a¢i™ ¢inké’3a diba™ ahi-hna™i, waii” wi” ubéta™ taf Pipe sacred tent tohimwhohadit fourtimes they arrived, robe one to wrap around it é¢i® abfi. (lické té. Niniba ¢ickai yi, ubéta® adi” ahfi. pf waqube they took it They untied its Pipe they untied when, wrapping they took it Tent sacred there for him. covering. it in (the robe) there. kéya a¢i” akfi; é ninigahi waqibe gdxe uji. Nikagdhi amd eondqtci atthe havingit they that killikinniok sacred made they put Chief the they alone reached in. (sub.) again ; ¢acide g¢i”’-hna"i. puffing out sat. smoke SACRED TRADITIONS AND CUSTOMS. 471 V.—Niniba waqtibe kéjA¢ica® ci ticka” wi" uwibéa td minke. Nfkagdhi Pipe sacred pertaining tothe again custom one Itell you will I who. Chief ami u¢éwi"i yi, Watcigaxe uda™ hi, ai. Inké-sabé aké, ninfba ei aka, the assembled when, To dance good 5 said Tnke-sabé it was pipe his the (sub.) they. he who, (sub.), é watcigaxe gaxe ‘i¢af, u¢tikie. I¢ikig¢e fhuyi¢af. Ma‘a ja™ wi” agiagat that a dance making prom- talkedto(them) Tojoinone they consulted Cotton- wood one went for it ised, about it. thing tothe other one another. wood Tnké-sabé amd wan'gi¢e. qasi ¢a"y4 ja” gastida-bdji. Wa‘t na™ba jliiwag¢e Tike-sabé the all. Topof atthe wood was not cleared of Woman two with them (pL sub.) a tree branches. a¢af, macaka a¢i™i. U¢ticiaya ujcyi gixai; &’di miza-hnavi, ja” td. Petige went, woman’s strap hey In the middle hole for they there they plantedit, pole the Old man for carrying wood had. the pole made; (ob.). feki¢éwaki¢ail. Wa¢atcigdxe te, af a¢a+. Ja™ ¢ayfnarqi te a¢a+, af. Inké- they made them act as ‘ou will dance, they indeed. Sleep you will arouse indeed, said Tnke- criers. —~ say yourselves by dancing they. sabé akadi ja”jinga d‘iba gasai. Hi¢uga ¢a” u¢ica® agaf éga", ta” wang¢a" Babs at the stick some theycut. Circle of tents ete aroundit went as, tribe (ob.) ubéna™-ma ja™jifiga wi" ¢a’¢a” wa‘i-hna™i. Ubdna™ tju aka gé-hna’i: the gentes stick one by one they gave them. Gens head-man the said as follows: Watcigaxe té 6'di-angiti*he wéga"¢ai éga™, ja“ jinga ké wa4 tai-éga™ atfi ha, ai. Dance the we join it they wish for as, stick the togive inorder they . said us (ob.) us that have come he. Cénujin’ga b¢tiga ha¢uyd¢i7i. Wasdsa® yi‘a”i. Wat mi”jinga eddbe waté Young man all naked. White clay hey wale Woman girl also dress on themselves. té-hnati, ci yi‘a™i. Agudi cté cénujin’ga wi’ widaha tida® A¢ahai. Inké- wore dresses, again they In what soever young man one clothing good he wore Tnke- painted place clothing. themselves. sabé ni na” ama waii’gi¢e ja” té eca”qtci g¢i”-hna"i. Wahi?-ci’¢e i”- sabé man grown ie every one pole the very near it sat. Robe with the hair they (sub.) out hna%i. Néxe-gayt diba, déxe diba cti (a¢i”) a-f-g¢ii. Inké-sabé ednujin’- wore. Drum four, gourdrattle four too Geng they sat there. Tike-sabé the young them ga-ma niniba waqtbe na™ba ké, é akiwa wépahan’ga a¢i” tA aké. Cénu- men pipe sacred two the, that both the first will have them. Young jin’ga na™b4 aké ninfba ujfi-de Aigd¢a mat¢i’-hnati. WaAdiée¢e oa™ ¢a-ma eS 8 man two the pipe (they) filled, carrying walked, Tomake those who wished (sub.) when on the arm presents fgadize-hna”i, cafi'gag¢i"i. Na*taf u¢ica®. Mate g¢i”i Quya aké. Niu rode round and round, sitting on horses. aes soe aaund Within sat Singers (an Man ance: e pole), ‘sub.). ama ca™ baytiwi"xai; wa‘tt amd dgaha na*taf. the infact turned around; woman the outsideonthe danced. (sub.) NOTES. 468, 1. 4i na™ba, the two sacred tents of the Hafiga gens. 468, 2. 4i witaqtci, the sacred tent of the Weji®cte gens. 468, 3. mazi ja" ma‘a ¢i" edabe, the sacred pole, which is kept in one of the Hatiga tents. 468, 4. niniba b¢aska na"ba, the two sacred pipes kept by the Inke-sabé gens. 12 Ie) 472 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. 468, 6. waqube jinga, the sacred customs of each gens and sub-gens. 468, 11. hu¢uga gaxai té. As the hu¢uga was curvilinear, “té” cannot refer to its shape. It admits of two renderings: ‘the one act,” and “when” or “as,” implying the occasion, time, or reason. 469, 2. ja" ké. The sacred pole is not kept erect, except on special occasions. 469, 3. nikagahi ¢atka. Frank La Fléche read “aka” instead of “¢anka.” 469, 7. waii"hahage ¢a®, the lower corners of a buffalo-hide, 7. e., the part towards the feet of the buffalo. ; 469, 18. cenujiiga nuya¢i", etc., refers to those who had not yet distinguished themselves in battle. 470, 1. yi-u¢ipu. a small lodge, such as the Winnebagos use. See “yi-u¢ipu” and “n¢ipu” in the Dictionary. 470, 3. gi-snede u¢ukihehebe gaxai. The length of the long tent depended upon the number of small tent-sticks obtained by the warriors. : 470, 5-6. guepa . . . agudi ¢ata"ce-da®. This is equivalent to “ wawenai,” asking or begging them to give something. After the old man said this, the fathers used to bring their children, each with four presents. These gifts, in modern times, have con- sisted of a piece of dried buffalo meat, a gun, a fine robe, and a kettle. When a gun could not be had, “nikide,” which were precious, and were used fer necklaces, were offered instead. Sometimes a horse was the fourth gift. 470, 15. ukit‘é ama, ete. The front flaps of the long tent were raised alittle. Then the attacking party passed between the dried meat and the grass-figures, and assaulted the chiefs. Both parties fired four times. Then the fight ended. 470, 18-19. Before the sacred pipe was taken back to its tent, the chiefs smoked it, and then it was taken over to the side of the young men, who represented the enemy. Here and there one would smoke it. Four times did they carry the pipe around for some of them to smoke it; and then it was returned to its sacred tent. 471, 3. i¢akig¢e ihuyi¢ai. On the evening of the day of the sham fight. 471, 5. macaka. Frank La Fléche read, ‘“‘maca™ka. 471, 15-16. Those on horseback used to watch for the pipe-bearers to come around, and when the women were on the other side of the circle. Then a horseman would take one of the pipes, which he “held for” a man (‘‘ui¢a™”), to whom he gave his horse, etc. See ga¢i®-na"paji’s War Story, the final paragraph. The men danced in a peculiar course, going from west to south, thence east and north; but the women followed the course of the sun, dancing in the reverse order, from the east to the south, thence by the west to the north. TRANSLATION, J.—Our ancestors spoke of making something to keep the people upright, something to make them behave. They spoke of making two sacred tents, and also of making another. When the chiefs had assembled, they consulted one another. They spoke of making sacred the cedar and cottonwood pole and two flat pipes. When they finished the pipes, they elected their own chiefs; and each gens of the tribe constituted itself according to its sub-gentes. And the gentes of the tribe gave to one another the minor sacred things which they now possess. They made the two tents sacred to the buffalo; and they made the one tent sacred to human beings; that is, to killing them SACRED TRADITIONS AND CUSTOMS. 473 in war. At length they completed all that was sacred. And these who had made themselves chiefs, they who were the first rulers, talked to the people. ‘Respect ye these two tents which ye have made sacred. When the tribal circle is formed, they shall standin the middle. Indeed, make it a rule to give to them whatsoever very good things you have. And desire even the chieftainship from us,” said they, addressing the young men. “In that event you will be stout-hearted. If any of you give many presents to strangers, you may paint your children’s foreheads. I you acquire this privilege by becoming very poor, you will be great men, and future generations will keep up the customs as long as the tribe shall last.” II.—They spoke of removing the camp to go on the buffalo hunt. When they came back and told about the bufialoes, they used to give good robes to the pole of the sacred tent. When they surrounded a herd, they used to gather together the buffalo tongues for the tent. When the buffaloes were killed, the chiefs said, “Ye two young men, you will gather buffalo tongues and place them at the sacred tent.” The young men used to thrust one end of their bows through the tips of the buffalo tongues, and carry them along by means of the bow-strings, which they put in front of them, next to their chests, the bows being on their backs. They were the very first ones to reach the lodges again. When they reached home in the evening, they used to cook. The chiefs assembled, wearing robes with the hair outside, and entered the sacred tent, where they ate after putting the food in the lower corners of their robes. He whose sacred thing it was, Hafiga, he who had made the feast, sat singing as the others ate. TI1.—When a man continues to fear unseen danger, they go out as scouts. The chiefs assemble. An old man calls: ‘‘I who move wish you to learn about the land for me!” Forthwith fifty or sixty young men go to the sacred tent of the Weji"cte. The young men go as scouts, running atound the circle of tents. At length they come back to report, perhaps, that they detected the presence of men. And they regard this service as fully equal to going on the war-path. They come back by making a detour, and perhaps they flee. : 1V.—When they killed a great many buffaloes they usually started homeward. At length the chiefs assembled, and spoke of making a sacred thing. They cooked a piece of dried buffalo meat at the two sacred tents, that they might assemble for the ceremony. The chiefs collected about a hundred young men, who were stripped to the waist and who sat in a circle around the two tents. Some of the men here and there were considered brave, so they wore robes and had on gay shirts. When they had eaten all the food the feast was ended. As the brave men followed the line of the tents, they were snatching bent tent-sticks from those who dwelt in small tents. And the owners did not refuse, nor did they ask why the braves tried to deprive them of their tent-sticks. They carried the sticks which they had taken back to the sacred tents. They made a long tent, using the sticks as long as they lasted. They made the prin- cipal sacred thing (i. e., they placed the pole) in the middle of the tent. They asked each first-born child for a piece of dried buffalo meat. An old man called about two hundred children by their names. “O grandchild, wherever you are standing, even though you bring but one thing, you will put it yonder on the ground for me, at a short distance.” When they collected the dried meat all beheld it. They spread it 474 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. out the length of the long tent. Waka*-ma*¢i" placed four of the fattest pieces of the meat in the middle. He cut them with a knife. He cut the fattest in slices as large as one’s hand. These he mixed with red clay, and then rubbed the sacred pole with the compound, making it exceedingly greasy. At length he completed it. They assembled the warriors, having spoken of feigning to contend with the enemy. The horsemen rode round and round. The chiefs had made four grass figures, in the shape of men, which they had put in as many places in front of the long tent. The mounted men and the chiefs shot four times at one another; and four times did the former pre- tend to kill the grass figures. And four times they pretended to cut them up. They took very close aim at them when they shot at them, and they knocked them down every time that they shot. They shot at the figures with guns loaded only with powder. The hostiles attacked the chiefs. Four times they fought one another. They stopped running. The enemy ceased fighting. Four times they went to the keeper of the tent of the sacred pipe, taking to him a robe to wrap around the pipe. They untied the pipe covering. Then they wrapped the pipe in the robe, and carried it to the long tent. After the ceremony they took it back to the sacred tents. It was that pipe which they used during the ceremony, after filling it with killikinnick which had been made sacred. The chiefs alone sat puffing out the smoke, when they put the pipe to their lips. V.—Now I will tell you a custom pertaining to the sacred pipes. When the chiefs assembled they said: “It is good to dance.” It was Inke-sabé, the keeper of the pipes, who promised to make a dance, and talked about it. The chiefs consulted with one another about having the dance directly after the other ceremonies. All the men of the Inke-sabé gens went after a cottonwood tree, from which they cut off all the branches but those at the top. Two women accompanied the men, having their “macaka.” When they brought the tree back they planted it in a hole in the ground, which had been made in the midst of the tribal circle. They caused old men to act as criers. ‘You are to dance! You are to keep yourselves wide awake by using your feet!” said they. The men of the Inke-sabé cut ten sticks in the neighborhood of their tents. Having gone around the tribal circle, the bearers of the sticks gave them out, one by one, to the several gentes. The head of each gens said as follows: ‘They have come to give us the stick because they wish us to take part in the dance.” Nearly — all the young men were naked. They rubbed white clay on themselves. The women and girls wore dresses and painted themselves. Here and there a young man was seen who wore good clothing. All the elder men of the Inke-sabé gens sat close around the pole. They wore robes with the hair outside. They had four drums and four gourd rattles. Both of the sacred pipes of the young men of the Inke-sabé were to occupy a prominent place in the dance. The two young men who kept them filled them and carried them on their arms as they proceeded in the dance. Those who desired to make presents were mounted and rode round and round the circle of the dancers. Those on foot danced around the pole. The members of the Quya section, who were the professional singers, sat within the circle of the dancers. The men turned around, and the women danced in an outer circle. LETTERS DICTATED BY OMAHAS AND PONKAS. 475 LETTERS DICTATED BY OMAHAS AND PONKAS. qGAHE-~AgE TO CUDE-GAXE AND MA*TCU-WAQIHI. July 29, 1878. Negtha, a*wa™qpani tedbe. Wija™be ka™b¢a, akfwa, Ma*teti-wa¢ihi O mother’s me poor very. I see you I wish, both, Matteu-wa¢ibi brother, é¢a*ba. Ma¢e usni tédihi yi, wija”be taf minke. Uma™ha"-ma can‘ge he too, Winter cold it arrives when, T see you will T who. The Omahas horse ¢ingé tedbe; waqpini ama. Caa™ amidya pi cde, can’ge ¢ingé ag¢i. 3 without very ; they are poor. Dakotas totheones Iwas but horse without I came > who there, home. Sindé-g¢écka waja" be pf éde, can’ge a™{-baji. Cin'gajin'ga ¢i¢ija, neetha, 1 Spotted Tail Isaw him Iwas but, horse he did not Chi your, O mother’s there give me. brother, wakéga-baji été, wi" ¢a-ga. Uma™ha’-ma mé tédi, macté té/di, Ahigi sick not itmay be, tell to me, The Omahas spring in the, warm in the, many ¢ida™be té ama. -yaxd-¢a" ba judg¢e ag¢i"; a%¢a™ baha". Wagi™ha hnize 6 see you will. Two Crows Iwith him Isit; he knows me. Letter you receive ts ay, = Cee Cie ei ose “ yi, wi" utangaqti tian’ki¢a-oa. when, just as soon as make one come to me. TRANSLATION. Mother’s brother, I am very poor. I wish to see you both. I will see you this year, in the winter. The Omahas have no horses at all; they are poor. I went to the land of the Dakotas, but I came home without a horse. I went to see Spotted Tail, but he did not give me a horse. Tell me, mother’s brother, if your children are not sick. Many of the Omahas will see you in the spring, when it is warm. I sit with Two Crows, who knows me. When you get the letter, send me one immediately. yAXE-GA” BA TO MA*TCU-WAQTHI. July 29, 1878. Nisfha, hnaji té’di, a"wa’qpani-maji’-qti-ma™ ¢a’ ety. Hné yi, a®wat- ; ! qp yt -q [l, My child, you did when, I was not poor at all heretofore. You when, me not go went 5 On : Stree, } ° / / : gpani hégamaji. Wigisi¢é-hna™ ca*ca™-qti-ma™. Ca? wigija"be ka™b¢a- 9 poor me not a little. Tam used to thinking always very Ido. In fact Isee you, my I wish of you relation qtima”. Hata" yi wigija*be etéga"-maji. Weéahide’qti hné té, i ¢a-maji very much. How if Tsee you, my apt I not. Very far away you as, Iam sad relation went hai, fe wida"qti wind‘a" ka"b¢éga". Nia™ba ¢itigé té’di cu¢éagd. Ca”. 4 Word very good I hear of you T hope. Moon (-light) none when Isend it to Enough. you. 476 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. TRANSLATION. My child, before you went, | was not poor at all. When you departed, I was very poor. I always remember you, and I greatly desire to see you. It is not prob- able that there will be any way for me to get to see you. Iam sad because you went so far away. I hope to hear good words from you. I send you this when there is no moonlight. Enough. JABE-SKA TO WAHE‘A®. August, 1878. Gijir'¢e té. Pahan’ga ite‘dge ijin’ge gija™ be, eft’e ha. Gan'yi Waji™a- : And ourelder dead. Before old man his son saw his, died to Bird- brother him gahiga, wabéxu ga™ hnize te ha. Gan’yi waqi”ha hnize té’di, ida® ma”- Chief, letter atany you take will D And letter youre- when, good you rate it ceive it eni” yi @wi’¢a gi¢a-oht. And‘a™ te hi. yan’ee wédaté na®*bidawAd¢é pi giga-g yan g walk if totellme — send it back. I hear will a Your daughter gave birth twins wa¢it. Akiwa taf. Ug¢e'qtei g¢i “S¢a¢é wika*b¢a. Ca™. Cijir’¢e ten eee she had. Both died. Very soon to come you I desire you. Enough. our elder dead so back promised brother u¢iwib¢d hi. He-xipa, ¢iddi, ¢a¢uhdgtei vé. Qagictabaji t'é te amé. I tell you of s He-xapa, your father, very nearly dead. You not seeinghim, die he will. yours your own Waji’a-gahiga da“ be jug¢a-ga. Jabe-ska ti¢iki¢é. Bird-Chief seeing it be with him. White-Beaver causes this to come to you. NOTES. This is a curious letter. The first sentence was intended for Wahe‘a™; then six were addressed to Waji"a-gahiga; and the rest, to Wahe‘a*. 476, 2. Pahatiga i"c‘age, ete. This should be “Ic‘age ¢inké ijin’ge giga™ baji tédi, git’e hit:” literally, ““Old man—the one who—his son—he saw not his—when—he died to him—.” 476, 6. Jabe-ski, Wa¢acpe, or Ma*¢i"-tcayi, was an aged Ponka who remained with his Omaha kindred when his people were removed to the Indian Territory, in 1877. TRANSLATION. Your elder brother is dead. He died before his father saw him. And you, O Waji"a-gahiga, please receive the letter. Send word back to me if you are doing well when you get the letter. I will hear it. Your daughter had twins. Both died. I wish you to promise to come home very soon. Enough. Your elder brother is dead, so I tell you about your own. Scabby Horn, your father, is almost dead. He will die before you see him. Look at this with Wajita-gahiga. White Beaver sends it to you. LETTERS DICTATED BY OMAHAS AND PONKAS. ATT JABE-SKA TO WAQA-NAJI®. August, 1878. (iddi ga¢ubdqtci ’é. Q@agictabdji t’é etéga®. Jdbe-ski waqi"ha Your father very nearly dead. oudonotsee yours to die apt. Beaver White letter ti¢iki¢é. Waddgictabaji ?é ta ¢anké. Qaki ‘i¢dgé; wi" ¢akaji (iyan’ge causes to come You do not see your they will die. You reach you prom- you did not speak Your elder to you. (relations) home ised; truly. sister wéda¢éde t’é. (iga*’cka ¢ijan’ge ida¢é ke t’é. Mim” ¢a” vé égasdni teé bore children, dead. our sister's yourelder theonethat dead. Moon the dead thenext the but child sister she bore day (=when) cugéad¢é. Tsend it to you. TRANSLATION. Your father is almost dead. He will be apt to die before you see him. Jabe-ski (White Beaver) causes the letter to come to you. Your relations will die before you see them. You promised to reach home, but you did not tell the truth. Your sister gave birth to a child, but it is dead. Your sister’s son, to whom she gave birth, is dead. I send this to you on the day after the moon died (7. e., August 1). NAMAMANA TO MA*TCU-WAGIHL. August 22, 1878. Laha™ha, wabag¢eze ¢a™ cuhi wiYuwatan’ga f¢a¢é te ha. Usniiiji Brother-in-law, letter the reaches as soon as * youcause will . Not cold (ob.) you it to becoming ca'té cupf ta minke ha. Ujan’ge ké i¢apaha"-maji’-qti-ma”. Maja” dgudi yet, Ireach will Iwho A Road the Ihave not the least knowledge of it. Land in what when you place ¢ag¢i” ¢a" i¢Apaha" ka” b¢a ta minke. Cin’gajin’ga wian’ge wa¢i" ¢anka you sit I know I wish will Iwho. Child my elder sister she had the ones (an ) them who tidal Y udna‘a" ka™b¢a. Wamuske cti uaji ha, wéga ze ag¢i"’-sdta”. they ae if, Lhear of it I wish. Wheat too Isowed , measure fifteen. goo Cin’gajin’ga wiwija wakégede piiiji, T’é té’di, cub¢é téi™te. A*wa™ qpani Child my sick, heat bad. He dies when, Igotoyou may. Me poor hégamaji hi. Eskana wija™ bai ka"™b¢éga"-hna® ca™ ca". Maja™ (¢a") tda® Tam very b Would that I see you Iam hoping always. Land (the) good (yi), wagazu and‘a® ka™b¢a. Ceéna, (if), aeaEctly I hear I wish. Enough. TRANSLATION. O brother-in-law, please send me a letter as soon as this one reaches you. I will reach you before the cold weather. Ido not know the road at all. It will be my desire to know the land in which you dwell. If the children that my sister has are well, I wish to hear about it. I sowed fifteen acres of wheat. My child is very ill. When he dies, I may go to you. Iam very poor. I am constantly hoping to see you. Jf the land in which you dwell be good, I wish to hear correctly about it. Enough. 478 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. UHA*-JIN'GA TO GACUDIGA*. August 22, 1878. Nisfha, hné té, nan’de i”pimaji’qti-ma”. Ata” wisi¢é té nan‘de My child, you went when, heart T had it very bad for me. When =I think of you the heart i” pimaji-hna"-ma™. Ga™adi a*wa™ qpani-maji tdi"te, ca” éskana wija™be I always have it sad. Now I may not become poor, yet would that I see you 3 ka"b¢éga™. Ca™ éskana, nisiha, uma” ¢inka (¢¢é) wija”be ka"b¢éga", usni T hope. Still would that, my child, season (this) I see you I hope, cold te’di ¢é¢uddi. Nikaci*ga a"wa™ ¢ita™ qti éga", Ada" anyig¢icupa-baji -qtia” i. inthe during this. Indians we have worked hard Sac there- we have not packed our things at all. what, fore Wa¢ita™ té hégaji, HE‘a” ma*hni” té wind‘a® ka™b¢a. Kgi¢e waqi”ha Work the not a little. How you walk the [hear from you I wish. Behold, letter 6 uq¢é'qtci tia’ ¢aki¢ée ka” b¢a hi. very soon you send to me I wish. TRANSLATION. My child, when you departed, my heart was very sad. I am usually sad when I think of you. At this time, though I may not be poor, I hope to see you. Still I hope, my child, to see you this year, during this present winter. We Indians have been working very much, therefore we have not made any preparations for the journey. There is so much work. I wish to hear how you are. Behold, I desire you to send a letter back to me very soon. KICKE TO MA*TCU- ,AN’GA. August 22, 1878. A™ba¢éga® waqi”ha wawidaxt. Ca” wisi¢éqti-hna’-ma™, kagé. This day, as letter I write to you. Still Iam always remembering you Oyounger very well, brother. Wigisi¢e’qti aba gé. Ca™ hnize yi, fe d‘iba a™{ i¢d-gi. Ucka™ e‘a™ Iremember you, my day the Yet youre- when, word some togive cause to Deed how own, very well (pl. ob.). ceive it tome be coming. 9 mathni™” té wind‘a™ ka™b¢a. Ca” uma” ¢inka ¢é¢uadi wija"be ka"b¢éga". you walk the I hear from I wish. In fact season during the I see you T hope. you present TRANSLATION. As it is to-day, I write you a letter. I am usually thinking of you, O younger brother. I think of you day by day. Now, when you get my letter, send some words tome. I wish to hear from you what you are doing and how you are. I hope to see you this year, LETTERS DICTATED BY OMAHAS AND PONKAS. 479 MA*TCU-NA*BA TO AGITCITA. August 22, 1878. A™ba¢é niaci"ga Pan‘ka ¢anké wabdg¢eze ¢a® ti¢ai bétze. (Qiyan’de This day people Ponka the ones letter the sent here IThave Yourdaughter’s who received. husband wakégai; i’tca"qtci gfuda”i. Udéb¢a ta minke. Wamiuske ké céta® was sick; just now he is better. Itellhim will I who. Wheat the (ob.) so far e¢ita yi. Wasnin‘de taté. he has not He delay will surely. worked his. NOTE. Agitcita is another name for Wajita-gahiga, mentioned in Jabe-skis letter. He is called Wanace-yanga, Big Soldier, in the Ponka Census List of 1880. His daughter married an Omaha, Wanaceki¢abi, referred to in the letter just given. TRANSLATION. I have received to-day the letter sent hither from the Ponka people. Your daughter’s husband was sick. He is better now. I will tell him what you say. He has not yet harvested his wheat. He will surely be backward with it. MA*TCU-NA"BA TO WE’S‘A-7,AN’GA. August 22, 1878. Lucpaha, fe na™ba cu¢éwiki¢é. Ca™ Caa™ ama, Sindé-g¢ecka, na™bé- My grandchild, word two I send to you. In fact Dakota the 7 Spotted-tail, hand who / Oe ff 0 y / Te 2 x T : ub¢a”. ‘A ¢ingé/qti na™bé-ub¢a”, ca” tida™ ha. Udargti na™bé-ub¢a”. T held. Nothing at all being hand I held, yet good é Very good hand T held. the matter. Ca™ ukit'S wita”wa ukit‘e ¢a” iida® ¢andji" té and‘a™ ka™b¢a Ca™ ga” Now nation which one nation the good youstand the TI hear it I wish. At any rate * ~ / (a P s52. iV-RO su oe *nisn/ 4s . wisi¢é-hna™-ma™ ¢a™ja e‘a” té, i pi-maji. Wakan'da i¢i’¢ig¢a™ taité, Talwaysremember you though whatis when, Iam sad. The Great Spirit decide for me about shall, the matter my own ehé. Céna cu¢éwiki¢ée. Uda? anaji”. ‘Tsay. Enough Isend to you. Good Istand. TRANSLATION. Grandchild, I send you two words. I have shaken hands with the Dakota, Spotted Tail. It was for no special reason that I shook hands, yet it was good. It was very good for me to shake hands with him. Now I wish to hear with which of the nations you are on good terms. Though I always remember you, no matter what hap- pens, yet I am sad when anything unpleasant occurs. I say that Wakanda shall decide for me about my affairs, I send enough to you. Iam doing well, 480 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. di-ZI-GIN’GE TO MISXA-SKA, QUGAHUNAJL, AND QIGA-SKA. Niacitga am& ¢éama ¢ida”be taf eb¢éga", dda" cub¢é t& minke. People the (sub.) these see you will T think, nares I go to you will I who. Hné té ceta”, negiha, can’ge céna a'¢ai ¢anka t’af, Ada" cub¢é t&é minke. You when so far, ann rosy somany you gave theones have there- Igoto will Iwho. went brother, to me that died, fore, you 3 Wija™be té ékiga”, ta” wang¢a™ zaniqti ¢ida™he ga™¢ai. Negiha, wiji¢e I see you the ike: it, nation see you they wish. 10) mother’ 8 my elder brother, brother méga®, a®wa™ qpani héga-maji. Cub¢é ta minke ha. Kdécai yi, waqi”ha likewise, me poor I not a little. I goto you will Iwho f What you if, letter say uq¢é qtei tia’ ¢aki¢e ka™ b¢a hia. very soon yousendhereto Iwish me NOTE. Mitxa-ska or White Swan is Frank La Fléche, sr.; Qugahunaji", Badger-skin- shirt; and Qi¢a-ska, the head-chief, White Eagle. TRANSLATION. I think that these Indians will visit you, therefore I will go to you. Mother’s brother, the horses which you gave me have died since you departed, therefore I will go to you. All of the tribe wish to see you, just as Ido. Mother’s brother and elder brothers, Iam very poor. I will go to you. If you have anything to say, I wish you to send me a letter very soon. qAHE-y;AgE TO QIGA-SKA. 6 Wagqi”ha hnize té, ian’ki¢é-gi. Negiha, maja” ¢a™ efa” ma™hni”™ Letter youre- Ww ine nm, cause one to fe O mother’s land the how you walk ceive coming to me. brother, té ¢uita™ and‘a® ka” eb¢éga™. Jhaji yi'cté, ¢ita® wi" ¢a gi¢a-ga. Negtha, the correctly I hear it I hope. Unsuit- evenif, correctly totellme causetocome O mother’s able back. brother, awa" qpani tedbe hi. Axdge-hna™ ca"ca™-qti-ma™, wija™ba-maji. Dada” me poor very Tam erying always indeed Iam, I do not see you. What 9 i“¢ingé, negiha, a™¢a”wang¢a ha. Awa qpani tedbe, negtha. (Néama, Tam without, maine! s Isufferonaccountofit . Me poor very, mother’s These, brother, brother. negiha,—wija™be ti minke ¢a™ja, negiha, wamuske udaji ugéwi Agi¢é mother 8 I see you will I who though, ee 8 wheat T sowed collect mine brother,— brother, b¢icta” yi wija”be ka" b¢a—Uma™ha™ ama usniqti wi'déta" tédthi yi I finish when Isee you I wish.— Omahas the (sub.) very culd half the length it arrives when ‘i there 12 ¢ida”be ta ama, negiha. Nikaci"ga-ma ¢éama, Uma™ha"-ma, negiha, eydha- see you will, mother’ 8 The neti these, the Omahas, aa Ss are ec- brother. brother, LETTERS DICTATED BY OMAHAS AND PONKAS. +81 baji, negtha. Uda" naji®’-baji; ’teqi teabe ha. I[’natha, winéei edabe, centric, mother’s Good theydonotstand; hard for very 5 My mother, my mother's also, brother. me ’ brothers ata [a ce sn/ SS / , aye aii Ne ede wakéga-baji yi, Mwi¢a gi¢a-ea. E‘a’ ctécte awanata® ka“ b¢a. Negtha, they are not sick if, to tell me cause to be Whatis soever Lhearof them I wish. Mother's : coming back. the matter brother, jn! n/ |x 74 V7 6 PAY, Sn/‘c pil Ter “hs waqi"ha Pan‘ka ama g¢i¢ai té and‘a", nan’de iuda®. Ega®, negtha, letter Ponkas the(sub.) caused to when I heard it, heart good for me. So, mother’s come home brother, */ ore. S, i r ae ~ ~/ 0 waqi”ha a™{ i¢a-ga ha. Ie d‘tiba a™f-ga ha, negiha. Nan’de iuda* letter to give cause to 0 Word some give me A mother’s Heart good for me me be coming brother. té, negiha. will, mother’s brother. NOTES. 480, 9. am¢a"wang¢a is from u¢ug¢a; but Sanssouci read, “aa walgig¢a,” from the possessive, u¢ugig¢a. 480, 9-10. @eama, negiha,—wiya*be, etc. This is a curious instance of a sudden digression on the part of a speaker. He inteuded speaking about the tribe, but he proceeded to tell of his own affairs. Then he returned to the Omahas. The correct order would have been, “@eama, negiha, Uma*ha® ama usniqti wirdéta™ tédihi yl ¢ida"be ta ama. Wija"be ta minke ¢atja, negiha, wamuske uaji u¢ewiagi¢e b¢icta® yi, wiga*be ka"b¢a.” TRANSLATION. When you receive the letter, send me one. O mother’s brother, I hope to hear just how you are getting along in the new land. Even if it be unsuitable, send back and tell me just how it is. Mother’s brother, lam very poor. Iam crying all the time, because I do not see you. I suffer on account of what I have los‘, O mother’s brother. I am very poor, mother’s brother. Though I wish to see you, mother’s brother, it cannot be till I have finished harvesting my wheat that I sowed. These Omahas will visit you when the very cold weather shall have gone half of its course. These Omahas, mother’s brother, are eccentric. .They do not prosper, and that is very hard for me. Send me back word whether my mother and mother’s brothers are not sick. Whatever may be their condition, | wish to hear about them. Mother's brother, when I heard the letter which the Ponkas sent back, my heart was glad. In like man- ner, mother’s brother, give me some words. My heart will be glad. yEBAHA TO WE‘S‘A-,AN’GA. Wawémaxe cu¢ca¢é. Nikaci’ga mace, a¢isi¢ai wé¢a-baji tedbe. U‘a®- Task questions Isend to you. O ye people, weremember you we are sad very. To no x ¢in’ge wisi¢é-hna"-ma™, a bata” cté. Ca™ maja” e‘a™ ma*hni™ yi, é wagazu purpose Tam generally thinking of you, some days. Yet land how you walk if, that correctly and‘a" ka b¢a. (iéami nikaci"ga amd usni tédihi yi, ¢ida™be ga™ gai. T hear I wish. These people the (sub.) cold it arrives when, tosee you wish. at it VOL vVi—31 6 12 482 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. Ca” e‘a™ mathni” yi waqi”ha gian’ki¢a-ga. Wina‘a™ kal’ b¢a. Uq¢e’qtei Yet how you walk if letter send back to me. Lhear from you Very soon waqi“ha gian’‘ki¢a-ga: (@é cuhf tédfhi yi, waqi”ha uhna™ tédihi xf, uq¢e- letter send back tome: This reaches it arrives when, letter youhold it arrives when, very you at it at it ay van ki¢g-o8 raqiehs qtei gian’ki¢a-ga, waqi™ha. soon send back to me, letter. TRANSLATION. I send to you to question you. O ye people, we are very sad when we think of you. On some days Iam thinking of you in vain. Still, I desire to hear just how you fare in the land. These Indians wish to visit you in the winter. Send a letter back to me, as I wish to hear how you are. Send a letter back to me very soon. When this reaches you, when you take hold of the letter, send me one back very soon. SI-yA*-QEGA TO EDUANA (ANTOINE ROY). Kagé, ga” Uma™ha" ama ca¢é td ama. [(é ama] cubéd b¢icta™ andj. Younger aftera Omahas the gotoyou will. [They are going] I go to have T stand. brother, while (sub.) you finished Ukie ca¢é t4 ama. Nikaci™ ga g¢éba-na™ba ¢ida™be ga™¢ai. Ca™, edAda® - a Totalk they will go to you. Person twenty to see you wish. Now, what- with them ctécte ab¢i”-maji, a"wa’ qpani tcabe. Cé niaci*ga nije pebye wija™ bal soever T have I not, me poor very. That person IT see you ka™ b¢a: Maja™-ibd4ha", Cabé-naji®, céna. Wist¢e-hnan’ di i™ ¢a-maji-hna"- I wish: Land he knows, Dark (afar) he enough. Iremember always Tam always stands, you when ma™. Ca” wija™be ka*b¢aqti-ma* » Fabgi" gahnankace. ‘Ta™wang¢a" téqi sad. Yet I see you I wish indeed, three Sie who are those Tribe Se oe (unseen). icpaha™; Ita" téqi, wéteqi’qtia”i. A"wa” qpani té awake. (Pé¢anka, nuyine? you knew; now difficult, very dificult for us. Tam poor the I mean it. _ These, ¢anka, na"ba ¢anka, waqi’ha da be juwa¢ig¢e ka b¢a. Ca™ cin’gajin’ga the(pl.ob.), two the (pl. ob.), letter toseeit you with them I wish. And children ¢ija wakéga té éska™ t’é ite ca™ and‘a®” ka™b¢a. Maja*-ibaha™ eti ¢fe your 30s the itmay.be dead it may be yet I hear it Iwish. - Maja"-ibaha® too you wawike. Cabé-ndji" ¢i cti ¢ie wawike. . I mean you. Cabé-naji® you too you Imean you. i NOTE. Nine letters were written for the Omahas on the same day, August 22,1878. Sey- eral alluded to the contemplated visit of the Ponkas; but Siya®-qega alone gave the number who intended going. Siya™-qega addressed three Ponkas in his letter: Antoine, Maja™-ibaha™ (Knows-the-Land), and Cabé-naji® (Stands-Dark-in-the-distance). LETTERS DICTATED BY OMAHAS AND PONKAS. 483 TRANSLATION. Younger brother, the Omahas will go to you. As they are going, I stand ready to go to you. They will go to pay you a friendly visit. Twenty persons wish to sce you. Now, I have nothing whatever; I am very poor. I wish to see three young men among you: yourself, Maja™-ibaha® (Knows-the-Land), and Cabé-naji" (Stands- Dark-in-the-distance). When I think of you, I am always sad. Yet I have a strong desire to see you three who are out of my sight. You know the trouble of the tribe. It is now in trouble; we are in great trouble. I mean that Iam poor. I wish these two young men to see the letter with you, Antoine. I desire to hear if your children have been sick, or even if they are dead. I mean you, too, Maja*-ibaha". I mean you, too, Cabé-naji. WAJI*Y-SKA TO MA*TOU-WAGIHI AND A’ PA*-7AN'GA. Waqi”ha ga¢a* wawidaxti cu¢éa¢é. Cuhi té, hnize yi, éskana Letter that I write to you I send it to It reaches when, you take it when, oh that you. you uq¢é’qtci g¢i¢a¢é ka*b¢éga”. Ki nfkaci”ga-ma, ¢éama, Uma™ha™ ama, very soon you pndone) I hope. And the people, these, Omahas he. UC (sub.), edada® fe ké a™cte ca” wab¢ita® ma™b¢i”, égi¢e, Ucka™ wisi¢é ha. Wisi¢e what (siey) the asif still I work I walk, behold, deed LIremember . I remember speal you you té ca™ waqi"ha ga¢a® cuhi té’di, fe ké agai ti¢adé yi, iddyig¢io¢a™ ka™ b¢a. the yet letter that itreaches when, words the you give yousend if, 1 decide for myself I wish. you me here _Ca™ niaci*ga uké¢i" eca” we¢énaji® edida® wi” ¢i4 gé ¢ti wdgaziqti And Indians nearto you stand to what one they the too very straight them give you (pl. ob.) wi" ¢a i¢a-ga. And‘a® ka™b¢a. Ca” A™pa™jan’ga, ¢i cti wisi¢é ca™ca’’- totellme send it here. T hear it I wish. And Big Elk, you too Iremember always you qti-ma”. Ki ca” fe ké cu¢é ké b¢iga, A™pa”-jan'ga, ¢i cti ¢and‘a™ téga™ indeed I do. And in fact, wordsthe sentto the all, A*pa"-janga, you too aren hear in order you them that wawidaxti. fe ¢fa ké ian’ki¢a-gi, d‘ttba, ¢{ cti. Nfacitga-mé edéda® tida™ I write to you. Words your the send here to me, some, you too. The people what things good . y ~ / : ~ : . gdxe té/di, si¢éwa¢é. Uda" a®ckAxe-hna™ éga", wisi¢é. Cat uwikie ké do when, memorable. Good you usually made me as, Irememberyou. And Italktoyou the ie ké dhigiqti ¢éama u¢iwikié cu¢éa¢é. A*wa™ qpani éga" dda® fe Ahigiqti words the verymany these Italk to you Isend to Tam poor some- there- words very many 4 about you what fore , ‘Ts , , y u¢uwikié cu¢éags. Wib¢aha™ cu¢da¢e. T talk to you Tsend to you. Ipray to you Isend to you. about 3 484 THE ¢EGINA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. NOTES. 483, 3. atcte is used in comparisons, figures of speech. See “i*cte,” in the Dic- tionary. 483, 3. The third sentence of this letter is puzzling, not only to the collector, but also to Sanssouci and Frank La Fléche. Still it is given as dictated. There may bea comparison between the bare words of the Omahas, and the deeds of the Ponkas. 483, 10. u¢uwikie, ete.: “I speak many words to you because I am poor.” TRANSLATION. I have written that letter to send to you. When it reaches your land, and you receive it, I hope that you will send one back very soon. What these persons, the Omahas, speak, I continue working at, as it were; but I remember your deeds. As I remember you, I desire to decide for myself, when that letter reaches you, and you send the words to me. I also wish you to tell me accurately about the things which your neighbors have given you. I wish to hear. And you, too, A*pajanga (Big Elk), I always remember. And, in fact, [ have written to you all the words that I send to your land, that you, too, A"pa"-qaiga, may hear them. Do you, too, send me some of your words. When men do what is good, they should be remembered. As you in- variably did me good, I remember you. And as I talk to you, I send you a great many words when I talk with you about these. As I am somewhat poor, I send to you, talking with you in a great many words. I send to you to ask a favor of you. CA’ TA*-JIN'GA TO MA*TCU-WAQGIHL. Gam” wija™ba-maji té, a™wa™qpani; wija”be té, a"wa™ qpani-maji. At any I do not see you when, Iam poor; I see you when, I am not poor. rate Oné té ceta® nan‘de i’pi-maji; a™wan’kega éga*-ca”ca". Nikagdhi ama You the so far heart not good for me; Tam sick ~ always. Chiefs the ones went who wiu¢akié tida®-hna™i, ci cénujin’ga tiwa rakié cti ida™-hna™i, Ta” wa®e¢a? you talk tothem is always good, again young man you talk to them too is always good. . Tribe about it ¢éama Uma™ha™-ma dada™ wa¢a'i té tida® teabe-hna?. (isi ¢é-hna” ca” ca?. these the Omahas what you neve given good very usually. They are always thinking of them you. Wé¢igga" ¢iya té vida" ca®ea’’qti. Eskana uma™¢inka aji yi wija™be Plans your the good continually. Oh that season another if T see you A , pee ony) , io e / = a aie ka"b¢éga". Eskana uhé ké iwi ¢aona i¢agé ka" b¢a. Téska aoni™ ¢inké I hope. Oh that path the you tell me you send I wish. Interpreter you haye the one (ob.) here him who uhé ké fbaha™ yi, Mwi’¢ i¢a-ga ha Badize ijaje agi”. Wag¢titada 4fi ¢a™ path the knowsit if, to tellme send here t Battiste his name he has. Oto village the (ob.) (ob.) éceta” a™ba tma*¢i" dna té and‘a™ ka™b¢a. Pan‘ka 4fi ¢a® éceta”, ¢ as far as day to walk in how the IT hearit I wish. Ponka village the as faras that that many (ob.) that, LETTERS DICTATED BY OMAHAS AND PONKAS. 485 iwake Pan’ka nikagahi ijin’ge wactice wan ‘gifeqti wija™ bai ka"b¢éga™. I mean it. Ponka chief his an brave T see you I hope. Kgipi ma”-qti-ma” éga", wija™bai ka"b¢éga"-hna®™ ca”ca™. Wakate ¢hia Tam so used to you as, I see you Lam hoping always. ood your 1 / F ° 1 . ; ° b¢a ite ca” ca™. I™uda™, Ada" wija™be ka*b¢a-qti-ma”. Badize aké ¢ ¢izat Tate always. Good to me, therefore [see you Idesire very Ido. Battiste the that he (sub.) takes it y J , ia Pe yi, da”’be udi¢a ta aka. when, seeing it he will tell you. TRANSLATION. When I do not see you lL am poor; but-when I see yon I am not poor. Since you departed my heart has been sad; I have continued sick. It is always good for you to consult the chiefs and the young men about your affairs. What things you gave to these gentes of Omahas were always good. They ever remember you. Your plans were good aft all times. I hope to see you in another season. I desire you to send and tell me the way to your land. If the interpreter whom you have, knows the way, send and tell me. His name is Battiste. I wish to hear how many days’ walk it is from the Oto village to the Ponka village. I hope to see all of you brave sons of Ponka chiefs. As I am so used to you, I am ever hoping to see you. I always ate your food. It was pleasant to me, therefore I have a strong desire to see you. When Battiste receives the letter and sees its contents, he will tell you. MAQPIYA-QAGA TO MA®*TCU-NAJI. Laha™ha, niyjinga ¢i¢ija t’é t6, niin’de i™pi-maji ca”ca®. Ki ¢d¢u ¢a- 3rother-in-law, boy your dead as, heart bad for me always. And here you naj té’'di, ada" héga-hmi"-aji cde ihné té ceta”, cin’gajin’ga ¢i¢ija E¢a"ba, stood when, good alittle you werenot but youhave so far, ebild "your he too, gone there maja” ¢a™ abdi™ ¢an’di M¢éwacka™ qti yi, té té and‘a® té’di, i” ¢a-maji ha. land. ue [have in the you made great efforts when, dead the Iheardit when, I was sad (ob. for me éaké iimi aka xa@é-hna™ ca™ea%. Cat ea” and‘a® té, ceta™ niin’de oD oD ’ Thisone hismother’s the is always erying. Just so Theardit when, so far heart brother's wife (sub.) i pi-maji ma™b¢i” ha. Can’ge ja’-ma™¢i" ‘i ¢an‘’ka endqtei iwi'’cte. bad for me I walk . Fee) wagon earry the ones that they alone remain to me. Maja™ ab¢i” ¢a” timaxe¢é axe ¢éga", wamtske maja” b¢tiga udji Ci Land Th a the I did not like to give it up a wheat land the whole I sowed. Again because I had worked it dada" waqta jin’'ga b¢tiga ab¢i’; nt eti ab¢i’, ca” wata™ zi cti Ahigiqti what vegetable eal all Ihave; pvetato too Thave, and corn too very much ab¢i”. Nikaci"ga-ma ¢é¢u magi" gé'di a” ba udwayiha-hna™i. Uma™ha® T have. The meagle here they walked during day we are generally lonesome. Omahas the (p].) ama bia ¢igisi¢é-hna™i. Ki Caa™ amaja cti angahii. Angag¢ii, can’ge the remember you. And Dakotas tothem too we arrived. We came home, horse watti ha Caa™ ama. Ja" wija™ be ka™b¢éde téqi ha. pi té im¢i’da™be gavetous . Dakotas the. Yet T see you Iwish, bunt diffieult, . House the to look after forme ~ 6 sf) 12 486 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. ¢ingé té ¢ Awake, téqi hi. Ca dhigiqti nikaci"ga ama a™¢ida"be taitdé thereis the that Imeanit, difficult . Yet a great many people the we see you shall nong (sub.) eb¢éga™ ha. Nikactga wi’ cénujin’ga ¢i¢ija ¢ankdé wi” a®¢a‘i ka?’b¢a. I think Person one young man your the cnee one you § pive I wish. who Uma™ha’-ma ita" waji’-qidaawa¢é; nikaci"ga-baji ga” ¢ai_ té, “da” waji”- The Omahas now Tam out oF Beveuee with Indians they not eiren desire, therefore Iam out em ; qiddawé¢é. Nikaci"ga ama nikagahi jua™wangig¢ai, é ida" ha. Waqe of patience with People the ones chief we go with them, ourown, that good . Acting the them. who gaxe éde a™¢a™t’a¢af é wedtab¢é ha. Ki nikaci*ga uké¢i* nfkagdhi a ¢a white but they hateme that Ihate them . And Indian ordinary chief to throw man away ga’ ¢ai hi; Ada™ cé¢u maja” ¢an‘di ya”be ka™b¢a-qti ha. da¢i"-na"paji they wish : therefore yonder land in the I see it I wish very da¢i"-na"paji where you are ami é wage gixe jiwag¢e ga™¢ai ha; nikaci"ga uké¢i" té a” ¢a ga” ¢ai ha. the he acting the white he with them Sash ; aes ordinary the to throw araatice (sub.) man it away Wagi"ha g¢i¢agai yi, fe piaji sabaji cubi a*¢an’yuhat ha. Letter yousentit if, words bad suddenly reach weapprehendit . back you NOTES. Maqpiya-qaga had been a member of the young men’s party, but he joined the chiefs’ party prior to sending this letter. Notwithstanding his bitter feeling against his former friends, he was a good farmer, and was making Considerable progress in civilization. Ma*tcu-naji® is the famous Ponka chief, Standing Grizzly Bear. 485, 7. maja" ¢a" ab¢i? ¢andi im¢ewacka*qti. Mamtcu-naji7 and his son, Wa¢ahuta®, aided Maqpiya-qaga, when they staid with the Omahas. They lent him their cattle to work his land. 485, 8. igimi aka, Maqpiya-qaga’s wife. 486, 3. nikaci"ga-baji ga™¢ai; literally, ““Not Indians they wish (to be).” TRANSLATION. My sister’s husband, as your son is dead, my heart is always sad. As you and your child made great efforts in helping me with my farm while you were here, and till you went to that land, I was grieved when I heard of his death. This one, my wife, is always crying. Indeed, I have been walking with a heavy heart ever since I heard it. Ihave nothing left me but the horses which carry the wagon. As I did not like to give up the land which I have, because I had expended so much labor on it, I sowed the whole of it in wheat. I have all the kinds of small vegetables; I have potatoes, and a great deal of corn. We Indians who walk here are generally lone- some every day. All the Omahas remember you. We have been to visit the Dakotas. When we came home, they gave us horses. Now, I wish to see you, but it is difficult. I mean that I have no one to see to my house in my absence. Still, I think that very many of us shall see you. I desire you to give me one of your young men. Now am I disgusted with the Omahas, because they do not wish to be Indians. If we men go with our chiefs, it is good. The Omahas act the white man, but at the same time LETTERS DICTATED BY OMAHAS AND PONKAS. 487 they hateme. That is what [hate. And they desire to throw away the Indian chiefs ; therefore I have a strong desire to see you in yonder land. Those with qa¢i?-na*paji wish to live as white men, and to throw away the Indian life. If you send back a letter, we fear that bad words will reach you suddenly. JOSEPH LA FLECHE TO HIS BROTHER FRANK. September, 1878. Ca™ fe djibaqtei uwib¢a té sane ha. Pahan‘ga onat té’di, wabiag¢eze Now words very few I tell yon will Iwho é, Before 2 ‘you went ae letter ¢a™ gtia™ daki¢é-ona” ha. Ki mé ¢é wabdig¢eze wirdcte e¢ia™ ¢aki¢a-baji ha. the youusedtosend backtome . And spring this letter evenone youhavenotsent back to (ob.) me Ca” wabig¢eze ¢ab¢i"-qti-éga™ cug¢éa¢é ha. Ki a™¢akiwaji’cte eb¢éga™ ha, Yet letter three sone I have sent 5 And youwereangry with I thought , to you me wabag¢eze wirécte g¢ia™ gaki¢gayt. Ca™ ¢ikage wi” wabég¢eze wi” ti¢aki¢é . letter evenone youdidnotsend back Yet your friend one letter one you caused to me. some one to send it to him Pwi'¢a ha; Ada® wi" cu¢éwiki¢é hi. Ki e‘a™ a ndjrité wedcpaha™ when, he told me ; therefore one Iecause him tosend . And how we stood you knew us it to Bia hnaf té, ca™ca™ angi“ ha. Ca” nié ¢i¢in’géqti y-ujf te wind‘al té, i” ¢éqti- you when, see we are c Yet pain youhadnone house- the Iheardof when, I was de- went at all ~~ hold you ma” he. Maja” ¢a” iepaha™ hnai ha. Maja” cé4a ¢a™, tyuhéqti ond lighted Land the youknewit youwent . Lan¢ yonder the very fearful yon go (ob.) by you (ob.), about it éga’i ha; ada” yuhewiki¢é-ima"-ma™i ha Micé¢a iha” wakéga héga-baji somewhat” ; there- J have always been apprehensive on. Michel his Ack nota little fore your (pl.) account mother ¢a™ja, ca” t’é taté i¢Apaha™-maji ve ca” ni™ya té da cté i¢4paha™-maji ha. though, yet die shall I do not know yet live will perhaps I do not know Nugé ¢é macté hégaji ha; ca™ 1 Saee wirécte i¢apaha™-maji hi. A” sha, Summer this warm not 2 little ; in fact, -warm even one I do not ie 5 By the by, Frank wa‘i min’g¢a" dde t’éé ha, “nigeii’di. Cat’ maja” ¢an’di ada Frank woman pena her but sheisdead , last summer. Still land in the we live niyai te ceta” a™¢a™ baha™-baji ha. Wagazu a ¢i"-baji ba. Ca” maja” by it will so far we do not know Strarght we are not Still land ké céqa udgaca” ka*b¢éga™. [¢adi¢af aka i*¢in’ginahi”i yp, meeeea etéga™ ha. the yonder atime I hope. Agent the he is willing for if, Teieaeel erie (sub.) me, his own I¢adi¢ai aké tiwagi¢i‘age-hna™i Uma™ha®-ma. Ca™ qadi® vi ¢a® wéga™ze g g Agent the is generally unwilling for them the Omahas. And Pawnees village the mee asure dna ¢ag¢i” té wi’ ¢aga ha. Ki ci maja” ¢ag¢i™i ga” ¢é ceta™ wégarze how yousit the tell to me E And again land you sit the this so far mabaanne many : dna ¢ag¢i"i yi, wi" ¢a-g% ha. Ki ci fe aji wi” égipe ta minke hia. how you sit if, tell to me 5 And again word differ- one Isayto will Iwho many ent him Ca” fe ¢é¢u ma™oni” té’di, fe té éga" uwib¢a-hna®-ma™. Nikaci"ga uké¢i" Yet word here youwalked when, words the Re I usually tell you. Indian ordinary 12 488 THE (@EGILA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. té gia ¢a-o8, ehd-maji hi; ci, Wage gaxa-ga, eha-maji ha; ci, Nikaci"™ga the nai away yours, I did not say ; again, Act the see man, I did not say ; again, Indian uké¢i? ma¢in’-ga, ehi-maji hi. Ki ci, Wakan‘da ¢inké u¢imajin’-gi ha. ordinary walk thon, [didnotsay . And again, Deity the (ob.) depend on him Wakan‘da ¢inké si¢a-e% hi. Ki Wakan‘da ¢inké ¢asi¢a¢aji 31, maja” Deity the (ob.) remember 5 And Deity the (ob.) you do not re- if, lan him member ¢é¢u-ondgtci qti¢ade yi, ¢i¢aji tat¢é—¢i¢ajt taté india¢ajaha. Wakan‘da here only you love if if, you sad shall you sad shall in the future. Deity aka ita” ¢itaqa ogi" i ha. Edi angahi tan’gata™. Edi angahii yi, a™¢an’- the(sub.) in front "sits : There we a ach we who will. There we Sanaa when, we know yidaha™ tangata", ehé. Wakan’da aké maja” ¢é¢u_a"ma” ¢i"i yi, wada™ be for ourselves wew Fo will, I said. Deity the (sub.) land here we walk when, seeing us e¢ivi ha. Ki Wakan’da ak& a®wasi¢a-baji’-qtia”i ha. Ci fe té céna sits 5 And Deity the nae we have notremembered thematall . Again words the enough who dixu ha. Ki ga¢i® wédaha" ama dna tai i’baxu f¢a-ga. Ci indada” I write 4 And Pawnees Iknowthem theones how have write tome send it. Again what who many died mééepaxu ¢ka“hna i™baxti-gi. Cani’ge cti dna waoni" cirte i baxt-ga. you write to me you wish write to me. Horse too how you have it maybe write tome. many them TRANSLATION. I will tell you a very few words. Before you went to the Indian Territory, you used to send me letters. But you have not sent me even one letter this spring. Yet T have sent you about three. And I thought that you were offended with me, because you had not sent me a single letter. But one of your friends, to whom you have sent a letter, has told me; so I cause him to send one to you. You knew what our condition was when you departed. We have continued so. I was delighted to hear from you, and to learn that you had no sickness in your household. You knew the land when you departed. You went somewhat as if you were very fearful about yonder land; therefore I have always been apprehensive on your account. Michel’s mother is very sick. I do not know whether she will live or die. It was very warm this summer. Indeed, I do not know even one summer in the past, which was as warm. By the by, Frank took a wife last summer, but she is dead. We do not know yet whether we shall improve in the land. We are unsettled. Still, I hope to go traveling to yonder land where you are. If my agent be willing for me to go, I shall be apt to travel. But he is generally unwilling for the Omahas to travel. Still, tell me how many miles you are from the Pawnee village, and how many miles, too, you are from this land. I will speak on another subject. It is the subject about which I told you from time to time, when you lived here. I did not say, “Abandon your Indian life.” I did not say, “ Live asawhite man.” Nor did I say, “Live as an Indian.” But Tsay again: Depend upon God. Remember Him. For if, instead of remembering God, you love this world alone, you shall be sad—you shall surely be sad in the future. God is ahead of us. We will go to Him. When we arrive there, we shall know jor ourselves. When we walk here on this earth, God sits looking at us. And we have altogether forgotten God. Now I have written enough on this subject. When you write, send me word how many have died of the Pawnees whom [ know. And write whatever you wish to write to me. Write to me how many horses you have. ee ere LETTERS DICTATED BY OMAHAS AND PONKAS. 489 GAHIGE TO QI@A-SKA AND ,ENUGA-NAJD. Céama nikaci’ga-ma ¢i ma™hni” té, ¢ tda™ wahni® eb¢éga”. ( fama Those the people you you walk when, that good youhavethem I think. These ida" wib¢? ka™b¢éde téqi ha. Ca” edada™ wépibdaji-baji_ a"ma™¢i"i_ té, good Thavethem TIwish, but difficult - Still what bad forus not we walk when, ca™ angti-qtci angayig¢a¢iM. Ndada™ ¢é maja” ¢a™ aX¢ita"i té, ata angu- still we ourselves have ourselves. What this land the we workit when, beyond we ac- . q: Sh eo) : : aun ° arte 5 keta™i. Céya wacka™i-ga. Wia™bai-maji i” teqi; ca™ wisi¢ai éga", évipe. quire. Yonder make an effort. I do net see you (pl.) hard for yet LTremember as, I have me; you said it. : ons r aor & Ca™ maja™ u¢dag¢i"i ¢a” wadate ea” u¢ajil gé efa™ ¢uita™ and‘a™ ka b¢a. Still land yousitin the food how youhave the how straight I hear I wish. planted (pl. ob.) Pan‘ka-m4 e‘a®™ nikaci"ga wakéga am4 awdna‘a™ ka™b¢a ha. (é¢u ama The Ponkas how people sick the ones I hear from IT wish - Here the ones who them who fea héga-baji. Ca” ¢ivimi aka efa” ma"hni’ té bétiga ¢ind‘a" ga™ gai wakéga héga-baji. Ca™ ¢ijimi aka e’a™ ma"hni té b¢uga ¢ina‘a® ga™ ¢aa, sick not a little. Now your the how you walk the all to hear of wishes, father’s sister (sub.) you ! . a “1. , ee p re Fes dda" waqi”ha cu¢éa¢é. I¢ ¢é, Ma*tet-wa¢ihi, Wana*paji fu¢d-ga. — Tyimi there- letter Isend to you. Word this, Matteu-wa¢ibi, Wanapaji tell himthe His father’s fore news. sister e on ys Caer t 1 org ee vy ree aki gaxai. Qéédu andji® té i uda™-qti-ma”. Ca” wisi¢ai té, i ¢a-maji- the has made it. Here Istand the itis very good for me. Yet I remember when, Tam always (sub.) you , Pine 1 Ne O= hna®-ma”. Caa™ ama niaci"ga waja™be pi déde Sindé-g¢écka ti‘a*¢in’ce sad. Dakotas the ones people Isecthem Iwas but Spotted Tail without cause 5 who there nathé a®wa™ ¢a"i. Niaci®ga-md cti can ge wa‘i-baji, wi-hna" e¢éba a™fi ha; hand he held me. The people too horse he did not give me alone ~ ten he gave: them, me; 4 5 D. ReyLEO : ao oF te wie awdyike. (/é wahdba jit‘a"i té’di, wéba’i, Thank‘ta®wi” ama, uma” ¢inka me Imeanmyself. This earof corn mature when, they have Yanktons the season called us, (sub.) f¢a"ba™ té/ga. Ca” ukit‘é ya™haha juwa¢ig¢ai e‘a” ¢andji” yi, ¢uita™ and‘a® a second at the. Now nations neighboring you withthem how youstand if, straight I hear it lime (ones) 7 ka” b¢a. I wish. NOTES. qentiga-najit, Standing Buffalo bull, is one of the Ponka head-chiefs. He is com- monly called by his Pawnee name, Acawage, Spotted Horse. 489, 8. Ma*teu-wa¢ilhi, Grizzly-bear-who-Seares-the-game-from-a-thicket, another name of Qi¢a-ska, White Hagle. 489, 8. iyimi. Tjimi may mean, “his or her father’s sister,” or “his or her mocher’s brother’s wife.” Hy) Oo - 49() THE (EGINA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. TRANSLATION. { think that you treat those Indians, the Ponkas, well, as you goon. f wish to treat these Indians, the Omahas, well; but it is difficult. Though we continue without any serious troubles, we chiets keep to ourselves. When we cultivate anything in this land, we always gain more than we planted. Try it yonder. As I cannot see you, it is hard for me; yet I have said it because | remember you. I wish to know all about the kinds of food which you have planted in the land in which you dwell. I desire to hear how those Ponkas are, who were sick. Those who are here have much sick- ness. Your aunt wishes to know all about your condition, therefore I send you a letter. Ma*teu-wa¢ihi, tell this news to Wana™paji. His aunt has made it. It is very good for me to be here. Still, when I remember you, I am always sad. I went to see the Dakotas; and Spotted Tail took me freely by the hand. He did not give the Omahas any horses,but he gave ten to me alone. I mean myself. The Yanktons have invited us to visit them next season, when this crop of corn shall have matured. I wish to | hear just how you are getting along with the neighboring tribes. CAN’GE-SKA TO QI@A-SKA. t Ca efa® mathni” é awdna‘a™ ka™b¢a. Ca™ ga” wakéga-baji ca” Now how you walk that I hear of them I wish. Still so they are not sick yet efa™ vida® ma®hni™ é awdna‘a™ ka” b¢a. Ca-hna™ ga™ maja” ¢a” wa¢aa"hna how good youwalk thatIhearofthem I wish. Still, in partic- so land the you abandoned it * ular (?) (ob.) ee . ore . / . ey . hnai té ca®™ ar¢fsi¢é-hna™i, a™ba i¢aug¢e. Maja” cfi té, e’a™ maja™ you the yet we always remember day throughout. Land you as, how land went : you, reached ° . w . / — = Su ida®qti ma™hni” yi, wind‘a™ ka”b¢a. E‘a™ te a*¢an’yidaha"-baji. Wage very good you walk if, I hear from I wish. How will we do not know about ourselves. White e you man ama fe céta® wirdécte wegdxa-baji. Ada™ ¢& ha: a™¢ida"be ¢tea™i té the words so far even one they have not done Therefore that : we see you may, at =the (sub.) for us. is it least a®¢a™ baha"-baji. Ca” juga wigqtci wija”be ka™b¢ai, ki waqi”ha ¢a™ cuht we do not know. Still body _ I, verily Isee you Iwish(pl.ob.), and letter the reaches you té, ugd¢é’gqtci qi¢a gi¢a¢dé ka*b¢éga”. Tuga and‘a® ka™b¢a. Ki ¢isan’ga when, very soon back you cause to T hope. News TI hear I wish. And your younger again be coming brother té ha, Heqiga-jin’ga af té; nikaci™ga wah¢haji'qti éde t’é ha. Ki nfkaci"ga dead , Heqaga-jinga 4.6.5 person very stout-hearted but dead . And people | ami nikagéhi ama gi¢a-baji’qtia’i ha. Ca™ wa'i ama cti cénujin’ga ama the chief the are very sad 0 Indeed woman the too young man the (sub.) (sub.) (sub.) (sub.) see ow = pees o. Sip . ne -cti gi¢a-bajii ha. Ca™-hna" ga™ dada” waqtca angtyii gé uda"i ha. Ca™ too are sorrowful e (Expletive) what vegetables we Der es are good. And _ (pl ob. wamuske ctia™t‘a™i, ci wata™zi cti Udarqti jlit‘a"-a¢at. wheat too wehave again corn too very good we have made it plenty, mature. LETTERS DICTATED BY OMAHAS AND PONKAS. 491 NOTE. 490, 1. e‘a® mathni® e awana‘a® ka"b¢a. This use of ‘awana‘a"” is unusual. The regular form is “wina‘a®,” I hear from you, as in the text, three lines below. TRANSLATION. I wish to hear how you are. I wish to hear whether you and your people are in good health and are prospering. Since you left the land, we ever think of you through- out the day. I desire to hear from you whether you are doing very well in the land to which you went. We do not know about our own affairs, how they will be. For up to this time the white people have not done for us even one of the things which they promised. Therefore that is it; that is why we donot know when we may, at least, see you, without hope of anything else. Still, I for my part wish to see you, and I hope that, when the letter reaches you, you will send one back very soon. I desire to hear the news. Your younger brother, Heqaga-jinga, is dead. He was a very stout-hearted man, but he is dead. The men and chiefs are very sad. Even the women and the young men are sorrowful. What vegetables we planted are good. We have plenty of wheat, and we have done very well in raising corn. WANACEKIGABI TO WAJI*’A-GAHIGA. Ci waqi”ha ¢a” g¢ia’ ¢aki¢é té, wa¢ita™ ké Ahigi, A*wan’kee de, Again letter the you made it come when, work the aeons I was sick, but _ (ob.) back to me m™tca" wagazuqti b¢i” ha. Ki wag¢ita" ké ag¢icta™ yi, cin’gajin’ga ¢agi- at present very straight Tam : And work a I finish mine when, child you (ob. cta"be taté. Wawaqpani ha. Can’ge cti wa¢in’gai ha. Cangd¢e _ taitd. see your shall. We are poor Horse too we have none co We goto you shall (pl.). Usni té’di, canga¢e tan’gata™. Wa‘t ¢inké uqpa¢éa¢a- maji ka™ b¢a, ¢ijan’ ge; Cold when, we goto you we who will. Woman the (ob.) T lose her not Iwish, yourdaughter; ida" ¢agicta"be taté. Wija”be té di, Me‘dga, nin’de i’uda™ ka™béa. therefore you see your shall. I see you when, O old man, heart good to me I wish. Ma¢adi can’ge uwib¢a edta" anga¢i" ha; cta™be etéga®. Wagqi”ha cuhi Last winter horse T told you sofar we have it ; you see it apt. Letter reaches about you té‘di, efa” ma™hni™ té uq¢é’qtci i¢a¢é ka” b¢a, waqi”ha. Wind‘a" ka™ b¢a. ~ when, how youwalk the very soon you send I wish, letter. T hear from I wish. : ere you Cin’ gajin’g oa gabe ¢ijan’ge eya ¢anké wagina‘a® ga™ ¢ai. hree your aenented her theones_ to nee about sho wishes. who them, hers, NOTES. See the letter of Ma*tcen-na"ba to Agitcita, August 22, 1878. 491, 5. imc‘aga, contracted from i*c‘age-ha. —~ 12 492 THE (EGINA LANGUAGE—MYTHUS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. TRANSLATION. When you sent the letter to me, the work was abundant. I was sick; but now I am all right again. When I finish my work, you shall see your child. We are poor; we have no horses. We shall go to see you. We will go to you in the cold weather. I do not wish to Jose the woman, your daughter; therefore you shall see her. When I see you, O venerable man, I wish it to be good for my heart. We still have the horse about which I told you last winter. You will be apt to see it. When the letter reaches you, I wish you to send me one very soon, telling how you are. I wish to hear from you. Your daughter desires to hear from her three children. DUBA-MA”’ GE: TO JANDE-NANyUGE (MACDONALD). Ca” a” ba¢d, a ba-waqtbe dicta” t%, wisi¢é ha. Ki edada™ fuga ¢ingé Now to-day, sacred day finished when, Lremem- . And what news there is ber you none cté, ca” wabdgd¢eze widaxe. Ca™ maja” ké fepaha® hné yi atg¢ita’ te, even, yet letter Imakeforyou. Now land the you knew it you when wework when, went it , Es .- wv , 7} . , a ptee a a ae 2 dada® a®¢an’gaxai té a'si¢ an’ga¢i”. Edada™ angujii ké uda™qti ha. Ca™ what we have made from the we are remembering as What we planted the very good : In fact, it (ob.) we move. (ob) waqta dada" angijii gé b¢uga t'a” ha. Eskana maja™ dada™ ¢ag¢i” di"te vegetable what we planted the all abound 2 Oh that Jand what yousit itmay be P : rie te / : nod x “ ca®” tidatgti ¢ag¢i"’ @te eb¢éga". Ca™ wagqti dada” ugagii cté ta’ qti the very good you may sit I think. Infact, vegetable what you planted even haying a (ob.) yours great abun- dance ¢ag¢i"i ka"b¢éga™. Ca™ wabag¢eze ¢a® hnize yi, uq¢e’qtci gd¢ia™ ¢aki¢e you sit I hope. Now, letter the yon when. very soon you send back to 5 (ob.) take it me ka™b¢éga™ ha. Ca® maja ¢a” e‘a” ma™hni™’ té wi" ¢ahna ka™ b¢a. ypaci IT hope 2 Now, land the how you walk the vou tell me I wish. Long (ob.) ago wabigeze e¢ia™ ¢aki¢c-hna” Cde, ¢ihdqi té ceta™ wabig¢eze g¢ia™¢aki¢a-_ letter you nsed to send back tome, — Int they ae when so far letter yeu have not sent back movec ce : . . er SrAT Es , . Sv) jhe , ce baji_ ca" ca”. Lint ¢i¢ija te, éskana, tida™qti mam™¢i™ ka"b¢éga". Cin’ga- to me always. Household your the, oh that, very good walks T hope. Chil ae hey? . . ene ; 1 Ra fs Ces 6 jin’ga ¢anka udarqti, éskana, ma¢i’i ka™b¢éga": a’ ba¢é'qti awiisi¢é qti. ‘dren — the ones very good, oh that, walking T hope: this very day T am thinking who much about them, Eskana ca” Pan‘ka-ma, ea” bétgaqti dwisi¢é. Pan’ka-ma ikageawa¢é-cti-. Oh that still the Ponkas, in faet all I Zerneuibel The Ponkas J have many of them for them. ! . 5 Sy é eats Ey, pe . / Pon oe noah . : ma”, ki ei dawadé eti, ki isan’gaawé¢é-cti-ma™. Ca™ ein’gajm'ga wiwija my and again Ihave them too, and TI have some, too, formy younger Now, child my own friends. for relations brothers. ¢inké ea” magi” dskana ca™ tida®gti mar¢i™ ka"b¢éga". Wagia"-ma" ze the one how he walks oh that atany very good he walks T hope. Wadgia™ma'ze who rate & Awake Ca™ a” ba-waqtbe Ama té/di nikaci"ga wi" t’é ha, ecnujin’ga. him I mean. Now, sacred day the other on the person one died. a young man LETTERS DICTATED BY OMAHAS AND PONKAS. 493 ey POO. ne ny) ‘, . o . . Heqaga-jin’ga ijaje agi’. Ca™ 4f-ujt wiwija té ida*gti ag¢i”; wakéga-baji, Heqgaga-jinga his name he had. Now, household my own the very good Tsit; they are not sick, ca udatqti ag¢i”. Ca” Pan‘ka-ma nikaci"ga-mA tida” inahiti eté i¢af té in fact, very good I sit. Still the Ponkas the people good truly oven they as went eke. Cra | te , Oav} ree "n ie ave : = téqi inahi’i a, eb¢éga® ag¢i”. Ki nikaci®ga dtiba ¢é¢anka, jua™ wane¢e hard truly i I think I sit. And people some these, we with them anga¢i® ¢anka, ptbaji teabai. Can’ge-ma ccénawa¢af. Ca™ efa"” a"wan’oaxe we have the ones bad are very. ‘The horses they have destroyed Yet how we treat them them who, them. E if ye 3 P ° Pe . z taité téqi; ‘a”¢ingé wabaski¢ai. Wawadqpani héga-baji Ca’ sidadi can’ ve shall difti- in vain we are angry We are poor not a little. In fact yesterday horses cult; , . Pes , = , = , wa¢itagti duba wa¢i" a¢ai | Iganga ami Ca” éskana wabag¢eze ¢a™ working well four having went Winnebagos the (sub.). Now oh that letter the (ob.) them w . . v. - / . , . . uq¢e'qtei tia’ ¢aki¢e ka™b¢éga®. Ca” nikaci"ga wagazuqti éde awaci éga”, very soon you send me I hope. Now person — very straight but LThaveem- as, ployed him wabag¢eze ingixe. Méadi ca™ déji ckube té’di, Caa” amdya pi. Ihank’- D fo) =} ’ letter he has made “Last spring in fact grass deep when, Dakotas tothem I was Yank- for me. there ta’wi” amadi pi Can‘ge g¢éba-dé¢atba waiii Cin’ eajin’ea nijinea ¢inké oO to) Ore t=) . to) a tons among I was Horse tens seven they gave Child boy the one the there us. who, éskana maja™ ¢é¢uadi ab¢i” yi, i uda*gti-ma™ té@te. Ca™ wad¢ita® @win’ka® oh that, land inthis Thad him if, very good forme itwouldbe. Indeed working he helped me yi, Muda*qti-ma™ téi"te. Cuyupi te¢an’di ab¢i’ di cté eb¢éga™. Maja” ¢a” if, very good for me it would be. Ireached when,inthe Ihad Iwas even Ithink. Land the you past him coming (ob.) home gag¢i™ ¢a® ya" be yi, gi¢ajiwd¢e ha. Ca™ maja™ gd¢a™ ¢ag¢i” té’di, wija™ be- you sat the TIsawit when, ittendedtomake . Indeed land that you sat when, Lused to (ob.) one sad hna’-ma™ ¢a™cti, eb¢éga” (yi), i da-maji. Ca” uq¢é wijabe etéga™-maji see you _ formerly, I think (when), Tam sad. Now soon I see you Tam not apt eb¢éga®, ada" i ¢a-maji Ca™ ujan'ge ugdhai gé ya”%be yi, i” ¢a-maji. I think, there- am sad. Indeed road you passed the I saw when, I was sad. fore along (pl.ob.) (them) Gata” ie'di ca” maja” ¢a™ gagisi¢a-baji te. Caa™ amd maja™ ¢av¢i"'i At last indeed land the you have forgotten yours. Dakotas theones land you sat (ob.) who ké b¢uigaqti ug¢i” amd waja™be; ki éde bétieaaqti Akidetai, Mtaxaga. to) co] ’ tS t=) ’ the all they whosatinit I saw them; and bunt all havegone _up the river. again, NOTES. 492, 11. Eskana ca® Panka-ma, ca" b¢ugagti awasi¢é. The collector agrees with Frank La Fléche in regarding “ Eskana,” “ca",” and “¢a®,” as superfluous. 493, 6. wa¢i? a¢ai. Read, “wa¢i" aid¢ai, they have gone away with them.”— Frank La Fleche. 493, 10. eskana maja” ¢e¢uadi ab¢im yi. Omit “eskana.”— Prank La Iléche. 493,11. ab¢im di ctéeb¢ega". Read, “ab¢i’ di etéde, eb¢éga”, I think that I should have brought him back.”—Frank La Fléche. 6 ) 12 15 494 THE (EGIUA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. TRANSLATION. I think of you to-day, when Sunday is over (7. e.,0n Monday). There is no news, yet I make a letter to you. We are thinking of what we have made from the land which we work, and which you knew when you departed. What we planted is very good. All the vegetables which we planted are abundant. I hope that you may do well in the land in which you dwell, whatever kind of land it may be. I hope that you may have a great abundance of the vegetables which you plant. I hope that when you receive this letter, you will send one back to me very soon. I desire you to tell me how you are getting along in the land. A long time ago you used to send me letters; but since your removal, you have not sent me any. I hope that your family is doing very well. I hope that the children are doing very well. Iam thinking much about them this very day. I think of all the Ponkas. I have many of them for friends, some I have for relations, and some, too, for younger brothers. And I hope that my child, Wagia®-ma%ze, is doing very well. A person died here the other week. The young man was named, Heqaga-jiiga. My household is doing very well; no one is sick. I sit thinking, ‘‘The Ponka people were truly good, and their departure was hard!” Some of these people with whom we dwell are very bad. They do not leave us any horses. It is difficult for us to do anything to them; in vain are we angry. We are very poor. The Winnebagos took four of our best working-horses yesterday. I hope that you will send mea letter soon. I have employed a very honest man, so he makes a letter for me. Last spring when the grass was tall I was among the Dakotas. I reached the Yanktons. They gave us seventy horses. If I had a child, a boy, in this land it would be very good for me. If he helped me in working it would be very good forme. I think that I should have brought one back when I went to see you. When I saw the land in which you used to dwell, it was such as causes sorrow. I was sad, thinking how I used to see you when you dwelt in that land. I thought that I would not be apt to see you soon, therefore I was sad. When I saw the paths which you used to go along, I was sad. At last you have forgotten your land. I saw all the Dakotas who were in the land where you used to dwell. But they have gone back to the up-river country. : MACTI”-A*SA TO NA‘A’BI. September 30, 1878. Udatqti ma*b¢i”. Ca™ eddda” wa¢dte k& angijii b¢iga tda®: Very good IT walk. Now what food the we planted all good; (col. ob.) them wamitske cti ida”, Akiasta dtiba ab¢i”. Ki i’tca™ wajit‘a® té‘di wawakegai. wheat too good, stack four T have. And now when cornis atthe we are sick. maturing S wala . Send ~ Tee: . se Ki Wactce t’é, Heqdga-jin’ga t’é Ki maja” ké e‘a™ ida” ma*hni™ yi, And Wacence dead, Hequga-jiiga dead. And land the how good you walk if, reaper, Yate y i and‘a® ka™b¢a. Ca” e‘a” tida® ké tida™ ma*hni™ yi'cté and‘a® ka b¢a. T hear it I wish. In fact how good the (ob.) good you walk evenif TJ hear it I wish. . . , . oe. . wv LY, . , vy vy ILE / = < Awa" ¢itati, tida%qti naji”i ha. Ki wisi¢é te, éceta” waqi"ha ga¢a" dixe. Woe work, very good it stands : And Iremem- when, from then letter - that Imake. ber you till now LETTERS DICTATED BY OMAHAS AND PONKAS. 495 TRANSLATION. Tam prospering. All the food that we planted is good; the wheat, too, is good. I have four stacks of it. And now, at harvest, we are sick. Wacuce and Heqaga- jinga are dead. I wish to hear if you are doing well in the land. And I desire to hear in what respects you are prospering. We work, and it stands well. And as I have remembered you until now, I make that letter. MANGGIQTA TO gAHE-AGGT”. September. 30, 1878. Wamitske si g¢ébahiwi" ¢ab¢i" ab¢i” uma”™ ¢inka ¢é’qtci. Ca” wab¢ita™ Wheat seed hundred three I have season this very. Now I work oes, : pes 1 , re ° té iuda"qti anaji". Ca” nié a*¢in’géqti anaji®. Ca” wab¢ita™ té i udaraqti the very good for Istand. Now, pain I have none at all I stand. Now, I work the very good for me me anaji®, éga® wahnita"i yi, uda™ té ha. Ca™ wisi¢é té, é cu¢déadé hia, I stand, 80 you work if, good will . Now Iremem- as, that Isendtoyou , ber you wabag¢eze ¢a”. Ki e‘a” ¢i cti ma™hni” té i"wi'’¢ i¢a-ga, wabag¢eze letter the (ob.). And how you too you walk the totellme send ieee letter hnize ¢ékita™ {¢a-ga. youtake atthe send here. it same time TRANSLATION, I have three hundred bushels of wheat this very season. I have been very pros- perous with my work. Iam without any bad health at all) As Iam so successful in " working, it will be good if you work. As I remember you, I send you the letter. Send and tell me how you are. Send at the very time that you receive this letter. ICTAGABI TO ACAWAGE. October 14, 1878. Jit¢cha, a ba¢é nan’de ma™tddi wija™be ka"b¢dqti ha. Ta™ wang¢a" Elder brother, to-day heart onthe inside Isee you I wish very Tribe ¢i¢ija ¢an‘di ya™be ka™b¢a. Ma*tcti-wa¢ihi é¢a"ba, ga?’ foatela méga”, your at the TI see it I wish. Ma'teu-wa¢ihi he too, and your sister’s son likewise, ta? warig¢a” ¢i¢ijai ¢a” ya™ be ey uma™ ¢inka ¢é. Nikaci"ga amd i”’t’ai your the I see it I wish, season this. People the have died (pL.) (sub.) to me ha: Wactce t’é, Cuya-ma”¢i" t’é, Heqdga-jinga t’é, gah¢-y4dé té Car” : Wacuce de ad ee zi in deat Heqaga-jinga dena dahe-jadé dead. Now nikaeci®ga amd e¢éga"i ca™ja, ca™ wi eb¢éga" cub¢é tA minke. Ca" cuhi people . the think though, yet I T think I goto you will Iwho. Now it reaches (sub.) you 496 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. te’di uq¢e’qtci wi" cpaxu, ji"¢cha. Gi¢a¢é ka b¢a. Wad¢ttada afi ¢an‘di when very soon (see note), elder Youcause I wish. Oto village by the brother. to be coming back fhe pi ta minke. Ca™ maja™ ¢ag¢i” ¢a” ¢uta™qti @baxu gi¢a-ea, ji"¢cha. I will Iwho. Now land you sit the very straight writing send it back, elder ‘ive (ob.) to me brother. Bier : G Pikigagti vi¢a-ea. Doit very quickly send it back. NOTES. 495, 7. Mattcu-wa¢ihi e¢a™ba. Three persons are addressed: Acawage, Matcu- wa¢ihi, and Acawage’s (?) sister’s son. 495, 9-10. Ca" nikaci"™ga ama e¢ega™l ¢atja, etc. Icta¢abi also gave another reading: Ca™ nikac@ga ama e¢éga®-baji awana‘a®-maji cat wi eb¢éga™ ha. Now people the they do not Lhave notheard yet I I think it (sub.) think it about them “Now, I have not heard that the people do not think of visiting you, yet I, for my part, think of doing so.” - 496, 1. i™wi’cpaxu, a case of hapax legomenon. The regular form is, i"¢écpaxu, “You write to me.” TRANSLATION. Elder brother, in my heart, to-day, I have a strong desire to see you. I desire to see your tribe. O Acawage, Ma*tcu-wa¢ihi, and your sister’s son, I wish to see your tribe this season. Among my people the following have died: Wacuce, Cuya-man¢i", Hegaga-jiiga, and gaheyadé. Though the people think of visiting you, I, for my part, without regard to them, am thinking of going to you. When the letter reaches you, elder brother, write to me very quickly. I desire you to send a letter back. I will pass by the Oto village in going to you. Send me in writing, O elder brother, a very accurate account of the land in which you dwell. Send it back very hastily. GAHIGE TO ACAWAGE. October 14, 1878. Ca” edaida® fuga ¢ingé ha. Ga™ nikaci"ga t’af té uwib¢a ga” cu¢déagé Now what news thereis . And people die the Itell you so I send to you none téke. Qiadi Wactice t’é; Clrya-ma™ ¢i" ?é; qahé-y4dé cti t’¢; Heqdga-jin’ga, will. Yourfather Wacuce dead; Cuya-man¢i" dead; dahe-jade too dead; Heqaga-jiiga, qi¢i-gahige ijin’ge, pada ta” wang¢a” ubana”, t'é ha Cin’gajin’ga ?é-hna’, da¢i"-gahige his son, pada gens, dead. Children die usuaily, J : e o -3 st : . ye ey: ip Raho ie watt cti t’é-hnari, ¢é¢u eté dhigi-baji, djabai. A*¢ina‘a"i nan’de wéuda"i woman too die usually, here even not many, they are few. Weheardfromyou hearts good for us, , , , , : Sa : <3 reife , r éde, at¢ida"be taf edta" agi” taité” téqi ha, Cat edada" wage ama wa‘t but we sce you will how we Ys shall difficult . In fact what white the give us people (sub.) LETTERS DICTATED BY OMAHAS AND PONKAS. 497 etéga”-baji, dda” wawaqpani héga-baji. Céya fuga tia”. Nikagi®ga uké¢i" they are not apt, therefore we are poor not a little. ees news abounds. Indians where you are 4higi ikigewa¢é¢é Ahigi wcka eyaf awdna‘a" ka™b¢a. Wa¢dte ¢i¢in’gai many you neye\hen for many deeds their I i about I desire. Food you have none your friends em 6 Ce, Ie x “ téqi hégaji. Wacka™ ega™i-gi. Hiyanga amd can’ge-ma cénawagal. hard nota little. Do exert yourselves. Winnebagos the the horses have made an end (sub.) of them. TRANSLATION. There is nothing to tell as news. I send to tell you that the people have died. Your father, Wacuce, is dead; Cuya-ma™¢i" is dead; gahe-yadé, too, is dead; Heqaga- jinga, son of ga¢i®-gahige, of the jada gens, is dead. Children and women, too, are dying. Here they are not many; they are few. It was good for our hearts to hear from you; but it is difficult for us to get our affairs in a condition which will permit our going to visit you. The white people are not apt to give us anything; therefore we are very poor. There is plenty of news yonder where you are. I wish to hear of the ways of the many Indians who are your friends. It is very hard for you to be without food. Do make an efiort. The Winnebagos have deprived us of all our horses. MAQPIYA-QAGA TO MA*TOU-NAJI. October 14, 1878. Wagi"ha g¢i té, dakipdqtci-ma™ b¢ize. Wijdha® té ga”, ¢and‘a® Letter has when, I met it just then I took it. My brother- died as, you hear it come back in-law teb¢éga®. Cuya-ma™¢i" 6 hai. Nikaci"ga wawdkega héga-baji ha, nin‘de will, that I think. Cuya-mar¢i2 ishe . People we are sick not a little ; heart udarqti-maji ha. Cénujin’ga dhigi t’af ita"; cénujin’ga tidaqti judwag¢e not very good for me 5 Young man many neye now; young man very good I with them died ahigi taf ha. Ki ticka™ ¢and‘a® cka”hna té é ¢éama, nfkagdhi ama, many havedied . And deed you hear you wished the that these (sub.), chiefs the, uda*gti ma*¢i"i ha. Ki tisanga cub¢éde, cub¢a-maji Irdédi, Céki, u¢éhna very good walk . And no prospect Iwas going to Iamnotgeingto My father, Ceki, you tell hin of anything you, but, you. else te hi, wijdha™ t’é te. Nucidha-gf-hna® cti, na‘an’/ki¢4-gi. (linégi t’é amd, will , mybrother- died the Nuciaha-gi-hna? too, cause him to hear it. Your dead they in-law fact. mother’s brother say, 4-gi. Awdyig¢ita” gé i uda™qti-ma™, jiga wiqtci. Qéama, nikagdhi amd, say it. I work for myself the is very good for me, body I myself. These chiefs the (pl. ob.) (the sub.), (sub.), ¢isi¢é-hna”i. Waqi”ha g¢i té’di, udwagib¢éde nan‘de gfuda™i nfkagahi remember you. Letter came back when, I told them, when heart good for them chiefs ama. (find‘a*i, Pan‘ka-macé, ¢ida™bai té ékiga" hi. Nikaci™ga amd sati® the They heard ye Ponkas, they saw you the like it . People the five (sub.). from you, (sub.) ja” yi t’é-hna"i; wakéga té pfiiji. Wijdha" vé t8 ceta™ dé¢a™ba ja™ yi, sleep when die, usually; sickness the bad. ae Duaee died the so far seven sleep when, in-law cu¢éa¢é. Wa‘i ag¢a™ ¢inké a™¢ina t’A¢i®. Isend to you. Woman I married theonewho came near dying. VOL. VI 32 12 498 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE--MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. NOTES. 497,45. ¢ana‘a® teb¢éga*, in full, ¢ana‘a® te eb¢éga”, “I think that you will hear it.” 497, 8. Ki usanga cub¢ede, cub¢a-maji. Maqpiya-qaga gave another reading: Ki cub¢é tisaiigaqti-ma™ éde cub¢a-maji, ‘‘And I was very sure, indeed, of going to you, but I am not going.” The disappointment was very great, as every probability was favorable to the trip. TRANSLATION. When the letter came back, I met it just then and took it. As my brother-in-law, Cuya-mar¢i®, is dead, I think that you will hear of it. Our people are very sick, so my heart is not very good. Many young men have just died; many of the very good young men with whom I went have died. And as to the matter about which you wished to hear, 7. ¢., the chiefs, they are doing very well. I was sure of going to you, but now I am not going. Please tell ny father, Ceki, that my brother-in-law is dead. Cause Nuciaha-gi-hna", too, to hear it. Say, “It is reported that your mother’s brother is dead.” I work for myself, and it is very good for me. These chiefs always ' remember you. When the letter came and I told them, their hearts felt good to hear from you, O ye Ponkas. It was like seeing you. The people usually die in five days. The sickness is bad. I send to you seven days after the death of my brother-in-law. The woman whom I married came near dying. MAQPIYA-QAGA TO MA*TCU-NAJI. October 15, 1878. Magptya-qiga wamuske b¢tiga gina¢in’ge; waqpdni hégaji. Qdde Magqpiya-qaga wheat all burnt to nothing poor not a little. Hay for him; . bs eal v *n/: . ens st ja"-ma™ ¢i"-uji g¢cba cti gina¢in’ge. Ci nan‘de ita" i“ uda"qti ma*b¢i"-maji wood-walking put-in ten too pon to sath Again heart now very good for I do not walk ‘or him. me té, ¢and‘a" taf eb¢éga" waqi“ha cu¢é. E na ji g¢éba-na™ba wa" da” the, youhearit will I think letter goes to you. That threshed twenty together weéna¢in’gai. Ci ntijinga, isan’ gaa¢éde, é wan’gi¢e wéna¢in’ gai. Wamuske it was burnt to Again boy, Thave him fora _ he all it was burnt to noth- Wheat nothing for us. younger brother, and ing for us, wan gi¢e wiriqtcia™ ité¢é; a®wa™ ¢ita™ angdid¢ai yi wéna¢in’gai. Ha” yi all once was piled; we worked wehad gone when it was aa to Night when nothing for us. ahfi té ha. it arrived NOTES. This letter contains one of the few instances ef Indian’s mentioning their own names; but it is done in the third person. See Jabe-ska’s letters to Waqa-naji”, ete. 498, 2. ja™-ma¢i"-uji was contracted to ja"-muji. 498, 3. nee tai eb¢ega™ waqi"ha cu¢e: equivalent to “¢and‘a" tai éga" waqiha cu¢é.” LETTERS DICTATED BY OMAHAS AND PONKAS. 499 498, 3. E na*ju, ete., is not plain, according to Frank La Fléche. It should read: Naja ¢icta” g¢éba-na”ba wa™da™ wénat¢itigai. Threshed finished twenty together were SSE OY ed for us by fire. 498, 4. Ci nujifiga isangaa¢ede, etc. Frank La Fléche gives the following reading: Cénujin’ga isafi’/gaa¢é-de cti gina¢in/gai. Youngman Thadhimfora and too his was destroyed younger brother by fire. 498, 5. witaqtcia™ ite¢é. Read, “wirdha ité¢é,” it was put in one place.—Frank La Filéche. TRANSLATION. All of Maqpiya-qaga’s wheat has been destroyed by fire. He is very poor. Besides that, ten wagon-loads of his hay were destroyed by the fire. And now I send you a letter, because I think that you will hear that I am not walking with a very good heart. We had in all twenty bushels of wheat burnt by the fire. And the boy whom I have for a younger brother had all of his wheat burnt. All the wheat had been put in one place. It was burnt when we had gone away to work. The fire reached it at night. WATA-NAJI* TO CAGE-SKA. October 19, 1878. A™ba¢é, kagé, wighia"be ka™ b¢ai édega™ , awa" qpani héga-maji. Idaxe To-day, ounger I see you, my I wish, I am poor i am very. I make by rother, own means of eté gé ¢ingé. B¢tgaqti ¢ij4ha" gina¢in’ge. Ca” a”bad¢é ¢isan’ga méga’, may the _ there are All your brother- his te destroy. ed Now to-day your younger irene 3 (pl ) none. in-law by fire. brother wigfja"be ka"b¢éde, fdaxe eté g&é b¢liga i’na¢in’ge éga”, ¢and‘a® taf eb¢éga™ I see you, my Iwish, but Imake by may the all destroyed for me raat you hearit will Ithink own, means of (pl.) ~ by fire waqi™ha ¢é cu¢éa¢é. Ga™ ¢ijan’ge méga’, ¢iji ‘¢e méga", wati'gi¢e letter this Isend to you. And your sister likewise, y rou olde likewise, all rother wind‘ai ka”b¢a. Wagiha gian’ki¢a-gi, e‘a® hni® té, af. I hear fom I wish. Letter send back to me, how youare the, i.e. you (pl.) NOTES. Cage-skai, White Hoof, son of yi-gijadé. 499, 1-2. Idaxe eté gt, should be “ [daxe été g%,” according to Frank La Fléche. TRANSLATION. To-day, younger brother, I wish to see you; but I am very poor. ‘There is nothing with which I can do anything. Your brother-in-law lost all his property by a prairie fire. Now I wish to see you and your younger brother to-day; but as all the things with which I could do anything have been destroyed by fire, I send you this letter that you may hear it. I wish to hear from you all, including your sisters and your elder brothers. Send a letter back to me, saying how you are. 500 THE GEGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. WATA-NAJIX TO JINGA-NUDA*. October 19, 1878. Waback ijin’ge, Jingdi-nida", ¢iji”%¢e méga™, wagi"ha ia” ¢aki¢s Wabacki his son, Jinga-nuda’, your elder likewise, letter you send to me brother ka™b¢a. At ba¢é wija™be ka™b¢a, waqi”ha cu¢éwiki¢é. Ca™ maja” ¢é I wish. To-day I see you I wish, letter I cause (one) to Yet land this send to you. 3 ¢aa™hna hnaf ¢an’di tiidatqti andji" éde, a“ ba¢é wéju-baji, ca” wamuske youleftit youwent inthe very good Istand, ees to-day we are unfortu- in fact wheat nate, a™ba¢é i“na¢ingé-de wa¢dte ayfdaxe dhigi ndg¢inge ha. Nujinga wi” to-day it was destroyed by food I made for much wasdestroyed . Boy one fire for me, and myself cs fire i¢imaxe cu¢éa¢s, Cinuda*-sk ijin’ge. Ca™ ga™, Cinuda"-sk iin’ge, cat” I inquire of I send to you, Cinuda*-ska his son. Yet so, Cinuda®-sk& his son, yet 6 ga” wagaztiqti and‘a” ka”b¢a. H‘a” éitte i®wit ee gi¢agé te. so very straight T hear it I wish. How ey Hay, you te: hace send will. back to me Ceta” a”ba¢é nikaci™ga-m4 ta’ wang¢a™”-ma i™uda” -mAji éga™ édega™, So far to-day the people the gentes good forme Inot somewhat, Bae a”ba¢é uhaf. Céna ‘id¢é. Ug¢e'qtei waqi" ha gi¢a¢ai ka™b¢a, Jinga- to-day they have Enough TLhave Very soon ye send back I wish, Jinga- their nee spoken of. to me 9 mida®, ¢iji”¢e méga". Maja™ e‘a” ¢ag¢i™ ¢a™ data" and‘a® ka” b¢a. Maja™ nuda’, your elder Weer. Land how yousit the straight Ihear I wish. Land brother (ob.) c&ja cf té, wacka™ wayfe¢ita’i-ga. Kdihi yi tda™ ¢andji" tal. Gégu at you as, makingefforts work for yourselves. In that event good youstand will. ere yonder have arrived wa¢dathna hnaf té, a"wan’yig¢ita™ a’naji" ‘i, éga” Udatqti andji" éde, a® ba¢é you left us you nee we worked for our- we stood, ao very good Istood, but to-day went selves 12 wamiske i’ na¢in’ge ha. wheat has been destroyed . for me by fire TRANSLATION. O Jifiga-nuda®*, son of Wabacki, I wish you and your elder brother to send me a letter. I wish to see you to-day, so I send you a letter. I have done very well in this land which you left when you went away, but to-day we are unfortunate. To-day had my wheat destroyed by a prairie fire, and much of the food which I had made for myself was burnt. I send to you to inquire about a boy, the son of Cinuda?-ska (White Dog). Iwish to hear just how he is. Please send back and tell me how he is. Until to-day I did not like the gentes of the people, but to-day they have their way. I have spoken about enough. O Jifiga-nuda*, I wish you and your elder brother to send back aletter very soon. I desire to hear just how you dwellin the land. Make some efforts and work for yourselves in yonder land which you have reached. In that event you will prosper. When you left us and went away we were working for ourselves, and so I did very well. But to-day my wheat was destroyed by fire. LETTERS DICTATED BY OMAHAS AND PONKAS. 501 MAQPIYA-QAGA TO CEKL. October 19, 1878. Te ‘aga, wamuske ab¢i™ beugadti ina¢in’gega", ¢and‘a® taf eb¢éga™ O old man, wheat Thad destroyed forme by youhearit will Ithink ©, a8, ca™ waqi™ha cu¢é. Ja™-ma™ ¢i” fe sidjudqtci wi" cte; éna ucté ag¢ab¢i”. yet letter goes to Wagon alone remains tome; that remain- I have mine. you. alone ing Ca” éawa¢é édf-ma awana‘a" ka™b¢a hi: Nudja”hanga, Hidiga cti, Jadé-gi Now Lhavethem those who [I hear from I wish : Nudja*haiiga, Hidiga on Jade-gi_ for kindred are there them eti, and‘a" ka” b¢a, ni™ya méite. Gahige-yéga cti, Wajin’ga-da, Agdha- too, I hear I wish, alive if se are. Gahize: -ega too, Wajifiga-da, Agaha- ma ¢i" ic‘4ge, Ickadabi jin’ga, Ma™tet-ska cti ha, wa‘tijinga iha”aw¢é mar¢i® old man, Ickadabi sis Mattet-ski too ; old woman IT had them for mothers ceti na” ba édi-ma awdna‘a™ ka™b¢a hai. Ca™ ucté fwidaha™i-maji. ga¢i?- too two those who = I hear from I wish 5 Now the rest I know you not. da¢ir- are there them a na™paji aka Awa" ¢inké igdg¢a " ¢inké éa¢é, ighepa wiwfaqti, a®¢a™ baha™- na®paji the the one for whom the (ob.) I[haveher grandchild my very own, she does not know (sub.) he danced the asa rela- pipe dance tion, Ji'qti éde, r’tca™ i¢4paha™ cu¢é. Ca™ ata” fwidaha’-maji-mace, dna ¢at’ai meatall, but now 1 know her it goes Now howfar Ihaveknownyounot yewho, how you have to you. many died éda® eb¢eg ga, and‘a" ka™b¢a hai. Ca niin‘de ¢a” da™qti ipi-maji. I’ta® I hear I wish 0 And heart the beyond I am sad. Now measure nuynee judwag¢e uidamqti éde, hégaji taf, dda™ nin’de i” pi-mdji-hna™ I with them very good, but notafew died, therefore heart sad to me regularly ca ca? . Ita" wamiske i na¢in’gega", ta" da” qti ?pi-méji. Wa‘tjinga always. Now wheat has been destroyed for now beyond Tam sad. Old woman me by fire, as, measure iha”a¢é ¢inké wakége-de gig¢azu-baji. (iytepa cti wan ‘gigeqti wakégai. Thad her for theone is sick but she has not regained Your grand- too are sick a mother who her strength. child I¢ddi ké pahan’ga té'‘di t’é ha. Wa*‘ijinga ganka ga™ twagi¢a-ga. Hisfather the before when died . Old woman the(pl.ob.) 80 tell them. TRANSLATION. Venerable man, as all the wheat which I had has been destroyed by fire, I send a letter to you that you may hear it. I have nothing left but the wagon. I desire to hear about my kindred which are there: Nudja™hanga, Hidiga, and Jade-gi. I wish to hear if they are alive. I also wish to hear about Gahige-jega, Wajitiga-da, the venerable Agaha-ma*¢i", the younger Ickadabi, Ma*tcu-ska, and the two old women whom I call my mothers. And the rest of you I knownot. The wife of one for whom qa¢i?-na*paji danced the calumet dance is my relation. She is my own grandchild, though she does not know me at all; but now I know her, and so the letter goes to you. Now I wish to hear how many of you have died among those I did not know. 12 12 15 502 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. My heart is far more sad than tongue can tell. I was with very good young men, but now many have died; therefore my heart is always sorrowful. Now is my heart sad beyond measure, because my wheat has been burnt. The old woman whom I call my mother is sick, and she has not yet regained her strength. All your grandchildren are sick. Their father died formerly. ‘Tell this to the old women. CAN’GE-SKA TO MA*TCU-WAGIHI. October 21, 1878. Ca™ waqi"ha g¢i¢a¢é ¢a” b¢ize. VS wa¢ikega u¢ayig¢a té angt ctf Now letter yousent back the I took it. you are sick youtoldof the we (ob.) yourself edwaga™i. Ga™ nikaci*ga cénujin’ ga wah¢haji'qti bahiqti a*t’af hai. Wactce We are 80. And person young man very stout-hearted picked, a yebere > Wacuce gather ie te: Ctiya-ma™ ¢i" eti, gahé-y4dé cti, Heqiga-jin’ga, He-snata, qéde-gahi dead, Cuya-mar¢i" am dahe-jade ame Heqaga-jiiga, He-snata, dede-gabi yan’ge (ya ze ran’ga igdq¢a™), Maéca™-ska iin ge, Cyt] -jiiga ijin’ge cti, his daughter (ya"ze-haiga his wife), Maca*-ski, his son, yu-jiiga his son too, Watiqtawads igdq¢a"™ t’é, Gahige-wadd¢inge igdq¢a*, Ickaddbi iqtepa, * Waugtawa¢é his wife ea Ganige-wadaeities his wi Ickadabi his grandchild, cin’ gajin’ga-ma jingdqtci-ma dhigi taf. Ki ceta™ /hma™ edada™ fuga e‘a™ the children the very small ones many. died. And so far what news how ma*hni™ yi, wind‘a® ka” b¢ai ha. Ki 4ji uwib¢a cug¢éagé taté cingé, Uma”- you walk if, I hear from I wish 2 And dif- Itellyou Isendto you shall there is as to the you ferent none ha*qti. Ki Pan’ka ¢ankdé, nikagahi ¢anka, t’¢ ¢anka, jaje wahnadde etéde. Omahas And Ponka the ones chief the ones dead theones hisname youshould have called themselves. who, who, who, them. U‘ig¢a a™¢i” hi. Wawadqpani Iyziga™¢ai ma™zeska’ cté wa‘i-baji. Ca™ Suffering we are 2 We are poor. The grandfather silver even has not given us. Yet wa¢ita” ké’ja ca’ qtaigdxai éde, ca”hna™ waju-baji, Ahigia’ji éga’, Ahigiqti work atthe wehavedoneonr best, but still we are below the aren not as, very much standard, angdxa-baji-hna”™i. Wag¢ita™ té enaqtci wiuwagipi etai, wéuda™ éte edwa- we have not done usually. Work the thatalone pleasant to us ey. good for us raf we (be), ga™i, a"wan’yig¢ita" té é dwake. Ta™wang¢a" angija-ma fe wadspa-bajj, are so, we work for ourselves the that I mean. Gentes ourown (pl.) words do not behave, endqtci téqi jin’ga; nikagahi fe wana‘a*-baji. Iyiga™¢ai eawawa™i ga” thatalone difficult a little; chief words they donot listentous. Grandfather he caused it forus so ta”wang¢a" ama fe wana‘a™-baji. Ita idéska aké waa™¢ai, yig¢izai gentes the words do not listen to us, Now interpreter the abandonedthem, he took him- (sub.) (sub.) self back .gacibe. Ta” wang¢a"-md fe wamaka-baji. Ga™adi idska c&’ga Pan‘kaja out of. The gentes words he was out of pa- Already interpreter yonder atthe Ponka tience with them. (land) gaxai ¢i” rtea” i¢adi¢ai aka gdxe, angi angdxa-baji. Nikagdhi afi’gata™ was made f . now agent abe made him, w A we aa not make him, Chief we who stand who (su LETTERS DICTATED BY OMAHAS AND PONKAS. 503 a"nd‘a"-baji-ctea™i, ceta™ ifddi¢ai aké udwagi¢a-baji. Udwagi¢at tédthi we have heard nothing about it, so far agent the (sub.) has not told us. He tells us it arrives at y / : Os vite *y v “ yi, efa™ tatdéite a™¢a™ baha™-baji: wéca™ eté yi'ji, wéca"-baji yi, a®wat waté when, how it may be we do not know: weagree ought if, we donotagree if, which one of the (two) tatéi*te. Ci wi” gi¢a-gd, ¢é hnize yi. itmay be. Again one send back, this youtakeit when. NOTES. This letter was dictated partly by Sanssouci, the ex-interpreter, and partly by Cange-ska. The interpreter appointed by the agent was Charles P. Morgan, who had been Ponka interpreter before the removal of the latter tribe in 1877. 503, 1. a™na‘a®-baji-ctea”i. The ending “ctea"i” shows that what was done, or left undone, was against the wishes of the speaker and his friends; but “a"na‘a®-baji- qtia"i,” we have heard nothing at all, would convey a different idea. 503, 2. tatéinte, 7. ¢., taté éite, has a future signification. TRANSLATION. I have received the letter which you sent. You told of yourselves that you were sick, and we are so, too. The choicest ones of the most stout-hearted of our young men have died. Wacuce is dead, so is Cuya-mam¢i", and gahe-yadé, and Heqaga- jinga, He-snata, gede-gahi’s daughter (the wife of yra"ze-hatiga), White-feather’s son, Cyu-jinga’s son, Wauqtawa¢e’s wife, Gahige-wada¢inge’s wife, and the grandchild of Ickadabi (7. ¢., of Louis Sanssouci); and in addition to these, many very small children have died. And up to this time have I been wishing to hear the news from you, how you were. There is nothing else for me to tell you about the Omahas. You should have mentioned the names of the deceased Ponka chiefs. We are poor and suffering. The President does not give us even money annuities. And as to work, we have done our best, but we are still below the mark, as it was not much. We have not done very much. Work alone should be pleasant for us, as it is apt to benefit us. I refer to working for ourselves. Our gentes do not behave when they speak; they do not listen to the words of us chiefs. That is the only thing which is a little difficult for us to bear. The President having caused it for us, the gentes do not listen to our words. The interpreter has just abandoned them, by resigning and taking himself out of their company. He got out of patience with the gentes on account of their words. And the agent has just appointed as interpreter the man who was made Ponka interpreter yonder at the old reservation in Dakota. We did not appoint him; in fact, we chiefs have heard nothing about it officially. The agent has not yet told us. We do not know how it will be when he tells us. It will probably be one thing or the other in that case; we may consent or we may not consent. Send back a letter when you receive this. om 12 15 504. THE @EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. WAJI’A-GAHIGA TO MA*TCU-,ANGA. October 19, 1878. Nikagéhi ttiju hnankdce, Acdwage, Ma"tett-wa¢ihi é¢a"ba, cénujinga Chief principal ye who are, Acawage, Ma*tcu-wa¢ibi he too, young man ¢i¢iga waja™ ba-mAaji, a*wa™ qpani hi. Wigta"be ka™b¢a. @Qé usni ¢é yourown Ihave not seen them, I am poor Isee you, myown, I wish. This cold _ this tédihi yi, cupi taté eb¢éga™ ha. Bekana uq¢e’qtci waqi? ‘ha g¢ia™ ¢aki¢e itarrives when, Ireach shall I think A Oh that very soon letter you cause (one) to at you send it back to me ka"b¢éga", nisiha, wisan’ga, wijyicpa méga"™, nikagahi wju hnankace. 1 hope, my child, my younger my grandchild _ likewise, chief principal ye who are. rother, A®wa" qpani éga", awigija™be ka™b¢a, ta” wang¢a™. Cénujin’ga g¢ubaqti I am poor as, [see them, my own, I wish, nation. Young man all an¢a” wathe ga™ ¢ai ha. Judwag¢e cupf taté, eb¢éga®. Ca™ nikagdahi to follow me desire Iwith them TIreach you shall, I think. Tn fact chief brtiga am¢a" wa"™he ga™¢ai, eb¢éga", nisiha, wisan’ga, wijyicpa méga", to follow me desire, I think, my child, my younger my grandchild likerise,” brother, nikagahi uju hnankdce. Cénujin’ga wiwija judg¢éqti ite éga", nain’de chief principal ye who are. Young man my own I reall we dead to as, heart with me i” pi-maji éga", waqi™ha cu¢éwiki¢é. Nikaci"ga bgigagt gipi- ee waqpani; is bad for me 3 letter I cause (one) to People poor; send it to you. Ita” ¢igisi¢at ha. Nisiha, wija™be ka™b¢a hi. Wandg¢e can’ge a™¢a‘-ma at they remem- . My child, I see you I wish ¢ Domestic horse those which present ber you animal you gave me cénawa¢éga", a"wa™ qpani, nisfha. A™wa" qpani éga™ » ¢guha i¢ate. Ukit‘'é they have been de- Iam poor, my child. I am poor a early Ihave died Nation stroyed, as, from it. ¢é Caa” ama atfi ha. Can’ge wab¢i" éde wan’gi¢e awd‘i. Ki @di pi this Dakotas the came . Horse Ihadthem but all Igavethem. And there I ar- (sub.) here rived yi, wiecte a™f-baji ha, nistha. Uma™ha™ ama, nisfha, ¢ida™be ga™ ¢ai, when, even one they did not 5 my child. Omahas the my child, to see you wish, give me (sub.), ki éga"™ wija™be ka™b¢a. Cupi taté eb¢éga", nisiha, usni ¢é. E‘a™ yi, and so I see you I wish. ITreach — shall I think, my child, cold this. How if, you nistha, ¢tta"qti g¢ia¢aki¢é te eb¢ega”. Ugq¢e’qtci éskana and‘a" te my child, very straight you cause (one) to will Very soon oh that Thearit win send it back to me eb¢éga". Cénujin’ga ¢i¢ija, nikagahi ¢i¢fja edabe, ie ¢i¢ja uq¢é’qti that I think. Young sane your own, chief your own also, words yourown very soon wind‘a"i ka b¢a. I hear from I wish. you v4 LETTERS DICTATED BY OMAHAS AND PONKAS. 505 NOTE. This Wajita-gahiga is the head of a part of the Omaha Wajifiga-¢ataji, while the other one is the head of the Ponka Wasabe-it‘aji gens. The Omaha bearing this name is an old man, and his letter is a good specimen of the oratorical style, especially the first part, in which Acawage is addressed as “my child,” Ma*tcu-wa¢ihi, as “my younger brother,” and Ma*tcu-yanga, as ‘my grandchild.” TRANSLATION. O ye head-chiefs, Acawage and Ma"tcu-wa¢ihi, as I do not see your young men, I am poor. I wish to see you, who are my own kindred. I think that I shall reach you by the time that the cold weather arrives. I hope that you will send back a letter very soon, O my child, O my younger brother, O my grandchild, ye who are head- chiefs. As I am poor, I desire to see the tribe who are my kindred. I think that all the young men wish to follow me. I think that I shall bring them to you. Indeed, I think that all the chiefs wish to follow me, O my child, O my younger brother, O my grandchild, ye who are head-chiefs. I send you a letter because 1 am sad at heart on account of the death of my young man who dwelt with me. All the people are sad; they are poor. Now they think of you. My child, I wish to see you. As all of the stock, the horses that you gave me, are gone, I am poor, my child. As I am poor, I have almost died from that cause. These Dakotas came here. I gave them all the horses which I had. But, my child, when I was there they did not give me even one horse. These Omahas, my child, wish to see you, and so do I wish to see you. I think that I shall reach you, my child, during this cold weather. My child, I hcpe that you will send back to me and tell me just how it is with you. I hope that I may hear it very soon. I wish to hear very soon the words of your young men, and also those of your chiefs. JABE-SKA TO GAHIGE.JIN’GA, WAQA-NAJIX, AND ACAWAGE. Gahige-jin’ga t’éska"i e¢éga" Jabe-ska fwa"xe ti¢ai. Waqa-naji*, Aca- Aca- Gahige-jinga dead, he thinking Jabe-sk& to question begins. Waga-najiz, might be that wage, cé-¢ab¢i", wi"a” wa ctécte t’éska"i e¢éga" wég¢a"xe ti ha. Gina‘a® wage, those three and which one soever dead, he thinking toaskabout has . To hearabout no more, might be that them, his kindred come his own ge y vl : r . “n/ . . ga™¢ai Jabe-ska. Ugg¢e'qtci ki¢é ta-bi waqi”ha, gina‘a™ gar¢ai; uq¢é wishes Jabe-ska. Very soon he says that some letter, 1o hear about he wishes; soon one will cause it to his own reach home waqi"ha ¢a" ki te—Acawage, waqi”ha cu¢éa¢é ¢ize Ada™ da” be jawag¢a-ga. letter the pralireach DAE letter Isend toyou takeit and seeing it be with them. ome.-— Gahige-jin’ea, Waqa-ndji, Wahé'‘a”, céna, da bai-gai Wagi™ha hnizai yi 5a, | ’ ’ ) g , Gahige-jifiga, Waga-naji®, Wahe'a’, enough, look ye at it. Letter you take it when, wi” éska™ ¢at’-baji yi, uq¢é’qtci waqi" ‘ha ¢a™ ki¢a¢é taf. Wahé‘a", Wa¢i- 6 one itmight youhavenot if, very soon letter the you will cause to Wahe‘a®, Wagi- I) died (ob.) reach home. 506 THE GEGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. daze cé-na"ba, a™wa’’wa ctécte t/éska"i gind‘a" ga™¢ai. Wiuwa¢agihna daze those two, and which one soever dead, he tohearof he wishes. You tellus about ourown no more, mi; chit be his : ki¢a¢é t4-bi. Ci niga yi, wa¢uta® gind‘a” oa™ gai. you will cause it to Again alive if, straight = hear of hy wishes. : reach home, he said. his own NOTES. This letter was written before October 25, 1878. 505, 1. tveskati, 7. ¢., Ve eska*i, “‘Dead, they might be.” 505, 3. uq¢eqtci ki¢é ta-bi. Frank La Fléche does not understand how “ki¢é ta-bi” can be used here, and it is a puzzle to the collector, who suggests the substitu- , tion of “ti¢a¢e te, you will please send it here,” or “g¢i¢ad¢é té, you will please send one back.” 506, 1-2. wiuwa¢agihna ki¢a¢é ta-bi. Frank La Fléche and the collector have agreed in substituting for this, ‘“ wiuwa¢agihna yi, i¢a¢é tai, when you tell us of our own, you will send one here.” TRANSLATION. Jabe-sk& begins to inquire, as he thinks that Gahige-jiiga may be dead. As he thinks that Waqa-naji", Acawage, or Gahige-jinga may be dead, he has come to inquire about the deceased one. Jabe-ska desires to hear about his own. He says that some one will cause a letter to reach bim at home (sic) very soon. He wishes to hear about his own kindred. The letter will please reach home soon (sic).—O Acawage, receive the letter which I send you, and look at it with them. O Gahige-jiiga, Waqa-naji", and Wahe‘a*, look ye at it. When you receive the letter, if one of you has not died, please cause the letter to reach home very soon (sic). He wishes to hear if either of his relations, Wahe‘a" or Wa¢idaze, has died. You will tell us by sending a letter here. And if they be alive, Jabe-sk&’ wishes to hear correctly about them. JIDE-TA* TO ACAWAGE. October 25, 1878. 3 Wiji’¢e Ve, nan’de i” pi-maji-hna®™ ca” ca’. Tyuhadbi t’é ¢and‘a” te, ae elder died to heart bad forme regularly always. Tyuhabi dead you hearit will, brother me, Acdawage. Wa‘t wiwija ké ci t’é ké yangé’qtci-hna™ hf. Umar ¢inka ¢¢ O Acawage. Woman myown the again dead when very near to usually ar- Season this (reel. one) lying rived. wija™ be ka*b¢éde b¢i‘a ha; wiji’¢e té, wat wiwfa t’é ta té’di hi. I see you I wished, but I have ; my elder dead, woman my own die will atit hasar- failed brother rived. 6 Uma ¢inka ji yi, wia”be ka™”b¢a th wija”be taté ebees a", Céki, Season another if, I see you I wish Isee you shall O Ceki, ¢ijan’ge t’é ha, a™’ba¢é, Gakfe-ma” ¢i" ager yourelder dead , to-day, Gakie-ma*¢i® his wife. sister LETTERS DICTATED BY OMAHAS AND PONKAS. 507 NOTE. 506, 5. tte ta tédi hi. Te yaigéqtci-hna® hi, which Jide-ta® gave as an equivalent,. is hardly applicable here, as it refers to several occasions of sickness unto death. TRANSLATION. My elder brother is dead, and my heart is constantly sad. O Acawage, you will hear that Ikuhabi is dead. My wife has nearly reached death on several occasions. I wish to see you this year, but I have failed, as my brother died, and my wife is approaching death. If I wish to see you another year, I think that I shall see you. O Ceki, your younger sister, Gakie-ma*¢i”s wife, died to-day. LE-UyA*HA TO MA*TCU-SI-TAN’GA. Ca”, nisiha, wisi¢é-hna*"-ma”. Ca™ éskana e‘a™ ma™hni™ yi, wind‘a" Now, onychild, Iam always thinking of you. Now oh that how you walk if, I have not maji’-qti-ma™; ca” e‘a” ma*hni™ yi, wi" ¢ahna gigage ka"b¢éga™. Wiya?’- heard from youatall; yet how you walk if, youtellme yousend back I hope. I see you ba-maji a"wa™qpani héga-maji. Ki éskana wija™be ka™b¢éga™ éde, b¢f‘a- T not Iam poor Lam very. And oh that I see you I hoped, but have hna?-ma™. Ki ¢ikége-ma, éskana wan ite twa¢agihna ka™b¢éga™. Ki failed each time. And those who are oh that a you tell them I hope. And your friends, a®wan kega-maji, ‘a" ¢ingé’qti ma™b¢i"; éga"™qti ma™hni” ka™b¢éga®. Wa- I am not sick, nothing at all is the I walk; just so you walk I hope. Let- matter baxu wi” cu¢éwiki¢é. Ca™ uq¢é qtei g¢i¢adée ONS ; Wage ama ter one I cause him to very soon you send one the send it to you. back ee (mv. sub.) 2 nl n n/ it maja” ¢inké ‘idwa¢ai xi, na™bé t‘a™ maja” wa¢ita™ wagadji ag¢af. Maja land the spoke about when, hand pos- land to workit commanded went Land us sessing us homeward. ¢an‘di yaci a” ¢i® taf, eb éga”. Cé'ya cangaéhi-baji tat, eb¢éga” . Gatega” inthe along we will be, Yonder we will not reach you, k. In Age man- time ner uwib¢a cu¢éadé. eds one nie NOTES. 507, 5. ega"qti ma"hni" ka*b¢ega*. gje-uya"™ha explained this by another sentence: Gi cti éga gti wa¢ikegajl’qti wina‘a™ ka"b¢éga*. You too justso yonare a sick at I ee I hope. “T hope to hear from you that you, too, have not been sick at all.” 507, 6. Wabaxu, used by an Omaha instead of wabag¢eze. 507, 6. Wage ama; 7. e., Inspector J. H. Hammond. 507, 7. maja" ¢itke, intended for “‘maja™ ¢a".”—Frank La Fléche. 12 508 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. TRANSLATION. My child, I always think of you. I have not heard at all how you are, though it has been my desire; yet I hope that you will send a letter back, and tell me how you are. AsIdo not see you, Iam very poor. I have hoped to see you, but I have failed each time. I hope that you will tell all your friends. I am not sick; I walk without any trouble at all. I hope that you are just so. I cause some one to send you a letter. T hope that you will send one back very soon. A white man talked with us about the land. He went home after telling us to work the land with our hands. I think that we will be in the land for some time. I think that we will not reach yonder where you are. I send to you to tell you such things. DUBA-MA* Gr! TO ,ANDE-NANYUGE. October 25, 1878. Ca” wabdg¢eze ti¢a¢é a” ba¢é ya”be. Niacitga i’¢adai ¢éaka. Ca” this Now letter you sent to-day Ihave Person read it to me Now seen it. (sub.). éskana yf-ujf ¢fja vida™gti and‘a® yi i”uda*. Ca™ éskana Wakan‘da aka ohthat household your very good ITheard when good for me. Now oh that Deity the u¢fka"i ka"b¢éga®. Ki A”pa™yan’ga t’é té and‘a" ha, ki nfkagahi sata help you I hope. And Big Elk he died the Iheardit , and chief five taf t& awdna‘a" hi. Ki nikaci®ga-mace, ahigiqti ¢at’af té ca™ gi¢ajiwad¢e. died the Iheardofthem . And ye people, verymany youdied the yet grievous. A™ba¢é afigt cti wawdkegai. Nikaci"ga udaqti sata" tai. Ci i’tca™ t’¢ To-day we too we are sick. Person very good five died. Again now todie etéga™qti édi-ma-hna™i, ki wa‘t cti t’é-hna"i. Ca” maja” ké ca™ ¢é cti very apt those are usually here, and woman too usually die. Yet land the yet this too éga®, ut’e t’a™ éga™ a™t’é-hna"i. Ki maja” céya¢ica™ kéya cangahi taité like, death abounds like we are dying. And land towardsyonder atthe wereach you shall place na™a®pe héga-baji. Ki nikaci"ga amd eddda™ fbaha™ ama, ‘dwa¢é-hna”i we fear it not alittle. And people (oe , what they know ehey usually talk about us sub. who, ¢a™ja, anyfwacka™ héga-baji. Ca™ wa¢iwagazu ga” gai. (ié¢uadi wa¢iwa- though, wo have made not a little. And tomakeusstraight they wish. In this place make us efforts in our own behalf gdau ti ama té. Ada™ maja” ké'ya, céya ké'ya, cangdhi taf atiga™¢a-baji straight they will, doubt- Therefore land atthe, at yonder atthe, wereach you will we do not wish it less. place égati hi. Ki e‘a™ wedgi¢ig¢a” @é edwaga™ tan’gata’, ca” cé¢u té‘di somewhat . And how they decide forus even we are 80 we who will, yet there inthe cangd¢a-baji tan’gata” éska™-a™¢a’’¢ai. Maja” ¢a® i¢ddi¢af fi té ceta™ we go not to you we who will we think it may be so. Land the agent houses the so far itaxayd¢ica® wakéga-baji. Ca” a” ba¢é wisi¢ai éga, wabig¢eze cugéwiki¢e. towards up stream they are not sick. Now to-day Iremember as, letter Icause him to send (north) you (pl.) it to you (sing.). LETTERS DICTATED BY OMAHAS AND PONKAS. 509 Ca” yf-uji wiwija té twakega ¢ingé. Ca” eddda™ maja” ¢é¢uddi witAqtci And household myown the sickness has none. And what land in this only one wéteqi éga" uwib¢ai-hna"-ma”. Hiyanga-ma téqi ha. Ca™ wabag¢eze hard for “om I have told you (pl.) re aes The Winnebagos hard 5 Now letter us uq¢ée’qtei ¢é, wabaxu ¢é¢u ¢inké, éskana ¢ai g¢idage ka"b¢éga®. very soon goes, here hewho, oh that you you send hope. give him back NOTES. 508, 1. niaci"ga im¢adai ¢eaka, another way of expressing, “Niaci"ga ¢éaka i¢adai ha.” 508, 6. Ca® maja" ké ca™ ¢e cti ega®. Duba-ma¢i" gave “¢é¢u eti, here too,” as equivalent to “¢e cti.”. Frank La Fléche reads: Maja” ¢6 cti éga", omitting «Can? and “ké ca®.” 508, 8. nikacvi"ga ama, edada® ibaha® ama, i. e., the white people. 508, 9-10. wa¢iwagazu té ama té&. Frank La Fléche and Duba-man¢i" say, “w¢i- wagazu,” while Sanssouci says, ‘“wa¢iwagazu.” Sanssouci renders “ta ama té” by “they will doubtless,” distinguishing it from ‘“‘taite, they shall.” Frank La Fléche says that “wa¢iwagazu taité” is seldom used. 509, 3. wabaxu ¢e¢u ¢inke, the one who sits here writing. TRANSLATION. To-day I saw the letter that you sent. This man read it to me. Iam glad to hear that your household is in good health. I hope that Wakanda may help you. I heard that Big Elk and five chiefs had died. And as so many of you have died, it is griev- ous, O ye people. We, too, are sick to-day. Five very excellent men have died, and now there are those who are very apt to die. The women, too, are dying. As this land, too, as well as yours, is full of death, we have been dying. We are very much afraid of arriving yonder at a land in your neighborhood. Though the people who know something have been talking about us and to us, we have been making great efforts on our own account. They wish to settle our business in a satisfactory manner. They will doubtless make a satisfactory settlement of our business in this place. Therefore we do not wish to reach the land near you, if we can avoid it. Whatever they decide upon for us we shall abide by, yet we hope that we shall not depart from this place. They are not sick in the agent’s country (i. e., Indiana) as far south as his city (7. e., Richmond). As I remember you to-day, I send you a letter. My household is without sickness. I have told you again and again of one thing in this land which is somewhat hard for us. The Winnebagos are hard for us to bear. I hope that, as this letter goes very soon, you will give one and send it to the writer who is here. 510 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. qAGI-NA*PAJT TO pA AN’GA-NAJT". Nisiha, a"wa” qpani héga-maji ui Jh wigfsi¢é-hna"-ma™. Eskana, nisfha, My child, I am poor _ Iam very I usually peer you, my Oh that, my child relation wigha"be ka"b¢éga"-hna™-ma™ dta"hé—Kagéha, maja” ¢é¢u ca” ca™ hni”’ Isee you, my own I usually hope Iwho stand.— My friend, land here always you were visu yiji, a"wa™ qpani-maji taté eb¢éga” ¢a™ja, ihné ha. Hnéga™ a*wa qpani if, I (am) not poor shall I think though, youhave . As you went Iam poor gone , Su 7 = ~ C — héga-maji. Ca™ edada™ ticka® ma™hni™ yi, ca” e‘a™ mat™hni” yi, b¢iga IT am very. Yet what deeds you walk if, infaet how you walk i all and‘a® ka™b¢a hi. Ca” fe uda®qti wigina‘a® ka™b¢a ha. Nisiha, maja™ T hear it I wish XS In fact words very good I hear of you, I wish t My child, land my own anaji" ¢an‘di wab¢ita™ a*¢a cpaha™ hnati té, itea® Ataca™ b¢é. Wage ama I stood in the I worked you knew me you(pl.) when, now beyond it I go. White the went people (sub.) edada® ca” wa¢ate botiga gaxai gé edwakiga™qtia“i. Ceta™ a¢ita™ té what in fact food mel noe ; we are just alike. So far wework the P ang¢i‘aqti, g¢isai té ang¢itaqti, ma¢e ha. Maja™ cta™be ga" bgliga wamuske we have failed plucking the wehavefailed winter . Land you saw wheat indeed, their own indeed, ugipi. Maja” ¢an‘di iyuhe ¢ingé’qti a™naji"i; sagiqti a"¢i”. Nikaci"ga-ma is full of. Land in the cae of having sone we stand; very firm we are. The people ‘ear at fna ¢atai gé ijaje zaniqti a"wa™na‘a™ anga™¢ai. Wactce ijim’ge ¢anka how san are the hisname every one we hear them we wish. Wacuce hisson theones many ie wit vé. E/di-4-i- naji” ijaje agi”. one died. Edi-a-i-naji® his name he had. NOTES. This zajaiiga-naji" is sometimes called yajaNga-naji” jinga (7. ¢., the younger), to distinguish him from Acawage. He is the brother-in-law of Mi*xa-ska, the elder Frank La Fléche. 510, 2. Kageha, ¢. e., Ma"tcu-wa¢ihi. TRANSLATION. My child, I always think of you when lam poor. I am ever hoping to see you. My friend, you have gone, though I thought that I should never be poor if you always remained here in this country. As you went, lam very poor. I wish to hear all, what you are doing, and how you are. I hope to hear very good words from you who are my own relation. My child, when you departed, you knew that I worked the land where I dwell. I have now exceeded what I did then. We are just like the white people in raising all kinds of food. We have not yet finished our work; we are far LETTERS DICTATED BY OMAHAS AND PONKAS. 511 from the end. It is winter, and yet we have not been able to finish gathering all of our crops. The land which you saw is full of wheat. We stand in the land with nothing at all to occasion apprehension; we are firmly settled. We wish to hear all the names of your people who have died. One of Wacuce’s sons is dead. His name was Edi-a-i-naji*. ICTAGABI TO MA*TCU-WAGIHI AND ACAWAGE. Wagqi"ha g¢i¢a¢é ga” b¢ize. Maja” ¢ag¢i” ga” drita®qti i"wi™ ¢a he Letter you sent back the I took it. Land you sit t very straight to tell me (ob.) (ob.) gi¢a-ga. Qé cugéags. Céama nikaci"ga dtiba ca¢af ha. Itizé cub¢é be sending This Isend to you. Those people some went to . Atthe Igotoyou back. you same time ka™b¢éde waqi™ha e¢fiji dea", aaa cad¢af ha. Ca™ uwikie té ékiea™- too) cologne) is) I wished, but letter had not as, leaving me theywent . Now Italktoyou the it was just come back to you qtia™, waqi“ha ¢a™ b¢ize té’di. Cat, jit¢éha, a"wa™ qpani héga-maji. Maja” like it, letter the Itookit when. Yet, elder brother, I am poor Tam very. Land uhfacka ¢ag¢i” eb¢éga”-maji ¢a™cti; wéahidé’qti ¢ag¢i” eb¢éga®. Ca” close by you sit I did not think heretofore; atagreatdistance you sit I thought. Yet maja” mactéaja ¢ag¢i” ¢a” a™ba tima"¢i" dna ja™ yi-hna™i and‘a® ka™ b¢a. land in the warm you sit the day towalkin how sleeps if only I hear it I wish. region many Wawakegai ca”afig4xai, afiginii. We were sick we have quit, we have recovered. NOTE. 511, 6. a"ba uma¢i", ete. Frank La Fléche says that this is not exactly correct. It should be “a™ba dna ja™ yi/ji hiwa¢é é6i™te and‘a" ka™b¢a.” TRANSLATION. I have received the letter which you sent home. Send mea letter, and tell me just how you dwell in the land. I send you this in order to make that request. Some of those men (¢. ¢., Omahas) went to you. I desired to go to you when they did, but they went to you without me, as a letter had not come from you. When I received the letter, it was just as if I talked with you. O elder brothers, I am very poor. I did not think, heretofore, that you dwelt in a land near by; I thought that you dwelt at a very great distance. And I wish to hear how many days it takes to walk to the land in the warm region where you dwell. We have brought our sickness to an end; we have recovered. 512 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. WAQPE-CA TO CAHIE@A. Negtha, maja” 4gudi ma™hni” wisi¢é-hna™ ca™ca". Ana ca™ ¢at?af Mother's land inwhat you walk ITamremembering always. How infact you have brother, place you many died éte wind‘a"i ka”b¢a. Maja” agudi ¢andji" yi, maja” wagazuaji, cub¢a- it may I hear from I wish. Land inwhat youstand if, land not straight, IT have not be you (pl.) place maji. fat’é é té ékiga™ i ‘fa -maji héga-maji. Niyjinga, kagé, t’éé ha, lee gonetoyou. Youdie the itis like it am sad Tam very. Boy, thirdson, isdead_ , gdga-jin’ga. Tyuhdbi cti és ha, ¢ija”’cka. Ca™ wabdAg¢eze gia” paki qaga-jifiga. Iyuhabi too isdead , your sister’s Now letter you cause him to be son. sending it back tome ka"b¢éga™. Ca™ dAgudi tida*qti ¢anaji® té and‘a™ ka*b¢éga”. I hope. Now in San very good youstand the I hear it I hope. place NOTES. Cahie¢a, or Cheyenne, a Yankton Dakota, was adopted by the Ponkas, who have made him the head of one of their sub-gentes. He was enrolled in 1880 as Mixa-n4ji*, which is a sacred name of his gens. 512, 13. kagé refers to Heqaga-jiiga, whom Waqpe-ca called his younger brother. He is spoken of by his household or ordinal birth-name, being the third son. Wa- qpe-ca might have said: “Nijinga isan’gaa¢éde 6 ha, Heqaga-jin’ga: I had a boy for my younger brother, Heqaga-jinga, but he is dead.” TRANSLATION. Mother’s brother, I always think of you, in whatever land you walk. I wish to hear from you how many of you have died. The land in which you stand is not straight, so I have not gone to you. I am very sad, because it is just as if you were dead. Heqaga-jinga, the third son in our household, is dead. Iyuhabi, your sister’s son, too, is dead. I hope that you will send back a letter to me. I wish to hear in what place you do very well. WANI],A-WAQE TO GAHIGE. Ca” éwi¢é’qti wisi¢é a™ bade. Eskana wija™be ka"b¢éga® éde, a™jtt- Now Ihave youfor I remem- to-day. Oh that T see you I hoped, but Tam a very near ber you not relation maji; ceta™ a®wa™ cte ag¢i”", angini-maji. @é¢u maja™ hndji té’di, a"wa"’- well; so far I remain Isit, I re not recovered. Here land yan did eae I was not go qpani cta”be té ca”ca™ b¢i”. Ki ¢i-hna® wisf¢a-maji; Pan‘ka nikagdhi poor yousawit the always Tam. And youonly Idonot remember Ponka chief you; 9 zaniqt awasi¢é; cénujin’ga-ma cti awdsi¢é, zani. Ca” wisf¢ai té, méiadi I remember the young men too Iremember all. Now Iremem- when, last spring them; them, bered you ~~ = LETTEV'S DICTATED BY OMAHAS AND PONKAS. ats) t *n/ / , oi; , ! , E Cinta eee , < icka" wi" Caa” amdja pi té éwa” éga", di yi, ticka™ jiiaji gdxai. deed one Dakotas to them Tar- when, it being as, IT was when, deed “wrong they did. rived the cause coming back Gan'yi éega" wisi¢ai. Hau. Edada™ fuga nikaci*ga-ma t’e-ma zaniqti 1 And that I remember What news the people the dead ones all being so you yaje wair¢écpaxt gi¢a¢é ka™b¢éga", zaniqti awdna‘a® ka™b¢a. Ca™ i” ¢a- his you write them for you send T hope, all T hear them I wish. Now Tam name me back maji qti-hna"-ma™ wisi¢ai té’di. Acka ¢ag¢i™ té’di, wiza” be ka™b¢a éga®, always very sad Tremem- when. Near yousat when, I sce you IT wished as, ber you cupi-hna*-ma™; éde ita" ean’ga"-maji i” ¢a-maéji. Hau. Gan’yi Uma™ha?- T used to reach you; but now Tam not so am sad. | T And Omahas ma céma cubhiwa¢é-hna™i wacta™bai yi, cuhfi yi, wabdag¢eze f¢a¢é té; the those they have been sentto you youseethem when, reach when, letter you send will; (pl.) (you see) you awana‘a"™ ka” b¢a. Ca™ éskana tida'qti ma™¢i”i ka™b¢a, fe tida"qti awdna‘a™ I hear about I wish. Now ohthat very good they walk I wish, words very good 1 hear about them them ka™b¢a. Hau. Gan’yi eawa¢é’qti Uma™ha"™ céma cuhii yie éskana I wish. 7 And I have them for Omahas those reach when, oh that near kindred (you see) you can’ge-ma wi” a™¢a4 ka"b¢éga™, iv¢i" of wa¢dki¢é ka™b¢éga®. Ca™ the horses one you give I hope, having coming you cause them T hope. Still me forme back ote Cones ° ° pie Me : * : = ¢ijin’ge, Uha™jin’ga, é i”¢i™ of kab¢éga". Can‘ge ja"-ma™¢i® @ ¢anké your son, Uha"-jiiga, he having coming I hope. Horse wagon carry it the ones ~ forme back that wi” i“tve, wiragtci iwi" cte. Can’ge a™¢a‘i yi, pahan’ga wabdg¢eze { — if, one is dead only one remains to me, Horse you give before letter is to me, mo coming ka"b¢éga™. Tan’ki¢a-ga. Ceta™ taté eb¢éga™. Maja” ¢é¢u can’ge ¢ingat I hope. Cause it to be com- So far shall I think. Land here horse there are ing for me. none éga", can’ge t'a™ aja ¢anaji®, Ada" wina cu¢éage. Ki Uha"-jin’ga efiiji yf, as, horse wherethey youstand, therefore Ibeg Isendtoyou. And Uha*-jiiiga isnot if, abound from you ; coming back Uma"™ha® jin’ga wi” i’ ¢i" gi wa¢act ka™ b¢a. Omaha small one having is youask | Iwish. forme coming him back NOTE. 513, 3. wai"¢ecpaxu, from “wagibaxu.” See Dictionary. TRANSLATION. My uear relation, I remember you to-day. J hoped to see you, but I am not in good health; I still have sickness left; I have not recovered. I am still poor in this land, as you saw me before you departed. And I do not remember you only; LI re- member all the Ponka chiefs, and all the young men. I remembered you last Spring, when I went to the Dakotas and was coming back, at which time, owing to one oceur- rence, they did an unfortunate thing. And as that is the case, I remember you. VOL. VI oo 12 514 THE @EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. I hope that you will send back what news there is, and write for me the names of all the people who have died. I wish to hear about all of them. When I think of you, I am sorely grieved. When you dwelt near, I used to go to you when I wished to see you. But now I am not in that condition, so I am sad. If you see those Omahas who have been sent to you, please send a letter, as I wish to hear about them. I hope that they are very well; I wish to hear very good words about them. When those Omahas who are my near kindred reach you, I hope that you will give me one of your horses. If hope that you will cause them to bring it back for me, or else that your son, Uha® jiiga, will bring it to me. As one of my wagon horses is dead, only one is left to me. If you give me a horse, I hope that a letter will come before it. Sendit. I think that this letter is long enough. I send to beg of you because this land is without horses, and you are in the land where there are plenty of them. If Uha®™-jinga does not come back, please ask one of the young Omahas to bring the horse home to me. * HE-WANI¢A TO GAHIGE-WADAQGINGE. Nia ¢ingé’qti ag¢i. Umdha akadi ag¢i. Ucka™ dja” ké wagaan Thave no painatall I have Omahas to them Ihave Deed youdo the straight come back come back. that ani‘a® ka“ b¢a. Umiaha akadi tda®qti ag¢f, nia” ¢ingé’qti. Ede Umaha I hear I wish. Omahas tothem- very good Ihave I have no pain at all. But Omahas come back, akadi ag¢d-maji tatéska"b¢éga", ehé. Eskana ¢ag¢fi ka"b¢éga", ehé. Qéama tothem I go not home- shall, I think, I said. Ohthat you have T hope, T said. These "ward come back ° oo =e ° , a s Umaha ama tida®qti naji” ama: niaci*ga dada" g¢i etéctewa” ¢izé ga” ¢a Omahas the very good are standing : person what hascome soever to take wishing (sub.) back him . , . py) . - , / er 2 edi” ama. Ca™ wakéga nid ¢i¢in’ge G"te wind‘a" ka™b¢ai ha. Ca™ eawa¢e they are sitting. Now sick pain youhave itmay I hear of I wish 5 Indeed I have them ‘ none be you (pL ob.) as kindred jin’ga efa” yi dctewa’, anda" ka™b¢a. Udg¢aqti ag¢i, nuyadd¢i" ag¢i, small how if, even that TI hear it I wish. Suffering greatly Ihave bareofouter Thave come back, garments come back, Umaha akadi. Ki ¢éaka, winégi aka, wafi™ i’¢iwit Eskana wabaxu ¢a” ? oD b) Omahas to them And this one, my mother’s the blanket bought for Ob that letter the brother (sub.), me. cuhi yi, uq¢é'qtci wi a™¢ai gi¢ag¢ai ka™b¢éga™. (iéaka wijan’ge aka reaches when, very soon one you give you (pl.) send I hope. Thisone my elder sister the you me it back (sub.) a ag¢é taité eb¢éga, Caa™ amajya. Umaha akadi ¢ab¢i" ja” cug¢eé she gohome- shall I think, Dakotas —_‘ to them. Omahas at them three sleep _it goes alone ward to you wabaxu ¢a”. letter the. NOTES. He-waji¢a is a Ponka of the Nikadaona gens. His name is given as pronounced by the Ponkas, but it is intended for the Dakota, He-wa"jina (One Horn), which would be Hé-witaqtci in Pegiha. Gahige-wada¢inge is a Ponka of the Hisada gens. LETTERS DICTATED BY OMAHAS AND PONKAS. 515 514, 1. Nia¢ingéqti, contracted from nié an¢in’géqti, “‘Pain—I have not at all.” 514, 3. tatéska"b¢éga”, in full, taté éska"bééga®, ’ t=} 5) v) > 514, 3. Omit “ehe” in both sentences.—Frank La Fléche. 514, 7. winegi aka, 7. ¢., the Omaha Leuyatha, of the Ictasanda gens. 514, 9. Frank La Fléche says that the last sentence should read: Umaha akadi ag¢i t& ¢ab¢i" ja”’ yi, cu¢é wabaxu da, Omahas at them Icame when three sleep when, goes to letter the. back you “Umiha” is the Ponka form of “Uma™ha;” and “wabaxu,” letter, book, is equivalent to the Omaha “ wabag¢eze.” TRANSLATION. I have come back to the Omahas without any sickness at all. I desire to know just what thing you are doing. I have come back to the Omahas in very good health, without any sickness at all. But I said that I did not think I would go homeward to the Omahas. I say that I hope you may come back. These Omahas are doing very well. They are desirous of receiving any kind of person whatsoever who comes back. I wish to hear from you that you have no sickness or pain. I desire to hear how my young relations are, no matter what their condition may be. I suffered very much when I came back to the Omahas; I came back without any outer garments. But this one, my mother’s brother, bought a blanket for me. I hope that when the letter reaches you, you will give me one very quickly and send it back. I think that my sister will go alone to her home among the Dakotas. The letter goes to you three days after my return to the Omahas. dAGT-NASPAJI TO pA PAN’ GA-NAJE JIN’GA. December 16, 1878. Waqi™ha ¢é¢a" ati b¢izega", nisiha, wija”be éga", 1M uda"qti-ma™, Letter this Teame I took it, as, my child, I see you like, it is very good for me, ere “1 ¢6-qti-ma™ hi. Ca™, nisfha, ata’ cté waqi™ ha cuhia¢é-hna*-ma™ taté. Ki Tam very glad : And, my child, whensoeyver letter I send to you regularly shall. And a at 4 subi 4 ou n/ Brae fee f Akidé ha (Né - ay, 2 fisan ga ce¢u cuhi té, a™wa™qpani éga cu¢eaki¢ée ha. e¢uy nistha, youryounger yonder reached as Tam poor as I caused him to : Here, my child, brother you _ to it, go to you andi" té, maja” ¢é¢u anaji", wab¢ita" idatqti béliga andj. Ca”, nistha, all Istand when, land here T stand, I work very good T stand. Yet, my child, wigisi¢é-hna” ¢an'‘di, edida" wi ahni™ té/di ab¢i’ téite, eb¢éga™ hna"-ma™ T always remem- when, in what one youhad when Ihaveit will, T used to think it bered you the past, perhaps, s, = a7 & / *) ep eh rae deh ao image P mies = ha. Nisiha, ata” cté ca™ wigija"be tatéska"b¢éea"-hna™-ma™ ha. 6 My child, whenever still Isee you, my own shall I am used to thinking 5 NOTE. 515, 3. Visanga, i. ¢., Nidaha”, the real son of qa¢i®=na"paii. ga, ’ ) d if 516 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. TRANSLATION. My child, I was very glad when I came to this house and received this letter. It was very good for me, being just as if I saw you. And, my child, I shall send letters to you from time to time. And, as to your younger brother, who has reached you, I sent him to you because I was poor. My child, when I remain here, working the land, I do all the work very well. And, my child, as I am always thinking of you, I think that if you have any one thing I may have it. My child, I am constantly hoping to see you at some time or other. qAG¢r-NA*PAJI TO HIS SON NIDAHA*. Wagqi™ ha ¢a" gti¢agé ¢a” Db¢ize. El Wagqi"ha cu¢éa¢é, pajan’ga- Letter yousentit the I took it. Letter I send toyou, Lajanga- ae ) back (ob.) naj". Hnize yf, ga¢a" Nidaha" ¢a‘f te Wandaq¢iqti gfi-ga ha. Wag¢ita naji”. You take it when, that(ob.) Nidaha® you give will. Hurrying very beyecom- . Work it to him much ing home té b¢f‘aqti-ma” ha. Ca™ uidaqtia’ji éga™ anaji"; ticka™ t'a” andji". Wand- the Ihave failed, in- a Indeed not very good like Istand; business plenty I stand. Hurry-. (ob.) deed, at it q¢i® gga. Ca wija™ba-maji nan‘de i pi-maji-hna*-ma™ ha. ing becoming home. Still I donot see you heart ~ I always have it bad forme NOTES. Nidaha® went to the Ponkas without the consent of his agent, who threatened to punish him if he did not return by a certain time. This was the trouble tu which qa¢i®-na"paji referred in the phrase, “ucka® t'a® anaji".” The second and third sentences were addressed to pajanga-naji, but all the rest was intended for Nidaha*. ; » TRANSLATION. T have received the letter which you sent home tome. I send a letter to you, O Maiiga-naji". When you get it, please give it to Nidaha*. O Nidaha”, come home ina very great hurry. I can make no progress at all with my work. Iam not prospering very well; I have plenty of trouble. Come home in a hurry. Now, when I do not see you, my heart is continually sad. LETTERS DICTATED BY OMAHAS AND PONKAS. lel HE-WAJIGA TO HEQAGA-NAJL. January 22, 1879. CaX ¢é¢u a™najii té tida™qti anndji?i ¢a™ja, ca” Caardiga angéi¢e taitd, Now here we stand when very good westand though, yet to the Dakotas we go shall, eb¢éga”. Wiyaha™ aka ¢éaka can’ge ¢ab¢i" wA¢i7, wai" cti na”ba ‘fi, T think. My sister's the this one horse ~ three has them, robe also two they have husband (sub.) given him, ik SO, 7 . Ona i re ye nS oes rs ma™zepe-jin'ga na”ba ‘i, niniba-wéawa” cti ‘fi, wamuske ké Ahigi ‘fi, sharp iron small two thoy Be gave calumet also hey gave wheat the much ney gave im im, him, ida" u‘ag¢a ctéwa™ ane a nai. Céqya ida®qti ¢andji® ékiga gti éga™ therefore suffering intheleast withoutany we stand. Yonder verygood you stand just alike a andjii. Wamiuske ké u¢éwitan’gi¢é a®¢icta"i yi, Caa™ija angade taitd, we stand Wheat the we collect ours we finish when, totheDakotas wego shall, eb¢éga". Qéaka, wijan’ge akd, mi™jinga wi” fda¢ai. adé-gatib¢i" aka I think. This one, my elder the girl one bore. (Lade-gaynwitxe the sister (sub.), (sub.) Wayjin’ f¢6-hna™ cade iC ti A‘a™i ka™’b ajim ga iS) ¢e nha Ca’ Cal. ane esa té zaniq 1 wind atl a ¢a, piqti. Wajiiga remembers him always. Now how itis all Ihearof you I wish, anew. Watijingagtci ¢inké cti ¢uita" and‘a™ ka™b¢a. pé-wa‘t cti ijan’ge é¢aba Very old woman he one why also straight I hear I wish. Le-wa'u too herdaugh- she too (ob.) ter ¢uta" awana‘a® ka™b¢a. Ki ¢uta™ awana‘a® yi'cté, e‘a” Gdaxa-maji té yi, straight Epes from I wish. And straight TI hear from evenif, how I do not will if, them them . ca” wisi¢é-hna"-ma™i. Ki ¢i, ¢itida™ ¢andji" yi'cté wija™be tai; ¢iteqi yet I always remember you And you, good for you stand even if Iseeyou(pl.ob.) will; hardtor (pl. ob.). you you yi'cté a®cta™be tai, ¢i. Wiegti e‘a” ma™b¢i™ yi, 1’¢e-hna® ca™ca®. Ata’ cté even if youseeme will, you. Imyvery how I walk when, Tam glad always. Whensoever self usually wisi¢é-hna™-ma™i. Ce-m b¢i" -} “de e‘a™i yi F : 4 niyjinga ¢ab¢i" judwag¢e-hna*-ma™-de e‘a™i yi, T usually remember you Those with boy three I was with them regularly, and how they if, (pl. ob.). you are win'¢ahna gi¢a¢é ka*b¢éga®. Ma” -akibana”, ki gahu¢ica”, Wajin’ga-da you tell me you send back I hope. Ma?-akibana®, and dahu¢ica’, Wajiiga- da ijin’ge, ki Han’ga-ckade, céna, wisi¢é-hna*"-ma™i. Ki ag¢i té’di a®cta™’b his son, and Haiiga-ckade, enough, I always remember you. And resend when you see me ome ‘f¢da¢ai ¢atcti. Uda"qti ma™hni” ctéctewa™, ¢iteqi 3 yi, wi" ¢a gi¢a-od. you prom- _ heretofore. Very good you walk even if, dfor if, to tell me send back. ised you Ki é m, edad hni’ @ fame i ¢iteqi ctéctewa™, eddda™ tijawaqti ahni” yi, Mwi"¢a gi¢a-ga. cama And _ hard for you even if, what very pleasant you have it if, totellme send back. These y fis Lys , Umiaha ckéde-hna"’-ma éducéhe-hna"-ma”-de ca™ wisi¢é-hna™-ma™i. I" ¢éqtt Omahas those who play regularly T usually join but yet Ti always, Sa you I at Bey, pl. ob.). glac n/ ctéwa™, ca™ wisi¢é-hna"-ma™ yi, i pi-maéji-hna®-ma” even if, yet LT always remember you when, Tam always sad. 15 18 518 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. NOTES. 517, 2. Wigaha® aka, 7. e., Unajit-ska, son of Cahie¢a, who had married 7¢-i¢e, the sister of He-waji¢a. . 517, 6. padé-gatb¢ir, the Ponka pronunciation of Taté-kahémni, a Dakota name, of which the (egiha equivalent would be “ yadé-gayiwitxe.” jadé-gaub¢i® is prob- ably the son of Unaji®-ska, as Wajinga is the child of Heqaga-naji*. 517, 13. gahu¢ica®, 7. e., gahe-u¢ica®, is a son of Bird-head (Wajinga-da). Hanga- ckade is the son of Ma*tecu-sinde-¢inge, who was a member of the Omaha Ma*¢inka- gaxe gens. Mateu-sinde-¢inge has resided with the Ponkas for many years, and his son has a name peculiar to the Ponka Wacabe gens. 517, 14-15. a™eta™b ‘i¢ad¢ai, in full, atcta™be ‘i¢a¢ai. TRANSLATION. Though we are doing very well while we are here, I think that we shall go to the Dakotas. My sister’s husband has three horses, two blankets, two hatchets, a calumet pipe, and plenty of wheat; so we have not suffered at all by staying here. You fare very well yonder where you are, and in like manner are we doing well. When we finish collecting our wheat from those who have given it to us, I think that we shall go to the Dakotas. My sister has given birth to a girl. Tate-kahomni always thinks of Wajinga. I wish to hear from you again about everything that has occurred. I desire to hear just how the very aged woman is. I wish to hear, too, about ge-wa‘u and her daughter. And even when I hear correctly about them, I always remember you, though I may not be able to accomplish anything. As for you, if you prosper, I will go to see you; and if you have a difficult time, you will come to see me. I, my very self, am always glad, whatever may be my condition; yet I always remember you. I hope that you will send me word about those three youths with whom I used to go: Ma»- akibana", gahu¢ica, and Hanga-ckade. I always remember you three. You promised me heretofore to visit me when I reached home. Send me word whether you are doing well or are in trouble. And even if you have a hard time, send me word if you have anything which is very pleasant. I always joi these Omahas in their games, but still, T always remember you. Even when I am very glad, I always feel sad when I think of you. CUDE-GAXE TO WE’S‘A-,AN’GA. February ailtowees Nikacitga amd ¢éama i"win‘ka'l b¢tigagti. Wa¢ate té 4f ugipiqti People ~~ the (sub.) these have helped me all. Food the tent very full ingixai. Can’ge eti wi édin’g¢a%i. I¢adig¢ai aka Mwin‘ka"qtia™i. Maja” they have Horse too one they have be- Agent the has helped me very much. Land made for me. stowed on me. (sub.) ke Spode ° pee Day & Abe pe f at cti i¢di¢ai aké a™fi ha; edada™ udji take’ eti wan'gi¢e a™ fi: ¢and‘a™ tai- too agent the has given. ; what T plant will, the too all he has you hearit in or- (sub.) tome (col. ob.) given to me: a LETTERS DICTATED BY OMAHAS AND PONKAS. 519 éga® waqi™ha cu¢éwiki¢é. A™ba¢é ¢izfja" Cda™iya b¢d, can’ge na™ba der that letter T cause him to send To-day your sister’s atthe Dako- I go, pony two it to you. daughter tas’ land . *n/ , : , n/ ¢ Oe yr , o, , waa qi’ ba™ ti¢ai éga®. Wabaxu wi™ fi¢a¢e itizé gdqa. Béé té& wabaxu wi't. tocallmeon have as. Letter one yousend at the ‘to that Igo when letter I give account of sent here here same time place. you. mine Awanaq¢i" qti b¢é hia. Gan'yi ag¢t yi, udji ti minke. Waha’’-¢ingé iya”’ Tam ina great hurry Igo And Icome when, I plant will I who. Waha"-¢inge his back grandmother , , S: , / ~~ é¢a"ba wa¢i" g¢i ga™¢a-gi. Cka™hna yi, wa¢i" e¢i ga ¢a-gi. her too having to come desire thou. You wish if, having tocome desire thon: them back them back NOTES. Cude-gaxe, commonly called “Smoke-maker,” was a member of the Ponka (ixida or Soldier gens, of which Ma*teu-wad¢ihi is the endl In the fall of 1878 he ese aped from Ponka Agency, Ind. T., with his immediate family, He-wa%ji¢a and Unaji®-ska, and arrived at the Omaha Agency in December, 1878. 518, 2. éding¢a%, 7. e., &/di in’g¢atl, from 6/di gig¢a"; synonym, i, to give. 519, 1. ¢ijija7, 7. ¢., Louis Roy’s wife, who was a Yankton woman. Cude-gaxe had married Louis Roy’s mother; and Wés‘a-janga’s wife was Cude-gaxe’s daughter by a former wife. 519, 35. Waha®-¢inge sometimes means ‘an orphan,” but here it is, perhaps, a proper name. TRANSLATION. All of these Indians have aided me. They have given me a horse, and have filled my tent with food. The agent has given me great assistance. He has given me land, and all the things for me to sow or plant. As I wish you to know this, I cause this letter to be sent to you. I am going to-day to your sister’s daughter, who is among the Dakotas at Yankton Agency. They have sent me an invitation, and have prom- ised to give me two horses. I give you a letter as I go. I goin very great haste. When I return, I will plant. Desire to come back with Waha”-¢iige and his grand- mother. If you wish it, desire to bring them back. CAN’GE-HI“Zf TO HIS BROTHER, WE’S‘A-,AN’GA. March, ee Jin¢cha, Monday tédi fe djiba uwib¢a cu¢éag¢ée. Edada® wi, ji"¢cha, Elder brother, Monday on the words afew I tell you Isend to you. What one, el brother, *n/ oy pea / y = feos rye AW ry iteqiqti-ma” cté a™¢in’ge. Niaci®ga uké¢i® wé¢ig¢a™ té ité¢a-ga; wage Thave it very hardforme even I have none. Indian mind the putitdown; whiteman . One ts A wé¢ig¢a® gaxa-ga. Niaci*ga wé¢ig¢a® juaji ¢i” ufka™ji-ga. Ucka™ ¢fuda® mind do. | Pe mae mind not up to the donot aid him. Deed good for the mark one who you eté té yiydxa-gi; hahada™ yiyixa-ga. Tyiga™¢ai aka tyu aka wa¢ita”- apt the(ob.) do for yourself; ready make yourself. Grandfather the principal the did not work 520 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. baji’qti cangahi té, ki qd¢a afigdgi tat té, wwawéci gaxe taf té giteqi; atallinour we Seed ity and back wearecom- will when, pay aaaee will the difficult case yonder, where again ing back for him; you are, ida" ewaji® angt angdyig¢a¢i" angdg¢i té ule ¢ingé té idarqtia™ te, af té. there- of his own = wo havingourselves wehavecome the words none the very goodin- will, nS said fore accord back about it deed Niacitga uké¢i" ke bgugagti gi¢a-baji; wage ké’ cti bgug a gi¢a-baji. aes are sad; white people the too are sad. Weét¢ig¢a® wi” re i, Heqdga-naji@ é¢a"ba, gdxe-hna™i-eh. Wia™ b¢a 8 5 s 2 Decision one youmake if, Heqaga-naji" he too, do ye it alone. T left you ag¢i té, i ¢a-maji’gti Wé¢ig¢a™ daxe té éga™qti ckaxai ka"b¢éga™. Waqi”ha ue ame when, I was very sad. Decision Imade the justso you make I hope. Letter pack it hnize yi, ug¢éqtcei waqi”ha ¢a"™ a™{ i¢d-ga. lt Kagéha Badize, ika- youtake when, very soon letter the give send here. Friend Battiste, Thave ° (ob.) me gewi¢é. Niaci*ga cé¢anka tcka® ca” tiwakan’-ga. Wage ama t‘an’gaq¢a” you for a Person those by you deed atany help them. White the fall hunt friend. rate people sub.) tédihi yi, wa¢ita™ ‘“i¢ai. it arrives when, to work have at about us promised. NOTE. 519, 8—520, 2. Ihiga™¢ai uju-. . . ai té. Caige-hi"-zi said that when Indian Com- missioner Hayt visited the Ponkas, and spoke to them in council, he told them that the Indian Bureau could not send them back to their own land, on account of the expense of the removal; but if any of them went back of their own accord, nothing would be said about it. Such was the interpretation of his speech, according to Cafiige-hi-zi; and perhaps there were others who understood it so. TRANSLATION. Elder brother, I send to you on Monday to tell you a few words. Elder brother, T have not even one thing which is very troublesome tome. Put down the mind of an Indian; take up the mind of a white man. Do not help the person whose plans are wrong. Make for yourself a way that tends to your advantage; make yourself ready. The President did no work at all when we reached the place where you are; and should we come back, it would be difficult for him to pay for the expense. There- fore he said that if we, of our own accord, brought ourselves back to this place, there should be no accusations, and it would be a very good thing. All the Indians are sad, and so are all the white people. Should you come to any decision, do you and Heqaga- naji® act upon it. I was very sorry to leave you when I came back. I hope that you will make the very decision that I made. When you receive the letter, give me one very soon. Friend Battiste, I consider you my friend. Aid those men with their undertaking. The white people promise to take up our case at the time of the fall hunt. LETTERS DICTATED BY OMAHAS AND PONKAS. Syl DUBA-MA’ GI" TO TENUGA-NIKAGAHT (MACDONALD.) March, 1879. Kagé, waqi”ha g¢i¢a¢é ga” P’tea™ ag¢i b¢ize ha. Ki waqi”ha ¢ana Younger letter you sent back the now T have T have o And letter you beg brother, (ob.) come home taken it tt, a”ba¢é dixe hi. Ki edéda® fuga tda*gti wi’ maja™ ¢é¢uadi ¢ingé as, to-day Imakeit . And what news very good one land at this place there is none éga". Maja” ¢an/di wacka™ té endqtci inijawa¢é té ¢6 ha. ypuwi'xe some- Land in the makingan the that only life-sustaining the that 5 Going around what. effort - is it mai” nfjaji etéga”. Ca”-hna" ga” wa¢ikega u¢ag¢a, ki, Cin'gajin'ga ¢anka walking notliving apt. Yet only s0 you were sick youtoldof and, hild the ones your own, who wi'ecte im taji, e¢é té, nin’de P’uda*. Ki endqtci-baji ta ak& ha; ci even one not dead to you when, heart good to me. And thatalone not aur tobe ; again me, Bai ) a™b Aji tédthi yi, i”cte ¢ajidé hnéga®. (~iéama nfikaci*"ga ditba g¢fi; day another itarrives when, for in- you are you go, These people some have at stance near it somewhat. come back , ; eo 1 ° . = . pe ita® o¢i; a“ba-waqtibe ¢Ab¢i" ag¢fi. Ki maja” ¢éguad? g¢ii te, wayl‘e now has sacred day three theyhave And _ land in this place they have as, to farm for come back; come back. P come back themselves wégat¢ai. Ky é/be nfkaci#ga uta” nadi da” be té'di, té giga” ajiwa¢é, ca” they wish it for And who person inaplace bee seeshim when, todie not to be desired for —_in fact them. tween him, nin’de-efpéjiwide hégaji. Cat éskana nié ¢i¢in’géqti maoni™ ka"b¢éga", apt to are che heart sad —_— not alittle. Now ohthat pain you have none yon walk LT hope, or him at Wakan'da ¢inké ¢igdxe yi. Hau. Ca” nikaci"ga ikigeawa¢é cti at‘a™, Deity theone hemakes if. 7 Now people T have them as too Ihave who for you friends plenty, caf sof di zs n/ f OT D fate Md om? 4 Oy : cm gajin ga wadaxe, a ‘ba¢é wisi¢ai. f-uji wiwija té me cté wa¢in gal. child I make them, to-day Firemen ben Household myown the pain even we have none. you (pl.). Ceta™ wab¢ita™-maji; a” ba¢é wamiske uaji ta minke ha. Nikaci"ga ama So far T have not worked; to-day wheat. Isow will Iwho 9 People the ¢éama b¢igaqti cka™i, a” ba¢é. Ki e-hna™ gété uwib¢a etéga", nikaci"ga these all stirring, to-day. And that only ane T tell you apt, people Ine ama cka™ ma™¢ii té e-hna” uwib¢a etéga", e-hna™ inijawadeé. the stirring walk the that only T tell you apt, that only life-sustaining. TRANSLATION. Younger brother, I have just come home, and have received the letter which you have sent home. And I make a letter to-day, as you have asked for one. There is, as it were, no very good news in this land. The only thing by means of which a man can make his living is to do his best with the land. He who continues wandering is not apt to improve.- When, in telling of your sickness, you said, ‘‘Not even one of my children has died,” my heart felt good. But that will not be the only thing; on 12 6 522 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. some other day, you will, as it were, go to sickness when it will be close to you. Some of these Ponkas have come back. They have been home for three weeks. And since they have returned to this land, the Omahas-wish them to farm for themselves. Now when a person sees any one unsettled he considers that as undesirable for the other, in fact, as something which must cause him to feel great sorrow for the other. I hope that God may cause you to be without any sickness whatever. I have many persons among you Ponkas for my friends; I have made them my children, and to-day I remember them. We have had no sickness in my household. I have done no work up to this time; but I will sow my wheat today. All of the people are stirring to-day. And that is the only thing which I will be apt to tell you: the people are stirring. That is the only way in which they can get their living. GAGE-NA*PAJI TO ,ATAN'GA-NAJI® JIN’GA. March, 1879. Wagqi"ha g¢i¢age ¢a” b¢ize ha. Cin’gajin’ga wiwfja tida™qti uhna Letter you have the T have Child my own very good you told sent home (ob.) taken it it ti¢a¢é té, nan’de igi’ uda". Ciide-gaxe amé Caa” aya agai; ceta” ag¢i-baji. you have as, heart mine is good for Cude-gaxe itis he tothe Dakotas went; so far he has not sent here me. who come back. Ma"tct-naji® g¢i té, a” ba-waqutbe ¢ab¢i"; ca” uda™qti dha” wayfie¢ita™ 2 5 ? ; g Matteu-naji® came when, sacred day three; yet very good Tv they will work back ti ama. Ca™ gi-uji ¢i¢tja té wi"’ecte ceta™ ¢at’aji té nan’de i¢i’uda”™ qti- for themselves. Now house- yourown the even one sofar youhave as heart I have mine very hold not died good ma™. Ki wi cti égima"; i-uji wiwija tidatqti andji. Q@éama nikaci"ga indeed. And I too Idothat; household my own very good I stand. These people ami uda™qti wayig¢ita’i; tida™qtia” ti amd. Ga¢a™ waqi”ha euhi té’di, the very good work for themselves; very good they will be. That one letter it reaches when, (sub.) you wa¢ita® uika™ a"¢in’géqti-ma™; cin’gajin’ga wiwija wandq¢i"qti gi agaji-ea. work to help I have none at all; child my own hurrying very tobe command him much coming back him. TRANSLATION. I have received the letter which you have sent home. I was glad at heart because you sent hither to tell me that my child was very well. Cude-gaxe went to the Dakotas, and he has not yet returned. It has been three weeks since Standing Bear came back. The men of his party will work very well for themselves. I was very glad to learn that not even one of your household had died. And I, too, am so; ~T and my household continue very well. These people work very well; they will be sure to prosper. When that letter reaches you, I shall still be without any one to assist me with my work. Command my son to be coming home in a very great hurry. LETTERS DICTATED BY OMAHAS AND PONKAS. 523 HUPE(:A® TO CEKL March, 1879. A™ba¢é wab¢ita"-qti-ma™ tai minke. Ki wisi¢éga” wawidaxu cu¢cage. To-day I work very hard will Iwho. And asIremember I write to you Tsend to you. you about several things / : s is ae seitelccni/s Say) =i , (iéama Uma™ha"™ ama _ ¢isi¢é-hna™i; u¢ikiai égipia’i. Ca Pan‘ka ama These Omahas the always remember they talk it is pleasant Now Ponkas the (sub.) you; with you to them. (sub.) lee hake: . Hae / , : nN. , re ! ag¢fi gé ud¢i¢a-hna’i wind‘a™. A™ba¢é wija”be ka™b¢éga®. Ki ca” have the they have told of T have heard To-day I see you T hope. And in fact come back you of you. . ) = : / ery, =i) , : / a wisi¢é yi, wija™ be ka™b¢éga™ Can’ge wa¢at‘a®, dda" wija™’ be ka™b¢éga”. Iremem- when, Isee you T hope. Horse you have therefore Isee you T hope. ber you plenty of them, Uma™ha™ amd maja” ejaf ¢a” wa¢ita"-md wacta™be ¢a™ i”tea® ataca™ Omahas the land their the those who worked yousawthem in the now beyond it (sub.) i past wat¢ita", gf¢éqtia”; dda" uwib¢a cu¢éa¢de Wayig¢ita® wéga%¢ai éga” c J c o DS ¢ | Cc ) c Cc da / ¢: age c | e¢ c oie ie p* , work, are very glad; therefore I tell you T send to you. To work for them- they wish forus as, selves a . / Coe panies , , , . ~ waqtahi, eéhi, yan’de, na pa-jin’ga, hazi, ca b¢uga wa‘i ‘i¢ai E eéna fruit tree, apple plum tree, cherry, grape, in fact all to give they That enough tree, us promise. . / So | Oe . oa , Pal uwib¢a. (land‘a" téga" cu¢éa¢e. Ci uma™¢inka ¢¢ maja” agi” nikaci"ga T tell you. You hearit inorder Isendtoyou. Again season this land having people that b¢tgaqti y¢éska-mi™ ga ékina Wwagiji ta ama. all cow : inequal they will put them in. shares TRANSLATION. T shall work very hard to-day. And as I think of you, I write about some things and send the letter to you. These Omahas always think of you; it is pleasant for them to talk with you. I have heard about you, as the Ponkas who have come back have been telling about you. I would like to see you to-day. And when I think of you I hope to see you. You have plenty of horses; therefore I hope to s‘e you. The Omahas are now working much more of their land than when you saw them at work. They are very glad; therefore I send to tell you. As the President wishes them to work for themselves, he has promised to give them fruit trees, apple trees, plum trees, cherry trees, grape vines, in fact, all kinds. That is enough for me to tell you. I send to you that you may hear it. And during this year they will make an equal distri- bution of cows among the men who have farms. 12 12 le) INGE es Mr. Frank La Fléche, an Omaha who was referred to in the Introduction, came to Washington in August, 1881, having been appointed to a clerkship in the office of the Commissioner of Indian Affairs. The collector wished to obtain Mr. La Fléche’s assistance in revising the proof-sheets of this volume; but he did not meet with much success till over two hundred of the preceding pages were in type. As Mr. La Fléche’s corrections and alternative readings are of considerable value, it has been thought best to publish them in this Appendix. The parts of the Appendix for which the collector is responsible are followed by ‘‘D.” ERRATA. The following words occur so frequently in the first two hundred pages of the texts that a general reference to them will suffice :— : 25, 3; 80,17; et passim. For “Adita,” read “a¢ija.” 10,18; et passim. “Atha, yes.” When it means simple assent, read “A™ha™;” but when it implies consent, the Omahas say, ‘“A*ha?’.” 107, 13; et passim. For “a*i¢a-gi,” read ‘‘a"4 i¢a-ga, hand it to me;” frum the verb, ‘i i¢6.” 9,7; et passim. For “‘Abae,” read “abae.” 52, 4; et passim. Translate “¢é¢a-biama,” by ‘sent off, they say.” 18, 10; 229, 7; et passim. For “¢6 te ama,” read “¢e té ama.” 148, 2; 211, 16; et passim. For ‘“6¢6,” indeed, read “ é¢e.”—D. 111, 16; et passim. For “éyii té/di,” read “‘e ii té/di.” 10, 3; et passim. For “gan’ki,” read “ gan’yi,” from “ga"” and “yi.” 9, 2; 10, 8; et passim. Ha, the masculine oral period, 1s supplied by Mr. La Fléche after many imperatives and other clauses. While the collector is familiar with this usage, he has good reasons for believing that such a usage is optional with the speaker. In like manner, the Dakota oral period “do” is obsolescent. 35, 9; 36, 1; et passim. For “Hat,” read “Hau.” When “Hau” is not addressed to a person, it marks the beginning of « paragraph, in which case the following words in the text and interlinear should begin with capitals. See 71, 15.—D. 16, 1; 16,4; ef passim. For “hégajiqti,” read “hégaji’qti.”—D. 46, 8; et passim. For “‘i‘u,” read ‘‘iu.” 57, 9; 210, 16; et passim. For “i i¢a-ga” or “i ¢a-ga,” read “ii i¢a-ga,” from “c gi i¢é.” 80, 4; et passim. For “In/daké,” read “ Hin/daké.” 24,1; et passim. For “kaii’ge,” read “ yan’/ge;” so for “kan’/géqtci,” read “ yan’ge- qtci.” 525 526 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. 62, 4; 62,5; et passim. For “kagéha,” read “kagéha.”—D. 28, 10; 28, 11; e¢ passim. For ‘‘nan/‘de,” heart, read “nan‘de;” but ‘“nan/de” signifies the side of a tent or lodge. 13, 5; ét passim. For “‘paha*, to arise,” as from sleep, read “ daha.” 16, 3; 16,8; et passim. For “ta,” a future interrogative, read “ ta.” 13, 12; 44,9; et passim. For ‘‘tar¢ir’,” read “qa” ¢ir.” 24, 3; et passim. For “‘tan‘de,” ground, read *qan/de.” 102, 2; 102, 4; et passim. For “jiga™ha,” read “giga™ha.”—D. 17, 16; et passim. For “tian¢in’ge,” read “tan¢in’ge,” from “tia” and “¢ingé.” 168, 14; et passim. For “u‘abae,” read “ uabae.” 32, 10; et passim. For “upé,” read “udé;” for “upa-biama,” read “uda-biama;” for “‘upa-bi ega™’,” read ‘“‘uda-bi ega®’.” 17, 5; et passim. For “ug¢tiqaha,” read “ ig¢uqaha.” 112, 14; 247, 13; et passim. For ‘‘iis‘u,” read ‘ tisu.” 24, 6; et passim. For ‘‘‘u,” to wound, read ‘u.” 26, 17; et passim. For *“‘waxaé-biama,” read “ waxa-biama.” 15, 12; et passim. For “wiugan’ga,” read “wiutan’ga.” This is obsolescent, “‘watan/ga” having become the common form. NOTES. 9, 6-7. Gé égima" ca”ea". Supply “ha, 4-biamé Macteit/ge-i” aka.” , said, they say Rabbit the (sub.). 9, 7. Join the two sentences thus: “Egi¢e Usni aka abae -a¢é “i¢a-biama yi, Negiha, cub¢é ta minke ha, 4-biama,” ete. 9, 11. Omit “a¢a-biama yi;” and change the second ‘aka,” in line 12, to “ama,” as the Rabbit was moving. Change “Usni aka,” 10, 3, to “Usni ama,” for the same reason. Other examples of this use of “ama” after the subject are as follows: After “Mactein’ge,” 15, 5; 15, 11; 16, 12; 32,12; and 36,8. Arter “wa‘tjinga,” 17, 10. After “iquepa,” 21, 5. 10, 11-12. “Anga¢e tai, Let us (all) go,” should be changed to the dual, “Anga¢e te ha, Mactcin’ge-i7.” 11, 1. After ‘“Mactcin’ge-i™ aka,” supply, “Gan’yi éga™ uné a¢a-biamé yi,” And so hunting he went, they say when, making one sentence with “wi"’ i¢a-b ega”’, t’é¢a-biama.” 11, 3. Supply the feminine oral period, ‘‘hé,” after “ a¢ai.” 13, 7. For ‘“a™aqai a¢ai te at,” read “ataqa a¢ai té-na™.” 13, 8. For “Ata® ja™’ tada®’,” read “ Héta® aja™’ tada®’.” 13, 9. Supply “¢i"” after “niaciga,” and “aka” after “ Mactein’ge.” , pp) $4, 13, 10. For “ukinacke,” read “‘uyinacke;” and for “ha” té,” read “ha” té.” 14, 2. As “ Mi*’ ¢a*,” which was given at first, could not refer to the Sun-god, but +} ? b—) b) > ? to the sun which we see in the sky, Mr. La Fleche has substituted “ Mit’ aka.” The former could not agree with ‘“aia¢a-biama.” Were it the subject of the verb, the sen- tence would read, ‘* Mit’ ¢a® ma™ciaha i¢é ama.” 15, 1. Read: “Mactein’ge ama iya” é¢a"ba @di akama, gig¢e jukig¢e.” Or, they were together. “Mactein’ge aka @di akama yi, iya” ¢inké gig¢e jugig¢e akama.” Rabbit the (sub.) there he was when, his the (ob.) dwelling he was with his, they sitting, they say grandmother in a lodge say. APPENDIX. 527 15, 3. “ Wasibe nikagahi ¢inké” would be followed by “yi hé”; but as the phrase is “qii hé,” we must read, ‘“ Wasabe nikagahi aka.” 15, 6. For “ yijébe &/di,” ete., read “pijébe té/di a-inaji-bi yi, xagé gaxa-biamé Mactein’ge aka.” “Gaxa-biama, he made it, they say,” should be distinguished from “oaxa-biama,” referring to turning grass by hitting it, or by blowing on it, and from “oaqa-biama,” referring to one who outruns another. 15, 10. Read “ Beige Mactein’ge ¢inké 6/di g¢im ¢inké ama.” 15, 11. Supply the classifier ete after ‘‘qijebe.” 16, 4. “Ede niaci®ga,” ete. Read: “Bde Maci*ga béigaqti ug¢a‘a‘a-biama.” 16, 8-9. “Aqta® Péwatade ta. * Pegs té pibaji hé.”—Or, ‘‘Aqta* Péwada¢e tada. TWé¢e u¢ieii hé: How is it possible for you to kill them? They are hard to kill.” 16, 10. Supply “aka” after “ Wa‘tjinga.” 16, 15; 18, 4. Supply “ama,” the pl. sub., after “‘ Wasdbe.” 17, 4. Supply “i,” the mv. ob., after “‘Mactein’ge.” 17, 6. Omit “té/di.” 17, 9. Change the end of the line to “te’é¢i¢ai, 4-biama.” ee eee Supply “aka,” the sub., after ““Wasabe”; and for “ Ata™ ja",” read “Bata® aja” & i 18. Supply ‘‘aka,” the sub., after ‘“Mactcin’ge.” 18, 1. For “* Wasabe,” read “* Wasabe-ma, the Black bears.” 20, 1. Read: “‘ Mactcin’ge aka.” 20, 2. Or, “wakan/dayi¢ai éga*, as he makes himself a god.” 20, 6. Capitalize the first words in the text and interlinear. For “pai,” read “pa-i.” 21, 1. Supply “aka,” the sub., after “waijiiga;” and capitalize “ke” and “come.” 21, 8. Supply “yi,” when, after “ga teqti.” 21, 9. For “ikagewa¢a¢é ama,” read “ikagewa¢a¢é ama ¢a™,” referring to a single Pawnee. Corresponding changes should be made in the translation, page 22: “O grandchild! a young Pawnee, your friend, met me and took me to his erie. As he made me eat, I did not come home.” 21, 11. For “wakéga, 4-biama,” read ‘““wakéga ama, she was sick, they say.” 23, 2. For “‘kide,” read “kéde,” the recl. ob., when. 23, 4. For “égati édega",” read “éean édéga™.” 23, 12. For “éonin” read “oni,” you are. 23, 19. For “najit/i-ga,” read “najin’-@4,” stand thou. 24, 4. Omit “aka” after “ yaqti-gikidabi.” 24, lines 4-6 of translation. Read thus: “And when paqti-gikidabi thought, ‘At last they will be apt to kill them!’ he went thither.” The last line should read, “They cut it up, and divided it between them.” 25, 4. ‘“Unai” should be rendered, ‘“‘ Were sought.” 25, 5. For “‘ibisande ata-qti,” fea “ibisandea4-qti, pressing close against.” 26, 3. For “ama ama,” read “a™ma ama.”—Frank La Fliche. I have suspected that there was another form of this word, judging from the Dakota equivalent “u"ma (uyma);” but I never heard it among the Ponkas. Compare nija and ni™ya; bija and buja"; béni and béni®; macaka and maca"ka", ete—D. For “ pahaciaya,” read “nahaciagata®.” 26, 9. Omit “6,” and read “Awate,ata",” whence? 528 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. 26, 10. For “¢iadi ga™ a™¢izai,” read “¢iadi a™¢ize ha”; as “am ¢izai” requires the classifier ‘‘ak4” or “ama” after the subject. 26, 19. For “u¢iqpa¢é,” read “ad¢iqpa¢é, making them fall by pulling them.” 30, 22. For “O elder brother, of what sort is it when you do that?” read: “*O elder brother, how is it that you are so”? 32, 1. For ‘‘iya™ aka,” read “iya™ ¢inké.” 32, 5-6. For “Mactcin’ge &/di ahi-bi yi,” read ‘‘ Mactcin’ge @/di hi yi.” 32, 9. For “iba-ha®/’-bi,” read “ibaha®/-bi.” 33, 4. Translate “etai éde” by “should have.” 33, 8. For “gahé ké b¢aza¢a-biama,” read “ gahé ké b¢aza¢e ama.” For “u¢éwi"- wa¢ai,” read ‘“u¢éwir¢a-biama, he collected it, they say.” 33, 16. For “cehé,” read “céhe,” and for “da"ba-g4,” read ‘‘da’ba-ga.” 35, 2. For “wé¢ixuxti,” read “wé¢ixuxt-hi.” (Other Omahas, however, say, ‘“wé- ¢ixtxu-hi.”—D.) 36, 1. For “naji”-ga,” read “naji"i-ga, stand ye.” 36, 5. Translate each “té” by ‘“ when.” 36, 10. As the subject of this sentence is “wami” instead of “*Mactcin’ge,” the sentence should read thus: “ Mactcin/ge wami ma ké jide ké aina, ¢iqai te.” “Jide ké amama” would refer to a line of red objects in motion. 38, 2. Omit “4-biama” after ‘‘ Uhu+!” 38, 3. Supply “¢a”cti,” heretofore, after ‘“ka™b¢éga™.” 38, 5. Omit ‘4-biamA” after “‘ Kagé.” 38, 6. Omit “Kagé, 4-biama.” (But we have such a use in English: “ My friend,” said he, ‘my friend, I have something to say to you.”—D.) 38, 7. Omit “A-biama” after “An‘kaji.” 38, 8. For “witci tee” read “witci te,” the regular pronunciation. 38, 9. Supply “yi,” when, after i¢ai”; and omit “a-biama” after “jin¢éha.” 38, 10. Omit “ji'¢éha.” 38, 11. Omit “ak4” after “Ictinike.” 38, 14. Omit “ama,” after “ Mactcin’ge.” 39, 2. Omit “aka.” 39, 14; 39, 20. For “Ma*¢i"/-bagi a¢i” mama,” read “ Ma™¢i"/-bagi a" mama.” 39, 18; 40, 3; 40, 7. Omit “ama” after “Ietimke.” 40, 20. Supply “4,” before ‘‘a-biama. It is equivalent to “aha.” 43, 3. Read, ‘‘Uhe a"wa"¢a maig¢ii’-ga.” 44, 16. For “Ga®-hninké,” read “Gaé-ninké, You who are that one out of sight.” 44, 16. For “ébécté,” read “ébé ctéwar.” 44, 18. For “g¢im minké,” read “ag¢i’ minké.” 45, 6. For “uddga®ji oninké,” read “u¢aqga" oninkeé.” 45, 8. For “égazqti” read ‘“‘égatqtina?’.” (Or, “éga%qti-hna”’.”—D.) 46, 2. Omit “4-biam4” atter “dtia¢a™.” 46, 10. Supply “aka,” the sub., after “ijin’ge.” 50, 3. For “g¢é ¢inké,” read “¢é¢inké,” this st. ob. 50, 3-4. Read: “Ga™ kida-bi ega™, kisandé/qti i¢a™’¢a-biama. Ugqpa¢e i ama x, uja ama.” (The sentences in the text are correct, but Nuda"-axa gave short ones be- cause he was dictating.—D.) APPENDIX. 529 50, 4; 50, 10; et passim. For “yuepa¢a®” and “yhicepa¢a”,” read “y;ucpéha” and “quepaha,” as the speaker was a male. 50, 7-8. Read: “Wuhu+‘a! ime‘a4ge the ga™¢a nahi" 4ha*, 4-bi ega’, wa¢aha t& g¢ionud4é-biamaé b¢uga.” 50, 9. Supply “Gan’yi,” the introductory “And,” before ‘ q¢abé.” 51, 5. Supply “yi,” when, after “¢é ama.” 52, 7. Supply ‘¢inké,” after “wa‘t.” 52,9; 52, 19. Read: “‘Hit+! 4-bi ega™, ¢aquba-biama.” 53, 8-9. Read: “Da?’ba-bi yi, Hit+! 4-bi ega®’, ¢aquba-biama.” 52, 17; 53, 7; 53, 17. Translate “u¢iqpa¢a-bikéama” by ‘‘had been caused to fall and lie there, they say.” 58, 11. Omit “4-biama.” 54,1. For “i’¢i" agi te,” read “in’¢it iwaki¢é te ha, let him cause them to bring it to me.” This should be the reading of 55, 1. 57,1; 57, 10. Supply ‘“‘aka” after “Si¢émaka®.” 57, 5. Omit the first “ja™-biama.” 57, 7. Supply the feminine oral period, ‘‘hé,” after “té k&.” 58, 3-4. Read: ena ge itégi¢ai gé uji-biamd Gjiha ké.” Beans they piled the he put in, sack the. theirs (scattered) they say 58, 7. Supply “ama” after “¢ab¢ir.” 58, 8. For “agii té,” read “gi té.” 58, 14. Supply “ké/di,” in the, after ‘“ Qade.” 59, 2. For “a¢aza-biama,” read “‘i¢aze ama.” 59, 35-36. For ‘collecting the beans he. put them in a sack,” read “che put in the sack their beans which they had piled up here and there.” 60, 2. Read: “Ictinike &/di ¢é ama,” or “‘Ictinike ama 6/di a¢4-biama.” 60, 3. Supply “yi,” if, after “‘ Hata" 4ma.” 61, 6. “yangaqti ¢a¢incé,” or “ FaNgaqti-mace, Ye who are very large.” 62, 1. For “ Wab¢até te’ya,” read “‘ Wab¢ate tada™, on account of my eating them.” 62, 9. For “¢aqta-biama, they bit it, they say,” read “¢ata-biama, they ate it, they say.” 62, 18. Omit “aka” after “ Ictinike.” 63, 3. Supply “ama” after ‘‘ Nikaci®ga,” and ‘“ak4” after “Ictinike.” 63, 13. For “¢ingé’qtci,” read “ ¢i¢ingé/qtci, you have none at all.” 63, 15. For “tabada®,” read “tada™.” 63, 20. Supply “aka” after ‘Ictinike.” 71, 15. For ‘han, é ga®’-ama,” read ‘Hau. E ga®’ ama, {| While moving, some time after that occurrence.” 72, 5. Omit the first “4-biama.” 72, 7. Supply “ama,” the sub., after “A™pa®.” Read “niaci®ga-ma,” the men; so also in line 8. 72, 13. For “¢iza-bi,” read “ ¢iz4-biama.” 72, 14. For “‘jin’ga,” read ‘jin’ga-ma,” the small ones (pl. ob.). 75, 4. Omit “égihe ¢é¢é.” 75, 5. For “‘ma*¢i*’-biama,” read “ g¢i™ ama, he sat, they say ;” as he could not walk when confined in the tree. VOL VI——34 530 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTUS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. 75, 6. Omit “fg¢tita wé¢é yi,” and supply, after “watt ama,” “wé¢s ahi-bi lea joining this to the next sentence. 75, 7; 75, 10. For “ci,” again, read “yi,” when. 75, 7. For “ti-biama,” read ‘ti ama.” 75, 8. For wai"/-biama,” read “waiti’-biama.” 75, 10. Supply “ké” after “sin‘de.” 75, 13. Supply “aka” after ‘“ Ictinike.” 75,17. Supply “am4” after “Ictinike.” 76, 14. Supply “té” after “daq¢uge.” | 79, 16. Supply “ega™,” having, after ‘‘a¢i*’-bi.” 79, 17. Supply “cti,” too, after “ké;” and read “a¢i’-biamé” for “agi™’-bi.” 80, 14. After qinfeapiqtt? supply “hé té gaqaqaqti-bi.” horn the branching very (pair) much, they say 80, 17. For “¢inké,” read “aka.” 80, 18. Read: “&/di ahi-bi yi, &/di g¢i-biama, when he arrived,” ete. 81, 8. For “aigaxai ada,” read “atigaxai-da™,” we do it, when. 83, 1. For “ta™ wang¢a” e,” read “ta™wang¢a™’-ma,” the villages or nations. 84, 8. For “e¢éga" éga",” read “e¢éga*-bi ega™.” 84, 10. For “tkiz4-biam4,” read “tkiza ama.” 84, 12. For “wayu ¢iona”i ké iki¢é-hna™-biama,” read “wayu ¢iona™i a iki¢a- biam4, they found by accident the awls which had been dropped.” 84, 14. “‘s&ti™hai,” in jive places. 84, 15-16. Read: “Fgi¢e ma¢e ama yi, nijinga na” ba na”’-biama.” Atlength writer they when, boy two grown, they say. say 85, 1. For “‘A¢askabe d¢a-biama,” read “A¢askabe¢a-biama, they made it stick;” and for “Ama,” the other, read “ama?” or “a™ma.” 85, 15. For “wahtita¢i",” read “man/dé.” 87, 14. Supply “ga™,” as, before “pi.” 88, 4. “‘ti‘a®/t‘a", there is a cause, blame.” 96, 1. For “ké” read “yi,” when. 96, 8. For “gaxd-bi ega™,” read “gidxa-bi ega™, having made it for him, they say.” 96, 11. Omit “aké” after “‘Ictinike.” 97,5; 97, 7; 97, 10. For “ga"tégat,” read “ga™tega.” 97, 7. For “waonize te,” read “‘onize te, you may take it.” 97, 14; 97,17. For “jingé-baji,” read “jin’ga-baji.” 97, 18. For “watibagiqti,” read “wa*/ibagi’qti.” 99, 1. Read: “Iig¢a"-sit-snéde Miyasi céna*ba akikip4-biama.” 99, 7. For “Ag¢i® te hi,” read “Ag¢i-biama, he sat on him, they say.” 99, 8. “pamakide” or “pama™kide.” 99, 13. Translate “aka” by “the ones who.” 100, 4. For “6 wawagiké-biama,” read “é wawagik4-bi ega™.” 100, 7. For “Agig¢i*’-da*,” read “‘Agig¢i*’-bi ega®’.” 100, 15. Omit “ ¢inké.” 101, 1. For “na‘a™i,” read “na‘a”’-bi.”—D. 102, 13. of translation. Supply ‘‘cwm ea” after “mane.” APPENDIX. 531 103, 6. After “Akiag¢4-biam4” insert the following: “Ki Miyasi akaé ubahaja And Coyote the to the side (sub.) (of the path) ua™si 4id¢a-biam4. Ada® biona™ Akusan/de 4id¢a-biamé yentiga ama.” leaping had gone, they There- missing far beyond had gone, they Buffalo- the say. fore him in passing say bull (sub.). For “éska"b¢éga",” read “éska® eb¢éga*, it might be, I think.” 103, 13. Supply “ama” after “ pentiga.” 104, 7; 104, 12. Supply ‘“‘am4” after “‘ pentiga jin’ga.” 104, 10. Supply ‘‘4,” the interrogative sign after “cka™ na.” 104, 13. For “‘jaha-bi,” read “jahaé-bi-dé, when he thrust at it, they say.” 107, 1. Read :— “Waha™ ¢icige aie iya™ jagig¢e akama. yyatha, 4ii ¢a4 b¢é te, a-biamaé.” 8 Orphan t) his was with his, they Grand- vil- tothe Igo will, said he, they (sub.) grand- say. mother, lage say. mother 107, 2. Supply “4-biam4 iya™ ak4,” after “@aji-a hé;” and “4-biamé Waha?¢i- cige ak4” after “b¢é ta minke.” Join the next sentences, thus: ‘“ E’/ya a¢a-bi ega™, qfi ¢an/di ahi-biama.” 107, 4. After “a¢in’ ti¢ai-gi” supply ‘4-biama,” referring to the men. ‘“ Mactcin’ge ¢ida™ be ti ha” was said to the head-chief by his attendants. Then the head-chief gave his orders to the people: “Ké, a¢i™ gfi-gi,” etc., ending with “Bgaxe i¢a™¢ai-gi;” after which supply “4-biam4é nikagahi aka.” 107, 5. The next words were said to the Rabbit by the chief: “Ké, wa¢atcigaxe taté hi, eg4-biam4é Mactcin’ge, Come, you shall dance, said he to the Rabbit.” 107, 6. Read: “Ké, iv quyai-ga, 4-biama Mactciil’/ge aka.” 107, 7. After “oni” ha” supply “4-biamé nikaci#ga am4,” as the men said that to the Rabbit. ; 107, 9. “Egaxe i¢a”¢ai-gi. Gai/yi Anasdi-gi hi” is not as good as “Bgaxe i¢a™ ¢a- bAda® 4naséi-gi ha.” See “bada™” in the Dictionary. 107, 14. For “¢é¢é yi,” read “i¢é¢a-bi ega™’.” 107, 15. For “Uar¢in’ge ¢andji*,” read “U‘ar¢iigé ¢andjiti.” 108, 1. Frank La Fléche has returned to the regular pronunciation ‘“ wajin’ga.” 108, 4. For “digda¢a-biamamaé,” read “diga¢a améma, carrying on his arm—was, as he moved, they say.” 109, 3. Read: “Ki Waha¢icige aké kida-biama yj, t?é¢a-biama.” 110, 6. For “ wéucii,” read “ wiucii;” and for ‘ wab¢i™ wit,” read “ wab¢inwit.” 110, 7. Supply “ak4” after ‘“ Wa‘tjiiga.” 110, 20. Change the first word, “‘ta™,” to “¢inké,” to agree with “-bi¢inké-ama” that follows, implying that she was placed in a sitting attitude. 111, 10. For “niti¢ica,” read “néu¢ica®.” 111, 18. For “ébéi té,” read “é&bé ite.” - 112, 15. Supply “aka” after ‘“‘Cinuda®,” which he gives as “‘Cinuda.” See note on 26, 3. 116, 3-4. For “¢é ama yi,” read ‘‘a¢4-biama yi,” to agree with the following “i¢a- biama.” For “¢izé ama,” read “ ¢iz4-biam4,” having for its subject “néjiiga” under- stood. 117, 1. Supply “¢a®” after “wabig¢eze jin’/ga.” 117, 5. Supply ““am4” after “ Niaci“ga,” as it refers to all the Indians, 117, 18. Supply “ak4é” after “nijitiga.” 532 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MY'THS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. 118, 1-2. Change “kag4” and “kagé” to “kagéha,” my friend. (But I have heard two or three say “kaga.”—D.) 118, 9. Supply the interrogative “a” after “‘wédaxe taté.” 118, 11. Read: “ijaje ¢ada-bi ega™, Ni-aha-ma™¢i"-4!” ete. 118, 13; 118, 14; et passim. ‘“ Aki-biama” may be translated by “reached there again, they say.” This is a secondary meaning. 119, 8. Supply “aka” after “Nujinga.” 120, 1. Supply “¢iiké” after each “ijan’ge,” and “¢a"” after “tan wang¢a™.” 120, 16. Supply “¢a™” after “ta” wang¢a”.” 121, 10. Supply “yi,” when, after “ aki-bi.” 122, 15. Joseph La Fléche gave me, “¢éze ¢a™, the tongues;” but his son Frank says that ‘‘¢éze ¢a®” means ‘‘the one tongue,” and that we must say “¢éze g&é” for “the tongues.” According to analogy, rank is correct.—D. 124, 15. Change “ag¢i” to “ag¢ii ha.” 125, 11. As several soldiers or policemen were addressed, read: “‘ahni™ cki tai ha,” instead of the singular, “‘ahni™ cki te.” 126, 1. Change “‘g¢i’ té” to “ g¢i™’-biama.” 126, 9. Supply “amaé” after “wandace.” 131, 1. Read :— Waha™¢icige ak4 iha™” i¢adi e¢a™ba git’a-biama yl, igan’ge ¢inké jaigig¢s- -biama. Orphan the his his he too died for him, when, his the one —_he was with her, (sub.) mother father they say sister who they say. 181, 3. Supply “aka” after “ Waha*¢icige.” 132, 14. Supply “aka” after “nijinga.” 182, 16. Change the first part of the line to “‘maqa?-biam4. Ki jég¢a?-biam4.” 138, 16. Supply “aka” after ‘“ 7e-mi?’ga.” 133, 17. For “‘igia*he,” read ‘‘iji‘a™he.” 133, 18. Supply “‘aké” after “wa‘i.” 134, 2. Supply “¢inké” after “7 e-jin’ga.” 134, 5. Supply “ta?” after ‘“Ictinike.” 134, 11. For “‘a¢4-biama,” read “ag¢a-biaina.” 134, 12. For “ama a¢ai,” read “ ¢i" ¢6.” 134, 16; 134, 21; 1385, 5. For “ama” read “ ¢in.” 135, 17. Supply ‘“‘ta®” after “ 7e-sa” jinga.” 135, 20. Supply “ké,” the recl. ob., after ‘ 7,e-mi"’ga.” 136, 1. “ ye-mi’ga ké ¢icpacpa ¢iNgé/qti gaxa-biama,” or “je-mi"’ga ké ¢i¢ii’gé- qtia™’-biama4,” the latter meaning, “They reduced to nothing at all the body of the female buffalo.” 136, 13. Supply “wi,” one, after “ékiga™qta.” 136, 17. Change “‘¢izai t&” to “¢iz4-biama.” : ie 4, Supply “ké,” the long object, after ‘‘Maja™,” as “Ahe” conveys the idea of ength. 141, 6. Change “ A-ig¢i"/-biam4ma” to “ A-ig¢i" amaéma.” 144, 19. Change “na™péhirqti-t’é etéga™ ¢anka ama” to “na™pehi® t’é tégatqtia™ 4 “hungry todie very apt ¢anka ama.” the ones they say.” 147, 1. Change “édedi-amama” to “édedi-¢a® ama.” 147, 4. Change “Nu aké” to “Nu aka,” APPENDIX. 533 149, 5. Supply “¢i2” after “¢iyicka.” 149, 12. Supply “ama” after “‘ijin’ge.” 149, 16. Change “djtib inahi” hi” to “djib inahi® 4ha®.” 150, 10. Supply “ké” after “¢éde.”—D. 151, 2. Supply “yf,” when, after “Aka®-bi.” : 151, 5. Change “q¢aje-hna’-bi” to “q¢aje-hna”-biama.” 151, 9. Change “¢é¢ai” to “¢é¢a-biama.” 152, 18. Read: “Ci gate ama yi, yandé.” 152, 19. Change “e¢éga® éga®” to “e¢éga™-bi ega™.” 153, 3. Supply “aké” after “7,é-wa‘ujid/ga.” 154, 2; 154, 7. Supply “yf,” when, after “égasani.” 154, 13. Supply “¢i®” after “niacitga.” 154, 15. Supply “am4” after the second “ Wa‘ijifiga.” 156, 1. Change “ati té” to “ati-bi yi: he came, they say—when.” 156, 5. Supply “yé” after “‘hinqpé.” 162, 6. Change “snédeqti” to “snédeaqti.” 162, 8. Insert ‘ ta,” the classifier, after “nijitiga.” 162, 9. Insert “wi,” one, after “ cil’ gajin’ga.” 163, 5; et passim. Change “haajifiga” to “ haji’ ga.” 163, 6. Read: “sdsaqtia™” am4” and “fida®qtia” ama.” Omit “e.” 163, 8. Omit the second “égi¢e.” 163, 9. Insert the classifier “ké” between “hdjifiga” in the preceding line and “co gaségat.” F 168, 10. Omit the “ci” before “na™’;” and “Na® am4” in the next line; making the text read thus: “Ci nijifiga ida¢ai ¢iiké na™ am yi, ci agiahi-biam4.” 163, 13. Omit “ci” at the end of the line. 163, 14. Insert the classifier “ta®” after “nijifiiga” at the beginning of the line. Omit “ci nijiiga” at the end of the line. 163, 15. Omit the classifier “¢in” at the beginning of the line. 163, 16. Insert “wit,” one, after “‘Hinqpé-Ag¢e.” 163, 18. Insert the classifier “¢i"” after “nfijitiga.” 163, 19. Insert the classifier “¢i>” after “nfijiiiga,” and omit the following “égi¢e.” 164, 3. Change “wa4giati ede,” to “wagiatii-dé, they came for them, when.” 164, 4. Change “éde,” but, to “yi,” when; and omit the “h” in “véwa¢é-hna”i.” 164, 6. “Ke,” Now! 164, 7-8. Insert the classifier “ké” after the first “hirqpé,” and omit the second “hingpé.” 164, 11. Insert the classifier “¢anka,” the ones who, after “duba;” and change “d¢inké/di” at the end of the line to “ ¢inké.” 164, 20. Read: “nijifiga ta" 6 wak4-bi ega™.” “boy the that meant, they haying.” (std. o| 8a, b.) 165, 20. Change “Ahi-baji-bi yi” to “Ada,” Therefore. 534 THE ¢EGINA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. 166, 3. Insert the interrogative sign “a,” between ‘¢aa™he” and the following comma. 166, 14. Change “¢i?” to “ama.” 166, 20. For “éskana,” read ‘6 eska™’, that—it might be.” 167, 6. Read:— « “wanin/de¢ag¢aji aoni™’ hé, you keep it because you do not loathe it.” “you do not loath it you have . it (fem.) 167, 13. Omit “akaé” after “ wiwiga.” : 167, 16. Insert the classifier “‘¢inké” after “ija™’¢e.” 167, 18; et passim. He writes ‘“‘na®” instead of “hna*,” which latter form is used by Joseph La Fléche and others. The three forms are all used: “‘ona®” being the ancient one; ‘“hna*,” a modern equivalent, used by old men of the present day; and “nat” the latest, used by the young men.—D. 168, 1. Omit the second “ Aki-biama.” 168, 3. Omit “é/di” 168, 5. Omit “‘aka” before “té¢é.” 168, 10. Omit ‘‘ Niaci"ga” at the beginning of the line. 168, 15. Change “ Niaci"ga” to “ Niaci"ga ama,” The men (pl. sub.). 168, 16. Insert “aka” after ‘“‘mi™jinga.” 168, 17. Supply “‘ama” after ‘‘cinuda?.” 168, 18. dazéqtci, ‘very late in the evening.” ; 168, 19. For ‘“‘ma™hnir”’,” read ‘‘ma®oni®’,” the ancient form. See note on 167, 18. 169, 3. Omit “é/di,” as superfluous after “céhi¢eté/di.” 169, 4. Omit “a-biama.” 169, 6. Supply “té” after “i“é;” so also in the next line, before “¢etéé hé.” 169, 20. For “‘anga¢e tai,” read “anga¢e te ha/.” 170, 3. Supply ‘‘wi",” one, after the first “niaci"ga;” and “¢i®” after the second “niaciga,” which is the object of the following verb. 170, 6. Omit “hitqpé” at the end of the line. 176, 10. For “wa¢ata-bajictéa’’-biama,” read “ wa¢ata-bajictéa”’-bi ega™, when he ate nothing at all, they say.” 176, 11. After ““Ata®’ctéqtci” supply “-na®’.” (Or “-hna®/.”—D.) 176, 13. Read: “ Edada® cka™na té égija® taté ha, 4-biama. Nikana*-jiha wai"ji®/ taté ha, 4-biama.” r 177, 1. For “U¢agaca™ji,” read “ U¢agaca™aji.” 177, 12. Read: “Ga 4ii ¢an/di ahi-biama.” Omit “&/di ahi-biama yi.” 177, 16. He reads ‘‘Nikawasa” for “ Nikawasa®’;” but the latter is in common use.—D. 177, 17. Omit “égi¢e” at the beginning, and supply “ha” before “4-biama.” 177, 20; 178, 12; 179, 5. For “téa¢a-baji 6,” read “ t’éa™¢a-baji ta-bi, ai.” 178, 2; 179, 8. For “t/é¢a-bi,” read “t7é¢6.” 178, 18. For “ega™,” read “31,” when. 178, 19. For “ihé¢a-ga,” read “ihé¢ai-g,” place ye. 179, 2. Omit the first “égi¢e,” and change “édedi¢i>” to “é/diedi-¢i7.” 179, 3. Read thus: “Bgi¢e wada™be a¢é-biama yi, ma"tea wi’ i¢a-biama.” 179, 19. For ‘“‘nujinga aka,” read “nijinga ¢i%.” a APPENDIX. 5) 179, 20. Supply “ga,” as, after “atiga™¢ai.” 180, 5. Supply ‘“‘té” after “eude.” 180, 12. Supply “wi,” one, after “i"cagéqtci.” 180, 13. “Na®cki” or ‘‘nacki,” See note on 26,3. Read “jin’ga-ctéwa-baji, by no means small”; and supply ‘“¢a®” after ‘“najiha.” 180, 14. Read :— “Ki nuda™hatiga ¢i" 4i té tide ¢é té/di, me‘age ¢inké wébaha™aji ama.” And war-chief the lodge the enter- went when, oldman _ the (st. knew him not’ they say. (mv.) (ob.) ing one) 180, 15. Supply “yi,” when, after “ ga ¢inke’qti.” 181, 11. For “e¢éga®,” read ‘e¢éga®-bi.” 181, 17. For “hni®,” read “oni*.” 182, 14. For “¢anké,” read “ ¢anka.” 182, 16. Omit “Aha2” after “inahi®”; and supply it after “ minké.” 182, 17-18. Read: “Wi” ¢inké najiha ska/qti ega”, gam’ wi” ¢inké jidéqti, ki wit’ ¢inké ziqti, ki wi’ ¢inké yuqti am ada.” 183, 5. Supply “¢anka” after “ dtba.” 183, 20. Supply “gé@,” the scattered inanimate objects, after ‘‘najiha.” 189, 1. Read: “I¢adi aka nikagahi-biama yi, ga-biama,” ete. 189, 2. For ‘ Nika™hi,” read ‘* Nika™ahi”; and for “nika’/hi-méji,” read “nika™ ahi- maji.” 189, 3-4. Read “‘Adae hi. U‘a¢in/ge a” qtian’/ga™-maji hi, Ada" éga" wika"b¢a hit.” For “a qti¢iéga®,” read ‘“a™qti¢iéga™ te ha, you will be a great man.” 189, 5. For “ Niajinga,” read “ Ki nijinga aka.” 189, 6. For “aka na™qa,” read “ta™ na®’qa-hi.” 189, 6-7. Read: “Bgi¢e apa diba wé¢a-biama yi, caii/ge,” ete. 189, 8-9. Read: “mide a’pa™-ma wag¢ade a¢a-biamé. Apa®-maédi ahi-biamaé erawling the elk creeping up he went, they At the elk (pl.ob.) he arrived, to them ~ gay. they say yl, Ackaqtci wakida-biam& Ki wi” w-bi_ ¢a*ja,” ete. when, very close he shot at them, And one hewounded, though, they say. they say 189, 11. For “naji"’-biama. Ki ewéahidé’qti,” read “najim amahi. Ki wéahidé/qti.” 189, 12. For “wakan/di¢ega™,” read “ wakan/di¢a-bi ega™.” 189, 14. For ‘“édedi-te ama,” read ‘é/diedi-te ama.” (The former is generally used.—D.) 189, 16. Read: “ @iéwarja™ ega™, niqa te,” ete. 189, 17-18. Read “ Baaza-bi ga™ a™ha-biama.” 190, 2. For “‘eyawada™be té/di,” read “e,awada™ba-bi yi.” 190, 3. Read: “ci ni té ¢ata® ¢é yi, cl We’s‘a aka é¢a™be ati-biama. Ci a*/he ama.” Omit the final “Ci.” 190, 4. Omit “wéduba” té.” For ‘‘ada"be té/di,” read “da™ba-bi yi.” 190, 12. Read “a™wat¢ate te ha, ecé te hé.” 190, 17-18. Read: “Na®bud¢iq¢a ¢a™ ¢ionida-bi ega™, eca™adi i¢a™¢a-biamaé. Ké, atwam¢ate taté ha, 4-bi yi, égi¢e wat,” ete. 190, 19. Omit “yi ¢agni”’-biama.” 190, 20. Supply “aka” after ‘““Wé/s‘a-wa‘t.” 190, 21. Supply “ak4é” after “nijinga.” 191, 5. Read “ite‘4ge ama,” and “ wa‘ti watcigaxe-mé.” 536 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. 191, 6. For “Ca™ckaxe tai 4-biamaé a¢a+!” read “Ca™ckaxe tai ha.” 191, 10. For “¢iontida-biama,” read “¢a",” the curvilinear inanimate object. 191, 11. Omit “¢ionad.” 191, 12. For “‘4-bi ega®’,” read ‘4-bi yi.” 191, 21. For “tai,” read ‘t-bi.” 192, 1. Change “wat am4” to “wa‘t-ma,” the women. 192, 2. Change the plural, ‘“Ca*/ckaxe tai,” ete., to ““Ca™’ckaxe te, ai a¢a+,” omit- ting **A-biama.” 192, 6; 192, 9; 192, 17; 198, 13. Supply “¢a®” after “‘na*bii¢iq¢a.” 192, 7. Change “ega*’” to “yi,” when. 192, 9. Change “¢inké” to “aka.” 192, 10. Change “na” ¢i" watcigaxe te” to “na”-ma watcigaxe tai ha.” the grown ones __let them dance 5 192, 10-11. Change “CémiXjii’/ga ¢ana” ¢a¢incé wadatcigaxe tai a¢a+” to “Cémi- jii’ga-mace, wa¢atcigaxe te, ai a¢a.” 192, 12. Change “ama” to “¢i2.” 192, 14. Change “tiha® Agaji-biam4” to “taha™ wagaji-biama.” The former takes a singular object, the latter, a plural. 192, 15. Read ‘‘na"pa™hi” instead of the alternative form, ‘“‘na™pa™hi2.” See note on 26, 3. 192,17. Translate “‘a¢iha” by again. (But the meaning is rather, “in addition to,” with an idea of finality.—D.) 192, 19-20. Read “ Ukikie-na”-biama yi, i¢4di aké na‘a*/-biama.” Also, “da™bai- % ha.” ‘ 193, 2. Read “juig¢e g¢in’ aka hé, she is sitting with him.” 193, 4. Supply “ak4” after “wa‘t.” 193, 4-5. Read “Bgi¢e na aké a¢é-biam4 yl, wai tdatqti wi’ -f¢a-biamaé yi, ¢4- biama,” ete. 193, 6. Read: “taminke hi. @iadi ¢iha™ e¢a™ba iwagi¢aé-gii hi, 4-biamé. Gan’ yi wat aké ug¢a,” ete. ‘ E¢a™ ba,” she too; “ugt¢a,” to tell about her own. 198, 12. “E¢iv ahi-bi ega”’.” Or, “B¢i" ahi-bi yi.” 193, 16. Change “b¢é ta minke, 4-biama,” to “b¢é ta minke ha.” 193, 16-17. ““Can’ge ta® na’qa cénakag¢e in’/g¢ai-ga.” This should be changed, either to “Can’ge ta canakag¢e in’g¢ati-ga,” or to “Can/ge ta® na®’qa-hi i/g¢a*i-g.” The former means ‘Put the saddle on the horse for me”; the latter, ‘‘Put it on the horse’s backbone for me.” 193, 17-18. ‘““Wa¢aha - - - - A¢a-biama” (the first one). Read: “Wa¢aha tdarqti A¢aha-bi ega™, caii/ge ta™ cti idaqti, canakag¢e cti ida™qtia” a¢a-biama.” 193,19. Change “ Nihan’ga té” to “ Nihan’ga té/ga”; and omit “ Sig¢u¢ugiha-biama.” 193, 21. Change “yi té piajiqti” to “9i piajiqti wi’, a very bad lodge.” “Sig¢u¢i- gihe a¢4-bi” may be changed to “‘ U¢agihe a¢a-bi: following his own—he went, they say.” 194, 2. The first “akama” may be omitted, if desired. Then read: “wa¢aha té i¢icpacpaqtcia® akama: clothing—the—torn in shreds as to it—he was, they say.” 194, 3. Omit “ahii yi.” Change “e)4 té”. to “ejai té.” 194, 4. Change “ehnéga?” to the ancient form, “‘eonéga*.” ‘194, 7. “Ahnaha hné.” Or, ‘“Aonaha oné.” 194, 8. Insert “wi,” one, after “eti”; and “cti” after “wahi¢age.” oe Wed . 4 APPENDIX. 537 194, 9. Change “hné te” to “né te hi”; and “édedi¢an” to “&/diedi¢a”.” 194, 11. Change “g¢i™” to the plural, “g¢i™i ha.” 194, 13. “Ga?” may be omitted. 194, 14. Supply “ké” after “Niyafiga.” For “gaxai,” read “ gaxa-bi.” 194, 15. Omit “itc‘Aage aka.” 194, 16. Supply “wi,” one, after ‘91.” 194, 17. For “cide ga",” read “ctide té,” the smoke. 194, 20; 195, 6; 196, 2. For “ugidada”-bi,” read “ugidida’’-bi,” from “ubida».” 195, 4; 195, 6; 195, 18; 197, 10. Supply “¢a"” after “wadage.” 195, 5. Supply “¢a®” after “niniba.” (This must refer to the pipe bowl, without the stem, as the whole pipe is “niniba ké.”—D. See line 16.) 195, 8. Supply “ak4” after “Ama”; and change “‘éwidacibe, ehé te” to “éwidacibe hi.” After “cénaji” supply either “i,” the interrogative, or “‘éimte,” as in the preced- ing line. 195, 11. Instead of “Hau! ha+!” the Omahas now use “wahbu‘'a!” 195, 12. Read “aja™i” at end of line. 195, 14. Change “g¢éwa¢a¢ai” to the objective singular, “g¢é¢a¢ai, you sent him homeward”; and supply “ha” after “Twit?ab¢ai.” 195, 16. “¢and-bi ega™.” Or, “¢and-bi yf.” 195, 17. Supply “ak4” after “Ama.” 195, 20. Read: “I¢ae-na™i hi.” 196, 4. Omit “ihus4-biama ci”; and supply “¢i>” after “nikaci*ga.” 196, 5. Change “g¢éwa¢aki¢é” to “ g¢é¢aki¢e.” 196, 9. Change “ati” to “atti.” 196, 10. Change “‘jabaji” to “jabajii.” 196, 11. “ti td.” Or, “ti yi.” 196, 18. Read: “t’é¢a¢aji” and “kig¢é¢a¢s.” 196, 19. Change “‘ati-hna®” to “ti-na™.” 197, 1-2. Change “tai” to “taité ha”; and omit “4-biama.” 197, 2. Change “ati” to “ti.” And in lines 3 and 4 change “t’éwa¢a¢a-baji” to “Ppéd¢ad¢a-baji.” : ; 197, 5. Omit the second ‘“4-biama.” 197, 9. Change “wendca-biam4, ibista-biama,” to ‘“wénaca-biama yi, ibist4-biama, when he snatched it from them,” ete. 198, 6. Change “Ca ckaxe taité” to “Ca™ckaxe taité 4, Will you really stop it?” 198, 15. Insert ‘“‘ama” after “ Wé’/s‘a-wa‘t.” 199, 1. Read: “Bgi¢e Wée/si-wa't igi¢a-biama; na wi" A¢ixe akama.” 199, 2. Change “‘it’a¢4-biama” to “‘it?a¢a-bi ega”’: he hated him, they say—having.” 199, 3; 199, 18. Supply “¢a” after ‘tay wang¢a”.” 199, 4. At the end of the line read: “gaq¢i-biama yi, ag¢4-biama: he killed her, they say—when—went homeward, they say.” 199, 7. Read: “ehé ¢acti,” and “oné taité ha.” 199, 8. Read: “‘ma™ni”” and “ wani".” 199, 9. Change “ga" - - - 4-biam4” to “éga™ ma™ci né taité ha, 4-biam4,” and “ma”ei hné yi” to “ma ci nai yi.”—Frank La Fléche. But “nai” is the plural of na,” to beg, and means “they beg”; hence I prefer writing ‘‘ma”ci hnat yi,” when ye go on 538 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. 4 high, to avoid confusion; though, perhaps, the context would determine which verb was intended.—D. 199, 12; 199, 14. “ahi-biama” should be “aki-biam4,” as in line 15, “he reached there again, they say.” 199, 13. Supply “ké” after ‘ ni.” 199, 14. For “¢éki¢a-biama,” read “o¢éki¢a-biama, he sent him back, they say.” 200, 2. For “‘Caii/ge wahi¢ageqtia™i,” read ‘‘Cai’/ge ¢i" wahi¢agéqtia™.” 200, 3. For “b¢ab¢azéqti,” read “b¢ab¢aza¢e’qti, torn very much accidentally or of its own accord.” 200, 5. Read: “ Niaci"ga wit’ waqpani tedbe ti ha, 4-biama.” 200, 6. “E/di” is superfluous. 200, 8. Read: “ca” ha, ¢ag¢i te, it is enough, since you have come home.” 200, 12. Omit the first “a-biama”; and read: “watt gatédi ¢im qtaa¢é hi, I love the woman who is in that place (out of sight).” 200, 13. For “¢éwaki¢a-ga,” read “¢éwaki¢a-g& ha, a-biama.” 207, 1-2. If we retain “¢inké,” we must change the verb to “watézug¢a” ama”; but if we retain “watézug¢a”’-biama,” we must change the classifier “¢inké” to “aka.” 207, 3. Change the line so as to read thus: “na ak& yaha-bi ega”, gé-biama: Egi¢e, ete.” man the feared, they having, saidasfollows, Beware. (sub.) say they say: Supply “wi2,” one, after “nikaci"ga.” 207, 4. “‘Nazugaq¢e: Facing the back of the lodge”.—D. 207, 4-5. Read: “Hgi¢e nti ¢inké 6 ¢6 ama yi, nikaci"ga wi” a-i-biam4.” 207, 6. Change “ubéha ija®” to “ubdéha® a-fja.” 207, 7-8. Read: “Fgi¢e nt ¢im Abae té gi am4 yi, ag¢a-biama ine‘4ge ahi ak4.” 207.8; 207, 13. “¢An a) Or, “Man! 3.7 207, 9. “Hcé te ¢éga.” Change to ‘“ Beé te ¢a™ éga" hé: imc‘age,” ete. What you said so it 2 old man. in the past was 207, 12-13. Read :— “Ci nai ¢i@ Abae té gi ama yi, ci ag¢d-biamd ivc‘4ge aka.” Again man the hunting the was coming when, again wenthomeward, oldman the. mv. back, they say they say Change “ati hé” to “atii hé.” 207, 15. Change “ Daba-bi ega®’” to “Daba-bi yi.” 207, 17. Supply “ké” after “wa‘t.” 208, 2. Read: ‘‘égihe i¢é¢a-biama” at the end of the line. 208, 3-4. Read: “Nu ¢i” ki ama yi, égi¢e wat ké vé¢é akiag¢a-bitéama, nixa k& mab¢aza-bikéama.” Change “yan/de ké” to “qan/de ké/di.” Or else, omit the phrase. 208, 5. Read either “aki-biama ni aka” or “ki ama na ¢inké.” Supply “wi,” one, after ‘cin’ gajin/ ga.” y. 208, 8-9. Read: “Ma*¢ida™ wakan/dagiqtia”-biama yi, Dadiha, man/dé jin/ga ingaxa-ga ha, 4-biama.” 208, 9-10. Read: “Wajin’ga ga” wakide-hna’’-biama yi, i¢adi aka Abae a¢é Bird so shooting at them regularly, when, his the hunting togo y - i they say father (sub.) ta-bi éga™ gia®/ze-hna™-biama.” in order that, taught him regularly, they they say say. 208, 10. Read: “jég¢a™-bi yi,” or else, ‘“jég¢a"-bi egan’.” 208, 12-13. Frank La Fléche changes ‘“ Wata” gaéxe a-i-biam4” to “ Wa‘a™ a-i- biam4: singing—he was coming, they say.” APPENDIX. 539 208, 18. He translates ‘“‘kagéha” by ‘‘friend”; though in this case it means, “vounger brother,” in my opinion.—D. 208, 19. Change the plural, ‘“a™¢ate tai,” to the dual, “a™¢ate té ha.” 209, 4. Change “ondsni® 4ha®” to ‘‘onasni*-na® aha®.” 209, 5. Read: “dadiha, 6 ama yi, gisi¢aji ama ie té.” Change the last part of the next line so as to read: “EB ¢é ama yi, ci ndjinga ama.” He went they when, again boy the say (my. sub.). 209, 8; 209, 15. Omit “nujinga ¢inké.” 209, 9. Read: “Kagé, ¢iadi cugi, 4-biama ga?’, ag¢a-biama ci.” 209, 11. Read: “6 ania yi, gisi¢ajiamaé.” For “ giaxa-biama,” read thus :— me made for him, i they say. “gidxa-bi ega™, ci a™’¢a a¢a-biama.” he made for having, again leaving he went, they him, they say him say. 209, 13. Read: “Ci ntjiiga amé a-i-bi ega™, Piadi i¢é 4, 4-biama.” 210, 6. Supply “ké” after “Asku.” 210, 7. Read: “Qijim¢e ¢icta’Aji-gi, 4-biam4é ga”, daha" Atid¢a-biama i¢adi aka.” Your elder do not let him ea said, they as, arising he started, they his the brother say say father (sub.). 210, 7-8. Read: ugulee ¢inké g¢é ga™¢aqtia” yi, égi¢e cka™ Aji i¢a™’-biama.” the one togo wishedvery when, at length motionless became suddenly, who back much they say. 210, 9. Read: “@ijim¢e méga™ u¢akikijii ha, 4-biama.” 210, 10. For “u¢ihi,” read “u¢ihii ha.” 210, 11. Put a period after “ wegdxai-ga”; and omit ‘4-biama.” 210, 13. Omit “égi¢e édi.” 210, 15; 211, 7. Supply “¢a?/cti,” heretofore, after “ wagaji.” 210, 15; 211, 7; 212, 10; 214, 8. For “ Bgi¢e,” read “Egat,” If so. 210, 16; 211, 8. After “Hin/dega™” supply “atiga¢e te ha, let us two go.” 210, 19. At the end of the line read thus: “ubéta™ a¢i2’.” 211, 1; 221, 20; 231, 10. Supply “té” after ‘jijébe.” 211, 2. Supply “ké” after “qAqti.” 211, 3; 212, 2. Change “ckaxe” to the plural, ““ckaxai.” (The dual, ckéxe, would answer just as well. See the above note on 210, 16.—D.) 211, 4-5. Read :— “Ci i¢adi ak&é abae a¢é ta-bi té/di, Egi¢e yiqinde gatédi hne tai hit, 4-biama.” Again his the hunting wasabout when, Beware’ gorge to that yougolest . said he, they father (sub.) to go say. 211, 6. Supply “te ha” after “anga¢e,” instead of “tai.” 211, 9. Supply “wit,” one, after “wa‘tjingaqtci.” 211, 10. Read: “¢é¢inké 6 ¢inké: this one who is sitting—she—is the one who.” 211, 16. Change ‘4-bi ega™’” to “4-biama.” Change “cpa¢a™’” to “cpa¢amhé,” and “ An? to 6 Ban? 211, 17. Change “wab¢askabe 6¢6” to “ wab¢askabe-na®-ma”™ é¢e.” 211, 18. Change “¢i¢a etéctewa™” to “¢i‘i¢a-bi ca™” gam.” 211, 19. Supply “¢a>” after “sindéhi” and ‘“sindé-q¢u‘a.” So in 212, 5. 212, 1. Change “angag¢i” to “angag¢ii ha.” 212, 4. Read: “‘yath4, ti¢a-ga, 4-biama. An/kaji é¢e, epa¢a™ hé.” 212, 5. Change “ wab¢askabe é¢8” to ‘“‘wab¢askabe-na?-ma” é¢e.” 212, 6. Read: “ugaqpa¢é i¢é¢a-biama.” 540 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS, 212, 7. Change “ké/di” to “‘¢an/di.” 212, 18. Supply the interrogative sign, “4,” after “ahni™.” 218, 16. Supply “¢ank4,” they who, after “Ing¢a™ jin’ga.” 214, 2. Omit “¢a®”; and change “ck4xe” to “ckaxai ha.” 214, 5. Omit “&/di” after “ke¢an/di.” 214, 6. Change “afiga¢e tai” to the dual, “atiga¢e te ha.” 214, 14. Supply “ama” after “niyjitga”; alsoin line 15 after “‘i¢adi.” Omit “si t&.” 219, 1. Read: “ Ukikiji duba-biama yi, endaqtei gig¢a-biama. Tha” ijan’ge ctéwa”” —“yi,” when; “ctéwa™” or “ctiwa",” even, instead of “ett Wey 219, 2-3. Read: “Abae a¢a-biama yi, isan/ga aka qiaja g¢iY’-biama.” Supply “ké” after ‘“‘ja™jinga.” 219, 4. Supply “31,” when, after ihe¢a-biama.” 219, 5. Change “iji”¢e” to “iji¢e-ma,” his elder brothers (the ob.). 219, 9. Change “Aki-bi” to “Ki-bi.” (The former is generally used.—D.) 220, 4. Supply “¢inké,” she who, after “wa‘u”; and “ama,” the plural sub., after “diaba.” 220, 8. Read: “ wai/gi¢e aki-biama yl, égi¢e,” ete., “when all her brothers reached home, behold,” ete. 221, 6. Supply “¢inké,” she who, after “‘ Mi“ jinga.” 221, 7. Supply “¢inké” after “wa‘i”; and change “‘edada®” to “dada.” 221, 11. After ‘“4-biama” supply watt aka.” 221, 12; 221, 19. Supply “ama,” the mv. sub., after “nijinga.” 221, 13. Read: “ahi-biama x1, Niacitga dtiba,” ete. 221, 17. Read: “ama,” the mv. sub., instead of “ni,” which is superfluous. 222, 1. Read: “waqpaéni-ctéwa"-baji akama ha, wa‘t aka ég¢ange e¢a™ba.” 222, 2. Change “gija™be yi,” to “giga™ba-bi yi, when he saw his, they say.” 222, 3. Supply “aka” after “ijan/ge.” 222, 8. Change “jingaqtci-hna*i” to “jingaqtcina®.” Read: “ yaha™ha, O wife’s brother,” instead of “ paha?’.” Omit the second “ yaha”™.” 222, 9. Change “aha®” to “ha.” 222, 11. Supply the classifier “té” after “mandé ji’ga,” as there were several small boats. 222, 15. Omit “gan’ki.” 222, 17. Change ‘“‘¢inké” to “ak4”; and supply ek? after “mandé.” 223, 3. Supply “aké” after “nu.” 226, 1. Supply “aka” after ““Haxige.” Read: “ Ki ijin’¢e aka,” ete. 226, 2. Read: “a¢é-na™-biamé yi, y4qti wakide-na”/-biama.” 226, 4. Read: “ Ki iji”¢e aka,” ete. 227, 2. Supply “ké” after “hati 3” “¢inké” after “Isan/ga”; and “ama ha” after “ceé¢ectéwar ji.” 227, 3. Supply ‘“‘¢a®” after ‘jijébe.” 227, 4. Change “ega”” to “yi,” when. 227, 6. Change “ahi yi/ji” to “ahi-bi yi/ji”; supply “¢im” after “isan’ga;” and read: “sig¢é ¢e té ama ha,” instead of “sig¢é ¢é te ama.” 227, 15. Prefix, “Ki a™ma*,” And the one, to “ g4-biama.” 227, 17. Supply “‘té na™-qtci: the ob.—alone,” after “na*béhiujin’ga.” APPENDIX. 541 227,19. Read: “‘Haxige aka ja™‘abe gaxa-bi ega”’, ni ké/di ugpa¢a-bi ega”’,” ete. 227, 20. Frank La Fléche reads, ‘utana®” instead of “uta?/na.” 228, 1. Read: “Mi*/xa-jin’/ga-ma,” the Ducks (pl. ob.); and change “edéce ¢a¢ircé” to “‘edéce-mace, what say you ?” 228, 3. Period at the end of line; and omit the following “4-biama.” 228, 5. Change “a¢i" aki” to “a¢i™ akii ha.” 228, 6. Read: “biamd yi, imaxd-biamé: H‘a™ yi-na’ é¢a*bai 4, a-biama yi, Mir’- ¢umaci cademaha*.” 228, 7. After “4-biam4” supply the following: ‘‘Gan’yi Haxige aka Mi’xa-jin/ga And Haxige the Duck (sub.) ¢inké i”cta-¢éde té saii/ki¢4-bi ega™’, Shim hidé té’ cti yuki¢a-bi ega”, ¢icta” ¢é¢a- the(ob.) cornerofeye the made white for having, wing base the too made blue for having, let him go sud- (ob.) him, they say him, they say denly biam4 hi. Ke! man¢ii’-gi ha. Mi-’xa-wag¢a/xe e¢ige tabace, 4-biama ha Haxige they say . Come! walk - Duck conjurer they call must, said,they . Haxige you say 4ka.” Then read: “A™ba té éga" am4 yi, gi¢a gaxe éde a¢a-biama,”— the Day the s0 they when, eagle made but he went, they (sub.). say say. in place of the text in lines 8 and 9. 228, 9. Read: “Egi¢e yehiiq¢abe ma”a¢a nédindingi¢é ja” akama ha.” 228, 10. Supply ‘ Ki,” And, before “ By4ta™” and “ Haxige.” 228, 15; 228, 19. Omit “ama” after “Haxige.” If “ama” be retained, we must change the preceding “g¢é ama” to “ag¢a-biama.” 228, 19. Change “ édihi” to “‘teédihi. 229, 6; 229, 8; 229, 9. Supply “wit,” one, after ‘“niacitga.” 229, 16. For “téwa¢ai. Zéawat¢é pi atathé, 4-biama,” read “wati ega™, zéawa¢6- nat pi 4ta"hé ha, 4-biamaé.” 230, 10. Change “nia¢é” to “niawa¢é,” I heal them. 230, 11. Read: “ Wéduba ké.” 230, 12. Change “at ¢i" ¢é-hna*i” to “a™¢i" a¢é-hnai.” 280, 18. Read: “ndjingai dha”, 4-bi ega™, gaqiqix4-biama, t?é¢a-biama.” Supply “98” after “wa¢aha.” 230, 19. Supply “ ¢a>” after “ géxe.” 231, 8. After “ pijébe 4gaha,” supply ‘“¢a™.” 231, 11. Supply “‘ta®,” the standing inanimate object, after “ Isan’ga.” 231, 14. For “Kagé, ime‘4ge-hna,” read “ Kagéha, ie‘age ama.” 231, 15. For “‘kagé” read “kagéha.” 231, 16. For “Qé” read “(Pée,” This is it. 282, 2. Read: “ati-hna®-ma” ké yiha gua¢ica™aga;” “ke” referring to line of bluffs. 282, 2-3. “yi-uji ¢ankaé wan’/gi¢éqti ¢éwaki¢a-biama, He sent away all of the families.” 232, 4. For “u¢awidava®” read “ud¢dawidaxa"l.” 282, 5. For “‘taté” read ‘“taité”; and for “te” read “tai.” 282, 19-20. Read: “Haxige ak4 6 akédega™, ydciqti Wakan’/dagi ¢anka naqube- Haxige the that washe,but, verylong Water-monster the ones he has (sub.) ago who wa¢é aka ha, ecé ci te ha, u¢a mang¢in’-ga.” cooked them to , you you will ,_ totell begone. pieces say reach it there 542 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. 232, 20. Omit “akA” after “ Wé’s‘a-nideka.” 233, 11. Or, “Ni égihe akiag¢a-biama.” 2388, 12. Read: “Ga wawénaxi¢a-ma wa¢i‘a g¢4-biama.” 238, 15; 247, 1; 247, 12; 247, 15. Omit “gan’ki.” (Intended for “ga™ yi.”—D.) 233, 16; 235, 1. Supply “ ¢inké” after “isan/ga.” 234, 9. Frank La Fléche reads “b¢é ta” for “b¢é te;” and in 234, 10, “daxe ta” for “daxe te.” 234, 17. Supply “ak4” after “17/6.” 235, 6. Supply “wi,” one, after “‘ Jabe-wa‘ujin’ga.” 235, 16. Change “¢izai-de” to “ wa¢izai-de, when he takes them.” 236, 16. Change “Agimakaji-biama” to ‘“agimaka-baji-biama.” The former is in- correet, as we must say, “Agimakaéji ama” when the subject is used without the classi- fier *‘ak4” or “amaé;” and “ 4gimaka-baji-biama” when such classifiers are expressed. 236, 19. Change “ snédéqti” to “snédeaqti.” 244, 8. Omit commas at end of line. 244, 10. Supply “ama” after the second “ Haéxige.” 244, 11. Supply “ké” after “ Ictab¢i.” 244, 13. Supply the interrogative sign, “a,” after “‘oné.” 245, 4. Change “ wé‘ui” to “ wéui”; and ‘ zéwa¢e” to “ zéwa¢é-na®.” 245, 11. For “ Awategija™ te,” read ‘‘ Awategija™ taté a.” 245, 16. For “wa‘ii,” read ‘¢ wati.” 246, 2. Omit “e.” 246, 3-4. Read: “Huhti! ¢é3a am&4 Héga wazé¢é ama 4i4ma hi, 4-biam4, Haxige é¢a™be hi i.” 246, 6. Read: “Ki Héga 6 e¢éga™-bi ega™, agia¢ai té.” (The last clause may be changed to “agia¢a-biama.”—D.) Omit “¢inké/di” in the next line. 246, 13. For “yi‘u,” read “yiu.” So also in Note on page 250. 246,15. Read “aké qijébeg¢a® ¢ikiaha'l té’di isan’ga ¢inké igidaha™-biama, ha ¢a®.” 246, 16. Omit “g4-biama,” and read: “Gan’yi ¢ikiaha*i yi, He!” ete. 246, 17. For ‘‘égi¢ati,” read “égi¢a®/-biama.” 246, 18. Or, “gijébeg¢a® ¢a®™ ¢ikidha"l yi, He! wisa™jitqtci¢é! ai hit.” 246, 19. For “ Bgi¢a®-baji-g4,” read “ Bgi¢a®-bajii-gi.” 247, 1. For “‘oné te,” read “oné tai.” 247, 3. Read: “Qé¢anka zéawA¢é b¢icta® yi, thi¢Aawaki¢é ta mifike hi.” 247, 7. Read “Maze ké najidé’/qti gaxa-bi yi, 0 té uibaxa™/-biama.” “ Uibaxa?- biama” means “he thrust it into the wound for him, they say.” 247, 8. Omit all as far as ‘yJ,” inclusive, the rest of the line being changed to 247, 10-11. Omit ‘“Ganki amé,” and join the two lines, thus: “jatéqti i¢é ha, 4-biama yi, ci é6ga™ gi‘a™’-biama.” For “Gan’/ki jin’ga ké,” read ‘Ga*/-ke jin’ga yi: a little while he lay—when.” 247,13. For “naba,” read “na™baé ¢anké.” For “akiwa” (the Ponka form), read “aki¢a.” 247, 14. For “ waxai yi,” read “waxa-bi yi.” 247, 16. Omit “ gig¢a-ba,” “4-biama,” and “ Ki” 247, 18. For ‘“cti,” read “¢a?’/eti,” heretofore. Omit ‘e.” ip APPENDIX. 543 248, 4. Read “Gdé ga”’¢a yi, na™ wape ama hi Wé/s%i-nideka.” 248, 7. Supply “¢anka” after “ Wakan/dagi.” 248, 9. For “s‘@-biama,” read “ sti-biama.” 248, 12. For “ag¢ai Haxige,” read ‘“ag¢a-biama Haxige ama.” 248, 14. For “hna®/-biama,” read “-na™ ama.” (Or, “hna™ ama.”—D.) 248, 17. For “uki¢ataqtia™ ¢i",” read “uki¢atagtia™ ¢i7 hit, it is sticking very tight in his throat as he moves.” 248, 19. Supply “wi®,” one, after “ Jabe-wa‘ujinga.” 249, 1. For “aka,” read {¢anka.” 249, 3. For “mand tg¢i,” read ‘““mandé ug¢i™’.” 249, 7-8. Omit “ug¢i” ta aka ha, Uq¢igqa”; and for “ug¢i"/-de,” read “ug¢i"i-de.” 249, 10. Read “ Haxige aka yéba uga™i-de wé/s‘a-m4 da,” ete. 249, 11. Omit “gé” and “ gan’ki.” 249, 18. Supply “‘¢inké” after the first “isanga”; change “Nimga” to “4 Ni™ga- biam4”; and “ gidxa-biama” to “ giyaxa-biama,” he made his. 254, 5. For “ugacke tédi hidé té,” read “ugacke hidé t&/di.” 254, 7. Read “ wé‘a®-na?i ha, nikawasa’.” 256, 3. For “abii,” read ‘“ahi-biamé.” 256, 9. For “thai,” read “‘tiha®-biamaé.” (Then we should read: “ Nuda™hanga- biamaé; ueté ama wagaq¢a-biama.”—D.) 256, 11. Supply “aka” after “yéqganga;” so in line 14, after “I™¢apa.” 257, 7-8. Read: “@akti¢a-gi. Etat’ ma™hni”’ éi™te, A-biama.” Make a similar change on page 258, lines 6 and 7. 257, 15; 258, 12-13; 259, 6; 260, 10. “ Hdada" néa®xi¢a i¢ai yi, if any difficulties are found,” or “if anything is found that gives me trouble.” 258, 9. For “taté,” read “te ha.” 258, 16. Omit “4-biam4” after “ba-ga.” 258, 18; 259, 18. For “ci ati wit,” read “ci wi" ti ha.” 259, 8-9. Read “‘wada™ba-gi.” Omit ‘¢4-biamaé.” 259, 12. For “‘Qe-i!” read “ He-i!” 259, 15. Omit “aka” before “agajade.” 260, 5. Supply “‘cti,” too, after “Si t&.” 260, 9. Read “ wawénaxi¢a a¢a-bi ega™”, yaqti wi",” ete. 260, 15. Supply “ama” after “yéjanga.” 260, 16. Read: “Beanqti yi i@wie¢a-ga ba.” 260, 18. Supply “aka” after the second “yéaiga.” 261, 7. Supply “té” after ‘nabé.” 261, 12. Read: “Ki watt wi” aci a¢a-biama yi, Miydhe ké i¢a-biama.” 261, 19. Supply “aka” after “ypéyanga.” 262, 6. Supply “ada,” good, after the second “wayu.” The following word, inahi*, shows that the adjective was omitted from the text. 262, 8-9. Read: “Hirbé i¢agidate té, a-bi ega'’, ibata-biam4 yi, na"béhi té Moccasin Isewmine will, said, having, she sewed with when hand-stock the with it they say it, they say ibaqapi-biama, baonat’ ¢é¢a-bi ega®/.” she thrust it through, missingin shesentit having. they say, punching suddenly, they say 544 THE GEGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. 262, 12. Supply “ké” after “Man/dehi.” 262, 13. Read: “ag¢a¢i™-bi ega™, yéqaiiga ¢inké/di aktbiamaé.”—D. 263, 2. Supply “‘¢a"” after “Cinan’déqti”; and after “cinande” in the next line. 263, 19-20. Read: “ypAci ag¢i-zmaji yi, égi¢e ¢ag¢é tai ha, 4-biama yéyanga aka.” 264, 1-2. Read: “Maqide d‘tiba dhigi gaqta"’-bitéama yi, naji té ama.” 264, 11. Omit ‘Gaé-biam4.” 264, 14. Supply “yx,” if, after “ana™bixa™.” 264, 15. Omit the second ‘“4-biama.” 265, 1. Change the last sentence, thus: “Oi yéjanga aka, Hin+!” ete. “And the Big turtle said, ‘Hi"v again.” This makes the Big turtle cry out twice. (But I prefer the text as dictated, which refers this sentence to oue of the men as speaker.—D.) 265, 3. Omit “aka” after “ yéjatiga.” 265, 13. Change “ weaqaq4” to “weaqaqai ha.” 265, 15. Change “@é¢andi” to “@é¢andii ha.” 265, 18. Change “endqtci é¢a"be ama” to “enaqtci é¢a"be g¢i-biama: alone— in sight—he sat, they say.” 266, 3. For “‘¢ané?” read “¢ané 4.” 266, 7. Supply the interrogative, “a,” after “‘taté.” 266, 8. Insert ‘‘‘i¢e,” he promises, between “a™¢acta” and “a¢a.” 266, 9. Read: “@aqta-bi é hi, 4-biama. Hi-uta™na ¢aqta-bi é ha, 4-biama.” 267, 7; 267,14. Change “aki-biam4” to “ki ama, it reached there again, they say.” 267, 9. The Swans sewed up the pouches of the Pelicans. 267, 13. Insert “gé” between “nade” and the verb. 267, 17. Supply “aka” after “ypé,atiga.” 268, 1-2. Read: “U¢ica" ma™¢i"-biama, déxe ¢a™ gig¢asa¢u ma"¢i™-biam4.” 268, 13. Supply ‘‘ama4” after “ Nikaci*ga.” 268, 15. Supply “‘té/cti” after “icta ¢ingai.” 268, 17. Change “waq¢i” to “awaq¢i, I killed them”; and “¢iaq¢i-hna™i” to “¢idq¢i-na™i-ma, those who killed you regularly.” 277, 1. Change the first sentence, thus :— “Tatwang¢a® wi &di-¢a® ama; héga-baji-biama.” * Nation one itwasthere,theysay; nota few, they say. 279, 7. Change “baxt 6/di” to “baxt ké/di,” at the peak. 279, 17. Omit “Hinbé ¢a"™;” and read: “Niaci"ga pahan’ga ta™ himbé wati ¢a™ ¢ionuda-bi ega™,” ete. 280, 1. Supply “¢a” after “ Himbé.” 287, 1. Change the first sentence to ‘“Nikacitga d‘iba 4i amaéma.” People some camped, they say. 287, 4. Supply “aka” after “mi™jiiga.” So in 288, 5. 288, 6. Change “wékinag¢i" té” to “wékinaq¢i-bi ega”, having hurried to get ahead of her.” 288, 8. “E¢a+!” The women say this when their husbands die. 289, 17. ““Kgi¢e” is of doubtful use here. Omit it. 290, 3. Supply “ama” after “mi™jinga.” 298, 10. Omit “Wa‘t” and “mi”jinga.” 298, 16-17. Read: “Us4-biam4 yi, cide té sib’ ama4.” So in 299, 1-2: “Ci usa- biama yi, cide té gaqti ama.” APPENDIX. 545 310, Title. For “Crabs” read ‘*Crawfish.” So on 313, et passim. 318, 3; et passim. For “wahuta¢i"” read “ wahuta"¢é.” 370, first line of notes. Insert ‘‘ snede” after ‘“‘ Wacuce” and in the seventh line change “juangee” to “ juang¢e.” 372, 14. For “ Nange-ti¢a” read ‘* Nange-ti¢e.” This battle is that which is referred to by Sanssouci in the notes on the next text, at the bottom of p. 381. 375, note on 374, 2, Change “Uha"-na"ba” to “ Uha®-na"ba.” 378 and 381. For “Amaha” read “Amathe.” 381, note on 378. For ‘“amahe” read ‘“‘ama*he,” and for ‘*wamahe” read ‘“ wa- mathe.” 381, note at bottom of page. This is the battle described by Nuda"-axa, 372-5. Four Omaha messengers were with the Pawnees at the time.of the battle, fide J. La Fleche and Two Crows (1882). 381, notes, et passim. For “ waii"” read “wai.” 382, first line. For “ Miya qega” read ‘“ Nanka hega.” 402, 13. “7 ii ¢a®” should be “gii ké,” as the Pawnees pitched their tents (and built their earth-lodges) in the form of a parallelogram. 409-412. This text is full of mistakes, fide J. La Fleche, who was present with the Pawnees when they killed Paris Dorion. Two distinct fights have been treated in this text as one by Big Elk. 421, 4. W. objected to the use of “ukig¢i"” in this connection, substituting “ug¢ir”, sitting in. 433, 2-3. ama aka dagaha‘i, ete. J. La Fleche and Two Crows never heard of this They doubt it. 435, 15. ye-sa® was not there, fide J. La Fleche and Two Crows. 438, 12. Omit “ buya,” fide same authorities. 439, 18. For “ Una*sude” read ‘‘ Unasude,” bare spots were made on burnt ground. 442, 13. weonaar¢agi¢e, you cause me to be thankful. 444, 20. For “hide kejza” (though good Omaha) read “ hideaja,” at or towards the mouth, down-stream, south (fide J. La Fleche and Two Crows). 445, first note. The same authorities denied that these white people were Mormons. They confirmed Sanssouci’s statement in the notes on 444, 8, on p, 446. 449. The same authorities say that the sacred bag there mentioned was carried only when there was a large war party, aud that such a party did not steal off one by one, as stated in the next sentence, which refers only to a small war party. 450, eleventh line from the bottom. Read: ‘and tied them around the horses’ jaws.” 458, note on 454, 6. “ The four war-chiefs,” ete., read “the two war-chiefs or cap- tains were Two Crows and Wanace jitiga, the two lieutenants being ga¢i" na"paji ana Sinde xa"xa".” 463, 1. Insert “ama,” between “ Wakidepi” and “ayig¢ajii.” the pl. sub. 466, 7. Read “aka,” 468, 3. For “nikagahi” read “ nikaci*ga,” and for “mazi” read ‘“ tagnange;” omit chief people cedar ash ¢ edabe.” VOL VI——35 546 THE (@EGIHA LANGUAGE— MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. 469, 1-2. ye-ma u¢ag¢i-hnati, ete. Denied by J. La Fleche and Two Crows. 470, 17-20. Not exactiy correct, fide same authorities. 471, 11. Supply “ tida"” before “ te-hna™i.” good 471, 15. For “ujii-de” read “ ujiiji”. not filled. 471, 16. Quya aka, 7. ¢., INke-sabe men. 472, note on 471, 15-16. Omit first sentence, fide J. La Fléche and Two Crows. 472, translation, I. For “chiefs” read “ people,” and for “cedar” read “ash,” to conform to changes in the text. 474, translation, V, near the end. Read: ‘“ They had one or two drums.” Omit “the young men of” before ‘the Inke-sabé.” Change the “‘ members of the Quya sec- tion, who were the professional singers,” to “‘The Inke-sabé singers.” 481, translation, line 8. After “ eccentric” insert “(or, are not progressive).” 487, 16. For “¢ag¢i"” read “ ¢ag¢imi” (2d pl.), and change ‘“ i"win¢aga” to scjpwin¢a-ga.” 488, 8. For “wedaha" ama” read “ wédaha®-ma,” as they did not dic willingly. those (pl. ob.) whom I know 488, 9. For “¢ka™hna” read “cka"hna.” 490, 1 and 2. Change “ mathni®” to ‘ ma®¢i"i.” you walk they walk 499 and 500, titles. For “ Wata-naji®”, read ‘‘ Wata®-naji®.” 510, first note. For “ brother-in-law” read *‘son-in-law.” 515, note, et passim. Read “ Nitdaha™.” 523, title, et passim ; Dele “>.” 523, 1. “et” used for “ gédi.” Compare the use of “ te” for “ tédi” when, referring to a single occasion. But “gé” and “gédi” refer to different occasions, as the Pon- kas returned in separate parties. Eh eOm CLEA. mnAN GAGE, JEveN Jad Peed Wal be : ADDITIONAL MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. - 5AT \: — a) MAES -AuNgD 2S POR EES. ICTINIKE AND THE CHIPMUNK. TOLD BY FRANK LA FLECHE. Ictinike ama a¢a-bi yi, a-fja"-biama, miytha wai” gi” ja™bi ega™. Tetinike the (my. went,they when came and slept, raccoon robe w Soins eee Seay sub.) say they say, skin his they say . w w) ran, , vf ~/ qe Ha”ega’tce fyi¢a-baji tédi, jedi”i té ha. Ki jé aka din’di” agai té’di Corie he woke not when, membrum virile A And mem- the rigid was when riguit brum virile (sub.) going wai” ¢a" u¢iha ag¢af té ha ma”ci. Ki ma” ciaziqti gahthi¢a g¢i’ te ha. 3 robe the with it went : high in the And far up on high waving to sat (garment) SOE and fro = [ee poo , pam . , As *n/ ay RC x 6 UGA Gan’yi Ictinike aka fyi¢a-biama. Ki wai” ¢a® da™ba-bi yi, ticiki- And then Ietinike the awoke, they say. And robe the saw, they say when it gave (sub.) him need- , . Daee . * A / ¢a-biama. Ki, “Ci+cte! Héga ¢éta®. Aqta™ gga" im¢e’‘a™ tadan? I¢a iypige less trouble, And Fie! buzzard this (std. How pos- an do so to me should? I awoke they say. ob.) sible. é . Oey? ‘ Ont PED ae ; : aja ha,” & ama yi, wai” aké f¢api¢i’ qtci yihd agi-biama. Ky igidaha®’- 6 Irecline . he was say- when, robe the very slowly down- was returning, And he knew his, ing, (sub.) ward they say. they . , a . T.*ns . . biama. “Qé!” 4-biamd. “Wai™ wid é ¢a® Eda” ucidyige ha?” Ga™ jé ‘ say. Bother! said he, they Robe my that the (expresses Ideceived And mem- say. (afore- (ev. surprise ?) myself brum said) ob.) virile ké gidéta"-bi ega”, a¢a-biama. A¢a-biama yi, Jaonin’ge wi? uhé é¢a-biama. the wrapped up his, a ing went, they say. Went, they say when Sireaked chip- one traveling the path he Ig. they say munk came to him sud- ob.) denly, they say. Laenin’geaka, “Tsi-tsi-tsf!” 4-biama. ‘“Qa-f! ¢é-na® égi¢an’-gh.” Cidcgi¢a”’- 9 Streaked ohin: the Tsi-tsi-tsi ! said, they say. W hew! only this say it! Again said it (to munk (sub.) ' him), . a Daa he , 7 OK , . , . e . biama aonin’ge aka. “Qa! a ¢ajin’ga imahi" Aha",” 4-bi ega™, &di they say Striped chip- the Whew! he underrates me truly ts? Seaid: having there munk (sub.) they say a¢i-biama. jaonin’ge aka ma*taha did¢a-biamd, matean’de uefde. Ki went, they say. Stripeil chip- the within had gone, they say, den entered his. And munk (sub.) Ictinike ak& jé ké g¢igd¢a-biamé. Ki matean‘de té u¢tibahi"’-biama. Ki 12 oD Ietinike the mem- the unwrapped his, they And den the thrust it into, they say. And (sub.) brum (lg. say. (ob.) virile ob.) Laonin g e it'a-biama. Ki jaonin’ge aka jé ké hébe ¢asi-biama. “AMbA- S05 Striped chi touched, they say. And Striped chip- the mem- the part bit off, they say. Pierce my munk munk {sub.) brum (1g. virile ob.) 549 550 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. q¢ag¢aidja-ga! In¢éni taté. Qitida® taté ha,” 4-biama Tetinike akdi. Ci flesh often with your You eseape shall. It shall be good . said, they say Tetinike the Again teeth! from me for vou (sub.) , , : f~ VOUGe TIL, Ne , eraee Z Yon! ff P Eye “ni eytha ¢cé¢a-biamda jé ké. Ci hébe ¢asi-biamd. Ca™ éga"-hna®™ ¢asé agi” further sent, they say mem- the Again part bit off, they say. Still so only biting having brum (lg. off it virile ob.) a¢a-biama. Ki, ‘Tsi-tsi-tsi!” 4-biamda yaonin’ge aka. “A™ha™, Tef-tci-tef, he went, they say. And Tsi-tsi-tsi! said, they say Streaked chip- the Yes, Tei-tei-tei, munk. (sub.) , S or; , FTS9) oe . , Chi fs ie 72 , , ” fia . d-gi ha. (fivida® taté hi,” 4-biama Ietinike aka. “Kata” éda® e¢éga®-bi say ! It shall be good : said, they say Ictinike the What can be 2 he thought, jor you (sub.) the matter they say ega”, Ictinike aki jé ké g¢iza-biama. Ki égi¢e teéckagtci u¢acta- having Ictinike the mem- the took his back, they And behold very short it remained (sub) brum (lg. say. of a (lg. ob.) virile ob.) bikéama. ‘‘ He+-i-ci! a ¢ijudji tnahi" Aha",” 4-bi ega™, g¢i‘uda-biama. after biting, Alas! he has made truly ! said, they having took his out of the hole, they say. me suffer say 4 they say. - , . ey, ; / 5 1 bes * 9 Ca” hébe g¢iza-bi té udta™ a™¢a ¢é¢a-bi-dé, “ Ganinke hazi ¢i¢ade tal,’ Then part took his, when next threw it away, they say, You who are grapes they call — shall they say when (as) that (unseen) you i ps re . 1 "T° . Ful Y rs J a-biama. [Xi edita" maja™ ¢a"™ hazihi é¢a"ba-biama. Ki’ ei hébe g¢iza-bi said, they say. And from that land the grape-vines came out of, they say. And again part took his, they say ega™, ci a” ¢a ¢é¢a-biama. “Ganinke yan‘de ¢i¢ade tai,” 4-biama. Ki having, again threw it away, they say. You who are plums they call shail, said, they say. And that (unseen) you xe / el ; . if 2 2 x , ene 2 edita® yan'dehi é¢a"ba-biama, Ca” éga™ waqta ké -b¢tiga ugdciba-biama. from that plum-trees came insight, they say. Then 8o fruit the all he accomplished (the making of) all, they say. NOTES. This myth should follow that of Ictinike and the Buzzard. (See pp. 74-77.) It should precede that of Ietinike and the Four Creators. 552, 3. Tci-tci-tci! Could this have been intended as the explanation of the ori- gin of the verb, tci, coi ? : Le da u¢iqaga told part of this myth, as follows: (bétédedi-biama Laonin’ge. There was they say Striped 2 here chipmunk. “T-eti-ni-ké ga-¢ir-cé! Cat-te-¢& ¢a-gi-i” — ¢a-¢im-cé, ¢A¢i-cé! ~~ Hé-cka-¢a-¢a! Ictinike you who Letting it you carry you who you who move alone yours on move move your back Te!te!te!te!te!” a-biama. “ Wit! nikaci"ga ieta gan/ga pé/ji,” 4 biama Ictinike aka. Ah! person eye big bad said they Ictinike the say (sub.) [It is said that there was a striped chipmunk. And they sang thus: “O I- ctinike, you who move! You who move, you who move carrying your own on your back though you do not disturb it! He-cka-¢a-¢a! Te!te!te! te! te!” “Ah! the bad person with big eyes!” said Ictinike.] Then Ictinike took four sticks (sic), one being part of a da’qé (artichoke? ), one part of a potato plant, the third a turnip or a part of that plant, and the fourth part of a plum tree. He threw them among the ‘‘ja” (veg etation resembling and including sunflowers), saying to the first, Han, ga-ninke da™qé Ho! you who are arti that unseen choke one ICTINIKE AND THE CHIPMUNK. 551 e¢ige tai. Nikacitga uké¢i" i i¢icka’’¢é tai, ¢i¢ate tai, 7. e. “Ho, you who are out they call shall Indian mouth madeto shall they eat shall you move by you ry ou of sight! You shall be called ‘da"qé!’ Indians shall move their mouths on account of you! they shall eat you!” qa¢i™ na*paji’s version follows: The striped chipmunk ridiculed Ietinike and ran into hisden. Tetinike took sticks, which he thrust into the den in order to reach the striped chipmunk. But the latter bit off the ends again and again (¢ada"da™ pa) till each stick was not more than four inches long. Ictinike threw the da™gé stick among the ja (sunflowers, ete.). Uspaspa, nihanga a¢a‘abe éga™ (hollow places, resembling those seen where there is a spring on a hillside?) refers to the place where he threw the piece of the potato vine. He threw the piece of the turnip on the hill and the plum stick among the ‘“ yandehi cugaqti” (very dense plum trees). It is evident that the last informant modified his language, not caring to tell the myth exactly as he had heard it. TRANSLATION. After punishing the Buzzard, Ictinike resamed his wanderings. He stopped somewhere for the night, wrapped himself in his robe of raccoon skins, and lay down. Before he woke in the morning, membrum virile riguit, carrying the robe up into the air. And the robe continued waving to and tro far above the head of Ietinike. At length Iectinike awoke, and when he beheld the robe it gave him needless trouble. Just as he said, “ Fie! this is the Buzzard! Howcan you possibly take your revenge on me? Iam awake,” the robe was coming down again very slowly. ‘Then he ree- ognized it. ‘“ Bother! how could J have been deceived by my own robe!” So he wrapped up the membrum virile and journeyed on till he came suddenly upon a striped chipmunk. The latter said, “Tsi-tsi-tsi!” ‘Do not say that again,” said Ictinike, but the chipmunk repeated the cry. “ Whew! he veally underrates me,” said Ictinike, enraged at the chipmunk, whom he chased into his retreat in the side of a bank. Twn Ictinike membrum virile explicuit, et in foramen id trusit donee Tamiam vario colore distinctum tetegit. Hic partem membri quod longissimum erat, praemordit. I taque mem- brum ulterius intrusit. Iterum Tamias vario colore distinctus partem praemordit, et sic Sacere non intermisit. Tum divit, 'Tsi-tsi-tsi.” “Sane,” inquit Ictinike “ dic, = Mery tei, tal?” Tum membrum ex foramine extraxit. Miratus est id tam saepe praemorsum esse ut modo curtissima pars remaneret. TItaque in foramen manum trusit et membri partem ex- traxit. As he threw it far to one side he exclaimed, “ You shall be called, Hazi (?ha, skin ; zi, yellow).” And grape-vines came out of the place where it had fallen. Again he thrust his hand in and took out another piece, which he hurled aside, saying, ‘ You shall be called, ypande.” And plum bushes (yande hi) sprang up from the ground where the piece had fallen. In like manner he accomplished the creation of all kinds of fruits and vegetables. 552 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. ICTINIKE AND THE FOUR CREATORS. OLD ANK LA ECHE. ToLp BY FRANK La FLECHE A¢a-biama yi, vYg¢a-biamd, mi“ eéa*-bi ega”. “Ninitjiha cé¢a™ ii I He went, theysay when he dwelt they say, he tooka they as. Tobacco-ponch that visi- give in a lodge wite say ble (cv. ob.) back to me re So , Pee ay as h . Spee Tar OS , f¢a-oi. Qixiga" JAbe ¢inké’di b¢é tace,” A-biama. Ga® &/di ag¢a-biama. send it Your grand- Beaver to the (st.ob.) Igo must, said he, they And there he went they hither. father say. say. ae , , , ~ , LJ Ld , v . , , . 3 Ubdha® hi ama yi, ‘Hau, gé¢ica® ti¢a-ga,” d-biama Jabe aka. I behi" Part of the he was when Ho, in that passalong, said he, they Beaver the Pillow lodge oppo: reaching direction say (sub.). site the there, they entrance say ké'di dg¢inki¢a-biama. “Waite ctéwa™ ¢ingé ¢a™ cti. () iviga" indada*qti by the he caused him to sit on it, Food soever there was heretofore. Your grand- what indeed they say. noue father até teda"+,” a-biama Jabe igaq¢a" aka. Gan’yi Jdbe aka jabe jin’ga diba heeat shall? said, they say Beaver a wile oe And Beaver ene beaver young four sub.). ~ (sub.) 6 wat‘a’-biama Jin’gaqtei akd, g4-biama, “ Dadiha, wieb¢i" 14 minke, wa¢ate he had them, they say. Very small the ora as follows O father, Tam that I who will, food (sub.), they say té,” A-biamd. I¢adi aka gig¢dq¢i-biamdé. Ugitha™-bi ega™, Ictinike ¢in- the, said he, they His the he killed his own by hit Heh boiled they aaa Ictinike the st. say. father (sub.) ting, they say. his own ae ké ¢atcéki¢é-biama. Ictinike aké ¢atd-baji té’di, Jabe aka ga-biama: one they caused him to eat Ictinike the he ate it not when, Beaver the said as follows, it, they say. (sub.) (sub.) they say: 9 “Egi¢e waht wi"éctéwa" naga" te ha’! Qaqa™ji-gi ha!” 4-biama. (fa™ja Beware bone even one yeu break lest ! Do not break it by ! said ha, they Yet by biting biting say- Ietinike aké sidahi wi” ¢aqa”-biama. Wénanda-bi-dé, wahi gé gidahi- Tetinike the toes one __ he broke it by biting, Felt full after they when, bone the he gathered (sub.) they say. eating say (pl.ob.) his own, biamé. Ha uiji-bi-dé, nidha ¢é¢a-biama. Garéga"téctéwa™ji jabe they say. Skin hefilled they when, into the he plunged it, they Not even a little while beaver torhim say water say. (had elapsed) 12 jin’gaqtci aka ¢¢a"be aki-biama, gini. I¢adi aka, ‘‘E‘a™ a,” egd-biama yi, very small the emerging camethitheragain, he His the How isit ? hesaid the pre- when, (sub.) they say, revived. father (sub.), ceding, they say yin’ge aka, ‘Dadiha, siddhi wi? a’ ¢aqa™i ha,” 4-biama. Ada” edita™ jabe his son the O father, toes one he broke mine said he, they There- since ‘beaver (sub.), by biting say. fore then ama b¢tiga sidahi wi’, sidahi ujin’ga fbiski té, u¢dsna-bitéama. Nini- the (pl. all toe one, little toe next to the, has been split by biting, Tobac- sub.) they say. » tjiha ¢a™ gisi¢a-baji gaxe ag¢a-biama (Ictinike amd). Ki cin’gajin’ga ¢ eo-pouch the he did not re- aS stend- he started home- Ictinike the (mv. And child that (ev. ob.) member it ing ward, they say sub.). (aforesaid) — on ICTINIKE AND THE FOUR CREATORS. 553 wawieiki-bi ega™, “Cé¢a™ i¢c¢i™ mar¢in’-ga. Qa*xdya igia¢a ¢d¢a-ga. q he meant them, they = That visible having for walk thou. At a great throw it back to him, his own say (ev. ob.) him, the distance the owner. owner Décteda-na”,” 4-biam’. Ki cin’gajin’ga ama i¢é¢i® aga-biama. Qa™xAja he talksin- usually, said he, they And child the (mv. having it went, they At a great cessantly say. sub.) for the say. distance owner . v ” ri fgia’¢a ¢é¢e tabi yi, “Dudiha! didiha!” 4-biamé Ictinike aké. Eytha 3 to throw it back to about, when This way! this way! said, they say Ictinike the Further hito, the owner they say (sub.). . / 4 pie . L wéaga¢i® hi ama yi'ji, “(@iadi a da*be hi te, uf¢a-@a,” A-biama. ‘“‘Dadtha, having them hewasreach- when, Your to see me he shall tell him, said, they say. O father, for the owners ing there, father reach they say there ° bom in wacta”be ef te, af,” 4-biamé nijinga aka. ‘“Gé wian’yuhat éga", Qa" you see them you shall, he — said, they say boy the That weapprehendedit ca At reach said, (sub.). dist there : S ys eis . ral , rs pa s wégia"¢a ¢é¢a-gi, a™¢a™i ¢a™cti,” A-biama Jabe aka. Ictinike yitide 6 throw it back to them, the we said heretofore, said, they say Beaver the Ictinike to enter owners, (sub.). the lodge =Vvisit) a . , , Fie oh; v v (oss a¢a-biama JAabe ama. Ki 64a ahi-bi yi, Ictinike aka cin’gajin’ga-ma wi" went, they say Beaver the(my. And there ar- they when, Ictinike the tho ¢ alae on one sub.). rived say (sub.) there tégiki¢é ga” ¢a-biamd, gaq¢ije ag¢i™-biamda.. Ede Jabe ak ui¢i‘aga- to kill him, wished, they say, making him he had him, they But Beaver the was unwilling his own ery out by say. (sub.) for him, hitting him biamé. “Cat¢inké¢a-gi! ‘Ag¢a¢agé ha,” a-biamda. Gan'yi JAébe amd nidya 9 they say. Let the (st. ob.) alone! You make him A said he, they And then Beaver the to the suffer say. (mv.sub.) water , ; i; Oy; wee —/ oe 7 1: , ES jaete A . , a¢a-bi ega™”, jabe jin’ga wi™ a¢i” aki’-bi-d¢é, wan’gi¢e ¢atd-biama. went they 4S, beaver young one he brought they when, all they ate, they say. say back thither say oN v/ Oe “nies s Pies on 0 Ki ci’ atb aji yi, “ Ninityiha eé¢a™ i74 f¢a-ea. (Qiyiga™ Si’ hnedewa- And again day, an- when Tobacco-pouch that vis- give send it Your grand- Muask- other ible(ev. back hither father ob.) to me * Ce (rece i Pines ” $ Yon! s/qs ® , fei gi¢e ¢inke’di b¢é tace,” a-biamé. Ga™ @’di a¢a-biamd. Ubdha™ hf ama 12 rat tothe (st.ob.) Igo must said he, they say. And there he went, they say Part of the he was lodge oppo- reaching sitetheen- there, they trance say ¥ , pie Distye ~ 3 . *n/ . . e : yi, “Han, gé¢ica™ ti¢d-gi,” A-biama Si”hnedewagi¢e aké. I" behi" ké'di whin Ho! in that di- pass along said he, they say Muskrat the (sub.). . Pillow by the rection fg¢inki¢a-biama. “ Wa¢adte ctéwa” ¢ifgd ¢a™eti. (fiyiga" indédaqti he caused him to sit on it, Food soever there heretofore. Your grand- what indeed they say. was none futher , , . , / , ae . , até teda’+, a-biama Sir”hnedewdgi¢e igdq¢a® aka. Ki Sithnedewa- 15 6 eat shall ? said, they say Muskrat Tis wife the And Musk- (sub.). . aA , , my ra | , . a . gi¢e aka, “Ni agima®¢in’-gi,” 4-biama. Wa‘t ama agia¢d-bi ega™, adi" rat the Water fetch thou said he, they say, Woman the (my. ae went they as, she (sub.), sub.) afterit. say ‘a 4 7 4 4 rss < > 4 vy he . f ra wi f aki-biamé ni té. Ugdcke Agaji-biamé. Ki watt aké ugacka-biamd, ni took it home, wa- the To hang the he told her, they And woman the hung up the kettle over wa- they say. ter (ob.) kettle over say. (sub.) the fire, they say, ter the fire 12 15 554 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STURIES, AND LETTERS. té. Abixéqtia” amd& yi, baca™¢a-biamé ni aké. Baca” ¢a-bi yi, si” the It was boiling they say when pushed over kettle, they man the Ho pushed they when wild (ob.). very fast say (sub.). overthe say rice kettle - / | i / yas, . , . > baca™¢a-biama. Gat Ictinike aké ¢atd-biamd si" té. Ninitjiha ¢a® he [pushed over the ket- And Ictinike the he eats, they say wild the Tobacco-pouch the tle and] poured out, (sub ) rice (ob.). (ev. they say. ob. gist ¢a-baji gaxe ag¢a-biama (Ictinike ama). Ki cin’gajin’ga ¢anka ¢ gajin g 2 not remember- Ee pre- he ae ted they Ictinike the (mv. And child the (pl. that ing it tended homeward, say. sub.). ob.) . / NYS oy pye ei ~, ~ wawagika-bi ega”, “Cé¢a® i¢é¢i® mar¢in’-ga! Qa™xdja igia™¢a ¢é¢a-gi he meant them they “as, Thatseen naving it walk thou. At a great toany it back to him, the say (ev. ob.) for the distance owner owner : . Fine eet bos=/} ° . ] . Décteda- na”,” 4-biamd. Ki cin’gayin’ga ama i¢é¢i? a¢d-biama. anxaja, t=) fen) He talks in- usu said _he, they And child the (mv. havingit went they say. Ata great cessantly ally say. sub.) for the distance owner . rye nye . , fife , fgia™¢a ¢é¢e tabi “Dudiha! duidiha!” 4-biama Ictinike aké. Ejydha he was about to throw it back a ben This way! this way! said, they say Tetinike the Further to him, the owner, they say (sub.). rye , , vty . / , ve . , , wéaga¢i® hi ama yi’ ji, “(Diadi a“ da"be hi te, ui¢a-ga,” a-biamd. “ Dadiha, having them he was when Your toseeme he shall tell him said, they say O father, for the reaching there, father reach ® owners they say there , PSS OP. . pisivl , Nie7: Ce /) oO of? , wacta™ be ci te, ai,” 4-biama nijinga aka. “Gé wian’yuhai éga", Qa™xdja you see them you shall he said, they say boy the That we apprehended it as Ata great seach said (sub.). distance there weégia' ¢a ¢é¢a-gh, amgati’ ¢a™cti,” a-biamd Si” hnedewagi¢e aka. Ictinike ieee it back to them, tho we said heretofore said, they say Muskrat the Tetinike owners, (sub.). Ay . , “nW/ . 5 . 3 pats yiide a¢a-biama Si”hnedewagi¢e amd. Ki eydha ahi-bi yi, Ictinike toenter went, they say Muskrat the (my. And further ar- they when Ictinike the lodge sub.). rived say (visit) there ; ae apy yeah 1 ° , See . aka, igdq¢a" ¢inké é wagika-bi ega™, ‘Ni agima"¢in’-gi,” A-biama. the ahs wife the (st that he meant his as, Water fetch thou, — said he, they (sub.) ob.) (afore- own, they say, say. said) , ae 5 1 amet : é TeAq¢a" ama ni agia¢a-biamda. Ugdcka-bi ega™, Abixé’qti yi, baca™ ¢a-bi His wife the(mv. wa- she went they say. She hung the as, it boiled very when, he pushed it (sub,) ter after it kettle over the fast over, they say, fire, they say A; v yi, ni sia'¢é’qti baca”¢a ama. Si”hnedewagi¢e gaxe té dea" gixe ga qa when, wa- alone he was pushing it over, Muskrat ae did the so oe do he ter they say, (act) wished te ¢i‘4 amd Ictinike aka. Si”hnedewdgi¢e aké ci éga™ gAxa-bi ega™ the he was failing Ictinike the Muskrat the again so he did, aS to do it, they say (sub.). (sub.) they say . nyne ° > . , ys Cue (a ° si” ahigi gia®¢a ag¢a-biamd. Ki’ ci ga-biama ab aji yi, “(igi ga" wild a great ie left for he started home, they And again said as follows, day an- wheu Your rice quantity him say. they say other grandfather eee Ns esd oe 5 ee Aft . , mis ye Naxide-cka™ ni ¢inké’di b¢é ta minke,” a-biama. Ki é’di a¢é-biamd. Edi Blue Kingfisher(?) to the (st, ob.) Igo I whowill saidhe,they say. And there he went, they say. There hi amd yi, Naxideckani aké ¢ixucpa™ Agadamiqti kédega™ Ata™-bi ega™ he wasar- when Blue Kingfisher (?) the large white as it lay bent down so far that he stepped as, riving, they (sub.) willow it was horizontal (2) on it, they say say ICTINIKE AND THE FOUR CREATORS. 555 edita® ni ke gang ge a¢a-biama. Huht wi" é¢a"be adi” aki-biamé. Ki thence wa- the diving he went, they say. Fish one emerging he brought it back, they say. And ter (lg. ob.) . oe re 5 eels Ictinike ¢inké ¢atéki¢a-biam’. Ki Ictinike g¢é ama yi'ji, na*bii¢ici" Ictinike the (st. he caused to eat it, they say. And Ictinike was starting when glove ob.) home, they say, masiniha gisi¢aji gixe g¢é ama. Ki nijinga ta” ¢ wagikd-bi ega™, on one side notremem- pretend- he was starting And boy the that he meant his as bering it ing home, they say. (std. ob.) own. they say “Cé¢a™ i¢é¢i" mam¢in’-gi! Qa™xdja feia™¢a ¢é¢a-gai! Déeteda- na,” That seen having it walk thou! Ata great throw it back to him, Ste He talks in- usu- (ey. ob.) for the distance owner! cessantly, ally owner. Z bi Z Ki k -bi Vals 4 Sh 4-biama. Iki cin ‘gain’ 2 oa ama dei" aga- lama. Qa'xaja igia™ ‘ga ec ¢e t Abi saidhe,they And child 2 the havingit went, they say. Ata great site was about to throw it Say. (my. sub.) for the distance back to the owner, they owner Say, yi, “Didiha! didiha!” 4-biama Ictinike aké. EjAha wéaga¢i" hi ama when, This way! this way! said, they say Tetinike the Further having them he was reach- (sub.). for the owners ing there, they say v/ su s / . ~ yi ji, = a” datbe hi te, uffa-ga,” a-biama, ‘“Dadtha, wacta™be ef te, when our to see me he shall tell him said, they say, © father. you see them you shall father reach reach there there af,” 4-biama nujinga aka. “Gé wian’yuhai éga", Qa"xdya wégia™ da ¢éGa-@it, he said they boy the That we apprehended it as, Ata great throw it back to the am, the said, say (sub.). distance owners, an¢a™i ¢a™cti,” d-biamai- Naxidecka™ni aké. Ga™ 6’di a¢a-biama we said heretofore said, they say Blue Kingfisher (2) the (sub.). And there went, they say Naxidecka™ni ama, Ictinike yiide. E/di bf amd yi, Tetinike aka ¢ixuepat’ Blue Kingfisher (?) the (my. Ictinike toenterhis There he wasar- when Ictinike the large white sub ), lodge (= riving, they (sub.) willow to visit) say dgadamuqti kédega" Ane a¢é-biamé. Ki edita™ ni ké u‘a™si éeihe as it lay bent down so far thatit climb. w ent, they say. And fromit stream the leaping beneath was horizontal (7) ing it (lg. in the sur- ob.) face did¢a-biama. Ki na™ji"cké’qtei Naxidecka™ni aka ¢izd-biamé. Ni had gone, they say. Aud scarcely Blue Kingfisher (?) the (sub) seized him, they Water Say. inandé’qti Ictinike ¢izd-biamd. Ga" huhtt wi" ¢izi-bi ega”, Ictinike efat¢a having his fill Ictinike he seized him, And fish one he took, rae Ictinike he left of it they say. they say for him ag¢a-biama. he started home, they say. Ki ci’ a"b Aji yi, “(infga” Sin’ga ¢inké’di b¢é té minke,” 4-biamé. Kt And again day an- when, Your grand Flying. to the (st.ob.) Igo I who will said he, they And other father squirrel say. di a¢d-biamé. F/di hi ama yi, Sin’ga aka, igdq¢a® ¢inké é wagikd-bi there he went, they say. There he was arriv- when, meh the his wife the (st. that he meant his ing, ray say squirrel (sub.), ob.) own, they say f . . Smee , ega™, ““Wayu ecké i¢a-gi,” A-biama. Wayu ¢izd-bi ega”, of te dgine a¢a- as Awl that seen vad said he, they Awl hetook,they as, lodge the climbing went, (Ig. ob.) hither say. say (eur his own ob.) biama. Pahdciayiqti ahi-bi- yi, candé ¢a" jayihé-biami. page uqpa¢ée they say. At the very top he reached, when — serotum the hestabbed they say. Black — to fall from they say part himself, walnuts a height 12 15 18 € 3 6 12 556 THE GEGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. gixa-biama, hégaji. age ¢atcki¢a-biama Ictinike. Ki ag¢a-bi yi, he made, they say, not a few. Black he caused to eat, they say Ictinike. And he started when, walnuts home, they say na"bi¢ici" masaniha gisi¢aji gaxe o¢é amd. Ki ntyinga ta" é wagiké-bi glove on one side ‘not to re- pretend- he was starting And boy the that he Fecu his member ing home, they say. (std. (afore- own, they say an. ob.) said) ega™, “ Cé¢a™ i¢é¢i™ mar¢in’-gi! Qa*xadja igia™¢a ¢é¢a-ga! Décteda-na™,” as, That seen having it walk “anaah Ata great Finor it back to him, the He talks in- usu- (ev. ob.) for the distance owner ! cessantly ally, owner i-biama (Sin’ga aké). ki cin’gajin’ga ama i¢é¢i" a¢a-biamd. Qa?xdja said,they say (Flying- the (sub.). And child - the having it went, they say. Ata great squirrel) (mv. for the distance sub.) owner fgia“¢a ¢é¢e tabi yi, “Didiha! didiha!” a-biamd Ictinike aké. KE jéha iat was about to throw it back when, ‘This way! this way ! said, they say Tetinike the Further to the owner, they say (sub.). wéaga¢i® hi ama yi'ji, “ (hadi a” da"be hi te, uf¢a-gi,” 4-biama. ‘ Dadiha, having Sing m hewasreach- when, Your toseeme he shall, tell him, said he, they O father for the owners ing there, father reach say. they say there wacta™be ci te, ai,” 4-biamaé niyinga aka. “Gé wian’yuhai éga", Qa™xdja yousee them you shall, he — said, they say boy the + That we apprehended aN At a great reach said, (sub.). distance there weeia™¢a ¢é¢a-gi, aga] ¢a”cti,” 4-biama Sin’ga aké. Ga™ @'di da™be aber it back to them, the we said heretofore, said, they say Flvi ine. the And there to see owners, squirrel (sub.). him a¢a-biama Sin'ga ama, Tetinike. E’di hi ama yj, Ictinike akA wéyu ¢izd-bi went, they say Flying- the (mv. Ictinike. There he was when, Ictinike the awl took it, they squirrel sub.), reaching (sub.) say there, they say ega™, uf té Agine a¢i-biama. Pahaciaja éctiama¢a™qti ahi-bi yi’ji, candé ¢a® as, lodge the climbing went, they say. At the top he barely he reached when scrotum the (std. his own there, part ob.) they say jayiha-biama. Ki wami sAbéqti badija-biama. “Qé! nicjiqtel yiyaxe ¢ aha”, # ‘stabbed himself,they And blood very black he forced out by stab- Why! not paining he made say. bing, they say. at all for himself, A-biama Sin’ga aka. Sin’ga aka wayu ¢izi-bi ega”, vi té dne aga-biama. said, they say Flying- the Flying- the awl he tuok, they — as lodge the climb- he went, they say. squirrel (sub.). squirrel (stub.) say es ing ob.) Ki yage hégajiqti gidxa-biama Sin’ga aka Ictinike. And Black an exceedingly mace they say Flying- the Ictinike. walnuts great number for him, squirrel (sub.) NOTES. Ictinike married after his adventure with the gaoninge, as told in the preceding part of the myth. The order of his adventures is as follows: 1. With the Buzzard (see pp. 74-77). 2. With gaoninge. 3. With the Beaver. 4. With the Muskrat. 5. With the Kingfisher. 6. With the Flying-squirrel. The four Creators were the Beaver, whose deeds are told in the myth; the Musk- rat, who made rice out of water, roots of trees, and men; the Flying-squirrel, who made nuts of his ““cande”; and the Kingfisher, who made all the fishes. 554, 16. Naxidecka"ni (O.), eq. to Nida"-b¢eya (P.), the blue kingfisher. - F. La Fléche. ICTINIKE AND THE FOUR CREATORS. 557 Samuel Fremont (Wadjepa) said in 1889 that the nida® b¢eya and the naxide cktni were different birds, resembling in plumage, beak, and fondness for fish, the naxide ckuini being slightly larger than the other fisher. Frank La Fléche insists that they are two names for the same bird. TRANSLATION. Ictinike married and dwelt in alodge. One day he said to his wife, ‘‘Hand me that tobacco-pouch. I must go to visit your grandfather, the Beaver.” So he departed. As he was entering the Beaver’s lodge the latter person exclaimed, ‘+ Ho, pass around to one side.” And they seated Ictinike on a pillow. The wife of the Beaver said, ‘* We have been without food. How can we give your grandfather anything to eat?” Now, the Beaver had four young beavers. The youngest one said, ‘‘Father, let me be the one who shall serve as food.” So the father killed him. After boiling her son, the Beaver’s wife gave the meat to Ictinike, who ate it. But before Ictinike ate it the Beaver said to him, ‘“‘ Beware lest you break even a single bone by biting! Do not break a bone!” Yet Ictinike broke the bone of one of the toes. When Ictinike felt full, after eating, the Beaver gathered the bones and put them in a skin, which he plunged beneath the water. In a moment the youngest beaver came up alive out of the water. When the father said, ‘Is all right ?” the son said, ‘‘ Father, he broke one of my toes by bit- ing.” Therefore from that time every beaver has had one toe, that next to the little one, which has seemingly been split by biting. When Ictinike was about to go home, he pretended that he had forgotten about his tobacco-pouch, which he left behind. So the Beaver said to one of his chiidren, ‘“* Take that to him! Do not go near him, but throw it to him when you are at a great distance from him, as he is always very talka- tive.” Then the child took the tobacco-pouch and started after Ictinike. After getting in sight of the latter, the young beaver was about to throw the pouch to Ietinike when standing ata great distance from him; bat Ictinike called to him, ‘‘Come closer! come closer!” And when the young beaver took the pouch closer Ictinike said, “Tell your father that he is to visit me.” When the young beaver reached home he said, ‘*O father, he said that you were to visit him.” The Beaver replied, “As I apprehended that very thing, I said to you, ‘Throw it to him while standing at a great distance from him.” Then the Beaver went to see Ictinike. When he arrived there Ictinike wished to kill one of his own children (in imitation of what he had seen the Beaver do), and was making him ery by hitting him often. But the Beaver was unwilling for him to act thus, so he said, “‘ Let him alone! You are making him suffer.” And then the Beaver went to the stream where he found a young beaver that he took back to the lodge, and they ate it. On another day Ictinike said to his wife, ‘‘ Hand me that tobacco-pouch. I must go to call on your grandfather, the Muskrat.” So he departed. As he was entering the Muskrat’s lodge the latter exclaimed, ‘* Ho, pass around to oue side.” And Ietinike was seated on a pillow. The Muskrat’s wife said, ‘‘We have been without food. How can we give your grandfather anything to eat?” Then, said the Muskrat, ‘Fetch some water.” And the woman brought the water. He told her to put it in the kettle and hang the kettle over the fire. When the water was boiling very fast the husband upset the kettle, and instead of water out came wild rice! So Ictinike ate the wild rice. When Ictinike departed he left his tobacco-pouch, as before. Then the Muskrat called 558 THE (@EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. one of his children, to whom he said, “Take that to him! Do not go near him, but throw it to him when you are at a great distance from him, as he is always very talk- ative.” So his child took the tobacco-pouch to return it to Ictinike. But when he was about to throw it to Ietinike the latter said, ‘Come closer! come closer.” And when he took the pouch closer Ictinike said, ‘‘ Tell your father that he is to visit me.” When | the young muskrat reached home he said, “‘O father, he said that you were to visit him.” The Muskrat replied, “As I apprehended that very thing, I said to you, ‘Throw it to him while standing at a great distance from him.’” Then the Muskrat went to see Ictinike. And Ictinike said to his wife, “ Fetch water.” Ictinike’s wife went after water. She filled the kettle and hung it over the fire till it boiled. When !ctinike upset the kettle, only water came out. Ietinike wished to do just as the Muskrat had done, but he was unable. Then the Muskrat had the kettle refilled, and when the water boiled he upset it, and an abundance of wild rice was there, which he gave to Ictinike. And thereupon the Muskrat departed, leaving plenty of wild rice. On another day Ictinike said to his wife, “I am going to see your grandfather, the Kingfisher.” When he arrived there the Kingfisher stepped on a bough of the large white willow, bending it down so far that it was horizontal; and he dived from it into the water. He came up with a fish, which he gave Ictinike to eat. And as Iectinike was Starting home, he left one of his gloves, pretending that he had forgotten it. So the Kingfisher directed one of his boys to take the glove and restore it to the owner; but he charged him not to go near him, as Ictinike was very talkative and might detain him too long. Just as the boy was about to throw the glove to Ictinike the latter said, “Come closer! come closer!” So the boy earried the glove closer. And Ictinike said, ‘“‘ Tell your father that he is to visit me.” And the boy said to his father, “O father, he said that you were to visit him.” The Kingfisher replied, “As I appre- hended that very thing, I said, ‘Throw it to him while you stand at a great distance from him.’” Then the Kingfisher went to see Ictinike. When he arrived there Ictinike climbed upon a bough of a large white willow, bending it till it was horizontal; he leaped from it and plunged beneath the water. And it was with difficulty that the Kingfisher seized him and brought him to land. Ictinike had swallowed more of the water than he liked. Then the Kingfisher plunged into the stream, brought up a fish, which he gave to Ictinike. But the Kingfisher departed without eating any portion of if. On another day Ictinike said to his wife, ‘‘I am going to see your grandfather, the Flying-squirrel.”. So he departed. When Ictinike arrived the Flying-squirrel said to his wife, Hand me that awl.” He took the awl and climbed up on his lodge. When he reached the very top per testes subulam impulit, causing a great many black walnuts to fall to the ground. Thus he provided black walnuts, which Iectinike ate. And when I[ctinike departed he left one of his gloves, as before, pretending that he had forgotten it. In like manner did the Flying squirrel send the glove to Ictinike by one of his sons. And Ictinike sent by the son an invitation to the Flying-squirrel to visit him. When the Flying squirrel reached the lodge of Ietinike, the latter took an awl and climbed to the top of his lodge. He had barely reached the top of the lodge when per testes subulam iinpulit. And he forced out very dark blood. ‘ Why,” said the Flying-squirrel, ‘he has surely hurt himself severely!” So the Flying-squir- rel took the awl and climbed up on the lodge. And the Flying-squirrel made a large- quantity of black walnuts for Ictinike. ie ICTINIKE, THE WOMEN, AND CHILD—AN OMAHA MYTH. 559 ICTINIKE, THE WOMEN, AND CHILD—AN OMAHA MYTH. TOLD BY GEORGE MILLER. Kegi¢e Ietinike ama a¢é amaima. Egi¢e yf wi" gat te ama. Ni-ya™ha Atlength Ictinike the was going, they At length lodge one of some sort was Bank of stream ; (my. sub.) say. std., they say. v , yes 1 “ poms , ~ / / ~ , ke‘ya a¢a-bi a”, ni ké uhd-biama. Ni ké ma™taja yan‘de édedf ke ama, to the having gone, stream the followed, they say. Stream the beneath plum were there in abund- (ig. ob.) they say, (lg. (lg. ance, they say ob.) ob.) s , , S , ° , . . , jide ké ama. “ Wuhu+!” e¢éga™-biama. ‘yig¢ionudd-bi ega™, miydha red lay (or they Oh! he thought, they say. Having stripped off his clothing, raccoon skin in abund- say. they say, ance?) wie mya . t vw £ = . . , Bes = . peji ge ité¢a-bi a”, yan'de té ag¢ange did¢a-biama. Man¢in’ka ké ¢iq¢at’- bad the having put them plum. the divingon had gone, they say. Soil the seizing a many down, they say, ad .\ (col. account of (Ig. ob.) large hand- (in. ob.) \\n ob) . . . , Vas S / . S ey, , qti ¢iza-biama. Ag¢i-bi yi, da ba-bi yi, ma™¢in’ka té amd. “ Wuhu+ !” ful took it, they say. Had come when, lookedatit, when, soil a they say. Oh! back (to they say mass land), they say d-biama. Ci ni kéya da™ba-bi yi ci yan’de té éga%qtida™ba-biama. Ci said, theysay. Again stream atthe looked atit, when again plum the just so saw, they say. Again : (ig. ob.) they say (col. ob.) ° © ® , ~ , o fe s—/ *n/ 2 £ ® ~ éga"qti did¢a-biama. Ci éga"-biama, ma™¢in’ka-na® a¢i™ ag@¢i-biamad. Ci co) 5 ’ 5 just so had gone, they say. Again was so, they say, soil only havingit he returned (to Again land), they say. da™ba-bi yi, ni kéya, ‘“Wahuat+!” a-biamdé. Ci yan’de ké jide ké ama, looked at it, when, stream at the Really ! said they say. Again plum the red in they they say (lg. ob.), he, (Ig.) abund- say line ance vil es . “7s . , fe , . cas . . , mi kéya. Ci égarqti aid¢a-biama. Ci égaqti ma"¢in’ka ¢izd-biama. stream at the. Again just so had gone, they say. Again just so soil took, they say. ; , . Ne 7 O 207 . 1 peas 3 oy ela “Qat!” a-biama. Ci éga™qti did¢a-bi a”, ag¢i-bi yf, ma®é ké’ya t¢ixida- Whew! said, they say. Again justso having gone thither, hadcome when, cliff to the gazed, they say back (to land), they say bi yi, égi¢e yan’dehi ak’ ma" kéya Agadimuaqti f¢istagti naji” akéma. they when, behold plum trees the cliff at the having very heavy adhering to were std., they say. say (sub.) weight (of fruit) in bunches 2 that bore down or clusters their branches Ki é nf keya niuwa¢ikiha’” ke-na” dAg¢angé-biamé. Wa¢aha pé'ji té And that stream atthe reflectionin the water the only dived on account of that, Clothing bad the F (lg. ob.) they say. (col. zs ob.) , Pape toy as s 1°: if / Sees , fae ens pe / , , ag¢aha-bi a”, &di a¢a-bi a”, yan’de gé ¢isé ama, a¢ici’-bi a”. Ad¢é ama having put on his own, there having gone, plum the was pulling off, having put them into Was they they say they say (pl.ob,) they say, a blanket “‘ pocket ” going, say made by curving the left arm, they say. bo 560 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. ui té'di. ypan‘de té jeq¢i” ibiya-bia”, yihuya™ té Cgiha-na® a®¢’ i¢é¢a-biama. tent to the Plum the semen having rubbed on smoke-hole the sTrOwen in threw it forcibly thither, (std. ob.). (col. them, they say, (std. each they say. ob.) ob.) cuse a, , , "n/ . / / zs . . . . Ki (wa‘t na™ba akama. “Hi”, ciya”, yan'de wi" i¢dyi¢e da™+,” A-biama. And woman two sat, they say. Oh! sister-in- plum one Thavefound . (fem.) said, they say. law, tor myself + Oe y , / . Tyine-na™ ama. Edi ahf-bia™, “ Qa-f! icfya" méga® ¢c¢ugti edi ¢anké-na,’ They were scrambling There having arrive a Whew! her sister- likewi ise just here my relations have come now and then for (the they say, in-law here and sit! plums), they say. d-biama. ‘Tena’! gaké yan‘de ké a™ta ctéwa™ji yi, nisa-baji’qtia®, ¢icfya" said he, they say. Why! that line plum the very abundant ~ when, you have not picked your sister- (lg.) line them at all, in-law / méga",” 4-biama (Ictinike aka). ‘ Hi", giga™ha, angtigaca®-baji’qtia™ eda®+ ! Resins said, they say (Tctinike) the Oh! grandfather SS ha ave not traveled at all alas (fem. (sub.). (f. sp.), intj.)! 4 b) s. *n/ Uhiack ¢éga" eté, yiga"hd, anyfe¢ise taf ei"té.” “Hau, ¢isé ma¢i™i-ga,” Near Sante: if, gre andl(agher we may pick them for ourselves. Ho, to pick walk ye, what (fem. sp.), them 4-biama. Cin’e@ajin’oea Ama aka wa™he adi?’ akdma, ki ud¢the u¢dha Aka® D 4} D5 ’ said he, they Child other the put into the was keeping it, and Indian withit leaning say. one (sub.) cradle and they say, eradle-board~ - wrapped the coverings around it ité¢a-bi ta” ama. Ki jae ta” ama cin’gajin’ga. Ki gd-biama Ictinike was set up std., they say. And sound was std., they child. And saidas follows, Ictinike asleep say they say ety Orie eet aka, “Céta" it¢i’a"¢a mar¢i“i-et u‘a”he ta. Egi¢e yan’dehi da” cté the That (std. leave for me, walk ye the std. one put Beware plum tree perhaps (sub.), an. ob.) its relation into the cradle ° ingi’nid¢s te!” “Hi, yfgathd, éga™ te da™+,” 4-biamd. Ga™ “Aagikida hurtit, my rela- lest! Oh! vee ae # will 5 said, they say. And Tattend to my tion (f. sp.), (fem.) own . one . Sse, , . , hed 2 ris ag¢i” ti minke,” 4-biama. Gan’yi ¢4-biam& wa‘t-ma. Gan’yi Ictinike I sit will I who, said he, they And then went, they say the women And then Ictinike say. F 2 . Bane ° +. . 1 , op . =i dpe nite aka hi’ ¢idki¢ge’gti naji”-bi a”, néxe ni ujf ité¢a-bi té amcdde ¢izi-bi a”, the bestirring himself at having arisen to his kettle water filled the stdin. ob. had been put having taken it, (sub.) once tvet, they say, down, they say they say, , ae me co S . , : varies ugicka-piama. Cin’ gajin’ga ké t’é¢a-bi a”, isu gaxa-biama. Uha®’-biamaé hung it over the fire, Child the having killedit, strips mde it, they say. Boiled it, they say they say. (reel. they say, of meat ob.) : * ye ~ , Dugas / / I}: , 7° cin’gajin’ga ké. ga ¢a" ¢izi-bi ega”, ufa”he ké’di daq¢tiqaha ¢an‘di ehild the Head the taken,they having, entire In- in the head covering inthe part (vecl, ob.). (ev. ob.) say dian eradle (lg. ob. ) sein pa . . Ten: See ugig¢a’-biama, nija naji’ té’di dga"qti gaxa-biama Hi" ¢iéyi¢e’qti Acéde put his own relation, alive stood when just so did, they say. Bestirring himself at fire they say, once a oe ails re e ; ; P, =e Thy 5 ; Ahiv¢i™¢a-bi a”, Aci eti wada™be ahi-na"-biamé. HEgi¢e nin’de¢d-biama. having put wood onit, outof too to look went often, they say. At length was cooked, they say. they say, doors (hizd-bi ega”, ¢até aganka-ma. G¢i-baji ¢asni"’-bi ega”, ad-biama. Having taken it, they he sat eating it, they say. Not having he having sw aNasaa it, went, they say. say, returned they say, ° Pates: c . / . Watti-ma ki-bi yi, ¢ingd-bi té amd Ictinike ama. ‘“Ciya™, iedige The women reached when, he was missing, they say Tetinike the (mv. Sister-in- old man home, sub.). law, they say ICTINIKE, THE WOMEN, AND CHILD—AN OMAHA MYTH. 561 ama ¢ingai té hé,” a-biama. “Na! i ja" té ca®ca™qtci ja” eha™+!” the is missing (?) said. Why! he lay the without inter- lies ! (fem. in (my. (fem.), forme past mission soliloquy) (sub.) act . / , , . y , , y , . yee . d-bi ega”, g¢ize agi-bi yi, da ¢a” uqpadé ama. “Hi”, sfji"qtci¢at+!” having said, they seized her wasre- when, head the was falling from a Oh! ‘dear little child! say, own turning, part height, they say. they say , s a - 1 / *n/ —/ ~ s éama. Xaga-biama wa‘ aki¢a. Ga™ xagé edi” ¢an‘ka té, Ictinike ama was saying, Cried, they say woman both. And = crying were st. when, Ictinike the they say. (my. sub.) . 11: 1 Dy) Fue fake Oe a . ie PNG . 0 yi‘a’’-bi a”, mat¢in’ka fyifa’-bi a”, djiqti yiyixa-bi a™, &di ahf-biama. having painted his earth having painted his very dif- having made himself, there arrived, they say. face, they say, face with it, they say, ferent they say. Gene , . , . w, aap , a . , . , “Tena! edta"qti ¢axagai a, ¢iciya" méga",” A-biamé. “Hi”, yfgathd, Why! for what pos- you(pl.)ery 7? your sister- _ likewise, said he, they Oh, grandfather sible reason in-law say. (f. sp.) Ictinike ama ¢é¢u atti Cdega", yan’de u¢a ega™ a®¢isé angahi. (héke ua he Ictinike the(my. here came having plum having told wepick wetwo This (lg. (entire) In- sub.) (past), about (them) reached there. ob.) dian cradle ké ata™¢a angahi cde, ¢asni’ aid¢ai té. ga ¢a" u‘a”he ké daq¢tiqaha the we left it we two but, swallowing he had gone. Head the entire In- the head covering (lg. reached there (the child) part dian cradle Ce ob.) ob.) ¢an’di ugig¢a" aid¢ai teda™+.” “Wahua!” a-biama. “ Hind’, ma zepe inthe part put hisown had gone . (fem.) Really! said he, they Let me see, ax relation say. i¢ai-ga. B¢iqe tice,” a-biama. Ma zepé-de ‘fi-bi ega™, a¢i-biama ya ¢inqti send ye I chase must, said he, they Ax when they having he went, they running fast hither. him say. (2) given it to him, say they say, ma"¢i” ama. pa ¢itqti a¢a-bi ega™, q¢abé cugdqti édega™ ahi-bi ega™, he was walking, they Running fast having gone, they say, tree very thick being, in having reached say. the past there, they say, a — / / f sn/ f / f Bl , / 4 iMtcan’ga-na™ tine ma™¢i” ama. Ja” gyifa ke’ uhd, ma™zepe dahide ¢a™ mice(orsome only seeking waswalking, they Wood de- the passed ax butt-end the other rodents them say. cayed (lg.ob.) along, of the ax-head part i"tean’ga-na" wégaq¢ig¢i-bi ega” wamt a¢ahahaqti g@axa-bi a”, ag¢é ama. mice only having killed them one by one blood streaming from having made it, was returning, with it, they say various parts of it they say, they say. , . / , vi ye v . , = Ow , ” 7 5 , Hau. Aki-bi a”, vi té’di, “Aq¢i ag¢i ha, ¢icfya® méga*,” 4-biama. T Having reached lodge at the I killed Ihave 5 your sister- likewise, said he, they there again, (std. ob), him comeback in-law say. . they say, “Ai"+! qgiga™ha, uht ackéga" éfte.” ‘An‘kajiqtia’ ha, wa¢ide etéwa ji. tan) to) A i ’ J Oh! grandfather place somewhat perhaps Not at all 5 by no means near. (f.sp.), of reach- near (indirect ing question). po ite vs , : 1 , PoE . 5 Hi" ¢ié-de udq¢e ha,” a-bi a”, ma” zepe wamf A¢ahahaqti adi akf-biama. Hurrying, JIovertook . having said, ax blood streaming from having he reached there, when him they say various partsofit - it again, they say. = , x / ees/ 108 | vf , . , * Ki é ama ha, yan’de nin’de yi agaha qtide A¢aha ¢i" Ewa" ama Ictinike And that wasit, . plum ripe when on it gray adheres the he caused it, Ictinike they say (class) they say ama gaxa-biama. the did it, they say. (mv. sub.) VOL. VI O68 15 562 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. NOTES. 560, 1. jeq¢i" ibiya-bi a". This is referred to in the last sentence of the myth con- taining the Omaha explanation of the gray down (?) on ripe plums. All fruits and vegetables were thought to be of phallic origin. 560, 6. Uhiack ega” ete, yiga"ha, or pigatha, uhiack ega® ete. Both used. 560, 11. ¢a-biama wa‘u-ma, instead of a¢a-biama wa‘u ama, as the women were re- quested to go. 560, 12. ite¢a-bi te amede, the women were absent then; perhaps this explains the use of such a form. 561, 2. g¢ize agi-bi yi, implies that the mother went to the cradle, took it up, and was returning to the other woman when the severed head fell to the ground (?). TRANSLATION. Once upon a time Ictinike was going somewhere. Near the place was a lodge in which dwelt two women. Ictinike traveled till he reached the bank of a stream, and then he went along the bank. Beneath the water there appeared to be a great many plums, and they were red. “ Oh!” said he, as he undressed ; and, putting aside his miserable attire of raccoon skins, he dived down after the plums. But he seized a large handful of dirt. On returning to land and viewing what he had behold it was a lot of dirt! Again he looked at the water and there were the plums. So he dived again and with a similar result. Having returned the fourth time with nothing but dirt, he chanced to raise his eyes to a cliff above the stream, and there were many plum trees filled with fruit, which caused the branches to hang down over the stream. Tt was the reflection of these in the water that had deceived him. ‘Then he put on his clothing, ascended the cliff, and gathered the plums, with which he filled one corner of his robe. Then he went to the lodge. He rubbed semen over the plums, and threw them one by one down through the smoke-hole of the lodge. On seeing the first plum one of the women said, “Oh, sister-in-law! I have found a plum!” They scrambled for the plums. On entering the lodge, Ictinike observed, “Whew! my relations, my grandchild, and her sister-in-law have returned here! Why! those plums are very abundant, and yet you two have not picked any of them?” “Oh! grandfather, we have not gone anywhere. If they are near here, we may pick them for ourselves,” exclaimed one of the women. ‘ Ho, go and pick them,” said he. The child of one of the women was still in the cradle, and the mother had set it up in the cradle against the side of the lodge. So Ictinike said, “ When you go leave the child in the cradle with me, as it might get hurt if you took it among the plum trees.” “Oh, grand- father! it shall be as you say,” said the mother. Ictinike promised to watch over it as over arelation. So the women departed. Presently Ictinike started to his feet in great haste, seized the kettle that had been placed there full of water, and hung it over the fire. Thenhe killed the child, and cut the flesh in narrow strips, which he boiled. But he put the head back in the cradle, wrapping it in the head covering, and arranged it just as if it was alive. He put ICTINIKE AND THE TURTLE—AN OMAHA MYTH. 563 wood on the fire without delay, and went out of the lodge from time to time to see whether the women were coming. At last the meat was cooked, and he sat eating it. Having devoured all of it before the women returned, he departed. When the women got home Ictinike was missing. ‘“O sister-in-law,” said one, “the old man is not here. Why! my child is still sleeping just as he was when I left him!” As she took up the cradle and was returning with it to the other woman the head of the child fell to the ground. ‘Oh! dear little child!” said she. Both the women wept. And while they sat crying Ictinike, who had painted his face with clay, disguising himself, entered the lodge. “Strange! what cause have you for crying?” “Oh, grandfather! Ictinike came and told us about plums, and when we went to pick them we left the child here in the cradle; but he ate it and departed, after putting the head back in the cradle and wrapping the head-covering around it.” “ Really!” said he, “let me see; hand me the ax, I must pursue him.” They gave him the ax and he de- parted, running very rapidly. He ran till he reached a very dense forest, where he sought for some wood mice. Passing the butt-end of the ax along a decayed log in which were some wood mice, he killed the mice and covered the ax with blood. He took the ax streaming with blood back to the lodge, and when he entered he said, “YJ killed him and I have now returned.” ‘Oh! grandfather,” said the women, “was not the place where you found him near here?” ‘Not at all! it is very far, but I overtook him by going very rapidly.” ‘This myth explains the cause of the gray down (?) on ripe plums: Ictinike was the cause of it. ICTINIKE AND THE TURTLE—AN OMAHA MYTH. TOLD BY GEORGE MILLER, Tctinike ama a¢é amama. Egi¢e waticka baca™i té é¢a"be ahi-bi- yi, Iectinike the was going, they At creek itbends the insight arrived, when, (my. sub.) say. length (place they say where) ae Sony f Nn al’ dinkd < 4 1 be) fdead] atlas Lore oh a Ste ¢ égi¢e yé yanga ga” ¢inké ama, i¢dnaqideadi atig¢i™ Gea", yied¢iza-bi at Biz turtle was (st.) there awhile, Ata sheltered place having come there Having drawn length they say, warmed by the sun and sat. (himself) back, 1 : , Palas ote cs AIT a tO! 5 TRH OY? tee ~ of qe : ega”, bispispa agi-bi ega", ja” ¢i"qti a¢a-bi a”, dami té ‘di ahf-bi they say crouching at having been coming running fast having gone, they downhill the there arrived, intervals back, they say, say, they say / : , ww , , So ae ‘ni x 2 a”, ga-biama: “Téna’! edta" cénajiqti ¢ag¢i” a. Ni gdké bize te af hav- said as follows, Why! where- paying no at- you sit 2? Water that dry will said ing they say: fore tention (lg. ob.) : whatever ega™, wanita ni ug¢i” ama b¢ugagti nf u¢tthai ha. Ki d-biama syd having, quadruped those dwelling in the all water follow im- a And said, they say ‘Tur- water mediately _ 4 tle after it = , =/ fe Faye 2 / visi , Y, FIO ganga aka, “ Na’! ¢¢ atidg¢i"-na™ma™ ¢a™ja, edada® ctéwa™ and‘a"-maji. big the Why! this T often come and sit though, what soever I have not heard, (sub.), 12 15 18 564 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. Ga” mi" ¢éta™ hf yi, ¢é dtidg¢i"-na"-ma™ ha.” ‘ Wana q¢in-ga ha,” } And sun this far reaches when, this T usually come and sit * Hurry d-biama Ictinike aka, “ yAciqti cénujin’ga dba t’4-biama tbizé, nuona™ said, they Iectinike the very lone young men some have died, they from otter say (sub.), ago (see note) Say thirst, jin’ga cti t’é amd, sin‘de jin’ga cti t’¢é ama, sin’de b¢aska eti t’é ama, miya young too isdead, they tail small too is dead, they tail flat too isdead, they raccoon say, say, say, jin’ga cti t?’é ama.” small too is dead, they say. Hau. “Ké, angd¢e te ha’,” A-biama ye janga aka. Jtig¢e ag¢a- bt Come, let us two go C said, they say Big*turtle aS With him = went, (sub.). biama Ictinike ami. Wahi g¢éga-na" und jig¢e ama. Wahi wéti" they say Ictinike the (my. Bone dried only seek- was with him, they Bone striking sub.). » ing say. weapon ida"qti f¢a-bi a”, “ Kagéha, ma¢in’-ga ha. Anéje ta -minke,” a-biama very good having found it, Friend, walk ! Mingo will I who, said, they say they say [mingam] Ietinike aké. (Qéké wahi ké ¢izd-bi a”, a¢é améde sakibaqti jug¢e Ictinike the This bone the having taken it, when he (the Big right beside with him (sub.). (lz. ob.) (lg. ob.) they say, turtle) was going him mar¢i"-bi a”, “ Kagéha, nikaci”ga ma"¢i"i yi, Gahi gazizi éga™ ma?¢i"’- having walked, they Friend, person walks when, neck stretching so he usu- say, a often . , = a5 Pesce! . ont ° Orrin’ | aS e See = nari.” yé yanga Gahi ké gézié’qti-na™ mar¢i” ¢i", jibe* ke’ cti na™jageqti ally Big turtle neck the stretching it far, was walking, leg the too sticking them walks. (lg. ob.) usually (lg. ob.) out much bent : ° 1 . oye che e , . 1 5 madi” ¢i, éga"-na™ ¢i" yi ji, Gahiqti ké ehc¢a-bi a”, gaza™qti was walking, was doing so regularly when, Tighton the the having put the horizon- having neck (lg. ob.) — talob. on it (another knocked him horizontal ob.), down ° . I 1 “ye g / a ° ihé¢a-bi_ a”, gacta™-baji-bi a" yi, ga” gaq¢i-bi a”, “ Haha+! aba and stunned him, not having stopped hitting when, so having killed him, Ha! ha! day they say, him, they say they say, ° & . / A SIRO , , : . “ wi"cti gdayi‘a’’-ona",” d-biamd, a¢é ama ag¢i™-bi a Né¢e aka, ye some (pl.) Ido that for usually, said he they was going having kept it, He was kindling a ‘Turtle myself say, they say. fire, x Ges : Terps Re a Corel ee re l . ; ae yanga ¢inké jég¢a® aka, Car’ qti ja” tiginga-bi a”, “ Hau, aja”. ta minke big the (st. he was roasting In spite (of having become sleepy, they Ho, I will sleep ob.) the animal as his hunger ’) say, he sat. a BD . es See Of e , ES “ ¢a™ja, fjatxe ¢aja”aji te ha’. Hau, ¢inin’de yi, ye yanga, ‘Pl’ ecé te ha.” though, OTja"xe yousjeep shall . Ho, youcooked when, O Big turtle, ‘Puff!’ you | shall not say Ga™ ja" ké. Mfyasi ama na®stdpiqtci diama. yé ¢inké ¢iza-bi a™, And he lay sleep- Coyote the walking very softly wascom- Turtle the (st. aving taken it, ing. (mv, sub.) over the leaves, etc. ing. ob.) they say, . , wo . . , . “7 Bs a es ~ = . . jega gé wi ¢iontida-bi a”, ¢ajd ad¢ankd. e-anita té wan'gi¢e ¢asni”’- leg the (pl. one having pulled out (or sat biting off the Animallimb the all having ob.) off), they say, meat. (ob.) devoured, . r y - © , e » , vl ~ = s ] sd bia™, wahi gé é’di ugidada”-bi a”, ci déde té’di i¢a™¢a-bi a”, Ictinike they say, bone the there having pushed them back again fire in the have placed it (the Ictinike (pl. ob.) into ete places (?), (ob.) turtle), they say, they say, ~~ 3 , s . Peal te ike 5 e‘a” gixe té éga%qti gaxe i¢a™¢a-bi a”, a¢d-biama. Kgi¢e Ictinike how he made the just so madeit having placed the ani- went, they say. At length Tetinike it mal, they say, ICTINIKE AND THE TURTLE—AN OMAHA MYTH. 565 akd fyi¢d-biamd. y¢ ¢inké ba‘t-bi a”, ¢izi-bi a”, ye-Anita té wi” u¢a™i the awoke, they say. Turtle the (st. having pushed into having taken it, animal the one grasped (sub.) ob.) the ashes to find the they say, limbs it turtle, they say ega™, ¢ida” yi sitar¢e’qti ¢izé gi. “Sal” (A-biama Ictinike aka) Ci wit having, pulled when only that and he took was Pshaw! (said, they say Ictinike the Again one it nothing else it coming (sub.) back té éga" yi ci éga%qti sifar¢é ¢izé ama. “Qa!” ¢ ga®, ci wi" té ize the so when again just so only that he was taking, Bshaw! said as, again one the took they say. it y ye Le v/ . , Sey ; 2 ay ” f : 1y *n/ S ar, = i ci si‘a¢ée'qti ega" ¢ize ama. “Qa+!” é€ ga, ci wi" té ¢ize HI, when again only that 80 he was taking, Pshaw ! said as again one the took when, they say. ci éga™ si‘a¢e’qtei ¢izé ama. “Qé-i-na+! fja"xe-a’, ¢aja”aji te ehé ¢a™cti.” again so only that was taking it, Surprising! O Tja"xe, you sleep shall Isaid formerly. they say. not ° nf ° Panta / / ares “ / So i a L * , Tja"xe yig¢fyuba-bi a”, a“ he-na"’-bi 1, “A™haji-ga,” éma™-biamd. “ Qa- Tja"xe having scratched his own, fled often, they when, Do not flee, said often, they say. Sur- they say, say : / ape (Pp SOS Tay aan , i-na+! A™ha™, ag¢dsni™ ¢a™cti,” A-biama. prising! Yes, I devoured it, formerly, said he, they my own say. NOTES. Another version is given on pp. 60-69. George Miller did not know any more of the version just given, so it ends rather abruptly. See White Eagle’s Ponka version on p. 66. 563,3, et passim. a, having (not they say), same as ega™. 564, 18. ugidada® used instead of ubada® or uibada™ because the Coyote had already eaten all the flesh of the turtle, so it was inside of him and part of him, his own prop- erty, so the bones, too, had become his. In the myth of Ictinike, the women, and child, ugig¢a" is used instead of ug¢a" or uig¢a”, to describe Ictinike’s act, though he had not yet eaten the child. TRANSLATION. Ictinike was journeying. When he came insight at a bend of a stream, a Big Turtle was sitting there in a sheltered place warmed by the sun. Ictinike drew him- self back out of sight, crouching at intervals as he retraced his steps, and ran down the hill to the place where the Big Turtle was. “Why! how is that you continue to pay no attention to what is going on? It has been said that yonder stream is to dry up, so all the quadrupeds that frequent the water have kept close to the (deep?) water,” said Ictinike. And the Big Turtle said, “Why! I have_been coming here reg- ularly, but I have not heard anything at all. 1 usually come and sit in this place when the sun gets as high as it is at present.” ‘“ Hurry !” said Iectinike, ‘*for some of the young men died very soon for want of water. The young otters died, so did the young muskrats, the young beavers, and the young raccoons.” “Come, let us go,” said the Big Turtle. So Ictinike departed with him. As he accompanied him, Ictinike sought for a dry bone. Having found one that would be good as a club, Ictinike said, “ Friend, go on. Mingam.” When he was alone, Ietinike seized the bone, and soon overtook the Big Turtle, walking beside him, 566 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. “Friend,” said he, “when a person walks, he stretches his neck often.” So the Big Turtle began to stretch his neck very far, and he was walking with his legs bent ex- ceedingly. As he was going thus, Ictinike gave him a hard blow on the neck, knock- ing him senseless, and he did not stop beating him until he killed him. ‘Ha! ha!” said Ictinike, as he carried the body away, ‘there are some days when I act thus for myself.” He kindled a fire and began to roast the Big Turtle. Notwithstanding his desire to feast on the Big Turtle, he became sleepy, and said, “ Ho! I will sleep, but you, O ‘Ija™xe,’? must keep awake. When you are cooked, O, Big Turtle, you must say ‘Puff!’” So he went to sleep. Then the Coyote was coming very cautiously. He seized the Turtle, pulled one ofthe legs out of the coals, and sat there biting off the meat. When he had deyoured the meat on all the limbs, he pushed the bones back into their former places, arranged the fire over them, aud departed after putting every thing just as he had found it. At length Ictinike awoke. He pushed into the ashes to find the Turtle, took hold of one limb and pulled it, when to his surprise only that limb came forth. ‘“Pshaw!” said he. Then he tried another limb, with a like result, and still another, but only the bones appeared. When he had pulled out the fourth leg he was astonished. ‘Surprising! O ‘Ija"xe,’ I said to you, ‘do not sleep,’ but you have disobeyed me.” Thereupon he scratched ‘Tja"xe,” but the latter fled often. ‘ Do not flee,” said Ictinike. All at once he exclaimed, “ Surprising! Ihad eaten the Tur- tle, but [had forgotten it!” THE COYOTE AND THE SNAKE—AN OMAHA MYTH. Totp By FRANK La FLicHE. Miyasi am& qan’/de A¢ivdqti agd-biama. Dida" unéga™ ma?¢i"’-bi Coyote the (my. ground crossing by the went, they say. Something as he sought it walked, they sub.) nearest way say, > noe , . . fp . . / yi, sabdjiqti nikaci"ga wi’, ‘Na®ctan’ga ha,” 4-biamd&. ‘Wi"a™ wa when very suddenly person one O stop walking ! said, they say. Which one etéda®,” e¢é-ga"-bi ega”, u¢fxidé-bi yi, f¢a-bajf-biama Ci eyaha a¢a- canit be? hethought, they as (=hay- helooked around, when, he did not find him, Again further went, say ing) they say they say. biama. Ki “Aéabetan’-ga ha,” 4-biamd. Ki Miyasi aka fg¢a-biama they say. And Pass to one side of me ! said, they say. And Coyote the found him, they (sub.) say. We'ss. “Cirete! ¢é ma™b¢i” ¢aja, bé-ctéwa" ideta" ka” b¢a-maji. (hi Snake. Fie! this I walk though, who at all I pass to one T wish T not. You side of him gaqé ti¢d-ga! Uhé ke iv ¢iyan’-ga!” «Qé matb¢i” ¢a™ja, &'be wi" to one pass ! Path the (lg. give me room! This I walk though who one side ob.) . ~ / Su Webby 2 0 , ~/ bs ie I) éb¢iya" té Aha", eb¢éga"-ctéwa™-maji ha,” d-biamé We's% akdi. “ Ega™ I give him will ! (in so- I think at all I not 4 said, they say Snake the (sub.). So room liloguy) Vets Awinan’ge t& minke ha,” d-biama Miyasi aka. “Mga" yi‘ji, ¢at’é So if even if I run on you I who will 0 said, they say Coyote the (sub.). you die PHE COYOTE AND THE SNAKE—AN OMAHA MYTH. 567 taté,” 4-biama Wé’s‘d aka. ‘“Agta™ até tada’. Ute a*¢in’ge,” a-biama shall — said, they say Snake the How possible I die shall? Cause of | me—none said, they say surely (sub.) death . , r if 4 w rae =~ oS , . , . o , Miyasi aka. ‘“Ké, an’gajida-ga! Ja¢ianki¢a-ga,” a-biama We's‘a aka. Coyote the Come step over me! Do it in spite of me! said, they say Snake the (sub.). (sub.). st 40 Piney : . re Op sre. , sho re , 0 Ki Mfyasi aké Agajida-biama. Ki We's‘a aka ¢aqti-biama. Ki Miyasi And Coyote the stepped over him, they And Snake the bit him, they say. And Coyote (sub.) say. (sub.) aka ni¢-ctéwa"-baji-biama. ‘“Awatée a. Awigajide yi at’é taté, ecé the pained atall not, they say. Where is it 2 I stepped over you if I die shall you (sub.) said ¢a™cti. Awaté at’é,” d-biami Miyasi aka. Gal’ f¢a"ba™ fa-baji-bi ega™, heretofore. Whereisit Idie said, they say. Coyote the And a second he spokenot, as (=hav- (sub.). time they say, ing) a¢i-biam’i Miyasi ama, yan’de agiqaqti. Gatté-ga" yi, wateicka. wi™ ahi- went, they say Coyote the (my. ground across by the After some- when stream one he (sub.) nearest way. time biama. Ki ni¢dta™ ta-bi ega”, ni ké da™ba-bi yi, nitiwa¢eyfe yuan ba- reached, And totakea wasabout, as wa- the he looked at when reflection in the he saw him- they say. drink they say, (=hay- ter (lg. they say water self, iug), ob). biamé. Ki ci’ qti yiya™ba-biamé. “Qa-é! ¢gima’-maji-na"-ma™ — ¢a"’cti. they say. And very fat he saw himself, they say. Whew ! ‘ I never was so heretofore. . . Ory oh o . , J . , mae Paid / Avci™ i¢dnahi” 4” 4-bi ega”, yig¢it'a’-ctéa"-na™biama, Ki ¢ata™-bi ega”, Me fat Itruly ! said, as, he felt him- even(!) often, they say. And he drank, as they say self all over they say, (=hav- ing) ca” a¢d-biama. Gate yiji, ‘“Aja™ta"¢a”¢inge i¢anahi" aha",” 4-bi still he want, they say. A while when I am sleepy I truly ! (in so- he said liloquy) they say ega™, qide baza™ ja™-biamaé. Ki ca”ea™ t’é ama, fbaqti. Ki ceta™ ha. as(=havy- grass pushingin helay, they say. And always he died, they much And so far ing) among say, swollen. NOTES. 567, 7 niuwa¢eyie. It is very probable, judging from the context, that this should be transiated “veflection in the water.” Sce niuwa¢ikiha™, 559, 12. TRANSLATION, The Coyote was going in a straight line across the prairie. While he was seeking something a person said very suddenly, “Stop!” The Coyote thought, “ Who can it be?” He looked all around, but found no one. Then he went a few-steps, when some one said, ‘* Walk around me!” Then the Coyote saw that it was the Snake. “Fie!” said the Coyote, “when I walk here I do not wish to walk around any one at all. Do you go to one side. Get out of my way!” The Snake replied, “ Though I am here, I have never thought for a moment of giving place to any one!” ‘“ Even if you think so,” said the Coyote, “I will run over you.” “If you do so, you shall die,” said the Snake. “Why should I die? There is nothing that can kill me,” said the Coyote. “Come! Step over me! Do it in spite of me,” said the Snake. Then the Coyote stepped over him. And the Snake bit him. But the Coyote did not feel the slightest pain. ‘Where is it? You said that if I stepped over you I should die. 12 568 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND’ LETTERS. Where have I received my death-blow ?” said the Coyote. As the Snake made no re- ply, the Coyote departed. After sometime he came to a creek. As he was about to take a drink he looked at the water, and he saw his reflection in the water. He ap- peared very fat. “ Whew! I was never so before. Iam very fat!” Saying this, he felt himself all over again and again; but that was all which he did. He departed after drinking the water. By and by he said, “I feel very sleepy.” So he pushed his way into the thick grass and lay there. He died while sleeping, never awaking, and he was much swollen. THE COYOTE AND THE SNAKE. TOLD BY GEORGE MILLER. Kgi¢e We'sta wit 6/di ja” akama. G¢adit’ uska™ska"qti uhdé ¢e ke’ At length Snake one there was recl., they Across inavery straight line path was going. Say. “Wa'!l matcidjaha jan’-ea, Weé's‘a! Awigajade yi, ¢at’é tatdé,” d-biama Why! further off lie, O Snake! I step over you if, you die shall, said, they say Miyasi aki. ‘“Uhé ¢cé¢a"skaqti kédega" ¢i-eda" a™¢a™epeta™ eté yi,” Coyote — the (sub.). Path just this size lies, but you rather you go to one side ought, (than I) of me d-biamd We's‘a aka. “Qa-f! ma*cidyaha jan’-ga, ehé,” 4-biama. ““({i-eda® said, they say Snake the Whew! further off Treg I say, said, they say. You rather % (sub.). (than I) mateidjaha fha-ga,” d-biama We's‘a aké. ‘“Ahat! Awigajide ta minke further off pass (or go) said, they say Snake the (sub.). Oho! I will step over you that way, ga“ ja, gat taté ha,” 4-biama Mtyasi aka. “Na! wi nikaci"’ga-ma wi™ though, youdie — shall C6 said, they say Coyote the (sub.). Why! I the people (pl. ob.) one an’eajide te’di t’é-na® ha’,” a-biama We's‘a aka. “A™ha®,” 4-biamé Mfyasi steps over me when usually : said, they say Snake the Yes, said, they say Coyote dies * (sub.). aka. Gat, “At’é ta minke,” d-biama. “Hindaé! wi’a"wa wi’anke téska?,” the And, I will die, said, they say. Let ussee! whichoneof we two tell may, in (sub.). the two the truth future, d-biama Miyasi aka. Ga™ a¢d-biama Miyasi ama. Wagajade ¢cé¢eqti yi, said, they say Coyote the And went, they say Coyote the(my. Stepped over very suddenly when, = fat (sub.). sub.). jibe siht gédi da™cté ¢aqtai te. “Haut, ¢at’é taté ha, awigajadje édega.” lower foot onthe one or the he was bitten. Ho, you die shail é I stepped over ii leg (pl.) other you eM ¢at’é taté ha,” a-biama We's aka. Ga a¢d-biama Miyasi ama. You youdie shall - said, they say Snake the And went, they say Coyote the (my. ; (sub ). sub.). Ga™ mar¢i™ ¢i” té, “Qri! jiga gama™-maji-na"-ma™ ¢a”cti. A*ci™ And he was walking ne Whew! body T never acted in that manner formerly. Me-fat THE COYOTE AND THE SNAKE. : 569 iganahi™-%,” 4-bi_ a™, yig¢azi-bi a”, nan‘ka ke’ eti ya" ba-bi an’, u¢u- I truly ! having said, having stretched him- back the too having looked at him- he was they say, self by an effort, they (lg. ob.) self, they say, exam- say, kija™ be-na™-biamaé. Ca qti eti’ ug¢di‘a ti¢é¢e-na” ama. TAga-qti-ctéa”’ na" ining himself often, they say. Inspite (or too hitting the he tovk up the ery often, Gaped very even often notwith- mouth and they say. hard (2) standing) giving the sealp-yell Tul (x “ Oo // y , 99) t Mise Vere . éga®, “Qa+! West fe té win’ke té éga® a,” ¢-na® ama. Egi¢e juga ¢i" having, Whew! Snake spoke the toldthe the so ! was saying often, Atlength body the truth they say. b¢tigaqti fba ama, badin’di", dactje ge’ etéwa™ baptici®-qtia” ama. “We's'a entire was swollen, distended, tip of the the even was exceedingly puffed up, Snake they say, nose (pl. ob.) they say. % wai Ic x doant sa % cy & aM4 hAnNaaidadi on Mok oAoolxe S fe té win’ke te éga" a,” ci ama. I¢anaqidadji g¢i" ¢inké, gagigixe qtel spoke the told the the so ! again was saying, At a sheltered place, he was st., coiled many times truth they say. warmed by the sun jar’te ga™ ca™ca" edi té ama. KE ama, ada" We's‘a ama edéda™ wanita ~ slept as continually there dead they say. That was it, therefore Snake the what qnadruped soundly they say, (pL. sub.) , , vw F— , ” ake oT wa¢aqtar te b¢tiga fba t’é-na‘l te’. they bitthem when all swell- died usually. ing NOTE. 568, 12. Qai, pronounced Qati! TRANSLATION. Once upon a time a Snake lay across a road, at right angles to it. The Coyote came, and said to him, “ Why! Snake, lie further off! If L step over you, you shall die.” To this the Snake replied, “Though the path is just this size (i. e., not large enough for both of us), you are the one, not I, to pass the other to one side!” «“ Whew!” said the Coyote, “do as I said, lie further off!” “Itis you, not I, who must pass further from the path,” said the Snake. “ Well,” said the Coyote, “I will step over you, and you shall die.” “No,” said the Snake, ‘‘ when a person steps over me, he usually dies.” ‘Yes, I will die. Let us see which one of us has told the truth,” said the Coyote. When he stepped suddenly over the Snake, the latter bit him on the leg or foot. ‘“ Ho,” said the Coyote to the Snake, “ you shall die, as I have stepped over you.” “ You shall die,” said the Snake. Then the Coyote de- parted. And as he went he said, “ Whew! my body never was in this condition heretofore. I am very fat!” He stretched his neck as far as he could, looked at his back, and examined himself all over. Notwithstanding his condition, he gave the scalp-yell often. When_he found himself gaping incessantly, with his mouth wide open, he said, ‘‘ Whew! the Snake told the truth!” At length his entire body was ‘swollen so much so that the skin was tight on him, and the tip of his nose was puffed up. “The Snake told the truth!” said he again, He seated himself at a sheltered place warmed by the sun, coiled himself as far as possible as a snake does, fell into a sound sleep, from which he never awoke. Thus he died. And on account of this event, when the snakes bite any quadrupeds, the entire bodies of the latter swell, and the animals die. » 12 15 570 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. THE COYOTE AND THE GRAY FOX—A PONKA STORY. TOLD BY ONE HorN. Lfqaqtde wi" ci’ qtia’-biamda. ‘“ Kagé, edada™ i¢ici“i a,” a-biama Gray fox one was very fat they say. Younger what you are fat q said, they say, brother, by weans of Miyasi aka. “A™ha®, jit¢cha, wamtiske nasige 4” a-f yi, u¢ticiaja t’é Coyote the Yes, O elder wheat baked hard car- they when infront dead (sub_). brother, Trying come dixe aja™-na"-ma™,” A-biamd, ‘‘ Gan’yi ja™¢inan’ge kedi a®wa™‘a*hai I pretend ~ T usually recline said, they say. Andthen ~ wagon in the they put me when reclining Ly , Pe . / 7] ae, , eee , =— Y tédi udna™qpa¢e ajaY-na"-ma™. Ki ud‘a"si ag¢¢é-na"-ma™. Gan’yi b¢ate when I make them fall T usually recline. And I leap I usually start home. And then Teat from a height by kicking , fe f As ~ : — v ag¢é-natma™. Wamiuske nasige é al¢a”ci" ha,” A-biamd. Gan'yi, IT usually start home, Wheat baked hard that I ain fat by : said, they say. And then, by means of “ Jinecha, éga", ckaxe wika"b¢a,” a-biama ypfyaqtide aka. “ (hieqtei, jinee, O elder brother, so you do Idesire you, said, they say Gray fox the Especially elder (sub ) you, brother, ; "oY Song h A)hiol ayaa 4 bo © 4 f n? Van! sy wma gle4 si ¢yang’ éga", dhigi u¢dinatqpage taté eb¢éga®” Gan'y! Miyasi aka foot you large as, many you make them fall shall T think. And then Coyote the froma height by kicking (sub.) u¢ticiaja ja” -biama. Gan’ yi wigé aka ja” ¢inan’ge ké u‘fa™hai té. Gan’ yi in front re- they say. And then white the wagon in the put the past And then clined, man (sub.) (lg. ob.) {reel. ob. in) sign. gé¢ega™-biama wage aka: “ (ke wawi"aji Aha®.” Sihi te baqtd-biama. he thought as follows, white the This (recl. if is not the ! (in so- Feet the he tied, they say. they say man (sub.): ob.) first time liloquy). (ob.) . = “I 4s D Y ~ , ~/ q: : , y Ja“ ¢inan’ge ké'di uta” hai te wage aka yi eqaf tée’di aki-biamé. Wagé Wagon in the putthe when white the house his at the reached home White (recl. man (sub.) again, they say. man ob.) in ; . we . . ©) , . , . y AO Fb, . yi peji’-qti wi te a™¢a ¢é¢a-biama Miyasi ke. Egi¢e wage aka mahi house bad very one the threw him suddenly, Coyote the Atlength white the knife (ob.) they say (recl. ob.) man (sub.) agi” ahfi te Miyasi ke’di méasa-biama tihf gé baqtéga" ga™ tle gdAxai he brought there the Coyote at the ent cords with a feet the as they were and dead pre- (=when) (recl. ob.) knife, they say, (pl.) tied tended da™cte yi, “ ag¢a-biamé. (Sihi masa-baji, hajinga fka*ta" endqtei perhaps when carry- he went back to his (Feet uot cut, cord used for that only ingon house. tying the back _mésai.) Ki nan’ge agéa-biama Mfyasi aka. pfyaqide iénaxi¢e ag¢a- he cut with And running went homeward, Coyote the Gray fox to attack him went a knile.) they say (sub.). homeward . da , ” , . , , Zav 99 , . , Oye Pome biama. ‘ Kagcha,” a-biamd, “ ‘“ag¢aar¢age,” a-biama. “ (hiéwagayi‘a®! they say. O younger brother, said, they say you have made mesuffer said, they say. You brought it on yourself! Ss £ Ces ) THE COYUTE AND THE GRAY FOX—A PONKA STORY. 571 Q¢eftiji gi-ea,” a-biama pfiyaqide aka. Wage aka wai" ati ama ke'di Silently come back, said, they say Gray fox the White man the trans- hecame, they at the (sub.). (sub.) porting say, place goods . / , +? Pies ” , es) a 7 ABA Hey a heey Sanit ahh fae ieee i ¢aja” cga™ ¢idwa¢ayi‘a®,” a-biama. “ Kagéha, wi" ¢aké’qtia”,” 4-biama. you lay as you broughtit on your- said, they say. O younger brother, you speak the very said, they say. down self, trath Mfyasi aka. piyaqnde aka gactan’ka-biama. Coyote the Gray tox the tempted him, they say. (sub.) (sub.) NOTES. 570, 9. (@eké wawi'aji Aha”, said because the man suspected some trick and had lost patience. TRANSLATION. A Gray Fox was very fat. The Coyote said, “ Younger brother, what has made you fat?” “Elder brother,” said the Gray Fox, “I lie down in the way of those who transport erackers, and I pretend to be dead. And when they throw me into the wagon I lie there, kicking the erackers out. Then I leap out and start home eating. It is the erackers which have made me fat. And, elder brother, I wish you to do like- wise. You, elder brother, have large feet, so I think that you will knock out a great many crackers.” And then the Coyote went to the place and lay down in the road. And when the white man came along he threw the Coyote into the wagon. The white man thought thus: “It is not the first time that he has acted thus!” So he tied the feet of the Coyote. Having put the Coyote in the wagon, the white man went to his home. He threw out the Coyote by a miserable outhouse. Then the white man brought a knife and cut the cords which bound the feet of ths Coyote (he did not cut off the feet, he severed only the cords with which they were tied). He thought that (or acted as if) the Coyote was dead, so he put the Coyote on his back and started off to the house. (But the Coyote managed to get loose, and) he ran homeward. He went back to attack the Gray Fox. “O, younger brother,” said the Coyote, “you have made me suffer.” “You yourself are to blame! Be silent and come to me!” said the Gray Fox. ‘You brought the trouble on yourself as you lay down in the place where the white man came with the load of goods.” “O younger brother, you tell the truth”, said the Coyote. The Gray Fox had tempted him. HOW THE RABBIT WAS DEPRIVED OF HIS FAT. ToLp By FRANK La FiLicne. Wanita am4 ci” waxa-biamé pahan’gadi. Wita™wa ci” u¢tika®pi Quadruped the fat were made, they at the first. Which fat made him (pl. sub.) say handsome jes O i eo , . . a a fbaha® ga™¢a-biama. Ki wanita-ma bétigaqti wéba"-biama Ki u¢éwi" to know he wished, they say. And — the quadrapeds all he called to them, And assem- they say. bling 572 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. ite petits ee 5 P o Gero edi ahf-biamaé. Ki ci u¢tika™onin’de-ma da ¢a" ti¢a®-bi-dé daéhi kédita there they arrived And fat those who did not look head the he held while neck from the there, they say. handsome with it part them, (ig. ob.) they say wi¢iskeba-bi-dé waci” oé wenacai-de, wi¢icta® ¢é¢é-na”-biama. Evite th ‘ Rt he scraped them while fat the he took when, letting them he was sending them reg- with his hand, they scattered from go ularly, they say. length say (in. ob.) them w= vi qe *n/ re , Tr . , Oi 1s w r oen/ / Alenia) Mactein’ ge édi a¢i™ ahi-biama. ‘‘Wieb¢i" ta minke ha. Wi ci” a®¢a” wanka™ pi Rabbit there having he reached Iamtheone I who will 5 I fat it makes me handsome him there, they say. ti minke ha,” 4-biamé Mactcin’ge aké. ‘“Hindaké! gi-ga ha,” a-biama.— I who will ; said, they Rabbit the (sub.). Let us see! come ! said, they say say. 1 *n/ . rN, / . rye eet / *n/ ~ a . , 1 Ga® ci” oixa-biama. “(i da qti u¢i¢ikatonin’de ci” té,” (4-biamd). Ga™ And tat he made him, they You beyoud it makes you ugly fat the, (said, they say). And Say. measure dé ¢a™ u¢a™-bi ega”, ahi hidé ¢andita" ¢iskéba-biama yi, abayt ¢a® head the he seized, as (=hav- neck base from the scraped off with the when, spacebe- the part they say ing), part hands, they say tween the part shoulders . . pane , ‘ns aie 2 r , u¢isp i¢é¢a-biamd nfacitga aké. Ada™ ci"’-na" ¢an’di Abaytii unticka ¢a” he pulled it suddenly, they person the There- fat only on the space be- depression the say (sub.). fore part tween the part shoulders endqtei waci" hébe A¢aha-na™ ama, edita". Kgi¢e Miya aka endqtei that only fat meat part adheres to, usu- they since then. Atlength Raccoon the he only ally say : (sub.) . , . , , Oy r (a , “7 . , ci” u¢tika"pi-biama, dda” juga béiga waci" a¢aha gidxa-biama. fat made him handsome, there- body whole fat meat adhering made for him, they say, fore to they say. NOTE. 571, 5. b¢ugaqti, pronounced b¢u+gaqti by the narrator. TRANSLATION. At the first the quadrupeds were made fat. And he who made them wished to know to which one the fat was becoming. So he called all the quadrupeds. And they collected there. He seized by the head each quadruped to whom the fat was not becoming, scraping off the fat from the neck downward, thus depriving the quadruped of it before releasing him. At length some one took the Rabbit to him. ‘TI will be the one! Fat will become me,” said the Rabbit. ‘Let us see! Come!” said he who made the quadrupeds. And he made the Rabbit fat. ‘Fat is more unbecoming to you than to any other quadruped,” said the being. So the being seized the Rabbit by the head and scraped off the fat from the base of the neck. But he pulled suddenly at the flesh in the space between the shoulders. Therefore, since then there has been a depression in the space between the shoulders of a rabbit, and only in that place is there a piece of fat adhering to that quadruped. At length the person saw that the Raccoon was the only quadruped to whom fat was becoming, so he made the whole body of the Raccoon fat. HOW THE RABBIT KILLED A GIANT. 573 HOW THE RABBIT KILLED A GIANT. ToLp BY GEORGE MILLER. oR . , , . ene / = . ie Mactein’ge-i” am& a¢é amima ¢gi¢e. Egi¢e ta” watg¢a" wi" edi Rabbit the was going, they say atlength. At length nation one there (my, sub.) aht-biama. ‘Mactcin’ge-i” ikima”’¢i® ati hu"+!” e-na™-biama niaci'ga arrived, they say. Rabbit as a visitor has halloo ! said often, they say people come ama. “Ebédi né 4,” d-biamé niaci"ga ama, Akipdé-bi ega”. “Na! ga” 3 the (pl. Towhom you ? _ said, they say people the (pl. having met him, they Why! just sub.). go sub.) say. ébédi ctécte pf ti minke,” 4-biamé (Mactcin’ge-i” aka). “Nal ai ama to whom —soever I will I who said, they say Rabbit the Why! lodge the reach (sub.). (pL sub.) wa¢ata-bajii ha’. pagtigtkidaébi aka-na” wa¢ite t‘a"i ha. ‘Hi’di né do not eat : He for whom they shoot the only food he has c There you at the deer (sub. go eté yi” (,A-biama niaci"ga amd). Ca” af uhan’ge naji” tédega", di 6 ought said, they say people the (pl. Yet lodge end — stood the, but (in ~— there sub.). the past), ah{-biama. “ Kag¢ha, wa¢ite ctéwa™ wa¢in’gai ha,” 4-biama af udaf arrived, they say. Friend, food soever we have none é said, they say lodge entered aka. “Na! kagéha, eddda®™ ctécte caté ama-na", ¢ingé yi,” a-biama the Why! friend, what soever they are eat- usu- there is when — said, they say (:ub.). ing ally none Mactein’ge-i” aka. Egi¢e Mactein’ge-i” giku-biama aqtigtkidabi aka. 9 Rabbit the At length Rabbit invited him to a Laqtigikidabi the (sab.). (ob ) feast, they say (sub.). “Wuhu+! kagéha, ¢ikui ha. Wana q¢in-ga ha,” a-biama ¢¢ yi udai Oho! friend, you are é Hasten y said, they say this lodge en- invited tered to a feast aka. Ki ta™watg¢a™ ama na™pé-qti-na" amama. Edada® wanita t¢¢ai the And nation the (pl. usually were fearing him greatly, What quadruped they (sub.). sub.) they say. killed etéctewa" & b¢tiga a¢i”-na" akama. Ki é'di ahi-biama Mactein’ge-i” 12 soever that whole he was-usually keeping it, And there ar- they say Rabbit Ahey say. rived, ama gikui té/di. E¢atbe hi sp’ji, “Ahat! gé¢ica" tifa-ga ha,” a-biama. the he was at the. Insight = ar- when, Oho! on that side pass along ! said, they say (mv. invited rived sub.) toa feast Mactein’ge-i” amd wa"si-qtci atid¢a-biama. G¢i'-biama. — Kgi¢e Rabbit thy (ne: leaping high passed along, they say. Sat they say. At Iength sub.) roe . , , hayes / . . *n/ . , . iii-biama. Wa¢ata-bi ega™, yig¢ikega” g¢i”-biama. Hébe ugaicta-bi ega™”, 15 they gave food Having eaten different ate very rapidly sat, they say. Part having reserved it instead of tohim, they say. things, they say, eating it, they say, 12 18 574 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. Sw, - , , . , r , y, y . , uqpé té basni ¢é¢a-biama ‘ Kaccha, ugpé té duaté,” 4a-biama D> | 5) howl the pushed off suddenly, they say. Friend, bowl the the one on said, they sa this side ar s € (Maetein’ge-i” akd). Ga™, “Kagcha, ca” dixe te,” d-biama (Mactcin’ge-i” Rabbit the And, Friend, enough Ido will said, they say Rabbit (sub ). a 4 u . / € ‘n 4 } « 4 4 1 , , 7 4 1 « 4 4 : « / aké). Ga™, “Atha,” ad-biamd (Aqtigikidabi aka). Ag¢a-bi ega™’, the And, Yes, said, they say Laqtigikidabi the Having gone back, they (sub.). (sub.). say ferite z one ° {Relay tn / , 1 Sianiae uné¢é ya”ha ke witdqtcia" u‘a’si-bi ega”, wéua"ba” tédihi wagaq¢a" fire-place border the once having leaped, they say, the second time the, ar- servant (lg. ob.) rived there Laqtigikidabi ey4 ¢inké man’ge A¢ijiqti Ata"-bi ega™, u‘a’siqti akiag¢a- Laqtigikidabi | his the (st. chest straight having steppe.l on, with a great had gone ob.) across they say, leap homeward, biamé Ufacta-bi ¢a” ikage ¢inké ag¢a¢i? aki-biama. Ikage igag¢a™ they say. What was not the his the (st. having his hereached there His friend his wife eaten part friend ob.) own again, they say. , SF irece e , . , , oe , eas) 7 / y é¢a"ba gi ¢éqti ¢ati-biama, wa¢adtaji améga". Kgi¢e ha”ega™tce xi, she too very glad ate it, they say, as they had not been eating, At length morning when they say. feki¢a-bi ega™, cka’¢é wagaji-biamé. Ci ga” “ paqtigikidébi aka erier pro- having dislodze commanded them, Again so Laqtigikidabi the claimed, they the game they say. (sub.) say, téki¢e tai aké,” e-na’-biamé niaci"ga amd. Abae ama _ a¢a-biama. he is the one for whom they were saying often, people the (pl. Hunter the (pl. went, they say. are about tu kill (the game), they say sub.). (sub.) Qéabé crigagti dite cka™ ¢a-bi a” gatéga*gti wakida biamé. Mactcin’ge-i" Tree very thick perhaps dislodged the havy- just in that they shot at them, they Rabbit game, they say ing manner say. ama 6/di ahf ¢é¢a-biama gicka qti. KEgig¢e paqtigikidabi aka yaciqti é’di the there started off in order to very hastily. Behold Laqtigiki dabi the very long thers (mv reach there soon, they (sub.) ago sub.) say ahi-bi ega™, a¢é amdma. Ci wédaji wakida-bi ega’, é'di égaqti having arrived there, was going (else- Again elsewhere having shot at something, immediately they say, where), they say. they say, ci hi ¢e¢é ga yi dgi¢e yaciqti edi ahi-bi ega”, a¢é amama ci, again starteloffin and(?) when behold very long there having arrived, they was going (else- again order to reach aso say, where) they say there soon , - eyes , ( fae Pits , , . , sex *n/ Laqtigikidabi ama. “Amakajiwa¢e Aha",” e¢éga"-biama Mactcin’ge-i” aka. Laqtigikidabi the (mv. Enough to make one ‘! (in so- thought, they say Rabbit the sub.). lose patience liloquy), (sub.). Ci wédaji wakida-bi ega”, ci @di égarqti ahi ¢c¢a-biama. Htan¢i" Again elsewhere having shot at something, again immediately started off in order to reach He first they say, there soon, they say. . , peep) . , cal + Aas . ahi-biama Mactein’ge-i” akdé. ‘“‘Kagéha, a™ddde tai ha,” a-biama arrived there, Rabbit the Friend, let us cut it up 5 said, they say they say (sub.). Mactein’ge-i” akd. Ki nikaci”ga ¢éaka yaqti t'é¢e aka u¢ifaga-biama. Rabbit the And person this one deer he who killed was unwilling, they (sub.). (sub.) it (sub.) say. “Na! kagéha, paqtigikidabi akAé ati te etea™i ha,” d-biama. “ Na! D 2 fo) ’ Why! friend, Laqtigikidabi the come will by and by ? sai they say. Why! (sub.) , , , S , . , Crh) eho ; kagéha, wanita t’éwa¢atl yi, wadadai-de énahaga” ¢a" wa‘i-na’i,” a-biama friend, quadruped they kill when they ent when in equal piles they usually give said, they say them them up or shares to them, HOW THE RABBIT KILLED A GIANT, 57D n/ (Mactein’ge-i” aké). Cat-na" u¢i‘agd-biama niaci™ ga aka, paqtigikidabi Rabie the Still (despite he was Ses they person the Lagtigikidabi (sub.). what was said) say (sub.), . = , | , O y/ CO Re r= mee Syren /: na™pa-bi ega”. Mactcin’ge-i” ama yu‘e a¢a-bi ega™, sihi té u¢a™ i¢a”’- he feared to see as. Rabbit the (mv. witha having gone, they feetof the he seized snd- him, they say (sub.) rush say, the an- (ob.) denly, ashe imal stood, biamd. Umasna-biam’. Egi¢e ¢¢a"be ati-biamda paqtigikidabi ama. they say. He slit the skin witha At length in sight came, they say Laqtigikidabi the (mv. knife, they say. (sub.). _“ Piiji ckéxe! Canké¢a-ga,” A-biama (paqtigikidabi aka). ‘Edada® Bad you do Let the (recl. ob.) said, they say (Laqtigikidabi the (sub.). What alone, pfiji daxe a,” d-biama (Mactein’ge-i” aka). “ Wanita t’éwa¢at-de bad Ido 2 said, they say Rabbit the (sub.). Quadraped when they kill them wadidai-de énaha¢a™¢a" nikaci™” ga-ma wa‘i-na*i” (4-biama Mactein’ge-i" when they cut them in egual piles or the people (pl. ob.) they usually said, they say Rabbit up shares give to them aka). ‘Canké¢a-oa, ehé,” d-biama paqtigikidabi aka. Ca"-na" the Let the (recl. ob.) I say, said, they say Laqtigikidabi the Still (despite (sub.). alone, (sub.). what was said) Mactein’ge-i” aké ubdésna"-biama “ Daéda® ¢i" dixa" ¢i" aha",” 4-biama Rabbit the pushed (the knife) into What the I blowit (a the ! said, they say (sub.). the meat, they say (mv. lightob.) (mv. ob.) ob.) (yaqtigikidabi aka). ‘« A bixan’-ga! a" bixan’-ga!” a-bi ega™, eydhag¢a"¢a Laqtigikidabi the Blow me (as alight ob.) blow me (asalight ob.) E thither by degrees (sub.) . . foes / Oye ION , ee) She a¢d-biama. Bixa™-bi ega”, Mactein’ge-1” ¢é ama gaqada" qtci. Gan’ yi went, they say. Having blown him, they Rabbit was going, with his fur stand- And then say, they say ing ontall over from his being blown at. ¢e’ ama paqtigikidabi aka yaqti ké ¢iza-bi ega™, ijifathe ¢é¢a-bi ega™ nf was going, Lagtigikidabi the deer the having taken it,they put the lg. suddenly, Te sae they say (sub.) (recl. say, ob. in his they say, ob.) belt, a¢a-biama. paqti ana t’éwa¢ai-ma b¢iiga iyfwaji- na” aki-na®-biama. went, they say. Deer how those which were all putting them —usu- he usually reached many killed (pl. ob.) thelg. objects ally home, they say. in his belt Nikaci’’ea snédedqti-biama. Ca” gaxe aki-bi ega™, yaqti ana t’éwa¢ai-ma Person very tall, they say. Having quit having reached, deer how those which were again, they say, many killed (pl. ob.) , 1s / 4 tie . btigaqti Lagqtigikidabi aka ijiwaji aki-biaméa. Ha" yi, Mactein’ge-i” Lagqtigikidabi the putting reached home, Night when Rabbit (sub.) them, the they say. lg. objects in his belt ama ugdca" ama ca" jaqtigikidabi gi té u¢ica® ga” ha™ té naji™ the yep ee oe they until Laqtigikidabi lodge the going awhile night when he was (my. say (std, around it sub.) ob.) d¢anké. Wag¢icka wi" ¢iza-bi ega”, égi¢a’-biama: “ Wag¢icka, né te std. Insect one having taken it, they said to it, they say: O insect, you will : say, zo ¢a™ja, tactadéqti tée/di ndgqta te ha,” d-biamd. Egi¢e ha”ega™tce yi though the flank itself inthe youbite will A said, they say. At length sone when (=just on the him flank) 4 12 15 576 THE (¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. Laqtigikidabi wakéga, 4-biamé. Tactide ¢an’di ¢ai/i‘¢A ama. Ki ¢itt Laqtigikidabi sick, said, they say. Flank in the itched him, they say. Andscratched with bis fingers a « St ruyite : “> , , , , S té ca” ¢icta™aji'qti ca”ca™ ga™ ja ¢a® u¢i‘ude amd ga™ t’é ama. Ki when still not ceasing at all continually at flesh the scratched a hole in, aud died they And last (7) they say say. nikaci“ga ama ¢gi¢a"’-biama: “Mactein’ge-i” ta™wa™ ofe¢ati-ga,” people the (pL. said to (eaeh other), Rabbit — village make ye for him sub.) they say: “erect a village for him. d-biama. Ki Mactcin’ge-iY aka égi¢a”-biama: “Wi ta”wa™ efe¢a'l said, they And Rabbit the said to (one?), they I village they place for one Say. (sub.) say: *n/ pte , . , ae . . , is . ma"b¢i"- maji,” a-biama. “Wa‘ijinga waqpa¢i*gti agia"b¢a uta nadi, Ada® I walk Inot said, they say. Old woman very poor I left her, my in a lonely there- own place fore , , a, . . / , . , / . ag¢é ta minke,” 4-bi ega”, ag¢a-biama. Ceta”’. I start will I who having said, they started home, they So far, back say, say. NOTES. F The use of egi¢e at the end of the sentence, instead of at the beginning, is peculiar to the narrator. This Omaha version is fuller than the Ponka one found on pp. 22-25. 514, 10, et passim, -bi a, used by the narrator instead of -bi ega*. 575, 10. ¢e ama paqtigikidabi, rather “ ¢e ama yi, Gaqtigikidabi,” ete. yi, when. TRANSLATION. When the Rabbit was journeying, he reached a certain village. The people said, “The Rabbit has come as a visitor, halloo!” On meeting him they said, “ Whom did you come to see?” “ Why, I will go to the lodge of any person,” said the Rabbit. “Why! the people have nothing to eat. jaqtigikidabi is the only one who has plenty of food. You ought to go to his lodge,” said they. Still the Rabbit passed on to the end lodge and entered it. The host said, “ Friend, we have nothing whatever to eat.” “Why! my friend, when there is nothing, the people usually eat anything (that they can get),” said the Rabbit. At length gaqtigikidabi invited the Rabbit to a feast. “Oho! friend, you are invited! Hasten!” said the man whose lodge the Rabbit had entered. All the people were afraid of the Giant. No matter whatanimal any one killed, the Giant kept all of the meat. The Rabbit arrived at the lodge of the Giant. As he entered the host said, “Oho! pass around to that side.” But the Rabbit leaped over and took a seat. At length food was given him. He ate at it very rapidly, but he left some (which he hid in his robe). Then he pushed the bowl aside. ‘ Friend,” said he to the Giant, “here is the bowl.” Then he said, “ Friend, I must go.” He leaped past the fire-place at one leap, at the second leap his feet touched the servant of the Giant on the chest, and with another leap he had gone. When he had reached the lodge, he gave to his host the food which he had not eaten, The man and his wife were very glad to eat it, as they had been without food. ies THE RABBIT AND THE TURKEYS. 577 The next morning the erier passed through the village, commanding the people to be stirring. And they said, “ paqtigikidabi is the one for whom they are to kill the game.” So they went hunting. They scared some animals out of a dense forest, and thus they shot at them. The Rabbit went thither very quickly. But he found that the Giant had anticipated him, having taken all the game as he departed. When the Rabbit heard the shooting in another place, he went thither immediately, but again he found that the Giant had anticipated him. “This is provoking!” thought the Rab- bit. When some persons shot at the game in another place, the Rabbit noticed it and went thither immediately, arriving there in advance of the Giant. “ Friend,” said he to the man who had killed the deer, “Jet us cutit up!” But the man was unwilling, saying, “No, friend, qaqtigikidabi will come by and by.” “Fie! friend, when one kills animals he cuts them up and then makes an equal distribution of the pieces,” said the Rabbit. Still the man refused, as he feared the Giant. So the Rabbit rushed forward and grasped the deer by the feet. When he had slit the skin the Giant arrived. “You have done wrong! Let it alone!” saidhe. “What have I done wrong?” said the Rabbit. ‘ When one kills game, he cuts it up and makes an eyual distribution of the pieces.” “ Let it alone, I say,” said the Giant. But the Rabbit continued to insert the knife in the meat. “ F will blow that thing into the air,” said the Giant. ‘Blow me into the air! Blow me into the air!” said the Rabbit. So the Giant went closer to him, and when he blew at him the Rabbit went up into the air with his fur blown apart, Striding on, the Giant seized the deer, put it through his belt, and departed. That was his custom: he used to suspend all the deer that were slain by his belt and take them to his lodge. He was a very tall per- son. At night the Rabbit wandered about, and finally went all round the Giant’s lodge. He seized an insect (louse) and said to it, ““O, insect, you shall go and bite him right in the side.” Atlength, when it was morning, it was said that the Giant was ill. His side itched him. And as he continued to scrateh there, he made a hole in his flesh, and died. And the people said, “‘ Make a village for the Rabbit!” But the Rabbit said, “ I do not wish to be chief. I left my poor old woman by herself, so I will return to her.” THE RABBIT AND THE TURKEYS. TOLD BY GEORGE MILLER. Mactcin‘ge-i” amd a¢é amdma. EKei¢e Ziztka d‘iba édedf amma. Rabbit the (mv. was going, they At length Turkey some were there, they say. sub.) say. Sa ate Pai fi Foie P Pn nse Aine ae, P K'di ahi-bi a”, “ Gfi-g ha, wiquya taf minke,” 4-biamé. Ga™ Ziztka ama There having arrived, Come ye ! I will sing for you (pl.), said he, they And Turkey the (pl. they say, say. sub.) a . / a ~ f ees . , . , , ati-bia”, “Ahati! wéquya tai ha, Mactcin‘ge-i",” 4-biamd. “ Wiquya taf having come, Oho! singforus will . Rabbit, said they, they I sing for they say, say, yoL VI——37 3 578 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. minke ¢a™ja, jangéga"-mace Agahdi-gi. Egi¢e ictd ¢ab¢a taf. Wir ictd you (pl) though, ye who are somewhat be ye outside: Beware eye you open leet One eye (pl.) large ¢ab¢ai yi, icta ¢ijide tafte ha,” d-biamaé. Ga™ waa-biama. “ Heé! you (pl) if, eye you red shall : said he, they And sang, they say. Alas! open (pl.) say. e sy bad ae MO ross 1 . . ; wada™be ¢inké! Teta jidé! Teta jidé! I be-na" ¢i‘an’dje! I™be-na" looker the one eye red! eye red! Tail(of regu- heopensout! ‘Tail(of regu- who! bird) larly bird) larly : : ee -0 , . 5 1 ee . . . ° ¢ifan’dje.” pangd-ma a¢uta" wa¢izi-bi a”, Wiha uji g¢i"-bi a”, wi” he opens out. The large ones of: night having taken them, sack filling having sat, they one (pl. ob.) they say, say, [He one them wherever they were] ictaxa"xa" gaxa-bi yi, “Téna’! na¢uhaqti yangéga™ afi’ga¢i® cénaawa¢é eyes opened a made, they when, Why! almost us who are somewhat large exterminating little say (pl. ob.) us a¢é aka ha,” 4-bi a”, “Kut!” & ga", gia” a¢d-biamé. Qéaka Mactcin’ge-i” heis going . having said, Sound of 1 : ° / , s / , : 1 6G ca”. Mattei amd g¢ada-bi a”, yu‘é aga-bi a”, Pentiga najiha ¢a® u¢a" as. Grizzly bear the creptupon hav- witha went,they hay- Buffalo bull hairofthe the grasped (my. sub.) him, they say ing, rush say ing, head part , 4 a a : nels pe eale pas / ae ys & ida”-bi a”, ¢idaza-biama. (Qiyviwitxe a¢i”-bi a”, ¢ija™ja", “fa-on ha! suddenly, hav- pulled him by the Pulling him hadbim, they hav- shook him Speak ! they say ing, hair, they say. around say ing, often, 7 > , , . . . c 7 oops > + [a-ea ha! GaA¢uqti ma*b¢i” A¢ithé yi at¢a”¢akijaje ama. Ké, na, fa-ga!” Speak ! That unseen IT walk Iwho when youthreatenedto theysay. Come, now, speak! place move attack me , . , , y s / s / . 4 Vw ~ 9 (A-biama). Na*bé b¢dska cti iti"-na”-bi a”, dacije té. “Téna’! edta™ (said, they say). Paw flat too hithimwithit hav- tipofnose the Fie! why often ing, (ob.) , ey sisapis Ee J . . . . r — *% Z wikijaje ta, ga™qti mani” ¢a¢ired,” 4-biamd pentiga aka. “An‘kaji ha! I threatento should, justin the you walk you who said, they say Buttalobull the Not so attack you manner (you move, (sub.). mention ?) aga ¢akijaje ama,” A-biamda Ma"tett aka. Naji™ha ¢a™ ¢icta”-bi a™, u¢ica® you threatened toat- theysay, said,theysay Grizzly the Hair of the the et it go,they hav- around tack me bear (sub.). head part say, ing, him eae ea a < AeA ‘ o; ° . . / . 1 . 5 12 ag¢a-bi a”, sin’de ke’ uga”-bi a”, ci ¢itub¢i" a¢i”-bi a”, ¢icta” ta-bi 1, having gone, tail the having grasped, again pulled him havinghadhim, about tolethim when, they say, (lg. ob.) they say, round and they say, go, they say round , r . . , . : ens candé ¢a® na*bé b¢aska iti"-biama. eniga ¢i" gab¢ab¢aje ma¢i™ ama. scrotum the paw flat hit him there Buffalo bull the legs wide apart was walking they part with it, they say. (my. ob.) say. yr f Oy/3OS, . l . , “U~huthu™ huthu+! nidjiqtcia” ckéxe tha®,” 4-biamaé pentiga aka. Ma"feu Oh‘ Oh! Ob! Oh! Oh! not paining at all you ! (insol- said,they Buffalo bull the Grizzly bear make iloquy), say (sub.). THE BUFFALO AND GRIZZLY BEAR—AN OMAHA MYTH. 583 . . y+ , . , . , ey OLR o ama a¢a-biama, nin‘de kiicti éga®. pentiga aka ge¢éga"-biama, “Aki¢a-ga the went, they say, hams (see note) some- Buffalo bull the thought as follows, they Return the (mv. what. (sub.) say, blows sub.) y , s i. / < bd © wv 2 , v , hai! (i cti éga"qti éga"-na® ni" ¢a™cti waji™ te,” e¢éga" amd yi, Martet ! You too justso often like you inthe disposition the was think- they when, Grizzly were past ing say bear aka fbaha™-biama. “ Wa! edécega™ 4,” d-biamaé Ma"tet aka. ‘ Edéha-maji the knew it, they say. Why! whatdoyou ? ~ said,theysay Grizzly the T said nothing (sub.) say bear (sub.). Ba P< s ¢ is ¥ PAP Y, ay ia) Y Laas OS SES Ta na PUD 1 é amd pentga. Ci qd¢a agi-bia™, ci peniga ¢iyuwi'xe qti adi was saying, Buffalo bull. Again back to havingcome, again Buffalo bull turned him around had him, they say starting- they say, very fast point . a re: % . : . . 7 2 biamé&. Ci hé té u¢a”-bia”, da ¢a™ cti ¢itub¢i"-na®™ a¢i’-biama ci. they say. Again horn the having grasped, head the too pulled it round and had him, they again. (ob.) they say, part round often say “Na! gaja" ehé yi'cti wétaja ¢a’cti,” 4-biama Ma"tet aka. Ci sin‘de ké Fie! youdo Isaid when youdenied formerly, said, they say Grizzly the Again tail the that it bear (sub.). (dg ob.) ie Ee y = : y, , : , , u¢a”’-bi a”, ci pahan’ga gf‘a"i te’ éga™ gf‘a"-biama. Na"bé b¢aska having grasped it, * again before did to the sO did to him, they say. Paw flat they say, hin fti-biama. Ci gab¢db¢aje ma™¢i” ama jentiga. “U™huthu™huthu"+ hit him with, Again legs wide apart was walking, they say ~ Buffalo bull. Oh! Ob! Oh! Oh! Oh! they say. nidjiqtcia” ckixe Aha®,” d-biama pentiga aka. Ci ag¢a-biama Ma*tet ami. not paining at all you !(in sol- said,they say Buffalo bull the Again went, they say Grizzly the make iloquy), (sub.). bear (sub.) 5 , . . , 2 « , 7: Lat Ci yentga aké égi¢e éga" ge¢éga™-biama ci: “ Walnua! Aki¢d-ga hati! Again Buffalobull the atlength so thought as follows, again: Really! Return the ! (sub ) they say blows ¥ tons * lige Y e , r (hi cti waji” té éga"-qti éga"-na™ ni” ¢acti,” e¢éga™ ama. Ci Matte ama You too disposi- the just so often like you formerly, was thinking, they Again Ze tion ob.) were Bay. ci f{baha™’-biama. ‘Wa! edécega” a,” 4-biamaé. ‘“ Edéha-maji ha,” é ama again knew it, they say. Why! whatdoyou ? _ said, they say. I said nothing 5 was saying, say they say emiga. “Gadja® ehé yi'cti wé¢aja ¢a™cti,” d-biama, ga¢a agi-bi ega™. Buffalo bull. Youdo = Isaid when youdoubted formerly, said, they say, back to having come, they that it the start- say. ing-point (iddze u¢a™ i¢a™-bi a”, ci ¢iytiwi"xt’qti agi”-bi a” ci na®bé b¢dska cti Pulled tis seized suddenly, hav- again turned himaround having hadhim, again paw flat too hair (on him they say ing, very fast they say the head) Q / Ss. De / 4 / . / vy A , ~ s ° , iti®-na™-biamd. Ci sin’de ké u¢a™-bi a”, ci na"bé b¢aska cti ffi"-biama, hit him with it often, Again tail the having grasped it, again paw flat teo hit him with it, they say. (lg. ob. they say, they 3ay, Se] i . vl . TY ‘asp $s, . pahan’ga gf‘ati te’ éga” gia-biamda. 9 “U"hothu™hu"hu"+! niajiqtcia™ before . wid to the so did to him, they say. Oh! Ob! Oh! Oh! Ob! not paining at all : im 8 ckixe dha®,” A-biamé pentiga ak’. Ci a¢a-biama Ma"tetiama. Ci pentiga youmake !(insol- said,theysay Buffalobull the Again went,theysay (Grizzly the(my. Again Buffalo bull iloguy), (sub.). bear sub.). etéga" ama, ‘“Wahud! Aki¢a-ga hati! (hi cti waji”’ te égaqti éga"-na™ ni® was thinking, they Really ! Return the ! You too disposi- the just so often like you say, blows tion were 15 12 15 584 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. acti,” e¢éga" ami. Ci Mattei ama ci fbaha™-biama. ‘Wa! edécega™ formerly, was thinking,they Again Grizziy the(my. agdin knew it, they say. Why! what do you say- bear sub.) say co Po , 7 ae , , a wit9)) oP, , Aanae oS 4,” a-biamé (Mattei aka). ‘“Edéha-maji ha,” ¢é ama qentga. ‘“Aki¢d-gi 2 said, they say Grizzly the I said nothing a wassaying, Buffalo bull. Return the bear (sub.). they say blows hati! (4 eti waji” té éeatqti éga®-na™ ni® ¢acti, ehé ha,” 4-biama. ‘A™ha™,” to} | to} ‘! 7) ! You too disposi- the justso often like you formerly, Isaid . said, they say. Yes, tion were d-biama Mattei aka. jjentiga ama nistustti a¢a-biama. Sin’de ké ¢iha™ said, they say Grizzly the Buflalo bull the(my. backing step went, they say. Tail the raised bear (sub). sub.) by step (lg. ob.) ¢é¢a-biama. ‘Na! a”haji-ga ha, 4-biama Mattei aké. Leniga ama suddenly in the air, Why! do not flee y said, they say Grizzly bear the Buffalo bull the they say. (sub.). ye sub.) ia’ ¢a g¢ihé¢a-bi a”, uyidaja4ya"’-biama jentiga ama nistustit ma¢i"’- having thrown himself down sud- —_ turned himself back and forth, Butfalo bull the backing step walked, denly, they say. they say (not rolling over and (mv. by step over in one direction). sub.) biama, ma?-na™‘'u. ‘Ni! a™haji-gt, ehd,” A-biami Mattei aké. Ki they say, pawing the ground. Fie! do not flee, I say, said, they say Grizzly bear the And * (sub.). gr xery : ene = a i: entiga aké iénaxi¢a tai éga" nistusti ma™¢i”i té. Ki Mattei aki Buffalo bull the toattack him in order to backed step walked the And Grizzlybear the (sub.) by step (com- (sub.) pleted act). ° : y , . % 5 baazi-bi e¢éga"i té. jentiga ak& Ma"teti eca™qtci hi yi, judé ¢ahéga- that he was hethought the Buffalo bell the Grizzly bear neartohim arrived when, having puffed scared (com- (sub.) pleted act). bajf-bi a”, yu‘é ad¢a-biamd. Mattei ma*cithaqti a¢’ i¢é¢a-biamd. Gi exceedingly (in witha went, they say. Grizzly bear veryhighintheair threw suddenly, they say. Re- breathing), they rush him turn- say, ing yi, ci ig¢da™¢é jaha-bi a”, ci ma®cidha a"¢’ i¢é¢a-biama. Kihadi kihé yi, when, again ‘“‘onthe ~ having gored again highinthe threw suddenly, they say. Downward laid when, fly’ him, they say, air him again yan’‘de dbasan’da-bi yi’, baona’-bi a, Ma"teti ama a¢a-biamé mindada, ground pushing againstthe when, having failed to gore Grizzly the (my. went, they say crawling by animal on the him, they say, bear sub.) degrees, ground, they say baona”™ona®™ a¢i”-biama. Mata ké utefje ké égiha aid¢a-bi a”, Mate ama thrusting at him had him, they say. Cliff the thicket the intoit having gone,they Grizzly the often and missing (1g. ob.) (lg. ob.) say, bear (my. « him each time sub.) itéde Fentiga amd uyig¢ispe ¢i‘i-bi a”, Akusan’de ma™’ ya™ha ké aid¢a- but now Buffalobull the(my. to hold him- having failed, beyond cliff bank the had gone, sub.) self back they say, (Ig. ob.) : , : . pe Sai il end mele weny a , biama. Ga¢uqti ahi-bi a”, sin'de *ké ¢iqa” téga" naji’-biama pentiga aka. they say. Atthatvery havingreached, _ tail the raised and bent stood, they say Buffalo bull the unseen place there, they say, (1g. ob.) (sub.) Mattei aka ma" ké ugds” ag¢i-bia”, “pentiga hat! ikageanki¢é tatd Grizzly the cliff the peeping having come Buifalo bull ho! we shall be friends bear (sub.) (Ig. ob.) back, they say, "nhs a2 : ye hau+! waji™ té edwakiga™ é¢a",” A-biama. ; disposi- the we are alike some- said, they say. (called to tion what, one ata distance) “rf THE BUFFALO AND GRIZZLY BEAR—AN OMAHA MYTH. 585 NOTES. The narrator did not remember more of the myth. 582, 5. q¢aqtia®, pronounced q¢a+qtia®. 582, 14. niajiqtei ckaxe aha", though in the negative, must be rendered by an affirmative, nie a*ckaxe aha®, you cause me great pain ! 583, 1. ninde kucti ega*, 7. e., bob-tailed. MKucti refers to the shape of the hams of the Grizzly bear. ; 584, 13. baogna®9na” a¢i"-biama, pronounced ba+ona"9na" a¢i®-biama. TRANSLATION. The Grizzly bear was going somewhere, following the course of a stream. At last he went straight toward a headland. When he got in sight a Buffalo bull was stand- ing beneath it. The Grizzly bear retraced his steps, going again to the stream, fol- lowing its course till he got beyond the headland. Then he drew near and peeped, and saw that the Buffalo bull was a scabby one, very lean, and standing with his head bowed, as if very sluggish. So the Grizzly bear crawled up close to him, made a rush, seized the Buffalo bull by the hair of his head and pulled down his head. He turned the Buffalo bull round and round, shaking him now and then, saying, “Speak! Speak! Ihave been frequenting this place a long time, and they say that you have threatened to fight me. Speak!” Then he hit the Buffalo bull on the nose with his open paw. ‘ Why!” said the Buffalo bull, “I have never threatened to fight you, who have been frequenting this country so long.” ‘+ Not so! you have threatened to fight me,” said the Grizzly bear. Letting go the hair he went around and seized the Buffalo bull by the tail, turning him round and round. Just as he was quitting him he gave him a hard blow with his open paw on the scrotum. This made the Buffalo bull walk with his legs far apart. “Oh! Oh! Oh! Oh! Oh! you have caused me great pain,” said the Buffalo bull. The bob-tailed Grizzly bear departed. The Buffalo bull thought thus: “Attack him! You too have been just that sort of a person.” But the Grizzly bear knew what he thought, so he said, ‘‘ Why! what are you saying?” “T said nothing,” said the Buffalo bull. Then the Grizzly bear came back. He seized the Buffalo bull by the tail, pulling him round and round. Then he seized him by the horns, pulling his head round and round. “ Now, when I said that you thought of doing that, you denied it,” said the Grizzly bear (referring to his previous charge of threatening to attack him). Then he seized the Buffalo buil by the tail, treating him as he had done previously. He hit him with his open paw. And the Buffalo bull walked with his legs wide apart, exclaiming, ‘Oh! Oh! Oh! Oh! Oh! you have caused me great pain.” Again the Grizzly bear departed. And the Buffalo bull soliloquized as before. But the Grizzly bear knew it, and attacked him as he had previously done. A third time did the Grizzly bear depart. But when he asked the Buffalo bull what he had been saying, the latter replied, ‘‘I said nothing of importance. I said to my- self, ‘Attack him! You too have been just that sort of a person.” ‘ Yes,” said the Grizzly bear. Then the Buffalo bull stepped backward, throwing his tail into the air. “Why! do not flee,” said the Grizzly bear. The Buffalo bull threw himself down, and rolled over and over. Then he continued backing, pawing the ground. ‘ Why! I 586 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTAHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. say, do not flee,” said the Grizzly bear. When the Buffalo bull backed prior to attack- ing the Grizzly bear, the latter thought that he was scared. But the Buffalo bull ap- proached the Grizzly bear, puffing a great deal, till he drew very near, when he rushed onhim. He sent the Grizzly bear flying through the air. When the Grizzly bear was returning to the ground, the Buffalo bull caught him on his horns and threw him into the air. When the Grizzly bear fell and lay on the ground, the Buffalo bull thrust at him with his horns, just missing him, but piercing the ground. The Grizzly bear crawled off by degrees, the Buffalo bull following him step by step and thrusting at him now and then, though without piercing him. This time, instead of attacking the Buffalo bull, the Grizzly bear plunged headlong over the cliff, landing in a thicket at the foot of the headland. The Buffalo bull rushed so fast that he could not stop him- self at the place where the Grizzly bear plunged over the cliff, but he continued along the edge of the cliff for some distance. And when he had thus gone, he stood with his tail partly raised (and bent downward). Then the Grizzly bear returned to the bank and peeped. ‘O, Buffalo bull! Let us be friends. We resemble in disposition,” said the Grizzly bear. ADVENTURES OF THE ORPHAN TOLD BY GEORGE MILLER. Ta” ware¢a® diiba g¢i’-biama. Ki wa‘ijinga wi" Waha™ ¢icige Nation some sat, they say. And old woman one Orphan jugig¢e ta” watg¢a™ gaqija g¢i"-biama. Ga" waqpa¢iqtia’i té, yi u¢ipu, she with her nation apart from aat, they say. And they were very poor low tent (of owl poor people) qade yf té, g¢i”-biama. Ki iyicpa aka yf-gaxe-na”-biama “ ya"hd, man‘dé grass lodge the sat, they say. And her grand- the used to play games, they aay. O grand- bow (std.ob ) child (sub.) mother jin’ga wi" ingaxa-ga,” a-biama. Tya™ aka giixa-biamé. Ma™ cti gidxa- small one make for me, said, they say. His the made it for him, Arrow too made for grand- (sub.) they say. him, mother ‘ biamé. Ga" wajin’ga wakide-na™-biamé iytiepa aka. Ca™ wajin’ga-ma they say. And bird | used to shoot at them, they her grand- the And the birds say child (sub.). idi¢ahe ké égaxé’qti miwaji aki-na"-biam&é Ki wakide-pi-qti-biama belt the all around ina putting he used to reach home, And he was a very good marksman, (Ig. circle them in his they say. they say ob.) belt niyinga aka, edada™ ¢i” ctéwa™ t’é¢é-na”-biama. ffi ¢a44 za‘e’-qti-na”- boy the what the soever he usually killedit, they Tents at the they used to make (sub.), (mv. say. (ev. ob.) a great noise, ob.) . *u/ ZAG : get ae C= (2, ee biamé, mi” ca® ma™ci ti¢a™ té'di. Iya” ¢inké fmaxd-biamd: ‘“ya™ha, they say. sun the highinthe the(ey. when. His the (st. he questioned her, they O grand- (ev. air ob.) be- grand- ob.) say: mother, ob.) came mother = ADVENTURES OF THE ORPHAN, 587 Si : oe . F200 . , giama za‘ amd eata"l 4,” 4-biama. Tya™ aké égi¢a™-biama, “Gdama those un- they are mak- why are ? said, they say. His the said to him, they Those seen ones ing a noise they grand- (sub.) say, unseen ones mother (sub. of an action) ta” ware¢a" amidi wajin’ga wi" hi-na" ama jidéqti pfi ¢an‘di ma‘a nation near those bird one reaches there reg- (sub. of an ularly, they say action) very red. Tents by the cotton (cb. ob.) wood q¢abé sndédedqti te¢a™ aAta"-na”-biama wajin’ga aka. fi ¢a" b¢ugagti tree very tall the (std. ho stands on regularly, inde the Tents the ob.) in they say (sub.). (cy. the past ob.) wajin'ga ak& ugéjide-na”-biama maja” ¢a. Kdega" nikagahi aka bird the sheds a red light over them, land the But chief the (sub.) they say (cv. (sub.) ob.). kidewaki¢a-biama. F’be té¢é ¢inké ijan’ge ¢inké g¢a” te,” .d-biama causes them to shoot at it, they Who kills it the one his anentee the one marry may, said she, they say. who who her say. “sra"hd, 6/di b¢é ta minke,” 4-biam4. ‘‘Awadiqti né te eha+! O grand- there I go will I who, said, they say. To what ee you can ! (fem) mother, indeed go Wawégqtaqtai he. I¢iqta taf hé,” 4-biama iya™” akaé. “U¢ade-qti ¢i¢in’ge They are those who s Abuse you will . said, they say his the Real cause for you have abuse people (fem) (pl) (fem) erand (sub.). (going ?) none mother eha"+!” Ca™ iytcpa aké nian’dé g¢iza-bi ega”, agai té, dci. “Egi¢e ond ! (few) Yet her the bow took his, they as went out of Beware you grand- (sub.) say (=hav- doors. go child ing.). FY lg 2h FR Ae / , / Fae tha (O *n/ 4/ = te, ehé,” A-biama iya™ aka. “Ga™ gadgédi yi-gaxe ma™b¢i” ta minke,” lest, LIsay, said, they say his the At any to those to play I walk will I who, grand- (sub.). rate unseen games mother places 4-biamé iyicpa aké. LEei¢e iiepa amd ad¢a-biamaé ca ca® té tal wate¢a™. to} D said, they say her the Atlength hergrand- the went, they say without the nation. grand- (sub.). child (my. stopping child sub.) Lii ¢a" yan’ge a¢a-bi yi, ugajide ama ta” wa"g¢a” ¢a™. Niaci"ga ama Tents the near at went, they when, it shone with a red nation the People the (ev. hand say light (ev. (pl. ob.) ob.) sub.) rey? . , alone /) ena . , . , . Akié’qti amima kidé amama wajin’ga ¢inké. E’di ahi-biamé Waha" ¢icige were (my.)ina great were shooting at it bird the (st. There arrivee, they Orphan crowd, they say as they moved, ob.). say they say ami. Niaci"ga wi™ ahi-bi ega”, “ Gi-gai ha, Waha™¢inge! ¢akide te,” the (mv. Person one reached as O come sub.). there, (= hayv- they say ing), Orphan! you shoot may at it i-biama. Na™wapabi ega™, wabag¢a naji”-biama Waha™¢icige aka. said, they say. Feared them, they as drawing back stood, they say Orphan the say (= hay- thro’ shame or (gub.). ing) diffidence Niaci"ga ama a-f-bi ega”, “Gudiha! gtidiha éga"! Waha'¢icige kide Person the coming, as, That way ! that way some- Orphan shoot (my. they say what! at it (sub.) taté,” d-biamé. Waha™¢icige ak& wajin’ga kida-biamé. Na ji®ctet’qtci shall, said, they say. Orphan ane bird shot at it, they say. Barely sub. 12 15 [5 588 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS miiona" i¢é¢a-biama. Tetinike aka kide yi, sakib’ thé ¢iq¢e wi" he suddenly missed hitting it, they Ictinike the shotat when beside lying reed one say. (sub.) it . l , . , . , , . or ¢ida” ¢é¢a-biamé. Niaci"ga ama a-biama, “Wuhu+! Waha™¢inge aka pulling he sent it, they People the (pl. said, they say, Oh! Orphan the (the say. sub.) (sub.) string) ave te¢apragin i) 9%! Wie b¢i’,” a-biama Ictinike aka. Wayjin’ga ama came very near killing it! Tam, said, they say Ictinike | the Bird the (sub.). (mv. (sub-) gia” a¢d-biama yi, niaci"ga ama ga” udé¢a ag¢a-biama. Ga™ Waha’ ¢icige flying went, they say when, people the atany scat- went homeward, And Orphan (pl. rate tering they say. (sub.) cti ag¢i-biamé. Ki akifi té, iya™ ¢inké’di. “ygatha’, wajin’ga ¢inké too went homeward, And he reached his at the st. one. O grand- bird the one they say. home, -grand- mother, who mother ‘0 av¢i" téa¢ a¢i® ha,” a-biamda. “I¢a"ba” ¢aji-a he+! Is¢iqta taf hé. I came very near killing it - said, they say. A second go not ! (fem) Abuse will time you (pl.) (fem). Qnaji te a™¢a™i ¢arcti,” a-biama iya” aka. Ci aba aji té ci You go shall we said heretofore, said, they say his the Again day an- the again not grarfd- (sub.). other mother ha”ega™tce té di a¢d-biama. Ci za‘é’qtia’-biama, Ci ahi-biama yi, morning the there went, they say. Again there was a great noise, Again arrived there, when they say. they say éga’-biama. Ci niaci"ga kide Agaji aka ct éga" kide Agaji-biama. Ci kidai so, they say. Again person toshoot com- the again so toshoot commanded him, Again he atib manded (sub.) at it they say. phoy at him té éga"-biamd. Ci na™ji"eteé’qtci mutona™-biama. Cr Ietinike aka idle fo} J the so, they say. Again barely missed hitting it, they Again Ictinike the shot at (past say. (sub.) it act) yi sakib’ ihé ¢iq¢e wi" ¢ida™ ¢é¢a-biama. (And so on, as on the first day. when beside lying reed one pulling he sent it, they (the string) say. Similar adventures on the third day.) A™ ba weduba té ahii te wajin’ga Day fourth, the — ar- the bird rived (=when) there ¢inké kida-biamd. Kusandeé’qti i¢a™¢a-biama. ‘“Wuhu+! Waha™ ¢inge the one shot at it, they. Through and he placed it, they On! Orphan who say. through say. aka t’é¢é,” A-bi yi'ji, Ictinike aka, “Sa! sal Wi tea¢e! Wi tedgé! the has said, when, Tetinike the (See note) I I killed it! I I killed it (sub.) killed it, they (sub.), say mG Vite , ufo a > , . r 1 . “, . , U¢ide ¢i¢in’'ge! Ud¢ade ¢ig¢in’ge!” 4-biama. Ga" uhéwaki¢a-baji-biama Cause for you have Cause for you have said, they say. And he would not let them have their (com- none! (com- none ! way, they say plaint ?) plaint ?) Ictinike aké, ga” Waha™ ¢icige wajin’ga té¢ai té ginacd-biama. Ga™ Ictinike the and Orphan | bird killed it the snatched from him, And (sub.), they say. : rer me ses nfaci"?ga ama’ dkie Abana" wajin’ga ¢inke naji”-biami. Ki Waha™ ¢icige people the (pl. ina viewing bird the (st stood, they say. And Orphan sub.) crowd the spec: ob.) 5 tacle oa ADVENTURES OF THE ORPHAN. 589 5 , . 1 * ami 6/di ata-bi ega™, hit wit ¢iontida-bi yi, wajin’ga b¢igaqti g¢iza- be} ’ the there went, they as feather one pulled out, they whan, “bird ae ale aie his (mv. say —=hav- say own (sub.) ing), biamé, jidéqti amd. Ag¢d-biamé. Gan’yi nikagahit aka ga-biama ) D 5D ’ they say, very red they Went homeward, And then chief the said as follows, say. they say. (sub.) they say, “ Wian’de ¢i@ adi” efi-ea,” d-biamd. Ga™ wajin’ga ¢inké agi” ag¢a- bi D5 kobe) _ My dauzhter’s the be bringing him said, they say. And “bird the one took it Hocierardl husband (ny. hither, who they say one) ega™ nikagahi aka ¢¢i" aki-i-biama, Ictinike akA eti agi” aki-i-biama. as chief the had it taken there to him, Ictinike the too was taken there to him, (=hav- (sub.) they say, (sub.) they say. ing) Tjan'g ge ¢anka natba éimte na™ ¢inkd Ictinike aka g¢a"-biama Gam His the ones two perhaps grown the one Tetinike the took her to wife, And daughter who who (sub.) they say. / *n/ . ido 7aae. , / , . ’ mi” egal éga", ga” o¢i’-biama Ictinike ak’. Waha ¢icige aka aki-biama. took : wife ae so sat, they say Ictinike the Orphan the reached there (sub.). (sub.) his home, they say. “sjatha, wajin’ga ¢inké tea¢e ag¢i,” d-biama. ‘“Hé! epaga”’! hé, epaga™ !” VO grand- bird the (st. Ikilled Ihave said, they Oh! grandchild! oh! grandchild! mother, ob.) it come home, say. . , , re . , A-biami. ‘“yathd, weé¢ita’-tég¢e ingaxa-ga ha, u¢iza™ te’di,” a-biama. said, they O grand. [See notes. iz mi aie for ae middle at the, said, they say. mother, say. Ga” yf té ugdjide’qti e¢i™-biama Waha ¢icige aka iya™ é¢a"ba. Ki, Aud tent the filled With a very sat, they say Orphan the his she too. And, (std. red light (sub.) grand- ob.) mother “spathd, wa¢igije wi" ingax: i-gn,” A-biama Gal” iya™ aka wi igigije gi- O grand- hoop (of one mae for me, said, they say. And his the hoop Bade mother, hide?) grand- (sub.) mother A4xa-biamd. Wa¢igije biz’ i¢a’¢a-bi te’di, ulita- bajf-biama Waha*’¢icige fur him, they Bes todry was placed, when, was anxiously waiting for Orphan say. p they say it, they say aka. Egi¢e bize ama. ‘Hat, yatha, u¢iza™ té ggin “ga ha,” A-biama. the At length dry they say. Ho, grand- middle the said, they (sub.). mother, say. Ga” Waha” ¢icige aké dciayi a-f-naji”-biama, pyébe fonugayi¢ica™ te’di And Orphan the outside came and stood, they door towards the right at the (sub.) say, hand naji”-biama. Ki ga-biama iya™ ¢ink&, “ ya'ha, ecé te ha, pé nikaci’ ga stood, they say. And Freeh as fol- his the (st. O grand- you shall. Buf- person ows, grand- ob.), mother, say falo they say mother it , / = fe f ~ / wy, , a wada"b éga® na® ga™-qti éde cu¢é he, cpaga"’ he, ecé te ha, ya"ha,” they are usually so of that very but goes grand- 5 you shall . O grand- seen (’) . sort (?) to you (fem.) child (fem.), say mother, d-biama. Ga™ iya™ aka ¢gi¢a’-biama. piayita® we i¢igije ga" banan’ge said he, they And his the said to him, they say. From the tent hoop the making it roll say- grand- (sub.) (cy. ob.) by pushing mother , . 7a er } Pan eo 3 , , nA *n/ f¢a-biama. pijébe te act é¢a"be ati-bi yi, yé ge ual aka wi™ ga” she sent it Doorway the out- emerging itcame, when, buf. this tollof the one hither, they say, side they say falo (sub.) 12 12 590 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. ti¢a’’-biama. Waha™¢icige aké kisandé’qti i¢a™¢a-biamad, yijébe té’di became suddenly Orphan the through and placed it, they say, doorway atthe (a ev. ob.), (sub.) through they say. ?é¢a-biama. Ga™ iya™ é¢a"ba dada-bi ega™, iya™ akd bé¢tigagqti aga- killed it, they say. And his she too they cut up as his the whole cutinto grand the animal, (=hav- grand- (sub.) slices, mother they say ing), mother they say biama. Ta” wa"g¢a" wag¢ta-baji-biamd. Iya" aké f¢iq¢i hébe gos they say. Nation did not eat anything, they His grand- the [See note.] mee mad say. mother (sub.) biama. (ficta”-bi yi, “ygatha, i¢iq¢i eété ani né te,” 4-biama, “nikagahi they say. Finished, when, O grand- [See that hav- you will, said, they chier they say mother, note.) pile ingit go say, ¢inké’di. Géce te ha, inf, gate ¢iddi ¢até teda+,” 4-biama. “A™, to the (st. Yousay will . O son's that your eat he may said, they Yes, ob.) as follows wife, father . (fem.) say. (See note. } ga", éga® taté, cpa¢a™,” a-biama iya™ aké. “Ga™ 6’di a¢a-biamaé iya™ ama. and, 25 shall, grandchild, said, they say his the And there went, they say his the grand- (sub.). grand- (my. mother mother — sub.). Ga™ yij¢ébe té’di ubtha" ¢é¢a-bi ega™, yig¢isat¢a ¢é¢a-bi ega™, agi-biamd And doorway atthe partoftent sent it nee turned herself around sud- having, she was return- near en- off, they denly, they say ing home, trance say they say wa‘tyinga aka. Ki gi-biama yfaja aka, ‘Da™bai-ga, da” bai-ga, da™ bai-ga,” old woman the And - said as fol- inthe theone Look ye! Look ay Look ye! (sub.). lows, they say tent who (sub.), d-biama. Da™be é¢a"be ahi-bi yi, niaci”ga ctewa™ ¢ingd-biama. said, they To look emerging arrived when, person soever there was none, say. there, they they say. say (Waha™¢icige akA iya” ¢inké wa¢fonaji giydixa-biamdé, dda™ haci té’di, Orphan the his the one invisible made his, they say, there- after when, (sub.) panne who (ob.) fore mother a” ba wéduba™ tédihi yi, “yga"ha, wa¢iona cki taté ha, i’ta",” 4-biama.) day fourth time the, it. when, O grand- visible you shall 7 now, said he, they arrived mother, come say. there back Ki Ictinike aka gé-biamaé, ‘“Wa‘tyjinga wi"dqtci ucté dega™ é te ha,” And Ictinike the said as follows, Old woman just one remains but that is (sub.) they say, the one (?) a-biama. Ci duba” éga%i té Weéduba” tédihi yi, u¢ikfha® wit’ said, they say. Again four it was so. Fourth time the,itar- when, sack of buffalo one ‘ times rived there meat . . eet / 7"’-biama 1ya™ aka, wajint g ga ¢inké djag¢a™-biama. ‘“ yga"ha, ita" wa¢iona carried on her his the bird the she carried the (cv. ob.) O grand- now visible back, they say grand- (sub.), (st. ob.) ou top of a pile, mother, mother they say. cki taté ha,” a-biamé. Ga™ iya” amd a¢ad-biama, wajin’ga ¢inké you shall : said, they say. And his the went, they say, bird the come grand- (my. sub.) (st. ob.) back mother . a7 4 ~ — cy y , ~ poe . djag¢a™-biama. Ki yf té yan’ge ahi-bi yi, yi té ugajide a¢aé-biama. she carried the (cy. ob.) And tent the near arrived when, tent the began to shine with a red on top of a pile, (std. there, they (std. light, they say. they say. ob.) say ob-) bin ADVENTURES OF THE ORPHAN. 591 yfi ya”ha ké a¢d-biama. Nikaci”ga ama égi¢a” -biama, “Wuhu+! Tents border the(lg. went, they say. People the (pl. said to (some one), Oho! ob.) sub.) they say, Waha™¢ingé aka wajin'ga t’é¢a-bi a™¢a"i yi'cté, Ictinike té¢é ecat Orphan the (sub.) bird that he we thought when, Ictinike killed it you killed it it said epee , . , my 4: . ¢a". Waha¢ingé iya” ama ¢é ‘i ati. Ebédi 4" ¢é da®,” éna*- in the Orphan his the this carry- has To whose carry- she ? said reg- past. grand- (my.sub.) ing on come. lodge ingon goes ularly, mother her back her back J se F ns , biama. Ga™ da”be naji-biamé nikaci”’ga ama. “Wuhu+! nikagahf 4i they say. And seeing stood, they say people the Oho! chief tent (pl. sub.). Ona ° ale viryqe is 1 . J . te‘di ‘i a¢af,” A-biamé. ijébe té’di ahi-bi ega”, wa‘i” té gapuk’ité tothe carry- she said, they Doorway at the reached, as(=hav- loadon_ the making the ing on went, say. they say ing), her back (ob.) | sound ‘*pu- her back ki” by falling , . . - 8 ss qe * ~ r , gaxa-biama. “Hi, gini+, ¢iddi ¢isan’ga méga" c¢te ¢até taf-eda"+,” she made it, they Oh! son's our your brother likewise this pile they may (pl.) say. wife, ‘ather eat it . (fem.) {See note.) d-biama. “Da™bai-gi, da™bai-gi, da”bai-ga! Gaté cti ga™-na® dha*,” said, they See (ye)! see (ye)! see (ye)! That too she his done ! say- thing it regularly 4-biamaé nikagah{ aka. Ga" Ictinike aka gé-biama, “Watjinga wi"dqtci said, they chief the And Ictinike the said as follows, Old woman only one say (sub.). (sub.) they say. ucté dega” & ¢i® té, gan’yi Gbé tada’,” 4-biama. Ki da™be a-i-biama: re- but she is andthen who could? said, they say. And toseeher they came, mains the they say. one Ki égi¢e Waha™ ¢iefge iya” aké ¢ akéma. “Waha™¢ingé iya™ é aka hé,” And behold Orphan his the she was the one, Orphan his she is the 6 grand- (sub.) they say. grand- one (fem.), mother mother d-biama. “Hat, wijan’de agi” gfi-ga,” a-biama. Ga™ ¢éte wai” té ¢izaf said, they say. Ho, my daughter's bring (ye) him said, they say. And this bundleor the they husband hither, pile pack pile took té, iya™ ¢i" wa‘i” hi té ¢izai té, wajin’ga ¢inké cti ¢izd-bi ega”, when, his the pack that she took they when, bird the (st. too took, they as grand- (mv. took it thither ob.) say (=hav- mother ob.) ing,) ubdji¢a’ ¢a-biamd. Ictinike té¢é ¢in’ké i¢a"ge ¢inké edabe i¢a™ ¢a- hung it up, they say. Ictinike killed the one he put it the one also they put it it who down who down, biama. pi té ugdjidé’qti g¢i’-biamé. Ga" Waha™ ¢icige aka a¢i™ akii-bi they say. Tent the shining witha sat, they say. And Orphan the taken him back (std. very red light (sub.) thither, they ob.) say ega™, jingd ¢inké g¢a”-biamda. Ga” g¢i'-biama, mi” g¢a™-bi ega™. having, small tke one he took to wife, they So sat, they say, taken a wife, having. who say. they say Najiha ¢a™ i¢iskiski-qtia”-biama, gaha-baji ca"ca™-bi ega™, q¢a™ jé-qtia”- Hair the exceedingly tangled, they say, uncombed remained, they having, exceedingly tangled, part say biamé. Ictinike igdq¢a® aké, ‘“Wihé, umi”je he i™biqpa¢é te he! they say. Ictinike his wife the Younger couch (or lice he made fall by will ! (sub.), sister rug) pressure on me (fem) accidentally Matciajaha éga" g¢in‘ki¢ai-a he! Wanin‘de¢ag¢aji eha"+!” a-biama. Ata greater distance cause yehim to sit !(fem.) You do not loathe him ! (fem.) said, they say, 12 15 18 15 592 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. Waha™¢icige igaq¢a® ¢¢a"ba gi’¢a-baji’qti g¢i-biamd. Wat aka gidhe Orphan his wife she too very sad sat, they say. Woman the ne comb (sub.) for him ‘i¢a-bi yi, u¢ffage-na™-biama Waha' ¢icige aka. Ga™ g¢i'i té, mi” e¢ari promised, but, always agile they say Orphan the So he sat signof taken a wife they say (sub.). complete achion, éga". A™ba mi ma™ci tiga” ama sp’, wait ¢inké jigig¢e a¢a-biama having. Day sun was becoming highin the air, when, woman the one with her he went, they they say who his own say s / , ia ~ e Spelt DA ad ony, / *n/ . wh maja” gacibaja. Ahii té ha. Neti¢ica” wi" eca® g¢i’ éi"te &’ya abi- land beyond (the vil- They ar- c Lake one nearto sat per- there ar- lage.) rived there haps rived, biama wa‘ jigig¢e. G¢i'-biama, ni-ya”ha kédi “Ni ¢é¢a™ matte they say woman with her, his Sat, they say, shore by the. Water this (ev. beneath own. ob.) , / b¢é ta minke ¢a™ja, ¢égi¢e ¢ag¢é te ha. Ag¢i-mdji ctéctewa", ga™ Igo will I who though, beware you go lest . Icome back I notwithstand- still home- not ing, ward g¢in'-ga. Ag¢i ti minke ha,” a-biama Waha%¢icige aka “ qé eda" éda® SI t. Icome will Iwho 2 said, they say Orphan the Fore- that in par- back (sub.) head part tien. lar (?) 3 is , . , , v s , [ee / wégaska"a™ ¢a-@a,” a-biama. gé ¢a™ ida*bé’qti unticka-biamé. Ga" examine me as to it, said, they say. Fore- the in the very mid- was a depression, they And head part dle say. Paes : rae aera. ys ~ y waha” ¢icigai é¢ za waqpa¢il éga" uhfi éga" nié¢é da’ cté-a™i té, sna orphan was poor as was as was perhaps sign was brought hurt of scarred up completed action, te, dé ¢an’di. Ga" ni ké jihe a¢a-biamé. Ga” daqti ¢a" é¢a*be sign fore- on the And stream the ford- went, they say. And only the the emerg- of com- head part. (Iz. ing head part ing pleted ob.) auction, naji”-bi ega”, yig¢isa"¢a-bi ega”, wa‘t ¢inké ugikie i¢a-biama. ‘“ Kdéda® stood, they havi oe turned himself around, having, woman the one esisine sent (lis voice) What say they say who to her, his hither, they own say. a 5.53 : 1. n/ 4 509) RL Se as 2 rs donha 434 uwib¢a té si¢a-ga,” a-biama. ‘Ca™ ha,” 4-bi ega”, ni ké égiha did¢a- Ttold you sign Abin tees said, they say. Enough a said. having stream the beneath had gone a ° it, they (lg. the sur- past or say ob.) face complete action . , q= , seal Ss / rN, : / biama. Ga™ watt ¢inké xagé ¢inké té ga” g¢fiiji té ¢ta" ni-ya™”ha they say. And woman the st. was weeping (as as still ne did not as_ so far bank, or shore a one she sat) come back ké uha ga” xagé ma¢i’-biama. Ictiha ké ujé¢a-bi ega™, ja™’-biama the follow- still weeping walked, they say. Eyelid the weary, they being, slept, they say (lg. ing the (lg. say ob.) course ob.) watt aka. Maja” ¢a® ni-ya”ha ké’di pahan’ga ahtfi ¢a}4 aki-bi ega™, woman the Land the bank, (or shore) by the first they tothe shereached having, (sub.). (place) reached (place) there again, there they say 5 2 5 5 ¥ aes , ape Pope ; 7 ere fee 4 edi ja”-biama. Ja"t’é’qti ja" ké yi, edi aki-biamé nt aka. (fiqi-biaméa. there she lay down, Sound asleep J she was when, there he reached there man the He woke her by they say, lying again, they say (sub.) takiny hold of ; her, they say. ADVENTURES OF THE ORPHAN. 593 “Acdi ha. qahan ga ha,” a-biama. aha" ti¢éga" wada™be y1'ji, Coi¢e Thave : Arise ! said, they say. Arose suddenly, she locked when behold re- when turned niaci@ga aké uda%qti akima, najiha ke’ ecti uda%qti-bi ga’ wabag¢a ga® person the was very good, they say, hair the too very good, they as hesitated thro’ as (sub.) (lg. say shame or difli- ob.) dence yiedisat¢ai-biama wa‘t aka. “Hi"+! na! wawd¢aqiqa eha"+! Niaci"ga she turned herself around, woman the On! fie! you are one given to ! (feim.) Man they say (sub.). abusing people . . : . 1 : ey° ace wi" waqpi¢i'gti ab¢ixé dega” ni ¢dé¢andi ¢gihi¢é dega” e¢faiji ga" one very poor I took him but water at this he went be- but he has as as my bhus- neath the not re- band surface turned axdge i¢iapé minké. Wawé¢aqaga eha’+!” a-biama. ‘'Téna’! wie b¢i'"’,” Iweep Iwait for I who sit. You are one given to — ! (fem.) said, they say. Why! I Tam, him abusing people : / aif : , , mm Y d-biamé nti ak& Ca™ na” ana‘a®-baji-biama wa‘i aka. “ Téna’! gd¢a® said, they say man the Yet still she paid noattention tohimw, woman the Why! that (sub.). they say (sub.). (place) ~ , / / ~~ 2’ 99 , , . , . wégaskara¢ag¢e te ehé ¢a”cti da™ba-ga ha.” Wa‘i akéa yig¢isa"¢a-bi you examine meas toit will I heretofore see it l Woman the turned herself said (sub.) around, they say / ° Byiid res: . hace / ison . re . ega”, da™ba-bi yi, itéde agin i¢a*’-bi ega”, fagikig¢a-biama. Ki ni- as saw him, they when now (a embraced him, her as kissed him, her own, they And shore (= hav- say reversal own, suddenly, (=hav- say. ing), of previous they say ing), act, ete.) yavha keé'di a¢a-bi ega”, jati’xe ni-ya”ha igabdéqi" gé u¢cwirda-bi (of the to the went, they as green scum shore Dlown up the collected, they lake) say (= hav- that arises there from scat- say ing), on water in (the water) tered springs, ete ega”, wai™ giyaxa-biama wa‘t ¢inké, waté cti giydxa-biamdé Waha’- Or- as robe made for her, hisown, Woman the st. skirt too made for her, his own, (= hay- they say ob.), they say. ing), . , CO) / , , , , : , S ‘. ¢icige aka wajin’ga a™cte waptigahahada-éga*-ma hitbé ¢a" eti waji phan the bird as if those resembling short-eared owls moccasin the too laid in (sub.) part ereat numbers uta”-biama, wai™ ¢a” cti waji wai"-biama, ja*- wéti" cti wi" agi’-bi yi, Wore as moccasins, robe the too laidon wore as a robe, wood for hit- too one he had, -when they say, part in great they say, ting they say numbers fka"ta” cti waxa-biama. Ja*- weéti® ké ihé¢ée-na”-bi ¢an‘di wajin’ga aka tied to it too he made them, they Wood for hit- the ~ laid down the (lg. when bird the say. ling (Ig. ob.) usually, (sub.) ob,) they say / . , i +: , N ff XO , , , . & . gahut’ (a") ihé- na”- biama. Ga™ igdq¢a™ é¢a"ba ag¢a-biama daizé-qtei erying out from was usually they say. And his wife she too they started home, late in the being hit placed they say afternoon horizontally snddenly 2 t yi. E¢a*be aki-biama yi ké. i ké baza™” ag¢d-biama yi égi¢e niaci®ga 15 when. Emerging they reached tent the Tent the ‘pushing went back, they when at length people (=in there avain, (dg. (lg. among say sight) they say line). line) them tee le , ot Whee ip . : Roky AO ama égi¢a"-na”-biama, “Na! Waha™¢ingé igdq¢a® nikaci”ga hy we re kA wiwa Keb- D1 ega™ > © an Wal ge ctewa Wajl Wal te ha we ajin’@ exray gan Xa. meant them, they a, infact robe tie even puton woreas (com- . bird those who, say scattered thick arobe plete action) — Cr 596 THE (@EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. Ga” Waha™ ¢icige wa¢aha te’ g¢ionud éga™ itégi¢e ¢¢ ama ha, q¢abé hidé And Orphan clothing the pulled offhis ieee ing toputhis was going, tree base own down they say te'di. Ietinike aka égi¢a’-biama ha, “Q¢abé ¢éte snedé tig¢e,” 4-biama to the Ictinike the said to (it), they say - Tree this tall (std. ob.), said, they (sub.) (std. ob.) becomes so, say reste 2 A Hoa oy 2 / seer = ~ Ictinike akad, jiji id-bi ega”. Waha™¢icige wana‘a™ éga" éga" fe té Ictinike the whis- spoke, haying. Orphan heard a fittle - a8 word the (sub.), pering they say ny 7 wémaxe ant. “Na! jit¢cha, edéce éga” 4,” ¢ ama, da qa¢a wada™be éga?. was asking him about Why! elder what did yousay ? wassaving, head back- looked Taine it, they say. brother, : they say, ward Fleet ke. . ° oun, : , rp nis “Edche ta. Gar’ iv gi ¢e¢i” ga™ a¢i” o¢i-de b¢até ta minke, ehé minké, Whatl should? Still return- this(mv. so he bringsit back, Ieatit will I who, I was saying as I say ing for one) when sat, me kage-san’ga,” 4-biama Ictinike aka. Ga” ci ¢é ama ha’, Ane q¢abé té. Ki friend amos said,they say Ictinike the And again wasgoiny, . climb- tree the And brother, (sub.). they say ing (std. ob.). ei’ &gi¢a"’-biama Ictinike akd, “Qeabé ¢été snedé tig¢e,” a-biama Ictinike again said to (it), they say Tetinike thes Tree this tall (std. ob.) said, they say Ictinike (sub.), (std. ob.) it becomes, aka, jijf i4-bi ega”. Ki ci’ Waha ¢icige wana‘a" éga" éga" ci wémaxe the whis- spoke, having. And again Orphan heard alittle as again was asking (sub.), per- they say him about it, ing = ama. “Na! jit¢éha, edéce éga®-na™ a,” ci ¢ ama. “Na! edada™ edéhe a, they say. Why! ~ elder what have you been 2 again was saying, Why! what Isay should? brother, saying occasionally they say. something : ip pus ey Paes * en/ps : , Ps) tH) kAge-san’ga,” A-biama Ietinike aka. Ga" edabéqtei i”hi ¢i", ehé minke, friend younger said, they say Ictinike the And very nearly hehas the I was saying as I brother, (sub.). reached (my, sat, itforme ob.), 4-biama Ietinike aké, Ga™ ci eqaha ¢é ama Ane. Ki ci’ égi¢a’-biama co) said, they say Ictinike the And again further was going, climb- And again said to (it), they say (sub ). they say ing. roe , yy eee, o; . , y , , = . Fine Iectinike aka, ci jiji id-bi ega”, “Qdabeé ¢cté snedé tig¢e,” a-biama. Ki Ictinike the again whis- spoke, having, Tree this tall (std.ob.) said, they say. And (sub.), pering they say (std. ob.) it beconies, Waha™ ¢icige wani‘a" ga" éga" ci wémaxe ama. “Na! jit¢cha, edéce Orphan heard a little as again was asking him about Why! elder what have it, they say. brother you been , ria 8 , , Ts , , - fe vod Nhe et / as ea are i éga"na” a,” ci & amd. “Na! edada® edéhe ta, kage-san’ga,” 4-biama siying ocea- ? again was saying, Why! what I say should? friend younger said, they say sionally they say. something brother, Ietinike aka. “Gat eddbéqtei ihi ¢i, ehé minke,” a-biama Ictinike aka. Ictinike the And very nearly he has the ITwassaying,asI said, they say Ictinike the (sub.). reached (mv. sat, (sub.). itforme one), , v v , vl a , 4 - Ci ¢é ama ha’, ci dne. Ga™ wéyuhé’qti ma™¢i” ama ha’, fe té wand‘a" Avain wasgoing, . again climb- And very apprehensive was walking,they . word the he heard they say ing. H say somethin ctéwa™ wa-na™-biega”. Ki égi¢e ci Cgi¢a’-biama, “Q¢abe ¢été snedé notwith- always denied it, as. And atlength again said to it, they say, Tree this tall standing they say (std. ob.) tig¢e,” ci A-biamd. Ci édihi wand‘a" éga", pf wémaxe ama. “Na! jit¢cha, (std.ob.) again said, they And uatthat understood as, again he was questioning Why! eld r it becomes, say. time it him. brother, } ADVENTURES OF THE ORPHAN. 597 Le y , , pee , . ws cu edéce éga™-na™ 4,” ci é ama, “Eddéha-maji, 4-biama. Qéabé ¢éte maxe what have you been say- ? again was saying, I said some- Inot, said he, they ‘Tree this upper ing occasionally they say. thing say. (std. ob.) world Cae) ; , 29) Z . , yoaee Lye 1 : , vy Oe re r i¢abat’u te, ehée ha,” a-biama Ictinike aké. Ga™ q¢abé té uti” ihé¢aga let it extend to, T said 5 said, they say Ictinike the And tree she hitting he brought (sub.). (std. it a horizontal ob.) ob. against it here and there ug¢ica® naji”-biama. “Q¢abé ¢éte snedé tig¢é te, ehée ha,” a-biama. Ga” going he stood, they say. ‘Tree this tall let it (the lg. Isaid said, they say. And around it (std. ob.) ob.) become suddenly, q¢abé ak&é maxe i¢dbat’i am’. Waha'’¢icige mixe i¢dbisandé’qti kega fo) tree the upper extended to, they say. Orphan upper i avery DA TLC Wy apace at the sub. vorid world etween (the tree an sd an the upper world) Go oe vl Vii: - naji” ama. “HéA!” é ama hi’, Waha™¢icige. Ga" xagé-na® ca™ca™ ami. was std., they say. Alas! was saying, é Orphan. And was crying always they ‘they say regularly say. Najiha ¢a™ cti naq¢a™jé-qtia” amd. Egi¢e sabajiqti Qi¢’ Weéganibe 6 Hair the too was exceedingly tangled, they say. Atlength verysuddenly Eagle Young White part Eagle wa¢adaf-ma wi" ah{-biamd, xagé naji” ta". “Nfacitga edéce ¢ita%ed 4,” those called that one arrived there, weeping stood the Person what are you saying ? they say, (std. ob.). as you stand 4-biama. “Ha, giga”! ha, giga™! had, yiga’!” 4-biamé Waha¢icige aka. said, they say. Oh! grand- oh! grand- oh! — grand- said, they say Orphan the father father father (sub.). “Hatt, kéganga! ug¢a-ga ha,” d-biama Qi¢d aka, A*ha™, yiga”ha,” 4-biama 9 Ho, come, do so! confess i said, they say Eagle the Yes, O grand- said, they say = m (sub.). father, Waha"™ ¢icige akd. “ piga”ha, q¢abé etigagti ihé¢e qéyi ga” qti-na" ¢an‘di, Orphan the O Grand- tree dense very laiddown foot of just that sort (?) at the (sub.). father, the bluff place, jiga™ ha, wanfta a™pa™ niga jin’ga édega™ A¢agia® nankace-na™ wi" b¢i" ha, © grand- quadruped elk male small but(inthe you were flying overit regularly one Jam father, animal past) ? jiga™ha,” 4-biam& Waha™ ¢icige aké. “Hat, ca” ha,” a-biama Qi¢d aka. O grand- said, they say Orphan the flo, enough a said, they say Eagle the father, (sub.). (sub.). “Qijiea™ wit tf tatdé,” d-biamdé. Ga™ a¢a-biama Qi¢a ama. Ci gi’¢aji’qti ci 12 Your one come shall, said,they say. And went,they say Kagle the(my. Again — very sad again grandfather sub.). Waha" ¢icige xagé naji” ama. Ci égi¢e Héga ama ahi-biama. Ci fe égi¢a™i Orphan erying wasstd., they Again at Buzzard the arrived,they Again word said to say. length (my. say. him sub.) té égi¢a™-biamé. Ci Waha™¢icige fe té égi¢a” amd, Ci wanita wi" the said to him, they say. Again Orphan word the was saying, they Again quadroped one say (?) tiwagi¢4 ama&. Ci éga*, COP aus care shins (izfga" wi" ti taté,” A-biamaé. 1 he was telling about to And ‘80, Ho, enough . Your one. come shall, said, they say. them, they say. grandfather Ou Ga” a¢a-biama Héga amd. Ci gi’¢aji'qti ci Waha™¢icige xagé nai” ama. And went, they say Buzzard the(my. Again very sad again Orphan erying was std., they sub.) say. Ci. égi¢e yaxe am ahi-biam’i. Ci Cgi¢a’-biama fe té Gan'yi ci Again — at Crow the (mv. arrived there, Again said to him, they say word the. And then again length sub.) lhey say. ) 12 15 598 THE (¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. Waha™ ¢icige ci égi¢a” ama, ci wanita wi" iwagi¢a ama. “Hau, ca” ha. Orphan again was saying, they again quadruped one he was telling about Ho, enough say, to them, they say. Ney . , , . , , . a v = aS ° (liyiga" wi" tf taté,” 4-biamd. Ga™ ad¢d-biam& yaxe ama. Ci gi’ ¢ajiqti Your one come shall, said, they say. And went, they say Crow the(mv. Again very sad grandfather sub.). ci Waha"™ ¢icige xagé nai” ama. Ci égi¢e Wajibesnéde ama ali-biama. again Orphan erying was std., they say. Again at Magpie the arrived there, length (sub.) they say. ‘3 ph we : og Tre y ay ~ vats u eo x Ci égi¢a”-biamd fe té. Gan’yi ci Waha¢icige ci ¢gi¢a” ama, ci again said to kim, they say word the. And then again Orphan again was saying to him, again they say, wanita wit tiwagi¢A ama. “Hau, ca” najin’-ea. (fiziga" ti taté,” quadruped one was telling about to Ho, still stand. Your come shall, them, they say. (yet) grand- father . , N if , . . : ie . d-biaméi. Ga"™ a¢a-biama Wajibesnéde ama. Egi¢e Qi¢a ama ahi- said, they say. And went, they say » Magpie the (mv. At = Eagle the ar- sub.). length (my.(sub.) rived there, : , , S : . . 1 . biama. ‘Hat, ati ha,” d-biamé Qi¢d aké. “Ha, giga”! ha, iga™! they say. Ho, Ihave F said, they say Eagle the OL! grand- oh! grand- come (sub.). father! father! ha, yiga”’ !” é€ amd Waha™ ¢icige waha™‘e ga”. “ Hau! ahi baca™ ¢a* oh! grand- was saying, Orphan making a spe- as. Ho! wing bent part the father! they say cial petition (part) F 3 / = = Sy / = Tale! : f , amwa'¢/-ada™ nan’ka ké ga™ na™sa”™ ¢é¢a-ga. Egi¢e icta nib¢a te. Icta- grasp me and back the at lie with legs stretched Beware eye youopen lest. Tye (lg. any out. ob.) rate Oso Cyahes we: , . , " )s . . i ¢ipi’ze jan’-gi,” (4-biama Qi¢d aka).* Gti" ag¢a-biamad, q¢abé u¢ica® closed ~ recline, said, they say Eagle the Carrying started home, they tree around (sub.). him ou say, his back . +: ° ° . 2; : 1 gawi"xe ga". Ujé¢a-qti-na”-bi ¢an'di q¢abé gaqa gé ata” i¢a™-na”- flying around as. He was generally very when tree branch the trod stood suddenly, ; tired (or every time (scat- on each time, that he was tired) tered) : ae . . yy : ys , w= Gy seb tats , biama. ‘A™zigi¢’-bi yi- na” ci ag¢é-na”-biamd. Ki ci’ égi¢e Héga they say. He rested, they when often again started home often, they Aud again at Buz: say say. length zard . , ~ , * J si / f ama’ ahi-biamé. ‘“ Hat, ati ha,” 4-biam&é Héga aké. ‘“ Ha, giga™! ha, the reached there, Ho, Ihave . said, they say Buzzard the Oh! grand- oli! (mv. they say. come (sub.). father! sub.) ° , : , ihe I A 12 / yiga™! ha, giga”!” é amd Waha" ¢icige, waha”‘e ga”. “Hau! Ahi baca® grand- oh! erand- was saying, Orphan, making aspe- as. Ho! Wing bent father! father! they say cial petition part ¢a" a®wam¢’- ada™ nan’ka ké ga” na™sa™ ¢é¢a-gi. Hgi¢e icté nib¢a te the grasp me and back the atany lie with legs stretched Beware eye youopen lest (part) (le. rate out. ' ob.) ha’. Icta-¢ipi’ze jan’-eh ha. Ma™¢i" waspa-maji,” 4-biama Héga aka. Ga™ Eye closed ~ recline ! Walking Ido not behave, said, they say Be ane And zar (sub.). ci efi" agdd-biama, q¢abdé u¢ica” gawi"xe ga”. Ujdé¢aqti-na™-bi ¢an‘di again carry- started home, they tree around flying around as. Every time that he was when ing him say, 2 tired, they say on his back J ail ADVENTURES OF THE ORPHAN. 599 Ata" i¢a’-na”-bia q¢abé gaqd gé mi. ‘A™zigi¢a-bi yi- na™ ci ag¢é-na"’- tree branch the trod stood suddenly, each time, He rested, they say when often again started home, (scat- on they say. often, tered) biamé Ki ci’ yyaxe ama ahi-biama. “Hau, ati ha,” a-biama yypaxe they say. And again Crow the ‘my. arrived, they say. Ho, Ihave said, they say Crow sub ) come : : / je : P0993 £ : , fy: / aka. “HA4! yigat’! ha, yiga” ! ha, giga’’!” a-biama Waha™ ¢icige waha™ ‘e the Oh! grand- oh! grand- oh! grand- said, they say Orphan ~ making a spe- (sub.). father! father ! father! cial petition A: / / / afi ~ / 1 , aw, ga”. “Hau! Ahi baca™ ¢a° a’wat¢- ada” nan‘ka ké ga” nasa” ¢¢¢a-ga. as Ho! Wing bentpart the grasp me and back the atany lie with legs stretched (part) , ag: rate out. : ob.) Kgi¢e icté nib¢a te ha’. leta-¢ipi’ze jan’-gi ha,” a-biama yjaxe aka. Beware eye youopen lest Eye closed recline ! said, they say Crow the n (sub ). D I = , i Fim *n/ ! Tee 0 t * Tiga (to Gi? ag¢d-biamd, q¢abé ug¢ica® gawi"xe ga". Ujé¢aqti-na’’- bi ¢an‘di Carry- started home, they tree around flying around as. Every time that he was when ing him say, tired, they say un his back q¢abé gaqa ge ata” tree branch the trod on (pL) they say. ] 4 Ax 1 lil = Aa Dey! biama. MaAxe i ean pa jy ma fa they say- Crow the reached when my. one there yan’‘de ké ugdzi da ba-biama. ground the made a saw, they say. (ig.ob,) yellow glare © / lA O ry s ha, tiga”! ha, yiga”!” € ama oh! grand- oh! grand- was saying, father! tather! they say didtiag¢d-biama, hita®. “Ati ha,” i¢a”-na”’-biama. stood suddenly, each time, QMO ALO S 1 = ‘A’ zigi¢a-bi yi-na” ci ag¢é-na’’- He rested, they say when, often again started home often, ictixa™xa® gAxa-bi ega”, cgi¢e secretly eyes slightly made, they having, behold open say eae J Or Cay ‘ / Piqti waha™‘e ja™-biama: “Ha, yiga™’! Anew making «spe- he lay, they say: Oh! grand cial petition father ! Waha"™ ¢icige. Egi¢e Wajibesnéde ama Orphan. At length Magpie the mv. one A-biami Wajibesnéde aka. “Ha, giga™! was coming very suddenly, crying I have said, they say Magpie the Oh! erand- they say, out. come (sub.). father ! hd, siga™! ha, giga’’!” é ama Waha™ ¢icige, waha™‘e ga”. ‘Hau! Ahi oh! grand- ob! grand- was saying, Orphan, making a spe- as. Ho! Wing father! father! they say cial petition baca™ ¢a® a®war¢’- ada” nan‘ka ke ga” nasa” ¢é¢a-ga. Hgi¢e icta bent part the grasp me and back the atany lie with legs stretched Beware eye (part) (ig. ob.) rate out. nib¢a te ha’ Teta-¢ipi’ze jan’-gi ha,” d-biama Wajibesnéde aka. Ki you open lest Eye closed recline Y said, they say. Magpie the And (sub.). Wajibesnéde ama gi‘l" aki-biama. Wajibesnéde aka vé’qtci akija"-biama. Magpie the (mv, carrying reached there Magpie the very dead reached there again sab.) him on again, they say. (sub.) and lay down, they his back say. ’ ocean / : t G / * / . Waha™ ¢icige aké waha™‘a-bi ega”, “Ha, yiga” ! ha, giga”’! ha, tiga” !” Orphan the madeaspecialpe- having, Oh! grand- oh! grand- oh! erand- (sub.) tition, they say father! father! father! S , ~~) , * a . 3 7g ae: . A-biama. Q¢abé té udica™ a¢i-bi YI egi¢e Ictinike aké wa¢aha eqaf said, they say. Tree the around it went,they when behold Ictinike the clothing his (std. ob.) say (sub.) ~ PUP bs / Pete , is Oats y té di a”¢a aggd-bi té amd, wa¢aha Waham¢icige es te A¢aha the there abandon- he had gone back, they say, clothing Orphan | his tho wearing (col. ing (col. it ob.) ob.) 6 12 oo 18 600 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. agdi-bi té amd. Ictinike aka wa¢aha té d¢aha aki-bi ega”, wajiti’ga had gone back, they say. Tetinike the clothing the ° wearing having reached there bird (sub.) (cl. ob.) it again, they say, ¢anka hitta"-baji’-qti-bi ctéwa™ &’qtci hiita® géxe-na™-biama. “ Q¢fiiji the ones not crying out at all, they notwith- he himself crying out pretended often, they say. Silent who say standing éga® g¢i"i-ga. Naxide wanaza‘e,” ¢-na"-biami Ietinike akdé. Kgi¢e ‘do 7 sitye. Inner ear you makea great said often, they say Iectinike the At length uproar by crying out, (snb.). Waha" ¢icige hidé g¢i té wajin’ga aki wai¢aha aké fgidaha™-bi ega’, Orphan bottom had when bird the wore them the having known him, Wabie ow y returned (sub.) (col. (master), they say, to sub.) hita" za‘é’qti g¢i’-biamd, Ictinike ak& wa¢ahd-bi ega”. Ictinike aka erying making a sat, they say, Ictinike the having worn them. they say. Ictinike the out great noise (sub.) (sub.) égi¢a"-na™-biama, ‘ Q¢tiji égan e¢i’i-gt. Naxide wanazi‘e,” 4-biamé. was saying often to (the _ Silent sit ye. Inner ear you make a Sac said, they say. birds), they say, uproar by erying out, Waha™ ¢icige aki ma™jiha ké ugina-bi yi’, égi¢e Ictinike ama Ceti Orphan — the quiver the sought hisown, when, behold Ictinike the it too (sub.) (le. ob.) they say (my. sub.) agi” agi-bi té ama. Ma™jiha eyi-bi ké ¢iq¢e ma™jiha ké 6’di a™¢a he had returned home with it, they Quiver his, they the (ig. rushes quiver the (lg. there leaving say. sav ob.) ob.) it ag{-bi ké ama. Ma™ te da™ba-bi yi, égi¢e hidé gapai diba ¢iq¢e té‘di he had returned home, Arrow the saw, they when behold base cutsharp some rushes in the they say. co say ob.) i’-bi kéama. Miydha wai” ¢a™ cti &'di a™¢a agi-bi ¢a” amd. Gi'¢a- he had the col., they Raccoon skin robe the too there it had boon | left when he had come Very say. (gar- back, they say. ment) 5 / a bajt oa ma” t& ¢izi-bi ega™, hidé ‘gapdi té ¢i¢ii¢uta’’-bi ega™, eé wantta arrow the having taken, ho base cutsharp the having pulled seni! that quadraped say, often, they say, towagi¢ai-ma ¢a™ b¢ligaqti éga™ t’éwaki¢a-bi ega™, ag¢d-biama. Ictinike those about which in the about all 5 he killed them pur- erate he started home, Ietinike he had told past posely, they say they say. . . Car, PES ° oe Ry = oo_y n miyaha wai™ ¢a" i¢é¢i" ag¢d-piamdé, ma™jiha ke’ eti. Wajin’ga aka raccoon robe the having he went homeward, quiver the too. Bird the skin (gar- _ for the they say_ (ig. ob.) ment) owner 4 yan’ge gi té igidaha”-bi ega™, hiita" te’ eti-bi ega™ gia” Atiagagd-biama. near com- the having known him, their criedout the too, they sO flying they began, now and ing own (master), they say, com say then, they say. pleted aet Ictinike aka @’di da” qti fyiji-bi ega”, wajin’ga ¢ankaé q¢fiijina"™ o¢i"’ Tetinike the there beyond was proud, as, bird the (pl. ob.) qe) often to sit (sub.) measure they say wagaji-biama. Kei¢e Waha™¢icfge amd eété agi-biamé, sijébe té ubéha® commanded them, At length Orphan the thatseen Soar back, doorway the was com- they say. (my. (std. ob.) they say, ing in sub.) agi-biama. Egi¢e ga’ akéma, Ietinike aké wA¢aha té A¢ahd-bi eoa”, at the entrance, Atlength some sat, they Tctinike the clothing the having put on the they say. time say, (snb.) (ae clothing, they say. ob.) Ki égi¢a”-biama Waha"¢icige aké, “Na! ¢f gité anaha té ga” Anaha And said to him, they say Orphan the Why! you that youwore as still you wear (sub.), (col.) it ADVENTURES OF THE ORPHAN. GOL hi’,” 4-bi ega”, igia”¢a ¢é¢a-biama. Ga™ wa¢aha té gig¢iza-biama. 7 having said, they hethrewit back to him suddenly, So clothing the reais back his own, say, they say. (col, ob.) they say. Waha" ¢icige najiha ge’ ctéwa™ naq¢a’jéqti ki ama. Aki-bi ega’’ Orphan hair nie (pl.) even exceedingly re- they Having returned tangled turned say. there, they say, there ga” amaf té Néxe gayi wi" gaxe-waki¢a-biama. IRgiq¢a" ¢inké they were so for some Drum one he caused them to make it, they His wife the (st. time. say. ob.) uf¢a-bi ega”, “A™wa™yiha-qti a¢ihé ¢a™ ag¢i ha. edge ui¢a-ga ha having told her, they Me very lonely I who inthe Ihave . Old man tell it to ea ! say, moved past come back Nikaci”ga-ma b¢tigaqti watcigaxe ewcéka"b¢a ha,” 4-biama Ki igdg¢a™ The people feu ob.) all to fence I wish for them : said, they say. And his wife aka i¢adi ¢inké uf¢a-biam’. Ki ig¢Adi ak i"cAge wi" agi¢e-waki¢a-bi ega™ the her the (st. told it to him, And her the old man one having caused them to fetch (sub.) father ob.) they say. father (sub.) him, they say, ned i? hi 5 Wal lade 'ké b t -bi cage ¢i" hi yi, ¢¢ Waha™¢icige fe edida" edé ké b¢ugaqti ui¢a-bi ega™ oldman the ar- when, this Orphan word what he the all having told to Sine (my. rived said they say, ob.) there some- thing feki¢e u¢a ¢cki¢a-biama Ki ie%ige ama Cgi¢a" a¢i-biamd, Wo ke uha. asacrier totell sent him, they say. And old ak the to say it went, they say, lodge the fol- it (mv. to (some- (lg. lowing. sub.) one) line) “Wa¢atcigdxe te, af a¢a+! pfi ¢a® beugagti cin’ gajin’ga A¢atska ké etéwa' You are to cance he indeed! Lodges the children of what size the soever says (ev. lg. ob.) line b¢tigagti wa¢atcigdxe te, ai a¢at!” a-biama. Waha™¢icige aka igdq¢a® all you are to dance he indeed! said, they say. Orphan the his wife says (sub.) ¢inké ea” iya™ ¢inké cti jiwagig¢a-bi ega™, ug¢uciaja a¢a-biama, néxe-gaytt the one and his theone too having gone with ioe his to the middle went, they say, drum who grand- who own, they say, of the tribal (ob.) mother (ob.) circle té a¢i"’-bi ega”. Igdq¢a™ ¢inké ugikid-bi ega™, égi¢a™’-biama (Idigig we the having had it, they His wife the (st. having spoken to her, said to her, they say selt say. ob.) his own, they say, sagiqti gixa-biama.),” Idi¢age giké a®wa" ¢an-gi had, ¢idin’din-gi ha. very tight made it, they say, Belt thae (a grasp me ! pull hard — ! Eei¢e nicta™ te ha’,” 4-biama. Ci iya” ¢inké ci dAmayi¢ica® u¢a™ Agig¢aji- tel 7 y Beware youlet lest . said he, they Again i the(st. again on the other to grasp pour aannea go say. grand- ob.) side her, his own, mother biama&. ‘“‘yga"hd, ¢icta™ji-gi ha Egi¢e nicta™ te hia’,” 4-biama. Ga™ they say. O grand- do not let: go ! Beware you let go lest A said he, they And mother, say. nikaci”ga ama b¢tigaqti edi u¢iiciaga ahi-bi ega™, g¢i"’-biama Waha”™ ¢icige people the all there atthe middle having eae sat, they say Orphan — (pl. sub.) of the tribal there, they + circle say, aki u¢an‘da ¢an‘di. Néxe-gayt té uti” ihé¢a-bi yi, b¢tigaqti nfkaci” ga-ma the middle in the Drum the tohit helaid the when, all the people (pl. ob.) (sub.) (place). (ob.) it stick hori- zontally, they say 12 15 18 602 THE (bGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. gaha ihé wixa-biamd. Gitjawaqtia”-biama nikaci”ga amd néxe-gayu té he made the crowd rise (about a They were much pleased, they people the (pl. drum the foot) and come down again, say sub.) they say. uti’ te’di. I¢a™ba™ uti’-bi yi, ma*cidha jin’ga gaha ihd-biama. (héaka hehit when. A second he hitit, when, up in the air little the crowd arose and came This it time they say (mv.) down again, they say. (sub.) iya™ aka, “TP”, yicpa¢a+! ana” piqti-ma™ hé,” 4-biama. Jtiga ké b¢tga his the Oh! grandchild! T usually (?) dance very : said she, they Body the every grand- (sub.), well (fem.) say- (lg. ob.) mother , eahi i¢a’-biama i ateg’ i¢a™-biamaé. Ki i¢a™ba™ uti”-bi yi 5 ’ > - if ; arose and came down again, when, in that she became suddenly, And asecond time hit, they say when, they say manner they say. matcidhaqti ihé waxa-biama. Gi-bi yi, yan’de ke ki-baji ci uti’’- my. very high up placed he made them, they They were when, ground the notreach- again he hit it, in the air ip a line say. coming back, (ig. ob.) ing there they say again biama. Ci pf pahdci ¢éwa¢d-biama. Gaktkug¢a-biama. Nikaci™ga-ma they say. Again anew upabove he sent them, they say. He beat rapidly, they say. The people (pl. ob.) b¢étigaqti ma*cidhaqti i¢éwa¢a-biama. Ki gakiku¢a-bi ega”, nikaci™ ga-ma all my.very highup he sent them thither. And having beat rapidly, they say, the people (pl. ob.) in the air they say. uxide ctéwa™ wa¢fona-baji-biamdé. Nikaci®’ga-ma ga™téqti yi té'qti- glimpse even they were not visible, they say. The people (pl. ob.) along time when fully dead na® e@¢ihaha waxa-biamé. Nikaciga-ma b¢ugaqti ga” t’éwa¢a-biama, usu- returningand he made them, they The people (pl. ob.) all * “so he killed them, they say, ally lying one by one say. z gat’éwa¢a-biamd. Qéak& wa‘tjinga aka, igdq¢a" aka céna"ba écti he killed them by beating This (sub.) old woman _ the (sub.), his wife the (sub.) only those they (the drum), they say. two too ma” ci gada”i ¢a™ja, fdifage ké u¢a”waki¢ai ga™ ¢icta”ji wagaji: sihf highin were blown through, belt the he made them grasp as not to let go he com- feet the air (up) to (Ig.ob.) it manded them: té ma™ci gada”-biamaé, jiiga aké bas‘i’ ja’’-biama. Ictinike igfga” the high in were blown (up) to, body the (sub.) upside lay, they say. Ictinike his tath the air they say, down er-in-law é¢a"ba iya™ ké’ cti céna™baqti ugdcta-bi ega™, iyiga™ ¢i waha?‘é-qti he too hismoth- the too only those two having been left (not killed his fath- the making a special er-in-law (Ig. by hitting the ground), they er-in-law (my.ob.) petition (with ob.) say, fervor) gf-na" amd: “Ha, nisiha! wijan’de méga", cag¢eé. (litean’gi¢di-gal” é was coming back, Oh! my child! my son-in- likewise, I return to Pity ye me, yourrela- said often, they say: law you. tion! ctéwa™ Waha ¢icige aka, “A*ha™! Gi-g& ha,” 4-bi etéwa”, ci pi uti"’-na™ notwith- Orphan the Yes! Come ! said, nevertheless, again anew beat often standing (sub.), they say bi ¢an'di, ci pf gud’ ig¢é¢é-na”-biama. Waha™‘e {b¢a*-qti-bi 3, they when, again anew beyond sent him thither often, they Making aspe- fully sated (ov sa- when say say. cial petition tiated) they say , . ite Ss 2 * , @ n 2 ' gaté¢a-biama. Ci igdgq¢a" ke’ ci éga™qtia” ama, ci waha™‘e té. Ci he killed him by letting Again his wife the again was just so, they say, again made aspecial pe- Again him fall, they say. (ig. ob.) tition, . , x se : = / Y Waha" ¢icige aka, “Atha”! Gi-gai ha, wa‘ujin’ga,” 4-bi ctéwa™, ci pi Orphan the Yes! Come ! old woman, said, neverthe- again auew (snub.), they say less, 5 tA . 7 . . . , gud’ i¢é¢é-na”-biamd, ci gat’é¢a biamd. Iectinike enadqtci ucté ama. beyond sent her thither often, they again he killed her by letting Tetinike he alone was left they say, her fall, they say say. ADVENTURES OF THE ORPHAN. 603 “Ha, kage-san’ga! Ha, kage-san’ga! cag¢é ha. Wihan’ga méga’, Oh! friend younger Oh! friend younger I go to you c My potential wife likewise, brother ! brother ! bey ever spy : . , rae . P ¢a‘ean’gi¢di-ga,” (4-biama Ictinike aka). Ietinike ga” gat’é¢a-biama. pity ye me, your rela- said, they say Ietinike the (sub.). Ictinike vat ke killed him by letting tion length him fall, they say. NOTES. This myth is a variant of “The Young Rabbit and Ictinike,” on pp. 50-57. It agrees in many particulars with a myth told by another Omaha, Richard Rush, or Mac‘awakude, of the yja"ze gens. 588, 1. et passim, sakib’ ihé, a common but faulty rendering of sakiba ihe (F.). 588, 7. gnaji te, a%¢a%i ¢a®eti, used by old women instead of gnaji te, ehe ¢a*cti. With this use of the plural for the singular, compare the use of the singular for the plural in the letters and speeches of chiefs, in the first and second parts of this volume. 588, 14. sa! sa! archaic interjection of reproof, objection, or disputation. 588, 15. u¢ade ¢i¢inge (fide F.) is always used in connection with a fear of some mysterious person or object, and it seems out of place here. 589, 1. wajinga b¢ugaqti g¢iza-biama, he took the entire bird (in a magical way), as it was his because he killed it. But there still appeared to be a dead bird there, as is seen from the next line but one. 589, 3 and 4. Ga™ wajinga ¢inke a¢i> ag¢a-bi ega", nikagahi aka e¢i® akii-biama, Ictinike aka cti a¢i® akii-biama. This to F. is full of mistakes, being poor Omaha. First, ag¢a-bi implies that all the people dwelt in the chief’s tent (or else that when they killed the red bird they were a great distance from the village), so we should substi- tute a¢a-bi. A similar objection might be urged against akii-biama or aki biama, for which ahi-biama should be read. The whole sentence, according to F., should be: Ga wajin’ga ¢inké nikagahi ¢inké 逢i> ahi-biama, Ictinike cti 6/di a¢i"’ abi-biama. And bird the one chief theone hay- reached there, Ictinike too there hav- reached there, who who ing it they say, ing they say. for him 589, 8. we¢ita"-teg¢e, archaic term, name for an appliance that is obsolete among the Omahas, but still in use among the Dakotas. It consists of two forked posts sup- porting a transverse pole, set up between the fire-place and the seat at the back of the tent. It was used for suspending the shield, saddle, bow, ete., of the owner of the tent. 589, 14. ecé used here and elsewhere by G., when géce would seem proper (Lefore the words commanded to be spoken), 589, 14. pe nikaci"ga, etc., not plain to F. 590, 5. ¢ate te-da"+, archaism for ¢ate te hé, as is ¢ate tai-eda™+ (591, 6.) for ¢ate tai he. 590, 8. tiaga aka, the chief. 591, 13. Ictinike te¢é ¢inke i¢an¢é ¢inke, etc. I¢a¢e ¢iike is superfluous (fide, F.). 591, 17. Ictinike igag¢a" aka, Wihe, umitje he ibiqpa¢é te hé, ete. See a similar speech in the story of Hinqpe-ag¢e, pp. 167, 174. 594, 8. Maja™ ¢e¢a™ ¢e¢a™sk edega", ete. Said by the chief to Ictinike: ‘This world is very large, but they have reported that yon have various kinds of knowledge. 604 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. Use one of these to make my daughter stop weeping (i. e.. get rid of the Orphan).” 594, 16. jug¢e a¢e ta akega”, the final word is contracted from aka and ega”. 597, 4 and 5. Wahat¢icige maxe i¢abisandéqti. kéja, ete. Maxe is prolonged, thus, ma+xe. He-i, pronounced, Hé+-1. 602, 1. gaha ihe refers to the crowd (long line) of people; gateg i¢a® (602, 4.) to one person, the grandmother, who came down on her feet ; g¢ihaha (602, 9.) shows that they came down one by one and lay as they fell. TRANSLATION. Once upon a time there was avillage of Indians. And an old woman and her grand- son, called the Orphan, dwelt in a lodge at a short distance from the village. The two were very poor, dwelling in a low tent made of grass. The grandson used to play games. One day he said, ‘Grandmother, make a small bow for me!” The grand- mother made the bow and some arrows. The boy went to shoot birds. And after that he used to bring back many birds, putting them all around his belt. The boy became an excellent marksman, usually killing whatever game caine in sight of him. About ten o’clock each morning all the people in the village used to make a great noise. At last the Orphan said, ‘Grandmother, why do they make such a noise?” The grandmother said, ‘‘ There is a very red bird that goes there regularly, and when he alights on a very tall cottonwood tree he makes a very red glare over the whole village. So the chief has ordered the people to shoot at the bird, and whoever kills the bird can marry the chief’s daughter.” ‘+ Grandmother,” said the Orphan, “ I will go thither.” “Of all places in the world that is the worst place for you to visit. They like to abuse strangers. They will abuse you. There is no reason why you should go.” The boy paid no attention to her, but took his bow and went out of the lodge. ‘ Beware lest you go,” said his grandmother. ‘I am going away to play games,” said the Orphan. But he went straight to the village. When he drew near the village, he noticed the red light ail around. He also saw a great crowd of people, who were moving to and fro, shooting at the bird. The Orphan reached them. One man said, “Come, Orphan, you may shoot at it.” But the Orphan continued to hesi- tate, as he feared the people. . But the people continued to approach him, saying to the rest, “Stand off! Stand off! Let the Orphan shoot!” So the Orphan shot at the bird. And he barely missed it. Just then Ictinike shot, and sent a reed arrow be- side that of the Orphan. The people said, ‘Oh! the Orphan came very near killing it!” But Ictinike said, “Iam the one who came near killing it.” When the bird flew away the people scattered, returning to their lodges. And the Orphan went home. Said he to his grandmother, “I came very near killing the bird.” “Do not go again! They willabuse you. Did I not say, do not go?” said the old woman. On the morning of another day he went thither. And the people were making a great noise. And it happened as on the previous day; he was told to shoot at the bird, and he barely missed it. On the third day he met with similar bad luck. But on the fourth day he hit the bird, wounding it through and through. “Oho! the Orphan has killed it,” said the people. ‘‘ Nonsense!” said Ietinike, “I killed it! I killed it! You must not grumble! You must not grumble!” And as Iectinike would not let the people do as they wished, he snatched the honor of the occasion from the Orphan. ADVENTURES OF THE ORPHAN. 605 And the people came in crowds to view the spectacle, the body of the famous bird. And when the Orphan approached the spot, he pulled out a feather, so the people thought, but he really took the entive bird, and carried it home. And the chief said, “ Bring my son-in-law hither!” So the people took the bird, as they imagined, that had been killed by Ictinike, and brought it and !etinike to the chief. And Ictinike inarried the elder daughter of the chief, making his abode in the chief’s lodge. In the meantime the Orphan had reached home. *‘Grandmother,” said he, ‘* I have killed the bird.” “Oh! my grandchild! Ob! my grandchild!” said she. “ Grand- mother, make me a ‘ we¢ita®-teg¢e’ between the tire-place and the seat at the back of the lodge,” said the Orphan. Aud after she made it (the Orphan hung the red bird upon it?). And the Orphan and his grandmother had their lodge filled with a very red light. By and by the young man said, “Grandmother, make me a hide hoop.” And his grandmother made the hoop for him, placing it aside to dry. But the Orphan could hardly wait for it todry. At lastit was dry. ‘Ho, grandmother, sit in the middle (between the fire-place and the seat at the back of the lodge ?),” said he. Then the Orphan went out of the lodge and stood on the right side of the entrance. Said he, “Grandmother, you must say, O grandchild, one of the Buffalo people goes to you.” And the old woman obeyed. She rolled the hoop from the lodge to the Orphan. When the hoop rolled out of the lodge, it changed suddenly into a buffalo, and the Orphan wounded it through and through, killing it near the entrance. He and his grandmother cut up the body, and his grandmother cut the entire carcass into slices for drying. At this time the people in the village had nothing to eat. The grand- mother prepared a quantity of dried buffalo meat mixed with fat, and the Orphan told her to take it to the lodge of the chief, and to say, to the chief’s (unmarried?) daughter, ““O, daughter-in-law! your father may eat that.” The old woman threw the bundle into the lodge, turned around suddenly, and went home. When the bundle was thrown into the lodge, the chief said, “ Look! Look! Look!” And when one of the daughters went to look she could not see any one. (The Orphan, by his magie power, had ren- dered his grandmother invisible; therefore on the fourth day he said, ‘* Grandmother, you shall be visible when you return.”) And Ictinike said, “Only one old woman dwells apart from us, and sheis the one.” Andit was so four times. When the forrth time came, the old woman carried a sack of buffalo meat on her back, and on top of the sack she carried the bird. Then said the Orphan, ** Grandmother, now you shall be visible when you return.” So the old woman departed. When she was very near the chief’s tent, that tent began to shine with a red light. As she passed along by the lodges the people said, **Oho! we did think that the Orphan had killed the bird, but you said that Ictinike killed it. Now the Orphan’s grandmother has brought it hither. To whom will she take it?” And the people stood looking. ‘Oho! she has carried it to the chief’s lodge!” When she reached the entrance, she threw down the sack, letting it fall with a sudden thud. “Oh! daughter-in-law, your father and brothers may eat that,” said she. * Look! Look! Look!” said the chief, ‘‘she has done that often!” And Ietinike said, ‘Only one old woman is left there, and she is the one. Who else could it be?” And they went to see. And behold it was the grandmother of the Orphan. “It is the Orphan’s grandmother,” said (one of the daughters). “Ho! bring my son-in-law to me,” said the chief. And they took the pack which the old woman had brought and they hung it up with the bird. They 606 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. placed it beside that which Ictinike had (seemingly) killed, and which had been bung up. And as they sat in the lodge it was filled with a very red glare. When they had returned with the Orphan, he married the younger dauguter of the chief, making his abode in the chief’s lodge. The Orphan’s hair had not been combed for a long time, so it was tangled and matted. So Letinike’s wife said to her sister, “Sister, if he sits on the rug, he will make lice drop on it! Make him sit away from it! Is it possible that you do not loathe the sight of him?” The Orphan and his wife were displeased at this. When the wife wished to comb his hair, the Orphan was unwilling. At length, one day, when the sun was approaching oon (7%. e., about 10 a.m.), he and his wife left the village and went to the shore of a lake. As they sat there the Orphan said, “Lam going beneath this water, but do not return to your father’s lodge! Be sure to remain here, even though I am absent for some time. I will return. Examine my forehead.” Now, in the middle of his forehead was a depression. He had been a poor Orphan, and was brought up accordingly, so he had been hurt in some manner, causing a scar on his forehead. Then he started to wade into the Jake. He waded until only his head was above the surface, then he turned and called to his wife, “Remember what I told you. That is all!” Having said this, he plunged under the surface. His wife sat weeping, and after awhile she walked along the lake shore, weeping because he did not return. At last her eyelids became weary, and she went to sleep at the very plave where they had first reached the lake. When she was sleeping very soundly her husband returned. He took hold of her and roused her. “7 have returned. Arise!” On arising suddenly and looking behold, he was a very handsome man, and his hair was combed very uicely, so the woman hesitated, think- ing him a stranger, and she turned away from him. ‘Oh fie! you like to make sport of people! I married a very poor man, who plunged beneath this water, and I have been sitting weeping while awaiting his return,” said she. ‘* Why! I am he,” said her husband. Still the woman paid no attention to his words. ‘Why! see that place about which I said, ‘Examine it!’?” When the woman turned around and saw it she no longer hesitated, but embraced him suddenly and kissed him. Then the husland went to the shore, drew together a quantity of the green scum that collects on the surface of water, and made of it a robe and skirt for his wife. The Orphan had birds resembling short-eared owls over his moccasins and robe, and ke had some tied to his club. Whenever he laid down the elub the birds used to ery out. Late in the afternoon he and his wife departed for the village. When they arrived the people exclaimed, “ Why! The wife of the Orphan has returned with a very different man. I think that the Orphan has been killed. He went off in the morning. Why! this is a very handsome man.” When the Orphan reached the chief’s lodge all the birds made a great noise. Then said the wife of Ictinike, “Sister, let my sister’s husband sit on part of the rug.” ‘Why, elder sister! your sister’s husband might drop lice on your rug,” said the younger sister as she turned up ove end of the rug and threw it towards the elder sister. Whereupon Ictinike’s wife began to ery, and she cried inces- santly. At last her father said to Ictinike, “This world is very large, but you are known everywhere as one who possesses various kinds of knowledge. Use one of these and make my daughter stop crying.” 3y and by Ietinike said to the Orphan, “ Younger brother, let us go to cut arrow- shafts. Let us make arrows for your wife’s brother.” But the Orphan did not , ee ADVENTURES OF THE ORPHAN. 507 speak. So Jectinike addressed him again, ‘Younger brother, let us make arrows for your wife’s brother. Let us go to cut arrow-shafts.”. Then the Orphan replied, “Come, elder brother, it shall be so.” And Ictinike was highly delighted because the Orphan was about to go with him. When the Orphan spoke of laying aside his magic garments Ictinike objected. ‘Wear them at any rate! Why should you put them away?” So they departed together. When they reached the edge of a very dense forest, some wild turkeys flew off and alighted ina tree. ‘*Ol! younger brother, shoot at them! I will eat a roasted one as I recline,” said Ictinike. ‘ No, elder brother,” said the Orphan, “we are going in great haste.” ‘Oh! younger brother, kill one for me,” said Ictinike. ‘‘ When my elder brother speaks about anything he has so much to say he does not stop talking!” said the Orphan, who then went towards the tree, taking his bow, in order to shoot at the turkeys. Just as be stood pulling the bow, Ictinike said in a whisper, “ Let it lodge on a limb!” And when the Orphan shot he sent the arrow through the bird. ‘Let it lodge on alimb! Let it lodge on a limb,” said Ictinike. And it fell and lodged on a limb. “Oho! younger brother! climb for me, get it and throw it down,” said Ictinike. ‘No, elder brothér, let us go on,” said the Orphan. ‘“* Why! you ought not to leave your arrow as well as the bird,” said Ictinike. ‘Go up for it and throw it down!” “Why! when my elder brother speaks about anything he has so much to say he does not stop talking!” said the Orphan. He decided to go and climb the tree. So he went to the basé of the tree. ‘‘Ho! lay your garments there! If you get caught in the branches the garments will be torn,” said Ictinike, referring to the magic clothing. So the Orphan stripped off his garments, placing them at the foot of the tree. As he climbed, Ictinike said in a whisper, ‘‘ Let this tree shoot up high very suddenly!” As the Orphan heard him whisper, he turned his head and ques- tioned him: ‘‘ Why! elder brother, what did you say?” ‘I said nothing of any con- sequence, younger brother. I was merely saying, ‘When he brings that bird back I will eat it’” So the Orphan continued climbing. When Ictinike whispered again, the Orphan repeated his question. ‘I said nothing of importance,” said Ictinike. “T was merely saying, ‘ He has nearly reached it for me.” Then the Orphan climbed higher. Ictinike whispered again, and made a similar reply to the query of the Orphan, who began to apprehend mischief. When Ictinike whispered the fourth time the Orphan said, ‘‘ Fie! elder brother, but you have been saying something!” “TI said nothing of importance,” said Ictinike. “I said, ‘Let this tree extend to the upper world.’” And as Ictinike went around the tree he hit it at short intervals, saying, ‘I say, ‘ Let this tree shoot up high very suddenly.” And the tree extended to the upper world. And the Orphan stood in a very narrow plage between the limb of the tree and the upper world. ‘Alas!” said he. And he wept incessantly. His hair, too, became exceedingly tangled. At length a young Eagle went to the weeping man. “Oman, what are you saying,” said he. ‘‘O grandfather! O grandfather! O grandfather!” said the Orphan to the young Eagle. ‘Come! dosay it. Tell your story,” said the’ Hagle. ‘ Yes, grandfather, I am one of those who left at the timber at the foot of the bluff some parts of a young male elk for you all to fly over and eat.” “That is right. One of your grandfathers shall come (to rescue you),” said the Eagle. So the Eagle departed. And the Orphan stood weeping, being very sorrowful. Presently the Buzzard went to him. And when the Orphan told him of another 608 THE (@EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. animal, which he had left for the buzzards, he was told, ‘‘ That is right. One of your grandfathers shall come (to rescue you).” Then the Buzzard departed, leaving the Orphan weeping. By and by the Crow approached. And when the Orphan told him of an animal which he had left for the crows to eat he was told that another grandfather (a crow) should comé to aid him. After the departure of the Crow the Magpie came. He made a like promise and departed. Thencame the promised Eagle. ‘“O grandfather! O grandfather! O grandfather!” said the Orphan, praying to him. ‘Ho! Catch hold of my wings at the shoulders, and lie on my back with your legs stretched out. Be- ware lest you open your eyes! Lie with closed eyes,” said the Kagle. So he departed, flying with the Orphan on his back, flying round and round the tree till he became very tired. Then he alighted from time to time to rest himself, and when rested he resumed his flight. Finally he left the Orphan standing on a lower limb. Then came the Buzzard, who took the Orphan on his back, after giving him directions similar to those given by the Eagle. The Buzzard flew round and round the tree, going lower and lower, alighting from time to time to rest himself, and resuming his downward flight when rested. Finally he left the Orphan standing on a lower linb. Then eame the Crow, who took the Orphan still lower. But while he was on the Crow’s back he opened his eyes slightly and he saw the ground emitting a yellow light. So he lay down again on the Crow’s back and begged him to continue to help him. But about this time came the Magpie very suddenly. And the Magpie carried the Orphan lower and lower till they reached the ground. When they reached there the Magpie lay insensible, as he was exhausted. When the Orphan went to get his garments he found that Ictinike had departed with them, leaving his own garmeuts at the foot of the tree. Now, when Ictinike returned home wearing the magic garments the birds on them did not ery out at all, so Ietinike pretended that they wanted to cry out, saying, ‘ Keep quiet! You make a great noise in people’s ears!” But when the Orphan returned on the Magpie’s back to the foot of the tree the birds on the garments knew about it, and they cried out with a great noise for some time, as Ictinike had on the garments. Then Ictinike exclaimed, ‘¢‘ Do keep quiet! You make a great noise in people’s ears!” When the Orphan hunted for his quiver he found that Ictinike had taken it, leav- ing instead his yuiver with the reed arrows. When he looked at the arrows he found among them some wooden arrows having the points cut sharp with a knife. He also found that Ietinike had left there his robe of raccoon skins. The Orphan was highly displeased, but he seized the arrows, straightened the wooden ones, and with them he killed all the animals about which he had told his deliverers. Then he started back to the village wearing the robe of raccoon skins and taking the quiver. When he drew near the village the birds knew it, and they cried out and flew a little now and then. This made Ictinike feel very proud, and he commanded the birds to keep silent. At length the Orphan returned and entered the lodge. He sat there a while, Iectinike still wearing the magic garments. At last the Orphan said to him, ‘“ Fie! you used to wear that thing, so wear it again !” throwing to him the raccoon skin robe. And the Orphan took back his own garments. But his hair was still in great disor- der. After his return nothing special happened for some time. The Orphan caused a drum to be made. Said he to his wife, ‘I have returned after being in a very lonely . situation! ‘ell the venerable man (your father) that I wish all the people to dance.” LEGEND OF UKIABL. 609 And his wife told her father. And her father commanded an old man to go around among the people and proclaim all the words that the Orphan had told. So the old man went through the village as a crier or herald, saying, “ He says indeed that you shall dance! He says indeed that all of you in the village, even the small children, are to dance!” The Orphan, his wife, and his grandmother, having the drum, went inside the circle (of lodges). The Orphan fastened his belt very tightly around his waist and then said to his wife, “Grasp my belt very hard. Beware lest you let it go!” Then he told his grandmother to grasp the other side (of the belt), saying, “Do not let go!” When all the people assembled inside the circle of lodges the Orphan sat in the very middle (surrounded by the people). And when he beat the drum he made the people rise about a foot and then come to the ground again. The people were enjoy- ing themselves when he beat the dram. When he beat it a second time he made them jump a little higher. Then said his grandmother, “Oh! grandchild! f usually dance very well.” He made her jump and come down suddenly as he beat the drum, just as he had done to each of the others. When he gave the third beat he made the people jump still higher, and as they came down he beat the drum before they could touch the ground, making them leap up again. He beat the drum rapidly, sending all the people so high into the air that one could not get even a glimpse of them. And as they came down after a long time, he caused them to die one after another as they lay on the ground. He thus killed all the people by concussion, which resulted from his beating the drum. Though the Orphan’s wife and grandmother were taken up into the air at each beat of the drum, it happened that only their feet went up into the air and their heads and bodies were turned downward, because the women held him by the waist, as he had ordered them. Of all the people only three survived, Ictinike, the chief, and the chief's wife, As the chief was coming down he implored the Orphan to spare him. But the latter was inexorable, sending him up repeatedly until he grew tired of hear- ing the chief’s entreaties. Then he let him fall to the earth and die. In like manner he caused the death of the chief’s wife. Only Ictinike remained. ‘“O younger brother! I go to you and my wife’s sister! Pity ye me !” said Ictinike. But the Or- phan beat the drum again and when Ietinike fell to the ground the concussion killed him. £ a = ~ LEGEND OF UKIABI. \¢- \ a» ToLp BY YELLOW BUFFALO. ms) vy yy Pave pes PR Re ws Be per Ga” nikacif ga aka qubaf té, wa¢ipizna” dtai te, Ukfabiaké. Gan’yi And person the was mysteri- doing things ex- the Ukiabi~ the And then (sub.) ous, skillfully ceeded (past (sub.). act), ijin’ge ak dubai té, wi" aka na" te, ¢ibei® jingai te. Hau. Gan’yi na™ his son the were four, one the was grown, three “were small. 4] Andthen grown (sub.) (sub.) ropes Pay senile) pe Ne finee Hi NOM ne RO oi) Lie beans Che aka qubé égiga” qtia’i té. Hau. Gan‘yi ca” qti i¢Adi ¢inké t'éoi¢e ga™ dai té the mysteri- was just like his (father). 1 Andthen strangeto his the one tokillhim, wished. (sub.) ous say, father who his own, VOL. VI——59 12 15 18 610 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETLERS. Hau. Ga” ma ciaja i’ be-ziga-ma wi" ma"xe ibisandé’qti gawi"xe And up iu the air yellow-tailed hawks one upper pressing close flying ina world against circle ma"¢i” gdxai té ha, ijin'ge aka. Wajin’ga juyi¢é ama. Gan’yi i¢adi aka- walking made 5 his ae the Bird he changed himself And then his the (sub.). into, they say. father (sub.) a"b fjaitéha. I¢adi aka ja”’-bi x, égige u¢ixide ¢é¢ai té. Hgi¢e igi¢ai té, day laydown . His the laydown, when, he looked all around At he found him, by father (sub.) they, say agit suddenly. length his own, fgidaha” qti ¢é¢ai té, Péwadée ga” ¢ai té fyidaha™ jai té igadi aka. Wa‘ijinga iS recognized his own (son) aude to kill wished the knowing it reclined his the Old woman denly, about himself father (sub.). ¢inké ugikiai té ‘“ Wa‘ujin’ga, yi -gi¢acije aka pifiiji tedbe gaxai,” the st. he spoke to her, Old woman, Lodge shivers for the bad very did, one his own. another by = (sub.) biting égi¢a”-biama. Hau: “A¢tha hé,” a-biama. ‘Edada™ pfaji gaxe téi"te,” said to her, they say. Again Be said, they say. What bad he do should ? (fem. ) i A-biama iha™ aké. “ An‘kaji, wA‘ujin’ga, tea’ ¢é ga™¢ai,” 4-biama. said, they say his the Not so, old woman, to kill me wishes, said, they say. mother (sub.). Hau. Ga” yihuya" the a¢af té, g¢eda” gaxe, i¢ddi aka. Id¢naxi¢ai T And smoke-hole pass- he went, hawk made, his the He dashed on ing that father (sub.). him way iin’ge ¢i. Maja” aba yuwi"xe ¢igé agi” té. pi ¢an‘di ¢igé agii té. pi hisson the Land day turningin pursu- had him. Tent tothe pursn- was re- Tent (mv. ob.). his course ing place ing turning. ¢an'di égiha kig¢é ama. Hi"qpé gaxe ja” ké ama. Ci igidaha™ qti i¢adi to the down had gone thither, Plume eae was lying, they say. Again he fully recognized his from above they say. his own father ama. A¢i” a¢a-bi ega™, a¢i” a¢a-bi ega™”, ni ma™te i¢é ama. Ci the (my. Having taken him along, they having taken him anaes they water beneath was going Again sub.). say, say, thither, they say. huht gaxe ama. Ci thaha”’-biama i¢adi aka. fish made they Again recognized him, they his the say. say father (sub.) Hau. Ci agi” a¢a-bi ega™”, agi’ a¢d-bi ega”, agi” a¢a-bi ega™, 7 Again having taken him along, they having taken him antes they” having taken him along, they say, say, say, wakan'dagi wi” ni tya" ké amd. Wakan’dagi ké udé ¢¢-ga" ¢iéq¢u‘a water monster one water was lying in it, they Water monster the enter- went, and inside the say. (g.ob.) ing animal ké’ mate jaY ama. Ci i¢adi aké ci éga” ma"taja aid¢ai té. Ci dkusan’de the within was lying, Again his the again so within had gone. Again out at the other (ig. they say. father (sub.) end ob.) 4 é¢a"be ahi-biama. emerging had reached there, they say- a Ci a¢i” ag¢a-bi ega”, ci yi té égiha kig¢é ama. Hé gaxe Again having taken himalongonthe again tent the down had gone, they Louse made way back, they say, Gra from above say. ob.) ») Gee . , : ° A ama yi, ci i¢ddi ama fgidaha’-biamaé. Ca™ edada" wanita cli gaxe they when, again his the (my. recognized him, theirown, In fact what quadruped prairie made say father sub.) they say. chicken ctéwa™, i¢adi aka éga"gixe amd. Hau. Ma"tet gaxe yi, ct ifddi aké éga® even, his the so made they 7 Grizzly made when, again his the so father (sub.) say. bear father (sub.) LEGEND OF UKIABL 611 gixe ama. Ing¢an’ga gaxe yi, ci igadi aka éga” gixe amd. Mixa sa™ made they Wild cat made when, again his the so made they Swan say. father (sub.) say. yan’ga ska/-qti-ma wi” éga" gixe yi, ci ifddi akd éga™ gixe amd. Ci those very white one so made when, again his the so made they Again ones father (sub.) say. g¢eda™ gixe yi'cté, égi¢e iwacka™ té zanf céna¢é té, ujé¢a te Ukfabi ijin’ge. hawk inde when, at strength (or the all he had ex- he became Ukiabi his son. length power) pended, weary Hau. Maxe ¢éké baqipi i¢é ga”¢a té, ¢eta” afja" te (ma”xe ké q Upper this to force his way wished when, this far hecame when upper the world (lg. ob.) through by and re- world (ig. pushing clined ob.) baqfpi aija" te, nin’de gata” ¢aji ama), sindéhi ¢a® Ata’i té i¢ddi aka. he pierced came when, hams that far did they 08 sacrum the trod on it his the it and re- not go say, part father (sub.). clined Ga" é té¢ai té& Ha™ i¢uag¢e agi” éga® a® is ké ékita*haqti té¢ai té. And that killed him. Night throughout having had} him day the just half in sight killed him. Ha™ega'tcé’qtci xagai té fi té’di. “Ukfabi ijin’ge ca”qti ga" ?é ama,’ Early in the morning they cried tents at the. Ukiabi his son strange to = is dead, Ree say, af té. Gan’yi da™be &'di ahi-biama. Kegi¢e te ké ama. Egi¢e ma” a¢aqti the Andthen toseehim there arrived, they Behold dead lay they Beh very Bacon his said. say. say. back ja" ké ama, Ukfabi ijin’ge ke, t’e ké amd. Wascjide nika i¢adi aka was lying, they say, Ukiabi his son ator dead lay they Indian red paint his the (lg. ob.), say. father (sub.) ¢izt-bi ega™, jliga jijideki¢’-biama, xaga-baji’qti g¢i’ akama. qexe wi" having taken, aie body he reddened fcr him in sa erying at all was st., they say. Gourd one say, spots, they say, gasi¢u ga” waa” e¢i” akima. E vite waa” té ¢acta’-bi ega”, xaga-biama. ee by 80 singing was st, they say. At song the having stopped eae he cried, they say. shaking length they say, pas 3 , 2 f n/ u 4qy > 4 Nikaci”ga xagé ti¢é¢e ami yi, b¢tiga xagd-biama ta™wa" ¢an'di, xagé People were eaiine up the crying when, all cried, they sav village at the, erying in succession, they say ufka"-biama. Nikaci”ga amd Pan‘ka amd Ukfabi ivc‘dge ijim’ge tégi¢ai they Belted mas they People the (pl. Ponka the(pl = Ukiabi old man his son killed his y sub.) sub.) own té nitn’de pfiiji e-na” ata éska". the heart bad onlythat ex- they as- (act) treme sumed it. NOTES. Another version of this legend was published in the proceedings A. A. A. S., Ann Arbor meeting, 1885, p. 399. Ukiabi was the chief of the Hisada, a Ponka gens. The lament of Ukiabi, as given by genuga zi or Yellow Buffalo, was as follows: “Ta-ku-¢a ha ma-b¢iv’ ge 4-¢i?-hé ¢a ha+a+ Nin/-de i-sa.a®-¢il/-ge 4.¢i°-hé ¢a ha+a+ Taé-ku-¢& ha ma™-b¢i’ ¢é a-¢i"-hé-ga® ¢& hat+a+ Nin/-de i-sa-a"-¢in/-ge hi?’-si-¢a ha+a+ !” It may be translated freely thus: “Tam walking to and fro! ] find nothing which can heal my sorrow.” By) 612 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. Ukiabi was buried in the side of a high bluff back of Fort Randall. This bluff is known to the Ponkas as ‘‘ Ukiabi qai ¢a", Where Ukiabi was buried.” Yellow Buffalo said that his maternal uncle saw Ukiabi (!!). The face of Ukiabi was exceedingly hideous. Lumps were on his forehead, his eyes were large, and his nose, which was small and turned up at the tip, had an indentation across the ridge, which made it appear broken. It seems probable that a historical Ukiabi is here con- iounded with the original one, judging from the statement in the next legend about the origin of the game of plumstone shooting. TRANSLATION. Ukiabi was a mysterious person, exceeding all others in performing wonderlul deeds. He had four sons, one of whom was grown, and the rest were small. The grown son closely resembled his father in being mysterious. He looked on his father as a rival and wished to kill him. One day the son changed himself into a yellow- tailed hawk, and flew round and round far above the clouds, very near the upper world. That day lis father was reclining in the lodge. By and by the father looked all around and discovered his son in the distance. He recognized him at once, and knew that his son wished to killhim. So he said to his wife, “‘ Old woman, ji-gi¢acije does very wrong.” ‘Do say something else,” said she. ‘He has no bad intention, Iam sure.” ‘You mistake, old woman, he wishes to kill me.” Then the father changed himself into a hawk, and darted through the smoke-hole of the lodge. He dashed toward his son. All day long he traversed the earth in close pursuit of his son, turning to the right or left whenever the latter did so. He chased him back to the lodge and down through the smoke-hole. The son took the shape of a plume and was lying there when the father entered. The father recognized him immediately. Then the chase was resumed; he chased him and chased him until the son went beneath the water and became a fish. Again the father detected him, He chased him, and chased him, and chased him, till the son reached a water monster that was lying in the stream. The son rushed into the mouth of the water monster and lay concealéd within his body. The father too entered the monster, driv- ing the son out at the other end. : Again Ukiabi chased his son till he dashed down through the smoke-hole. He assumed the form of a louse, but his father recognized him. No matter what form he took his father assumed the same form. Among the forms taken were those of a prairie chicken, a grizzly bear, a wild cat, and a very white swan. Finally the son became a hawk. Then he had expended all his mysterious power, and he became weary. He tried to force his way up through the foundation of the upper world. When his body from the hips upward was through the hole in the upper world, and only that part from the hips downward remained on this side, the father trod on the os sacrum of the son, thus killing him. The pursuit had lasted throughout the might, and until half of the sun was visible above the horizon; just at that moment did he kill him. Early in the morning the people eried in the lodges. “Strange to say, Ukiabi’s son is dead!” said they. And then every one went to see him. There he lay dead! He lay flat on his back. The father took some Indian red paint and reddened the body in spots. He did not ery for some time, but sat there “<7 UKIABI, THE SUITOR—A PONKA LEGEND. 613 singing and shaking a gourd rattle. At last he concluded his song, and then he cried. First one household and then another took up the wail, until all the villagers condoled with Ukiabi. The Ponkas have thought that there never was such an exhibition of grief as that shown when the venerable Ukiabi killed his son. UKIABI, THE SUITOR—A PONKA LEGEND. TOLD BY YELLOW BUFFALO. Ukfabi iTe‘Age aka nikaci”ga na™“ba wagaq¢a™ wa¢i" té ha’, nu. Ukiabi old man the person two servant he had them man. (sub.) . . O, . *n/ . , , . , a Lye ae Mi” i¢é yi, juwagte g¢i'-biama. Ga-biama, “ Kagcéha, wa‘t gatédi Sun went when, he with them sat, they say. He said as follows, O friend, woman in that (down) they say, tent (2) . SG Sea oy; / , = , . , v Fa, (wa¢ixajt) ¢inké ag¢a™ ka”b¢a,” wagaq¢a™ ¢anka tiwagi¢ai té& Ki, 3 has not taken a the one T take her I wish, servant the ones he toldit to when. And, husband who for a wife who them ~ e , 2 fe 2 fe , *. “H/di wit ¢akié né tai, akiwaqti, kag¢ha,” 4-biam&é Ukfabi aka. There you speak to her you will, both, O friend, said, they say Ukiabi the for me go (sub.). bie . , , . ices easier Tedgq¢a", wa‘tjinga aka, ga-biama, “I+, ag¢tihaqtia’,” 4-biama. “Minjinea His wife, old woman the said as follows, How do speak about said, they say. Girl (sub.), they say, absurd! something else! (fem.) udaqti ta” akadi aqta™ ¢iti taba,” 4-biama. 6 very good have among how possi- they should ? said, they say. those who ble give one (pl.) to you 7 “lq: ‘n/t iq ~ 1 Se . Hau. “Ké, @'di mar¢i“i-ga,” af té. Ga é'di add-biamé. jiaa 7 Come, there walk ye, he the And there went, they say. To the said (past tent act). . , , an fee PAG , . ai-biamé akiwa. Nui aka (mi“jinga i¢ddi aké) gd-biama: “ Hat,” were coming both. Man the girl her father the said as follows, Ho! in this direc- (sub.) (sub.) they say: tion (sie), they say A-biamad. Nu ¢inké- ga", wa‘t ¢inkd- ga", wa¢aha™ i te akiwa. “Cin’eajin’oa ite) said, they say. Man uel both, woman usa and, they prayed to them both. Child ob.) ob.) fae , : is / , , *n/ . Y . ¢é¢inke udaqti ¢atia"i. A™ba¢é nikaci”ga wi" g¢a” ga’ dai éga™, this st. one very good you have a This day person one to marry wishes “as, child. her ¢igdg¢a” é¢a"ba angt¢ikié angati,” a-biama. Nu ¢inké faji amé. Wat your wife her too we speak to you we have said, they say. Man ‘thest. did not they Woman come, one speak _ say. ja . said she, they though yet man _ the not stopping speak- as, woman the st. was taking (fem.), say (=hus- (sub.) ing, they say one it fur them band) ami hit wasésa™ ¢a". Gan'yi nu na"cki ¢a" ctewa™ (sic), fs — e , ® , a fsanyi¢a-biama ha he whitened himself with it, they say , ey ted i aka ¢iza-bi ega™, the took it, as (=hav- (sub.) they say ing), (licta”-bi yi ie‘Age-ma the even. He finished, when the old men they 0 white clay the Andthen man say piece. (=hus- band) / wasésa"™ ¢a", ca™ b¢tiga, indé, white clay cd in fact all (iss face, head piece, body), a¢af té sakiba the a¢a-bi ega™, they the passing along- went, they as (=hav- went side of say ing), ~ : 1 , Sadég¢e té dna-bi ega” gaha j Scaffold the heclimbed, as(=hav- onit (std. they say ing) ob.) ida’ ¢é. Ki égi¢e icdge ama he placed And atlength old men the (pl. the part. (sub.) Cénujin’ga ak’ wand‘a™ ja”-biama. ) Acts they nay head the part they say éta¢i® @'di ahi-biama ha, wat’é ké’di. he first there arrived, they ; corpse at the say (recl. ob.). “-biamd, Ga ¢a” yimar¢tihe té é¢a"be “breast of the the emerging part tent” (where from the skins aro joined, above the entrance) didmama ui¢abe té f¢api¢i’ qtei uktkie. were coming, up-hill the very slowly talking they say together. Ki égi¢e yi té’di ahi-bi yi, Me‘dge SAREE the tolistento he lay, they say. And at lodge atthe arrived, when, old ame (sub.) them length (std.ob.) they say Tw af , ama g¢i”-biama wan’gi¢e. Ki pahan’ga aka g4-biama: ‘“Kagéha, ¢ikige the they sat, they say all And first one the Sain as follows, oO friend, your (pl. sub.) (sub.) they say: friend méga", nini ujii-gi ha. (iéna™ haci ¢ikage nini i" juan’gig¢e tabice,” likewise, tobacco fill = () ! This time after your friend tobacco to we with him, must (pl.), (This last time] use our own ® 7 *n/ / Crp ve CET eee ies ~ a t y, . d-biamé. Ki wi”, “A™ha®, ¢ikage win’kéqtia” ha. Kga" ida® ha,” 4-bi said, theysay. And _ one, Yes, your friend does indeed speak c So good s said, truly they ega™, nini uji-biamé. Uji ¢icta’’-bi as tobacco filled, they Filled finished, (=hav- say. they say ing), ~~ , , ké gyima"¢uihe the ‘breast of the (lg. tent’ (where ob.) the skins are joined, above the entrance) teqa¢ica® ¢isa” ‘fa. towards the he turned. say ega™, ¢and-biama. Zi ama yi’ niniba as Peta drew a whiff, they It was yel- they pipe ing), say. low say “Tau! kagcha, Ma ci u¢ixida-bi ega™, Ho, friend Upinthe hegazed,they as (=hav- air say ing), oo 12 15 620 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. nini gaké’. Ga™ ¢éna® haci nini i” jua™¢igig¢ai. Ki aki¢aha a™¢i” taf to- That (lg. And this time after tobacco to we are with you, And apart we be shall bacco ob.). (This last time] use our own. ha, nini gaké’,” A-bi ega”, eyi¢ica” u¢ixida-biama yi da ¢a™ ga” ¢a® tobacco that said, as (—hay- in that direc- he gazed, they say when head the inthe the (lg.ob.) they say ing), tion part manner part described P He , i¢a-biama. Ki, “Wa! kagéha, ¢ikage méga", ¢éya-¢a" da™bai-ga ha,” found it, they paar On! oO friend, your friend eae this place look ye say. behind you . , 7 ae, , tf s ~/ Ud 4 14 a Oo A-biama. Ki na®b’ aké da™ba-bi yi’, ‘“Wuht! kagéha, ée ak& ha,” 4-bi said, they say. And two the looked, they when, Really ! O friend, itisheabout . said, (sub.) say whom we they have heard say ega™, a”he ag¢d-biama wan'gi¢e. Ki eénujim’ga aka yiha u‘a™si-bi ega™ as fleeing went back, they all. And young man the down- leaped, they as (=hav- say (sub.) ward say (=hav- ing), ing), CF riya . , Friss , , ta . f= a Lad o weénaxi¢di-biama. Ki na*ba-ma waq¢t qid¢a-bi ¢a“ja, eéwa¢a-baji-bi attacked them, they say. And the two being fell to the though, paid no attention to scared ground, them, they say they say ega™, i¢adi ¢i" Akiha® g@¢iqa-biama. Ii i"eAige ama uq¢ai-bi yi, waq¢t as his the beyond he pursned him, his And old man the was over- when, being (=hav- father (mv. own, they say. (inv. taken, scared ing), ob.) sub.) they say gid¢a-biamd. Ki ijin’ge aka ‘igig¢ajadedti e¢i"-bi ega”, “Na®xide ¢i¢in’ ge he fell to the ground, And his son the sine astride his sat, they as Hearing you haye they say. (sub.) own say (=hav- none ing), f¢anahi"i aha™. Nini Mwi™ji-ga ha,” 4-biaméa. Ki ie‘dge aka, “Ha! you truly ! Tobacco fill for aise ! said, they say. And oldman une Ho! (sub.) . < op visas re Coes quepa! ha! quepa!” 4-bi ega™, ¢iztie ja” ninf ufji ja”-biama. Ki eénujin’ga Ogrand- Ho! Ogrand- — said, as stretched _ly- to- filling he lay, they And young man child! child! they (=hay- out ing bacco for say. say ing), him ¢inké ninf ké i” ¢icta” ama yi, ga-biama i"c‘ige aka: “Ha! quepa! ha! the (st. tobacco the ae was finishing, when, efi as fol- old man the Ho! Ogrand- Ho! one) (lg. they say lows, they (sub.): child! ob.) say qucpi! quepad, ¢a‘ean’gi¢-Ada"™ a” ¢ictan’-ga. (héna™ haci nini i" jua™ ¢igig¢e O grand- O grand- pity me and let me go. This time after to- to we be with chile! child! [This last time] bacco use you, our own ta-bi, a®¢a™ ¢ai éga" cangdhii ha. quepa, ¢d‘ean’gi¢d-ga,” 4-biama. ‘“Kga™ about, we thought oa we aoe there . O grand- pity me, your own said, they say. So that, where you were child, nayji™ ada” a™¢isttiba-ga ha,” 4-biamaé cénujin’ga aké. Gan'yi Me‘ige stand up and extend your hand ! said, they say young mane the And then old man toward me in entreaty (sub.). aké na™ji™-bi ega”, ¢isttiba-biama, “Ha! gucpa! ha! quepa!” é ca” ca™ the stood up, they as extended his hands Ho! O grand- Ho! O grand- say- con- (sub.) say (=hav- toward him, they child! child ! ing stantly ing), say. naji"-biama. Ccnujin’ga aka iqa téga’-qti-bi etéwa™, an’kabaji-na™-biama. he stood, they say. Young nee the to just about to, eyen though, was not so regularly, they say. (sub.) laugh they say “Ke! mang¢in’-ga ha. Egi¢e f¢a"ba” aja” minké’di a™waonica™ca™ tai Come! begone Beware a@ second Tlie by mewholie you go around me often lest time A DAKOTA STORY. 621 ha. Hi-bajfi-ega ha,” 4-bi ega”, o@¢céki¢d-biamé ha cénujin’ga aka. Gan’ yi Jil ? feed is) 7 yf Do not ye arrive ! said as arate him go homeward, . young man the. And then there they (=hav- they say (sub.). say ing), . , ne / . . cénujin’ga ama qi¢a a¢a-biama. Ki égi¢e i"eige na™ba aka ceta™-na™ qia¢ai young man the back to went, they say. And at old man two the still they rell (mv. the start- length (sub.) down sub.) ing place (=seatfold) ¢an’di akf¢a ja” akima. Ki yan’ge ¢é ama yi aki¢a bayt Aid¢a-biama, at the both were lying, they And near at was young, when both with they had gone some- place say. hand (in they say robes over where, they time) their heads say, : / / i ~ Zaqae t waq¢i-bi ega™, ca” ca™¢ankéwa¢e ag¢a-biamda. Ag¢a-bi yi" ci étar¢i" they were as, yet he let them alone he went homeward, He went when again he first cowards, they they say. homeward, say they say ° ApS | , sey , aa fas . re : , Ons Say) aki-biama yf té’di cénujin’ga ama Gan’yi yig¢ija-bi ega” ¢izte ja™”- reached home, lodge atthe young man the (my. And then washed himself, as stretched lay, they say (std. ob.) sub.). they say (=hav- out ing) biamaé. Ki igq¢a™ ¢inké ugikid-bi ega”, “Kgi¢e e¢ii yi’ f¢aqa te ha’. they say. And his wife the st. spoke to her, as Beware they when you lest one his own, they =hav- have laugh say ing), returned A oe ; 0 , Gea 2 RD 9 Lye fee Tqaji ga” ¢a wackan’-ga ha. A” ci" waq¢i gaski t’éawa¢a¢i” ha,” 4-biama. Not to desire make an effort ! Nearly being panting I killed them (ac- 5 said, they laugh scared cidentally) say. {1 made them die from exhaustion. } Ki e‘ge-ma g¢i-bi yi’ ja” gaxe ja™-biamd aki¢a. Ki ie‘ige aka And the a men returned when to feigning Jee lay, they both (i. e., And old men the home, they sleep say the man (coll. say and wife). sub.). ‘ns 1s , teh c a 2 wan'gi¢e ja"-baji’-qti ninf i" jukig¢e g¢i”-biama, fabaji’-qti cti. Cat’ qti all Jee sleeping at all to- us- with one they sat, they say, notspeaking too. Still, in- bacco ing another at all deed jav-baji, aba ama, wan’gi¢e. Ki ha”ega™tce yi cénujin’ga aka not sleeping, it was day, they all, And morning when young man the say, (sub.) diha™-bi yi’ Pe‘Age aké wan’ gi¢e gi’¢a-baji’-qti e¢i”akama. Iki ecnujin’ga arose from when old men the all very sorrowful were sitting, they And young man sleep, they (coll. say. say sub.) aka gi-biama: “(Qikage méga" wai” mA¢aqa" ¢ag¢fi g& wi” a™d-e ha. Wi the said as follows, ams eine robe youcutoff youhave the one givetome ! (sub.) they say: friends come back ts ob- jects) eti wai” a®¢in’gé-qti-ma™ ha,” a-biama. Ki i¢adi aka, Tena’! edi angahii too robe I age none at all C said he, they And his the Why! there we arrived say. father (sub.) there ga” ja a™¢ia angag¢il ha, weana"xi¢al éga®., A™¢i"-na" téawa¢a-ba¢ini ha,” though we failed we have we were attacked S.. Nearly we were killed (acci- come back dentally ?) f-biamé. “Tena’! éga® taté ub¢iage ga”, (Qé-bajfi-et ha’, ehé yi ca” said he, Why! so shall Iwas unw vill aes Go ye =e I_ when yet they say. ing saic a™¢and‘a"-baji onat ha. Ita" éde ¢axdgai té ha,” 4-biamé cdénujin’ga you did not hear me you : Now but you weep. the ¢ said, they say young man went past act (?) =| 15 622 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. aka, Ci ha” yi cénujin’ga aka, “Ci a¢tha fgaska” ¢é ma™¢i"’-ga ha. Wi I the Again night when young man the Again in addi- to try it walk ye (sub.). (sub.), tion to cti hébe i™¢i® gii-gi ha, ¢ikige méga", wai” a®¢in’gé-qti-ma™ A¢a,” too piece havingit beyecom- ! your friend eae robe if have none at all in- for me ing back deed, ez h - é Kk =I, ks re ka 2 ia ot -bi a-Dilalma. Ne C age aka wan ‘gi¢e wiaman Ka- etéwa"’ rayi- lama, u¢t aga- -bi said, they say. Aud old men the all became altogether out of patience with him, they were un- (coll. they say, willing, they sub.) - bay ega™. Sasti as. Frangois (Frank). NOTES. 619, 10. yima™¢uhe té e¢a"be i¢at¢é, he pulled out some of the skewers, and thrust his head out between the skins. 620, 1. nini gake’, tobacco is named, but gaké shows that the pipe (niniba) is meant. While this was said the pipe was held out to the corpse. 620, 6. waq¢i gia¢a-bi, the two old men fainted. TRANSLATION, Long ago a Dakota died and his parents made a lodge for him on the bluff. In the lodge they erected a scaffold on which they laid the body. Now, there was in that vil- lage a young married man, whose father dwelt with him, And two old men visited the father, and smoked with him, talking about various things. At length the father of the young mau said, ‘‘ My friends, let us go to the corpse and cut off summer robes for ourselves from the tent skins.” But the young man opposed this, saying, ‘‘ No! Do not do so! The death of the young man was a very pitiable occurrence, and, as they had nothing else to give up for him, they erected the tent there and placed him init that he might decay init. Let him rest undisturbed!” In spite of his son’s words the father remarked, “As he is already dead, what possible benefit can he get from the tent? We have no robes, so we wish to cut off parts of the tent skins for ourselves.” Then the young man said, *‘ Really! You have determined to have your own way! Well then! Go as you have said and we shall see what will happen!” He spoke thus by way of reproof. Aud the old men arose without saying a word, and went to the place where the corpse lay. When they had gone the young man said to his wife,“ O wife, get my piece of white clay. I must scare one of those old men nearly to death.” But the woman was unwilling, saying, ‘‘ Let them alone! They have no robes. Let them cut off robes for themselves.” But as the husband would not stop talking about it, the wife got the piece of white clay for him. The husband took it, and with it he whitened his whole body and even his head and face. When he had finished he went in a course parallel to that taken by the old men, and reached the corpse before they arrived. He climbed the scaffold and lay on it, thrusting his head out through the tent skins just above the door-way. At length the old men were ap- proaching, ascending the hilland talking together in a low tone. The young man lay listening to them. At length when they had reached the lodge, the old men sat down. And the leader said, ‘* Friends, fili your pipe. We must smoke this last time with our ‘= A DAKOTA STORY. 623 friend up there.” And one of them said, ‘‘ Yes, your friend has spoken well. That should be done.” Sohe filled the pipe. He drew a whiff, and when the fire glowed he turned the pipe stem towards the seam of the skins above the door-way. He looked up towards the sky, saying, ‘ Ho, friend, here is the pipe! Wemust smoke with you this last time. And then we will separate. Here is the pipe.” As he said this he gazed above the door-way and saw the head extending from the tent in the manner that has been de- scribed. ‘Oh! my friends,” said he, “look at this place behind you!” And when . the two looked they said, “ Really! friend, itis he!” And all fled. Then the young man leaped down and attacked them, Two of them fell to the ground in terror, but he did not disturb them, going on in pursuit of his father. When the old man was over- taken he fell to the ground, as he was terrified. The young man sat astride upon him, and said, “You have been very disobedient! Fill the pipe for me!” And the old man said, “Oh! my grandchild! Oh! my grandchild!” hoping that the supposed ghost would pity him, Then he filled the pipe as he lay stretched out and gave it to his son. And when the young man stopped smoking the father said, * Oh! my grandchild! Oh! my grandchild! Grandchild, pity me and let me go. We thought that we must smoke with you this last time, so we went to the place where you were. Grandchild, pity me.” “If that be so, arise and extend your hands to me in en- treaty,” said the young man. So the old man arose and did so, Saying continually, “Oh! my grandchild! Oh! my grandchild!” It wasas much as the young man could do to keep from laughing. At length he said, “Well! begone! Beware lest you come again and go around my resting-place very often! Do not visit ‘t again.” Then he let the old man go. On returning to the burial lodge he found chat the two old men were still lying where they had fallen. When he approached them they slipped off with their heads covered, as they were terrified, and he let them go undisturbed. When they had departed the young man hastened home. He was the first to reach there, and after washing himself he re- clined at full length. He said to his wife, ‘When they return, be sure not to laugh. Make an effort to restrain yourself. I came very near making them die from exhaus- tion.” And when the old men returned the husband and wife lay as if they were asleep. But the old men did not lie down; all sat in silence, smoking together till daylight. When the young man arose in the morning the old men appeared very sorrowful. Then said he, ‘‘Give me one of the robes that you and your friends cut off and brought back. I too have no robe at all.” But his father said, Why! We went there but we did not get anything, as we were attacked. We came very near being killed.” To this the son replied, ‘Why! Iwas unwilling for this to happen, so I said, ‘Do not go,’ but you paid no attention to me and went. But now you think differently and you weep.” And when it was night the young man said, “ Go again and make an at- tempt. Bring back a piece for me, as I have no robe at all.” The old men were un- willing to go again, and they lost their patience, as he teased them so often. 624 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. YANKTON STORY. TOLD BY GEORGE MILLER. Ga® Than‘kta"wi" ta” watg¢a" mdi"te, cénujin’ga wi” mi” i¢dpe-na™i And Yankton village those per- young man one human waited for regu- haps (?) female anun- larly seen one © , eens, / pT_sss yy : Obie Tb Pps chee O w té. Nikagahi ijjan’ge na™ba ukikiji té, wa¢ixa-baji te, nijingdé cti wi” té, the Chief his two nearkin- the they didnot take the boy too one the (com- daughter dred = (past husbands (past (past pleted sign), sign), act), act). eee a . . hry . , , , = ty at . A 3 jingd. Ki niaci”’ ga ¢é mi” i¢apa-bi ehé aka, ¢ wa‘ti ¢anké twakie ga™ ¢ai “ small. And man this that he waited for Isaid the he woman the(pl. totalkto desired a woman (sub.), ob.) them ~ y “ , vi ye . ~, o . = Onc ° té, é wéapai té. Ha™ yi, ai tédiahfi té, yi-sa"¢é. i ndza té di ja™i the he waited for the Night when, tent atthe arrived the tent whitened. Tent rear atthe lay (past them (past (past act), act). act), o . ye y Ale , OC a . te. Ga" fe wana‘a™ ja™i t&é Egi¢e cémijin’ga aka aki¢a ukikie the And speak- listening to lay the At length young woman the both talked (past ing them (past (sub.) together act). act). mais . a fo . , Ts oy , ony, . a 6 Atidg¢a-biamda. Gé atidg¢a-biama: ‘Wihd, é’be nikaci’ga wi” Kagé began suddenly, they To say began suddenly, they Younger who person one Younger say. as fol- say: sister, brother lows (fem.) Wa" ta"-wéaki¢at yi, an’ea¢ixe taté,” 4-biama. ‘ Wuhu+!” e¢éga® ja™i té. causes him (for us, his sis- if, wetakehim for shall, said, they say. Oho! thinking helay the ters) toenrage the enemy, a husband (past etc. es act). . . . nS : 1 = rye : ° Ga" wé¢ig¢a™ gixe jai té. Ag¢d-bi ega”, éwa¢é-madi aki-bi ega™, hi"bé And plan making ‘he lay the Having gone back, to his kindred having returned, mocca- (past they say, (pL. ob., ete.) they say, sins act). . oe . . ¥ , a y kere - 9 baté wacfi té. Ga™ gidxai té. daze i¢a"ba” yi, nujiiga uné afaf té, tosaw employed the So they didit the Evening asecond when, boy toseek went the them (past forhim (past time him (past act). act). act), indé ¢a™ fyidaha™jiwd¢e té’di. Ga™ nijinga ¢i" &dedi ¢i" ama, 4i-gaxe. face the can not be recognized by when. And boy the wasmy. there they playing. (part) one another (mv. ob.) say, Gan’yi i¢ai te. Gan’yi, “ Gi-gt hati, Kagé-i,” 4-bi ega” ga™ a¢i™ agai té. Andthen found the And then, Come ! Younger having said, so having he the him (past brother, they say him went (past act). (masc.) act). 12 Ga” ha” té i¢dug¢e’qti ga” gif” a¢af té, yan’de a¢ijaqti. Ga” nuda” And night the throughout so carrying went the ground acrossby the And to war him on (past nearest way. his back act), A YANKTON STORY. G25 efi” agai te. entiga wi" té¢a-bi ega™, yantiya uma”e nin‘de gaxai ti, carry- went the Buffalo bull one having killed, ihey say, freshiueat provisions cooked made the ing him (past (past on his act). act). back / / - *n/ co) ~ Te , , Ga” uma”e té 4™-bi ega”, niyinga cti dgahadi gif" té. Waticka édega™ And provisions the having carried on boy too in maddition carried the Creek but (past) (col. his back, they say, to it him on (past ob.) his back, act). they say ahi-bi ega”, nijinga utefjeadi g¢in’ki¢a-bi ega”, uma”e hébe ‘fi te, 4A. having reached it, boy in the bushes having seated him, they say, provisions part gave the dried they say, to him (past meat. act), AiO fiat ie= ©, Al. On , . “Higi¢e né te. Ca”ca" e¢in’-oi. Kvi¢e ugagas'i” te, gacibaja! Beware you lest. Always Rito Beware yon peep lest, “outside (the £0 undergrowth) * ~ / id y a / *n/ - So s. Ag¢i ti minke hi.” Gat a¢at té, wada”be. Niaci™ ga cté wé¢a-baji akii I will return hither c And went the as a scout. Person at found themnot he (past all reached act), there again , : : . 3; te’di, ukia-bi ega”, nti na” qti ukie gaxai té, ‘“ Nuda*hanga, niaci”ga cté when, having spoken a nit, man fully pee cinead made the O war capi Sema atall they say, grown tu him (past act), Oo - / ae 499 “Ny / » - y ¢ingaf. Edada™ ctéwa™ ¢itigaf.” Ci gf" ega™” ci a¢af té& Ci is wanting. Whatsoever is wanting. Again fei ing carried again went the Again him on his back (past Z act). oa” ama éga” e¢in’ki¢at té, uteijeadi dazeqtci hi yi. Ci wadabe a¢af having gone thus for he seated him the amid the late in the he when. Again as a scout went some time (past undergrowth evening reaehied act), there té. Kgi¢e wakida-biama. Kei¢e niaci” ga wit apa" wi™ t’é¢é akéma. the Atlength he shot at something, At length person one elk one was killing it, they (past they say. say. act). Ki nijinga ¢inké agiag¢e ga” ¢a-bi yi cté, giteqi té ca” ga™ u¢uda*be g¢i”i And boy the (st. to fetch him wished, they even difficult the yet still considering he sat ob.) say when, for him (=as) té. Ga" niaci’ga ta" g¢idai té. Ga" wé¢é ctéwa™ji t’é¢ai té nfaci” ga the And person the hecreptup the And not having seen him hekilled the person (past (std. towards (past at all him = (past act). ob.) him act). act) ke’. Gan’yi nujinga ¢inké agfag¢at té. “ Nida*hanga, niaci"gd wi” t’éagé the And then boy the (st. he fetched the O war captain, person one I bave (recl. ob.) (past killed ob.). act). ha. Wana" q¢in-ga ha,’ al té. Gat efi? ega™ 6’di a¢af té, ya”ci. Edi Hasten said the And having carried there went the running. There (past him on his back (past act). act), ahi-bi ega™, nijinga ¢inké niaci”ga ke’ gaha atanki¢at te. Gan’yi ag¢af having reached, boy the (st. person thy “on it caused him to the And then — started they say, ob.) dead tread (past home body act). te. Niaci” ga naji”ha ¢a™ cti hébe ¢izi-bi ega”, ga” ntyjinga ¢inké gf" the Person hair the too part having taken, they so boy the one ae ‘V- (past (pare) say, who ing him act). on his back VOL vi——40 12 15 iis) 12 15 626 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. ag¢ai té. Ga? wait ¢anka wasi¢éqti g¢é té ga”, “ Minag¢a® ta minke,” started the And woman the (pl. thinking in- started the eae I take for a will I who, home (past _ ob.) tently of them back (past wife act). act) e¢éga" éga", oi/¢éqti g¢e te’. Ki pahan’ga maja” afi ¢an‘di akfi té, having heen Soot gli l started the And before land he was at the hear- the home (past approach: (land) rived (past act). ing again act), ji-ti¢iq¢ige ¢an’di. Egi¢e af wi? @dedi te amd. fi b¢tigaqti waha”-bi deserted de ie at the Atlength tent one was std. there, they say. Tents all removed, they site (land). say < ry qs : % yi, uw wirdaqtci & ‘dedi te amd. Edi ahi-bi yi, égi¢e yyébe te’ ctéwa™ when, tent just one was std. there, they say. There arrived, when, behold door-way the en they say ev man¢in'ka aji-bi ega” , i’ teaqtei waha™ a¢a-bi ké ama, yi ama ucté ama. earth having been puton just now migrating they had gone oftina thosein the the others it in small pieces, lg. line, they say, tents (sub.) (sub.). they say, Ci ujan’ge ké uhad agai té, ugdg¢a™ jan’ge wiuhe a¢af té. Kgi¢e nfaci™ ga Again cond the follow- went the road of the migrating following went the Atlength person (lg. ingit (past party closely (past ob.) act), after them act). na™ba dahadi g¢i” akama. E/di ahi-bi yi, égi¢e ¢¢ es: ¢inké i¢adi two on a hill were sitting, they There arrived, when, behold this the one his say. they say who father aka ihat’ aka céna"™ba akima. Ai-bi ega™, niyjinga iagikig¢a-bi ega”™, the his the those two were st., Having come, they boy having kissed their oe they (sub.) mother (sub.) they say. say, say, ; niaci” ga ¢inké fakig¢a-biama, i¢Adi aka cti, iha aka cti. “ Uda" hégaji man the one they kissed him, they his the too, his the too. Good very who say, father (sub.) mother (sub.) ckixe édega® ¢ayfedijudji,” 4-biamd. Niaci™ ga aké niyjinga ¢inké agi” agai you did put youinjured yourself, said, they say. Man ey boy unprone took away (sub. who té €bé ctéwa" ui¢a-bajii te’. Ki iyan’ge amd niyinga ¢inkd ¢ingé té'di when who soever he did not tell the And hissister_ the (pl. boy the one was miss- when it to (past sub.) who ing act), sn/ , fei¢a-baji té’di, téyi¢a-biama. Nujinga i¢adi ak&é gé-biama: “Ani” né they did not when, they killed themselves, Boy his the reat as follows, You took him find him, their they say. father (sub.) they say: away own tedi und eté yi tda®qti ckixe ¢a™ja, iyan’ge aka enaqtci ni ukfji éga™ c when you ought very good youdo though, his ater the him only man near as tell it (sub.) relation (brother) Ve latd f . is 79) téqigi¢al, ca” ugqpagé te ga” vé da” cté e¢égati éga" ga” téyi¢at yan'ge prized him, 80 lost the and dead _ perhaps they as so killed them- his Sees their own, thought selves aki¢a.” Gan'yi ¢¢ niaci”ga aka ga™ i¢ddi ¢inké ui¢ai té ¢é fe ké th both. And then Jhis man the atany his the (st. toldit the this spoken the (sub.) rate father ob.) tohim (past act) G ~/ aL = 4 / ~ b¢tiga, e‘a™ niaci’ga téai te’. “Ke, anga¢e tai. Ca” ha. Wanate te how man hekilled the Come, let us go. Enough . You eat shall (past act). ha,” ai té “ Mar¢i”i-ga. Cub¢é ta minke,” af té niaci”ga aka. Ga™ said the Walk ye. I will go to you, said the man the So he (past (past (sub.). act). act) A YANKTON STORY. 627 @ti> 1 te. Ikisa”¢i" ¢af yi, qd¢a ag¢ai te. Wat ¢é téyi¢e ¢ankaja alti he sat the Outofsight they when, back hestart- the Woman this killed to the ones he (past went again edback (past ~ themselves reached act). act). again ~ ss of, - DOG y 4 , . / , . té. pijébe ma*¢in’ka ma®-bisé Ajii té ug¢iqpaga-bi ega™, yf mate alii the Door-way earth cubes of sod piled up the haying made fallfromaheight tent within ar- (past (col. by pulling, they say, rived act). ob.) 2 wy 2 z A st cpene / . . ley Ni qe: Sts te. Egi¢e watt aki¢a ja” yi‘a”he ihéwa¢a-bi ¢ankama. EK di ahi-bi ega”, the Behold woman both reclining they had been laid, they say. There having arrived, (past together (?) they say, act). 4 / uA 2 f/ , —/ . St i, - , u¢iza® té uta™na tibasne ja” akima. Gan’yi t’éyi¢é akama. middle the space makinga he was lying, they And then he was killing himself, split by say. they say. pushing (?) TRANSLATION. There was once a Yankton village in which was a young man who was wait- ing for a chance to marry. The chief had two daughters, full sisters, who were un- married, and one son who was the youngest child. And this man who, as I have said, was waiting for a chance to marry, wished to court the sisters, and he was waiting on their account. One night he went to their tent, which was a whitened one, and he lay down out- side at the rear of the tent in order to listen to what the sisters might say. Atlength the sisters began a conversation. One said, “ Younger sister, we shall marry the per- son who takes our little brother and enables him to insult our enemies.” “Oho!” thought the listener. As he lay there he matured a plan. Returning home he asked his female kindred to sew moccasins. And they did it for him. The next evening, when it was too dark for persons to distinguish one another's faces, he started to seek the boy. The boy was playing, and the young man found him. When he said, “Come, younger brother,” the boy went with him. The young man carried him on his back all night long, going across the prairie in a straight line. When he carried him thus he was going on the war path. He killed a buffalo bull, cut up the carcass, and cooked the fresh meat that it might serve as rations for the journey. He carried the provisions on his back, and besides them he carried the boy. When he reached a stream he seated the boy among the undergrowth and gave him some dried meat to eat. Then said he, “ Do not depart! Remain here! Beware lest you peep outside of the under- growth! I will return.” Then he went asascout. Not discovering any one at all, he returned to the boy, and spoke to him as if he were a full-grown man, “O war captain, there is no one at all. I did not find anything whatever.” Then he took him on his back again, resuming his march. Late in the evening he seated the boy amidst the undergrowth and went off as a scout. At length there was some one shooting. It was a man who killed an elk. The young man wished to fetch the boy, but it was difficult, so he sat considering what todo. He crept up carefully towards the man and killed him before his presence could be detected. Then he fetched the boy. “O war captain, I have killed aman. Hasten!” He carried the boy on his back, running to the place. On arriving there he caused the boy to tread on the dead man. Then the two started home, taking part of the scalp of the slain man. As the man started back, he thought intently of the women, ‘TI will oS) 6 628 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. take a wife,” and he was very glad. On returning to the place where he had first met the boy and had overheard the sisters, behold, nothing remained but a single tent and the deserted village site. All the inhabitants had removed, leaving only the one tent standing. On reaching it he noticed that small pieces of sod had been piled up against the door-way, and that but a short time had elapsed since the departure of the other inhabitants. He followed close behind the villagers, and at length saw two persons sitting onahill. Nearing them, he saw that they were the parents of the boy whom he was carrying. They came towards him and kissed their son and also the young man. ‘ You have done very well, but you have injured yourself,” said they. When the young man carried oft the boy he did not tell any one at all what he intended doing. And when the sisters did not find the boy, their brother, they killed themselves. The boy’s father said to the young man, ‘‘ You should have told about it when you carried him off. You have done well, but since his sisters had only him as their real brother they loved him, and, thinking that he was either lost or dead, they killed themselves.” Then the young man related every occurrence to the boy’s father, telling how he had killed the man. The father said, “Come! Letusgo. Itis enough. You must eat.” The young man said, “ Depart ye! I will join you later.” So he sat there and they departed. When they had gone out of sight he retraced his steps till he reached the place where the sisters had killed themselves. He pulled down the cubes of sod that had been piled up against the entrance, and then went into the tent. There were the two women, side by side, just as they had been laid there. He went to them, forced his way in between them, and lay down. Then he killed himself. ADDRESS TO THE YOUNG MEN. Niaci"ga-mice, wa¢dyig¢ita’i nide yaxux’ u¢iji-qti yi-na™, edada™ wi" oO ye Sole you work for your- throat you are very when reg- what one selves full of ularly, ly ou pant very hard after working] ¢ayickaxe tai ha. Wacka™i-ga E’be u¢tinaji®-bajfi-ga. Nikaci™’ga ukédi" you make for will : Try (pl.). Who do not depend (ye) on ai Indian : yourself pl. an’ga¢i" b tiga ti Wakan’da aké-ga" wdxai té ha, maja” ¢an‘di, ¢a”ja 5 Je we aie move Wakanda the awe, so madeus the m1 lan on the, though (past act). edida® wedgitida™ a"ma™¢i" wegaxai gé bgtigaqti ¢ingé ha. Majar’ ¢é¢a* what for our adv. antage we walk ne forus the all wanting 5 Land this (pl. (place) b¢ugagti wage-ma ugipi éga" wanita wedgitida” Wakan‘da ¢inké wegaxai the white peo- full as quadraped earl for us Wakand1 the st. Tne for us ple one sei vi ys : ste : ga ja, bgtigagti mu¢ingaf, Pahan’ga té’di wanita ¢i" eyd ¢inge’qti ga” though, all exterminated Before when quadruped the his without any so by shooting (class) at all LENUGA NAJIS TO HIS FRIEND, GRAY HAT. 629 tea” ¢é ama’ ¢i"i, a®¢an’yie¢ig¢a gti atma” ¢i7i, nu égarqti ama” gi Ki we kilkd we walked, we deciding ¢ ogether for we walked, man just like we walked. And ourselves tea" tdi ticka™ g@ e-na™” angisi¢é’qti a"ma”¢i" taité ¢ingé. Waqe-ma now when deed the ouly we remember well we walk shall wanting. Lhe white peo- (pl. those (pl.) ple ob.) P v / Zou , Y / , e ° / ° , rm , ticka® eyaf ké a®¢a™baha-baji etéctéwa", ca™ eya¢ica” wia" ¢ige tal. odi deed their the we do not know notwithstand- yet towards them let us shape our In that ing, course. yi wéuda" a’ma® ¢i" tai. case guod for us we shall walk. NOTE. According to George Miller, an Omaha, the old men of his tribe often make such an address to the young men. TRANSLATION. O ye people, if you ever accomplish anything for yourselves it will be only when you work so hard for yourselves that you pant incessantly thereafter. Do your best ! Do not depend on any one else. The Mysterious Power made us all Indians in this country, but all those things which he made for our constant good have disappeared. The entire country is full of white people, so the quadrupeds which had been made by the Mysterious Power for our advantage have been exterminated, they have beep shot. In the former days we went about killing the quadrupeds who had no owners, we governed ourselves, going wherever we pleased, we went about just as men should do. But now it is impossible for us to think any longer about those deeds of the past. Although we are ignorant of the customs of the white people, let us shape our course in that direction. In that case we shall prosper. ieee se ERS: LENUGA NAJIX TO HIS FRIEND GRAY HAT. (ié¢u Wadige qide g¢i yi, udkie. Ljigat¢ai keya pi, Wajindagir Here Hat gray had when, I talked to Grandfather atthe Iwas Washington come him. (place) there. back é Awake, maja” ¢é¢a" wiwfja lyiga™¢ai ¢inké wéb¢i"wi" pi. Nikaci”ga that I mean, land this (cv.) my He whomthey — the (st. I sell it I was People have for a grand- ob.) there. father vay r , , a =f A Poe i ae . kéd{f amaé hideayé ama Mahi®-yan’ga-ma ckiga™qti waja”be. Ki dgi¢e those who were — those lower down the the Americans just like Lsaw them. And at length there Missouri R. oo 6 15 18 630 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. maja” wég¢i"wi" te’di waqpaniii ji amd. Tyiga"¢ai aké ujan’ge ida" wi am land sold their when they were not poor. Gr andfat her the road good one gave (sub.) me ha. I™¢agi¢a-maji, Ada" waqpdni. A™wa?’qpani Ada™ ki éskana Wakan‘da fs I have not found there- poor. Iam poor there- and _ oh that! God ee fore fore ¢inké iin’ge ¢inké, a”ba e34 ké’ya d¢a"be pi ka” eb¢éga.. Ede the one his son the one day their to the in sight I I hope. jut who who, reach ugahanadaze kédi-na" ca™ca" b¢i". Eskana ¢éceta™, Mahi"-jan’ga-mice, darkness in it usually always Tam. Oh that! hence oer Oye (eneetar uga”ba ke’ga éskana pl ka” eb¢éga®. Iwit’¢aya™i yi, éska™ eb¢éga®, light to the oh that ; I hope. You help me if itmaybe I think that, Te ie 1 cin’gajin’ga wiwija ni™y agai ka” eb¢éga®. Ukit‘e ¢éama Caa™ ami pf- child my alive £0 I hope. Nation or these Dakota the bad Foreigners (pl sub.) baji hégabaji yi, ca”, Mahi"-gan’ga-mace, edida® gé dhigiqti wa¢d4 not a little when, still, O ye Americans, what thn agreatmany you give (=thing) pl. in. to them ob. waqpani-baji. Wi na*xide a®ska’qti, fe- ¢i¢fyai and‘a® minké. Nietide they are not poor. I Ihave avery good hearing, word your (pl.) IT am hearing as I sit. Missouri R. ¢é-kédi wage ahigiqti, waqpaniqti at’é ta minke. Niaci"ga-ma ticka® this by the white a great many, very poor Idie will I who. People the (pl. ob.) deed man ; piaiji ama wa¢akihidai yi, fe ¢i¢ijai and‘a" minké. Ugdhanadaze ké‘di bad the ones you attend to them if word your(pl.) Iam hearing as I sit. Darkness in the who ca™ca" b¢i’. Qéceta” éskana a*cta”be eg c¢tea”i éde. Waga™ze wi’ always Iam. By this time oh that you see me so (2) Se at but. Teacher one east Pan‘ka yfi ¢an’di naji” ha, ¢é¢u naji”. Wagqpani t’a” a®¢a™ baha™ waga" ze Ponka vil atthe stands : here stands. Poor there he knows about teacher lage is me ta". Eddda® i’teqi g&é waga™ze ta” na‘a™ taté. Ucka™ i’teqi gé the. What hard for the teacher the he hears shall. Deed hard for the std. me pl. in std. it me pl.in one. ob. one ob. baxtiaki¢é-na"- ma™ ti minke. Ki fe ké waga™ze ta” ¢éna‘a*i yi, T cause him to write T use will I who. And word the teacher the youhear when, usually std. from him win'ke éska™ enéga"i, geb¢éga", Mahi"-yan’ea-mace. I L¢é Adia"wa"¢ai-ma He speaks perhaps you think, I think that, O ye Americans! ose whom we have had truly for agents wigazu-baji. Ucka™ gé i”uda™i gé i¢d¢a-maéji hi. Niaci"ga-ma not meen (pl.). Deed the good for the I have not found . The persons (pl. ob). pl. in me pl. in ob. ob. waigazuqti-ma wi" ka“b¢a. Wagazti-ma wi" ti¢aki¢é yi, Mwin’ka'i y1, the very honest ones one I desire. The h nonert ones one yousendhim if, he helps me if, (pl. ob.) , tome i¢ani4ja té ha. Ki W adi ige qude ¢f, fe taté ana‘a" té éceta”-qti cgi¢e I may live by 5 And gray you he shall Iheard when fromthat really vit means of him speak it time on- hap ward ered wigazu jingdqtci. Wagazu té éga"na™ ka™b¢a. Uda" ha, ebééga" seaiene very small, Straight the so only T desire. Good . I think that. Gidiha ani™ya (¢)te aha", ada™ wé¢ihide sagigi- na® ka™b¢a. Ja ¢inan’ge In future Ilive may ! there- tool hard ones of only I desire. Wagon fore. different kinds Vv TENUGA NAJI* TO HIS FRIEND, GRAY HAT. 631 ka”b¢a. péska ka”b¢a. éska ja® “”-ma ka”b¢a. Weé'e ka b¢a. I desire. Cattle I desire. Cattle wood those who I desire. Plow I desire. carry on their backs Qadigiona ka“b¢a. —yan’dina*epé ka b¢a. = Wémagixe — ka b¢a. Seythe I desire. Spade I desire. Saw I desire. Ma™zé wiugida® ka™b¢a. Can’ge wa¢aha ka" béa. Wamitsk-ina'yibé Tron used for nailing T desire. ee clothing I desire. “Wheat-grinder”’ (=grist-mill) ka” b¢a. Ki é ab¢iY yi, i¢anitja té aha", eb¢éga". Maja” oé yan’ga ) t=} I desire. And that Ihave when I live by will ! I think that, Land the lar, ay means of it pl.in ob. ctéwa™ abd¢i”- maji ha; ada® wé¢ihide sagigi- na” ka”b¢a ha. Usni byanymeans Ihave T not 5 there- tool hard ones — only I desire A Winter fore of different kinds g¢éba ki &'di ¢ab¢i" Tjiga"¢ai ¢inké’ya pi te ag¢i te, ki ceta” wé¢ihide ten and = on it three the one had to the Iwas the I have the, and that far tool as a grand- there come father back sagi- ctéwa™ ab¢i”- maji. Ada* wé¢ihide sagi gé ka™“b¢a. Waga'’ze ta® hard byanymeans Ihave I not. There- tool hard the I desire. Teacher the fore pl in (std.) ob. ka”b¢a té a™¢a”baha®. Ki ¢kiga™qti im¢éckaxaf ka” eb¢éga™. Edada™ I desire the he knows about And ne like oy for me you make I hope that. What me. it wi™ i¢ani4ya té ctéwa™ ¢ingéé ha. Enadgqtci i¢dni4ya té hi. one Ilive by may soever there is 5 That only Iliveby may means of it none means of him NOTES. This was the first text of any sort dictated to the writer (in 1872). “Gray Hat” was the name given by the Ponkas to the late William Welsh, of Philadelphia. A translation of this letter appeared in the “Spirit of Missions” (of the Protestant Episcopal Church) for 1872. 629, 5. Wa¢age qude g¢i yi, rather, Wa¢age qude ihe g¢i yi, When Gray Hat came back by this route. Wajimda¢i", Washington, in Ponka notation; but the native phrase, waji" da¢i®, means, foolish disposition. 630, 4 and 5. One “eskana” is enough; omit the other (7. ¢., either one). 630, 8. Wi na"xide a*skiqti, etc. The speaker names himself, but the true refer- ence is to his people, the Ponka. Nearly all the personal statements should be so construed. 630, 11. (eceta® eskana a®cta"be eg eteai ede, I think that you (pl.) should at least have seen me (i. e., should have come to see me) by this time. L. gave another reading : Geceta® eskana a"cta"be éga" etai éde, I think that you should have visited me ere this. 630, 15. For geb¢ega”, L. reads, ka*b¢ega*, I hope. But the other, too, makes sense. 631, 1. geska ja® ‘i®-ma, those cattle which carry yokes, i. e., oxen. 631, 4. i¢ani"jya te aha", eb¢ega®. L. reads, i¢dani"ya éte Aha, eb¢éga”, I think, “T ought to live by means of it !” Waga‘ ze in this letter refers to the missionary, 7. ¢., the author. 632 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. TRANSLATION. O Gray Hat, when you came hither after your visit to the tribes up the Missouri River I talked with you. (And now I talk about the same business.) I have been to the place of the President, | mean Washington. I went thither to sell my land to the President. I saw some people down the Missouri River who were just like Amer- icans, and I noticed that when they sold their land they were rich. The President gave me a good road. I have not found it, therefore Iam poor. I am poor, I say, for that reason. I am always in darkness. I hope that I may soon come out into the day of God and his Son. O ye Americans, I hope that henceforth I may reach the light. I think that if you will help me my children will improve, thus realizing my hopes. O ye Awericans, though these Dakota tribes are very bad you give them many things and they are wealthy. But my people have behaved well, they have obeyed your words (though you have not given us many things). (If) there are a great many white people along this Missouri River, I shall die poor. When you are attending to the Indians who will not behave I am obeying your words. [Tam ever in darkness. I think that you should at least have visited me before this time. A missionary is here at the Ponka village. He knows about my poverty. He shall hear of the things which are difficult for me to endure. From time to time I will get him to write about those things. And when you hear his words, O ye Amer- icans, I imagine that you will think “ He tells the truth.” : Those whom we have had as our agents have not been upright. I have not found any of their acts advantageous to me. {f desire to have one of the truly honest per- sons. If you send me one of that kind and he aids me, 1 may improve by means of his assistance. O Gray Hat, when I heard that you were to speak (in our behalf?) our affairs really improved a little from that time onward. I desire only what is right. I think that itis good. In future I ought toimprove. Therefore I desire substantial appli- ances of different kinds. I desire wagons, cows, oxen, plows, scythes, spades, cross- cut saws, nails, harness, and a grist-mill. If I obtain the things which I have named, I think that I cught to improve by means of them. The lands which I have are by no means large, therefore I desire substantial ap- pliances of different kinds. It has been thirty-three winters since I returned home after my first visit to the President, and I have not yet had even one substantial im- plement. -Therefore I desire them. The missionary knows what I wish toobtain. And I hope that you may do for me just as I desire. There has not been even one thing here of advantage to me. My only present dependence is the missionary. _ aie HEGAGA SABE AND yAZANGA NAJIS TO BETSY DICK. 633 HEQAGA SABE AND yAZANGA NAJIX TO BETSY DICK. Nijinga aki ¢ida”be ga” ¢ai. Wa¢aha wa¢agiond te gija™ be Boy the to see you entree. Clothing you told us about the to see bis (sub.) own : mm / ° ga™ ¢al. Uq¢éqtei dat té ga”¢ai. Ta™adi ¢ati te'di can’geqajin’ga wi't he desires. ery soon you the Re desires. Last fall you when colt I gave give it came you to him ani’ ¢ag¢é, g¢i. Nu iyinga ¢i‘i ¢inké ¢ Aji ha, g¢izaji ha can’geyajin’ga. you took it home- it has Boy he gave theone he dif- f he did not 6 colt. ward, returned. itto you who ferent take it back Pan’‘ka ji can’ge ta” iha™ ta” a¢i” aka, ¢ g¢izai can’gejajin’ga. Uya™be Ponka an- horse the its the hehas_ the he took it colt. Do not luok other (std.) moth- (std.) her (sub.) back for er a fu / gi¢aji-ga! A®™wa™waja ugdca™-baji, Cka™aji g¢i. Wawaqpani hégabaji. it, as your al Whither they have not gone Motionless sits. We are poor nota little. traveling. Gayzide-ma” ¢i", nikagahi waci ejai té. Ctide-gaxe ijin’ge, Qega¢iqa’, Gajzide man¢ir, chief adherent their dead. Smoke-m Shihan his son, Qega¢ida’, A 5 . = . , . wv PGs / “, vé ¢icta” gti”. Pahan’gadi wabaxu wi" cu¢éa¢ée, g¢idji. I tea" ci gag¢a™ dezd finished _ sits. Formerly letter one LTsent to you, it has not Now again that one returned. cu¢éagé. Mir ¢é hébe ¢ighatbe ga™¢ai niyinga. T‘a”da™ ¢ati té'di Isend to you. Moon this part to see you, at sires boy. In the fall you when his own came eau tp Om . if , , - ony: , r . . ¢a‘é¢i¢e ntyinga. Can’ge wi" ¢if. Hdada" twa¢agina ¢ag¢t bétiga gind‘a’, had pity on boy. Horse one he What you told us about = you all have heard of you gave came their own, to you. back day one when, nikaci”ga na™ba cté tai, ki ¢ab¢i" cté t’ai, ki duba eté taf, aba wirdqtei person two forin- died, and three forin- died, and four forin- died, day just one stance stance stance yi. «Ki cé¢a™ ¢é cuhi té cta”be té ¢kitatha wai™”baxu-gi. Ca” e‘a” when. And that this reaches the youseeit the atthe same write things to me. Now how (ey. ob.) you time pee ~ ge , , / *n/ f 4 ¢anaji" yi, wai"¢écpaxt ka b¢a. Twit’ ¢ f¢a-ga you stand if, you write things I wish. To tell ine send to me. to me NOTES. 662, 3 and 4. Ce-ma... uwagi¢a-gi. This sentence may be expressed differently, thus: Ihank/ta"wi® d‘iba cé-ma cil’gajin’/ga wadaxe-ma Uwagi¢a-ga. Yankton some those children those whom I _ tell it to them. made (or adopted) 662, 7. ¢e is superfluous (F.). TRANSLATION. We have been sick. Wacuce, Little Elk, gahe-tap‘é and Cuya-ma¢i", who were very good men, have died. My wife and I have been sick, and we barely es- caped dying. As we live, | remember you, therefore I write several things to you. Tell some of those Yanktons in the tribe, those whom I regard as wy children. This country is very bad to day; in one day two, three, or even four persons die. And when this letter reaches you, and you see it, write to me in return one of equal length aud about several topics. I wish you to write to me how you are progressing. Send hither to tell me. LION TO BATTISLTE DEROIN AND THE OTO CHIEFS. 663 LION TO BATTISTE DEROIN AND THE OTO CHIEFS. October 9, 1878. Kagéha, uwikie cu¢éa¢é Kagéha, wija” be ka"b¢éde a"wan’kega ha. My friend, Ispeakto Isend to My friend, I see you I wish, but Tam sees you you. Angini yi, cupi ta minke, wiya”be ta minke. Ki i™tca® Uma™ha™ ama Irecover when, Ireach will J who, Isee you will I who. And now Omaha the (pl, you sub.) cupi-maji ca"té ca¢é ‘i¢é-nati. Ca¢é ‘i¢é té ubd¢itage: wawakega I do not reach yet going to they usually Going to speak- the Iam unwilling! weare _ you awhile you speak of it. you ing of héga-baji, ki ¢icti wa¢ikega. Ata” angini yi, ékita"ha cangahi tan’gata™ very sick, and youtoo you are sick. When TIrecover when, at the same we shall reach you time ¢iskié. Wawasninde tan’gata" wamuské ké na ji ¢i‘ai; ¢icta”i yi, all together. We shall delay wheat the thresh they they fin- when, have ish tailed ; cangahi tan’gata". Wad¢ikega té ¢at’af té anguicti a™t’af té i”¢a-maji ha. os shall reach eit Youaresick the youdie the ye too wedie the Tam sad 6 Ca” waqi"ha ¢é¢a" nize yi, uq¢é’qtci ci éga® waqi”ha wi” e¢ian’ki¢d-gis. Now paper thisob. youre- when, very soon again Jike it paper one send back to me. ceive it yibaona" cuhi ewéka"b¢a-maji. Waqi”ha na*hébai-ga, ecé f¢agé taf. Missing one another in I do not wish for them. Paper wait ye for it, you yousend please. going to you say hither Uma™ha™ ma b¢iga é awawaké: wi pahan’ga cuhi ka™b¢a-maji, ¢iski¢ The Omahas all that I mean: me before to go to I wish not. all to- you gether cangahi angd¢ai ata’ cté. we sain you we go at some fu- ture time. NOTES. Lion was the keeper of the sacred pipe in the yada gens. He was the friend of Battiste Deroin and Ckajoe-yine. Battiste is the Oto half-breed interpreter. 663, 4. ekita*ha refers here to both tribes, Omahas and Otos. There had been much sickness in each tribe, and when both should recover the Omahas intended vis- iting the Otos. TRANSLATION. My friend, I send to you to speak to you. My friend, I wish to see you, but I am sick. When I recover I will come and visit you. (Note by author.—This may be in- tended for the whole tribe, instead of the speaker alone.) And now the Omahas are speaking of going to you before Ido. I am unwilling for them to speak of going to you. We have many sick among us, and you, too, have sickness. When both you and we recover, we shall all come together to see you. We shall delay, as they have 12 664 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. not finished threshing the wheat. When they finish it, we will come to you. Iam sad because you and we too are losing our people by sickness. When you receive this letter send me back one like it very soon. Ido not wish the Omahas and the letter to miss (or pass) one another on the way when the former goto you. I desire you to send word hither, saying, ‘Stop on the way and wait for a letter!” I refer to all the Omahas. I donot wish them to anticipate me in going to you. At some future day we (will) all go together to visit you. CKAJQE-YINE, A MISSOURI, TO BATTISTE DEROIN. Céjya_ niaci” ga a™¢ata¢e ¢inké wagazu and‘a" ka”b¢a: i"wi'¢ f¢a-ga. There person he who is jealous of me straight T hear I wish: to tell me send where hither. you are Ki cag¢é ka"b¢éde wagazuaji, 1 teqi ha. Gan’ yi wi" ¢ana ti¢age, wigazu And Igoback Iwish,but itis notstraight, itis hard And then youtelltome yousend Sania: to you for me hither, and‘a" ka™b¢a. (hé wabdg¢eze ¢a" nize yi, uq¢e’qtei Wi lan’ ki¢a-ga. I hear I ai: This letter the youre- when, very soon on send hither. (ob.) ceive it Cin’gajin’ga ¢i¢fja, Badize, wakéga té iwi" ¢a-gi: awdna‘a™ ka™b¢a. Ca J ) s S Chita your, Battiste, sick the tell to me: I hear of them I wish. And Uma™ha™-madi 1 uda’qti anaji. Kiku éduéhe-na?-ma”. A™ba witdéta® among the Omahas very good T stand. Cans I usually am a member. Day part to feasts té hi¢at te’di Uma™ha™ ama watcigaxe édudche-na"-ma™. Wahit¢aga the Saturday onthe Omaha the iul. dance I usually join. Pottawatomi sub.) Watutada amd ad¢ai dite and‘a® ka™bda. Ac¢dé-baji da?’ ctéa™i, ahi J ) Oto the (pl. went whether I hear it I wish. They did not for example, they sub.) or not go reached there _ 4 (is , ») yv ~~ , C= da™ ctéa™i, ana‘a" ka" b¢a. Edada™ edéce ti¢agé yi, cag¢é ti minke. Ca™ for example, I hear it I wish. What what you yousend when, Tg0 back I will. And say hither to you , ov} 5 S. . te S carte cag¢é ka™b¢éde i’teqi ha Téqi yi'cté, cag¢a-maéji téinke. Wagazu I go back I wish, but difficult - Difficult if, ie will not return to you. Straight to you for me iwi" ¢and ti¢a¢é ida" yi, cag¢é ta minke. Ji gud¢ica™ ¢ankA ¢ai 1, youtellittome yousend good if, T go back I will. Lodge beyond the ones went if, it hither to you who awana‘a” ka™b¢a, wagazu. Can’ge-ska (Wa¢utada nikagéhi) Pan‘kaja ¢é I hear about I wish, str Sait White. Horse Oto chief to the Ponkas to them go ‘i¢e and‘a” ka™ b¢a, wagazu. Pan‘kaya ¢é ga™¢ai yi, wabig¢eze ian’ki¢d-ga. spoke LI hear it I wish, straight. Tothe Ponkas to me wishes if, letter send to me. of it £0 NOTE. This letter was dictated in Omaha by Lion, acting as interpreter for Ckaqoe-yine, who spoke in Oto. Battiste Deroin married the sister of Ckajoe-yine. . MAQPIYA-QAGA TO CA-KU-GU (A-KL-TA-WE. 665 TRANSLATION. I wish to hear the truth about the man yonder, who is jealous of me. Send hither and tell me. I wish to return to you, but affairs are not right, so it is hard for me (to act). Please send and tell me how itis; I wish to hear the exact state of affairs. When you get this letter send me one very soon. Tell me about the sickness of your children, Battiste; I wish to hear about them. I am still dwelling very pleasantly among the Omahas, and I am attending feasts from time to time. I wish to hear whether the Otos went tothe Pottawatomis. I wish to hear whether they went or stayed at home. If you send hither and say anything, I will return to you. I still wish to return to you, but it is difficult. If it is (still) difficult, [ will not return to you (now). If you send and tell me the truth, and all is well, 1 will go back to you. I wish to hear about those lodges beyond (your village?), whether they went or not. I wish to hear whether White Horse (the Oto chief) spoke of going to the Ponkas. If he wishes to go to the Ponkas, send me a letter. MAQPIYA-QAGA TO CA-KU-(U (A-KI-TA-WE. October 12, 1878. Wagi” ha cugéwiki¢é ¢a® @¢iiji éde wijdha™ t’é ha ¢and‘a™ t(e) eb¢éga™ Paper Isent by some the hasnot but my brother: deal . youhearit may that I think one to you (ob.) returned in-law *n/ ~ *n/ L128 ha SO se of, =i} waqi" ha cu¢éa¢é. Nikaci™ ga ékiga™ qti widaxe éde wijan’ge eg¢an’ge t’é paper Isend to yon. Indian just alike Imake you but my sister her husband dead ~ Ceri Seem) , =) Loy Ci / ia ae = 2 ha. Cin’gajin’ga eya ¢anka dda™be ¢ingai Ada® e‘a” cub¢a-maji. fuji te F Child his the ones to look they have there- how Ido not go to you. House- the : who after none tore hold wakéga-baji uwib¢a te¢a” ita” wakégai, wan’gi¢é’qti. Céta™ ucté ¢anka they were not sick I told to you in the now are sick, every one. So far the rest past . , ay . ys ra wv, : J i u eet a . gig¢dizu-bajiqtiai. Sata" ja” yi-na™ taf ha. Wakéga té pfiji. Pahan‘gadi have not recovered at all. Five sleep when usu- they . Sick the bad. Formerly ally die nin‘de i” uda™ qti-ma™ éde, ita” i’ ¢a-maji ha. Cub¢é ehé te¢a™ cub¢a-maji heart very good for me but, now lam sad 5 Igoto Isaid inthe I go not to you you past ti minke ha. Wagqi”ha ¢a™ cuhi yi, uq¢é’qtci g¢ian’ki¢a-gi, wind‘a” TI will 0 Paper the reaches when, very soon send it back to me, Lhear from you you ka” b¢a-qti. Nikaci”ga-ma uda%qti-na” taf ha. Niaci”ga uckidaqti Iwish very. The people very good some die : Person very kind judwag¢e ahigi t’af ha. Nan’‘de i ¢a-maji’-qti-na™ ca”ca™. Ma’ zéska’ cti I with them many have 5 Heart very sad for me con- always. Money too died tinues t su / : \ 5 en [ow ns ia / su rae wa‘i-baji ca™ca". Ca® dda™ ma™zéski wirécté cta™baji-na". Wéka"ta™ they have not always (pl.). And there- money even one you (sing.) — usu- Lariat given to us fore do not see ally. 666 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. fea ON 1 we eee ee epaion ip ee Bc ° j . F Qa yénajtha gazan‘de wi” gian’ki¢a-ga. Wa¢aha ab¢i” éde, witaha™ t’é, ¢ingé— hair ona buf- to plait one send back to me. Clothing Thad but, mybrother- dead, thereis falo's head in-law none b¢tigaqti ¢ingé. Ca” edada® wéyi‘a" ctéwa™ a¢in’ge. Uma" ¢inka ¢¢ all this is gone. Now what ornament soever I have none. Season i¢iug¢e ca” mage Ama téyA ctéwa™ wa¢aha ayfkabéa téinke. Ega™ gé'di throughout infact winter the at the soever clothing I will desire for myself. So at dif- other erent times ud iS — / LA = *n/ yy J , , , Lae ed =< wija™ be te. Pan‘ka amadi wi” itize wabig¢eze ci¢edki¢é. Pan‘ka aké I see you may. Ponka withthem one together letter I send it to you Ponka it is {with you) (by a messenger). he (or at the same time) wi" tian’ki¢ai. Pan’ka aké waqi”ha wi” tian‘ki¢ai, Pan’ka nikagahi wi’, one he has sent to Ponka amie paper one he has sent it Ponka chief one, me. © to me, Ma*teu-naji® ai akd, wi ikageadé. Standing Grizzly they the I I have him for bear say one a friend, who, NOTES. Caku¢it ¢akitawe was a Pawnee. 665, 1. te eb¢ega™, pronounced rapidly by the speaker, teb¢ega*. 666, 2 and 3. F. inserts “¢e” and omits * ca,” though the latter is thus used by many Omalias. 666, 3. Ega™ gédi, meaning conjectural: perhaps he expected to get the clothing for himself at different times. F. renders it ‘“‘ then.” TRANSLATION. The letter which I sent you by some one has not been answered, but my brother- in-law has died, and I send this letter to you because I think that vou will (thus) hear it. Iregard you as a person just like him, but my sister’s husband has died. His children have no one to look after them, therefore it is impossible for me to go to you. I told you heretofore that those in the household were not sick; but now every one is sick. The rest of the people have not yet recovered at all: they usually die in five days. The sickness is bad. Formerly I was very glad, but now I am sorrowful. Though I said in the past that I would go to you, I will not go (now). When the letter reaches -you, send me back one very soon, as I am very anxious to hear from you. Some of the very best men have died. Many very kind men with whom I went have died. I continue very sad all the time. They continue to give usnomouey. And therefore you have not been seeing even one dollar (of our money ?). Thad clothing, but my sister’s husband died, and there is none (left)—all is gone. Indeed, I have not even any trinkets. Throughout this year and even throughout next winter I will desire clothing for myself. When I shall have acquired (these gar- ments) at different times in the future (?), ILmay see you. Isend the letter to a Ponka as well as to you. He is the Ponka who has sent me one. He is the Ponka who has sent me a letter. He is a Ponka chief, Standing Bear, whom I regard as my friend. oa MA‘*TCU NA'BA TO BATTISTE DEROIN. 667 MA*NTCU-NA*BA TO BATTISTE DEROIN. October 10, 1878. ickaddbi, nfkagahi nankaéce wan’gi¢e, nikaci” ga wija cu¢af, Cin’ga- Ickadabi, chief ye who are all, people my have gone Child to you. jin’ga wija cti cug¢af. Qida”be cug¢ai. Uma™ha" tida" wab¢i"-ma zanf my too has gone To see you have gone Omaha good those whom I all to you. to you. have eu¢af. Udatgti wit ké té ha, Heqaga-jin’ga, ga¢i"-gahige ijin’ge; ucté have Very good one the dead. Little Elk, Pawnee Chief his son; the gone to (veel. rest you. ob.) ama cu¢ai ha. Wa¢ikega-bi af té, and‘a® ca™ ¢ida™be ga” ¢ai éga™ cu¢al. the havegone . That yon had been they Iheard it yet to see you they wish as they (pl. to you sick said, have gone sub.) to you. Kagcéha, nikagathi nankdace, ¢a‘ean’gi¢di-ga. Cé-ma nikaci” ga udatqti Friend, chief ye who are, have pity on me. Those person very good giwaki¢ai- ga, ¢a‘é¢a¢e giwaki¢ai- ea, nan’de-giudaqti giwaki¢ai- ga. send ye them back you pity him send ye them back being very glad ~ send ye them back to me, to me, to me. Cénujin’ga wasisige ¢i¢ija-ma wag¢aha”i-ga! Nikagahi ijin’ge ¢inké Young man active | those who are pray ye to them, your Chief his son the (st. your own! an. ob.) Ahati-oa! Ki iéski nankdé, ¢icti, Badize isan’ga é¢a®ba, Wad¢utada S$ ’ ’ 8 ) pray ye to him, And inter- ye who are, you, too, Battiste his younger he too, Oto your own! preter brother nikagahi fe tiwagika™i-ga, iésk’ nankiace. Uma™ha®™ ta” wa?g¢a™ naji” chief word help ye them, iuter- ye who are. Omaha nation stand preter nikaci”ga amd wasisige ataca™ cu¢ai. Eska™ ¢a‘ean’gi¢a-bada” ‘i¢al people the (pl. active exceed- have gone Oh that you have pity and (pL) they (sub.) ingly to you. on me prom 186 etéga’gti ingixa-ga. Uma™ha™ nikagahi wan’gi¢e ccénujin’ga ¢é ti-ma very apt make for me. Omaha chief all young man this those who have come téqiwagi¢e’qtiati. Le eddda" edaf yi, Uma™ha® nikagdhi éga"qti wagiyaxe- they prize them very Word = what what when, Omaha chief just so they usually do highly. they tor them say na” i, ¢é ti-ma niyjinga. Hau. Céna Wa¢utada nikagahi nankdce, wib¢a- ’ . 5 5 ? their these who boy. 7 Enough Oto chief ye who are, I have own, have come prayed to ha™i, kagéha. Hau. Ie té céna wib¢aha" cu¢déage. you my friends. 1 Word the enough I pray to you I send it to {pl.), you. 668 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. TRANSLATION. O Ickadabi, and all ye chiefs! my people have gone to you. My child, too, has gone to you. They have gone to see you. All those good Omahas whom I govern have gone to you. The best one of them, Little Elk, son of Pawnee Chief, has died ; but the rest have gone to you. I heard it said that you had been sick, yet they have gone to you, as they wished to see you. O my friends, ye chiefs, have pity on me! Send back to me those very good men; pity them and send them back to me; send them back to me after making them very glad! Pray to those who are your active young men! Pray to your chief’s son! And O you interpreters, you, Battiste, and your younger brother, help the Oto chiefs. The most active of the men who dwell in the Omaha territory have gone to you. Oh that you would pity me and for my sake so act that the Ovos shall be sure to promise (them good things). All the Omaha chiefs prize highly those young men who have gone to you. Whatever those-young men say, the Omaha chiefs usually do just so for them. My friends, you Oto chiefs, I have petitioned to you enough. I have sent enough words to you to petition to you. KI-WI-GU-TI-DJA-GL-CI TO CL-(E-¢L-TA-WE. : October 21. Wi minké, AcAwage ¢A¢ihide, waqi™ha cu¢éwiki¢at ha, ¢iji"’¢e méga". ’ co) ) q . 5 I I who sit, (Pawnee words), paper Icause some oneto . your elder likewise. take it to you (pl.) brother ° Pe AC ma ss / Ca” maja” ¢é¢a" ¢aa™na nai ¢a® awa’ qpaniqti andj ha. Ca™ a™ba¢eé And land this (cv. youaban- you the me very poor T stand Z And to-day ob.) (or doned went place place) ° fs Bo. : . Sapiiersinay: oe wija"”be ka™b¢a, ua’ ¢ingé’qti waqi”ha cu¢éwiki¢ai. Ga"-na™ juga I see you I wish, for no reason what- paper I cause some one to And usually (?) body 7 ever take it to you (pl.). : Oe? : Rah. ee . wiqtei ci vida" matb¢i™” ¢te-ma™, ca” ga™ edada* ayfidaxe té uda'qti Imy again good I walk I do this at at any rate what Ihave made the very good - very self least, for myself yee ie ~ ° , ~) : , : oi anaji" de, a ba¢é wamiské itéa¢é nikaci’ga cidé agi’ ena-b¢uga ité¢e I stood but, to-day wheat I piled it person six had it all together put in up a heap nai¢inge ha. was burnt to nothing NOTES. Kiwigutidja¢ici, a Pawnee name of yenuga waji" piiijl, Mad Buffalo, an Omaha. Acawage ¢a¢ihu¢e, Big Spotted Horse, the name of a Pawnee, in the Omaha notation of Pawnee words. Ci¢e¢itawe, the Omaha notation of a Pawnee name. 668, 3 and 4. juga wiqtci ci uda™ ma"b¢i" ete-ma®, L. gave as the corresponding qoiwere, iro mionagtci pi hamanyi ihdkiyrayi" ke. But ihakiyray® ke is the Omaha ayibte ha. MA*TCU-NA®BA TO HEQAKA-MANI AND TATANKA-PSYANKE. 669 TRANSLATION. I, for my part, O Big Spotted Horse, have sent a letter to you and your elder brother (Ci¢e¢itawe?). I dwell a very poor man in this country in which you left me. I wish to see you to-day, (but) I send you a letter at any rate (though I can not say when I may come). And while I my self am at least doing well and I am prospering in what I have been doing for myself, to-day all of the wheat which belonged to six per- sons, including myself, and all which I had put into a heap, was consumed by fire. MAYTCU-NAXBA TO HEQAKA-MANI AND TATANKA-F*YANKE. October 16. Quta™ qti uwib¢a cugJagé ha ivtca” ¢f wikage méga®. Ta” wate¢a® Very straight Itellyou Isend it to now you my friend likewise. Nation : eee pliji ¢a® hégaji ha: mi” ¢4b¢i" wawadkegai, c¢ta" wagini-baji; Ada®™ ¢at’é bad the notalittl . moon three we have been sick, sofar wehavenotrecoy- there- you (ev. ered; fore die ob.) taité uwib¢i‘agat, iwit’Ab¢ai-maji. Kgi¢e wa¢ikega ¢at’al yi, a’ d¢ag¢a taf. shall Iam unw Ning for I do not hate you (pl.). Beware you sick you die if you blame lest. (pl.) you (pl.), me Cena. ‘L-bajfi-gi. Wakéga té pfiji ca®ca™qtiaYi. Ma” zéska’ cti Enough. Do not be com- Sick the bad remains indeed! Money too ing! a'¢iza-baji, wawaqpani héga-baji. Can’ge-ma Hiyjanga ama cénawagat, we have not re- we are very poor. The horses Winnebago the (pl. have made an ceived, sub.) end of them, wama”¢ai; ada" ayina ka™b¢a ag¢i", i’ ¢a-maji ta". Ta” wa"g¢a™ma they have stolen there- I fight I wish I sit, Tam displeased now. The nations them; fore Pan‘kama g¢ébahiwi" ki é’di ata t’at; Maqude-ma cti, Zage, Wa¢utada, the Ponkas a hundred and over have the Iowas too, Sass, Otos, died; digi", ta”warg¢a"-ma cti b¢tiga wakéga héga-biji. Nikagdhi tiju Pawnees, the nations » too ae uve been or ill. Chief princi- pal ¢anka wéepaha” ha. G¢eda”- naji® yaje adi” aka fi¢igg¢a™ ta aka hi’, ¢ the ones you know 4 Hawk stands his he who has it, he will decide ; that who name (the sub.) one (the afore- said) 4 Ty r ~, / pee ¢ wieazu ¢igaxe ti aka ha’. Can’ge cadé ¢at ha, G¢eda”- naji". Lepaha™ aaiebe he will do for you. Hnrea, six you C Hawk stands. You know gave him to him Cleon taté Céna cu¢éwiki¢d. shall. Enough Ihave sent to you by some one. OS 670 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. NOTES. 669, 1. @uta™qti uwib¢a, ete. Given justas dictated. The author is sure of this. But the sentence is reconstructed thus by F.: I"tea™ wikage mega”, ¢uta*qti uwib¢a cu¢ea¢ai ha. This accords with the general usage, as observed in the epistles collected by the author. The two Yanktons, Heqaka-mani and Tatanka-i“yanke, had written to say that they were coming to visit the Omahas. TRANSLATION. Just now I will send and tell you and my friend the exact truth.. The nation is in a very bad condition; for three months we have been ill, and we have not yet re- covered. Therefore I am unwilling for you to die (by taking the sickness from us); I do not (send this word because I) hate you. Should any of you die from the sickness you wouldblameme. Enough! Donotcome! The sickness is continually bad! And, moreover, we have not received money; we are very poor. The Winnebagoes have made away with our horses; they have stolen them; therefore I am wishing to fight them; I am displeased at present. With reference to the (other) nations, over a hundred Ponkas have died; and the Iowas, Sacs and Foxes, Otos, and Pawnees have had much sickness among them. You know the Omaha head-chiefs. That one of them who has the name of Standing Hawk will decide; it is he who will do for you what isright. You will surely recognize Standing Hawk (by this): you gave him six horses. I have sent you enough. LION TO BATTISTE DEROIN AND THE OTO CHIEFS. October 19, 1878. Waqi”ha a™ba¢é b¢izé, uq¢e’qtci uwikie cu¢éa¢e, kagcha. Nikaci™’ ga Paper to-day Ihave re- very soon I speak to I send it to my friend. Persons ceived it, you you, d‘tiba a®wan‘kie atii, ikageawa¢é-de atfi. A®™wan’‘kie and‘a™ yi, nin’de some to speak to me have Imadethem my friends, they to speak to me Theard it when, heart come, and have come, i”uda™qti-ma™, Céna. Gan’yi nikaci”ea t’é ha, Lyuhdbi sfdadi ama was very good for me. Enough. And now person — dead 3 Ikuhabi yesterday the other te'di té ha, é nikaci’ga wiwija, nijinga wiwija. EH’be ta™wag¢a™ t’é onthe dead. he person my, boy my. Who nation die etéctéwa", zani wiwija, i™¢a-maji ha. Ci nikaci”ga wiwija amd cuhi soever, all mine, Tam sad ° Again person my the (pl. have sub.) reached you 6 can’ge wa¢a‘i té awdna‘a™ i” ¢é-qti-ma™, nin’de i” uda™. horse youhave the I heard it of I was yery well heart good for given to them pleased, me. them >: 4 — e LION TO BATTISTE DEROIN AND THE OTTO CHIEFS. 671 Hau. Gan'yi ta warg¢a” ¢i¢ijai ¢a® pahan’ga té‘di t’é wit ¢and And then nation your (pl.) the before when dead you tola ts me ti¢agé awdna‘a® te i’¢a-maji ha. Ki i’tea® wirécté t’é Mwi'’¢ana-baji yousent LTheardofthem the I was sad . And now evenone dead you have not told to hither me dda® nan’de i”uda”qti-ma™. Ki hati, nfkagahi nankdce, edénujin’ga there- heart mine feels very good. And ho! chief ye who are, young man tore edibe, t'é wind‘a™i-mdji i”¢é-qti-ma™. (Qéceta” eddda™ wi fuga also, dead I have not heard of I am very glad. From this time what one news you iwi" ¢ana- nai ka*b¢éga". Angini etéga". Qé wabdg¢eze b¢ize té’di you tell tome only I hope. We recover apt. ‘This letter Ireceive when it wage yi té'di ati, Ca” wija™bai-maéji yaci taité ha Wamiské white honse intoit Ihave And I do not see you (pl) a long shall Wheat man come. time Pets . oe . ON . l 6 De « On , / igi" nayju-baji yaci taité, ada” wija™bai- maji yAci taité. Ma¢é uska?’ska" they not thresh my along — shall, there- I see you (pl.) not along — shall. Winter inastraight time fore time line with usni ida*bé’qti tédihi yi, m¢i’na yi taité. cold inthe very mid- by that time, they thresh it shall. dle for me TRANSLATION. My friends, I received the letter to-day, and I send you a reply very soon. Some Indians have come to talk with me; I made them my friends and they have come. When I heard them speak to me I was very glad. Enough (about this). And nowa man is dead: Lyuhabi died day before yesterday. He was my Indian, my young man. No matter who dies in the nation, I am grieved, for all are mine. And when I heard that my people had reached you, and you had given them horses, I was well pleased, my heart felt good. I was sad when I heard formerly what you sent to tell me of the deaths in your nation. But now you have not told me of the death of even one person, therefore I feel very glad. And ho! ye chiefs, and ye young men, too, i am delighted because I have not heard of your deaths! I hope that henceforth you will make it a rule to tell me (at least) one piece of news (when you write). We are apt to recover. [ have come to a white man’s house when I have received this letter. I shall not see you for along time. My wheat can not be threshed for a long time, therefore [ shall not see you for along time. They will not thresh it for me before midwinter. 3 By) 672 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. MA*TCU-NA*BA TO BATTISTE DEROIN AND THE OTO CHIEFS. ucpdAha, wib¢aha". Weé¢ig¢a® Gaxe té éea®gti i¢éckaxe Wac¢utada ] ) 3B ga q Grandchild, I pray to you. Decision Imake the just so you make it Oto it for me , ry: = , ye wee] *n/ Su / S nikagahi nankdce édabe wib¢aha™i. Nan‘de i”¢a-maji. A™ba i¢dug¢e chief ye who are also I pray to you (pl.). Heart lam sad. Day throughout axdge ca™ca™i éde, na"baé ja™ wind‘a"i té i’ ¢éqti-ma”. Wandg¢e a¢a‘i-ma I weep always but, two sleep Ihave heard the I am very glad. Domestic ani- theones which from you mal you gave tome : / die he ’ L nl hee Sree, wé¢ihide wédaxe ida" waka™b¢a-na"-ma™, éga™ wina éga™ a™¢a‘i té nan‘de tool Itreatthom there- I desire them only, as Thave ° as youhave the heart as(orluse fore begged piven them for) of you to me . . S = : Oy, / CG) be Bs iuda*, ci wakéga té angini-méji-na"-ma™, Ada" cénujin’ga wahdchaji'qti good for again sick . the I have not yet recovered, there- young man very stout-hearted me, fore wi" ivte, Wanita-waqe ijin’ge, Tyuhdbi ijaje agi”. one of mine Lion his son, Iyuhabi “his he had. is dead, name H tha” méga® nié ¢i¢in’ge ¢andji” nan‘de i uda". Ki ¢ijan’ au. @Wiha™ méga" meé ¢i¢in’ge ¢anaji” nan’de 1 uda". Ki ¢ijan ge 7 Your likewise pain youhave you stand heart good for And your sister mother none me. Uma™ha"™ ama ¢a‘é¢ai, wandg¢e duba ‘fi ha, ada™ ¢iyaha" wasxyig¢ita’ qti, Omaha the (pl. have pitied domestic ani- four have . there- your sister's works very hard for sub.) her, mal given fore husband himself, to her dda" nan‘de i’uda’ qti andji™. piuji wiwija udatgti anaji®. Céna cu¢éwiki¢d, there- heart very good for Istand. House- my very good I stand. Enough Ihave sent to you. fore me hold NOTES. 672, 5. angini-maji-na"-ma*, used by a chief, really, wagini-bajii ha, we have not (yet) recovered. 672, 8. ¢ijaha", Ckaqoe-yile, or Sam Allis, the brother of Deroin’s wife. TRANSLATION. My grandehild, I petition to you. I ask you and the Oto chiefs to do for me just according to the plan which I have made. I am sad at heart. Throughout the day I am ever crying, but I am delighted to hear from you after an interval of (only) two days. From time to time have I regarded the domestic animals which you have given me as helpful appliances in connection with my work, and so I have desired them. I have been glad on account of your giving me these things when I begged them of you. I (i. e., my people) have not yet recovered from the sickuess, therefore I have lost one of my most stout-hearted young men, Iyuhabi by name, the son of Lion. Tam glad because you and your mother continue well. The Omahas have pitied your sister, and have given her four domestic animals; therefore your wife’s brother works very hard for himself, and so I continue well pleased. The members of my household are doing very well. I have seut you enough. JABE-SKA TO GACTAGABI. 673 JABE-SKA TO GACTAGABI, A PONKA, AT YANKTON AGENCY, DAKOTA TERRITORY. 1878. Paa‘ka nikaci’ga g¢ébahiwit t’4-bi ai éde ¢and‘a® téga" waqi"ha Ponka Indians a hundred havedied, they but you hearit in order paper itissaid say that cuhiwiki¢é. Niaci’ga witaqtci t’é ké ugaf, ucté te ugd-baji, ijaje a°wa'’- I cause it to reach Person just one dead the they remain- the they didnot his we did not you. (recl. told, der tell, name ob.) sv , imams . . vy 4 » na‘a™-baji. Lentiga-cage-jan’ga enaqtei ana‘a"l ha. (land‘a® téga" cuhia¢e hear them. Buffalo bull hoof large he only we have 3 You hear it inorder I cause it heard that to reach you AO (St Aen aml ee em 1 , f su / ° nls waqi”ha. pentga-cige-yan’ga t’é ké ta” wa"g¢a" b¢tiga wé¢abajt-qtia™), paper. (Lenuga cage janga dead the nation whole they are very sad, (recl. ob.) a-bi ¢a™ ama. it is said in the letter. NOTE. Jabe-ski or Wa¢acpe, an aged Ponka, who was a refugee among the Omahas from 1877 to 1880. Gactaga-bi was also called Wahuta"¢é (Gun) and Maca" (Feather). TRANSLATION. They say that a hundred Ponkas have died (in the Indian Territory), and I send you a letter that you may hear it. They tell of just one man who has died, they have not told (the names) of the rest, (so) we have not heard their names. We have heard the name of zenuga cage yaiga alone. I send you the letter that you may hear it. It is said in the letter (which came from the Indian Territory) that the whole tribe is very sad on account of the death of penuga cage yanga. pANGA-GAXE TO ICTA-MA*)E, AN OTO. October 25, 1878. Wamtské ké i”nagin’ge. Icpaha® ¢ag¢é na¢inge. Wamiuské ké Wheat the is burnt to noth- Youknew you went itis consumed. Wheat the (lg. ing for me. it back (ly. ob.) ob.) Baan Tepaha® id Aino iské kd. Ed Rete: is na¢inge. Icpaha™ ¢ag¢ede na¢inge, wamuske ke. Ide wagaxe te cté is consumed. Youknewit you went it is consumed, wheat the But debt the even back, but (lg. ob.). y . = © os , 3, , pee ewéb¢i‘a ti minke. Inddda" cté fdaxa-maji, wamiské ké na¢inge I failfor them will I who. What soever Ido not make by wheat the is consumed means of, (lg. ob.) / s 5 Os) ah oon ens a®¢a”sabe tebe. Ede ta™wa%g¢a" wakéga teabai ¢ga", wijiha™ i” tea" I suffer greatly. But nation sick yery much as, your prosper now in-law VOL vi——43 12 15 18 674 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. vé ha, Chya-ma™¢i" ijdje agi”. Nié a™¢in’gé-qti-ma”. Cupi “a¢é te¢a” dead. Cuka-ma¢i? his he had. Pain IT have none at all. T reach what I said in the name you past wagixe ewcb¢i‘a té aa" wa"¢ispéga", cupi-maji té. Géatega” cupi debt I fail for them the as I am kept back (or re- I may not reach you. In that man- IT reach strained) on account of it, ner you ‘i4g¢é te¢a”, nid a®¢in’ge yi, cupt ta minke; ki wagixe té nié a"¢in’ge whatI promisedin pain Ihavenone if. I will reach you; and debt the pain Ihave none the past, S ryer is , e . , . . 3 TOC? yi, u¢thiagi¢ etéga’. Qéke ¢iha” wakégede iteatgtci gini. Nujinga i I cause it to be apt (or This (reel. your was sick, but just now she has Boy enough for me may). ob.) mother recovered. (to pay or can- cel it) y ys . izicpaawa¢é cin’ gajin’ga ¢ija ¢iha” wasi¢é- na™i. Ucka® e‘a™ ni” té IT have them for infant your your remembers usually. Deed how you the grandchildren mother them are . ~~ v Ca f oo wagaztiqti ana‘a® ka™b¢a, ada® edabe wabaxu cu¢éa¢é. Ki cin’gajin’ga very straight T hear it I wish, oer also letter Isendto you. And child ore ¢ankicti nié ¢ingat yi, awana‘a" ka™b¢a. Ki ¢igdq¢a" ¢inké cti nié ¢ingaf the pl.ob.too pain havenone if, I hear of them I wish. And your wife theone too pain she has who none yi, and‘a" ka™b¢a. Ki wabiag¢eze tia” ¢aki¢é (ka®™ b¢a). I¢awipe éde, if, I hear it I wish. And letter you send hither T have waited but, to me for you wabig¢eze tia’ ¢aki¢aji. Cub¢é te, ecéd yi, wabag¢eze ian’ki¢i-od. letter you have not sent Igotoyou will, you if, letter send to me. hither to me. say Gan’ yi Wa¢utada- ma i¢a- bi ai, ea” ucka® té awdna‘a" ka”b¢a. Kyi And then Oto the have itis they how deed the I hear of them I wish. And (pl. gone said say, sub.) (by re- quest) na-baji cka”na yi, fe wagazu and‘a" ka”b¢a. Ki né te yi, wagazu you do not you wish if, word straight T hear it I wish. And vou will if, straight go ‘go ana‘a" ka”b¢a. Can’ge wi" ani” améde a¢a‘i ka”b¢a. Edéce xi, T hear it I wish. Horse one youlhlave they say, you give I wish. You say if, but (or as) to me something cupi té minke. Wedaji wa¢d wika"b¢a-maji. Nize a uq¢e qtei I will reach you. _ Elsewhere you give I do not wish for you. You re- very soon them ceive it wabig¢eze i¢agé ka™b¢a. Ca” ta” wa"g¢a" ¢i¢ija nikagahi ama ie dida® letter you send I wish. And nation your chief the (pl. word what hither sub.) cté awana‘a® ka™b¢a. Ki a™ba¢é indada™ wi" ¢aka"i té u¢tiwindji’. ever I hear of them I wish. And to-day what you haveaidedme the I depend on you or it. Ga” edéce té wagaztqti ana‘a® ka™b¢a. And whatyou the very straight T hear it I wish. say Hau. Pan‘ka-ma eyacti fe yé wagazu and‘a® ka™b¢a. Pan’ka-ma The Ponkas there too word the straight T hear it I wish. The Ponkas nikagthi dé¢ab¢i" g¢i ama¢a” judwag¢e pi ama¢a”, fe dada® chief eight those who came back I with them those whom I reached, word what at¢a” wankiaf asi¢é-na" ca™ca™. Dada” ud¢tiwikié ¢ati té’di Pan’ka fe they spoke to me about I have always remembered. What Ispoke to you . you when Ponka word about came hither TANGA-GAXE TO ICTA-MA‘#E. 675 r y07 Pye Ye . Pies s u¢tiwikié asi¢é-na™-ma™. I bai éga® asi¢é-na"-ma”. KE waja™be ka™b¢a. Ispoke to you Tam thinking of from They called as Tam thinking of it That Isee them I wish. about time to time. me from time to time. y | Lae . v , . = Y es . . Te ugtiwikié asi¢é-na"-ma”, wagazu i™na‘an’-ga. Ni Ma*teti-wa¢ihi, Word LIspoke to you Iam thinking of from straight hear for me. And Ma*tcu-wa¢ihi, about time to time, Acawage, Wé's‘a-jan’ga, ie ejaf asi¢é-na®"-ma™. I™ba*l Ma*tett-wa¢ili ; Acawage, Big Snake, word their I am thinking of from He called Ma*tcu-wa¢ibi; time to time. me , DPS , Pitas y hy hae =I) re fas Ben! fe ké gisi¢e¢al. hagisi¢é yi, hi-ga. Pan‘kaya yii ¢an‘di waqi" ha word the he has caused You remem- when, reach Atthe Ponkas village at the paper him e remem- ber it there. er. i¢éwa¢iki¢é tai. Waqi"ha iwiyiya. cause it to go please. Paper Task as a fa- thither for them vor of you (2) see note.). NOTES. 673, 6 and 7. Observe how yatga-gaxe says one thing four times. He could have expressed himself in one sentence, thus: Wamuské ké iepaha™ ¢ag¢éde (or, ¢ag¢édega®) ina¢in’ge ha, My wheat which you knew about when you went home has been consumed by fire. gjaliga-gaxe was an Omaha. 674, 4. u¢uhiagi¢ etega*, in full, u¢uhiagi¢é etega™. 674, 10. Gaiyi Wa¢utada-ma i¢a-bi ai, etc. This should be changed, in order to conform to the standard Omaha, to read thus: Gan/yi Wa¢utada-ma i¢a-bi ai, anda‘a® hi. Ega*i té and‘a® ka” b¢a, And I have heard that the Otos have gone away. If it is - so, I wish to hear it (F.). Had the Otos gone of their own accord Wad¢utada ama 4-ia¢a-bi should have been used; Wa¢utada-ma i¢a-bi shows that they went because they were forced or requested. 674, 12. amede. F. prefers the fuller form, amédega®, as it is said that (you have a horse). 675, 4. Patikaga ii, etc. Explained by the third sentence preceding it. janga- gaxe wished his Oto friend to send a letter to the three Ponka chiefs, Ma*tcu-wa¢ihi, Acawage, and Wés‘a-ganga. 675, 5. Waqitha iwiyiya (sic). Not plain to any of the author’s Omaha inform- ants, who have aided him since 1882. L. suggested Waqitha wiyiya, I ask a letter to him (or, them),«s a favor from you. F. rendered this, I ask a letter for you (sic!). He gave another reading, Waqi"ha tian’ki¢é-ga, Send a letter tome. W. said that either wiyiya or tiaiki¢a-gi should be used. But G. substituted, Waqi"ha ¢iyiyal, They (the Ponkas) beg you to send a letter to them. The context seems to require this last. TRANSLATION. My wheat has been consumed by fire. What you knew (about) when you started home has been burnt. The wheat has been burnt. The wheat that you knew (about) when you started back has been burnt. And I shall not be able even to cancel my debt. There is nothing at all by means of which I can do anything; I suffer greatly from the burning of the wheat. But (that is not all)—there has been much sickness in the nation, and your brother-in-law, Cuya-ma”¢i", has died. I am very well, I 676 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. spoke of going to you, but as Lam kept back by my inability to cancel the debt, Imay not get to you. That is the way; I promised to come to you, and if I keep well, I will come to you; for I may make enough to cancel the debt if I keep in good health. Thisone whom you ¢call your mother has been sick, but she has just now recovered. Your mother generally thinks of your children, whom I call my grand- children. I wish to hear just what you are doing, therefore I send a letter to you and them. And I wish to hear whether the children, too, are well. I also wish to hear whether your wife is well. I desire you to send me a letter. I have waited for you (to send me one), but you have not sent me a letter. If you say, “I will come to you,” send a letter to me. I have heard that the Otos have gone (to the Indian Ter- ritory). I wish to hear whether this is so. I wish to hear correct words, if you do not desire to go. And if you wish to go, I wish to hear the truth. They say that you have a horse, so I wish you to give it tome. If you say something, I will come to you. I do not wish you to give it to any other person. When you receive the let- ter, I wish you to send one hither very soon. I wisn to hear any words whatsoever that the chiefs of your nation (may send). And I depend on you to-day for anything with which you have helped me. And when you say anything, I wish to hear it cor- rectly. I wish to hear an exact account of the Ponkas, who also are there. I have always remembered the things about which the eight Ponka chiefs, who came back and with whom I was, spoke to me. Iam thinking from time to time of the Ponka matters about which I spoke to you when you came to this place. I am thinking from time to time of their invitation to visit them. I wish to see them. I am usually think- ing of the words about which I spoke to you. Hear correctly for me. I think from time to time of the words of White Eagle, Standing Buffalo, and Big Snake. White Eagle invited me to visit him; he has caused him (sic) to remember the words. Re- member them and go thither! Please send a letter to the Ponka village. They ask you to favor them by sending them a letter. DUBA-MAXGDY TO HEQAGA-SABE. October 25, 1878. Ca Pan‘ka-méya wabig¢eze hia¢é. Ki fu¢a wi” awana‘a™: Pan‘ka-ma And to the Ponkas letter I have And news one _ Ihave heard The Ponkas (pl. ob.) caued it about them: (pl. ob.) 0 arrive there. dhigi té-bi af, g¢éba-hi-wi" ata t’-biama; nikagahi sata" t4-biama many that they they hundred over have died, they chief five have died, they have died say, say; say. Nikagahi yangaqti wi’iqtci t’é ama ha, AY pt qyan’ga. Ca” can’ge wa¢i"- Chief very great only one isdead,they . big. And horse they usu- say ally have na”-bi ¢a“ja, na"pchi" taf éga® wég¢i"wi"-na™-biama. Ca™ b¢uga wakéga- them, though, hungry die as they are selling them, they say. In fact all are sick, they say biami. Ca™ giteqi hégabaji-bi, ai. Ca” a™ba¢é céna and‘a®. Ki Uma™ha® they say. And itis very diffic ult forthem, they And today enongh Ihave And Omaha that say. heard. JOSEPH LA FLECHE TO A. B. MEACHAM. 677 an’ga¢i™’ cti wawikega héga-bajii ha. Niaci™ ga sata” tai. Q@and‘a®™ ¢a™ja, we who move too we are very sick 4 Men five dead You have though, (pL). heard it ca” uwib¢a. Heqiga-jin'ga t’¢, Wactice ci fepaha™ t’é, Cirya-ma' fi" 6, —D still T tell it to Elk * little dead, Brave again youknow dead, Cuya-man¢i? dead, you. him fepaha®. gahé-yip‘@ fepaha". Tyuhabi vé. Céna taf hit. Ki ceta” 3 you know dahe-jap'é you know Tyuhabi dead. Enough they 5 And so far him. him. are dead . Bu 10 een : Ata) r wakéga aki wa¢ictat-biji-a”i. Ki in’cte ui¢a*be angace éga’, sickness the he has not stopped on us. And as if up-hill we go 80. (sub.) NOTES. 676, 3, 4, 5. Ca", superfluous, fide F. 677, 4. wakega aka, etc. The sickness is here spoken of as a person, or as the voluntary cause of distress to the people. L. read, Ki ceta™ wakéga aké wa¢icta™- baji ¢a™ja, ca” ui¢a™be angace éga", The sickness has not yet ceased among us, but it is still on the increase. This is the meaning of the figure of speech, “we are, as it were, going up-hill.” It does not refer to improvement. W. said that L.’s reading was equivalent to the other one. Heqaga-sabé was a Ponka and a refugee at Yankton Agency, Dakota. TRANSLATION. I sent a letter to the Ponkas (in the Indian Territory). And I have heard one item of news about them: they say that “‘many Ponkas have died,” it is said that there have been over a hundred deaths, and that tive chiefs have died. Only one principal chief, Big Elk, has died. And although they usually have horses, it is said that as they are dying from hunger they are selling them. In fact, it is reported that all are sick, and they have many troubles. I have heard no more to-day. We Oma- has, too, have many sick among us; five men have died. Though you have heard it, still I tell you. Little Elk, Brave, Cuya-ma"¢i", and gahe-yap‘é, whom you knew, are dead. Iyuhabi, too, is dead. These are all who have died. The sickness has not yet ceased among us; it is rather on the increase. JOSEPH LA FLECHE TO A. B. MEACHAM, OF “THE COUNCIL FIRE.” December 20, 1878. Kag¢ha, a” ba¢é wisi¢c-ga", wabig¢eze widaxu, fe djtiba. Kagéha, My friend, to-day as I remember letter Imaketo you, word ‘a fow. My friend, you, i¢de té éska™ ¢ani‘a® ka” eb¢éga” ha, Edida® wi" md¢adi uwib¢a ha. 6 Ispeak the perhaps you hear it I hope 5 What one last winter Itold you Widaxu b¢icta® mi¢adi, fe ké ca’ea" ci uwfb¢a ha. Maja™ ¢é¢u a"ma™ ¢i" Iwrotetoyou I finished last winter, word the always again Itellyon . Land here we walk té Wakan’da aki ¢é¢u jiit‘a" waxai éga", ¢é¢u ama ¢i"i ha. Wage ama the God the here madeushayebodies as, here we wal 5 White the (pl. (sub.) man sub.) 12 15 18 678 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. ¢é¢u ati-baji té’di maja” angtyai té éska™ a™¢a™¢ai ha. Ki Igfgam¢ai aka here had not when land our the perhaps we thought nd Grandfather the come 5 (sub.) maja™ ¢a™ wé¢i" wi" -bi ai éga*, we¢i" wi"ha; ki maja” ji"aqtci angugig¢actal land the thatitwassold he Ba it was sold 4 and land very small we have reserved of said our own ha, angig¢a¢i’i ha. Ci wage ama wé¢izai ga™ ¢ai ha, maja” wédaji ¢edwaki¢e . we fave our own . Again white the(pl. they take Fos wish . land elsewhere to send us man sub.) from us D/ hoy ha: rh 7 i 4 bati A n/ qa D/ jt Key ] I oh xx 1 rs ga™¢al ha: weteqi hega-baji. A™cte maja” ¢a" we¢izal teawa¢ai té they wish hard for not a little. Asif land the they take they killus’ the us (ob.) from us ékiga™qtia’i ha. Ki a®ni’ ga anga™¢ai dda" wabag¢eze ¢¢é widaxu ha. Ki it is just like it ; And welive we wish there letter this Iwriteto . And fore you nikaci™” ga uké¢i" ama piaji dha" eonéga*i ha, ada" wage angéxe ta-bi a™¢a™ Indian common the(pl. bad ! (in you think 2 there- white that we will act we say sub.) thought) fore man an oui¢i¢at ha. de té win’kéqti an’gui¢i¢ai ha. Ki waqe angdaxe té‘di we tell to you é Word the speaking the wetellit to you 5 And white we act when very truth man maja” ¢a" angag¢ad¢i” anga”¢ai hi. Ada® wage angdxe afiga™ ¢ai ha. land the we keep our own we wish 2 ahere: white we ae oa wish ore man (Ca™ edada" wéteqi ké zani’qti uwib¢a ka” b¢a ¢a™ja, b¢ita éga™ aba Aji And what hard for the all Itelltoyou I wish though, ‘I fail Sane day an- us what other yi ji, ci d‘uba uwib¢a té.) . . . . Kagéha, wage ama Mahi-yan’ga if, again some Itellto yon will. My pane white she tol: _ American man sub.) ama nikaci”ga uké¢i" wada”be ama eddda®™ u¢i¢ai yi, tida" (wagazu) the (pl. Indian common those who have seen what they tell when, good straight sub.) them you u¢i¢a-na™i ha. Ki wada™ba-baji’qti ama, “ Nikaci™ ga uké¢i*-ma pibaji ama,” they usuaily tell . And. those who have not seen them at Indian those who are arebad itis you all common said é-na™i ha; ukikiai té ‘di, “Nikaci” ga uké¢i"-ma pibajiqti,” é ukikie-na™i ha. they usu- . they talk when, Indian common, those are very bad, that they usually talk ally say together who are together Ki, kagcha, éskana nin‘de ¢i¢ja ¢a™ ¢ag¢acibe ada” Wakan'da ¢inké And, my friend, oh that heart your the you open your and God the one (cy. ob.) own (in speech ?) who asi¢e é wa ai ha. Ca ha ¢asi¢a¢é Ada® nikaci” ga uké¢i"-ma ¢a‘éawa¢a¢ai ka mga" ‘gai ha. Ca” ha? youremem- and those who = common Indians you have pity on us we hope 5 In fact night ber him gé a” ba ge’ cti, ylia*he-na™ ca*ca™ qti a™¢i7i ha. Kagéha, ci fe Aji wi™ the day the too, usually we fear always we are > My adh again word an-- one unseen danger other djibaqtci dixe ka”b¢a. Kagé, ie ci djtiba~ aji uwib¢a ti minke ha. avery few I make I wish. Friend, word again few different I tell to I will it you Wage wandce-ma i¢ddia*wa™ ¢é ta-bi, ecai ha. “Ede wanice-ma wia™ baha"i White thesoldiers (pl. that wearetohavethemfor you : Bat the soldiers (pl. we know them man ob.) agents (pl.) say ob.) ha. Wia™baha™i éga", na“a wa"pai ha. . A®*wai’ga"¢a-baji ha. Ca™ We know them as, we fear to see them r We do not want them c In fact nikaci” ga uké¢i® ama wan’ gi¢e’qti waga™ ¢a-baji wandce-ma. Ki nikaci’ga matey the (pl. all of them do ut: want them the solpiere (pl. And person sub.) ob.). JOSEPH LA FLECHE TO A. B. MEACHAM. 679 ahan’@wamadita"-ma i¢idia®wattat cea", wea baha™i ha. I’ ete eondatci to} oD y} from the first ones the we had them for as, we know them 6 Asif they only (pl. ob.) agents nikaci”ea éga*qti-na™i ha. Ki nfkaci™ ga, wat da™eté, wi" iqta ga™ ¢ai human Benes sanity just so . And Indian, man woman or, one to Sree abuse “eye OT? OS n/: e ow e rw) yi A¢iza-baji’qti iqta-na™i ha. Ki ci t’éwa¢e ga™ ¢ai yi'cté, téwad¢e-na"i ha, if withont taking hen abused her , And again to kill them © they evenif, they usually killed at all usually wished them Ca” kuikusi cinuda edabe ¢ékiga™qti waxe-na™i, t’éwa¢é té. Ada? Tn fact hog dog also BK like usually mented killed them the. There- them, fore a"wan ga"¢a-baji. Nikaci™ ga uké¢i" ama edada™ piaji gaxai té ¢ pahan’ga we do cat waut them. iadiana the (pl. what bad they did the they before sub.) gixa-baji-na™i ha. Wandce amd ¢€ pahan’ga gAxai ctéwa™, ticka® pfiiji té ie usnally did not 6 Soldier the (pl. they before Si aia it even when, deed bad the sub.) . , ye Voge Tom ee ion , . Pies Agig¢aqide-na™i. Agig¢aqidai éga", nikaci”ga uké¢i" ticka™ pfiiji eq usually covered their own. ‘They covered their as, Tile deed bad his own , . oe . 7 ane , wv , v Tyiga"¢ai ¢inké gibaha-na”i. . . . . (Ki, kagéha, ci fe d‘iba uhéa¢é Grandfather the (st. Sent showed it And, my friend, again word some Tadd ob.) to him. hae Car fe angtiyqai té nivel” gauké¢i" fe eqai, ucté wagaztiqti, win kéqti And word our the Indian word their, therest very straight, very true lise ha, ¢a’ja fe win’ke ctéwa™ Tyigat¢ai ¢inké wé¢iza-baji éga™, i¢dadi¢al ee ‘ though word they speak even when the President does not, as it were, ey agent here and truly them from us, there ¢inké fe eq4 enaqtei gi¢izat té, é wéteqi héga-a™¢i"-baji, 6 wedgitégi tyju the word his only takesfrom the, it is very an for us, it our own chief him troubles (2) tée.) Ki fe wi” ci c¢gipe tai minke ¢a™ja, éga"qti égipe tai minke. the, it And word one again T will say that though, aa 80 I will say that. is. Nikaci"”’ga uké¢i-ma maja” Tyiga*¢ai aka weé¢i'wit-ma wa'e g¢i"-ma i cte The Indians land President the those who have sold plowing those who as if (sub.) continue nikaci”ga uké¢i"-ma Caa™ wa¢adaf-ma weata¢at ha. Ki ci nikaci’ga the Indians Dakota moses hore they hate us A And again the In- called uké¢i"-ma bgtigadti etwakiga™qti ska” eonéga™ ha, ddega” edwakiga™-baji dians we are Aa alike you think th ae z but we are unlike ha. D‘tiba wage amajd¢ica™ ga ¢ai ha, ki d‘iba an‘kabaji ha. FE Caa™ Some towards the white men desire 7 and some are not so ° They Dakota wa¢adai-ma. Ki ékiga™qti am¢i’’-bi eonéga yi an’ka-a™¢i-baji ha, are the ones called. And just alike that we ave you think when we are not so ékiga"-a™ ¢i"-baji ha. Ukit‘é aji¢a’¢a™ a¢ivi ha. Ki, waqe-miace, gictt we are not alike Nation of different we are A And, Oye white people, youtoo sorts dji¢a™ ¢a™ oni™i ha, ki angucti dawaga”i ha. Caa™” ama cti weat’a¢af yi, ci of various youare . and we too wwe are so 6 Dakota the(pl. too they hateus if, again kinds sub.) ¢icti wed¢at’Aonai yi, eta" a” ¢i? a™ni™ya taba. Ega™ yi, a™ni™ya atiga™ ¢al youtoo you (pl.) hate us if, how we are we live shall So if, we live we wish possibly (?) (That being the case) 12 15 18 12 15 18 680 THE (}EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. éga", ¢imaceaji¢ica® angd¢e anga™ gai. A®¢i‘ai ctéctéwa"™, ca” angtket‘a™ towards you (pl.) we go aa wish. We fail notwithstanding, yet we acquire , % Ore picts : , . o As anga™ ¢a tan’ e@ata", wage gixe té. Ki édi-na" wedgiuda’l etéga"l. Ci fe gate we will sii acting the white the And init only it will be good itisapt. Again word that man (thing). for us = : iq ae) K ee rx *n/ = céna uwib¢a ha. Ci fe ji uwib¢a ta minke. Ki a"ni"’ta anga™ ¢a éga®, enough I tell you 5 Again word differ- I will tell to you. And we live, we wish . as, et a'wan yig¢itai hi. Ki a™wan’yig¢ita té wedgiuda’i té a™¢a™baha™ qti we work for ourselves 5 And we work forourselves the itis goodforus the we know it very well 1 pies f f fers ee *n/ hx éga®, atwan'yig¢ita’i ha. Dega™ uma’ ¢inka ¢¢ wéteqi’qti ég(a™) at¢i” ha: he we work for ourselves . But season this weare iniereat so (?) we are trouble macté hégaji éga" wamuské si gé wénat’éga ha, ada" ciiga-jin’ga ¢ab¢i" warm very as wheat seed the withered by C there- ten-cent piece three heat for us fore , 1 . . iv fa y U = ap. a Sof bd pea fie dtiba ceta” wedgigixai. Ada" edida™ ctéwa™ anyfyaxa-baji’-qti edwaga”i. four go far we have made of There- what soever we have not made at all for we are like that. our own. fore ourselves Ki ca” waqta aji¢a’g¢a™ anga¢i"l ha, anyiyaxai, nu, wata™zi da” cté. Ki And infact vegetable of different we have 6 we have made potato, corn for instance. And kinds for ourselves, nikaci™ ga¢ema, qi” ha-ska’-ma a"wa™ da*bai té, “Uda" ma¢i™t aha®,” at¢a™ ¢ai person these (pl. those who have white we see them when, Good they walk ! (in we thin ob.), skins (pl. ob.) thought), ha. Ada® anga™¢ai ha. Ki wé¢ihide edida® ¢i¢ijai gé b¢vgaqti iInjawa¢e . There- we desire it = And tool what your own ane all life sustaining fore (pl. ob.) am¢a™ baha™i-de uma’ ¢inka ¢ab¢i"qtei edita® wé¢ihide anga¢i" ha. Ki | we have known, as, season just three from tool we Sim © 5 And awa" ¢ita® a®¢an’gaska™¢ai uda™ té a™¢a"baha™qtia”i, ada™ amiga” ¢ai we work we try it good the we know it very well, there: we wish it ore ha. Ki wabdg¢eze ¢é¢a" i"¢ibaxti té Wakan’da aka juawag¢e’qti g¢i” : And letter ee we writeitfor the God ene really with us he sits (cv. ob.) you (sub. égai, Ada® éskana maja” ¢a" ‘idwa¢a¢a-baji’qti ka”at¢a™ ¢ai. Angdgd¢a¢i™’ oD ? t= \eo) 80, there- oh that land the you do not talk about us we et We keep our own fore (ob.) at all al nga” dai éde a®¢i¢aha™i. Ki nikaci"ga udwa¢agika™i-macé’ cti, a*¢i¢aha™i, we Wish but wepraytoyou. And person ye who help us too (on we pray to you, on the one hand), ~ ki Amayi¢ica"-macé’ cti a™¢i¢aha™i ha. Uma™ha®-ma_ nikaci™ ga-ma and ye who are on the other side too we pray to you : The Omahas (pl. ob.) the eae (the pl. (or on ob.) the other hand) 7 - ye | ety — ¢a‘cawa¢ii-gi. Ukit‘é-ma zani‘qti ¢ a” wa"waka-baji, anguona ¢ have pity on us. The nations all that we do not mean them, we only that n nH siicat a"wanl yikat. we mean ourselves. NOTES. 678, 8. Parenthetical remark. Mr. La Fléche ended the first day’s dictation here. On another day he resumed at line 10. 678,11. wagazu, parenthetical and explanatory of his use of uda*. al JOSEPH LA FLECHE TO A. B. MEACHAM. 681 679, 8. Another parenthetical remark, at the beginning of the third day’s dictation. 680, 5. ega™ a®¢i", contracted by the speaker, in dictation, to eg a¢i". “TRANSLATION. My friend, as I think of you to-day, I write you a letter of a few words. My friend, I hope that you may hear what I speak. Last winter I told you about one thing. I continue to tell you the words which I succeeded in writing to you last winter. As God made us here in the land in which we dwell, here we dwell. Before the white people came we thought that the land was ours. But the President said that the land was sold, and so it was sold. We reserved for ourselves a very small part of the land, and that we have for ourselves. But the white people wish to take that from us and send us to another land; that is very hard for us! To deprive us of our land would be just like killing us. But we wish to live, therefore I write a letter to you. And you think “Indians are bad!” Therefore we tell you that we will live as white people. This is the very truth which we tell you. And when we live as white people, we wish to keep our own land. Therefore we wish to live as white people. (Although I wish to tell you all the things which are difficult for us, I can not do it; so perhaps on another day I will tell you some again.) . . . . My friend, when white people, Americans, who have seen Indians tell you anything, they usually tell you what is true about them. And those who have not seen them at all generally say, “It is said that Indians are bad.” When they talk together they say, “The In- dians are very bad.” Now, my friend, we hope that you may speak what is in your heart, and, having God in mind, have pity on us who are Indians! Whether it is night or day, we are ever apprehending some trouble. My friend, I wish to make a very few remarks upon another matter. You white people say that we are to have the white soldiers for agents. But we know about the soldiers. And as we know about them, we fear to see them (among us). Wedonot want them. We know about them because the first agents that we had were soldiers. They usually act just as if they were the only human beings! And when they wished to abuse a man ora woman, they usually abused the person in utter defiance of all our ideas and customs. Even if they wished to kill them, they usually killed them. In fact, they usually treated them just as so many hogs and dogs. Therefore we do not want them (among us acain). When the Indians did wrong, they were not usually the first offenders. Even when the soldiers did wrong first, they usually concealed their bad deeds, and showed to the President the bad deeds of the Indians. . . . . (And, my friend, [add some words again. Though there are here and there among us Indians those who speak very true and honest words, the President does not, as it were, accept them from us as true. He accepts only the words of the agent. That is very hard for us to bear. That is the chief thing which gives us trouble.) And though I will repeat one subject, still I will say it just as I have done. The President (?) hates us Indians who have sold our land to him, and who continue the cultivation of the soil, treating us as if we were those Indians called the Sioux. You think that we are just like all Indians; but we are unlikethem. Some Indians desire (to act) on the side of the white people, and others are not so. The latter are those called Sioux. And when you think that we are just alike, we are not so, we are unlike. We Indians are of different nations. You, 682 THE GEGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. for your part, O white people, are of various kinds, and weare so too. If on the one hand the Dakotas hate us, and on the other hand you dislike us, how can we hope to live? That being the case, we wish to live, and so we wish to proceed towards you. Even though it is possible for us to fail, still we wish to acquire the privilege of living as white people. For only in that way can we prosper. Now, I have told you enough about that subject. I will tell you about another matter. We work for ourselves be- cause we wish to live. We work for ourselves because we know full well that it is good for us. But this season we are in great trouble. Our wheat has been withered by the heat; therefore we have not realized from our wheat crop more than thirty or forty cents a bushel. Consequently it seems as if we had not accomplished anything at all for ourselves. Yet we have different kinds of vegetables; we have cultivated them for ourselves; potatoes and corn, for instance. And when we see these white persons (who are near us) we think, “They surely prosper!” Therefore we desire (to imitate them). It has been just three years since we began to have tools, as we have learned that all tools that are your own are life-sustaining. And we know very well that we ought to try to work at various occupations, therefore we desire to do this. And when we write this letter to you God is, as it were, sitting with us; therefore we hope that you will not talk at all about (depriving us of) our land. We wish to keep our own, therefore we petition to you. We petition on the one hand to you who have aided us Indians, and we petition on the other hand to you who are on the other side. Pity us Omaha Indians. We do not refer to all tribes, we refer to our- selves alone. LE-UyA*HA TO A. B. MEACHAM. (Same date.) Kagéha, wib¢aha® cu¢ca¢é ta minke. HKbé ¢i etéetéwa® maja” My friend, I pray to you I send to you T will. Who heis soever land : : E =p : : r ul Mok ¢an’di nija mati" ga™¢ai, eb¢éga". Nikaci”ga fe awdna‘a” yi, i’cte in the alive to walk he wishes, J think that. Person word I hear them when, asif : edie se : of SNS Econ ae ¥ ory snia”tvéqti éga™. Ki maja” ¢a" pahan’ga awan'yig¢itai té wa¢éte Tam very chilly so. And land the , before — we worked for ourselves the food . . 58 . . ey, / , Joe , aT Says ar¢a niyaqtia® anyfig¢ita’i ha. Gand’ ¢ tida” éska"b¢éga". Nikaci’ ga we lived by means of we worked for ; Andthen that good I think that. Person ‘ ourselves (2) qi”ha-jide ¢i" ctécté maja” ¢an’di nija magi” ga” ¢ai ha. Gate maja™ red-skin heis soever land in the alive to walk he wishes a That land . is . . . a r v al inawa¢é téga® Wakan‘da i"wi’¢ai ¢éga", fe uwib¢a cu¢déa¢e. Eskana life-sustaining inorder God told me as, word I tell you I send it to Oh that that you. wib¢aha" cu¢éa¢é fe té nize ka*b¢éga". Ké, kagéha, céna wib¢aha® I pray to you Isend it to word the you re- I hope. Come. friend, enough I pray to you z you ceive it , y cu¢ea¢e. I send it to you. NOTES. 682, 2 and 3. Nikacitga - - - snia™t’éqti ega". Refers to what the white people were talking about. Such talk chilled him, made him shudder. 682, 4. Gand e uda*, ete. Gand (e) has a good meaning, being prob.=ganyi (W.). HUPE@A TO A. B. MEACHAM, 683 TRANSLATION. My friend, I send to you to petition to you. I think that whosoever exists wishes to live on the land. When I hear the words of (white) persons Iam, as it were, very chilly! When we first worked the land for ourselves we lived by means of food. And (?) I think that itis good. Whatever Indian (person with red skin) exists de- sires to continue alive in the land. As God has told me that thing in order for the land to be life-sustaining, I send to tell you the word. I hope most earnestly that you will accept the words which I send you for the purpose of petitioning to you. Well, my friend, I have sent you enough of a petition. HUPEGA TO A. B. MEACHAM. (Same date.) Kagéha, fe wi" uwib¢a ta minke ha. Ca” wagaztqti uwib¢a My friend, word one I will tell you . And very straight I tell you ayidaxe. Nikaci” ga uké¢i? an’ga¢i® ucka™ ¢i¢ija qtaa¢é an’ga¢i®, Ahigi’qti I make it for Indian common we who are deed your we who are loving it, very many myself (mv.) a ¢i-baji. Lyiga™¢ai maja” wé¢i"wi?-maé wan’gi¢e adi”. Nikaci™” ga uké¢i" we are not. President land those who sold it all we are. Tndian common anga¢i" a™wan'yig¢ita® an’ea¢i™. A®™wan'yig¢ita” an’ga¢i" wa¢dna™oni” a. we who are we are working for ourselves. We who are working for ourselves (as ~— do you forget us g my. we nv.) Nikaci”ga uké¢i? uda® an’ga¢i” fe a¢f‘i-na”i. Nikaci” ga uké¢i" piiji-ma Indian common good wewhoare word we have given Indian common those who my. you from time to are bad time. edida® gixe ga™¢aji-ma ékiga™qti wackixe-na™i. Ki nikaci”ga tida*-ma what to do they who do not just alike you usually make us. And Indian those who wish are good wejai" ama ¢i" anga™¢ai.. Céna uwib¢a. distinguished we walk we wish. Enough I tell you. (from others) TRANSLATION. My friend, I will tell you one thing. And on my own account I will tell you the exact state of affairs. We Indians who are loving your ways are not very many. We are all those who sold the land to the President. We Indians are working for ourselves. Have you forgotten us who have been working for ourselves? We who are good Indians have given you words regularly. You have treated us just as you have the bad Indians, who do not wish to do anything. But we good Indians wish to continue distinguished from others. I have told you enough. SM) 684 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. MAWADA*(I® TO A. B. MEACHAM. (Same date.) Kaecha, fe djtibaqtei i¢ie wib¢aha® ecu¢éa¢ée tai minke. Ile ¢ija geha, J | My friend, word ~ very few Ispeak Ipray to you I will send to you. Word your n L , im4-qtei and‘a" yi’cté, gicka™qti ub¢a™-na"-ma” ha. A™ba¢dé, kagéha, very small I hear even if, = ery quickly T usually take hold of it 5 To-day, my friend, 3 ¢a‘éawa¢a¢ai ka"b¢éga”. (ha‘ éawagi¢ai-ek. Piqti, kagé, uawagika™i-ga you take pity on us I ingaae Pity ye us! Anew, friend, a ye us! Ki maja™ jitat‘a" ¢an‘di, kagé, éskana é@di ca™ea™ anfja wab¢ita® And land IT have grown in the, friend, oh that there always Llive I work ma*b¢i™ ka"b¢éga". Ata” até cetéctéwa* cin’gajin’‘ea ~wiwfja-ma éskana I walk I hope. When I die svever child those who are my oh that 6 ujan’ge ¢ijai uhai ka"b¢éga™ Ki ticka"™ ¢i¢ijai édihi xi, “Cin’gajin’ ga road your oney fol- I hope. And deed your in that case, = ohild ow anetyai-ma ibaha"™ a¢i” etéga™i aha’, ” an¢a¢ai. Ucka™ ¢i¢ijai uhai those who are our knowing tohave will ie apt we think. Deed your they follow yi-ona™, ‘“Uda™ etaf dha”,” a®¢a™¢ai, qtia"¢ai. A®wa™ha™e amiga” ¢ai ha. when, only, Good will (be) ! we think, we love it. We pray for some- we wish thing 9 Ké, kagcha, céna uwib¢a cu¢éa¢ée ha. Come, my friend, enough Itell you Isend to you NOTE. The text is given as corrected. Whenit was dictated two explanatory words were mentioned before a"¢a"¢ai, in line 7. The former, ewean’gi¢ai, means, “we think about them.” The latter, a"wan/giya’’¢ai, from wagiya%¢a, means, “we desire (it for) them, our own (kindred).” TRANSLATION. My friend, I will send you a very few words which I speak as I pray you (to do something). Even if I hear but a very small part of your words, I am always very quick to take hold of it. To day, my friend, I hope that you will pity us. Pity ye us! Friend, help us again! Friend, I hope that I may ever continue to live and work in the land where I was made. Whensoever I may die, I hope that my children may fol- low your road. And in that event we think ‘Our children will be apt to have a knowledge of your deeds!” We think that only when they follow your customs can there be happiness. We love (that course). We wish to pray for something (for our children?). Well, my friend, I have told you enough, gA¢I.NA*PAJI TO THE PAWNEE AGENT. 685 qGAGP-NAXPAJI TO THE PAWNEE AGENT. (qa¢itmitha® yi té’di nai.) Té af ana‘a® ha. Ega®™ yi ¢uta®qti S Skidi lodge atthe he stood. Dead they Ihave 0 if very straight say heard , / efits a 3 ite , pale ani‘a® ka b¢a. I¢adi¢ai ¢dtateé, wiya hai, wibgaha” ha. qa¢i" nikagabi I hear it I wish. You who stand asagent, TIaskafa- . I pray to you é Pawnee chief vor of you nankace, wiyai, nikaci”ga té ké edida™ agi” té wagazu iv ¢inki¢a-ga. ye whoare(st.), Task a fa- person he who what hehad the straight cause it to be for me. vor of vou, lies dead (whole) f LJ *n/ , uv . *n/ , vw , . *H/ , v a4 Wagazu igi” dackaxe yi, igi war¢ f¢a-gi. Wagazu igi" war¢ I¢age x, Straight you do it for me if, totell me about send hither. Straight totellme of yousend if, mine mine hither wijabe té ékiga™qti wib¢aha™ cugéa¢é. Maja” ¢ég¢a" aga $e ¢a” cti. Isee you the just like it I pray to you Isend to you. Land this Spats he formerly. one went Maja™ ey ¢a® ca™ cka™aji’gti ga” g¢i” gan’yi cea najit’ té eddda® a¢i”, Land his the yet not moving at all so he sat «undthen yonder he stood the what he had, mn ieee, ws a= fates y pe Tyas v / , hye ~ ca” yf tédi, can’ge, 4yéski cti, ca™ ja*ma’¢i" cti, ca* edida™ wa¢i" gé for lodge in the, horse, ox too, and wagon too, and what he had the in- them (pl.in stance ob.) ro4gs enesn/ ’ ~ Po =i oe 7 logs n FL Is - wagaztiqti igi” war¢ f¢a-gi. Ca” cin’gajin’ga da ete wi" éska™ t‘a™i té very Straight to tell me about send And child forexample one perhaps he had the mine hither. and‘a" ka” b¢a. (Qecagu ki¢ibiski nikagahi ¢ pahan’ga u¢tikid-ga Kage, I hear I wish. Recaru kiribaski chief he before pbeat: to him My friend, about it. edida® agi” t& fmaxi-gi. Kagcha, iéska ninke’ce, wib¢aha™ Edada" what hehad the ask him. My friend, you who are interpreter, I pray to you. What a¢i” té fepaha" etéga’. Kagcha, nfaci™ ga uké¢i® ma"b¢i" té ca™ca™-maji, he had the you know it apt. My triend, Indian common I walked the always I am not, wage ticka" axe ga” edida" a™¢a ¢é te wagazliqti i¢igidaxe ka™b¢a. white deed Ido as what heaban- he the very straight Imake by means I wish. man doned went of my own A Oe nO 3 ~ ¥ < omy ts , ©) w Wagaztiqti imgi’gaki¢é yi, uq¢e'gtci igi war¢ ifa-ga. Agina‘a” i, Very straight you cause it to be if, very soon to tell me about send hither. I hear of my if, for me my own own , », n , = 7a s wé¢ig¢a" ayidaxe téinke. plan I make for will. myself NOTES. Though the letter does not name the Omaha referred to, the author Jearned that he was Sida ma*¢i", a member of ga¢i" na™paji’s sub gens, who had resided with the Pawnees for years. After the death of this Omaha his name was assumed by another old man, likewise a member of the sub-gens. 685, 1. The first sentence is explanatory. 685, 9. Geca¢u ki¢ibaski, the Omaha notation of the Pawnee name, 12 686 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. TRANSLATION. (He dwelt at the Skidi village.) I have heard it said that heis dead. Tf it be so, I wish to hear very accurately about it. O you who are the (Pawnee) agent, I ask a favor of you, I petition to you. O ye who are the Pawnee chiefs, I ask a favor of you; get for me all that the deceased owned. If you act uprightly for me in getting my own property for me, send hither to tell me abontit. And if you send hither hon- estly to tell me about my own, I (will) send to you to petition to you, which is just the same as my seeing you (face to face?). Formerly he (the dead man) abandoned this land and departed. His land here has been lying altogether idle; but when he was yonder where you are he had possessions; and I wish you to send and tell me just what he had, whether articles in the lodge, horses, oxen, wagons, or anything else. And I wish to learn whether he left a child. Speak first to the chief Recaru kiribaski about it. My friend, ask him what he (the deceased) had. My friend, the interpre- ter, I petition to you. You are apt to know what he (the dead man) owned. My friend, I have not continued to act as a common Indian. As I act like the white peo- ple, I wish to improve my own property very honestly by means of what he (the de- ceased) owned at the time of his death. If you can settle the affair for me, send to tell me about mine very quickly. WhenIhear about my own I will come to a decision. HUPE(A TO (1-QKI-DA-WI (E-CA-CU. a”, qa¢i-mace, wisi¢é-na"-ma”i. Wija™bai ka*b¢éga™ ¢a™ja, wab¢i- Well, O ye Pawnees, T think of yeu occasion- TI see you I hope though, Thave ally. ta” édega™ i”ta™ b¢icta® yi, wisi¢ai. Nikaci™ ga wija™bai-mace, ana ¢at’ai been working, and now Thave fin- if, TI remember Person ye whom I have seen, how youhave ished you (pL). any died wind‘ai ka” b¢a: iwimaxe cu¢éa¢ée. Nikaci" ga an’ga¢i" wacta™ bai te¢a” T hear about I wish: LTask youa Isend to you. Person we aise move you saw us in the you question past 5 5 DEP; yy: re uae / : CMe i’ta™ tida® a"¢i”. Maja” ¢an‘di ¢atii té’di wacta”be, maja” ang¢i™i ¢a™ now good we are. Land inthe youcame when you saw us, land Wo sitin the hither wacta™ bai waqe ama ckai bguigagti éga" angaxai. Maja™ sagiqti Tyiga™¢ai you saw us white. the(pl. they Sh we do. Land very firm President people sub.) stir aka wegixai wé¢eqti a*ma™ ¢i" dda” wisi¢ai i ¢a-maji iwimaxe cu¢éad¢é ha. the has made for we are very we walk there- I remember Tam sad Lask youa I send to (sub.) us glad fore you question you NOTES. (hiqkidawi ¢eca¢u, the Omaha notation of the Pawnee, Rigkidawi recaru, accord - ing to L. Sanssouci. 686, 2 and 3. ana ¢at’ai wina‘a"i ka™b¢a, others express it more fully: ana ¢at/ai éda" eb¢éga? and‘a™ ka" béa (501, 9), and ana ca” ¢at’al Gite wina‘ani ka’ béa (512, 1). See, also, 482, 11 (t?é imte ca™ and‘a™ ka™b¢a), and 506, 1 (t’éska™i gina‘a™ ga”’¢al). TASWA’-GAXE JINGA TO HEQAKA-MANI AND ICTA-JA®’-JA®. 687 TRANSLATION. O ye Pawnees, I think of you from time to time. I hoped to see you, but I have been working, and now that I have finished I remember you. O ye Indians whom I have seen! I wish to know how many of you have died, and so I send to you to ask you (about it). We Indians whom you saw in the past are now doing well. When you came here you saw us on the land, on the land im which we dwell, and there are we imitating all the acts of the white people. The President has given us very good titles to our lands, so we are rejoicing and going forward; but when I think of you I am sad, and so I send to ask you a question (about yourselves ?). TAYWA*-GAXE-JINGA TO HEQAKA-MANI AND ICTA-JA*JA®, YANKTONS. Pahan’gadi uma” ¢inka ama té’di nikaci”ga wacta”be ¢ati. Ki é'di Formerly season other inthe person you saw them oulcame And then hither. . r . Pipes . S 2 5 nikaci”’ ga duba fe uda™qti wa¢a4 té gisi¢é-na™ ca™ca". Ki ita” wa¢ita™ person four word very good yougave the theyre- contin- always. And now to work to them membered ued ¢icta”i yi, ¢ida™be taité eb¢éga". Wawdkega héga-baji. Niaci”’ga a®t’ai they finish when, they shall see you I think that. We have been very sick. People een aye died S * e_y/e . Orr anc , . & . ha. Weé¢a-baji’qtia”i, Ada® ¢i éga" a¢isi¢ai cangdhi tan’gata". Nikagdhi 2 We are very sad, there- you so we remem- we shall reach you. Chief fore ber you ama cahi té’di céna-ctéwa™-baji, Ada” angi wad¢asi¢a¢a-bi eska” ¢ ag¢t the (pl. they when you (pl.) showed not even there- we that youremembered perhaps that they sub.) reached the slightest attention, fore us (introductory that) returned you nikagahi ama, ada" cangd¢ai. Djo akd can’ge ¢i‘i té ¢ati tée’di éde chief the (pl. there- we go to you. doe the horse hegave the you when but sub.), fore (sub.) toyou (act) came hither ty On? ay en wy, Oho z Ee ree ca¢a-baji; ita ikage ¢inké gisi¢ai. ypaxé-¢a”ba akd can’ge ¢i‘i te¢a™ he does not go now his friend the (st. he remem- Two Crows the horse that he gave to to you; ob.) bers him. (sub.) you in the past ae Osi) anes Cee +? . / = s © * —~ ¢ati té'di, ita" ikage ¢inké gisi¢ai. A™pa™-yan’ga akdé ¢ati te’di can’ge you when, now his friend the(st. he remem- Big Elk — the you when horse came ob.) bers him. (sub.) came hither hither . *n/ Le sate Om oT RO ies \O Si . ° . ¢{i; ita" ikage ¢inké gisf¢ai. (ati te’di Htpe¢a can’ge wi" wif; i’ta™ he now hisfriend the(st. he remem- You when Hupe¢a horse one I gave now gave ob.) bers him. came you you; hither Perc ae , sys eS : y , SEO agisi¢é, wikige. Céna ijdje angidaxu cu¢éa™¢ai. Ueté ama wan’gi¢e IT remember my friend. Enough hisuame we write our we send to you. The rest all it, own can’'ge cif-ma ¢ikage ama b¢tiga wagtja"be ca¢é ta ama. Cin’gajin’ga 9 horse those to your the (pl. all to see them, they will go to you. Child whom you friend sub.) their own ois gave , 2 ~ —/ ~ s Fes) S wija uwagi¢a-ga. A®wan'kega édega” a™¢i"-na” at’d¢i. Anfja yi, 12 my tell it to them. Me sick but so nearly I died. I live if, * ~ . ae awagisi¢é, awagija™ be ka” b¢a. I remember T see them, my own T wish, them, my own, 688 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. NOTES. 687, 2. nikaci"ga duba, four persons, Joseph La Fléche, Two Crows, Big Elk, and Ta™wa"-gaxe jinga. Hupe¢a, the fifth man, dictated the sentence in which his name occurs. 687, 4. ¢i ega®, emphatic, ¢ieni"’ga", ete. (F.), you truly are the one. W. makes ¢i ga", ete.,=Uwikie onadkace, a™¢isi¢ai 6ga" cangahi tai’/gata", O ye whom I have addressed, since we remember you, we will go to you. 687, 5. cena-ctéwa*-baji, etc. They did not receive even the slightest attention (F.); You (pl.) showed not even the slightest attention (ceonactéwa?-baji?); They did not get any- thing at all (W.). The Omaha chiefs went to the Yankton without taking the “young men.” The Yankton paid them no attention, so the chiefs thought that it was because the Yankton wished the “ young men” to come. TRANSLATION. Last year you came to visit our tribe. Then you made very fair promises to four men, who have not forgotten them. Now they have done their work, and I think that they will visit you.. We have had considerable sickness, and our people have died. This has made us very sad. Therefore we remember you especially, and we shall visit you. When the chiefs went to see you you did not pay them much attention, so they coneluded that it was because you thought of us, the members of the progressive party, and they said so on their return tous; therefore we are going to visit you. Joe gave you a horse when you came, but he did not go to you (with the chiefs); and now he remembers his friend. Two Crows gave you a horse when you came (to see us), and now he remembers his friend. Big Elk gave you a horse ie you came, and now he remembers his friend. When you came, 1 Hupe¢a gave you a horse, and now, my friend, I remember it. Only we write our names and send to you. All your other friends to whom you gave (i. é., promised) horses will go to you in order to see their own (horses). I, Ta"wa"-gaxe jinga, wish you to tell my adopted children among the Yanktons that I have been sick, and that I came very near dying. If I live I will remember them, and I desire to see them. TAYNWAXGAXE-JINGA TO MIXGABU, A YANKTON. Céjazita", nistha, can’ge a™¢ai4-ma wan ‘gige’ qti ¢ingaf. Ga™ wigija"be From your my child, hor: ay those which are gone. And(so) Isee you, place, you gave me my own i , o ay , r . ree v , ka“ b¢a. Ada” edida™ ctéctéwa", nisiha, fe uda™qti a¢a‘i ti¢age katb¢éga™ I wish. There- what soever, my child, word very good you give you send I hope. fore to me hither Wagi" ‘ha uq¢é’qtei gian’ki¢a-ga. Paper very soon Shoal back to me. TRANSLATION. My child, all those horses which you gave me at your place, and which I brought away, are gone! So I wish to see you. Therefore, my child, 1 hope that you will send and give me very good words of any kind whatsoever. Send back a letter very auickly. MA*TCU-NA*BA TO PANYI-NAQPAOI. 689 MAXTCU-NAXYBA TO PANYI-NAQPAOI. arckaha, wiyiepa méga", waqi“ha ga™ cu¢éwiki¢é. Ca™ nikaci” ga My sister's son, my grand- likewise, paper 2 I cause to be taken And person child how to you. d‘tiba ta™ wate: qn i¢Mal oa qn’ £ oa hay at Aba Sq, fort} Q aro¢a™ ¢i¢ijal gag¢a™ ¢e ga” ¢al al, ana‘a", ede iwimaxe some nation your migrating to go wish they T have but Task you say, heard, cu¢éagé. Ki dna né-baji dite ci and‘a" ka™b¢a, wagaziqti ana‘a® Isend to you. And how yon donot perhaps again I hear it I wish, very straight T hear it many go ka™b¢a. Ki gan’yi nikagahi nankacé, ci dna na-baji cite ci wagazu I wish. And S58 then ange ye who are, again how you do not perhaps again _ str, San many go : wind‘ai ka™b¢a. Gan’yi angi ¢é¢uta" té wakéga té wagini anga¢ai I hear from I wish And then we from this the Biss the we recover we go you (time) hi. Usni té ékita® ¢ined taté. Neé tai té i”¢a-maji. Maja” ¢a® imaka Cold the as far as none shall You will go the IT am sad. Land the cheap (be). ckaxe ¢aa™nai té i”¢@a-maji. Gan’yi maja” ¢a" uda™ pahan’ga 1"ta® youmake youabandonit the Tam sad. And then land the good first now i¢apaha™. I?’ta® maja™ ¢a® wda” pahan’ga té i¢apaha", ada™ maja” ¢a* I knowit. Now land the good first the I know it, there- land the tore téqidgi¢e. Imc‘dge ut’af ¢a® wind‘a’i ka” b¢a. Ada™ uq¢é’qtci daze hcbe I prize mine. Old man en the T hear of you I wish. EHD very soon evening part died in ore nize yi, f¢age te. you when, you will please receive ‘send it hither. : NOTES. This letter was sent to Panyi-naqpaoi and his son, who were Otos. 689, 9. I*c‘age ut’ai ¢a", ete. An appeal to the patriotism of the Otos. “I wish to hear from you concerning the place where your old men (ancestors) have died (and where their bones lie).”. Do you prize it? Or have you lost all love for the land and its associations ? TRANSLATION My sister’s son and my grandchild, I have sent you a letter at any rate. I have heard that some persons of your nation wish to migrate to another country, and I send to you to ask you about it. I wish to hear how many of you are not going; I wish to hear the facts. And I wish to hear from you, O ye chiefs, how many of you are not going. And we, from this time forward, are progressing towards recovery from the sickness. By the time that the cold weather is over there will be none of it. Iam sad on account of your contemplated departure. I am displeased because you set lit- tle value on the land which you are abandoning. But I, for my part, now know that the land is the chief good thing (for us). I know now that the land is the best thing VOL V 12 690 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. for us, therefore I prize my country. I wish to hear from you what you think about the place in which your ancestors died. Therefore please send a letter very quickly, on the very evening of the LEA when you receive this letter. ICTAGABI TO HEQAGA SABE, MAGA, AND MAWATA®NA, YANKTON AGENCY, DAKOTA PE RRIMOR S79: Ca® zani wib¢aha™i ha, nikaci”ga nankacé. Ki ca” a™ba¢é’qtei Now all I petition you (pl.) 7 person ye who are. And atany this very day rate iA yi =) Ren oD sey D! = ka®’t = uagaca ka b¢éga ga wija bai Ka oa. (hé- ma cin’ gajin’e ga-mMa I travel I hope as I see you (pl.) I wish. These the anilaren wadaxe-ma awdgija™ be ka™b¢a ha. Nan‘de isa*¢in’ge. Ce Sindé g¢ecka those whomImade Isee them, my I wish s Heart canse of gladness I That Tail Spotted own have none. ata” oi” éitte &€ Pwi’¢ i¢ai-ga. Gaga" cta”be yi uq¢é’qtci ékita™ how far sits perhaps that to tell me send ye! That (ev. you seeit when very soon simulta- ob.) neously i” baxtii-ga. 1 write ye to me. NOTE. Icta¢abi was an Omaha; Heqaga sabe and Maca®™ were Ponkas, refugees among the Yanktons; and Mawata"na was a Yankton. TRANSLATION. Now I petition to you all, O ye Indians! And as [ hope to start on a journey this very day, I wish to see you. I wish to see those persons (Yanktons) whom I have regarded as wy children. I have nothing to make me glad. I wish you to send and tell me how far distant Spotted Tail and his people are dwelling (from yeu?). When you see this letter, do not let any time pass before you write to me. yE-MP-WA‘U, A PONKA WOMAN, TO HER DAUGHTER, MARY NAPECA, AT SANTEE AGENCY, NEBRASKA. (fiadi ¢ida™ be gar¢éde t’ée hé. Wagqa-naji® ¢ida”be ga” ¢ai. I*c‘dge Your to see you aane d, but heis Waga-najin to see you wished. Old man father dead ~ / < tL Ps, ie = a es tée hé. Qijan’ge ¢ida”be gar¢éde, ¢ici‘e wa¢ita™ éga”, anga¢a-baji is dead : Your younger to see you wished, but, your sister's works as, we do not go sister husband tan’gata®. Ma¢adi ¢iyan’ge nijinga wi ida¢dde, git’ee he’. Céya té we shall. Last winter your younger boy one gave birth to, heisdead . Yonder’ the sister but, to her of. ce never 1 a an ks ea” ¢ingé ¢anaji", cin’gajin’ga ¢anka e‘a™ ¢ingé naji” yi, awana‘a” nothing being the youstand, child theones nothing the matter they if, I hear of them matter who stand ka™b¢a. Qisan’ga aka na"ba” indé-wagixe g¢i¢ai he. Ie‘dge aka I wish. Your younger the twice “ face-picture ”’ has sent a Old man the brother (sub.) it back (sub.) gajayita" wakéga a-f. té ca™’ca™ it’e hé. Uan ¢ingé ¢ijan’ge aka ¢ida™ be from that un- aick he was the continuing died . For no reason your younger a to see you seen place coming from it sister (sub. > ga” ¢al. wishes. LOUIS SANSSOUCI TO HANGA-CENU. 691 NOTES. This is one of the few letters dictated to the author by women. 690, 6. Piadi probably refers to Hexapa, mentioned by Jabe ska in his letter, p. 477. 690, 7. Pijaiige, see 477, 3. TRANSLATION. Your father wished to see you (again), but he died (without seeing you). Wagqa- naji® wished to see you. The venerable man is dead. Your younger sister wishes to see you, but her husband is working, and so we will not go away. Last winter your younger sister gave birth to a boy, but he died. I wish to hear whether you and the children, in yonder land, are well and happy. Your younger brother has sent his picture back twice. The old man was illas he came from that land (Indian Territory 2), and, as the illness continued, it killed him. In vain does your younger sister wish to see you. LOUIS SANSSOUCI TO HANGA-CENU. Wagqi"ha gia ¢aki¢é ¢a" off. Wind‘a™ té vida" ha. (anja ma"ni™ Paper you have sent the has re- Thear from the good c You live you walk back to me turned. you té ta” ware¢a”-ma gi'¢ai, ¢ind‘a"i yi, nain’de giuda™i. Tuga agai ké the the gentes are glad, they hear when, heart good for them. News you give the from you. me u¢agaca™ ma"ni™ ké‘ya tida"qti mani” té ctl yi, ci piiiji te et Mwi™ ¢a- you travel you walk to the very good youwalk the too when again bad the too you have not naji. Ki uda® mani” yi, wi" ¢and yi, ci piiji yicté MwiY¢and yi, told And good you walk if, you tell me if, again bad even if you tell me if, me. i“uda® téitte. Edi yi, ta” watg¢a’’-ma ¢éma udwagtb¢a té. Ucka™ at- goodfor it may be. In that case, the gentes these I wiil tell it to them. Deed you me ¢a”¢awa™xe té uwib¢a ta minke. Nikaci’ ga uma™¢inka ¢énaqtei t’e-ma asked me about the 1 will tell to you. People season only this those who died wa¢ana‘a® cka™na té uwib¢a ta minke. Wactce, Gahige isan’ga; Mat- you hear about you wish the I will tell it to you. Wacuce, Gahige his younger Two them brother; teu-na”ba isan’ga, Cuya-ma™¢i"; qa¢i’-gahige iin’ge, Heqiga-jin’ga; Grizzly bears es younger, Cuya-mar¢i" ; Pawnee-Chief his son, Little-Elk ; rother, Wagqa-naji" isan’ga, Dyuhabi; gahé-yip‘é, Ma*tet-na™ba iya" cka; Weéjircte Wagqa-naji® his younger Tyuhabi; dahe-jap‘é, Ma*ten-na*ba his sister's Wejitcte brother, son ; akaédi Nimaha" iyin’ge, He-sndya; I"tean’ga¢a, Ma*tet-na™ba isan’ga; in the Nemaha his son, He snaja; Intcatga¢a, Ma*tcu-na"ba his younger brother ; G¢eda”-naji® aha", Wac‘aji, Ictasanda akddi, Kidahanu ijin’ge; Cyt- Standing Hawk hisbrother- Wae‘aji, Ictasanda in the, Kidahanu “his son ; Prairie- in-law, 3 692 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. jinga ijin’ge, Mangé¢-jin’ga; pé-¢ixi" ijin’ge; géde-gahi ijan’ge, ya" ze- chicken his son, Small-Breast ; Buttalo Rib his son; Fire Chief his danghter, ya"ze- han’ga igdq¢a"; Sfyanga igdq¢a; Man’g¢i¢a" igaq¢a", Ma*tet-xi ijan’ge ; hanga his wife; Big Foot his wife; Mang¢i¢a® his wife, Ma*tcuxi his daughter ; Wactice ijan’ge na” ké; Watiqtawa¢é igdaq¢a®; Ickaddbi iyicpa; qa-sa"- Wacuce his grown the Lover his wife; Ickadabi his grand- Pasa”- daughter (reel. child; ob.); naji" ipicpa; Cage-diba ijan’ge; He-sa”nida ijan’ge ; Kawaha ijan’ge ; najia his grand- Cage-duba his daughter; Horn-on-one-side his daughter; Kawaha his daughter ; child; Ta’ watgaxe i"c'dge iyticpa: Wactce ijin’ge, H’di-d-i-naji"’; ki Pan‘ka Village-maker old man his arene Wacuce his son, Edi-a-i-naji"; and Ponka child; ic‘age, He-xdpa te. lu¢a Aji tia” ¢a™ja, uwib¢a-maji ta minke old man, Scabby-Horn dead. News other exists though, "LT will not tell you. Wag¢ana‘a" cka™na xf, pi waqi™ha f¢a-ga. Ma"tet-na”ba aké wabaji" vou hear about you wish if, anew paper send hither. Two Grizzly bears the message them (sub.) gts cugé¢ai: Wagi”ha na™ba” cu¢éwiki¢é ¢a™ g¢ia” ¢aki¢aji-na’, dda* this sends to you: Paper twice I have sent it to (see you have not sentit usn- there- you by some one note) back to me by ally, fore some one , / , MSs , (P *n/ {¢a"ba” ag¢éna‘a™ji taté. Uda"gti ma™b¢i”’. & second you shall not listen to it. Very good I walk. time (—ever) NOTES. Louis Sanssouci is the son of an Omaha mother. Haftga-cenu was an Omaha staying at the Pawnee Agency. 691, 3. técti . . . t& cti(F’s reading); but W. gave, ida"qti mani” té/cti ci piiji té/eti m@wir’¢anaji. 692, 7. ¢a", intended for ¢a%ja, though, which makes sense. TRANSLATION. The letter which you sent me hascome. It is good for me to hear from you. The gentes rejoice because you continue alive; they are happy to hear from you. When you gave me the news concerning your travels, you did not tell me whether you had been very prosperous or unfortunate. You ought to tell me if you are doing well, and even if you are not prospering. In that case, I will tell it to these gentes. I will tell you the thing about which you asked me. You wish to hear about those (Omahas) who have died only during this year. I will tell you. (Their names are as follows:) Wacuce, Gahige’s younger brother; Cuya-ma"¢i", Yellow Smoke’s younger brother;, Little Elk, Pawnee Chief’s son; Iyuhabi, Waqa-naji’s younger brother; gahe-yap‘é, Yellow Smoke’s sister’s son; He-snata, Nemaha’s son, of the Elk gens; I*tcanga¢a, Yellow Smoke’s younger brother; Standing Hawk’s brother-in-law, Wac‘aji, of the Ictasanda gens, and son of Kidahanu; Prairie Chicken’s son, Small Breast; Buffalo Rib’s son; Fire Chief’s daughter, the wife of yyaze hanga (or Henry Blackbird); Big Foot’s wife; Maig¢i¢a™’s wife, the daughter of Mateu-xi; Wacuce’s grown daughter; Lover's wife; Ickadabi’s grandchild; ga-sa®-naji’s grandchild; Four Hoof’s daughter; ) } ; \ CA®TA’.JINGA TO T. L. GILLINGHAM. 693 Horn-on-one-side’s daughter; Kawaha’s daughter; the grandchild of the elder Village- maker; Wacuce’s son, Edi-ai-naji®; and the Ponka old man, Hexapa. There is other news, but I will not tell you. If you wish to hear it, send a letter again. Yellow Smoke sends you this message: I have sent you two letters, but you have not replied; therefore you shall not hear from me again. Iam doing very well. CA®TA*®-JINGA TO T. L. GILLINGHAM. Ca” ta*-jin'ga wa¢ita™ ¢écka"na té wa¢ita’qti. Na™za te ¢a™ cti Little Wolf to work you wished for the he has worked Fence field the too him very hard. ~ Te § E ie 7s ae, , dnasé. Ki éga™ tida" ¢écka"na téga™ gixe. Ki éga" gaxe éde ¢éama he has And so good you wished like the he has And 80 hehas but these fenced in. for him done. done (sub.) , eet ;, . / ’; . ww « . a € Uma™ha™ ama piaji-na" gidxai-na™ ca” ca". U'e-i¢dnasé ¢icé¢ati; can’- 3 Omahas the (pl. bad only havedone usn- always. Fence of a field they have the sub.) to him ally pulled to pieces ; OFZ TAA TG = Y . tL 4 . =; of . ge-ma ¢atéwaki¢e-na”i te eya ¢an’di. Gan’ yi wawéci ‘{-baji-na™i, 7’ ¢aji qti- horses they havecaused usu- field his inthe. And then - pay they have contin- very sad he them to eat ally not given ually, (has been) . 4 rie Shay . aay es oF, fe / Zaye Ce oe r , as na”i. Kskana fe ¢i¢fja wi ¢aka" f¢age ka” b¢a. IR¢adi ¢inké ui¢ f¢a-ga. usu- Oh that word your youhelpme yousend I wish. His the one to tell send ally. hither father who tohim hither. eas , ys Orr 2a [0 , rye Oy, . . pee A Gan’yi dahucige ¢a™ja i¢adi¢ai aka wa¢ita"-baji-na™i, Ada® i’ ¢a-maji-na’- 6 Andthen Tinsistonit though agent the does not deal with usn- there- Tam sad usu- (sub.) them (as offenders) ally, fore ally k . . . aq Nao S L , ] 9 ma”. Ada” fe ¢i¢fja wi" ¢aka" i¢a¢é ka” b¢a. Gan’yi, kagéha, “ Wandg¢e Tam. There- word your youhelpme yousend I wish. And then, my friend, Domestic ani- fore hither mal wa¢in-ga,” ecé ga” éga® daixe éde, g¢éba-cadé wab¢i" éde, ¢éama i” ma?- keep them, you as 30 IT have but, sixty Ihadthem but, these they stole said it done (sub.) . . J to) are my near he attends to T hope. Standing Grizzly he too that I give to Oto kindred them bear (ob.) you (pl.). ¢ankadi angag¢i. té’di can’ge diba waoni" ¢aki-bi, ¢€ ti¢ai ha, é té Ba- to the (pl.) we came when horse four you had reached there that they 0 said Bat- bac again with them, it sent was said, hither dize aka. Ki wi"a”wajata" can’ge-ma wa¢i" ki éte Mwi™¢a i¢a- ga hi, tiste the And whence the fom they reached if to tell me send (sub.) there again with hither them Gahige. Gahige. NOTES. The writer refused to send this letter to the Indian Territory, so Unaji*-skai applied to some one else to act as his amanuensis. Unaji®-ska was a son of Cahie¢a, a Yankton who was adopted by the Ponkas. This letter was sent to the Ponka Gahige. 706, 3. Ca® cka™ wab¢ipi-maji, etc. Addressed to the Ponka agent, Mr. White- man. At first Unaji"-ska dictated the following: Ca® ucka™ wab¢ipi-maji/-qti-ma™ di ¢aja, And although I did the tribe (2) a great wrong by (or, before) returning (to the Omahas). But on reflection, as this had “a bad meaning” (sic), he changed it. 706, 7. Cema uawakiji-ma. The idea of suckling is implied here in this phrase (from uji, to fill with a liquid or many small objects), in other cases it refers to those who suck the breast together. The messages to Gahige were resumed in this line. 706, 8. Nanka-t‘a"i, a name of Gacudi¢a", Wa¢idazé, “ Fire-shaker,” a shaman in 1871, but now a leader of the civilization partyin the tribe. 706, 9. Cahie¢a, the real father of Unaji®-ska. 706, 11. Badize, Battiste Barnaby, the Ponka interpreter. UNACDI-SKA TO WES‘A-,ANGA. 707 TRANSLATION. I have returned. As I have come back to the Omahas, they have condoled with me because they pity me. I have returned to Joe’s (lodge), and there I stay. He treats me very kindly, and I eat excellent food. Those Dakotas have come, it is said, to the Winnebago Reservation. I have not yet seen them. I will see them to-morrow or at some future day. Isuffered exceedingly before I returned here (or, as I returned to this place). I have not yet returned to the Yankton Reservation because the horses are weary. And, moreover, I have not yet begun to have enough of intercourse with the people here. I send to tell you, in order that you (pl.) may know that I have returned here. It has been very good for me merely to breathe the air (with a sense of freedom) since I have come here. The Omahas continue just as they were when we saw them formerly. They are prospering, as they have sown their wheat. And no matter how I get along here, I continue to think of you all. And when I returned here I beheld the white people who are neighbors to the Omahas, and these white people are doing very well. Although you reckoned that I was returning hither on account of bad deeds which I had done, it was not so. I did that because I wished to live. As I hoped to live for a number of years to come, I fled (from Indian Territory). I feared to encounter the sickness. I hope that you will have great pity on those (Indians) whom you continue to keep. I refer to you, O agent! I hope that you will tell them exactly what I speak. . . . Attend to those who are my near kindred, my mothers, the ones who gave me birth. I hope to see them all together. I hope that Has.a-back will likewise attend to those who are my near kindred. I make a similar request of Cheyenne, my father. I give this message to you (whom I have named?) and also to Standing Bear. Battiste has said that word has been sent hither that when we came back hither from the Otos, you returned there (the Ponka Agency ?) with four horses. O Gahige, send and tell me where they obtained those horses which they took home (to the Ponkas). UNAJIX-SKA TO WES‘A-,ANGA. A™ba ¢é¢u Caa™ ama waja”be ha, Umdéha fi ¢an’di. A da"bai Day here Dakota oie (ol I saw them Omaha village in the. They saw me subj.) éoa™ v‘ean¢éeqti in’kati ha. I“¢a-maéji tedibe. ‘“Awddi né- Oe g q § as . they pitied me ex- they con- am sad- very. Where you went as ceedingly doled with me » pase Pee my ate Ete Ce omens nin’de waqpani- wa¢d¢ai, xedwad¢a¢ai,” i*¢in gar ¢eama. Qiamja, ‘“Wanace, anxious you (pl.) have you (pl.) have made they said the these. Though, Policemen, made us us weep, foregoing to me . . — . x , —/ OS , : s i ¢ie a” warja”i,” ehé. “Jingdaqtci ¢e-ma gi ¢ajiwagagal, wandice-macé.” Ca” you are they whocaused I said. Verysmall theseones you have made them O ye policemen ? Yet me the trouble, (pl. ob.) sad, licka® whg¢a ké nain’de wha iga”a¢é ¢a™ ean’kiga™i ha, of ¢a-baji qtia™ 1. deed TI suffer the heart my I put it in the they were like : they were very sad. (coll) (ob.) me 12 15 18 708 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. Umaha amd edabe niin‘de ¢kiga”qtia”i ¢a”ja, e‘a” taté a%¢a™baha™ji. Omaha the (pl. also heart they a very similar though, what shall we two do not knowit. sub.) the mat- (be) ter . , . y / E uwib¢a cu¢éag¢ai. E‘a” ckaxai gé watete wi"Aqtei éga" uythai-ga. That Itell you I send to yon. How you do the _ at least this just one follow it for scattered one time yourselves. (in an. obj.) Kga" né eti ukit gi¢ajiwa¢a¢é-na™i. Beégi¢é’qti éde ca” ¢a‘é¢i¢e tedbe- So only too nation you have usually made them Atotalstranger but yet they pitied very [See note. ] sad. you na™i. Ké, i”teqi éga* céhe. Ci gaté uya”ha. Ci ga” uwib¢a cu¢éagai. usually. Come! hard for as ry Again that apart. Again so Itellyou I-send to you. me that. Ceta™ udgaca™ taté hfaji, itaxaja¢ica" ké Eq ke’ etéwa™ ca nin‘de That far I travel shall ithasnot towardsthe head _ the There the notwith- yet heart reached, ofthe river (lg. ob.). (ig.ob.) standing ké éga™ tait eb¢éga". Eqya ama fe ejyaf gé and‘a® ¢a™ja, écti fe f=) to) , the so shall I think. There the(pl. word their the I hear it thongh, they word (coll. ?) sub.) (pl. ob.) too uya” adiqtia” wi a¢i*heya¢ica™ ¢a™ja, “ Win'kéqtia”i Aha” eb¢éga™. Ata™ are altogether at one I towards me asI though, They have spoken ! (in so- I think. When side moye the full truth liloguy) éi¢apaha® yi’, waqi”ha wi” cuhi ete ha cf. Hat-ha! Waqi”ha wi” ingéxai til know about it (in paper one it may . again. Well! Paper one they make it future). reaches it for me you ee Tees -ii! oe ¢a‘ea™ ¢a¢é’qti ka"b¢éga™ té-na® ca™ ca™qti b¢i™. you pity me greatly I hoped usually Ireally continue. Cé pi té edéda® mi”-maji ha. Wagqi”ha b¢éyaqtci mi” ag¢i ha. Ki That I the what I did not wear : Paper (or calico) very thin Iwore Icame And reached as a robe asarobe back niaci”ga-ma ¢éé ha, ¢d‘ea”¢ai té igadi¢ai udarqti anga¢i¢i” éska™ b¢éga® the people said . they pitied me the agent very good we had you I thought that it ¢a™cti. The ha, i¢act-a"¢a¢ éga® ha, ¢a“ja edada® té ni‘a éga® éga®™ Aha? formerly That you, my friend, ae F though what the you Sone: so ! (in so- (not now). is it have made ine what failedat what liloquy) asharoud eb¢éga" hi. Wag¢ack ud¢aket‘a™ yi’, tida™ i¢d ipaha” téite eb¢éga®. I think that - You try you acquire it if, good I know it might (in I think that. past) Wa¢acka” te¢a™ja, ni‘a téha, eb¢éga. Ki céama ca™-na® we¢éwacka™-na® You tried phon epian pon ABs I think. And those atanyrate(?) you make efforts for them the past, ailec Y ea™ca" ka™b¢éga™. I¢adi¢ai ‘a qtia’¢igi¢égai ¢a™cti. Inddd tida® always T hope. Agent we repinipd seep our own, in the past. What good too highly we¢éckaxe té wiecté i¢dpaha™-maji ha (fa™ja eddda® wi” éwa™ té’cté you made forus the Iformy I do not know about = Though what one is causing the part it trouble , hae ° °u , eo ie . a éga™ aha™ eb¢éga". Ca™ fe ahigi’qti wii taté cté ci iteqi éga™ ha. s (in I think. Yet word verymany Igive shall even again hardfor some- thought) you me what / = / 2 Ne Ul Céna ga” ca” i¢de té, ga” ¢and‘a® t eb¢éga®, éga" ga” uwib¢a Enough so an any Ihave the, so youhearit will I think, so thus T tell you rate spoken i¢adi¢ai-a! Géatega™ edna, i¢ddi¢af-i! Gan’yi nfiaci”ea wi’ te o¢i¢a- t=) ’ > O agent! Thas enough, O agent! And then person one died yon have A sent “on UNAJI-SKA TO WES‘A-7ANGA. 709 ¢af- de i¢&paha®-maji ha. Waniace jan‘ga t’¢ée ha ecai- de i¢apaha"-maji ha. back when Ido not know him c Policeman large isdead . yout when Ido not know him sail As r / w , *n/ , y. , w Al E ¢tita” and‘a” ka b¢a ha. Ca” nfaci™ga ¢atiai té ¢ wagazu ti a. EK That straight I hear it I wish 4 Now person you neve the that correct has ? That died come Wanace yan’ga endqtci a¢iqtde ha. Niaci’ga e¢ébahiwi" ki &’di g¢¢éba-sata” Policeman large that only not plain 3 Person one hundred and be- fifty sides Oy ce . / ~ , oe: , A . ms r ki &di na”ba ¢at’ai té wagazu i¢dpaha” ag¢i. Agahadi ci ana ¢at’al and besides two you died the straight I knew it I came Besides again how you have back. many died U , SST aae , Ss Sie =: c : té cé wa¢awa baxti af if¢di-ga. Ga gdtcega™ ha, We's‘a-yan’ga i¢adi¢ai the that counting writing give send to me. And thus it is 2 Big Snake agent them to me e¢a” ba. he too. £ : NOTES. Wési-janga or Uhaiige-ja® (see 638) was then on the Ponka reservation in the Indian Territory. 708, 3. Ega" nécti. F. said that it should be, “ Bga®-na™ cti.” The author in- ferred from analogy that the full form was “ Hga"-na® écti,” only in that manner those too (obj. of some action), confirmed by W. The idea is that the Ponkas, by contin- uing divided, not only brought trouble on themselves, but in that very course of ac- tion they made the neighboring tribes of Indian sad. 708, 6. tait eb¢ega*, in full, taite eb¢ega”. 708, 11. niacitga-ma eé hi (=egi¢ari ha, fide W., but prob. needs modification), where we would expect to find, “ niaci“ga ama ai ha.” fo 708, 12. Hé ha, may be intended for ‘That is it.” Otherwise its connection with the rest of the text is not clear. 708, 13. Wa¢ack, in full, wa¢acka®”, as in line 14. 708, 15. Indad, in full, Indada*. 708, 18. ¢ana‘a" t eb¢ega”, 7. e. ¢apa‘a™ te eb¢ega”. 709, 1 Wanace-jatga, his Indian names were Waji*agahiga (Bird Chief) and Agitcita (a Ponka modification of the Dakota, Aki¢ita, Soldier or Policeman. On the agency roll he was recorded as “ Big Soldier,” of which Wanace janga is the translation. TRANSLATION. On this day I have seen the Yanktons at the Omaha village. “When they saw me they pitied me exceedingly, and condoled with me, as I was very sad. These said to me, “ Your departure to another place has made us very anxious and has caused us to weep, just as if we were children.” ButI said, ‘O policemen, you are to blame for this trouble which I have. O ye policemen, you have caused these youngest ones (or, children) to be sorrowful.” Yet they, being like me, were very sad when they heard the things which I had suffered and had treasured up in my heart. The Omahas have hearts just like those of the Yanktons, but we do not yet know how it shall result (i. e., what the Omahas and their agent shall decide with reference to us). I send to tell you that. Let all of you make up your minds for this once, at least, to do but one thing. You have been making the nations sad by the course which you 710 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. have been pursuing. You have been total strangers, but they have shown great kindness to you. Well, I say that, though it is somewhat hard for me (to speak thus). And that is a different subject about which I send to tell you. The time for me to travel towards the north (or, up the Missouri Rk. to the Yanktons) has not yet eome. I think that even over there their hearts will resemble those of the Omahas and the visiting Dakotas. Though I understand their language, their words, too, are not ex- actly in harmony with mine, yet I think that they speak the very truth! When I know about it I will be apt to send you a letter again. Well, O agent, I wish them to send me a letter! I have been continually hoping that you would pity me exceedingly. When I left the place where you are I wore no comfortable robe; I came here with only a very thin piece of cotton cloth on me. And the people said that they pitied me, so I thought at one time (but I do not think so now) that we had in you avery good agent! Thatisit. Though you have made me somewhat ashamed, I think that you have failed in some endeavor. Had you tried till you acquired it I think that I might have known what was good. You did make the effort, but I think that perhaps you failed. Now, I hope that you will exert your- self in behalf of those still under your care. We did think heretofore that we were very fortunate in having you for our agent. But what good thing have you done for us I, for my part, do not know. Although I think that one thing has been caus- ing the trouble. Now, it is hard for me to give you very many words. I have spoken enough, and I think that you will understand it, so I tell you, O agent! This is sufficient, O agent! You have sent us words that one man has died, but I do not knowhim. You say that Big Soldier has died, but I do not know him (by that name). I wish to under- stand it thoroughly. Has the account of the deaths of your people come in a correct form? Only the name of Big Soldier is not plain. When I returned here I knew about the deaths of one hundred and fifty-two of your people. I wish you to count those who have died in addition (to the first) and write me an account. Thus it is, O Big Snake, and you, O agent! LION TO BATTISTE DEROIN. December 12, 1878. Wabiag¢eze tia ¢aki¢é ¢a™ b¢izeé a”ba¢é. Wabig¢eze b¢izé té'di Letter you have sent the Ihave to-day. Letter I have when hither to me (ob.) received it received it nin’de i°¢i™uda™-qti-ma™. Nikaci”ga wana™ju-madi éde nikaci”ga wi” heart Thad it very good for me. People among the threshers but people one na'tai ¢a™ja, ceta” nija ja”. I¢apaha’-maji nija técté, t’é técté killed by though, so far alive lies. I do not know it whether he will whether he will the machine live, _ die i¢ipaha"-maji. Tjaje té Kické isan’ga, Ma*teti-da ¢. Pfiji té hégaji gaxai T do not know.» ‘His the Kicke his younger Mateu-pa that. Bad the nota wasmade name brother, little jiga b¢tiga. Weénatju ak éwat, body whole. Threshing- the caused it. machine (sub.) LION TO BATTISTE DEROIN. 711 Hau. Nikagahi nankacé, idski ninke’cé, waddcka™ ka™b¢éga™ Ada™ 1 Ye who are chiefs, inter- you who are, you make an T hope there- preter effort fore uckuda" wa¢ayicka” ka™b¢a. Wa¢dcka™ td-bi ehé té, cin’gajin’ga to aa good you exe your- I wish. That you are to persevere Isaid the, child eeds selves it wabig¢eze A¢adewa¢aki¢e ehé té, € Awake. Nikaciga dna ni” éi"te book you cause them toread Isaid the, that I mean it. People how you it may it many are be qgan’de wa¢acka® ¢ita”i-ga. Wa¢dcka™ ta-bi ehé té, & dwake. Eskana ground you persevere work ye! That you are to persevere Isaid the, that I mean. Ob that ci i¢adi¢ai ¢inké cé da™be¢aki¢ai ka™b¢éga". Wabdg¢eze ¢a” udikati again agent the one that you cause him to I hope. Letter the it helps you who see it (ob ) ka*b¢éga", wacka™ ka’ b¢a. LT hope, he makes I wish. an effort Hau. Nikaci”ga céma ama-mé edida® edai etéctéwa™ fa-bajfi-git, 1 Person those the others what they soever do not speak, say what wada™ba-bajfi-ga. Nikaci’ga cé¢u the g¢i ¢i” Pan‘ka nikagahi ¢inké ¢é¢u do not look at them. Person yonder passed he who Ponka chief the one here was re- who turning o¢{f ha. Gedi té’di ya”be té’di i’ ¢a-maji éde ceta™ udkia-maji wAgazu. to) J ‘ f=) has . Here- when Isawhim when I was sad but so far Thave notspoken _ straight. returned turned to him Uma™ha® i¢adi¢at aka nikagahi edabe wigazu gidxai tédihi yi, ¢and‘a® taité, Omaha agent the chief also straight theymake whenitshall — you shall hear it, (sub.) for him reach, nikagdhi nankacé, Wa¢utida nankacé, iéska’ ninke’cé edabe. ye who are chiefs, ye who are Otos, you who are the in- also. terpreter Hau. Ucka® wiwfja té ¢and‘a® tai, wé¢ig¢a™ wiwija té. Nikaci” ga 1 Deed my the ye will hear it, decision my the. Indian uké¢i® ikégeawd¢a-maéji hi; ¢indgtci ikAgewi¢ai. Caa™” ama atfi éde common I do not have them for my 6 you only: I have you for Dakota the(pl. have but friends friends. (sub.) come : Oo fs : fou fr (aa) Ln - fale, : udwakia-maji. Uawakia-maji ag¢ai. IkAgeawd¢a-maji ehé té. Nikagadhi I did not speak to them. Idid not speak to they went I did not have them for Isaid the. Chief them back. friends esas 4 eas na. 4 A: n iki , rA ha-mm 4aiy 4 ki 447 EK 4 ] ama 1 C6 age ama @ e@Wal; ada 1KAQeaW a¢a-Majl, Wawa K1a-Maji. naqtel the(pl. oldman the(pl. that caused it; there- I did not have them for I did not speak to They only sub.) sub.) fore friends, them. ikagewa¢é ga” ¢ai té i"c‘age ama, e-na™i nikagdhi amé. Ca™ nikaci”ga tohavethem for wished the oldman the(pl. they only chief the (pl. And person friends sub.), sub.). ¢ema waqe-ma, maja™ ¢é¢u naji”-ma zani ikageawade hi. Ca™ ucktida'qti these the white land here those who all I have them for 7 And doing very good (pl. ob.) people, staud friends deeds ké edada® i¢ayidaxe pahan’gadita" ké égija" ka™b¢aqti. Piiiji té yi, ¢f the what Idid for myself from the first the youdo Istrongly desire. Bad will if, you that ckaxa-baji wika"b¢ai. Cin’gajin’ga ¢a‘Cwatagi¢d-ba wa¢ita® wacka™i-ga. you do it not I wish for you Child do pity them your and to work persevere ye ! (pl.)- own (pl.) 12 Ns) 712 THE (@EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. Edi yi, Wakan’da aka ¢a‘é¢i¢e taf, ki eddda™ ctécté ida" ¢igaxe taf. Ca™ In that case, God the will pity you, and what soever good will do for you. And awa" ¢akié wabag¢eze ti¢agé té nan’de i”ud éga", éskana tida*qti ma*ni™ you spoke to me letter you sont the heart fot as, oh that very good you walk hither or me ka"b¢éga". Nikaci”ga cé¢anka g¢adimaja a¢é ga’ ¢a ¢anka égi¢a®-bajfi-ga. I hope. Person those across _ togo theones who wishit do not say anything to (them) FA aleny p pase , mised sre w, / fe te s. Us / Kegi¢éga® égice tai. Kgi¢a®-bajfi-ga. Ca wicti a"wa™qpani ¢a™ja, ca” Beware you say lest. Say it not to (them). And I too Iam poor though, yet to wa¢ita’ té ¢é uda™ ha. Ké, céna uwib¢a cu¢éagai. towork the that good Come, enough Itell you Isend to you. NOTE. 710, 5. Wena®ju ax ewa"i: ak a contraction of aka. TRANSLATION. I have received to-day the letter that yousent me. It made me very glad. Among the men who have been threshing there is one who has been severely injured by the machine, but he is still alive. Ido not know whether he must die, or whether he can live. He is the younger brother of Kicke, and his name is Ma*tcu-da. His whole body is in a shocking condition. It was caused by the threshing-machine. O ye chiefs, and you interpreter! I hope that you may make an effort, therefore I wish you to exert yourselves in doing good actions. When I say that you should persevere I refer to what I said about your causing your children to be educated. As many men as there are among you I exhort: Per- severe in working the ground! I mean that when I say, ‘“‘ Persevere.” I hope that you will let your agent see this letter. I hope that the letter may aid you, and I wish him (the agent) to persevere. No matter what those other Indians say, do not speak, do not look at them. The man who passed yonder where you are on his way back hither (I mean), the Ponka chief, has returned here. I was sad when I saw him after his return, but I have not yet had a chance to talk to him. When the Omaha agent and the chiefs shall have made a decision in his favor you shall hear it, O ye chiefs, ye Otos, and you also, O interpreter ! You shall hear of my acts and of my plans. I do not regard the majority of Indians as my friends; I have none but you for my friends. The Yanktons came here, but I did not speak to them. They went back without my speaking to them. I have said that I did not regard them as my friends. The old men, the chiefs, are to blame for this; therefore I did not regard them as friends I did not speak to them. The old men wished to be the only ones to have them for friends; they alone are chiefs. I regard as my friends all these white people who occupy the land. And what very good deeds I have done for myself from the first, I strongly wish you to imitate. If anything should be bad I would not wish you to do it. Pity (7.e., be kind to, or do what is for the good of) your children, and persevere in working. In that case God will be kind to you and will do for you something or qAGP-NA*PAJI TO HEQAKA-MANI AND OTHERS. 113 other which is good. As I am glad because you sent a letter and spoke to me, I hope that you may continue to be very prosperous! Do not say anything to those Indians who wish to go south! Beware lest you say (anything) tothem! Say nothing to them! And though I, too, am poor, the work (which I have) is good. Well, I have told you enough. ; GAQGP-NA*PAJI TO HEQAKA-MANI, ICTA-JAXJA®, AND PTE- WAKA®-INAJL®. December 21, 1878. Nikagdhi-maé, kagéha, ticka" wéepaha"™ i"¢iga™¢ai éga"™ cea’ ¢a-bajii The chief (pl. obj.), my friend, deed you knew us we desired for “as we paid no atten- you tion to it ha, ¢aki¢ag¢ai te’di. I'’ta" wé¢a-bajii, Ki ¢aki¢ag¢at te’di i’ta® wépibajii. 3 you had gone when. Now we are sad. And you had gone when now bad for us (un- back back fortunate). Ga waqi"ha cu¢éa¢é ¢a”ja, éskana fe wda*qti wigina‘a™i ka b¢a. That paper I send to you though, oh that word very good I hear from you, I wish. my own (pl.) Ug¢e’qti waqi“ha ia”¢aki¢é te. Ca” éskana fe udaqti wind‘a% Very soon paper you send hither will. And oh that word very good T hear from to me you, (pl.) . / . ry . ene ka*b¢éga". Nikaci"’ga d‘iba uya™h a™¢i” weacpaha”i; uya™ha a"ma™ ¢i"i. I hope. Person some apartfrom we are you know us; apart from we walk. the rest the rest : = =i fs ow Benes su 5 2 v iskié uya”h angata” an’guiha-baji. Cea” ¢i¢a-baji’qti ¢ag¢ai, ki wa¢até All to- apart we who we do not follow them. We disregarded you alto- you went and food gether stand gether back, Nave: hassla4s pee AG Thao an¢fi-baji'qti ¢ag¢at wépi-baji. we gave you none you went bad for us. at all back NOTES. The writer gives his reason for slighting his Yankton visitors. The apparent want of hospitality was not owing to a dislike for the Yunktons. The latter were the guests of the Omaha chiefs, but the chiefs and the progressive Omahas would not work in unison. The progressive men did nothing because they wished the visitors to find out the real intentions of the chiefs. 718, 5. uya"h an¢ir, in full, uyatha ar¢ir. TRANSLATION. My friends, we did nothing prior to your departure, because we wished you to find out the ways (07, minds, etc.) of the (Omaha) chiefs. Now we are sad. And we are sad now on account of your having gone home. Though I send this letter to you, I hope that I may hear very good words from you. Please send me a letter very soon. I hope that I may hear very good words from you. You know about us that we are some Indians who walk apart from the rest; we continue apart from them. All we who stand apart from them do not follow them. We are sad because we did not pay any attention to you before you left, allowing you to depart without giving you any food at all! 714 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. MAXTCU-NA*SBA TO MATO-MAZA, A YANKTON. Ca™ ¢itiga" méga" wib¢aha® cu¢éa¢ée tai minké. Nikaci” ga ama ¢éama And your grand- like- I pray to you I will send to you (pl.). Person the (pl. these father wise sub.) Heqika-mani d‘iba jiwag¢e ti-ma i wijaqti tii ha. Wadate dida® b¢até Walking Elk some — those with whom he house my own genae Food what Late came ither wa" da" judwag¢éga", wadate ¢acta” cug¢ai. Ca” udg¢acige tai minke. together “it having been with food finished eat- they went And I will complain of my own (tribe). them, ing it back to you. I” ¢a-maji udg¢a ta minke. Uma™ha™ ama ¢éama nfkagdéhi ama eénujin’ga Iam displeased I will tell of my own. Omahas the (pl. —_— these chief the (pl. young men sub.) sub.) ama edabe, “Ké, twa‘ii-gi,” ehé yi, wacta-baji a” ¢i"-na" ma¢i™i, dda® the (pl. also, Come, give ye foodto Isaid when, notsparing them havingme they walked, there- sub.) them, (articles of food) fore uma” ¢inka wi™ i™¢a-maji taté eb¢éga". Ca™ dda™ ¢éama Uma™ha™ ama season one T shall be displeased I think it. And peers these Omaha the (ol: ore sub.) inku naji”i. Bé¢a-maji-na"-ma”. ‘“A*wan'’kega,” ehé. Te a®wa™ha-maji inviting they stand. make it a rule not to go. T am sick, Tsay. Word Iam not followed me at¢a” wankégal. Heqdika-mani, ‘“Ma¢é diba waja™ba-maji taf,” é cag¢af. { am sick on account of Walking Elk, Winter four T shall not see them, said went back to you. , PEG OR cae. 4 cony) reer , eres va u *n/ . y Céna ga” fu¢a cu¢éa¢é. Ga™ ¢iiga™ e¢i da” ctéa“i yi, waqi”ha itizé Enough atany news Isend to you. And yourgrand- has even if (2) when, paper together rate father returned cta™ be tat. you will see it. NOTES. Mato-maza, called Ma*teu-ma"zé by the Omahas, was the son-in-law of Wiyakoi". 714, 5. wacta-baji a™¢i®-na" ma®¢i"i, They were unwilling (to spare the food to them) and they carried me along with them. The idea is, I could not when standing alone go against the voice of the majority. TRANSLATION. I will send to you and your wife’s father to petition to you. These Indians who came hither with Walking Elk entered my own house. When I had entertained them, sharing with them what kinds of food I had to eat, they returned to you. But I will complain of my own people. I will tell of my sorrow. When I said to these Omahas, the chiefs and young men, “Come, give food to them!” they refused to do it, and I could not act in opposition to them. Therefore I think that I shall be sad for a year. As the Omahas know my feelings, they continue inviting me to feasts. But I make it arule not to go. I say that I am sick. Iam sick because they have not heeded my words. When Walking Elk departed, he said, ‘I shall not see them for four years.” Ihave sent enough news to you. And whenever your wife’s father returns, please examine this letter together. LOUIS SANSSOUCI TO WILLIAM PARRY. 715 LOUIS SANSSOUCI TO WILLIAM PARRY. . , y : , / Waqi”ha widaxe te ehé té fe égarqti agidaxe ka™b¢a. Ta™ wa'g¢a" Paper Imake to will I the word just so I make my I wish. Nation you said own zaniqti nie wa¢in’gai. Ki nie wa¢in’gai ca eté e¢éwa¢e. Lug¢a an¢in’ oe all we have no pain. And we have no pain as a may reasonable. News Ihave none shoul be . , 3 - ¢a”ja, ca” fe ewigehé té éga® agidaxe ka”b¢a. Aguthage ¢é¢u fat té, 3 though, yet word Isaidthat the so I make my I wish. Last here you the, s to you own care ither v ~~ / a = r a7 Qo is a 5 “Téski té ana™cta® ta minke,” ehé, eb¢éga. Ki éga” dixe ¢a™ja, nikagahi Inter- the I will stop walking, Isaid, I think it. And so 1 Daye though, chief preter done . Os : , , , Oa} a ama gica-qti-baji eb¢éga" ¢a™ja, wi edta” dma” taté ar¢in’ge eb¢éga", the (pl. were not Baty, satis- I thought though, I how I shall do I have none T thought, sub.) e¢ ana’ cta" ha. E/di uwédi-maji. Angfya"¢at yi, i¢ddi¢at ¢inké udtkie tai, 6 I stopped 5 There Tam not in it. They wish me, if, agent the (ob.) let them talk walking their own with him about it, = la) vl ous y Toye 1 Oh Leia |O / Os f angfyam¢a-baji yi’cté, ct égi¢a™ tai. Wiminke'di e‘a™ ¢inge. Gahie they do not want me, evenif, again let them say it to With reference to there is no cause Council their own him. me for complaint (against them) yan’ga wi" angdxai. I¢adi¢at ginké a™wa™ci éga™, éga" édaxe, éde gahi great one we have made. Agent the st. asked (0 em- as, so I did for but council f one ployed) me him, . . — . = , . y fz f / D ié ticka® ga™¢ai té éga%qti anigdxai. Cé’ya cub¢é ka™b¢éde efa™ taté ite. 9 word deed they the just so we made it. Yonder I goto I wish, but how it shall be is wished you uncertain. . Eee eT va. aot Oy . Icté ¢é¢a™ zea™ dai éga® cub¢é ka” b¢a. Wage angtyai ama i'win’ka® ga” ¢ai Eye this they prac- so I go to I wish. White peo- our the (pl. to help me wish tice on me you ple sub.) ha. Nikaci’ga ¢i¢fja amd wage ama i*win’ka"i té éga" ta-bité eonéga” . Person your the(pl. white the(pl. they helped the sothattheyshall youthink sub.) people sub.) me (past be it act) A 4 ia 8. 4 Se , 14 , 4 , 2. y vi s y x. Ikdgewi¢af éska*b¢éga™ dda" fe té égipe ha. Ug¢e'qtci fe te qa¢a 12 2 Lhave you (pl.) I thiuk so there- word the Ihave 5 Very soon word the back for friends fore said it again (what pre- cedes) . *n/ . , , bd ‘) - a ~ -’ tind’ ¢aki¢é ka"b¢éga", kagcha. (likage-ma tiwagi¢é-gi, Myce cti. you will cause some I hope, my friend. Your friends tell it to them, Star too. one to bene my own ither NOTE. Sanssouci was the blind interpreter at the Omaha Agency. He dictated the fol- lowing translation as far as the end of the last question. What follows that question was translated from the original Omaha text by the author. Sanssouci’s words are given verbatim, although not always inthe best English. His successor as interpreter was an Iowa, Charles P. Morgan, who had been interpreter for the Ponkas. Mr, Parry’s home was in Richmond, Indiana. 716 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. TRANSLATION. I promised to write to you, and I want to fulfill my promises. We are all well and doivg as well as might be expected. I have not much news to write, but still I wish to fulfill my promise this time. When you were here last I told you that I was going to resign my office. I have done so, and the chiefs were not very well satisfied about it. But I can not help it. Iamout of it now. If they want me, they can say so to their agent; and if they do not want me, they can say so. It will be all right with me. We have had a great council here. The agent asked meto interpret for him, so I did so, and got the thing worked out very nicely. I wish to go east to visit you if I can and to have my eyes attended to. The people here are trying to raise the money to send me. Do you think that your people will help me as well as my people (i. e., the white people) here? I consider you my friends, so I have said what Ihave. My friend, I hope that you will send me word back very soon. Tell your friends, William Starr and others. ICTAQABI TO CUNyIQOWE. January 14, 1879. ahaha, nikaci”’ ga ¢i¢ija ¢anka wija™be ka™b¢a. Nikaci™ ga jiwa¢a- Brother-in-law, people your the ones I see you I wish. People you with who (sing.) g¢e ¢anka wiya™be ka” b¢a. Petigéqti ci yi, edida™ iwidaxe ka™b¢a ha. them the ones I see you I wish. Very oldman you when, what Imakeforyou I wish who (sing.) reach by means of Nikagahi Ma"tet-na™ba aka ingdxai ha, ada" cub¢é ka™b¢a, nikaci’ga Chief Ma*teu-na"ba the hasdonefor . there- I go to 1 wish, people (sub.) me fore you . = , . , vl = ive , , ~~] / ¢i¢ga ¢anka wija”be ka™b¢a ¢é uq¢e'qtci. Wacaka¢tide ée ha, ya™be your the ones I see you I wish this very soon. Wagakarutce itis . IT see him who he ka™b¢a ¢inké: e ya”be taf ha, nikagahi aké. Gan’yi uq¢éeqtci ga¢a® I wish theone him I see will 0 chief the And then very soon that (ev. who: (sub.). ob.) s = . . Cee ILO wv . . wv cta”be yi, jaha”ha, waqi™ha wi" tian’ki¢a-ga. Ayig¢icta™-qti-ma™ ha. yousee when, O brother-in- paper one send hither to me. Ihave fully prepared myself LENT for it \ fs r 5 On itatOaD , , re Ss Oe a y 1 Nikaci’ga ‘a’ ak& wabdxuki¢a¢ii aka ¢ baxti té, wi™ b¢izé-na’-ma™, Indian how the he whom they have as their he write when, one I usually receive it. (sub.) amanuensis NOTES. Ciinyiqowé (Pegiha, Cage i¢a‘é¢e), He who has mysterious interviews with a Horse (or, Wolf), the name of the Oto head chief. 716, 1, 2, and 4. wija™be ka*b¢a, used for the pl., wiza™bai ka™b¢a. 716, 7. Nikaci"ga ‘a" aka, etc. A better reading suggested by G.: ERSTE ndian efa” wabaxuki¢ai ti¢ai ctéwar’ wi” b¢izé-na™ ma”. how they cause him he sends soever one Lusually receive it. to write it hither TASWA'-GAXE-JINGA TO A. B. MEACHAM. allen TRANSLATION, Brother-in-law, I wish to visit your people. I desire to see those with whom you dwell. When you become a very aged man I wish to do some work for you at your request. The chief, Two Grizzly Bears, has done (something) for me, therefore I wish to go to see you. I wish to see your people very soon hereafter. Wagakerutce is the chief whom I wish to see. Brother-in-law, when you receive this letter send me one very soon. I hold myself in readiness to start to you. When Indians of any tribe have some one to write letters, stating how the people are, and he sends a letter, I usually receive it. TAYWA* GAXE-JINGA TO A. B. MEACHAM. January 16, 1879. Hityatiga can’ge wéma™¢a™ wawéci ka™b¢a, yiga”ha. Can’ge g¢éba- svane lage hor: aa they stole from pay I wish, O Grand. Hor aS a hun- us father. hiwi® Ata weénacaf hi. Pahan’eadi Isa”yati can’ge g¢ébahiwi® ki é'di dred and they snatched . inane Santee hor “F a hundred and be- over from us sides g¢éba-dé¢ab¢i? i" nacai éga", wawéci ka™b¢a, yiga”ha. . . . . eighty took from me ae pay I wish, O Grand- father. Wagaztiqti atnd‘a" anga™ ¢ai, yiga”ha. Maja™ ¢a" ag¢ita" ha: waqi"ha sagt Very straight we hear it we wish, O grandfather. Land the Iworkmy . paper hard (ob.) own ka™b¢a. Cé¢i" i¢adi¢at beuga u¢tiakié b¢ieta" fe té agi” cug¢éaki¢é, I wish. That (mv. agent Ihave talked Ihavefin- word the Icausehimtotakeit again ob.) to him aboutit ished back to you, Z , *n/ , v 1 / , vavie ~ *n/ * , , ga¢a® waqgi"ha cu¢éa¢é. Ca™ awii‘e tédihi yi, i’teqi tat éska"b¢éga", that (ob.) paper I send to you. And I plow when the time hard for — shall I think that, comes, me ca” @/di éskana ma™zéski d‘iba i’¢écpaha ka™b¢éga™. Cal, yiga™ha, yet there oh that money some you show to me I hope. And, O Grand- father, céna uwib¢a. Uwib¢a té éskana éganqti im¢éckaxe ka*b¢éga™. Lyiga® enough TI have told Ihavetold the oh that Saat so you do for me I hope. Grandfather you. you oninké, wib¢aha” ha. Nikaci”ga uké¢i" wégi¢ig¢a™ oninké, wib¢aha. you who I pray to you 5 Indian common theonewhoplans you who I pray to you. are, for them are, Ga™ edté céna wib¢aha® ha. Ki ticka™ Aji ci wi" uwib¢a ta minke. And that enough I pray to you . And deed re again one . I will tell you. other Eskana edada™ i’teqi ké wa¢ionaqti wija”be u¢iwiki¢é ka"b¢ééga". Hskana Oh that what difficult the very plainly I see you I talk to you I hope. Oh that forme (coll.)? about it enégatqti im¢éckaxe ka™b¢éga". Edé téda™ eb¢éga™ awina‘a® ta minke. just so you you do for me I hope. What will he say? I think I will hear from you. think (a soliloquy) Eskana fe té nizé ka™b¢éea™. Ca™ edéce yi, uq¢é’qtci g¢i¢age tat éska™ Oh that word the you T hope. And whatyou if, very soon you cause to shall so (ob.) take say return hither it ana” ¢al. we think, 12 W718 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. NOTES. This letter was sent by Ta™wa»-gaxe-jinga, ga¢i"-na™pajl, Two Crows, Hupet¢a, Mazi-kide, Matthew Tyndall, yje-uya"ha, and Na*pewa¢é, Omahas of the civilization party, to A. B. Meacham, editor of ‘The Council Fire,” at Washington, D.C. Though addressed to Colonel Meacham, it was intended for the President, the Secretary of the Interior, and the Commissioner of Indian Affairs. Part was not written in Omaha, but in English, as the author found it easier to make a translation as fast as he wrote. See the third line of the text, where a hiatus occurs. 717, 1, et passim, ka*b¢a, I wish, spoken by one man, but intended for the expres- sion of all. 717, 6. tat eska"b¢ega®, in full, tate eska"b¢ega". 717, 12. Ede teda™ eb¢ega", ete. When pronounced rapidly, ‘a®” was dropped before “‘eb¢ega™.” L. agreed with Ta"wa"-gaxe-jinga in the use of ‘* Ede,” though that is3d.s. L. gaveas the equivalent poiwere, Taku écera ihare arinago® (hamina) hniye ké, what you Ithink I hear you I sit will . say TI think, “ What will you say?” I will (sit, waiting to) hear it from you. But W. (1888) changed Ede teda*, etc., to Edéce taté awina‘a® ta minke ha, I will hear from you What shall Lhearyou will I who you say what you shall say. 717, 13 and 14, tat eska™ a™¢a™¢ai, in full, tate eska™ a™¢ar¢al. TRANSLATION. Grandfather, we wish pay for the horses which the Winnebagos have stolen from us. They have stolen from us more than a hundred horses. Grandfather, we also desire pay for the hundred and eighty horses which the Santees stole from us formerly. (The former agent, Dr. Graff, wrote to Washington about it; and he said to us, “You shall be paid; the Grandfather has promised it.” We have been expecting it ever since, and if it ever came we suspect that the chiefs devoured it.) O Grandfather, we wish to hear correctly about it. We work the land, and we wish to have good titles to it. We have already spoken to the agent who has gone to you, telling him of all this, and getting him to take it back to you. And now we send it to you in a letter. When plowing time arrives we think that we shall have trouble; yet we hope that then you will show us some: money. We have told you enough on this point, O Grand- father! We hope that you will do for us just as we have told you. O Grandfather, we petition to yoa! We petition to you, O you who govern the Indians! Now, we have petitioned to you enough on that subject. And we will tell you about something else. We hope that we may be allowed to see you face to face and speak to you about the things which give us trouble. We hope that you will think favorably of this and do accordingly for us. We think, “‘ What will he have to say?” We sit awaiting your reply. We hope that you accept these words. And if you have anything to say to us we hope that you will send it back to us very soon, * MI°XA-SKA TO MAZA-NAP'I*. 719 MIXXA-SKA TO MAZA-NAP'T, A YANKTON. January 25, 1879. Negiha, cub¢é tai minke. Ki wijan’ge eti 1 na"ha cti waja™ be ka™ b¢a. area I will go to you. And my sister too my mother too Isee them I wish. rother, A™ba ga™ awa" qpani ga™ wija”be ka” b¢a ga” cub¢é ta minke. TI” na*ha Day as Tam poor as I see you I wish as I will go to you. My mother té té ceta” itdadi waqpani hada™ wiqa be ka™b¢d-qti-ma™ ha. Hinda, ga” died sofar my father poor , there- I see you I have a strong desire Let me see, as fore miag¢a™ ga™ a™wa™qpani ga” wija” be ka™b¢a-qti-ma™ ha. Ki Wihé cti Ihavetakena as I am poor as I see you I have a strong desire z And Fourth too wife sister i’tea" wa¢ixe ga” éga® ¢and‘a” tii eb¢éga” cu¢éa¢é. Ki ¢atfi téeti edada” now has taken as so you willhearit Ithinkit Isend to you. And you inthe what a husband came past, too ab¢it’-maji hada® ¢i¢in’ge-na” ¢ag¢ai. Ki Uma™ha" Badize cug¢é ta-¢inké, Thad not I , there- youwithout usu- you went And Omaha Battiste he is the one who will fore any ally back. go to you, wawa". Ki @di cub¢é ta minke. Pan‘ka na™ba écti ca¢é ta aka. (Céna todancethe And _ there I will go to you. Ponka two they will go of their (Enough pipe dance. too own accord to you. etéga® ha. Céna ta aka.) itmay be . Enough it will be.) NOTES. Mi*xa-skii was formerly called, Waqwata"-¢inge, the Omaha notation of the Oto Waqwita"-yin/e, Poor Boy. He was the son of Wasabé-yanga, an Omaha. 719, 3 and 6, hada®, a peculiar contr. of ha, the oral period, and Ada". 719, 6. Badize, a man who had a negro father and an Omaha mother. 719, 7 and 8. (Cena etega” hi, ete.), an observation made to the author, and not part of the letter. TRANSLATION. Mother’s brother, I will go to you. I wish to see my sister and also my mother. I wish to see you, as I have been poor for days, so I will go to you. My father is still poor because my mother is dead, therefore I have a strong desire to see you. By the way, I have a strong desire to see you because 1 am poor through having taken a wife. I send to you that you may hear that Fourth-sister has just taken a husband. When you came hither in the past you generally went back without anything, because I had nothing to give you. The Omaha Battiste is the one who is going to see you for the purpose of performing the pipe dance. And then I will go to you. Besides us there are two Ponkas who will go to see you. (Zo the author; “Thatisenough! That will be sufficient.”) 720 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS, CANGE-SKA TO WIYAKOI*. January 27, 1879. Negiha, ca” winégi cti i’t’e ga” wijdha™ cti ite ga” awa” qpani Mother's atany my too isdead as my brother- too isdead as Tam poor brother, rate mother's to me in-law to me brother héga-maji. Cé cin’gajin’ga daxe ¢inké agija"be ka™b¢a. Awa" qpani Tam very. That child I made the one Isee my own I wish. Iam poor him who « | ae / / eed 3 héga-maji ga” ada” ta™warg¢a™ ¢i¢tia, negiha, awdja"be ka”b¢a. Kyi Tam very as there- nation your, mother's I see them I wish. And fore brother, waqi”ha ¢a® cuhf tédihi yi’, cin’gajin’ga wiwija u¢dkie ka". abe paper tke reaches when the time child my you talk please. I see him (ob.) you arrives, to ka" b¢a té inahi" yi, waqi“ha ia” ¢aki¢é ka"b¢éga". Ca” wagazua¢aki¢é I wish the he is if, paper you cause to be I hope. And you straighten it for me willing coming hither to me Cony . ae , , *n/ . . iS S 6 yi, Mwi"¢ana i¢a¢dé te. Ki ¢é¢u nikaci’ga ¢i¢fja amd atii ha. Ki if, you tell me you will send And here people your the (pl. came : And hither. sub.) hither a ay Z . v wus Oee pics a a"wa™qpani éga" eddda® wi”aqte? cté iwin’gaxa-baji cag¢al. Ki’ fe ké I was poor 80 what even one we did not do for them they went And word the back to you. jlaji wégaxe cag¢a-biama. Ki é’di ca™ juga windqtei cub¢é ka” b¢a. Ta inferior made for they went back to And then atany body I alone I go to 1 wish. And us you, it is said. rate you ens / Se OIE! e Pe lev . avy G De / 9 e‘a™ ma™ni” ca” nié ¢i¢il'ge yi, ca? uda"qti ma™ni” yi, wind‘a" ka" b¢a. how you walk atany you have no pain if, atany very good you walk if, I hear from I wish. rate rate you G » 2 i ft fs wl y / / , v2 , / Ca” ukit‘'é,i°taxay’ ama efa™i gé’ ctéwa™ ca” fe wagazu and‘a" ka™b¢a. And foreigners those whoareup how(pl.) soever their af- still word straight T hear it I wish. towards the head fairs may be of the river - / oye , cee? / *n/ S / Ue ~/ - / Ca™ ta’ warg¢a™ ¢i¢ija-ma cti iicka™ e‘a” ma™¢i” yi, ca” e‘a™i g&’ ctéwa™ And nation those who are too deed how they walk if, atany how(pl.) soever their yours rate affairs may be 12 ca” wagaztiqti and‘a® ka" b¢a. still very straight Ihearit I wish. NOTE. 720, 11. e‘ati gé ctéwa® however their different affairs may be: gé shows that the affairs, ete., belong to different times or places. TRANSLATION. Mother’s brother, I am very poor on account of the deaths of my mother’s brother and my brother-in-law. I wish to see that one whom I made my child. I am very poor, therefore I wish to see your nation, O mother’s brother! And when the letter shall have reached you please talk to my child. Should he be willing for me to see him, as I desire, I hope that you will send mea letter. When you get the matter MA*TCU-NASBA TO WIYAKOI®, T2il settled for me in a satisfactory manner, please send to tell me. Your people came hither. But they went back again to jou without our doing even one thing for them on account of my poverty. And it is said that they started back to you after making some uncomplimentary remarks about us. Consequently I wish to go to you by myself. I wish to hear from you, how you are, whether you are well and prospering. I desire to hear a correct account of the various affairs of the Dakota tribes up the Missouri River. I also desire to hear a very correct account of the various affairs of your own nation, and what they are doing. MA*XTCU-NAXBA TO WIYAKOTLD, Ké, aa®ckaha, wawina cugcage ti minke. Ma"teti-cége, na"bé eyai gé Come, _ sister’s son, 1 beg from I will send to you. Grizzly bear claw, hand their the you . (pl. in. ob. 5 e , Cf) sy: *, a/iper ete ees 07 G ye a d‘iba ani” yi, wabig¢eze ‘-amadi uji-ada” é'di ian’ki¢a-gi. TYi yi, some you if, letter where they carry putitinand there send it hither to It if, have them on their back me. comes 4 2 . ALY o— 17/48 / J Leta ° ya’ckdha, i” ¢e-qti-ma™ ta minke. Wa¢i"a™ ¢a¢é ayidaxe t4 minke. Nikaci”ga 3 sister’s son I will be greatly pleased. You treat me as I will make for myself. People your kinsman (i. ¢., very kindly) cé ag¢i” minké guad¢ica™ ta” wa'g¢a™ dibahai édita" i nai ti¢ai édega™ that am sitting beyond nation in four places thence to beg have but (near the from me sent speaker) hither 2 Sees: ° ns , . . Hho) 3 a¢ai xi, 63a awd ta minke, dda™ iwi" ¢aya”qti ka™b¢a ha. Awadcka" you give if, there I will give to them, there- you give me all pos- I wish 7 I try it to me fore sible help 5 De Nal ay Boe HO ol Geo al Nr sbsaa vert ; 2 téga" e¢he ha. Gan’yi fu¢a Aji ¢ingé’qtia® dda" uwib¢a-maji. Céna ga” 6 in order Leey . Andthen news es there {oat at ere I do not tell you. Enough as to that en a ‘ore widaxu cu¢éa¢e. (Picti ea” ¢andji® yi, ida” ¢andji" yi, wind‘a® ka™ b¢a. I write to Isend to you. Youtoo how youstand if, good youstand if, Ihear from I wish. you you NOTE. 721, 4. ta"wa*g¢a" dubahai, probably refers to the four Pawnee divisions of Skidi, Tcawi, Pitahawirat, and Kitkehaqki. TRANSLATION. Well, sister’s son, I send to beg something from you. If you have some claws of grizzly bears, send them to me in the mail-bag from your post-office. When they come, sister’s son, I will be well pleased. I will consider that you are treating me, your kinsman, with the greatest kindness. I have received a letter from that nation dwell- ing beyond me in four villages begging (a necklace of bears’ claws?) from me. If you will give it to me, I will give it to them in that place, therefore I wish you to afford me all possible help. [ promise to do my best and get something in return from them, which I can send to you. Now, there is no other news at all, therefore I do not tell you anything. I have written enough to you. I wish to hear how you are and whether you are prospering. VOL vI——46 722 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. CUDE-GAXE, TO LOUIS ROY AND MA®*TCU-PC‘AGE. February 6, 1879. Cub¢é ha. Awanatg¢i’qti cub¢é ha. Wiya’be ta minke, dadtha. lam going . ITaminagreathurry Iam going 5 I will see you, O father. to you to you A™ba¢é, dadiha, iwi’ ¢aya” te ha’. A™wa™qpani’qti ag¢i™. Nikaci™ ga To-day, O father, you will please help me . Tam very poor People 3 ¢i¢iga ¢a” bgtiga waja”be ka™b¢a. Nikagahi dé¢a"ba nankacé, wib¢aha™ your the I see them I wish. Chief seven ye whoare, I pray to you Ob) cu¢éa¢ai. Wandce nuda™hanga diba nankacé, wib¢aha” cu¢éa¢ai. I send toy you. Captain of police four youwhoare, Ipraytoyon Isend ay you (pl). (pl NOTES. Matteu-i"c‘age, Venerable-man Grizzly-bear, a name of Padani-apapi, Struck-by-the- Ree, the head chief of the Yanktons. Louis Roy, a half-breed Ponka, son of the former interpreter, Frank Roy. Louis married a Yankton woman before 1571; so he had a right to dwell on the Yankton reservation. Louis’s mother was the wife of Cude-gaxe when this letter was written. Cude-gaxe was a Ponka. Only the first and second sentences in line 1 are addressed to Louis Roy. The rest is intended for Padani-apapi, whom Cude-gaxe calls Grandfather. 722, 3. ¢a" refers to the Yankton tribal circle. We may, however, substitute ¢anka, the ones who. 722, 3. Nikagahi de¢a"ba, the chiefs of the seven Yankton gentes (excluding the half-breed gens). 722, 4. Wanace nudathatga duba, the four captains of police. See Omaha Sociology, § 195, in 3d Ann, Rept. Bur. Ethnology TRANSLATION. Iam going to you. Iam going to you in a great hurry. O father, I will see you. O father, you will please aid me to-day. I dwell in great poverty. I wish to see all of your people. O ye seven chiefs, J send to you to petition to you. O ye four captains of policemen, I send to you to petition to you. EDWARD ESAU TO JOSEPH ESAU. 423 EDWARD ESAU TO JOSEPH ESAU, AT PAWNEE AGENCY. February 17, 1879. Pahan‘gadi wawidaxu cu¢da¢é ¢a™ja, wabdg¢eze qada gdidagaji. back Formerly I wrote several Isent to you though, letter you have not things to you again sent it back. I"tea" Pan‘ka amd ag¢fi yi, u¢i¢ai, ¢ida™ba-bi ai éga", fe djtibaqtei Now Ponka the (pl. they when, they told that he had seen he as, word ~ very few sub.) have come about you, you said back uwib¢a ta minke. Cé¢u jiiwig¢e te¢an’di cta™’be te¢a™ ca™ca™ qti ma™b¢i" I will tell to you. Yonder whenI was with youin yousawme inthe always I walk the past past ha. Ca” nié cté a¢in’gé-qti-ma™, wa‘ wiwfja cin’gajin’ga wiwfja-ma And pain even Tam really destitute of, woman my child those who are mine eti, Ca™ im¢é-qti ga” ma*b¢i” ha. Ki eddda™ dhigi ab¢it’-maji. too. And Iam very so I walk : And what many I have not. glad A*wa™qpani tedbe ma™bfi”. A™ba gé ca” wija™be ka™b¢a-qti-ma™ ha. Iam poor very I walk. Day the at any I see you Ihave a strong desire (pl.in. rate ob.) Ca” wWar¢ingé’qti eb¢éga’-na*ima™ ha. Ki maja” wéahidé’qti ¢andji™ Yet all in vain T usually think it 5 And land ata great distance you stand ada", & awake, wija”be té b¢i‘a ha. Ca” Uma™ha*-md_ wacta™be because, it I mean, I see you the I an un- : And the Omahas you saw them able ca"ca™qtia™ ita" udagti a¢ai. Ca™ waqi”ha pahan’gadi cugéagé ¢a™ continued all the now very good they go. And paper formerly IT sent to you the time ob. g¢iaji éga, i¢dyuhéga" fe té djiibaqtci widaxe ha. Cé wabig¢eze qd¢a has not as, as I apprehend word the very few I make for 5 That letter bac returned unseen trouble you again g¢ia”¢aki¢é yi, ci fe d‘iba uwib¢a ta minke. Ca™ uq¢é’qtci @mbaxu youcauseittohave if, again word some I will give to you. And very soon write to me returned i¢a-ga. Wind‘a™ té ka™b¢a-qti-ma™ ha. send it Ihearfrom the IThavea strong desire hither. you NOTES. Edward Esau, or Huta*ta", an Omaha, is the maternal uncle of the younger Frank La Fléche. His cousin, Joseph, became interpreter for the Ponkas in 1880. 723, 2. yi, used here in a past sense; but tédi is the common term. 723, 4. Supply nie wa¢in’/géqtiai, they are really without it, after wiwija-ma cti. TRANSLATION. I wrote about several matters to you formerly, but you have not sent a letter back again. Now that the Ponkas have returned they have told about you, saying that they saw you, so I will tell you a very few words. Ihave always continued as you saw me when you and I were together. I am well, and my wife and children are also 12 724 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. in good health. Ilive very happily. I have not many things. Iam very poor. Day after day I have had a strong desire to see you. But I reflect each time that it is all in vain. Iam unable tosee you. I refer to the great distance of the land in which you dwell. As no reply has been received since I sent you letters, I send you now a very few words, as I apprehend unseen trouble. If you send a letter in reply, I will tell you of some other matters. Write and send a letter to me very soon. I have a strong desire to hear from you. dGAGT’-NA*PAJI TO NIXDAHA®, AT THE PONKA AGENCY. February 22, 1879. Wab¢ita" té b¢f‘a-qti-ma” ta minke, eb¢éga". Wija™ba-maji yi’ji ’ fo) ? iework: at dif- the I shall utterly fail to complete it, I think it. { do not see you if, erent thing wa¢ita® té nan’de a*¢a’’sa-maji-na*-ma™. Wana™q¢i®-qti ef-ga. Ca” work the heart Iam usually uneasy on account of it. In great haste be return- And ing. Uda*gti andji". Ca™ eddda" fu¢a ¢ingé éga”. Wag¢ita" té endqti ubita- very good I stand. And what news there is Work the itonly causing im- none patient or anxious jiwa¢é, Ada™ wana q¢irqti ¢ag¢i ka*b¢éga”. (iéaka ¢ij4ha" akdcti looking for there- making great haste you cone hope. This one your brother- the sub., results, fore back (sub.) in-law too wa¢isnindaf dda® nan‘de gipi-bajii ha. Gaga" waqi”ha cuhi té‘di, you (pl.) are tardy —_ there- heart is bad for him 5 That ob. paper reaches when, fore you cki cka”na yi'ji, waqi”ha wana™q¢i'qti gian’ki¢é-ga. Ca” tidaqti youare youdesire if, paper making great haste yousend it back tome. And very good return- ing nié ¢ingé ga™ anaji", mujnes cti wan ‘Bige uda"qti i naji™ 1. without pain so I stand, too very good they stand for me. NOTE. 724, 5. wa¢isnindai refers to ga¢i"-na"paji’s son, Nitdaha®, and his comrade, Teaza-¢inge (see p. 695) who were at the Ponka A gency, Indian Territory. The sentence should read thus: Wa¢isnindai éga™, ¢éaka ¢ij4ha™ akacti nin/de gipi-bajii hi, As you delay your coming, this one, too, your brother-in-law (i. e., Macti®-‘a®sa) is sorrowful. TRANSLATION. I think that I shall utterly fail to complete my different kinds of work. As I do not see you, the work usually makes me uneasy. Return in great haste. I am very well. There is hardly any news. The work is the only urgent matter, therefore I hope that you will return very speedily. This one, too, your brother-in-law, is sor- rowful because you delay your return. When this letter reaches you, send mea letter immediately if you wish to come home. I am very well, and all my young men (i. e., men of my party ?) are well too. MA®TCU-NA®BA TO ICTAGABL. 725 MA®TCU-NA®BA TO ICTAGABL r “7 . , ‘ Te. , oo wu. su fe djibaqtci cugdwiki¢é t4 minke ha. Uswa‘t ta ama éde fepaha™ ji. Word very few I will cause some one to take to 5 They will give things to but youdo not know you us it. éska dYiba wa‘i ‘i¢ai, yéska nfja wa‘t ‘i¢af, wandg¢e a™wan’ga¢i" ta-bi Oxen some they have prom- oxen alive they have prom- domestic an- that we may keep them ised to give to us, ised to give to us, imals lA S v a , v2 s LS l4 , , ~ ka"b¢éga". Céhi cti diiba wai “¢ai, é fepaha” wika"b¢a hi. Caa™ T hope. Apple too some they have prom- that you know I desire for fe Dakota tree ised to give to us, it you , 4 / / pe a = — , C ~ *n/ ama ¢éama ta™wa"g¢a™ sata” wada™be ga’ ¢ai. Pan‘ka w¢iqé ab¢i® the (pl. these nation five to see them they wish. Ponka refugee T have sub.) : , Ovi} 1 / . , . ee . Bh ake roche Pcdge i“te. Gata™adi edéda® inig¢a” té nicta™ téite, gfi-ga. (ag giiji old man is dead Now, at last what you planned the youhave shallif, return ye. ~ You do not for me. finished come back — , 2 v Ud a! Of) , mw ff ~~ , 14 i tiwai té udi¢igin’ge taté eb¢éga%. Pan’ka cti d‘iba agi ama. if theyissue the shall not be sufficient to I think it. Ponka too some are re- it is them give you a share turning, said. , ale I od - te ~ s A ~~) t “ Mattet-ndji® agii ha. Ag¢i tédfhi yi, wa¢ita™ ta ama ha. Standing Grizzly is re- 0 Hehas__ by the time they will act in his case bear turning returned that NOTE. Icta¢abi was the son-in-law of Ma"tcu-na™ba. He had gone to visit the Otos. TRANSLATION. I will send you a very few words. They are going to issue things to us, but you do not know about it! They have promised to give us some cattle as live stock, and I hope that we may keep them as domestic animals. They have also promised to give us some apple trees; I wish you to know that. These Dakotas wish to go to see five nations. The aged Ponka man whom I had as a refugee is dead. If by this time you have accomplished what you planned, return! If you do not return, I think that you will miss your share of the issue. It is said that some Ponkas have returned from the Indian Territory. Standing Bear is returning. When he shall have returned, the Omahas will act in his case. RICHARD RUSH TO UNAJP-SKA. iga”ha, fe djibaqtci widaxu ha, Ki i uda™-qti-ma™ ha. Grandfather, word very few Iwritetoyou . Aud I am doing very well vite = i . / yiji Pan’ka yi d‘iba ag¢ii. (jéama Uma™ha® ama e‘a™ wégaxe tafte 7 Ponka lodge some have re- These Omaha the (pl. how they shall do to them turned. sub.) ceta” wigazti-ctéwa"ji. Matet-niji® aka jiwag¢e ag¢ii. Wage ¢é¢u so far is by no means certain. Standing Grizzly bear the he with them they have White here (sub.) returned. man 9 726 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. ti ¢i” ti tédihi yi'ji, wagazu taté ha. Ki wabag¢eze wina ¢a" he whohas he it reaches when, it shall be straight 6, And letter T have the come and has there begged (ob.) is my. come from you ka™ b¢a-qti-ma™ hi. Wagazu i*¢éckaxe ka™b¢éga". Ma zéska’ cti ceta” I desire it greatly Straight you do for me I FOv6: eet too so far 3 b¢iza-maji, dda” wawéci a"¢in’ge ha, Ki ca® jitga ¢aa”na ¢ag¢é ta” I have not re- there- pay I have none 5 And you abandoned when the ceived, fore you went back (std, ob.) e‘a” ckaxe yi, and‘a" ka™b¢a. Ug¢é wai™ baxt-ga. how you do if, T hear it I wish. Soon write tu me BtouE the things. NOTES. Richard Rush is an Omaha. Unaji®sk& was at the Yankton Agency. 725, 10, and 726, 1. Wage ¢e¢u ti ¢i" refers to Mr. T. H. Tibbles, of Omaha, who visited the reservation after the release of Standing Bear. TRANSLATION. Grandfather, I write a very few words to you. I am doing very well. Some Ponka lodges have returned. It is still by no means certain how these Omahas shall decide with regard to them. Standing Bear has returned with them. When the white man who came to the reservation some time ago shall have come again the question shall be settled. Iam very anxious to get the letter which I begged of you. I hope that you will do for me what is right. I have not yet received any money, so Ihave no pay. I wish to hear what you intend doing about the colt which you left here when you went to the Yanktons. Write to me soon about these things. GAGP-NA®PAJI TO MU*79E-QA*OE, AN OTO. lati ‘idage te, {4iji-ga. A™wa"’qpani héga-maji. Egi¢e ¢ati yi, u‘a’’- You have the, donot come. I am very poor. Beware you if, all in spoken of com- come ing 6 ¢ingé’qti ¢ati te. Nan’de ¢ipéji’qti ¢ag¢é yi wicti éga™ nan’de i"¢i™uda®- vain you lest. Heart very sadfor yougo it Itoo so heart not good for me come you back on account r : ys ~ 9 ee a anhey, s maji i¢Anahi"-maji. Ca” waqe, “Wayig¢ita™i-ga,” ai éga”, dakihide; wa¢ita™ of it Iam not willing. And white peo- Work for yourselves! said hay- I pay attention work ple, ing, to it; téndqti asi¢e ha. only the I think of it NOTE. Miiy49e-qa"y0e, Large Black bear, in Omaha, Wasabe-jalga. TRANSLATION. You have spoken of coming hither; but do not come! J am very poor. Beware lest you come altogether in vain! Iam unwilling for you to start for your home with a very sad heart, in which case I too would be very sad. The white people have said, “ Work for yourselves!” I have followed their advice. I think of nothing but work. HUPE@A TO INSPECTOR J. H. HAMMOND. 2% HUPE¢A TO INSPECTOR J. H. HAMMOND. , , . , , . = . . Kag¢éha, a®nija tai éga" nija we¢écka"nd udwa¢igional. Angtsi¢ai My friend, we live inorder that tolive you wished for us you told us. We have re- membered it a”b i¢aug¢e. Wakan’‘da ¢inké hidadi ti éga", Gawa¢akiaf. Waji” waska’-qti through the day. God theone downto had as, you talked to us. We are very sensible who the bot- come tom hither & rae Ty yD! aks Sey ! ogked éga" wackixe. Nikaci™ga aki wawé¢ig¢a” aka ydci héga-baji; ma¢é so you made us. Person the ruler the a long ee a little ; winter (coll. (coll. while sub.) sub.) {=those who (coll.) give directions] g¢cba-¢ab¢i" ki &'di dé¢ab¢i"® wawé¢ig¢a"i; éde uhé anga¢e taf fbaha™-baji, thirty and besides eight they have ruled but the wewill goalong they have not over us; path known, udwagi¢a-biji ‘Ag¢a-qti a™¢i" ¢ati. (ati éga", udwaddginal t& a nd‘ari. they have not told us. Suffering we were you You as, you have told us the we have greatly came came heard it. hither. hither Uawa¢aginat te wan gig! qti ¢iza-baji ctéctéwa™ a®¢an’gaska™ ¢é tan’gata®. You have toldus the all have not re- even though we will try it. ceived it Nikaci™ ga aka ¢éaka wawé¢ig¢a™ aka na®cta”i té &be twagi¢d yi, na‘a™ Person the this those (coll.) who give they stop the who to tellthem if, hear (sub.) directions y walking tai éda®, a™¢a”¢ai. Ki ¢i uwa¢agind tédihi yi'ji, na‘a” Mwin’ga¢af. Ki apt? (in solil- we think. And you you tell us onitsar- when, tohearit we desire for them. And oquy), rival ° “ Y 1 nikaci’ga ama waqe-macé’ cti ta” wa"g¢a™ ¢andji" ge’ wawé¢ig¢a™ ¢ingd person the (pl. ye white people too nation (or city) you stand “the ruler none (pl. in ob.) yi, wagazu-baji te ha. Ki ta” wa"g¢a™ an’gata" wawc¢ig¢a" wad¢in’gai xi, if, they willnotbe straight . And nation we who stand ruler we have none if, & n/ -bA K k: n gl + Ad n tk yn/ 1k ¢ n/ sks S| wagazu-a”™ ¢i"-baji taité éska® a™¢a™ ¢ai da" nikaci” ga d‘iba waji’skiqtei we shall not be straight we think that probably. a here: person some very sensible ore wacka™yangaqti maja” ¢an‘di fe éna‘a" etai yi’ji, wed¢agickaxai ka” very strong land in the word they listen ought if, you make it for us we to it an¢a™ ¢al. hope. NOTE. Though the speaker and his associates were opposed to the old chiefs, they were not prepared to do without leaders. TRANSLATION. My friend, you told us that you wished us to improve our condition that we might live. We have remembered your speech throughout the day. When you spoke to us, it was just as if God had come down from above. You have made us very sensible. 12 728 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. Those men who are chiefs have held their positions for a very long time; they have ruled us for thirty-eight years. But they do not know the path which we ought to follow in order to improve ourselves, so they have not told us about it. Hence we were suffer- ing much when youcame. When you came we heard what you told us. Even though all have not received what you told us, we will try it. We think that if these men who are chiefs should resign and there should be none to succeed them, who would obey if any one should tell the people anything? We desire them to hear what you have to tell us when your reply shall have come. Now it is the case with you white people, if you have no persons in authority in your cities there will be a bad state of affairs. And in like manner we think that if we shoald have no rulers in our nation our affairs would be in disorder. Therefore we hope that you will arrange for us to have some very sensible and very strong men in our land whom the people will be apt to obey. qAGP-NA®PAJI TO INSPECTOR HAMMOND. Nikaci®’@a diiba, sata", cadé da” ectéa™ i, Ahigi ukikie, é’di wacka™janea ten} ’ ? ? Person four, five, six it may be (?), much they talk then strong together, A i . ” LO S . ee Ber ay 5 r edida™ gaxai, éga” anga™¢ai. Wan’ga¢i" yi, ie a"wan’gagind‘a” taf, ada™ what they do, 380 we wish. We have them if, word we obey them, our will there- own, (pl.), fore = / . gé te anga™ ¢al. what has we wish it. been specified (?) TRANSLATION. When four, five, six, or many persons talk together, what they do is enduring; and this is what we desire. If we can have them, we will obey them. Therefore we desire what has been specified. MAZI-KIDE TO INSPECTOR HAMMOND. (hati tedi fwidaha™-maji, jit¢cha. Uwad¢akié-médega” fe ¢fa té and‘a®; You when I did not know you, O elder Since you have spoken tous word your the Ihave came brother. heard ; nain‘de ¢i”uda™. Ki ¢¢-ma nikaci™ ga d‘iba wa¢ita" we¢écka"nd-médega™ heart mineis good And these (pl. person some ¢ to work as you have wished (for) them by means of it. ob.) (pl. ob.) wijiga" méga", @duche. Ki nikaci’ga ¢éama, nikagdhi-ma ma™na”™ ¢i’, my grand- likewise, I belong to. And person these, the chiefs have made mis- father takes, wa¢ita"-ma ¢cama nikaci”ga d‘iba wa¢ita® ga™¢ai-ma é’duche. Ede the ones who these person some those who wish to work I belong to. But work uma” ¢inka na™ba i*’tea" inyawa¢é fbaha™i; si masani ¢izé a¢al. season two now (what is) favora- they know; foot on one taking they ble to life side it go. WAQPECA TO UNAJI-SKA. 729 4 NOTES. 728, 4. Uwa¢akie-medega®, etc. W. gave another reading, though he said that the text (-medega”) was correct: Kagéha, nikaci'’ga uwa¢akié ma ie ¢iga te imwir’¢ai éga™, anata” té nan‘de i™¢i’uda", Friend, those persons to whom you spoke told me your words, and when I heard them they made me glad. 728, 8. si masani ¢ize a¢ai. This means, “They learn a little about the way and advance one foot; then they learn a little more and advance the other.” There were other speakers after Mazi-kide, but their words were not recorded in their own language. TRANSLATION. O elder brother, I did not know about you when you came. Since you have spoken to us, I have heard your words, and they make me glad. Since you and my Grandfather (the President?) have wished some of these Indians to work, I have joined them. These Indians, the chiefs, have made blunders. I have joined those Indians who wish to work. It has been two years since they found out that it is life- sustaining. They are advancing one step at a time. WAQPECA TO UNAJI?-SKA. March 24, 1879. Negtha, wabag¢eze b¢izé yi, nan’de i™¢i”uda™-qti-ma”. Negtha, Mother's letter I re- when, heart mine was very good by means Mother’s brother, ceived of it. brother, wiji’¢e nija, wakéga té gini”. Eskana f¢ae té bétiga éga" ckaxe my elder lives, sick the he has re- Oh that you the all 80 you do brother covered spoke : from. ka*b¢éga". Hneé te¢an’di nan‘de i”pi-maji. Ki ita" an‘ka-mdji. Ca™ I hope. You went in the past heart bad for me. And now Iam not so- And Pan‘ka ama edada” giteqi’qti wi" akipai, waqe wandce a™ba¢é’qtei Ponka the (pl. what very cuaienls one have met it, white soldiers this very day sub.) for 5 wa¢i" a¢ai: Ma®tet-naji", yaxe-ni-¢ata”, ¢é-sig¢¢é, Cyu-i-hna", Wa¢iqe-yaci, have taken them Marteu-naji", yaxe-ni-¢ata, Buffalo Tracks, Prairie chicken Runs a long time, away: is coming, , rye ~ . r , ssi ete , fon ayn Matteu-da¢i", Cangé-hi-zi. Bu¢ite ijin’ge ¢aji, iha” aka Quza¢i e¢izai éva™ ; CU Reeak= eye 5 Osa. Foolish Grizzly bear, Horse with yellow Charles hisson didnot his the Rosalie having taken him hair. Pepin go, mother (sub.) from her own. ee a Tr r lOe , Wamiské udji b¢ieta" yi, Wad¢iitada waja™be béé téinke, negfha. Ca™ Wheat I sow I finish when, Oto I see them I may go, oO mother’s And brother. . v/ £22 , — ~~ ie la , . , aba i¢diug¢e ta ¢andji" ka"b¢éga". Wackan’-g4. Wandce ¢i¢ize taf, day through there you stand I hope. Make an effort. Soldier ‘they will take you, eb¢éga". Ctide-gixe, winégi, wijimi méga", wakéga-baji yi, awdna‘a" I think it. Smoke-maker, my mother’s my father’s likewise, not sick ; if. I hear about brother, sister them ka™b¢a. Icta¢abi aka Wag¢utadaja wawa'i abfi, can’ge cidé-na”ba I wish. Ictag¢abi the (sub.) to the Otos to dance the reached. horse twelve pipe-dance there, wa¢i® ageti gen. he has brought them back. 6 730 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. NOTES. 729, 5. yaxe-ni-¢ata™, a name of jeje-baje, or Buffalo Chips, one of the Ponkas arrested at Omaha Agency in March, 1879, by order of Commissioner Hayt. 729, 6. Bu¢ite, the Ponka notation of the French pouliche, a she colt. This was the Ponka name of Charles Pepin’s elder brother, who died on the old Ponka reser- vation, in Dakota. His son by Rosalie Primeau ((/uza¢i) was John Pepin, a scholar of the author in 1872. TRANSLATION. Mother's brother, when I received your letter it made me very glad. Mother’s brother, my elder brother is alive; he has recovered from the sickness. I hope that you will fulfill all your promises. I was sad when you went away (in the past). But now Iam not so. For the Ponkas (who were here) are in great trouble; this very day the white soldiers came and took them away (to Omaha City). (The names of the arrested Ponkas are as follows:) Standing Bear, Crow Drinks Water, Buffalo Tracks, Prairie-chicken is Coming, Runs a Long time, Foolish Grizzly bear, and Horse with Yellow Hair. John Pepin did not go, as his mother, Rosalie, (now wife of the Omaha Silas Wood) took him. Mother’s brother, when I finish sowing wheat I may go to see the Otos. Throughout each day I hope that you may remain there (where you are). Persevere. I think that the soldiers will arrest you (if you return here). I wish to hear whether Smoke-maker, my mother’s brother, and my father’s sister are well. Icta¢abi went to the Otos to dance the pipe-dance. He has come home with twelve horses. MA®TCU-NAXBA TO WIYAKOF. April 3, 1879. Ca™, ya®ckAha, udgtacige cudéa¢é ti minke. Ki a®wa™qpani ehé b) 5) = D | And, sister’s son, T complain of Twill send to you. And I am poor I said my own uwib¢a-na"-ma™. Ki Heqdga-ma™¢i" ma¢adi ca” wada™be atti, ki T usually told you. And Walking Elk last winter at any to see us came, and rate awa" qpani ehé éga™, ca” ca" waqpani té cug¢é. Gan’yi Heqdga-ma' ¢i" Tam poor I said as, always poor the he went And Walking Elk back to you. ama anka™ta’l cag¢ai, qa"ckAha. Ki wiyicpa a”ba atan’yi a'’¢icke téda*, the (mv. tied me they went Osister’s son. And my grand- day when (fut.) hetoose me will? (in sub.) back to you, child soliloquy), eb¢éga™ andji” ca” ca" ti minke. Céna, ja"ckdha, fe udg¢acige cu¢éadé. I think it Istand always will I who. Enough, Osister’sson, word Icomplain of I send to you, my own Ahat. Caa™’-qti-méya ci té’di eddida™ fe u¢u¢ikiat G™te ana‘a™ T To the real Dakotas you when what word they spoke to if I hear it went you about MA*’TCU-NASBA TO WIYAKOL. 731 ka’ b¢a. Ca™ edaida” uwib¢a té ¢ingé éga" hi. Ca™ fu¢a ¢ingé cti I wish. And what Itell you the there is ‘80 , And news none too none anaji®. Pan‘ka ¢é Mattet-naji® g¢i éde wanace ama agiati ¢ga", I stand. Ponka this Standing Grizzly came but soldier the (pl. came for as, bear back sub.) him U n/} BY Their ad tet at li ~eheD f Ki ban! a Amecleyt 1+ qn! ma”ha® ta’ warg¢a® ¢an'di wa¢i" ag¢al. i e‘a” giaxal taite ceta Omaha city tothe they took them back. And how they shall do to them so far i¢Apaha"-maji: agi taité cti i¢dpaha’-maji, ci Pan’ka maja” ¢aya I do not know: they shall be re- too I do not know, again Ponka land to the turning wa¢i" hi taité cti i¢Apaha"-maji. Ki, “Mwin’yan-ga,” ji éga", uéya?-maji: they shalltake them too I do not know. And, Help me! as he did not I did not help thither say, him: é i¢a-maji te. Lu¢a uwib¢a cugéa¢e Uma™ha®™ yi dé¢a"ba gaq¢a™” that Iam sad for the. News I tell you I send to you. Omaha lodge seven migrating psu / . J a¢ai éde, ag¢i-baji ca”ea". qa¢idja diiba gaq¢a” agai éde ceta™ went but, they have not always. To the Paw- some migrating went but so far returned nees Os, RoUe CLO , P FO agti-baji. Tuga pfiiji’qti ivtea™ and‘a®. Hidedja Wagutida 4fi ¢a™ they have not News very bad now I have heard. Down the Oto the village returned. stream gua¢ica™ya dixe wakéga éga’-bi; juga q¢iq¢i, ahigi t’4-biama. (hiadi beyond it is said that they have the small-pox; body broken out many have died, it is Your : in running said. father sores, maka” iwat’xekifa-gi, waqe améadi. Zc¢i¢ai yi, dixe ¢¢iga™-baji_ taf. medicine cause him to ask about it, among the white They pre- if, you will not have the small-pox. people. scribe for you An fate U n/] n Es xfs n = / n ak n/ n —/—* n/ the n ngtctiy Uma™ha" ama eawaga” tan’gata", maka™ a"¢an yiwa" xe tan gata”, We too Omaha the (pl. we will be so, medicine we will ask about it for ourselves. sub.) Pan‘ka iec‘ige wi” abd¢i” éde téé ha. Wasabe-q¢a iaje agi”. Cude- Ponka old man one Thad but heis 7 Black bear lean his he had. Smoke- dead name - y y , s - gixe uf¢a-@i. Ci fe eddda” uwib¢a ké ¢iita"qti uwfb¢a cug¢éage. maker tellittohim! Again word what Itellto you the verycorrectly I tell it to I send to you. you Wagi’ha gé¢a" nizé ki, ugq¢é gian’ki¢a-ga. Paper that youre- when, soon send it back. ceive it NOTES. 730, 4. wiyucpa, Walking Elk. Ma"tcu-na"ba expected a great many good words from Walking Elk whenever (in future) the latter should ‘“‘untie” him. (L.) 731, 8 and 9. Wa¢utada qii ¢a" gua¢ica’ya, ¢. e., near Vinita, Indian Territory. TRANSLATION. Sister’s son, I will send to you to complain of my own (people?). I have told you often that I was poor. Yet Walking Elk came at any rate last winter to visit us; and, as I had said that I was poor, he returned to you without any presents. And then, VU sister’s son, as he returned to you, Walking Elk placed restrictions on me. So I will continue to think, ‘On what day will my grandchild untie me?” 1 have sent you enough words of complaint about my own (people), O sister’s son! 732 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. When you visit the real Dakotas (7. e., the Tetons), I wish to hear about what matters they talk to you. There is hardly anything for me to tell you. There is no news where lam. This Ponka, Standing Bear, came back, but the soldiers came after him and carried him and his party to Omaha City. I do not know yet how they will treat them; whether they will return hither, or whether they will take them to the Ponkaland(in Indian Territory). As they did not say “* Help me!” I did not help them. Iam sad on that account. I send to tell you news. Seven lodges of Omahas went away, and they have not returned. Some migrated to the Pawnees, but they have not yet returned. I have just heard a very bad piece of news. It is said that the people in the south, beyond the Oto village, have the small-pox; that their bodies have broken out in running sores, and that many have died. Get your agent to ask for medicine among the white people. If you are vaccinated you will not have the small-pox. We Omahas will do likewise; we will ask about the medicine for ourselves. An aged Ponka man whom I kept has died. His name was Lean Black bear. Tell Smoke- maker. Now, Isend you a correct account of the matters of which I tell you. When you receive the letter, return one to me soon. qAGT’-NA*PAJI TO MU®TCE-QA*®]9E. A*wa” waja cté udgaca"-maji, ada" can’ge a”¢in’ge, a"wa™qpani hi. In any direction what- I haya not traveled, there- horse T have none, Tam poor ever fore [-aji-ga ha. Egi¢e ‘a™¢ingé’qti u¢igaca™ ¢ati te. QPidaji/qti ¢agdé i¢d- Do not ie Beware altogether in vain you travel you lest. You are very you go Tam coming come sad back nahi*-maji. Nikaci”ga d‘uba ikageawa¢é ¢a™ja, wa¢ita® Akihidai éga*, not willing. Person some I have them for though, work they aired as, friends niaci”ga uké¢i" icka® eqai té gaxe anga™¢a-baji. Ada” i-iji-ga has Céna. Indian common deed their the todo we do not wish. There- donot be f Enough. fore coming NOTE. See 726. After ga¢i®-na"paji had sent that letter, Mt™ e-qa™joe wrote again, insisting on coming to visit the Omahas. This elicited the above letter. TRANSLATION. I have not traveled in any direction whatever, so I have no horses; I am poor. Do not come! Beware lest you travel and come altogether in vain! I am not willing for you to start home much displeased. Though I have some persons as friends, they attend to work, and so we do not wish to do the deeds of wild Indians. Therefore do not come! Enough! TAYWA'-GAXBE-JINGA TO MAWATA®NA. 733 TAYWA®-GAXE-JINGA TO MAWATA®NA. Ca® ga” maja” ¢a™ b¢ita" éde eddda® b¢tiga udji b¢icta™ yi, Thank’- At any rate land the I have but what all Iplant Ifinish when, Yank- {ob.) worked them ta®wi™ fi ya be té, eb¢éga". Ca™ Thank’ta"wi yf gua¢ica” Caa™ aji- ton vil- I will see it, I think it. And Yankton vil- beyond Dakota dif lage lage ¢at¢a” waja™be ka™b¢a. Ca” ¢isan'ga, Ugq¢ etéga", can’ge yiuji ca” ferent ones I see them I wish. And your younger ‘To over- a horse honseful in fact brother, take (a foe) hada" can’ge sita” gina¢in’ge, wé5", kikusf cti, beuga gina¢in ge. at night horse five he lost by fire, plow, hog too, he lost by fire. (fand‘a® téga" uwib¢a cu¢éa¢e. Ca™ ga™-na" cupi te eb¢éga” uwib¢a You hear it in onder Itellitto Isend to you. And at any rate I will reach I think it T tell you that you (4) you cu¢éa¢é. Ca™ niaci’ga d‘tiba nujiniga wagaztiqti Thank’ta"wi” ikagea®- I send to you. And sence some boy very ae Yankton we have them wa™¢ai wagijapé qti judwag¢e. A™cté-na” yi wiwija udgidé cug¢é. for friends being very near to IT was with them. Usually, asit house my own I enter my I return them, my kindred were own to you. Ug¢e'qti waqiMha g@ wit’ ian‘ki¢a-ga. Niaci”ga-ma e‘ai yi, wi" ¢a-ga Very soon paper the (pl. one send hither to The manate how they if, tell me. in. ob.) me! are Wagaziiqti iwi" ¢a f¢a-ga. Very straight totellme send hither! NOTES. 733, 3. Ugq¢ etega" (Uq¢e etega"), a war or bravery name, “Apt to overtake the foe,” a name of Mandan (Mawada¢i"), the Omaha, half-brother of the Yankton Man- dan (Mawata™na). : 733, 5. Ca" ga"-na*, ete., said by W. to be bad Omaha. He gave other readings: Ca® ga” cub¢é etéga”, Tipit be apt to go to you at any rate; or, Ca® ga*’qti cub¢e etéga”, T will be apt to go to you, no matter what happens! Or, Edada" dakipa ctéctéwa™, cupi te eb¢éga®, ete., I think that TI shall reach your land in spite of anything that I may encounter, ete. Or, I™ba®-baji etéctéwa", ca’ (wiewaji®) cupi te eb¢éga", Even though T should not be invited (to your land), still, I (of my own accord) think that I shall reach your land. 733, 7. A™cte-na®, etc. A™cte 4i wiwija udgidé égatqti cub¢é, I go to you just as if I was entering my own house. (G.) W.and Ta®wa"-gaxejinga agree in the use of cug¢e. A” cte-na" qi wiwiya-qti udagidé cug¢e éga® ha (W.) differs from the text only in the use of the emphatic ending, -qti, very, and ega®, so, like. 734 THE YEGIHAA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. TRANSLATION. I work my land, but I think that when I finish planting everything I wiil visit the Yankton villages. I also wish to see the various Dakota tribes that dwell beyond the Yanktons. Your younger brother, Mandan, had his stable, five horses, his hogs, and plows consumed one night by a fire. I send to tell you. I also send to inform you that I think of visiting you. There are some men among the Yanktons, young men whom we regard as warm friends, with whom I associated when very near their lodges. And if I now go to see you it will be as if I entered my own house. Send mea letter very soon. ‘Tell me how the people are. Send and tell me the truth. HUPE(A TO A. B. MEACHAM. Kagéha, ticka™ udwa¢agiona ti¢a¢ai té angaxai. Wag¢ita® e‘a” ckAxai My friend, deed you told to us you have the wehave done Work how you (pl.) fs sent hither it. 0 it gé at¢an’gaska™¢ai, a™¢icta. Nikaci™ ga an’ga¢i™ pahan’ga Wakan‘da the we have attempted, we have fin- Person we who are before God (pl. ished. ir. ob.) aka jlit‘a® wixai té edada™ ctéwa™ a®¢a™baha™-baji. Kagéha, wa¢ita™ té the ~ made us have the what soever we did not know. My friend, work the (sub ) bodies a” ba¢e’qtci at¢icta’i té uwib¢a cu¢éagé. Nikaci’ ga uké¢i" an’ga¢i” ucka™ this very day we have fin- the I[tell it to I send to you. Indian common we who are deed ished you ¢i¢fja vida" ctéwa™ fbaha"-baji, angt-ona" a*¢a™baha", Uma™ha® an’gata™. your good soever they know not, only we we know it we who are Omahas. Kag¢éha, nikaci”ga uké¢i" ucté-ma gi ¢a-baji’-qtina” ca™ a”ba i¢aug¢e, My friend, Indian common the others are usually very sad yet day throughout, kagcha, gi’¢aji-méde anguthaji anga™¢ai. Eskana udwaya" ka™ a®¢a™ ¢ai. my friend, those who have we do not fol- we wish. Oh that they help us we hope. been sad low Nikaci’ga uké¢i" an’ga¢i” wa¢aha angijai gé a¢aha ctéwa” ga” ¢a-baji Indian common we who are clothing our the to wear at all they do not wish (pl. clothing in. ob.) wige ami. Ki, waqe-macé, edida™ aoni” gé b¢iiga anga™¢ai. Pahan’ga white the (pl. And, O ye white people! what you the all we desire. Form- people sub.) have — (pl. in. ob.) té/di ugdhanadazé’qti anguma™¢i’-na" ca™ea", nikaci”ga uké¢i" a"ma™ ¢i erly in great darkness we were always walking, Indian common we walked te’di. Ki a™”ba¢e’qtci a™¢ida*baf té’di, a”ba uda"qti wéahidé’qti when. And this very day we have seen you when, day very good to a very great istance 12 anegti¢ixiue edwaga™i. Waqe-macé, maja” niu¢uan’da ¢é nikaci”ga we look to a dis- We are so. O ye white people! land island this Indian tance HUPEG@A TO A. B. MEACHAM. 735 uké¢i®-ma Wakan’da aka ucjyawadki¢ai. Wiugdace ctéwa™ a¢igaxa-baji. the common ones God the caused them to own Tn the way in the least we did not regard (pl. ob.) (sub.) it. you. Ni-yan’ga masini ké maja” u¢u¢iyi¢in’gai ¢a™ maja” wiwija ¢a™ ¢att. Big Water other side the land it did not hold out for ‘the land my the you you (all) come hither. Ki ¢anija tai éga" maja” wiwtja ¢a" ¢att éga", ¢anfjai. Maja” wiwija 3 And youlive inorder that land my the youhaving come you live. Land my hither, ¢a" ¢ati té’di, can’ge-ma ci” qti waja™be-na™ma™, yéski cti ci qti the youhave when, the horses very fat T have usually seen them, oxen too very fat come waja™ be-na"-ma™, wamiuiské uji g@é’ cti, wéga"ze g¢éba-diba, g¢éba-sata’, I have usually seen them, wheat sown he too, measure forty, fifty, dL. eb) ujinati gé wajabe, maja” wiwija ¢an‘di. Wata™zi gé’ cti g¢éba-diba 6 they usually the I have seen land my in the. Corn the too forty sowed (pl. them, (pl. in. ob.) in. ob.) uji-na'i waja™be; na™za ge’ cti tidaqti g¢i”; can’ge yf ge’ cti udarqti, they usually I have seen; fence the too very good sit ; horse house the too very good, planted (pL. (pl. in. ob.) in. ob.) - y-ug¢i"’ ge’ eti, ida" g¢i”; kikusi wi"dqtci g¢éba-sata" ctéa™i: maja™ dwelling- the too, good sit; hog one fifty perhaps: land house (pl. in ob.) wiwija ¢a" fyiyixai wage amd. Gi'¢éqti-na™ ca™”ca’. Wi i” ¢a-maji-na™ 9 my the have made white the (pl. They are usually always. it IT am sad usually for themselves people sub). very glad by means of it ca”’ca™ b¢i”. T’teatqtci i”¢é ha, ada" wawidaxu cu¢éa¢é. Twi’ ¢aya* always Lam. * Just now Tam : there- I write several I send to You help me glad fore things to you. you. ka"b¢éga™. Twi ¢aya™ x'ji, i’ ¢é-na®™ ca’ca® etéga". Nikaci™’ ga uké¢i"-ma I hope. You help me if, Tam usually always apt. Indian the common glad ones wanita pfiiji’qti te ¢i” ékiga™qti wackaxai, waqe-macé. Téna’! wami 12 quadruped very bad will the(mv. just like it you make us, O ye white people. Fie! blood an. ob,) ea’ ¢ikiga™i: qi™ha-ska’ ¢idxai, qiha-jide waxai. Pahan‘ga te’di edada® weare like you: white skin he made red skin he made us. Formerly what you, ctéwa™ a®¢a® baha"-baji, ita" ticka" ¢i¢ijai ge at¢a™¢ibaha™i. Ucka" soever we did not know, now deed your the(pl. we know you by means Deed in. ob.) of them. ¢i¢fjai gé ama’ ¢ibaha™i te’di, ticka™ ¢i¢ijai ge’ at¢an’gu¢ihé anga™¢ai- 15 your the (pl. we know you by when, deed your the(pl. we follow you in we wish. in. ob.) means of them in. ob.) them An¢an’gu¢ihé tan’gata" ha. A™¢a”niy etaf té wi udwagi¢di-ga, We will follow you in them ' We may improve by the one tell it to us, means of (things) wige-macé. E‘a” i¢igindai gé wi" udwagi¢di-ga, kagéha. Qta” ¢i¢é O ye white people. How they are for the(pl. one tell to us, my friend. We love you your good in. ob.) héga-baji, kagéha. Nikaci’ga uké¢i" d‘iba macté maja” kéya hi éde 18 not a little, my friend. Indian common some warm land tothe reacheé but 3 736 THE (GEGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. g¢i. Gi'¢a-baji teabe, nikaci”ga uké¢i". Waya™be, Pan‘ka ¢anké. Tena! have They are sad very, Indian common. T have seen Ponka the ones Fie! come é them, who. back. , Lee , a / ~n/ J —~ ~~ ucka" ¢i¢ija ibaha" da™be ga” ¢ai ¢anka edta" t'é we¢écka™naf A. deed your to know to see they wish the ones why to die do you wish for them ? who Wakan‘da ¢inké wi éskana fe ¢and‘a%i é@di-macé, Wakan‘da ¢inké fe God the one I oh that word youhearit 0 vou who are God theone word who there, who “Ly . . , ~ , see v é¢ana‘a"-baji'qtia"i. Wag¢ate¢é cté tepaha-baji éska"b¢éga", wAqe-micé. you do not obey him at all. Pity even you do not know it it may be, I think it, O ye white people Nikaci”ga uké¢i" ¢anka wayig¢ita’qti ga’¢ai éde waniytiwi'xe wani" Indian — common the ones to work hard for them- they but you have led them you have who selves wished around kept them Za ae : EO a . 5 , . Pan‘ka ¢anka. Wagqi™ha cuhi té’di, waqi”ha-gawa baxt-de ca” maja™ Ponka the rae Paper reaches . when, paper spread open written when and land who you , Pico mice — | ON) Peay Lon fe ~ b¢uga u¢ffai té, gan’yi wi ian’ki¢d-ga. whole scattered the, and then one send hither to me! in NOTES. The translation of this letter appeared in The Council Fire of 1879. 734, 4. Nikacitga uke¢i™ aNga¢i", does not include the Omahas; so the phrase may be rendered by ‘‘The Indians who are like us,” ete. But in 734, 5, afguona™ - . Umatha" afigatat, refers to the Omahas alone. TRANSLATION. My friend, we have done the deeds of which you told us when you sent hither. We have attempted the various kinds of work that you have done, and we have suc- ceeded. When God first made us, we Indians did not know anything whatever. My friend, I send to you to tell you that we have finished the work on this very day. The wild Indians of our race do not know anything about your ways; but we Omahas alone know about them. My friend, the other Indians are very sad throughout the day; but we do not wish to follow them. We hope that you will aid us. The white people do not wish us Indians to wear any part of our own clothing. O ye white peo- ple! we desire all the things which you have. Formerly, when we lived as wild Indians, we continued in great darkness. But to-day as we have seen you, we can perceive by steady gazing a very good day at a great distance. O ye white people ! God caused the Indians to own the land on this island. We did not regard you as being in our way at all! You came to my land because the land on the other side of the water was insufficient for you all. You came to my land in order to live, and so you have improved. Since you have come to my land, I have seen in my land very fat horses and cattle, as well as from forty to fifty bushels of wheat sown (by one man). I have seen forty bushels of corn planted; excellent fences, stables, and dwellings. One hog has, perhaps, increased (in a few years) to fifty. The white people have acquired these things for themselves from my land; and they are always very glad. But I was ever sorrowful. Now I am glad, therefore I write to you about JOHN SPRINGER TO JOHN PRIMBAU. ; 737 several matters. I hope that you will help me. If you help me, I shall be apt to rejoice continually. O ye white people! you have regarded us Indians just as so many very bad quadrupeds! Fie! weresemble you in having blood, though you were made with white skins and we with red ones. In former days we knew nothing at all; but now we have learned your deeds from you. As we have learned your methods, we wish to imitate you in practicing them. We will follow you in this respect. O ye white people, tell us one of the things by means of which we may improve! My friend, tell us one of the many things which have been advantageous to you. My friend, we have great love for you. Some Indians went to the Indian Territory, but they have returned. The Indians are very sad. I have seen them. They are the Ponkas. Shame on you! why do you wish those to die who desire to see and know your ways? O ye whom I regard as hearers of God’s words (among those who are otherwise), you have not obeyed God’s words at all! I think, O ye white people, that you do not even know what pity is. The Ponkas desired to work very hard for themselves, but you have kept them in an unsettled condition. When this letter reaches you, and it is put in a newspaper and scattered over the whole country, send me a paper. JOHN SPRINGER TO JOHN PRIMEAU. April 26, 1879. Kag¢ha, can’ge ta" ceta™ tkikawi"a¢a-maji. Can’ge ta” q¢d éde i” tea® My friend, horse the so far I have not bartered. Horse the lean but now (std. (std. an. ob.) an. ob.) ci" ¢é ha. Ki itea™ wab¢ita" héga-maji, wéb¢i"wi"-maji tdnke. Beéfcta™ fat goes . And now I have plenty of work, I may not sell. I finish it yi, can’ge ikikawi"a¢é ta minke. Itea™ gfujf angtyai nid ¢ingé, udaqti when, horse I will trade. Now ens our pain hasnone, very good ole a™naji®. Ki Thank’ta"wi™ 4fi ¢a"y4 ond wika™b¢a. Cin’gajin’ga wiwija &’ya we stand. And Yankton vil- tothe you I wish for you. Child my there lage go cta”be né wika"b¢a. Ii Ma"teti-ndji" i¢imaxe te ticka™ e‘at™ i¢apaha"-maji yousee you Iwishforvou. And Standing Grizzly Lask hima may deed how I do not know him “go bear question ~ = a = =a z Sons rd yn’ |< A 170 y ha. Wabag¢eze ci ugé¢é tia’ ¢aki¢é ka"b¢éea", waqi“”ha ¢é nize yi. fo) Ona 5 Letter again soon you send hither I hope, paper this you when. to me recelve it NOTES. John Springer was a half-blood Omaha. John Primeau was a half-blood Ponka, who resided on the Santee reservation, Knox County, Nebr. 737, 5. Ki Ma*teu-naji", ete. If té, the, be substituted for te, may, we may trans- late thus: “I do not know about the matter concerning which I questioned Standing Bear,” youn yi-——47 738 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. TRANSLATION. My friend, I have not yet exchanged the horse for one of equal value. The horse has been lean, but now he is getting fat. At present I have plenty of work, and I may not sellit. When I finish the work I will trade the horse (for another?). All in our household are in good health, we are doing very well, I wish you to go to the Yankton village. I desire you to go to see my child that is there. I do not know how I can ask Standing Bear a question (?). I hope that when you receive this letter you will send me one soon. ANPAY-;ANGA, AND OTHERS, TO INSPECTOR J. H. HAMMOND. May 8, 1879. Nikaci”ga amé& ¢éama ikagewa¢a¢é Uma™ha™ tiwa¢akié ama¢a™ ca” Indian the (pl. these you have them for Omaha those whom you talked to at sub.) friends in the past any rate . , v {2 i"taxaja wagaca™ ond té ca” ¢ag¢i i¢d¢ipat se, ¢ag¢iaji éga", maja” uk towards the traveling you the still youhave they have you have ‘as, land home head of the went returned waited for not returned river you . 7yqe eee 2 72 , Pe ESP: / = 4 / 2 ¢i¢ija ¢an’di ¢aki éska® e¢éga™ éga", u¢ti¢ikié ga ¢ai, u¢ina‘a" ga” ¢ai. your inthe youhave perhaps they think as, to talk to you they wish, tohearabout they wish. reached about some- you home thing Kagéha, ie wi" u¢ti¢ikié ga” ¢ai ha, icka® wit’ u¢udikié ga” gai. Ug¢e'qtei My acne word one to talk to you Sher wish . deed one to talk to you Stas wish. Very soon about it about it wabag¢eze wi™ twaki¢a-ga ha. Qatiiiji taté yi, ie té gif cubi¢e “i¢ai ha. letter one send to us You shall not if, word the togive tosend they come hither to you thither promise to you TRANSLATION. These Indians whom you regard as your friends, the Omahas to whom you spoke, have waited for you to return from your journey up the Missouri River. But since you have not returned they think that you may have gone on to the land where your home is, and so they wish to speak to you about something. Then they desire to hear from you. My friend, they wish to speak to you about one matter, one deed. Send us a letter very soon. If you do not intend coming hither, they promise to give you the words and send them thither to you. MA“E-GAHI TO LOUIS ROY. 739 MA™E-GAHI TO LOUIS ROY. May 24, 1879. Umaha-madi ag¢i. Uméha ¢éama wiji’¢e amd, winégi ama edabe, To the Omahas I have Omaha these my elder the (pl. my the (pl. also, returned. brothers sub.), mother’s sub.) brother 1 . sO Oey; / O . anew oe eo a ¢éqti a” gir éga", i”uda™gti ma"b¢i”. Maja” pfiiji hégaji, tte ké very gently have me as, very good for T walk. Land very bad, cause the (or carefully) me of (coll. death ’) J ~ Is Fey eel, . . héga-ctéwa" ji, macté hégaji-na” ca”ca’. Wija”be ka™b¢a-qti_ ca” ca" far from being few, warm very ust- always. I see you T have a strong always ally desire ma*b¢i”. Wisf¢é-na* ca”ca™, Watt ¢i¢ija uckida™ ga”-ada™ awasi¢é-na® I walk. ITremember usu- always. Woman your kind as, there- Iremember usu- you ally fore them ally ea” ca". Himbé tida" ingdxe- na", da" awasi¢é-na™ma™. (Piddi wa¢até always. Moccasin good made for ust- there- Tam usually thinking about Your food me aliy, fore them. father ukét‘a® ¢a” u¢ide uhf juwig¢e, wa"da” udhi ha, ga”-ada™ wisi¢é-na"-ma™, heacquired the together I was with you in together Igrew . as, there- Tam usually thinking = (ob.) in work growing, up fore of you. Ede wija™ba-méji iteqi i¢dnahi® ma*bd¢i’. Edudna ea” ¢a-baji té : | But I do not see you hard for I accept it I walk. Antoine not related to the me me . / . / , , v ~ / / eu / , y eee if; ékiga™ qtia”, dda" yf té ctéwa™, ya™ba-maji, ca” di ha. (bigaha" aka can’ge is just like it, there- lodge the even, I did not see it, I wascom- . Your the horse fore (ob.) ing back brother-in- (sub.) hither just law so ta” ¢if ta® ab¢i” di te af de, agisi¢é’-ctéewa*-maji, Ca™ ha™-ima”™ ¢i" the he the Tam bringing will he but, I did not think of it at all. Just walking by night (std. gave (std. it back hither said (as L an. it to was) an. ob) you ob.) di ha. Ugq¢e/qtei wijabe ta minke etéga". Dega™ wabaxu ¢a* nize x1, I . Very soon I will see you it is But (?) letter the you when, was probable. (ob.) receive coming it back 5 : . . . ml v np — , : uq¢e’qtei waqi”ha gia” ¢aki¢é te. Edéce yi, cupi ta minke. Nt wata™zi very soon paper please be sending it What you if, I will reach you. Potato corn back to me. say 4 edabe udji édega® ceta™ ag¢f‘a. Ag¢icta yi, cupt etéga" ha. Hitbé éskana 12 also Lhave but sofar Ihave not Ifinish when, I reach it is 6 Moceasin ob that planted finished mine you probable mine. . . (ee 1S , L ¢igaq¢a® i¢a”anki¢al ka*b¢éga”. your wife she puts them by I hope, in order to save for me 740 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. NOTES. Ma™e-gahi was a Ponka. Louis Roy, a half-blood Ponka, was then staying on the Yankton reservation, Dakota. 739, 10. Dega®. W. substitutes, “‘Ga",” And. G. agrees with the author in giving a reading of equal value (both sentences being connected): Uq¢eqtci wigatbe ta minke etega"™ ¢aja, wabaxu ¢:a", ete. i.e., Though I shall probably see you very soon, please send me a letter very quickly after you receive this one. TRANSLATION, I have come*back as far as the Omaha reservation. These Omahas, my elder brothers, and my mother’s brothers also, have treated me with the greatest considera- tion, so I continue to prosper. The land (in the south ?) is very bad, it contains many things that tend to shorten life, and it is always very warm. I always have a strong desire to see you. I always think of you. Your wives have been very kind, there- fore I have always remembered them. They usually made moccasins for me, so I am generally thinking about them. You and I were raised together on the food which your father acquired, therefore I am usually thinking of you. But I continue in great distress because I do not see you. Antoine (your brother) has been just as if he was not related to me at all, therefore I started back hither without even seeing his house. Your brother-in-law said that I was to bring back to the Omaha reservation the horse which he had given you, but it escaped my memory altogether, I came hither travel- ing by night. It is probable that I shall see you very soon. When you get this letter, please send one back to me very soon. If you say anything I will come to you. I have been planting potatoes and corn, but I have not yet finished my work. When I finish it I will probably come to you. I hope that your wife will put some mocca- sins aside for me. TWO CROWS AND OTHERS TO JOSEPH LA FLECHE, AT OMAHA. May 28, 1879. Cé-ma ukikie wécpaha® yi wackan’-ga. Ca™ Sawa¢é-na™i gé éskana Those talking you know when make an effort! And they are usually the oh that whom you together them talking about us (pl. see * in ob.) . 3 / WED aoe ~~! Te pi ie uda’qti, éskana ckaxe ka” a™¢a™ ¢ai. Wa¢acka™ ka” a™¢a™ ¢ai. anew word very good, oh that you we hope. _ You make an we hope. make it attempt NOTES. Joseph La Fleche went with his daughter Susette to the Indian Territory, to visit his younger brother, Frank, a Ponka chief. Two Crows said that when the letter was received La Fléche would think “Wacka™ ‘i¢ai tena,” 7. e. “they talk of nothing but perseverance !” G., (1889) gave what is plainer to the author: Wacka™ té - na - qti ‘i¢ai a. Persevere the only very they ! ~ speak of iene FRED. MERRICK 0 G. W. CLOTHEB. 741 TRANSLATION. Do your best when those whom you see and know are talking together! We hope that when they talk about us alone, you will make very good speeches (in our behalf). We hope that you will persevere. FRED. MERRICK TO G. W. CLOTHER: A™ba¢é wawidaxu cu¢éa¢é ha. Cé¢u pi té nikaci ga juawag¢é aka To-day I write to you -Isendtoyou . Yonder I the Indian I with them the about several reached (coll. things there sub.) efuda™ qtia’ i, tida'qti judwag¢e. Maja™ béé Gage ¢a%ya judwag¢e b¢a-maji. it was very good for very good I was with Land Igo I to the I with them I did not go. them, them. pa Ki maja” li tédthi yi, wab¢ita” Ki ticka" égice te¢a™ imaja™ ¢é¢uadi ag¢i tedihi yi, wa ¢ita"qti-ma™. Ki tcka™ égice te¢a™ 3 And land inthis place I ave by the time I have worked. And deed you said inthe come that, that to past back . (some one) and‘a® ka™b¢a-qti-ma™. Waha cka’na ‘i¢agé te¢a” éga*qti g gixa- gi. Ca” IThearit Ihave a strong desire. Animal you wish you in the sat 80 re And skins for spoke of past and‘a" ka™ b¢a-qti-ma™ hi, ugaket‘a" tédihi yj, Waqi“ha ¢é cuhf té I hear it I have a strong desire c you acquire it by the if. Paper this reaches the time that you éskana fe aa ‘igage ka*b¢ég ra", ug¢é qtci, Nikaci’ ga wagaxe é¢i¢i” aki 6 WV oh that word you give you I hope, very soon. s X - sear , debt he has the tome promise ° for you (sub.) gisi¢ai a” ba i¢dug¢e. Ki a™ba wija™be té dtandar wactar ‘be taté eb¢éga*. Sense day through. “And day Isee you the by that you shall seeit(ob.not I think it. it , time named) Ca” i udatqti-ma™, éskana uq¢é’qtci waqi”ha ia” ¢aki¢é katb¢éga®. Ki And Iam doing very well, oh that very soon paper you send hither I hope. And to me Ligita® t’a™ hégaji ha, wamuské ke’ cti hégaji, dda" a®wa"’snindeé’-qti-ma” 9 work abounds very 4 wheat the too very there- Iam delayed a long time much much, fore ha. Ci wahd u¢dket‘a™ cka”na té ha’. Ki nfkaci™’ga ¢é cahf aka Again animal you acquire ~ you wished A And person this he the skin reached (coll. you sub.) wan 'gige u¢dket‘a® ¢iga’¢ai. Nikaci”ga aka ¢igisi¢é-na™i ha. Ikige¢i¢e’qti youacquire they wish it Person the they are usually . Having you for a for you. (coll. remembering you real friend sub.) iyAxal. 12 they make for them- selves. NOTE. Fred. Merrick, or Siya"-qega; was an Omaha. He wrote this letter to a white man residing at Columbus, Nebr. 742 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. TRANSLATION. I write to vou to-day about several matters and send to you. When I was there with you the Indians whom I accompanied were well pleased, and it was very good for me to be with them. I did not accompany them to the land to which I promised to go. By the time that I returned to this land I had plenty of work (?). I have a strong desire to hear respecting the matter about which you spoke to me. You spoke of your desire for skins of animals; act accordingly! I am very anxious to hear about them against the time that you acquire them. When this letter reaches you I hope that you will promise to give me information on the subject very soon. The Indian who owes you a debt thinks of it throughout the day. I think that you Shall see it by the day that I see you. Tam very well. I hope that you will send me a letter very soon. There is a great amount of work here, and the wheat crop is bountiful, therefore I am delayed a long time. You wished to acquire skins of animals. All these Indians who came to you wish that you would acquire them. The men are usually thinking of you. They consider you as their true friend. HOMNA TO HEQAKA-MANI, ICTA JAXJAX, AND MASATCEBA (sic) YANKTONS. Nikaci”ga ¢ab¢i® céna wawidaxti ha. Ca”, nikaci™ ga-macé, ¢wi¢ai, Indian three enough Iwrite to you(pl.) . And, O ye Indians, Thave you on different sub- for kindred, jects y ° yy 7 = an ‘S ba 14 ‘| - - , *n/ = ki ikAgewi¢e’-cti-ma™i. Ki maja” ké wéahidé’qti pi édega™, i”’teqi éga™ and TI also have you for my friends. And land the ata great distance IT had arrived, it ie hard as or me ag¢i. Nikaci” ga ¢éama edwad¢ée amadi ag¢i, ki i uda™-qti-ma™, i” ¢é-qti I returned Persons these Ihavethem totheones Ive- and I wasdoing very well, I was very hither. for kinsmen who turned, well pleased . G Pies , ols yal re : 1s , rec , Sas ma"b¢i" yi, waqe ama a™¢izai. Ki maja” gahi¢a’ya a™agi® aki te’di, Iwalked when, white the(pl. they took And land to that (land) out they took me when, ; people sub.) me. of sight back thither , ify & 4 2 / 2 if , / / / =. / wage ama a®wa"‘iai, A ¢icta”-bi af édega™, ceta” a™wa"¢a"i, a"wa™ cte white the (pl. were talking That they had let they but, so far they hold me, Tam left people sub.) about me. me go said OS = s ° su , *n/ 4 , , e . Dens jin’ga ha’, a™¢icta™-baji. Nikaci™ga ¢éama, Umaha ama cti udwagiya™qti. a little 5 they have not re- Person these, Omaha the (pl. too haye given me much leased me. sub.) help. Ceta” Umaha maja” e}4 ¢an’di baza™ aki-maji, ya”ha ke'di ag¢i. Ki So far Omaha land their to the among I have not border tothe Ihave And the crowd reached there returned. again, . . G . ° . , Osos fu vi y a” ¢icta’i té’di, ca” nikaci”ga uké¢i® ticka™ jtjuaji ke’ ctéwa™ éska" they letme go when, atany Indian common deed badonesof the soever oh that rate various kinds 9 ana™cibe ka"b¢éea™. Ca™ a™ba¢é wisf¢é-qti, wabdg¢eze wawidaxti. fo) ? 5 I take my feet I hope. And to-day I think muoh letter I have written to out of (?) about you, you on different subjects. —_se HOMNA TO HEQAKA-MANI AND OTHERS. 743 Ki ticka"™ e‘a™ ma®ni™ yi, ca" wagazu éskana Mwi'’¢anaf ka"bééga™ (ca™ Db D5 And deed how you walk if, yet straight oh that you (pl.) tell it to I hope yet me , e / *n/ 2 ae , *n/ , , vy , e ticka® Aja" e‘a” ma™ni™ yi). Ki nfkaci”’ga dba ¢éama ticka® gé giteqi deed youdo how you walk if. And person some these deed the hard for it (pl. (them) in. ob.) , , Oey a aefOea) Bee “I Eas ay ys . ama. IkAge¢i¢é’qti xi’j1, ucka™ ge’ giteqi ama ha’ ¢a™ ja, nikaci”ea diba the (pl. They have you for when, deed the (pl. hard the (pl. . though, person some el.). real friends, in. ob.) for (them) — el.) éwa'i, nikagahi- ma wae¢ai, ¢ida™ba-baji ¢ wakaf. Ca™ nikaci™ga they chief the (pl. they accuse they did notsee you it they mean. And person caused it, in ob.) them a Cy ah y , , Fol , = *n/ 8) , ~ Q) *n/ , ¢e¢inke iaje té epaxu etega". Ki’ wabig¢eze i'¢i’¢izal yi, Mwi'¢a_ ti¢e this st. ona his the you write itis proba And letter he receives when, totellme tosend name (ob.) it ble. for me at my to me request etéga". Ditba-ma™¢i" ¢ wagaztiqti nikaci’ga igi" ¢ize ta ¢inkeé, he is apt. Duba-ma¢i" he very straight person the one who will receive it for me. NOTES. Homna, Smelling of fish, the Yankton equivalent of the Ponka Hub¢a®. This Ponka was also known as yaxe-ni-¢ata™ (see 729, 5), peje-baye, Buffalo Chips, and Nudathatiga, War captain. Heqaka-mani was Walking Elk. 743, 1 and 2. (ca" ucka® aja® ea" ma"ni® yf) a parenthetical expression, which can be omitted, as it is redundant, being a mere equivalent of what precedes: “that is, how you progress with the things which you have undertaken.” TRANSLATION. I write to you three men on various matters. O ye men, Tregard you as my kindred and friends. I arrived at the very distant land, and as it was difficult for me to remain, I returned hither. I returned to these Indians, my kindred, and when I was doing very well and continued very happy the white people arrested me. And when they took me back to Omaha City the white people talked about me (7. e., entered suit). They subsequently said that they had let me go, but they still hold me a little under restraint; they have not released me. These Omahas have given me much aid. I have not yet returned to the Omaha reservation, where I could associate freely with the people. I have returned to the border of the reservation. When they release me, I hope that I may get my feet out from the various kinds of bad deeds of wild Indians. AsI am thinking much about you to-day, I write to you a letter on different subjects. I hope that you will tell me fully what things you have been doing (that is to say, how you progress with the things which you have undertaken). Some of these people have had trouble. When they had you for true friends they got into trouble, and this was caused by some persons, that is, the chiefs, whom they accuse of keeping them from visiting. you. You may write the name of this Indian sitting here. When he receives a letter for me at my request, he will be apt to send and tell me. Duba-ma*¢i" is the one who will receive my letters for me, as he is a very upright man. Qo 744 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. NAYZANDAJI TO JAMES O’KANE. June 24, 1879. Ca™, kag¢cha, a“ba¢é wisi¢é wawidaxu cu¢éa¢é, fe djubaqtei éga". And, my friend, to-day Iremember Iwritetoyou Isendtoyou, word very few. you about several things y : : lye Lege a Oe; . ent Ikageki¢é tida*qti a™¢i™ ¢a™cti, anyija™ba-baji yaci agi”. Ca” Regarding one very good we were formerly, we have not seen one a long we are. And another as friends : another time / : : : 1 *n/ 1 : watdsi¢a¢a-baji’-qti-ja” ite, ca” a¢isi¢e-na” ar¢i”. Ca” ¢ikage yon have not been thinking of us at all if, per- yet we think of usu- we are. And your friend haps, ; you ally ) oI . , 1 "LZ , nin’de ¢a” gi ¢aji’-qti-na® ca™ca", xagé-na"™ ca™ca”. (hikage wait heart the very sad forhim usu- - always, he weeps usu- always. Your friend woman (ob.) ally ally eiwakéga git’e téga". Ca” éskana wabag¢eze nizé yi, e‘a” ma™ni™ ¢i"te sick forhim hisdies is apt. And oh that letter youre- when, how you walk if ceive it ca” wind‘a® ka”b¢a. Ca™ ti¢ita® a¢dg¢ani” dite a™¢ina‘a® afiga™ ¢ai. atany I hear from I wish. And work you have your if we hear from we wish. Tate you own you Ca” Méjik a™patha, yAqtiha da’ cté, a¢i” dimte, i¢amaxe yi, iwi" ¢and And Messick elk hide, deer hide or, he has if, youask him when, you tell it to me ka*b¢éga™. Ca™ ydqtiha na™ba tida*qti ka™b¢a, ¢éni"wiY yi’, ia” ¢aki¢é I hope. And deer hide two very good I desire, you buy them if, you send them for me hither to me ka"b¢éga", uq¢é’gtci. Ci a™pa"ha wiraqtci etéctéwa" ka™b¢aqti. Ca™ I hope, very soon. Again elk hide just one even if I desire greatly. And e‘a” ma™b¢i” té a™¢a”cepaha™. Nid a*¢in’gé-qti-ma™ how I walk the you know me. Pain I have not at all. NOTES. Na®zandaji wasan Omaha. O’Kane’s residence was at Kearney Junction, Nebr. 744, 3. Qikage, i. e., Pidaiga or Spafford Woodhull: see 656, note. 744, 7. Mejik, 7. e., T. M. Messick, a white trader. TRANSLATION. My friend, I remember you to-day, and I write to you about various matters, send- ing you a very few words. We have been very good friends, though we have not seen each other for a long time. Even if you have not been thinking of us at all, we are usually thinking of you. Your friend is now very sad at all times; he is weeping continually. Your iriend’s wife is ill, and will probably die. I hope that when you receive the letter I may hear from you how you are getting along. If you have any work of your own, we wish to hear from you. When you ask Mr. Messick whether he has any elk or deer skins, I hope that you will tell me what he says. I desire two very good deer skins. If you buy them for me, I hope that you will send them to me very soon. I also desire at least one elk skin. Youknow how Lam doing. I am very well. Te WAQPECA TO UNAJI’-SKA. 745 WAQPECA TO UNAJI®-SKA. June 3, 1879. Ca” wind‘a™ ka”b¢a, ki a”ba dhigi wind‘a"-méji hi. Winégi And LT hear from I wish, and day many T have not heard 4 My mother's you from you brother giaméde, g¢iiji, Cahid¢a. Cé’ya ¢andji", negtha, i’ ¢éqti-ma™. Wisi¢é-na® isreturning he has not Cheyenne. Yonder youstand, mother’s Iam very glad. IT think of usu- they say, but, returned, brother, you ally ca”ca". Wabag¢eze nizé yi, uq¢e’qti ti¢age ka*b¢éga". Djé aké Pan‘ka always. Letter youre- when, very soon you send I hope. Joe the Ponka ceive it it hither (sub.) Ay) ° . . . my ho . w ahi éde, ag¢i uq¢é’qtci. Winégi cuki cite eta”be yi, mwi™¢and f¢a¢ée reached but, he re- very soon. My mother’s re- if yousee when, youtellittome yousend there turned brother turned him hither hither there to you Ss . wi ye: ef ~ te hi’, und‘a"a"¢aki¢e té, cta”be té‘di. Pan‘ka cé¢u g¢i té ceta™ will 3 you cause me to hear will, you see when. Ponka yonder has the so far about it him come back wagazu-baji, Ebécté tbaha™ ji. is not straight, whoever does not know it. NOTES. 745, 1. Winegi, 7. e., Cheyenne. In line 2, Negiha refers to Unaji®-ski, son of Cheyenne. Note that Waqpeca calls both father and son his “mother’s brothers.” See Omaha Sociology, §75, in 3d An. Rept. Bureau of Ethnology, 1885. 745, 2. giamede, in full, gi ama ede. 745, 5. una‘atar¢aki¢e te ctabe tédi, equivalent to the two preceding phrases. TRANSLATION. I have wished to hear from you, but for many days I have not heard from you. It is said that my mother’s brother, Cheyenne, is coming back, but he has not yet returned. I am delighted, mother’s brother, that you are staying there where you are. _ Tam always thinking of you. I hope that when you receive this letter you will send one hither very soon. Joseph La Fléeche went down to see the Ponkas in the Indian Territory, but he will return very soon. If my mother’s brother (your father) has reached the Yankton reservation, please send and tell me when you see him. Please let me hear about him when you see him. It is still uncertain whether the Ponkas will return to their old reservation (in Dakota). No one knows about it. 746 THE @EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. OR N PRIMEAU TO REV. A. L. RIGGS. June 5, 1879. A™ba¢é niaci®ga waja™ be, ukikiaf a™ba¢é Umaha amd. Ki Omaha To-day people T have seen they have to-day Omaha the (pl. And Omaha them, talked together sub.). City eyata" niaci” ga wiuki wi” ati, Pan’ka wiuki aké. Te tda®qti nfaci’ ga City from it person or advocate one has Ponka advocate theone Spoke very good man Indian come, who is he. aka wiuki aké. Ma*teti-ndji® nfaci’ga ufya" tedbai, wawiu'é aké, tida?- the advocate the Standing Bear person has aided greatly, lawyer theone very (sub.) (sub.). him who, qti giga"¢at. I’tea"ba¢e fai té uwib¢a ta minke. Ijiga™¢ati ¢inké’ya Pan‘ka good desires for This day, now what they I will tell you. Grandfather to the Ponka him spoke . ¢anka ‘iwa¢é ag¢é ‘i¢ai, Isa™yati ¢ankdé cti, Uméha ¢anka cti, Hiyatiga the ones to talk to go he has Santee the ones too, Omaha the ones too, Winnebago who about them promised, who who ¢anka cti, dda" ticka" gé b¢tiga wigazu gixe ga’ ¢ai. Ca™ fe ké Ahigi the ones too, there- deed the (pl. all straight to make he wishes. And word the many who fore in. ob.) ¢a"ja, djuba daxe, awdna"q¢i" éga". Monday te’di df ha. Ki Wednesday though, few I made, I was in haste as. Monday on Iwas . And Wednesday coming hither té’di ati ha, Umaha 4fi ¢an’di. Ki a™ba-waqtbe ¢icta”, Monday té’di on Icame . Omaha vil- to the. And Sunday finished, Monday on hither lage cag¢é ta minke. Qlawini Cani e¢a” ba Pan‘ka wiuki uwd¢agina te. (asi, TI will start back to you. David Charles he too Ponka they aid you tell it to will. jorsey, ; F them : them Mr. Hamilton’ cti ya be. Céna. Mr. Hamilton too Isaw. Enough. NOTES. John Primeau had acted as Ponka interpreter for Rev. A. L. Riggs at the Santee Agency, Nebr., since 1871, and perhaps for a longer period. John Primeau came to the Omaha Agency and visited the Presbyterian Mission while Mr. T. H. Tibbles was consulting with the Omaha about the Ponka case. TRANSLATION. I have seen the Indians to-day; the Omahas have been talking together to-day. A lawyer has come from Omaha City, and he is the one who has been helping the Ponkas. This advocate spoke very good words. The lawyers have afforded consid- erable help to Standing Bear. They desire for him what is very good. I will tell you what they spoke about this very day. He has promised to go to the President to speak for the Ponkas. And not only for them, but also for the Santees, Omahas, Winnebagos, and, in fact, he wishes to rectify the affairs of all of them. And though there were many words, I record but a few, as I am in haste. I started hither on Monday, and on Wednesday I reached here at the Omaha Agency. On Monday next I will start back to you. Please tell Charles and David Le Clere about the man who has been aiding the Ponkas. I have seen Messrs. Dorsey and Hamilton. Enough. : Ae MA®TCU-NA*BA TO UNAJI-SKA. AT MAXTCU-NAYBA TO UNAJIN-SKA. Waqi”ha ¢é¢a" i’teaqtci b¢izé. Caa™” ama cag¢al té’di i teaqtci Paper this just now T have re- Dakota the (pl. started when just now ceived it. - sub.) back to you b¢izé. Wawéa"maxe ti¢ai te uwib¢a cu¢géa¢é ti minke. Edadda™ nijinga I have re- To ask me some ques- they the TI tellit to I will send it to you. What boy ceived it. tions sent you hither ama ¢if ama i¢apaha"-mdaji, ca” wéamiaxe ta minke, ¢a™ja ayiqib¢a, yAci the (pl. they gave to I do not know it, yet I will ask them a question though TL hesitate from a long sub.) you about several things, fear of failure, time , La v vy , , s v , ® N / — s hégaji. Ci ¢ati yi, wé¢andxai yi, ida" tdi"te. Ga™ Pan‘ka amd ¢éama very. Again you when, you question if, good it would And Ponka the (pl. these have them about sev- be. sub.) (pL) come eral things hither . Pin get) , = , , Om . 1: =f . Dj6 aka &ya ahi, fu¢a ey té ub¢d ta minke. (hiddi Pan‘ka fhusd-biama, Joe the there reached news his the I will tell it. Your Ponka They scolded him, (sub.) there, (pl. father if is said, in ob.) A . . Ly Hew 10 . oe . , ie gi dgaji-biamé, ca” eca”adi g¢i” ¢inké amd. Céki ama yf sata” to be they ordered him, yet near to them he was sitting, it is said. Ceki the (my. lodge five re- it is said, sub.) turn ing juwag¢e agi-bi améde a™ba-waqtbe na™ba ef té ceta” Djo Zuzét'te ‘he with them was returning hither, mysterious day two re- the so far Joe Susette they say, but turning / af, “as Las rove / =i, , . , / e¢a“”ba Pan‘ka fi ¢an’di ahi-bi ega”, Pan‘ka u¢a-biamd. I” tea" she too Ponka village at the having arrived there, Ponka told it, they say. Now they say, yan’ géqtci ag¢fi té, Uma™ha™ qi ¢an‘di. Ita" a™ba-waqube dtba gf very near the they _ the, Omaha village to the. Now mysterious day four re- time have re- turn- turned ing a Lies — © ~ 4 —~/ is té ceta”, Céki. Pan’ka na™ba waka ta"-biama, Weé’s‘a-jan’ea, Gahige the so far, Ceki. Ponka two were tied, they say, Big Snake, The Chief e¢a”ba. Ukie a¢é ‘i¢d-bi egat, Pan‘ka i¢ddi¢af aka fhuwa¢a-biama: he too. To paya togo theyspoke having, Ponka agent the he consulted them : friendly of it, they say (sub.) visit “T’ta", nathébai-ga. (Qixiga" thuwa¢éé ¢éadé ta minke. Inahi™ yi, ond Hold on! wait ye! Your grand- to consult I will send thither. He is will- if, you father - them ing taité. Inahi” yi, uma™e cti will éga™, né taité,” a-biamd. Ki ca™ shall go. He is will- if, provisions too Igive having, you shall go, he said, they And yet ing e you say. na‘a”-baji We’s‘a-jan’ga Gahige e¢a™ba. Gat Pan‘ka juwag¢e a¢a-bi they did not Big Snake The Chief he too. So Ponka with them went, they listen to him say Cahié¢a yi ¢an’di. E’di ahi-bi yi, Cahié¢a i¢adi aka u¢a"-biama, Wée's‘a- Cheyenne vil to the. There arrived when, Cheyenne father the held them, they Snake lage there, they (sub.) say, say yan’ga Gahige e¢a™ba. Gan’yi ucté am’ wandce amd wagiahi-biama Big The Chief he too. And then those who re- police the (pl. they came there for mained (=the sub.) them, they say rest) 12 15 9 12 15 748 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGB—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. Pons . , ga™, wi¢i? aki-biamé. Waka’ ta" ¢a™ja, uq¢é wa¢icke ta-bitéama. I™’ta® as, they ue them back home, They tied them though, soon they shall be untied, they say. Now they say. Pan’ka ucté am& yimtig¢a™ gf ga™¢ai éde, Djé aka cka™aji g¢i” wagaji. Ponka the remainder to stealaway re- wished but, Joe the not moving to sit Re eills turn- (sub.) them. Mattct-naji® ¢é¢inke an’guin’ya"i. Uma™ha" maja” uhan’ge waqe ea Standing Bear this st. one we aided him. Omaha land end white their people own hébe ug¢i” g¢i™. Ki a® ‘ba¢é an’guin’ya"l, médica" hide u¢a™ juawag¢e. part sitting in it he sits. And to-day we have aided him, quill base Ra seen I was with them. old of it Ceta” Wakan’da ¢aha™-ma watie edibe Uma™ha™ aké cti céna ufya"l So far. God those who pray lawyer also Omaha * the (coll. too enough have to Him sub.) aided him Ma"tet-ndji®. A” bagé wattie wi" juan’e¢e gti”, ar¢an’gukié ang¢i™i. Standing Bear. To-day lawyer one he with me he sat, we talked together we sat. Tyiga "tat ¢inké agé ‘i¢ai, watie aké. KK ag¢i tédihi yi, wagazu teéi"te. Grandfather theone togo he spake lawyer the He hehas bythat when, straight it maybe. who of it (sub,). returned time hither Juan e¢e ang¢i” taité, ki maja™ céya, a®wa™ wa g¢i” td"te a"¢a™ baha™-baji. We with him we shall sit, and land yonder, which (of the he site itmay be we do not know it. two?) Wakan‘da ¢aha’’-ma, wattie amd edibe Pan‘ka ¢i” endqtei u¢tki-baji; : God those who pray lawyer the (pl. also Ponka the they only they do not side to Him, sub.) (coll. with; ob.) nikaciga uké¢i" b¢tiga udwagiki fai, Ada® wé¢e héga-baji. Indian common all to side with us he there- we are very glad. speaks, fore Ahat. Uma™ha® an’gata" nie wa¢in'ge héga-baji; wa¢até anyiyaxe Omaha we who stand pain we have none oa (pl.); food we have made for ourselves bgtiga an¢ijut‘a’i; vidatqti a™naji"i. Ceta®’ Matett-ndji" ya” ba-maji ha. we have raised very good we stand. So far Standing Bear I heye not seen . it; im Ita", gasdni da” cté, ya“ be ta minke. Now, to-morrow perhaps I will see him. Hau. Céama, Maca™-ti", Icta-ja"jat’, Miydha-¢ige, céna, Sindé- 1 Those, Wiyakoin, Tetaja"ja", acacan skin head- enough, Spotted ress, g¢ecka da™be tai éga" cag¢ai. Cupi ta minke. Tail to see him in order they have I will reach there. that (pl.) started back to you, NOTES. 747, 2. wawea"maxe ti¢ai té. W. gives as an alternate reading, Wawéawamaxe ti¢ai te, with reference to what was sent hither to ask us questions. G. substituted Wawéar¢amaxe ti¢ats t, with reference to what you sent hither to question me about. 747, 8. Panka u¢a-biama. Hither supply aka, the sign of a voluntary action, after Panka, or change u¢a-biama to u¢a ama. 748, 15. cag¢ai. After this Ma"tcu-natba added the following, recorded at the time in English: “If you hear of their going, send me word the same day.” This must refer to the contemplated visit of the three Yanktons to Spotted Tail MA*TCU-NA®BA TO UNAJI*-SKA. ‘ 749 TRANSLATION. I have just received this letter. I received it just now as the Dakotas started back to you. I will send to you to tell you that they sent here to ask us some questions. I do not know what the young men have given you, still I will ask them the questions, though I hesitate a very long time from fear of failure. You ought to come and ques- tion them yourself! Joseph La Fléche reached the Ponkas in the Indian Territory. T will tell the news which he brought about them. He said that the Ponkas had scolded your father and had ordered him to return hither, but he was staying near them. When Joe and Susette reached the Ponka village, the Ponkas told him, so he says, that Ceki had startedsthis way with five lodges about two weeks previous to their arrival. It is now very near the time for them to have come to the Omaha village. Up to this time it has been four weeks since Ceki and his companions started. He also said that two Ponkas, Big Snake and The Chief, had been arrested and confined. When they had spoken of going to make a friendly visit to another tribe, the Ponka agent consulted them. ‘Hold on! Wait! I will send and consult the President. Should he be willing, you shall go, and I will give you provisions for the journey,” said the agent. But Big Snake and The Chief would not obey him. They and the Ponkas went away and traveled to the Cheyenne village. When they got to the Cheyenne village, the Cheyenne agent arrested Big Snake and The Chief. Then the policemen took them and the rest of the Ponkas and brought them back to the Ponka reservation. : It is said that the two, who have been confined, will be released soon. At this time the rest of the Ponkas wished to steal off and come back to us, but Joe told them to remain where they were. We have aided Standing Bear. He is dwelling on a piece of land belonging to the white people, near the boundary of the Omaha reservation. We have aided him to-day ; I was with those who “ touched the pen-handle.” Up to this time only those who pray to God (among the white people), the lawyers, and the Omahas have aided Standing Bear. A lawyer sat with me to-day; we sat together talking with one another. The lawyer promised to go to see the President. By the time that he gets there the matter will be settled. We shall dwell together, but we do not know in which of two lands yonder he will dwell. The lawyers and those who pray to God take sides not only with the Ponkas, but they speak of befriending all of us Indians. Therefore we are very glad. We Omahas are in excellent health; we have made food for ourselves; we have raised all that we planted; we are very prosperous. I haye not yet seen Standing Bear. I will see him to-day or to-morrow. These men, Wiyakoi*, Icta-ja"ja", and Raccoon-skin Head-dress, have started back to you in order to go on a visit to Spotted Tail. (Send me word the very day that you hear of their departure.) And I will go to see you, 15 7a0 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. TO INSPECTOR J. H. HAMMOND, FROM SEVERAL OMAHAS. June, 1879. Two Crows said:—Ga™, ji¢cha, ¢ati tée’di twidaba”-maji ha. Ki And elder brother, you when I did not know you 5 And came nikaci” ga ¢éama twa¢akié-ma wiwija-ma f¢ae ¢ag¢é té wi" ¢ai. Ki wisi¢e- person these those to whom you those who are you you the they have And Ithink of talked mine spoke went told me you back about it. na" ca™ca" hi. Ki maja” ¢é¢a™ a®¢a™niye etéga™i té bgtigagti udwa¢agina usu- always 2 And land this we live by Aaa (pl.) *the you told it tous ally means of it ¢ag¢ai. Ki ci pi/qti éskana a™¢a™wacka™ etéga"l yi, wi" we¢éckaxat you started And again anew oh that we get strong by ought (pl.) if, one you make for us back. means of it ka™ at¢a”¢ai. Eskana, can’ge, kagéha, waka™b¢a ha. Wag¢ita"-ma jibaji, we hope. Ob that, horse, my cgend) I desire them 5 The working ones are inferior, nucidha, éga", wacka™-¢i‘a-na"i. Nikaci”ga uké¢i" can’ge é Aawaka-maji low in as, they are weak usn- Indian common horse it Ido not mean it stature, ally. < n/ re K Ls ha: wage can’ge, uma” ¢inka ¢ab¢i", diba-ma ceta™ a®wan’ga"¢ai. Eskana white es year three, those who are so far we Genes: them. Oh that man four udwa¢agika™ a i yiji, & wedgitda® etaf. Ugq¢ée’qtci éskana Iyiga¢ai you help us at if: that good fer us may. Very soon oh that. Grandfather ¢inké fe angiyai na‘a™¢aki¢é ka” at¢a™ ¢ai. the one word our you cause him to we hope. who : hear Duba-ma'¢i” said: —Ji¢cha, a™ba¢é edada" wiya ta minke, ada™ O elder brother, to-day what I will ask a favor of you, sneer? ore wabig¢eze widaxu cu¢éa¢é. Madgadi ¢ati ha. Ki uwikie-maji éte-ma™ letter I have writ- I send it to Last winter you ¢ And I did not talk to I may, in ten to you you. came you the least hither ¢a™ja, nikaci”ga ¢éama ikageawd¢é-ma u¢ikiai té, fe té u¢i¢ai té although, person these those whom I have for talked to the, word the toldabout the friends you you and‘a® té iuda*qti-ma™”, ji¢éha. IJ¢dniya té Iwi¢ana té, éb¢izé ITheard when I was very glad, O elder L live by will. You tell it to the, I take it brother. means of it me from him tédihi yi, Gdi-na™ ani”ya etéga. Ki wiya te, ehé té. Can’ge-ma by the when, then only L live apt. And Taska_ will, I said it. The horses time favor of (pl. ob.) you wiwija-ma wéb¢ihide-ma hahada™i, ki edada" skige agai té ¢utaqti those that are those by means of which are light. and what esos goes the very mine I continue at work straight a¢a-baji ¢a™ja, ca” awacka™ te, ehé ¢a", ga” awacka™ taminke. Ji*¢éha, they donot though, yet I make an will, I said in the so I will make an effort. O elder go effort past, brother, can’ge wige ejaf, ca” uma ¢inka ¢Ab¢i" diba, sita"-ma, éskana a™wan’- horse white their, te. year three four, those that are oh that we de- people five, gam¢at. Ki Tyiga™¢ai ¢inké ugq¢e'qti éskana ¢écepaha ka™b¢éga™. sire them. And ae grand- the very soon oh that you show it T hope. father (st. ob.) to him TO INSPECTOR J. H. HAMMOND, FROM SEVERAL OMAHAS. 751 dagi"-na"paji said :—Ji*¢cha, a ba¢é edada® wi" wiya cu¢éa¢é. Can’ ge O elder to-day what one Taska_ Tsend it to Horse brother, favor of you. you wa¢ita® wab¢i® té a*jt-maji héga-maji, can’ge wiwija te. Can’ge wage to work T have the Iam very unfortunate, horse my the. Horse white them people eyai ~wacka™janga waka™b¢a. Can’ge-ma mad¢ée ¢ab¢i", dtiba, satan their strong I desire them. ‘The horses winter three, four, five ceta”-ma é waka™b¢a. Edf yi, maja” ¢a™ b¢ita™ te uf¢a"be b¢é etéga® those who that I desire them. In that case, land the Iworkit the up the hill Igo apt. are so far Tyiga*¢al, eskana uq¢ée’ qtei u¢u¢akié ka™b¢ééea”. Grandfather, oh t very soon you speak to I hope. ‘him about it Mawada"¢i” said:—Kagcha, a” ba¢e'qtci edida® ¢ina édega™ éduche My friend, this very day what they have begged Ihave from you joined it ha. Maja” ¢an‘di end edaida" anyfyaxai a™¢i¢aha-na™i é-na™ éé@ ha- 5 Land in the that what we have done for we pray to usu- it alone that alone ourselves you ally is it Kdega” edada" daxe té b¢f‘a-na™-ma™ ha, kagé. Ki dda®™ a™ba¢é But what Ido the ‘I usually fail to com- c O friend. And there- to-day plete fore udwa¢aya™ i té a®¢a™ ¢é-qti ha. Ga” ¢é¢anka wandg¢e a™¢a” wacka™ tafte you have aided us the wereally thinkit . And these domesiag ani- we shall be strong by means mal of them é& ha, Ada" uwib¢a cu¢éad¢e. that . there- I tell it to I send it to is it fore you you. pe-uya"ha said :—Kag¢ha, a" ba¢é nikaci” ga ¢éama wa¢ibaxu ta ama ha; My friend, to-day person these they wallets will (pl.) you on dif- ferent subjects ki wiji’¢é fe wi" a®{ g¢é e¢éga™ éga® ¢isi¢e éga™ wai™¢ibaxu tan’gata™. and myelder word one’ hegave he thonght — hav- remem- fae we write to you we will. brother itto started that ing bered vou ing me back Ca” ma¢adi ¢ati té’di a"wa™¢akié*té, fe té dgisi¢é-na™ ca™ca™. Te té And lastwinter you when you spoke tome when, word the Ithink usu- always. Word the came of it ally hither ab¢i™ te cé ab¢i” ha. Ca™ eddda® angtyji si Jt bguig raqti hi ké tida’, Ihave the that Ihave ‘ And what we plant stock the good, (coll. ob.) céhi ké’ cti, ja™ ‘abe bguigaqti tda™. Ki ama a™¢a4 ‘i¢dagé té ub¢at’-ctéwa™- apple the too, leaf good. And the you give you the I have in the least tree (coll. otber me promised taken hold degree ob.) of it maji, ja“ be-ctewa™-maji, i¢adi¢at wa‘i-baji, a“ba¢é na®cta™i, Aji ugdi™, I—not, I have not even seen it, agent did not give it to-day he has besced an- sitsin (his to us, to walk, other place), nikaci™ ga i¢adi¢af aka. Ki yéska-ma é Awake ha Kiyéski-ma é Tyigat¢ai Indian agent Bs And thecattle that Imean 5 And thecattle that Grand- sub.). father 12 15 u¢gu¢akié yi, éskana maja” gé’di ag¢ab¢i" ab¢i kab¢éga’. Gat can’ge 18 you speak to if, oh that land Te the T have my Thave it I hope. And horse him about it (pl. in, ob.) own 12 15 752 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. wina, can’ge uma” ¢inka ¢ab¢i" méga", duba méga”, sata” méga™, céna. I beg horse year three thoseofthat four thoseofthat five thoseofthat enough. from you, age, age, age, Can’ge P¢‘Agéqti ka™ b¢a-maji, can’ ge uké¢i® cti ka™ b¢a-maji; Mahiyan’ea g geq 4) 5 & Horse very old man I do not want it, horse common too I do not want it; American can’ge-ma eonaqtci waka” b¢a, macté can’ge a™wan’ga"™¢a-baji. Hécepaitna the horses those alone Iwantthem, warm(i.e. horse we do not want them. Spanish (pl. ob.) Kansas) ¥ can’ge éeti pi-baji. horse those are bad, too A"pa"-yanga said:—Ji*¢eha, ¢ati ha, Uma™ha™ maja” ¢an‘di. Ki e‘a” O Elder you 2 Omaha land to the. And how brother, came hither ang¢i” ¢a® cka™ ang¢i” wacta™be ¢atf. Ki “le wiwiya té si¢ai-ga,” eed, Ada® we sat the action we sat you saw us you And Word my the remember you _ there- came. ye it, said, tore si¢é-na”i. Ca’ edida™ we¢éckaxe, maja” awa"ji, we¢éckaxe i"¢inai ke¢a™ they usually. And what you have donefor land strong to youmakeitfor webegged inthe remem- us, bear them us of you past ber it up, atsi¢é-na™ ca™ca™i ¢a”ja, Ugita™ hégaji ani” éga™, we¢éni‘al té, ecé. Ca™ we usu- always though, work very you as, you had failed the, you And think of ally much have to accomplish said. it it for us wage ticka® anga”¢ai té uq¢é anga™¢ai ha. Cal” efa” mani” té éga*qti white deed we desire the soon we desire : And how youwalk the just so people S anoa® ¢ai hit Anal. ¢i¢t {tan-on Taia’ {ta® yj Sd pjB ug¢é anga’¢ai ha. I¢apaji, ¢i¢tja g¢itan-ga. Maja” ag¢ita™ yi, ag¢abdi s00n we desire it ' Not waiting yourown do yourown Land Jworkmy if, I have my for him to work. own own appear, ka*b¢éga", waqi”ha sagi. Iyiga"¢ai ¢inké gaté na‘an’ki¢a-ga. Ca™ edada® I hope, paper hard. Grandfather eA faa let him hear it. And what . ob. thing wéteqi gé b¢tigagti, éskana anga™¢a-baji. Ca” nikaci”ga maja” ¢a” are hard the all, oh that we do not want it. And person land the for us (pl. in. (ob.) ob.) wakihide-ma cti wé¢isthi-ga, gacibe ¢edwaki¢ai-ga. Ki maja” ayig¢ita™ those who attend to too cleanse it of them out of it cause them to go from And land I work for them tor us, us. myself té/di, wé¢ihide ayidaza” ingdxai-ga. E ti yi, i”eté edada™ cté when, tool each with its make for me. That it when, as if what ever own kind comes hither vag¢a-maji, yuaha-maji’qti, wab¢ita" ma™b¢i”. T¢adi¢ai ama ena ma™zéska I ao not suffer, I do not fear unseen I work at I walk. Agent the (pl. only money danger at all, various tasks sub.) they kédita" agi” g¢i”i éga", end wéd¢ihide agi” g¢i”i QPiskié ité¢e gi’ from the having they as, only implements having they Ajlina toplace sitting it sit they sit. pile in a heap a®wan ga¢a-baji. we do not want them, TO INSPECTOR J. H. HAMMOND, FROM SEVPRAL OMAHAS. 153 NOTES. 750, 8. L. gave another reading, Fskana udawad¢agiya™i yi, 6 wedgiuda™ etaf. It is impossible to distinguish between the two readings, either in English or in (begiha. 750, 11. uwikie-maji etema® ¢a®ja, ete. The insertion of ‘“etema"” shows that only in one respect did the speaker differ from his friends; he had not conversed with Gen. Hammond. But he and they were of one mind, and when he heard their report of the council with the inspector, he agreed with them in trying to act by his advice. 752, 10. I¢apaji, etc. Reference uncertain. It may be intended for I¢Apaji-da™’ ¢i¢ija g¢itan-gi, Do the work for your own wards (the Omahas) without waiting for some one to appear ! 752, 14. we¢ihide ayidaza" ifgaxai-gi, give me tools as my personal property. Ayidaza” conveys the idea of separation into homogeneous groups. The speaker wished his agricultural implements to be distinet from those of other Omahas. The general idea of what is recorded in lines 11 to 17, as given at the time, is as follows: “If we become citizens, we desire an equal division of land, horses, and tools. We do not wish them to be kept as common property, or in one place.” After Saying this, they added: ‘ We need one hundred and fifty span of horses.” TRANSLATION, Two Crows said :—Elder brother, I did not know about your coming. But after you departed, these Indians, my friends, told me what you had said. Iam always thinking of you. Before you left you told us very fully how we ought to live by means of the land. We express again the hope that if we ought to make an effort by means of such things (?), you will make one of them for us. My friend, I desire horses. As our working horses are low in height, they are usually too weak for the work. When I speak of desiring horses, I do not refer to Indian ponies. We want American horses from three to four years old. If you would only help us to get them they would be advantageous to us. We hope that you will cause the President to hear our words very soon. Duba-ma*¢i> said:—Elder brother, I ask something of you as a favor to-day, there- fore I write you a letter. You came here last winter. Though I did not talk to you, these Indians, my friends, did talk to you, and I have heard what they have told about you. So Iam very glad, elder brother. I will improve by means of it. By the time that I take from the President (?) what you have told me only then can I improve. I said that I would ask youa favor. My horses, by means of which I continue working, are light, and when the work becomes heavy they can not go very straight. But since I said, “I will persevere,” I will do so, O elder brother, we desire American horses that are three, four, or five years old. I hope that you will show this to the President very soon. ; qa¢i"-na"paji said :—Elder brother, I send to you to-day to ask a favor of you, Tam very unfortunate with my working horses. I desire strong American horses. I wish the horses to be three, four, or five years old. In that case, when I work the land, I will be apt to ascend the hill (i. ¢., improve). I hope that you will speak to the Presi- dent about this very soon. VoL vi——48 754 THE ¢(EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. Mandan said :—My friend, I am one of those who have begged something from you this very day. We have petitioned to you about only one thing; that is, with reference to our making something for ourselves by working the soil. That is the only thing about which we ask you. But, my friend, [ have usually failed to complete what I have undertaken: And so to-day we really think that you have aided us. Domestic animals are the means by which we shall put forth strength, therefore I send to tell you. E : e-uyatha said:—My friend, these Indians write to you to-day. We write to you because we remember how you, our elder brother, gave us some advice before you started home. I have always remembered the words which you spoke to me when you came here last winter. I have kept the words which I received. All things which we have planted have grown up and the plants and trees are in good condition. So are the apple trees; the leaves are all good. I have not taken hold of the other thing which you promised to give us; I have not even seen it; the agent has not given it to us. He has resigned to-day, and another Indian agent is in his place. I refer to the cattle. And when you speak to the President about the cattle, I hope that I may have my own (cattle) in my land. And I beg horses of you. I want horses that are three, four, or five years of age. Ido not want very aged horses, nor do I desire Indian ponies. I desire none but American horses. We do not want Kansas horses. And Mexican horses, too, are bad. Big Elk said:—Elder brother, you came here to the Omaha country. Youcame | to see how we were and what we were doing. You said, ‘* Remember my words,” therefore the people have remembered them. And though we have always remem- bered how we begged you to make our land strong enough to bear us up, you said that you had failed to accomplish it for us because you had so much work. And the ways of the white people which we desire, we wish to have them soon. We desire to imitate your ways before long. Work for us, your wards, without awaiting the appear- ance ofany Omaha (?). If we cultivate our land, we hope that we can have good titles to it. Let the President hear that. Wedo not desire the many difficult things which we have encountered. Send from our land all those (white employés at the agency) who attend to us. Make them leave ourreservation. When we cultivate our land, let us have the personal ownership of the tools which we use. As the agents stay (among the Indians) solely on account of money, they continue in possession of the annuity money, the agricultural implements, etc. But we do not desire them to keep these implements in one place. (We need one hundred and fifty span of horses.) WAQPECA TO UNAJI®-SKA. 755 WAQPECA TO UNAJI®-SKA. August 19, 1879. Ca” edta® waqi"ha g¢i¢aki¢aji ca” g¢i¢aki¢aji ca™ca® hi. Cub¢é And why paper you have not sent yet you have not sent always I will back hither back hither ta minke ha. Ca™ a™ba-waqube na™ba té ceta” waqi”ha e¢i¢ade yi, go to you D And mysterious day two the so far paper you send if, (=week) ‘back cub¢é téinke, céya. Wabag¢eze uq¢é' qtci gian’ki¢a-gi, ¢é nizé yi. Can’ge I will go to you, yonder. Letter very soon send back hither to this youre- when. Horse me, ceive it ¢agina ta” dasi i“teqi i¢ayuhé ha. Aa™b¢a cub¢é td minke. Niaci ga youasked the Idrive difficult Ifeartheun- . I abandon if I will go to you. Person for your (std. it for me seen danger own an. ob.) ae y / / ikAged¢é agina‘a™ ka™b¢a. Quitatgqti ii” ward f¢da-gi: Tatan’ka-madni ¢ I have him for T hear about I wish. Very accu- _ send hither to tell me enone Walking Buffalo-bull that a friend my own rately my own: is he awake. Ca™ ¢é¢u ¢ag¢iiiji té i”ca*-qti-ma” ha. Pan’ka-ma: ceta™ I mean him. And here you have not the Tam well selisted 4 The Ponkas so far returned with i hither wagazu-baji, ¢é naji" té téqi a, ehé: giteqi ott ti agazu-bajl, ¢é¢u ¢anayi" té teqi a, giteqiwa¢é, giteqi gti naji™i. are not straight, here you stand the diffi- ! I say: Redes to Se difficult they stand. eult them, for them TRANSLATION. For some reason you have not sent a letter hither; you have never sent a reply I will go to you. If you send a reply in two weeks, I will go yonder to your land. When you receive this, send a letter back very quickly. You have begged for your horse; it is difficult for me to drive it along, and I am apprehensive on this account. Iwill leave it here when I go to see you. I wish to hear about the man whom I regard as my friend. Send and tell me all about him. I refer to Walking Buffalo-bull. I am very well satisfied for you not to return here. The Ponka matter is not yet settled, and it would be difficult for you to stay here. They continue in great trouble. TO THE CINCINNATI COMMERCIAL, FROM SEVERAL OMA- HAS. Duba-ma"¢i” —eaid: —Kagéha, nikaci’ga ¢é an’ga¢in’di, Uma™ha™ oD , =) My friend, * Indian this tous eae are mv., Omaha an’‘ga¢in’di, wabdg¢eze wi” ti¢agé té and‘a®. Weé¢ig¢a™ té ada” ¢amaxe to us who are mv., letter one you sent the I heard it. Mind the you asked me about it hither té uwib¢a ti minke. Maja” ¢a™ ¢é¢a" ag¢db¢i". Maja” wiwija. the T will tell it to you. Land the this T have my own. Land my own. 12 15 18 756 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS, Ki nikaci”ga-ma_ ¢é-ma cka™ ma*¢i”-ma waja™be ha, icta wéya"be. And the people (pl. ob.) these (pl. those who walk actively TI have seen eye T have seen ob.) (busily) (pl. ob.) them them with. Nikaci” ga cka™ wiwfja ké agia"b¢a ka” b¢a haciayd¢ica’; agiza"ba-maji- Person act my own the Iabandon my I wish towards the rear; __T do not look at mine. own : ~~ an) / 4 / A ~ S. Agidasnu ¢éa¢é. Ki wage ¢éama waya™be té cka™ e‘a™i té ida" fnahi® I push my own off. And white phese Isee them the act how the good really people they are eb¢éga", éska" ¢gima™ ka™ eb¢éga" ha. Nikaci”ga uké¢i? cka™ té T think, oh that T do that Lhope — ; Indian common act the naxixi¢a té ka™b¢a-maji ha, haciaja¢ica" agidasnu ¢éa¢é, é Awake. A™ba what made the I do not desire Drs towards the rear I push my own, that I meant it. Day people fear to leave camp i¢dug¢e edadda™ a™¢an’gitida” té udyig¢ixide ha. Egi¢e cka™ ¢i¢ha té throughout what by means of which the I gaze around, in 6 At length deeds your the A I may prosper search of it for (move- myself ments) e- na™ fgitda™wa¢é té ya” be ha. Nikaci”ga-ma waya"’be té wicti Ayi- that only may be good for the Ihave ” after “ ega™ ha Igiga"¢ai aka, ada® wawéci té a®i baji té hi’. TRANSLATION. Duba-ma*¢i" said :—My friend, I have heard that you sent a letter to us Omahas. I will tell you the decision about which you asked me. I regard this land as my own. It is my land. I have seen these (white) people who are very industrious, I have seen them with my owneyes. Iwish toabandon my Indian habits. Ido not look at them. I push them aside! WhenI see these white people, I think that what they do is really good, and I hope to do likewise. I do not wish to retain the ways of the wild Indian that made one feel insecure if he did not keep close to the camp. I referred to that when I spoke of pushing my own customs towards the rear. Throughout the day I gaze around in search of something by means of which I may prosper. At length have I observed that your ways alone are apt to prove beneficial for one. I have seen the white people, and [have also looked at myself. I think, ‘I am doing as they do, and I have limbs for action just as they have.” I have sown wheat, I have planted potatoes, onions, cabbage, beans, pumpkins, apple (trees), cherry (trees), turnips, beets, tomatoes, lettuce, and watermelons. I have cattle, horses, a wagon, harness, aud chickens. My triend, we have heard that these people, your friends, have their dwellings very full (of property). And all of them think asI do. It is as if I was going trav- eling anew. Ihave by no means had enough of walking. And with reference to the things which I tell you to-day that I have raised, I hope that in another year I may raise still more of them. My friend, these persons, your friends, do not all meet with the same degree of success: it is as if they were chasing one another. Itis as if they were chasing one of their own party who moves ahead of them. Two Crows said :—My friends, as we have heard the words from you and the people who resemble you, we are very glad. We are very willing to do various kinds of work. Even though we continue to work for ourselves with great pleasure, we are filled with apprehension when we suddenly remember the President and his servants. Tt seems as if they had not been aiding us at all. * * * * We hope that you will cause a great many (white) people to hear the words which you sent hither to beg from us. We hope that we may join the lawyers. We hope that you will give us very good titles to our lands. In that event, we will not be apt to apprehend any trouble from the white people who are restless. My friend, you did not question me is superfluous. If ada™ be retained, read, ‘“ aakib¢a in’/ga*¢ai TO THE CINCINNATI COMMERCIAL, FROM SEVERAL OMAHAS. 761 about anything, still I will tell you. When we sell any vegetables, fruits, ete., which we have raised, the store-keepers invariably reckon those things as very light; but their things are always reckoned as very heavy (when we wish to buy them). Big Elk said:—I send to tell you the things which I (in my heart) think are difficult for me. The Indians haye been wishing to accomplish what is good for them- selves, but the agents have been the only ones who have not aided us. My friend, we can talk to you and only to those persons like yourself about the matters which give us trouble. The President usually thinks that the things which give us trouble are not troublesome to us; he continues to think that the agents whom he employs to watch over us are benefiting us. Therefore I hope to imitate the white people who do various things for themselves. I desire to live ds a good man in the land. I do not desire even to look again at my old life as a wild Indian. I wish all of you people to aid me by making the land fully strong enough to bear my weight. O ye people, O ye who have good thoughts in your hearts, we wish to retain our own land, and we beg you to aid us when you confer together about your own affairs (in Congress). Maxewa¢é said:—My friend, you who have sent a letter hither to me, I think and say that I send off (a letter) to petition to you. I am very glad, my friend, because you have sent me a letter, saying that you wished to aid me. We do not know about your ways at all, yet we love them very well. We hope that you will look around in search of something which may be for our good. The Indians who have come hither are very glad because you have sent them a letter; your friends are well pleased. Among our customs there is none of any kind whatever whieh is life- sustaining; we are destitute of all. Hven when we look all around us for something which can support life, we do not find it. Your ways alone can improve us. Friends, pity us! As we wish to live, we are ever making a special prayer for ourselves throughout the day. qa¢i"-na"paji said:—He who keeps the store on this reservation has a strong desire to injure us. Notwithstanding we have wished to dismiss him, the President has helped him, and that is hard for us to bear. He is always treating me most wantonly, snatching from me more than enough of what I have raised for myself to pay what I owe him; therefore we do not wish him to remain here after next summer. I hope that you will let the President hear of this. Two Crows said :—My friend, you wish to hear from us what we are doing and how we are progressing, therefore we will send to you to tell it to you. We have much trouble in this land, but we have no one to help us. The President placed some Winnebago Indians near the land where we dwell. The proximity of these foreigners has been a source of great trouble to our people. The Winnebagos have stolen three hundred horses from us. The agents have known all about our trouble, but they have not shown any desire to act in our behalf. Notwithstanding we have told the agents to inform the President of the matter, I think that they have not even sent him any letters on the subject. For this reason the President has not heard it. But when white men lose even a very small thing, it is always regarded as a great wrong, and as the President does not take any steps to correct our troubles when we lose what is of very great importance, we are displeased. Do you think that the President would consider it good if I returned the injury by stealing from them? Heretofore I did not repay them for their crimes against me, as I thought that it was right not to 3 ite) 762 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. give blow for blow. (But that is all a thing of the past.) I am displeased because the President does nothing to right my wrongs. I did think heretofore that he would give me damages out of the Winnebago funds. But he has not done so. The Presi- dent has not given me the damages because he wishes me to repay the Winnebagos with injury for injury. (I am forced to this conclusion.) I hope that you will send those words in a letter to the President. ~ LE-JE-BA]E TO REV. A. L. RIGGS. ; October 13, 1879. Nikaci’ ga an’ga¢i" a"¢ig¢aha™ i, nikaci”ga-macé. Ata” geda™ ' kagéha, People wewhomove we thank you O ye people. At different Race! O triend, our own, . * / fl “ns & . > a’¢igisi¢é - na" ca™ca". Hskana nikaci’ga ¢a‘étewa¢é'qti d‘iba_ ¢i" we remember usu- always. Oh that Indian most pitiful some the you, our own ally (coll. ¢a‘edwa¢a¢é' gti anga™¢ai, a” ee ¢é¢uddi. Ci wikdge ¢é baxtanki¢é, you pity us indeed we wish, on this. Again my friend this me have conse im to write it, kagéha. A*¢ig¢aha™i. Ki éskana, Kaga, a”ba i¢ayi¢é yi, a¢i¢aha™i té O friend. We thank you. And = Oh that, Third day youawake when, wepray to you the son, ¢agisi¢e ka” at¢a™¢ai. Angu, Kaga, nikaci’’ga an‘ga¢i", nikaci”ga wi™ you remem- we hope. We, T hird Indian we who move, person one ber it son, angtikiai yi, anigaga anga™ ¢a-baji. Ki, Kaga, gata”hi té’di att’é taité we ale tohim we, eee we do not wish. And, Third that far when we shall die econ him son, (unseen) a*¢an’ yidaha®-baji. Ikaége-ma-ji¢ica”-ma wi" nija wagtya "¢agtiar’ 1 ha, we do not know about our- Those on the side of his friends one to live he really we es for them, selves. his own kagéha. Ki ikdge wi” ¢é¢inke waqi”ha ¢and‘a" téga" gaxean’giki¢al. O friend. And his one this st. one paper you hearit in order we have caused him, friend that our own, to make it. Ma?¢i"’-teayi wét‘ai te’ éceta” a™ba-waqube wi"aqtci. (éama Unajit-qude Mar¢i"-teayi die for us the so far mysterious day just one. This (my. Gray coat past (=until sub.) act now) amd ag¢af té wadagi¢e’gtia’l, ¢a‘éawa¢e’qti fai. Ki eta” a®t’é téga-baji the he went the he made us very glad by haying great pity he Ane how we dio can not (mv. (=when) talking, or us spoke. sub.) *n/ of. , o 4 i’ta"; wéagitida™ etéga™ udwagi¢al. now; we do well (or, apt he has told it to it is for our good) us. NOTES. e-je-bayje, a Ponka, same as Homna of p. 748, note. 762, 8. ikage wi” ¢e¢inke, the author. NUDA*-AXA TO REV. A. L. RIGGS. 763 TRANSLATION. O ye people, we Indians, thank you who are our (friends). O friend, we continue to think of you at different times. On this day we desire that you would treat us with great kindness who are some of the Indians that are in a most pitiful condition (?). We have caused one of our friends to write this. We thank you. O Third son, we hope that when you wake up each day you will remember that we have petitioned to you. We Indians, O Third son, do not wish to break our word when we have talked to a person. Third son, we do not know when the time shall come for us to die. O friend, one who is on the side of his friends really wishes them to live. We have caused this friend to write a letter so that you might hear it. It has just been one week since we lost Ma*¢i®-tcayi by death. When Gray Coat (Mr. Tibbles) went homeward, he spoke words of pity, and made us very glad by what he said. And now there is no danger of our-perishing (as a tribe); he has told us that we ought to prosper. NUDA®-AXA TO REV. A. L. RIGGS. October 14, 1879. Kagéha, ikdgewi¢ai, Wakan’da wa¢aha"- macé, wawiuie-micé, O friends, I have you for my God ye who pray to him, ye who are under the friends, protection of the laws, ikAgewi¢e'qti. Ki nikaci”ga wi” Wakan‘da ¢inké fe ey té gaqai. Ki ¢ I have you for es And person one God the st. word his the Tas gone And it friends. one (ob.) beyond. ka™ b¢a-maji. Wakan’da fe e44 zani‘qti b¢izé. Wakan’‘da aka a™¢an‘gitda® I do not wish it. God pond his everyone I eh God ane Ido eliby, means taken (sub.) i) éte té zani‘qti iwi" ¢ai ha, dda™ i ¢é-qti-ma™. Aqa-maji ka™b¢a. Ucka" ought the everyone he bas told : there- Iam very glad. I do not go I wish. Deed to me fore beyond him 0 Mattet-ndji® ¢ia’¢a g¢é té béize ha, ub¢a” hi. Qand‘a™ te ha. one, Standing Bear he aban- he the TIhave . I have 5 Youhearit will . ‘ doned you went taken it taken hold back of it Nikaci”ga wi" cé¢u caki. Isan’ga aka ticka™ wan sige’ qti ii" ¢e gi” Person one yonder has His younger the deed his elder the reached brother (sub.) brother (mv. there again, ob.) where you are. oiAxai. (and‘a” eté. Cta”be yi, “Nikaci™ ga naxide-¢in’ge aha, ” enéga” made for ou hearit ought. Youseehim if, Person disobedient you think him. eté yi. Hga" we¢écka™nat etéga” éga® ha, Can’ge-hi"-2i-a. fates st ought. So you wish for us apt so 5 O Yellow Horse. The Omahas ¢éama wi™ waq¢i, qénicka. Tedza-¢it’ge t’éa%¢ “gd-bi, ecé te. edge bese one stunned denicka. Tcaza-¢inge to kill that he you said it. T kill him them, me spoke of it, 764 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. ‘ia¢é, wiu¢agina. Gan’yi Na”pewa¢e cti Hedge ‘ia¢é una té. Gan'yi 1 I threat- you told them And Dangerous too I ki Ithreat- you the. And ened, about their own. him ened told it Sihi-duba eti tea¢e age, und té. Céna nikaci™ ga ¢db¢i" und té. Gatega™ Four Legs too Ikill Ithreat- you the. Enough person — three you the. In that man- him ened told it told it ner 3 we¢éckaxai. Magqpf i¢dbat?u wa¢i¢iona. you have acted Cloud pressing you are visible. against us. against NOTES. 763, 3. a™¢aigiuda® ete té, ete. W. (an Omaha) read, a®¢ai/giida® té gt fat. the sign (scat- tered in. objects) inwir/¢ai éga™ zani/qti b¢izé ha, as he has told me about the things which will be advan- tageous to me at various future times, I have accepted all. From line 8 to the end is addressed to Yellow Horse. 763, 9. Teaza-¢inge tea"? ‘i¢a-bi, ece té, ete. G. (an Omaha) reads, Te4za-¢in’ge Vea ¢é ‘ia ¢a-bi wiu¢agina té ha, You told them (the Omahas) that we had threatened to kill Teaza-¢inge. 764, 3. Maqpi, etc. That is, “You can not hide your plots. It is just as if you stood in bold relief against the clouds in the sight of all men.” TRANSLATION. O friends, I have you (all) for my friends. O ye who pray to God, and O ye lawyers, I have you as real friends. One Indian had transgressed God’s words. I do not desire that. I have accepted all of God’s words. God has told me all that can be advantageous to me, so I am very glad. I do not wish to disobey (him). I received and took hold of one custom (or mode of action) when Standing Bear abandoned you and started back (to Niobrara). You can hear it. One Indian has reached yonder land where you are. It was the younger brother who caused all the trouble for his elder brother (i. ¢., Yellow Horse induced Standing Bear to act thus). You should hear it. You ought to think, when you see him, ‘“ He is a very disobedient man!” O Yellow Horse, it is probable that you wished him to think thus about us! (?) One of these Omahas hit genicka. You said that Tcaza-¢inge had threatened to kill me. You told the Omaha that I had threatened to kill him. And you also told that i had threatened to kill Na*pewa¢é and Sihi-duba. You told about just three men. In that manner you have acted against us. (But) you are in sight (just as if), you touched the clouds. . ee [EJEBAZE TO WAJINGAgA. 765 {E-JE-BALE TO WAJINGA-gA September, 1879. Ceta™ wi¢itaqtia’i. Wag¢ita" a®wa™cka™i tedbe éde ceta™ a”¢ifal. So far they have altogether Work we have exerted very but, so far we have failed in the work ourselves (hard) not finished on our account. it. , ey , ¢ , , s ~ . v , u Cani-a, Qawina méga", ¢iziga" ¢a‘e¢ai-ga. Giwacka™i-et. Wagate O Charles, David likewise, your pity ye him! Do ye make an effort Food grandfather for him ! ee mae) es Fibeute Pee ey Pcs 9 cin'gajin’ga ¢anka ¢atetki¢ai-ga. Nikaci”ga cé¢inke, kagcéha, wib¢aha", % child the ones p ity ye him through. Person that seen st. my friend, I pray to you, who one, os , 4 , y , *n/ © aw . Wajin’ ga-tida™. » (haté¢age ka"b¢éga" ha, nikaci”ga ¢inké. Ca™ eddda™ wi" Good Bird. You pity him I hope 4 person the (st. And what one ob.). =“ “ oe f owl s f an . gikéja wad¢acka™ te ¢inge. Usni @/di hi. Ki endqtci wa¢icka™ ka"b¢éga" at that youmake an will there is Cold it has And it only you make an I hope (place ?) effort none. reached effort there. y © 4» Fo ~/ Oey 4 . . eé¢uadi’qti te. Ka Awaké’ja wa¢acka" te ¢ingé. . . . Ceta” waqi”ha 6 just yonder by the. And atwhatplace you make an will there is So far paper you effort none. . trae / Oe . . tia ¢aki¢aji. . . . Ma* a-teéba igdq¢a" wahi¢age giya™be ga gai éga”, you have not sent Mawaéepa his wife lame to seo his he wishes as, hither to me. own Eapeh ei « ; a+} es , an’giti ka"b¢éga". Man¢i"’-teayi ietage 'é také.. he comes I hope. Man¢is teayi old man will surely for me die as he reclines. NOTES. Wajiiiga-da is addressed in line 1; Charles and David Le Clere, in 2 and 3; Rev. A. L. Riggs in 4.and 5; Charles Le Clere, from 6 to the end. Two sentences (Ki enaqtei, ete.,) in 5 and 6 are intended for Wajinga-da. 765, 8. Man¢ir-teayi, @. &., Jabe-skii or Wa¢acpe. See 476. TRANSLATION. They have not yet met with any success in the work which they undertook for us. We have persevered to the utmost in the work, but we have not yet accomplished it. O Charles and David! pity your grandfather! Make an effort in his behalf! Think of his children, and treat him kindly by giving him food for them! I petition to that man near you: My friend, Good Bird, I petition to you. I hope that you will pity him (i. e., Wajinga-da, or else all the Ponkas with him). There is nothing that you can do for them elsewhere. Winter is at hand. I hope that you (O Wajinga-da) will do your best just where you are, as it is the only place where you can doanything. Nothing can be done elsewhere. (Recorded only in English: Crazy Bear’s wife, child, and horse were taken from him. Send me soon what news you have to tell. People who are relations hear from one another.) You have not yet sent me a letter. (Recorded only in English: O Charles, my wife wishes to see her Yankton relations.) As she desires to see Mawaétepa’s lame wife, I hope that he may come forme, The aged man, Ma*¢i"-teayi, will surely die. 766 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STURIES, AND LETTERS. MA®TCU-DAGE’ TO WAGIQE-yACI. Wait ¢inké ec¢inke agiya"b¢a-qti-ma™. (hé¢u naji’ te’ di udg¢daji etd. Woman the (st. that (st one) Istrongly desire (to have) Here she when she does ought. one) near you my own (again). stands not suffer Usni hiaji te’di, uq¢é agtya™b¢a wat ¢inké. Ki e‘a™ endéga™ yi, ug¢é’- Cold hasnot when, soon Idesire myown woman _ the (st. And how you think if, very arrived again one). : it 3 qtei waqi"ha ¢a" ian‘ki¢a-ga. Unf‘age yi’cté, éskana éga*qti ckaxe soon paper the send it hither to You are un- even if, oh that just so yon act (ob.) me. willing ka"b¢éga". Watt ¢inké igi” ¢ani" cf ka™b¢éga". (Qikage amé ¢éama T hope. Woman the (st. you bring mine for me I hope. Your friend the (pl. these one) sub.) waga’ze ama ma¢é té u¢tag¢e ¢a‘cawa¢ail. Udwai ta ama wage ama. teacher the winter the throughout pitied us. They will give rations white the (pl. sub.) to us people (pl. sub.). 6 (@éama fe awadqa ka™béa-maji, dda™ cag¢é ka™ b¢a-maji. J) to) These word I go be- I do not wish, there- I go back I do not wish. youd them fore to you NOTES. Matteu-da¢i" and Wa¢ige-yaci were Ponkas who had fled from the Indian Territory with the famous Standing Bear. Mattcu-da¢i? remained with the Omahas, but Wa¢iqe-yaci continued his journey till he reached his old home near Niobrara, Nebr. TRANSLATION. I have a strong desire to recover my wife, who is now with you. There is no prospect of her suffering from being here. I wish my wife to return soon, before the winter sets in. Send a letter to me very soon, and let me know what you think about it. Even if you are unwilling, I hope that you will do just as (I have said). I hope that you will bring my wife back to me. Your friends, these missionaries, have treated us kindly throughout the winter. The white people will give rations to us. I do not wish to transgress the commands of these (persons), therefore I do not wish to go back to you. GAHIGE TO CUDE-GAXE. Ciide-gixe-a’ wamuské té wagixe a™{-baji-na™i. Qaa”na ¢igdxai. O Smoke-maker! wheat the debt they have not usu- You have they have givenittome ally. abandoned it thought about you. ye , OIrhs rss , pts Tad Ca” ¢é¢u ¢ag¢i taté ayiqib¢a, ada®™ i¢aa-maji, a™i-baji ¢a“ja Ca™ cea -And here you shall have Thesitatedtrom there- I have not they have not though. And yonder come back tear of failure, fore spoken, given it to me where you are 9 ¢gag¢i’ té, Pan’ka-macé, nan’de i”pi-maji ha. Pahan’ga cupi_ té‘di you sit the, O ye Ponkas, heart not good forme A Before Treached when 3 you GAHIGE TO CUDE-GAXE. 767 uwib¢a kega™ uska™ska" taté eb¢éga". Ca” Pan‘ka ama nan‘de wiwija T told it to the, in shall be straight on I think it. And Ponka the heart, my own you the past (pl. sub.) ous . - , . , o. ie , . a ehébe ayidaxe, meé'qti a'ckixai. QMag¢ai té ¢ awake. (hégu adi’ ¢anka apartof Imakeitfor you cause me great pain. You kave gone it I mean it. Here the ones who sit them myself, back / 0 ~ Pies ¥ f 4 5 i , ‘a” weedxai tédihi yi, ¢and‘a" taite. Ucka" we¢écka"na té nicta”. how they do for bythetime when, you shall hear it. Deed you have wished the you have them it arrives for them dropped it. {or, if they should] Nan‘de ¢a™ ¢idqai ha. Heart the you have been excelled (=lett behind or ignored) NOTES. Gahige was an Omaha chief. Cude-gaxe was a Ponka, then near Niobrara, Nebr. 767. 3. Ucka" we¢ecka"na té nicta®, ete. Explained thus by G.: “You settled on a course of action which you wished the Ponkas to adopt. But they would not act as you desired ” (i. e., they would not imitate the behavior of Cude-gaxe. He had settled among the Omahas, promising to remain with them, but he lied and went to the Yanktons, thereby forfeiting everything which he abandoned. The other Ponkas refused to go to the Yanktons, remaining among the Omahas until arrested by the white soldiers). TRANSLATION. O Smoke-maker, they have made it a rule not to give me the wheat which was due (you?). They consider that you have abandoned it. I have hesitated through fear of failure on account of your probable return here, so I have not speken, though they have not given it tome. O ye Ponkas, it makes my heart sad to think of your staying yonder. I think that what I told you when I first went to see you will con- tinue henceforth, without intermission (?). I regard my heart as being part of the Ponkas, so you have hurt me badly. I refer to your starting back to Dakota. Should the white people do anything for these (Ponka) who are here, you shall be informed. You wished the Ponka refugees to adopt. a certain course of action, but they have not regarded your wishes. WAQPECA TO UNAJP-SKA. October 14, 1879. Céya cub¢é ka™b¢a, b¢f‘a. Wa¢ita® waqta uaji gé ¢ita” gingé Yonder I go to I wished, I have not Work vegetables Ihave the to work there is (to you) you been able. planted (pl. none in. ob.) cub¢d-maji hi. Beéfcta™ yi, eub¢d téinke ha. Pan‘ka ama maja™ ¢é¢u Ido not go to you . I finish it when, Igoto may (?) C Ponka the land here you (pl. sub.) naji” ti ama. Céya cka™aji najin’-ga ha, Cide-gixe-a’. Cka™aji naji™i-ga will be standing. Yonder motionless stand thou ! O Smoke-maker. Motionless stand ye 768 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. ha aki¢a. Pan‘ka ama wag¢ita" ¢a¢uhdqtci wa¢icta” agai. Wii’ ¢é te. f both. Ponka the to work almost tolet them they have Myelder dead (pl. sub.) go gone. brother , Brplete , , Oa ow , . eee yiixe-sibé. A™ba-waqtbe dma té’di té Kata” wabag¢eze g¢ia™ ¢aki¢aji Black Crow. Mysterious day the onthe dead. Why letter you have not sent other one -back to me ca”ca™ ¢iita’gti wi" ¢a gi¢a-ga ha, negiha. Ma"tet-na™ba ceta™ giniiiji, always very correctly to tell it to send back ! O mother’s Two Grizzly bears sofar has not re- me hither brother, covered. "é taté, eb¢éga”. He shall die, I think it. NOTES. 767, 5. ka™b¢a, b¢ita, used; but ka™bééde (7. e., ka™/ b¢a éde) b¢ita is better. I wish but Ihave jailed 767, 5. Watita™, etc. Read, Wa¢ita™ 6, waqta uadji gé, ¢ita™’ ¢ingéga™, cub¢a- Work the vege- Isow the towork as there I goto differ- table (pl. in. is none you ent kinds, ob.}, maji ha; or, Wa¢ita® ge’, waqta uaji ge’, ¢ita” ¢ingé ha, 4da® cub¢a-maji ha. I not. Work the vege- Isow the to work there a there- Ido not go to differ- table (pl. in. is none fore you entkinds, ob.), TRANSLATION. I have wished to visit you, but I have not been able for want of time. I have not gone to you because there is no one to cultivate the vegetables, etc., which I have planted. When I finish (this work), I will go to (see) you. The Ponkas will remain in this country. O Smoke-maker, remain there where you are! Both of you remain there! The Ponka affair is progressing; they have almost reached a point where the prisoners shall be released (?). My elder brother, Black Crow, is dead. He died last week. O mother’s brother, send and tell me just why you have continued to send me no letters. Yellow Smoke has not yet recovered. I think that he must die. NA*ZANDAJI TO T. M. MESSICK. November 6, 1879. Ca" wagixe éwib¢i” té i¢dugd¢ée’qti asi¢é. Cu¢cadé taté eb¢éga”, And debt I have tor the continually I remem- I shall send it to you Thave you (ob.) ber it. thought it, act , 2 eae > oe / . ; re éde maja” wa¢awa @¢ una™cta™ té i¢dpaha"-maji. Uta™nadi uqpa¢é but land counting the stopping place the I do not know it. At some lone it be lost (pl. in (ob.) place ob.) inihé eb¢éga™ éga™ cu¢éa¢a-maji. . . . Ca” ma™zéska’ té ¢agit‘a™ etéga™. lest I think it as I have not sent it to And money the you have apt. you. plenty of your own Céna. .. . A” patha cka”na yi i"wi™dana i¢agé té ha. Enough. Elk skin youdesire if you tell it tome yous please sen hither QZE-JE-BA,E TO UNAJI"-SKA. 769 NOTE. Parts of this letter, shown in the translation by parentheses, were recorded only in English. TRANSLATION. I have ever kept in mind the debt that I owe you. Ihave thought that I would send it to you, but I do not know how many miles distant the stopping-place (R. R. station?) is. I have not sent it to you through a fear lest it might be lost through miscarriage. (I have told you that you should not lose your money, and that Big Elk would pay you, as he is honest.) You will be apt to have your money again. Enough. (As soon as you get this, send your correct address back to Big Elk, and then he will send the money to you.) Send and tell me whether you desire elk skins. [EJE-BA]JE TO UNAJE-SKA. Undaji-ska, ¢inégi can’ge ta" Caa™ afi yi, i¢é¢ani” ¢ati katb¢éga”. oO ite Shirt, your horse the Dakota they if, you bring mine hope. mother’s (std. are hither brother ob.) coming Ceta™ wa¢ita® té ucté. Ga” ¢igisi¢é-na™ ca™ca™qti, ¢ ha. Ceta™ So far work the remains. And he remembers you, always (em- he a So far usually phatic), says nikaci”ga wa¢ita"-maéja ¢i‘a-qtia”. A™ba-waqibe yangd té hi té é people tothe workers they have not fin- Mysterious day large the reaches when it ished at all. there mja"be¢é. Ki Heqaka-mani-i’, wisi¢é-na" ca™ca™. E¢é wiwlya-macé, there isa hope. And O Walking Elk, I Temiemlen you, always. Kindred you who are mine, usually wan gi¢é gti wigisi¢é-na"-ca"ca™-qti-ma™i. Ca” nikaci”ga dttba cti all lam really thinkiug of you continually. And person four too wisi¢ai. Wanace-jin’ga, ¢icti wisi¢e. Wikuwa, ¢icti, Kagé, wisi¢é-na” I remember O Little Policeman, youtoo Iremember Wikuwa(aDa- youtoo, Fourth I remember you you (pl.). you. kota name), son, usually / FA fa se _/ > = f f / , ca” ca”. (iéaka, Wanace-jin’ga, ¢ijimi aka xagé-na" ca™ca", ¢ida"be always, This one, O Little Policeman, your the she cries usu- always, to see you father’s (sub.) ally sister gar¢a-qti éga". Ga" Cude-gixe yi té (ia¢é 16 widqtci ¢kiga") 4 she hasastrong as. And Smoke-maker lodge, the Thave the just one likeit lodge desire (std. spoken ob.) ob.) of it wiraqtci ang¢i” éga", wisi¢é-na” ca™ca". Tyuwazi ijja’a¢é agtija"be just one we sit 80, I remember you, always. Tyuwazi (Da- T have her I see her, my usually kota name) for my sister's own daughter ° is . nO . / ka*b¢a-qti-ma”. Ki ¢éaké, Cawi™ aka, ijan’ge wahi¢age gija™be I have a strong desire. And this one, Dakota the (sub.), her lame — to see her woman daughter own ga” ¢aqtia” (Ma™a-tecba igaq¢a"). Ki, kagéha, nikaci” ga diba wigtisi¢é-na™ she strongly de- Mawaéepa ~ his wife. And O friend, person four Tre eMve r usu sires you ally VOL yiI——49 ~ 770 THE (EGIBA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. ca”ca". Ki wi™ ¢ati, Tcexapa, Tatan’ka-i"yan‘ke. Ta™wa'g¢a" wiwiya always. And one you Beats the Drum Running Buffalo. Nation my own came @), hither, nankacé, Thank’ta"wi” nankaécé wazani, wigisi¢é-na"-ma™i ca"ca™-qti-ma™ 1. ye who are, Yankton ye who are all, I remember you (pl.) usually I do it always. Ca” éskana eddda™ ctécte jijin’ga ¢and‘a" Gitte ca™ iu¢a dada™ ¢and‘a® And oh that what soever smallonesof youhearit whether and news what youhear it different sorts (or if) fon Tea? fhe i ka®betéoa® élte iwi" ¢ana ti¢a¢al Kka"b¢ega”. whether you tell it to you (pl.) I hope. (or if) me send hither TRANSLATION. O White Shirt, I hope that when the Dakotas come you will bring the horse to me, your mother’s brother. The work is still unfinished. [The Omahas are?] con- stantly thinking of you, so he says. Those who are working for the Indians are still unsuccessful for wantof time. There is a hope thatthe case may be settled by Christmas. O Walking Elk, I always think of you. O ye, my kindred, I am ever thinking about you. Lremember you, too, ye four men. I also think of you, O Little Policeman, and you, too, O Wikuwa. Little Policeman this one, your father’s sister (my Yankton wife), is continually weeping, as she has a strong desire to see you. And as tothe lodge of the Yankton Smoke-maker (I have spoken as of one lodge)—as we used to sit in one lodge, I think of you. I haveastrong desire to see my sister’s daughter, [yuwazi. And this Dakota woman, my wife, has a great longing to see her lame daughter, the wife of Mawaéepa. O friends, I am continually thinking of you four men. One of you, Beats the Drum (?) or Running Buffalo, came to this place. O ye who are my own nation, O all ye Yanktons, I am always remembering you! I hope that you will send to tell me, if you hear news of any kind whatever. BETSY DICK TO WAGIQE-yACI. November 15, 1879. Te ¢¢ a”ba¢é cug¢éagé. Zani tida*qti ni” ¢tea”i té and‘a™ ka™b¢a. Word this to-day I send it to All very good you at deat the I hearit I wish. you. are (pl. 2) Négiha, igdq¢a* ett ca” ¢ihan’ga ctéwa™ wind‘a" ka”b¢a, cin’gajinga O mother’s his wife and your potential even T hear from I wish, child brother, . wife you cti zani ¢uta™qti, éskana, tiwa¢agina ka"b¢éga”. Gan te wisa"¢a™, too all very correctly, oh that, you tell if} to us I hope. my younger brother (f. sp.), cu¢éwiki¢é. Can’ge waa ¢e i™¢éckaxe té ¢uta” and‘a® ka™b a wisa™¢a™. I have sent it to Horse you promised to pay ittome the cor- Thear it I wis my younger you by some one. for my services as a doctor rectly brother (f. sp.). Matet-naji® agi ca¢af té wawiue aka udwagib¢a ¢éde feska u¢i¢a-bajii Standing Bear he went to you the lawyer the sub. I have told it to but interpre- he did not tell it afterhim (when (see note) him ter to you BETSY DICK TO WAG@IQH-yACI. 771 té hé, wisa™¢a”. Ga™-adia" ga”adi wabag¢eze cu¢éa¢é ga” éskana ie the js my younger So, therefore now letter Isendto you as oh that word (fem.), brother (f. sp.)- té udatqti it¢éckaxe ti¢a¢é ka™b¢éga". A™ba hi¢af té’di cug¢éade. the very good you mike for you send it T hope. Day they bathe on the I send it to me hither you. (ijin’ge t’é té and‘a” te, gi Ge cti té¢ai té, fuga péji’qti and‘a™ he- Your son died the Thave the, yourelder too they the, news very bad I have 5 heard it brother killed him heard it (fem.) Nan‘de i’pi-maji, wisa"¢a”, ¢a™ja wéahide ¢anaji" giteqiwa¢e ¢¢e. Heart bad for me, my younger though at a distance youstand a aie of trouble indeed brother (f. ED ys (fem.). A’ ba¢e’qtei Mattet-naji® fe ey4 ké and‘a", wabig¢eze giwa ya™be yi. ’ This very day Standing Bear word his the Ihave heard, newspaper Isaw when. Wage bgtiga ¢a‘c¢i¢ai fai té, nan’de i "¢iuda™. Ca™, wisa®¢a™, niin’de White have pitied have the, heart it is good for Yet my younger heart people you (pl.) spoken mine. brother (f. ep.), i” pi-maji axdge ag¢i” é¢e. (iyi ¢e da” ctéa”, ¢iga™ cka da” ctéa”, i" ¢aha”’-a, is-bad forme I weep Tsit indeed, Your elder either, your sister's or, pray to him ie. (fem.). brother son me (fem.), can’ge ta™ja. Te té edé te yi, éskana tia™¢aki¢é ka"™b¢éga". Spafford horse concerning Word the hewillsay if, oh that you send it hither I hope. Spafford the (Glab ob. Me something to me Woodhull ijan’ge ab¢i” ¢in’'ke¢a” i’te, ¢i¢warja”. Mar¢ir’-teayf t’éé he. Woodhull hisdaughter Ihave theone,inthe dead you have eae Mar¢i"- ee her past to me, it. aead (fem.)« Uma™ha® cté t’d-baji, endqtei t’éé hé a” ba¢é’qtei. Omaha even have not only he this very ae died, dead (fem.) NOTES. For an account of Betsy Dick, see p. 634. Watiqe-yaci, who was a Ponka, married a Yankton woman. 770, 5. eteai (used by an Omaha woman) . . W. (an Omaha man) gave toe following as a correct form of the sentence: Zani uda*qti ni”i éimte ana‘an ka™b¢a. All very good yon whether I hear I wish, (pl. ) are Perhaps etea” is sometimes used by females as an equivalent of eite. 770, 6. Negiha, i. ¢., Silas Wood, who was the elder son of Gahige, the chief of the Inke-sabé (an Omaha) gens. 770, 10. Wawiue aka should be wawiue ¢iike, as it refers to the object of an action. 771, 9. Spafford’s daughter was named, Ahi"-snede, Long Wings. QPiewarja", you have caused it, i. e., indirectly. Betsy had to neglect Spafford’s daughter while she was attending, as doctor, to some member of the family of Wa¢ige yaci. See 770, 9. TRANSLATION. [send this word to you to-day. I wish to hear about you at least this: that you are all prospering. O mother’s brother, I wish to hear from you, his wife, and your poten- tial wife; I hope that you will tell us exactly how all the children are also. O younger brother (i. e., Wa¢ige-yaci), Ihave sent a message to you by some one. O younger brother, I wish to hear correctly about the horse with which you promised to pay my bill for services as your doctor. I told the lawyer (i. e., Mr. T, H. Tibbles) about if, 772 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. when he went after Standing Bear, but the interpreter did not tell you. So therefore I now send a letter to you, and I hope that you will send me a very good message. I send this to you on Saturday. 1 have heard that your son was dead, and that they had killed your elder brother. It is very bad news that I have heard. My heart is sad, younger brother, but your being at a distance is a greater cause of sorrow. On this very day I have heard the words of Standing Bear; I have seen them in a news- paper. All the white people pity you; they have spoken words which have made me glad. Still, younger brother, with a sad heart, I sit weeping. Petition either to your elder brother or to your sister’s son with reference to the horse. I hope that you will send me word what he (or she) says. I have lost Spafford Woodhull’s daughter, whom I used to have with me, and you are the cause of her death. Ma¢i-teayi is dead. Not even one adult Omaha has died, only that aged Ponka man has died this very day. NUDA®-AXA TO CUDE-GAXE. November 15, 1879. Ca” ¢ijin’ge té¢ai te wage ama cde, ¢¢ama Umadha ama b¢tgaqti And your son they the white the(pl. but, these Omaha the (pl. all have people sub.) sub.) killed him nin’de gipi-baji, ada® a” ba¢eé hi¢af te’di uwfb¢a cu¢éa¢é. Ki Umaha ama heart are sad, thore- to-day they when I tell itto Isend to you. And Omaha the (pl. fore bathe you 5 sub.) u¢ligig¢e-na”i, can’ge watt te g¢i tédthi, ci ¢ga" tat éska™ e¢éga™ éde they are sor- usually, horse they the has by the again 80 shall be they thought but rowful for give to come time, their relation us back hebddi vicka® judji gidxai. (léama Uméaha ama uf¢igig¢ai té nan’de before deed inferior made for These Omaha the (pl. they are sor- the heart reaching him. sub.) rowful for the end ‘ their relation igi’ uda®-qti-ma”™. Ucka"™ b¢tigaqti wagaztiqti na‘a”-baji, té¢ai té-ona™ mine is very good for me. Deed all very straight they have not they the only heard, killed him ga” nafa™i. Ki dda® ¢éaka ikage aka nan‘de gfpi-baji-qtia”i, ékiga”qti so they heard. And there- this one his the heart ~ is very sad for him, just like him a fore friend (sub.) nin‘de i“ pi-maji. Nan’de i’ pi-méji te ga” égija® eté. E‘a™ daxe taté heart Tam sad. Heart Tam sad the so aon do ought. How Ido shall that ¢ingé, ga™ nin’de ¢a"™ ég i¢a”¢a¢é eté. Wagqi”ha a¢ai cka”na yi'cté, there is so heart the so youplaceit ought. Paper you give you wish even if, none, (cv. ob.) (ev. ob.) to me Dyt+) 7 5 égarqti i¢a-gi. justso send hither. NOTES. 772, 1. ¢ijinge, your son, intended for ¢ijande, your daughter's husband, i. e., Big Snake, who was murdered by a soldier in the office of the Ponka agent, in Indian Ter- ritory. 772, 6. ikage aka, 7. e., the author. qiDE.GAHI TO SILAS WOOD. 773 TRANSLATION. The white people have killed your son-in-law, so all the Omahas are sad. Therefore to-day, Saturday, I send to you to tell you how they feel. The Omahas are usually sorrowful when they hear of the death of a relation. And as the time of the year when Big Snake was accustomed to give away horses came around again they thought that it would surely be so; but before it had arrived the white men had done a bad thing to him (i. e., Big Snake). As these Omahas are sorrowful on account of their kinsman, it does my heart good (to observe their sympathy). They have not heard a full account of the whole affair, they have heard merely the report of his murder. Therefore this person, his friend, is sorely grieved, and I am just as sad as he. As I am sad, so ought you to be. There is nothing that I can do (to avenge his death), and you ought to consider the matter as I do. Should you wish to send me a letter (which I do not ask for, but which I will be glad to receive), just send it. qEDE-GAHI TO SILAS WOOD. December 1, 1879. \\ é waaivha ti¢a¢d® ¢a® bé¢ize hi. Wadgiha ¢a™ ya be té nin’de ¢a® VW q gage ¢ ¢ q ¢ ¢ This paper youhave the I have b Paper the Isawit when heart the sent (ob.) received (ob.) (ob.) hither it 2 Ly / x a7 / A *n/ , , : t . . Muda qti ya be ha. Ki a” ba¢dé nikaci’ga ama b¢tgaqti ucka" wi" “gat very good for Isawit . And to-day people the (pl. all deed one they me sub.) fale about édega™ ca™ ¢é¢u andji" té’di ‘i¢af x, 7’ uda"-qti-ma™ ¢a™ja, ¢ifin’ge té'di, 3 but yet here Istand when they if, Iam doing very well though, you are when, talk wanting about it ‘i¢af te u‘a™ ¢ingé ¢and‘a" téga® waqi”ha cug¢éa¢é, nan'de i"¢i™ pi-maji ha. they the in vain you hear it in order paper I send to you, heart mine is very sad talk that by means of it about it Wage ama Iyfga"¢ai igddi¢ai e¢a™ba, nikaci”ga ¢i¢fja-qti-ma wi" iéska White the Grandfather agent he too, people those who arereally one inter- people | your own preter = & , 1 . Sais exc giyaxa-gi, al... E gatega™” uwib¢a. Ga’ ma®ni” té ¢iuda”-qti-ja” 6 make him, your said. That thatisthe Ihave told And you walk the you are domg very own, substance you. well of it / / Su 4 Ee ON ee Sv ecé, f¢a®ba™ a®cta™ baji éga™ i¢ad té i“ pi-maji. you asecond you do not see 80 you the itis bad for say time (—once me speak me. it, more) it 774 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. NOTE. qede-gahi wished Silas, who was a full Omaha, to return from the Ponkas in Dakota, and become the Omaha interpreter. gede-gahi was an Omaha chief. TRANSLATION. I have received this letter which you have sent me. I was very glad when I saw it. To-day all the people are talking about one subject, but notwithstanding I am doing very well here, when they talk about the matter it saddens me to think that I am sending you word about it when it can do no good on account of your absence. The white people. including the President and the agent, have said, ‘“ Make one of your own people your interpreter.” I have told you the substance of what they said. You say that you are prospering where you are, and you speak of not seeing me again, so I am sad. MI°yA‘E-JINGA TO KE-yREGE (CHARLES MOORE). December, 1879 Ga® ¢é¢a" waqi”ha ¢a" ¢éama Uma™ha™ ama fe ¢i¢ija ub¢ édega”, And this paper the these Omaha the word your I have told them, (ey. ob.) (cv. ob.) (pl. sub.) but, ca” d‘iba iMjaki¢éga" ca¢é ta ama, dna‘a-baji. Ada™ ga¢a™ waqi™ha yet some as they have they will go to you, they have not There- that paper ‘ doubted me obeyed. fore (ev. ob.) cu¢éad]é. Ki fe eddda™ edéce té ci pf ¢tita" and‘a™ ka™b¢a. Te wi” I send it to And word what what you the again anew straight I hear it I wish. Word one you. say ¢é iwi'¢ana té pi wagazuanki¢e’qti f¢a-ga. ‘Naxide té a¢in’-ga,” this you told it to the anew making it very straight send it Inner ear the eep thou, me for me hither. ecé te¢a” é& awake. Ie té ana”b¢i. KE ¢tita™ and‘a® ka™b¢a. Edada™ what yousaid, that Imeanit. Word the I forget (Ido That correct I hear it I wish. What in the past not understand). fu¢a ¢ingé, ca™ ie ug¢iwikié-na"-ma” gé éskana ¢uta’qti im¢éckaxe news none, yet word Ihave been speaking to you the (pl. ob that very correctly you do for me regularly in. ob.) 5 pines A ¥ oy ka"b¢éga". Te ¢i¢iga asi¢é-na™ ca™ca", i”uda™ gé. Gat nikaci™ga-ma I hope. Word your Ithink usu- always, good for the(pl. And the people (pl. ob.) of them ally me in. ob.). wacta”be ¢ag¢é ga” e‘a™ ¢ingé, idatqti naji”. Te ¢i¢fja dakihide andji’, you saw them youwent still whatis thereis very good stand. Word your Iattendtoit I stand, . back the matter none, é beige. Ca” ie wé¢ig¢a™ uda™qti wind‘a" ka*b¢éga™. Uq¢e'qti ci a¢tha it Ipursue And word decision very good I hear from I hope. Very soon again finally it. you waja” be ka™b¢a waqi™ha. I see them I wish paper. ‘ MIP yA‘E-JINGA TO KE-yRESE. 775 NOTE. Mitya‘é-jinga was an Omaha, and Ke-yrede, an Oto. TRANSLATION. I have told these Omahas your words (sent in) this letter, but some of them have not obeyed (your wishes), so they will go to your land, as they have doubted me. Therefore I send this letter to you. I wish to hear again, and accurately, the words which you have said. Send again and explain to me this one word that you have told me. I refer to what you said, ‘‘ Use your hearing.” I do not fully grasp its meaning. I wish to hear it accurately. There is no news at all, yet I hope that you will attend to the affairs for me just as I have been speaking to you about them. I am always thinking about your words, which have been advantageous to me at various times. There is nothing the matter with the people whom you saw (here) when you went back to your people. The tribe is still prosperous. I continue to heed your advice; I pursue it. I hope to hear some word, some very good plan from you (when you write). Finally, I wish to see some letters (from you) very soon. E-UyASHA TO UNAJI’-SKA AND HE-WANJIGA. December 12, 1879. Cin’gajin’ea ite taté eb¢égat. Ca™ edada® téqi dakipa. Wawina g 2 | Child shall die to me I think it. And what difficult Ihave I beg some- met it. thing from you cu¢éa¢ai. Hé-warji¢a ¢iyan’ge e¢a™ba, a®wa” qpani héga-maji. Ca™ can’ge I Sage you One Horn your sister she too, Iam poor Iam very. And horse (pl). . ° ’ ree us N ons . ° wi" ani” éite éskana a™¢a‘i ‘idd¢é ka™b¢éga™. Ca™ fe wiwfja égaqti one you if oh that you give you I hope. And word my just so have it ittome promise i¢éckaxe ka*b¢éga". Wan’gi¢é’qti wib¢aha™i, ¢iyaha" méga™, ¢ijan’ge ct. you do for me I hope. Every one I pray to you (pl.), yourbroth- likewise, your sisters too, w be ers-in-law % a 7 “Ps r iia a Cub¢é ka™b¢a té b¢f‘a. Sidddi t’é-deleis™ ha, mi“jinga na” ta" é Awake. I goto you I wish the Lam Yesterday when shere- . girl grown the her Imean unable. she died vived (std. her. ob.) Axdge-na® ca™ca® nan/de ¢a%4&. Qida"be ga™¢aqti éde a‘aji té také. 6 Iam usu- always heart in the. To see you she hada but she, being she willsurely weeping ally strong desire unsuccessful die as she (orunlucky) reclines. Ca™ efa” yi, uq¢e’qtci wi ¢a ti¢a-ga. A” ba¢éd wawidaxu cu¢éagé. And how if, very soon to tellit to send hither. To-day I write some- Isend to you. me thing to you 2 0 776 THE (EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. NOTE. Unaji™’-ska and He-warji¢a, Ponkas, were at Yankton Agency. TRANSLATION. I think that my child shall die. I amin trouble. Isend to you (all) to beg some- thing from you. One Horn, I address you and your sister. Iam very poor. If you have a horse, I hope that you will promise to give it to me. I hope that you will do for me just according to my words. I petition to every one of you, including your sisters and your brothers-in-law. I am unable to go to you as I have desired. My largest daughter fainted yesterday, but she has revived. I am weeping constantly in my heart. She has a strong desire to see you, but she will surely die (as she reclines) without having her wish gratified. Send very soon to tell me whether my request can be granted. I write something to you and send it to you to day. NUDA®-AXA TO MISS JOCELYN. December 3; 1879. A” ba¢é usni'qti té’di indida® tia” ¢a¢af udnayi” éga", a®ctidéqti-ma™ To-day very cold when what you have sent I stand in it as, I am living very com- here to me fortably - ida” wib¢aha" cu¢déa¢ai, wa‘i-macé. Pi’qti, kagéha, ida" ingdxai-gi. there- I thank you T send at to you O ye women. Anew, O friends, good do ye for me. fore (pl.), Kagéha, Wakan’da ¢inké inddda™ uda™ keyd¢ica" ké at¢isa¢af, Adaz O friends, God the st. what good towards the the we turned, there. one (ob.) (ob.) fore wib¢aha”-na"-ma™. Wage amd ¢éama wag¢ita® ké waja™be. Wakan‘da I have been praying to you White the (pl. these do various the I have seen God regularly. people sub.) kinds of work them. ak& na"bé ¢icka™ waki¢at bpigadti waja” be, dada" égima™ ka"b¢éga”, the hand has caused them to I have seen there- I do that I hope, (sub.) move (rapidly) them, fore agina-na"-ma™. Cin’gajin’ga wiwija wa¢it ibaha™ ada" ci é ga¢inke Ibeg for my own usually. Child my to work knows it there: again it that (st. ob.) ore uya” adi uwib¢a cu¢éa¢ée. Weénandean’gi¢é-na”, ada™ é tida® éska"b¢éga*. apart I tell it to I send it to He causes me to feel full, usually, there- that good I think it may be. you you. as after eating fore Gata™adi égima™ tit eb¢éga", Ada® ayidaxe éga™ tdéite. A™ba dgudi Just about this Ido that may I think it, there- I do it a little for my- may. Day where time fore self etécté waqi"ha tia™¢aki¢é wika"b¢a. Inddda® ckaéxe ma*ni™-macé’, soever paper you send hither _I desire for you. What you do O ye who walk, to me gaza™adi uéhe ma"b¢i™. among them I ole I walk. 1 NOTE. Miss Jocelyn represented some ladies at the East who had sent clothing for the destitute Ponkas, who were encamped near Decatur, Nebr. WAQPECA TO UNAJI'-SKA. C6 TRANSLATION. As I am attired to-day, during the very cold weather, in what you have sent to me, I am living very comfortably, therefore I send to you to thank you, O ye women! O friends, do good to me anew! Friends, we have turned towards Wakanda and what is good, therefore I have been thanking (or petitioning) you now and then. I have seen these white men do various kinds of work. Wakanda has caused them to move their hands (rapidly) in working: I have seen it all, therefore I hope to do like- wise. I usually beg (of Wakanda) for my own (interests). My child knows how to work, so I send to tell you about him in addition to what I tell about myself. My child usually causes me, as it were, to feel full, as after eating (by what he does for me), therefore I think that what he does is good. I think that I may do likewise just about this time, therefore I may accomplish a little for myself (though I am getting old). I desire you to send me a letter on some day or other, whenever it may suit you. O you who lead industrious lives, I live among you following your example. WAQPECA TO UNAJE-SKA. December 26, 1879. Negtha, fe ti¢agé te i” ¢éqti-ma”. Can’ge Ahigi wéni" i” ¢éqti-ma™. Ouncle, word youhave the Iam very glad. Horse many you have I am very glad. sent here them Ha” gé i¢dug¢e ar¢isi¢af. Cin’gajin’ga wiwija ¢a‘éwaga¢e’qti eté yi, my Night the(pl. throughout we think of Child you have great pity on ought, in. ob.) you. them ¢a‘éwa¢d¢aji qtia’, ¢isi¢é-na™ ca”ca™. Cub¢é ta: minke, negfha. Ca" you have not pitied them at hethinks usu- always. I will go to you, O uncle. Well Mi of you ally ata” i™uda" té éta™ uq¢é’qtci éga". Ninigahi g¢éba ja” dadxe andji" howlong goodfor the solong very soon 80. Killickinnick ten night Imake Istand me it téinke. Ca” ¢ijan’ge ctéwa™ waja”be ka™b¢a. Uwad¢igind ka"b¢éga". will. Well, your sister even TI see them I wish. You tell it to them I hope. Can’ geqajin'g ga wéb¢iwi" éga™ ¢ingé. Wijiga® aké, Ma*tct-na"ba e¢a™ba I sell them ae there are My ead: the Two Grizzly bears he too none. father (sub.), cahi ti aka. Edi cupi téinke. Ceta™ giniqtii’ji. Qind‘a" yi, gi ‘¢eqtia™. will arrive there Then I willreach there So far he has not fully He hears if, chen is very glad. where you are. where you are. recovered, from you Can‘ge, negiha, a™¢in’ge. Camn’ge waqe ejaqti na™ba wab¢i" endqtci. Horse, O uncle, I have none. Horse white their very two T have them them only. people own Cin’ gajin’g ga endqtci wa¢i", wa¢itatwiki¢é-na™ i. they only they have they causethemto usually. them, work 6 778 THE ¢EGIHA LANGUAGE—MYTHS, STORIES, AND LETTERS. TRANSLATION. O mother’s brother, I am delighted at the words which you sent me. I am very glad that you have many horses. We think of you throughout the nights. Youought to pity my children. You have not pitied them at all. They are constantly thinking of you. O mother’s brother, I will go to you. When it shall be best for me to go, I shall go very quickly. I shall be here ten days making the killickinnick. I wish to see even your sisters. I hope that you will tell them. As I havesold the colts, there are none (here). My wife’s father (Wacka*-mar¢i") and y,wo Grizzly bears will come to your land. And then I will come, too. My wife’s father has not yet fully recovered. He is delighted to hear from you. O mother’s brother, I have no horses. I have only two American horses, which are in the possession of my children, who generally use them when they work. PAHANGA-MA*GIX TO SILAS WOOD. January 12, 1880. Ca” niaci”ga ama ¢éama wayig¢ita" amd ¢and‘a™ Gitte, G4 té’ya Well people the these they are working the you hear it perhaps, there per- (pl. sub.) tor themselves (pl. sub.) taining to udaqti i¢apaha” pi (a ja, i ju-maji. QPéduiidi te’ pyaxal ¥ ‘, ga™ ¢awa¢e, very good I knew it I hough, I was unfor- In this place the they do for desirable, reached tunate. themselves there Ca™ edida" a¢i” gé fpaha" pf yi, uqpa¢é¢e éka"b¢a-mdji. Wan’gi¢e Well what they the(pl. Iknewit Lar- when, to lose I did not wish for All have in. ob.) rived him. there iv¢i® g¢f éka"b¢a. (é nfaci”ga amd ea” ma™di”i yi, ni™ja ga” dai to bring aa I wish for This people the how they wallc if, to live they wish here to me him (pl. sub.) ¢a™ja, niaci”ga na™baha ag¢af. F’be u¢tiahe ka® ‘b¢a-maji. Udarqti though, people intwo ways they go. Whom I follow him I do not wish. Very good éskana wé¢ig¢a" ckaxe katb¢ég a” ¢a™ja, ¢ag¢i tate’ ya ¢asi¢a¢é ka"b¢éga™. oh that decision you hoped though, with reference to you think of I hope. make it your future re- it turn here A Cee] bs Ca” efa™” ¢ingé ha. Well whatis there is the matter none NOTES. Pahanga-ma*¢i" is the brother of Silas Wood. He dictated this letter after return- ing from a visit to his brother, who was staying with the Ponkas near Niobrara, Nebr. 778, 3. Ca® edada® a¢i7 gé . . . Wafigi¢e i™¢it g¢i eka"b¢a. The author mis- took a direct address to himself for an address to Silas. In speaking to the latter the sentences should have been changed thus: Ca? edada® ani? gé’ iwidaha™ pi gé’ uqpade¢a¢ée wika"b¢a-maji. Nie gi¢e Well what you the Iknewabout I the you lose Ido not wish for have (pl.in. you reached (pl. you. , F ob.) there in. ob.) wAni® (or, i’¢ani") ¢ag¢i wika"b¢a. you have you have you I wish for them for me come you. back PAHANGA-MA‘¢1’ TO CUDE-GAXE. 779 TRANSLATION. Perhaps you have heard that these Indians are working for themselves. Though I had a full knowledge of things pertaining to the Ponka on the old reservation (near Niobrara), I was unfortunate. It is desirable for people to accomplish things for themselves in this place (7. ¢., on the Omaha Reservation, instead of going off to the Ponkas). Ido not wish you to lose any of the things which I found in your possession when I visited the Ponka. I wish you to bring all of them home to us. These Indians always wish to improve, no matter how they act, but they are divided into opposing parties. I do not wish to follow any one (i. e., I will not become a partisan). I hope that you will make an excellent decision, and that you will consider about your future return to this land. Well, there is nothing more to be told. PAHANGA-MA*¢T® TO CUDE-GAXE. January 12, 1880. Cide-gaxe, fe égice té ub¢a ag¢i ddega”, fe ¢idiia si¢a-baji. Ub¢a Smoke-maker, word Sh the Itold Icame pat, word your they had for- I told it you (ob.) it back gotten. say here ‘AS oiaihd (\.,n/ I té'di gisi¢é ¢a™ja, ae z Ca™ ub¢a ag¢i te’di, nan’de giudaqtia” ¢a™ja, when they re- though, th Still Ltoldit Icame when, heart very good for them though, membered aes 3) back it failed. here edada” igaxe taté’ya ¢id. (itd uwib¢a teda” ca™ca™ gid. Ki ga™ ¢itd té what with reference to they They Itolditto inthe always they And so they the the means of have fail you past have have doing it failed. failed. failed hee fperraits TAG 1 I , , A * es ca™ca"; i¢a*ba™ fajiwa¢é. Ga™ ¢and‘a™ téga” uwib¢a. . . I¢atba™ always; again it should not So you hear inorder I tell it to Again be spoken. it that you. fiiji- gat. do not speak it. TRANSLATION. O Smoke-maker, when I came back I told the words which you said, but they had forgotten your advice. Though they recalled it when I told them, they are unable (to act accordingly). Though they were very glad when I told them, they can find no means of doing it in future. They have failed, just as I always told you that they would. And they have always failed; it should not be mentioned again. I tell you that you may hear it. Do not speak of it again. iu 4 ’ a 7 es 5, be a ih, ‘ 3 F y be = é i. Ms : Sas | t é PA , ror Gita ae ; 7 ee ; A at oe | oe So / : tk = yy . 4: 7 - 2 a” « f. | oh ee eae | = 2 iis! a 7 2 te ‘ b j = : suas ! ay i= "é . ; . “wore i ; j : 2 a ee a --=-2--------essrse=2~ 239 See 151 and 155. Grass wisps used at a war feast..-...-..-.-.- = 269 | Homna to Heqaka-mani, Icta-ja"ja", and Ma"atceba. 742 Grayehox Coyoterand.-ssc~c ce) )o acest see eee 570 | See Le-je-baje. Gray Hat, or William Welsh. See [enuga-naji®. | Horses. 475, 480, 486, 488, 490, 494, 497, 505, 514, 518, 519, 657, 660, Gray Squirrel, adventures of........----- . 273, 274, 276 670, 688, 699, 703, 718, 730, 738, 740, 754, 771, 778 Green-haired Thunder-man -. = 187 | Hub¢a" camp of Ponkas......-...--..-------------- 38L WOMAN eae een 302 See Wai".qude. Grizzly bear, Buffalo and...--....- ee 582) |) Hunting customs ~~~ 2 soe one are ee ese new nen 473 Pic chanpedintolae ce seee eee =s ease 288 | Hupe¢a, account of... -- 2. - ieee eon nee 2 killed by Ictinike . -..-...-........-.. 91 | myth obtained from .........-.-..-..----.-. 70 the Rabbit's son .....-..-.... 46 | tovAN DB: Meacham \oeceeee sees = eenie ieee 683, 734 RED Dit aU epee seine Some ee 43 VOCE) aes ha ose eeatr sabe pbenaacehenckccccn 523 Ground) cleft/by;mapio sens. =e ene ne sen one ea ee == 293 to Gi-qki-da-wi ¢eca¢u.....-..-.......------ 686 Ground-mice, song of boy raised by the..--....-.---- 208 to Inspector J. H. Hammond --.-...-..--.-.-. 727 Gun,magic. See Magic gun. kerb ayl his tOnyi0 tesco eect ee 384 Hainjof four colors easees pee eee eee a eee eee STS02T| killed a foe. 391 Half-Omaha sided with Ponkas - -. 401) |) Lerbaj isthe tis bigs eee aes anime ee erate 390 slain by his kinsman 401 | Ickadabi, a chief, joined Omaha war party -.- 423, Hammond, Inspector J. H., A"pa"-yanga and others to 738 a name of Louis Sanssouci ------. 458 Hupe¢a to... 727 the younger, a Ponka 501 Mazi-kide to. - = 728 | Icta¢abi, Ma*tcu-na*ba to ...----.- 725 da¢i"-na"paji to.......--- 728, 751 £0) A CANS G ae = aaa sect enia inet oer 495 referred (60 ~.c- cece aoe 507 | (CUT ONy Geese eretelemetea ateleteiele 716 several Omahas to. .....- 750 Heqaga-sabé Seesn=c 662 See A"pa*janga, Duba-mas¢in, Mawada¢ir, Heqaga-sabé, Maca", ane Mawata"na... 690 da¢i"-na"paji, Two Crows, and j.e-uyatha. Ma"-teu-wa¢ihi and Acawage..-.----.-.. dll Hands of dead Pawnoe ....--..-----..-- --..--.--.-. 363 | Icta-jatja". See Heqaka-mani. Dakota scared to death by the- 366 | Ictama"Se, Laliga-gaxe to. .-.--..---...---....-..... 673, 698 Hanga gens had tho two sacred tents...-....-...--.. 468 || Ictinike and the Buzzard ........----.----=....-.<.. 74 sacred pole..-..-. - 471,472 | Chipmunk ...--. 549 Hangacenn, Louis Sanssouci to.--.-....-...-.--..--. 691 Deserted Children . 83 Hapax legomena..-.....----.-- -14, 41, 238, 496, 675 Fc oe esteeatteieee 70 Haxige, adventures of.._... 2 --- 227, 244 Four Creators - -- killed the Beaver-woman. --- 243, 2538 Rabbit: --2.c. ; Buzzard ....... .. 240, 251 Turtle . ..- made rivers...--.. .. --..- a 239 caused the fur on plums ...-.-...-.-------- 562 rewarded the Wood-duck...-...----..-...--. 251 cheated by the Coyote .........-..-....--.- 566 transformations ob-nse ieee eee aeeee eat 289, 242, 253 claimed@thered bird. u-p see ee ee eects 604 INDEX, 789 Page. | Page. Ictinike created fruits and vegetables .-......-...-. 551 | La Fléche, Joseph, how he lost his goods....-.---- 415 deceived by a tree....-...-.-------- 68 | myths and stories obtained from 15,32,116, ¢wowomen ...2--.-.=--<:=:- 563 | 176, 219, 329,358, 361, 362, 363, 367, 294, 393 identical with Ictcinke of the .,2iwere 54) spoken against. ------.-.-2-.----- 646 killed a child. -..--.-- 562 | toyA.|B: Meacham <----°3,<--.c2- 677 by the Orphan -..-..-- 609 to his brother Frank .-.--...-.-- 487 the Rabbit's son. 54 | Two Crows and others to .-..-.. 740 tHeRBipe artless ees aan 67, 566 | Marve account 0 temenm aan eaten nem 2 magic transformation of, into anelk ...-. 69 myths obtained from.........---.. 107, 131 married the chief's elder daughter _--...-- 55, 605 Susanne (Om.), account of .-..-... .-.--. 2 plotted against the Orphan ...-...-.-. ---- 606 myth obtained from ..... 65 Raccoons called ....-.---------------------- 315, 316 | Susanne (P.), Frank La Fléche to his RORY S- Aces a sbesnoecisnoenssosuseeceonte 61 CEE AUG one “ee ecepaseceaan osDSesegssesb 642 stole the Buffalo calf. ....-....--..--------- 133 | Lake drained by pelicans. ..-..--......-. -----.:---- 276 the Brothers and Sister -.....-.------------ 79 | Orphan’ plunged into eee ees ee a cee nem 606 Coyote and Colt.----..--..-....---..... 96 red bird dwelt beneath a ............ -...-.--- 225 first who taught war customs .---...-.--. 88 Large fish,man changed into a ...- .-.. ----.. eoseé 286 Turkeys, Turtle, and Elk ....-..--...--- 60 wuerends\---caees eee neae 317, 324, 334, 345, 355, 609, 613 Womanand Childssas-<.+-<0--=-2---2-- 599 | Letters. Ses Dakotas, Missouri, Omahas, Otos, Paw- took the form of the Buzzard .....--.-..--- 54,237 | ees, Ponkas, White people, and Yanktons. used magic against the Orphan-.------ (i? |||) Sheen tt Ot aaoes toda soos osa sooo s eos ae cccaceT 4 Rabbit's son -- 55 tolBatistecDeroinl 220s ssa eee = seme < mee 710 Igacude (same as the male Winter).--..-...-- 11 and the Oto chiefs ......---. 663, 670 Iyuhabi died .- .-.-.....--. 7 * 507 See Wanita-wage. Indian Commissioner Hayt cited.--.-.---.--------- 520 | Listener. --..----- ie nN NE Ie gs ieee 333, 334 Industry of Omahas. .----- 477, 478, 479, 481, 486, 490,491, , Long tent constructed for sham fight ...-.-..---.---. 473 494, 495, 498, 510, 522, 646, 655, 694, 701, 707, 760 | Louse, giant killed bya... .-..-----.----+-s++-0+---- 577 See Corn, Hay, Potatoes, Vegetables, Wheat. ODJOCLE CO sopterate etait netete eeate 157, 174, 606 Inheritance among Omahas . .......---.----------- 686 Maca", or Gactagabi. See Ieta¢abi. Univaitations asked tone. co: -s2sceca+ cesene a se sccces 688 | Mactcinge, a Ponka, detectcd the Pawnees..---.-.-- 382 towar feastiee cee saat eee 254,256 | Macti™-‘atsa to Na‘atbi .......--.------------ 494 Inke-sabé gens kept sacred pipes --.--.- - .--.----- 471 ‘Lenuga- waji” 651 regulated the Hede-watei ..--..---- (V) 474 | Magio arrow .----.....------- 223 Jvabe-ska to Gactagabi.-.--.-<--<-0-<--<-ee~ sosees es 73 [Wher cass Sones Ree ca Sane SeS I FScCS ESS 114 Gahige-jinga, Waga-naji", and Aca OW tesa sens sale nn neal al 138, 158, 159 OG Seepmanceeeanecn cosna aS SSE SSe559 505 calling of the animals. ....-...-..-. ---- 82 AUIESUIGH: eee een ae Seen eee eae 476 COAT rhs Sat ecouns coSEeB Ses ecco aceacacmac is 225 NW TAs = eee nse oe eee 417 (ANON Ade Dy see oe eal alee 146 idestantorA Cawa ee) S-< sence so -cncecen sea cecan sans 506 cap and sword..----.--. --+-++--2+-eee2-+---- 203 Jifga-nuda", Wata™-naji* to -...--...-..---.-...----- 500 clothing......-----.----------+---sss005-=--- 47, 606 Jocelyn, Miss, Nuda"-axa to..--. .......--..--.--- 776 | club which cleft a hill. --..-...--.---..-- --- 83 Ke-yrese, Minya‘é-jinga to 774 could make thunder.-.-.....-.--.. 183, 186 and Battiste Deroin, Wajinga-sabé to.. --. 705 | creation of the Rabbit's son..-..- 44 Kicke to Ma*tcu-gatiga.----..---.-.....------------8 478 CUP) cee a eal = és 202 Kactawagu ..----.--.--- See oes cece lesisins seuseceees 423 | dogs.-- - 114, 127 See Ca"ta™ jinga. drum..-..--.. 57, 609 Kingfisher, one of the Four Creators..-..-.-----..-. 558 forest made by.-----.--- . 293 Kipazo, a Dakota chief.......----------.----.---.--- 430 formula used by Wahan¢icige ---.---..---.--. 145, 146 ordered Ponkas to join Dakotas in fighting ground cleft by.----.------------+--++-+++ -- 83, 293 Oma as trees eee eee eee aoe 430 114, 127 Kipazo’s son killed Big Elk’s brother ..--.---------. 430 | 353 madera ted emeetaseee see 429 | . 265, 606 Ki-wi-gu-ti-dja-¢i-ci to Ci-¢e-¢i-ta-we .----..--------. 668 | 159, 161 KeucncasHeqaga-sabetoles o2-5-->-----2-22---=----- 635, 637 worn by Hinqpe-ag¢e.------.-------- liz yaxe-¢a"ba, a war chief. .....-.-..-...-.-.------.--- 450 power of Buffalo-woman- ..---.-.------------- 138 to Ma"tcu-wa¢ihi .......---- 475 Ieyntnit kG) se :...--.2 3764): NVolfphost: song iotithe: .a9sre sso ate ae ate ee 360 Nuda®-axa’s father . 371 | Woman carried underground by an elk 82 da¢i"-na"paji ..-.--.. 449 See Green -haired, Red-haired, White-haired, Bi OLCLOW See. =e aries planners teeters 460 Yellow-haired. VSG 6 3 S62 See eee 398 | Women wounded by Awl, Comb, Corn-crusher, and order of march of ......-..----.-.-------. 269 HER AEE Sogo is ad SSR RC COE ga Anas Eee 278, 274 TELUMN (OL, acsenentes ceticate cnnne se eeeen 277 | Wood, Silas, Pahaiiga-ma*qi" to.....-....---...-..--- 7178 under five leaders ..- -....-....222-.---- 460 aede-gahi to 73 Warriors and three Snakes... ...-....22..se00-.-02-- 326 | Wood-duck rewarded by Haxige ..- 251 changed into snakes ..-......-.--..-.----- 322 | Woodhull, Spafford, to John Heron. - €55 exhorted by distant kindred. . 446 | Wren, chief of birds .--.------.---.- 581 when absent appealed to in song .......--. 446 | Yankton legend. ...-.-----.--+.-----------=--------. 355 Wrar. tent. oc- 52h rgcdae an ate a eceapiceas toposes 471 SLOTY ----- += +e eee ee eee eee eee ee eee nee 624 Woata"-najit to Cage-skit.....-.. a -0sene-s-scteeesccss 499-| Yanktons aided Ponkas .-..-..-.--.---- 2 381 in FANE a. ean em aoe eet eee cae 500 displeased with Omahas -...- - 714 Water, Big Turtle pretended to fear the 275 invited Omahas to visit them. -- = 490 Water-deity, andichild) =°ic > 2ts ee aeeen ee eee eee 355 letters sent to. .-.650, 656, 657, 659, 661, 669, 687, 688, Water-monster, Haxige’s brother taken to den of . .- 238 690, 696, 701, 713, 714, 719, 720, 721, 722, 730, 733, 742 or Wakandagi. | Omahas killed seven 457 Water-monsters killed by Haxige -...-...-...-.-.--- 241 visited by Omahas. . 494 wounded by Haxige . 239 | visited Omahas --.. 749 Wegasapi, Ponka head chief ..---..- soc Sees 375 | Yellow-haired Thunder-man 187 scolded Dakotas though addressing WOM AD ieee ad oasis Sareea 302 POURS) 32 5.32 -s cae eres nese sees 426 Yellow Horse. See Caiige-hi"-zi. or Whip. | Young chief killed by buffaloes ......-------------- 355 Wejitcte gens had the war tent.................-.... 471 | Young man changed himself into a red-tail fish, ete.. 280, 283 sacred tent resorted to 473 | Young men, address to .---...-------------------- =: 628 Welsh, William, or Gray Hat. See Lenuga-naji". Youth and the underground people .-.-...---- ----- B15 Wés'd-janga arrested ..--.-..-----.---..-------+---- 749 | Zizika-aki¢isi" or Zizika-akisi -..--.----------------- 397 Cange-hi"-zi to ...--...-...-...... esas 51g See Republican Paw- (Cnde-paxeitoeesesens-— nea peaaow saws see 519 nees. =) 5- B917 Gy Wh i | HA Hii 3 9088 00595 9663